[From the U.S. Government Printing Office, www.gpo.gov]
    uni ea
   States
.oast9

  Pilot
Pacific and Arctic
Coasts Alaska-n
Cape Spencer to
Beaufort Sea
17th Edition

                       #D P-TMOSIIII
         : 44'


U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration
National Ocean Service




         United
         States

Coast 9


      Pilot

  Pacific and Arctic
  Coasts Alaska:
  Cape Spencer to
  Beaufort Sea

  17th Edition
  The last published change to the previous edition (16th/1994) was change 9.
  Change 8 was published in Defense Mapping Agency Notice to Mariners 29
  dated 07/22/95. Change 8 was published in Commander Seventeenth Coast
  Guard District Local Notice to Mariners 24 dated 06/13/95. Changes 1 through
  9 to the previous edition have been entered into this 17th edition.





       /~fFNTOC?~
  U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE
  Ronald H. Brown, Secretary
  National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA)
  D. James Baker, Under Secretary of Commerce for Oceans
    and Atmosphere, and Administrator, NOAA
  National Ocean Service
  W. Stanley Wilson, Assistant Administrator for Ocean Services
    and Coastal Zone Management
  Washington, DC 1995
  For sale by the National Ocean Service and its sales agents.













                                           LIMITS OF UNITED STATES COAST PILOT
                      Atlantic Coast                                               Pacific Coast
                        I Eastport to Cape Cod                                      7 California, Oregon, Washington, and Hawaii
                        2 Cape Cod to Sandy Hook                                    8 Alaska - - Dixon Entrance to Cape Spencer
                        3 Sandy Hook to Cape Henry                                   9 Alaska -- Cape Spencer to Beaufort Sea
                       4 Cape Henry to Key West                                   Great Lakes
                        5 Gulf of Mexico, Puerto Rico, and Virgin Islands           6 The Lakes and their Connecting Waterways
      IVr       1r           '        IY'  1 30                        1          110         i sr                          I Ml        sr'

                                ALASKA                                      X-e

                         zincir~hon

               7BFR   yl~b                                                                             CINDSON SAY
         P/  EING SEA'C    O\





C- *. ....                                                                                                                                                    -----------




         P A C I F I C           0  C E A  N                          UAr
                                                         Mid\a I.  HU NoI    T E DrS T ATE                                ATLANTIC            OCEAN








                      Honol0 '0


                                                                           Ga. FNI
                      ll n    I1Q  r*  15r     140        13'       1          110-       100'  I    9r                    7     0'  ar


      IV tar 1r  IVt140'                                    13          r         IICl M                                                           r







                                               Preface


  United States Coast Pilot is published by the National Ocean Service (NOS), National Oceanic and Atmospheric
Administration (NOAA), pursuant to the Act of 6 August 1947 (33 U.S.C. 883a and b), and the Act of 22 October
1968 (44 U.S.C. 1310).
  The Coast Pilot supplements the navigational information shown on the nautical charts. The sources for updating
the Coast Pilot include but are not limited to field inspections conducted by NOAA, information published in
Notices to Mariners, reports from NOAA Hydrographic vessels and field parties, information from other Govern-
ment agencies, State and local governments, maritime and pilotage associations, port authorities, and mariners.
  This volume of Coast Pilot 9, Pacific and Arctic Coasts, Cape Spencer to Beaufort Sea, cancels the 1994 (16th)
Edition.
  Notice.-Amendments are issued to this publication through U.S. Coast Guard Local Notices to Mariners.
A subscription to the Local Notice to Mariners is available upon application to the appropriate Coast Guard
District Commander (Aids to Navigation Branch). Consult appendix for address. All amendments are also
issued in Defense Mapping Agency Notices to Mariners.
  Mariners and others are urged to report promptly to the National Ocean Service errors, omissions, or any condi-
tions found to differ from or to be additional to those published in the Coast Pilot or shown on the charts in order
that they may be fully investigated and proper corrections made. A Coast Pilot Report form is included in the back
of this book and a Marine Information Report form is published in the Defense Mapping Agency Hydrographic/
Topographic Center Notice to Mariners for your convenience. These reports and/or suggestions for increasing the
usefulness of the Coast Pilot should be sent to
  Chief,
   Office of Coast Survey (N/CS261)
  National Ocean Service, NOAA
   1315 East-West Highway, Station 7317
   Silver Spring, MD 20910-3282.





190'~~~~a I la,                      I10       I    S     M                       60                  140*                1300



                                               Arctic Ocean




                   'ft Chukchi Sea                                 PaMoint Bo                 Beaufon Sea

















                                                    Norton ~~~~~~~~SoundYatt


                                    PrblfSt. Eliaswrencer
                                    Islands

80'n                SeaUnimak                                  of               A~aarwmm
                                             slnd%                                    Son       Vkga

   A I                             NsBisolBa                                     rd           ap            C
     Ki       k I                      Pifsl  and 4ASPuter 


               Be~~~~NrtPaific Oea      '    nia       







             ~~~GaphicChiapteAdr   Islnd  ex




                    RECORD OF CHANGES


             FROM NOTICE TO
CHANGE NO.       MARINERS NO.              ENTERED BY            DATE ENTERED














































                                                                    V










                        Contents





Chapter 1. General Information ..1........................ 
Chapter 2. Navigation Regulations..........................33
Chapter 3. Cape Spencer to Beaufort Sea.......................64
Chapter 4. Cape Spencer to Cook Inlet........................73
Chapter 5' Kodiak Island ..............................148
Chapter 6. Alaska Peninsula .............................185
Chapter 7. Aleutian Islands .............................221
Chapter 8. Bering Sea ................................284
Chapter 9. Arctic Ocean...............................317
Appendix ........................................330
Tables ....................................(Follow Appendix)
 Climatological ....................................T-1
 Meteorological ....................................T-15
 Mean Surface Water Temperatures and Densities ...................T-20
 Ice Breakup and Freezeup ..............................T-21
 Coastal Warning Displays...............................T-22
 Distances.......................................T-23
 Radio Bearing Conversion Table ...........................T-26
 Distance of Visibility of Objects at Sea.........................T-27
 Conversion, Degrees to Points and Vice Versa.....................T-28
 Determination of Wind Speed by Sea Condition....................T-29
 Estimating Time of Transit..............................T-30
 Standard Abbreviations for Broadcasts........................T-3 1
 Conversion, Nautical to Statute Miles and Feet to Meters...............T-34
Index ......................................(Follows Tables)
Coast Pilot Report form.............................(Follows Index)











                                                            VIl








                                            1. GENERAL INFORMATION

 (1)   UNITED STATES COAST PILOT.-The National                      (7)   Currents.-Stated current velocities are the averages at
Ocean Service Coast Pilot is a series of nine nautical books that    strength. Velocities are in knots, which are nautical miles per hour.
cover a wide variety of information important to navigators of    Directions are the true directions to which the currents set.
U.S. coastal and intracoastal waters, and the waters of the Great   (8)   Depths,-Depth is the vertical distance from the chart
Lakes. Most of this book information cannot be shown graphically    datum to the bottom and is expressed in the same units as the
on the standard nautical charts and is not readily available else-    applicable chart (feet, meters or fathoms). (See Chart Datum this
where. The subjects in the Coast Pilot include, but are not limited    chapter for further detail.) The controlling depth 6f~a channel is
to, channel descriptions, anchorages, bridge and cable clearances,    the least depth within the limits of the channel; it restricts the safe
currents, tide and water levels, prominent features, pilotage, tow-    use of the channel to drafts of less than that depth. The centerline
age, weather, ice conditions, wharf descriptions, dangers, routes,    controlling depth of a channel applies only to the channel center-
traffic separation schemes, small-craft facilities, and Federal regu-    line; lesser depths may exist in the remainder of the channel. The
lations applicable to navigation.                                  midchannel controlling depth of a channel is the controlling
 (2)   Notice.-Amendments are issued to this publication    depth of only the middle half of the channel. Federal project
through U.S. Coast Guard Local Notices to Mariners. A sub-    depth is the design dredging depth of a channel constructed by the
scription to the Local Notice to Mariners is available upon    Corps of Engineers, U.S. Army; the project depth may or may not
application to the appropriate Coast Guard District Corn-    be the goal of maintenance dredging after completion of the chan-
mander (Aids to Navigation Branch). Consult appendix for    nel, and, for this reason, project depth must not be confused with
address. All amendments are also issued in Defense Mapping    controlling depth. Depths alongside wharves usually have been
Agency Notices to Mariners.                                        reported by owners and/or operators of the waterfront facilities,
 (3)   Bearings.-These are true and are expressed in degrees    and have not been verified by Government surveys; since these
                 from 000 (north) to 359, measured clockwise. General bearings    depths may be subject to change, local authorities should be con-
from 000ï¿½ (north) to 359ï¿½, measured clockwise. General bearings
are expressed by initial letters of the points of the compass (e.g., suted for the latest controlling depths.
N, NNE, NE, etc.). Adjective and adverb endings, except in chap-    (9).  In general, the Coast Pilot gives the project depths for
ter 2, Navigation Regulations, have been discarded. Wherever pre-    deep-draft ship channels maintained by the Corps of Engineers.
cise bearings are intended degrees are used. Light-sector bearings    The latest controlling depths are usually shown on the charts and
are toward the light,                                              published in the Notices to Mariners. For other channels, the latest
                  (4)    ridges and cabes-Vertical clearances of bridges and    controlling depths available at the time of publication are given.
                                                                    In all cases, however, mariners are advised to consult with
overhead cables are in feet (meters) above mean high water unless
                                                                    pilots, port and local authorities, and Federal and State
otherwise stated; clearances of drawbridges are for the closed    pilots, port and local authorities, and Federal and State
position, although the open clearances are also given for vertical- authorities for the latest channel controlling depths.
lift bridges. Clearances given in the Coast Pilot are those approved  (to)  Under-keel clearances-It is becoming increasingly evi-
for nautical charting, and are supplied bytthe U.S. Coast Guard    dent that economic pressures are causing mariners to navigate
(bridges) and U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (cables); they may be    through waters of barely adequate depth, with under-keel clear-
as-built (verified by actual inspection after completion of struc-    ances being finely assessed from the charted depths, predicted tide
tures) or authorized (design values specified in permit issued prior    levels, and depths recdrded by echo sounders.
to construction). No differentiation is made in the Coast Pilot     (t)  It cannot be too strongly emphasized that even charts
between as-built and authorized clearances. (See charts for hori-    based on modern surveys may not show all sea-bed obstructions or
zontal clearances of bridges, as these are given in the Coast Pilot    the shoalest depths, and actual tide levels may be appreciably
only when they are less than 50 feet (15 meters).) Submarine    lower than those predicted.
cables are rarely mentioned.                                        (12)  In many ships an appreciable correction must be applied to
 (5)   Cable ferries,-Cable ferries are guided by cables fastened    shoal soundings recorded by echo sounders due to the horizontal
to shore and sometimes propelled by a cable rig attached to the    distance between the transducers. This separation correction,
shore. Generally, the cables are suspended during crossings and    which is the amount by which recorded depths therefore exceed
dropped to the bottom when the ferries dock. Where specific oper-    true depths, increases with decreasing depths to a maximum equal
ating procedures are known they are mentioned in the text. Since    to half the distance apart of the transducers; at this maximum the
operating procedures vary, mariners are advised to exercise    transducers are aground. Ships whose transducers are more than 6
extreme caution and seek local knowledge. DO NOT ATTEMPT           feet (1.8 meters) apart should construct a table of true and
TO PASS A MOVING CABLE FERRY.                                      recorded depths using the Traverse Tables. (Refer to discussion of
 t6)   Courses.-These are true and are expressed in the same    echo soundings elsewhere in chapter 1.)
manner as bearings. The directives "steer" or "make good" a         (13)  Other appreciable corrections, which must be applied by
course mean, without exception, to proceed from a point of origin    many ships, are for settlement and squat. These corrections
along a track having the identical meridional angle as the desig-    depend on'the depth of water below the keel, the hull form and
nated course. Vessels following the directives must allow for    speed of the ship.
every influence tending to cause deviation from such track, and     (14)  Settlement causes the water level around the ship to be
navigate so that the designated course is continuously being made    lower than would otherwise be the case. It will always cause echo
good.                                                              soundings to be less than they would otherwise be. Settlement is



                                                   1. UiNbRKAL INFORMATION


appreciable when the depth is less than seven times the draft of the    reported marine information required by oceangoing vessels oper-
ship, and increases as the depth decreases and the speed increases.  ating in both foreign and domestic waters. Special items covering
 (5)  Squat denotes a change in trim of a ship underway, rela-    a variety of subjects and generally not discussed in the Coast Pilot
tive to her trim when stopped. It usually causes the stern of a ves-    or shown on nautical charts are published annually in Notice to
sel to sit deeper in the water. However, it is reported that in the    Mariners No. 1. These items are important to the mariner and
case of mammoth ships squat causes the bow to sit deeper.    should be read for future reference. These notices may be obtained
Depending on the location of the echo sounding transducers, this    by operators of oceangoing vessels, without cost, by making appli-
may cause the recorded depth to be greater or less than it ought to    cation to Defense Mapping Agency (see Defense Mapping
be. Caution and common sense are continuing requirements    Agency Procurement Information in appendix).
for safe navigation.                                                  (28)  Notices and reports of improved channel depths are also
 (16)  Distances.-These are in nautical miles unless otherwise    published by district offices of the Corps of Engineers, U.S. Army
stated. A nautical mile is one minute of latitude, or approximately    (see appendix for districts covered by this volume). Although
2,000 yards, and is about 1.15 statute miles.                       information from these notices/reports affecting NOS charts and
 (17)  Heights.-These are in feet (meters) above the tidal datum    related publications is usually published in the Notices to Mari-
used for that purpose on the charts, usually mean high water. How-  ners, the local district engineer office should be consulted where
ever, the heights of the decks of piers and wharves are given in    depth information is critical.
feet (meters) above the chart datum for depths.                      (29)  Marine Broadcast Notices to-Mariners are made by the
 (18)  Light and fog signal characteristics.- These are not    Coast Guard through Coast Guard, Navy, and some commercial
described, and light sectors and visible ranges are'normally not    radio stations to report deficiencies and important changes in aids
defined. (See Coast Guard Light Lists.)                             to navigation. (See Radio Navigation Warnings and Weather, this
 (19)  Obstructions.-Wrecks and other obstructions are men-    chapter.)
tioned only if of a relatively permanent nature and in or near nor-  (30)  Vessels operating within the limits of the Coast Guard dis-
mal traffic routes.                                                 tricts can obtain information affecting NOS charts and related
 (20)  Radio aids to navigation.-These are seldom described.    publications from the Local Notices to Mariners. Small craft using
(See Coast Guard Light Lists and Defense Mapping Agency    the Intracoastal Waterway and other waterways and small harbors
Hydrographic/Topographic Center Radio Navigational Aids publi-    within the United States that are not normally used by oceangoing
cations.)                                                           vessels will require the Local Notices to Mariners to keep charts
 (21)  Ranges.-These are not fully described. "A 3390 Range"       and related publications up-to-date. Information for oceangoing
means that the rear structure bears 339ï¿½ from the front structure.    vessels can be obtained from the Notice to Mariners published by
(See Coast Guard Light Lists.)                                      the Defense Mapping Agency Hydrographic/Topographic Center.
 (22)  Reported information.-Information received by NOS             (31)  Notices to Mariners may be consulted at Coast Guard dis-
from various sources concerning depths, dangers, currents, facili-    trict offices, NOS field offices, Defense Mapping Agency Hydro-
ties, and other subjects, which has not been verified by Govern-    graphic/Topographic Center offices and depots, most local marine
ment surveys or inspections, is often included in the Coast Pilot;    facilities, and sales agents handling charts and related publica-
such unverified information is qualified as "reported", and    tions.
should be regarded with caution.
 (23)  Time.-Unless otherwise stated, all times are given in local    U.S. GOVERNMENT AGENCIES PROVIDING
standard time in the 24-hour system. (Noon is 1200, 2:00 p.m. is    MARITIME SERVICES
1400, and midnight is 0000.)
 (24)  Winds.-Directions are the true directions from which the      (32)  Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service, Depart-
winds blow. Unless otherwise indicated, speeds are given in knots,    ment of Agriculture.-The Agricultural Quarantine Inspection Pro-
which are nautical miles per hour.                                  gram and Animal Health Programs of this organization are
                                                                   responsible for protecting the Nation's animal population, food
NOTICES TO MARINERS                                                 and fiber crops, and forests from invasion by foreign pests. They
                                                                   administer agricultural quarantine and restrictive orders issued
 (25)  Notices to Mariners are published by Federal agencies to    under authority provided in various acts of Congress. The regula-
advise operators of vessels of marine information affecting the    tions prohibit or restrict the importation or interstate movement of
safety of navigation. The notices include changes in aids to navi-    live animals, meats, animal products, plants, plant products, soil,
gation, depths in channels, bridge and overhead cable clearances,    injurious insects, and associated items that may introduce or
reported dangers, and other useful marine information. They         spread plant pests and animal diseases which may be new to or not
should be used routinely for updating the latest editions of nautical    widely distributed within the United States or its territories.
charts and related publications.                                    Inspectors examine imports at ports of entry as well as the vessel,
 (26)  Local Notice to Mariners is issued by each Coast Guard    its stores, and crew or passenger baggage.
District Commander for the waters under his jurisdiction. (See        (33)  The Service also provides an inspection and certification
appendix for Coast Guard district(s) covered by this volume.)    service for exporters to assist them in meeting the quarantine
These notices are usually published weekly and may be obtained    requirements of foreign countries. (See appendix for a list of ports
without cost by making application to the appropriate District    where agricultural inspectors are located and inspections con-
Commander.                                                          ducted.)
 (27)  Notice to Mariners, published weekly by the Defense
Mapping Agency Hydrographic/Topographic Center, is prepared           (34)  Customs Service, Department of the Treasury.-The U.S.
jointly with NOS and the Coast Guard. These notices contain    Customs Service administers certain laws relating to: entry and
selected items from the Local Notices to Mariners and other    clearance of vessels and permits for certain vessel movements




                                                   1. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                           3


between points in the United States; prohibitions against coastwise    the year for a number of reference stations and differences for
transportation of passengers and merchandise; salvage, dredging    obtaining similar predictions for numerous other places. They also
and towing by foreign vessels; certain activities of vessels in the    include other useful information such as a method of obtaining
fishing trade; regular and special tonnage taxes on vessels;-the    heights of tide at any time, local mean time of sunrise and sunset
landing and delivery of foreign merchandise (including unlading,    for various latitudes, reduction of local mean time to standard
appraisement, lighterage, drayage, warehousing, and shipment in    time, and time of moonrise and moonset for various ports.
bond); collection of customs duties, including duty on imported        (40)  Caution.-In using the Tide Tables, slack water should not
pleasure boats and yachts and 50% duty on foreign repairs to    be confused with high or low water. For ocean stations there is
American vessels engaged in trade; customs treatment of sea and    usually little difference between the time of high or low water and
ship's stores while in port and the baggage of crewmen and pas-    the beginning of ebb or flood currents; but for places in narrow
sengers; illegally imported merchandise; and remission of penal-    channels, landlocked harbors, or on tidal rivers, the time of slack
ties or forfeiture if customs or navigation laws have been violated.    current may differ by several hours from the time of high or low
The Customs Service also cooperates with many other Federal    water. The relation of the times of high or low water to the turning
agencies in the enforcement of statutes they are responsible for.    of the current depends upon a number of factors, so that no simple
Customs districts and ports of entry, including customs stations,    general rule can be given. (To obtain the times of slack water, refer
are listed in the appendix.                                          to the Tidal Current Tables.)
 (35)  The Customs Service may issue, without charge, a cruis-        (41)  Tidal Current Tables for the coasts of the United States
ing license, valid for a period of up to 6 months and for designated    are issued annually by NOS in advance of the year for which they
U.S. waters, to a yacht of a foreign country which has a reciprocal    are prepared. These tables include daily predictions of the times of
agreement with the United States. A foreign yacht holding a cruis-    slack water and the times and velocities of strength of flood and
ing license may cruise in the designated U.S. waters and arrive at    ebb currents for a number of waterways, together with differences
and depart from U.S. ports without entering or clearing at the cus-    for obtaining predictions for numerous other places. Also included
tomhouse, filing manifests, or obtaining or delivering permits to    is other useful information such as a method for obtaining the
proceed, provided it does not engage in trade or violate the laws of    velocity of current at any time, duration of slack, coastal tidal cur-
the United States or visit a vessel not yet inspected by a Customs    rents, wind currents, combination of currents, and current dia-
Agent and does, within 24 hours of arrival at each port or place in    grams. Some information on the Gulf Stream is included in the
the United States, report the fact of arrival to the nearest custom-    tables for the Atlantic coast.
house. Countries which have reciprocal agreements granting these       (42)  Tidal Current Charts are published by NOS for various
privileges to U.S. yachts are Argentina, Australia, Bahama           localities. These charts depict the direction and velocity of the cur-
Islands, Bermuda, Canada, Federal Republic of Germany, Great    rent for each hour of the tidal cycle. They present a comprehensive
Britain, Greece, Honduras, Jamaica, Liberia, the Netherlands, and    view of the tidal current movement in the respective waterways as
New Zealand. Further information concerning cruising licenses    a whole and when used with the proper current tables or tide tables
may be obtained from the headquarters port for the customs dis-    supply a means for readily determining for any time the direction
trict in which the license is desired. U.S. yacht owners planning    and velocity of the current at various localities throughout the
cruises to foreign ports may contact the nearest customs district    areas covered.
headquarters as to customs requirements.                              (43)   HOW  TO OBTAIN TIDAL PREDICTIONS AND
                                                                    DATA FROM THE NATIONAL OCEAN SERVICE.-NOS,
 (36)  National Ocean Service (NOS), National Oceanic and    which annually publishes Tide Prediction Tables and Tidal Cur-
Atmospheric Administration (NOAA), Department of Comn-    rent Prediction Tables, is experiencing a shortage of funds to print
merce.-The National Ocean Service provides charts and related    and distribute those Tables. In addition, the role of NOS with
publications for the safe navigation of marine and air commerce,     regrdto the publication of the Tables is redefined to be that of
and provides basic data for engineering and scientific purposes    maintaining and updating the tidal prediction database from
and for other commercial and industrial needs. The principal facil-    domestic and international sources and generating the annual pre-
ities of NOS are located in Silver Spring, Md.; in Norfolk, Va.    dictions and associated information. Therefore, beginning with
(Atlantic Marine Center); and in Seattle, Wash. (Pacific Marine    the 1996 edition of these Tables, NOS will no longer print and dis-
Center). NOAA ships are based at the marine centers. These    tribute book-form Tables as a standard nautical product.
offices maintain files of charts and other publications which are
available for the use of mariners, who are invited to avail them-
selves of the facilities afforded. (See appendix for addresses.)
                                                                    including Greenland;
  (37)  Sales agents for Charts, the Coast Pilot, Tide Tables, Tidal    including Greenla nd;
                                                                      (46)  Tide Tables 1996 - West Coast of North and South Amer-
Current Tables, and Tidal Current Charts of the National Ocean       ic      a including the Hawaiian Islands
Service are located in many U.S. ports and in some foreign ports.
A list of authorized sales agents and chart catalogs may be had        (47)  Tide Tables 1996- Central and Western Pacific Ocean and
free upon request from National Ocean Service, Distribution Divi-    Indian Ocean;
sion (NIACC3). (See appendix for address.)                            (48)  Tide Tables 1996 - Europe and West Coast of Africa
  (38)  Nautical charts are published primarily for the use of the    including the Mediterranean Sea;
mariner, but serve the public interest in many other ways. They are   (49)  Tidal Current Tables 1996 - Atlantic Coast of North Amer-
compiled principally from NOS basic field surveys, supplemented    ica;
by data from other Government organizations.                          ' (50)  Tidal Current Tables 1996 - Pacific Coast of North Amer-
  (39)  Tide Tables are computed annually by NOS in advance of    ica and Asia;
the year for which they are prepared. These tables include pre-       (51)  Regional Tide and Tidal Current Tables 1996 - New York
dicted times and heights of high and low waters for every day in    Harbor to Chesapeake Bay;



4                                                   1. GENERAL INFORMATION


 (52)  Supplemental Tidal Predictions - Anchorage, Nikiski, Sel-      (60)  Attn: Tidal Predictions (N/OES33)
dovia, and Valdez, Alaska - 1996.                                      (61)   1305 East-West Highway
 (53)  Although NOS will no longer print and distribute the           (62)  Silver Spring, MD 20910-3281
Tables in a book format, a complete set of Tables will be made         (63)  Telephone (301) 713-2815
available to all who request it as a special compilation of predic-   (64)  FAX (301) 713-4501
tion information on CD-ROM. The CD-ROM will contain cam-               (65)  E-MAIL [email protected]
era-ready PostScript page-images. A PostScript reader will also       (66)  WWW http://www-ceob.nos.noaa.gov
be included to allow viewing documents on-screen. There will be        (67)  Tidal observation data for some of the NOS tide stations,
a fee charged for production and distribution of the special compi-    and information about how to obtain other data, is available from
lation. Although available to all who request it, the CD-ROM         the NOS Ocean and Lake Levels Division. This information is
vehicle may also be used by private printers who wish to print in    available on the World Wide Web at http://isis.ngs.noaa.gov:80/
book-form the full set of Tables for distribution to retailers and the    olld/home.html. TELNET access to tidal data and information is
general public. The annual predictions and associated information    available at wlnet2.nos.noaa.gov. Tidal observation data is also
will be made available on the same schedule as followed in previ-    available in hard copy by mail, and in some instances, by fax.
ous years.                                                           Special arrangements can be made for continuing access to data,
 (54)  In addition to the CD-ROM, two new vehicles will be pro-    or for real-time access to certain data sets.
vided for obtaining predictions. First, for the approximately 3,700    (68)  Anyone with questions or comments regarding the above
domestic tide stations, a 3-day window of predictions for any date    subject or wishing more information should write, telephone, or
in 1995 and 1996 will be offered on the NOS, Coastal and Estua-    fax to:
rine Oceanography Branch, Tidal Information Distribution and           (69)  National Ocean Service, NOAA
Education System (TIDES) electronic bulletin board which is            (70)  Attn: Ocean and Lake Levels (N/OES232)
accessible by telephone modem (301) 713-4492, N-8-1, up to            (71)   1305 East-West Highway
9600 baud). During 1996, this feature will be expanded to include      (72)  Silver Spring, MD 20910-3281
about 3,000 additional sites in 120 countries around the world.        (73)  Telephone (301) 713-2877
Second, for domestic tidal reference stations, predictions covering    (74)  FAX (301) 713-4366
a 4-day period beginning on the day of inquiry will be available on    (75)  NOS, in partnership with other agencies and institutions,
the NOS, Coastal and Estuarine Oceanography Branch, Mosaic    has established a series of Physical Oceanographic Real Time Sys-
Homepage on the Internet (http://www-ceob.nos.noaa.gov).    tems (PORTS) in selected areas. These PORTS sites provide con-
These two new communication pathways will also be used to con-    stantly updated information on tidal and tidal current conditions,
tinuously inform customers when prediction products become           water temperature, and weather conditions. This information is
available or finalized during the year. Further, NOS will continue    updated every six minutes. The PORTS sites currently in opera-
to provide tide and tidal current prediction and associated informa-    tion include: Tampa Bay, Florida; San Francisco, California; and
tion on the media and in the time-frames with which customers    New York/New Jersey; with future sites to be added. The infor-
have been familiar from past experience with NOS.                    mation is accessible through a computer data connection or by a
 (55)  Thus, all requests for prediction and associated informa-     voice response system at the following numbers:
tion continue to be welcome.  Beginning immediately, NOS is           (76)   TAMPA BAY
accepting prediction data requests via two new communication           (77)  Voice response (813) 822-5836 or (813) 822-0022
pathways. The first is the TIDES electronic bulletin board. The        (78)  Data (813) 822-5931 (2400 baud, N-8-1)
second, is the NOS, Coastal and Estuarine Oceanography Branch,         (79)   SAN FRANCISCO
World Wide Web Homepage.                                               (80)  Voice response (707) 642-4337
 (56)   As NOS is no longer printing and distributing the Tables      (81)  Data (707) 642-4608 (2400 baud, N-8-1)
in book-form, the NOS Nautical Chart Sales Agents will no longer      (82)  NEW YORK/NEW JERSEY
obtain the Tables in book-form from the NOS Distribution               (83)  Voice response (212) 688-7725
Branch.  Instead, they may obtain quantities of the Tables for        (84)  Anyone with questions or comments regarding the above
resale to the public from various private printers and distributors.    subject or wishing more information should write, telephone, or
NOS is aware of a small number of vendors who have shown             fax to:
interest in printing and distributing the Tables in book-form. NOS     (85).  National Ocean Service, NOAA
requests any and all parties who may be interested in printing and     (86)  Attn: Office of Ocean and Earth Sciences (OES333)
distributing the Tables in book-form to contact NOS (address fol-     (87)   1305 East-West Highway, Station 6544
lows).                                                                (88)  Silver Spring MD 20910-3281
 (57)   The U.S. Coast Guard, through the Federal regulation 33       (89)  Telephone (301) 713-2809
CFR 164.33, requires certain charts and publications be carried on     (90)  FAX (301) 713-4501
board vessels of 1,600 gross tons and greater when traversing U.S.
waters. NOS has been in contact with the U.S. Coast Guard con-         (91)  Coast Guard, Department of Transportation.- The Coast
cerning this regulation. Questions concerning this regulation    Guard has among its duties the enforcement of the laws of the
should be addressed to Chief, Navigation Rules Branch, G-NVT-        United States on the high seas and in coastal and inland waters of
3, United States Coast Guard, Washington, D.C. 20593-0001, tele-    the United States and its possessions; enforcement of navigation
phone (202) 267-0416; fax (202) 267-4826.                            and neutrality laws and regulations; establishment and enforce-
 (58)  Anyone with questions or comments regarding the above    ment of navigational regulations upon the Inland Waters of the
subject or private printers and distributors wishing more informa-   United States, including the establishment of a demarcation line
tion should write, telephone, fax or e-mail to:                      separating the high seas from waters upon which U.S. navigational
 (59)  National Ocean Service, NOAA                                  rules apply; administration of the Oil Pollution Act of 1961, as




                                                  1. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                         5


amended; establishment and administration of vessel anchorages;    Relations, U.S. Coast Guard, Building 110, Box 26, Governor's
approval of bridge locations and clearances over navigable waters;    Island, NY 10004-5034, telephone: (212) 668-7764; Commander,
administration of the alteration of obstructive bridges; regulation    Atlantic Area, U.S. Coast Guard, Governors Island, NY 10004-
of drawbridge operations; inspection of vessels of the Merchant    5000; Commander, Pacific Area, U.S. Coast Guard, Coast Guard
Marine; admeasurement of vessels; documentation of vessels;    Island, Alameda, CA 94501-5100; and at U.S. Coast Guard Dis-
preparation and publication of merchant vessel registers; registra-    trict Offices, Marine Safety Offices, Marine Inspection Offices,
tion of stack insignia; port security; issuance of Merchant Marine    and Captain of the Port Offices in major U.S. ports. Requests for
licenses and documents; search and rescue operations; investiga-    instructions should state the language desired if other than
tion of marine casualties and accidents, and suspension and revo-    English.
cation proceedings; destruction of derelicts; operation of aids to   (98)  For AMVER participants bound for U.S. ports there is an
navigation; publication of Light Lists and Local Notices to Mari-    additional benefit. AMVER participation via messages which
ners; and operation of ice-breaking facilities.                     include the necessary information is considered to meet the
 (92)  The Coast Guard, with the cooperation of coast radio sta-    requirements of 33 CFR 160. (See 160.201, chapter 2, for rules
tions of many nations, operates the Automated Mutual-assis-    and regulations.)
tance Vessel Rescue System (AMVER). It is an international           (99)  AMVER Reporting Required.-U.S. Maritime Adminis-
maritime mutual assistance program which provides important aid    tration regulations effective August 1, 1983, state that certain U.S.
to the development and coordination of search and rescue (SAR)    flag vessels and foreign flag "War Risk" vessels must report and
efforts in many offshore areas of the world. Merchant ships of all    regularly update their voyages to the AMVER Center. This report-
nations making offshore passages are encouraged to voluntarily    ing is required of the following: (a) U.S. flag vessels of 1,000
send movement (sailing) reports and periodic position reports to    gross tons or greater, operating in foreign commerce; (b) foreign
the AMVER Center at Coast Guard New York via selected radio    flag vessels of 1,000 gross tons or greater, for which an Interim
stations. Information from these reports is entered into an elec-    War Risk Insurance Binder has been issued under the provisions
tronic computer which generates and maintains dead reckoning    of Title XII, Merchant Marine Act, 1936.
positions for the vessels. Characteristics of vessels which are valu-  (1oo) Details of the above procedures are contained in the
able for determining SAR capability are also entered into the com-  AMVER Users Manual. The system is also published in
puter from available sources of information.                        DMAHTC Pub. 117.
 (93)  A worldwide communications network of radio stations          (101) Search and Rescue Operation procedures are contained in
supports the AMVER System. Propagation conditions, location of    the International Maritime Organization (IMO) SAR Manual
vessel, and traffic density will normally determine which station    (MERSAR). U.S. flag vessels may obtain a copy of MERSAR
may best be contacted to establish communications. To ensure that    from local Coast Guard Marine Safety Offices and Marine Inspec-
no charge is applied, all AMVER reports should be passed    tion Offices or by writing to U.S. Coast Guard (G-OSR), Washing-
through specified radio stations. Those stations which currently    ton, D.C. 20593-0001. Other flag vessels may purchase MERSAR
accept AMVER reports and apply no coastal station, ship station,    directly from IMO.
or landline charge are listed in each issue of the "AMVER Bulle-     (102)  The Coast Guard conducts and/or coordinates search and
tin" publication. Also listed are the respective International radio    rescue operations for surface vessels and aircraft that are in dis-
call signs, locations, frequency bands, and hours of operation. The    tress or overdue. (See Distress Signals and Communication Proce-
"AMVER Bulletin" is available from AMVER Maritime Rela-    dures this chapter.)
tions, U.S. Coast Guard, Building 110, Box 26, Governor's Island,    (103) Light Lists, published by the Coast Guard, describe aids
NY 10004-5034, telephone: (212) 668-7764. Although AMVER            to navigation, consisting of lights, fog signals, buoys, lightships,
reports may be sent through nonparticipating stations, the Coast    daybeacons, and electronic aids, in United States (including
Guard cannot reimburse the sender for any charges applied.          Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands) and contiguous Canadian
  (94)  Information concerning the predicted location and SAR       waters. Light Lists are for sale by the Government Printing Office
characteristics of each vessel known to be within the area of inter-    (See appendix for address.), and by sales agents in the principal
est is made available upon request to recognized SAR agencies of    seaports. Mariners should refer to these publications for detailed
any nation or vessels needing assistance. Predicted locations are    information regarding the characteristics and visibility of lights,
only disclosed for reasons related to marine safety.                and the descriptions of light structures, lightships, buoys, fog sig-
  (95)  Benefits of AMVER participation to shipping include: (1)    nals, and electronic aids.
improved chances of aid in emergencies, (2) reduced number of        (104) Documentation (issuance of certificates of registry,
calls for assistance to vessels not favorably located, and (3)    enrollments, and licenses), admeasurements of vessels, and
reduced time lost for vessels responding to calls for assistance. An  administration of the various navigation laws pertaining thereto
AMVER participant is under no greater obligation to render assis-    are functions of the Coast Guard. Yacht commissions are also
tance during an emergency than a vessel who is not participating.   issued, and certain undocumented vessels required to be numbered
  (96)  All AMVER messages should be addressed to Coast    by the Federal Boat Safety Act of 1971 are numbered either by the
Guard New York regardless of the station to which the message is    Coast Guard or by a State having an approved numbering system
delivered, except those sent to Canadian stations which should be    (the latter is most common). Owners of vessels may obtain the
addressed to AMVER Halifax or AMVER Vancouver to avoid    necessary information from any Coast Guard District Commander,
incurring charges to the vessel for these messages.                 Marine Safety Office, or Marine Inspection Office. Coast Guard
  (97)  Instructions guiding participation in the AMVER System    District Offices, Coast Guard Stations, Marine Safety Offices,
are available in the following languages: Chinese, Danish, Dutch,    Captain of the Port Offices, Marine Inspection Offices, and Docu-
English, French, German, Greek, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Nor-    mentation Offices are listed in the appendix. (Note: A Marine
wegian, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Spanish and Swedish. The    Safety Office performs the same functions as those of a Captain of
AMVER Users Manual is available from: AMVER Maritime    the Port and a Marine Inspection Office. When a function is at a



6                                                   1. GENERAL INFORMATION


different address than the Marine Safety Office, it will be listed    (113) Persons or organizations who want to file for an applica-
separately in the appendix.)                                         tion for an ocean dumping permit should write the Environmental
                                                                    Protection Agency Regional Office for the region in which the
  (105)  Corps of Engineers, Department of the Army.-The Corps    port of departure is located. (See appendix for addresses of
of Engineers has charge of the improvement of the rivers and har-    regional offices and States in the EPA coastal regions.)
bors of the United States and of miscellaneous other civil works       (114) The letter should contain the name and address of the
which include the administration of certain Federal laws enacted    applicant; name and address of person or firm; the name and usual
for the protection and preservation of navigable waters of the    location of the conveyance to be used in the transportation and
United States; the establishment of regulations for the use, admin-    dumping of the material involved; a physical description where
istration, and navigation of navigable waters; the establishment of    appropriate; and the quantity to be dumped and proposed dumping
harbor lines; the removal of sunken vessels obstructing or endan-    site.
gering navigation; and the granting of permits for structures or       (115)  Everyone who writes EPA will be sent information about a
operations in navigable waters, and for discharges and deposits of    final application for a permit as soon as possible. This final appli-
dredged and fill materials in these waters.                          cation is expected to include questions about the description of the
 (106)  Information concerning the various ports, improvements,      process or activity giving rise to the production of the dumping
channel depths, navigable waters, and the condition of the Intrac-    material; information on past activities of applicant or others with
oastal Waterways in the areas under their jurisdiction may be    respect to the disposal of the type of material involved; and a
obtained direct from the District Engineer offices. (See appendix    description about available alternative means of disposal of the
for addresses.)                                                      material with explanations about why an alternative is thought by
 (107)  Restricted areas in most places are defined and regula-    the applicant to be inappropriate.
tions governing them are established by the Corps of Engineers.
The regulations are enforced by the authority designated in the        (116)  Federal Communications Commission.-The Federal
regulations, and the areas are shown on the large-scale charts of    Communications Commission controls non-Government radio
NOS. Copies of the regulations may be obtained at the District    communications in the United States, Guam, Puerto Rico, and the
offices of the Corps of Engineers. The regulations also are    Virgin Islands. Commission inspectors have authority to board
included in the appropriate Coast Pilots.                            ships to determine whether their radio stations comply with inter-
 (108)  Fishtraps.-The Corps of Engineers has general supervi-    national treaties, Federal Laws, and Commission regulations. The
sion of location, construction, and manner of maintenance of all    commission has field offices in the principal U.S. ports. (See
traps, weirs, pounds, or other fishing structures in the navigable    appendix for addresses.) Information concerning ship radio regu-
waters of the United States. Where State and/or local controls are    lation's and service documents may be obtained from the Federal
sufficient to regulate these structures, including that they do not    Communications Commission, Washington, D.C. 20554, or from
interfere with navigation, the Corps of Engineers leaves such reg-    any of the field offices.
ulation to the State or local authority. See 33 CFR 330 (not carried
in this Pilot) for applicable Federal regulations. Construction per-   (117) Immigration and Naturalization Service, Department of
mits issued by the Engineers specify the lights and signals    Justice.-The Immigration and Naturalization Service administers
required for the safety of navigation.                               the laws relating to admission, exclusion, and deportation of
 (109)  Fish havens, artificial reefs constructed to attract fish, can    aliens, the registration and fingerprinting of aliens, and the natural-
be established in U.S. coastal waters only as authorized by a Corps  ization of aliens lawfully resident in the United States.
of Engineers permit; the permit specifies the location, extent, and    (118)  The designated ports of entry for aliens are divided into
depth over these "underwater junk piles".                            three classes. Class A is for all aliens. Class B is only for aliens
                                                                    who at the time of applying for admission are lawfully in posses-
 (110)  Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).-The U.S.              sion of valid resident aliens' border-crossing identification cards
Environmental Protection Agency provides coordinated govern-    or valid nonresident aliens' border-crossing identification cards or
mental action to assure the protection of the environment by abat-    are admissible without documents under the documentary waivers
ing and controlling pollution on a systematic basis. The ocean    contained in 8 CFR 212.1 (a). Class C is only for aliens who are
dumping permit program of the Environmental Protection Agency        arriving in the United States as crewmen as that term is defined in
provides that except when authorized by permit, the dumping of    Section 101 (a) (10) of the Immigration and Nationality Act. (The
any material into the ocean is prohibited by the "Marine Protec-    term "crewman" means a person serving in any capacity on board
tion, Research, and Sanctuaries Act of 1972, Public Law 92-532,"    a vessel or aircraft.) No person may enter the United States until
as amended (33 USC 1401 et seq.).                                    he has been inspected by an immigration officer. A list of the
 (I11)  Permits for the dumping of dredged material into    offices covered by this Coast Pilot is given in the appendix.
waters of the United States, including the territorial sea, and into
ocean waters are issued by the Corps of Engineers. Permits for the    (119) Defense Mapping Agency Hydrographic/Topographic
dumping of fill material into waters of the United States, including    Center (DMAHTC), Department of Defense.-The Defense Map-
the territorial sea, are also issued by the Corps of Engineers. Per-    ping Agency Hydrographic/Topographic Center provides hydro-
mits for the dumping of other material in the territorial sea and    graphic, navigational, topographic, and geodetic data, charts,
ocean waters are issued by the Environmental Protection Agency.      maps, and related products and services to the Armed Forces,
 (112)  Corps of Engineers regulations relating to the above are    other Federal Agencies, the Merchant Marine and mariners in gen-
contained in 33 CFR 323-324; Environmental Protection Agency         eral. Publications include Sailing Directions, List of Lights, Dis-
regulations are in 40 CFR 220-229. (See Disposal Sites this chap-    tances Between Ports, Radio Navigational Aids, International
ter.)                                                                Code of Signals, American Practical Navigator (Bowditch), and




                                                   1. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                        7


Notice to Mariners. (See Defense Mapping Agency Procurement         (130) National Weather Service (NWS), National Oceanic and
Information in appendix.)                                          Atmospheric Administration (NOAA), Department of Com-
                                                                    merce.-The National Weather Service provides marine weather
 (120) Public Health Service, Department of Health and Human    forecasts and warnings for the U.S. coastal waters, the Great
Services.-The Public Health Service administers foreign quaran-    Lakes, offshore waters, and high seas areas. Scheduled marine
tine procedures at U.S. ports of entry.                            forecasts are issued four times daily from more than 20 National
 (121) All vessels arriving in the United States are subject to pub-    Weather Service Forecast Offices (WSFOs) around.the country,
lic health inspection. Vessels subject to routine boarding for quar-    operating 24 hours a day. Marine services are also provided by
antine inspection are only those which have had on board during    over 50 National Weather Service Offices with local areas of
the 15 days preceding the date of expected arrival or during the    responsibility. (See appendix for Weather Service Forecast Offices
period since departure (whichever period of time is shorter) the    and Weather Service Offices for the areas covered by this Coast
occurrence of any death or ill person among passengers or crew    Pilot.)
(including those who have disembarked or have been removed).        (131) Typically, the forecasts contain information on wind speed
The master of a vessel must report such occurrences immediately    and direction, wave heights, visibility, weather, and a general syn-
by radio to the quarantine station at or nearest the port at which the    opsis of weather patterns affecting the region. The forecasts are
vessel will arrive.                                                supplemented with special marine warnings and statements, radar
 (122) In addition, the master of a vessel carrying 13 or more pas-    summaries, marine observations, small-craft advisories, gale
sengers must report by radio 24 hours before arrival the number of    warnings, storm warnings and various categories of tropical
cases (including zero) of diarrhea in passengers and crew recorded    cyclone warnings e.g., tropical depression, tropical storm and hur-
in the ship's medical log during the current cruise. All cases that    ricane warnings. Specialized products such as coastal flood,
occur after the 24 hour report must also be reported not less than 4    seiche, and tsunami warnings, heavy surf advisories, low water
hours before arrival.                                              statements, ice forecasts and outlooks, and lakeshore warnings and
       (123)  "Ill person" means person who:                      statements are issued as necessary.
                                                                     (132) The principal means of disseminating marine weather ser-
                  ()  1. Has a temperature of 100F (or 38C) or greater,    vices and products in coastal areas is NOAA Weather Radio.
accompanied by a rash, glandular swelling, or jaundice, or which    This network of more than 350 stations nationwide is operated by
                                                                    This network of more than 350 stations nationwide is operated by
has persisted for more than 48 hours; or Q                         the NWS and provides continuous broadcasts of weather informa-
 (125) 2. Has diarrhea, defined as the occurrence in a 24 hour    tion for the generalpublic. These broadcasts repeat taped mes-
period of three or more loose stools or of a greater than normal    sages every 4-6 minutes. Tapes are updated periodically, usually
(for the person) amount of loose stools.                           every 2-3 hours and amended as required to include the latest
 (126) i Vessels arriving at ports under control of the United States    information. When severe weather threatens, routine transmis-
are subject to sanitary inspection to determine whether measures    sions are interrupted and the broadcast is devoted to emergency
should be applied to prevent the introduction, transmission, or    warnings. (See appendix for NOAA Weather Radio Stations cov-
spread of communicable disease.                                    ered by this Coast Pilot.)
 o27)  Specific public health laws, regulations, policies, and pro-  (133)  In coastal areas, the programming is tailored to the needs
cedures may be obtained by contacting U.S. Quarantine Stations,    of the marine community. Each coastal marine forecast covers a
U.S. Consulates or the Chief Program Operations, Division of    specific area. For example, "Cape Henlopen to Virginia Beach, out
Quarantine, Centers for Disease Control, Atlanta, Georgia 30333.    20 miles." The broadcast range is about 40 miles from the trans-
(See appendix for addresses of U.S. Public Health Service Quar-    mitting antenna site, depending on terrain and quality of the
antine Stations.)                                                  receiver used. When transmitting antennas are on high ground, the
                                                                    range is somewhat greater, reaching 60 miles or more. Some
 (128) Food and Drug Administration (FDA), Public Health    receivers are equipped with a warning alert device that can be
Service, Department of Health and Human Services.-Under the    turned on by means of a tone signal controlled by the NWS office
provisions of the Control of Communicable Diseases Regulations    concerned. This signal is transmitted for 13 seconds preceding an
(21 CFR 1240) and Interstate Conveyance Sanitation Regulations    announcement of a severe weather warning.
(21 CFR 1250), vessel companies operating in interstate traffic     (134) NWS marine weather products are also disseminated to
shall obtain potable water for drinking and culinary purposes only    marine users through the broadcast facilities of the Coast Guard,
at watering points found acceptable to the Food and Drug Admin-    Navy, National Bureau of Standards, certain Sea Grant Universi-
istration. Water supplies used in watering point operations must    ties, and commercial marine radio stations. Details on these broad-
also be inspected to determine compliance with applicable Inter-    casts including times, frequencies, and broadcast content are listed
state Quarantine Regulations (42 CFR 72). These regulations are    in the joint NWS/Navy publication Worldwide Marine Weather
based on authority contained in the Public Health Service Act (PL    Broadcasts. For marine weather services in the coastal areas, the
78-410). Penalties for violation of any regulation prescribed under    NWS publishes a series of Marine Weather Services Charts show-
authority of the Act are provided for under Section 368 (42 USC    ing locations of NOAA Weather Radio stations, Coastal Warning
271) of the Act.                                                   Display sites, telephone numbers of recorded weather messages
  (129) Vessel Watering Points.-FDA annually publishes a list of    and NWS offices, and other useful marine weather information.
Acceptable Vessel Watering Points. This list is available from      (135)  Ships of all nations share equally-in the effort to report
most FDA offices or from the Interstate Travel Sanitation Subpro-    weather observations. These reports enable meteorologists to cre-
gram Center for Food Safety and Applied Nutrition, FDA (HFF-    ate a detailed picture of wind, wave, and weather patterns over the
312), 200 C Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20204. Current status    open waters that no other data source can provide and upon which
of watering points can be ascertained by contacting any FDA        marine forecasts are based. The effectiveness and reliability of
office. (See appendix for addresses.)                              these forecasts and warnings plus other services to the marine



 8                                                   1. GENERAL INFORMATION


 community are strongly linked to the observations received from        (140) International distress signals.-(l) A signal made by
 mariners. There is an especially urgent need for ship observations    radiotelegraphy or by any other signalling method consisting of
 in the coastal waters, and the NWS asks that these be made and    the group "SOS" in Morse Code.
 transmitted whenever possible. Many storms originate and inten-        (141)  (2) A signal sent by radiotelephony consisting of the spo-
 sify in coastal areas. There may be a great difference in both wind    ken word "MAYDAY".
 direction and speed between the open sea, the offshore waters, and     (142)  (3) The International Flag Code Signal of NC.
 on the coast itself.                                                  (143)  (4) A signal consisting of a square flag having above or
  (136)  Information on how ships, commercial fishermen, off-    below it a ball or anything resembling a ball.
 shore industries, and others in the coastal zone may participate in   (144) (5) Flames on the craft (as from a burning oil barrel, etc.)
 the marine observation program is available from National              (145) (6) A rocket parachute flare or hand flare showing a red
 Weather Service Port Meteorological Officers (PMOs). Port    light.
 Meteorological Officers are located in major U.S. port cities and      (146) (7) Rockets or shells, throwing red stars fired one at a
 the Republic of Panama, where they visit ships in port to assist    time at short intervals.
 masters and mates with the weather observation program, provide        (147)  (8) Orange smoke, as emitted from a distress flare.
 instruction on the interpretation of weather charts, calibrate         (148)  (9) Slowly and repeatedly raising and lowering arms out-
 barometers and other meteorological instruments, and discuss    stretched to each side.
 marine weather communications and marine weather requirements          (149) (10) A gun or other explosive signal fired at intervals of
 affecting the ships' operations. (See appendix for addresses of    about 1 minute.
Port Meteorological Officers in or near the area covered by this      (150)  (1) A continuous sounding of any fog-signal apparatus.
Coast Pilot.)                                                         (151)  (12) Theradiotelegraphalarm signal.
                                                                      (152) (13) The radiotelephone alarm signal.
  (137) National Environmental Satellite, Data, and Informa-           (153)  (14) Signals transmitted by emergency position-indicat-
tion Service (NESDIS), National Oceanic and Atmospheric              ing radiobeacons.
Administration (NOAA), Department of Commerce.-Among its              (154)  (15) A piece of orange-colored canvas with either a black
functions, NESDIS archives, processes, and disseminates the non-    square and circle or other appropriate symbol (for identification
realtime meteorological and oceanographic data collected by gov-    from the air).
ernment agencies and private institutions. Marine weather obser-       (155)  (16) A dye marker.
vations are collected from ships at sea on a voluntary basis. About    (156)  Radio distress procedures-Distress calls are made on
 I million observations are received annually at NESDIS's             500 kHz (SOS) for radiotelegraphy and on 2182 kHz or channel
National Climatic Center. They come from vessels representing        16 VHF-FM (MAYDAY) for radiotelephony. For less serious situ-
every maritime nation. These observations, along with land data,    ations than warrant the distress procedure, the urgency signal
are returned to the mariners in the form of climatological summa-    PAN-PAN (PAHN-PAHN,  spoken three times), or the safety sig-
ries and atlases for coastal and ocean areas. They are available in    na SECURITY (SAY-CURITAY, spoken three times), for radiote-
                                                                    nal SECURITY (SAY-CURITAY, spoken three times), for radiote-
such NOAA publications as the U.S. Coast Pilot, Mariners             lephony, are used as appropriate. Since radiotelegraph
Weather Log, and LocalI Climatological Data, Annual Sum-             transmissions are normally made by professional operators, and
mary. They also appear in the Defense Mapping Agency Hydro-    urgency and safety situations are less critical, only the distress
graphic/Topographic Center's Pilot Charts and Sailing    procedures for voice radiotelephone are described. For complete
Directions Planning Guides.                                          information on emergency radio procedures, see 47 CFR 83 or
                                                                    DMAHTC Pub. 117 (See appendix for a list of Coast Guard Sta-
DISTRESS SIGNALS AND COMMUNICATION                                   tions which guard 2182 kHz and channel 16.) Complete informa-
PROCEDURES                                                           tion on distress guards can be obtained from Coast Guard District
 (138) Coast Guard search and rescue operations.-The Coast    Commanders.
Guard conducts and/or coordinates search and rescue operations         (157) Distress calls indicate a vessel or aircraft is threatened by
for surface vessels or aircraft that are in distress or overdue.    grave and imminent danger and requests immediate assistance.
Search and Rescue vessels and aircraft have special markings,    They have absolute priority over all other transmissions. All sta-
including a wide slash of red-orange and a small slash of blue on    tions which hear a distress call must immediately cease any trans-
the forward portion of the hull or fuselage. Other parts of aircraft,    mission capable of interfering with the distress traffic and shall
normally painted white, may have other areas painted red to facili-    continue to listen on the frequency used for the emission of the
tate observation. The cooperation of vessel operators with Coast    distress call. This call shall not be addressed to a particular station,
Guard helicopters, fixed-wing aircraft, and vessels may mean the    and acknowledgement of receipt shall not be given before the dis-
difference between life and death for some seaman or aviator;    tress message which follows it is sent.
such cooperation is greatly facilitated by the prior knowledge on      (158)  Radiotelephone distress communications include the
the part of vessel operators of the operational requirements of    following actions:
Coast Guard equipment and personnel, of the international distress     (159) (1) The radiotelephone alarm signal (if available): The
signals and procedures, and of good seamanship.                      signal consists of two audio tones, of different pitch, transmitted
 (139)  Note.-In August 1993, all Coast Guard communication          alternately; its purpose is to attract the attention of persons on
stations and cutters discontinued watchkeeping on the distress fre-    radio watch or to actuate automatic alarm devices. It may only be
quency 500 kHz. Distress and other calls to Coast Guard commu-       used to announce that a distress call or message is about to follow.
nication stations may be made on any of the following HF single        (160) (2) The distress call, consisting of:-the distress signal
sideband radiotelephone channels: 424 (4134 kHz), 601 (6200    MAYDAY (spoken three times);
kHz) 816 (8240 kHz), or 1205 (12242 kHz).                              (161) the words THIS IS (spoken once);



                                                    1. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                            9


 (162) the call sign or name of the vessel in distress (spoken three    ing procedure:-the word SEELONCE, followed by the word DIS-
times).                                                               TRESS, and its own call sign.
 (163)  (3) The distress message follows immediately and con-          (188)  (6) Transmission of the distress procedure by a vessel
sists of:                                                             or shore station not itself in distress: A vessel or a shore station
 (164)  the distress signal MAYDAY:                                  which learns that a vessel is in distress shall transmit a distress
 (165) The call sign and name of the vessel in distress;             message in any of the following cases:
 (166)  particulars of its position (latitude and longitude, or true   (891)  (a) When the vessel in distress is not itself able to transmit
bearing and distance from a known geographical position);             the distress message.
 (167)  the nature of the distress;                                    (190)  (b) When a vessel or a shore station considers that further
 (168)  the kind of assistance desired;                              help is necessary.
 (169) the number of persons aboard and the condition of any           (191)  (c) When, although not in a position to render assistance,
injured;                                                              it has heard a distress message that has not been acknowledged.
 (170)  present seaworthiness of vessel;                               (192)  In these cases, the transmission shall consist of:
 (171)  description of the vessel (length; type; cabin; masts          (193)  the radiotelephone alarm signal (if available);
power; color of hull, superstructure, trim; etc.);                     (194)  the words MAYDAY RELAY (spoken three times);
 (172)  any other information which might facilitate the rescue,       (195)  the wordsTHIS IS;
such as display of a surface-to-air identification signal or a radar    (196)  the call sign and name of vessel (or shore station), spoken
                 ~~~~~~~~~reflector;~                                         ~ ~three times.
 (173)  your listening frequency and schedule;                         (197)  When a vessel transmits a distress under these conditions,
                  (173)  your listening frequency  anit shall take all necessary steps to contact the Coast Guard or a
 (174)  THIS IS (call sign and name of vessel in distress). OVER.      shore station which can notify      the Coast Guard.
 (175)  (4) Acknowledgement of receipt of a distress message:           98  (7   Termination of distress: When distress traffic has
If a distress message is received from a vessel which is definitely
                                                                     ceased, or when silence is no longer necessary on the frequency
in your vicinity, immediately acknowledge receipt. If it is not in
in your vicinity,      i       mmediately acknowledge receipt. If it is not in    used for the distress traffic, the station in control shall transmit on
your vicinity, allow a short interval of time to elapse before
                                                                     that frequency a message to all stations as follows:
acknowledging, in order to permit vessels nearer to the vessel in
distress to acknowledge receipt without interference. However, in
                                                                       (2o0) the call TO ALL STATIONS, spoken three times;
areas where reliable communications with one or more shore sta-        (20)  the call TO ALL STATIONS, spoken three times;
tions are practicable, all vessels may defer this acknowledgement       201)  the words THIS IS;
for a short interval so that a shore station may acknowledge receipt    (202)  the call sign and name of the station sending the message;
first. The acknowledgement of receipt of a distress is given as fol-   (203)  the time;
lows:                                                                   (204)  the name and call sign of the vessel in distress;
                        l  name of the vessel sending the distress     (205) the words SEELONCE FEENEE (French for silence fin-
 (176)  the call sign or name of the vessel sending the distress).
(spoken three times);
 (177)  the words THIS IS;
                                                                     DISTRESS ASSISTANCE AND COORDINATION
 (178)  the call sign or name of acknowledging vessel (spoken        PROCEDURES
three times);                                                           (206)  Rescue Coordination Centers.-There are four Rescue
 (179)  The words RECEIVED MAYDAY.                                    Coordination Centers in Alaska. The centers depend upon infor-
 (180)  After the above acknowledgement, allow a momentary           mation from many sources in order to perform effectively. Mari-
interval of listening to insure that you will not interfere with    ners are requested to report any information to the nearest center
another vessel better situated to render immediate assistance; if    concerning fire, collision or other emergencies, foreign fishing
not, with the authority of the person in charge of the vessel, trans-    vessels, oil spills, possible illegal entry, submarine sighting, ice-
mit:  bergs, foreign naval vessels, or any other unusual sightings. (See
 (181)  the word MAYDAY;                                             the appendix for the location of the centers.)
 (182)  the call sign and name of distressed vessel;                   (207)  Surface ship procedures for assisting distressed surface
  (183)  the words THIS IS;                                           vessels.
 (184)  the call sign and name of your vessel;                         (208) (1) The following immediate action should be taken by
 (185)  your position (latitude and longitude, or true bearing and    each ship on receipt of a distress message:
distance from a known geographical position);                          (209)  (a) Acknowledge receipt and, if appropriate, retransmit
  (186)  the speed you are proceeding towards, and the approxi-    the distress message;
mate time it will take to reach, the distressed vessel. OVER.           (210)  (b) Immediately try to take D/F bearings during the trans-
 (187)  (5) Further distress messages and other communica-           mission of the distress message and maintain a D/F watch on 500
tions: Distress communications consist of all messages relating to    kHz and/or 2182 kHz;
the immediate assistance required by the distressed vessel. Each        (211)  (c) Communicate the following information to the ship in
distress communication shall be preceded by the signal MAYDAY.        distress:
The vessel in distress or the station in control of distress commu-     (212)  (i) identity;
nications may impose silence on any station which interferes. The       (213)  (ii) position;
procedure is:-the words SEELONCE MAYDAY (Seelonce is                   (214)  (iii) speed and estimated time of arrival (ETA);
French for silence). Silence also may be imposed by nearby              (215)  (iv) when available, true bearing of the ship in distress.
mobile stations other than the vessel in distress or the station in    (216)  (d) Maintain a continuous listening watch on the fre-
control of distress communications. The mobile station which          quency used for the distress. This will normally be:
believes that silence is essential may request silence by the follow-   (217)  (i) 500 kHz (radiotelegraphy) and/or



10                                                  1. GENERAL INFORMATION


  (218)  (ii) 2182 kHz (radiotelephony).                               changing propeller pitch, ships should be alert to respond to the
  (219)  (e) Additionally, maintain watch on VHF-FM channel 16    signals without the sounds, when jets or turboprop aircraft are
(156.80 MHz) as necessary;                                            involved.
  (220)  (f) Operate radar continuously;                                (241)  Surface ship procedures for assisting aircraft in dis-
  (221)  (g) If in the vicinity of the distress, post extra lookouts.  tress.- 1. When an aircraft transmits a distress message by radio,
  (222)  (2) The following action should be taken when proceed-        the first transmission is generally made on the designated air/
ing to the area of distress:                                          ground enroute frequency in use at the time between the aircraft
  (223)  (a) Plot the position, course, speed, and ETA of other    and aeronautical station. The aircraft may change to another fre-
assisting ships.                                                      quency, possibly another enroute frequency or the aeronautical
  (224)  (b) Know the communication equipment with which    emergency frequencies of 121.50 MHz or 243 MHz. In an emer-
other ships are fitted. This information may be obtained from the    gency, it may use any other available frequency to establish con-
International Telecommunication Union's List of Ship Stations.        tact with any land, mobile, or direction-finding station.
  (225)  (c) Attempt to construct an accurate "picture" of the cir-     (242)  2. There is liaison between Coast Radio Stations aeronau-
cumstances attending the casualty. The important information    tical units, and land-based search and rescue organizations. Mer-
needed is included under Distress Signals and Communication           chant ships will ordinarily be informed of aircraft casualties at sea
Procedures, this chapter. Should the ship in distress fail to transmit    by broadcast messages from Coast Radio Stations, made on the
this information, a ship proceeding to assist should request what     international distress frequencies of 500 kHz and 2182 kHz. Ships
information is needed.                                                may, however, become aware of the casualty by receiving:
  (226)  (3) The following on-board preparation while proceeding        (243)  (a) An SOS message from an aircraft in distress which is
to the distress area should be considered:                            able to transmit on 500 kHz or a distress signal from an aircraft
  (227)  (a) A rope (guest warp) running from bow to quarter at    using radiotelephone on 2182 kHz.
the waterline on each side and secured by lizards to the ship's side    (244)  (b) A radiotelegraphy distress signal on 500 kHz from a
to assist boats and rafts to secure alongside;                        hand-operated emergency transmitter carried by some aircraft.
  (228)  (b) A derrick rigged ready for hoisting on each side of the    (245)  (c) A message from a SAR aircraft.
ship with a platform cargo sling, or rope net, secured to the runner    (246)  3. For the purpose of emergency communications with
to assist the speedy recovery of exhausted or injured survivors in    aircraft, special attention is called to the possibility of conducting
the water;                                                    /       direct communications on 2182 kHz, if both ship and aircraft are
  (229)  (c) Heaving lines, ladders, and scramble net placed ready     so equipped.
for use along both sides of the ship on the lowest open deck and        (247)  4. An aircraft in distress will use any means at its disposal
possibly crew members suitably equipped to enter the water and        to attract attention, make known its position, and obtain help,
assist survivors;                                                     including some of the signals prescribed by the applicable Naviga-
 (230)  (d) A ship's liferaft made ready for possible use as a    tion Rules.
boarding station;                                                       (248) 5. Aircraft usually sink quickly (e.g. within a few min-
 (231)  (e) Preparations to receive survivors who require medical     utes). Every endeavor will be made to give ships an accurate posi-
assistance including the provision of stretchers;                     tion of an aircraft which desires to ditch. When given such a
 (232)  (f) When own lifeboat is to be launched, any means to    position, a ship should at once consult any other ships in the vicin-
provide communications between it and the parent ship will prove    ity on the best procedure to be adopted. The ship going to the res-
to be of very great help;                                             cue should answer the station sending the broadcast and give her
 (233)  (g) A line throwing appliance with a light line and a    identity, position, and intended action.
heavy rope, ready to be used for making connection either with the      (249)  6. If a ship should receive a distress message direct from
ship in distress or with survival craft.                              an aircraft, she should act as indicated in the immediately preced-
 (234) Aircraft procedures for directing surface craft to scene    ing paragraph and also relay the message to the nearest Coast
of distress incident.-The following procedures performed in    Radio Station. Moreover, a ship which has received a distress
sequence by an aircraft mean that the aircraft is directing a surface    message direct from an aircraft and is going to the rescue should
craft toward the scene of a distress incident,                        take a bearing on the transmission and inform the Coast Radio
 (235)  (a) Circling the surface craft at least once.                 Station and other ships in the vicinity of the call sign of the dis-
 (236) (b) Crossing the projected course of the surface craft    tressed aircraft and the time at which the distress message was
close ahead at low altitude, rocking the wings, opening and clos-    received, followed by the bearing and time at which the signal
ing the throttle, or changing the propeller pitch.                    ceased.
 (237)  (c) Heading in the direction in which the surface craft is     (250) 7. When an aircraft decides to ditch in the vicinity of a
to be directed. The surface craft should acknowledge the signal by    ship, the ship should:
changing course and following the aircraft. If, for any reason, it is   (251) (a) Transmit homing bearings to the aircraft, or (if so
impossible to follow, the surface craft should hoist the interna-    required) transmit signals enabling the aircraft to take its own
tional code flag NOVEMBER, or use any other signaling means           bearings.
available to indicate this.                                             (252)  (b) By day, make black smoke.
 (238)  The following procedures performed by an aircraft mean         (253)  (c) By night, direct a searchlight vertically and turn on all
that the assistance of the surface craft is no longer required:       deck lights. Care must be taken not to direct a searchlight toward
 (239)  (a) Crossing the wake of the surface craft close astern at a    the aircraft, which might dazzle the pilot.
low altitude, rocking the wings, opening and closing the throttle or    (254)  8. Ditching an aircraft is difficult and dangerous. A ship
changing the propeller pitch.                                         which knows that an aircraft intends to ditch should be prepared to
 (240)  Since modern jet-engined aircraft cannot make the charac-    give the pilot the following information:
teristic sound associated with opening and closing the throttle, or     (255)  (a) Wind direction and force.




                                                     1. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                           11


 (256)  (b) Direction, height, and length of primary and second-       (277)  (3) If you are beyond helicopter range, advise your diver-
ary swell systems.                                                    sion intentions so that a rendezvous point may be selected.
 (257)  (c) Other pertinent weather information.                       (278)  (4) If there are changes to any items reported earlier,
 (258)  The pilot of an aircraft will choose his own ditching head-    advise the rescue agency immediately. Should the patient die
ing. If this is known by the ship,; she should set course parallel to    before the arrival of the helicopter, be sure to advise those assist-
the ditching heading. Otherwise the ship should set course parallel    ing you.
to the main swell system and into the wind component, if any.           (279)  Preparations prior to the arrival of the helicopter:
 (259)  9. A land plane may break up immediately on striking the       (280)  (1) Provide continuous radio guard on 2182 kHz or speci-
water, and liferafts may be damaged. The ship, should, therefore,    fled voice frequency, if possible. The helicopter normally cannot
have a lifeboat ready for launching, and if possible, boarding nets    operate CW.
should be lowered from the ship and heaving lines made ready in        (281) (2) Select and clear the most suitable hoist area, prefera-
the ship and the lifeboat. Survivors of the aircraft may have bright    bly aft on the vessel with a minimum of 50 feet (15.2 meters)
colored lifejackets and location aids.                                radius of clear deck. This must include the securing of loose gear,
 (260)  10. The method of recovering survivors must be left to    awnings, and antenna wires. Trice up running rigging and booms.
the judgment of the master of the ship carrying out the rescue    If hoist is aft, lower the flag staff.
operation.                                                              (282)  (3) If the hoist is to take place at night, light the pickup
 (261)  11. It should be borne in mind that military aircraft are    areas as well as possible. Be sure you do not shine any lights on
often fitted with ejection seat mechanisms. Normally, their aircrew   the helicopter; so that the pilot is not blinded. If there are any
will use their ejection seats, rather than ditch. Should such an air-    obstructions in the vicinity, put a light on them so the pilot will be
craft ditch, rather than the aircrew bail out, and it becomes neces-    aware of their positions.
sary to remove them from their ejection seats while still in the        (283)  (4) Point searchlights vertically to aid the flight crew in
aircraft, care should be taken to avoid triggering off the seat mech-  locating the ship and turn them off when the helicopter is on the
anisms. The activating handles are invariably indicated by red and    scene.
or black/yellow coloring.
                                                                        (284)  (5) Be sure to advise the helicopter of the location of the
 (262)  12. A survivor from an aircraft casualty who is recovered
                                                                      pickup area on the ship before the helicopter arrives, so that the
may be able to give information which will assist in the rescue of    pi                   a                     ship
                                                                      pilot may make his approach to aft, amidships, or forward, as
other survivors. Masters are therefore asked to put the following     required.
questions to survivors and to communicate the answers to a Coast
                                                                        (285)  (6) There will be a high noise level under the helicopter,
Radio Station. They should also give the position of the rescuing                       so voice communications on deck are almost impossible. Arrange
                                                                      so voice communications on deck are almost impossible. Arrange
ship and the time when the survivors were recovered.
 (263)  (a) What was the time and date of the casualty?                        a  set of hand signals among the crew who will assist.
                                                                        (286) Hoist operations:
 (264)  (b) Did you bail out or was the aircraft ditched?
 (265)  (c) If you bailed out, at what altitude?                       (287)  (1) If possible, have the patient moved to a position as
 (266)  (d) How many others did you see leave the aircraft by    close to the hoist area as his condition will permit-time is impor-
                                                                      tant.
parachute?
 (267)  (e  How manyditchedwiththe aircraft?                           (288)  (2) Normally, if a litter (stretcher) is required, it will be
 (268)  (f) How many did you see leave the aircraft after ditch-    necessary to move the patient to the special litter which will be
ing?                                                                  lowered by the helicopter. Be prepared to do this as quickly as
 (269)  (g) How many survivors did you see in the water?              possible. Be sure the patient is strapped in, face up, and with a life
 (270)  (h) What flotation gear had they?                            jacket on (if his condition will permit).
 (271)  (i) What was the total number of persons aboard the air-       (289)  (3) Be sure that the patient is tagged to indicate what
craft prior to the accident?                                          medication, if any, was administered to him and when it was
 (272)  (j) What caused the emergency?
 (273,): Helicopter evacuation of personnel-.Helicopter evacua- :   (290)  (4) Have patient's medical record and necessary papers in
tion, usually performed by the Coast Guard, is a hazardous opera-     an envelope or package ready for transfer with the patient.
tion to the patient and to the flight crew, and should only be          (291)  (5) Again, if the patient's condition permits, be sure he is
attempted in event of very serious illness or injury. Provide the    wearing a life jacket.
doctor on shore with all the information you can concerning the         (292)  (6) Change the vessel's course to permit the ship to ride as
patient, so that an intelligent evaluation can be made concerning     easily as possible with the wind on the bow, preferably on the port
the need for evacuation. Most rescue helicopters can proceed less    bow. Try to choose a course to keep the stack gases clear of the
than 150 miles offshore (a few new helicopters can travel 250 to    hoist area. Once established, maintain course and speed.
300 miles out to sea), dependent on weather conditions and other        (293)  (7) Reduce speed to ease ship's motion, but maintain
variables. If an evacuation is necessary, the vessel must be pre-    steerageway.
pared to proceed within range of the helicopter, and should be          (294)  (8) If you do not have radio contact with the helicopter,
familiar with the preparations which are necessary prior to and    when you are in all respects ready for the hoist, signal the helicop-
after its arrival.                                                    ter in with a "come on" with your hand, or at night by flashlight
 (274)  When requesting helicopter assistance:                        signals.
 (275)  (1) Give the accurate position, time, speed, course,           (295)  (9) Allow basket or stretcher to touch deck prior to
weather conditions, sea conditions, wind direction and velocity,    handling to avoid static shock.
type of vessel, and voice and CW frequency for your ship.               (296)  (10) If a trail line is dropped by the helicopter, guide the
 (276)  (2) If not already provided, give complete medical infor-    basket or stretcher to the deck with the line; keep the line free at
mation including whether or not the patient is ambulatory.            all times. This line will not cause shock.




12                                                 1. GENERAL INFORMATION


 (297)  (11) Place the patient in basket, sitting with his hands    small craft to have efficient radar reflectors permanently installed
clear of the sides, or in the litter, as described above. Signal the    aboard the vessel.
helicopter hoist operator when ready for the hoist. Patient should     (320) Filing Cruising schedules.-Small-craft operators should
signal by a nodding of the head if he is able. Deck personnel give    prepare a cruising plan before starting on extended trips and leave
thumbs up.                                                           it ashore with a yacht club, marina, friend, or relative. It is advis-
 (298)  (12) If it is necessary to take the litter away from the hoist    able to use a checking-in procedure by telephone for each point
point, unhook the hoist cable and keep it free for the helicopter to    specified in the cruising plan. Such a trip schedule is vital for
haul in. Do not secure cable or trail line to the vessel or attempt    determining if a boat is overdue and will assist materially in locat-
to move stretcher without unhooking.                                 ing a missing craft in the event search and rescue operations
 (299)  (13) When patient is strapped into the stretcher, signal the    become necessary.
helicopter to lower the cable, attach cable to stretcher sling (bri-
dle), then signal the hoist operator when the patient is ready to     (321)  Medical advice.-Free medical advice is furnished to sea-
hoist. Steady the stretcher so it will not swing or turn.            men by radio through the cooperation of Governmental and com-
 (300)  (14) If a trail line is attached to the basket or stretcher, use    mercial radio stations whose operators receive and relay messages
it to steady the patient as he is hoisted. Keep your feet clear of the    prefixed RADIOMEDICAL  from ships at sea to the U.S. Coast
line, and keep the line from becoming entangled.                     Guard and/or directly to a hospital and then radio the medical
 (301) Medical advice and/or evacuation.-In the event a master
                                                                    advice back to the ships. (See appendix for list of radio stations
of a vessel requires medical advice and/or there is a potential of    that provide this service.)
evacuation the following should be volunteered by the master:
 (302) Vessel's name and call sign.
 (303)  Vessel's position and time at position.                      RADIO NAVIGATION WARNINGS AND WEATHER
 (304)  Vessel's course, speed and next port and estimated time of    (322) Marine radio warnings and weather are disseminated by
arrival (ETA).                                                       many sources and through several types of transmissions. Morse
 (305)  Patient's name, nationality, age, race and sex.              code radiotelegraph broadcasts of navigational warnings and other
                                 306  Patient's respiration, pulse and temperature.  advisories are not described, since these transmissions are nor-
 (307)  Patient's symptoms    and n  ature of illness.
                  (307)  Patient's symptoms andnatureof              mally copied only by professional radio operators. U.S. Coast
 (308)  Any knownhistory ofs        illness                          Guard NAVTEX, high-frequency (HF) narrow-band direct print-
 (309Any known  history of similar illness.                         ing (radio telex), HF radiofacsimile, and radiotelephone broad-
 (309)  Location and type of pain.
 (310)  Medical supplies carried on board vessel.                    casts of maritime safety information are summarized here. (For
 (311)  Medication given to patient.                                complete information on radio warnings and weather see
 (312)  Weather                                                     DMAHTC Pub. 117 and the joint National Weather Service/Navy
       (313)1Communication schedule and frequency.                  publication, Selected Worldwide Marine Weather Broadcasts.)
                                                                     (323)  Frequency units.-Hertz (Hz), a unit equal to one cycle
 (314)  Coast Guard droppable, floatable pumps.-The Coast    per second, has been generally adopted for radio frequencies;
Guard often provides vessels in distress with emergency pumps by    accordingly; frequencies formerly given in the Coast Pilot in kilo-
either making parachute drops, by lowering on helicopter hoist, or    cycles (kc) and megacycles (mc) are now stated in kilohertz
by delivering by vessel. The most commonly used type of pump         (kHz) and Megahertz'(MHz), respectively.
comes complete in a sealed aluminum drum about half the size of       (324) Coast Guard radio stations.-Coast Guard radio stations
a 50-gallon oil drum. One single lever on top opens it up. Don't be    provide urgent, safety, and scheduled marine information broad-
smoking as there may be gas fumes inside the can. The pump will    casts with virtually complete coverage of the approaches and
draw about 90 gallons per minute. There should be a waterproof    coastal waters of the United States, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Vir-
flashlight on top of the pump for night use. Operating instructions    gin Islands.
are provided inside the pump container.                                (325)  Urgent and safety radiotelephone broadcasts of impor-
 (315) Preparations for being towed by Coast Guard:                  tant Notice to Mariners items, storm warnings, and other vital
 (316)  (I) Clear the forecastle area as well as you can.            marine information are transmitted upon receipt, and urgent
 (317)  (2) If a line-throwing gun is used, keep everyone out of    broadcasts are repeated 15 minutes later; additional broadcasts are
the way until line clears the boat. The Coast Guard vessel will    made at the discretion of the originator. Urgent broadcasts are
blow a police whistle or otherwise warn you before firing.           preceded by the urgent signal PAN-PAN (PAHN-PAHN, spoken
 (318)  (3) Have material ready for chafing gear.                    three times). Both the urgent signal and message are transmit-
                                                                    ted on 2182 kHz and/or VHF-FM channel 16. Safety broadcasts
 (319)  Radar reflectors on small craft.-Operators of disabled    are preceded by the safety signal SECURITY (SAY-CURITAY,
wooden and fiberglass craft and persons adrift in rubber rafts or    spoken three times.) The safety signal is given on 2182 kHz and/
boats that are, or may consider themselves to be, the object of a    or VHF-FM channel 16 (156.80 MHz), and the message is
search, should hoist on a halyard or otherwise place aloft as high    given on 2670 kHz and/or VHF-FM channel 22A (157.10
as possible any irregularly shaped metallic object that would assist    MHz).
their detection by radar. The more irregular the shape, the better    (326)  Scheduled radiotelephone broadcasts include routine
will be the radar reflective quality. Coast Guard cutters and aircraft    weather, small-craft advisories, storm warnings, navigational
are radar equipped and thus are able to continue searching in dark-    information, and other advisories. Short-range broadcasts are
ness and during other periods of low visibility. For quick identifi-    made on 2670 kHz and/or VHF-FM channel 22A, following a
cation at night, shine spotlights straight up. If aircraft are involved,    preliminary call on 2182 kHz and/or VHF-FM channel 16. (See
once you are identified, turn lights away so as not to blind aircraft    appendix for a list of stations and their broadcast frequencies and
crew. It is advisable for coastal fishing boats, yachts, and other    times for the area covered by this Coast Pilot.)





                                                  1. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                        13


 (327)  Weather information is not normally broadcast by the         (340) Each NAVTEX message broadcast contains a four-charac-
Coast Guard on VHF-FM channel 22A in areas where NOAA               ter header describing identification of station (first character),
Weather Radio service is available. See note below regarding    message content (second character), and message serial number
VHF-FM channel 22A.                                                 (third and fourth characters). This header allows the microproces-
 (328) HF single-sideband broadcasts of high seas weather infor-    sor in the shipborne receiver to screen messages, selecting only
mation is available on the (carrier) frequencies 4428.7, 6506.4,    those stations relevant to the user, messages of subject categories
8765.4, 13113.2, and 17307.3 kHz from Portsmouth, VA and San    needed by the user, and messages not previously received by the
Francisco, CA.                                                      user. Selected messages are printed on a roll of paper as received,
 (329) Narrow-band direct printing (radio telex or sitor) broad-    to be read by the mariner at his convenience. Unwanted messages
casts of NAVAREA and other navigational warnings are transmit-    are suppressed. Suppression of unwanted messages is more and
ted on the following assigned frequencies:                          more important to the mariner as the number of messages, includ-
                                                                   ing rebroadcasts, increases yearly. With NAVTEX, a mariner will
                                                                   no longer find it necessary to listen to, or sift through, a large num-
 (331) Other Atlantic warnings: 8490, 16968.8 kHz.                 ber of irrelevant data to obtain the information necessary for safe
  (332) Pacific: 8710.5, 8714.5, 8718, 13077, 13084.5, 17203,    navigation.
22567, and 22574.5 kHz.
                                                                     (341)  Vessels regulated by the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS)
  (333) HF radiofacsimile broadcasts of weather and ice charts are    Convention, as amended in 1988 (cargo vessels over 300 tons and
made on the following frequencies:
  (334)  Atlantic: 3242, 7530, 8502 (ice only), 12750 (ice only)    passenger vessels, on international voyages), and operating in
  (334) Atlantic: 3242, 7530, 8502 (ice only), 12750 (ice only)
                                 k2  2      ^z.  ~~~~areas where NAVTEX service is available, have been required to
kHz.                                -                               carry NAVTEX receivers since 1 August 1993. The USCG dis-
  (335)  Pacific: 4298 (Kodiak), 4336, 8459 (Kodiak), 8682,    continued broadcasts of safety information over MF Morse fre-
12730, 17151.2 kHz.                                                 quencies on that date.
  (336)  National Standard Abbreviations for Broadcasts. - A          (342)  The USCG voice broadcasts (Ch. 22A), often of more
listing of Standard Abbreviations for Textual Maritime Safety    inshore and harbor information, will remain unaffected by NAV-
Broadcasts is contained in tables T-31 through T-33. These abbre-    TEX. With NAVTEX, mariners who do not have the knowledge
viations were jointly approved by the U.S. Coast Guard, National    of Morse code necessary to receive safety messages, or who have
Weather Service, Defense Mapping Agency, and the Radio Tech-;   difficulty receiving them on a timely basis, should find a signifi-
nical Commission for Maritime Services. In addition to appearing    cant advantage in owning a NAVTEX receiver. Mariners not able
in radio broadcasts of the U.S. Coast Guard and National Weather    to man a radio on a 24-hour basis in order to hear critical warning
 Service, they appear in Notices to Mariners of the U.S. Coast    messages (e.g., commercial fishermen) should also find a signifi-
Guard and Defense Mapping Agency, and in NAVTEX.                    cant advantage in owning a NAVTEX receiver.
  (337) Warning Regarding Coast Guard VHF-FM Channel
  22337  Warning Regarding Coast Guard broadcassVHF-FM Chandinel      (343)  See appendix, U.S. NAVTEX Transmitting Stations, for a
 22A  Br oadcasts.-The C       oast Guard broadca ships on channel 22A (157.10    list of NAVTEX broadcast stations (Pacific Ocean) and message
 maritime safety information to ships on channel 22A (157.10
 MHz), the ship station transmit frequency portion of channel 22,
 of Appendix 18 of the International Telecommunications Union         (344)  NOAA Weather RadioThe National Weather Service
 (ITU) Radio Regulations. This simplex use of channel 22A is not
                                                                    162.475, or 162.55 MHz, to provide continuous recorded weather
 compatible with the international duplex arrangement of the chan-    162-475, or 162.55 MHz, to provide continuous recorded weather
                                                                    broadcasts. These broadcasts are available to those with suitable
 nel (coast transmit 161.70 MHz, ship transmit 157.10 MHz). As a
 result, many foreignflag vessels having radios tuned to the inter-    receivers within about 40 miles of the antenna site. (See the
 national channel 22 can not receive these maritime safety broad-    appendix for a list of these stations in the area covered by this
 casts. A 1987 Coast Guard survey of foreign vessels in U.S.    Coast Pilot.)
 waters indicated that half of foreign vessels in U.S. waters did not  (345)  Commercial radiotelephone coast stations.-Broadcasts
 have equipment on board capable of receiving channel 22A broad-    of coastal weather and warnings are made by some commercial
 casts.                                                              radiotelephone coast stations (marine operators) on the normal
  (3381  Operators of vessels which transit U.S. waters and who do    transmitting frequencies of the stations. Vessels with suitable
 not have VHF-FM radios tunable to USA channel 22A are urged    receivers and desiring this service may determine the frequencies
 to either obtain the necessary equipment, to monitor the radiotele-    and schedules of these broadcasts from their local stations, from
 phone frequency 2182 kHz and tune to 2670 kHz when a broad-    Worldwide MarineWeather Broadcasts, orfrom the series of
 cast is announced, or to carry a NAVTEX receiver.                   Marine Weather Services Charts published by NWS
   (339)  NAVTEX.-NAVTEX is a maritime radio warning system            (346) Local broadcast-band radio stations.-Many local radio
 consisting of a series of coast stations transmitting radio teletype    stations in the standard AM and FM broadcast band give local
 (CCIR Recommendation 476 standard narrow band direct print-    marine weather forecasts from NWS on a regular schedule. These
 ing, sometimes called Sitor or ARQIFEC) safety messages on the    stations are listed on the series of Marine Weather Services Charts
 international standard medium frequency 518 kHz. Coast stations    published by NWS.
 transmit during preset time slots so as to minimize interference     (347)  Reports from ships.-The master of every U.S. ship
 with one another. Routine messages are normally broadcast four to    equipped with radio transmitting apparatus, on meeting with a
 six times daily. Urgent messages are broadcast upon receipt, pro-    tropical cyclone, dangerous ice, subfreezing air temperatures with
 vided that an adjacent station is not transmitting. Since the broad-    gale force winds causing severe ice accretion on superstructures,
  cast uses the medium frequency band, a typical station service    derelict, or any other direct danger to navigation, is required to
  radius ranges from 100-500 NM day and night. Interference from    cause to be transmitted a report of these dangers to ships in the
  or receipt of stations farther away occasionally occurs at night.   vicinity and to the appropriate Government agencies.












             NAVTEX PREDICTED COVERAGE AREA

                             EAST COAST

    '.1 wo. Q~~5Wns                                                              LEGEND


                                                                   200 NMi
                   ~~~.- .0.0 66                                                1 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Approx.]

  Qa- - 730O0


  ~~~~40'A




CL!








 00

 00(








                       Longitude degrees - west                        April 87



                                                  1. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                        15


 (348) During the West Indies hurricane season, June 1 to    been used as Chart Datum along the east coast of the United States
November 30, ships in the Gulf of Mexico, Caribbean Sea area,    and in parts of the West Indies. It is presently being changed to
southern North Atlantic Ocean, and the Pacific waters W of Cen-    Mean Lower Low Water, with no adjustments to soundings, shore-
tral America and Mexico are urged to cooperate with NWS in fur-    lines, low water lines, clearances, heights, elevations, or in the
nishing these special reports in order that warnings to shipping and    application of tide predictions for navigational purposes. The tidal
coastal areas may be issued.                                        datum of Mean Lower Low Water is used as Chart Datum along
 (349) Time Signals.-The National Institute of Standards and    the Gulf and west coasts; the coasts of Alaska, Hawaii, and other
Technology broadcasts time signals continuously, day and night,    United States and United Nations islands of the Pacific; and in
from its radio stations WWV, near Fort Collins, Colorado,    parts of the West Indies.
(40049'49"N., 105ï¿½02'27"W.) on frequencies of 2.5, 5, 10, 15, and    (357) Mean Low Water is defined as the arithmetic mean of all
20 MHz, and WWVH, Kekaha, Kauai, Hawaii (21ï¿½59'26"N.,    the low water heights observed over the National Tidal Datum
159046'00"W.) on frequencies 2.5, 5, 10, and 15 MHz. Services    Epoch. Mean Lower Low Water is defined as the arithmetic mean
include time announcements, standard time intervals, standard    of the lower low water height of each tidal day (24.84 hours)
audio frequencies, Omega Navigation System status reports, geo-    observed over the National Tidal Datum Epoch. The National
physical alerts, BCD (binary coded decimal) time code, UTI time    Tidal Datum Epoch is the specific 19-year period adopted by the
corrections, and high seas storm information.                       National Ocean Service, NOAA, as the official time segment over
 (350) Time announcements are made every minute, commenc-    which tide observations are taken and reduced to obtain mean val-
ing at 15 seconds before the minute by a female voice and at 7'/2    ues for tidal datums. The present Epoch is 1960 through 1978.
seconds before the minute by a male voice, from WWVH and             (358) Accuracy of a nautical chart.-The value of a nautical
WWV, respectively. The time given is in Coordinated Universal    chart depends upon the.accuracy of the surveys on which it is
Time (UTC) and referred to the time at Greenwich, England, i.e.,   based. The chart reflects what was found by field surveys and what
Greenwich Mean Time.                                                has been reported to NOS Headquarters. The chart represents gen-
 (351) NIST Times and Frequency Dissemination Services,    eral conditions at the time of surveys or reports and does not nec-
Special Publication 432, gives a detailed description of the time    essarily portray present conditions. Significant changes may have
and frequency dissemination services of the National Institute of    taken place since the date of the last survey or report.
Standards and Technology. Single copies may be obtained upon         (359) Each sounding represents an actual measure of depth and
request from the National Institute of Standards and Technology,    location at the time the survey was made, and each bottom charac-
Time and Frequency Division, Boulder, Colo. 80303. Quantities    teristic represents a sampling of the surface layer of the sea bottom
may be obtained from the Government Printing Office (See appen-    at the time of sampling. Areas where sand and mud prevail, espe-
dix for address.).                                                  cially the entrances and approaches to bays and rivers exposed to
                                                                   strong tidal current and heavy seas, are subject to continual
NAUTICAL CHARTS                                                     change.
                                                                     (360)  In coral regions and where rocks and boulders abound, it
 (352) Reporting chart deficiencies.-Users are requested to    is always possible that surveys may have failed to find every
report all significant observed discrepancies in and desirable addi-    obstruction. Thus, when navigating such waters, customary routes
tions to NOS nautical charts, including depth information in pri-    and channels should be followed and areas avoided where irregu-
vately maintained channels and basins; obstructions, wrecks, and    lar and sudden changes in depth indicate conditions associated
other dangers; new landmarks or the nonexistence or relocation of    with pinnacle rocks, coral heads, or boulders.,
charted ones; uncharted fixed private aids to navigation; and dele-  (361) Information charted as "reported" should be treated with
tions or additions of small-craft facilities. All such reports should    caution in navigating the area, because the actual conditions have
be sent to Chief, Marine Charts Division (N/CS2), National Ocean    :not been verified by government surveys.
Service, NOAA, 1315 East-West Highway, Station 7317, Silver          (362)  The date of a chart is of vital importance to the navigator.
Spring, MD 20910-3282.                                              When charted information becomes obsolete, further use of the
  (353)  Chart symbols and abbreviations.-The standard sym-    chart for navigation may be dangerous. Announcements of new
bols and abbreviations approved for use on all regular nautical    editions of nautical charts are usually published in notices to mari-
charts published by the Defense Mapping Agency Hydrographic/    ners. The publication, Dates of Latest Editions, published quar-
Topographic Center and NOS are contained in Chart No. 1,    terly, gives the edition and date of the latest edition of charts
United States of America Nautical Chart Symbols and Abbrevi-        published by NOS. It is distributed to sales agents; free copies
ations. This publication is available from  NOS Distribution    may be obtained from the sales agents or by writing to Distribu-
Branch (see Sales Information, appendix.)                           tion Branch (N/CG33), National Ocean Service. (See appendix for
  (354)  On certain foreign charts reproduced by the United States,    address.)
and on foreign charts generally, the symbols and abbreviations       (363)  Source diagrams.- The Coast and Geodetic Survey has
used may differ from U.S. approved standards. It is, therefore, rec-    recently committed to adding a source diagram to all charts
ommended that navigators who acquire and use foreign charts and     1:500,000 scale and larger. This diagram is intended to provide
reproductions procure the symbol sheet or Chart No. 1 produced    the mariner with additional information about the density and reli-
by the same foreign agency.                                         ability of the sounding data depicted on the chart. The adequacy
  (355) The mariner is warned that the buoyage systems, shapes,    with which sounding data depicts the configuration of the bottom
and colors used by other countries often have a different signifi-    depends on the following factors:
cance than the U.S. system.                                          (364) -Survey technology employed (sounding and navigation
  (356) Chart Datum.-Chart Datum ist the particular tidal datum    equipment).
to which soundings and depth curves on a nautical chart or bathy-    (365)  Survey specifications in effect (prescribed survey line
metric map are referred. The tidal datum of Mean Low Water has    spacing and sounding interval).




16                                                  1. GENERAL INFORMATION


 (366) -Type of bottom (e.g., rocky with existence of submerged    pling. Depths of areas between or outside of leadline sounding
pinnacles, flat sandy, coastal deposits subject to frequent episodes    points can only be inferred or estimated leaving the possibility of
of deposition and erosion).                                           undetected features, especially in areas of irregular relief.
 (367)  Depth information on nautical charts is based on sound-        (372)  1940 to present: During this period sounding data has
ings from the latest available hydrographic survey, which in many     been collected using continuous recording single-beam echo
cases may be quite old. The age of hydrographic surveys support-    sounders which yield a graphic record of the entire sounding
ing nautical charts varies. Approximately 60 percent of inshore       line-not just isolated points. Using this graphic record, features
hydrography was acquired by leadline (pre- 1940) sounding tech-    which fall between the standard position fixes can be inserted into
nology.                                                               the data set. Positioning of the sounding vessel in this era has var-
 (368) The sounding information portrayed on NOAA nautical    ied from horizontal sextant angles to modern Global Positioning
charts is considered accurate but does not, as noted above, repre-    System satellite fixes.
sent a complete picture of the seafloor because older sounding
                           sent a                c    o mplete picture of thbcauseoldersoun(373) Although the sampling is continuous along the track of the
technologies only collected discrete samples. For example, a lead-
line survey provides only a single point sounding. Electronic         sounding vessel,features can be missed between sounding lines.
echo sounders, which came into common use during the 1940's,            (374) The spacing of sounding lines required to survey an area
collected continuous soundings along the path of the survey ves-    depends on several factors; such as water depths, bottom configu-
sel, but no information between survey lines. Full bottom cover-    ration, survey scale, general nature of the area, and the purpose of
age technology which is transitioning into use as a supplemental      the survey. For example, a 1:10,000-scale survey conducted in an
method in the early 1990's, will make leadline and conventional       estuary will typically have 100-meter line spacing requirements,
echo sounder technologies obsolete in areas of complex bathyme-    but may be reduced to 50 meters or less to adequately develop an
try.                                                                  irregular bottom; shoal, or some other feature that may present a
 (369)  The following shows the eras of survey technology and    hazard to navigation. Also, hydrographic project instructions for
their impact on the adequacy with which the bottom configuration      surveys may have required line spacing that deviates from these
is portrayed.                                                         general specifications.
 (370)  Prior to 1940: The majority of survey data acquired prior      (375) The following table shows the various sounding technolo-
to 1940 consisted of leadline soundings which were positioned         gies, line spacings, and areas or depths for each given period of
using horizontal sextant angles. This positioning method is con-    hydrographic surveying. The terminology used to describe the
sidered to be accurate.                                               different types of bottom in the table are derived from the first
 (371)  A deficiency with pre-1940 data exists in the leadline    through fourth editions of the Hydrographic Manual and Hydro-
sounding method because it represents discrete single-point sam-    graphic Survey Guideline No. 69.




   ERA                        SOUNDING TECHNOLOGY                      MAXIMUM LINE SPACING              AREAS OR DEPTHS
   PRE-1940                   Leadline                                      50 Meters                    Anchorages, Channel Lines
                                                                                                        Open Coast
                                                                                                        Even Botton
                                                                      200-300 Meters                     0-10 Fathoms
                                                                           0.5 Mile                      10-15 Fathoms
                                                                           1-4 Miles                     15-100 Fathoms

                                                                       Reduced as Necessary              Uneven Bottom
   1940 TO 1989               Continuous Recording Echo-sounder                                          Harbors & Restricted Areas
                                                                        50 Meters                       Shoal Development
                                                                        100 Meters                      <20 Fathoms
                                                                        200 Meters                       20-30 Fathoms
                                                                       400 Meters                       >30 Fathoms
                                                                                                        Open Coast
                                                                                                        Irregular Bottom
                                                                        100 Meters                      <20 Fathoms (Rocky points,
                                                                                                        spits & channel entrances)
                                                                                                        Smooth Bottom
                                                                       200 Meters                       <20 Fathoms (All Other Areas)
                                                                       400 Meters                        20-30 Fathoms
                                                                       800 Meters                        30-110 Fathoms
                                                                       1600 Meters  I 0-500 Fathoms
   1989 TO PRESENT            Continuous Recording Echo-sounder                                          Harbors & Restricted Areas
                              (Metrication)                             100 Meters                       <30 Meters
                                                                       200 Meters                       30-50 Meters
                                                                       400 Meters                       >50 Meters

                                                                                                        Open Coast
                                                                        100 Meters                      <30 Meters (Rocky points, spits
                                                                                                        & channel entrances)
                                                                       200 Meters                       <30 Meters (All Other Areas)
                                                                       400 Meters                        30-50 Meters
                                                                       800 Meters                        50-200 Meters
                                                                       1600 Meters                      200-900 Meters




                                                  1. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                       17


 (376)  Referring to the accompanying sample Source Diagram         (380)  Referring again to the accompanying sample Source Dia-
and the above discussion of survey methods over time, a mariner    gram, and the above discussion of survey methods over time, a
transiting from Point X to Point Y, along the track indicated by the    mariner could choose to transit from Point X to Point Y. along the
dotted line, would have the following information available about    track shown with a dashed line.
the relative quality of the depth information shown on the chart.   (381) -The transit again starts in an area surveyed by NOS in
 (377)  *Point X lies in an area surveyed by NOS in 1926-27 at a    1926-27 at a scale of 1:100,000, The sounding data would have
scale of 1l:100,000. The sounding data would have been collected    been collected by leadline. Depths between sounding points can
by leadline. Depths between sounding points can only be inferred,    only be inferred, and undetected features might exist between
and undetected features might exist between the sounding points    sounding points in areas of irregular relief. Caution should be
in areas of irregular relief. Caution should be exercised.         exercised.
                                                                    (382) -The transit then crosses an area surveyed by NOS in 1958
 (378) ,The transit continues to cross areas surveyed by MOo In n  
the 1920's using leadline survey technology. As depths decrease,    at a scale of 1:80,000 The charted hydrography i this area would
the line spacing decreases, but depths still can only be inferred    have been acquired by continuous recording single beam echo
between sounding points. Shoals and undetected features might    sounder. It is possible that features could have been missed
exist between the sounding points in areas of irregular relief. Cau-    between sounding lines, although eho sounderecord all depths
      *ion must still be exercised.                                along a sounding line with varying beam widths.
  (379) -The transit ends in an area charted from miscellaneous      (383) *The transit then crosses an area surveyed by NOS in 1992
  (379) ,The transit ends in an area charted from miscellaneous at a scale of 1:20,000. The data is collected in metric units
surveys. These surveys may be too numerous to depict or vary in    acquired by continuous recording single beam echo sounder. It is
age, reliability, origin, or technology used. No inferences about    possible that features could have been missed between sounding
the fitness of the data can be made in this area from the diagram.  lines, although echo sounders record all depths along a sounding
                                                                    line with varying beam widths.
                                                                     (384) *The transit ends in an area where the charted hydrography
                   SOURCE DIAGRAM                                  is derived from miscellaneous surveys. These surveys may be too
                                                                    numerous to depict or vary in age, reliability, origin, or technology
                            SOURCE                                 used. No inferences about the fitness of the data can be made in
                                                                    this area from the diagram.
     a  Uistaloneous Surveys      f   1992   NOS   1:20.000         (385) By choosing to transit along the track shown by the dashed
     b  1926   NOS   1:40.000     9   1926-27 NOS   1:10Do.00      line, the mariner would elect to take advantage of more recent sur-
         1926-28 NOS   1.80,000                                     vey information collected with more modern technology.
     0  1926-28 NOS   1:80.00o
     e  1926-27 NOS   1:40,000                                       (386) U.S. Nautical Chart Numbering System.- This chart
                                                                    numbering system, adopted by the National Ocean Service and the
                                                                    Defense Mapping Agency Hydrographic/Topographic Center,
                                                                    provides for a uniform method of identifying charts published by
                                                                    both agencies. Nautical charts published by the Defense Mapping
                    (                \ ,;    \                      Agency Hydrographic/Topographic Center are identified in the
                   !                \  i \|                        Coast Pilot by an asterisk preceding the chart number.
                                                           c 46-      (387)  Corrections to charts.-It is essential for navigators to
                                                                    keep charts corrected through information published in the notices
                                  1 /~ \, S    1to mariners, especially since the NOS no longer hand-corrects
                 /I                                                 charts prior to distribution.
                f/                            ,                      (388) Caution in using small-scale charts.-Dangers to naviga-
                I     /              l0'-                           tion cannot be shown with the same amount of detail on small-
                                                                     scale charts as on those of larger scale. Therefore, the largest scale
               /I        J         \       e  Cchart of an area should always be used.
                                                                      (389) The scales of nautical charts range from 1:2,500 to about
                      1 9  /          \        ~ t1:5,000;000. Graphic scales are generally shown on charts with
            /                           J                           scales of 1:80,000 or larger, and numerical scales are given on
                                                           /|/  20-  smaller scale charts. NOS charts are classified according to scale
            ]     !                    l       >                     as follows:
           /                                                          (390) Sailing charts, scales 1:600,000 and smaller, are for use
          I/   f  0                      X    1 Sin fixing the mariner's position as he approaches the coast from
                                                                     the open ocean, or for sailing between distant coastwise ports. On
                                                                     such charts the shoreline and topography are generalized and only
        //                                                '" /   [   1   45- offshore soundings, and the principal lights, outer buoys, and
       X        0                 /   /   ,5                        landmarks visible at considerable distances are shown.
                                                                       (391) General charts, scales 1:150,000 to 1:600,000, are for
                                                                     coastwise navigation outside of outlying reefs and shoals.
                                                                      (392)  Coast charts, scales 1:50,000 to 1:150,000 are for inshore
              S t5      4f,              0      ,       4. 40.       navigation leading to bays and harbors of considerable width and
                                                                     for navigating large inland waterways.




 18                                                1. GENERAL INFORMATION


  (393) Harbor charts, scales larger than 1:50,000, are for har-    Corps of Engineers and all other dumping by the Environmental
 bors, anchorage areas, and the smaller waterways.                   Protection Agency (EPA). (See Corps of Engineers and Environ-
  (394) Special charts, various scales, cover the Intracoastal    mental Protection Agency, this chapter, and appendix for office
 waterways and miscellaneous small-craft areas.                      addresses.)
  (395)  Blue tint in water areas.-A blue tint is shown in water      (405)  Dumping Grounds are also areas that were established by
 areas on many charts to accentuate shoals and other areas consid-    Federal regulation (33 CFR 205). However, these regulations
 ered dangerous for navigation when using that particular chart.    have been revoked and the use of the areas discontinued. These
 Since the danger curve varies with the intended purpose of a chart    areas will continue to be shown on nautical charts until such time
 a careful inspection should be made to determine the contour    as they are no longer considered to be a danger to navigation.
 depth of the blue tint areas.                                         (406)  Disposal Sites and Dumping Grounds are rarely men-
  (396)  Caution on bridge and cable clearances.- For bascule    tioned in the Coast Pilot, but are shown on nautical charts. Mari-
 bridges whose spans do not open to a full vertical position, unlim-    ners are advised to exercise extreme caution in and in the
 ited overhead clearance is not available for the entire charted hori-    vicinity of all dumping areas.
 zontal clearance when the bridge is open, due to the inclination of  (407) Spoil areas are for the purpose of depositing dredged
 the drawspans over the channel.                                     material, usually near and parallel to dredged channels; they are
  (397)  The charted clearances of overhead cables are for the low-    usually a hazard to navigation. Spoil areas are usually charted
 est wires at mean high water unless otherwise stated. Vessels with    from survey drawings from Corps of Engineers after-dredging sur-
 masts, stacks, booms, or antennas should allow sufficient    veys, though they may originate from private or other Government
clearance under power cables to avoid arcing.                       agency surveys. Spoil areas are tinted blue on the chart and
  (398)  Submarine cables and submerged pipelines cross many         labeled, and all soundings and depth curves are omitted. Naviga-
waterways used by both large and small vessels, but all of them    tors of even the smallest craft should avoid crossing spoil areas.
may not be charted. For inshore areas, they usually are buried        (408) Fish havens are established by private interests, usually
beneath the seabed, but, for offshore areas, they may lie on the    sport fishermen, to simulate natural reefs and wrecks that attract
ocean floor. Warning signs are often posted to warn mariners of    fish. The reefs are constructed by dumping assorted junk ranging
their existence.                                                    from old trolley cars and barges to scrap building material in areas
  (399)  The installation of submarine cables or pipelines in U.S.    which may be of very small extent or may stretch a considerable
waters or the Continental Shelf of the United States is under the    distance along a depth curve; old automobile bodies are a com-
jurisdiction of one or more Federal agencies, depending on the    monly used material. The Corps of Engineers must issue a permit,
nature of the installation. They are shown on the charts when the    specifying the location and depth over the reef, before such a reef
necessary information is reported to NOS and they have been rec-    may be built. However, the reefbuilders' adherence to permit
ommended for charting by the cognizant agency. The chart sym-    specifications can be checked only with a wire drag. Fish havens
bols for submarine cable and pipeline areas are usually shown for    areioAtlined and labeled on the charts and show the minimum
inshore areas, whereas, chart symbols for submarine cable and    authorized depth when known. Fish havens are tinted blue if they
pipeline routes may be shown for offshore areas. Submarine    have a minimum authorized depth of 11 fathoms or less or if the
cables and pipelines are not described in the Coast Pilot.          minimum authorized depth is unknown and they are in depths
  (400)  In view of-the serious consequences resulting from dam-    greater than 11 fathoms but still considered a danger to navigation.
age to submarine cables and pipelines, vessel operators should    Navigators should be cautious about passing over fish havens or
take special care when anchoring, fishing, or engaging in under-    anchoring in their vicinity.
water operations near areas where these cables or pipelines may      (409)  Fishtrap areas are areas established by the Corps of Engi-
exist or have been reported to exist. Mariners are also warned that    neers, or State or local authority, in which traps may be built and
the areas where cables and pipelines were originally buried may     maintained according to established regulations. The fish stakes
have changed and they may be exposed; extreme caution should    which may exist in these areas are obstructions to navigation and
be used when operating vessels in depths of water comparable to    may be dangerous. The limits of fishtrap areas and a cautionary
the vessel's draft.                                                 note are usually charted. Navigators should avoid these areas.
  (401) Certain cables carry high voltage, while many pipelines       (410) Local magnetic disturbances.-If measured values of
carry natural gas under high pressure or petroleum products. Elec-    magnetic variation differ from the expected (charted) values by
trocution, fire, or explosion with injury, loss of life, or a serious    several degrees, a magnetic disturbance note will be printed on the
pollution incident could occur if they are broached.                chart. The note will indicate the location and magnitude of the dis-
 (402)  Vessels fouling a submarine cable or pipeline should    turbance, but the indicated magnitude should not be considered as
attempt to clear without undue strain. Anchors or gear that cannot    the largest possible value that may be encountered. Large distur-
be cleared should be slipped, but no attempt should be made to cut    bances are more frequently detected in the shallow waters near
a cable or pipeline.                                                land masses than on the deep sea. Generally, the effect of a local
 (403) Artificial obstructions to navigation.-Disposal areas    magnetic disturbance diminishes rapidly with distance, but in
are designated by the Corps of Engineers for depositing dredged    some locations there are multiple sources of disturbances and the
material where existing depths indicate that the intent is not to    effects may be distributed for many miles.
cause sufficient shoaling to create a danger to surface navigation.  (411) Compass roses on charts.-Each compass rose shows the
The areas are charted without blue tint, and soundings and depth    date, magnetic variation, and the annual change in variation. Prior
curves are retained.                                                to the new edition of a nautical chart, the compass roses are
 (404)  Disposal Sites are areas established by Federal regulation    reviewed. Corrections for annual change and other revisions may
(40 CFR 220-229) in which dumping of dredged and fill material    be made as a result of newer and more accurate information. On
and other nonbuoyant objects is allowed with the issuance of a    some general and sailing charts, the magnetic variation is shown
permit. Dumping of dredged and fill material is supervised by the    by isogonic lines in addition to the compass roses.






                                                   1. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                        19


 (412) The Mercator projection used on most nautical charts    of the earth. Geographic range is a function of only the curvature
has straight-line meridians and parallels that intersect at right    of the earth and is determined solely from the heights above sea
angles. On any particular chart the distances between meridians     level of the light and the observer's eye; therefore, to determine
are equal throughout, but distances between parallels increase pro-    the actual Geographic range for a height of eye, the Geographic
gressively from the Equator toward the poles, so that a straight    range must be corrected by a distance corresponding to the height
line between any two points is a rhumb line. This unique property    difference, the distance correction being determined from a table
of the Mercator projection is one of the main reasons why it is pre-    of "distances of visibility for various heights above sea level."
ferred by the mariner.                                              (See Light List or Coast Pilot table following appendix.) The max-
 (413) Echo soundings.-Ships' echo sounders may indicate    imum distances at which lights can be seen may at times be
small variations from charted soundings; this may be due to the    increased by abnormal atmospheric refraction and may be greatly
fact that various corrections (instrument corrections, settlement    decreased by unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog, rain,
and squat, draft, and velocity corrections) are made to echo sound-    haze, or smoke. All except the most powerful lights are easily
ings in surveying which are not normally made in ordinary naviga-    obscured by such conditions. In some conditions of the atmo-
tion, or to observational errors in reading the echo sounder.    sphere white lights may have a reddish hue. During weather con-
Instrument errors vary between different equipment and must be    ditions which tend to reduce visibility, colored lights are more
determined by calibration aboard ship, Most types of echo sound-    quickly lost to sight than are white lights. Navigational lights
ers are factory calibrated for a velocity of sound in water of 800    should be used with caution because of the following conditions
fathoms per second, but the actual velocity may differ from the    that may exist:
calibrated velocity by as much as 5 percent, depending upon the      (418)  A light may be extinguished and the fact not reported to
temperature and salinity of the waters in which the vessel is oper-    the Coast Guard for correction, or a light may be located in an iso-
ating; the highest velocities are found in warm, highly saline    lated area where it will take time to correct.
water, and the lowest in icy, freshwater. Velocity corrections for   (419) In regions where ice conditions prevail the lantern panes
these variations are determined and applied to echo soundings dur-    of unattended lights may become covered with ice or snow, which
ing hydrographic surveys. All echo soundings must be corrected    will greatly reduce the visibility and may also cause colored lights
for the vessel's draft, unless the draft correction has been set on    to appear white.
the echo sounder.                                                     (420) Brilliant shore lights used for advertising and other pur-
 (414)  Observational errors include misinterpreting false echos    poses, particularly those in densely populated areas, make it diffi-
from schools of fish, seaweed, etc., but the most serious error    cult to identify a navigational light.
which commonly. occurs is where the depth is greater than the        (421)  At short distances flashing lights may show a faint contin-
scale range of the instrument; a 400-fathom scale indicates 15    uous light between flashes.
fathoms when the depth is 415 fathoms. Caution in navigation         (422) The distance of an observer from a light cannot be esti-
should be exercised when wide variations from charted depths are    mated by its apparent intensity. The characteristics of lights in an
observed.                                                           area should always be checked in order that powerful lights visible
                                                                     in the distance will not be mistaken for nearby lights showing sim-
AIDS TO NAVIGATION                                                  ilar characteristics at low intensity such as those on lighted buoys.
                                                                      (423)  The apparent characteristic of a complex light may change
 (415) Reporting of defects in aids to navigation.-Promptly         with the distance of the observer, due to color and intensity varia-
notify the nearest. Coast Guard District Commander if an aid to    tions among the different lights of the group. The characteristic as
navigation is observed to be missing, sunk, capsized, out of posi-    charted and shown in the Light List may not be recognized until
tion, damaged, extinguished, or showing improper characteristics.   nearer the light.
 (416) Radio messages should be prefixed "Coast Guard" and           (424) Motion of a-vessel in a heavy sea may cause a light to
transmitted directly to any U.S. Government shore radio station    alternately appear and disappear, and thus give a false characteris-
for relay to the Coast Guard District Commander. If the radio call   tic.
sign of the nearest U.S. Government radio shore station is not       (425) Where lights have different colored sectors, be guided by
known, radiotelegraph communication may be established by the    the correct bearing of the light; do not rely on being able to accu-
use of the general call "NCG" on the frequency of 500 kHz. Mer-    rately observe the point at which the color changes. On either side
chant ships may send messages relating to defects noted in aids to    of the line of demarcation of colored sectors there is always a
navigation through commercial facilities only when they are    small arc of uncertain color.
unable to contact a U.S. Government shore radio station. Charges      (426) On some bearings from the light, the range of visibility of
for these messages will be accepted "collect" by the Coast Guard.   the light may be reduced by obstructions. In such cases, the
  (417) . Lights.-The range of visibility of lights as given in the    obstructed arc might differ with height of eye and distance. When
Light Lists and as shown on the charts is the Nominal range,    a light is cut off by adjoining land and the arc of visibility is given,
which is the maximum distance at which a light may be seen in    the bearing on which the light disappears may vary with the dis-
clear weather (meteorological visibility of 10 nautical miles)    tance of the vessel from which observed and with the height of
expressed in nautical miles. The Light Lists give the Nominal    eye. When the light is cut off by a sloping hill or point of land, the
ranges for all Coast Guard lighted aids except range and direc-    light may be seen over a wider arc by a ship far off than by one
tional lights. Luminous range is the maximum distance at which    close to.
a light may be seen under the existing visibility conditions. By use  (427)  Arcs of circles drawn on charts around a light are not
of the diagram in the Light Lists, Luminous range may be deter-    intended to give information as to the distance at which it can be
mined from the known Nominal range, and the existing visibility    seen, but solely to indicate, in the case of lights which do not show
conditions. Both the Nominal and Luminous ranges do not take    equally in all directions, the bearings between which the variation
into account elevation, observer's height of eye, or the curvature    of visibility or obscuration of the light occurs.




 20                                                1. GENERAL INFORMATION


  (428) Lights of equal candlepower but of different colors may be   (439) Experience indicates that distances must not be judged
 seen at different distances. This fact should be considered not only    only by the intensity of the sound; that occasionally there may be
 in predicting the distance at which a light can be seen, but also in    areas close to a fog signal in which it is not heard; and that fog
 identifying it.                                                    may exist not far from a station, yet not be seen from it, so the sig-
  (429) Lights should not be passed close aboard, because in many    nal may not be operating. It is not always possible to start a fog
 cases riprap mounds are maintained to protect the structure against    signal immediately whenfog is observed.
 ice damage and scouring action.                                     (440) Avoidance of collision with offshore light stations and
  (430) Many prominent towers, tanks, smokestacks, buildings,    large navigational buoys (LNB).-Courses should invariably be
 and other similar structures, charted as landmarks, display flashing    set to pass these aids with sufficient clearance to avoid the possi-
 and/or fixed red aircraft obstruction lights. Lights shown from    bility of collision from any cause. Errors of observation, current
 landmarks are charted only when they have distinctive characteris-    and wind effects, other vessels in the vicinity, and defects in steer-
 tics to enable the mariner to positively identify the location of the    ing gear may be and have been the cause of actual collisions, or
 charted structure.                                                 imminent danger thereof, needlessly jeopardizing the safety of
  (43))  Articulated lights.-An articulated light is a vertical pipe    these facilities and their crews, and of all navigation dependent on
 structure supported by a submerged buoyancy chamber and    these important aids to navigation.
 attached by a universal coupling to a weighted sinker on the seaf-  (44)  Experience shows that offshore light stations cannot be
 loor. The light, allowed to move about by the universal coupling,    safely used as leading marks to be passed close aboard, but should
is not as precise as a fixed aid. However, it has a much smaller    always be left broad off the course, whenever sea room permits.
watch circle than a conventional buoy, because the buoyancy        When approaching fixed offshore light structures and large navi-
chamber tends to force the pipe back to a vertical position when it   gational buoys (LNB) on radio bearings, the risk of collision will
heels over under the effects of wind, wave, or current.            be avoided by ensuring that radio bearing does not remain con-
  (432) Articulated daybeacons.-Same description as for articu-    stant.
                                                                        .(442) It should be borne in mind that most large buoys are
lated lights (see above) except substitute daybeacon for light.     (442)  It hould be borne in mind that most large buoys are
                   (433) Bridge lights and clearance gages.-The Coast Guard    anchored to a very long scope of chain and, as a result, the radius
 regulates marine obstruction lights and clearance gages    on bridges    of their swinging circle is considerable. The charted position is the
regulates mare         ins tand clearance gages a redges    location of the anchor. Furthermore under certain conditions of
                                                                       location of the anchor. Furthermore under certain conditions of
across navigable waters. Where installed, clearance gages are gen-
                                                                       wind and current, they are subject to sudden and unexpected
erally vertical numerical scales, reading from top to bottom, and   i   a   cret   h    r sbc   o ud    n   nxptd
erally vertical numerical scales, reading from top to bottom, and    sheers which are certain to hazard a vessel attempting to pass close
show the actual vertical clearance between the existing water level    aboard.
                                                                       aboard.
and the lowest point of the bridge over the channel; the gages are
                                                                        (443) Buoys.-The aids to navigation depicted on charts corn-
normally on the right-hand pier or abutment of the bridge, on both    prise a sys    tem consisting of fixed and floating aids with varying
                  the upstream and downstream sides. prise a system consisting of fixed and floating aids with varying
the upstream and downstream sides.
                   ge lstsream fid redoren,         rea pives       degrees of reliability. Therefore, prudent mariners will not rely
 ma(434) Bridge lightsthey are fixgenerally not chartd red or describen, and arin the privatelyxt solely on any single aid to navigation, particularly a floating aid.
maintained; they are generally not charted or described in the text 4)Teapoiteosinofabyisrrsnedyth
                                                                        (444) The approximate position of a buoy is represented by the
of the Coast Pilot. All bridge piers (and their protective fenders)    dot or circle associated with the   buoy symbol. The appr oximate
and abutments which are in or adjacent to a navigation channel are    dto  iceascae   ihtebo   ybl   h   prxmt
and abutments which are in or adjacent to a navigation channel are    position is used because of practical limitations in positioning and
marked on all channel sides by red lights. On each channel span of    maintaining buoys and their sinkers in precise geographical l oca-
a fixed bridge, there is a range of two green lights marking the     ti ons. T    hese limitations include, but are not  lmted to, inherent
                                                                      tions. These limitations include, bul are not limited to, inherent
center of the channel and a red light marking both edges of the    imprecisions in position fixing methods, prevailing atmospheric
channel, except that when the margins of the channel are confined    and sea cond itions, the slope of and the material making up the
by bridge piers, the red lights on the span are omitted, since the   seabed, the fact that buoys   ate moored to sinkers by varying
pier lights then mark the channel edges; for multiplespan fixed    lengths of chain, and the fact that buoy     body and/or sinker posi-
bridges, the main-channel span may also be marked by three white    tions  are not under continuous surveillance, but are normally
lights in a vertical line above the green range lights.             in  r  o    de    ntuu svilac  b    r  omly
                  lights in a vertical line above the green range lights  checked only during the periodic maintenance visits which often
 (435) On all types of drawbridges, one or .more red lights are
                   (435)  On all types of drawbridges, one or more red lights are    occur more than a year apart. The position of the buoy body can be
shown from the drawspan (higher than the pier lights) when the
                 shown from the drawspan (higher than the pier lights) when the    expected to shift inside and outside of the charting symbol due to
span is closed; when the span is open, the higher red lights are    the forces of nature. The mariner is also cautioned that buoys are
obscured and one or two green lights are shown from the draw-    liable to be carried away, shifted, capsized, sunk, etc. Lighted
span, higher than the pier lights. The number and location of the    buoys may be extinguished or sound signals may not function as a
                                                                      buoys may be extinguished or sound signals may not function as a
red and green lights depend upon the type of drawbridge.           result of ice, running ice or other natural causes, collisions, or
 (436) Bridges and their lighting, construction, maintenance, and    other accidents.
operation are set forth in 33 CFR 114-118 (not carried in this      (445) For the foregoing reasons, a prudent mariner must not rely
Coast Pilot). Aircraft obstruction lights, prescribed by the Federal    completely upon the charted position or operation of floating aids
Aviation Administration, may operate at certain bridges. Draw-    to navigation, but will also utilize bearings from fixed objects and
bridge operation regulations are published in chapter 2 of the    aids to navigation on shore. Further, a vessel attempting to pass
Coast Pilot.                                                       close aboard always risks collision with a yawing buoy or with the
 (437) Fog signals.-Caution should be exercised in the use of    obstruction the buoys marks.
sound fog signals for navigation purposes. They should be consid-   (446) Buoys may not always properly mark shoals or other
ered solely as warning devices.                                    obstructions due to shifting of the shoals or of the buoys. Buoys
 (438) Sound travels through the air in a variable manner, even    marking wrecks or other obstructions are usually placed on the
without the effects of wind, therefore, the hearing of fog signals    seaward or channelward side and not directly over a wreck. Since
cannot be implicitly relied upon.                                  buoys may be located some distance from a wreck they are




                                                    I. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                           21


intended to mark, and since sunken wrecks are not always static,       (4571 The table is entered with the differences of longitude in
extreme caution should be exercised when operating in the vicinty    degrees between the ship and station (the nearest tabulated value
of such buoys.                                                        being used), and opposite the middle latitude between the ship and
 (447)  Caution, channel markers.-Lights, daybeacons, and             station, the correction to be applied is read.
buoys along dredged channels do not always mark the bottom              (458)  The sign of the correction (bearings read clockwise from
edges. Due to local conditions, aids may be located inside or out-    N) will be as follows: In north latitude, the minus sign is used
side the channel limits shown by dashed lines on a chart. The         when the ship is E of the radiobeacon and the plus sign used when
Light List tabulates the offset distances for these aids in many      the ship is W of the radiobeacon. In south latitude, the plus sign is
instances.                                                            used when the ship is E of the radiobeacon, and the minus sign is
 (448)  Aids may be moved, discontinued, or replaced by other    used when the ship is W of the radiobeacon.
types to facilitate dredging operations. Mariners should exercise       (459)  To facilitate plotting, 180 degrees should be added to or
caution when navigating areas where dredges with auxiliary    subtracted from the corrected bearing, and the result plotted from
equipment are working.                                                the radiobeacon.
 (449) Temporary changes in aids are not included on the charts,
                                                 (4)   e   hnge  n s and o      (460)  Should the position by dead reckoning differ greatly from
 (450)  Radiobeacons.-A map showing the locations and operat-
                                                                     the true position of the ship as determined by plotting the cor-
ing details of marine radiobeacons is given in each Light List. This  the tru     e position of the ship as  de termi ned by plotting the or-
                                                                     rected bearings, retrial should be made, using the new value as the
publication describes the procedure to follow in using radiobea-       osition of the ship.
cons to calibrate radio direction finders as well as listing special
radio direction-finder calibration stations.                            (461)  Radio bearings from other vessels.-Any vessel with a
 (451) A vessel steering a course for a radiobeacon should    radio direction-finder can take a bearing on a vessel equipped with
observe the same precautions as when steering for a light or any      a radio transmitter. These bearings, however, should be used only
other mark. If the radiobeacon is aboard a lightship, particular care    as a check, as comparatively large errors may be introduced by
should be exercised to avoid the possibility of collision, and sole    local conditions surrounding the radio direction-finder unless
reliance should never be placed on sighting the lightship or hear-    known and accounted for. Although any radio station, for which
ing its fog signal. If there are no dependable means by which the    an accurate position is defintely known, may serve as a radiobea-
vessel's position may be fixed and the course changed well before    con for vessels equipped with a radio direction-finder, extreme
reaching the lightship, a course should be selected that will ensure    caution must be exercised in their use. Stations established espe-
passing the lightship at a distance, rather than close aboard, and    cially for maritime services are more reliable.
repeated bearings of the radiobeacon should show an increasing          (462)  SATELLITE POSITION INDICATING RADIO BEA-
change in the same direction.                                         CON (EPIRB).-Emergency position indicating radiobeacons
 (452)  Radio bearings.-No exact data can be given as to the  I (EPIRBs), devices which cost from $200 to over $2000, are
accuracy to be expected in radio bearings taken by a ship, since    designed to save your life if you get into trouble by alerting rescue
the accuracy depends to a large extent upon the skill of the ship's    authorities and indicating your location. EPIRB types are
operator, the condition of the ship's equipment, and the accuracy    described in the accompanying table.
of the ship's calibration curve. Mariners are urged to obtain this
information for themselves by taking frequent radio bearings,
when their ship's position is accurately known, and recording the
results.                                                                                      EPIRB Types
 (453) Radio bearings obtained at twilight or at night, and bear-
ings which are almost parallel to the coast, should be accepted         Type                 Frequency             Description
with reservations, due to "night effect" and to the distortion of       Class A               121.5/243 MHz        Float-free,
radio waves which travel overland. Bearings of aircraft ranges and                                                 automatically-
standard broadcast stations should be used with particular caution                                                 activating, detectable
due to coastal refraction and lack of calibration of their frequen-                                                by aircraft and
                                                                                                                  satellite. Coverage
cles.                                                                                                              limited (see Chart).
  (454)  Conversion of radio bearings to Mercator bearings.-            Class B               121.5/243 MHz         Manually activated
Radio directional bearings are the bearings of the great circles                                                   version of Class A.
passing through the radio stations and the ship, and, unless in the     Class C              VHF ch 15/16          Manually activated,
plane of the Equator or a meridian, would be reprates on maritime
                                                                                                                  channels only. Not
Mercator chart as curved lines. Obviously it is impracticable for a                                                d etectable by satellite.
navigator to plot such lines on a Mercator chart, so it is necessary                                               Not authorized after 2/
to apply a correction to a radio bearing to convert it into a Merca-                                                1/99.
tor bearing, that is, the bearing of a straight line on a Mercator      Class S               121.5/243 MHz        Similar to Class B,
chart laid off from the sending station and passing through the                                                    except it floats, or is an
rece iv      on.                                            integralpart ofa
                            ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~receiving~~~~~station.~~~~~~ ~   .survival craft.
  (455)  A table of corrections for the conversion of a radio bearing   Cat I                 406/121.5 MHz         Float-free,
into a Mercator bearing follows the appendix. It is sufficiently                                                   automatically activated
accurate for practical purposes for distances up to 1,000 miles.                                                   EPIRB. Detectable by
  (456)  The only data required are the latitudes and longitudes of                                                 satellite anywhere in
                                                                                                                  the world.
the radiobeacons and of the ship by dead reckoning. The latter is       Cat 11               406/121.5 MHz         Similar to Category 1,
scaled from the chart, and the former is either scaled from the                                                    except is manually
chart or taken from the Light List.                                                                                activated.









Igo 120 so 0 so 120 Igo

                                                                                                             Notes
      *iow  0-2 e
                                                           10  70
                                                                                                      LUTS
                                                            .. . .......... Z..
                                                                                                      I Archangelsk
                     4
                     rise k-e
                                                                                                      2 Churchill
75 75
                                                                                                      3 Edmonton
                                                                                  ......... 4 Goose Bay
                                                                                                      5 Kodiak
                                                                                                      6 Lasharn
                      .2
                                                                                                      7 Moscow
so 60 8 Novosibirsk

                                                                                                      9 Ottawa
                            9et                                                                                                                                                                                                         iL                                       10 Pt. Reyes
                                                                                                     I 1 Scott AFB
                                                 -W,
                                                                                                     12 Toulouse
                                                                                                     13 Tromso
30 30
                                                               ... .. . . .....
                                                                  . . ......
                                                               ...... . ...... ..
                                                               ..... .....
                                                                                      OA
                                                               ....... .. ... 01 14 Vladivostok
                                          ... ........ ... .
                                                               ........ 11 ...
                                                               ........ .....
                                           %"Woo ....... I.. ..
                     .. . . .......
  ........ ......... ... .                % _A
                                 ... .. .. . . ..
                                    ................
                                                             ..... ...
                                                            . ..... .. . . .
                                                                                      .. .... ... .
                                   .. ....... ......
                                   ............
  ......... ... ....
          ..... . ..
                         I ......... ..
                                  ..........
         .......... . . . ...
      ......... . ...... .
                                .............
                                  ...........
  . ..    . ......... ......... ... .. ....... .
  .... ...... .........
  ...... .................. ......... . ... ..... . .
  ......... ....... . ... ....... . ......
      ........ ..
    .. ......... . ...... ......
                                    ......... SARSAT satellite
                                                                            4 M;4m 1.
                      . ....... .......
      .......... ... . .
                                                                                              0
                     ...... ..... .........

     .......... ......
                                    .......... ......... .
0 ......
              ....... ..... . . ...
              .. .... ...... .. ......
              ....... .......
            .. .. ..... ...... A
              ... 11 I ...... hilude                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              850 km
             ..........
             .......... ..
         .... . .........
          .... .... .......
                                         ....... ......... Elevation Angle 5 d
            ... ........ ..... ... . .... .
         .......... ...... eg
                                                                 .... ... ....... .........
                                                                ...... ..........
                .. . ..... .
30 . ......
                                                                               '!i               'fs
                                                                   .... ..... ...
                 ..... Responsibilities                                 Haiti                                                                                                                                                                                                   30
                                                    ........... ..... . ......... ......... .
                                            ... .... ........
                                          .. .. ... ......
      ....... ..... ........... . ......... . ...
             ........... ........ ... ..... .......... .. ..... ......... .. ..
                                                                       ......... ......
                                                                 ': ..... . ......... ..... ..
                                                          .. ..... ......... .........
                                                                     . ......... . .......
  ......... . . .. ...... ....... . .........
       ...... ........
                                                               ... .. ..
       ..... ....... . ......
     ....... . . ........ .........
     .. ..... .. ........
                              . . ......... ........ ......... .........
        .. .......... .-
           ...... . ... ....... .........
                                                   . ....... ... . ........ ........ ........
         .......... ......... ......... .... . ....... .
                                            ... .......
                                                 X".
      ... . ....... ......... ....... ...... .
          ......... ....... ........
  ......... ........ ......... ........ 11 .... I ... .. .... I
                                                       ......... .....I.. ......... ....
                             . ..... ......... ......
                                                        ...... ....... . ....... ........ .. ....
                                 ..... ..... ........ ......... .... 1 1 ... ....
  .......... ...... ... . ........ .. 1.1-'."'.'-.1-'.1'1:'.-'1. ... . ......... .. ..... ......... ..... ..
                                                                  ..............................
                                                       ..........
                                                       ......... :. .
                                                                      .........
  ..........
                                                                   ... ... ......... ..... .
                                                           ...... . . . ......... .........
                                    M.
  ..........
  . ...... :i.,                                                      "   -,  -   - ...... . .........
          ....... . . ... ......
  .. ...... ....... . ..... . ...... .........
                                                       .........
                                                                    ...... ........
                                                       .......... ... .........
  ......... ........
      ........ . ......... r                                                                                                                                                                               ""' ".. :: .......
     .......... ....... . .. .... . ... ........
      ....... ....... .. .......- . .........
60
                                  . . ...........
                                                                                              so
                            ........... ... .... . .... ... ......... . ......
                                                       .......... . . .... ... . .... ......
                         .......... .... ......... . . . ......
                                                .... ... ....
                     ......... .......
                                           .. . ........ ... .
                     .......... .......... .
                                       X. . ........ ..........
                                                       ....... . . .
                                                     .... ........ ..........
                                                .... ........
                                                  .. ......... ...... . ....... .
7 .. . ......... ..... .. .. .......
                                                  .. ....... . .. ........ ......... ........ X.
                                              . .......... .. .... 75
  .. . ...... . ..... . ... ........ . . ..... .... ... .. ...
IGO 120 so 60 120 1W



        1988 Satellite Visibility Area of SARSAT LUTs

             (represents approximate System coverage at 121.5 MHz,,
                  at 406 MHz, the System covers the entire globe)





                                                  1. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                         23


 (463)  121.5/243 MHz EPIRBs.-These are the most common             SARSAT has contributed to the saving of 1240 lives (as of June 6,
and least expensive type of EPIRB, designed to be detected by        1989), 554 of these mariners. The Coast Guard operates two local
overflying commercial or military aircraft. Satellites were          user terminals, satellite earth stations designed to received EPIRB
designed to detect these EPIRBs, but are limited for the following    distress calls forwarded from COSPAS-SARSAT satellites,
reasons:                                                             located in Kodiak, Alaska and Point Reyes, California. The Air
 (464) (i) Satellite detection range is limited for these EPIRBs    Force operates a third terminal at Scott Air Force Base, Illinois.
(satellites must be within line of sight of both the EPIRB and a      (478) Testing EPIRBs.-The Coast Guard urges those owning
ground terminal for detection to occur)(see Chart),                  EPIRBs to periodically examine them for water tightness, battery
 (465)  (ii) EPIRB design and frequency congestion cause these    expiration date and signal presence. FCC rules allow Class A, B,
devices to be subject to a high false alert/false alarm rate (over    and S EPIRBs to be turned on briefly (for three audio sweeps, or
99%); consequently, confirmation is required before search and    one second only) during the first five minutes of each hour. Signal
rescue forces can be deployed.                                       presence can be detected by an FM radio tuned to 99.5 MHz, or an
 (466)  (iii) EPIRBs manufactured before October 1989 may           AM radio tuned to any vacant frequency and located close to an
have design or construction problems (e.g. some models will leak    EPIRB. FCC rules allow Class C EPIRBs to be tested within the
and cease operating when immersed in water), or may not be    first five minutes of every hour, for not more than five seconds.
detectable by satellite.                                             Class C EPIRBs can be detected by a marine radio tuned to chan-
 (467)  Class C EPIRBs. These are manually activated devices    nel 15 or 16. 406 MHz EPIRBs can be tested through its self-test
intended for pleasure craft who do not venture far offshore and for    function, which is an integral part of the device.
vessels on the Great Lakes. They transmit a short burst on VHF-       (479) Radar beacons (Racons) are low-powered radio trans-
FM channel 16 and a longer homing signal on channel 15. Their    ceivers that operate in the marine radar X-band frequencies. When
usefulness depends upon a coast station or another vessel guarding    activated by a vessel's radar signal, Racons provide a distinctive
channel 16 and recognizing the brief, recurring tone as an EPIRB.    visible display on the vessel's radarscope from which the range
Class C EPIRBs are not recognized outside of the United States.      and bearing to the beacon may be determined. (See Light List and
 (468)  New class C EPIRB stations will not be authorized after    DMAHTC Pub. 117 for details.)
February 1, 1995. Class C EPIRB stations installed on board ves-      (480)  LORAN-C.-LORAN, an acronym for LOng RAnge Nav-
sels before February 1, 1995, may be used until February 1, 1999,    igation, is an electronic aid to navigation consisting of shore-based
and not thereafter.                                                  radio transmitters. The LORAN system enables users equipped
 (469) 406'MHz EPIRBs.-The 406 MHz EPIRB was designed    with a LORAN receiver to determine their position quickly and
to operate with satellites. Its signal allows a satellite local user ter-    accurately, day or night, in practically any weather.
minal to accurately locate the EPIRB (much more accurately than       (481)  A LORAN-C chain consists of three to five transmitting
121.5/243 MHz devices), and identify the vessel (the signal is    stations separated by several hundred miles. Within a chain, one
encoded with the vessel's identity) anywhere in the world (there is    station is designated as master while the other stations are desig-
no range limitation). These devices also include a 121.5 MHz         nated as secondaries. Each secondary station is identified as either
homing signal, allowing aircraft and rescue craft to quickly find    whiskey, x-ray, yankee, or zulu.
the vessel in distress. These are the only type of EPIRB which        (482)  The master station is always the first station to transmit. It
must be certified by Coast Guard approved independent laborato-    transmits a series of nine pulses. The secondary stations then fol-
ries before they can be sold in the United States.                   low in turn, transmitting eight pulses each, at precisely timed
 (470)  All 406 Mhz EPIRBs must be registered with NOAA.  If    intervals. This cycle repeats itself endlessly. The length of the
you change your boat, your address or your phone number, you    cycle is measured in microseconds and is called a Group Repeti-
must re-register your EPIRB registration forms from, and mail or    tion Interval (GRI).
fax completed forms to:                                               (483) LORAN-C chains are designated by the four most signifi-
  (471) NOAAINESDIS                                                  cant digits of their GRI. For example, a chain with a GRI of
  (472) SARSAT Operations Division, E/SP3                            89,700 microseconds is referred to as 8970. A different GRI is
  (473)  Federal Office Building 4                                   used for each chain because all LORAN-C stations broadcast in
  (474) Washington, DC 20233                                         the same 90 to 110 kilohertz frequency band and would otherwise
  (475) For additional information on registering these EPIRBs,      interfere with one another.
call (301)763-4680 or fax (301)568-8649.                              (484) The LORAN-C system can be used in either a hyperbolic
  (476)  An automatically activated, float-free version of this    or range mode. In the widely used hyperbolic mode, a LORAN-C
EPIRB will be required on Safety of Life at Sea Convention ves-    line of position is determined by measuring the time difference
sels (passenger ships and ships over 300 tons, on international    between sychronized pulses received from two separate transmit-
voyages) of any nationality by I August 1993. The Coast Guard    ting stations. In the range mode, a line of position is determined
requires U.S. commercial fishing vessels carry this device (by    by measuring the time required by LORAN-C pulses to travel
May 1990, unless they carry a Class A EPIRB), and will require    from a transmitting station to the user's receiver.
the same for other U.S. commercial uninspected vessels which          (485) A user's position is determined by locating the crossing
travel more than 3 miles offshore.                                   point of two lines of position on a LORAN-C chart. Many receiv-
  (477) The COSPAS-SARSAT system.-COSPAS: Space Sys-    ers have built-in coordinate converters which will automatically
tern for Search of Distress Vessels (a Russian acronym); SARSAT:     display the receiver's latitude and longitude. With a coordinate
Search and Rescue Satellite-Aided Tracking. COSPAS-SARSAT            converter, a position can be determined using a chart that is not
is an international satellite-based search and rescue system estab-    overprinted with LORAN-C lines of position.
lished by the U.S., Russia, Canada and France to locate emer-         (486)  CAUTION: The latitude/longitude computation on
gency radio beacons transmitting on the frequencies 121.5, 243    some models is based upon an all seawater propagation path.
and 406 MHz. Since its inception only a few years ago, COSPAS-       This may lead to error if the LORAN-C signals from the vari-




24                                                  1. GENERAL INFORMATION


ous stations involve appreciable overland propagation paths.    Force system is the NAVSTAR Global Positioning System (GPS).
These'errors may put the mariner at risk in areas requiring    NAVSAT became operational in 1964 and has been available for
precise positioning if the proper correctors (ASF) are not    commercial use since 1967. GPS development began in 1973 and
applied. Therefore, it is recommended that mariners using    has reached initial operational capability.
Coordinate Converters check the manufacturer's operating               (497)  NAVSAT Navigation System.-The current NAVSAT
manual to determine if and how corrections are to be applied    constellation contains ten satellites, each designated either
to compensate for the discontinuity caused by the overland    OSCAR or NOVA, in near-circular, non-geostationary, polar
paths.                                                               orbits at an altitude of 600 miles. Seven satellites are operational
  (487) There are two types of LORAN-C accuracy: absolute and    and three satellites are stored in orbit. The system operates with a
repeatable. Absolute accuracy is a measure of the navigator's        minimum of four satellites in operation, with additional satellites
ability to determine latitude and longitude position from the    providing system redundancy and more frequent fix availability.
LORAN-C time differences measured. Repeatable accuracy is a    Because the orbits converge over the poles, fix frequency
measure of the LORAN-C navigator's ability to return to a posi-    increases with latitude. Fix frequency varies from an average of
tion where readings have been taken before.                          110 minutes at the equator to an average of 30 minutes at 80ï¿½.
 (488) The absolute accuracy of LORAN-C is 0.25 nautical    Presently, due to non-uniform orbital precession, the NAVSAT
miles, 95% confidence within the published coverage area using    satellites are no longer in evenly spaced orbits. Consequently, a
standard LORAN-C charts and tables. Repeatable accuracy              user can occasionally expect a period greater than 6 hours between
depends on many factors, so measurements must be taken to deter-    fixes. This condition exists for less than 5 percent of system avail-
mine the repeatable accuracy in any given area. Coast Guard sur-    ability. Each satellite sends satellite time and orbital parameter
veys have found repeatable accuracies between 30 and 170 meters    data in 2 minute phase-modulated broadcasts on 150 MHz and 400
in most ground wave coverage areas. LORAN-C position deter-    MHz frequencies.
mination on or near the baseline extensions are subject to signifi-   (498) A NAVSAT receiver measures frequency shifts (Doppler
cant errors and, therefore, should be avoided whenever possible.    effect) in the broadcast frequencies as a satellite moves along its
The use of skywaves is not recommended within 250 miles of a    orbit. The receiver compares this information to orbital position
station being used, and corrections for these areas are not usually    data received from the satellite, computing satellite-to-receiver
tabulated.                                                           range applied to receiver position estimates. The use of two fre-
 (489) If the timing or pulse shape of a master-secondary pair    quencies enables correction of ionospheric refraction errors. NAV-
deviates from specified tolerances, the first two pulses of the sec-    SAT fixed tracking stations in Hawaii, California, Minnesota, and
ondary station's pulse train will blink on and off. The LORAN-C      Maine relay broadcast information from the satellites to a comput-
receiver sees this blinking signal and indicates a warning to the    ing center. This center recomputes satellite position data, which is
user. This warning will continue until the signals are once again in    transmitted to each satellite via injection stations (in the same
tolerance. A blinking signal is not exhibited during off-air peri-    locations as the tracking stations). These orbital data injections
ods, so a separate receiver alarm indicates any loss of signal.    are updated every 12 hours. Fix information may be accurate to
Never use a blinking secondary signal for navigation.                (plus or minus) 50 meters.
 (490)  In coastal waters, LORAN-C should not be relied upon as       (499)  Termination of NAVSAT. The Navy will terminate oper-
the only aid to navigation. A prudent navigator will use radar,    ation of the system by the end of 1996.
radio direction finder, fathometer and any other aid to navigation,    (500)  GPS Navigation System.-GPS is a space-based position-
in addition to the LORAN-C receiver.                                 ing, velocity, and time system that has three major segments:
 (491)  LORAN-C Interference                                         space, control, and user. The Space Segment is composed of 24
 (492)  Interference to LORAN-C may result from radio transmis-    satellites in six orbital planes. The satellites operate in circular
sions by public or private sources operating near the LORAN-C        20,200 km (10,900 nm) orbits at an inclination angle, relative to
band of 90-110 kHz.                                                  the equator, of 55ï¿½ and with a 12-hour period. The system nor-
 (493)  LORAN-C Charts and Publications                             mally operates with twenty-one satellites in service, the remaining
 (494)  Navigational charts overprinted with LORAN-C lines of    three serving as active spares. At any given time, a minimum of
position are available from National Ocean Service, Distribution    four satellites are observable from any position on earth, providing
Division (N/ACC3). (See Appendix for Address.)                       instantaneous position information. Each satellite transmits on two
 (495)  A general source of LORAN-C information is the    L band frequencies:  1575.42 MHz (LI) and 1227.6 MHz (L2).
LORAN-C User Handbook written by the U.S. Coast Guard. This    L1 carries a precise (P) code and a course/acquisition (C/A) code.
publication can be purchased from the Government Printing    L2 carries the P code. A navigation data message is superimposed
Office, Washington, DC (see appendix for address).                  jon the codes. The same navigation data message is carried on
 (496)  Satellite Navigation.-Satellite navigation presently con-    both frequencies. This message contains satellite ephemeris data,
sists of two global systems. Each may be considered a refinement    atmospheric propagation correction data, and satellite clock bias.
of celestial navigation, using artificial earth-orbiting satellites to  (501o  The Control Segment consists of five monitor stations,
form an electronic "constellation", serviced by land-based control    three of which have uplink capabilities, located in Colorado,
and tracking stations, and passively "sighted" by mobile receivers.    Hawaii, Kwajalein, Diego Garcia, and Ascension Island. The
These systems take advantage of three areas of technical advance-    monitor stations use a GPS receiver to passively track all satellites
ment: wide coverage demonstrated by the use of satellites for    in view, accumulating ranging data from the satellites' signals.
communications; precise control and measurement of time by    The information from the monitor stations is processed at the Mas-
means of stable oscillator frequencies; and rapidly developing       ter Control Station (MCS), located in Colorado Springs, CO, to
computer design and application. These systems have been devel-    determine satellite orbits and to update the navigation message of
oped by the U.S. Navy and the U.S. Air Force. The Navy system    each satellite. The updated information is transmitted to the satel-
is the Navy Navigation Satellite System (NAVSAT).  The Air    lites via ground antennas. The ground antennas, located at Kwa-




                                                   1. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                          25


jelein, Diego Garcia, and Ascension Island, are also used for         (514)  Omega differs from LORAN by using very low radio fre-
transmitting and receiving satellite control information.            quencies and phase-difference measurement techniques for navi-
 (502) The User Segment consists of antennas and receiver-pro-    gation instead of the LORAN time difference measurement
cessors that provide positioning, velocity, and precise timing to the    techniques.
user. The GPS receiver makes time-of-arrival measurements of          (515)  Operation.-The system design calls for eight stations,
the satellite signals to obtain the distance between the user and the    designated A through H, transmitting on a time-shared basis at the
satellites. The distance calculations, known as pseudoranges,        frequencies of 10.2 kHz, 11.33 kHz, and 13.6 kHz.
together with range rate information, are converted to yield system    (516) There is no master-slave relationship between stations.
time and the user's three:dimensional position and velocity with    All stations are equal and each is, in a sense, a slave to the defini-
respect to the satellite system. A time coordination factor then    tion of time. Since the transmitted signals from each of the trans-
relates the satellite system to earth coordinates. A minimum of    mitting stations are in absolute phase, measurements may be taken
four pseudoranges are needed to produce a three-dimensional fix    in pairs (for example: station A minus station B yields pair AB) to
(latitude, longitude, and altitude). GPS receivers compute fix    give a hyperbolic position line. Measurements may also be taken
information in terms of the World Geodetic System (1984),    with respect to a precision source of phase (high quality oscillator,
which may need datum shift correction before it can be accurately    (R); therefore, R minus station A yields range A) in the receiver to
plotted on a chart. There are three different types of receivers.    give circular or range position lines.
Sequential receivers track only one satellite at a time, computing     (517) The intersection of two or more LOP's gives the receiver's
a fix after a series of pseudoranges have been sequentially mea-    position.
sured; these receivers are inexpensive but slow. Continuous           (518) Because of the cyclic nature of phase differences, the same
receivers have at least four channels to process information from    phase difference can be observed in multiple lanes. This is known
several satellites simultaneously; these process fix information the    as lane ambiguity. Lane ambiguity can be resolved by setting the
fastest. Multiplex receivers switch at a fast rate from satellite to    receiver's lane counter at a known or estimated location.
satellite, receiving and processing data from several satellites      (519) Because of the long distances that the Omega signal trav-
simultaneously, producing a fix by a sort of "round-robin" process.    els, the variable effects of propagation of the signals through the
 (503) GPS provides two services for position determination,        atmosphere are very important. Most modem receivers automati-
Standard Positioning Service (SPS) and Precise Positioning    cally compensate for these effects using models for propagation
Service (PPS). Accuracy of a GPS fix varies with the capability    corrections (PPC's).
of the user equipment. SPS is the standard level of positioning        (520) Accuracy improvement by as much as a factor of ten may
and timing accuracy that is available, without restrictions, to any    be obtained with a technique called Differential Omega.  This
user on a continuous worldwide basis. SPS provides positions    technique removes the propagation variation and prediction errors,
with a horizontal accuracy of approximately 100 meters. PPS,         which are the principal causes of positional inaccuracy in Omega.
limited to authorized users, provides horizontal accuracy of 30    These errors are removed by using the knowledge that Omega sig-
meters or less.                                                      nals have spatial coherence over relatively large areas such as 100
 (504) Differential GPS (DGPS)                                      to 300 miles.
 (505) The U.S. Coast Guard plans to provide a Differential GPS       (521)  Stations and Reeivers.-Omega is operated as an inter-
(DGPS) service for public use in all U.S. harbors and approach    national partnership between the United States, Argentina, Austra-
areas by 1996, including the Great Lakes, Puerto Rico, most of    lia, Liberia, France, Japan, and Norway. The U.S. Coast Guard,
Alaska, and Hawaii. The system will provide radionavigational        through the Omega Navigation System Center in Alexandria, VA,
accuracy of 10 meters or less. DGPS reference stations will deter-    has operational control of the system. Modern transmission of
mine range errors and generate corrections for all GPS satellites in    Omega signals is controlled by Omega signal format generators
view. The DGPS signals will be broadcast using existing Coast    and cesium atomic frequency standards at each station. Each sta-
Guard radiobeacons. Monitor stations will independently verify    tion is synchronized within 2 microseconds of the mean reference
the quality of the DGPS broadcast. Until the system is declared    time of all eight stations. In addition, Omega system time is
operational by the Coast Guard, mariners are cautioned that signal    within 5 microseconds of Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
availability and accuracy are subject to change due to the avail-     (522)  Modem receivers are equipped with coordinate converters
ability of GPS, testing of this developing service, and the unreli-    to display latitude and longitude, and do not require use of refer-
ability of prototype equipment. For further information and/or    ence publications. Early receivers required Omega Propagation
operational questions regarding GPS or DGPS, contact:                Correction (PPC) tables (OMPUB224100CA - 224318CF).
 (5s06  Commanding Officer                                            (523) Omega receivers compute positions using the phase mea-
 (507) U.S. Coast Guard Navigation Center                           surements in one to two modes: direct ranging or hyperbolic. In
   (508) ?323 Telegrast G u ad                 NavigationCenboth modes the receiver must be initialized to a known position.
  (509j  7323 Telegraph Road 22310-3Modern receivers contain a microprocessor-based PPC model to
 (509o  Alexandria, VA 22310-3998
                  (509)  Aelephandi   V3 223130-53900               correct the nominal phase computations for diurnal and seasonal
 (510s) - Telephone: (703) 313-5900                                 variations
 511)  FAX: (703)313-5920                                             (524) Omega receivers maybe designed to use one or all of the
 (512) Electronic Bulletin Board Service (703) 313-5910.            Omega frequencies. The additional frequencies assist in the lane
 (513)  Omega.-Omega is a very long range hyperbolic radio    resolution and position fixing. Because of the long range and sta-
navigation system operating between 10.2 kHz and 13.6 kHz. It    bility of the Omega signal, a single set of stations can be used to
provides navigational service throughout the world using a trans-    traverse thousands of miles.
mitting complex of eight stations. Since the transmissions are         (525) Detailed Omega information is contained in the Coast
controlled by cesium atomic frequency standards, the signals can    Guard's Omega Navigation System User's Guide (COMDTPUB
be used for time dissemination.                                      P16566.3).



26                                                1. GENERAL INFORMATION


 (526)  Range and Coverage.-Signals radiated at the designed        (543)  Omega:: Current status recorded voice announcements
power of 10kW provide field strengths sufficient to allow phase    are available; phone (703) 313-5906. NAVCEN generates a
tracking at any location in the world. No less than five LOP's    weekly Omega status advisory, Address Indicator Group 8980
should be available in any area. Current coverage is depicted on    (AIG 8980). For further information contact the watchstander at
the Omega coverage software called ACCESS.  ACCESS is a    (703) 313-5900; available 24 hours.
computer-based coverage tool which gives predictions on a 24        (544)  Loran-C information: the current operational status of
hour basis. The ACCESS package is available through:               all Loran-C stations is available from the coordinator of chain
 (527)  COMMANDING OFFICER                                        operations (COCO) or the Regional Manager. The COCO mon-
 (528)  NAVIGATION CENTER                                         itors the day-to-day operations of the Loran-C chain and provides
 (529)  7323 TELEGRAPH ROAD                                       information with a recorded telephone announcement or responds
 (530)  ALEXANDRIA VA 22310-3998                                  to queries directed to the COCO personally. The Regional Man-
 (531) Telephone: (703) 313-5905 or 5906.                         agers monitor the operation of the Loran-C chains in their areas.
       Telephone: (703)                                            Pertinent telephone numbers follow:
 (532)  The Differential Omega mode will be limited in coverage    Pertin ent telephone numbers follow:
according to the number of local monitors. However, the maxi-       (545) COCO Canadian east coast (CEC-5930) and Labrador Sea
                                                                (LABSEA-7930) chains is located at Loran Monitor Station St.
mum range from any one monitor is expected to be approximately      LABSEA7930  chains is located at Loran Monitor Station St.
                ~~~~~~~~~~300 NM.             ~Anthony Newfoundland Canada. Recorded announcement: (709)
                                                                454-3261. COCO: (709) 454-2392.
 (533)  When transmitted Omega signals are known to be unreli-       546)  COCO Great Lakes (GKLS-8970) and northeast US
able or disturbed by various phenomena, such as a polar cap dis-    (NEUS-9960) chains is located at Loran Station Seneca, NY.
turbance (PCD), appropriate warnings will be transmitted via the    Recorded announcement: (607) 869-5395. COCO: (607) 869-
NAVAREA IV/XII, HYDROLANT/HYDROPAC message sys-    1334.
tems and will be published in the weekly Notice to Mariners
                                                                  (547) COCO southeast US (SEUS-7980) and south central US
                                                                (SOCUS-9310) chains is located at Loran Station Malone, FL.
                      Station List:                              Recorded announcement: (205) 899-5227. COCO: (205) 899-
                                                                5225/6.
 Station                                   Position                 (548) Information concerning the Gulf of Alaska (7960), Cana-
 Norway (A)                     66ï¿½25'12.7"N   13ï¿½08'13.l"E        dian west coast (5990), US west coast (9940), Russian-American
 Liberia (B)                    6ï¿½18'19.3"N    10%39'51.9"W        (5980), North Pacific (9990), and North Central US (8290) chains
 Hawaii (C)                     21024'17.9"N   157049'51.0"W       may be obtained from the USCG Pacific Area Loran-C Regional
 North Dakota (D)               46021'57.4"N   98020'08.2"W        Manager in Alameda, CA at (510) 437-3232.
 Reunion (E)                    20o58'26.9"S-  55017'23.6"E         (549) European Loran-C information:
 Argentina (F)                  43ï¿½03'12.8"S   65011'26.8"W         (550) Information concerning the Icelandic (9980), Norwegian
 Australia (G)                  38ï¿½28'52.4"S   146056'07.1"E       Sea (7970), and Mediterranean Sea (7990) chains may be obtained
 Japan (H)                      34ï¿½36'53.1"N   129 27'13.1"E       from the Regional Manager at U.S. Coast Guard Activities
                                                                Europe, London, UK at 011-44-71-872-0943. If additional infor-
 (534)  LORAN-C, OMEGA, GPS, DGPS, AND GENERAL                    mation is required after contacting COCO'S or the Pacific or
RADIONAVIGATION USER INFORMATION.-The Com-    European Regional Managers, contact the NAVCEN by calling
mandant of the U.S. Coast Guard has consolidated radionaviga-    (703) 313-5900 or by writing: Commanding Officer (OPS),
tion operational control, management, and information              NAVCEN (address above).
responsibilities of the Commandant Radionavigation Division (G-     (551) Scheduled Loran-C unusable times are published by
NRN), the Omega Navigation System Center (ONSCEN), Com-    announcements in USCG Local Notice to Mariners, Canadian
mander Atlantic Area (ATL), and Commander Pacific Area (PTL)    Coast Guard Notice to Shipping (NOTSHIP'S), FAA Notice to
at one field unit, entitled Navigation Center (NAVCEN).            Airmen (NOTAMS), FAA NOTAM "D"s, and on the pre-recorded
NAVCEN address:                                                    service for the pertinent chain. In many cases scheduled outages
 (535) Commanding Officer                                         are preceded by Coast Guard Marine Radio Voice and NAVTEX
 (536)  USCG Navigation Center                                    Broadcasts in the areas where coverage will be affected.
                                                                  (552) Military or government users with an official Govern-
 (537)  Alexandria,7323  VA22310-3 .                              ment Plain Language Address (PLAD) desiring inclusion on
 (538)  Alexandria, VA 22310-3998.                                notification messages should request such in writing to NAVCEN;
 (539)  A reorganized G-NRN Staff remains at Coast Guard    address above. Requests must include a point of contact, tele-
Headquarters for policy and planning functions of the radionavi-    phone number, why you need this service, and a Government
gation program.                                                    PLAD. Due to the time sensitive nature of this information it-is
 (540) NAVCEN provides the following services:                    sent only by government message. These messages and other
 (541)  Computer Bulletin Board (BBS): The BBS provides    Loran-C information are also available to the public in the Loran-
Loran-C, Omega, GPS, Marine Radiobeacon, Differential GPS          C section of the NAVCEN Bulletin Board (BBS).
(DGPS), and general radionavigation user information and status.    (553)  If you have a problem with Loran, contact the applicable
It is accessed by computer users with modems. The Coast Guard    COCO or Regional Manager for the rate used. If you need to
does not charge for access to the BBS. Modem setup parameters:    check about unusable time, system failures or report abnormali-
8 bits, no parity, I stop; 300-14400 BAUD; call (703) 313-5910.    ties, note the rate used, model of receiver, location, type of prob-
 (542)  GPS System: Current status recorded voice announce-    lem, date, and time occurred. This will enable the COCO or
ments are available; phone (703) 313-5907. Printed materials on    Regional Manager to quickly check the records for the period in
GPS may also be obtained; phone (703) 313-5900.                    question and to provide a more exact answer to you.




                                                  1. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                       27


 (554) WWV and WWVH broadcasts: Broadcasts from WWV                 (576) Two categories of waterway markers are used. Regulatory
of Fort Collins, CO and WWVH of Kekaha, Kauai, HI contain    markers, buoys, and signs use distinctive standard shape marks to
Omega and GPS information. Omega summary status and propa-    show regulatory information. The signs are white with black let-
gation anomaly notification are broadcast from WWV at 16 min-    ters and have a wide orange border. They signify speed zones,
utes after each hour, and from WWVH at 47 minutes after the    restricted areas, danger areas, and directions to various places.
hour. GPS information is broadcast from WWV at 14 to 15 min-    Aids to navigation on State waters use red and black buoys to
utes after each hour and from WWVH at 43 to 44 minutes after    mark channel limits. Red and black buoys are generally used in
each hour.                                                         pairs. The boat should pass between the red buoy and its compan-
 (555) NAVSAT information:  Orbital data and operational sta-    ion black buoy. If the buoys are not placed in pairs, the distinctive
tus is gathered by the Naval Satellite Operations Center (NAV-    color of the buoy indicates the direction of dangerous water from
SOC), Point Magu, CA  and supplied to the Defense Mapping    the buoy. White buoys with red tops should be passed to the S or
Agency (DMA) for public dissemination. For additional informa-    W, indicating that danger lies to the N or E of the buoy. White
tion contact the following:                                        buoys with black tops should be passed to the N or E. Danger lies
 (556) All users: Orbital data and operational status is available    to the S or W. Vertical red and white striped buoys indicate a boat
from DMA, telephone (301) 227-2495. For more information    should not pass between the buoy and the nearest shore. Danger
write                                                              lies inshore of the buoy.
 (557) Defense Mapping Agency Combat Support Center
 (558) ATTN COCO, Mail Stop d-17                                    (577) DESTRUCTIVE WAVES.-Unusual sudden changes in
 (559) 6001 MacArthur Boulevard                                   water level can be caused by tsunamis or violent storms. These
 (560) Bethesda, MD 20816-5001.                                   two types of destructive waves have become commonly known as
 (561) Military/government  users  with  message    tidal waves, a name which is technically incorrect as they are not
PLADS:  NAVSOC maintains AIG 51 to disseminate NAVSAT              the result of tide-producing forces.
status information. Information on being added to this AIG may      (578) Tsunamis (seismic sea waves) are set up by submarine
be obtained by writing or calling:                                 earthquakes. Many such seismic disturbances do not produce sea
 (562) Naval Satellite Operations Center                          waves and often those produced are small, but the occasional large
 (563) Building 375, 661 13th Street                              waves can be very damaging to shore installations and dangerous
 (564) Point Mugu, CA 93042-5013                                  to ships in harbors.
 (565) Telephone (805) 989-4284.                                    (579) These waves travel great distances and can cause tremen-
 (566) U.S. Naval Observatory: The U.S. Naval Observatory    dous damage on coasts far from their source. The wave of April 1,
(USNO) provides the following services: automated data services    1946, which originated in the Aleutian Trench, demolished nearby
for Loran-C, Omega, GPS and NAVSAT information: data service    Scotch Cap Lighthouse and caused damages of $25 million in the
(menu driven) parameters - 8 bit, no parity, 1 stop, 1200 to 2400    Hawaiian Islands 2,000 miles away. The wave of May 22-23,
BAUD, access password CESIUM133. Time service: (900) 410-    1960, which originated off southern Chile, caused widespread
8463 or (202) 653-1800. General information: (202) 653-1522/5.     death and destruction in islands and countries throughout the
 (567) National  Oceanographic  and  Atmospheric                  Pacific.
Administration: The U.S. Department of Commerce National            (580) The speed of tsunamis varies with the depth of the water,
Oceanographic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA), Space    reaching 300 to 500 knots in the deep water of the open ocean. In
Environment Services Center (SESC) disseminates information    the open sea they cannot be detected from a ship or from the air
regarding solar activity, radio propagation, ionospheric, and geo-    because their length is so great, sometimes a hundred miles, as
magnetic conditions. For more information:                         compared to their height, which is usually only a few feet (a meter
 (568) For general information, and information about WWV and    or 2). Only on certain types of shelving coasts do they build up
satellite broadcasts, write or call:                               into waves of disastrous proportions.
 (569) U.S. Department of Commerce                                  (581) There is usually a series of waves with crests 10 to 40 min-
 (570) Space Environment Services Center, R/E/SE2                 utes apart, and the highest may occur several hours after the first
 (571) 325 Broadway                                               wave. Sometimes the first noticeable part of the wave is the trough
 (572) Boulder, CO 80303                                          which causes a recession of the water from shore, and people who
 (573) Telephone (303) 497-3171.                                  have gone out to investigate this unusual exposure of the beach
 (574) For Public Bulletin Board System (PBBS): PBBS data    have been engulfed by the oncoming crest. Such an unexplained
service (menu driven) parameters - 8 bit, no parity, 1 stop, 300 to    withdrawal of the sea should be considered as nature's warning of
2400 BAUD. PBBS will prompt you for the required initial infor-    an approaching wave.
mation and lead you to the main menu. Telehone (303) 497-5000.      (582) Improvements have been made in the quick determination
 (575) Uniform State Waterway Marking System.-Many bod-    and reporting of earthquake epicenters, but no method has yet
ies of water used by boatmen are located entirely within the    been perfected for determining whether a sea wave will result
boundaries of a State. The Uniform State Waterway Marking Sys-    from a given earthquake. The Pacific Tsunami Warning Center,
tem (USWMS) has been developed to indicate to the small-boat    Oahu, Hawaii, of the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Adminis-
operator hazards, obstructions, restricted or controlled areas, and    tration is headquarters of a warning system which has field report-
to provide directions. Although intended primarily for waters    ing stations (seismic and tidal) in most countries around the
within the State boundaries, USWMS is suited for use in all water    Pacific. When a warning is broadcast, waterfront areas should be
areas, since it supplements and is generally compatible with the    vacated for higher ground, and ships in the vicinity of land should
Coast Guard lateral system of aids to navigation. The Coast Guard    head for the deep water of the open sea.
is gradually using more aids bearing the USWMS geometric            (583) Storm surge.-A considerable rise or fall in the level of
shapes described below.                                            the sea along a particular coast may result from strong winds and



28                                                 1. GENERAL INFORMATION


sharp change in barometric pressure. In cases where the water   . (597) Vessels, with or without tows, passing Coast Guard yves-
level is raised, higher waves can form with greater depth and the    sels displaying this signal shall reduce speed sufficiently to insure
combination can be destructive to low regions, particularly at high    the safety of both vessels, and when passing within 200 feet of the
stages of tide. Extreme low levels can result in depths which are    Coast Guard vessel displaying this signal, their speed shall not
considerably less than those shown on nautical charts. This type of    exceed 5 miles per hour.
wave occurs especially in coastal regions bordering on shallow        (598)  High seas (International Rules):
waters which are subject to tropical storms.                          (599) DAY, three black shapes in a vertical line at least 5 feet
  (584) Seiche is a stationary vertical wave oscillation with a    (1.5 meters) apart, the highest and lowest being globular shapes
period varying from a few minutes to an hour or more, but some-    and the middle being a diamond shape, each not less than 2 feet
what less than the tidal periods. It is usually attributed to external    (0.6 meter) in diameter. On vessels of less than 65 feet (20 meters)
forces such as strong winds, changes in barometric pressure,    in length, the size of the shapes and the distance between them
swells, or tsunamis disturbing the equilibrium of the water surface.    may be reduced in correspondence with the size of the vessel.
Seiche is found both in enclosed bodies of water and superim-        (600)  NIGHT, three lights in a vertical line not less than 6 feet (2
posed upon the tides of the open ocean. When the external forces    meters) apart, the highest and lowest being red and the middle
cause a short-period horizontal oscillation of the water, it is called    being white in color. On vessels of less than 65 feet (20 meters) in
surge.                                                              length, the lights shall be not less than 3 feet (I meter) apart.
  (585)  The combined effect of seiche and surge sometimes makes      (601) Minesweeper signals.-U.S. vessels engaged in mine-
it difficult to maintain a ship in its position alongside a pier even    sweeping operations or exercises are hampered to a considerable
though the water may appear to be completely undisturbed, and    extent in their maneuvering powers. With a view to indicating the
heavy mooring lines have been parted repeatedly under such con-    nature of the work on which they are engaged, these vessels will
ditions. Pilots advise taut lines to reduce the effect of the surge.  show the signals hereinafter mentioned. For the public safety, all
                                                                     other vessels, whether steamers or sailing craft, must endeavor to
SPECIAL SIGNALS FOR CERTAIN VESSELS                                 keep out of the way of vessels displaying these signals and not
                                                                     approach them inside the distances mentioned herein, especially
 (586)  Special signals for surveying vessels.-National Oceanic    remembering that it is dangerous to pass between the vessels of a
and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) vessels engaged in sur-    pair or group sweeping together.
vey operations and limited in their ability to maneuver because of   (602) All vessels towing sweeps are to show: By day, a black
the work being performed (handling equipment over-the-side such    ball at or near the foremast head and a black ball at each end of the
as water sampling or conductivity-temperature-density (CTD)         fore yard. By night, all around green lights instead of the black
casts, towed gear, bottom samplers, etc., and divers working on,    balls, and in a similar manner.
below or in proximity of the vessel) are required by Navigation       (603) Vessels or formations showing these signals indicate that it
Rules, International-Inland, Rule 27, to exhibit:                   is dangerous for another vessel to approach within 1,000 meters
 (587)  (b)(i) three all-round lights in a vertical line where they    (3,280 feet) of the mineclearance vessel. Under no circumstances
can best be seen. The highest and lowest of these lights shall be    is a vessel to pass through a formation of minesweepers. Mine-
red and the middle light shall be white;                            sweepers should be prepared to warn merchant vessels which per-
 (588)  (ii) three shapes in a vertical line where they can best be    sist in approaching too close by means of any of the appropriate
seen. The highest and lowest of these shapes shall be balls and the    signals from the International Code of Signals. In fog, mist, falling
middle one a diamond;                                               snow, heavy rainstorms, or any other condition similarily restrict-
 (589)  (iii) when making way through the water, masthead    ing visibility, whether by day or night, minesweepers while towing
       lightssidelights and a sternlight in addition to the lights pre  sweeps when in the vicinity of other vessels will sound whistle
lights, sidelights and a sternlight, in addition to the lights pre-
                                                                     signals for a vessel towing (one prolonged blast followed by two
scribed in subparagraph (b)(i); and
 (590)  (iv) when at anchor, in addition to the lights or shapes
                                                                      .(604)  The United States is increasingly using helicopters to con-
prescribed in subparagraphs (b)(i) and (ii) the light, lights or
shapes prescribed in Rule 30, Anchored Vessels and Vessels    duct mnesweepg operations and exercises Whenso engaged,
shAground.                                              Vessels    helicopters, like vessels, are considerably hampered in their ability
                                                                     to maneuver. Helicopters may function at night as well as during
 (591) The color of the above shapes is black.                     the day and in varying types of weather. Accordingly, surface ves-
 (592) A NOAA vessel engaged in hydrographic survey opera-    sels approaching helicopters engaged in minesweeping operations
tions (making way on a specific trackline while sounding the bot-    should take precautions similar to those described above with
tom) is not restricted in its ability to maneuver and therefore    regard to minesweeping vessels.
exhibits at night only those lights required for a power-driven yes-  (605) Helicopters towing minesweepinggear, and surface
sel of its length.                                                  escorts, if any, will use all practical means to warn approaching
 (593)  Warning signals for Coast Guard vessels while handling    ships of the operations being conducted. Where practical, mea-
or servicing aids to navigation are the same as those, prescribed    sures will be taken to mark or light the gear being towed. While
for surveying vessels. (See Special signals for surveying vessels,    towing, the helicopter's altitude varies from 49.2 to 311.6. feet (15
this chapter.)                                                      to 95 meters) above the water, and speeds vary from 0 to 30 knots.
 (594)  Inland waters (Inland Rules):                                (606) Minesweeping helicopters are equipped with a rotating
 (595)  DAY, two orange and white vertically striped balls in a    beacon which has a selectable red and amber mode. The amber
vertical line not less than 3 feet nor more than 6 feet apart dis-    mode is used during towing operations to notify and warn other
played from the yardarm.                                            vessels that the helicopter is towing.
 (596)  NIGHT, two red lights in a vertical line not less than 3 feet  (607) Submarine emergency identification signals.-U.S. sub-
nor more than 6 feet apart.                                         marines are equipped with signal ejectors submarines are




                                                    1. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                           29


equipped with signal ejectors which may be used to launch identi-       (618)  3. Traffic separation schemes are recommended for use
fication signals, including emergency signals. Two general types    by all ships unless stated otherwise. Bearing in mind the need for
of signals may be used: smoke floats and flares or stars. The         adequate underkeel clearance, a decision to use a traffic separation
smoke floats, which burn on the surface, produce a dense colored    scheme must take into account the charted depth, the possibility of
smoke for a period of 15 to 45 seconds. The flares or stars are pro-    changes in the seabed since the time of last survey, and the effects
pelled to a height of 300 to 400 feet from which they descend by    of meteorological and tidal conditions on water depths.
small parachute. The flares or stars burn for about 25 seconds. The     (619) 4. A deepwater route is an allied routing measure prima-
color of the smoke or flare/star has the following meaning:           rily intended for use by ships which require the use of such a route
 (608) Green or black is used under training exercise conditions    because of their draft in relation to the available depth of water in
only to indicate that a torpedo has been fired or that the firing of a    the area concerned. Through traffic to which the above consider-
torpedo has been simulated.                                           ation does not apply should, if practicable, avoid following deep-
 (609) Yellow indicates the submarine is about to rise to peri-    water routes. When using a deepwater route mariners should be
scope depth. Surface craft terminate antisubmarine counterattack      aware of possible changes in the indicated depth of water due to
and clear vicinity of submarine. Do not stop propellers.              meteorological or other effects.
 (610)  Red indicates an emergency inside the submarine; she will      (620) 5. Users of traffic separation schemes adopted by IMO
try to surface immediately. Surface ships clear the area and stand    will be guided by Rule 10 of the 1972 International Regulations
by to assist. In case of repeated red signals, or if the submarine    for Preventing Collisions at Sea (72 COLREGS) as follows:
fails to surface in a reasonable time, she may be presumed dis-        (621)  (a) This Rule applies to traffic separation schemes
abled. Buoy the location, look for submarine buoy, and attempt to    adopted by the Organization.
establish sonar communications. Advise U.S. Navy authorities            (622) (b) A vessel using a traffic separation scheme shall:
immediately.                                                            (623)  (i) proceed in the appropriate traffic lane in the general
 (611) Submarine marker buoys consist of two spheres 3 feet in    direction of traffic flow for that lane;
diameter with connecting structure, painted international orange.       (624)  (ii) so far as practicable keep clear of a traffic separation
The buoy has a wire cable to the submarine, to act as a downhaul      line or separation zone;
line for a rescue chamber. The buoy may be accompanied by an oil       (625)  (iii) normally join or leave a traffic lane at the termination
slick release to attract attention. A submarine on the bottom in dis-    of the lane, but when joining or leaving from either side shall do
tress may release this buoy. If sighted, such a buoy should be        so at as small an angle to the general direction of traffic flow as
investigated and reported immediately to U.S. Navy authorities.       practicable.
 (612)  The submarine may transmit the International Distress          (626)  (c) A vessel shall so far as practicable avoid crossing traf-
Signal (SOS) on its sonar gear independently or in conjunction    fic lanes, but if obliged to do so, shall cross as nearly as practica-
with the red signal. Submarines also may use these other means of    ble at right angles to the general direction of traffic flow.
attracting attention: release of dye marker or air bubble; ejection     (627)  (d) Inshore traffic zones shall not normally be used by
of oil; pounding on hull.                                             through traffic which can safely use the appropriate traffic lane
 (613)  Vessels Constrained by their Draft.-International Navi-       within the adjacent traffic separation scheme. However, vessels of
gation Rules, Rule 28, states that a vessel constrained by her draft    less than 20 meters in length and sailing vessels may under all cir-
may, in addition to the lights prescribed for power-driven vessels    cumstances use inshore traffic zones.
in Rule 23, exhibit where they can best be seen three all-round red     (628) (e) A vessel, other than a crossing vessel, or a vessel join-
lights in a vertical line, or a cylinder.                             ing or leaving a lane shall not normally enter a separation zone or
                                                                      cross a separation line except:
NAVIGATION RESTRICTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS                                (629)  (i) in cases of emergency to avoid immediate danger;
 (614)  Traffic Separation Schemes (Traffic Lanes).-To                 (630)  (ii) to engage in fishing within a separation zone.
increase the safety of navigation, particularly in converging areas     (631)  (f) A vessel navigating in areas near the terminations of
of high traffic density, routes incorporating traffic separation have,    traffic separation schemes shall do so with particular caution.
with the approval of the International Maritime Organization            (632)  (g) A vessel shall so far as practicable avoid anchoring in
(IMO), formerly the Inter-Governmental Maritime Consultative    a traffic separation scheme or in areas near its terminations.
Organization (IMCO), been established in certain areas of the           (633)  (h) A vessel not using a traffic separation scheme shall
world. In the interest of safe navigation, it is recommended that    avoid it by as wide a margin as is practicable.
through traffic use these schemes, as far as circumstances permit,      (634  (i) A vessel engaged in fishing shall not impede the pas-
by day and by night and in all weather conditions.                    sage of any vessel following a traffic lane.
 (615) General principles for navigation in Traffic Separation         (635)  (j) A vessel of less than 20 meters (65.6 feet) in length or
Schemes are as follows:                                               a sailing vessel shall not impede the safe passage of a power-
 (616)  1. A ship navigating in or near a traffic separation scheme   driven vessel following a traffic lane.
adopted by IMO shall in particular comply with Rule 10 of the 72        (636)  (k) A vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver when
COLREGS to minimize the development of risk of collision with    engaged in an operation for the maintenance of safety of naviga-
another ship. The other rules of the 72 COLREGS apply in all    tion in a traffic separation scheme is exempted from complying
respects, and particularly the steering and sailing rules if risk of    with Rule 10 to the extent necessary to carry out the operation.
collision with another ship is deemed to exist.                         (637)  (1) A vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver when
 (617)  2. Traffic separation schemes are intended for use by day    engaged in an operation for laying, servicing or picking up of a
and by night in all weather, in ice-free waters or under light ice    submarine cable, within a traffic separation scheme, is exempted
conditions where no extraordinary maneuvers or assistance by ice-    from complying with this Rule to the extent necessary to carry out
breaker(s) are required.                                              the operation.



30                                                I. GENERAL INFORMATION


 (638) 6. The arrows printed on charts merely indicate the gen-     (647) Obligation of deck officers.-Licensed deck officers are
eral direction of traffic; ships need not set their courses strictly    required to acquaint themselves with the latest information pub-
along the arrows.                                                  lished in Notice to Mariners regarding aids to navigation.
 (639) 7. The signal "YG" meaning "You appear not to be com-        (648) Improper use of searchlights prohibited,-No person
plying with the traffic separation scheme" is provided in the Inter-    shall flash or cause to be flashed the rays of a searchlight or other
national Code of Signals for appropriate use.                      blinding light onto the bridge or into the pilothouse of any vessel
 (640) When approved or established, traffic separation scheme    underway. The International Code Signal "PG2" may be made by
details are announced in Notice to Mariners, and later depicted on    a vessel inconvenienced by the glare of a searchlight in order to
appropriate charts and included in Coast Pilots and Sailing Direc-    apprise the offending vessel of the fact.
tions.                                                              (649) Use of Radar.-Navigation Rules, International-Inland,
 (641) Oil Pollution-The Federal Water Pollution Control Act,    Rule 7, states, in part, that every vessel shall use all available
as amended, prohibits the discharge of a harmful quantity of oil or    means appropriate to the prevailing circumstances and conditions
a hazardous substance into or upon the United States navigable    to determine if risk of collision exists. If there is any doubt such
waters or adjoining shorelines, or into or upon the waters of the    risk shall be deemed to exist. Proper use shall be made of radar
contiguous zone, or in connection with activities under the Outer    equipment if fitted and operational, including long-range scanning
Continental Shelf Lands Act or the Deepwater Port Act of 1974,    to obtain early warning of risk of collision and radar plotting or
or which may affect natural resources belonging to, appertaining    equivalent systematic observation of detected objects.
to, or under the exclusive management authority of the United       (650) This rule places an additional responsibility on vessels
States including resources under the Fishery Conservation and    which are equipped and manned to use radar to do so while under-
Management Act of 1976. Discharges that do occur must be    way during periods of reduced visibility without in any way
reported to the Coast Guard (National Response Center) by the    relieving commanding officers of the responsibility of carrying out
most rapid available means. To assist in swift reporting of spills, a    normal precautionary measures.
nationwide, 24-hour, toll-free telephone number has been estab-     (651) Navigation Rules, International-Inland, Rules 6, 7, 8, and
lished (1-800-424-8802).                                           19 apply to the use of radar.
 (642)  Hazardous quantities of oil have been defined by the Envi-  (652) Danger signal.-Navigation Rules, International-Inland,
ronmental Protection Agency as those which violate applicable    Rule 34(d), states that when vessels in sight of one another are
water quality standards or cause a film or sheen upon or discolora-    approaching each other and-from any cause either vessel fails to
tion of the surface of the water or adjoining shorelines, or cause a    understand the intentions or actions of the other, or is in doubt
sludge or emulsion to be deposited beneath the surface of the    whether sufficient action is being taken.by the other to avoid colli-
water or adjoining shorelines. (For regulations pertaining to this    sion, the vessel in doubt shall immediately indicate such doubt by
Act see 40 CFR 110.3, not carried in this Pilot.)                  giving at least five short and rapid blasts on the whistle. Such sig-
 (643) The Refuse Act of 1899 (33 U.S.C. 407) prohibits anyone    nal may be supplemented by a light signal of at least five short and
from throwing, discharging or depositing any refuse matter of any    rapid flashes.
kind in U.S. navigable waters or tributaries of navigable waters.   (653) Narrow channels.-Navigation Rules, International-
The only exceptions to this prohibition are liquid sewage flowing    Inland, Rule 9(b) states: A vessel of less than 65.6 feet (20 meters)
from streets or sewers and discharges made from shore facilities    in length or a sailing vessel shall not impede the passage of a yes-
under a permit granted by the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers.        sel that can safely navigate only within a narrow channel or fair-
 (644) The Act to Prevent Pollution from Ships (33 U.S.C. 1901)    way.
is based on the International Convention for the Prevention of Pol-  (654) Control of shipping in time of emergency or war.-In
lution from Ships, as modified by the Protocol of 1978 (MARPOL     time of war or national emergency, merchant vessels of the United
73/78). For tankers over 150 gross tons and all other ships over    States and those foreign flag vessels, which are considered under
400 gross tons, MARPOL 73/78 requires the installation of new    effective U.S. control, will be subject to control by agencies of the
equipment to control overboard discharges of oil and oily waste.    U.S. Government. The allocation and employment of such vessels,
This includes oily-water separating, monitoring and alarm systems    and of domestic port facilities, equipment, and services will be
for discharges from cargo areas, cargo pump rooms and machinery    performed by appropriate agencies of the War Transport Adminis-
space bilges. New ships must have the equipment on board by    tration. The. movement, routing, and diversion of merchant ships
October 2, 1983, while existing ships have until October 2, 1986    at sea will be controlled by appropriate naval commanders. The
to comply.                                                         movement of merchant ships within domestic ports and dispersal
 (645) Ships are also required to have an International Oil Pollu-    anchorages will be coordinated by the U.S. Coast Guard. The
tion Prevention Certificate verifying that the vessel is in compli-    commencement of naval control will be signalled by a general
ance with MARPOL 73/78 and that any required equipment is on    emergency message. (See DMAHTC Pub. 117 for emergency pro-
board and operational, and they must maintain a new Oil Record    cedures and communication instructions.)
Book reporting all oil transfers and discharges. The Oil Record     (655) Exclusive Economic Zone of the United States.-Estab-
Book is available from the Government Printing Office.(See    lished by a Presidential Proclamation on March 10, 1983, the
appendix for address.)                                             Exclusive Economic Zone (EEZ) of the United States is a zone
 (646) Other requirements for the protection of navigable    contiguous to the territorial sea, including zones contiguous to the
waters.-It is not lawful to tie up or anchor vessels or to float    territorial sea of the United States, the Commonwealth of Puerto
lografts in navigable channels in such manner as to obstruct nor-    Rico, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands (to the
mal navigation. When a vessel or raft is wrecked and sunk in a    extent consistent with the Covenant and the United Nations Trust-
navigable channel it is the duty of the owner to immediately mark    eeship Agreement), and United States overseas territories and pos-
it with a buoy or beacon during the day and a light at night until    sessions. The EEZ extends to a distance of 200 nautical miles
the sunken craft is removed or abandoned.                          from the baseline from which the breadth of the territorial sea is





                                                   1. GENERAL INFORMATION                                                         31


measured. In cases where the maritime boundary with a neighbor-       (663) Reports of foreign fishing activity within the fishery con-
ing state remains to be determined, the boundary of the EEZ shall    servation zone should be made to the U.S. Coast Guard. Immedi-
be determined by the United States and the other state concerned    ate reports are particularly desired, but later reports by any means
in accordance with equitable principles.                             also have value. Reports should include the activity observed, the
 (656)  Within the EEZ, the United States has asserted, to the   -position, and as much identifying information (name, number,
extent permitted by international law, (a) sovereign rights for the    homeport, type, flag, color, size, shape, etc.) about the foreign ves-
purpose of exploring, exploiting, conserving and managing natural    sel as possible, and the reporting party's name and address or tele-
resources, both living and nonliving, of the seabed and subsoil and    phone number.
the superjacent waters and with regard to other activities for the
economic exploitation and exploration of the zone, such as the         (664)  BRIDGE-TO-BRIDGE RADIOTELEPHONE COM-
production of energy from the water, currents and winds; and (b)    MUNICATION.- Voice radio bridge-to-bridge communication
jurisdiction with regard to the establishment and use of artificial    between vessels is an effective aid in the prevention of collisions
islands, and installations and structures having economic pur-    where there is restricted maneuvering room and/or visibility.
poses,, and the protection and preservation of the marine environ-    VHF-FM radio is used for this purpose, due to its essentially line-
ment.                                                                of-sight characteristic and relative freedom from static. As VHF-
 (657) Without prejudice to the sovereign rights and jurisdiction    FM has increasingly come into use for short-range communica-
of the United States, the EEZ remains an area beyond the territory    tions in U.S. harbors and other high-traffic waters, so has the num-
and territorial sea of the United States in which all states enjoy the    ber of ships equipped with this gear increased.
high seas freedoms of navigation, overflight, the laying of subma-
rine cables and pipelines, and other internationally lawful uses of   (665)  The Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Regulations,
the sea.                                                             effective January 1, 1973, require vessels subject to the Act while
 (658)  This Proclamation does not change existing United States.   navigating to be equipped with at least one single channel trans-
policies concerning the continental shelf, marine mammals and    ceiver capable of transmitting and receiving on VHF-FM channel
fisheries, including highly migratory species of tuna which are not  13 (156.65 MHz), the Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone fre-
subject to United States jurisdiction and require international    quency. Vessels with multichannel equipment are required to have
agreements for effective management.                                 an additional receiver so as to be able to guard VHF-FM channel
 (659) The United States will exercise these sovereign rights and    13 (156.65 MHz), the Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone fre-
jurisdiction in accordance with the rules of international law.      quency  in addition to VHF-FM channel 16 (156.80 MHz)  the
 (660) ; The seaward limit of the EEZ isshown on the nautical    National Distress, Safety and Calling frequency required by Fed-
                                                                    eral Communications Commission regulations. (See 26.01
chart as a line interspersed periodically with EXCLUSIVE ECO-        eral Communication  Commission regulations  (See 26.01
NOMIC ZONE.: The EEZ boundary is coincidental with that of    through 26.10, chapter 2, for Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotele-
                                                                    phone Regulations.)
the Fishery Conservation Zone.                                       p
                                                                      (666)  Mariners are reminded that the use of bridge-to-bridge
  (661)  U.S. Fishery Conservation Zone.- The United States          voice communications in no way alters the obligation to comply
exercises exclusive fishery management authority over all species    with the provisions of the Navigation Rules, International-Inland.
of fish, except tuna, within the fishery conservation zone, whose     (667)  VHF-FM Radiotelephone.- VHF-FM channel 16
seaward boundary is 200 miles from the baseline from which the    (156.800 MHz) is the international distress, urgency, safety, call-
U.S. territorial sea is measured; all anadromous species which    ing and reply frequency for vessels and public and private coastal
spawn in the United States throughout their migratory range    stations. In 1992, the Federal Communications Commission
beyond the fishery conservation zone, except within a foreign    (FCC) designated VHF-FM channel 9 (156.450 MHz) for use as a
country's equivalent fishery zone as recognized by the United        general purpose calling frequency for non-commercial vessels,
States; all U.S. Continental Shelf fishery resources beyond the    such as recreational boats. This move was designed to relieve
fishery conservation zone. Such resources'include American lob-    congestion on VHF-FM channel 16. Non-commercial vessels are
ster and species of coral, crab, abalone, conch, clam, and sponge,   encouraged to use VHF-FM channel 9 for routine communications
among others.                                                        but distress, urgency, and safety calls should continue to be ini-
  (662)  No foreign vessel may fish, aid, or assist vessels at-sea in    tially made on VHF-FM channel 16.
the performance of any activity relating to fishing including, but     668  The following table provides the frequency equivalents
not limited to preparation, supply, storage, refrigeration, transpor-    and general usage of selected VHF-FM channels which appear in
tation or processing, within the fishery conservation zone, or fish the Coast Pilot. The letter "A" appended to a channel number idi-
for anadromous species of the United States or Continental Shelf    cates that U.S. operationof the particular channel is different than
fishery resources without having on board a permit issued in    the international operation, i.e., U.S. stations transmit and receive
accordance with U.S. law. These permits may only be issued to    on the same frequency and international stations use different fre-
vessels from countries recognizing the exclusive fishery manage-      uencies.
ment authority of the United States in an international agreement.    q
The owners or operators of foreign vessels desiring to engage in      (669) The information given here is extracted from the "Man-
fishing off U.S. coastal waters should ascertain their eligibility    time Radio Users Handbook" published by the the Radio Techni-
from their own flag state authorities. Failure to obtain a permit    Cal Commission for Maritime Services. Ordering information for
prior to fishing, or failure to: co miply with the conditions and    this valuable, comprehensive publication is included in the appen-
restrictions established in the permit may subject both vessel and    dix.
its owners or operators to administrative, civil and criminal penal-   (670) All channels given below are designated for both ship-to-
ties. (Further details concerning foreign fishing are given in 50    ship and ship-to-coast communications except as noted.
CFR 611.)






32                                              1. GENERAL INFORMATION




                       Ship Frequency (MHz)
  Channel         Transmit         Receive          Channel Usage
  IA             156.050           156.050          Port operations and commercial
  5A             156.250           156.250          Port operations
  6               156.300          156.300          Intership safety
  7A              156.350          156.350          Commercial
  8               156.400          156.400          Commercial (ship-to-ship only)
  9               156.450          156.450          Non-commercial
  10             156.500           156.500          Commercial
  11             156.550           156.550          Commercial
  12             156.600           156.600          Port operations (traffic advisories, including VTS in some ports)
  13             156.650           156.650          Navigational (ship-to-ship), also used at locks and bridges
  14             156.700           156.700          Port operations (traffic advisories, including VTS in some ports)
  16             156.800           156.800          Distress, safety and calling
  17             156.850           156.850          State or local government control
  18A            156.900           156.900          Commercial
  19A            156.950           156.950          Commercial
  20             157.000           161.600          Port operations (traffic advisories)
  22A            157.100           157.100          Coast Guard Liaison
  24              157.200          161.800          Public correspondence (ship-to-coast)
  25              157.250          161.850          Public correspondence (ship-to-coast)
  26              157.300          161.900          Public correspondence (ship-to-coast)
  27             157.350           161.950          Public correspondence (ship-to-coast)
  28             157.400           162.000          Public correspondence (ship-to-coast)
  63A             156.175          156.175          VTS New Orleans
  65A             156.275          156.275          Port operations (traffic advisories)
  66A             156.325          156.325          Port operations (traffic advisories)
  67              156.375          156.375          Commercial (ship-to-ship only) (used in New Orleans VTS for ship-to-ship
                                                    navigational purposes)
  68              156.425          156.425          Non-commercial
  69             156.475           156.475          Non-commercial
  71             156.575           156.575          Non-commercial
  72             156.625           156.625          Non-commercial (ship-to-ship only)
  73              156.675          156.675          Port operations (traffic advisories)
  74              156.725          156.725          Port operations (traffic advisories)
  77              156.875          156.875          Port operations (ship-to-ship, to and from pilots docking ships)
  78A            156.925           156.925          Non-commercial
  79A            156.975           156.975          Commercial
  80A            157.025           157.025          Commercial
  84             157.225           161.825          Public correspondence (ship-to-coast)
  85             157.275           161.875          Public correspondence (ship-to-coast)
  86             157.325           161.925          Public correspondence (ship-to-coast)
  87             157.375           161.975          Public correspondence (ship-to-coast)
  88             157.425           162.025          Public correspondence in Puget Sound and parts of Great Lakes
  88A            157.425.          157.425          Commercial, fishing (ship-to-ship) (except in parts of Great Lakes)







                                          2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS

 (1)   This chapter contains sections from the Code of Federal       (28)  "Towing vessel" means any commercial vessel engaged in
Regulations that are of most importance in the areas covered by    towing another vessel astern, alongside, or by pushing ahead.
Coast Pilot 9. Included from Title 33, Navigation and Navigable      (29)  "Vessel Traffic Services (VTS)" means a service imple-
Waters (33 CFR), are                                                mented under Part 161 of this chapter by the United States Coast
 (2)   Part 26, Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Regula-    Guard designed to improve the safety and efficiency of vessel traf-
tions;                                                              fic and to protect the environment. The VTS has the capability to
 (3)   Part 67, Aids to Navigation on Artificial Islands and Fixed    interact with marine traffic and respond to traffic situations devel-
Structures (in part);                                               oping in the VTS area.
 (4)   Part 80, COLREGS Demarcation Lines;                           (30)  "Vessel Traffic Service Area or VTS Area" means the geo-
 (5)   Part 110, Anchorage Regulations;                            graphical area encompassing a specific VTS area of service as
 (6)   Part 160, Ports and Waterways Safety-General;               describedin Part 161 of this chapter. This area of service may be
 (7)   Part 161, Vessel Traffic Management;                        subdivided into sectors for the purpose of allocating responsibility
 (8)   Part 162, Inland Waterways Navigation Regulations;          to individual Vessel Traffic Centers or to identify different operat-
    (9    Part 164, Navigation Safety Regulations (in part);       ingrequirements.
 (o)  Part 165, Regulated Navigation Areas and Limited Access        (31)  Note: Although regulatory jurisdiction is limited to the
Areas;                                                              navigable waters of the United States, certain vessels will be
       Areas;    166Shipin Sfet Farwas-encouraged or may be required, as a condition of port entry to
                                           Part 166, Shipping Safety Fairways;  report beyond this area to facilitate traffic management within the
 (12)  Part 334, Danger Zones and Restricted Area Regulations.     VTS area.
 (13)  Included from Title 50, Wildlife and Fisheries (50 CFR),      (32)  ï¿½26.03 Radiotelephone required.
are
       (14)  Part 227-Threatened Fish and wildlife.                  (33)  (a) Unless an exemption is granted under ï¿½26.09 and
 (14)  Part 227-Threatened Fish and wildlife.
                                                                    except as provided in paragraph (a)(4) of this section, this part
 (i5)  Note.-These regulations can only be amended by the    applies to:
enforcing agency or other authority cited in the regulations.        (34)  (1) Every power-driven vessel of 20 meters or over in
Accordingly, requests for changes to these regulations should be    length white navigatin
directed to the appropriate agency for action. In those regulations  (35)  (2) Every vessel of 100 gross tons and upward carrying
where the enforcing agency is not cited or is unclear, recommen-
dations for changes should be directed to the following Federal
      agencies for action: U.S. Coast Guard (33 CFR 26, 67, 80, 110,  (36)  (3) Every towing vessel of 26 feet or over in length while
                                                                    navigating; and
160, 161, 162, 164, 165, and 166); U.S. Army Corps of Engineers      (37)  (4) Every dredg e and floating plant engaged in or near a
                                                                     (37)  (4) Every dredge and floating plant engaged in or near a
(33 CFR 334); National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration
(50 CFR 334227). National Oceanic andAtmosphericAdministration      channel or fairway in operations likely to restrict or affect naviga-
                                                                    tion of other vessels except for an unmanned or intermittently
                                                                    manned floating plant under the control of a dredge.
Part 26-Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Regulations           (38) '(b) Every vessel, dredge, or floating plant described in
 0 6)  ï¿½26.01 Purpose.
                                                                    paragraph (a) of this section must have a radiotelephone on board
 (i7)  (a) The purpose of this part is to implement the provisions    capable of operation from its navigational bridge, or in the case of
of the Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Act. This part-       a dredge, from its main control station, and capable of transmitting
 (i8)  (1) Requires the use of the vessel bridge-to-bridge radio-    and receiving on the frequency or frequencies within the 156-162
telephone;                                 :                        Mega-Hertz band using the classes of emissions designated by the
 (19)  (2) Provides the Coast Guard's interpretation of the mean-    Federal Communications Commission for the exchange of naviga-
ing of important terms in the Act;                                  tional information.
 (20)  (3) Prescribes the procedures for applying for an exemp-      (39)  (c) The radiotelephone required by paragraph (b) of this
tion from the Act and the regulations issued under the Act and a    section must be carried on board the described vessels, dredges,
listing of exemptions.                                              and floating plants upon the navigable waters of the United States.
 (21)  (b) Nothing in this part relieves any person from the obli-   (40)  (d) The radiotelephone required by paragraph (b) of this
gation of complying with the rules of the road and the applicable    section must be capable of transmitting and receiving on VHF-FM
pilot rules.                                                        channel 22A (157.1 MHz).
 (22)  ï¿½26.02 Definitions.                                           (4i)  (e) While transiting any of the following waters, each
 (23)  For the purpose of this part and interpreting the Act-      vessel described in paragraph (a) of this section also must have on
  (24)  "Secretary" means the Secretary of the Department in    board aradiotelephone capable of transmitting and receiving on
which the Coast Guard is operating:                                 VHF-FM channel 67 (156.375 MHZ):
 (25)  "Act" means the "Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotele-           (42)  (1) The lower Mississippi River from the territorial sea
phone Act," 33 U.S.C. sections 1201-1208;                           boundary, and within either the Southwest Pass safety fairway or
  (26)  "Length" is measured from end to end over the deck    the South Pass safety fairway specified in 33 CFR 166.200, to
excluding sheer;                                                    mile 242.4 AHP (Above Head of Passes) near Baton Rouge;
 (27)  "Power-driven vessel" means any vessel propelled by           (43)  (2) The Mississippi River-Gulf Outlet from the territorial
machinery; and                                                      sea boundary, and within the Mississippi River-Gulf outlet Safety


                                                                                                                                  33




34                                                2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


Fairway specified in 33 CFR 166.200, to that channel's junction    operating condition at the earliest practicable time. The failure of a
with the Inner Harbor Navigation Canal; and .                        vessel's radiotelephone equipment shall not, in itself, constitute a
 (44)  (3) The full length of the Inner Harbor Navigation Canal    violation of this Act, nor shall it obligate the master of any vessel
from its junction with the Mississippi River to that canal's entry to    to moor or anchor his vessel; however, the loss of radiotelephone
Lake Pontchartrain at the New Seabrook vehicular bridge.             capability shall be given consideration in the navigation of the
 (45)  (f) In addition to the radiotelephone required by para-    vessel.
graph (b) of this section each vessel described in paragraph (a) of   (58)  ï¿½26.07 Communications.
this section while transiting any waters within a Vessel Traffic Ser-
vice Area, must have on board a radiotelephone capable of trans-      (59)   No person may use the services of, and no person may
mitting and receiving on the VTS designated frequency in Table    serve as, a person required to maintain a listening watch under
26.03(f) (VTS Call Signs, Designated Frequencies, and Monitor-    section 5 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 1204, unless the person can com-
ing Areas).                                                          municate in the English language.
 (46)  Note: A single VHF-FM radio capable of scanning or             (60)  ï¿½26.08 Exemption procedures.
sequential monitoring (often referred to as "dual watch" capabil-     (61)  (a) Any person may petition for an exemption from any
ity) will not meet the requirements for two radios.                  provision of the Act or this part:
 (47)  ï¿½26.04 Use of the designated frequency.
                                                                     N(62)  (b) Each petition must be submitted in writing to U.S.
 (48)  (a) No  person may       use the frequency designated by the  Coast Guard Office of Navigation Safety and Waterway Services,
Federal Communications Commission under section 8 of the Act,    2100 Second Street SW., Washington, DC 20593-0001, and must
33 U.S.C. 1207(a), to transmit any information other than infor-
mation necessary for the safe navigation of vessels or necessary
tests.                                                                (63)  (1) The provisions of the Act or this part from which an
 (49)  (b) Each person who is required to maintain a listening,    exemption is requested; and
watch under section 5 of the Act shall, when necessary, transmit  '   (64)  (2) The reasons why marine navigation will not be
and confirm, on the designated frequency, the intentions of his    adversely affected if the exemption is granted and if the exemption
vessel and any other information necessary for the safe navigation    relates to a local communication system how that system would
of vessels.                                                          fully comply with the intent of the concept of the Act but would
 (50)  (c) Nothing in these regulations may be construed as pro-    not conform in detail if the exemption is granted.
hibiting the use of the designated frequency to communicate with
                              obtain or furnish information necessary for the  (65)  ï¿½26.09 List of exemptions. (a) All vessels navigating on
shore stations to obtain or furnish information necessary for the
                                                                    those waters governed by the navigation rules for Great Lakes and
safe navigation of vessels.
 (51)  (d) On the navigable waters of the United States, channel    their connecting and tributary waters (33 U.S.C. 241 et seq) are
                                                                    exempt from the requirements of the Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge
13 (156.65 MHz) is the designated frequency required to be moni-    exempt from the requirements of the Vessel Bridge-t-Bridge
                                                                    Radiotelephone Act and this part until May 6, 1975.
tored in accordance with ï¿½26.05(a) except that in the area pre- .
scribed in ï¿½26.03(e), channel 67 (156.375 MHz) is the designated       (66)  (b) Each vessel navigating on the Great Lakes as defined
frequency.                                                           in the Inland Navigational Rules Act of 1980 (33 U.S.C. 2001 et
 (52)  (e) On those navigable waters of the United States within a    seq.) and to which the Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone
VTS area, the designated VTS frequency is'an additional desig-    Act (33 U.S.C. 1201-1208) applies is exempt from the require-
nated frequency required to be monitored in accordance with    ments in 33 U.S.C. 1203, 1204, and 1205 and the regulations
ï¿½26.05.                                                              under ï¿½ï¿½26.03, 26.04, 26.05, 26.06, and 26.07. Each of these ves-
 (53)  Note: As stated in 47 CFR 80.148(b), a VHF watch on    sels and each person to whom 33 U.S.C. 1208(a) applies must
Channel 16 (156.800 MHz) is not required on vessels subject to    comply with Articles VII, X, XI, XII, XIII, XV, and XVI and
the Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Act and participating    Technical Regulations  1-9 of "The Agreement Between the
in a Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) system when the watch is main-    United States of America and Canada for Promotion of Safety on
tained on both the vessel bridge-to-bridge frequency and a desig-    the Great Lakes by Means of Radio, 1973."
nated VTS frequency.                                                  (67)  ï¿½26.10 Penalties. Section 9 of the Act states-
 (54)  ï¿½26.05 Use of radiotelephone.
                                                                      (68)  (a) Whoever, being the master or person in charge of a
 (55)  Section 5 of the Act states that the radiotelephone required    vessel subject to the Act, fails to enforce or comply with the Act or
by this Act is for the exclusive use of the master or person in
cby this Act is for the person designated by the master or per -    the regulations hereunder; or whoever, being designated by the
charge of the vessel, or  dithe person designated by the master or per-    master or person in charge of a vessel subject to the Act to pilot or
    son in charge to pilot or direct the movement of the vessel, who  direct the movement of a vessel fails to enforce or comply with the
shall maintain a listening watch on the designated frequency.        Act or the regulations hereunder-is liable to a civil penalty of not
Nothing herein shall be interpreted as precluding the use of porta-    more than $500 to be assessed by the Secretary.
ble radiotelephone equipment to satisfy the requirements of this
act.                                                                   (69)  (b) Every vessel navigated in violation of the Act or the
 (56)  ï¿½26.06 Maintenance of radiotelephone; failure of    regulations hereunder is liable to a civil penalty of not more than
radiotelephone. Section 6 of the Act states-                         $500 to be assessed by the Secretary, for which the vessel may be
 (57)  (a) Whenever radiotelephone capability is required by    proceeded against in any District Court of the United States hav-
this Act, a vessel's radiotelephone equipment shall be maintained    ing jurisdiction.
in effective operating condition. If the radiotelephone equipment      (70)  (c) Any penalty assessed under this section may be remit-
carried aboard a vessel ceases to operate, the master shall exercise    ted or mitigated by the Secretary, upon such terms as he may deem
due diligence to restore it or cause it to be restored to effective    proper.




                                              2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                           35




      Table 26.03(f).-VESSEL TRAFFIC SERVICES (VTS) CALL SIGNS, DESIGNATED
                               FREQUENCIES, AND MONITORING AREAS


 Vessel traffic services1    Designated frequency2
       Call Sign             (channel designation)                                    Monitoring area


                                                           New York


New York Traffic3.....     156.700 MHz (Ch. 14) .....  The waters of the Lower New York Bay west of a line drawn from Norton Point
                                                       to Breezy Point and north of a line drawn from Ambrose Entrance Lighted
                                                       Gong Buoy #1 to Ambrose-Channel Lighted Gong Buoy #9 thence to West
                                                       Bank Light and thence to Great Kills Light. The waters of the Upper New York
                                                       Bay, south of 40042.40'N. (Brooklyn Bridge) and 40ï¿½43.70'N. (Holland Tunnel
                                                       Ventilator Shaft); and in Newark Bay, north of 40038.25'N. (Arthur Kill
                                                       Railroad Bridge), and south of 40ï¿½41.95'N. (Lehigh Valley Draw Bridge); and
                                                       the Kill Van Kull.
                          156.550 MHz (Ch. 11) ....  The waters of Raritan Bay east of a line drawn from Great Kills Light to Point
                                                       Comfort in New Jersey and south of a line drawn from Great Kills Light to
                                                       West Bank Light, thence to Ambrose Channel Lighted Gong Buoy #9, and
                                                       thence to Ambrose Channel Lighted Gong Buoy #1, and west of a line drawn
                                                       from Ambrose Channel Lighted Gong Buoy #1 to the Sandy Hook Channel
                                                       Entrance Buoys (Sandy Hook Lighted Gong Buoy #1 and Sandy Hook Lighted
                                                       Bell Buoy #2).
                          156.600 MHz (Ch. 12) ....  Each vessel at anchor within the above areas.

                                                           Houston3


                                                       The navigable waters north of 29ï¿½N., west of 94020'W., south of 29ï¿½49'N., and
                                                       east of 95ï¿½20'W.:
Houston Traffic .......   156.550 MHz (Ch. 11) ....   The navigable waters north of a line extending due west from the southern most
                                                       end of Exxon Dock #1 (29ï¿½43.37'N., 95ï¿½01.27'W.)
                          156.600 MHz (Ch 12) ..        The navigable waters south of a line extending due west from the southern most
                                                       end of Exxon Dock #1 (29ï¿½43.37'N., 95ï¿½01.27'W.).

                                                         Berwick Bay


Berwick Traffic .......  156.550MHz (Ch. 11) .....  The navigable waters south of 29ï¿½45'N., west of 91o10'W., north of 29037'N.,
                                                       and east of 91018'W.

                                                        St. Marys River


Soo Control..........    156.600 MHz (Ch. 12)...   The navigable waters of the St. Marys River between 45ï¿½57'N. (De Tour Reef
                                                       Light) and 46ï¿½38.7'N. (lie Parisienne Light), except the St. Marys Falls Canal
                                                       and those navigable waters east of a line from 46ï¿½04.16'N. and 46001.57'N. (La
                                                       Pointe to Sims Point in Potagannissing Bay and Worsley Bay).

                                                        San Francisco3


San Francisco Traffic ..   156.600 MHz (Ch. 12).....   The waters within a 38 nautical mile radius of Mount Tamalpais (37ï¿½55.8'N.,
                                                       122ï¿½34.6'W.) excluding the San Francisco Offshore Precautionary Area.
                          156.700 MHz (Ch. 14) .....  The waters of the San Francisco Offshore Precautionary Area eastward to San
                                                       Francisco Bay including its tributaries extending to the ports of Stockton,
                                                       Sacramento and Redwood City.



36                                                    2.  NAVIGATION REGULATIONS



    Vessel traffic servicest      Designated frequency2
          Call Sign               (channel designation)                                       Monitoring area


                                                               Puget Sound4


  Seattle Traffic5 ........   156.700 MHz (Ch. 14) .....  The navigable waters of Puget Sound, Hood Canal and adjacent waters south of
                                                             a line connecting Marrowstone Point and Lagoon Point in Admiralty Inlet and
                                                             south of a line drawn due east from the southernmost tip of Possession Point on
                                                             Whidbey Island to the shoreline.
                              156.250 MHz (Ch. 5A) ....   The navigable waters of the Strait of Juan de Fuca east of 124ï¿½40'W. excluding
                                                             the waters in the central portion of the Strait of Juan de Fuca north and east of
                                                             Race Rocks; the navigable waters of the Strait of Georgia east of 122ï¿½52'W.;
                                                             the San Juan Island Archipelago, Rosario Strait, Bellingham Bay; Admiralty
                                                             Inlet north of a line connecting Marrowstone Point and Lagoon Point and all
                                                             waters east of Whidbey Island north of a line drawn due east from the
                                                             southernmost tip of Possession Point on Whidbey Island to the shoreline.
  Tofino Traffic6 ......... 156.725 MHz (Ch. 74) .....   The waters west of 124ï¿½40'W. within 50 nautical miles of the coast of
                                                             Vancouver Island including the waters north of 480N., and east of 127ï¿½W.
  Vancouver Traffic  .....   156.550 MHz (Ch. I 1) .....  The navigable waters of the Strait of Georgia west of 122ï¿½52'W., the navigable
                                                             waters of the central Strait of Juan de Fuca north and east of Race Rocks,
                                                             including the Gulf Island Archipelago, Boundary Pass and Haro Strait.

                                                          Prince William Sound7


  Valdez Traffic ........    156.650 MHz (Ch. 13) ..... The navigable waters south of 61 ï¿½05'N., east of 147'20'W., north of 60ï¿½N., and
                                                             west of 146ï¿½30'W.; and, all navigable waters in Port Valdez.

                                                                 Louisville7


  Louisville Traffic . ..... 15 6.650 MHz (Ch. 13).....   The navigable waters of the Ohio River between McAlpine Locks (Mile 606)
                                                             and Twelve Mile Island (Mile 593), only when the McAlpine upper pool gauge
                                                             is at approximately 13.0 feet or above.

    NOTES:
     I VTS regulations are denoted in 33 CFR Part 161. All geographic coordinates (latitude and longitude) are expressed in North American
  Datum of 1983 (NAD 83).
    2 In the event of a communication failure either by the vessel traffic center or the vessel or radio congestion on a designated VTS
  frequency, communications may be established on an alternate VTS frequency. The bridge-to-bridge navigational frequency, 156.650 MHz
  (Channel 13), is monitored in each VTS area; and it may be used as an alternate frequency, however, only to the extent that doing so
  provides a level of safety beyond that provided by other means.
    3 Designated frequency monitoring is required within U.S. navigable waters. In areas which are outside the U.S. navigable waters,
  designated frequency monitoring is voluntary. However, prospective VTS Users are encouraged to monitor the designatedfrequency.
    4 A Cooperative Vessel Traffic Service was established by the United States and Canada within adjoining waters. The appropriate vessel
  traffic center administers the rules issued by both nations; however, it will enforce only its own set of rules within its jurisdiction.
    5 Seattle Traffic may direct a vessel to monitor the other primary VTS frequency 156.250 MHz or 156.700 MHz (Channel 5A or 14)
  depending on traffic density, weather conditions, or other safety factors, rather than strictly adhering to the designated frequency required
  for each monitoring area as defined above. This does not require a vessel to monitor both primary frequencies.
    6 A portion of Tofino Sector's monitoring area extends beyond the defined CVTS area. Designated frequency monitoring is voluntary in
  these portions outside of VTS jurisdiction, however, prospective VTS Users are encouraged to monitor the designated frequency.
    7 The bridge-to-bridge navigational frequency, 156.650 MHz (Channel 13), is used in these VTSs because the level of radiotelephone
  transmissions does not warrant a designated VTS frequency. The listening watch required by ï¿½26.05 of this chapter is not limited to the
  monitoring area.




                                                  2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                        37


PART 67-AIDS TO NAVIGATION ON ARTIFICIAL                             Continental Shelf Lands Act (43 U.S.C. 1333). By a rule in 49
ISLANDS AND FIXED STRUCTURES (in part)                               CFR 1.9 the Secretary continued in effect actions taken prior to
SUBPART 67.01-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS                                   April 1, 1967. By rules in 49 CFR 1.4 (a) (2) and (f) the Secretary
 (71)  ï¿½67.01-1 Scope.                                              of Transportation authorized the Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard,
 (72)  (a) The regulations in this part prescribe the obstruction    with respect to his own organization, to exercise the authority
lights and fog signals to be operated as privately maintained mari-    granted to the Secretary as Executive head of that department by
time aids to navigation on the artificial islands and structures    any statute, Executive order or regulation. Section 1657 (e) of
which are erected on or over the seabed and subsoil of the Outer    Title 49 U. S. C. provides for delegation and redelegation of pow-
Continental Shelf and in the waters under the jurisdiction of the    ers and functions vested in the Secretary. By a rule in 49 CFR 1.4
United States, for the purpose of exploring for, developing,         (g) the Commandant is authorized to redelegate and authorize suc-
removing and transporting resources therefrom.                       cessive redelegations within the organization under his jurisdic-
 (73)  (b) Subpart 66.01 in Part 66 of this subchapter shall be    tion.
applicable to all private aids to navigation erected on or over the   (83)  (b) Delegation of functions. The Coast Guard District
Outer Continental Shelf in the same manner and to the same           Commander is hereby delegated responsibility for performing, or
extent as they are applicable.to private aids to navigation estab-    having performed the inspections, enforcement, and administra-
lished, erected, or maintained in the waters under the jurisdiction    tion of such regulations, which are or may be required. He may
of the United States. 0            :                         R       redelegate this authority as necessary to any person from the civil-
 (74)  ï¿½67.01-5 Definitions.                                        ian or military branch of the Coast Guard.
 (75)  (a) Structures. The term "structures" as used in this part     (84)  ï¿½67.01-15 Classification of structures.
shall include all fixed structures, temporary or permanent, for       (85)  (a) The varied depths of water and marine commerce traf-
which a Corps of Engineers' permit is issued. It shall include, but
is not necessarily limited to, all drilling platforms, production plat-    Shelf, and in other waters permit the classification of structures
forms, quarters platforms, pipe line riser platforms, manifold plat-    according to their location in such waters. Those structures in the
forms, loading platforms, boat landings, caissons, well protective    areaseaward of the line of demarcation prescribed by the regula-
structures, tank battery barges submerged on station, drilling
structures, tank battery barges submerged on station, drilling    tions in this part, are designated as Class "A" structures. All struc-
barges submerged on location, breakwater barges submerged on    tures shoreward of the line of demarcation, prescribed by the
location, artificial islands and all other piles, pile clusters, pipes, or
                                                                     regulations in this part, are designated as either Class "B" or Class
structures erected in the waters.                                    "C" structures.
 (76)  (b) Class "A", "B", or "C" structures. The term "Class A,
B, or C structures" refers to the classification assigned to struc-e of demarcation is not prescribed
  l o      r C              .      s        .rcures" erecter  to theclassinhican c esignedin  rntostru  District Commander shall designate a structure "A", "B", or "C"
tures erected in areas in which corresponding requirements for    as he deems appropriate.
                                                                     as he deems appropriate.
marking are prescribed.
                                                                      (87)  ï¿½67.01-20 Prescribing lines of demarcation.
 (77)  (c) Line of demarcation. The term "line of demarcation"
means the dividing line used administratively to distinguish          (11)  In those areas where lines of demarcation are not pre-
between the areas in which structures shall conform to Class "A"     scribed, or where they have been prescribed and require modifica-
and Class "B" or "C" requirements.                                   tion, the District Commander shall submit his recommendations
 (78)  (d) Outer Continental Shelf. The term "Outer Continental     thereon to the Commandant for establishment or changes as
Shelf' means all submerged lands lying seaward and outside the    required When approved by the Commandant, and upon publica-
area of lands beneath navigable waters as defined in the Sub-    tion in the Federal Register, such additions or changes in lines of
merged Lands Act (sec. 2, 67 Stat. 29, 43 U. S. C. 1301), and of    demarcation shall be effective for the purposes of this part.
which the subsoil and seabed appertain to the United States and        (89)  ï¿½67.01-30 Equivalents.
are subject to its jurisdiction and control.                          (90)  The use of alternate equipment, apparatus, or installation
  (79)  (e) Reliable operation. The term "reliable" as used in this    arrangements specified in this part may be permitted by the Dis-
part shall mean that dependability which will insure to the highest    trict Commander to such extent and under such conditions as will
degree reasonably possible the uninterrupted operation of lights    result in achieving a degree of safety or compliance with these
and fog signals as private aids to navigation for safety of marine    regulations equivalent to or above the minimum requirements set
commerce.                                                            forth in this part.
 (so)   (f) Fog signal. The term "fog signal" as used in this part
shall mean the audible sound signal, authorized as a private aid to    SUBPART 67.05-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
navigation, to mark a structure for the safety of marine commerce    LIGHTS
whenever the visibility has been reduced by fog, mist, rain, falling  (91)  ï¿½67.05-1 Arrangement of obstruction lights.
snow, smoke, dust, or other phenomena.                                (92)  (a) Structures having a maximum horizontal dimension of
  (81)  ï¿½67.01-10 Authority to regulate and delegation of    30 feet or less on any one side, or in diameter, shall be required to
functions.                                                           have one obstruction light visible for 360ï¿½.
  (82)  (a) Regulatory authority. By virtue of the Department of       (93)  (b) Structures having a maximum horizontal dimension of
Transportation Act (Pub. L. 89-670, 80 Stat. 931-950, 49 U. S. C.    over 30 feet, but not in excess of 50 feet, on any one side, or in
1651-1659), establishing the Department of Transportation, the    diameter, shall be required to have two obstruction lights installed
U.S. Coast Guard together with its functions and duties under the    on diagonally opposite corners, 180ï¿½ apart, or as prescribed by the
Secretary of the Treasury was transferred to the new department.    District Commander, each light to have a 360ï¿½ lens.
The Secretary of Transportation thereby became the "head of the       (94)  (c) Structures having a horizontal dimension of over 50
Department in which the Coast Guard is operating," including the    feet on any one side, or in diameter, shall be required to have an
authority to promulgate and enforce regulations under the Outer    obstruction light on each corner, or 90ï¿½ apart in the case of circular




38                                               2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


structures, or as prescribed by the District Commander, each light    Class "B" or Class "C" requirements are otherwise applicable.
to have a 360ï¿½ lens.                                                The requirements for the lights in any of these cases, shall not
 (95)  (d) Where the overall dimensions of a structure require the    exceed those established for structures in the Class "A" areas.
installation of two or more obstruction lights, the lights shall all be
mounted on the same horizontal plane within the limitations of    SUBPART 67.10-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FOG
height specified in ï¿½67.20-5, ï¿½67.25-5, or ï¿½67.30-5, as applica-    SIGNALS
ble.                                                                  (108)  ï¿½67.10-1 Apparatus requirements.
 (96)  (e) Lesser structures and piles, pile clusters or flare tem-  (109) The fog signal required by ï¿½ï¿½67.20-10, 67.25-10, and
plates, etc., will not normally be required to be marked by obstruc-    67.30-10 must:
tion lights, when they are located within 100 yards of a Class "A",  (no)  (a) Have its maximum intensity at a frequency between
"B" or "C" structure marked by established obstruction lights, but    100 and 1,100 Hertz;
they shall be marked with red or white retro-reflective material,    (111)  (b) Sound a 2-second blast every 20 seconds (2 seconds
installed as prescribed by the District Commander.                  sound, 18 seconds silence) unless otherwise authorized by the Dis-
 (97)  (f) All obstruction lights shall be installed in a manner    trict Commander;
which will permit at least one of them to be carried in sight of the  (112) (c) Have the range required by ï¿½67.20-10, ï¿½67.25-10, or
mariner, regardless of the angle of approach, until he is within 50    ï¿½67.30-10;
feet of the structure visibility permitting.                          (113) (d) Have a height not exceeding 25 feet;
 (98)  ï¿½67.05-5 Multiple obstruction lights.                         (114)  (e) Have not more than eight sound sources;
 (99)  When more than one obstruction light is required by this      (115)  (f) Be approved by the Coast Guard under ï¿½67.10-15; and
part to mark a structure, all such lights shall be operated to flash in  (116)  (g) Be permanently marked with:
unison.                                                              (117)  (1) The date of Coast Guard approval;
 (100)  ï¿½67.05-10 Characteristics of obstruction lights.             (118)  (2) The manufacturer and date of manufacture;
 (0ol) All obstruction lights required by this part shall be pow-    (119)  (3) A model designation;
ered from a reliable power source, including auxiliary power          (120)  (4) The approved range; and
sources as necessary. They shall display a quick-flash characteris-  (121)  (5) The power necessary to comply with the provisions
tic of approximately 60 flashes per minute, unless prescribed oth-    of paragraph (c) of this section.
erwise in the permit issued by the District Commander. Their          (122)  ï¿½67.10-5 Location requirements.
color shall be white when marking Class "A" and "B" structures,      (123) The fog signal required by ï¿½ï¿½67.20-10, 67.25-10, and
and either white or red, as prescribed by the District Commander,   67.30-10 must:
when marking Class "C" structures. In determining whether white      (124)  (a) Be located on the structure so that the sound signal pro-
or red lights shall be authorized, the District Commander shall    duced is audible over 360ï¿½ in a horizontal plane at all ranges up to
take into consideration matters concerning, but not necessarily    and including the required range; and
limited to, the dimensions of the structure and the depth of water   (125) (b) Be located at least 10 feet but not more than 150 feet
in which it is located; the proximity of the structure to vessel    above mean high water.
routes; the nature and amount of vessel traffic; and the effect of   (126)  ï¿½67.10-10 Operating requirements.
background lighting.                                                 (127)  (a) Fog signals required by ï¿½ï¿½67.20-10, 67.25-10 and
 (102)  ï¿½67.05-15 Operating periods of obstruction lights.         67.30-10 must be operated continuously, regardless of visibility,
 (103)  Obstruction lights shall be displayed at all times between    unless the fog signal is controlled:
the hours of sunset and sunrise, local time, commencing at the       (128)   (1) By an attendant on the structure;
time the construction of a structure is begun. During construction    (129)  (2) Remotely by an attendant on a nearby structure; or
and until such time as a platform capable of supporting the          (130)   (3) By a fog detection device capable of activating the
obstruction lights is completed, the fixed lights on an attending    fog signal when the visibility in any direction is reduced to the
vessel shall be used. In addition, when lights are in use for general    range at which fog signal operation is required by this part.
illumination to facilitate the construction or operation of a struc-  (131)  (b) During construction and until such time as a fog signal
ture, and can be seen from any angle of approach at a distance    is installed and operating on a platform, the whistle of an attending
equal to that prescribed for the obstruction lights for the class of    vessel moored alongside the platform may be used to sound the
structure, the actual operation of obstruction lights also will not be    signal required for the structure by this part.
required.                                                            (132)  ï¿½67.10-15  Approval of fog signals.
 (104) ï¿½67.05-20 Minimum lighting requirements.                      (133)  (a) The Coast Guard approves a fog signal if:
 (105)  The obstruction lighting requirements prescribed in this     (134)   (I) It meets the requirements for fog signals in ï¿½67.10-
part are the minimum requirements only and shall not preclude the    1(a), (b), (c), (d), and (e) when tested under ï¿½67.10-20; or
maintainer from making application for authorization to establish    (135) (2) It is similar to a fog signal which was tested and
more lights, or lights of greater intensity than required to be visi-    approved under the provisions of this section and the Coast Guard
ble at the distances prescribed: provided, that the prescribed char-    has approved all variations in design, construction, production,
acteristics of color and flash duration are adhered to.             and manufacture from the fog signal tested.
 (106) ï¿½67.05-25 Special lighting requirements.                      (136)  (b) A fog signal that is an identical production model of a
 (107)  Whenever a structure is erected in a position on or adja-    fog signal which has been approved under paragraph (a) of this
cent to the edges of navigable channels and fairways, or lines of    section is a Coast Guard approved fog signal.
demarcation, the District Commander is authorized to require the
structure to be marked by the lights which in his judgment are nec-    Part 80-COLREGS Demarcation Lines
essary for the safety of marine commerce, and without regard to      (137)  ï¿½80.01 General basis and purpose of demarcation
the fact that the structure may be located in an area in which either    lines. (a) The regulations in this part establish the lines of demar-




                                                 2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                       39


cation delineating those waters upon which mariners shall comply     (154)  (2) No vessel may anchor in this anchorage without noti-
with the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at    fying the vessel traffic center in Valdez; and
Sea, 1972 (72 COLREGS) and those waters upon which mariners          (155)  (3) Each vessel anchored shall notify the vessel traffic
shall comply with the Inland Navigation Rules.                      center in Valdez when it weighs anchor.
 (138) (b) The waters inside of the lines are Inland Rules waters.
The waters outside the lines are COLREGS waters.                    Part 160-Ports and Waterways Safety-General
 (139)  (C) Geographic coordinates expressed in terms of latitude    Subpart A-General
or longitude, or both, are not intended for plotting on maps or      (156)  ï¿½160.1 Purpose.
charts whose referenced horizontal datum is the North American       (157) (a) This subchapter contains regulations implementing
Datum of 1983 (NAD 83), unless such geographic coordinates are    the Ports and Waterways Safety Act (33 U.S.C. 1221) and related
expressly labeled NAD 83. Geographic coordinates without the    statutes.
NAD 83 reference may be plotted on maps or charts referenced to      (158) ï¿½160.3 Definitions.
NAD 83 only after application of the appropriate corrections that    (159)  For the purposes of this subchapter:
are published on the particular map or chart being used.             (160)  "Bulk" means material in any quantity that is shipped,
 (140) ï¿½80.1705 Alaska                                             stored, or handled without the benefit of package, label, mark or
 (141) The 72 COLREGS shall apply on all the sounds, bays,    count and carried in integral or fixed independent tanks.
harbors, and inlets of Alaska.                                       (161)  "Captain of the Port" means the Coast Guard officer desig-
                                                                   nated by the Commandant to command a Captain of the Port Zone
Part 110.-Anchorage Regulations                                     as described in part 3 of this chapter.
 (142) ï¿½110.1 General. (a) The areas described in Subpart A of       (162) "Commandant" means the Commandant of the United
this part are designated as special anchorage areas pursuant to the    States Coast Guard.
authority contained in an act amending laws for preventing colli-    (163)  "Commanding Officer, Vessel Traffic Services" means the
sions of vessels approved April 22, 1940 (54 Stat. 150); Article 11    Coast Guard officer designated by the Commandant to command a
of section 1 of the act of June 7, 1897, as amended (30 Stat. 98; 33    Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) as described in part 161 of this chap-
U.S.C. 180), Rule 9 of section 1 of the act of February 8, 1895, as    ter.
amended (28 Stat. 647; 33 U.S.C. 258), and Rule Numbered 13 of       (164)  "Deviation" means any departure from any rule in this
section 4233 of the Revised Statutes as amended (33 U.S.C. 322).    subchapter.
Vessels not more than 65 feet in length, when at anchor in any spe-  (165) "District Commander" means the Coast Guard officer des-
cial anchorage area, shall not be required to carry or exhibit the    ignated by the Commandant to command a Coast Guard District
white anchor lights required by the Navigation Rules.:              as described in part 3 of this chapter.
 (143) (b) The anchorage grounds for vessels described in Sub-       (166) "ETA" means estimated time of arrival.
part B of this part are established, and the rules and regulations in  (167)  "Length of Tow" means, when towing with a hawser, the
relation thereto adopted, pursuant to the authority contained in    length in feet from the stern of the towing vessel to the stern of the
section 7 of the act of March 4, 1915, as amended (38 Stat. 1053;    last vessel in tow. When pushing ahead or towing alongside,
33 U.S.C. 471).                                                     length of tow means the tandem length in feet of the vessels in tow
 (144)  (c) All bearings in this part are referred to true meridian.  excluding the length of the towing vessel.
 (145)  (d) Geographic coordinates expressed in terms of latitude    (168)  "Person" means an individual, firm, corporation, associa-
or longitude, or both, are not intended for plotting on maps or    tion, partnership, or governmental entity.
charts whose referenced horizontal datum is the North American       (169)  "State" means each of the several States of the United
Datum of:1983 (NAD 83), unless such geographic coordinates are    States, the District of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto
expressly labeled NAD 83. Geographic coordinates without the    Rico, Guam, American Samoa, the United States Virgin Islands,
NAD 83 reference may be plotted on maps or charts referenced to    the Trust Territories of the Pacific Islands, the Commonwealth of
NAD 83 only after application of the appropriate corrections that    the Northern Marianas Islands, and any other commonwealth, ter-
are published on the particular map or chart being used.            ritory, or possession of the United States.
                                                                     (170) "Tanker" means a self-propelled tank vessel constructed
Subpart A-Special Anchorage Areas (None applicable to this          or adapted primarily to carry oil or hazardous materials in bulk in
Coast Pilot.)                                                       the cargo spaces.
Subpart B-Anchorage Grounds            -                             (171)  "Tank Vessel" means a vessel that is constructed or
  ancg(146)e ï¿½g110.233I Prince William Sound, Alaska.bg(a) The    adapted to carry, or that carries, oil or hazardous material in bulk
anchorage grounds. In Prince William Sound, Alaska, beginning    as cargo or cargo residue
at a point at latitude 60040'00"N., longitude 146040'00"W.; thence
                 ~~~s~~~~~~~outh to  ~(172) "Vehicle" means every type of conveyance capable of
                                                                    being used as a means of transportation on land.
 .1471 60ï¿½38'00"N., 146ï¿½40'00"W.: thence east to
                                                                     (173)  "Vessel" means every description of watercraft or other
  (148)  60038'00"N., 1 46'30'00"W.; thence north to                artificial contrivance used, or capable of being used, as a means of
  (149)  60ï¿½39'00"N., 146030'00"W.; thence northwesterly to the    transportation on water.
beginninlg poinlt.          .                                 j    (174)  "Vessel Traffic Services (VTS)" means a service imple-
  (lo0) (b) The regulations. (I) This anchorage area is for the    mented under Part 161 of this chapter by the United States Coast
temporary use of vessels during:                                    Guard designed to improve the safety and efficiency of vessel traf-
  s(51l  (i) Adverse weather or tidal conditions;                   fic and to protect the environment. The VTS has the capability to
  (1s2) (ii) Vessel equipment failure; or                           interact with marine traffic and respond to traffic situations devel-
  (153) (iii) Delays at Port Valdez;                                oping in the VTS area.



40                                                 2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


  (175)  "Vessel Traffic Service Area or VTS Area" means the geo-      Prior to issuing the ruling, the District Commander may, as a mat-
graphical area encompassing a specific VTS area of service as    ter of discretion, allow oral presentation on the issues.
described in Part 161 of this chapter. This area of service may be      (l86)  (c) Any person directly affected by the establishment of a
subdivided into sectors for the purpose of allocating responsibility  safety zone or by an order or direction issued by a District Com-
to individual Vessel Traffic Centers or to identify different operat-    mander, or who receives an unfavorable ruling on an appeal taken
ing requirements.                                                     under paragraph (b) of this section, may appeal through the Dis-
  (176)  Note: Although regulatory jurisdiction is limited to the    trict Commander to the Chief, Office of Marine Safety, Security
navigable waters of the United States, certain vessels will be        and Environmental Protection, U.S. Coast Guard, Washington,
encouraged or may be required, as a condition of port entry, to    D.C. 20593. The appeal must be in writing, except as allowed
report beyond this area to facilitate traffic management within the    under paragraph (d) of this section. The District Commander for-
VTS area.                                                             wards the appeal, all the documents and evidence which formed
  (177)  "VTS Special Area" means a waterway within a VTS area    the record upon which the order or direction was issued or the rul-
in which special operating requirements apply.                        ing under paragraph (b) of this section was made, and any com-
  (178)  ï¿½160.5 Delegations.                                           ments which might be relevant, to the Chief, Office of Marine
                                                                     Safety, Security and Environmental Protection. A copy of this
  (179)  (a) District Commanders and Captains of the Ports are
                                                                     documentation and evidence is made available to the appellant.
                  delegatedUnder the    ovit stios ofetyCP 6o.       The appellant is afforded five working days from the date of
  (180)  (b) Under the provisions of 33 ICFR 6.04-1 and 6.04-6,    receipt to submit rebuttal materials to the Chief, Office of Marine
District Commanders and Captains of the Ports have been dele-    Safety, Security and Environmental Protection. The decision of
gated authority to establish security zones.                          the Chief, Office of Marine Safety, Security and Environmental
  (181)  (c) Under the provisions 33 CFR ï¿½1.05-1, District Com-        Protection is based upon the materials submitted, without oral
manders have been delegated authority to establish regulated navi-    argument or presentation. The decision of the Chief, Office of
gation area.                                                          Marine Safety, Security and Environmental Protection is issued in
 (182)  (d) Subject to the supervision of the cognizant Captain of    writing and constitutes final agency action.
the Port and District Commander, Commanding Officers, Vessel            (187)  (d) If the delay in presenting a written appeal would have
Traffic Services are delegated authority under 33 CFR 1.01-30 to    significant adverse impact on the appellant, the appeal under para-
discharge the duties of the Captain of the Port that involve direct-    graphs (b) and (c) of this section may initially be presented orally.
ing the operation, movement, and anchorage of vessels within a    If an initial presentation of the appeal is made orally, the appellant
Vessel Traffic Service area including management of vessel traffic    must submit the appeal in writing within five days of the oral pre-
within anchorages, regulated navigation areas and safety zones,       sentation to the Coast Guard official to whom the presentation was
and to enforce Vessel Traffic Service and ports and waterways         made. The written appeal must contain, at a minimum, the basis
safety regulations. This authority may be exercised by Vessel    for the appeal and a summary of the material presented orally. If
Traffic Center personnel. The Vessel Traffic Center may, within    requested, the official to whom the appeal is directed may stay the
the Vessel Traffic Service Area, provide information, make recom-    effect of the action while the ruling is being appealed.
mendations, or, to a vessel required under Part 161 of this chapter
to participate in a Vessel Traffic Service, issue an order, including    Subpart B-Control of Vessel and Facility Operations
an order to operate or anchor as directed; required the vessel to       (188)  ï¿½160.101 Purpose.
comply with orders issued; specify times of entry, movement or          (189)  This subpart describes the authority exercised by District
departing; restrict operations as necessary for safe operation under    Commanders and Captains of the Ports to insure the safety of ves-
the circumstances; or take other action necessary for control of the    sels and waterfront facilities, and the protection of the navigable
vessel and the safety of the port or of the marine environment.       waters and the resources therein. The controls described in this
 (183)  ï¿½160.7 Appeals.                                               subpart are directed to specific situations and hazards.
 (184)  (a) Any person directly affected by a safety zone or an        (190)  ï¿½160.103 Applicability.
order or direction issued under this subchapter (33 CFR Subchap-        (191)  (a) This subpart applies to any-
ter P) may request reconsideration by the official who issued it or     (192)  (1) Vessel on the navigable waters of the United States,
in whose name it was issued. This request may be made orally or    except as provided in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section;
in writing, and the decision of the official receiving the request      (193)  (2) Bridge or other structure on or in the navigable waters
may be rendered orally or in writing.                                 of the United States; and
 (185)  (b) Any person directly affected by the establishment of a     (194)  (3) Land structure or shore area immediately adjacent to
safety zone or by an order or direction issued by, or on behalf of, a    the navigable waters of the United States.
Captain of the Port may appeal to the District Commander through        (195)  (b) This subpart does not apply to any vessel on the Saint
the Captain of the Port. The appeal must be in writing, except as    Lawrence Seaway.
allowed under paragraph (d) of this section, and shall contain          (196)  (c) Except pursuant to international treaty, convention, or
complete supporting documentation and evidence which the    agreement, to which the United States is a party, this subpart does
appellant wishes to have considered. Upon receipt of the appeal,      not apply to any foreign vessel that is not destined for, or departing
the District Commander may direct a representative to gather and    from, a port or place subject to the jurisdiction of the United States
submit documentation or other evidence which would be neces-    and that is in-
sary or helpful to a resolution of the appeal. A copy of this docu-     (197) (1) Innocent passage through the territorial sea of the
mentation and evidence is made available to the appellant. The        United States;
appellant is afforded five working days from the date of receipt to     (198)  (2) Transit through the navigable waters of the United
submit rebuttal materials. Following submission of all materials,    States which form a part of an international strait.
the District Commander issues a ruling, in writing, on the appeal.      (199)  ï¿½160.105 Compliance with orders.




                                                  2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                       41


 (200) Each person who has notice of the terms of an order issued    (217)  (3) Does not comply with applicable vessel traffic service
under this subpart must comply with that order.                     requirements;
 (201)  ï¿½160.107 Denial of entry.                                    (218)  (4) While underway, does not have at least one licensed
 (202)  Each District Commander or Captain of the Port, subject    deck officer on the navigation bridge who is capable of communi-
to recognized principles of international law, may deny entry into    cating in the English language.
the navigable waters of the United States or to any port or place    (219)  (c) When a vessel has been prohibited from operating in
under the jurisdiction of the United States, and within the district    the navigable waters of the United States under paragraphs (a) or
or zone of that District Commander or Captain of the Port, to any    (b) of this section, the District Commander or Captain of the Port
vessel not in compliance with the provisions of the Port and    may allow provisional entry into the navigable waters of the
Tanker Safety Act (33 U.S.C. 1221-1232) or the regulations issued    United States, or into any port or place under the jurisdiction of
thereunder.                                                         the United States and within the district or zone of that District
 (203)  ï¿½160.109 Waterfront facility safety.                       Commander or Captain of the Port, if the owner or operator of
 (2o4)  (a) To prevent damage to, or destruction of, any bridge or    such vessel proves to the satisfaction of the District Commander
other structure on or in the navigable waters of the United States,    or Captain of the Port, that the vessel is not unsafe or does not
or any land structure or shore area immediately adjacent to those    pose a threat to the marine environment, and that such entry is
waters, and to protect the navigable waters and the resources    necessary for the safety of the vessel or the persons on board.
therein from harm resulting from vessel or structure damage,         (220) (d) A vessel which has been prohibited from operating in
destruction, or loss, each District Commander or Captain of the    the navigable waters of the United States, or from transferring
Port may-                                                           cargo or residue in a port or place under the jurisdiction of the
 (205)  (1) Direct the handling, loading, unloading, storage, stow-    United States under the provisions of paragraph (a) or (b)(l), (2)
age, and movement (including the emergency removal, control,    or (3) of this section, may be allowed provisional entry if the
and disposition) of explosives or other dangerous articles and sub-    owner or operator proves, to the satisfaction of the District Com-
stances, including oil or hazardous material as those terms are    mander or Captain of the Port that has jurisdiction, that the vessel
defined in Section 4417a of the Revised-Statutes, as amended, (46    is no longer unsafe or a threat to the environment, and that the
U.S.C. 391a) on any structure on or in the navigable waters of the    condition which gave rise to the prohibition no longer exists.
United States, or any land structure or shore area immediately       (221)  ï¿½160.115 Withholding of clearance.
adjacent to those waters; and
                                                                      (222)  (a) Each District Commander or Captain of the Port may
 (206)  (2) Conduct examinations to assure compliance with the    request the Secretary of the Treasury, or the authorized representa-
safety equipment requirements for structures.                       tive thereof, to withhold or revoke the clearance required by 46
 (207)  ï¿½160.111 Special orders applying to vessel operations.     U.S.C. 91 of any vessel, the owner or operator of which is subject
 (208)  Each District Commander or Captain of the Port may    to any penalties under 33 U.S.C. 1232.
order a vessel to operate or anchor in the manner directed when-
 (209) (a) The District Commander or Captain of the Port has    Subpart C-Notifications of Arrivals, Departures, Hazardous
reasonable cause to believe that the vessel is not in compliance    Conditions, and Certain Dangerous Cargoes
with any regulation, law or treaty;              -                   (223)  ï¿½160.201 Applicability and exceptions to applicability.
 (210)  (b) The District Commander or Captain of the Port deter-     (224)  (a) Thissubpartprescribesnotificationrfor
                                                                      (224) (a) This subpart prescribes notification requirements for
mines that the vessel does not satisfy the conditions for vessel    U.S. and foreign vessels bound for or departing from ports or
operation and cargo transfers specified in ï¿½160.113; or
                                                                     places in the United States.
 (211)  (c) The District Commander or Captain of the Port has
                                                                      (225)  (b) This part does not apply to recreational vessels under
determined that such order is justified in the interest of safety by    46 U. S.C. 4301  e      t seq. and, except ï¿½ 160.215, does not apply to
                                                                    46 U.S.C. 4301 et seq. and, except ï¿½160.215, does not apply to
reason of weather, visibility, sea conditions, temporary port con-
gestion, other temporary hazardous circumstances, or the condi- passenger and supply vessels when they are employed in the
gestion of ther vesselmporary hazardous circumstances, or the co    exploration for or in the removal of oil, gas, or mineral resources
tion of the vessel.
                                                                    on the continental shelfi
 (212) ï¿½160.113 Prohibition of vessel operation and cargo
transfers.                                                           (226)  (c) Sections 160.207 and 160.209 do not apply to the fol-
                                                                     lowing:
 (213) (a) Each District Commander or Captain of the Port may      lowing:
prohibit any vessel subject to the provisions of section 4417a of    (227)  (1) Each vessel of less than 1600 gross tons, except for-
the Revised Statutes (46 U.S.C. 391 a) from operating in the navi-    eign vessels of less than 1600 gross tons entering ports or places in
gable waters of the United States, or from transferring cargo or    the Miami Captain of the Port Zone as described in ï¿½3.35-10(b) of
residue in any port or place under the jurisdiction of the United    this chapter.
States, and within the district or zone of that District Commander   (228)  (2) Each vessel operating exclusively within a Captain of
or Captain of the Port, if the District Commander or the Captain of    the Port zone.
the Port determines that the vessel's history of accidents, pollution  (229) (3) Each vessel operating upon a route that is described in
incidents, or serious repair problems creates reason to believe that    a schedule that is submitted to the Captain of the Port for each port
the vessel may be unsafe or pose a threat to the marine environ-    or place of destination listed in the schedule at least 24 hours in
ment.                                                               advance of the first date and time of arrival listed on the schedule
 (214)  (b) The authority to issue orders prohibiting operation of    and contains-
the vessels or transfer of cargo or residue under paragraph (a) of   (230) (i) Name, country of registry, and call sign or official
this section also applies if the vessel:                            number of the vessel;
 (215) (1) Fails to comply with any applicable regulation;           (231) (ii) Each port or place of destination; and
 (216) (2) Discharges oil or hazardous material in violation of      (232) (iii) Dates and times of arrivals and departures at those
any law or treaty of the United States;                             ports or places.





42                                                 2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


  (233)  (4) Each vessel arriving at a port or place under force        (269)  "Great Lakes" means Lakes Superior, Michigan, Huron,
majeure.                                                              Erie, and Ontario, their connecting and tributary waters, the Saint
  (234)  (5) Each vessel entering a port of call in the United States.    Lawrence River as far east as Saint Regis, and adjacent port areas.
in compliance with the Automated Mutual Assistance Vessel Res-          (270)  "Hazardous condition" means any condition that could
cue System (AMVER).                                                   adversely affect the safety of any vessel, bridge, structure, or shore
  (235)  (6) Each vessel entering a port of call in the United States    area or the environmental quality of any port, harbor, or navigable
in compliance with the U.S. Flag Merchant Vessel Locator Filing    water of the United States. This condition could include but is not
System (USMER).                                                       limited to, fire, explosion, grounding, leakage, damage, illness of a
  (236)  (7) Each barge.                                               person on board, or a manning shortage.
  (237)  (8) Each public vessel.                                        (271)  "Port or place of departure" means any port or place in
  (238)  (9) United States or Canadian flag vessels, except tank    which a vessel is anchored or moored.
vessels or vessels carrying certain dangerous cargo, which operate      (272)  "Port or place of destination" means any port or place to
solely on the Great Lakes.                                            which a vessel is bound to anchor or moor.
  (239)  (d) Sections 160.207, 160.211, and 160.213 apply to each       (273)  "Public vessel" means a vessel owned by and being used
vessel upon the waters of the Mississippi River between its mouth     in the public service of the United States. This definition does not
and mile 235, Lower Mississippi River, above Head of Passes.          include a vessel owned by the United States and engaged in a
Sections 160.207, 160.211, and 160.213 do not apply to each ves-    trade or commercial service or a vessel under contract or charter to
sel upon the waters of the Mississippi River between its sources    the United States.
and mile 235, above Head of Passes, and all the tributaries empty-      (274)  ï¿½160.205 Waivers.
ing thereinto and their tributaries, and that part of the Atchafalaya   (275) The Captain of the Port may waive, within that Captain of
River above its junction with the Plaquemine-Morgan City alter-    the Port's designated zone, any of the requirement of this subpart
nate waterway, and the Red River of the North.                        for any vessel or class of vessels upon finding that the vessel,
  (240)  ï¿½160.203 Definitions.                                         route, area of operations, conditions of the voyage, or other cir-
 (241)  As used in this subpart:                                      cumstances are such that application of this subpart is unnecessary
 (242)  "Agent" means any person, partnership, firm, company or    or impractical for purposes of safety, environmental protection, or
corporation engaged by the owner or charterer of a vessel to act in    national security.
their behalf in matters concerning the vessel.                          (276)  ï¿½160.207 Notice of arrival: vessels bound for ports or
 (243)  "Carried in'bulk" means a commodity that is loaded or    places in the United States.
carried on board a vessel without containers or labels and received     (277)  (a) The owner, master, agent or person in charge of a ves-
and handled without mark or count.                                    sel on a voyage of 24 hours or more shall report under paragraph
 (244)  "Certain dangerous cargo" includes any of the following:      (c) of this section at least 24 hours before entering the port or
 (245)  (a) Class A explosives, as defined in 46 CFR 146.20-7         place of destination.
and 49 CFR 173.53.                                                      (278)  (b) The owner, master, agent, or person in charge of a ves-
 (246)  (b) Oxidizing materials or blasting agents for which a per-    sel on a voyage of less than 24 hours shall report under paragraph
mit is required under 49 CFR 176.415.                                 (c) of this section before departing the port or place of departure.
 (247)  (c) Highway route controlled quantity radioactive mate-        (279)  (c) The Captain of the Port of the port or place of destina-
rial, as defined in 49 CFR 173.403(1), or Fissile Class III ship-    tion in the United States must be notified of:
ments of fissile radioactive material, as defined in 49 CFR             (280)  (1) The name, country of registry, and call sign or official
1 73.455(a)(3).                                                       number of the vessel;
 (248) (d) Each cargo under Table 1 of 46 CFR Part 153 when            (281)  (2) The name of the port or place of departure.
carried in bulk.                                                        (282) (3) The name of the port or place of destination; and
 (249)  (e) Any of the following when carried in bulk:                 (283)  (4) The estimated time of arrival at the port or place.
 (250)  Acetaldehyde                                                   (284)  If the estimated time of arrival changes by more than six
 (251) Ammonia, anhydrous                                             hours from the latest reported time, the Captain of the port must be
 (252)  Butadiene                                                     notified of the correction as soon as the change is known.
 (253)  Butane                                                         (285)  (5) The International Maritime Organization (IMO) inter-
 (254)  Butene                                                        national number of each foreign flag vessel of 5,000 gross tons or
 (255) Butylene Oxide                                                 more, which is constructed or adapted to carry, or that carries, oil
 (256)  Chlorine                                                      in bulk as cargo or cargo residue.
 -(256)                                       Chlorine(286)  ï¿½160.209 [Reserved]
 (257)  Ethane                                                         (287)  ï¿½160.211 Notice of arrival: vessels carrying certain
 (258)  Ethylene                                                      dangerous cargo.
 (259)  Ethylene Oxide                                                 (288)  (a) The owner, master, agent, or person in charge of a ves-
 (260) Methane                                                        sel, except a barge, bound for a port or place in the United States
 (261)  Methyl Acetylene, Propadiene Mixture, Stablized               carrying certain dangerous cargo shall notify the Captain of the
 (262)  Methyl Bromide                                                Port of the port or place of destination at least 24 hours before
 (263)  Methyl Chloride                                               entering that port or place of-
 (264) Phosphorous, elemental                                          (289)  (1) The name, country of registry, and call sign or official
 (265)  Propane                                                       number of the vessel;
 (266)  Propylene                                                      (29o)  (2) The location of the vessel at the time of the report;
(267) Sulfur Dioxide                                                  (291) (3) The name of each certain dangerous cargo carried;
(268)  Vinyl Chloride                                                 (292)  (4) The amount of each certain dangerous cargo carried;





                                                 2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                       43


 (293)  (5) The stowage location of each certain dangerous cargo;    (314) (b) Vessel Traffic Services provide the mariner with infor-
 (294)  (6) The operational condition of the equipment under 33    mation related to the safe navigation of a waterway. This informa-
CFR 164.35;                                                         tion, coupled with the mariner's compliance with the provisions
 (295) (7) The name of the port or place of destination; and       set forth in this part, enhances the safe routing of vessels through
 (296) (8) The estimated time of arrival at that port or place. If    congested waterways or waterways of particular hazard. Under
the estimated time of arrival changes by more than six hours from    certain circumstances, a VTS may issue directions to control the
the latest reported time, the Captain of the port must be notified of    movement of vessels in order to minimize the risk of collision
the correction as soon as the change is known.                      between vessels, or damage to property or the environment.
 (297) (b) The owner, master, agent or person in charge of a         (315)  (c) The owner, operator, charterer, master, or person
barge bound for a port or place in the United States carrying cer-    directing the movement of a vessel remains at all times responsi-
tain dangerous cargo shall report the information required in para-    ble for the manner in which the vessel is operated and maneu-
graph (a)(1) through (a)(8) of this section to the Captain of the    vered, and is responsible for the safe navigation of the vessel
Port of the port or place of destination at least 4 hours before    under all circumstances. Compliance with these rules or with a
entering that port or place.                                        direction of the VTS is at all times contingent upon the exigencies
 (298)  ï¿½160.213 Notice of departure; vessels carrying certain    of safe navigation.
dangerous cargo.                                                     (316)  (d) Nothing in this part is intended to relieveiany vessel,
 (299)  (a) The owner, master, agent, or person in charge of a ves-    owner, operator, charterer, master, or person directing the move-
sel, except a barge, departing from a port or place in the United    ment of a vessel from the consequences of any neglect to comply
States for any other port or place and carrying certain dangerous    with this part or any other applicable law or regulations (e.g., the
cargo shall notify the Captain of the Port or place of departure at    International Regulations for Prevention of Collisions at Sea, 1972
least 24 hours before departing, unless this notification was made    (72 COLREGS) or the Inland Navigation Rules) or of the neglect
within 2 hours after the vessel's arrival, of-                      of any precaution which may be required by the ordinary practice
 (300) (1) The name, country of registry, and call sign or official    of seamen, or by the special circumstances of the case.
number of the vessel;                                                (317)  ï¿½161.2 Definitions.
 (301)  (2) The name of each certain dangerous cargo carried;        (318)  For the purposes of this part:
 (302)  (3) The amount of each certain dangerous cargo carried;      (319)  "Cooperative Vessel Traffic Services (CVTS)" means the
 (303)  (4) The stowage location of each certain dangerous cargo    system of vessel traffic management established and jointly oper-
carried;                                                            ated by the United States and Canada within adjoining waters. In
 (304)  (5) The operational condition of the equipment under 33    addition, CVTS facilitates traffic movement and anchorages,
CFR 164.35;                                                         avoids jurisdictional disputes, and renders assistance in emergen-
 (305)  (6) The name of the port or place of departure; and        cies in adjoining United States and Canadian waters.
 (306) (7) The estimated time of departure from the port or         (320)  "Hazardous Vessel Operating Condition" means any con-
place.                                                              dition related to a vessel's ability to safely navigate or maneuver,
 (307)  If the estimated time of departure changes by more than    and includes, but is not limited to:
six hours from the latest reported time, the Captain of the Port     (321) (1) The absence or malfunction of vessel operating equip-
must be notified of the correction as soon as the change is known.  ment, such as propulsion machinery, steering gear, radar system,
 (308) (b) The owner, master, agent, or person in charge of a    gyrocompass, depth sounding device, automatic radar plotting aid
barge departing from a port or place in the United States for any    (ARPA), radiotelephone, automated dependent surveillance equip-
other port or place and carrying certain dangerous cargo shall    ment, navigational lighting, sound signaling devices or similar
report the information required in paragraph (a)(1) through (a)(7)    equipment.
of this section to the Captain of the Port of the port or place of   (322) (2) Any condition on board the vessel likely to impair
departure at least 4 hours before departing, unless this report was    navigation, such as lack of current nautical charts and publica-
made within 2 hours after the barge's arrival.                      tions, personnel shortage, or similar condition.
 (309) ï¿½160.215 Notice of hazardous conditions.                      (323) (3) Vessel characteristics that affect or restrict maneuver-
 (310)  Whenever there is a hazardous condition on board a ves-    ability, such as cargo arrangement, trim, loaded condition, under-
sel, the owner, master, agent or person in charge shall immediately    keel clearance, speed, or similar characteristics.
notify the Captain of the Port of the port or place of destination   (324) "Precautionary Area" means a routing measure compris-
and the Captain of the Port of the port or place in which the vessel    ing an area within defined limits where vessels must navigate with
is located of the hazardous condition.                              particular caution and within which the direction of traffic may be
                                                                    recommended.
Part 161 Vessel Traffic Management                                   (325) "Towing Vessel" means any commercial vessel engaged in
Subpart A-Vessel Traffic Services                                   towing another vessel astern, alongside, or by pushing ahead.
  (31 1  General Rules                                                (326)  "Vessel Movement Reporting System (VMRS)" is a sys-
  (312)  ï¿½161.1 Purpose and Intent.                                 tem used to manage and track vessel movements within a VTS
  (313) (a) The purpose of this part is to promulgate regulations    area. This is accomplished by a vessel providing information
implementing and enforcing certain sections of the Ports and    under established  procedures as set forth in this part, or as
Waterways Safety Act (PWSA) setting up a national system of    directed by the VTS.
Vessel Traffic Services that will enhance navigation, vessel safety,  (327)  "Vessel Movement Reporting System (VMRS) User"
and marine environmental protection and promote safe vessel    means a vessel, or an owner, operator, charterer, master, or person
movement by reducing the potential for collisions, rammings, and    directing the movement of a vessel, that is required to participate
groundings, and the loss of lives and property associated with    in a VMRS within a VTS area. VMRS participation is required
these incidents within VTS areas established hereunder.             for:





44                                                 2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


  (328)  (1) Every power-driven vessel of 40 meters (approxi-    sary for safe navigation under the circumstances. An application
mately 131 feet) or more in length, while navigating;                 for an authorized deviation must state the need and fully describe
  (329)  (2) Every towing vessel of 8 meters (approximately 26    the proposed alternative to the required measure.
feet) or more in length, while navigating; or                           (347)  (b) Requests to deviate from any provision in this part due
  (330)  (3) Every vessel certificated to carry 50 or more passen-    to circumstances that develop during a transit or immediately pre-
gers for hire, when engaged in trade.                                 ceding a transit, may be made verbally to the appropriate VTS
 (331)  "Vessel Traffic Center (VTC)" means the shore-based           Commanding Officer.  Requests to deviate shall be made as far in
facility that operates the vessel traffic service for the Vessel Traffic  advance as practicable. Upon receipt of the request, the VTS
Service area or sector within such an area.                           Commanding Officer may authorize a deviation if it is determined
  (332)  "Vessel Traffic Services (VTS)" means a service imple-    that, based on vessel handling characteristics, traffic density, radar
mented by the United States Coast Guard designed to improve the    contacts, environmental conditions and other relevant information,
safety and efficiency of vessel traffic and to protect the environ-    such a deviation provides a level of safety equivalent to that pro-
ment. The VTS has the capability to interact with marine traffic    vided by the required measure or is a maneuver considered neces-
and respond to traffic situations developing in the VTS area.         sary for safe navigation under the circumstances.
 (333) "Vessel Traffic Service Area or VTS Area" means the geo-
graphical area encompassing a specific VTS area of service. This        (348)  Services, VTS Measures, and Operating Requirements
area of service may be subdivided into sectors for the purpose of       (349)  ï¿½161.10 Services.
allocating responsibility to individual Vessel Traffic Centers or to    (350) To enhance navigation and vessel safety, and to protect the
identify different operating requirements.                            marine environment, a VTS may issue advisories, or respond to
 (334)  Note: Although regulatory jurisdiction is limited to the    vessel requests for information, on reported conditions within the
navigable waters of the United States, certain vessels will be        VTS area, such as:
encouraged or may be required, as a condition of port entry, to         (351)  (a) Hazardous conditions or circumstances;
report beyond this area to facilitate traffic management within the     (352) (b) Vessel congestion;
                 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~VTS area.  ~(353)  (c) Traffic density;
 (335)  "VTS Special Area" means a waterway within a VTS area          (354)  (d) Environmental conditions;
in which special operating requirements apply.                          (355) () Aids to navigation status;
 (336)  "VTS User" means a vessel, or an owner, operator, char-        (355)  (e) Ands to navigation status;
terer, master, or person directing the movement of a vessel, that is:   (35)  () Anticipated vessel encounters;
                                                                      (357) (g) Another vessel's name, type, position, hazardous ves-
 (337)  (a) Subject to the Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotele-
 (337)  (a) Subject to tph one Act- or                                sel operating conditions, if applicable, and intended navigation
phone Act; or
                                                                     movements, as reported;
 (338)  (b) Required to participate in a VMRS within a VTS area
                                                                      (358)  (h) Temporary measures in effect;
 (339)  "VTS User's Manual" means the manual established and           (359)  (i) A description of local harbor operations and condi-
                                                                     tions, such as ferry routes, dredging, and so forth;
distributed by the VTS to provide the mariner with a description
of the services offered and rules in force for that VTS. Addition-      (360)  () Anchorage availability; or
ally, the manual may include chartlets showing the area and sector      (361)  (k) Other information or special circumstances.
boundaries, general navigational information about the area, and        (362)  ï¿½161.11 VTS measures.
procedures, radio frequencies, reporting provisions and other           (363)  (a) A VTS may issue measures or directions to enhance
information which may assist the mariner while in the VTS area.       navigation and vessel safety and to protect the marine environ-
 (340)  ï¿½161.3 Applicability.                                         ment, such as, but not limited to:
 (341) The provisions of this subpart shall apply to each VTS          (364)  (1) Designating temporary reporting points and proce-
User and may also apply to any vessel while underway or at    dures;
anchor on the navigable waters of the United States within a VTS        (365)  (2) Imposing vessel operating requirements; or
area, to the extent the VTS considers necessary.                        (366)  (3) Establishing vessel traffic routing schemes.
 (342)  ï¿½161.4 Requirement to carry the rules.                         (367)  (b) During conditions of vessel congestion, restricted vis-
 (343)  Each VTS User shall carry on board and maintain for    ibility, adverse weather, or other hazardous circumstances, a VTS
ready reference a copy of these rules.                                may control, supervise, or otherwise manage traffic, by specifying
 (344)  Note: These rules are contained in the applicable U.S.    times of entry, movement, or departure to, from, or within a VTS
Coast Pilot, the VTS User's Manual which may be obtained by           area.
contacting the appropriate VTS, and periodically published in the       (368)  ï¿½161.12 Vessel operating requirements.
Local Notice to Mariners. The VTS User's Manual and the World           (369)  (a) Subject to the exigencies of safe navigation, a VTS
VTS Guide, an International Maritime Organization (IMO) recog-    User shall comply with all measures established or directions
nized publication, contain additional information which may assist    issued by a VTS.
the prudent mariner while in the appropriate VTS area.                  (370)  (1) If, in a specific circumstance, a VTS User is unable to
 (345)  ï¿½161.5 Deviations from the rules.                             safely comply with a measure or direction issued by the VTS, the
 (346)  (a) Requests to deviate from any provision in this part,    VTS User may deviate only to the extent necessary to avoid
either for an extended period of time or if anticipated before the    endangering persons, property or the environment. The deviation
start of a transit, must be submitted in writing to the appropriate   shall be reported to the VTS as soon as is practicable.
District Commander. Upon receipt of the written request, the Dis-       (371) (b) When not exchanging communications, a VTS User
trict Commander may authorize a deviation if it is determined that    must maintain a listening watch as required by ï¿½26.04(e) of this
such a deviation provides a level of safety equivalent to that pro-    chapter on the VTS frequency designated in Table 161.12(b) (VTS
vided by the required measure or is a maneuver considered neces-    Call Signs, Designated Frequencies, and Monitoring Areas). In






                                                 2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                           45


addition, the VTS User must respond promptly when hailed and           the Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Act and participating
communicate in the English language.                                   in a Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) system when the watch is main-
                   Note : As stated in 47 CFR 80.148b), a VHF watch on  tained on-both the vessel bridge-to-bridge frequency and a desig-
 (372) Note:  As stated in 47 CFR 80.148(b), a VHF watch on
Channel 16 (156.800 MHz) is not required on vessels subject to                      requy.





        Table161.12(b)-VESSEL TRAFFIC SERVICES (VTS) CALL SIGNS, DESIGNATED
                                 FREQUENCIES, AND MONITORING AREAS


   Vessel traffic services     Designated frequencyl
         (call sign)            (channel designation)                                    Monitoring area


                                                             New York


  New York Traffic2 .....   156.700 MHz (Ch. 14) .....    The waters of the Lower New York Bay west of a line drawn from Norton Point
                                                         to Breezy Point and north of a line drawn from Ambrose Entrance Lighted
                                                         Gong Buoy #1 to Ambrose Channel Lighted Gong Buoy #9 thence to West
                                                         Bank Light and thence to Great Kills Light. The waters of the Upper New York
                                                         Bay, south of 40ï¿½42.40'N: (Brooklyn Bridge) and 40043.70'N. (Holland Tunnel
                                                         Ventilator Shaft); and in Newark Bay, north of 40038.25'N. (Arthur Kill
                                                         Railroad Bridge), and south of 40ï¿½41.95'N. (Lehigh Valley Draw Bridge); and
                                                         the Kill Van Kull.
                            156.550 MHz (Ch. 11) .....  The waters of Raritan Bay east of a line drawn from Great Kills Light to Point
                                                         Comfort in New Jersey and south of a line drawn from Great Kills Light to
                                                         West Bank Light, thence to Ambrose Channel Lighted Gong Buoy #9, and
                                                         thence to Ambrose Channel Lighted Gong Buoy #1, and west of a line drawn
                                                         from Ambrose Channel Lighted Gong Buoy #1 to the Sandy Hook Channel
                                                         Entrance Buoys (Sandy Hook Lighted Gong Buoy #1 and Sandy Hook Lighted
                                                         Bell Buoy #2).
                            156.600 MHz (Ch. 12) ....   Each vessel at anchor within the above areas.

                                                             Houston2


                                                         The navigable waters north of 29ï¿½N., west of 94ï¿½20'W., south of 29049'N., and
                                                         east of 95020'W.:
  Houston Traffic .......  156.550 MHz (Ch.  1 ) ....  The navigable waters north of a line extending due west from the southern most
                                                         end of Exxon Dock #1 (29043.37'N., 95ï¿½01.27'W.)
                            156.600 MHz (Ch 12) .....  The navigable waters south of a line extending due west from the southern most
                                                         end of Exxon Dock #1 (29043.37'N., 95ï¿½01.27'W.).

                                                            Berwick Bay


  BerwickTraffic .......   156.550 MHz (Ch. i) .....   The navigable waters south of 29ï¿½45'N., west of 91  10'W., north of 29037'N.,
                                                         and east of 910 18'W.

                                                          St. Marys River


  Soo Control ..........   156.600 MHz (Ch. 12) .          The navigable waters of the St. Marys River between 45ï¿½57'N. (De Tour Reef
                                                         Light) and 46038.7'N. (Ile Parisienne Light), except the St. Marys Falls Canal
                                                         and those navigable waters east of a line from 46ï¿½04.16'N. and 46001.57'N. (La
                                                         Pointe to Sims Point in Potagannissing Bay and Worsley Bay).





46                                                  2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS





                                                                San Francisco2


   San Francisco Traffic ..   156.600 MHz (Ch. 12) .....   The waters within a 38 nautical mile radius of Mount Tamalpais (37ï¿½55.8'N.,
                                                              122ï¿½34.6'W.) excluding the San Francisco Offshore Precautionary Area.
                               156.700 MHz (Ch. 14) .....  The waters of the San Francisco Offshore Precautionary Area eastward to San
                                                              Francisco Bay including its tributaries extending to the ports of Stockton,
                                                              Sacramento and Redwood City.


                                                                Puget Sound3


   Seattle Traffic4 ........    156.700 MHz (Ch. 14) ....    The navigable waters of Puget Sound, Hood Canal and adjacent waters south of
                                                              a line connecting Marrowstone Point and Lagoon Point in Admiralty Inlet and
                                                              south of a line drawn due east from the southernmost tip of Possession Point on
                                                              Whidbey Island to the shoreline.
                               156.250 MHz (Ch. 5A)  ....  The navigable waters of the Strait of Juan de Fuca east of 124ï¿½40'W. excluding
                                                              the waters in the central portion of the Strait of Juan de Fuca-north and east of
                                                              Race Rocks; the navigable waters of the Strait of Georgia east of 122ï¿½52'W.;
                                                              the San Juan Island Archipelago, Rosario Strait, Bellingham Bay; Admiralty
                                                              Inlet north of a line connecting Marrowstone Point and Lagoon Point and all
                                                              waters east of Whidbey Island north of a line drawn due east from the
                                                              southernmost tip of Possession Point on Whidbey Island to the shoreline.
   Tofino Traffic5.........   156.725 MHz (Ch. 74) .....  The waters west of 124ï¿½40'W. within 50 nautical miles of the coast of
                                                              Vancouver Island including the waters north of 480N., and east of 127ï¿½W.
   Vancouver Traffic  .....   156.550 MHz (Ch. 11) .....   The navigable waters of the Strait of Georgia west of 122052'W., the navigable
                                                              waters of the central Strait of Juan de Fuca north and east of Race Rocks,
                                                              including the Gulf Island Archipelago, Boundary Pass and Haro Strait.

                                                           Prince William Sound6


   Valdez Traffic ........   156.650 MHz (Ch. 13) .....   The navigable waters south of 61 005'N., east of 147ï¿½20'W., north of 60ï¿½N., and
                                                              west of 146030'W.; and, all navigable waters in Port Valdez.

                                                                  Louisville6


   Louisville Traffic ...... 156.650 MHz (Ch. 13) ..... The navigable waters of the Ohio River between McAlpine Locks (Mile 606)
                                                              and Twelve Mile Island (Mile 593), only when the McAlpine upper pool gauge
                                                              is at approximately 13.0 feet or above.

      NOTES:
      I In the event of a communication failure either by the vessel traffic center or the vessel or radio congestion on a designated VTS
   frequency, communications may be established on an alternate VTS frequency. The bridge-to-bridge navigational frequency, 156.650 MHz
   (Channel 13), is monitored in each VTS area; and it may be used as an alternate frequency, however, only to the extent that doing so
   provides a level of safety beyond that provided by other means.
      2 Designated frequency monitoring is required within U.S. navigable waters. In areas which are outside the U.S. navigable waters,
   designated frequency monitoring is voluntary. However, prospective VTS Users are encouraged to monitor the designatedfrequency.
      3 A Cooperative Vessel Traffic Service was established by the United States and Canada within adjoining waters. The appropriate vessel
   traffic center administers the rules issued by both nations; however, it will enforce only its own set of rules within its jurisdiction.
     4 Seattle Traffic may direct a vessel to monitor the other primary VTS frequency 156.250 MHz or 156.700 MHz (Channel 5A or 14)
   depending on traffic density, weather conditions, or other safety factors, rather than strictly adhering to the designated frequency required
   for each monitoring area as defined above. This does not require a vessel to monitor both primary frequencies.
      5 A portion of Tofino Sector's monitoring area extends beyond the defined CVTS area. Designated frequency monitoring is voluntary in
   these portions outside of VTS jurisdiction, however, prospective VTS Users are encouraged to monitor the designated frequency.
     6 The bridge-to-bridge navigational frequency, 156.650 MHz (Channel 13), is used in these VTSs because the level of radiotelephone
   transmissions does not warrant a designated VTS frequency. The listening watch required by ï¿½26.05 of this chapter is not limited to the
   monitoring area.




                                                 2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                       47


 (373) (C) As soon as practicable, a VTS User shall notify the       (401) ï¿½161.18 Reporting requirements.
VTS of any of the following:                                         (402) (a) A VTS may: (I) Direct a vessel to provide any of the
 (374) (1) A marine casualty as defined in 46 CFR 4.05-1;          information set forth in Table 161.18(a) (IMO Standard Ship
 (375)  (2) Involvement in the ramming of a fixed or floating    Reporting System);
object;                                                              (403)  (2) Establish other means of reporting for those vessels
 (376)  (3) A pollution incident as defined in ï¿½ 151.15 of this    unable to report on the designated frequency; or
chapter:                                                             (404)  (3) Require reports from a vessel in sufficient time to
 (377)  (4) A defect or discrepancy in an aid to navigation;       allow advance vessel traffic planning.
 (378)  (5) A hazardous condition as defined in ï¿½ 160.203 of this    (405)  (b) All reports required by this part shall be made as soon
chapter;                                                            as is practicable on the frequency designated in Table 161.12(b)
 (379) (6) Improper operation of vessel equipment required by    (VTS Call Signs, Designated Frequencies, and Monitoring Areas).
Part 164 of this chapter;                                            (406) (c) When not exchanging communications, a VMRS User
 (380) (7) A situation involving hazardous materials for which a    must maintain a listening watch as described in ï¿½26.04(e) of this
report is required by 49 CFR 176.48; and                            chapter on the frequency designated in Table 161.12(b) (VTS Call
 (381) (8) A hazardous vessel operating condition as defined in    Signs, Designated Frequencies, and Monitoring Areas). In addi-
ï¿½161.2.                                                             tion, the VMRS User must respond promptly when hailed and
 (382) ï¿½161.13 VTS Special Area Operating Requirements.            communicate in the English language.
 (383) The following operating requirements apply within a VTS       (407) Note: As stated in 47 CFR 80.148(b), a VHF watch on
Special Area:                                                       Channel 16 (156.800 MHz) is not required on vessels subject to
 (384) (a) A VTS User shall, if towing astern, do so with as short    the Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Act and participating
a hawser as safety and good seamanship permits.                     in a Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) system when the watch is main-
 (385)  (b) A VMRS User shall:                                     tained on both the vessel bridge-to-bridge frequency and a desig-
 (386) (1) Not enter or get underway in the area without prior    nated VTS frequency.
approval of the VTS;                                                 (408) (d) When reports required by this part include time infor-
 (387)  (2) Not enter a VTS Special Area if a hazardous vessel    mation, such information shall be given using the local time zone
operating condition or circumstance exists;                         in effect and the 24-hour military clock system.
 (388)  (3) Not meet, cross, or overtake any other VMRS User in      (409)  ï¿½161.19 Sailing Plan (SP).
the area without prior approval of the VTS; and                      (410) Unless otherwise stated, at least 15 minutes before navi-
 (389) (4) Before meeting, crossing, or overtaking any other    gating a VTS area, a vessel must report the:
VMRS User in the area, communicate on the designated vessel          (411)  (a) Vessel name and type;
bridge-to-bridge radiotelephone frequency, intended navigation       (412)  (b) Position;
movements, and any other information necessary in order to make      (413)  (c) Destination and ETA;
safe passing arrangements. This requirement does not relieve a       (414)  (d) Intended route;
vessel of any duty prescribed by the International Regulations for   (415) (e) Time and point of entry; and
Prevention of Collisions at Sea, 1972 (72 COLREGS) or the            (416)  (f) Dangerous cargo on board or in its tow, as defined in
Inland Navigation Rules.                                            ï¿½ 160.203 of this chapter, and other required information as set out
                                                                    in ï¿½160.211 and ï¿½ 160.213 of this chapter, if applicable.
 (390)  Subpart B-Vessel Movement Reporting System                   (4t7)  ï¿½161.20 Position Report (PR).
 (391)  ï¿½161.15 Purpose and Intent.                                  (418)  A vessel must report its name and position:
 (392)  (a) A Vessel Movement Reporting System (VMRS) is a           (419)  (a) Upon point of entry into a VTS area;
system used to manage and track vessel movements within a VTS        (420)  (b) At designated reporting points as set forth in subpart
area. This is a accomplished by requiring that vessels provide    C; or
information under established procedures as set forth in this part,  (421) (c) When directed by the VTC.
or as directed by the VTS.                                           (422)  Note: Notice of temporary reporting points, if estab-
 (393)  (b) To avoid imposing an undue reporting burden or    lished, may be published via Local Notices to Mariners, general
unduly congesting radiotelephone frequencies, reports shall be    broadcast or the VTS User's Manual.
limited to information which is essential to achieve the objectives  (423)  ï¿½161.21 Sailing Plan Deviation Report (DR).
of the VMRS.  These reports are consolidated into four reports       (424)  A vessel must report:
(sailing plan, position, sailing plan deviation and final).          (425) (a) When its ETA to a destination varies significantly
 (394)  ï¿½161.16 Applicability.                                     from a previously reported ETA;
 (395) The provisions of this subpart shall apply to the following   (426)  (b) Any intention to deviate from a VTS issued measure
VMRS Users:                                                         or vessel traffic routing system; or
 (396)  (a) Every power-driven vessel of 40 meters (approxi-         (427)  (c) Any significant deviation from previously reported
mately 131 feet) or more in length, while navigating;               information.
 (397) (b) Every towing vessel of 8 meters (approximately 26         (428) ï¿½161.22 Final Report (FR).
feet) or more in length, while navigating; or                        (429) A vessel must report its name and position:
 (398) (c) Every vessel certificated to carry 50 or more passen-     (430) (a) On arrival at its destination; or
gers for hire, when engaged in trade.                                (431)  (b) When leaving a VTS area.
 (399)  ï¿½161.17 Definitions.                                         (432)  ï¿½161.23 Reporting exemptions.
 (400) As used in this subpart: Published means available in a       (433)  (a) Unless otherwise directed, the following vessels are
widely-distributed and publicly available medium (e.g., VTS         exempted from providing Position and Final Reports due to the
User's Manual, ferry schedule, Notice to Mariners).                 nature of their operation:



48                                                 2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


                 TABLE 161.18(a).-THE IMO STANDARD SHIP REPORTING SYSTEM


   A        ALPHA ............... Ship ...................  Name, call sign or ship station identity, and flag.
   B        BRAVO ...............           Dates and time of event  ...   A 6 digit group giving day of month (first two digits),
                                                                        hours and minutes (last four digits). If other than
                                                                        UTC state time zone used.
   C        CHARLIE .............           Position .................    A 4 digit group giving latitude in degrees and minutes
                                                                        suffixed with N (north) or S (south) and a 5 digit
                                                                        group giving longitude in degrees and minutes
                                                                        suffixed with E (east) or W (west); or,
   D        DELTA ................  Position ................  True bearing (first 3 digits) and distance (state
                                                                        distance) in nautical miles from a clearly identified
                                                                        landmark (state landmark).
   E        ECHO ................. True course .............  A 3 digit group.
   F        FOXTROT ............. Speed in knots and tenths of  A 3 digit group.
                                          knots
   G        GOLF ................. Ports of Departure........   Name of last port of call.
   H        HOTEL  ...............          Date, time and point of entry   Entry time expressed as in (B) and into the entry
                                          system.                          position expressed as in (C) or (D).
   I        INDIA ................   Destination and expected                Name of port and date time group expressed as in
                                          time of arrival.                 (B).
   J        JULIET ...............   Pilot ................                  State whether a deep sea or local pilot is on board.
   K        KILO .................          Date, time and point of exit    Exit time expressed as in (B) and exit position
                                          from system.                     expressed as in (C) or (D).
   L        LIMA .................  Route information........  Intended track.
   M        MIKE .................  Radio .................  State in full names of communications stations/
                                                                        frequencies guarded.
   N        NOVEMBER  ..........   Time of next report .......    Date time group expressed as in (B).
   O        OSCAR ...............           Maximum present static           4 digit group giving meters and centimeters.
                                          draught in meters.
   P        PAPA .............. Cargo on board ..........  Cargo and brief details of any dangerous cargoes as
                                                                        well as harmful substances and gases that could
                                                                        endanger persons or the environment.
   Q        QUEBEC ........... ...   Defects, damage,                        Brief detail of defects, damage, deficiencies or other
                                          deficiencies or limitations.     limitations.
   R        ROMEO  ............... Description of pollution or               Brief details of type pollution (oil, chemicals, etc) or
                                         dangerous goods lost.            dangerous goods lost overboard; position expressed
                                                                        as in (C) or (D).
   S        SIERRA ...............    Weather conditions .......    Brief details of weather and sea conditions
                                                                        prevailing.:
   T        TANGO ...............   Ship's representative and/or   Details of name and particulars of ship's
                                         owner.                           representative and/or owner for provision of
                                                                        information.
   U        UNIFORM ............. Ship size and type........    Details of length, breadth, tonnage, and type, etc., as
                                                                        required.
   V        VICTOR ..............    Medical personnel........    Doctor, physician's assistant, nurse, no medic.
   W        WHISKEY .............  Total number of persons on  State number.
                                         board.
   X        XRAY ..............  Miscellaneous ........... Any other information as appropriate. (i.e., a detailed
                                                                        description of a planned operation, which may
                                                                        include: its duration; effective area; any restrictions
                                                                        to navigation; notification procedures for
                                                                        approaching vessels; in addition, for a towing
                                                                        operation; configuration, length of the tow, available
                                                                        horsepower, etc.; for a dredge or floating plant:
                                                                        configuration of pipeline, mooring configuration,
                                                                        number of assist vessels, etc.)




                                                2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                      49


 (434) (1) Vessels on a published schedule and route;             48ï¿½23'30"N., 124ï¿½44' 12"W. on Tatoosh Island, due west to the
 (435) (2) Vessels operating within an area of a radius of three    U.S. Territorial Sea Boundary; thence northward along the U.S.
nautical miles or less; or                                         Territorial Sea Boundary to its intersection with the U.S./Canada
 (436) (3) Vessels escorting another vessel or assisting another    International Boundary; thence east along the U.S./Canada Inter-
vessel in maneuvering procedures.                                  national Boundary through the waters known as the Strait of Juan
 (437)  (b) A vessel described in paragraph (a) of this section    de Fuca, Haro Strait, Boundary Pass, and the Strait of Georgia to
must:                                                              the Washington State coastline at 49000'06"N., 122o45'18"W.
 (438) (I) Provide a Sailing Plan at least 5 minutes but not more    (International Boundary Range C Rear Light). This area includes:
than 15 minutes before navigating within the VTS area; and         Puget Sound, Hood Canal, Possession Sound, the San Juan Island
 (439) (2) If it departs from its promulgated schedule by more    Archipelago, Rosario Strait, Guemes Channel, Bellingham Bay,
than 15 minutes or changes its limited operating area, make the    the U.S. waters of the Strait of Juan de Fuca and the Strait of
established VMRS reports, or report as directed.                   Georgia, and all waters adjacent to the above.
 (440)  (c) In those VTS areas capable of receiving automated      (455) (b) Vessel Traffic Service Puget Sound participates in a
position reports from Automated Dependent Surveillance Ship-    U.S./Canadian Cooperative Vessel Traffic Service (CVTS) to
borne Equipment (ADSSE) as required by ï¿½ 164.43 of this chapter    jointly manage vessel traffic in the Juan de Fuca Region. The
and where ADSSE is required, vessels equipped with an operating    CVTS for the Juan de Fuca Region consists of all waters of the
ADSSE are not required to make voice radio position reports at    Strait of Juan de Fuca and its offshore approaches, southern Geor-
designated reporting points as required by ï¿½ 161.20(b) of this part,    gia Strait, the Gulf and San Juan Archipelagos, Rosario Strait,
unless otherwise directed by the VTC.                              Boundary Pass and Haro Strait, bounded on the northwest by
 (441)  (1) Whenever an ADSSE becomes non-operational as    48ï¿½35'45"N.; and on the southwest by 48023'30"N.; and on the
defined in ï¿½164.43(c) of this chapter, before entering or while    west by the thumb line joining 48ï¿½35'45"N., 124047"30"W. with
underway in a VTS area, a vessel must:                             48ï¿½23'30"N., 124048'37"W.; and on the northeast in the Strait of
 (442) (i) Notify the VTC;                                        Georgia, by a line drawn along 49ï¿½N. from Vancouver Island to
 (443) (ii) Make voice radio position reports at designated    Semiahmoo Bay; and on the southeast, by a line drawn from
reporting points as required by ï¿½ 161.20(b) of this part;          McCurdy Point on the Quimper Peninsula to Point Partridge on
 (444) (iii) Make other voice radio reports as directed; and      Whidbey Island. Canadian and United States Vessel Traffic Cen-
 (445) (iv) Restore the ADSSE to operating condition as soon as    ters (Tofino, B.C., Canada, Vancouver, BC, Canada and Seattle,
possible.                                                          WA) manage traffic within the CVTS area irrespective of the
 (446) (2) Whenever an ADSSE becomes non-operational due to    International Boundary.
a loss of position correction information (i.e., the U.S. Coast     (456) (c) VTS Special Areas.
Guard differential global positioning system (dGPS) cannot pro-     (457) (1) The Rosario Strait VTS Special Area consists of those
vide the required error correction messages) a vessel must:        waters bounded to the south by the center of Precautionary Area
 (447) (i) Make required voice radio position reports at desig-    "RB" (a circular area of 2,500 yards radius centered at
nated reporting points required by ï¿½ 161.20(b) of this part; and   48026'24"N., 122045'12"W.), and to the north by the center of Pre-
 (448) (ii) Make other voice radio reports as directed.           cautionary Area "C" (a circular area of 2,500 yards radius cen-
 (449) Note: Regulations pertaining to ADSSE required capabil-    tered at 48ï¿½40'34N.  122'42'44"W.; Lighted Buoy "C"); and
ities are set forth in ï¿½ 164.43 of this chapter.                    (458) Note: The center of precautionary area "RB" is not
                                                                  marked by a buoy. All precautionary areas are depicted on
                                                                  National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) nau-
Subpart C-Vessel Traffic Service Areas, Cooperative Vessel
Traffic Service Area, Vessel Traffic Service Special Areas and     tical charts.
Reporting Points.                                                   (459)  (2) The Guemes Channel VTS Special Area consists of
 (450)  Note: All geographic coordinates contained in part 161    those waters bounded to the west by Shannon Point on Fidalgo
(latitude and longitude) are expressed in North American Datum    Island and to the east by Southeast Point on Guemes Island.
of 1983 (NAD 83).                                                   (460) (d) Additional VTS Special Area Operating Require-
 (451) ï¿½161.50 Vessel Traffic Service San Francisco.              ments. The following additional requirements are applicable in
 (452) (a) The VTS area consists of all the navigable waters of    the Rosario Strait and Guemes Channel VTS Special Areas:
San Francisco Bay Region south of the Mare Island Causeway          (461)  (1) A vessel engaged in towing shall not impede the pas-
Bridge and the Petaluma River Entrance Channel Daybeacon 19    sage of a vessel of 40,000 dead weight tons or more.
and Petaluma River Entrance Channel Light 20 and north of the       (462)  (2) A vessel of less than 40,000 dead weight tons is
Dunbarton Bridge; its seaward approaches within a 38 nautical    exempt from the provision set forth in ï¿½161.13(b)(1) of this part.
mile radius of Mount Tamalpais (37ï¿½55.8'N., 122034.6'W.); and       (463) (3) A vessel of less than 100 meters in length is exempt
its navigable tributaries asfar east as the port of Stockton on the    from the provisions set forth in ï¿½161.13(b)(3) of this part.
San Joaquin River, as far north as the port of Sacramento on the    Approval will not be granted for:
Sacramento River.                                                   (464) (i) A vessel of 100 meters or more in length to meet or
 (453)  ï¿½161.55 Vessel Traffic Service Puget Sound and the    overtake; or cross or operate within 2,000 yards (except when
Cooperative Vessel Traffic Service for the Juan de Fuca    crossing astern) of a vessel of 40,000 dead weight tons or more; or
Region.                                                             (465)  (ii) A vessel of 40,000 dead weight tons or more to meet
 (454) The Vessel Traffic Service Puget Sound area consists of    or overtake; or cross or operate within 2,000 yards (except when
the navigable waters of the United States bounded by a line drawn    crossing astern) of a vessel of 100 meters or more in length.
from the Washington State coastline at 48ï¿½23'08"N.,                 (466)  (e) Reporting Point. Inbound vessels in the Strait of Juan
124043'37"W. on Cape Flattery to the Cape Flattery Light at    de Fuca upon crossing 124ï¿½W.




50                                                2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS



               TABLE 161.60(d)-VTS PRINCE WILLIAM SOUND REPORTING POINTS

                                                                                              Latitude/
         Designator              Geographic name                Geographic description          Longitude             Notes

    IA                   Cape Hinchinbrook ..........  Cape Hinchinbrook ............ 60016'18'N              Northbound Only.
                                                                                            146045'30"W
    LB                    Schooner Rock ..............   Schooner Rock ................ 60ï¿½ 18'42"N           Southbound Only.
                                                                                            14605 1'36"W
    2A                    Naked Island ...............  Naked Island .................   60040'00"N           Northbound Only.
                                                                                            147001'24"W
    2B                    Naked Island ...............    Naked Island            ................   . 6040'00"N  Southbound Only.
                                                                                            147005'00"W
    3A                    Bligh Reef .................    Bligh Reef Light (Pilot Embark)..   60ï¿½50'36"N      Northbound Only.
                                                                                            146ï¿½57'30"W
    3B                    Bligh Reef .................  Bligh Reef Light (Pilot Disembark)   60ï¿½5 1'00"N      Southbound Only.
                                                                                            147ï¿½01 '24"W
    4A                    Rocky Point ......... .......  Rocky Point .................    60057'48"N          Northbound Only.
                                                                                            146ï¿½47'30"W
    4B                    Rocky Point ................   Rocky Point ....I..............    60 ï¿½5748"N        Southbound Only.
                                                                                            146ï¿½50'00"W
    5                     Entrance Island ...... ....... Entrance Island Light ..........   61 05'24"N
                                                                                            146ï¿½37'30"W




 (467)  ï¿½161.60.Vessel Traffic Service Prince William Sound.         Part 162-Inland Waterways Navigation Regulations
 (468)  (a) The VTS area consists of the navigable waters of the      (480) ï¿½162.1 General.
United States north of a line drawn from Cape Hinchinbrook Light       (481)  Geographic coordinates expressed in terms of latitude or
to Schooner Rock Light, comprising that portion of Prince Will-    longitude, or both, are not intended for plotting on maps or charts
iam Sound between 146'30'W. and 147'20'W. and includes Val-    whose referenced horizontal datum is the North American Datum
dez Arm, Valdez Narrows and Port Valdez.                             of 1983 (NAD 83), unless such geographic coordinates are
 (469)  (b) The Valdez Narrows VTS Special Area consists of    expressly labeled NAD 83. Geographic coordinates without the
those waters of Valdez Arm, Valdez Narrows, and Port Valdez    NAD 83 reference may be plotted on maps or charts referenced to
northeast of a line bearing 307ï¿½ True from Tongue Point at    NAD 83 only after application of the appropriate corrections that
61ï¿½02'06"N., 146040'W.; and southwest of a line bearing 307ï¿½    are published on the particular map or chart being used.
True from Entrance Island Light at 61005'06"N., 146ï¿½36'42"W.           (482)  ï¿½162.245 Kenai River, Kenai, Alaska; use, administra-
 (470)  (c) Additional VTS Special Area Operating Require-    tion, and navigation. (a) The area. The main channel area of the
ments. The following additional requirements are applicable in    river, having a width of 150 feet, beginning at a point directly off-
the Valdez Narrows VTS Special Area:                                 shore from the centerline of the city dock and extending about
 (471)  (1) No VMRS User shall proceed north of 610N. without    2,200 feet upstream to a point 200 feet upstream from the Inlet Co.
prior approval of the VTS.                                           dock.
 (472)  (2) For a vessel listed in paragraph (c)(3) of this section-  (483)  (b) The regulations. (1) Vessels may navigate, anchor, or
                                                                   moor within the area until such times as notification is received or
 (473)  (i) Approval to enter this area will not be granted to a ves-
sel when a tank vessel of more than 20,000 deadweight tons is
navigating therein;                                                  areas.
                                                                     (484)  (2) Notice of anticipated passage of towboats and barges
  474)  (ii) A northbound vessel shall remain south of 61 N. until    shall be indicated 24 hours in advance by display of a red flag by
the VTS has granted permission to proceed; and
 (475)  (iii) A southbound vessel shall remain in Port Valdez east
of 146035'W. and north of 61ï¿½06'N. until the VTS has granted per-
                                                                   Part 164-Navigation Safety Regulations (in part). For a
mission to proceed.                                                  complete description of this part see 33 CFR 164.
 (476)  (3) Paragraph (c)(2) of this section applies to-              (485)  ï¿½164.01 Applicability.
 (477)  (i) A vessel of 1,600 gross tons or more; and                 (486)  (a) This part (except as specifically limited herein) applies
 (478)  (ii) A towing vessel of 8 meters or more in length, except    to each self-propelled vessel of 1600 or more gross tons (except
for a vessel performing duties as an escort vessel as defined in 33    foreign vessels described in ï¿½164.02) when it is operating in the
CFR Part 168.                                                        navigable waters of the United States except the St. Lawrence
 (479)  (d) Reporting Points.                                        Seaway.



                                                 2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                       51


 (487) ï¿½164.02 Applicability exception for foreign vessels.          (510) (h) Engine speed and direction orders are executed as
 (488) (a) This part (including ï¿½ï¿½ 164.38 and 164.39) does not    given;
apply to vessels that:                                                51l) (i) Magnetic variation and deviation and gyrocompass
 (489) (1) Are not destined for, or departing from, a port or place    errors are known and correctly applied by the person directing the
subject to the jurisdiction of the United States; and               movement of the vessel;
 (490) (2) Are in:                                                   (512) (j) A person whom he has determined is competent to
 (491) (i) Innocent passage through the territorial sea of the    steer the vessel is in the wheelhouse at all times (See also 46
United States; or                                                   U.S.C. 8702(d), which requires an able seaman at the wheel on
 (492) (ii) Transit through navigable waters of the United States    U.S. vessels of 100 gross tons or more in narrow or crowded
which form a part of an international strait.                       waters during low visibility);
 (493) ï¿½164.03 Incorporation by reference.                           (513)  (k) If a pilot other than a member of the vessel's crew is
 (494) (a) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this    employed, the pilot is informed of the draft, maneuvering charac-
part with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register    teristics, and peculiarities of the vessel and of any abnormal cir-
under 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and I CFR part 51. To enforce any edition    cumstances on the vessel that may affect its safe navigation.
other than that specified in paragraph (b) of this section, the Coast  (514) (I) Current velocity and direction for the area to be tran-
Guard must publish notice of change in the Federal Register and    sited are known by the person directing the movement of the ves-
the material must be available to the public. All approved material    sel;
is on file at the Office of the Federal Register, 800 North Capitol  (515) (m) Predicted set and drift are known by the person
Street, NW., suite 700, Washington, DC, and at the U.S. Coast    directing movement of the vessel;
Guard, Marine Environmental Protection Division (G-MEP),             (516) (n) Tidal state for the area to be transited is known by the
room 2100, 2100 Second Street, SW., Washington, DC 20593-    person directing movement of the vessel;
0001 and is available from the sources indicated in paragraph (b)    (517) (o) The vessel's anchors are ready for letting go;
of this section. 1                                                   (518)  (p) The person directing the movement of the vessel sets
 (495)  (b) The materials approved for incorporation by reference    the vessel's speed with consideration for-
in this part, and the sections affected, are:                        (519)  (1) The prevailing visibility and weather conditions;
 (496)  Radio Technical Commission for Marine Services, P.O.         (520)  (2) The proximity of the vessel to fixed shore and marine
Box 19087, Washington, DC 20036, Paper 12/78/DO-100 Mini-    structures;
mum Performance Standards, Loran C Receiving Equipment,              (521)  (3) The tendency of the vessel underway to squat and suf-
1977-164.41.                                                        fer impairment of maneuverability when there is small underkeel
  (497)  International Maritime Organization, 4 Albert Embank-    clearance;
ment, London SEI 7SR U.K., IMO Resolution A.342(IX), Rec-            (522)  (4) The comparative proportions of the vessel and the
ommendation on Performance Standards for Automatic Pilots,    channel;
adopted November 12, 1975-164.13.                                    (523) (5) The density of marine traffic;
  (498)  ï¿½164.11 Navigation under way: General.                       (524) (6) The damage that might be caused by the vessel's
  (499) The owner, master, or person in charge of each vessel  'wake;
underway shall ensure that:                                          (525) (7) The strength and direction of the current; and
  (500) (a) The wheelhouse is constantly manned by persons            (526) (8) Any local vessel speed limit;
who-                                                                 (527) (q) The tests required by ï¿½164.25 are made and recorded
  (501) (1) Direct and control the movement of the vessel; and      in the vessel's log; and
  (502) (2) Fix the vessel's position;                                (528) (r) The equipment required by this part is maintained in
  (503) (b) Each person performing a duty described in paragraph    operable condition.
(a) of this section is competent to perform that duty;               (529)  (s) Upon entering U.S. waters, the steering wheel or lever
  (504)  (c) The position of the vessel at each fix is plotted on a    on the navigating bridge is operated to determine if the steering
chart of the area and the person directing the movement of the ves-    equipment is operating properly under manual control, unless the
sel is informed of the vessel's position;                           vessel has been steered under manual control from the navigating
  (5o5) (d) Electronic and other navigational equipment, external    bridge within the preceding 2 hours, except when operating on the
fixed aids to navigation, geographic reference points, and hydro-    Great Lakes and their connecting and tributary waters.
graphic contours are used when fixing the vessel's position;         (530)  (t) At least two of the steering-gear power units on the
  (506) (e) Buoys alone are not used to fix the vessel's position;  vessel are in operation when such units are capable of simulta-
  (507) Note: Buoys are aids to navigation placed in approximate    neous operation, except when the vessel is sailing on the Great
positions to alert the mariner to hazards to navigation or to indi-    Lakes and their connecting and tributary waters, and except as
cate the orientation of a channel. Buoys may not maintain an exact    required by paragraph (u) of this section.
position because strong or varying currents, heavy seas, ice, and    (531) (u) On each passenger vessel meeting the requirements of
collisions with vessels can move or sink them or set them adrift.    the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1960
Although buoys may corroborate a position fixed by other means,     (SOLAS 60) and on each cargo vessel meeting the requirements of
buoys cannot be used to fix a position: however, if no other aids    SOLAS 74 as amended in 1981, the number of steering-gear
are available, buoys alone may be used to establish an estimated    power units necessary to move the rudder from 350 on either side
position.                                                           to 30ï¿½ on the other in not more than 28 seconds must be in simul-
-.:(508) - (f) The danger of each closing visual or each closing radar    taneous operation.
contact is evaluated and the person directing the movement of the    (532)  ï¿½164.13 Navigation underway: tankers.
vessel knows the evaluation;                                         (533)  (a) As used in this section, "tanker" means a self-pro-
  (509) (g) Rudder orders are executed as given;                    pelled tank vessel, including integrated tug barge combinations,



52                                               2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


constructed or adapted primarily to carry oil or hazardous material  (552) The master or person in charge of each vessel that is
in bulk in the cargo spaces and inspected and certificated as a    anchored shall ensure that-
tanker.                                                               (553) (a) A proper anchor watch is maintained;
 (534)  (b) Each tanker must have an engineering watch capable       (554) (b) Procedures are followed to detect a dragging anchor;
of monitoring the propulsion system, communicating with the    and
bridge, and implementing manual control measures immediately          (555)  (c) Whenever weather, tide, or current conditions are
when necessary. The watch must be physically present in the    likely to cause the vessel's anchor to drag, action is taken to ensure
machinery spaces or in the main control space and must consist of    the safety of the vessel, structures, and other vessels, such as being
at least a licensed engineer.                                       ready to veer chain, let go a second anchor, or get underway using
 (535)  (c) Each tanker must navigate with at least two licensed    the vessel's own propulsion or tug assistance.
deck officers on watch on the bridge, one of whom may be a pilot.    (556) ï¿½164.25 Tests before entering or getting underway.
In waters where a pilot is required, the second officer, must be an  (557) (a) Except as provided in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this
individual licensed and assigned to the vessel as master, mate, or    section no person may cause a vessel to enter into or get underway
officer in charge of a navigational watch, who is separate and dis-    on the navigable waters of the United States unless no more than
tinct from the pilot.                                               12 hours before entering or getting underway, the following equip-
 (536) (d) Except as specified in paragraph (e) of this section, a    ment has been tested:
tanker may operate with an auto pilot engaged only if all of the     (558)  (1) Primary and secondary steering gear. The test proce-
following conditions exist:                                         dure includes a visual inspection of the steering gear and its con-
 (537)  (1) The operation and performance of the automatic pilot    necting linkage, and, where applicable, the operation of the
conforms with the standards recommended by the International    following:
Maritime Organization in IMO Resolution A.342(IX).                   (559)  (i) Each remote steering gear control system.
 (538) (2) A qualified helmsman is present at the helm and pre-      (560)  (ii) Each steering position located on the navigating
pared at all times to assume manual control.                        bridge.
 (539)  (3) The tanker is not operating in any of the following      (561)  (iii) The main steering gear from the alternative power
areas:                                                              supply, if installed.
 (540)  (i) The areas of the traffic separation schemes specified in  (562)  (iv) Each rudder angle indicator in relation to the actual
subchapter P of this chapter.                                       position of the rudder.
 (541)  (ii). The portions of a shipping safety fairway specified in  (563)  (v) Each remote steering gear control system power fail-
part 166 of this chapter.                                           ure alarm.
 (542)  (iii) An anchorage ground specified in part 110 of this      (564)  (vi) Each remote steering gear power unit failure alarm.
chapter.                                                              (565)  (vii) The full movement of the rudder to the required
 (543)  (iv) An area within one-half nautical mile of any U.S.    capabilities of the steering gear.
shore.                                                               (566)  (2) All internal vessel control communications and vessel
 (544)  ï¿½164.15 Navigation bridge visibility.                      control alarms.
 (545)  (a) The arrangement of cargo, cargo gear, and trim of all    (567)  (3) Standby or emergency generator, for as long as neces-
vessels entering or departing from U.S. ports must be such that the    sary to show proper functioning, including steady state tempera-
field of vision from the navigation bridge conforms as closely as    ture and pressure readings.
possible to the following requirements:                               (568)  (4) Storage batteries for emergency lighting and power
 (546) (1) From the conning position, the view of the sea surface    systems in vessel control and propulsion machinery spaces.
must not be obscured by more than the lesser of two ship lengths     (569)  (5) Main propulsion machinery, ahead and astern.
or 500 meters (1640 feet) from dead ahead to 10 degrees on either    (570)  (b) Vessels navigating on the Great Lakes and their con-
side of the vessel. Within this arc of visibility and blind sector    necting and tributary waters, having once completed the test
caused by cargo, cargo gear, or other permanent obstruction must    requirements of this sub-part, are considered to remain in compli-
not exceed 5 degrees.                                               ance until arriving at the next port of call on the Great Lakes.
 (547)  (2) From the conning position, the horizontal field of       (571)  (c) Vessels entering the Great Lakes from the St.
vision must extend over an arc from at least 22.5 degrees abaft the    Lawrance Seaway are considered to be in compliance with this
beam on one side of the vessel, through dead ahead, to at least    sub-part if the required tests are conducted preparatory to or dur-
22.5 degrees abaft the beam on the other side of the vessel. Blind    ing the passage of the St. Lawrence Seaway or within one hour of
sectors forward of the beam caused by cargo, cargo gear, or other    passing Wolfe Island.
permanent obstruction must not exceed 10 degrees each, nor total-    (572) (d) No vessel may enter, or be operated on the navigable
more than 20 degrees, including any blind sector within the arc of    waters of the United States unless the emergency steering drill
visibility described in paragraph (a)(1) of this section.           described below has been conducted within 48 hours prior to entry
 (548)  (3) From each bridge wing, the field of vision must    and logged in the vessel logbook, unless the drill is conducted and
extend over an arch from at least 45 degree on the opposite bow,    logged on a regular basis at least once every three months. This
through dead ahead, to at least dead astern.                        drill must include at a minimum the following:
 (549)  (4) From the main steering position, the field of.vision     (573) (1) Operation of the main steering gear from within the
must extend over an arc from dead ahead to at least 60 degrees on    steering gear compartment.
either side of the vessel.                                            (574) (2) Operation of the means of communications between
 (550)  (b) A clear view must be provided through at least two    the navigating bridge and the steering compartment.
front windows at all times regardless of weather conditions.          (575) (3) Operation of the alternative power supply for the
 (551) ï¿½164.19 Requirements for vessels at anchor.                 steering gear if the vessel is so equipped.




                                                  2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                          53


 (576)  ï¿½164.30 Charts, publications, and equipment: Gen-             speeds. For vessels whose turning circles are essentially the same
eral.                                                                 for both directions. a diagram showing a turning circle in one
 (577)  No person may operate or cause the operation of a vessel    direction, with a note on the diagram stating that turns to port and
unless the vessel has the marine charts, publications, and equip-    starboard are essentially the same, may be substituted.
ment as required by ï¿½ï¿½164.33 through 164.41 of this part.              6(60) (2) The time and distance to stop the vessel from either
 (578) ï¿½164.33 Charts and publications.                               full and half speeds, or from full and slow speeds, while maintain-
 (579) (a) Each vessel must have the following:                       ing approximately the initial heading with minimum application of
 (580) (I) Marine charts of the area to be transited, published by    rudder.
the National Ocean Service, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, or a          (602) (3) For each vessel with a fixed propeller, a table of shaft
river authority that-                                                 revolutions per minute for a representative range of speeds.
 (581)  (i) Are of a large enough scale and have enough detail to      (60-3)  (4) For each vessel with a controllable pitch propeller, a
make safe navigation of the area possible; and                        table of control settings for a representative range of speeds.
 (582)  (ii) Are currently corrected.                                  (604)  (5) For each vessel that is fitted with an auxiliary device
 (583)  (2) For the area to be transited, a currently corrected copy    to assist in maneuvering, such as a bow thruster, a table of vessel
of, or applicable currently corrected extract from, each of the fol-    speeds at which the auxiliary device is effective in maneuvering
lowing publications:                                                  the vessel.
 (584)  (i) U.S. Coast Pilot.                                          (605)  (6) The maneuvering information for the normal load and
 (585)  (ii) Coast Guard Light List.                                  normal ballast condition for-
 (586)  (3) For the area to be transited, the current edition of, or   (606)  (i) Calm weather-wind 10 knots or less, calm sea;
applicable current extract from:                                       (607)  (ii) No current;
 (587)  (i) Tide tables published by the National Ocean Service.       (608)  (iii) Deep water conditions-water depth twice the vessel's
 (588)  (ii) Tidal current tables published by the National Ocean     draft or greater; and
Service, or river current publication issued by the U.S. Army           (609)  (iv) Clean hull.
Corps of Engineers, or a river authority.                               (610)  (7) At the bottom of the fact sheet, the following state-
 (589)  (b) As an alternative to the requirements for paragraph (a)    ment:
of this section, a marine chart or publication, or applicable extract,  (611)  Warning
published by a foreign government may be substituted for a U.S.         (62)  The response of the (name of the vessel) may be different
chart and publication required by this section. The chart must be    from that listed above if any of the following conditions, upon
of large enough scale and have enough detail to make safe naviga-     which the maneuvering information is based, are varied:
tion of the area possible, and must be currently corrected. The
publication, or applicable extract, must singly or in combination       (613)  (1) Calm weather-wind 10 knots or less, calm sea;
contain similar information to the U.S. Government publication to       (614)  (2) No current;
make safe navigation of the area possible. The publication, or          (615)  (3) Water depth twice the vessel's draft or greater;
applicable extract must be currently corrected, with the exceptions     (616) (4) Clean hull; and
of tide and tidal current tables, which must be the current editions.  (617)  (5) Intermediate drafts or unusual trim.
  (590)  (c) As used in this section, "currently corrected" means       (618)  (h) An echo depth sounding device.
corrected with changes contained in all Notices to Mariners pub-        (619)  (i) A device that can continuously record the depth read-
lished by Defense Mapping Agency Hydrographic/Topographic             ings of the vessel's echo depth sounding device, except when
Center, or an equivalent foreign government publication, reason-      operating on the Great Lakes and their connecting and tributary
ably available to the vessel, and that is applicable to the vessel's    waters.
transit.                                                               (620)  (j) Equipment on the bridge for plotting relative motion.
  (591)  ï¿½164.35 Equipment: All vessels.                                (621)  (k) Simple operating instructions with a block diagram,
  (592)  Each vessel must have the following:                          showing the changeover procedures for remote steering gear con-
  (593) (a) A marine radar system for surface navigation.              trol systems and steering gear power units, permanently displayed
  (594)  (b) An illuminated magnetic steering compass, mounted         on the navigating bridge and in the steering gear compartment.
in a binnacle, that can be read at the vessel's main steering stand.    (622)  (1) An indicator readable from the centerline conning
  (595)  (c) A current magnetic compass deviation table or graph    position showing the rate of revolution of each propeller, except
or compass comparison record for the steering compass, in the    when operating on the Great Lakes and their connecting and tribu-
wheelhouse.                                                           tary waters.
  (596)  (d) A gyrocompass.                                             (623) (m) If fitted with controllable pitch propellers, an indica-
  (597)  (e) An illuminated repeater for the gyrocompass required    tor readable from the centerline conning position showing the
by paragraph (d) of this section that is at the main steering stand,    pitch and operational mode of such propellers, except when oper-
unless that gyrocompass is illuminated and is at the main steering    ating on the Great Lakes and their connecting and tributary waters.
stand.                                                                  (624)  (n) If fitted with lateral thrust propellers, an indicator
  (598)  (f) An illuminated rudder angle indicator in the wheel-'    readable from the centerline conning position showing the direc-
house.                                                                tion and amount of thrust of such propellers, except when operat-
  (599)  (g) The following maneuvering information prominently         ing on the Great Lakes and their connecting and tributary waters.
displayed on a fact sheet in the wheelhouse:                            (625)  (o) A telephone or other means of communication for
  (600)  (1) A turning circle diagram to port and starboard that    relaying headings to the emergency steering station. Also, each
shows the time and distance and advance and transfer required to    vessel of 500 gross tons and over and constructed on or after June
alter course 90 degrees with maximum rudder angle and constant    9, 1991 must be provided with arrangements for supplying visual
power settings, for either full and half speeds, or for full and slow  compass-readings to the emergency steering station.



 54                                               2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


  (626)  ï¿½164.37 Equipment: Vessels of 10,000 gross tons or           (650) (a) Each vessel required to be fitted with an Automatic
 more.                                                               Radar Plotting Aid (ARPA) under ï¿½164.38 must be fitted with a
  (627)  (a) Each vessel of 10,000 gross tons or more must have,    device to indicate speed and distance of the vessel either through
 in addition to the radar system under ï¿½164.35(a), a second marine    the water, or over the ground. Vessels constructed prior to Sep-
 radar system that operates independently of the first.              tember i, 1984, must have this equipment according to the follow-
  (628)  Note: Independent operation means two completely sepa-    ing schedule:
 rate systems, from separate branch power supply circuits or distri-  (651) (I) Each tank vessel constructed before September I,
 bution panels to antennas, so that failure of any component of one  1984, operating on the navigable waters of the United States-
 system will not render the other system inoperative.                  (652)  (i) If of 40,000 gross tons or more, by January 1, 1985;
  (629)  (b) On each tanker of 10,000 gross tons or more that is      (653) (ii) If of 10,000 gross tons or more but less than 40,000
 subject to Section 5 of the Port and Tanker Safety Act of 1978 (46    gross tons, by January 1, 1986.
 U.S.C. 391a), the dual radar system required by this part must        (654) (2) Each self-propelled vessel constructed before Septem-
 have a short range capability and a long range capability and each    ber 1, 1984, that is not a tank vessel, operating on the navigable
radar must have true north features consisting of ardisplay that is    waters of the United States-
stabilized in azimuth.                                                (655)  (i) If of 40,000 gross tons or more, by September 1, 1986;
  (630)  ï¿½164.38 Automatic radar plotting aids (ARPA). (See           (656)  (ii) If of 20,000 gross tons or more, but less than 40,000
33 CFR 164.)                                                        gross tons, by September 1, 1987;
  (631)  ï¿½164.39 Steering gear: Foreign tankers.                      (657)  (iii) If of 15,000 gross tons or more, but less than 20,000
  (632)  (a) This section applies to each foreign tanker of 10,000    gross tons, by September 1, 1988.
gross tons or more, except a public vessel, that-                     (658)  (b) The device must meet the following specifications:
  (633) (1) Transfers oil at a port or place subject to the jurisdic-  (659) (I) The display must be easily readable on the bridge by
tion of the United States; or                                       day or night.
  (634) (2) Otherwise enters or operates in the navigable waters      (660)  (2) Errors in the indicated speed, when the vessel is oper-
of the United States, except a vessel described by ï¿½ 164.02 of this    ating free from shallow water effect, and from the effects of wind,
part.                                                               current, and tide, should not exceed 5 percent of the speed of the
  (635)  (b) Definitions. The terms used in this section are as fol-    vessel, or 0.5 knot, whichever is greater.
lows:                                                                (661)  (3) Errors in the indicated distance run, when the vessel is
  (636)  Constructed means the same as in Chapter II-I, Regula-    operating free from shallow water effect, and from the effects of
tions 1.1.2 and 1.1.3.1, of SOLAS 74.                               wind, current, and tide, should not exceed 5 percent of the distance
  (637)  Existing tanker means a tanker-                            run of the vessel in one hour or 0.5 nautical mile in each hour,
  (638)  (1) For which the building contract is placed on or after    whichever is greater
June 1, 1979;                                                        (662)  ï¿½164.41 Electronic position fixing devices.
                                                                      (663)  (a) Each vessel calling at a port in the continental United
which is laid or which is at a similar stage of construction on or    States, including Alaska south of Cape Prince of Wales,  except
after January I 1980;                                              each vessel owned or bareboat chartered and operated by the
                                                                     United States, or by a state or its political subdivision, or by a for-
  (640)  (3) The delivery of which occurs on or after June 1, 1982;
                                                                     eign nation, and not engaged in commerce, must have one of the
                                                                     following:
  (641)  (4) That has undergone a major conversion contracted for         in
                                                                      (664)  (1) A Type I or II LORAN C receiver as defined in Sec-
on or after June 1, 1979; or construction of which was begun on or    tion1.2(e), meeting Part 2 (Minimum Performance Standards) of
after January 1, 1980, or completed on or after June 1, 1982.       the Radio Technical Commission for Marine Services (RTCM)
                                                                     the Radio Technical Commission for Marine Services (RTCM)
 (642) Public vessel, oil hazardous materials, and foreign vessel    Paper 12-78/D0-100 dated December 20, 1977, entitled "Mini-
mean the same as in 46 U.S.C. 2101.                                 mum Performance Standards (MPS) Marine Loran-C Receiving
 (643) SOLAS 74 means the International Convention for the    Equipment". Each receiver installed on or after June 1, 1982, must
Safety of Life at Sea, 1974, as amended..                           have a label with the information required under paragraph (b) of
 (644)  Tanker means a self-propelled vessel defined as a tanker    this section. If the receiver is installed before June 1, 1982, the
by 46 U.S.C. 2101(38) or as a tank vessel by 46 U.S.C. 2101(39).    receiver must have the label with the information required under
 (645)  (c) Each tanker constructed on or after September 1,    paragraph (b) by June 1, 1985.
1984, must meet the applicable requirements of Chapter II-1, Reg-    (665)  (2) A satellite navigation receiver with:
ulations 29 and 30, of SOLAS 74.                                     (666)  (i) Automatic acquisition of satellite signals after initial
 (646)  (d) Each tanker constructed before September 1, 1984,    operator settings have been entered; and
must meet the requirements of Chapter II-I; Regulation 29.19, of     (667)  (ii) Position updates derived from satellite information
SOLAS 74.                                                           during each usable satellite pass.
 (647)  (e) Each tanker of 40,000 gross tons or more, constructed    (668)  (3) A system that is found by the Commandant to meet
before September 1, 1984, that does not meet the single-failure    the intent of the statements of availability, coverage, and accuracy
criterion of ChapterII-1, Regulation 29.16, of SOLAS 74, must    for the U.S. Coastal Confluence Zone (CCZ) contained in the U.S.
meet the requirements of Chapter II- 1, Regulation 29.20, of    "Federal Radionavigation Plan" (Report No. DOD-NO 4650.4-P, I
SOLAS 74.                                                           or No. DOT-TSC-RSPA-80-16, I). A person desiring a finding by
 (648) (f) Each tanker constructed before September 1, 1984,    the Commandant under this subparagraph must submit a written
must meet the applicable requirements of Chapter II-I, Regula-    application describing the device to the Office of Navigation
tions 29.14 and 29.15, of SOLAS 74.                                 Safety and Waterway Services, 2100 Second Street SW., Washing-
 (649)  ï¿½164.40 Devices to indicate speed and distance.            ton, DC 20593-0001. After reviewing the application, the Com-




                                                2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                      55


mandant may request additional information to establish whether     (695) (9) Display a visual alarm to indicate to shipboard person-
or not the device meets the intent of the Federal Radionavigation    nel when a failure to receive or utilize the RTCM messages
Plan.                                                              occurs;
 (669) Note.-The Federal Radionavigation Plan is available from     (696)  (10) Display a separate visual alarm which is triggered by
the National Technical Information Service, Springfield, Va.    a VTS utilizing a DSC message to indicate to shipboard personnel
22161, with the following Government Accession Numbers:            that the U.S. Coast Guard dGPS system cannot provide the
 (670) Vol 1, ADA 116468                                          required error correction messages; and
 (671) Vol 2, ADA 116469                                            (697) (I 1) Display two RTCM type 16 messages, one of which
 (672) Vol 3, ADA 116470                                          must display the position error in the position error broadcast.
 (673) Vol 4, ADA 116471                                            (698) (c) An ADSSE is considered non-operational if it fails to
 (674) (b) Each label required under paragraph (a)( ) of this sec-    meet the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section.
tion must show the following:                                       (699) Note: Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) areas and operating
 (675)  (1) The name and address of the manufacturer.             procedures are set forth in Part 161 of this chapter.
 (676)  (2) The following statement by the manufacturer:            (700)  ï¿½164.51 Deviations from rules: Emergency.
 (677) This receiver was designed and manufactured to meet Part    (701)  Except for the requirements of ï¿½ 164.53(b), in an emer-
2 (Minimum Performance Standards) of the RTCM MPS for    gency, any person may deviate from any rule in this part to the
Marine Loran-C Receiving Equipment.                                extent necessary to avoid endangering persons, property, or the
 (678)  ï¿½164.42 Rate of turn indicatoc                            environment.
 (679)  Each vessel of 100,000 gross tons or more constructed on   (702)  ï¿½164.53 Deviations from rules and reporting: Non-
or after September 1, 1984, shall be fitted with a rate of turn indi-    operating equipment.
cator.                                                              (703) (a) If during a voyage any equipment required by this part
                                                                   stops operating properly, the person directing the movement of the
  (60)ï¿½14.3Atoatd~pedet~rEquillance ~hipment.                      vessel may continue to the next port of call, subject to the direc-
  (681) (a) Each vessel required to provide automated position    tions of the District Commander or the Captain of the Port, as pro-
  (681) (a) Each vessel required to provide automated position
                                                                    vided by 33 CFR 160.
reports to a Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) must do so by an
reports  to a V   ess el Traffic  Srvic e (VTS    ust do so by an ip-  (704)  (b) If the vessel's radar, radio navigation receivers, gyro-
installed Automatemd Dependent Surveillance Shipborne o tip- compass, echo depth sounding device, or primary steering gear
  men() (AD)    sysTwelve-channel all-sistin-view Differential Global Posi  stops operating properly, the person directing the movement of the
  tioning(682) (1) Twelve-channel all-in-view Diffeem  dGP   receGlobal Posi-    vessel must report or cause to be reported that it is not operating
  (683)  (2) Martioning System (dGPS) receivercapa-,   properly to the nearest Captain of the Port, District Commander,
          (683) (2) Marine band Non-Directional Beacon receiver capa-    or, if participating in a Vessel Traffic Service, to the Vessel Traffic
ble of receiving dGPS error correction messages;
  (684) (3) VHF-FM transceiver capable of Digital Selective    Center(705)s  soon as possible.
    Calling *DSC) on the, designated DC frequency; and(705)  ï¿½164.55 Deviations from rules: Continuing operation
Calling (DSC) on the designated DSC frequency; an    d             or eriod of time
  (685)  (4) Control unit.
  (685) (4) AControllowiun it.                                      (706) The Captain of the Port, upon written application, may
  (686) (b) An ADSSE must have the following capabilities:         authorize a deviation from any-rule in this part if he determines
  (687) (1) Use dGPS to sense the position of the vessel and    that the deviation does not impair the safe navigation of the vessel
determine the time of the position using Universal Coordinated    under anticipated conditions and will not result in a violation of
Time (UTC);                                                        the rules for preventing collisions at sea. The authorization may be
  (688) (2) Fully use the broadcast type 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9, and 16    issued for vessels operating in the waters under the jurisdiction of
 messages, as specified in RTCM Recommended Standards for    the Captain of the Port for any continuing operation or period of
 Differential NAVSTAR GPS Service in determining the required    time the Captain of the Port specifies.
 information;                                                        (707)  ï¿½164.61 Marine casualty reporting and record reten-
  (689) (3) Achieve a position error which is less than ten meters    tion.
 (32.8 feet) 2 distance root mean square (2 drms) from the true      (708) When a vessel is involved in a marine casualty as defined
 North American Datum of 1983 (NAD 83) in the position infor-    in 46 CFR 4.03-1, the master or person in charge of the vessel
 mation transmitted to a VTS;                                       shall-
  (690) (4) Achieve a course error of less than 0.5 degrees from     (709) (a) Ensure compliance with 46 CFR 4.05, "Notice of
 true course over ground in the course information transmitted to a    Marine Casualty and Voyage Records," and
 VTS;                                                                (710)  (b) Ensure that the voyage records required by 46 CFR
  (691) (5) Achieve a speed error of less than 0.05 knots from    4.05-15 are retained for-
 true speed over ground in the speed information transmitted to a    (711)  (1) 30 days after the casualty if the vessel remains in the
 VTS;                                                               navigable waters of the United States; or
  (692)  (6) Receive and comply with commands broadcast from a       (712)  (2) 30 days after the return of the vessel to a United States
 VTS as DSC messages on the designated DSC frequency;               port if the vessel departs the navigable waters of the United States
  (693) (7) Receive and comply with RTCM messages broadcast    within 30 days after the marine casualty.
 as minimum shift keying modulated medium frequency signals in
 the marine radiobeacon band, and supply the messages to the    Part 165-Regulated Navigation Areas and Limited Access
 dGPS receiver;                                                     Areas
   (694) (8) Transmit the vessel's position, tagged with the UTC at    Subpart A-General
 position solution, course over ground, speed over ground, and       (713) ï¿½165.1 Purpose of part.
 Lloyd's identification number to a VTS;                             (714) The purpose of this part is to-



 56                                                 2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


  (715) (a) Prescribe procedures for establishing different types    Subpart B-Regulated Navigation Areas
 of limited or controlled access areas and regulated navigation          (736)  ï¿½165.10 Regulated navigation area.
 areas;                                                                  (737)  A regulated navigation area is a water area within a
  (716)  (b) Prescribe general regulations for different types of    defined boundary for which regulations for vessels navigating
 limited or controlled access areas and regulated navigation areas;    within the area have been established under this part.
  (717)  (c) Prescribe specific requirements for established areas;     (738)  ï¿½165.11 Vessel operating requirements (regulations).
 and                                                                     (739)  Each District Commander may control vessel traffic in an
  (718)  (d) List specific areas and their boundaries.                 area which is determined to have hazardous conditions, by issuing
  (719)  ï¿½165.5 Establishment procedures.                              regulations-
  (720)  (a) A safety zone, security zone, or regulated navigation      (740)  (a) Specifying times of vessel entry, movement, or depar-
area may be established on the initiative of any authorized Coast    ture to, from, within, or through ports, harbors, or other waters;
Guard official.                                                         (741)  (b) Establishing vessel size, speed, draft limitations, and
  (721)  (b) Any person may request that a safety zone, security    operating conditions; and
zone, or regulated navigation area be established. Except as pro-       (742)  (c) Restricting vessel operation, in a hazardous area or
vided in paragraph (c) of this section, each request must be sub-    under hazardous conditions, to vessels which have particular oper-
mitted in writing to either the Captain of the Port or District    ating characteristics or capabilities which are considered neces-
Commander having jurisdiction over the location as described in    sary for safe operation under the circumstances.
33 CFR 3, and include the following:                                    (743)  ï¿½165.13 General regulations.
  (722)  (1) The name of the person submitting the request;             (744)  (a) The master of a vessel in a regulated navigation area
  (723)  (2) The location and boundaries of the safety zone, secu-    shall operate the vessel in accordance with the regulations con-
rity zone, or regulated navigation area;                              tained in Subpart F.
  (724)  (3) The date, time, and duration that the safety zone, secu-   (745)  (b) No person may cause or authorize the operation of a
rity zone, or regulated navigation area should be established;        vessel in a regulated navigation area contrary to the regulations in
  (725)  (4) A description of the activities planned for the safety    this Part.
zone, security zone, or regulated navigation area;
  (726)  (5) The nature of the restrictions or conditions desired;    Subpart C-Safety Zones
and                                                                     (746)  ï¿½165.20 Safety zones.
  (727)  (6) The reason why the safety zone, security zone, or reg-     :(747)  A Safety Zone is a water area, shore area, or water and
ulated navigation area is necessary.                                  shore area to which, for safety or environmental purposes, access
  (728)  (Requests for safety zones, security zones, and regulated    is limited to authorized persons, vehicles, or vessels. It may be sta-
navigation areas are approved by the Office of Management and    tionary and described by fixed limits or it may be described as a
Budget under control numbers 2115-0076, 2115-0219, and 2115-          zone around a vessel in motion.
0087.)                                                                  (748)  ï¿½165.23 General regulations.
  (729) (c) Safety Zones and Security Zones. If, for good cause,        (749)  Unless otherwise provided in this part-
the request for a safety zone or security zone is made less than 5      (750)  (a) No person may enter a safety zone unless authorized
working days before the zone is to be established, the request may    by the COTP or the District Commander.
be made orally, but it must be followed by a written request within     (751)  (b) No person may bring or cause to be brought into a
24 hours.                                                             safety zone any vehicle, vessel, or object unless authorized by the
 (730)  ï¿½165.7 Notification.                                          COTP or the District Commander.
 (731)  (a) The establishment of these limited access areas and        (752)  (c) No person may remain in a safety zone or allow any
regulated navigation areas is considered rulemaking. The proce-    vehicle, vessel, or object to remain in a safety zone unless autho-
dures used to notify persons of the establishment of these areas    rized by the COTP or the District Commander; and
vary depending upon the circumstances and emergency condi-              (753)  (d) Each person in a safety zone who has notice of a law-
tions. Notification may be made by marine broadcasts, local notice    ful order or direction shall obey the order or direction of the COTP
to mariners, local news media, distribution in leaflet form, and on-    or District Commander issued to carry out the purposes of this
scene oral notice, as well as publication in the Federal Register.    subpart.
 (732) (b) Notification normally contains the physical bound-
aries of the area, the reasons for the rule, its estimated duration,    Subpart D-Security Zones
and the method of obtaining authorization to enter the area, if         (754) ï¿½165.30 Security zones.
applicable, and special navigational rules, if applicable.              (755)  (a) A security zone is an area of land, water, or land and
 (733)  (c) Notification of the termination of the rule is usually    water which is so designated by the Captain of the Port or District
made in the same form as the notification of its establishment.       Commander for such time as is necessary to prevent damage or
 (734)  ï¿½ 165.8 Geographic coordinates.                               injury to any vessel or waterfront facility, to safeguard ports, har-
 (735)  Geographic coordinates expressed in terms of latitude or    bors, territories, or waters of the United States or to secure the
longitude, or both, are not intended for plotting on maps or charts    observance of the rights and obligations of the United States.
whose referenced horizontal datum is the North American Datum           (756)  (b) The purpose of a security zone is to safeguard from
of 1983 (NAD 83), unless such geographic coordinates are    destruction, loss, or injury from sabotage or other subversive acts,
expressly labeled NAD 83. Geographic coordinates without the    accidents, or other causes of a similar nature-
NAD 83 reference may be plotted on maps or charts referenced to         (757)  (1) Vessels,.
NAD 83 only after application of the appropriate corrections that       (758)  (2) Harbors,
are published on the particular map or chart being used.                (759)  (3) Ports and




                                                 2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                      57


 (760) (4) Waterfront facilities- in the United States and all terri-  (78) (b) The area 200 yards off the vessel navigating the Vessel
tory and water, continental or insular, that is subject to the jurisdic-    Traffic System from abeam of Naked Island, maneuvering to
tion of the United States.                                         approach, moor, unmoor at Ammunition Island, or the departure
 (761) ï¿½165.33 General regulations.                               of the Vessel from Ammunition Island.
 (762) Unless otherwise provided in the special regulations in      (782) (c) Special regulation. (1) ï¿½ 165.2312 does not apply to
Subpart F of this part-                                            paragraph (a) of this section, except when the vessel is moored to
 (763) (a) No person or vessel may enter or remain in a security    Ammunition Island.
zone without the permission of the Captain of the Port;             (783) (d) Effective August 25, 1987 Notice of vessels arrival
 (764) (b) Each person and vessel in a security zone shall obey    will be made in the Notice to Mariners, Local Notice to Mariners
any direction or order of the Captain of the Port;                 and in the Local Valdez newspaper, prior to the vessel arrival.
 (765) (C) The Captain of the Port may take possession and con-    (784)  165.1704 Prince William Sound, Alaska-regulated
trol of any vessel in the security zone;                           navigation area.
 (766) (d) The Captain of the Port may remove any person, ves-      (785)  (a) The following is a regulated navigation area: The
sel, article, or thing from a security zone;                       navigable waters of the United States north of a line drawn from
 (767)  (e) No person may board, or take or place any article or    Cape Hinchinbrook Light to Schooner Rock Light, comprising
thing on board, any vessel in a security zone without the permis-    that portion of Prince William Sound between 146030'W. and
sion of the Captain of the Port; and                               147ï¿½20'W. and includes Valdez Arm, Valdez Narrows, and Port
 (768) (f) No person may take or place any article or thing upon    Valdez.
any waterfront facility in a security zone without the permission of  (786) (b) Within the regulated navigation area described in
                                                                     (786) (b) Within the regulated navigation area described in
the Captain of the Port.                                           paragraph (a) of this section, ï¿½ 161.60 of this chapter establishes a
                                                                    VTS Special Area for the waters of Valdez Arm, Valdez Narrows,
Subpart E-Restricted Waterfront Areas                              and Port Valdez northeast of a line bearing 307ï¿½ True from Tongue
 (769)  ï¿½165.A0 Restricted Waterfront Areas.                      Point at 61O02'06"N., 146ï¿½10'W.; and southwest of a line bearing
 (770) The Commandant, may direct the COTP to prevent access    3070 True from Entrance Island Light at 61 05'06"N.,
to waterfront facilities, and port and harbor areas, including ves-    146o36'42"W.
sels and harbor craft therein. This section may apply to persons
                 who do not possess the credentials outlined in 33 CFR 12509  (787)  (c) Regulations. In addition to the requirements set forth
when certain shipping activities are conducted that are outlined in    in ï¿½161.13 and ï¿½161.60(c) of this chapter, a tank vessel of 20,000
                 ~~~~~~~~33 CFR 125.15.  :          -deadweight tons or more that intends to navigate within the regu-
                                                                    lated navigation area must:
                                                                     (788) (1) Report compliance with Part 164 of this chapter, to the
Subpart F-Specific Regulated Navigation Areas and Limited
Access Areas                                                       Vessel Traffic Center (VTC);
  (771) ï¿½165.1303 Puget Sound and adjacent waters, WA-reg-           (789) (2) Have at least two radiotelephones capable of operat-
ulated navigation areas.                                           ing on the designated VTS frequency, one of which is capable of
  (772) (a) The following is a regulated navigation area: the    battery operation;
waters of the United States east of a line extending from Discov-   (790)  (3) When steady wind conditions in the VTS Special Area
ery Island Light to New Dungeness Light and all points in the    or Port Valdez exceed, or are anticipated to exceed 40 knots, pro-
Puget Sound area north and south of these lights.                  ceed as directed by the VTC (entry into the VTS Special Area and
  (773) (b) Regulations.                                           Port Valdez is prohibited);
  (774) (1) Tank vessel navigation restrictions: Tank vessels        (91)  (4) When steady wind conditions, at the designated
larger than 125,000 deadweight tons bound for a port or place in    anchorage (Knowles Head), in Prince William Sound exceed:
the United States may not operate in the regulated navigation area.  (792)  (i) 40 knots: not anchor within Prince William Sound, or
  (775)  (2) A vessel in a precautionary area which is depicted on    if at anchor, must strictly adhere to ï¿½ 164.19 of this chapter, includ-
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) nau-    ing maintaining a constant bridge watch and placing the entire
tical charts, except precautionary area "BB" (a circular area of    main propulsion system on immediate standby;
2,500 yards radius centered at 48026'24"N., 122'15'12"W.), must     (793)  (ii) 45 knots or any dragging of the anchor occurs: weigh
keep the center of the precautionary area to port.                 anchor and proceed as directed by the VTC;
  (776) Note: The center of precautionary area "RB" is not
  m(776) Note: The center of precautionary area "RBya is not         (794) (5) When transiting the VTS Special Area, limit speed to
marked by a buoy.
  (777)  ï¿½165.1701 Port Valdez, Valdez, Alaska-safety zone.
  (778) The waters within the following boundaries are a safety     (795) (6) If laden and intending to navigate the VTS Special
zone-The area within 200 yards of any waterfront facility at the    Area, limit speed to 12 knots except between Middle Rock and
Trans-Alaska Pipeline Valdez Terminal complex or vessels    Potato Point where the speed limit shall be 6 knots; and
moored or anchored at the Trans-Alaska Pipeline Valdez Terminal     (796)  (7) Not later than July 1, 1994, have an operating Auto-
complex and the area within 200 yards of any tank vessel man-    mated Dependent Surveillance Shipborne Equipment (ADSSE)
uevering to approach, moor, unmoor, or depart the Trans-Alaska    system installed,
Pipeline Valdez Terminal complex.                                   (797) (i) The designated digital selective calling frequency
  (779) ï¿½ 165.1703 Ammunition Island, Port Valdez, Alaska.         (DSC) in Prince William Sound is 156.525 MHz (VHF Channel
  (780)  (a) The waters within the following boundaries is a safety    70).
 zone-the area within 1330 yards of Ammunition Island, latitude      (798) (ii) ADSSE equipped vessels will not be required to make
 61007.5'N., longitude 146ï¿½18'W., and the vessel moored or    voice radio position reports at designated reporting points required
 anchored at Ammunition Island.                                     by ï¿½ 161.20(b), unless otherwise directed by the VTC.



58                                               2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


 (799) (iii) Whenever a vessel's ADSSE becomes non-opera-            (819)  60ï¿½13'18"N., 146038'06"W.
tional, as defined in ï¿½164.43(c) of this chapter, before entering or  (820) 60ï¿½11'24"N., 146047'00"W.
while underway in the VTS area, a vessel must:                       (821) 59ï¿½55'00"N., 145042'00"W.
 (800)  (A) Notify the VTC;                                          (822)  (ii) Gulf to Hinchinbrook Safety Fairway (recommended
 (801)  (B) Make the required voice radio position reports as set    for inbound vessel traffic). The area enclosed by rhumb lines join-
forth in ï¿½ 161.60 and required by ï¿½ 161.20 (b) of this chapter;     ing points at:
 (802)  (C) Make other voice radio reports as required by the        (823)  59015'42"N., 144ï¿½02'07"W.
VTS; and                                                              (824)  59059'00"N., 145027'24"W.
 (803)  (D) Restore the ADSSE to operating condition as soon as      8s25) 59058'00"N., 145032'12"W.
possible.                                                             (826)  59014'18"N., 144004'53"W.
 (804)  (iv) Whenever a vessel's ADSSE becomes non-opera-            (827)  (iii) Hinchinbrook to Gulf Safety Fairway (recommended
tional due to a loss of position correction information (i.e., the    for outbound vessel traffic). The area enclosed by rhumb lines
U.S. Coast Guard dGPS system cannot provide the required error'   joining points at:
correction messages) a vessel must:                                   (828) 59015'41"N., 144ï¿½23'35"W.
 (805) (A) Make the required voice radio position reports as set     (829)  59056'00"N., 145037'39"W.
forth in ï¿½ 161.60 and required by ï¿½ 160.20(b) of this chapter; and    (830) 59055'00"N., 145042'00"W.
 (806)  (B) Make other voice radio reports as required by the        (831) 59ï¿½14'19"N., 144ï¿½26'25"W.
VTS.                                                                  (832)  (2) Unimak Pass Safety Fairway. (i) East/West Safety
 (807)  (v) Whenever a vessel's ADSSE becomes non-opera-    Fairway. The area enclosed by rhumb lines joining points at:
tional before getting underway in the VTS area, permission to get    (833)  54025'58"N., 165042'24"W.
underway must be obtained from the VTC.                               (834) 54022'50"N., 165006'54"W.
 (808) Note: Regulations pertaining to Automated Dependent           (835) 54022'10"N., 164ï¿½59'29"W.
Surveillance Shipborne Equipment (ADSSE) required capabilities       (836)  54007'58"N., 162019'25"W.
are set forth in Part 164 of this chapter.                            (837)  54004'02"N., 162020'35"W.
                                                                     (838)  54022'02"N., 165043'36"W.
Part 166-Shipping Safety Fairways                                    (839)  (ii) North/South Safety Fairway. The area enclosed by
Subpart A-General                                                   rhumb lines joining points at:
 (809) ï¿½166.10 Purpose. The purpose of these regulations is to       (840) 54042'28"N., 165016'19"W.
establish and designate shipping safety fairways and fairway          (841) 54043'32"N., 16509'41"W;
anchorages to provide unobstructed approaches for vessels using      (842) 54022'50"N., 165006'54"W.
U.S. ports.                                                           (843)  54022'10"N., 164059'29"W.
 (80) ï¿½166.10 Geographic Coordinates.
 (8 l) Geographic coordinates expressed in terms of latitude or    PART 168-ESCORT REQUIREMENTS FOR CERTAIN
longitude, or both, are not intended for plotting on maps or charts    TANKERS.
whose referenced horizontal datum is the North American Datum         (844)  ï¿½168.01 Purpose.
of 1983 (NAD 83), unless such geographic coordinates are              (845) (a) This part prescribes regulations in accordance with
expressly labeled NAD 83. Geographic coordinates without the    section 4116(c) of the Oil Pollution Act of 1990 (OPA 90) (Pub. L.
NAD 83 reference may be plotted on maps or charts referenced to    101-380). The regulations will reduce the risk of oil spills from
NAD 83 only after application of the appropriate corrections that    laden, single hull tankers over 5,000 GT by requiring that these
are published on the particular map or chart being used.            tankers be escorted by at least two suitable escort vessels. The
 (812)  ï¿½166.10  Definitions. (a) "Shippings safety fairway" or    escort vessels will be immediately available to influence the tank-
"fairway" means a lane or corridor in which no artificial island or    ers' speed and course in the event of a steering or propulsion
fixed structure, whether temporary or permanent, will be permit-    equipment failure, thereby reducing the possibility of groundings
ted. Temporary underwater obstacles may be permitted under cer-    or collisions.
tain conditions described for specific areas in Subpart B. Aids to   (846) (b) The regulations in this part establish minimum escort
navigation approved by the U.S. Coast Guard may be established    vessel requirements. Nothing in these regulations should be con-
in a fairway.                                                       strued as relieving the master of a tanker from the duty to operate
 (813)  (b) "Fairway anchorage" means an anchorage area con-    the vessel in a safe and prudent manner, taking into account the
tiguous to and associated with a fairway, in which fixed structures    navigational constraints of the waterways to be traversed, other
may be permitted within certain spacing limitations, as described    vessel traffic, and anticipated weather, tide, and sea conditions,
for specific areas in Subpart B.                                    which may require reduced speeds, greater assistance from escort
 (814)  ï¿½166.110 Modification of areas. Fairways are subject to    vessels, or other operational precautions.
modification in accordance with 33 U.S.C. 1223(c); 92 Stat. 1473.     (847)  ï¿½168.05 Definitions.
Subpart B-Designations of Fairways                                   (848) As used in this part -
 (815) ï¿½166.400 Areas along the coast of Alaska.                     (849) "Disabled tanker" means a tanker experiencing a loss of
 (816)  (a) Purpose. Fairways, as described in this section, are    propulsion or steering control.
established to control the erection of structures therein to provide  (850) "Escort transit" means that portion of the tanker's voyage
safe vessel routes along the coast of Alaska.                       through waters where escort vessels are required.
 (817)  (b) Designated Areas. (1) Prince William Sound               (851) "Escort vessel" means any vessel that is assigned and ded-
Safety Fairway. (i) Hinchinbrook Entrance Safety Fairway. The    icated to a tanker during the escort transit, and that is fendered and
area enclosed by rhumb lines joining points at:                     outfitted with towing gear as appropriate for its role in an emer-
 (818) 59ï¿½59'00"N., 145ï¿½27'24"W.                                   gency response to a disabled tanker.




                                                 2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                       59


 (852)  "Laden" means transporting in bulk any quantity of appli-    (872)  (1) Must be accompanied by escort vessels that meet the
cable cargo, except for clingage and residue in otherwise empty    performance requirements of paragraph (b) of this section (but not
cargo tanks.                                                        less than the number of escorts required by ï¿½ 168.40).
 (853) ' "Single hull tanker" means any self-propelled tank vessel  (873)  (2) Must have the escort vessels positioned relative to the
that is not constructed with both double bottom and double sides    tanker such that timely response to a propulsion or steering failure
in accordance with the provision of 33 CFR 157.10Od.                can be effected.
 (854)  "Tanker master" means the licensed onboard person in        (874)  (3) Must not exceed a speed beyond which the escort ves-
charge of the tanker.                                               sels can reasonably be expected to safely bring the tanker under
 (855)  "Tanker owner or operator" means the owner or shoreside    control within the navigational limits of the waterway, taking into
organization (individual, corporation, partnership, or association),    consideration ambient sea and weather conditions, surrounding
including a demise charterer, responsible for the overall manage-    vessel traffic, hazards, and other factors that may reduce the avail-
ment and operation of the tanker.                                   able sea room.
 (856)  ï¿½168.10 Responsibilities.                                    (875)  (b) The escort vessels, acting singly or jointly in any com-
 (857)  (a) The tanker owner or operator shall:        7           bination as needed, and considering their applied force vectors on
 (858)  (1) select escort vessels that can meet the performance    the tanker's hull, mustbe capable of -
requirements of this part; and                                       (876) (1) Towing the tanker at 4 knots in calm conditions, and
 (859)  (2) inform the tanker master of thie paertforance d capbii- holding it in steady position against a 45-knot headwind;
 (859) (2) inform the tanker master of the performance capabili-
ties of the selected escort vessels. This information must be pro-   (877)  (2) Stopping the tanker within the same distance that it
vided to the master before beginning the escort transit.            could crash-stop itself from a speed of 6 knots using its own pro-
 (860) (b) The tanker master shall operate the tanker within the    pulsionsystem;
                                                                      (878) (3) Holding the tanker on a steady course against a 35-
performance capabilities of the escort vessels, taking into account
speed, sea and weather conditions, navigational considerations,    degree locked rudder at a speed of 6 knots; and
and other factors that may change or arise during the escort transit.
                                                                     ing rudder and a speed of 6 knots, within the same distance
 (861) (c) In an emergency, the tanker master may deviate from     (advance and transfer that it could turn itself with a hardover
                                                                     (advance and transfer) that it could turn itself with a hard-over
the requirements of this part to the extent necessary to avoid
endangering persons, property, or the environment, but shall
                                                                      (880) ï¿½168.60 Pre-escort conference.
immediately report the deviation to the cognizant Coast Guard
Captain of the Port (COTP).                                          (881) *(a) Before commencing an escort transit, the tanker mas-
                                                                     ter shall confer, by radio or in person, with the tanker pilot and the
 (862)  ï¿½168.20 Applicable vessels.                   .            masters of the escort vessels regarding the escort operation.
 (863) The requirements of this part apply to laden, single hull     (882)  (b) The purpose of the pre-escort conference is for all par-
tankers of 5,000 gross tons or more.                                ties to plan and discuss particulars of the escort transit.
 (864)  ï¿½168.30 Applicable cargoes..                                 (883)  (c) At a minimum, the following topics must be addressed
 (865) The requirements of this part apply to any petroleum oil    during the pre-escort conference:
listed in 46 CFR Table 30.25-1 as a pollution category I cargo.      (884)  (1) The destination, route, planned speed, other vessel
 (866)  ï¿½168.40 Applicable waters and number of escort yes-    traffic, anticipated weather, tide, and sea conditions, and other
sels.              x                            .                   navigational considerations;
  (867) The requirements of this part apply to the following          (885) (2) The type and operational status of communication,
waters:                                                             towing, steering, and propulsion equipment on the tanker and
  (868) (a) Prince William Sound: Each tanker to which this part    escort vessels;
applies must be escorted by at least two escort vessels in those     (886)  (3) The relative positioning and reaction time for the
navigable waters of the United States within Prince William    escort vessels to move into assist positions, including, if appropri-
Sound, Alaska, and the adjoining tributaries, bays, harbors, -and    ate, pre-tethering the escort vessels at crucial points along the
ports, including the navigable waters of the United States within a    route;
line drawn from Cape Hinchinbrook Light, to Seal Rocks Light, to     (887)  (4) The preparations required on the tanker and escort
a point on Montague Island at 60014.6'N., 146059'W., and the    vessels, and the methods employed in making an emergency tow-
waters of Montague Strait east of a line between Cape Puget and    line connection, including stationing of deck crews, preparation of
Cape Cleare.  :                                                     messenger lines, bridles, and other towing gear, and energizing
  (869)  (b) Puget Sound and certain associated waters: Each    appropriate deck equipment;
tanker to which this part applies must be escorted by at least two   (888)  (5) The manner in which an emergency towline connec-
escort vessels in those navigable waters of the United States and    tion would be made (which escort vessel will respond, how mes-
Washington State east of a line connecting New Dungeness Light    sengers and towlines will be passed, etc.);
with Discovery Island Light and all points in the Puget Sound area   (889)  (6) Other relevant information provided by the tanker
north and south of these lights. This area includes all the naviga-    master, pilot or escort vessel masters.
ble waters of the United States within Haro Strait, Rosario Strait,      
the Strait of Georgia, Puget Sound, and Hood Canal, as well as    Part 334-Danger Zones and Restricted Area Regulations
those portions of the Strait of Juan de Fuca east of the New         (890)  ï¿½334.1 Purpose.
Dungeness-Discovery Island line.                                     (891) The purpose of'this part is to:
  (870)  ï¿½168.50 Performance and operational requirements.            (892)  (a) Prescribe procedures for establishing, amending and
  (871)  (a) Except as provided in paragraph (c) of ï¿½ 168.10, at all    disestablishing danger zones and restricted area;
times during the escort transit each tanker to which this part       (893) (b) List the specific danger zones and restricted areas and
applies:                                                            their boundaries; and




60                                               2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


  (894)  (c)  Prescribe specific requirements, access limitations     (90)S  (5) A brief statement of the need for the area, its intended
and controlled activities within the danger zones and restricted    use and detailed description of the times, dates and extent of
areas,                                                              restriction.
  (895) ï¿½334.2 Definitions                                            (909)  (b) Public notice. (I) The Corps will normally publish
  (896)  (a) Danger zone. A defined water area (or areas) used for    public notices and Federal Register documents concurrently.
target practice, bombing, rocket firing or other especially hazard-    Upon receipt of a request for the establishment, amendment or
ous operations, normally for the armed forces. The danger zones    revocation of a danger zone or restricted area, the District Engi-
may be closed to the public on a full-time or intermittent basis, as    neer should forward a copy of the request with his/her recommen-
stated in the regulations.                                          dation, a copy of the draft public notice and a draft Federal
                                                                    Register document to the Office of the Chief of Engineers. ATTN:
  (897) (b) Restricted area. A defined water area for the purpose
                                                                    CECW-OR.  The Chief of Engineers will publish the proposal in
of prohibiting or limiting public access to the area. Restricted    the Federal Register concurrent with the public notice issued by
areas generally provide security for Government property and/or    the District Engineer.
protection to the public from the risks of damage or injury arising
                                                                      (910,  (2) Content. The public notice and Federal Register doc-
from the Government's use of that area.
                                                                    uments must include sufficient information to give a clear under-
 (898)  ï¿½334.3 Special policies.                                   standing of the proposed action and should include the following
 (899)  (a) General. The general regulatory policies stated in 33    items of information:
CFR part 320 will be followed as appropriate. In addition, danger    (911)  (i) Applicable statutory authority or authorities; (40 Stat.
zone and restricted area regulations shall provide for public access    266; 33 U.S.C. I) and (40 Stat. 892; 33 U.S.C. 3)
to the area to the maximum extent practicable.                        (912)  (ii) A reasonable comment period. The public notice
 (900)  (b) Food fishing industry. The authority to prescribe dan-    should fix a limiting date within which comments will be received,
ger zone and restricted area regulations must be exercised so as    normally a period not less than 30 days after publication of the
not to unreasonably interfere with or restrict the food fishing    notice.
industry. Whenever the proposed establishment of a danger zone       (913)  (iii) The address of the District Engineer as the recipient
or restricted area may affect fishing operations, the District Engi-    of any comments received.
neer will consult with the Regional Director, U.S. Fish and Wild-    (914) (iv) The identity of the applicant/proponent;
life Service, Department of the Interior and the Regional Director,  (915)  (v) The name or title, address and telephone number of
National Marine Fisheries Service, National Oceanic & Atmo-    the Corps employee from whom additional information concern-
spheric Administration (NOAA),                                      ing the proposal may be obtained;
 (901o  (c) Temporary, occasional or intermittent use. If the use    (916)  (vi) The location of the proposed activity accompanied by
of the water area is desired for a short period of time, not exceed    a map of sufficient detail to show the boundaries of the area(s) and
thirty days in duration, and that planned operations can be con-    its relationship to the surrounding area.
ducted safely without imposing unreasonable restrictions on navi-    (917)  (3) Distribution. Public notice will be distributed in
gation, and without promulgating restricted area regulations in    accordance with 33 CFR 325.3(d)(1). In addition to this general
accordance with the regulations in this section, applicants may be    distribution, public notices will be sent to the following Agencies:
informed that formal regulations are not required. Activities of     (918)  (i) The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) where the
this type shall not reoccur more often than biennially (every other    use of airspace is involved.
year), unless danger zone/restricted area rules are promulgated       (919)  (ii) The Commander, Service Force, U.S. Atlantic Fleet,
under this Part. Proper notices for mariners requesting that vessels    if a proposed action involves a danger zone off the U.S. Atlantic
avoid the area will be issued by the Agency requesting such use of    coast.
the water area, or if appropriate, by the District Engineer, to all  (920)  (iii) Proposed danger zones on the U.S. Pacific coast
known interested persons. Copies will also be sent to appropriate    must be coordinated with the applicable commands as follows:
State agencies, the Commandant, U.S. Coast Guard, Washington,         (921)  Alaska, Oregon and Washington:
DC 20590, and Director, Defense Mapping Agency, Hydrographic          (922)  Commander, Naval Base, Seattle
Center, Washington, DC 20390, ATTN: Code NS 12. Notification         (923) California:
to all parties and Agencies shall be made at least two weeks prior   (924)  Commander, Naval Base, San Diego
to the planned event, or earlier, if required for distribution of Local  (925)  Hawaii and Trust Territories:
Notice to Mariners by the Coast Guard.                                (926) Commander, Naval Base, Pearl Harbor
 (902)  ï¿½334.4 Establishment and amendment procedures.               (927)  (c) Public hearing. The District Engineer may conduct a
 (903)  (a) Application. Any request for the establishment,    public hearing in accordance with 33 CFR part 327.
amendment or revocation of a danger zone or restricted area must      (928)  (d) Environmental documentation. The District Engineer
contain sufficient information for the District Engineer to issue a    shall prepare environmental documentation in accordance with
public notice, and as a minimum must contain the following:         appendix B to 33 CFR part 325.
                                                                     (929)  (e) District Engineer's recommendation. After closure of
                              '.904) -(1) Name,. add.              the comment period, and upon completion of the District Engi-
including the identity of the command and DoD facility and the    nees review he/she shall forward the case through channels to
                                                                    neer's review he/she shall forward the case through channels to
identity of a point of contact with phone number.
                                                                    the Office of the Chief of Engineers, ATTN: CECW-OR with a
 (905) (2) Name of waterway and if a small tributary, the name    recommendation of whether or not the danger zone or restricted
of a larger connecting waterbody.                                   area regulation should be promulgated. The District Engineer
 (906) (3) Name of closest city or town, county/parish and state.    shall include a copy of environmental documentation prepared in
 (907)  (4) Location of proposed or existing danger zone or    accordance with appendix B to 33 CFR part 325, the-record of any
restricted area with a map showing the location, if possible.       public hearings, if held, a summary of any comments received and



                                                 2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                       61


a response thereto, and a draft of the regulation as it is to appear in    advance through the usual media for the dissemination of such
the Federal Register.                                               information. Notice to the U.S. Coast Guard and NOTAM shall be
 (930)  (f) Final decision. The Chief of Engineers will notify the    issued at least 48 hours before firing is to be conducted on the
District Engineer of the final decision to either approve or disap-    range. Information as to the dates, time, and characteristics of the
prove the regulations. The District Engineer will notify the appli-    firing shall be advertised in advance of each session of firing.
cant/proponent and publish a public notice of the final decision.    (944) (3) Prior to conducting each practice firing, the danger
Concurrent with issuance of the public notice the Office of the    zone shall be patrolled by aircraft to note the location of all vessels
Chief of Engineers will publish the final decision in the Federal    within the area. The practice firing exercise shall be conducted in
Register and either withdraw the proposed regulation or issue the    the portion of the danger zone not occupied by surface craft.
final regulation as appropriate. The final rule shall become effec-  {945) (4) This section shall be 'enforced by the Commander,
tive no sooner than 30 days after publication in the Federal Regis-    Alaskan Air Command, U.S. Air Force, Seattle, Washington, or
ter unless the Chief of Engineers finds that sufficient cause exists    such agencies as he may designate.
and publishes that rationale with the regulations.                   (946)  ï¿½334.1290 In Bering Sea, Shemya Island Area, Alaska;
 (931) ï¿½334.5 Disestablishment of a danger zone.                   meteorological rocket launching facility, Alaskan Air Com-
 (932) (a) Upon receipt of a request from any agency for the dis-    mand, U.S. Air Force. (a) The danger zone. An arc of a circle
establishment of a danger zone, the District Engineer shall notify    with a 45-nautical-mile radius of the launch point centered at lati-
that agency of its responsibility for returning the area to a condi-    tude 52043'30"N., longitude 174ï¿½06'05"E. extending clockwise
tion suitable for use by the public. The agency must either certify    from 1100 true bearing to 2000 true bearing.
that it has not used the area for a purpose that requires cleanup or  (947)  (b) The regulation. (1) Rockets will normally be launched
that it has removed all hazardous materials and munitions, before    one each day Monday through Friday between 9 a.m. and 3 p.m.
the Corps will disestablish the area. The agency will remain    Rocket hardware will discharge into the sea 22.5 to 37.5 nautical
responsible for the enforcement of the danger zone regulations to    miles off the launchsite. The instrument package with parachute
prevent unauthorized entry into the area until the area is deemed    will impact about 1 /2 hours later at an undetermined area, depend-
safe for use by the public and the area is disestablished by the    ing on weather conditions.
Corps.                                                               (948) (2) All mariners entering the area will do so at their own
 (933) (b) Upon receipt of the certification required in paragraph    risk and are cautioned to take evasive action as necessary.
(a) of this section, the District shall forward the request for dis-  (949) (3) The regulation in this section shall be enforced by the
establishment of the danger zone through channels to CECW-OR,    Department of the Air Force, Headquarters 6th Weather Wing
with its recommendations.  Notice of proposed rulemaking and    (MAC), Andrews Air Force Base, Washington, D.C. 20331.
public procedures as outlined in ï¿½334.4 are not normally required    (950) ï¿½334.1300 Blying Sound area, Gulf of Alaska, Alaska;
before publication of the final rule revoking a restricted area or    air-to-air gunnery practice area, Alaskan Air Command, U.S.
danger zone regulation. The disestablishment/revocation of the    Air Force. (a) The danger zone. A rhomboidal area beginning at
danger zone or restricted area regulation removes a restriction on a  (951)  5905 !'30"N., 148ï¿½42'00"W.; thence to
waterway.                                                            (952)  59022'30"N., 147000'00"W.; thence to
 (934) ï¿½334.6 Datum.                                                 (953)  58ï¿½52'00"N., 148ï¿½03'00"W.; thence to
 (935)  (a) Geographic coordinates expressed in terms of latitude    (954)  59ï¿½20'00"N., 149045'00"W., and thence to point of begin-
or longitude, or both, are not intended for plotting on maps or    ning.
charts whose reference horizontal datum is the North American        (955)  (b) The regulations. (1) 20-mm. cannon will be fired at
Datum of 1983 (NAD 83), unless such geographic coordinates are    towed targets in the air. One firing mission will be conducted
expressly labeled NAD 83. Geographic coordinates without the    every 2 weeks during daylight hours only and weather permitting.
NAD 83 reference may be plotted on maps or charts referenced to      (956) (2) The fact that practice firing is to take place over the
NAD 83 only after application of the appropriate corrections that    designated area shall be advertised to the public 7 days in advance
are published on the particular map or chart being used.            through the usual media for the dissemination of such information.
 (936)  (b) For further information on NAD 83 and National Ser-    Notice to the U.S. Coast Guard and NOTAM shall be issued at
vice nautical charts please contact:                                least 48 hours before firing is to be conducted on the range. Infor-
 (937)  Director, Coast Survey (N/CG2)                             mation as to the dates, time, and characteristics of the firing shall
 (938)  National Ocean Service, NOAA                               be advertised in advance of each session of firing.
 (939)  1315 East-West Highway, Station 6147                         (957)  (3) Prior to conducting each practice firing, the danger
 (94))  Silver Spring, MD 20910-3282.                              zone shall be patrolled by aircraft to note the location of all vessels
 (941)  ï¿½334.1280 Bristol Bay, Alaska; air-to-air weapon           within the area. The practice firing exercise shall be conducted in
range, Alaskan Air Command, U.S. Air Force. (a) The danger    the portion of the danger zone not occupied by surface craft.
zone. An area in Bristol Bay beginning at latitude 58ï¿½24'N., longi-  (958)  (4) The regulations in this section shall be enforced by the
tude 159 10'W.; thence to latitude 57ï¿½58'N., longitude 158030'W.;    Commander, Alaskan Air Command, U.S. Air Force, Anchorage,
thence to latitude 57ï¿½07'N., longitude 160020'W.; thence to lati-    Alaska, or such agencies as he may designate.
tude 58ï¿½02'N., longitude 161 ï¿½40'W.; and thence to the point of      i959) ï¿½334.1320 Kuluk Bay, Adak, Alaska; naval restricted
beginning.                                                          area.
 (942) (b) The regulations. (1) Intermittent firing will be con-    (96())  (a) The area. The northwest portion of Kuluk Bay
ducted over two to three day periods about 2 hours a day between    bounded as follows:' Beginning on shore at
the hours of 10:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m. during the months of May       (96))  51ï¿½55'00"N., 176ï¿½33'09"W.; thence due east to
through August.                                                       962) 51ï¿½55'00"N., 176ï¿½33'09"W.; thence due south to
 (943)  (2) The fact that practice firing is to take place over the  (963) 51ï¿½51'55"N., 176ï¿½31'09"W.; thence due west to the shore
designated area shall be advertised to the public 72 hours in    at




62                                                2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS


 (964)  51051'00"N., 176037'43"W.; thence along the shoreline to:      (983)  (4) Quota. If the Assistant Administrator determines and
the point of beginning.                                               publishes notice that 675 Steller sea lions has been killed inciden-
 (965)  (b) The regulations. (1) Except in great emergency, no        tally in the course of commercial fishing operations in Alaskan
vessel shall anchor in the restricted area described above.           waters and adjacent areas of the U.S. Exclusive Economic Zone
 (966)  (2) The dragging of anchors in or across the restricted    (EEZ) west of 141ï¿½W longitude during any calendar year, then it
area is prohibited and no object attached to a vessel shall be    will be unlawful to kill any additional Steller sea lions in this area.
placed on or near the bottom.                                         In order to monitor this quota, the Director, Alaska Region,
 (967)  (3) Fishing and trawling activities in the restricted area    National Marine Fisheries Service, may require the placement of
are prohibited.                                                       an observer on any fishing vessel. If data indicate that the quota is
 (968)  (4) The regulation of this restricted area shall be enforced    being approached, the Assistant Administrator will issue emer-
by the Commander, Patrol Wing, U.S. Pacific Fleet, Naval Air    gency rules to establish closed areas, allocate the remaining quota
Station Moffett Field, California, and such agencies and he/she    among fisheries, or take other action(s) to ensure that commercial
may designate.                                                        fishing operations do not exceed the quota.
 (969) ï¿½334.1330 Bering Strait, Alaska; naval restricted area          (984)  (b) Exceptions-(l) Permits. The Assistant Administrator
off Cape Prince of Wales. (a) The area. An area 2,000 feet wide    may issue permits authorizing activities that would otherwise be
extending from a point on Cape Prince of Wales marked by a tri-    prohibited under paragraph (a) of this section in accordance with
angular cable marker located approximately midway between the    and subject to the provisions of 50 CFR part 222, subpart C-
village of Wales and Cape Prince of Wales Light to a point four    Endangered Fish or Wildlife Permits.
statute miles due west of the cable marker with the axis of the area
passing through the two points.                                        (985)  (2) Official activities. Paragraph (a) of this section does
  (970)passing through the regulations. (I) No vessel shall anchor in the    not prohibit or restrict a Federal, state or local government official,
 (9 regulati            on ea described in paragraph (a) of this section.  or his or her designee, who is acting in the course of official duties
restricted area described in paragraph (a) of this section. from:
  (971)  (2) Dragging of anchors in or across the restricted area is
prohibited and no object attached to a vessel shall be placed on or     (986) (i) Taking a Steller sea lion in a humane manner, if the
near the bottom.                                                      taking is for the protection or welfare of the animal, the protection
  (972)  (3) The regulations in this section shall be enforced by the    of the public health and welfare, or the nonlethal removal of nui-
Commander, Third Fleet, Pearl Harbor, Hawaii, and such agen-    sance animals; or
cies as he may designate.                                               (987)  (ii) Entering the buffer areas to perform activities that are
  (973)  Title 50, Wildlife and Fisheries                              necessary for national defense, or the performance of other legiti-
  (974)  Part 227-Threatened Fish and Wildlife                         mate governmental activities.
  (975) Subpart B-Threatened Marine Mammals
  (9756)  ï¿½227.12 Stell    ener se a lion.s                             (988)  (3) Subsistence takings by Alaska natives. Paragraph (a)
  (977)   22.2(a) Prohibins(I) No discharge of firearms.  Exept as    of this section does not apply to the taking of Steller sea lions for
  (977)  (a) Prohibitions-(1) No discharge of firearms. Except as    subsistence purposes under section 10(e) of the Act.
provided in paragraph (b) of this section, no person subject to the
jurisdiction of the United States may discharge a firearm at or         (989)  (4) Emergency situations. Paragraph (a)(2) of this section
within 100 yards (91.4 meters) of a Steller sea lion. A firearm is    does not apply to an emergency situation in which compliance
any weapon, such as a pistol or rifle, capable of firing a missile    with that provision presents a threat to the health, safety, or life of
using an explosive charge as a propellant.                            a person or presents a significant threat to the vessel or property.
  (978)  (2) No approach in buffer areas. Except as provided in         (990)  (5) Exemptions. Paragraph (a)(2) of this section does not
paragraph (b) of this section:                                        apply to any activity authorized by a prior written exemption from
  (979) (i) No owner or operator of a vessel may allow the vessel    the Director, Alaska Region, National Marine Fisheries Service.
to approach within 3 nautical miles (5.5 kilometers) of a Steller    Concurrently with the issuance of any exemption, the Assistant
 sea lion rookery site listed in paragraph (a)(3) of this section;     Administrator will publish notice of the exemption in the FED-
  (980)  (ii) No person may approach on land not privately owned       ERAL REGISTER.  An exemption may be granted only if the
 within one-half statutory miles (0.8 kilometers) or within sight of    activity will not have a significant adverse affect on Steller sea
 a Steller sea lion rookery site listed in paragraph (a)(3) of this sec-    lions, the activity has been conducted historically or traditionally
 tion, whichever is greater, except on Marmot Island; and              in the buffer zones, and there is not readily available and accept-
  (981) (iii) No person may approach on land not privately owned       able alternative to or site for the activity.
 within one and one-half statutory miles (2.4 kilometers) or within
 sight of the eastern shore of Marmot Island, including the Steller      (99j)  (c) Penalties. (I) Any person who violates this section or
                                                                       the Act is subject to the penalties specified in section I I of the Act,
 sea lion rookery site listed in paragraph (a)(3) of this section,    and any othe penalties provided             in section by  of the Act,
 whichever is greater.        -                                        and any other penalties provided by law.
 whichever is greater.
  (982)  (3) Listed sea lion rookery sites. Listed Steller sea lion     (992) (2) Any vessel used in violation of this section or the
 rookery sites consist of the rookeries in the Aleutian Islands and    Endangered Species Act is subject to forfeiture under section
 the Gulf of Alaska listed in Table I.                                 II (e)(4)(B) of the Act.




                                                2. NAVIGATION REGULATIONS                                                        63


                                        Listed Steller Sea Lion Rookery Sites'

                                                    From                             To                   NOAA
                Island                       Lat.           Long.            Lat.           Long.          chart          Notes

I. Outer I                              59020.5 N       150023.0 W      59ï¿½21.0 N       150024.5 W      16681         S quadrant.
2. Sugarloaf I                          58053.0 N       150002.0 W                                       16580        Whole island.
3. Marmot I                             58014.5 N       151047.5 W      58010.0 N       151ï¿½51.0 W      16580         SE quadrant.
4. ChirikofI                            55046.5 N       155039.5 W      55046.5 N       155ï¿½43.0 W       16580        S quadrant.
5. Chowiet I  56000.5 N                                 156ï¿½41.5 W      56000.5 N       156042.0 W      16013         S quadrant.:
6. Atkins I                             55ï¿½03.5 N       159ï¿½18.5 W                                      16540         Whole island.
7. Chernabura I                         54047.5 N       159O31.0W       54045.5 N       159ï¿½35.5 W      16540         SE corer.
8. Pinnacle Rock                        54046.0 N       161046.0W                                       16540         Whole island.
9. Clubbing Rks (N)                     54ï¿½43.0 N       162026.5 W                                       16540        Whole island.
Clubbing Rks (S)                        54042.0 N       162026.5 W                                       16540        Whole island.
10. Sea Lion Rks                        55028.0 N       163ï¿½12.0 W                                      16520        Whole island,
11. Ugamak I                            54014.0 N       164ï¿½48.0 W      54013.0 N       164048.8 W      16520        E end of
                                                                                                                      island.
12. Akun I                             54 18.0 N        165032.5 W      54018.0 N       165031.5 W      16547        Billings Head
                                                                                                                      Bight.
13. Akutan I                            54003.5 N       166000.0 W      54005.5 N       166005.0W       16520        SW corner,
                                                                                                                      Cape Morgan.
14. Bogoslof I                          53056.0 N       168ï¿½02.0 W                                      16500        Whole island.
15. Ogchul I                            53000.0 N       168024.0 W                                      16500        Whole island.
16. Adugak I                            52055.0 N       169ï¿½10.5 W                                      16500        Whole island.
17. Yunaska I                          52042.0 N        170038.5 W      52041.0 N       170ï¿½34.5 W      16500        NE end.
18. Seguam I                           52021.0 N        172035.0W       52021.0 N       172033.0 W      16480        N coast,
                                                                                                                      Saddleridge
                                                                                                                      Pt.
19. Agligadak I                         52006.5 N       172054.0 W                                      16480        Whole island.
20. Kasatochi I                         52010.0 N       175031.5 W      52ï¿½10.5 N       175ï¿½29.0W        16480        N half of
                                                                                                                      island.
21. AdakI.                              51036.5 N       176ï¿½59.0 W      51ï¿½38.0 N       176ï¿½59.5 W       16460        SW point,
                                                                                                                      Lake Point.
22. Gramp rock                          51 29.0 N       178020.5 W                                      16460         Whole island.
23. Tag I                               51ï¿½33.5 N       178034.5W                                        16460        Whole island.
24. Ulak 1                              51020.0 N       178ï¿½57.0 W      510ï¿½18.5 N      178059.5 W       16460        SE corner,
                                                                                                                      Hasgox Pt.
25. Semisopochnoi                       51ï¿½58.5 N       179ï¿½45.5 E      51 47.0 N       179ï¿½46.0 E       16440        E quadrant,
                                                                                                                      Pochnoi Pt.
Semsopochnoi                            52ï¿½01.5 N       179037.5 E      52ï¿½001.5 N      179ï¿½39.0 E      16440         N quadrant,
                                                                                                                      Petrel Pt.
26. Amchitka I                          51022.5 N       179028.0 E      51021.5 N       179ï¿½25.0 E       16440        East Cape.
27. Amchitka I                          51032.5 N       178049.5 E                                       16440        Column Rocks
28. Ayugadak Pt                         51ï¿½45.5 N       178ï¿½24.5E                                        16440        SE coast of
                                                                                                                      Rat island.
29. Kiska I                             51057.5 N       177021.0 E      51056.5 N       177ï¿½20.0 E       16640        W central,
                                                                                                                      Lief Cove.
30. Kiska I                             51052.5 N       177ï¿½13.0 E      51053.5 N       177 12.0 E       16440        Cape St.
                                                                                                                      Stephen.
31. Walrus I                            57011.0 N       169ï¿½56.0 W                                       16380        Whole island.
32. Buldir 1                            52ï¿½20.5 N       175057.0 E      52023.5 N       175ï¿½51.0 E       16420        SE point to
                                                                                                                      NW point.
33. Agattu I                            52ï¿½24.0 N       173ï¿½21.5 E                                       16420        Gillion Point.
34. Agattu 1                            52ï¿½23.5 N       173ï¿½43.5 E      52ï¿½22.0 N       173C41.0 E       16420        Cape Sabak.
35. Attu I                              52054.5 N       172ï¿½28.5 E      52ï¿½57.5 N       172ï¿½31.5 E       16681        S Quadrant.

I Each site extends in a clockwise direction from the first set of geographic coordinates along the shoreline at mean lower low water to the
second set of coordinates; or, if only one set of geographic coordinates is listed, the site extends around the entire shoreline of the island at
mean lower low water






                                       3. CAPE SPENCER TO BEAUFORT SEA

  (1)   Alaska, the largest of the United States, occupies the NW     (i i)  Disposal Sites and Dumping Grounds.-These areas are
 part of the North American continent. The State is bordered on the    rarely mentioned in the Coast Pilot, but are shown on the nautical
 E and S by Canada and on the W and N by the Pacific and Arctic    charts. (See Disposal Sites and Dumping Grounds, chapter 1, and
 Oceans. The northernmost point of Alaska is Point Barrow            charts for limits.)
 (71ï¿½23'N., 156028'W.); the westernmost point is Cape Wrangell         (12)  Aids to navigation.-Lights, although infrequent along
 (52055'N., 172ï¿½26'E.) on Attu Island; and the southernmost point    much of this coast, do mark the important headlands and passages;
 is Nitrof Point (51 13.0'N., 179ï¿½07.7'W.), on Amatignak Island.    fog signals are at most of the principal lights. Many of the buoys
 Cape Muzon (54040'N., 132ï¿½41'W.) is on the historic parallel    in the important passages are equipped with radar reflectors,
 which is the coastal boundary between Alaska and Canada's Brit-    which greatly increase the range at which the buoys may be
 ish Columbia. Cape Muzon is on the N side of Dixon Entrance and    detected. Many of the aids to navigation in Alaska are seasonal.
 is 480 miles NW of Cape Flattery, Washington; between the two    There are aerolights in Alaska that are useful for navigation pur-
 United States capes is the coastal area of British Columbia.        poses, but these should not be confused with marine lights. (See
  (2)   Alaska was purchased from Russia in 1867 and became an    the Light List for a complete description of navigational aids.)
 organized territory of the United States in 1912. By Presidential     (13)  Electronic navigation.-Radar, loran, radar beacons
 proclamation of January 3, 1959, Alaska officially became the    (Racons), and the radio direction finder have given the navigator
49th of the United States. Principal resources are oil, timber, fish,    means of determining his position in any weather. The mariner
 and coal. Alaska has a general ocean coastline of 5,770 nautical    should, however, appreciate the limitations and sources of error of
 miles and a tidal shoreline of 29,462 miles. The State is so huge    the various systems. Radar should be properly calibrated and
that its description requires two complete volumes of the National    tuned. Radio direction finders must be calibrated, and the operator
Ocean Service's nine-volume series of United States Coast Pilots.   should become experienced in the use of the equipment. Radar,
  (3)   Coast Pilot 9 deals with the Pacific and Arctic coasts of    radio direction finder, and loran equipment are subject to malfunc-
Alaska from Cape Spencer to Beaufort Sea; general ocean coast-    tions which may not be immediately apparent to the operator, and
line totals 5,520 nautical miles, and tidal shoreline totals 18,377    there are conditions when loran or radio signals may be subject to
miles. Included are the Gulf of Alaska coast and islands, the    error when the shipboard receiver is operating properly. Sound-
Alaska Peninsula, the Aleutian Islands, and the United States    ings should always be taken in critical places, and the position
coasts and islands of the Bering Sea, Chukchi Sea, and Beaufort     should be checked by visual bearings when possible.
Sea.                                                                 (14)  Except for the Arctic Coast of Alaska, where radar bea-
  (4)   Between Cape Spencer and Cape St. Elias, the coast is    cons (Racons) are seasonally maintained, navigation by radar is
fairly regular. Along this stretch are Lituya Bay, Yakutat Bay, and    facilitated along the remainder of the coast of Alaska and in the
Icy Bay. The great Malaspina Glacier comes to within 3 miles of    various passages by the generally high relief of the coastline. The
the ocean W of Yakutat Bay.                                         rugged coast provides many points, headland, large offshore rocks
  (5)   From Cape St. Elias to Cook Inlet, the characteristic for-    and islands which give accurate radar ranges and bearings. Radar
mation is generally rocky; the waters are mostly deep, but there    ranges are more accurate than radar bearings. When two or more
are also great variations in depth. The visible topographic features,    suitable targets can be positively identified, a better fix is obtained
such as the mountains and the rugged islands, probably are dupli-    by radar ranges alone than by radar ranges and bearings. When
cated underwater.                                                   visibility permits, visual bearings should always be taken. When
              (6)   In Cook Inlet, the characteristic formation is the result of    positioning by a bearing and a radar range of a single object, the
                  a aion. C net shores aratrewist  boursmgati       identification of the target must be positive. Floating aids to navi-
glacial action. The shores are strewn with boulders, some of great
size, and soundings indicate the existence underwater of similar    gation should not be used as targets for fixing position.
boulders, particularly in areas of hard bottom where the boulders     (is)  Radiobeacons are limited in the area of this Coast Pilot.
have not been buried by silt.                                       Radio direction finder equipment is subject to several kinds of
                                                                     errors. Bearings obtained at twilight or at night or bearings which
 (7) W from Cook Inlet, and throughout the islands off the SE
                   W from Cook Inlet, and throughout the islands off the SE  are almost parallel to the coast should be accepted with reserva-
side of the Alaska Peninsula, rock formation is again found. The    tions, due to "night effect" and to the distortion of the radio waves
                 prinipalharors re Kdia  on  odia  IsandSandPoit inthe tions, due to "night effect" and to the distortion of the radio waves
principal harbors are Kodiak on Kodiak Island, Sand Point in the
                 pr incipalharbors are KodiakonKodandSad Po n the Sif traveling overland. Other sources of error in the system may be
Shumagin Islands, and King Cove and False Pass on the SE side    avoided by the proper calibration of the shipboard receiver.
                 of the Peninsula.                                ~~~~~~~~~avoided by the proper calibration of the shipboard receiver.
of the Peninsula.
                                                                      (16)  Loran provides good coverage from several stations along
 (8)   The Aleutian Islands are rugged and mountainous, with    the North Pacific Ocean. These stations provide vessels generally
numerous off-lying islets, rocks, and reefs. Some of the larger    good fixes when sailing along the coast or approaching the coast
islands provide more or less sheltered anchorage.                   from seaward.
 (9)   The Bering Sea is characterized in general by shallow         (17)  The frequent occurrence of fog along this coast makes
waters, with extensive sand and mud flats along the shores, partic-    radar an invaluable aid in detecting other traffic and obtaining a
ularly in the approaches to the various bays and rivers. There is lit-    line of position and/or fix. Bridge-to-bridge radio communication
tie rock formation, and its occurrence, where found, is limited in    (VHF-FM) is another useful aid, regardless of weather, in waters
area.                                                               where maneuvering room is limited or restricted. The use of VHF-
 (o0)  The Arctic coast is mostly low, especially to the N of Cape    FM equipment for short-range communication is increasing, and
Lisbumrne. The principal landing places are Kotzebue and Barrow.    so are the number of vessels equipped with this equipment. The


64




                                               3. CAPE SPENCER TO BEAUFORT SEA                                                     65


primary advantages of this radio system are its line-of-sight char-    (34)  Associated structures within 100 yards of the main struc-
acteristic and relative freedom from static interference.            ture, regardless of location, are not normally lighted but are
 (18)  Radar beacons (Racors) have been established in the    marked with red or white retro-reflective material. Mariners are
area of this Coast Pilot as additional aids to navigation. Most are    cautioned that uncharted submerged pipelines and cables may
along the U.S. Arctic Coast of Alaska from Point Lay (69ï¿½44.1'N.,    exist in the vicinity of these structures, or between such structures
163ï¿½00.6'W.) to Brownlow Point (70ï¿½09.6'N., 145ï¿½50.6'W.).    and the shore.
Racons are generally seasonally maintained from July 1 to Sep-         (35)  During construction of a well or during drilling opera-
tember 15. (See Racons, chapter 1, for additional information.)      tions, and until such time as the platform is capable of supporting
 (19)  COLREGS Demarcation Lines.-The International Reg-    the required aids, fixed white lights on the attending vessel or
ulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea, 1972 (72 COLREGS)         drilling rig may be shown in lieu of the required quick flashing
apply on all the sounds, bays, harbors, and inlets of Alaska. (See    lights on the structure. The attending vessel's foghorn may also be
Part 80, chapter 2.)                                                 used as a substitute.
 (20)  Shipping Safety Fairways.-A system of shipping safety          (36)  Submerged wells may or may not be marked depending on
fairways has been established in the approaches to Prince William    their location and depth of water over them.
Sound and through Unimak Pass. The Prince William Sound                (37)  All obstruction lights and fog signals, used to mark the
Safety Fairway, extending SE from Hinchinbrook Entrance, has    various structures, are operated as privately maintained aids to
separate inbound and outbound traffic lanes that merge in the NW     navigation. (See 33 CFR 67, for detailed regulations for the mark-
part. The Unimak Pass Safety Fairway is comprised of an E-W          ing of offshore structures.)
fairway with a connecting N-S fairway in the W  section. (See          (38)  Information concerning the establishment, change, or dis-
166.100 through 166.110 and 166.400, chapter 2, for limits and    continuance of offshore oil-well structures and their appurte-
regulations.)                                                        nances is published in the Local Notice to Mariners or by
 (21)  Ports and Waterways Safety.-(See Part 160, chapter 2,    Broadcast Notice. Additional information may also be obtained
for regulations governing vessel operations and requirements for    from the Coast Guard Commander. Mariners are advised to navi-
notification of arrivals, departures, hazardous conditions, and cer-    gate with caution in the vicinity of these structures and in those
tain dangerous cargoes to the Captain of the Port.)                  waters where oil exploration is in progress, and to use the latest
 (22)  A, Traffic Separation Scheme (Traffic Lanes) has been    and largest scale chart of the area.
established in Prince William Sound. (See chapter 4, for details.)     (39)  During the continuing program of establishing, changing,
 (23);  A Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) has been established in    and discontinuing oil-well structures, special caution should be
the Prince William Sound area. The Service has been established    exercised when navigating the inshore and offshore waters of the
to prevent collisions and groundings, and to protect the navigable    affected areas in order to avoid collision with any of the structures.
waters from environmental harm.                                        (40)  Information concerning seismographic operations is not
 (24)  The Vessel Traffic Service provides for a Vessel Traffic    published in Notice to Mariners unless such operations create a
Center (VTC) that regulates the routing and movement of vessels    menace to navigation in waters used by general navigation. Where
by lradar surveillance, movement reports of vessels, VHF-FM          seismographic operations are being conducted, casings (pipes),
radio communications, and specific reporting points. The system    buoys, stakes, and detectors are installed. Casings are marked with
consists of traffic lanes, a separation zone, and reporting points.  flags by day and fixed red lights by night; buoys are colored inter-
       (25)  The Service is mandatory. (See 161.301 through 161.387,    national orange and white horizontal bands; and stakes are marked
                                                                     with flags.
chapter 2, for rules and regulations, and chapter 4 for details.)
 (26)  Anchorages.-Many: of the harbors in the moIuntainous           (41)  Pipelaying barges.-With the increased number of pipe-
 areas are subject to violent williwaws  These severi e mgusts  may  line laying operations, operators of all types of vessels should be
                                        areas are subject to violent williwaws. These severe gusts may  aware of the dangers of passing close aboard, close ahead, or close
come from any direction and should be considered when selecting
acome from anydire ction and should be considered when selecting    astern of a jetbarge or pipelaying barge. Pipelaying barges and jet-
               an anchorage.                                         barges usually move at 0.5 knot or less and have anchors which
 (27)  Dangers.-Offshore drilling and exploration operations are
increasing in the waters of Alaska, especially in Cook Inlet.
                                                                     may be marked by lighted anchor buoys. The exposed pipeline
 (28)Y  Obstructions in these waters consist of submerged wells    behind the pipelaying barge and the area in the vicinity of anchors
and oil well structures (platforms), including appurtenances    are hazardous to navigation and should be avoided. The pipeline
thereto, such as mooring piles, anchor and mooring buoys, pipes,    and anchor cables also represent a submerged hazard to naviga-
,and stakes.                                                         tion. It is suggested, if safe navigation permits, for all types of ves-
 (29)  In general, the oil well structures (platforms), depending    sels to pass well ahead of the pipelaying barge or well astern of the
on their size, depth of water in which located, proximity of vessel    jetbarge. The pipelaying barge, jetbarge, and attending vessels
routes, nature and amount of vessel traffic, and the effect of back-  may be contacted on VHF-FM channel 16 for passage instruc-
ground lighting, may be marked in one of the following ways:         tions.
 (30)  Quick flashing white light(s) visible at least 5 miles: fog    (42)   Kelp grows on nearly every danger with a rocky bottom
signal sounded when visibility is less than 5 miles.                 and is particularly heavy in many places in the Aleutian Islands. It
 (31)  Quick flashing white light(s) visible at least 3 miles: fog    will be seen on the surface of the water during the summer and
signal sounded when visibility is less than 3 miles.                 autumn; during the winter and spring it is not always to be seen,
 (32)  Quick flashing white or red lights visible at least 1 mile:    especially where it is exposed to a heavy sea. Many rocks are not
may or may not be equipped with fog signal.                          marked by kelp, because a heavy sea will occasionally tear it away
 (33)  Structures on or adjacent to the edges of navigable chan-    and a moderate current will draw it under water so that it will not
nels and fairways, regardless of location, may be required to dis-    be seen. When passing on the side of a kelp patch from which the
play lights and fog signals for the safety of navigation.            stems stream away with the current, care should be taken to give it



66                                            3. CAPE SPENCER TO BEAUFORT SEA


a good berth. Dead, detached kelp, floats on the water curled in    based on seismic evidence, within 15 minutes of the occurrence of
masses, while live kelp, attached to rocks, streams away level with    the generating earthquake. Warnings will be disseminated by the
the surface. Live kelp is usually an indication of depths less than    National Weather Service on NOAA Weather Radio and through
10 fathoms.                                                        Civil Defense and military authorities.
 (43)  Logs and deadheads.-Mariners are cautioned that a large      (52)  Because of the long length of Alaskan coastline and the
number of logs and deadheads are adrift in the navigable waters of    vulnerability of communication facilities to major earthquakes,
Alaska at all times particularly after storms and unusually high    any unexplained withdrawal or advance of the sea within an hour
tides. Mariners are urged to be alert for the presences of such logs    or so after an earthquake is felt should be considered nature's
and deadheads, as they constitute a serious menace to craft of    warning of an approaching wave.
small and moderate size.                                            (53)  When a warning is received, persons should vacate water-
 (44)  Danger zones and Restricted areas are along the Alaskan    front areas and seek high ground. The safest procedure for ships
coast. (See Part 334, chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)      will depend on the amount of time available, and this may not
 (45)  Tides.-The greatest diurnal range of tide in the United    always be known. A ship well out at sea would ride such waves
States is the 33.3 feet in Turnagain Arm, Cook Inlet. In contrast,    safely, and hence if time is available to put to sea, that would be
Point Barrow has a diurnal range of only 0.4 foot. (See the Tide    the safest action. On the other hand, the crew of a ship in harbor
Tables for more detailed information.)                             may have a difficult time averting serious damage. The ship may
 (46)  Caution.-In using the Tide Tables, high or low water    be washed ashore by incoming waves or grounded because of
should not be confused with slack water. For ocean stations there    excessive withdrawal of water between crests. Much of the dam-
is usually little difference between the time of high or low water    age in the Los Angeles area during the 1960 Chilean tsunami was
and the beginning of ebb or flood currents; but for places in nar-    caused by rapid currents and the swift rise and fall of the water
row channels, landlocked harbors, or on tidal rivers the time of    level that parted mooring lines and set floating docks and ships
slack water may differ by several hours from the time of high or    adrift.
low water stand. The relation of the times of high and low water to
the turning of the current depends upon a number of factors, hence  (54)  Weather.-Dates of ice breakup and freezeup, climatologi-
no simple rule can be given. (See the Tidal Current Tables for pre-    cal tables for coastal locations and meteorological tables for the
dicted times of slack water or strength of current.)               coastal ocean area covered in this volume follow the appendix.
 (47)  Currents.-The nontidal current that sets N and W along    The tables for the ocean area were compiled from observations
the coasts of British Columbia and Alaska is greatly affected by    made by ships in passage. Listed in the appendix are National
strong winds and may reach velocities of 1.5 knots; the offshore    Weather Service offices and radio stations which transmit weather
extent of this current is not known but it is believed to be strongest    information.
between the 100-fathom curve and the coast. (See the Tidal Cur-     (55)  Marine Weather Services Charts published by the National
rent Tables for more detailed information on currents.)            Weather Service show radio stations that transmit marine weather
 (48)  Tide rips and Swirls in regions of strong currents usually    broadcasts and additional information of interest to mariners.
are encountered in the vicinities of shoals, islands, or points and    These charts are for sale by the National Ocean Service Distribu-
are, therefore, generally positive indications of danger. The back-    tion Branch (N/CG33). (See appendix for address.)
wash from seas striking steep cliffs often is felt at a considerable  (56)  This section presents an overall, seasonal picture of the
distance. In thick weather, any change in the feel of a moving yes-    weather that can be expected in the offshore waters along the
sel should be considered a warning of possible danger.             entire coast of Alaska. Detailed information, particularly concern-
 (49)  Earthquakes.-The March 27, 1964, earthquake had wide    ing navigational weather hazards, can be found in the appropriate
effect on Prince William Sound, Cook Inlet, and Kodiak Island.    coastal sections.
Post-earthquake tidal observations indicate bottom changes rang-    (57)  Winter (October-March).-The Aleutian Low looms
ing from a sinkage of 6 feet to a rise of 32 feet. Caution is advised    over the North Pacific as a climatic warning to mariners navigat-
in the affected areas because many of the depths and rocks yet to    ing the Alaskan waters. This semipermanent feature is made up of
be resurveyed may be considerably different than represented on    the day-to-day storms that traverse these seas in a seemingly end-
the nautical charts or in this Coast Pilot.                        less procession. And with these storms come the rain, sleet, snow,
 (50)  Tsunamis (seismic sea waves)-There is no record of any    the howling winds, and the mountainous seas that make the north-
destructive seismic sea wave along the Bering Sea coast of the    ern Gulf of Alaska and the southern Bering Sea among the most
Alaska mainland. The rest of Alaska, especially the area from Attu    treacherous winter waters in the Northern Hemisphere.
Island to Cape Spencer, occasionally is subject to severe waves     (58)  The broad expanse of the Aleutian Low covers the Pacific
which cause widespread damage to waterfront areas and shipping.    Basin from the Arctic Ocean to 30ï¿½N, and from the North Ameri-
Loss of life and property can be reduced by correct response to    can coast to Japan. The center migrates from the Bristol Bay-
warning that such waves are imminent. (See chapter I for details    northwestern Aleutian Islands by midwinter. While this migration
about these waves.)                                                indicates a shift in storm activity, particularly intensity, three of
 (5o1)  One of the world's most active seismic belts parallels the S    four storms per month still move through the area each month, on
sides of the Aleutian Islands and the Alaska Peninsula. Another    the average. Winter or extratropical storms from the Asian main-
active belt parallels southeast Alaska and Canada. Earthquakes are    land and the waters around Japan generally move NE toward the
frequent in both these areas but only a very few generate seismic    Aleutians and then into either the Bering Sea or the Gulf of
waves. The National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration    Alaska. Once they reach the Alaskan coast, they have a tendency
has the Alaska Tsunami Warning Center at Palmer, Alaska, which    to stall and dissipate, particularly in the Gulf, where there are
will issue warnings of tsunamis generated in the Gulf of Alaska    mountain barriers to the N and E. Early winter storms are often
and the Aleutian Islands. Because of extensive telemetry nets, it is    intense and are more likely to make it into the Bering Sea than
anticipated that this center will be able to issue tsunami warnings,    mid- and late-season storms. This makes the early part of the win-




                                              3. CAPE SPENCER TO BEAUFORT SEA                                                   67


ter the roughest part of a rough season in the Gulf and the southern    Aleutians. Gales are most frequent here, blowing 15 to 17 percent
Bering Sea. As winter progresses, more storms remain S of the    of the time early in the season. While they blow most often out of
Aleutians which results in a noticeable difference in wind, wave,    the E, they are also common from the W and NW.
and weather conditions in the navigable Alaskan waters.             (65)  Summer (April-September).-The changeover from win-
 (59)  Winter winds are variable. No one direction prevails. In    ter to summer is subtle. The Aleutian Low slowly weakens and
the northern Gulf, easterlies, southeasterlies, and westerlies are    retreats, while the North Pacific High gradually strengthens and
common. In the southern Bering Sea, including the Aleutian    advances. The storms still come, but they are less intense. Winds
waters, SW through NW winds common early in the season give    get strong, but become gales less often. Rough seas are encoun-
way to N through E winds by January. This is a reflection of the    tered, but less frequently. Clouds and rain remain a persistent
more S route of storms. Gales, which blow 10 to 20 percent of the    weather feature, but snow and cold retreat N. Winds blow more
time, are most likely in November and December. Windspeeds         often from a S quarter, bringing warmth and the most dangerous
average 16 to 20 knots; peak values occur in October, November,    and frequent summer-weather navigational hazard, fog.
and December. Wave heights climb to 10 feet or more throughout      (66)  Fog hampers navigation most often during June, July, and
the winter. In situations that occur on the average of once every    August. It is an advection or sea fog that forms when warm moist
five years, severe wind and wave conditions may be encountered.    air blows across cooler water. The southwesterlies and westerlies
Along the Aleutians, sustained winds may reach 65 to 70 knots;    that blow across the cold Oyashio Current, which runs S along
significant wave heights can climb to 40 to 50 feet, with an    Kamchatka and the Kurils, often bring a dense, widespread fog to
extreme wave height reaching 80 to 90 feet. In the northern and    the Aleutians and the southern Bering Sea. This fog can engulf a
western Gulf of Alaska and in Bristol Bay, sustained winds may    ship traversing these waters, for several days. Sea fog is also com-
reach 60 to 70 knots; significant wave heights can climb to 30 to    mon, but a little less frequent, in the northern Gulf of Alaska and
40 feet, with an extreme wave height of 60 to 75 feet. These    along the northwest and north coasts of Alaska. Off the west coast
extremes are most likely to occur during the winter season.        of Alaska and along the Aleutians, visibilities drop below 2 miles
 (60)  In winter, precipitation occurs 20 to 35 percent of the time.    about 20 to 40 percent of the time, and 0.5 mile or below up to 20
It is most likely along the Aleutians, where it falls as snow more    percent of the time. Elsewhere, fog is about one-half as frequent.
than one-half of the time in midwinter. In the Gulf, it snows about  (67)  During May and June, summer weather features become
5 to 10 percent of the time. Since snow is the primary restriction to    more apparent. While the lows that move through the area cause
visibility in the winter, restrictions are most likely to occur along    variable winds, S through W  winds are the most common. Gales
the Aleutians. Visibilities less than 2 miles occur 5 to 15 percent of    occur less than 10 percent of the time everywhere; they are least
the time. Cold winter temperatures are a result of winds blowing    likely in June, July, and August. Seas of 20 feet or more are
off land or off the ice sheet. Temperatures drop to freezing or    unlikely from May through August, when seas of 10 to 20 feet
below about 20 to 30 percent of the time in January. Rare polar    occur 5 to 15 percent of the time; they are most likely in the north-
outbreaks from the Arctic can drop temperatures into the teens.    western Gulf and the Aleutians. Off the north coast, they have
 (61)  Heavy swells out of the S through SW in Aleutian waters    been observed less than 5 percent of the time. Freezing tempera-
are often forerunners of intense storms from the waters around    tures are rare from June through September except off the north
Japan. They can climb to 20 to 30 feet. As storms from the S or W  coast.
approach the Aleutians, they bring clouds and either rain or snow.  (68)  The weather-producing storm systems are gradually
Winds blow out of the NE through SE. They can reach gale force    forced N by the North Pacific High. Some still move over the old
and whip up 30-foot seas. Gales and high seas can occur before    winter routes, but they are usually weak. By midsummer, numer-
and after the storm passes.                                        ous weak lows find their way through the Bering Sea and Strait.
  (62)  Lows running E with their centers S of the Aleutians, as is    This results in a maximum of cloudiness and precipitation off the
common in midwinter, usually bring E winds backing through N       northwest and north coasts of Alaska, and a minimum in the Gulf
to W  over the southern Bering Sea. These winds can reach 60    of Alaska and along the Aleutians. The more restricted move-
knots, with seas to 30 feet. As these storms and storms from the    ments of these storms and the clockwise flow around the North
mid-Pacific approach the Gulf of Alaska, they are sometimes pre-    Pacific High to the S help make S through W winds the most com-
ceded by heavy swells from the SE through the SW. Then winds    mon in the Alaskan coastal waters, except off the north coast
strengthen out of the NE through S as clouds and rain begin to    where northeasterlies and easterlies prevail.
move in. Gales and 30-foot seas are not unusual with intense        (69)  September weather is often a harbinger of winter. This
storms. Sometimes they will stall in the Gulf and prolong these    transition is usually more abrupt than the change from winter to
rough conditions for several days. When a low is centered in the    summer. More storms begin moving into Bristol Bay and the Gulf
eastern Gulf, winds are generally out of the E off Sitka, out of the    of Alaska; some are intense. Gales blow up to 5 percent of the
N off Seward, and out of the NW off Kodiak.                        time, and 20- to 30-foot seas are occasionally encountered in the
  (63)  Storms that move E or NE, remaining N of the Aleutians,    northwestern Gulf and southern Bering Sea. Waves of 10 feet or
as is common early and late in the season, are followed by a SW    more occur up to 20 percent of the time. Breezy, warm days alter-
through N flow that can reach gale force, raise high seas, and bring    nate with cool, stormy ones. Winter is approaching.
snow. If these storms move into Bristol Bay, they can create a      (70)  Superstructure icing.-lce accretion on ships can occur in
strong SE to SW flow in the northern Gulf of Alaska which can    coldwater seas. It is caused by freezing spray, freezing rain, or
raise 20-foot seas.                                                steam fog. On large merchant ships, it often results in only slip-
  (64)  In the Gulf of Alaska, conditions are often.roughest in the    pery decks, since they have a high freeboard and often pass
waters S of Seward and E:of Kodiak Island. The long fetch to the    quickly through icing conditions. Fishing trawlers, small merchant
E and SE allows a buildup of sea and swell from that quarter.    ships, and Coast Guard cutters have other problems. Their free-
Wave heights reach 20 feet or more up to 8 percent of the time in    boards are relatively low. A trawler often has a large top hamper
November, the roughest month. This is as rough as it gets in the    and is usually confined to one area for long periods. On a small



68                                             3. CAPE SPENCER TO BEAUFORT SEA


ship, icing can greatly increase the weight. It elevates the center of    the conditions for it occur 5 to 10 percent of the time. Icing in the
gravity, which decreases the metacentric height. It increases the    navigable northern Bering Sea waters can be a threat as early as
sail area and heeling moment due to wind action. The trim is    September and as late as May.
altered because of the nonuniform distribution of ice. Icing ham-      (76)  Icing rates can be cut by slowing down to reduce ship-gen-
pers steerability and lowers ship speed.                             erated spray. A course change to reduce spray, however, should be
  (71)  Freezing sea spray is by far the most common and danger-    secondary to getting away from the icing, except in critical condi-
ous form of icing. It can occur when the air temperature falls    tions. Another precaution is to remove the ice, if possible. When
below the freezing temperature of seawater (usually about 280ï¿½F)    icing becomes a problem, it is important first to free the aerials,
and sea-surface temperatures are below about 410 F. If air temper-    freeing ports, stays, shrouds, masts, rigging davits, running and
ature falls below about 0ï¿½ F, wind-induced spray may freeze    navigational lights, windlass, and hawsepipes. If the ice is
before striking the ship and not adhere. In general, however, the    unevenly distributed, it should be removed from the listing side
lower the temperature and the stronger the wind, the more rapid    first.
the accumulation of ice.                                               (77)  The Russians are well experienced with superstructure
  (72)  Tests by the Russians, Japanese, and British have shown       icing, as they do a lot of coldwater fishing. From a proposal they
that when air temperatures are just below the freezing point of the    made to the International Maritime Organization (IMO), here are
seawater, ice buildup is slow, and will not accumulate at more than    some excellent suggestions of what to do in an icing situation.
1 ton per hour on a 300- to 500-ton vessel, in any wind. On a ves-    (78)  Tips to keep icing hazards to a minimum aboard fish-
sel of this size, a moderate buildup of less than 4 tons per hour will    ing vessels:
generally occur with air temperatures between 27ï¿½ F and 18ï¿½ F, in     (79)  1. Head for warm water or protected coastal areas.
winds of 16 to 30 knots. When winds exceed 30 knots and temper-        (80)  2. All fishing gear, barrels, and deck gear should be
atures drop below 18ï¿½ F, conditions are right for an accumulation    placed below deck or fastened to the deck as low as possible.
rate of more than 4 tons per hour on a 300- to 500-ton vessel.        (81)  3. Cargo booms should be lowered and fastened.
These figures are somewhat subjective, and represent a compro-         (82)  4. Deck machinery and boats should be covered.
mise of opinions of the major maritime nations.                        (83)  5. Storm rails should be fastened.
 (73)  Freezing rain can coat a ship with a freshwater glaze of ice   (84)  6. Gratings should be removed from scuppers, and all
the same way it covers trees and roads on land. The weight picked    objects that might prevent water drainage from the deck should be
up is usually not enough to endanger a ship, but this ice can make   moved.
topside conditions dangerous. Steam fog can occur when the air        (85)  7. Ship should be as watertight as possible.
temperature is below freezing and is also considerably colder than     (86)  8. If freeboard is high enough, all empty bottom tanks
the sea. It is usually confined to a layer a few feet thick. Trawler-    containing ballast piping can be filled with seawater.
men call it "white frost" when the top of the layer is below the      (87)  9. Reliable two-way radio communication should be
observer's eye level, and "black frost" when it extends above the    established either with a shore station or another ship.
observer. The small water droplets in this fog are supercooled         (88)  Williwaws.-These dangerous winds occur mainly along
(exist as water even though the temperature is below freezing) and    the Aleutian chain and Gulf of Alaska shores, and are influenced
freeze on contact with the cold ship. Usually, ice accretion by this    by local topography. They are most frequent in winter and are usu-
method is small. However, there are exceptions. The ERNEST           ally the result of air damming up on the windward slopes of moun-
HOLT, about 100 miles E of Bjornoya Island (an island N of Nor-    tains. This air spills over in strong gusts on the lee side; that lasts
way) and 20 miles from the ice edge, ran into a dense steam fog.    as long as the dammed-up cold air lasts, which frequently is only a
She took 4 inches of rime ice on the deck, with up to 12 inches on    matter of minutes. However, such winds are violent, often reach-
the ship's side at the level of the rail, within a 12-hour period.   ing hurricane force, and their onset is sudden, often interrupting
 (74)  The two categories of potential icing are somewhat sub-    periods of near-calm conditions. Some locations sheltered from
jective, but give a relative idea of which areas are dangerous.      the normal winds of the area may be extremely vulnerable to willi-
Moderate icing potential exists when temperatures fall to 28ï¿½F or    waws.
below, and winds blow at 13 knots or more. This means a probable       (89)  Ice.-Ports in the Aleutian Islands and in the Gulf of
accumulation of up to about 2 inches per hour. The potential for    Alaska, except at the upper end of Cook Inlet, are ice free and
severe icing (greater than 2 inches per hour) exists when tempera-    open to navigation the year around. Ports N of Unimak Pass are
tures are 16ï¿½F or lower, and winds are 30 knots or more.             icebound in varying degrees. (See page T-2 1 for dates of ice
 (75)  Superstructure icing is a threat in the northern Gulf of    breakup and freezeup.)
Alaska and along the Aleutians, from about November through
April. In the Gulf, the waters around Kodiak Island are the worst.     (90)   Routes.-These are the usually traveled routes in W
Here the potential for moderate icing exists 10 to 20 percent of the    Alaska. In laying out courses to pass through the geographic posi-
time from December through March, compared to a 3- to 1 0-per-    tions of the turning points listed, allowance must be made for wind
cent potential in the other Gulf coastal waters. There is also a    and current. Departure from these routes may become necessary
slight chance of severe icing in Kodiak waters during this period.    because of weather conditions and ice in the more N latitudes.
The December-through-March period is also the roughest along    Special attention should be given to the continual current setting N
the Aleutians, where the potential for moderate superstructure    and W along the coast of Alaska. Where necessary, directions for
icing exists 10 to 25 percent of the time; severe icing is unlikely    entering a port are given in the text for the place concerned,
since temperatures rarely get down into the teens. In the ice-free    including information about dangers, prominent features, and
waters of the southern Bering Sea and Bristol Bay, the potential    other pertinent information.
for moderate superstructure icing exists 20 percent or more of the    (91)  Strait of Juan de Fuca to Prince William Sound ports
time from December through March, and up to 50 percent of the    (Cordova, Valdez, Whittier).-Rhumb lines through:
time in February. Severe icing is also a threat in February, when      (92)  48ï¿½31'N., 125000'W.; Swiftsure Bank, Washington.




                                              3. CAPE SPENCER TO BEAUFORT SEA                                                    69


 (93)  48050'N., 125039'W.; of Amphitrite Point, Canada.             (134) 580ï¿½13'N., 151056'W.; Marmot Strait.
 (94)  50001'N., 128ï¿½03'W.; off Solander Island, Canada.             (135) 57050'N., 152017'W.; off Spruce Cape.
 (95)  51049'N., 131l12'W.; off Cape St. James, Canada.              (136) Cook Inlet to Unimak Pass.-Shelikof Strait route.
 (96)  60ï¿½13'N., 146041'W.; off Cape Hinchinbrook, Alaska.           (137) Shelikof Strait route-Cook Inlet to Unimak Pass.-
 (97)  Strait of Juan de Fuca to Seward.-Same as to Prince    Rhumb lines through:
William Sound ports to 51ï¿½49'N., 131ï¿½12'W., thence great circle      (138)  59003'N., 151ï¿½26'W.; off East Chugach Island.
to 59051'N., 149ï¿½17'W., S of Barwell Island off Cape Resurrec-       (139) 59ï¿½01.6'N., 152ï¿½19.0'W.; N of Ushagat Island.
tion.                                                                (140) 57038.5'N., 154033.8'W.; off Cape Uyak.
 (98)  Strait of Juan de Fuca to Cook Inlet ports (Seldovia,         (141) 56ï¿½27.0'N., 156ï¿½48.0'W.; off Foggy Cape.
Homer, Nikishka, Drift River, Anchorage).-Same as to Prince          (142) 55ï¿½46.0'N., 158037.8'W.; SE of Mitrofania Island.
William Sound ports to 50ï¿½01'N., 128003'W., thence great circle      (143) 55021.6'N., 160003.6'W.; N of Andronica Island.
to 59003'N., 151026'W., off East Chugach Island.                     (144) 55022.8'N., 160021.7'W.; N of Popof Island.
 (99)  Strait of Juan de Fuca to Kodiak.-Same as to Prince           (145) 55026.0'N., 160ï¿½43.5'W.; off Unga Spit.
William Sound ports to 50001'N., 128ï¿½03'W., thence great circle      (146) 55ï¿½17.5'N., 161ï¿½15.2'W.; off Seal Cape Light.
to 57042'N., 152009'W., N of Cape Chiniak.                           (147)  55017.2'N., 161039.5'W.; N of Ukolnoi Island.
 (0oo) Strait of Juan de Fuca to Unimak Pass.-Great circle          (148)  55010.9'N., 161054.2'W.; off Arch Point.
from 4803 I'N., 12500'W., to 5400'N., 163ï¿½00'W., thence rhumb        (149)  55007.5'N, 161055.6'W.; off Moss Cape.
line to 54020'N., 164045'W., off Scotch Cap.                         (150)  550067'N., 161056.2W.; NWof Goloi Island.
 (101)  Cape Spencer to Prince William Sound ports.-Rhumb            (151)  55ï¿½02.6'N., 161054.5'W.; E of Iliasik Islands Light.
lines through:                                                       (152)  55ï¿½02.0'N., 161ï¿½55.5'W.; SE of Iliasik Islands Light.
 (102)  58010'N., 136038'W; off Cape Spencer.                        (153) 55000.5'N., 162020.5'W.; N of Deer Island.
 (103) 59043'N., 144038'W.; S of buoy off Cape St. Elias.            (154)  54057.4'N., 162027.6W.; W of Fox Island.
 (104) 60ï¿½13'N., 146041'W.; off Cape Hinchinbrook.
 (105) Cape Spencer to Seward.-Rhumb lines through:
 (o6  58010'N., 136038'W.; off Cape Spencer.                        (156) 54037.8'N., 163003.6'W.; off CapePankof.
 (107) 59021'N., 146019'W.; S ofMiddleton Island                     (157)  54"20'N., 164045W.;offScotchCap.
                                                                     (158)  Kodiak to Unimak Pass.-Proceed via Narrow Strait,
 Ms) 59ï¿½5 I'N., 149ï¿½17'W.; S of Barwell Island off Cape Resur-
 (108)  59051'N   1490 7W.     of Barwel Isrection.land off Cape Resur- Whale Passage, Kupreanof Strait, and Shelikof Strait route.
rection.
                                                                     (159) Unimak Pass to Aleutian Islands ports.-Rhumb lines
 (109)  Cape Spencer to Cook Inlet ports.-Rhumb line from
58010'N., 136038V'W. to 59ï¿½03'N., 151026'W.                         along the N coast of the Aleutian chain through:
 (110)  Cape Spencer to Kodiak.-Rhumb line from 58ï¿½10'N.,            (160  To Dutch Harbor and Unalaska
136038'W. to 57042N., 152009'W.                                      (161)  54020'N., 1652ï¿½09'W.;offScotchCap.
 (m) Prince William Sound ports to Seward.-From Elrington            (162)  541 20'N., 165038'W.; off Akun Head.
Passage clear Cape Puget and Cape Junken by 1 mile, thence to        (163) 54016'N., 16600'W.; off North Head.
59051'N., 149017'W., S of Barwell Island off Cape Resurrection       (164)  5402'N., 16624'W.; off Priest Rock Light.
 (112)  Prince William Sound ports to Cook Inlet.-From               (165)  53055'N., 166ï¿½29'W.; offUlakta Head.
Elrington Passage, rhumb lines through:                              (166)  To Kuluk Bay
 (113)  59033'N., 149ï¿½38'W.; N of Seal Rocks.                        (167)  54020'N., 164045'W.; off Scotch Cap.
 (114) 59021'N., 150ï¿½14'W.; off Outer Island.                        (168)  54020'N., 165038'W.; offAkun Head.
 (115)  59009'N., 150057'W.; off GorePoint.                          (169)  54008'N., 166ï¿½40'W.; off Cape Cheerful.
 (116)  59003'N., 151ï¿½26'W.; off East Chugach Island.                (170)  53036'N., 168ï¿½14'W.; N of Umnak Island.
 (117)  Prince William Sound ports to Kodiak.-From Elrington        (171)  52028'N., 172026'W.; N of Seguam Island.
Passage, rhumb line to 57ï¿½50'N., 152017'W.; off Spruce Cape.         (172)  52028'N., 174009'W.; off North Cape Light (Atka Island).
 (118)  Prince William Sound ports to Unimak Pass.-Same as           (173) 52010'N., 176009'W.; off Swallow Head Light (Great Sit-
to Cook Inlet, thence Shelikof Strait route.                        kin Island).
 (119)  Seward to Cook Inlet.-Rhumb lines through:                   (174)  51 ï¿½54'N., 176030'W.; E of Kuluk Shoal.
 (120)  59045'N., 149ï¿½26'W.; off Pilot Rock.                         (175)  To Kiska
 (121) 59036'N., 14932'W.; off Chiswell Island.                      (176) Same as to Kuluk Bay to 52ï¿½10'N., 176009'W., thence
 (122)  59031'N., 149040'W.; off Seal Rocks.                       rhumb lines through:
 (123)  59021'N., 1500 14'W.; off Outer Island.                      (177)  52ï¿½07'N., 179046'E.; N ofSemisopochnoi Island.
 (124)  59009'N., 150057'W.; off Gore Point.                         (178)  52ï¿½08'N., 17805'E.; NofSegula sland.
 (125)  59003'N., 151ï¿½26'W.; off East Chugach Island.                (179)  52ï¿½05'N., 177046'E.; E of Haycock Rock.
 (126)  Seward to Kodiak.-Same as to Cook Inlet to 59031'N.,   : (180) 51ï¿½58'N., 177ï¿½35'E.; off North Head.
149040'W., thence rhumb lines through:                               (181)  To Alcan Harbor
 (127) 58ï¿½21'N., 151ï¿½54'W.; offTonki Cape.                           (182)  Same as to Kiska to 52ï¿½08'N., 178ï¿½05'E., thence thumb
 (128)  58013'N., 151056'W.; Marmot Strait,                        lines through:
 (129)  57050'N., 152017'W.; off Spruce Cape.                        (183)  52ï¿½13'N., 177ï¿½38'E.; off Sirius Point (Kiska Island).
 (130)  Seward to Unimak Pass.-Same as to Cook Inlet, thence         (184) 52047'N., 174005'E.; N of Shemya Island.
Shelikof Strait route.                                               (185) To Massacre Bay
 (131)  Cook Inlet toKodiak.-Rhumb lines through:                    (186)  Same as to Alcan Harbor, thence rhumb lines through:
 (132) 59003'N., 151ï¿½53'W.; S of Cape Elizabeth Island. .            (187) 52ï¿½49'N., 173053'E.; N of Alaid Island.
 (133) 58ï¿½21'N.,  151ï¿½54'W.; off Tonki Cape.                         (188) 52047'N., 173019'E.; off Alexai Point.



  70                                            3. CAPE SPENCER TO BEAUFORT SEA


   (189)  Vessels may also proceed from Unimak Pass to Massacre    Whittier, Seward, Kenai, Nikishka, Drift River, Anchorage,
 Bay by great circle.                                                Kodiak, Sand Point, Unalaska, and Adak.
   (190)  Unimak Pass to Bering Sea ports.-Rhumb lines through:        (237)  Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-
   (191)  To Port Moller                                             sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of
   (192)  54020'N., 164045'W.; S of Scotch Cap Light.                Alaska. Exempted from this requirement are (1) vessels under
   (193)  54024'N., 164059'W.; W of Scotch Cap Light.                enrollment, (2) fishing vessels registered in the United States or in
   (194) 54036'N., 165ï¿½04'W.; off Cape Sarichef Light.               British Columbia, Canada, (3) motorboats as defined in Sec. I of
   (195)  55ï¿½00'N., 164036'W.; off Cape Mordvinof.                   the Federal Motor Boat Act of 1940 (54 Stat. 163; 46 U.S.C. sec.
   (196)  55ï¿½31'N., 163718'W.; off Sea Lion Rock.                    526 et seq.), (4) vessels of United States registry of less than 300
   (197)  55053'N., 162015'W.; off Black Hill.                       gross tons and tow boats of United States registry and vessels
   (198)  56006'N., 160'50'W.; thence to entrance buoy.              owned by the State of Alaska, engaged exclusively on the rivers of
   (199) To Kvichak Bay                                              Alaska, or in the coastwise trade on the west coast of the United
   (200)  Same as to Port Moller to 55000'N., 164036'W.; thence:   States including Alaska, Hawaii, and British Columbia, Canada,
 rhumb lines through:                                                (5) vessels of Canada, including cruise ships, engaged in frequent
   (201)  57044'N., 157053'W.; off Cape Greig Light.                 trade between British Columbia and Alaska, provided that recipro-
   (202) 58014'N., 15753'W.; off Red Bluff Light.                    cal exemptions -are granted by Canada to vessels owned by the
   (203)  58027'N., 157041'W.; off Middle Bluff Light; thence to    State of Alaska and those of United States registry, and (6) plea-
 the anchorage off the entrance to Naknek River.                     sure craft.
  (204)  To Nushagak Bay                                              (238) The State of Alaska has established the following bound-
  (205) Same as to Port Moller to 55ï¿½00'N., 164ï¿½36'W.; thence    aries of the inside waters of Southwest Alaska:
 rhumb line to 57ï¿½44'N., 157053'W. (off Cape Greig Light); thence     (239)  (1) All waters of Prince William Sound inside a line
 to entrance buoy.                                                   drawn from Cape Puget to Point Elrington, thence to Cape Cleare,
  (206)  To St. Michael                                             thence Zaikof Point to Cape Hinchinbrook Light, thence Point
  (207)  54020'N., 164045'W.; S of Scotch Cap Light.                Bentinch to Point Whitshed; (2) the waters of Resurrection Bay N
  (208)  54024'N., 164ï¿½59'W.; W of Scotch Cap Light.                of latitude 59ï¿½59.0'N.; (3) all waters of Cook Inlet inside a line
  (209)  54036'N., 165004'W.; offCape SarichefLight.                drawn from Cape Douglas (58ï¿½51.2'N., 153ï¿½14.9'W.) through
  (210)  60014'N., 168004'W.; off Cape Mohican Light (Nunivak    Cape Elizabeth Light (59008.8'N., 151052.6'W.) to the Kenai Pen-
 Island).                                                            insula shoreline.
  (211)  63000'N., I 67040'W.; 32 miles E of St. Lawrence Island.     (240)  At all buoyed entrances from seaward to bays, sounds, riv-
  (212)  63041'N., 165 18'W.; Norton Sound.                         ers, or other estuaries for which specified boundary lines are not
  (213) 63041'N., 162021'W.; N of Stuart Island.                    described, the waters inshore of a line drawn approximately paral-
  (214)  63032'N., 161055'W.; off St. Michael.                      lel with the general trend of the shore, drawn through the outer-
  (215) To Golovnin Bay                                             most buoy or other aid to navigation of any system of aids, are
  (216)  Same as to St. Michael to 63ï¿½00'N., 167ï¿½40'W. thence    inside waters
rhumb line to 64'20'N., 163000'W.                                     (241) Vessels proceeding directly from points outside Alaska
  (217)  ToNome                                                      inside waters to an established pilot boarding station or pickup
  (218)  Same as to St. Michael to 63'00'N., 167O40'W., thence    point are excluded from compulsory use of a pilot when traveling
rhumb line to 64029'N., 165'26'W.                                   specified inside exclusion routes.
  (219)  To Port Clarence                                             (242)  The inside exclusion routes for Southwest Alaska are as
  (22(0)  Same as to St. Michael to 63ï¿½00'N., 167ï¿½40'W., thence    follows:
rhumb lines through:                                                 (243)  (1) travel via Prince William Sound to the Cordova Pilot
  (221) 64'58'N., 167040'W.; E of King Island.                      Station about 2 miles S of Sheep Point (60037.0'N., 146ï¿½00.0'W.);
  (222)  65019'N., 167040'W.; off Cape York.                          (244)  (2) travel via Prince William Sound to the Valdez and
  (223)  65019'N., 166ï¿½51 'W.; off Point Spencer.                   Whittier Pilot Station:
  (224)  65017'N., 166025'W.                                          (245)  (A) oil tanker traffic-about 3.6 miles SW of Bligh Reef
  (225) Unimak Pass to Arctic Ocean ports:                          Lighted Buoy 6 (60ï¿½50.5'N., 146ï¿½54.4'W.); or
  (226)  To Point Hope                                                (246)  (B) nonoil-tank traffic-about 2.3 miles N of Busby Island
 (227)  Same as to St. Michael to 63ï¿½00'N., 167ï¿½40'W., thence    Light (60ï¿½53.7'N., 146ï¿½49.0'W.);
rhumb lines through:                                                  (247) (3) travel via Cook Inlet to the Homer Pilot Station about
 (228) 64058'N., 167040'W.; E of King Island.                       I mile S of Homer Spit Light (59036.ON., 151 ï¿½24.6'W.);
 (1229) 65038'N., 16803 I'W.; E of Fairway Rock.                     (248)  (4) travel to Kodiak or Women's Bay Pilot Station about 2
 (230)  68021'N., 167ï¿½18'W.                                        miles 100ï¿½ from St. Paul Harbor Entrance Light (57ï¿½44.4'N.,
 (231)  To Point Barrow                                             152025.7'W.).
 (232) Same as to Point Hope to 68021 'N., 1670ï¿½ 18'W., thence       12491 The Southwest Alaska Pilots Association's main office is
rhumb lines through:                                                P.O. Box 977, Homer, AK 99603, telephone 907-235-8783, FAX
 (233) 68ï¿½58'N., 166ï¿½40'W.: off Cape Lisburne.                     907-235-6119, cable address SWAPILOT HOMER, radio call
 (234) 70034'N., 162025'W.: off Icy Cape.                           KCE-203. The Homer office monitors VHF-FM channels 16 and
 (235)  71020'N., 156ï¿½55'W.                                         10, 24 hours daily.
                                                                     (25(0) The other office is P.O. Box 869, Valdez, AK 99686, tele-
 (236) Principal ports.-The principal deep-draft commercial         phone 907-835-2134, FAX 907-835-5372, radio call WAB-982.
ports within the area of this Coast Pilot are: Cordova, Valdez,    The Valdez office monitors channels 16 and 13, 24 hours daily.



                                            3. CAPE SPENCER TO BEAUFORT SEA                                                    71


 (251)  Southwest Alaska Pilots Association provides pilot ser-      (275) (18) Sand Point-Squaw Harbor-about 2.5 miles S of
vice to all ports N and W of Cape Spencer. The major ports served    Popof Head (55ï¿½14.7'N., 160ï¿½20.0'W.).
include, but are not limited to, all Cook Inlet ports; all Kodiak    (276) (19) King Cove-about 1 mile SE of Morgan Point Light
Island ports; all Prince William Sound ports, including Valdez,    (55ï¿½02.4'N., 162ï¿½20.2'W.).
Cordova, and Whittier; Resurrection Bay including Seward; all        (277)  (20) False Pass-Isanotski Strait-about 1.5 miles NW of
Aleutian Islands ports; and all Alaska Peninsula and Bristol Bay    Ikatan Point (54ï¿½46.5'N., 163ï¿½11.0'W.).
ports.                                                               (278) (21) Akutan-about 1 mile E of Akutan Point (54008.7'N.,
 (252)  The Homer pilot boat is the "MARY DELE"; a 42-foot          165ï¿½43.6'W.).
trawler, green hull, white deckhouse, and the word Pilot forward.    (279)  (22) Attu-Navy Cove-about 1.3 miles S of Murder Point
"MARY DELE" monitors channels 16 and 10, 24 hours daily.    (52%47.7'N., 173ï¿½11.7'E.).
Contact her directly or through the Homer office.                    (280)  (23) St. Paul Island-about 4 miles W  of Reef Point
 (253) The Valdez pilot boat is the "EMERALD ISLAND"; 91-    (57ï¿½06.5'N., 170ï¿½17.7'W.).
foot long with black hull, white house and the word Pilot on both    (281)  (24) Port Moller-Herendeen Bay-about 7.5 miles NW of
sides. "EMERALD ISLAND" monitors channels 16 and 13, 24    Entrance Point (55ï¿½59.5'N., 160034.6'W.).
hours daily. Contact her directly or through the Valdez office.      (282)  (25) Port Heiden-about 7 miles WNW  of Christiakof
 (254) The pilot boats for other Southwest Alaska ports can be    Island (56055.8'N., 158042.8'W.).
contacted by calling "KODIAK KING" or "KODIAK PILOT                  (283) (26) Ugashik Bay-about 0.5 mile W  of Smoky Point
BOAT," "SEWARD PILOT BOAT," "DUTCH HARBOR PILOT                     (57ï¿½39.0'N., 157042.0'W.).
BOAT," etc., on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearranged fre-           (284) (27) Egegik-about 7 miles W  of Red Bluff Daybeacon
quency between pilot and agent/vessel. When engaged in pilotage    (58ï¿½14.1'N., 157ï¿½29.1'W.).
duties they display the appropriate day and night signals.           (285) (28) Naknek-about 9 miles WSW  of Naknek Light
 (255) Pilot services should be arranged in advance through    (58042.4'N., 157ï¿½04.8'W.).
ships' agents, or otherwise, in sufficient time to enable the pilot to  (286) (29) Nushagak Bay-close aboard Nushagak Bay Entrance
travel to the area where the service is required.                   Buoy 2 (58033.7'N., 158024.3'W.).
 (256) The established pilot boarding stations or pickup points     (287)  (30) Kulukak Bay-about 3 miles S of Kulukak Point
for Southwest Alaska are as follows:                                (58ï¿½51.0'N., 159ï¿½36.0'W.).
 (257)  (1) Cordova-about 2 miles S of Sheep Point (60ï¿½37.0'N.,      (288)  (31) Togiak-about 1 mile S of Summit Island (58ï¿½50.0'N.,
146ï¿½00.0'W.).                                                       160012.0'W.).
 (258) (2) Valdez-(A) oil tanker traffic-about 3.6 miles SW of       (289) (32) Goodnews Bay-about 7.5 miles SW of Platinum
Bligh Reef Lighted Buoy 6 (60050.5'N., 146ï¿½54.4'W.); or             (59001.0'N., 161049.4'W.).
 (259) (B) nonoil-tank traffic-about 2.3 miles N of Busby Island    (290) (33) Yakutat-about I mile NW of Yakutat Bay Lighted
Light (60053.7'Ni, 146049.0'W.).                                    Whistle Buoy 4 (59%35.6'N., 139ï¿½51.2'W.).
 (260) (3) Whittier-pilot boarding station is the same as for Val-   (291) (34) Icy Bay-about 9 miles S of Claybuff Point
dez.                                                                (59058.0'N., 141035.0'W.).
 (261)  (4) Seward-about 1 mile SE of Caines Head Light              (292) Alaska Marine Pilots, P.O Box 730, Dutch Harbor, AK
(59059.0'N., 149023.1 'W.).                                         99692, telephone 907-581-1240, FAX 907-581-1372, radio call
 (262)  (5) Cook Inlet-about 1 mile S of Homer Spit Light    KBK-383, also provides pilotage in western Alaska. The pilot
(59ï¿½36.1'N., 151024.5'W.).                                          office, Dutch Harbor, monitors VHF-FM channel 16 and 4125.0
 (263)  (6) Kodiak or Womens Bay-about 2 miles 1000 from St.    kHz, daily 24 hours.
Paul Harbor Entrance Light (57044.3'N., 152025.8'W.).                (293) The Alaska Marine Pilots provide extensive pilot service
 (264) (7) Cold Bay-about 3 miles S of Cold Bay Channel    to all ports from Kodiak Island W through the Alaska Peninsula
Lighted Buoy 1 (55005.5'N., 162ï¿½31.8'W.).                           and Aleutian Islands thence N to Bristol Bay and N regions
 (265) (8) Dutch Harbor-about 1 mile E of Ulakta Head Light    through the Arctic Ocean to Demarcation Point.
(53ï¿½55.5'N., 166030.4'W.).                                           (294) The major ports served include but are not limited to
 (266)  (9) Adak-about 2 miles E of Gannet Rocks Light 4    Chignik, Sand Point, King Cove, Akutan, Dutch Harbor, Captain's
(51ï¿½52. I'N., 176036.4'W.).                                         Bay, Atka, Adak, Port Moller, NakNek, Dillingham and Togiak.
 (267) (10) Discoverer Bay-about 2 miles N of Posliedni Point        (295)  Pilot services should be arranged in advance through
(58O26.0'N., 152020.0'W.).                                          ships' agents or otherwise, in sufficient time to enable the pilot to
 (268)  (I I) Port Wakefield-about I mile NW of Kekur Point    travel.
(57051.5'N., 152047.2'W.).                                           (296)  During times of frequent vessel movements, Alaska
 (269)  (12) Port Bailey-about 1 mile N of Dry Spruce Bay          Marine Pilots station resident pilots in locations convenient to
Entrance Light (57ï¿½57.3'N., 153ï¿½06.2'W.).                           shipping activity to eliminate much of the detention which can
 (270)  (13) Uganik Bay-about 1.5 miles W  of East Point    occur due to inclement weather and limited transportation com-
(57050.5'N., 153028.3'W.).                                          mon to the area. These locations include but are not limited to
 (271)  (14) Larsen Bay-about I mile E of Harvester Island    Sand Point, King Cove, Port Moller, False Pass, Bristol Bay and
(57ï¿½38.8'N., 153ï¿½59.5'W.).                                          Togiak. Contact Alaska Marine Pilots, Dutch Harbor, for current
  (272)  (15) Alitak Bay-about 2 miles SE of Cape Alitak    resident pilot locations.
(56ï¿½50.7'N., 15418.2'W.).                                           (297) Towage.-Tugs are stationed at Anchorage, Valdez, and
  (273)  (16) Old Harbor-about 1 mile E of Cape Liakik    Kodiak. Navy tugs are stationed at Adak. At other places any tow-
(57ï¿½06.9'N., 153027.0'W.).                                          ing that is required is done by cannery tenders and other local
  (274) (17) Chignik-about I mile N of Chignik Spit Light    small craft. Much of the cargo traffic between Washington State
(56018.6'N., 158022.9'W.).                                          and Alaska is by barges and tugs.




72                                          3. CAPE SPENCER TO BEAUFORT SEA


        (298) Vessel Arrival Inspections.-Vessels subject to U.S. quar-   (308) Reporting Marine Emergencies and Oil Spills.-Marine
      antine, customs, immigration, and agricultural quarantine inspec-    emergencies, oil spills, possible illegal entry, sightings of foreign
      tions generally make arrangements in advance through ships'    naval or fishing vessels, icebergs, submarines, or any other
      agents. Government officials conducting such inspections are sta-    unusual events should be reported to the nearest Coast Guard unit
      tioned in most major ports. Mariners arriving at ports where offi-    by radio or by calling, toll free, Zenith 5555 anywhere in Alaska
      cials are not stationed, should contact the nearest activity    except Juneau, Douglas, or Kodiak. Within these cities, call 586-
      providing that service. (See appendix for addresses.) Unless other-    2680 for Juneau/Douglas, and 487-5888 for Kodiak.
      wise directed, officials usually board vessels at their berths.    (309) Small-craft facilities are limited in Alaska. In general,
        (299) Harbormasters are mentioned in the text when applica-    only the larger communities have gasoline, diesel fuel, berths,
      ble. They generally have charge of the anchoring and berthing of    marine supplies, and limited repair facilities. Services and supplies
       vessels.                                                          available at these facilities are described under the communities
        (300) Supplies.-Provisions and fuel are generally obtained by    concerned.
      vessels prior to departure for western Alaska. Provisions and lim-
      ited amounts of marine supplies are available at the principal     (310) A vessel of less than 65.6 feet (20 meters) in length or a
      towns in Alaska, and nearly all of the canneries can supply some    sailing vessel shall not impede the passage of a vessel that can
      provisions.                                                       safely navigate only within a narrow channel or fairway. (Nav-
        (301J Water is available at most of the ports and canneries, and    igation Rules, International-Inland Rule 9(b).
      gasoline, diesel fuel, and lubricating oils are available in all the  (311) Standard time.-All of Alaska E of 169ï¿½30'W. uses
      larger towns and at many of the canneries in western Alaska.      Alaska standard time (Ak.s.t.), which is 9 hours slow of Green-
        (302) Repairs.-There are no repair facilities for large vessels in    wich mean time. Example: when it is 1200 at Greenwich, it is
      western Alaska. The nearest major facilities are in British Colum-    0300 in Juneau and Anchorage. All the Aleutian Islands W of
      bia and Washington. Most principal ports do, however, have facil-    169ï¿½30'W., including the communities of Adak, Atka, Attu, and
      ities for minor emergency repairs to machinery, engines, and small    Shemya, use Hawaii-Aleutian Standard time (H.A.s.t.), which
      boats.                                                            is 10 hours slow of Greenwich mean time. Example: when it is
        (303) Some of the ports and canneries have small marine rail-    1200 at Greenwich, it is 0200 at Adak.
      ways, slipways, or grids, but these are subject to frequent change  (312) Daylight saving time.-In Alaska clocks are advanced I
      due to destruction from ice, abandonment of canneries, or discon-    hour on the first Sunday in April and are set back to standard time
      tinuance of service.
      tinuance of service.                                              on the last Sunday in October.
        (304) Communications.-There is scheduled steamer service
      from Seattle to ports in western Alaska, with limited service to   (313)  Legal public holidays.-The following are legal holidays
      nearby smaller ports. Air service is also available to most major    in the area covered by this Coast Pilot: New Year's Day, January
      ports in western Alaska, with connections to nearly every commu-  I; Martin Luther King, Jr.'s Birthday, third Monday in January;
      nity in the State.                                                Washington's Birthday, third Monday in February; Memorial Day,
        (305) Alaska State ferries maintain scheduled service between    last Monday in May; Independence Day, July 4; Labor Day, first
      the cities of Anchorage, Whittier, Valdez, Cordova, Seward,   Monday in September; Columbus Day, second Monday in Octo-
      Homer, Seldovia, and Kodiak.                                      ber; Veterans Day, November 11; Thanksgiving Day, fourth
                                                                         Thursday in November; and Christmas Day, December 25. The
        (306) Telephone service is available from most communities in     hursday in November; and Christmas Day, December 25. The
       Prince William Sound, Cook Inlet, and Kodiak Island.              national holidays are observed by employees of the Federal Gov-
        i3n)7  Alascom, Inc.d operates a radio networdk that includes    ernment and the District of Columbia, and may not be observed by
        (307) Alascom, Inc., operates a radio network that includes
                                                                         all the States in every case.
      coast stations with ship-to-shore service throughout most of
      Alaska. Complete information on this service can be obtained       (314) In addition the following holidays are also observed in the
       from Alascom, Inc., Office of Public Affairs, Pouch 6607,    area covered by this Coast Pilot: Seward's Day, last Monday in
       Anchorage, Alaska 99502.                                          March; Alaska Day, October 18.







                                      4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET

 (1)   This chapter describes the S coast of the Alaska mainland    ter season. September and October are often the rainiest months,
from Cape Spencer to Cook Inlet, and the many passages and trib-    when precipitation occurs on 15 to 20 days per month on the aver-
utary waters of Prince William Sound and Cook Inlet. Also    age, except at the well-sheltered ports. Snow is likely from Octo-
described are the deepwater ports of Valdez, Whittier, Anchorage,    ber through April. At Valdez, an average of 61 inches falls in
and Seward, and the petroleum terminals and facilities on the    January compared to 7 inches at Kenai. April through June is often
Kenai Peninsula, as well as the numerous fishing and logging    the driest period.
ports in this area.                                                  (7)   Poor visibilities are mainly caused by advection or sea fog
                                                                   in the summer, and land fog or precipitation in winter. In general,
 (2)   Charts 16016, 16013.-From Cape Spencer the coast    sea fog affects exposed ports, while land fog is more of an influ-
extends NW for about 130 miles to Yakutat Bay. The Fairweather    ence at sheltered spots. However, visibilities are most likely to
Range begins 20 miles from Cape Spencer and extends to Alsek    drop below 0.5 mile on winter mornings, even at exposed ports.
River. The mountains are snowcapped and have elevations of    Land fog can be very dense for short periods. At Cordova, for
10,000 to more than 15,000 feet. From Alsek River to Yakutat Bay    example, visibilities are most likely to be below 0.5 mile in Janu-
the mountains are 4,000 to nearly 6,000 feet high. Along the coast    ary, but below 2 miles in August. Yakutat suffers from poor visi-
are numerous glaciers with terminal moraines. The niost conspicu-    bilities in both midwinter and midsummer, when they drop below
ous are La Perouse Glacier, with a sea face 200 to 300 feet high    0.5 mile on up to 6 days per month. In Cook Inlet, January is usu-
and partly vertical; Yakutat Glacier, 25 miles E of Yakutat Bay;    ally the foggiest month. This land fog will set in during the night
and the great Malaspina Glacier, W of Yakutat Bay.                  and persist until about noon. Fog banks frequently hang over open
 (3)   Weather.-Winds near the coast are only slightly less vari-    waters after the harbors have been cleared. Occasionally in winter,
able than over the open sea. As this coastline is irregular, with    if extremely cold air moves over the water, a steam fog or frost
many islands, channels, and inlets, and is often steep, there are    smoke may be experienced as relatively warm water evaporates
strong local effects to both wind speed and direction. In general,    into much colder air.
prevailing winds set parallel to the coastline, while speeds are     (8)   Air temperatures are mild for these latitudes and reflect the
increased by funneling effects or decreased by blocking.            influence of the land and the sea. The more continental ports have
 (4)   The gale frequencies of less than I percent at ports like    a wide daily and annual temperature spread compared to those
Valdez, Anchorage, and Cordova can be misleading since they are    exposed to the sea. A noticeable cooling begins in September,
usually much more sheltered than their approaches. This is    when daytime highs average in the low to midfifties (OF), with
reflected in the frequencies of calms, which range from 20 to 40    nighttime lows in the upper thirties to low forties. January is usu-
percent during the winter season. Storms and williwaws are    ally the coldest month and is the time when the difference between
responsible for the gales that are most likely in early winter. Willi-    exposed and sheltered locations is most noticeable. In the shel-
waws, which blow down from the mountains in winter, occur    tered Cook Inlet, average maximums are in the low twenties,
along most of the coast; they are particularly severe at Seward.    while minimums drop to about 5F or less. At Seward daytime
Extreme sustained winds at these ports have reached 74 knots at    highs average 30ï¿½F, with nighttime lows of 18ï¿½F. At continental
Cape Spencer, 66 knots at Anchorage, and 50 knots at Yakutat.    locations like Kenai, Anchorage, and Valdez, temperatures fall
Gusts of 60 knots or greater occur almost monthly during the win-    below 00F on an average of 10 to 15 days in January, compared to
ter: season.             .                         .                3 days at Seward. Freezing temperatures, also more frequent at
 (5)   In general from Cape Spencer to Yakutat, easterlies and    sheltered locations, are common from October through April.
southeasterlies are frequent; and from Yakutat to Cook Inlet,    Extreme low temperatures range from a -18ï¿½F at Homer to a -
northeasterlies and easterlies prevail. At Yakutat, E winds blow 30    480F at Kenai. A noticeable warming begins in April, and the dif-
percent or more of the time from August through April. They also    ference between the two types of locations becomes less notice-
prevail at Cordova during this period. At Valdez, the sheltering    able. Daytime highs in the low to midforties, and nighttime lows
effects of surrounding mountains funnel local winds into north-    in the midtwenties to low thirties, are common. July and August
easterlies in winter and southwesterlies in summer. Over Control-    are usually the warmest months. Maximums average in the low to
ler Bay, summer winds range from the E through S and    midsixties, while minimums are frequently in the low toupper for-
occasionally SW. Seward's prevailing winds are from the N in    ties. It is often warmest at the more sheltered ports. Extreme highs
winter and S in summer. In Cook Inlet, winds are most frequent    reach the mid- to upper eighties.
from the N, with topography causing deflections to the NW and        (9)   Ice is most often a problem along this coast in Cook Inlet.
NE in some sections. At Anchorage, winter northerlies aive way    The upper end is usually closed by ice to all but heavily-built ves-
to southeasterlies and southerlies from May through August. At    sels, from December until late March. Elsewhere in the rivers and
Kenai, northerlies prevail in winter, although gales are often out of    bays and in Prince William Sound, waters partially freeze after
the E in early winter and SE later on; summer winds blow out of    December 1, and some floating ice is seen through May. This ice
the S through SW. At Homer, winter northeasterlies give way to    usually does not interfere with navigation.
summer southwesterlies.
  (6)   Precipitation along this coast is also greatly influenced by  (lo)  Chart  17301.-Cape  Spencer  (58 12'45"N.,
topography. The annual ranges are from 15 inches at Anchorage to    136039'30"W.),873 miles from Seattle by the outside route and
132 inches at Yakutat; records from Latouche, which has since    976 miles by the inside passage, is a conspicuous headland on the
been abandoned, were 184 inches. Most of it falls during the win-    NW side of the entrance to Cross Sound. The large shoal area that


                                                                                                                                73



74                                             4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


extends about 1.3 miles S from the cape has rocky islets, some of    the narrow S extremity by a deep V-shaped ravine. Bare rocks and
the inner ones wooded, and rocks, the outermost of which break.    some that cover, fringe the shore from S around to W.
The cape rises rapidly to ridges about 1,800 feet high which are     (2i)  Sugarloaf Island Shoal, about 0.5 mile long, is about I
heavily wooded up to 1,500 feet.                                    mile S of the southern end of Sugarloaf Island. A rock awash and
  (11)  Cape Spencer Light (58ï¿½11.9'N., 136ï¿½38.4'W.), 105 feet    submerged rocks on the shoal usually break. A lighted whistle
above the water, is shown from a white square tower on a rectan-    buoy is off the W end of the shoal.
gular concrete building on the outermost large rocky islet S of the  (22)  During moderate E gales temporary anchorage is possible
cape; a fog signal and radiobeacon are at the light.                in 10 to 18 fathoms, rocky bottom, in the cove NE of Sugarloaf
 (12)  Cross Sound, between Cape Spencer and Cape Bingham,         Island. The cove is 0.3 mile wide and open to the NW.
8 miles SE, is the northernmost passage to the inside waters of      (23)  Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as
Southeast Alaska. The sound is described in U.S. Coast Pilot 8,    3ï¿½1/4 from the normal variation, have been observed at the S end of
Pacific Coast, Alaska-Dixon Entrance to Cape Spencer.               Sugarloaf Island.
 (13)  Dicks Arm, a narrow inlet less than 200 yards wide in         (24)  Astrolabe Point, 11 miles SW of Cape Spencer, is rugged
places, extends in a NNE direction for about 2 miles along the SE   and has bare cliffs on its W side; the S face of the point is moder-
side of Cape Spencer. From the head of the arm, a gradually rising    ately wooded halfway up. Astrolabe Rocks, some bare, sub-
valley passes over a saddle to Taylor Bay. A narrow channel, with    merged, or awash, are 0.3 mile S of the point.
depths of 2/2 to 12 fathoms leads E of Zip Rock, 20 feet high and
                                                                     (25)  Dixon Harbor, with its entrance between Sugarloaf Island
bare, through the off-lying rocks and islets to the inlet. Depths of    and Astrolabe Point, has depths of 60 to 20 fathoms over an aver-
3/4 to 8 fathoms are found in the inlet to within 0.5 mile of the
                                                                    age width of 0.8 mile for 2 miles N to Thistle Cove, the NW arm.
head, where it is shoal.                                            Depths of 13 to 18 feet are just W of the middle of the entrance. A
 (14)  Polka Rock, 20 feet high, is 2 miles NW of Cape Spencer    glacier above the head of the harbor is visible from the entrance.
and at the outer edge of the foul ground, marked by kelp, which      (26)  Thistle Cove is I mile long in a N direction. At the point
extends about 0.5 mile from shore in this general vicinity. Small
                                                                    on the NE side of the entrance is a grass-covered rock, 20 feet
                                                                    high, from which a shoal extends SW across the entrance, leaving
between Polka Rock and Graves Rocks.
                                                                    a channel 200 yards wide and about 2 fathoms deep close along
 (I5)  Graves Rocks are a group of islets about 3.5 miles NW of    the SW shore. The sea and swell from outside are well broken
Cape Spencer and about 1 mile from shore. Near the N end of the    before reaching the cove and vessels have no difficulty in entering.
group is a wooded islet about 125 feet high. Rocks and kelp
                                                                    The head of the cove is a secure anchorage with 7 fathoms, muddy
patches extend to the mainland and along the shore to Cape Spen-    bottom.
cer.
 (16)   Libby Island, 5.3 miles NW of Cape Spencer and 0.7           (27)  Palma Bay is between Astrolabe Point and Icy Point, 6
                                                                    miles to the NNW. This large body of water, sometimes called Icy
mile from the mainland, is high and wooded. Bare rocks and rocks
                                                                    Bay, has depths of 20 to 60 fathoms; large vessels have anchored
awash extend about 0.3 mile S of the island. Libby Island Light    close inshore in 15 to 20fathors.
(58ï¿½16.4'N.,  136ï¿½46.4'W.), 53 feet above the water, is shown       close inshore in    to 20 fathoms.
from a pole with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on an         (28)  Boussole Head, in the E part of Palma Bay, is a prominent
islet SE of the island. Horn Mountain is a sharp, bare peak on the    wooded 650-foot-high peninsula which extends about I mile into
mainland NSE    of theLibby Island. Horn Montain                    the bay. The outer end of the head is a natural arch which rises 60
 (17)   Graves Harbor has an entrance about 1.2 miles wide    feet above the water and is quite prominent from the S. Alder
 (17)  Graves Harbor has an entrance about 1.2 miles wide
between Graves Rocks and Libby Island Light and extends inland    Rock, 0.3 mile S of Boussole Head, uncovers 4 feet.
for about 3 miles. Depths in the harbor are 11 to 79 fathoms. The     (29)  Astrolabe Bay, SE of Boussole Head, and Boussole Bay,
unnamed cove, which makes off to the S from the head of Graves    on the NW side of the head, are open to the S but afford protection
Harbor, affords good landlocked anchorage in 7 to 15 fathoms and    to small vessels in N or E weather. Anchorage is possible in 6 to 8
is easily entered. A daybeacon marks a shoal on the W side of the    fathoms, sand bottom, near the head of each bay; the best is in
entrance to the cove.                                               Boussole Bay.
 (I8)  Murphy Cove, on the SE side of Graves Harbor 1.7 miles        (30)  Another anchorage, which affords some protection for
above Graves Rocks, has depths of I 11 fathoms or more in its outer    small craft in W  weather, is off the mouth of Kaknau Creek, a
part and affords snug anchorage for small vessels. Murk Bay,    large stream which empties into Palma Bay on the NE side of Icy
opposite Murphy Cove, is clear but too deep and open for good    Point; recommended anchorage is close inshore in 6 to 10 fath-
anchorage.                                                          oms, sand bottom.
 (19)  Torch Bay, 7 miles NW of Cape Spencer, extends inland         (31)  Icy Point, on the W side of Palma Bay and 17 miles NW
more than 2 miles in a N direction and varies in width from I mile    of Cape Spencer, is low and wooded; from S La Perouse Glacier
at the entrance to 0.3 mile at the head of the W arm. Rocks, which    can be seen over the point. Many rocks fringe the point but deep
uncover 7 feet and always marked by breakers, are I mile S of    water is only 0.3 mile offshore.
Venisa Point, on the W side of the entrance; vessels can pass on
either side of these rocks when entering the bay. The bay has         (32)  Chart 16760.-From Icy Point to La Perouse Glacier, a
depths of 13 to 56 fathoms and is not a good anchorage for large    distance of about 8 miles, the coast is low and wooded, with roll-
vessels; small vessels can find protected anchorage in the NE arm.  ing hills that gradually increase in height to the bare mountain
 (20)  Sugarloaf Island, 9 miles NW of Cape Spencer, was            peaks. Rocks extend along the coast about halfway from the point
named from its shape as seen from S. from which direction it   to the glacier; the rest of the way is mostly smooth sand beach.
appears barely detached from the islet-like point projecting from     (33)  La Perouse Glacier, about 24 miles N of Cape Spencer, is
Hankinson Peninsula. The island is high and wooded. From W, it   an outstanding landmark along this coast because the mountains
has a uniform N slope; the S slope has a step and is separated from    are often covered by clouds. The face of the glacier is 200 to 300




                                               4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                     75


feet high and is nearly perpendicular; at the foot of the glacier is a  (43)  Tides and currents.-The diurnal range of tide is 9.7 feet
narrow strip of sand beach strewn with boulders.                    2 miles inside the entrance. The current velocity at the entrance is
 (34)  Between La Perouse Glacier and Lituya Bay, 15 miles    5.1 knots on the flood and 4.1 knots on the ebb. Ebb currents, run-
NW, the coast is low and densely wooded. About 2 miles inland    ning against a SW swell, cause bad topping seas or combers which
are hills that rise in a succession of terraces to the snowcapped    are dangerous to small craft. Small powered vessels in the bay
peaks of the Fairweather Range. Most of the shore is sandy, with    should stay away from the entrance on the ebb to avoid being
occasional boulders; huge boulders cover the last 1.5 miles to    swept through. The ebb current follows a narrow path for several
Lituya Bay.                                                         miles out to sea and can be seen for some distance. On the flood,
                                                                   the entrance is smooth and local fishing boats often negotiate it
 (35)  Chart 16762.-Lituya Bay, 39 miles NW of Cape Spen-    with a calm sea but are quickly swept through the channel by the
cer, affords protected anchorage in all weather, but the entrance is    powerful current. Strangers should not attempt to enter except at
dangerous and should never be attempted except at slack water    slack water. (See the Tidal Current Tables for daily predictions.)
because of the strong current. The bay extends about 6 miles in a    (44)  lce.-The bay has never been known to freeze over but ice-
NE direction and has widths of I to 2 miles. The shoaler area    bergs can always be found in the upper part. With NE breezes
along the shore around the bay is obstructed by tree trunks.    these icebergs often reach the entrance to the bay before melting.
Anchorage for small boats close to the shore is not recommended    Ice is usually heaviest during October. The many streams flowing
because of the possibility of fouling anchors in the debris of trees    from the glaciers at the head of the bay give the water a murky dis-
and roots.                                                          colored appearance.
 (36)  In July 1958, a giant wave, caused by an earthquake-
induced avalanche, denuded the shores of Lituya Bay of trees to a    (45)  Chart 16760.-From Lituya Bay NW to Yakutat Bay, the
height of 1,720 feet. Giant waves are a recurring phenomenon in    shore is mostly gently curving sand beaches but boulders are
the bay, and other catastrophic waves were observed in 1853,    found in the vicinity of Cape Fairweather and at other places. Pre-
1874, and 1936. Steep shattered cliffs at the head of the bay    vailing currents set NW about parallel to the shore, but it has been
present a continuing hazard of avalanches; destructive waves,    observed that winds have a great influence on directions and
caused by rock falls, can occur at any time.                        strengths.
 (37)  At the head of Lituya Bay are two arms, each leading to a     (46)  Cape Fairweather, 54 miles NW of Cape Spencer, is an
glacier. Gilbert Inlet, on the NW, has Lituya Glacier at its head;    evenly rounded point sloping gently to the sea and abruptly back
Crillon Inlet, on the SE, has North Crillon Glacier at its head.    to the mountains. The summit of the cape is bare of vegetation but
Because of rapid shoaling, depths in these inlets may differ from    is covered with large piles of glacier drift, some of a bright iron-
the charted depths. Cascade Glacier, which discharges into the    rust color. Mount Fairweather, 15,320 feet high, is 15 miles
head of the bay between the two arms, can be seen far at sea.    inland from the cape and is on the Alaska-Canada boundary.
Depths in the bay are as much as 78 fathoms. Vessels can obtain      (47)  Protection from SE weather can be had N of Cape Fair-
water from streams near the head,                                   weather, which appreciably breaks both wind and swell. Just N is
 (38)  Harbor Point, on the E side of the entrance to Lituya Bay,    a high rocky slide, with a cataract several hundred feet high, which
can easily be identified from offshore by The Paps,  two conical,    is prominent from offshore.
wooded hills about I mile to the NE; the NW hill is the higher and   (48)  Alsek River, about 82 miles NW of Cape Spencer, emp-
rises to 540 feet. Large boulders, 20 to 35 feet high, are strewn    ties into the NE part of Dry Bay. About 8 miles back of the coast
along the beach. Cormorant Rock, 16 feet high, is the largest of    is Alsek Glacier. Dry Bay is filled with bars and small islands
three bare rocks off the S side of Harbor Point.                    between which are constantly changing channels. The entrance to
 (39)  La Chaussee Spit, on the NW side of the entrance to    the bay, about 400 yards wide with depths of about 6 feet, has been
Lituya Bay, is 100 to 225 yards wide and about 0.7 mile long. The    used to some extent by small craft. The tidal current has a velocity
spit is 2 to 12 feet high; the outer side of the spit is covered with    of about 2.5 knots on the ebb; during heavy weather the sea breaks
large boulders.                                                     fully 2 miles offshore.
 (40)  The entrance to Lituya Bay between Harbor Point and La        (49)  From Dry Bay to Yakutat Bay, the mountains are 5 to 15
Chaussee Spit is about 350 yards wide but is mostly foul. The    miles from the coast, and between is a low wooded plain cut by
channel has a controlling depth of about 5 fathoms but is only    numerous streams. The principal rivers between Dry Bay and
about 50 yards wide; the water shoals abruptly on either side and    Yakutat Bay have shifting bars at their entrances and lagoons or
there are many rocks. The entrance is marked by a 007ï¿½ 30'    tidal basins inside; they can be used only by small boats or
lighted range.                                                      launches at high water and with a smooth sea. The mountains back
  (4t)  Anchorage Cove behind La Chaussee Spit, has depths of    of the coastal plain carry numerous glaciers; Yakutat Glacier,
3 to 5 fathoms, but is obstructed by numerous tree trunks and    about 100 miles NW of Cape Spencer and 30 miles E of Yakutat
rocks awash and is not suitable for anchorage. On a flood tide with    Bay, is 3 miles wide and very prominent.
S weather, the cove has considerable swell.                          (50)  Mariners are advised that in glacially fed areas such as
  (42)  Cenotaph Island, in midbay and about 3 miles from the    Yakutat Bay, a layer boundary with a steep thermal/salinity gradi-
entrance, is densely wooded and has several hills, the highest ris-    ent and/or suspended sediments in the water column can produce
ing about 320 feet. The N and W  sides of the island slope gently,    erroneous bottom traces on echo sounders. If this anomaly is sus-
but the S side is an abrupt, high cliff with depths of 75 fathoms    pected, a handheld lead line should be used to penetrate the layer
only 100 yards away. The island is named for a wooden monu-    for an accurate reading.
ment, or cenotaph, which was erected by La Perouse in 1786 in
memory of officers and men who were lost in the entrance to the      (51)  Chart 16761.-Yakutat Bay, 130 miles NW of Cape
bay. No trace of the monument or its site have been found in    Spencer, has a 16.5-mile-wide entrance between Ocean Cape on
recent years.                                                       the SE and Point Manby on the NW; the bay is 7 miles wide at




 76                                             4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


 Blizhni Point, 15 miles above the entrance, and 2 miles wide a    Island is foul. Heavy breakers are reported to exist at the entrance
 few miles farther up in Disenchantment Bay, the N extension of    to Monti Bay.
 the bay. Yakutat Bay, the best anchorage between Cape:Spencer        (58)  The Ahkau, on the S side of Monti Bay 1 mile SE of
 and Prince William Sound for light and medium-draft vessels, is    Point Carrew, is the outlet of an intricate system of shallow
 mostly clear of islands and dangerous shoals. Depths in the bay    lagoons within the peninsula between the bay and the ocean. In
 range from 2 fathoms, marked by heavy growths of kelp W  of    1979, a depth of 5 feet could be carried through the entrance to
 Otmeloi and Krutoi Islands, to 141 fathoms off Point Latouche,    The Ankau; currents are strong and entry should not be attempted
 23 miles above the entrance. Two to 3 miles outside the line    except at or near slack water and as close to Ankau Head as possi-
 between Ocean Cape and Point Manby is a submarine ridge, very    ble. A sandbar extending N across the channel from Ankau Head
narrow on top, with depths of 3'/2 to 17 fathoms; the water deepens    is building to the E making entry into The Ankau very difficult.
 rapidly to more than 30 fathoms on either side except near Point    Several large boulders on the S side nearly block the entrance.
Manby, and the ridge curves NE near Ocean Cape to join shal-    Inside The Ankau, tides lag those predicted for Yakutat by as
 lower water. During very heavy weather, it has been observed that    much as 2 hours.
breakers or pronounced increased height of swell occur across the    (59)  Tzuse Shoal, about midway between Point Turner and the
entire entrance to Yakutat Bay; at such times entrance is danger-    Yakutat mainland, has on its N side a rock 5 feet high; the bare
ous.                                                                shoal is about'300 yards in diameter at low water. A rock, 4 feet
  (52)  Current predictions are unavailable for Yakutat Bay, but    high, is near the S side of the shoal. Two rocks, awash at lowest
complex currents are known to exist. The current to the E of    tide, are about 0.2 mile N of the shoal. A lighted buoy marks the
Knight Island flows S on a flood tide and N on an ebb tide.         SE side of the shoal.
  (53)  Ocean Cape, on the SE side of the entrance to Yakutat         (60)  Yakutat, a town at the E end of Monti Bay, has a small
Bay, is low and well wooded. Three bare light-colored bluffs 50 to    hospital, school, and two general stores. Lodging is available at
70 feet high, the westernmost point of the cape, are unmistakable   the airport S of the town.
landmarks. Ocean Cape Light (59ï¿½32.1'N., 139ï¿½51.3'W.), 130           (61)  Vessels with drafts greater than 8 feet should anchor on the
feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red    E side of the harbor.
and white diamond-shaped daymark on one of the bluffs. A              (62)  Tide.-The diurnal range of tide at Yakutat is 10.1 feet.
lighted whistle buoy, 3 miles W  of Ocean Cape Light, marks the      (63)  Weather.-The Yakutat area is surrounded on three sides
entrance to Yakutat Bay. Heavy breakers have been observed up to    by the waters of the Gulf of Alaska and Yakutat Bay; conse-
0.5 mile offshore from the cape; vessels unfamiliar with the area    quently, the climate is maritime in character. Both daily and sea-
should not attempt to pass between the lighted whistle buoy and    sonal average temperatures are held within fairly well-confined
Ocean Cape.                                                         limits. Differences between average maximum and minimum
  (54)  Point Manby, on the NW side of the entrance to Yakutat    readings range from a little'over 120F in October to around 160F
Bay, is low and wooded. There is usually heavy surf and strong    in April and May. Normal monthly temperatures range from
currents along the shore from this point NE to Blizhni Point, mak-    slightly above 26'F in January to around 53'F in July and August.
ing it dangerous for boats to land, and causing migration of the    Although Yakutat has experienced a record low of -240F, readings
shoreline and sandbars close to shore. Landings at stream    approaching this figure are extremely rare. Yakutat averages about
entrances should only be made at high water and with local knowl-year with temperatures below zero. The higher
edge.                                   -                           mountain areas to the N and NE of Yakutat, with extensive glacia-
                                                                    tion, provide downslope cold air drainage which results in wide
  (55) Point Carrew is on the E side of Yakutat Bay 1.5 miles
                                                                    variations of temperature within short distances. Maximum tem-
NE of Ocean Cape. A lighted whistle buoy, about 2 miles N of    peratures above the 809F mark have occurred in June, July, and
Point Carrew, marks the N end of a bank of shoaler water extend-    August.
ing from the point, and the turn into Monti Bay. A rocky point,
ing from twhe point, and the turn into Monti.Bay. A rocky point,     (64)  Although the area in the immediate vicinity of the station
over w hich heavy surf breaks, extends N from Poi nt Carrew. The    is relatively flat, rather rough, hilly terrain exists within short dis-
W shore of Phipps Peninsula is foul with large boulders. The N
and NE shore of Phipps Peninsula is subjecl th   a bers. The N      tances. At distances of40 to 75 miles to the N and NE, peaks of
of sand NE shore of   Phipps Penins pla is subjecto a periodic buildup    the St. Elias Range rise to heights of from 14,000 to almost 20,000
                                        of sand ofen producing sandbars offshore.  feet. The upslope terrain, combined with the exposure of the sta-
 (56)  Point Munoz, the westernmost extremity of Khantaak    tion to moisture-laden air from the Gulf, tends to provide Yakutat
Island, is 3.5 miles above Ocean Cape. Dangerous rocks and    with abundant rainfall. The annual precipitation of around 130
heavy kelp growth, over which heavy surf breaks, extend SW to S    inches is one of the greatest in the State, and annual amounts have
from Point Munoz making.the area foul for vessels. The island is    always been in excess of 85 inches. Thunderstorms seldom occur,
about 5 miles long in a NE-SW direction and the greatest width is    averaging only about one per year. June has the lowest average
between Point Munoz and Point Turner, 2 miles to the SE. Khan-    precipitation of any month with around 5 inches. October, with an
taak Island is low and wooded except at Point Turner, which is a    average of almost 20 inches, has the heaviest monthly rainfall. In
tongue of sand covered with grass and bushes. Khantaak Island    spite of abundant rainfall, runoff from heavy rain seldom creates a
Light (59033.6'N., -139ï¿½47. I'W.), 28 feet above the water, is    problem of any consequence. This is particularly true in the vicin-
shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-    ity of the station where runoff not easily reaching drainage ditches
shaped daymark on the S end of the island near Point Turner.        is quite readily absorbed by the porous gravel which is exposed as
 (57)  Monti Bay, entered between Point Carrew and Point    a surface layer over much of the area. The heavy precipitation pro-
Munoz, extends about 3 miles SE to Yakutat, then turns N to    duces copious growth of various types of vegetation in the sur-
Yakutat Roads anchorage. Depths in Monti Bay are 12 to 40 fath-    rounding woods, including several types of edible berries. Heavy
oms, except for a 10-fathom wreck 0.4 mile S of Point Turner. The    stands of timber in the area are harvested for lumber and pulp.
S side of the bay is clear, but the N side in the vicinity of Khantaak    Salmon fishing is a main source of income for natives in the area.




                                                4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                   77


 (65)  Snowfall has occurred in all months of the year except    the E side of the roads. The best anchorage for large vessels is in
June, July, and August. The heaviest fall in any 24-hour period    the middle of Yakutat Roads in 15 to 23 fathoms.
was experienced in March of 1960 when 32 inches fell.               (79)  Port Mulgrave, on the W side of Yakutat Roads behind
 (66)  Cloudiness is abundant with the annual average sunrise to    Point Turner, KhantaakIsland, is 1 mile long and about 200 yards
sunset exceeding eight-tenths sky cover. During the spring, fall,    wide; on the side opposite Point Turner is Village Shoal, parts of
and winter months, the Yakutat area is subjected to numerous    which show at high water. The entrance to Port Mulgrave has a
storms, usually accompanied by high winds. During these seasons,    depth of I A feet; the arm is usuable only by small boats.
the low pressure systems that develop in the Aleutians seem to fol-  i8()  Rurik Harbor, the next arm indenting the inner side of
low a path lying just S of this area, resulting in persistent cloudy    Khantaak Island NE of Port Mulgrave, has depths of 5 to 14 fath-
weather and extensive precipitation in the vicinity. During the    oms in its entrance. Small vessels can anchor in the entrance.
summer, however, the weather occasionally remains cloudless and
delightful for days at a time. The St. Elias Mountain Range, which    has depths of 10 to 36 fathoms. Prince Shoal, between Rurik Har-
borders the area on the NE and contains numerous glaciers, exerts    bor and Sea Otter Bay, extends about 0.5 mile SE from the Khan-
                                                                    bor and Sea Otter Bay, extends about 0.5 mile SE from the Khan-
a pronounced effect upon the local weather, particularly when a    taak Island shore. The shoal is foul with rocks and has an
steep pressure gradient develops with low pressure in the Gulf to    extensive area that bares. Prince Shoal, partly bare at low water
the SW of Yakutat. Under these conditions cold winds move down
                                                                    extends out 0.4 mile from the point on the NE side of the entrance.
from the glacier slopes and skies are generally cloudless.         Small vessels can anchor in the entrance to Rurk Harbor.
 (67)  Ice.-The ice in Yakutat Bay comes from the glaciers at the
                                                                     (82)  Johnstone Passage, at the NE end of Yakutat Roads, con-
head of Disenchantment Bay and Russell Fiords. It is usually quite
thick in Disenchantment Bay, but at times is scarce. Ordinarily, the    nects with several bays and arms between the numerous islands
                                                ice banks on the W side of Yakutat Bay as far S as Blizhni Poin and rocks behind Khantaak Island. The connecting channels are
ice banks on the W side of Yakutat Bay as far S as Blizhni Point.
                                                                    navigable only for small craft at low water. Extensive shoaling and
Scattered bergs usually are found in the bay proper, and occasional
drifts find their way as far S as Ocean Cape and Point Manby. Ice    rocks exist throughout the area; local knowledge is advised.
flows have reportedly been encountered W of Knight Island on the    (83)  Broken Oar Cove, 2.5 miles NE of Yakutat, is the site of
E side of the bay.                                                 a logging operation. Sawmill Cove, on the S side of Broken Oar
 (68)  (See page T-l for Yakutat climatological table.)           Cove, is used as a log dump and has a log boom with a submerged
 (69)  Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-    cable extending across the entrance.
sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of   (84)  Redfield Cove, 3 miles NE of Broken Oar Cove, affords
Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)                    excellent protected anchorage for light and medium draft vessels
 (70)  Vessels en route Yakutat meet the pilot boat about I mile    in 5 to 22 fathoms. The S side is clear of obstructions or shoals. A
NW of Yakutat Bay Lighted Whistle Buoy 4 (59035.6'N.,    shoal extends about 0.3 mile SSW from the N entrance point. The
139051.2'W.).                                                      safest passage to the bay is from N between Knight Island and
 (7))  The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "YAKUTAT        Krutoi Island. Unlighted buoys mark the passage.
PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearranged fre-           (85)  From the SE side of Knight Island, 6.5 miles N of Red-
quency between pilot and agent/vessel.                             field Cove, a 500-yard-wide ridge extends SE to Tla-xagh Island.
 (72)  Wharves.-The Delta Western wharf is on the S side near    The ridge provides a good anchorage in 14 fathoms for moderate-
the head of Monti Bay and has a 55-foot face with 25 feet along-    draft vessels. About 0.5 mile E of Tla-xagh Island is the entrance
side. Gasoline, diesel fuel, and water are available. Other petro-    to Eleanor Cove. Chicago Harbor, just NE of Eleanor Cove, is a
leum products can be delivered by truck from the airport.          well-protected steep-sided cove for small craft.
  (73)  Sitka Sound Seafood Pier, 300 yards across the head of       (86)  N of Point Latouche, the bay bends to the NE and joins
Monti Bay from the Delta Western wharf, has a 110-foot face with    Disenchantment Bay. Depths of 120 to 136 fathoms are found
about 18 feet alongside and 25 feet about 20 feet out from the face.    throughout Disenchantment Bay, except in the vicinity of Haenke
The pier is exposed to SE swells.                                  Island, about 4.5 miles NE of Point Latouche, Osier Island, about
  (74) . Another Sitka Sound Seafood Pier is about 500 yards    2.5 miles NE of Haenke Island in the entrance to Russell Fiord,
WNW of the Seafood Pier described above.                           and a small islet about 1.3 miles NE of Haenke Island. A partially
  (75)  A small-craft and seaplane float owned by the State and    protected anchorage in 40 fathoms can be found behind Haenke
operated by the City of Yakutat is off Yakutat Roads in Shipyard    Island.
Cove, (59033'50"N., 139ï¿½44'20"W.). No services or supplies are      (87)  Turner Glacier and Hubbard Glacier actively discharge
available at the float. Limited repairs to small-craft are available at    icebergs into the bay. The flow favors the W shore but at times
the cannery, when in operation, and at a garage in town.           heavy ice concentrations can be troublesome throughout the area.
  (76)  The harbormaster assigns berths; he can be contacted on    Turner Glacier flows into the W  side of the bay. The position of
VHF-FM channel 16 and by telephone (907-784-3323 or 907-784-    the glacier's terminus varies and, at times, a moraine bar is
3270).                                                             exposed at low tide some distance off the ice cliffs. Hubbard Gla-
  (77)  Communications.-Barge service is available, stops being    cier, the largest tidal glacier in Alaska, discharges innumerable
made only as freight traffic demands. Daily scheduled air service    icebergs into the head of the bay along a 6-mile-long ice cliff.
to Anchorage, Cordova, and Juneau is available from the Yakutat    Large waves caused by calving ice from the glacier makes landing
airfield, about 3 miles SE of the town; charter air service is also    on the shores of the N part of the bay hazardous. Osier Island is
available.                                                         2.5 miles NE of Haenke Island and 95 feet high; the passage
  (78)  Yakutat Roads, extending NNE from Monti Bay, has a    between the island and the mainland S is shallow. Hubbard Gla-
clear width of 0.3 mile E of Tzuse Shoal, a length of about 2 miles,    cier has advanced in recent years, at times closing the entrance to
and depths of 4 to 23 fathoms, mud bottom, except for an exten-    Russell Fiord. Uncharted reefs, tidal currents, icebergs, and ice
sive foul area at its NE end. A light marks the N limit of shoals on    calving from the glacier and resulting waves make navigation




78                                             4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


between Disenchantment Bay and Russell Fiord extremely haz-         (101) A dangerous shoal extends about 0.5 mile N from the E
ardous at all times.                                               sandspit to a 2-fathom spot in 59ï¿½55'45"N., 141 ï¿½25'47"W. Depths
 (88)  Mariners should contact the U.S. Forest Service Public    to the N of the shoal are greater than 5 fathoms.
Affairs Office, Chatham Area, Region 10, 204 Siginaka Way,          (102) Moraine Island, actually a peninsula, is on the E side of
Sitka, Alaska 99835, for the latest conditions concerning Disen-    Riou Bay. A bar, with a least depth of I fathom, N of Moraine
chantment Bay, Hubbard Glacier, and Russell Fiord; telephone,    Island, extends from 59ï¿½56'00"N., 141023'35"W. to 59056'00"N.,
(907) 747-6671.                                                    141 ï¿½23'50"W.
 (89)  Russell Fiord (see chart 16760) extends 27 miles SE of       (103) Gull Island, a natural bird sanctuary, is 2.5 miles NE of
Osier Island and has depths well over 100 fathoms except in the    Moraine Island. A 40-foot-high conical hill on the NE end of the
vicinity of Hubbard Glacier. A branch, Nunatak Fiord, extends E    island is conspicuous. A shoal extends 0.6 mile W from the SW
for 12 miles from Russell Fiord to East Nunatak Glacier which    tip of the island. Between the island and the SE shore of Icy Bay,
terminates on shoals that bare at low water.                       the water is foul with rocks and a moraine reef.
 (9o)  Tide rips and strong currents have been observed at the      (104)  The Icy Bay Lumber Company logging camp, on the NW
entrance to Russell Fiord on both sides of Osier Island. Errors in    side of the bay about 2 miles W of Claybluff Point, is the only set-
charted depth of 1 to 5 feet may exist in the area E of longitude    tlement in Icy Bay. Two caretakers are in attendance at the camp
139030' because of tidal differences between Yakutat Bay and    during the nonoperational winter months. An airstrip is at the
Russell Fiord.                                                     camp.
                                                                     (10os5) The Icy Bay Lumber Company also operates a log dump
 (91)  Ice.-The ice in Yakutat Bay comes from glacier ice. Float-    and pier on the NW side of the bay at Carson Creek about 2.5
ing glacier ice and icebergs from Hubbard and Turner Glaciers is    miles NE of Claybluff Point. The pier, a 230-foot beached barge,
usually quite thick in Disenchantment Bay to as far S as Point    has depths of 15 feet at its outer face and is subject to heavy surge
Latouche.,                                                         action. Heavy swells, which frequently break along this coast, can
                                                                   make landings difficult. A road terminates at Carson Creek.
 (92)  Chart 16016.-Between Yakutat Bay and Cape Suckling,          (106) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-
the coast is formed by river and glacier deposit and is relatively    sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of
regular. Coastal currents are discussed in chapter 3.              Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)
 (93)  A short way inland, the St. Elias Range rises to 18,008 feet  (107) Vessels en route Icy Bay meet the pilot boat about 9 miles
at Mount St. Elias, on the Alaska-Canada boundary, and culmi-    S of Claybluff Point (59ï¿½58.0'N., 141 ï¿½35.0'W.).
nates in the 19,850-foot Mount Logan in Canada. These towering      (108) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "ICY BAY
snow-clad peaks, only 25 miles apart, are surpassed in all Canada    PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearranged fre-
and the United States only by central Alaska's 20,320-foot Mount   quency between pilot and agent/vessel.
McKinley.                                                           (109) Anchorage.-Possibly the best anchorage in Icy Bay is E
 (94)  Stretching from Yakutat Bay to the Bering River in one    of Moraine Island. This harbor makes an excellent anchorage in
continuous icefield are the tremendous Malaspina Glacier and    most weather, well protected from the wind. The bottom is soft
Bering Glacier. Malaspina Glacier, which covers most of the    clay which may yield in very high winds. In 1976, the controlling
coastal plain between Yakutat Bay and Icy Bay, reaches the sea at    depth in the NW part of the harbor was 5 fathoms with a 1/2-
Sitkagi Bluffs which are formed of forest and debris covered ice.    fathom spot at the entrance in 59ï¿½56'00"N., 141ï¿½22'40"W. Do not
From the sea the glacier appears as a vast, almost featureless white    anchor between Moraine Island and Gull Island to the NE, as
plain, gently sloping toward the coast from the base of the tower-    bergs drift through this area, sometimes with considerable veloc-
ing peaks of the St. Elias Mountains.                              ity. Off the entrance to Riou Bay, NE of Moraine Reef, is an area
                                                                   that offers good protection from swells coming from the Gulf of
 (95)  Chart 16741.-Icy Bay is a glacially carved fiord that is 5    Alaska and has a good holding bottom. Riou Bay has many foul
miles wide at the mouth and extends inland more than 22 miles.    areas along the E shore which, combined with the presence of
Actively calving Guyot, Yahtse, and Tyndall Glaciers are at the N  Moraine Reef, makes the bay an undesirable anchorage.
end of the bay.                                                      (llo) In 1972, the USCG Cutter CLOVER reported a good
 (96)  Caution.-Mariners should use extreme caution when nav-    anchorage in about 20 fathoms, untroubled by ice in all except E
                                                                   winds of 20 knots or more in 60ï¿½00.8'N., 141ï¿½23.1'W., just SW of
igating Icy Bay. Icebergs and floe ice are hazards and their move-Point
ment can cause changes to both shoreline and water depths.
                                                                     (Ill) A 52/-fathom spot is 3.5 miles SW of Kichyatt Point, 0.9
 (97)  The bay is entered between Point Riou Spit, on the SE,    mile offshore.
and Claybluff Point, on the NW. Claybluff Point is composed of
  soft ,layblutfPoint,  on  the  NW.   Claybluff  Point sha composedof (l112)    Tides  and  currents.-The  diurnal  range  of tide  at Icy  Bay
soft shale and sand.
                                                                   is 9.9 feet. Currents in the bay are weak. The combined effect of
 (98)  A bar extends across the entrance of Icy Bay, roughly in    the ebb current and the discharge from the glacial streams is most
the shape of a crescent, with depths in midchannel of 51/2 to 9 fath-    pronounced in the NW part of the bay. In the entrance to Guyot
oms. Breakers extend out from each entrance point along the crest    Bay, the ebb current attains a velocity of 2 knots or more. The tidal
of the bar, varying from the size of the seas, but have never been    current at the entrance to Icy Bay floods NE and ebbs SW, with a
observed to encroach on the channel.                               velocity of about 0.5 knot.
 (99)  It is reported that most points on the E side of the bay give  (113) Weather.-The prevailing winds are E and NE. A breeze
excellent radar returns from all positions in the bay.             off the glacier usually brings rain. Winds from other quarters are
 (loo) Riou Bay is behind Point Riou Spit. Moraine Reef lies in    seldom observed, although offshore winds are known to blow at
the entrance to Riou Bay. Numerous rocks awash and deadheads    times. Breakers on the outside coast are generally heavy and
are in the entrance and throughout the bay.                        plainly audible on either side in entering. Within the bay, W of



                                                4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                      79


Claybluff Point, breakers are frequently heavy enough to make        and Okalee Spit is of little use except for very small vessels that
landing difficult in small boats. There is no surf along the E shore    can cross the flats E of Wingham Island.
of the bay.                                                           (1241 Two prominent rocks about 75 feet high are in the
 (114) The bay trends generally NE for 10 miles with depths of    approach, 1.5 miles E of Lemesurier Point at the NE end of
generally less than 50 fathoms below Kichyatt Point; uncharted       Kayak Island, and 1.2 miles S of Okalee Spit. Ledges which
shoals and rocks may be present. N of prominent Kichyatt Point,    uncover are between the two rocks, and extend about 300 yards E
on the W  side of the bay, the shores are barren having been         and W  from them. Foul ground with 13 feet over its outer half
recently exposed by glacier retreat; the bay trends NW for 15    extends from Lemesurier Point almost to the shoal surrounding the
miles to Guyot Glacier and Yahtse Glacier which discharge ice-    rocks.
bergs. The W  shore is high; 7 miles NW of Kichyatt Point, Tsaa       (125) The channel is over a bar with least depths of 17 to 19 feet,
Fiord extends W 3 miles heading in three calving glaciers. The E     thence between Okalee Spit and the two prominent rocks. N from
shore of the bay is low and composed of glacial moraine and out-    the rocks, the channel has depths of 5 to 6 fathoms until about I
wash from Malaspina Glacier. Two miles NNE of Kichyatt Point    mile inside the N end of Kayak Island; thence, through the flats,
is low Kageet Point; N of the point Taan Fiord extends 5 miles       about 12 feet can be carried to Kayak Entrance, and 6 feet to Oka-
NE to Tyndall Glacier.                                               lee Channel. Keep to the W of Southwest Breaker when using this
 (115)  Ice.-Ice in the bay originates from the actively calving    channel.
glaciers at the head of the bay. The part of the bay N of 60ï¿½00'N. is  (126)  Kayak Island is 17.5 miles long, has peaks 1,110 to 1,390
usually filled with ice. In the S part of the bay, the ice usually    feet high in the central portion, and slopes gradually to its N part.
forms long tongues of loosely packed ice. Icy Bay is usually ice-    which is low and wooded.
free from the E shore, W to the centerline of the bay. The size of
                                                                      (127) Cape St. Elias, the S end of Kayak Island, is an important
the ice ranges from a few widely spaced bergs of over 200 feet inm
length and 50 feet in height to many small bits 2 feet and smaller.    and unmistakable landmark. It is a precipitous, sharp, rocky ridge,
                                                                     about 1 mile long and 1.665 feet high, with a low, wooded neck
Riou Bay remains relatively free of ice during the summer. During    about I mi          and 1,665 feet high, with a low, wooded neck
and shortly after periods of strong winds, the upper end of the bay
                                                                 is clear of ice sometimes to the face of the glaciers.  Rock, about 0.2 mile off Cape St. Elias, is 494 feet high and con-
is clear of ice sometimes to the face of the glaciers.
 (116)  Caution should be exercised when approaching or beach-    nected to the cape by a low, narrow strip of land
ing a boat near the face of the glaciers. Boats may be swamped by     (128)  Cape St. Elias Light (59047.9'N, 14435.8'W.), 85 feet
the large waves generated by the falling of large chunks of ice into    above the water, is shown from a white square tower at the corner
the water. Caution should also be exercised in the vicinity of the    of a rectangular building on the SW end of Kayak Island
larger bergs which may roll over or break apart without warning.      ((29)  A breaking reef extends I mile SW from Pinnacle Rock.
 (117)  Freshwater may be obtained from streams along the W         Another breaking reef, about 1 mile E of Cape St. Elias, extends 2
side of the bay in the vicinity of Kichyatt Point. Also, small ice-    miles SSE from Kayak Island and then continues as a submerged
bergs can be taken aboard for potable water.                         ridge of 4 to 8 fathoms to Southeast Rock, which uncovers II
                                                                     feet. Broken ground with 7 to 16 fathoms extends 2.5 miles SW
 (1(8)  Chart 16016.-From Icy Bay to Cape Yakataga, the coast    from the rock. A bell buoy, 3.2 miles from Cape St. Elias Light, is
is backed by a continuous ridge of stratified mountains 3,000 to    on the broken ground. Tidal currents have considerable velocity
                                                                     across the reefs.
6,000 feet high. Numerous streams cut the foothills, and a dense
growth of alders and bushes line the shore.                           (130) The E coast of Kayak Island is strewn with boulders and
 (119) Yakataga Reef extends about 0.5 mile from shore at Cape      landing is impracticable. Rocky shoals with 11 feet over them are
Yakataga (60ï¿½03'40"N., 142026'00"W.) and parts of it show            1.8 miles 172ï¿½ from Lemesurier Point. Lying 3.2 miles SW of the
above high water. This is the best landing place between Icy Bay     point and I mile offshore is a reef 0.5 mile long. Its N end is a rock
and Controller Bay about 57 miles to the W, but landing is possi-    10 feet high and its S end uncovers 5 feet. For 6 miles NE from
ble only with occasionally smooth seas. In 1968, a depth of 9 fath-    Cape St. Elias, rocks awash and breakers extend 0.8 mile off the E
oms was reported about 15 miles S of Cape Yakataga in    coast of the island.
59050.0'N., 142031.0'W. An aero radiobeacon is at Cape Yakat-          (131) Sea Ranger Reef is off the W  coast of Kayak Island 3.3
aga.                                                                 miles N of Cape St. Elias. The inner shoal is I mile from shore,
                                                                     has 11 feet over it and often breaks. The outer shoal is 1.5 miles
  (120) Chart 16723.-Caution: Mariners are urged to use caution    from shore, has a least known depth of 24 feet, and seldom breaks.
when navigating in the area of this chart due to possible changes    Tide rips occur around it at times.
in depths and shoreline as a result of the earthquake of March 27,    (132) The tidal currents on the W  side of Kayak Island set N on
1964.                                                                the flood and S on the ebb, with an estimated velocity of 0.6 knot.
  (121)  Cape Suckling (59ï¿½59'24"N., 143053'36"W.), 25 miles           (133) Anchorage.-Good protection from all winds except from
NE of Cape St. Elias, is low and wooded. Two miles N of the cape    the W  can be found on the W  side of Kayak Island. This area is
a prominentmountain ridge 1,500 to 2,500 feet high extends about    used by foreign fishing vessels, generally large stern trawlers, for
8 miles NE. Three bluffs about 100 feet high are 1.5 to 2.9 miles    the transfer of fish between vessels at anchor. The smoothest water
W of Cape Suckling. From the E bluff a sunken reef extends 0.6    usually will be found between Sea Ranger Reef and Kayak
mile SW to three rocks awash that are close together.                Entrance, an anchorage which is used by fishing vessels during the
  (122)  Southwest Breaker is a rock bare at low water, 3.8 miles    halibut season. Indifferent anchorage can be had on the E side of
260ï¿½ from Cape Suckling.                                             Kayak Island in 15 to 20 fathoms, about 1.5 miles offshore mid-
  (123)  Okalee Spit, forming the S side of Controller Bay, is low   way between Cape St. Elias and Lemesurier Point. The holding
with bare sand dunes, and is 7 miles long in an E-W direction. The   ground is poor and a vessel should be ready to move on short
SE entrance to Controller Bay between the N end of Kayak Island    notice.




80                                             4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


 (134)  Controller Bay is formed by Okalee Spit and Kayak          through all the entrances on the flood and out on the ebb. In Kayak
Island on the S and Wingham and Kanak Islands on the W. For    Entrance the ebb has greater velocity than the flood and the esti-
some distance back from the E shore the land is but slightly above    mated velocity is not over 3 knots. Tide rips occur at times in the
high water, and is broken by many streams. Quicksand has been    channels S of Wingham Island and SE of Kanak Island.
found in the channel at the mouth of Edwardes River. The bay is      (146) Weather.-During the summer the prevailing winds are
mostly flats. Entrance is through two principal channels; Kayak    from the E around through S to SW. During the early spring and
Entrance just S of Wingham Island; the other, Okalee Channel just    fall, NW winds blow with great force over the flats. There is a
N of Wingham Island.                                                great deal of cloudy misty weather during the summer. Fog is
 (135)  Kayak Entrance, between Kayak and Wingham Islands,    infrequent and usually clears before noon.
is rocky and foul with shoals. The least depth of the shoals as far   (147) Point Hey is a projecting and prominent point, high and
as abeam of the SE tip of Wingham Island is I fathom; above that    narrow, on the NW side of Controller Bay I mile N of Kanak
and into the S portion of Controller Bay the depth is not more than    Island. Chilkat, an abandoned village, is on the W  side of the
3 feet. Two rocks awash are about 0.3 mile N of the S entrance    mouth of Bering River, which flows into the NE end of Controller
point. The channel is 0.5 mile wide between spits, which largely    Bay.
uncover, projecting out-from Kayak and Wingham Islands. Kayak        (148)  Katalla Bay, 23 miles N from Cape St. Elias, is between
Entrance should be used with caution and only at high water.        Strawberry Point on the E and Martin Islands on the W, a distance
 (136) Anchorage.-Anchorage can be made in 2 to 3 fathoms,    of 5 miles, and indents the coast about 2 miles to the mouth of
bottom soft in places, in Kayak Entrance as far N as abeam of the    Katalla River. The bay is a roadstead sheltered from offshore
SE end of Wingham Island. There is some local chop with strong    winds, but exposed to winds from SE through SW.
winds, but no outside swell enters the bay either through Kayak       (149)  Strawberry Point is low and bare at the end and wooded
Entrance or around the N end of Kayak Island.                       toward the foot of a prominent hill on the point which has a low
 (137) Small vessels can anchor in the narrow channel close to    break between it and the higher land N. A shoal with little water
the E side of Wingham Island. This channel is about 300 yards    over it, and on which the sea generally breaks at low water,
wide and has depths of 7 to 11 fathom for I mile, then shoals grad-    extends nearly 1.2 miles S from the point.
ually S. The flats on the E edge of the channel have depths of 7 to  ((50) The NE shore of the bay from Strawberry Point to the
11 feet. At times the tidal currents in the channel have a velocity of
                                                                   mouth of Katalla River is a steep sand beach. The NW shore from
3 knots or more.                                                    Katalla to Martin Islands is foul and should be given a berth of
 (138) With heavy E winds, anchorage and shelter can be found
in 16 to 18 fathoms 0.5 mile off the W side of Wingham Island.      about 0.8 mile.
                  (39)  Wingha   Island, 4 miles long and wooded  has three  (15)  PalmPoint is 1.5 miles SW of Katalla. A boulder reef,
 (1391 Wingham Island, 4 miles long and wooded, has three
                 -hills, the highstneritsendiseso833eet.TeWshreof bare at low water, extends 0.4 mile S from it.
the island is precipitous.                                            (152)  Martin Islands, two in number and about 150 feet high,
 ((40)  Okalee Channel, between Wingham and Kanak Islands,    have steep rocky sides, and are 0.5 miles from shore. The N island
is 0.6 mile wide at the entrance, A depth of 6 fathoms can be car-    is joined to the shore by a flat, bare at extreme low water.
ried to abeam of the S tip of Kanak Island. Further NE, and into     ((53)  Martin Islands Light (60009.9'N., 144'36.2'W.), 150 feet
the bay depths are less. The channel is a secure anchorage, how-    above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and
ever, it changes annually and should be used only with local    white diamond-shaped daymark on the SW point of Fox Island,
knowledge.                                                          the outer island of the Martin group.
 (141)  The shoal on the S side of Okalee Channel, 1.5 miles NE      (154) Katalla is an abandoned village at the head of the bay, on
from Wingham Island, uncovers shortly after high water, and this    the W side of Katalla River. The bar at the mouth of the river has
shoal and the one on the opposite side of the channel are usually    a depth of about 3 feet, and the sea generally breaks on it. The
indicated by breakers. The shoal extending S from Kanak Island is    entrance is narrow and rocky, and requires local knowledge. With
mostly uncovered at low water. Above these shoals the flats bor-    a smooth sea, lighters formerly landed in the bight on the NE side
dering Okalee Channel are partly uncovered at low water only,    of Palm Point. The beach always has some surf, and with SE or
and there is nothing to indicate the channel when the flats are cov-    SW winds, landing is impracticable. Shoals make out on both
ered.                                                               sides of the river mouth.
 (142) Vessels sometimes anchor in Okalee Channel about 2            (155) The anchorage in the bay is 1.5 to 2 miles S of Katalla, in
miles above the N end of Wingham Island. This part of the chan-    53/4 to 7 fathoms, hard sand bottom. The holding ground is gener-
nel is generally easy of access in clear weather. Above this point    ally good, but quicksand S of Palm Point has caused the loss of
Okalee Channel should be navigated at low water only, in the    many anchors. There are no dangers if the shore is given a berth of
absence of local knowledge.                                         over 0.8 mile, but the shoal extending 1.5 miles S from Strawberry
 (143)  Kanak Island is about 4 miles long, very low and flat, and    Point should be kept in mind.
wooded in the middle. Breakers mark the extensive shoal which
makes out from the W side of the island. The S edge of the shoal is   (156) Chart 16013.-Copper River (60ï¿½25.0'N., 145000.0'W.)
within 1.2 miles of the N end of Wingham Island.                    emerges from the mountains between Miles Glacier and Childs
 (144) The passage between Kanak Island and Strawberry Point    Glacier, above which are rapids. Below the rapids, the river flows
is used only by small boats at high water with local knowledge.     through broad flats in many changeable channels which vary in
 (145)  Tides and currents.-The diurnal range of tide is 10.1 feet    depth from 5 to 20 feet at high stages. There are five navigable
at the N end of Wingham Island. The current velocity is 1.5 knots    channels in the Copper River Delta. These channels require local
on the flood and 1.2 knots on the ebb off the N end of Wingham      knowledge due to changing bar and sea conditions and frequent
Island, and 1.7 knots on the flood and 2.0 knots on the ebb in the    dangerous breakers. The current is swift, and tidal effects are felt
channel SE of Kanak Island. The currents set into Controller Bay    only near the mouth.



                                               4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                     81


 (157) The delta is low and marshy except for sand dunes, 50 to     (166) The irregular slough, marked by stakes and black oil drum
150 feet high, on the islands and banks of the main channel. From   buoys and trending E and W  near Point Whitshed and Twin
seaward, the vicinity of Copper River shows as a vast, rugged    Rocks, has a controlling depth of about I foot. When the Twin
range with numerous glaciers filling its gorges. From Point Mar-    Rocks are just covered, the depth in the slough is increased to
tin to Hinchinbrook Island is a chain of low sand islets, 4 to 5    about 6 feet. Twin Rocks can be avoided by bringing the summit
miles offshore. These islets are marked by four lights, shown 12    of Mummy Island, a rounded wooded knoll, in range with the
feet above the water from steel skeleton towers with red and white  1,845-foot mountain peak on Hawkins Island.
diamond-shaped daymarks. The daymarks, moving E to W, are            (167) An abandoned radio tower is near Gravel Point on the
labelled "S", "K", "G", and "P" in black. These lights are fre-    mainland about 1 mile E from Mummy Island.
quently destroyed in severe weather conditions. Between 1-2          (168) Mummy Island is about 425 feet high and wooded.
miles offshore of these lights are corresponding yellow spherical    Mummy Island Light 5 (60ï¿½27.7'N., 145059.4'W.), 21 feet
special purpose buoys with black letters "S", "K", "G" and "P".    above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a square
These buoys are difficult to see and detect on radar even in moder-    green daymark on the islets E of Mummy Island, where there is an
ate weather and should only be used for position reference, as they    approach through a slough. The islet 0.2 mile SW of Mummy
do not mark the navigable channels between the islets. Back of    Island has two steep ends, 75 feet high, with a low, flat strip
the islets are tidal flats of mud and sand, intersected by sloughs    between.
which drain into the Copper River passes and into Glacier and        (169) Little Mummy Island is rounded in outline and profile.
Eyak Rivers.                                                         (170) About 1 mile S of Mummy Island is Pinnacle Rock, on
 (158) The shoals extending seaward from the islets off the Cop-    the edge of a slough extending from Point Bentinck to Mummy
per River Delta have not been surveyed, however, danger can be    Island.
avoided by giving the islets a berth of more than 3 miles and by     (171) Orca Inlet N to Cordova from Mummy Island is filled
avoiding depths less than 10 fathoms.                               largely with flats. The channel from Mummy Island to Cordova is
 (159) Alaganik Slough, the westernmost and main outlet of    marked by seasonal buoys from May to November. In June 1983,
Copper River, is 0.5 to I mile wide, with depths from 5 to 15 feet    11/4 fathoms could be carried in the channel from Mummy Island:
depending upon the stages of tide and river. The mean range of    to Cordova. Shoals throughout the area are constantly shifting;
tide is about 9 feet at the mouth, and is reported to be 2 to 3 feet at    numerous other dangers exist in the area. Local knowledge is nec-
Alaganik about 10 miles up the slough.                              essary. The inlet is described later in the chapter.
                                                                     (172)  Point Bentinck (60023.5'N., 146ï¿½05.0'W.), at the E end of
 (160)  Chart 16709.-Eyak River, 6 miles ENE of Point Whit-    Hinchinbrook Island, is low, sandy, and grass covered, with sand
shed (60ï¿½26'45"N., 145ï¿½52'42"W.), flows from Eyak Lake and has    dunes and brush 0.5 mile back. The brush covers a ridge extending
a swift current. At favorable stages of the tide it is navigable for    SW from Strawberry: Hill at the S shore of Boswell Bay. The
small, light-draft craft to the lake. A highway bridge with a 43-    798-foot knoll with a parabolic antenna N of Boswell Bay is
foot fixed span and a clearance of 8 feet crosses the river about 3.5    prominent.
miles above the mouth. Mountain Slough is 1.5 miles W from the       (173)  At low water, sandflats bare for 2 miles off Point Bentinck.
mouth of Eyak River.                                                Part of this area is above ordinary high water offering a footing for
 (161) Egg Islands, about 5 miles SE of mainland Point Whit-    sparse grass and a lodging place for driftwood. Shoal water con-
shed and 10 miles E of Hinchinbrook Island, are low and partly    tinues off the point in a SE direction, and about 4 miles from the
grass covered. Egg Island Channel, just E of the islands, leads    point the shoal drops off into deeper water.
NE between sand and mudflats to Alaganik Slough. The seaward         (174)  A lighted bell buoy SSE of Point Bentinck marks the sea-
approach to the channel is marked by a lighted whistle buoy.        ward approach to a channel that leads between the flats I mile E of
 (t62) Egg Island Light E (60022.2'N., 145ï¿½45.0'W.), 33 feet    the point to Orca Inlet. After.crossing the bar the channel becomes
above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and    deep and narrow abreast of Point Bentinck. Low water is the best
white diamond-shaped daymark, on the SE island of the group.        time to negotiate the entrance as the flats are bare and of some aid.
 (163)  The current in the channel is strong. E of Egg Islands,    A stranger should not attempt this entrance.
flood and ebb velocities of 3 to 3.5 knots, respectively, setting in  (175)  Current velocities up to 3 knots on the flood and 2 knots
the direction of the channel, have been observed. N of the islands    on the ebb were observed in this channel. On the bar, flood and
a current of 1.5 knots, flooding NW and ebbing SE, was found. SE    ebb velocities of about 1 knot were found setting NE and S,
of Point Whitshed a W flood of 1.5 knots was observed.              respectively. S of the flats which extend W  from Egg Islands, a
 (164) Navigation in this area is limited to small craft with local    NW flood of 0.5 knot and'a SE ebb of 1 knot were observed.
knowledge. Anchorage can be found in the wider parts of the          (176)  A l/2-fathom spot is about 1.2 miles  NNE of Point
sloughs N of the Egg Islands. There is no protection from prevail-    Bentinck in about 60ï¿½24.8'N., 146003.7'W. A group of rocks that
ing winds but seas are broken up by the surrounding flats.          bare is in the middle of the entrance to Boswell Bay in about
 (l65) Point Whitshed is at the S extremity of the Heney           60O24.9'N., 146005.7'W.
Range, the steep E side of which flanks the alluvial coastal region  (177) Boswell Bay, indenting the E end of Hinchinbrook Island,
of the Cooper River. The waterfall, 1 mile from the point on the    affords anchorage for small craft just inside the entrance. Massive
coastal side of the ridge, is a prominent landmark, seen for several  Boswell Rock is 100 yards off the N point. Immediately adjacent
miles over the mudflats, and shows well when the peaks and    to the point itself is an undercut rock. A very small rock is 100
higher land are cloud covered. The higher peaks on Heney Range,    yards outside of Boswell Rock.
as well as those on Hinchinbrook Island, are generally sharp and     (178) To enter bring the 65-foot rock, brown in color and near
bare topped. The end of the peninsula W  from Heney Range is    the S shore of the bay, just clear of the southernmost pinnacle
rolling hills. Government Rock, at Point Whitshed, is 30 feet    inside the entrance, and steer on this range until abreast of Boswell
high and rounded in outline.                                        Rock. Then haul S a little and anchor when the NE point of





82                                             4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


Hinchinbrook Island is just shut in on the undercut rock. Flood      (191  A Vessel Traffic Service (Prince William Sound Vessel
 and ebb velocities of 1.5 and 2 knots, respectively, have been    Traffic Service), operated by the U.S. Coast Guard, has been
observed in the narrow entrance.                                    established in Prince William Sound, Valdez Arm, Valdez Nar-
  (179)  Hinchinbrook Island, SE coast.-A mountain ridge paral-    rows, and Port Valdez. The Service is designed to prevent colli-
lels the SE coast of Hinchinbrook Island. The tree line is about    sions and groundings, and to protect the navigable waters of the
 1,000 feet high and the summits of the island are bare. The peaks    Vessel Traffic Service area from environmental harm resulting
are not prominent and from offshore they are difficult to identify.  from such collisions and groundings.
  (180) The promotory between Point Steele and Hook Point is 2        (192) The Prince William Sound Vessel Traffic Service com-
miles broad and is faced with 200-foot bluffs; back of the bluffs is    prises three major components: a Traffic Separation Scheme, a
swampland. Lowland and sand beaches-are adjacent to the prom-    Vessel Movement Reporting System, and radar surveillance.
ontory on either side. A boat can land in good weather on the NW    The Traffic Separation Scheme comprises a network of one-way
side of Hook Point and 0.5 mile N of Point Steele. Reefs make out    traffic lanes with a separation zone in between. The traffic lanes
0.4 mile from the promontory.                                       are each 1,500 yards wide from Hinchinbrook Entrance to the
  (181)  NE of Cape Hinchinbrook, the seaward face of Hinchin-    vicinity of Bligh Reef at the SE end of Valdez Arm, then gradually
brook Island is steep, with rocky bluffs at the water, for 12 miles    decrease in width to 1,000 yards and terminate at Rocky Point.
to an open bight with a broad sand beach on the W  side of Hook    The separation zone is 2,000 yards wide between Hinchinbrook
Point.                                                              Entrance and the vicinity of Bligh Reef, then gradually decreases
  (182)  Hinchinbrook Entrance is described later.                  in width to 1,000 yards and terminates at Rocky Point.
                                                                     (193) The Vessel Movement Reporting System is controlled by
                                                                    the Vessel Traffic Center, call "Valdez Traffic," which is operated
                                                  (83)  Chart  6700.-Prince William Sound is an extensive    continuously by the U.S. Coast Guard. The center maintains radio-
body of water with an area of about 2,500 square miles. It is very    telephone communications with vessels in the Vessel Traffic Ser-
irregular in outline, with great arms spreading in all directions.
The entrance, from Cape Hinchinbrook to Cape Puget, is 58 miles    vice Area on VHF-FM channel 13. The center receives,
across, but is almost closed off by islands. The largest is Montague    assembles, and voluntary re p ormation from vessels through man-
Island which extends well out into the ocean.                       datory and voluntary reports, and in turn disseminates marine
                                                                    safety information to vessels participating in the Service.
  (184) Many of the islands and peninsulas in the sound are low       (194)  The radar surveillance system covers Valdez Arm, Valdez
and tree covered but behind these rise eternal barriers of ice and    Narrows and Port Valdez from Coast Guard operated radar sites.
snow. The Chugach Mountains stretch NW from the St. Elias    One site is at Potato Point, on the W side of Valdez Narrows, and
Range and enclose the sound round through N and W. On the N         the other is on Valdez Spit, which borders the S and E sides of the
shore glaciers come down to the heads of the bays.                  small-boat basin at Valdez. A continuous radar watch of these
 (185) Prince William Sound Shipping Safety Fairway,               areas is maintained by the Vessel Traffic Center.
extending SE from Hinchinbrook Entrance at the approaches to         (195)  The mariner is cautioned that the reliability of information
Prince William Sound, has separate inbound and outbound traffic    received by the Vessel Traffic Center may vary depending on the
lanes that merge in the NW part. (See 166.100 through 166.110    method of receipt and source. Additionally, the Coast Guard may
and 166.400, chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)                not always have first-hand knowledge of hazardous circumstances
 (186) Traffic Separation Scheme (Prince William Sound),           existing in the Vessel Traffic Service area, and unreported hazards
wholly within U.S. Territorial waters, has inbound and outbound    may confront the mariner at any time.
traffic lanes and separation zones, and leads from the vicinity of   (196) The Vessel Traffic Service is shown on the appropriate
Cape Hinchinbrook through Prince William Sound and into Val-    nautical charts of the area.
dez Arm (the entrance to Port Valdez). (See charts 531, 16013,       (197) The rules governing vessels operating in the Vessel Traffic
16700, 16709, and 16708.) (See also, Traffic Separation Schemes,    Service area are given in 161.301 through 161.387, chapter 2. In
chapter 1, for additional information.)                             addition, detailed operating procedures are contained in the Prince
 (187)  Mariners approaching or departing Hinchinbrook    William Sound Vessel Traffic Service Operating Manual, available
Entrance are advised to use caution, because of strong currents,    from the Commanding Officer, Coast Guard Vessel Traffic Ser-
occasional severe weather, and fishing activity in the area.    vice, Valdez, Alaska 99686.
Hinchinbrook Entrance may be transited E or W of Seal Rocks, at      (198) Middleton Island, about 50 miles off the entrance to
the vessel master's discretion.                                     Prince William Sound, is comparatively low and grass covered
 (188)  Dangers.-The off-lying dangers in the approaches to    and difficult to pick up when making a landfall. An aerolight is on
Prince William Sound are Middleton Island, Fountain Rock, Wes-    the W side about 1.3 miles from the S end of the island.
sels Reef, and Seal Rocks.                                           (199)  From a few miles offshore the island appears flat. The
 (189) It has been found convenient to approach Hinchinbrook    highest ground, on the S, has an elevation of 126 feet. A pinnacle
Entrance on a radio bearing using the radiobeacon station at Cape    rock at the extreme S end is conspicuous from E and W. The N end
Hinchinbrook, and taking cross bearings on the radiobeacon at    slopes to a sandspit.
Cape St. Elias as an aid in clearing Wessels Reef and Seal Rocks.     (200) The E and S sides of the island are bold hard-clay cliffs
 (190) The March 1964 earthquake caused a bottom uplift of    upon which great numbers of seafowl nest. The steepest and high-
from 4 to 32 feet in Prince William Sound. Some parts of the    est section of the cliff, on the W side, extends for 1 mile from the S
sound outside of the traffic separation scheme have not been    end. There is also a short section of cliff midway along the W
surveyed since the earthquake. Until a complete survey is    shore.
made of the area, extreme caution is necessary because depths         (201) A sandbar, awash at low water, extends 1.3 miles NW
may be considerably less than charted and mentioned in the    from the N tip of the island. The channel between the extreme end
Coast Pilot.                                                        of the bar and the main island, 0.5 mile NW of the tip of the island,




                                               4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                  83


carries a depth of 3 fathoms, but strong rips occur and it is danger-    is required in approaching Hinchinbrook Entrance in thick
ous to use.                                                       weather.
 (202) Middleton Island is inhabited by a few families that oper-  (211)  Weather.-The waters of the sound are very deep and are
ate the Federal Aviation Administration station. The island is   chilled by large amounts of ice from the surrounding glaciers. The
fringed by vast areas of reefs, rocks, and kelp. Breakers occur at    meeting of cold water and the colder air from the mountains with
greater distances. Foul ground extends 2 miles S of the island, ter-    the warmer waters and vapor-laden airs of the Gulf of Alaska
minating in breakers except in very smooth weather. Seaward of    causes changeable weather; sudden wind squalls and thick fogs
these breakers, the bottom falls off rapidly into deepwater, except    are common.
that in 1967, a depth of 51/4 fathoms was found to exist about 0.3  (212) Ice.-Glacial ice is rarely found in the open waters of
mile S of the foul ground in 59ï¿½22.3'N., 146ï¿½23.1'W. Broken    Prince William Sound. Ice is discharged by the Columbia Glacier,
ground extends 3 miles to the E, terminating in breakers which    N of Glacier Island, and is driven into the sound by N winds; it
first begin to appear when a moderate swell is running. This side    may be expected, depending on the winds, from Bligh Island to
of the island should be given a wide berth.                       Bald Head Chris Island and as far S as Storey Island. Large bergs
 (203) The waters W of Middleton Island are clear of off-lying    may be found at anytime along the N shore from Point Freemantle
dangers, giving an easy approach to an anchorage from this direc-    to Fairmount Island:
tion. The best anchorage is I mile S of the N tip and 2 miles W of  (213) There are numerous discharging glaciers in Port Wells, the
the island in about 12 fathoms. Small vessels can anchor further E,    NW arm of the sound, but ice rarely reaches the entrance of the
1 mile W of the island, in about 7 to 8 fathoms. This area gives    arm. There is a discharging glacier at the head of Blackstone Bay,
protection from the NE and SE. Tidal currents, of about 2 knots,    but the ice is confined to the bay. Ice is discharged by Chenega
run approximately parallel to the island.                         Glacier on the SW side of the sound, and occasionally drifts E as
 (204) There are two good landing places, depending on the pre-    far as Point Helen and the N entrance to Latouche Passage.
vailing seas; one is on the NE side of the island 0.3 mile from the  (214) During very cold weather ice sometimes forms in the arms
N tip, and the other is on the W side of the island, directly W of a    of the sound which reach well into the mountains, and is at times
quonset hut, 0.7 mile S of the N tip of the island. These ar h    heavy enough to impede navigation.
steep beaches, and landings can be made in moderate swells. The    (215)  Montague Island,on the W  side of Hinchinbrook
remains of the. S.S. COLDBROOK, which was wrecked in this    Entrance approach to Prince William Sound, is high, mountainous,
vicinity in 1942, are above the high waterline.                   and wooded to about 1,000 feet. There are no distinctive peaks,
                                                                   although Montague Peak, the most N one of the range, can be dis-
 (205) At the N and S ends of the island the current is irregularak, the most N one of the range
                                                                   tinguished from the S. A striking characteristic of the E part of the
and sets in a NE-SW direction. Tide rips are visible several miles
to the S of the island, and to the N in the vicinity of Fountain    N      half of the island  the regularity of the successon of spurs
                                                                   reaching from the mountain range to the coast, where the spurs
Rock. Mariners are advised to use extreme caution when navigat-in 
ing in shoal waters in the vicinity of Middleton Island because of
possible additional shoaling as a result of the bottom uplift caused  (216) A constant SW current is reported along the E coast of
                 possibly th~~~~~~~~~e erhaeoMrh94Montague Island. (See remarks on currents in chapter 3.)
                                                                     (217)  Two logging camps are on the N side of Montague Island.
 (206) Fountain Rock, 4 miles N of Middleton Island, breaks in
 l    ight seas. The rock, which uncovers 2 feet,   and th e danger area  Brown bears are numerous on the island, and they are said to be
light seas. The rock, which uncovers 2 feet, and the danger area,    ferocious.
centered around the rock is about 0.5 mile square. Safe passagend was subected to ex
                                                                     (218) Montague Island was subjected to extensive upheaval
can be made midway between Fountain Rock and the N tip of    durig the March 1964 earthquake Thrtyone feet was  ea
Middleton Island in 14 fathoms, but should be done so with cau-
                                                                   sured at Macleod Harbor, 11 feet at Port Chalmers, and 15
                                                                   feet at Patton Bay. Mariners should exercise extreme caution
 (207) Wessels Reef, bare at low water and 2 miles long, NNE-    when navigating in depths under 10 fathoms or areas of
SSW, is about 19 miles N of Middleton Island. Depths of 30 fath-    uneven bottom
oms or more are close to the reef, and with smooth seas it can
hardly be detected. A lighted whistle buoy is on the E side of the  (219) Chart 16701.S and E coast of Montague Island.
reef.                                                              (220)  Cape Cleare, the SW extremity of Montague Island, is
 (208) Seal Rocks are discussed later with Hinchinbrook    gently rounding and consists of eroded bluffs with rocky beaches.
Entrance.                                                         Back of the cliffs the cape is timbered and undulating with the
 (209) Routes.-Vessels bound for ports on Prince William Sound    ground gradually rising to the mountain masses nearby. A
from E use Hinchinbrook Entrance, between Montague and    detached rock with a double head 25 feet high is about 75 yards
Hinchinbrook Islands. Vessels approaching from SW use Elring-    off the SW extremity of the cape. A pinnacle rock (59ï¿½44.2'N.,
ton Passage, it being the best marked. Montague Strait, the widest    147051.2'W.) with a depth of less than 3 fathoms is S of the cape.
and deepest of the W entrances to Prince William Sound, Latou-    The cape should be given a berth of at least 2.5 miles. Strong tidal
che Passage, Prince of Wales Passage, and Bainbridge Passage are    currents sweep around the cape and tide rips are frequently
also available to vessels approaching from the SW.                encountered.
 (210) Tides and currents.-In Prince William Sound high and  ,  (221) Exposed anchorage can be had in the bight about 5 miles
low water occur about the same time as at Cordova. The diurnal    NE from Cape Cleare in 10 to 20 fathoms, sand and gravel bot-
range of tide is 12.4 feet at Cordova and 11.2 feet at Port Etches at    tom.
the entrance to the sound. (See the Tide Tables for daily predic-  (222) Neck Point, the first prominent point NE from Cape
tions for Cordova.) It is reported that the currents along the    Cleare, is a bold headland with eroded bluffs. A prominent pinna-
approach to Prince William Sound set SW invariably, and occa-    cle rock is about 100 yards off the point and deep water extends
sionally with a velocity of 2.5 knots; accordingly, extreme caution    close to shore. The point is separated from the higher peaks back




84                                              4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


of it by a neck of land somewhat lower than the outside point. The    Seal Rocks. About 3.5 miles S of Purple Bluff, a spit extends 0.5
headland and the 1,900-foot peak are separated from the main    mile offshore, terminating in a group of rocks awash.
ridge by a deep valley. When viewed from a position SW of Cape        (235) The W  and N coasts of Montague Island are described
Cleare the peak has the appearance of a detached conical island.    later.
  (223) Jeanie Cove, a bight 10 miles NE from Cape Cleare, is
exposed to the S and affords no protected anchorage. There are       (236) Chart 16709.-Hinchinbrook Entrance, the main
numerous reefs and rocky patches in this vicinity that should be    entrance to Prince William Sound, is about 6 miles wide, and clear
avoided.                                                            with the exception of Seal Rocks. The entrance (1.5 miles SW of
  (224) A rock awash is 0.8 mile off the W entrance point, and a    Cape Hinchinbrook Light) is 1,168 miles from Seattle via Strait of
reef, which uncovers, is 0.8 mile off Jeanie Point, the E entrance    Juan de Fuca and the outside route, and 1,306 miles via the inside
point. A depth of 7 fathoms is about 1.4 miles 212" from Jeanie    passages, Cross Sound, and Cape Spencer.
Point.                                                                (237) The S extremity of the Prince William Sound Traffic
  (225) Jeanie Point is bold with rock cliffs. Back of the cliffs the    Separation Scheme leads through the middle of Hinchinbrook
land is timbered and rolling. A prominent detached rock is a short    Entrance. Additional information on this scheme is given earlier in
distance off the point.                                             this chapter under Prince William Sound.
  (226)  Wooded Islands, on the SE side of Patton Bay, are 16         (238)  Seal Rocks, off the entrance, are 6 to 7 miles SW from
miles NE from Cape Cleare. The largest of the three is wooded    Cape Hinchinbrook and over 6 miles from Montague Island. They
and flat topped, with a prominent square-topped pinnacle rock    are two bare rocks, 30 and 37 feet high, surrounded by low rocks.
about 175 yards off its W end. Tanker Island, the middle islet    The westernmost bare rock is marked by Seal Rocks Light
about 0.4 mile E of the largest island, has a small clump of trees    (60ï¿½09.8'N.,  146050.3'W.), 48 feet above the water and shown
near one end that appear similar to the stack and wheelhouse of a    from a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-shaped day-
tanker. Fish Island, the easternmost island, is small with a few    mark. A radar beacon (Racon) is at the light. Rocks, submerged
trees on the W summit. The area between the islands is foul, and    and awash, extend 1 mile NE and 0.4 mile SW from them. The
the small passage SW of the largest island is shoal and foul. These    entire reef within the 10-fathom curve forms an obstruction nearly
islands should be given a berth of at least 2 miles, and without    2.9 miles long. A lighted whistle buoy marks the E end 6f this
local knowledge, the shoal rocky passage SW of the islands    obstruction.
should not be used by small boats.                                   (239)  Currents.-The tidal currents in the entrance set directly in
 (227) A survey of the coast from Wooded Islands to Cape Cleare    or out of the sound, except E of Seal Rocks where the currents
disclosed no outlying dangers, but there are areas of broken bot-    usually run E to W regardless of the tide. There is a strong set in
tom near the shore and vessels are advised to give the coast a berth    the direction of Seal Rocks when the wind is blowing from the E
of 3 miles.                                                         and the tide is ebbing. In Hinchinbrook Entrance, Montague Strait,
 (228)  Patton Bay, 17 miles NE of Cape Cleare, is about 4.5    and Latouche Passage, the velocity of the current is about I knot.
miles square with Box Point on the NE side and Wooded Islands    The ebb current running out against a large swell causes overfalls,
on the SE side. The deepwater entrance, about 3.5 miles wide, is    especially in the deep water 2 or 3 miles E of Zaikof Point, which
between the rocky foul ground extending E from Box Point and    have been mistaken for breakers. There are also tide rips on the
the irregular rocky ground extending ENE from the Wooded            broken ground around Cape Hinchinbrook. The flood entering W
Islands.                                                            of Montague Island sets NE past Montague Point and causes rips
 (229)  Inside the bay, foul areas make 0.3 mile S and 1.1 miles W  between it and Johnstone Point.
of the S tip of Box Point; I mile offshore from the head of the bay   (240) Outside the entrance along the SE coast of Hinchinbrook
due W of the bay entrance; and 0.7 mile N and 0.3 mile E from the    Island the current sets SW almost constantly. (See remarks on cur-
prominent pinnacle rock on the rocky point 2 miles NW of the    rent in chapter 3.) Current observations in Elrington Passage indi-
largest of the Wooded Islands. Nellie Martin River, on the S side    cate a velocity of 1.5 knots,
of the bay, is blocked by a bar across its mouth.                     (241) With a strong S gale and ebb tide, very heavy overfalls and
 (230) There is good anchorage, except during NE to S weather,    tide rips occur in Hinchinbrook Entrance, and are dangerous to
for small boats in the bights at the NE, W, and SW parts of the bay    small craft. Tremendous seas, steep and breaking, are sometimes
in 3 to 10 fathoms, sand bottom, and for larger vessels in 15 fath-    encountered just outside the entrance. During heavy weather, tide
oms or more, sand and mud bottom.                                   rips and confused seas are in the vicinity of Wessels Reef. Many
 (231)  In July 1983, a reconnaissance survey of Patton Bay by    halibut schooners have foundered between Cape St. Elias and
the NOAA Ship DAVIDSON confirmed that the March 1964    Montague Island.
earthquake caused a bottom uplift of at least 2 fathoms               (242)  Cape Hinchinbrook is on the E side of Hinchinbrook
throughout the bay. Shoaling and new dangers may exist    Entrance, the principal entrance to Prince William Sound from the
requiring extreme caution until a complete survey is made of    E.
the area.                                                             (243) A few rocky islets are close to the SE and SW sides of the
 (232)  Box Point, 20 miles NE of Cape Cleare, is about 130 feet    cape, and submerged reefs on which the sea breaks in a moderate
high and comparatively level, with steep bluffs, giving a rectangu-    swell, are 0.4 mile SE and S from the cape. The cape should be
lar appearance. Two box-shaped islets are on foul ground extend-    given a berth of at least 1 mile.
ing 1.7 miles E to 6-fathom depths.                                  (244)  Cape Hinchinbrook Light  (60014.3'N., 146ï¿½38.8'W.),
 (233)  Purple Bluff, 5 miles N of Box Point, has a purple hue    235 feet above the water, is shown from a white square tower on
especially in the afternoon. S of Purple Bluff, a conspicuous val-    the corner of a building on the SW point of the cape; a fog signal
ley, drained by a river, trends far inshore.                        and radiobeacon are at the light.
 (234)  From Purple Bluff to Zaikof Point, the outer coast of Mon-   (245)  Zaikof Point, on the W side of Hinchinbrook Entrance, is
tague Island is unbroken and free from outlying dangers except for    one of three prominent points on the NE end of Montague Island.





                                                4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                     85


Schooner Rock, marked by a light, is a pinnacle 75 feet high         (256) English Bay, on the S side of the entrance to Port Etches,
about 0.3 mile off Zaikof Point.                                    is a bight about 0.4 mile wide. It can be used as a temporary
 (246)  Between the three prominent points are Zaikof and Rocky    anchorage by small vessels, but is exposed to the ocean swell in
Bays. Low depressions run through from the heads of these bays    heavy weather and open to N and W winds. E gales blow in willi-
to the W side of Montague Island.                                   waws from all directions but do not raise much sea in the inner
 (247) Zaikof Bay is clear, but exposed to NE winds. In 1973, a    cove. The holding ground is good. A submerged rock is about 0.2
47-foot spot was reported in the entrance in 60ï¿½19.4'N.,    mile N of the SW entrance point, in about 60ï¿½17'30"N.,
146056.8'W., 1.3 miles NW of Zaikof Point. Dangerous rocks          146040'47"W.
awash are 2.6 miles WNW of Zaikof Point in about 60ï¿½ 19'02"N.,        (257)  The two bights on the SE shore of Port Etches, 1.2 and 3.5
147000'42"W. and 60ï¿½ 19'18"N., 147000'39"W. Anchorage can be    miles NE of English Bay, are rocky and should be avoided.
selected with the aid of the chart along the SE shore, from 2 miles  (258)  Porpoise Rocks, on the NW side of the entrance to Port
inside Schooner Rock to the head, also on a bar with 6 to 9 fath-    Etches, are three principal rocks about 48 feet high, with numer-
oms that extends across the bay 2.5 miles from the head. A swell    ous small rocks among and E of them. The westernmost and larg-
makes in during SE gales.                                           est is flat on top and grass covered, and has a rock covered at high
 (248)  A small vessel can anchor in the cove on the SE side 1.6    water 200 yards W from it. Deep water is close to the rocks except
miles from the head, with shelter from NE winds. Anchor close to    on their NE side where foul ground extends to Point Barber at
the S side of the point, about 0.1 miles from the short spit making    Nuchek, a distance of 1 mile, with no safe channel between. Kelp
out from it, in 8to 10 fathoms. There is no swell, but the willi-    surrounds Porpoise Rocks and extends 0.4 mile SW of Point Bar-
waws blow with great force over the lower land inside the point.    ber.
When the wind hauls SE or S the williwaws come from all direc-       (259)  Nuchek is an abandoned Indian village on the SE end of
tions, and it is well to shift anchorage farther from the spit. A   the shingle spit at the SW end of Constantine Harbor. A hunting
small shallow lagoon is at the head of the cove, and the bank is    lodge is conspicuous.
steep-to.                                                             (260) In good weather steamers have anchored off the shingle
 (249)  Foul ground marked by kelp extends 0.6 mile off Middle    spit NW of Nuchek. It is an uncomfortable anchorage because of
Point, which separates Zaikof and Rocky Bays.                       the swell. The best anchorage in about 10 fathoms, sandy bottom,
 (250)  Rocky Bay is deep, and exposed to N and E winds. A         is abreast the spit midway between the village and the rocky
small vessel can anchor in good weather about 0.6 mile from the    wooded knob in the middle of the spit, with thesoutheasternmost
head and 0.2 mile from the NW side, in 5 to 61/2 fathoms. Small    of the three largest Porpoise Rocks in line with the end of Hinchin-
craft can anchor in the lagoon, on the S side 1 mile from the head,    brook Island.
where a small area has a depth of 10 feet. When entering the         (261)  Constantine Harbor, the lagoon on the NW side of Port
lagoon care should be taken to avoid a reef, partly bare at low    Etches, has its entrance at Phipps Point. It is suitable only for
water, extending W  and NW  from the N point. A dangerous           small craft because of the very narrow entrance channel, that is 50
sunken wreck is in the entrance to the lagoon in about
6020'30"sunken wreck is in the entrance to14  the lagoon in about    to 100 yards wide with depths of 3 to 15 feet. The tidal currents
60020'30'"N.  147ï¿½06'15"W.                                          have considerable velocity in the entrance. The best time to enter
 (251) A reef that uncovers extends about 0.8 mile E from Mon-
                  )  Ae  whit ucovers ethenidef Rocy B0.    e E so  Mon  is at high water, preferably near slack. The harbor is mostly shal-
tague Point which forms the W  side of Rocky Bay. The S side of    low, but has an area 0.5 mile long and 0.4 mile wide with depths of
the bay has many dangerous off-lying rocks and reefs that extend    3 to 4'/4 fathoms, sticky bottom, but exposed to williwaws.
up to 0.6-mile offshore. Mariners are advised to exercise extreme    Numerous brown bears are reported to inhabit the area.
caution when navigating on this side of the bay.
                                             hesn n ting    thS  d of t    (262) On the NE side of the entrance are three small rocky
  (252)  Port Etches, an inlet in the SW end of Hinchinbrook
Island, has secure anchorage, the best in gHinchibrook Entrance,    awash, and 60 yards SSE from the W islet is a submerged rock, all
eand bis easy of access. The sutrongest galeis are  E and are not    marked by kelp at slack water. The channel is close to the W islet,
steady, but descend from the surrounding mountains in heavy wil-
                                                                    between the foul ground at the islets and a shoal of 9 to 10 feet
liwaws of varied direction, and at times blow hard in Port Etches    between  the    fround at the islets and a shoal of 9 to 10 feet
when comparatively light winds prevail outside. Water can be
obtained from streams in Garden Cove; and on the NW side of          (263) Temporary anchorage in 10 to 12 fathoms, sticky bottom,
Constantine Harbor.                                                 can be had about 0.5 mile SE of the rocky islets in the entrance of
  (253)  The best anchorage for large vessels is abreast Garden    Constantine Harbor; there is considerable swell in heavy weather.
Cove, in 11 to 14 fathoms, muddy bottom. A flat extends 1.5 miles    (264) The diurnal range of tide in Port Etches is 11.2 feet.
from the head, but can easily be avoided. The swell is quite per-    (265)  Bear Cape, steep and high, is the SW end of the NW
ceptible in heavy S weather.                                        mountain ridge of Hinchinbrook Island. Deer Cove, 3 miles N of
  (254) Garden Cove, on the SE side 2 to 2.5 miles from the head    Bear Cape, has anchorage a little S of the middle of the entrance in
of Port Etches, is the best anchorage for small vessels. Garden     3 to 6 fathoms, with shelter from E and SE winds. A light is on the
Island, wooded and with a break through it, is in the middle of the    point at the S side of the entrance to the cove.
entrance; there is no safe passage NE of it. Point Horn, the SW      (266)  Shelter Bay, 5.5 miles NNE of Bear Cape, has a shallow
point of the cove, is the most prominent of the projecting points on    entrance with strong currents and is foul inside. It should not be
the SE shore of Port Etches.                                        used even by small craft. A shoal with a rock that uncovers 3 feet
 .(255) Anchor with Point Horn in line with the southernmost of    extends 0.3 mile from the shore of the bight at the entrance to
the Porpoise Rocks, and about 250 yards SE of Garden Island in 4;   Shelter Bay. This bight should not be used without local knowl-
to 5 fathoms, sticky bottom. No ocean swell reaches the anchor-    edge.
age, but, as elsewhere in Port Etches, the williwaws are bad in E     (267)  A vessel has anchored in 10 fathoms, about 0.3 mile NW
gales.                                                              of The Seven Sisters, a group of rocks 2 miles N of Shelter Bay,





86                                            4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


and found the williwaws less strong with SE winds than at the    146ï¿½l5.1'W.), 27 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton
anchorage in the cove 3 miles N of Bear Cape.                     tower with a green square daymark on the point.
 (268) Temporary anchorage, with shelter from offshore winds,      (279) Gravina Island, low and wooded, is 1.5 miles NW of the
can be had S of the sharp point, with two rocks about 30 feet high    point and 0.6 mile offshore. Anchorage in about 10 fathoms, with
close-to, 0.4 mile S of Johnstone Point. The anchorage is about 0.5    shelter from NE winds, can be had aboui 0.5 mile offshore
mile off the sand beach, in 10 fathoms, sandy bottom.             between the island and Gravina Point.
 (269) Johnstone Point, the NW end of Hinchinbrook Island, is      (280) Sheep Bay has its entrance between Gravina and Sheep
low and wooded with a small bluff at the water's edge. Johnstone    Points, and extends N about 7 miles. The bay has not been closely
Point Light (60ï¿½29.0'N., 146ï¿½36.7'W.), 57 feet above the water, is   surveyed, the bottom is exceedingly broken, and vessels should
shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-    proceed with caution. Foul ground extends 0.2 to 0.4 mile from
shaped daymark on a pillar rock off the point,                    the E shore for 2 miles N of Sheep Point. Indifferent anchorage in
 (270) Twin 100-foot-high communication towers, about 12 feet    18 to 20 fathoms can be selected in the middle about 3 miles
apart, and several buildings are about I mile E of Johnstone Point.  above Sheep Point and 0.4 mile below the point where the bay
 (271) E of Johnstone Point the shore is low, and broken by two    narrows. Proceeding with care and preferably at low water, small
shallow bays or lagoons. TheE bay has secure anchorage for    vessels can follow the deep channel among the islands in the upper
small craft. The entrance, 4 miles E of Johnstone Point, is W of a    part of the bay and select anchorage in 6 to 15 fathoms.
large island, and leads between two rocks. The one on the W side   (281) Sheep Point is moderately low and wooded at the end and
is bare at half tide and is at the end of a sandspit making out from    backed by high land. A wooded islet is 0.3 mile W of the point
the shore; it should be given a berth of about 40 yards. The rock on    with bare rocks between; foul ground extends 0.3 mile S and W
the E side is bare at extreme low water. When inside the rocks,    from the islet.
head for the cove in the SW side of the bay and anchor in about 3  (282) Hanks Island, small and wooded, is 0.8 mile E of Sheep
fathoms, sticky bottom, about 250 to 300 yards from shore and    Point and 0.5 mile from shore. Gatherer Rock, 0.6 mile 124ï¿½
about halfway between the sandspit mentioned above and the S    from Hanks Island, is a pinnacle covered 13 feet with deep water
shore of the bay.                                                 close-to. Broken ground on which the least depth found was 8 feet,
 (272) Middle Ground Shoal, between Hinchinbrook and    extends 0.8 mile S from Hanks Island, and is marked at its S end
Hawkins Islands, extends for 3 miles into Orca Bay. A lighted bell    by a lighted bell buoy.
buoy marks the NW end. The shoal, which uncovers at low water,     (283) Simpson Bay is just E of Sheep Bay. Bomb Point is the E
consists of sand and mud, and is subject to shifting. A narrow    entrance point to Simpson Bay. The shores of the bay are fringed
unmarked channel with depths of about 2 feet leads from the NW    with numerous rocks and islets. In navigating the N arm, avoid the
corner of the shoal SE into Hawkins Island Cutoff. Anchorage can    rock awash at extreme low water 400 yards S of the E entrance
be selected off the shore, SW of Middle Ground Shoal, in 12 to 20    point of the inner part of the bay. Anchorage can be had at the
fathoms, soft bottom, with shelter from S and E winds.            head of the arm in about 15 fathoms.
 (273) Hawkins Island Cutoff, between Hinchinbrook and             (284) The E arm of Simpson Bay is clear except near the shores.
Hawkins Islands, leads from Prince William Sound into Orca Inlet    Good anchorage in 12 to 15 fathoms, can be had on either side of
and is navigable only for small craft with local knowledge. It is   the twin islands in the upper part of the arm. The Coast Guard uses
full of shoals, and in its E end are extensive flats which bare and    the E arm for wet-pool storage of buoys. Occasionally lanterns are
are largely covered at high water. Strong tidal currents are in its    attached to the buoys, but at no time are they lighted. Mariners
narrower parts.                                                   should not confuse these buoys with navigational aids.
 (274)  Orca Bay is the E arm of Prince William Sound, N of        (285) Hawkins Island, about 20 miles long and mountainous, is
Hinchinbrook and Hawkins Islands. From its entrance between    divided by Canoe Passage about 8 miles from its SW end; the
Johnstone Point on the S and Knowles Head of the N, Orca Bay    passage is no longer navigable. The NW shore W of Canoe Pas-
extends about 30 miles in a general E direction. The city of Cor-    sage is low tundra with patches of trees. NE of Canoe Passage the
dova is on Orca Inlet at the head of the bay. The S side of the bay    high land is nearer the NW shore of the island; there are bluffs in
is clear with the exception of Middle Ground Shoal. The N side is   places, and it is more densely wooded.
indented by large bays of no commercial importance.                (286) With the aid of the chart, anchorage can be selected in
 (275) Anchorage.-An anchorage with fair to good holding    places along the NW shore of Hawkins Island with shelter from E
ground is on the N side of Orca Bay and extends about 2.2 miles S    and S winds. The best anchorage in 9 to 12 fathoms, soft bottom,
of Knowles Head. (See 110.1 and 110.233, chapter 2, for limits    is 0.2 to 0.4 mile off the spit at the S end of Cedar Bay. A round,
and regulations.) Williwaws may cause vessels anchored in the E    wooded islet is at the N end of this spit, and a larger wooded one is
part of the anchorage to drag; caution is advised.                0.5 mile N. Small craft, entering at high water and passing N of
 (276) Knowles Head, the SW end of the mountainous peninsula    the awash and covered rocks inside, can anchor E of the spit,
between Port Gravina and Fidalgo Bay, is a steep massive head-    where there is a limited area with a depth of 7 feet.
land, with a prominent yellowish landslide down its S face. There  (287) Windy Bay is a small inlet on the NW coast of Hawkins
are numerous rocks close to shore and, a rock, covered 33/4 fath-    Island about 5 miles NE from Canoe Passage.
oms and marked by a lighted bell buoy about 0.5 mile SW of it, is
about 3 miles W of Knowles Head.                                   (288)  Chart 16710.-Channel Islands, wooded and nearly 1
 (277) Red Head, 4 miles ESE of Knowles Head, is a high hill    mile long,; are on the NW side of Orca Bay 6 miles above Sheep
with a long, low, wooded neck behind it. It is the W entrance point    Point. The channel at the islands, 0.5 mile wide, is called The
to Port Gravina and marked by a light.                            Narrows. A rock with 3 feet over it, 0.4 mile SW of the SW end
 (278)  Gravina Point, on the N side of Orca Bay, is low and    of Channel Islands, is marked by a lighted buoy. The lighted buoy
wooded, and at its S end is a bare spit with a large and a small    and a light opposite it on Hawkins Island mark the SW entrance to
clump of trees on it. Gravina Point Light 3 (60ï¿½37.4'N.,    The Narrows.





                                               4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                     87


 (289) Orca Inlet extends S from the head of Orca Bay to    the charted recommended track leading from about 60ï¿½28.0'N.,
Mummy Island. From North Island to Spike Island, about 4.5          147ï¿½52.5'W., through Orca Bay, thence via the buoyed channel
miles to the S, the W  side of the inlet is shoal, and S of Spike    through the E part of Orca Bay, thence via marked Orca Inlet to
Island the inlet is largely blocked by flats. N of North Island it has    Cordova.
depths of 25 to 30 fathoms, and a flat extends I mile from the head,  (304) From the W  via Elrington Passage. Pass I mile E of
at its N end.                                                       Point Helen Light, thence 1.5 miles W  and 1.5 miles N of Seal
 (290) Salmo Point, marked by a light, the N extremity of Hawk-    Island, thence E across the Prince William Sound Traffic Separa-
ins Island, is just E of Channel Islands. Deep Bay, 1.5 miles long    tion Scheme to the charted recommended track in about
and 0.5 mile wide, is between Salmo Point and Knot Point, the    60035'02"N., 146ï¿½42'10"W., through Orca Bay, thence the same
NE end of Hawkins Island. A large shoal covered 4 to 17 feet is    as from the S to Cordova. Caution: Mariners are advised to
across the entrance of the bay and extends 1 mile inside; however,    adhere to the general principles for navigation when entering,
there are depths of 19 to 33 feet farther inside. Anchorage is possi-    departing, or crossing a traffic separation scheme. (See Traffic
ble for vessels able to cross the shoal.                            Separation Schemes, chapter 1.)
 (291) Observation Island, 0.8 mile long, high and wooded, is        (305) Fishing vessels sometimes approach Cordova through
0.4 mile NE of Knot Point.                                          Western Channel and Odiak Channel, on the W  and S sides,
 (292) North Island, 0.4 mile long, low and wooded, is I mile    respectively, of Observation Island. Both channels are buoyed, but
NE of Salmo Point.                                                  local knowledge is helpful. Fishing boats also approach Cordova
 (293) Shepard Point is a sandspit 1.5 miles ENE of North    through Orca Inlet from the S. This route requires local knowledge
Island and 6 miles N of Cordova. Ruins of a cannery and wharf are    and was discussed earlier in this chapter.
on the point.                                                        (306) Tides and currents.-The diurnal range of tide at Cordova
 (294) The ruins of a cannery and wharf are on the SE shore of    and Orca is 12.4 feet. (See the Tide Tables for daily predictions.)
Nelson Bay, about 1.5 miles NE of Shepard Point.                     (307) The flood current enters the NE end of Orca Inlet and sets
 (295) Chugach Alaska Fisheries has a cannery at Orca, 2.5 miles    SW past Orca and Cordova. Off Orca the current velocity is about
NE of Cordova. The 200-foot-long wharf has depths of 12 to 22    1 knot, but a flood of nearly 2.5 knots has been observed. The cur-
feet alongside its face, 11 feet off the NE end, and 5 to 8 feet off    rent sets parallel with the face of Ocean Dock and Municipal Dock
the SW end. A submerged obstruction covered about 10 feet is    on the flood and ebb. In the channel between the Municipal Dock
about 50 feet N of the SW corner of the face of the wharf. Large    and Spike Island the swiftest water will be found along the E shore
vessels make port landings; the dock heading is 224ï¿½. Docking on    of Spike Island sometimes attaining 2 knots.
the flood is difficult as the current tends to set off the wharf.    (308)  Off Cordova the velocity is 1.8 knots on the flood and 1
 (296)  Cordova is on the E shore of Orca Inlet opposite Spike    knot on the ebb. (See the Tidal Current Tables for daily predic-
Island, which is wooded and marked by a light at its N end. Cor-    tions.)
dova is 1,221 miles from Seattle via the ocean route and 1,363       (309)  In the channel W of Big and Gravel Points, 6 miles SW of
miles via inside passages through British Columbia and Southeast    Cordova (see chart 16709), velocities up to 2 knots have been
Alaska to Cape Spencer. It is one of the most important towns in    observed setting along the channel. A NE current can be expected
southwestern Alaska and is the supply and distribution point for    at low water and a SW current at high water.
numerous outlying fishing localities.                                (310) Weather.-(See page T-2 for Cordova climatological
 (297)  Prominent features.-Mt. Eyak-, 2,498 feet, and Mt.         table.)
Eccles, 2,680 feet, dominate the approach, the town nesting at the   (311)  Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-
foot of Mt. Eyak.                                                   sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of
  (298) Channels.-The deepest channel, and the one used by    Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)
larger vessels, leads N of North Island and then follows the E       (312)  Vessels en route Cordova meet the pilot boat about 2 miles
shore S to Orca and Cordova. The buoyed channel has a control-    S of Sheep Point (60037.0'N., 146000.0'W.).
ling depth of about 20 feet on the W side, but deeper water in mid-  (313) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "CORDOVA
channel can be carried to Orca and Cordova.                         PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearranged fre-
  (299)  Anchorages.-Good anchorage can be had in the channel    quency between the pilot and agent/vessel.
NE of Spike Island in 45 to 55 feet, 0.1 mile NW of Spike Island     (314) Quarantine, customs, immigration, and agricultural
in 40 feet, and 0.5 mile NW of Spike Island in 26 to 30 feet, sand    quarantine.-(See chapter 3, Vessel Arrival Inspections, and
bottom.                                                             appendix for addresses.)
  (300) Dangers.-The March 1964 earthquake caused a bot-              (315) Quarantine is enforced in accordance with regulations of
tom uplift of 6.3 feet at Cordova. Shoaling and new dangers    the U.S. Public Health Service. (See Public Health Service, chap-
may exist requiring extreme caution until a complete survey is   ter 1.)
made of the area.                                                    (316)  Coast Guard.-A U.S. Coast Guard vessel is stationed at
  (301) Log booming areas are on the N side of Channel Islands    Cordova.
and 1.3 miles N of Spike Island.                                     (317) Harbor Regulations.-The harbormaster administers the
  (302) The area extending from North Island Rock, marked by a    municipal wharves and the small-boat harbor, and maintains an
light and 1.6 miles N of Observation Island, to over 2 miles S of    office at the N end of the small-boat basin.
the island has several visible rocks and. shoals with little water   (318) Wharves.-The waterfront facilities at Cordova consist of
over them. The E limit of the shoal area is buoyed.                 two piers for large vessels, a small-boat harbor, and a few piers for
  (303) Routes to Cordova (see-also chart 16709).-From the S    fishing boats.
via the Prince William Sound Traffic Separation Scheme (dis-         (319) Ocean Dock: L-shaped pier 0.8 mile Nof town; 408-foot
cussed earlier in this chapter under Prince William Sound). Depart    outer face with about 25 feet alongside; inner face, 325 feet long,
the scheme about 14 miles N of its southern entrance, thence via    16 feet alongside; deck height, 201/2 feet; 140-ton mobile crane,





88                                             4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


water, gasoline, and diesel fuel are available on the pier; Alask-  (333) The upper end of Port Gravina is deep, and terminates in
aState Ferry Terminal is at the SW end of the pier; receipt of petro-    mudflats which extend for 1.3 miles to the head of the bay.
leum products and general cargo; owned by the city of Cordova.      (334) Parshas Bay is a small bay on the N side of Port Gravina.
  (320) Morpac, Inc. Dock, just S of Ocean Dock, is a cannery    Depths of 40 to 30 fathoms extend nearly to the head of the bay,
with docking facilities for unloading fishing vessels; N pier, 14    but there is no suitable anchorage. An extensive area of rocks,
feet alongside; S pier, 8 feet alongside.                          islets, and foul ground extends about I mile SW from Parshas Bay.
  (321) Municipal Dock: T-shaped pier across from Spike Island;      (335) Olsen Bay, 1.5 miles W from Parshas Bay, shoals gradu-
280-foot outer face; 23 feet alongside; deck height, 20 feet; the    ally from 20 fathoms at the entrance to mudflats at the head. In
outer face is used by a U.S. Coast Guard vessel stationed at Cor-    entering, the W shore should be followed at a distance of 0.5 mile
dova; the inner face is privately rented moorage; water is avail-    or less to avoid the foul ground extending SW from the W
able; owned by the city of Cordova.                                entrance point of Parshas Bay.
  (322) St. Elias Ocean Products, Inc., and North Pacific Proces-    (336) St. Matthews Bay indents the N shore of Port Gravina 5.5
sors are just N of Municipal Dock. Both have unloading facilities    miles NE from Red Head. The only known dangers are a reef
for fishing boats with depths of 12 to 13 feet alongside.          extending 0.4 mile off the E point and a rock awash 0. I mile S of
  (323) Cordova Small-Boat Harbor, SE and inshore of Munici-    the prominent point on the W  side of the bay, I mile within the
pal Dock, is protected by two breakwaters, the S of which is    entrance. Good anchorage can be had near the head of the bay in
lighted. It has about 852 berths, and transient moorage is avail-    14 fathoms, mud bottom.
able; the harbormaster assigns berths. The harbormaster's office    (337) Between Red Head and St. Matthews Bay are a series of
monitors 2509 kHz, VHF-FM channels 16 and 19. In July 1983,    lagoons. Hells Hole is the northeasternmost one. This shore
the controlling depths were 16 feet in the entrance channel, thence    should be given a berth of 0.8 mile or more.
in June 1988, reported depths of 16 feet were available in the      (338) Port Fidalgo, an E arm of Prince William Sound, has its
basin, except for shoaling to 4 feet along the edges of the basin. In    entrance between Goose and BlighIslands and extends E about 22
July 1985, a pinnacle rock, covered 61/2 feet, was reported in about    miles. There are abandoned mines on the shores of Boulder and
the middle of the entrance to the basin about 75 yards E of the    Landlocked Bays and on the S shore of Port Fidalgo, between
breakwater light. Water, electricity, gasoline, and diesel fuel are    Irish Cove and Whalen Bay.
available in the basin. The basin is owned by the State and oper-   (339) The waters of the main arm of Port Fidalgo are deep and
aied by the city.                                                  free from outlying dangers. Vessels can navigate with safety as far
 (324) Supplies-.Gasoline, diesel fuel, and water are available at    as the SE arm at the head of the bay by keeping over 0.3 mile off-
Ocean Dock; gasoline, diesel fuel, and water are available at the    shore.
small-boat harbor. Most provisions can be obtained in town.         (340)  Goose Island, on the S side of the entrance to Port
 (325)  Repairs.-Several machine shops can handle minor engine    Fidalgo, is wooded and has two prominent knolls. Gull Island,
repairs. A marine grid, in the small-boat harbor, can handle craft    small and rocky, is midway between Goose Island and the shore.
up to 70 feet; a small boatyard is S of town.                      The passages between the islands and the shore should be avoided
 (326)  Communications.-Regular freight van ship feeder/vessel    by strangers.
and barge services to and from Seattle use the Municipal Dock.      (341)  Goose Island Light (60042.8'N., 146043.6'W.), 38 feet
Telephone and telegraph service is available, and scheduled air    above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and
service to Anchorage and Juneau is maintained. Ferry service to    white diamond-shaped daymark on the SW side of the island, and
Valdez and Whittier is maintained by the Alaska State Ferry Sys-    marks the entrance to Port Fidalgo.
tem.                                                                (342) Porcupine Point is a round, high, wooded bluff, with a
 (327) RCA Alascom maintains a public coastal radio station at    low depression between it and Knowles Head. A rock awash and
Cordova and on nearby Hinchinbrook Island.                         marked by kelp, is 350 yards N of the point.
                                                                     (343) Snug Corner Cove, on the NE side of Porcupine Point,
 (328) Charts 16708, 16707.-Port Gravina has its entrance    has good anchorage except with NW winds, but the bottom is
between Gravina Point and Red Head. A 31/4-fathom bank is near    irregular and should be avoided by large vessels. A rocky patch
the middle of Port Gravina, between Gravina Rocks and St. Mat-    with 41/4 fathoms, possibly less, is in the entrance 0.5 mile off the
thews Bay.                                                         NE side of Porcupine Point. A low divide is at the head of the cove
 (329) Gravina Rocks are about 0.8 mile offshore near the SE    and another is across Porcupine Point.
entrance point.                                                     (344) To enter Snug Corner Cove, avoid the rock off Porcupine
 (330)  Comfort Cove is a small inlet on the SE shore about 6    Point and follow the SW shore at a distance of about 0.3 mile.
miles from Gravina Rocks. The entrance is narrow and the cove is    Anchor about 0.3 mile off the bight in the SW shore in 10 to 11
suitable for small craft only.                                     fathoms, soft bottom. Small vessels can find better shelter from N
 (331) The March 1964 earthquake caused a bottom uplift of    winds in the basin at the head of the cove, in a depth of 5 fathoms.
4.6 feet in Comfort Cove. Shoaling and new dangers may exist    Favor the SW shore slightly when entering and anchoring. The
requiring extreme caution until a complete survey is made of    shore of the basin should be given a berth of over 0.2 mile.
the area.                                                           (345) Two Moon Bay indents the SE shore of Port Fidalgo. Low
 (332) Beartrap Bay is a narrow inlet near the head of Port    divides cut the peninsula from the heads of its two arms. Good
Gravina. There are rocks awash and areas of broken bottom in    anchorage can be had in the bay at the entrance to either arm, and
midchannel just within the entrance. About 1.2 miles from the    vessels of moderate size can anchor in the arms in about 10 to 15
entrance, an island nearly blocks the channel. The deep channel is    fathoms, bottom generally sticky. A midchannel course should be
on the N side of the island. Depths of 27 to 30 fathoms, mud bot-    followed in the arms. At the head of the SE arm is a basin trending
tom, will be found in the upper basin.                             SW where small vessels can anchor in 4 to 7 fathoms. The channel




                                               4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                   89


is between the W point and a reef bare at low water near the mid-   (358) Bligh Island, on the E shore of Prince William Sound, is
die of the entrance.                                               mountainous. The SW end of the island is a high, steep, wooded
 (346) Irish Cove, on the S shore of Port Fidalgo, is a narrow    head, with yellow landslides near the water. On the NW side are
inlet about 1 mile long. Small craft can find secure anchorage in    islands with foul ground between.
the widest part near its head in 5 fathoms. To enter, favor the E   (359) Good anchorage from N winds for large vessels can be
side of the narrows and then keep in midchannel.                   found about 1 mile S of Bligh Island. Radio reception from Valdez
 (347) In Whalen Bay, mudflats, bare at low water, extend across    is reported to be poor at this anchorage.
the bay 0.5 mile from the head. Small vessels can enter the bay on  (360) Reef Island, off the W  side of Bligh Island, is level and
a midchannel course, and find anchorage in 7 to 10 fathoms I mile    wooded, and has a single knoll in the middle. A rock awash is 0.3
inside the entrance to the bay.                                    mile 2080 from the SW end of the island.
 (348) A group of islands is near the head of Port Fidalgo. A sin-  (361)  Bligh Reef, about 2 miles long, has depths of '/4 fathom to
gle islet is about 900 yards SW of this group, the passage to the    9 fathoms and shoals to bare near the center. The reef is marked
bight to the N lying between the groups. This bight is not recom-    by Bligh Reef Light (60ï¿½50.3'N., 146ï¿½53. 'W.), 59 feet above the
mended as an anchorage. Its head is obstructed by mudflats, and it   water and shown from a pile structure with a red and white dia-
is reported that strong williwaws are encountered.                 mond-shaped daymark. A lighted bell buoy is about 0.7 mile W
 (349) The entrance to the E arm at the head of Port Fidalgo is 2    of the light. The steamship OLYMPIA was lost on Bligh Reef in
miles ESE of the group of islands. A dangerous rock awash is 460    1910.
yards off the NE entrance point. The head of the arm ends in a nar-  (362) Busby Island, off the NW end of Bligh Island, is high,
row passage that opens out into a circular lagoon. It is reported    and partly wooded. Its W point is long, level, and wooded, and is
that this passage is foul and should not be attempted.             surrounded by a reef to a distance of nearly 0.5 mile. The point is
 (350) A well-sheltered anchorage is in midchannel 0.6 mile W     marked by Busby Island Light (60053.7'N., 146049.0'W.), 48
from the above mentioned dangerous rock in 15 fathoms, mud   feet above the water and shown from a skeleton tower with a red
bottom. Small vessels can find anchorage near the head of the SE    and white diamond-shaped daymark.
arm in midchannel, 0.8 mile beyond the rock, in 7 fathoms.          (363) Tides and currents.-The diurnal range of tide is 12 feet
 (351) Fish Bay, on the N shore of Port Fidalgo 9 miles above    in Snug Corner Cove in Port Fidalgo. At the entrance to Port
Porcupine Point, is an indifferent anchorage and should be    Fidalgo, N of Goose Island, the velocity of the current is about 0.5
avoided by large vessels. The williwaws are very heavy with NE     knot.
winds drawing through the bay from the high mountains above its     (364) Tatitlek Narrows separates Busby and Bligh Islands from
head. A small wooded island is just inside the entrance and 0.2    the main shore, and offers a more direct route for small craft
mile from the W  side. The channel is E of the island and is    between Port Valdez or Ellamar and points on Port Fidalgo. The
obstructed near the middle by a rock covered 31/2 fathoms, possi-    channel, buoyed in the SE part, has depths of about 4 fathoms,
bly less. Rocks awash are 200 yards off the E point at the entrance.    except for a shoal with a least depth of 8 feet in midchannel in
Anchorage can be had in the middle of the bay, 0.3 to I mile above    about 60ï¿½51'58"N., 146042'13"W. The channel is narrow with foul
the island, in 8 to 13 fathoms, with soft bottom in places.        ground on both sides; local knowledge is advisable.
 (352) Landlocked Bay is on the N shore of Port Fidalgo             (365) Tatitlek, an Indian village on the N shore at the SE end of
between Bidarka Point and Graveyard Point. Secure anchorage    the narrows, has a Bureau of Indian Affairs school and a small
is afforded in the widest part above the narrows, in 14 to 15 fath-    store. A State-maintained pier with a 64:foot face is here. The
oms, sticky bottom. The bay is easily entered during daylight, but    Alaska State Ferry will stop for passengers on request. Skiffs are
the shadows cast by the hills at night obscure the narrow entrance,    used to embark and debark passengers in the vicinity of Tatitlek
rendering it difficult for vessels not equipped with searchlights.  Narrows Buoy 8 (60ï¿½53.5'N., 146043.4'W.).
 (353) The islands on the E side below the narrows have covering   (366) Virgin Bay is a shallow bight 0.5 to 0.8 mile long on the
rocks near them. Near the middle of the narrows is a rock with 12    NE shore of Tatitlek Narrows. There is little water in the bay, and
feet or less over it. The channel is NW of the rock, but the NW    on the N side of the entrance is a long reef bare at low water.
shore abreast of it should be given a berth of about 100 yards.     (367) Ellamar, an abandoned village on the NE side of Virgin
There is a flat at the head of the bay with an islet at its lower edge.    Bay, has a large wharf in ruins. Small craft find shelter S of the
Water can be obtained from a fall on the S side of the bay SE of an    ruins; the approach is marked by a lighted buoy.
old mine.                                                           (368) Anchorage can be had 0.3 to 0.4 mile from the NE shore
 (354) There are no commercial enterprises in this bay. The       of Tatitlek Narrows, and 0.5 to 0.8 mile NW of Ellamar, in 12 to
mines are abandoned and the wharves are in ruins.                  16 fathoms, sticky bottom.
 (355) Bidarka Point is a high wooded hill with a lower strip at    (369) Larger vessels can find anchorage between Busby Island
its S end. A shoal extends 0.3 mile SW from the point.             and Black Point, 1.4 miles NW of Ellamar, in about 30 fathoms,
 (356) Boulder Bay, between Bligh Island and Bidarka Point,    fair holding ground.
has several dangers, the depths are very irregular, and the anchor-  (370) Valdez Arm, the main N arm of Prince William Sound,
age is not desirable.                                              extends about 13 miles NE from Busby Island and Point Free-
 (357) In the approach to Boulder Bay, a reef bare at lowest tide    mantle to the N end of Valdez Narrows, then turns E for 11 miles
is 0.6 mile from Bligh Island. About 0.3 mile E of this reef is a    to the head of Port Valdez. The water is very deep and there are no
21/2-fathom spot and a depth of 61/, fathoms about 0.7 mile to the    known outlying dangers except for Middle Rock near the N end of
S. A submerged rock, nearly awash at low water, and a rock awash    the narrows, which is described later in this chapter, and two
close N, are 0.4 mile from a point on the E shore and 1.6 miles    shoals, 21/4 and 7 fathoms, about 0.2 mile apart, near the W edge of
NW from Bidarka Point. A reef, partly bare at low water, is 0.2 to    the arm about 3.5 miles NE of Point Freemantle. The S side of the
0.4 mile SE from the small wooded island in the middle near the    7-fathom shoal is marked by a lighted buoy. Anchorages are few
head of Boulder Bay.                                               because of the great depths.















                                                                                                                                    In















                                                                                                                                     0


                                                                        )~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~                                          8


                                                        ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
~~~~~~~~~~~~KU ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~ ~~ ~~ ~ ~~
































ip,
n
'A
LI)
o
m
z
r)

0
n
0
0
P





















 10




92                                             4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


 (371) The Prince William Sound Traffic Separation Scheme,    are marked by lights. Entrance Island, E of Middle Rock, is
which is a component of the Prince William Sound Vessel Traf-    marked by a light.
fic Service, leads through the middle of Valdez Arm. Additional     (380) Port Valdez is the designation given the body of water
information on the traffic separation scheme and the vessel traffic    extending from Valdez Narrows to the head of the bay.
service are given earlier in this chapter under Prince William       (381) Shoup Bay, at the face of Shoup Glacier, is closed by a
Sound.                                                             sandspit nearly dry at low water and over which the best depth is
 (372)  Sawmill Bay, on the W shore of Valdez Arm 9 miles from    about 7 feet. The bay occasionally has floating ice, some of which
Point Freemantle, has depths of about 6 fathoms in its 0.4-mile-    escapes into Port Valdez when the wind and tide are favorable.
wide entrance. Secure anchorage, with a clear width of over 0.2     (382) ï¿½166.103 Geographic Coordinates.
mile, can be had behind the W entrance point, in 9 fathoms, sticky  (383)  Geographic coordinates expressed in terms of latitude or
bottom. The S and W ends of the basin forming the anchorage are    longitude, or both, are not intended for plotting on maps or charts
shoal, and a flat fills the head of the bay down to the narrows at the    whose referenced horizontal datum is the North American Datum
N end of the basin.                                                of 1983 (NAD 83), unless such geographic coordinates are
 (373) Rocky Point is the W end of the peninsula between Tati-    expressly labeled NAD 83. Geographic coordinates without the
tlek Narrows and Galena Bay. A rocky grass-covered islet is 0.2    NAD 83 reference may be plotted on maps or charts referenced to
mile N of the point. Rocky Point Light 10 (60057.0'N.,             NAD 83 only after application of the appropriate corrections that
146ï¿½47. I'W.), 38 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton    are published on the particular map or chart being us.
tower with a red triangular daymark on the SW point of an island    (384) Jackson Point is a jutting point of land extending from
W of Rocky Point.                                                  the mainland on the S side of Port Valdez. This point of land was
 (374) Tides and currents.-The diurnal range of tide at Rocky    once an island.
Point is 12.1 feet. The currents in Valdez Arm are too weak or      (385) Valdez Marine Terminal is on the S side of Port Valdez
variable to be predicted.                                          between Jackson Point and Saw Island, 0.8 mile to the W. It is the
 (375)  Galena Bay is about 5 miles long in a general E direction.    terminus of the Trans-Alaska Pipeline which carries crude oil S
The depths are great throughout except for flats off the mouths of    from Prudhoe Bay on the Arctic Ocean. The terminal and adjacent
streams. Care should be observed in the vicinity of The Narrows,    waters are within a Safety Zone. (See 165.1 through 165.8,
about 3 miles from the entrance, as that area has not been thor-    165.20, 165.23, and 165.1701, chapter 2, for limits and regula-
oughly surveyed. The only anchorage is about 0.2 mile S of the    tions.)
islets on the N side at the head of the bay, in about 15 fathoms,   (386) Towage.-Three 5,750-hp tugs and two mooring launches
bottom soft in places.                                             are available for docking and undocking.
 (376)  A group of rocky, grass-covered islets extends 0.5 mile off  (387)  Wharves.-The terminal, operated by Alyeska Pipeline
the N point at the entrance of Galena Bay. Anchorage can be had    Service Co., has four deepwater berths for the shipment of crude
in the middle of the cove NE of the islets, in 10 to 12 fathoms,    oil. Berth No. 1 is a floating pier with four 12-inch loading arms
sticky bottom.                                                     with a maximum loading rate of 20,000 barrels per hour each.
 (377) Jack Bay, on the E shore S of Valdez Narrows, is 0.8 mile    Berth Nos. 3, 4, and 5 are T-head piers each having four 16-inch
wide at the entrance and 0.2 to 0.4 mile wide in the upper 3 miles.    loading arms with a maximum loading rate of 27,500 barrels per
An island with an islet off the NW end and several islets off the SE    hour each arm.
end are in the middle of the bay. Numerous rocks surround the       (388)  No bunker fuel or freshwater are available at the terminal.
island and the islets to the SE. Two coves indent the S shore, 0.7    The alongside depths for each facility are reported depths. For
mile and 1.8 miles inside the entrance. The entrance to the first    information on the latest depths contact the operator. For complete
cove is foul; the second cove has depths of 53/4 to 8 fathoms and is    information on terminal facilities, services, and regulations refer
a suitable anchorage for small vessels. Jack Bay has mudflats at    to the Trans-Alaska Pipeline Port Information Manual, Valdez,
the head and numerous boulders along the shore. Anchorage for    Alaska, published by the operator. For a complete description of
large vessels can be had 1.2 miles inside the entrance about 0.2    the port facilities for all of Port Valdez refer to Port Series No. 38,
mile from the N shore, in 12 to 15 fathoms. Other anchorages are    published and sold by the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. (See
also available in the entrance to the cove about 1.5 miles ESE of    appendix for address.)
Tongue Point, in 9 to 12 fathoms, and in the cove about 0.5 mile    (389)  Berth No. i: E end of Jackson Point; 1,200 feet with dol-
E of the island, in 9 to 14 fathoms. The diurnal range of tide is    phins; 150 feet alongside; deck height, 32 feet.
12.1 feet in Jack Bay.                                              (390) Berth No. 3: W side of Jackson Point; 1,050 feet with dol-
 (378)  Valdez Narrows is about 0.8 mile wide, with deep water    phins; 90 feet alongside; deck height, 38 feet.
and bold shores. Middle Rock, near the middle of the N end of the   (391) Berth No. 4: about 0.4 mile W of Jackson Point; 1,380 feet
narrows and marked by a light, is a pinnacle barely covered at    with dolphins; 90 feet alongside; deck height, 38 feet.
extreme high tides. A shoal, W of the light, extends E from the     (392) Berth No. 5: about 0.7 mile W of Jackson Point; 1,385 feet
mainland about 0.4 mile. The shoal consists of a rock covered 2    with dolphins; 85 feet alongside; deck height, 38 feet.
feet at the inner end, a 3'/2-fathom depth at the outer end, and a   (393)  A rock that uncovers 10 feet is about 175 yards SW of
wooded islet in between. The tidal currents in the narrows are too    Saw Island. A private buoy displaying the word "Rock" marks the
weak and variable to be predicted, however, it is reported that    E end of the rock SW of the island.
deep-draft tankers maneuvering at the regulated low speed of 6       t394) About 0.5 mile E of Jackson Point, submerged piling of an
knots will be affected appreciably by the currents. Speed adjust-    abandoned cannery wharf may exist. Ruins of the inactive Midas
ments may be necessary to lessen the effect of the currents on    mine wharf are 2.3 miles E of Jackson Point.
deep-draft vessels.                                                  (395) Valdez is on the N shore of Port Valdez about 2 miles
 (379) Entrance Point, 1 mile N of Jack Bay on the E side of    from its head. It is at the S end of Richardson Highway, which
Valdez Narrows, and Potato Point, on the W side of the narrows,    connects with Fairbanks 374 miles distant. Open all year, the high-





































                Lt4                           -
                                       20
                                               z

                    --       4                    H

 I                 'V4i 



                                               H
























tri
0


0
0




                                                4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                   95


way also serves Anchorage and Seward and links with the Alaska    water. The pilot boat displays the appropriate day and night sig-
Highway.                                                           nals when on duty.
 (396) The town of Valdez was formerly at the head of Port Val-    (410)  Quarantine, customs, immigration, and agricultural
dez, but was relocated to its present site due to the extensive dam-    quarantine.-(See chapter 3, Vessel Arrival Inspections, and
age it suffered from the March 1964 earthquake.                    Appendix for addresses.)
 (397) Valdez is 1,232 miles from Seattle via the outside route    (411)  Customs.-Valdez is a customs port of entry.
through the Strait of Juan de Fuca and 1,374 miles via the inside   (412) Quarantine.-A U.S. Public Health Service Contract Phy-
route to Cape Spencer.                                             sician is located at the hospital in Valdez. (See appendix for addi-
 (398) Prominent features.-The white petroleum tanks at Old    tional information.)
Valdez are most prominent, and the Coast Guard radar tower on       (413) Valdez is a customs port of entry.
the S side of Valdez is conspicuous.                                (414) Coast Guard.-A Coast Guard Marine Safety Office is in
 (399) Channels.-The approach to Valdez is deep and clear of    Valdez. (See appendix for address.)
dangers once through Valdez Narrows.                                (415) Wharves.-There are four deep-draft waterfront facilities
 (400) Anchorage.-There are no safe anchorages at Valdez due    at the new town of Valdez. For a complete description of the port
to the foul ground and high winds that prevail from the W during    facilities refer to Port Series No. 38, published and sold by the
the afternoons of the summer season. Convenient anchorages in    U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. (See appendix for address.)
the approaches to Valdez Arm and Port Valdez have been              (416) Valdez City Dock (61007'30"N., 146ï¿½22'30"W.): 600-foot
described.                                                         face with 25 feet alongside; deck height, 22 feet; receipt and ship-
 (401) Routes to Valdez (see also chart 16700).-From the S via    ment of fish; cranes to 25 tons; owned by the city and operated by
                                                                    Nautilus, Inc.
Prince William Sound Traffic Separation Scheme (described
earlier in this chapter under Prince William Sound). Depart the     (417) State of Alaska, Valdez Ferry Terminal: W side of City
scheme at its N end in Valdez Arm, thence through Valdez Nar-    Dock; 200 feet of berthing space; 20 feet alongside; deck height,
rows and Port Valdez to Valdez.                                f  22 feet; landing for passenger and vehicular ferry; owned by the
                                                                    city and operated by the State.
 (402) From the W  via Elrington Passage. Pass 1 mile E of
                                                                      (418) Valdez Dock Co., Petroleum Dock: 133 yards E of City
Point Helen Light, thence 1.5 miles W of Seal Island Light, thence
2 miles E of Smith Island, thence enter the Prince William Sound    Dock; 200-foot face, 300 feet of berthing space with dolphins; 24
                                                                    to 34 feet alongside; deck height, 22 feet; receipt and shipment of
Traffic Separation Scheme and depart the scheme at its N end in
                 Valdez Arm  thence through Valdez Narrows and Port Valdez to    petroleum products; bunkering vessels; pipelines extend from
Valdez. Caution: Mariners are advised to adhere to the general    wharf to storage tanks in rear, total capacity 180,500 barrels;
principles for navigation when entering, departing, or crossing a    owned and operated by Valdez Dock Co.
traffic separation scheme. (See Traffic Separation Schemes, chap-   (419) When approaching this pier care must be taken to avoid a
ter 1.)                                                            3-fathom shoal extending about 100 yards out from the W break-
                                                                    water of the small-boat harbor to E.
 (403) Tides and currents.-The diurnal range of tide at Valdez isSma ll-Bo at Harbor, the                 small-boat harbor to  the
                                                                      (420) Valdez Small-Boat Harbor, the small-boat harbor to the
12.0 feet. (See Tide Tables for daily predictions.) Additional infor-
                                                                    E of the fuel pier, is entered between two breakwaters. In June
mation on the predicted hourly heights of the tide can be obtained
from the publication "Supplemental Tidal Predictions - Anchor-    t thdepths  
age, Nikishka, Seldovia, and Valdez, Alaska," published by the                          12 feet in the  b  asin, except for severe Eshoal-
National Ocean Service. The tidal currents are too weak and vari-    nel edge, thence 10 to 12 feet in the
                                                                    ing in the SE corner at the head of the project. The far E end of the
                                                                    basin is locally maintained and had depths of 10 to 12 feet. A light
noticeable currents from the Robe River discharging into the SE
end of Port Valdez are created at times of low and high stand of
                                                                    modate about 520 boats, and transient berths are also available.
the tide. This current affects the area of the Old Valdez waterfront.    The harbormaster assigns berths he can be contacted on VHF-
The current sets 000ï¿½ with a maximum observed velocity of 2 to 3       hater
                                                                    FM channel 16. Water, electricity, fuel, boat-launching ramps, and
knots flowing perpendicular to the ruins of the piers at Old Valdez.  a 60-ton mobile vertical boat lift are available in the harbor. A tide
  (404) In 1979, it was reported that the surface currents in Port    grid is available for underwater repairs.
Valdez had a maximum velocity of 0.5 to  1.0 knot.                  (421) Port of Valdez, General Cargo and Container Wharf:
  (405) Pilotage.-Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is    1.5 miles E of the small-boat harbor; 704-foot face, 1,200 feet
compulsory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State    total berthing space with dolphins; 50 feet alongside; deck height,
of Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)                 14 feet; 21 acres of open storage; nine 522,000-bushel capacity
  (406)  Vessels en route Valdez or Whittier meet the pilot boat as    grain silos; two cranes are available; receipt and shipment of con-
follows:                                                           tainerized and general cargo; shipment of grain; owned and oper-
  (407)  (A) oil tanker traffic-about 3.6 miles SW of Bligh Reef    ated by the city of Valdez.
Lighted Buoy 6 (60ï¿½50.5'N., 146054.4'W.); or                        (422)  A mooring buoy is 0.5 mile W of the marginal wharf.
  (408) (B) nonoil-tank traffic-about 2.3 miles N of Busby Island    (423)  Supplies.-Gasoline, diesel fuel, and water are available at
Light (60053.7'N., 146ï¿½49.0'W.).                                   the fuel pier and in the small-boat basin. Some marine supplies
  (409) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "EMERALD        can be obtained in town.
ISLAND" on VHF-FM channels 10 and 16, or on 4125 kHz from           (424)  Repairs.-Minor repairs can be made to small craft.
1300 to 1400 daily. The pilot boat is a 65-foot trawler with a dark  (425) Communications.-Valdez is connected with the Alaska
blue hull, and a white deckhouse with the word "Pilot" shown on    Highway system. Scheduled air service to Anchorage is main-
both sides of the house. Vessels picking up a pilot should maintain    tained, and charter service is available ..The Alaska State Ferry
a speed of about 6 knots and have the pilot ladder 8 feet above the    maintains service to Cordova year-round and to the Alaska Rail-




96                                             4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


road at Whittier during the summer. Telephone and telegraph ser-     (435) Jackson Hole, about 1 mile W of Eagle Bay, appears to be
vice are available.                                                 clear of offshore dangers and has depths ranging from 20 feet in its
  (426) Glacier Island is on the N side of Prince William Sound,    narrow entrance to 90 feet inside at midchannel.
W of the entrance.to Valdez Arm. It is mountainous and indented      (436) Campbell Bay and Irish Cove, on the NW side of Glacier
by a number of bays.                                                Island, have not been surveyed. The bottom is irregular in the
 (427)  Glacier Island Light (60052.4'N., 147ï¿½05.4'W.), 38 feet    channel between them and the mainland with depths of 30 feet or
above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and    less 0.3 mile off the W  end of Campbell Bay. Dangerous
white diamond-shaped daymark on the E side of the island.           uncharted rocks may also exist. A midchannel course is recom-
 (428) Chamberlain Bay, on the S side of Glacier Island, is    mended for traversing the W  part of the passage N of Glacier
exposed to the S but affords anchorage for small vessels about 0.4    Island.
mile from the head in about 15 fathoms, muddy bottom. Rocks,         (437) Iceberg Point forms the W extremity of Glacier Island. A
which partly bare at low water, extend 0.2 mile from the W side of    dangerous rock is reported about 0.5 to 1 mile SE of the point with
the bay about 0.6 mile from the head.                               its exact position unknown. Mariners are advised to use caution
  (429) Jackson Cove, on the W  side of Chamberlain Bay, is a    when navigating in the area.
secure harbor for small craft. The entrance has a least width of     (438) Between Point Freemantle and Columbia Bay the coast
about 50 yards and a depth of about 12 feet; at the narrowest part    is encumbered by dangerous rocks extending at least 0.2 mile off-
of the entrance, favor the N side. The upper half of the cove has    shore. A shoal with a least known depth of 27 feet is reported 0.5
rocks on both sides, and a careful midchannel course should be    mile S of Elf Point.
followed. Anchorage can be selected in the lower part of the cove    (439)  Columbia Bay, situated W  of Heather Island, is deep
in 10 to 15 fathoms, also about 350 yards from the head in about 5    except near the shores. Between Heather Island and a small
fathoms. A divide about 75 feet high extends through to Jackson    island to its S is a narrow, rocky passage, called Lutris Pass,
Hole. The diurnal range of tide is 11.9 feet in Jackson Cove.       which has a maximum depth of 10 feet; due to numerous reefs S
 (430) The passage N of Glacier Island in its E part is very deep    and W, this latter island should be given a berth of at least 0.5
except near the shore. The N side of Glacier Island is indented by    mile. Rocks extend 0.2 mile offshore along the NW shore of
Finski Bay, Growler Bay, Eagle Bay, and Jackson Hole. On the N      Heather Island.
side of the passage, Columbia Bay, Long Bay, and several other       (440)  Columbia Glacier closes the head of Columbia Bay with
smaller inlets form an irregular coast. None of the waters have    a magnificant ice cliff 2.5 miles long and as much as 300 feet high,
been completely surveyed.                                           from which icebergs are constantly being discharged. Mariners are
 (431) Finski Bay, situated on the NE side of Glacier Island, has    warned to keep at least 0.5 mile away from the cliff, as blocks of
depths of 30 fathoms in the exposed N part. The inner cove is    ice may be thrown great distances when falling seracs strike the
encumbered with rocks exposed at low tide and is unsuitable for    water. A moraine shoal completely crosses the bay in front of the
anchorage.                                                          glacier. Both E and W ends of this moraine dry at low water; else-
 (432)  Growler Bay provides good anchorage near its head for    where the depths vary from about 2 to 12 fathoms.
small craft. Several rocks bare at low tide, situated along the S    (441) Glacier Ice: At any time of the year, but especially in
shore near the head of the bay, are the only known offshore dan-    summer and fall months, icebergs and brash ice discharged from
gers once well inside the entrance. The E side of the channel    the Columbia Glacier may completely fill Columbia Bay and
should be favored when approaching the bay with depths as little    block the passage and coves north of Glacier Island. Particularly
as 9 feet reported off the entrance in midchannel, and shoals    dangerous to vessels are low-lying icebergs (growlers) which
extend all along the E side of the island between Growler Bay and    scarcely show above the water surface. Ice conditions change rap-
Elder Point.                                                        idly and mariners are cautioned to be vigilant at all times. At night
 (433)  The unnamed bay E of Elder Point provides two small-    and under conditions of low visibility, navigation of these and
craft anchorages. As both entrance points are foul, a midchannel    adjacent waters should not be attempted. Glacier ice provides
course should be maintained while entering and while passing on    extremely pure water and small bergs taken aboard provide excel-
either side of a wooded island near the W shore. Anchorage can be    lent drinking water.
had in about 50 feet SE of the island and in 40 feet S of the island.  (442)  Heather Bay, situated E of Heather Island, shoals gradu-
The narrow passage which connects with Growler Bay, with a    ally NE from 50 fathoms to moraine reefs near its head and pro-
least depth of about 3 feet, is suitable only for small boats.      vides good protection from wind and heavy glacier ice for
 (434)  Eagle Bay provides secure anchorage at its head, but    moderate-sized vessels. The best anchorage is situated in about 30
unsurveyed shoals are situated in midchannel on the W side of the    fathoms in midchannel, where the bay trends N. The E side of the
bay SE of an unnamed island about 1 mile W  of Elder Point.    bay is encumbered by dangerous rocks and shoals. A moraine reef,
Rocks awash at low tide extend about 0.3 mile NE of the NE side    with a maximum depth of 5 fathoms about 0.3 mile off the NE
of the unnamed island. Dangerous offshore rocks, nearly awash at    point of Heather Island, and with rocks awash at low tide further
low tide are situated about 0.5 mile W of this island and the pas-    NE, encloses the head of the bay. Although Columbia Glacier
sage on the S side has not been surveyed. Eagle Bay can be    extends nearly a mile across the head of Heather Bay, due to shoal
entered by maintaining a course about 200 yards off the W shore S    water, only small icebergs are discharged.
from Elder Point until the lowland opens between Eagle Bay and        (443)  Emerald Cove, situated on the SE side of Heather Bay 1
the next bay E, then steering directly SW for the head of the bay,    mile NE of Elf Point, provides the most secure small-craft anchor-
where anchorage in 4 to 6 fathoms is available. Eagle Lagoon        age in the area. Depths of 85 feet, muddy bottom, are found in
connects with Eagle Bay by a very narrow passage which is    midchannel, and a small bight on its N side has midchannel depths
encumbered on its S side by rocks exposed at low tide. Small craft    of 33 feet; sunken rocks are located on both the E and W entrance
entering at high water slack can find anchorage in depths up to 70    points to the bight. Fresh water can be obtained from a small cas-
feet inside the lagoon.                                             cade at the E side of the bay; a drying flat extends 0. I mile off the





















A              

















                                                                    m
                                                                    cd

                                                                    z

                                                                    z
                                                                    0
                                                                    0
                                                                    0



 98                                             4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


 stream mouth. Another anchorage for small craft called Jade Har-    N-S, and about 6 miles wide. They are high and wooded to the
 bor is situated S of an island about 2 miles NE of Emerald Cove.    summits.
 A midchannel course should be followed when entering due to         (453)  The bottom in the vicinity of the islands, including the
 rocks along both shores; once inside, good anchorage is available    passages among them, is rocky and very broken. As a measure of
 in 4 to 5 fathoms. A shoal extends about 0.2 mile off a small river    safety it is advisable for vessels, especially large ones, to avoid
 of good water which enters the head of the cove.                   areas with depths less than about 20 fathoms in the vicinity of the
   (444) The NE corner of Heather Bay is shoal, and even small    islands and to avoid the passages between them.
 launches should not proceed N of a group of small islands and       (454) It is safer for vessels to keep in the deeper part of the pas-
 rocks situated on the E shore. Fishermen occasionally anchor in    sage between Naked Island and Smith Island, preferably between
 good weather in the passages on either side of the largest of the    the 50-fathom curves.
 islands while visiting nearby lakes.                                (455) The best anchorages are in the S part of the large bay on
   (445) Granite Cove, situated on the W side of Columbia Bay,    the N side of Naked Island in 20 to 30 fathoms for large ships, and
 has maximum depths of about I fathom, rocky bottom, in mid-    in the E bight of this bay in 10 to 20 fathoms for vessels up to 500
 channel in the passage N of the entrance island. Once inside, the    tons. The bottom is rock and mud.
 cove has depths up to 5 fathoms. Due to the shallow entrance and    (456) Small craft can anchor in the small bight on the N side of
 frequency of glacier ice, this cove is little used as an anchorage.  Naked Island and in the small bight on the SW side of Peak Island.
  (446) The coast between Granite Cove and Flent Point is    They may also anchor in the bay on the N side of the E part of Sto-
 shoal. A reef with a least depth of about 10 feet is located 0.2 mile    rey Island with protection from all winds except N. Anchorage in
 E of Flent Point and the beach S of the point is also foul. Vessels    6 to 10 fathoms on the E side of Naked Island affords protection
 are advised to maintain a distance of at least 0.3 mile off these    only from the N and W.
 shores.                                                             (457) Bass Harbor, on the S side of Naked Island, offers secure
  (447) Long Bay, 3.5 miles W of Columbia Bay, extends in a N      anchorage in 20 fathoms, mud bottom, about 0.4 mile W of the
 direction for about 6 miles and at its head divides into two arms,    entrance to a small unnamed cove on its E side. The anchorage is
 each about 2 miles long. There are numerous islands and rocks    open to S winds, and a slight swell makes in during heavy S
 that bare at various stages of tide. The bay is unsurveyed, but the    weather.
 bottom is known to be very broken. There are no apparent secure     (458)  Cabin Bay, on the W  side of Naked Island, offers some
 anchorages.                                                        protection from E winds for vessels up to 500 tons, but the bottom
  (448)  Useless Cove, which indents the E shore of Long Bay, is   is broken and not ideal holding ground.
 reported to be foul. One mile NW of Useless Cove are numerous       (459) Fairmount Island, 7.5 miles N of Storey Island, is high.
 dangerous rocks which extend as much as 0.4 mile offshore. Other    Buildings of a former fox farm are on the gravel beach on the SW
rocks encumber the E and W shores of Long Bay, and a midchan-    side but they are not prominent. The channel between the island
nel course is recommended. S, W, and N of Schrader Island, situ-    and the mainland is about 0.6 mile wide at its narrowest part, but
ated near the center of Long Bay, foul ground is located between a    has numerous rocks that bare at various stages of the tide; passage
small wooded island and the mainland. The NE extremity of Long should not be attempted without local knowledge. Foul ground
Bay appears to be deep in midchannel until about 1 mile of thees rom SE through SSW o the S shore o the
head, where the bottom rises abruptly to a shoal with depths of    island.
less than 3 feet.                                                   (460) Wells Bay (60ï¿½53.5'N., 147ï¿½28.5'W.) is a large bay just E
                                                                     of Unakwik Inlet and separated from it by a narrow peninsula. The
  449  Moderathoms mud bottom in Buyers Cove  just W of Slipper Poin 8 to 12    bay extends N about 8 miles to a forked head, and is about 2 miles
situated off the W entrance point to Long Bay. Surveys in 1994    wide at the mouth and narrows to 0.6 mile about 4 miles N of the
situated off the W entrance point to Long Bay. Surveys in 1994                      .  . .
                 found shoals from about 1  to 4 fathoms in Buyers Cove. The    entrance. The E side is indented by two bays. Granite Bay, 1.3
found shoals from about 1 /4 to 4 fathoms in Buyers Cove. The    miles from the mouth, extends ENE about 2.3 miles and is about
I l/4-fathom depth is in about 6055'04.1!N., 147ï¿½ 16'21 5"W.    miles from the mouth, extends ENE about 2.3 miles and is about
               '/-fathom depth is in about 6055'04.l"N., 14716'21.5"W.    0.3 mile wide at the entrance. A constricted passage about 100
Commercial fishermen use the cove as a transfer point. Just W of    yards  wide sat  I mile from its head. Surveys in 1994 idi-
this cove is Eickelberg Bay, about 2 miles long, with depths of 10    cated numerous rocks  and shoals. Caution is ad . Srveys n 1994 ndi
feet, possibly less, near the middle of the entrance.
                                                                     are usually bold. Cedar Bay, 2.5 miles from the mouth of Wells
                                                                     Bay, extends NE about 3.5 miles and averages 0.5 mile in width;
  (450)  Charts 16705, 16700, 16709.-The NW part of Prince    an island near its head almost closes the upper part of the bay.
William Sound has long inlets and fiords, most of which are very    (461) A group of islands and bare rocks between Granite and
deep. The shores are generally bold; wooded, and rise abruptly to    Cedar Bays extends W past the center of Wells Bay. A prominent
lofty peaks, especially near the heads of the fiords. Spectacular    point juts out about 0.5 mile on the E side of this bay 1.3 miles N
valley glaciers descend into the heads of the fiords and discharge    of the entrance; an island is on the SE side of the point. Temporary
large quantities of icebergs which may completely block the upper    anchorage for moderate-sized vessels may be had about 0.2 mile
channels, especially in the spring months.                         N of the point and 0.2 mile E of the W shore in 17 to 20 fathoms,
 (451) The bottom of the entire area is a bluish-gray glacial silt of    mud bottom. The bay is unsurveyed, but it is known that the
very fine texture, and often quite sticky even though the deposit is   entrance is deep. A 2-fathom shoal was discovered in 1993 in
only a few inches thick over the rock. In selecting an anchorage,    about 60ï¿½55'51.5"N., 147029'31.2"W.
care should be exercised to determine the true character of the bot-  (462) Unakwik Inlet, unsurveyed, has its entrance 6 miles W of
tom, for it is often difficult to get an anchor to hold on the underly-    the W point of Glacier Island, 2 miles W of Wells Bay. The inlet
ing rock, even though the sounding lead shows a sticky bottom.     extends N about 18 miles and averages 1.5 miles in width, narrow-
 (452) Naked Island, Peak Island, and Storey Island, near the    ing to 0.5 mile at its N end at Meares Glacier, which discharges
center of Prince William Sound, form a group about 8 miles long,    large quantities of small icebergs. Numerous rocks and islets are




                                                4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                   99


situated off the E and W  shores; in midchannel, excepting the    1.5 miles. One large and several small coves are on the E side. The
shoal off Jonah Point described below, the inlet's depth gradually    shores are extremely ragged and there are many wooded islets,
diminishes from over 1,000 feet at its S end to 500 feet near the    bare rocks, and rocks awash. The large cove on the E side has
glacier.                                                           numerous good anchorages for small craft. The bay is unsurveyed,
 (463) Olsen Island is situated on the W  side of the entrance to    and caution should be used because of the irregularity of the bot-
Unakwik Inlet; a rock awash at low water is reported about 1,200    tom. In entering, the best water appears to be about 0.2 mile W of
yards E of the island and a group of rocks are situated 0.4 mile off    the small prominent wooded islet 0.5 mile SW of Point Pellew.
its NW side; the passage between the island and these rocks is      (471) Axel Lind Island, 2.5 miles SSW of the entrance to
foul. Many rocks encumber the passage between Olsen and a    Eaglek Bay, is high. The buildings of a fox farm are prominent on
small island SW; rocks and shoals extend a mile or more S of this    a stretch of gravel beach on the N side. Passage to the N is deep,
latter island. The passage between Olsen Island and the mainland    but there are several off-lying dangers. Fishing craft use this pas-
is used by small vessels. A course slightly W of midchannel is rec-    sage and the one N of Bald Head Chris Island when bound for Port
ommended, due to numerous rocks on both sides.                     Wells via Esther Passage. Surveys in 1994 indicate shoaling to 21/4
 (464) Olsen Cove provides anchorage for small craft in 40 to 60    fathoms about 0.3 mile off the SW shore.
feet of water near the center of the basin. Sunken rocks extend 300  (472) Squaw Bay, 1 mile E of Esther Passage and 1.5 miles N of
feet from the N shore just outside of the entrance narrows, which    Bald Head Chris Island, extends NNE 2 miles and averages 0.5
has a least depth of 14 feet. Once inside the narrows, a course    mile in width. Its E side is irregular, with numerous islands and
slightly S of midchannel should be maintained to avoid rocks situ-    rocks baring at various stages of the tide. The W side has no visi-
ated about 400 feet offshore midway between the two N points. A    ble dangers and is unbroken except for a small cove about midway
sunken rock is also located about 300 feet W  of the S entrance    in. The cove affords excellent anchorage for small craft in 8 to 10
point. The main basin appears to be clear of danger with the    fathoms, sticky mud bottom. Water may be obtained from a water-
exception of shoals and a drying rock which block the NW           fall at the head of the cove. The bay is unsurveyed, but the best
extremity of the cove.                                             water appears to be near the W shore.
 (465) An unnamed cove, 1 mile N of Olsen Cove, affords good        (473) Lone Island, about 3 miles E of Perry Island and 5.5 miles
anchorage for small craft near its S shore just W of the two small    S of Axel Lind Island is wooded, comparatively level, and high.
wooded islets marking the S entrance point. Depths shoal gradu-    Foul ground extends nearly 0.5 mile N. A 31/2-fathom shoal 1.4
ally from 25 to 8 fathoms, sand and gravel bottom. This anchorage    miles S of the island is marked by a lighted bell buoy. A bank with
is exposed to the NE.                                              a least depth of 3/V2 fathoms is between the shoal and the island.
 (466)  Siwash Bay, on the W side of Unakwik Inlet 6 miles N of     (474) Dutch Group consists of several wooded islands and bare
Olsen Island, affords excellent anchorage in 10 to 15 fathoms,    rocks 4.3 miles NNW of Lone Island, the largest having elevations
mud bottom, about 0.2 mile W of the entrance island. This bay is    up to 150 feet. Foul ground extends 1.3 miles S of the group to
about 2 miles long, 0.5 mile wide, and has a wooded island near    two prominent rocks about 5 to 10 feet high. An abandoned white
the S shore at the entrance. The deep channel is to the N of the    building with a yellow roof is on the large N island of the Dutch
island. Entering on a midchannel course the depths shoal rapidly    Group and is prominent from offshore.
to 10 fathoms just N of the island, continuing at that depth until  (475) Fool Island, 3 miles W  of the Dutch Group, is wooded
well inside. Sheltered from all directions, the anchorage appears    and about 50 feet high. A rock that uncovers is 0.3 mile S of Fool
suitable for large vessels.                                        Island.
 (467) Jonah Bay, on the W  side 9 miles N of Olsen Island, is      (476)  Egg Rocks are prominent bare rocks 1.5 miles WNW of
crescent shaped and about 2.5 miles long. A glacial stream dis-    Fool Island.
charges at its head. The entrance is narrow and nearly blocked by   (477)  Perry Island, in the NW corner of Prince William Sound,
a small island. The best water appears to be S of the island, but the    is wooded to a height of about 1,000 feet. It is prominently marked
depths are unknown.                                                on its NE side by a round peak, the summit of which is small, bare,
 (468)  A dangerous moraine bar completely crosses Unakwik    and dome shaped. The bays indenting the island are anchorages
Inlet just N of Jonah Bay. The shoal extends from Jonah Point to    for small craft only, because of the foul, rocky, and broken bottom.
the E shore of the inlet. A low, grassy islet, difficult to observe in  (478) Perry Island Light (60039.3'N., 147055.8'W.), 35 feet
thick weather, is situated approximately one-third of the channel    above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and
width from the E shore to which it is connected by drying rocks.  - white diamond-shaped daymark on the southernmost point of the
Three crossings of the shoal in 1977 found a least depth of 22 feet    island. A rock, 14 feet high, is about 150 yards S of the light. A
about 0.4 mile W of the islet and depths of 11 and 10 feet approxi-    rock awash is 0.4 mile NW of the light.
mately 0. I mile E and W of this line. Shallow water extends about  (479) Foul ground extends 0.5 mile E from the E end of Perry
0.2 mile E from Jonah Point and well offshore W to the mouth of    Island, and nearly I mile SE and S from the SE point of the island.
Jonah Bay. The ruins of an abandoned cannery and wharf are on       (480)  On the E side of Perry Island Light is a bay that is known
the E shore just S of the bar. A mooring buoy is near the ruins. A  locally as South Bay. Good anchorage is available for moderate-
rock, depth unknown, lies at the entrance to the cove S of the can-    size vessels in 10 to 24 fathoms, sand and mud bottom, in the cove
nery ruins.                                                        at the head of the bay. The only known off-lying danger in the
 (469) On the E side of the inlet, II miles N of Olsen Island is a    cove is a rock awash about 50 yards off the point on the E side of
series of small coves known collectively as The Cow Pens.   A      the entrance. The buildings at the head of the cove are prominent
small ragged island lies about 0.5 mile offshore.                  from the S; the cove is a port of call for the biweekly mail boat
 (470) Eaglek Bay, midway between Unakwik Inlet and Esther    from Cordova. South Bay should be entered with caution because
Passage, is a large irregularly shaped bay extending N about 7    of the irregularity of the bottom in the outer part.
miles. The S half is about 2.5 miles wide and the N half about 1    (481) East Twin Bay, indenting the N side of Perry Island, has
mile wide. Two coves are on the W side, each extends W for about    anchorage for small craft on the SW side of the head in about 11




 100                                           4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


 fathoms; small area of soft bottom. A midchannel course should    the W entrance to Port Wells. It is reported that the best way to
 be followed until up with a prominent rock about 20 feet high, that    avoid the reported submerged rock is to hold well into the N half
 is near the middle 0.7 mile from the head. Pass NE of the rock and    of the channel when swinging on the turn. Fishing craft use the
 follow the NE shore at a distance of about 150 yards. A rock with    passage regularly.
 1 fathom over it is 450 yards 135ï¿½ from the prominent rock and     (489) Esther Rock, I mile W of Point Esther, is 22 feet high
 275 yards from the NE shore.                                      and sparsely covered with grass.
  (482) West Twin Bay, on the NW side of Perry Island, affords      (490) A reef, bare at lowest tide, is reported to extend about 1
 no anchorage because of the rocky, broken bottom. Small craft    mile off the S point of Granite Bay, on the W  side of Esther
 entering should favor the NE side to the narrow part 1.3 miles    Island.
 from the head, and then favor the SW side, passing W of a rock,    (491) Culross Island is mountainous and wooded to a height of
 about 25 feet high, near the middle of the bay 0.6 mile from the    about 1,000 feet. Culross Island Light  (60'44.8'N.,
 head.                                                             148006.8'W.), 40 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton
  (483) From the point on the W side of entrance to West Twin    tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the NE
 Bay, a chain of islets and foul ground extends N for over 1 mile.  oint ofthe island.
  (484)  Perry Passage is between Perry Island and Culross    p
                                                                      (492) Culross Bay, on the N side of Culross Island, has good
 Island, 2.5 miles to the W. Wells Passage, between Perry and Cul-    anchorage in 30 fathoms with limited swinging room about 0.9
 ross Islands on the S and Esther Island on the N, is over 2 miles    mile inside the entrance just S of a prominent point on its NW
 wide. The two passages have depths of 100 to 250 fathoms.         side. The bay is open to NE winds, but no swell makes in, and it is
  (485) Esther Island is mountainous, wooded to a height of    not subject to williwaws.
 about 1,000 feet, and the summits are bare rocks. The peak on the
                  SE point of Esther Island, and the sharp twin peaks on the SW  (493) Culross Passage, between Culross Island and the main-
SE point     of Esther Island, ande prominent. Point Esther  Light (6047.1'N.  land to the W, is used occasionally by fishing craft and cannery
,point, are prominent. Point Esther Light (60047.1'N.,    tenders. It is narrow and congested and should be used only with
 148ï¿½06.0'W.), 31 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton    teders. It  narrow and congested and should be used only with
tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the SW       McARTHUR reported finding excellent anchorage in midchannel
side of the island. Three bays are between the light and Esther Pas-    McARTHUR reported fidi  excellentanchorage ms, mud bottom.
sage. Esther Bay, the easternmost, is unsurveyed. It is 3.5 miles E    about I makes in, and the   area offers protection froms, mud bottom.
of the light on Point Esther and extends N about 2 miles. The    No swell makes in, and the area offers protection from all but N
of the light on Point Esther and extends N about 2 miles. The    weather. The small bay on the E side I mile from the N entrance
entrance, 0.7 mile wide, is partly blocked by several wooded    weather. The small bay on the E side 1 mile from the N entrance
entrance, 0.7 mile wide, is partly blocked by several wooded    affords good anchorage in 3 to 8 fathoms, mud bottom; water can
islets, bare rocks, and rocks awash. The interior of the bay is dot-     affords good anchorage streams at to 8 fathoms, mud bottom; water can
      .,d .ith islets and rocks.                                   be obtained from the streams at the head of the bay.
ted with islets and rocks.
  (486)  Quillian Bay, the middle bay, is unsurveyed. It is 1.3     (494) Goose Bay, on the E side of Culross Passage 3.5 miles S
miles E of the light, extends 1.7 miles NNE, and is about 0.2 mile    of the Nentrance, is narrow and extends NE about 1 mile. The
wide. The entrance is constricted to a width of 0.1 mile. An islet is    entrance narrows to about 50 yards and has a reported depth of
0.7 mile above the entrance and two rocks awash are toward the    about 2 fathoms. The narrow entrance opens out into a bay with
head of the bay. The shores are steep-to.                         two arms; extensive flats and shoal water are reported in both
  (487) Lake Bay, the westernmost bay, is 0.7 mile E of the light,
extends 1.2 miles NW, and is about 0.1 mile wide. Fishing craft    (495)  Long Bay, on the W side of Culross Passage across from
find indifferent anchorage near the E shore SE of the narrowest    Goose Bay, is narrow and extends SW about 2 miles. It is reported
part where the bay widens to its maximum of 0.3 mile. Rocks    that the bay appears clear in midchannel with about 10 fathoms
awash extend about 100 yards SE of the point forming the NW       and shoals rapidly in the vicinity of the small islets at the SW end
extremity of this anchorage bight. A submerged rock is near the    of the bay.
head of the bay. In general, the shores are steep-to and depths are  (496) It is further reported that anchorage for small vessels can
too great for convenient anchorage. About 0.5 mile from the head    be had in the vicinity of the small islets in 7 to 10 fathoms, fair
on the E side is a freshwater stream that discharges from Esther    holding ground. E winds funnel into Long Bay blowing from the
Lake.                                                             NE with considerable force and gusts; vessels should guard
 (488) Esther Passage separates Esther Island from the main-    against dragging onto the shoals at the head of the bay.
land. The S entrance, 7.5 miles E of Point Esther and 1.8 miles    (497) Routes, Culross Passage, from the northward.-When
NW of Bald Head Chris Island, is about 1.5 miles wide. The    entering the narrowest part of Culross Passage from the N, pass
entrance is flanked by two wood islets. A rock awash at about half    between the small islet, just off the W  shore 2 miles inside the
tide is about 0.3 mile E of the W islet. The bottom of the entrance    entrance, and a rock nearly awash, just E of the islet. Do not
is extremely irregular, varying from 61/4 to 60 fathoms. Once    attempt to pass between the islet and the W shore as there is a
inside, the water deepens rapidly to more than 100 fathoms for 2    rock, barely covered, making passage impossible. Continue S
miles or more. The passage trends NW for about 10 miles and    between the larger island in midchannel and the W shore, then
connects with Port Wells about 8.5 miles N of Point Esther and 3.5    shift to midchannel to avoid a shoal extending off the point on the
miles S of Golden; it is sharply constricted at its midpoint. The    W shore. One mile farther S and off Goose Bay, are numerous
least depth in the constricted channel was reported in 1994 to be    islands. The channel, with a least depth of 41/4 fathoms, passes to
3'2, fathoms in about 60ï¿½53'39.6"N., 147056'59.7"W. The S half    the E of the island. (This route from the N was reported to
is about 0.7 mile wide and the N half, 400 to 250 yards wide. The    National Ocean Service in 1974.)
passage was being surveyed in 1994 and appears to be clear except  (498) In entering the passage from the southward, give a wide
for the 3 /2 fathom area previously mentioned and a rock, that    berth to the many dangerous rock ledges and rocks that extend off
uncovers, on the S side of the W entrance, and another rock,    the S shore of Applegate Island on the E side of the entrance. Con-
reported to be submerged, near midchannel at the bend 1 mile E of    siderable current has been observed through this area.




                                               4. CAPESPENCERTO COOKINLET                                                       101


 (499) Port Wells extends N from Wells Passage along the W         est tides is 0.8 mile E of the light. A similar rock is 200 yards
side of Esther Island for 13 miles to Point Pakenham where it    WNW of the light.
divides into Barry Arm to the W  and College Fiord to the E. A       (506) Entry Cove, immediately W of Point Pigot, affords good
low spit extends well offshore from the W  shore just S of the    anchorage in 13 fathoms, soft bottom, with swinging room for one
entrance to Barry Arm and 2.5 miles N of Hobo Bay. Depths of 2    vessel up to 200 feet long.
fathoms have been reported 0.5 mile off the end of the spit. In May   (507) Cochrane Bay empties into the S end of Port Wells oppo-
1985, a reef was reported at the entrance to Barry Arm in about    site Point Pigot. The middle of the bay has depths of 100 to 200
60059'N., 148009'W. In September 1992, shoaling was reported    fathoms and the shores are steep-to.
in about 60059'30"N., 148008'25"W.  Offshore depths in Port          (508) Surprise Cove is on the W side of Cochrane Bay just S of
Wells.are 100 to 200 fathoms. Harriman Fiord, about 5 miles    the entrance. The SW arm of the cove appears clear of dangers
above the entrance to Barry Arm, extends SW about 10 miles.    with 33 fathoms in the middle decreasing towards the head, near
Gravel bars, which uncover, extend across the entrance to Harri-    which indifferent anchorage is available in 12 to 15 fathoms. The
man Fiord from Point Doran.                                         thin layer of glacial silt over the rocky bottom is poor holding
 (500) Bettles Bay, on the W  side of Port Wells 7 miles above    ground. The W arm of Surprise Cove has a restricted entrance and
Wells Passage, is reported free from dangers in midchannel. Sur-    can be entered only by small craft.
veys in 1994 indicated a 3-fathom shoal just S of midchannel near    (509)  Blackstone Bay empties into the S side of Passage Canal
the entrance in about 60ï¿½55'06"N., 148016'00"W. Good anchor-    SW of Point Pigot. The middle of the bay has depths of 100 to 200
age is available in 25 fathoms, mud bottom, in midbay 1 mile    fathoms to Willard Island, a large island about 489 feet high near
above the entrance, and in 22 fathoms, mud bottom, in the NE cor-    the head of the bay. A rock, bare at low water, is 0.1 mile N of the
ner of the bay. A stream and an extensive delta from a glacier are    island. An islet and nearby rocks awash are on the E side of the
at the head of the bay. Vessels should approach with caution    bay about 3.7 miles inside the entrance in about 60ï¿½45'48"N.,
because depths are reported to rise abruptly from 20 fathoms to 1    148031'42"W. A 15-fathom spot is about 1.6 miles SW of the islet
fathom. An abandoned mine building is on the hillside NW of the    in about 60ï¿½44'41"N., 148034'00"W. The area between Willard
stream.                                                             Island and the E side of the bay is constricted by shoals extending
 (501)  Hobo Bay, on the W  side of Port Wells just N of Bettles    from both shores. A shoal with two rocks awash at the end extends
Bay, is crossed at the entrance by a bar that is covered about 31/2    from the E side of the bay to about 60042'12"N., 148036'30"W.;
fathoms. Vessels entering follow the N side of the bay at a    extreme caution is advised. There are no known anchorages in the
reported distance of 100 yards. Several rocks, bare at low water,    bay.
are along the S shore of the bay. A grassy rock is close offshore. A  (510)  Depths along the W  side of Willard Island range from 29
vessel entering this bay reported anchoring off the grassy rock in 5    to 66 fathoms. Glacial moraines, with little water over them at low
fathoms.                                                            water, extend from both shores of Blackstone Bay to Willard
 (502) Golden is a mining camp on the E shore of Port Wells,    Island midway of the island's length. Blackstone Glacier is
about 3 miles NE of Esther Passage. Steamers anchor 200 to 300    active, and there are generally numerous small icebergs in the
yards S of the little island off Golden in about 20 fathoms, rocky    head of the bay.
bottom. It is regarded as a poor anchorage and it is probable that   (511)  Passage Canal has its entrance at the SW end of Port
the anchor will not hold with strong winds drawing down Port    Wells between Point Pigot and Blackstone Point, the N extremity
Wells. The area between the island and the shore uncovers.          of the peninsula separating Cochrane and Blackstone Bays. The
 (503)  Pigot Bay, on the W  side of Port Wells just N of Passage    canal trends NW for 4 miles, then W for 8 miles.
Canal, has a rocky shore except at its head where sand and mud-      (512) The principal approaches to Passage Canal and the canal
flats extend offshore about 0.2 mile and bare at low water. The     itself offer little difficulty for navigation with the aid of the chart.
bottom in Pigot Bay is heavy blue clay with good holding quali-    These waters, including the Knight Island group and both shores
ties. Depths near the entrance to Pigot Bay are too great for    of Knight Island Passage, are characterized by rocky and exceed-
anchoring, but good anchorage is available for vessels near the    ingly broken bottom. Differences of 50 fathoms between adjacent
head of the bay in 30 fathoms. A small area I mile from the head    soundings are not uncommon, and it is possible that on the broken
of the bay affords good anchorage in 12 fathoms, but is difficult to    areas there may be less water and possibly dangers not disclosed
find because of its limited extent. A similar area 0.2 mile from the    by surveys. As a measure of safety, vessels should avoid areas
head of the bay affords excellent anchorage for small vessels in 13    where abrupt changes are indicated by the chart to depths less than
fathoms. Mooring buoys are near the head of the bay. Good           50 fathoms.
anchorage is available for small boats in the NE corner of the bay   (513)  Passage Canal is 1 to 1.5 miles wide, has great depth and
and in Ziegler Cove, on the N side of the bay immediately inside    is clear except in a very few places near the shores. The shores rise
the entrance.                                                       abruptly and are wooded to about 1,000 feet. The higher peaks are
 (504) The ruins of an abandoned logging camp are at the head of    bare or snow-covered rock.
Pigot Bay, and an abandoned mine is a short distance up the river
which empties into the bay.                                          (514)  Chart 16706.-Decision Point, on the S side of Passage
 (505) Point Pigot is the SE end of the peninsula between Pigot    Canal about 3 miles W  of Point Pigot, is marked on the N end by
Bay and Passage Canal. Low valleys extend across the peninsula    Decision Point Light (60ï¿½48.4'N., 148ï¿½27.2'W.), 35 feet above
from Entry Cove and Logging Camp Bay. The S end of Point    the water and shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white
Pigot is a wooded, rocky headland 220 feet high. This headland is    diamond-shaped daymark.
joined to the mainland by a sandy neck 6 feet high. Point Pigot       (515)  Shotgun Cove, on the S side of Passage Canal 2.5 miles
Light (60048.1'N., 148ï¿½21.3'W.), 25 feet above the water, is    W of Decision Point, has depths through the middle of 30 to 35
shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-    fathoms, muddy bottom. Foul ground fills the narrow parts of the
shaped daymark on the S tip of the point. A rock that bares at low-    head of the bay; approaching slowly, a small vessel can select



102                                            4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


anchorage just above this foul ground in 15 to 20 fathoms. Several    (531) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "BERING" on
mooring buoys are in the cove.                                      VHF-FM channels 10 and 16, or on 4125 kHz from 1300 to 1400
  (516) The bight on the SE side of Shotgun Cove is obstructed    daily.
near the middle by a rock covered l/2 fathom. Anchorage with a        (532) Towage.-One 2,000 hp tug is available at Whittier.
clear width of 0.3 mile can be had in the NE part of this bight in 15  (533)  Quarantine, customs, immigration, and agricultural
to 20 fathoms, mud bottom.                                          quarantine.-(See chapter 3, Vessel Arrival Inspections, and
 (517)  Trinity Point is on the S side of Passage Canal 3 miles W   appendix for addresses.)
of Decision Point. Tiny Emerald Island is 0.4 mile W  of Trinity      (534) Quarantine is enforced in accordance with regulations of
Point. A light, 39 feet above water, is shown from a skeleton tower    the U.S. Public Health Service. (See Public Health Service, chap-
with a red and white daymark on the outer end of the narrow point    ter 1.)
between Trinity Point and Emerald Island. SmallEmerald Bay            (535)  Wharves.-There are two deep-draft facilities, two rail-
extends SW from the island and offers good shelter and anchorage    road-car barge facilities, a ferry dock, and a small-boat harbor at
for small craft in 3 to 5 fathoms, mud bottom; the entrance is nar-    Whittier. For a complete description of the port facilities refer to
row but clear of dangers.                                           Port Series No. 38, published and sold by the U.S. Army Corps of
 (518) Anchorage in 12 to 18 fathoms, sticky bottom, can be had    Engineers. (See appendix for address.)
on Bush Banks which extend 0.3 mile from the S side of Passage        (536)  DeLong Pier: at the E end of Whittier; 675 feet of ber-
Canal at a point 1 mile above Emerald Island and 3.5 miles from    thing space; 45 feet alongside; deck height, 22 feet; receipt of
the head. The least depth is 41/2 fathoms at the SW end of the    petroleum products; owned by The Alaska Railroad; operated and
banks.                                                              used by the U.S. Army as a fuel pier.
 (519) Small craft can anchor in the cove at the NW end of the       (537) Alaska Railroad Wharf: 550 yards WSW of DeLong
head of the canal in 6 to 12 fathoms.                               Pier; 1,000-foot face with about 30 to 40 feet alongside; deck
 (520) Whittier is the Alaska Railroad terminus on the S side of    height, 22 feet; mobile crane; 32,000 square feet of covered area;
Passage Canal, 1.5 miles from the head. The town has a sawmill    receipt of general cargo, fish, and mooring of fishing boats; owned
and wood-treatment plant and a U.S. Army fuel depot.                and operated by The Alaska Railroad.
 (521) Prominent features.-In the approach to Whittier, the          (538) Railroad-car barge facilities are at each end of the mar-
army tank farm at the head of Passage Canal and the buildings in    ginal wharf.
town are prominent. The three large buildings in town were built      (539) Alaska State Ferry Terminal is about 100 yards NW of
by the army during World War II. The largest is 14 stories high    the marginal wharf. The approach channel to the terminal is
and almost all of the living quarters and business activities in town    reported dredged to 20 feet. The ferry terminal is owned and oper-
are within this building.                                           ated by the State.
 (522)  Anchorages.-Large vessels sometimes anchor clear of the      (540)  Whittier Small-Boat Harbor, 0.25 mile W  of the ferry
41/2-fathom shoal on Bush Banks about 2 miles NE of Whittier or    terminal, is used mostly by pleasure craft and some fishing ves-
in Pigot Bay.                                                       sels. The harbor has about 344 slips; the harbormaster assigns
 (523)  Routes to Whittier (see also chart 16700).-From the S    berths. The harbormaster's office monitors VHF-FM channel 16.
via Prince William Sound Traffic Separation Scheme                    (541) A floating breakwater, marked by a light on its W  end,
(described earlier in this chapter under Prince William Sound).    restricts the entrance to less than 80 feet. In 1973, depths of 15 feet
Depart the scheme N of Hinchinbrook Entrance and set courses to    were reported available throughout the harbor.
pass 1.5 miles NE of Smith Island, 1.5 miles N of Point Eleanor       (542)  Gasoline, diesel fuel, water (during summer), electricity,
Light, 1.5 miles SW of Perry Island Light, 1 mile NE of Culross    dry storage, launching ramp, small-boat grid, and a 30-ton boatlift
Island Light, 0.5 mile S of Point Pigot Light, 0.5 mile N of Deci-    are available, but there are no repair facilities. The harbor is
sion Point Light, 0.5 mile N of Trinity Point Light, and thence to    owned by the State and operated by the city. A restaurant and a
Whittier, clearing the S shore by 0.5 mile until up to the water-    small grocery are in town.
front. Caution: Mariners are advised to adhere to the general prin-   (543)  Whittier Passenger Loading Dock is just W  of the
ciples for navigation when entering, departing, or crossing a traffic    entrance to Whittier Small-boat Harbor and is used by small tour
separation scheme. (See Traffic Separation Schemes, chapter 1.)     boats and fishing vessels. The dock is marked by private lights.
 (524)  From the W  via Elrington Passage. Clear the E side of       (544)  Communications.-Landline telephone service is avail-
Evans Island by 1 mile, thence 0.5 mile E of Pleiades Light,    able. The Alaska State Ferry makes daily stops in the summer, but
thence 2 miles E of Crafton Island Light, thence 1.5 miles SW of    offers no service in winter. The Alaska Railroad transports auto-
Perry Island Light, thence the same as from the S to Whittier.      mobiles to the Seward-Anchorage Highway and has passenger
 (525)  Vessels from Valdez usually use Perry Passage when          service to Anchorage daily in the summer and biweekly in the
going to Whittier.                                                  winter. Charter air service is available in the summer.
 (526) Tides and currents.-The diurnal range of tide at Whittier
is 12.3 feet. The currents have little velocity in Passage Canal.     (545)  Charts 16705, 16709.-Port Nellie Juan extends 23 miles
 (527)  Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-   SW from its entrance between Culross Island and the mainland to
sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of    the S. Applegate Island, on the NW side of the entrance, is low,
Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)                     flat, and wooded. Port Nellie Juan Light (60"35.9'N.,
 (528) Vessels en route Whittier or Valdez meet the pilot boat as    148ï¿½06.0'W.), 23 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton
follows:                                                            tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the N end
 (529) (A) oil tanker traffic-about 3.6 miles SW of Bligh Reef    of the point on the SE side of the entrance.
Lighted Buoy 6 (60050.5'N., 146ï¿½54.4'W.); or                          (546) Port Nellie Juan-is divided into three right-angled reaches
 (530)  (B) iionoil-tank traffic-about 2.3 miles N of Busby Island    into which many glaciers discharge. The innermost reach is Kings
Light (60ï¿½53.7'N., 146ï¿½49.0'W.).                                    Bay. Midchannel depths of more than 100 fathoms are available to












































m





H






H

























0





























:pl-
m1
N





C)




                                                4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                  105


near the head. In general, the reaches are deep close to the shores    70 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red
which are indented by numerous bays and small inlets.              and white diamond-shaped daymark at the NE end of the island.
 (547) Areas in front of the glaciers should be approached with    (559) Crafton Island is surrounded by foul ground to a distance
caution. The moraines are often very large, and the water over    of about 0.5 mile on its E and S sides, where no sounding has been
them shoals rapidly to I fathom or less. This is particularly true at    done. An exceedingly broken area extends over 2 miles SE from
the head of Kings Bay where the water is shoal 0.2 to 0.5 mile    the island. Rocks, bare at about half tide, are I mile SE from the S
from shore, then deepens rapidly to more than 50 fathoms.          end of the islets. Vessels should avoid all broken areas in this
 (548) McClure Bay, the first of two bays which indent the SE    vicinity where depths less than about 50 fathoms have been found.
shore of the first reach, is deep and narrow and extends S for about
5 miles. It is from 80 to 100 fathoms deep, free from hidden dan-         The passage W of Crafton Island is foul along the shore of
                 gers and has bold shores. The upper part of the E arm at the head    the islets, and three rocks which uncover are in the middle of the S
gers, and has bold shores. The upper part of the E arm at the head
                                                                    entrance. This passage should be used only by small craft, pro-
of the bay is foul. Vessels requiring little swinging room may
                                                                    ceeding with care and preferably at low water. The channel favors
anchor at the entrance of this arm in 18 fathoms, mud bottom. The    the W                           shore from the S entrance until abreast the middle of
                                                                    the W shore from the S entrance until abreast the middle of
W arm is clear in midchannel and affords shelter for small vessels.
 (549) An abandoned cannery and wharf are in the cove on the E
side of McClure Bay near the entrance. The wharf, in extremely      (561)  The clearer channel to Eshamy Bay follows the shore N
poor condition and with hidden piles which cover at high water, is    from Point Nowell and is about 0.8 mile wide. Differences of 50
not recommended. A rock, with little water over it, is on the N side    fathoms between adjacent soundings are not uncommon in this
of the cove just E of the wharf. The cove accommodates only    locality. Foul ground extends 350 yards N, and rocky broken
small craft.                                                       ground of 14 fathoms, or less, extends 0.6 mile N from the S point
 (550) Blue Fiord, the second bay, is at the head of the first reach    at the entrance of Eshamy Bay.
and extends S about 4 miles to the moraine of Ultramarine Gla-      (562)  Eshamy Bay, between Point Nowell and Crafton Island,
cier. The shores of the fiord are steep-to and depths in midchannel    affords anchorage only for small craft in 8 to II11 fathoms, in the
are 33 to 100 fathoms.                                             small cove back of the islands and rocks in the SE corner of the
 (551) Derickson Bay, Deep Water Bay, and Greystone Bay,    bay. The better entrance is through the middle of the deep narrow
are three prominent bays along the S shore of the middle reach of    channel between the small islands and the E shore. Eshamy
Port Nellie Juan. Along the N shore of this reach are long and nar-    Lagoon extends W from Eshamy Bay, but its foul entrance with
row East Finger and West Finger Inlets, with Shady Cove midway    strong currents makes it inaccessible for strangers.
between them.                                                       (563) Point Nowell, 4.5 miles S from Crafton Island Light, is a
 (552)  Nellie Juan Glacier, at the head of Derickson Bay, is the    small wooded hook, about 50 feet high, back of which the land
most active glacier in the area and the bay is often filled with small    rises abruptly. The cove, formed by the hook, is about 300 yards in
icebergs.                                                          diameter and apparently clear, and affords anchorage for small
 (553)  Anchorage.-Because of the great depths, there are few    craft in about 8 fathoms.
anchorages in Port Nellie Juan. Indifferent. anchorage for large    (564) Knight Island (see also chart 16700), on the W  side of
vessels can be found in the bight just inside the point on the SE    Prince William Sound, is 22 miles long and very rugged, the peaks
side of the entrance. The S of the two coves in this bight has a    rising to 3,261 feet. It is wooded to about 1,000 feet, and above
wide, even, gravel shore that is excellent for beaching a small ves-    this is grass covered. Disk, Ingot, and Eleanor Islands are moun-
sel. -                                                             tainous and sparsely wooded islands that extend 6 miles N from
 (554) Another indifferent anchorage is available for vessels up    Knight Island to Point Eleanor, the N end of the group.
to 250 tons 0.7 mile SW of Division Point between Blue Fiord
and Derickson Bay. Depths of 18 fathoms can be found 300 yards      (565) Eleanor Island has bluff, rugged shores. Broken ground
off the entrance to a small indentation. The thin layer of mud over    extends 0.4 miles N and NW from Point Eleanor the N point of
                 rocky bottom is only fair holding ground          the island. Point Eleanor Light (60ï¿½34.8'N., 147ï¿½33.8'W.), 45
                                                                    feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red
 (555)  Small craft can find indifferent anchorage in some of the       above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red
bights on the NW side of the first reach. The best of these is in the    and white dlamond-shaped daymark on the p or
area W of Mink Island where the depth is about 15 fathoms, mud    on the NW side of Eleanor Island, is deep and clear. Anchorage for
bottom. Good anchorage is available for vessels up to 300 tons in    small vessels is available in the S arm of the bay, about 0.4 mile
the upper end of West Finger Inlet in 15 fathoms, and in Shady    from the head in about 20 fathoms.
Cove, 14 fathoms in the middle and 8 fathoms near the head, mud     (566)  Near the E point of Eleanor Island, 1.8 miles S of Point
bottom.      -                                                     Eleanor, is a rocky islet with a few trees and with foul ground on
 (556) Main Bay, 4 miles SE of Port Nellie Juan, is deep and    its shore side. A bare rock 0.2 mile S of the islet should be given a
generally clear away from the shores, but affords no anchorage.    berth of 0.3 mile. A group of prominent bare rocks, close together
Foul ground makes off both entrance points.                        and about 12 feet high, is 0.6 mile off the SE point of Eleanor
 (557)  Falls Bay, 2 miles SE of Main Bay, affords no anchorage    Island. Between them and Eleanor Island is broken ground with
and is open to the prevailing NE weather. The main part of the bay    depths of 6 to 7 fathoms. A bare rock about 5 feet high is 0.6 mile
is clear and deep. Rocks make out from the points at the entrance,    SW of the group; it should be given a berth of over 0.4 mile from
contracting it to a width of 0.2 mile in which the least found depth    the SE.
is about 12 fathoms.                                                (567)  Upper Passage, separating Eleanor and Ingot Islands, is
 (558) Crafton Island is 1 mile long and wooded. At its N end    generally deep and suitable for small craft. Block Island, 1 mile
are rocky bluffs about 100 feet high, while its S part is lower and    long -with its N end joined at low water to Eleanor Island, narrows
has sandy beaches in places. Two low islets with sandy beaches    the S part of the passage to about 400 yards. About 600 yards SE
are off its S end. Crafton Island Light (60030.7'N., 147ï¿½55.9'W.),    of Block Island is a ledge with 5 fathoms over it, possibly less.



106                                            4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


 (568) Entrance Island, high and wooded, is 0.3 mile S of           (578) Smith Island, near the center of Prince William Sound, is
Eleanor Island and on the N side of the S approach to Upper Pas-    high and wooded, and lowest at its SW end. Broken rocky bottom
sage. It is surrounded by deep water.                              extends 3 miles NE from Smith Island. A lighted bell buoy is 0.3
 (569) Sphinx Island, on the S side of the S approach to Upper    mile S of a 7-fathom patch, I mile E of the island.
Passage and 0.4 mile E of Ingot Island, is high and wooded, and     (579) Little Smith Island, close W of Smith Island, is bluff,
surrounded by deep water. About 0.9 mile SE of Sphinx Island is a    high, and wooded. Rocky patches of 43/4 to 16 fathoms' are about
rocky area with a least known depth of 18 fathoms.                 1.5 miles N of the island. A rocky area of 9 to 10 fathoms extends
 (570) Ingot Island is between Upper and Lower Passages. A         1 mile S from the island.
prominent high wooded island is 0.2 mile off the NW end of Ingot    (580) Seal Island, 5.5 miles S of Smith Island, is wooded, high,
Island. Two small bare rocks, close together and nearly awash at    and round. Seal Island Light (60025.8'N., 147024.9'W.), 45 feet
high water, are 0.5 mile SE from the S point of Ingot Island. Bro-    above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and
ken ground extends 0.5 mile SE from the rock to a ledge covered    white diamond-shaped daymark on the NW side of the island.
33/4 fathoms.                                                      Close to the E end of the island are two bare rocky islets, and
 (571)  Disk Island is separated from Ingot Island on the E by    about 0.1 mile off the W end is a small rock which uncovers 8 feet.
Foul Pass, a narrow passage blocked by reefs. A landlocked bay      (581) Rocky, broken areas extend 1 mile NE and N from Seal
with two narrow entrances makes into the W side of the island. An    Island. Pennsylvania Rock, I mile N of the island and marked by
excellent anchorage for small craft can be found in the bay in 5 toms. About 0.8 mile SW of the island is
13 fathoms, mud bottom, with good shelter from all winds. Enter    a 5% -fathom rocky area.
through the S entrance which is reported to be about 80 feet wide   (582)  Vessels generally use the channel between Seal and Smith
and has a least depth of 3 fathoms. It is reported that the N side of
the S entrance should be favored to avoid a ledge which is sub-
merged at high water and extends about 10 to 15 feet into the       (583) Chart 16700.-The W  entrance of Prince William
channel. The best anchorage is reported to be in a bight on the E    Sound between Cape Cleare and Cape Puget is divided into a
side of the bay.                                                   number of passages between the islands. They are described in the
 (572) Lower Passage, between Ingot Island and the N end of    following order: Montague Strait, Latouche Passage, Elrington
Knight Island, is a deep navigable channel suitable for small ves-    Passage, Prince of Wales Passage, BainbridgePassage, and Knight
sels. Broken ground, on which the least known depth is 61/2 fath-    Island Passage.
oms, extends into the passage 0.2 mile from the W entrance point
of Louis Bay. A rock that uncovers at half tide, is 350 yards from  (584)  Charts 16701, 16709.-Montague Strait, between Mon-
the W  shore, 0.8 mile inside the NW end of the passage. Foul    tague Island on the E and Latouche and Knight Islands on the W,
ground extends from this rock to the head of the cove, 0.5 mile    is the broadest of the passages W of Montague Island leading from
SW.                                                                the sea to Prince William Sound. The strait affords an unrestricted
                                                                   channel 4.5 miles wide. Below the N end of Latouche Island the
 (573) A rock covered 41/2 fathoms, possibly less, is about 0.4    channel 4.5 miles wide Below the N end of Latouche Island the
mile NW from the N end of Disk Island. Another rock with 5 fath-om used as vessels generally proceed via Elrington
oms over it is about 0.5 mile from Ingot Island and over 0.7 mile    Passage. Above that point the regular steamer route to the E part
                                                                   of Prince William Sound is via the passage W of The Needle,
042ï¿½ from Passage Point, the N end of Knight Island. These rocks    of Prince William Sound is via the passage W  of The Needle
ar       e well ou t of  the usual track of vessels going through Lower Pas-    Green Island, and Seal Island, thence through the passage between
are well out of the usual track of vessels going through Lower Pas-
                 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~sage.           ~Seal and Smith Islands. (See also chart 16705.)
sage.
                                                                     (585) The March 1964 earthquake may have caused bottom
 (574) Louis Bay indents the NE side of Knight Island about         (585) The March 1964 earthquake may have caused bottom
                                                                   uplift throughout Montague Strait, Shoaling and new dangers
halfway through Lower Passage, about 2.2 miles S of Passage    may exist requiring extreme caution until a complete survey is
Point. The bay affords anchorage for small vessels 250 to 300    made of this area.
yards from the head of either of its two arms, in about 15 fathoms.  (586  The W  side of Monta gue Island is heavily wooded to
                                                                     (586) The W  side of Montague Island is heavily wooded to
The W arm is clear so far as is known.                             about 900 feet. Generally rugged with many deep, steep-walled
 (575) The E arm of Louis Bay has a very broken bottom, and    recesses near its high levels, it retains numerous patches of snow
small vessels entering should proceed with caution. A rock cov-    and ice throughout the summer.
ered 5 feet is 175 yards from the E shore and 350 yards N from the  (587) San Juan Bay, an open bightjust N of Cape Cleare, has a
entrance of the E arm. The arm is 0.1 to 0.2 mile wide; a ledge    sand beach at its head that is backed by a large tidal swamp that
makes out about 30 yards from the wooded islet on the W side of    drains through a small stream. Landings in the bay are usually dif-
the entrance. When inside the entrance, favor the W side to avoid    ficult because of the surf.
three rocks which bare at lowest tides.                             (588) Stair Mountain, just N of San Juan Bay, is a prominent
 (576) Herring Bay, at the NW end of Knight Island, has no    conical-shaped 1,595-foot-high peak which shows unmistakably
desirable anchorage and is characterized by much foul ground and    from the S and SW. The summit is bare and the slopes have a scat-
very broken bottom, with deep water close to the shores and dan-    tering growth of trees.
gers. Vessels should proceed with caution, especially in the vicin-  (589) Point Bryant is a rounding point of high eroded bluffs,
ity of broken areas with depths less than about 20 fathoms, and    about 3 miles N of San Juan Bay. A rock, awash at extreme low
preferably at low water. The entrance is clear except along the E    tide, is about 300 yards off the point. The rocky shore is fringed
shore, which is foul. A prominent rock about 4 feet high is near    with heavy kelp.
the center of the bay; the best channel to the upper part of the bay  (590) Macleod Harbor, on the E side of Montague Strait, 6.5
is E of the rock. Water can be obtained from a fall in the SE arm.  miles N from Cape Cleare, is free from dangers and an excellent
 (577) Herring Point, the N end of a narrow ridge about 1,000    anchorage protected from all directions except the SW. Point
feet high, forms the W side of Herring Bay.                        Woodcock, on the N side of the entrance, is a rocky bluff about 50






                                               4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                   107


feet high and wooded on top. The point is fringed by a rocky, kelp-    small bluff on the SW side of the cove. When about 0.2 mile from
covered reef. The S entrance point is gently rounding. The head of    shore, steer more E and pass midway between Putnam Point and
the harbor is marked by extensive mudflats.                        the rock, awash at high water, 400 yards N of the point. Anchor in
 (591) The March 1964 earthquake caused a bottom uplift of    the cove SE of the rock in 6 to 8 fathoms. A rock bares at half tide
31.5 feet in Macleod Harbor. Shoaling and new dangers may          175 yards NE of the point W of Putnam Point, and the S of two
exist requiring extreme caution until a complete survey is    rocks, bare at extreme low water, is 0.6 mile 133ï¿½ from the outly-
made of the area.                                                  ing 25-foot-high rock.
 (592) Large vessels entering Macleod Harbor favor the N shore      (598) The March 1964 earthquake caused a bottom uplift of
and anchor in 14 to 17 fathoms, muddy bottom, about 0.3 mile off    7.2 feet in Gibbon Anchorage. Shoaling and new dangers may
the shingle beach I mile from the head of the bay. In making this    exist requiring extreme caution until a complete survey is
anchorage, care should be taken to avoid the mudflats which rise    made of the area.
very sharply. Severe williwaws draw down through the harbor, but    (599) Passage between Green and Montague Islands.-The
the holding ground is good and the anchorage is safe. Small craft    middle of the E side of Green Island is characterized by a promi-
find anchorage farther in close to the N shore and to the head of    nent sand and gravel point, sparsely wooded. A group of five
the bay in 4 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom. Small-craft mooring piles    rocky islets is I mile off this point. Channel Island, 62 feet high
at the head of the harbor, are now dry at low water because of the    and the highest of the group, is tree covered. A sandspit, terminat-
upheaval caused by the March 1964 earthquake. Drastic changes    ing in low rocks, extends 0.4 mile NE from this group.
have occurred, and the overall size of the bay is greatly reduced.  (600) The bottom is very irregular between Channel Island and
 (593) Hanning Bay, indenting the W side of Montague Island    Montague Island. Several 5 /4- to 10-fathom spots on which there
13 miles N of Cape Cleare, is a good anchorage with E winds.    may be less water, were found in this area. The best water appar-
Shoals extend nearly 0.4 mile off from the streams at the NE and    ently is about 0.3 mile SE of the island.
SE parts of the bay, and a reef extends 0.2 mile from the point on  (601) Caution.-The area between Green Island and Montague
the E side. A dangerous sunken wreck and a 13/4-fathom spot are    Island is reported to have many uncharted rocks.
about 0.5 mile off the S shore just inside the entrance. The best   (602) Port Chalmers, on Montague Island 5 miles S of Grave-
anchorage with S winds is about 0.4 mile from the S side, with    yard Point, is S of Gilmour Point and extends NE about 1.2
Danger Island open from the S point at the entrance bearing 258,8   miles. At its NE end are two small lagoons, the outer one having
and Point Bazil, the N point at the entrance, bearing between 005ï¿½    about 31/2 feet of water along its S shore.
and 348ï¿½, in 15 to 16 fathoms, sticky bottom. With NW winds, a      (603)  A small wooded island, 165 feet high, is I mile SW of
better berth can be had 0.3 to 0.4 mile off the cove on the N side,    Gilmour Point. A rock, 10 feet high, is SE of the island, and a
0.6 mile inside the entrance, in 5 to 8 fathoms, hard bottom. When    kelp-marked rock that uncovers 4 feet and a I '/4-fathom rocky
entering, give the points at the entrance a berth of 0.4 mile. In    shoal are about 0.5 mile N of the island; a I V/-fathom rock is about
1965, a 292-foot survey vessel found secure anchorage in this bay.  0.4 mile farther N.
 (594) The Needle is a flat-topped, steep-sided rock, about 45      (604) The approach to Port Chalmers is between the island and
feet high, in Montague Strait 3.8 miles from the nearest point of    the 1V/4-fathom shoal. A group of kelp-marked rocks that uncover
Montague Island and 5.5 miles SE from Point Helen, the S    3 feet is 0.4 mile inside the island, on line with the head of the
extremity of Knight Island. Rocks that uncover are close NNE and    port. The group is passed to the N in entering. A reef, covered at
SSW of The Needle. A shoal with a least depth of 31/4 fathoms and    extreme high tide, makes out 150 yards from the N shore, 0.6 mile
6 fathoms at both ends extends NE about 2 miles from a point    E of Gilmour Point.
about 0.5 mile S of The Needle. Two shoal spots, 7 and 71/2 fath-   (605) Anchorage for small craft can be had in all weather at the
oms, are close SW and W of the S extremity of the shoal, and a    head of Port Chalmers, between the reef and the lagoon entrance.
shoal area, 5 2 to 81/2 fathoms, is about 0.7 mile NNE of The Nee-    There is excellent holding bottom of mud in 6 to 10 fathoms. On
dle.                                                               the upper half of the tide small craft drawing not more than 5 feet
 (595) Little Green Island, heavily wooded and about 100 feet    enter midchannel into the lagoon at the head of the port; they can
high, is 6 miles N of The Needle. A fringe of rocks surrounds the    lay in the lagoon at all times in any weather, except during
island and a kelp-marked reef, baring at various stages of the tide,    extreme ranges of tide. A range (astern) of Channel Island off
extends 1.2 miles off the S end of the island. A rock, covered 23/4    Green Island with Horn Mountain on Knight Island, can be used to
fathoms, is 1.8 miles SW of the island, and two rocks that uncover    pass 400 yards N of the 165-foot-high island and avoid the dan-
and have little kelp on them are 1.5 miles E of the island and close    gers in the approach. The rock 0.4 mile NE of Wilby Island,
to the 50-fathom curve.                                            uncovers 2 feet. Another rock, which uncovers I1/, feet, is 0.8 mile
 (596) Green Island, between Knight Island and the N part of    WSW of Wilby Island. Mariners should exercise caution in
Montague Island, is wooded. The highest elevations are near the E    navigating these waters. Numerous shoals and rocks charted
side of the island, and slope gradually to the N and S ends. Very    at 1 to 3 fathoms have been seen to bare at minus tides because
foul ground surrounds the island. Two wooded islets, 100 feet    of an uplift of about 11 feet caused by the March 1964 earth-
high, several small islets, and numerous rock and shoal spots are    quake.
along the NW shore of Green Island. These include a prominent       (606) Small cannery tenders frequently anchor in 12 to 14 fath-
outlying rock, 25 feet high, 1.2 miles NW of Putnam Point. A       oms about 0.2 mile inside the 95-foot-high island SW of the 165-
small rocky islet, 15 feet high, is about I mile SW from the sharp    foot-high island. To enter this area pass midway between the two
point forming the W end of Green Island.                           islands.
 (597) Gibbon Anchorage is a secure harbor for craft up to 500      (607) In 1965, a 292-foot survey vessel anchored securely in a
tons in the cove about the middle of the NW side of Green Island.    40-knot wind, 1.9 miles 290ï¿½ from Gilmour Point, in 20 fathoms.
Passing 0.3 mile S of the outlying prominent 25-foot-high rock,    Later, winds of 50 and 60 knots caused some dragging in this loca-
steer 1260 for Putnam Point, the prominent wooded point with a    tion.



 108                                            4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


  (608) The small bay just N of Gilmour Point offers good protec-    (620) Snug Harbor is on the E side of Knight Island, 6.7 miles
 tion and anchorage in 2 to 8 fathoms, mud bottom. The entrance is    N of Point Helen. Its W arm is 0.3 mile wide and clear near mid-
 clear of dangers on a midchannel course.                           channel, and has secure anchorage at its head in 12 to 17 fathoms.
  (609) Stockdale Harbor, just S of Graveyard Point, has two    Anchorage, exposed to N and NE winds, can be had in the broad
 small tree-covered islets in the S part of the harbor. Its N half is    cove on the S side of the harbor in 12 to 15 fathoms, rocky bottom.
 clear except for a kelp-marked 1 l/4-fathom shoal 0.4 mile off the N  Discovery Point, the S entrance point to Snug Harbor, is bold and
 entrance point. Anchorage can be had in 15 to 20 fathoms near the    high.
 first bight in the N side of the harbor. Small boats can anchor at the  (621)  In 1965, an uncharted 15-fathom-deep pinnacle was dis-
 head of the harbor. The chain of detached shoals and rocks extend-    covered 1.5 miles 040ï¿½ from Discovery Point.
 ing along the middle of the harbor N of the islets must be avoided.  (622) Marsha Bay, 5 miles N of Discovery Point, has a crooked
  (610)  A 2/4-fathom rock, lightly marked by kelp, is 1.3 miles    narrow entrance and is suitable only for small craft. The depths are
 SW of Graveyard Point.                                             great-except at its N end, where anchorage can be selected in 15
  (611)  Montague Point is the large rounded N end of the W side    fathoms or less. The entrance is between two submerged rocks,
 of Montague Island. The shoreline is foul from Graveyard Point to    and the channel then leads S of the islands which choke the mouth
 Montague Point.                                                    of the bay. Enter in midchannel between the outer island and the S
  (612) Applegate Rock and the surrounding reef area were sub-    point of the bay, then favor the S point of the islands when passing
stantially uplifted during the March 1964 earthquake. Applegate    through the narrowest part of the channel. A sunken wreck is just
Rock, marked by a light, now bares about 10 feet at high water    W of the narrowest part of the channel.
and the reef bares at high water for a distance of about 0.5 mile,  (623) Manning Rocks, about 2 miles off the entrance to Bay of
with many off-lying rocks baring at low water. The area should be    Isles, are three pinnacles which, because of the 1964 earthquake
avoided. At the NE end of this area is a 41/2-fathom spot 3.5 miles    uplift, are now bare at low water. Surrounded by deep water, they
 162ï¿½ from the summit of Seal Island. Detached from the area's W    are the worst dangers on the E side of Knight Island. Between
limit is a 2'/2-fathom spot 5.2 miles 1960 from Seal Island summit.  Manning Rocks and the foul ground in the entrance to Bay of Isles
  (613) The passage between Seal Island and the reef area has    the bottom is very irregular, although the least depth found is 8
ample depth for a width of about 2 miles. The broken bottom    fathoms. This area should be avoided.
within 1.5 miles of Seal Island and that adjacent to the reef area  (624) Bayof sles,ontheEsideofKnight sland,hasnumerous
should be avoided.                                                 islets and pinnacle rocks, submerged and awash, and is suitable
  (614)  The passage between the reef area and Green Island has    only for small vessels proceeding with caution and preferably at
ample depth for a width of about 1 mile. The 9-fathom spot and    low water. Secure anchorage is available in South Arm and West
the broken bottom in its vicinity, about 2 miles NW of Green
thel   so      bre a   ottom in its vicinity, about    12 miles NW of Green    Arm, the latter being easier of access. Depths in the bay are great,
Island, should be avoided. The 25-foot-high rock 1.2 miles NNW     and the deep water extends close to the rocks, which are not
of Putnam Point is a good leading mark in entering the passage    marked by kelp.
from N. Heading for this rock on course 222ï¿½ until about halfway
through the passage, a vessel will be assured of deep water.        (625)  Foul ground extends 0.5 mile SE from the N point in the
  (615)  Obtaining radar fixes in this area is reported to be    approach to Bay of Isles. At the end of the foul ground is a rock
  (615) Obtaln i n    g  radar fixes in this area Risn reported to be    with 10 feet over it, 0.9 mile 073ï¿½ from an island near the N shore.
Island give poor returns.                                           (626) To enter Bay of Isles, pass in midchannel N of the islets in
 (616)  Latouche Islands on the W  side of Montague Strait, is    the middle of the bay. Continue 0.5 mile past the islets, and pass in
  (616) Latouche Island, on the W                                    side of Montague Strait, is midchannel W  of the islands near the S shore. Then keep about
wooded to about 500 feet, and above this is covered with moss and    midchannel W  of the islands near the S shore. Then keep about
bushes, except the highest peaks, which are bare. The E shore is    150 yards off the N shore in entering West Arm. Anchor in the
precipitous and the 100-fathom curve is less than 0.3 mile off in    middle of the broad part of the arm i 9 to 11 fathoms.
places.
 (617) Danger Island, 1.4 miles S of Latouche Island, is low and    (627) Chart 16702.-Latouche Passage has its seaward
wooded. The SE point of the island is surrounded by reefs and    entrance between Danger Island and Elrington Island. The
rocks, and a kelp bed extends from Latouche Island to Danger    entrance bar, with depths of 51/2 to 11 fathoms, has sometimes
Island. There is visible evidence on the nearby shorelines that this    been crossed by large vessels proceeding W from Latouche. The
area uplifted 12 to 15 feet because of the March 1964 earthquake,    recommended route, however, is by way of Elrington Passage and
and consequently passage between the two islands should not be    the N part of Latouche Passage. A 23/4-fathom spot and a reported
attempted.                                                         4-fathom spot are 0.3 mile and about 1.2 miles, respectively, W of
 (618) Point Helen, the SE extremity of Knight Island, is marked    Danger Island.
by Point Helen Light (60009.2'N., 147045.8'W.), 35 feet above       (628) Occasionally with W winds large pieces of glacial ice drift
the water and shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white    into Latouche Passage from Knight Island Passage.
diamond-shaped daymark.                                             (629) Latouche Passage, E of Elrington Island, is 7 miles long
 (619)  Hogan Bay, on the E side of Knight Island, 2.5 miles N of    and 0.7 to 1 mile wide with depths under 30 fathoms in most
Point Helen, has anchorage in the middle, 0.6 mile inside the    places. Anchorage can be selected nearly anywhere in this channel
entrance, in 16 to 20 fathoms. The bottom is rocky and uneven,    in suitable depths, but it should be avoided in strong S winds.
and the anchorage is exposed E. A rock, covered 13/4 fathoms, is    Avoid the E part of the passage in the vicinity of Izmaylov Island,
about 0.2 mile off the N shore of the bay and about 0.8 mile inside    the crescent-shaped islet 2.2 miles SW of Chicken Island. Much
the entrance. Small craft can pass through the narrow channel at    kelp is in the passage back of the islet.
the head of the bay and find secure anchorage in the inner cove in  (630)  From Point Grace, the N point of Latouche Island, to the
12 fathoms or less. The spit on the W side of the channel is bold,    N end of Elrington Island, a distance of 5 miles, Latouche Passage
and should be favored when entering the inner cove.                is about 1.8 miles wide, with deep water. A wooded islet, with a



                                                4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                 109


grass-covered rock close to its N end, is near Evans Island and    (646)  A pyramidal pinnacle rock, about 8 feet high with grass on
0.8 mile N of Bishop Rock.                                        top, is about 250 yards off the N point at the SW entrance to
 (631) Latouche, on the W side of Latouche Island 2.3 miles S of    Elrington Passage, about 1.4 miles NE of Lonetree Point Light. A
Point Grace, is the site of the abandoned copper mine of the Ken-    grass-covered rock, about 10 feet high with some brush on its
necott Copper Corp. The buildings are in ruins.                   summit, is near the angular mountain point on the E side of the
 (632) The cove immediately E of Powder Point is shoal, and a    passage, 4 miles from the N entrance. In the SE angle of the pas-
reef makes out 100 yards from the point. Anchorage can be had    sage, 1.4 miles S of the grass-covered rock, anchorage can be had
about 600 yards N of Powder Point in 10 to 15 fathoms.            in 5 to 20 fathoms, muddy bottom, depending on the swinging
 (633) A rock with 21/2 fathoms over it is off the point next S    room required.
from Powder Point.                                                 (647) The N end of Elrington Passage is marked by Elrington
 (634) Chicken Island, 3.5 miles SW of Point Grace, is sepa-    Passage Light (60002.8'N., 148000.5'W.), 25 feet above the
rated from Latouche Island by a pass 350 yards wide with a depth    water and shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white dia-
of only 4 feet.                                                   mond-shaped daymark, on the S extremity of the island W of Bet-
 (635) Horseshoe Bay is on the W side of Latouche Island, 4.5    tles Island.
miles SW of Point Grace. Its S half is shoal; small craft entering  (648) Sawmill Bay indents the E side of Evans Island near the N
close to the N point of the bay, can anchor in its N end in 18 to 20    entrance to Elrington Passage. The end of the long peninsula on
feet. Just N of the S point of the bay is a rock covered at high    the SE side of the inner part of the bay is marked by a light, 14 feet
water. Vessels can anchor about 0.3 mile off the entrance in 16 to    above the water, shown from a skeleton tower with a green square
18 fathoms.                                                      daymark, and visible through the entrance N of Bettles Island. The
                                                                    entrance from Elrington Passage is 700 yards W of Elrington Pas-
                                                                    sage Light between two islands W of Bettles Island; a buoy marks
 (636) Elrington Passage, W of Elrington Island, is generally    a reef about 0.5 mile NW of Elrington Passage Light which
used by vessels proceeding between Prince William Sound and    uncovers 3 feet
points to the W. It is 8 miles long, 0.5 to 1 mile wide, deep and
                                                                     (649) A reef covered 3V/4 fathoms is in the N approach, 1.8 miles
clear. Anchorage is not easily found because of the great depths.    E           A reef covered 3'/4  fathom   is in the N  approach, 1.8 miles
                                                                    E of Sawmill Bay Light. A rocky 8'/2 fathom patch is 900 yards N
The passage is well marked.
                                                                    of the peak of Bettles Island.
 (637) Currents.-The flood current sets NE and the ebb SW with                          o the NE side of Sawmill Bay entrance,
                                                                     (650) Johnson Cove, on the NE side of Sawmill Bay entrance,
                                                                    has an abandoned saltery at its head. The cove is foul with 8 feet in
 (638) Elrington Island, high and mountainous, is between    the basin at its head.
Latouche Passage and Elrington Passage. The SW end of the          (651) Bettles Island, the largest of the high wooded islands at
island has three prominent points between which are South Twin    the entrance to Sawmill Bay, has foul ground along the N shore.
Bay and North Twin Bay.                                            (652) Local magnetic disturbance was reported in Sawmill
 (639) Point Elrington, the SW end of the island, is a small hill,    Bay and in the waters between Elrington and Bettles Islands in
high and wooded, with cliffs at the water, and is joined to the    1974. Extent of the disturbance is not known.
island by a sand and gravel neck just above high water. A hill,    (653) Crab Bay is a small indentation on the N shore of Saw-
1,060 feet high, 1.4 miles E of the point, has a low divide about    mill Bay. A saltery just inside the W entrance point has a wharf
100 feet high at the E end.                                      that is in ruins. A reef covered 1 fathom is 200 yards SE of the
 (640) Point Elrington Light (59056.2'N., 148ï¿½14.9'W.), 30 feet    ruins.
above the water and shown from a skeleton tower with a red and     (654) Port Benney was formerly the site of a saltery just W of
white diamond-shaped daymark, marks the extremity of the point.    Crab Bay.
 (641) South Twin Bay is free from dangers and affords conve-     (655) Port Ashton, on the NW shore of Sawmill Bay, has been
nient anchorage in 17 to 20 fathoms, hard bottom with patches of    destroyed by fire except for a small wharf suitable for vessels up
sand and gravel. It is exposed to W and SW winds.                 to 50 feet long. The wharf had about 12 feet alongside in 1966. A
 (642) North Twin Bay is free from dangers except for a rock    group of rocks, awash at extreme low water, are about 115 yards
awash at low water about 250 yards off the S shore 0.5 mile NE of    offshore and about 260 yards NE from the wharf.
the S entrance point. Anchorage can be found in the center of the  (656) Port San Juan is at the SW end of Sawmill Bay. A wharf
bay in 13 to 17 fathoms. Of the two bays, the best shelter is usu-    with a 200-foot face on a heading of 354ï¿½, had a least depth along-
ally found in the S one.                                          side of about 30 feet, in 1966. A waterfall is behind the fish hatch-
 (643) The N point at the SW end of Elrington Island is a high    cry.
hill, connected with the island at its SE end by a long, low,      (657) A rock covered 1/2 fathom, is 700 yards E from the wharf;
wooded neck. Lonetree Point, the most N extremity of the point,    a buoy is 100 yards N from it. Another rock, covered I I/4 fathoms,
is marked by a prominent lone tree and a light, 30 feet above the    is 325 yards NE from the wharf; a buoy is about 175 yards S of it.
water, shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-    In the approach to this wharf are some spots with less than 27 feet
shaped daymark.                                                   over them.
  (644) On the SE end of Evans Island is a light, 20 feet above the  (658) Careful maneuvering is required for a large vessel to get
water, shown from a small house with a red and white daymark.     away from this wharf safely. The practice is to swing the stern out
 (645) A high island is in the bend at the S end of the passage    and back toward the island before turning.
close to Elrington Island, from which its SE point is separated by a  (659) Anchorage.-Sawmill Bay has no good anchorages. Ves-
narrow pass dry at low water. Anchorage in about 34 fathoms with    sels sometimes anchor between the oval-shaped island and the
mud bottom and limited swinging room is reported S of the high    cannery, but the holding ground is poor.
island in what is locally called Fox Farm Bay. This anchorage      (660) Sawmill Bay can be entered by either the NE or the SW
offers good protection in most weather.                           entrance. The former is recommended because of its greater width.



 110                                            4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


In proceeding toward the SW end of the bay, vessels can pass on    oms, 1 mile farther S and extending 0.3 mile from the S shore,
either side of the small oval-shaped island in the middle of the bay.    should be avoided.
If passing on the N side, the island should be favored to avoid the  (671)  The only good anchorage in Prince of Wales Passage is in
rocks off Port Ashton.                                             circular Squirrel Bay, at the SW point of Evans Island. Anchor-
  (661)  Tides and currents.-The diurnal range of tide in Sawmill    age can be found near the center of the bay in 12 to 22 fathoms,
Bay is 11.3 feet. Little or no current exists in the bay.          sand and gravel bottom of fair holding qualities.
                                                                      (672) Glacial ice is sometimes discharged through Prince of
  (662)  Prince of Wales Passage, between Evans Island and    Wales Passage.
Bainbridge Island, is between 10 and I I miles long and from 0.5    (673)  Currents.-Off Amerk Point at the narrowest part of the
to 2 miles wide. It offers a direct route from Knight Island Passage    passage, the flood sets N at a velocity of 0.8 knot and ebbs SW at a
for vessels bound SW along the coast; otherwise Elrington Pas-    velocity of 2.5 knots. Between Flemming and Evans Islands at the
sage is more direct and is generally used.                         N end of the passage the velocity is from 1.5 to 2 knots.
  (663) Prince of Wales Passage has several dangers. The princi-
pal channel at the N entrance is E of Flemming Island and the 2/4-  (674) Bainbridge Passage, between Bainbridge Island and the
fathom shoal about 0.5 mile S of the island, then W  of Iktua    mainland, extends NE for 10 miles from Port Bainbridge to
Rocks. A foul area with a depth of 8/V2 fathoms is about 500 yards    Knight Island Passage. Bold Point Waters, 5 miles N of Point
offshore and about 0.5 mile S of the prominent point on the E side    Pyke, is on the mainland side of the entrance from Port Bain-
of Bainbridge Island, about 2.7 miles S of Flemming Island. Pass    bridge.
about 0.5 mile offshore to avoid the foul area, then follow off     (675) Two outlying dangers are in the passage. A ledge that
Bainbridge Island at a distance of 500 yards, pass the broken    uncovers 3 feet is about 200 yards off the point about 3 miles S of
ground about 4 miles S of Flemming Island and head for Amerk    Point Countess, the NW point at the E entrance to Bainbridge
Point, the prominent low sand point with a fringe of trees, 3 miles    Passage. Another ledge that uncovers 4 feet is about 250 yards off
farther S on Bainbridge Island.                                    the N shore, 1.8 miles E of Point Waters, the NW point at the W
  (664) The channel W of Flemming Island has considerable foul    entrance to the passage. Although there is deep water between
ground and should be avoided by strangers, except possibly small    both these ledges and the N shore, vessels should pass SW of
craft proceeding with caution and preferably at low water. Good    thm.
anchorage in 4 to 16 fathoms, mud bottom, is W of the S end of      (676)  A recommended anchorage in the passage is in the small
Flemming Island at Panhat Point on Bainbridge Island. To enter    bay about 2.2 miles S of Point Countess. Care should be taken,
the anchorage area from the S, pass 300 yards off the point on the    however, to avoid the rock that uncovers 6 feet in the middle of the
N course until 500 yards N of the point, head W and then S to the    bay and the ledge that extends off the NE entrance point.
anchorage.                                                          (677)  Currents.-The tidal current in Bainbridge Passage floods
                                                                    NE at a velocity of 3.1 knots and ebbs SW at 2.4 knots.
 (665) Gage Island, wooded and with a group of partly bare
rocks off its S side, is 0.5 mile N of Flemming Island and is a good
mark for the N entrance of Prince of Wales Passage.                 (678)  Chart 16700.-Knight Island Passage, on the W  and S
                                                                    sides of Knight Island, is used by vessels calling at bays on the W
 (666)  Ship Island, with a few trees, is the S of two on the E side    of Knight Island. With E winds it offers a smoother channel
of Flemming Island. A reef bare at low water extends 225 yards
SE.                                                                from Latouche Passage to the N end of the Naked Island group
                                                                    than the generally used route E of Knight Island.
 (667)  Iktua Bay opens to the N on the E side of the passage       (679) From its N entrance between Herring Point and Crafton
about 1.5 miles S of Flemming Island. The bay, 1.5 miles long, is   Island, where it is 5 miles wide, the passage extends S for about 16
about 0.6 mile wide at the entrance and narrows to about 0.4 mile
                                                                    miles to Pleiades Islands, with a least width of 2 miles at the SE
midway of its length. The E shore of the bay has several off-lying    end of Chenega Island. The channel leads E of the Pleiades, where
dangers and may be followed 300 to 350 yards offshore to the    it is 1.2 miles wide between them and Point of Rocks. From these
head of the bay and anchorage in 3 to 14 fathoms, mud bottom.    islands the passage has a SE trend for 10 miles, with widths of 3 to
The W shore of the bay may be followed about 200 yards off for    4 miles, to Montague Strait between Point Helen and the N end of
0.7 mile until abeam of the S of two small islets. Good anchorage  Latouche Island.
for small craft in 2 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom, is E of these islets.  (68  The  depths in the passage range from 40 to 400 fathoms.
                                                                      <680) The depths in the passage range from 40 to 400 fathoms.
 (668) Iktua Rocks, a group of bare rocks, highest about 3 feet,    The W side is generally bold, except for the bight between Crafton
are 0.4 to 0.5 mile off Evans Island and 1.5 miles S of Flemming    Island and Point Nowell. From Lower Herring Bay to Pleiades
Island.                                                            Islands, the E shore is foul for 0.8 mile off, with islands, rocks,
 (669) Guguak Bay is on the E side of the passage about 1.3    and reefs. The bays on the W side of Knight Island are not good
miles S of Iktua Rocks. A rock that bares at half tide marks the W  anchorages. Small craft can anchor in nearly all the arms of the
side of the narrow entrance. Rocks, that uncover, are across a nar-    bays, but the bottom is generally rocky.
row portion of the bay, about 0.2 mile S of the entrance. There is  (681) Pleiades Islands, in the middle of the bend in Knight
anchorage in 33/4 to 7 fathoms outside the bay entrance.           Island Passage, are a chain of seven wooded islands 1 mile long.
 (670) Several wooded islands are on the E side of the passage    The southernmost and largest is about 90 feet high. The rock,
from 3.2 to 5 miles S of Flemming Island. The area between them    about 400 yards W of the middle of the chain, bares at low water.
and Evans Island is foul and the tidal currents have a velocity of 2    Two large rocks, covered 3 feet, are reported on the 9-fathom bank
to 3 knots. Near midchannel W of the middle island is an area of    about 200 yards E of the N end of the southernmost island. Pleia-
broken ground about 0.7 mile long on which the least depth found    des Light (60014.4'N., 148ï¿½00.5'W.), 30 feet above the water, is
is 51/4 fathoms. It should be avoided by vessels; the better channel    shown from a small house with a red and white diamond-shaped
follows the W shore. The broken area with depths less than 3 fath-    daymark on the N end of the northernmost island of the group.



                                               4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                    111


 (682) Currents.-The tidal currents in Knight Island Passage       ined from the 50-fathom curve at the entrance to the head of the N
have a velocity of 1 to 2 knots.                                    arm and found to be clear of dangers except those charted.
 (683) Ice.-Considerable glacial ice has been seen in the passage    (694) Strangers may have some difficulty in recognizing the
S of Pleiades Islands. It comes E between Point Countess and    entrance to Drier Bay, as there are several groups of islands on the
Chenega Island, and drifts as far as Latouche Passage with the    E side of Knight Island Passage, both N and S of the entrance.
ebb.                                                                Approaching from N, the island in the mouth of Johnson Bay is a
                                                                    good mark. The chart is the guide.
 (684)  Chart 16702.-Little Bay, on the S side of Knight Island,     (695) Clam Islands, two in number, low and wooded, are
1.8 miles NW of Point Helen, has no known dangers except for    between New Year Islands and Rocky Point, the N point of Drier
the rocks awash close to the head. The depths are 13 to 18 fath-    Bay. A rocky patch with 33/4 fathoms over it is 0.3 mile S from
oms, rocky bottom, and it is a fair anchorage except with S winds.  Clam Islands, about in the middle of the entrance.
 (685) Mummy Bay, in the S end of Knight Island, is deep and         (696)  Range Isle, small and wooded, is close to the N side of
clear, but rocks extend 0.3 mile from the head. Small vessels can    Drier Bay and 2 miles E of New Year Islands. The line of Range
anchor 0.5 mile from the head in 15 to 20 fathoms. Northeast    Isle just clear of the N shore E of it, leads about midway between
Arm is an anchorage for small craft.                                Mummy Island and New Year Islands, and is sometimes used as a
 (686) Thumb Bay is a small inlet opening into the S part of    range for entering the bay.
Mummy Bay. The bay affords anchorage for small vessels in 12 to      (697)  Cathead Bay is on the S side of Drier Bay, 2 miles from
22 fathoms with limited swinging room and rocky bottom. No          Mummy Island. Two Islands are in the upper part of the bay. The
swell makes in the anchorage and the holding ground is good. The    soundings taken indicate deep water, but it has not been thor-
anchorage is protected from winds from all directions except NW.    oughly surveyed. In the entrance of the bay, 0. l mile from the W
 (687) Lucky Bay and Italian Bay are unimportant inlets on the    side, is a rock with 3/4 fathoms over it.
S shore of Knight Island between Long Channel and Mummy Bay.         (698)  Cathead Shoal, with a least known depth of 3 /2 fathoms,
                                                                    is about 500 yards NE from Cat Head, the point on the W side of
 (688)  Chart 16704.-Squire Island and Mummy Island, two    Cathead Bay entrance. Entering Cathead Bay, favor the E side to
large islands on the E side of Knight Island Passage, are separated    avoid Cathead Shoal and the 3/4-fathom rock, then proceed with
from Knight Island by Long Channel. Squire Island, the S one, is    caution on either side of the islands at its head.
the higher of the two. A drying ledge is 0.3 mile SW from Squire     (699) Mallard Bay, on the S side 2.5 miles inside Mummy
Point, the S end of the island. A rock awash is about 0.2 mile W of    Island, is foul for a distance of 0.2 mile from its head. Approach-
the drying ledge. Two small islands are 0.3 mile off the W  side of    ing with care; anchorage can be made 0.4 to 0.7 mile from the
Squire Island, and from these islands a large reef extends 0.4 mile    head in 17 to 26 fathoms. No swell makes into the anchorage, but
W to Point of Rocks, the latter awash at high water. The channel    williwaws are possible during heavy SE weather.
between Mummy and Squire Islands leading into Long Channel           (700) Barnes Cove is obstructed by ledges at its entrance, and
has rocky, broken bottom, and should be used with caution.          shoals make out from the shores. Small craft entering with care
 (689) Long Channel is a deep inside passage for small craft    can find good anchorage in 8 fathoms. Vessels can anchor 300 to
from Drier Bay to the S part of Knight Island Passage. It is 4.5    500 yards off the entrance in 20 to 22 fathoms.
miles long and the midchannel is clear as far as known. The chan-    (701) The point on the NE side of Barnes Cove is prominent and
nel is generally 0.3 to 0.4 mile wide, but narrows to 175 yards    high, with bare rocky slides. A reef extends 150 yards off the NW
abreast Mummy Island and to 50 yards 0.8 mile from the N end of    side of this point.
Squire Island. A rock, covered at high water, is in the N entrance   (702)  Chase Island, small and wooded, is 700 yards from the
0.3 mile E from the N end of Mummy Island. The tidal currents    NW side of Drier Bay and 1.8 miles E of Range Isle. A ledge that
have little velocity.                                               bares extends 300 yards S from Chase Island.
 (690) Copper Bay, on the E side of Long Channel, is abreast the    (703) A rock awash at half tide is 0.4 mile NE of Chase Island.
N end of Squire Island. Its entrance is very narrow and foul, and    Another rock bares at lowest tide between the half-tide rock and
suitable only for small craft with local knowledge. The tidal cur-    Mountain Point.
rents have considerable velocity in the entrance.                    (704)  Northeast Cove, at the head of Drier Bay, is small and has
  (691)  Mummy Island, on the S side of the entrance to Drier    shoals at its entrance and also inside for 0.1 mile from its head.
Bay, is high and wooded; on the S half of the island are patches of    Small craft entering with care can find good anchorage in 4 to 5
grass. Reefs extend 0.3 mile SW from the N end of the island, and    fathoms. Vessels can anchor 300 to 500 yards off the entrance in
wooded islets with reefs around them extend 0.6 mile W from the    17 to 20 fathoms. A rock with 23/4 fathoms over it is about 300
middle of the island.                                               yards offshore, 500 yards W from the entrance. Anchorage can be
 (692)  New Year Islands are on the N side of the approach to    selected about 0.3 mile from shore in the N end of Drier Bay, in
Drier Bay. They are wooded, and the largest is 200 feet high. A     about 20 fathoms.
light, 23 feet above the water and shown from a skeleton tower       (705)  Port Audrey is the N arm of Drier Bay. A rock covered
with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark, is on the most S       13/4 fathoms is about 500 yards S of the entrance to the lagoon at
timbered island of the group. Bare reefs extend 250 yards SW        the head of the arm. The lagoon has depths of 7 feet in the
from the light. Rocks that uncover are 500 yards 019ï¿½ from the N    entrance and good anchorage inside for small craft in 6 to 10 fath-
island, and are a serious danger in the channel between New Year    oms. A flat extends out 250 yards from the head of the lagoon.
Islands and the islands to the N.                                   Violent winds blow in and out of Port Audrey.
  (693)  Drier Bay has its main approach between New Year             (706) Squirrel Island, 1 mile N of New Year Islands and 0.5
Islands and Mummy Island. The SE shore of the bay is indented    mile from the E shore, is the northernmost of the islands extending
by a number of smaller bays and coves. Drier Bay has been exam-     1.5 miles N of the entrance to Drier Bay. It is high and wooded.




112                                            4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


  (707) Johnson Bay is suitable only for small craft; strangers    bottom, in the small bight in the N side of the W arm; the latter is a
should enter at low water only, and proceed with caution in the    very good anchorage and is directly off a bare cliff that is visible
vicinity of all broken ground. A wooded island is in the mouth of    for some distance. Ice from Icy Bay often obstructs the entrance to
the bay. The entrance, N of the island, is about 125 yards wide    Whale Bay.
between reefs that bare. The axis of the channel is about 125 yards  (717) Dangerous Passage separates Chenega Island from the
from the N shore. From Knight Island Passage, a course for the N    mainland. The N entrance of the passage is obstructed for a dis-
point at the entrance in range with a pyramidal peak of black rock,    tance of about 0.6 mile off the N end of Chenega Island by a group
2,090 feet high, above the head of the bay, will lead between the    of islets and rocks, including Junction Island, which is high and
outlying dangers to the entrance. Water can be obtained from a fall    wooded. The northernmost obstruction of the group is a rock
near the head.                                                      awash at low water. It is difficult to pick up the N entrance at
 (708)  A covered rock, dangerous for small craft, is 0. 1 mile S of    night.
Aguliak Island.                                                       (718)  About 5.5 miles from the N entrance, Dangerous Passage
                                                                    is restricted by an island and a group islets. Delenia Island, in the
 (709)  Charts 16701, 16705.-Channel Rock, a prominent. bare,    middle of the passage, is wooded. A small grassy islet is 350 yards
black rock about 6 feet high, is about I mile off the entrance of    N of Delenia Island; a 3'/2-fathom shoal is 450 yards N of the
Lower Herring Bay, and is a good mark for Knight Island Passage.    grassy islet. The deepest and straightest channel is between this
A rock that uncovers is 1.4 miles 025ï¿½ from Channel Rock and 0.6    shoal and the nearby W  shore of Dangerous Passage, and is 225
mile from the shore of Knight Island. From this rock S, the E side    yards wide. The channel to the E and S of Delenia Island is wider,
of Knight Island Passage is very broken and foul, with deep water    but a rock, bare only at lowest tides, must be avoided. The rock is
extending close to the dangers.                                     250 yards E from the grassy islet.
 (710)  Lower Herring Bay is suitable only for small craft. The      (719)  The best anchorage in Dangerous Passage is in the vicinity
best entrance is E of Channel Rock. The principal danger in the    of Delenia Island. There is good holding ground about 0.3 mile
bay is a rock that uncovers 9 feet which is in the middle, 600 yards    SW of the Island in 15 to 20 fathoms.
from the E end of the bay. The passage between this rock and the     (720)  Granite Bay, on the N side of the N entrance to Danger-
point N, between the two arms, should be used with caution. A       ous Passage, has irregular depths and is not recommended for
midchannel course should be followed in the arms. Small craft can
anchor in the cove on the S side 1.2 miles inside the entrance of
                                                                      (721) Paddy Bay is about 3 miles SW of Granite Bay. A rock
the bay, in not less than about 10 fathoms. Water can be obtained
                 ~~~in this cove from a fall.       ~awash at low water, is 330 yards W of the S end of the island near
in this cove from a fall.
 (71 1)  A narrow deep passage, suitable for small craft, follows    the head of the bay, and near the middle of the entrance to the NW
the shore inside the islands between Lower Herring and Johnson
Bays. Strangers should take it at low water and exercise care. In    either of the two arms at the head
1968, a reef was reported at the entrance to Lower Herring Bay in    (722) Masked Bay indents the Chenega Island shore of Danger-
60022'55"N., 147ï¿½52'00"W., and, in 1974, a 11/4-fathom spot was    ous Passage opposite Paddy Bay. The wooded islets in the
found about 0.4 mile SW  of the reef in 60022'42"N.,                entrance leave a channel only 100 yards wide. Small vessels will
147o52'42"W.                                                        find excellent anchorage in the bay, but local knowledge is
 (712) Chenega Island, on the W side of Knight Island Passage,    required to anchor
has a bold but fairly regular shore bordering on Knight Island Pas-  (723) Ewan Bay indents the N shore of Dangerous Passage
sage. Its highest summit is near the center. The S shore of Chenega    about 5 miles from the N entrance. Several rocks and islets fringe
Island is indented by several small bays where small vessels can    both shores of the bay, but midchannel is deep and clear. The
find anchorage and shelter from the prevailing NE storms.           entrance to the lagoon at the head of the bay is obstructed by rap-
 (713)  The March 1964 earthquake caused a bottom uplift of    ids. Small vessels can anchor at the head of the bay, but it is rather
4.9 feet at Chenega Island. Shoaling and new dangers may            deep.
exist requiring extreme caution until a complete survey is           (724) Jackpot Bay is about 3 miles SW of Ewan Bay. Jackpot
made of the area.                                                   Island, wooded, is near the middle of the entrance. The narrows,
 (714)  Chenega, an abandoned village, is at the head of a cove     1.5 miles above the entrance, have a width of 250 yards. At the
indenting the S end of the island, which is marked by three small    upper end of the narrows, a midchannel rock uncovers 8 feet. This
wooded islets. A rock bares 4 feet 150 yards N of the northern-    rock is on range with the E tangent of the narrows and the highest
most islet. A school and church in the village were reported in    point of Jackpot Island. Depths in the bay are generally too deep to
ruins in 1966. There is a prominent landslide back of the aban-    anchor. Small craft can find good all-weather anchorage in either
doned village.                                                      of the two basins in the N part of the bay; the entrances are narrow
 (715) Small vessels can anchor in the cove fronting Chenega, in    but free of dangers.
5 to 15 fathoms, soft bottom. The anchorage is only partly pro-
tected from the S by the entrance islets and is not recommended in   (725)  Charts 16700, 16701.-Icy Bay, at the SW extremity of
S weather. To enter, pass 300 yards W  of the entrance islets on a    Dangerous Passage, is separated from Port Bainbridge by a nar-
000ï¿½ course until within 300 yards of the shore, then swing    row neck of land of moderate height. Verdant Island, a precipi-
sharply to the right and head for the cross on the church in ruins.    tous, high, wooded island is off the E entrance point. Active
Anchor in a suitable depth.                                         glaciers in Nassau Fiord and at the head of Icy Bay keep the bay
 (716)  Whale Bay indents the mainland 4 miles SW of Chenega.    filled with ice most of the time, and make it dangerous for small
A low portage at the head of the W arm connects with the head of    boats to enter. Anchorage and good shelter from ice can be found
Port Bainbridge. The bay is deep, but small craft can find anchor-    in Gaamaak Cove on the W  shore of Icy Bay, 0.8 mile N of the
age along the E shore of the S arm, and in 6 to 10 fathoms, mud    entrance to Nassau Fiord.




                                               4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                  113


 (726) Ice.-All the bays in this vicinity are likely to freeze over  (739) A constant current sets SW along the Kenai Peninsula.
in cold weather. The ice floes from Icy Bay at times make naviga-    (See remarks on currents in chapter 3.)
tion difficult W of the Pleiades Islands and extend N into Danger-  (740) Caution.-A danger zone of an air-to-air gunnery practice
ous Passage. The discharge is continuous but irregular in volume,    area is in Blying Sound. (See 334.1300, chapter 2, for limits and
and is mainly SE. When heavy it blocks the entrance to Whale    regulations.)
Bay and passes S of the Pleiades Islands. Isolated bergs of consid-  (741)  Cape Puget is a prominent headland with an eroded bluff.
erable size frequently drift E as far as Latouche and are a menace    At the foot of the slope is a conical rock that is prominent from the
to navigation. Ice floes have been known to pass S through Bain-    E or W. Several bare rocks are off the cape, the farthest being
bridge Passage and then N into Prince of Wales Passage. No ice    about 0.2 mile.
has been observed E of Delenia Island.                              (742) Puget Bay, the first indentation W of Cape Puget, is fun-
                                                                    nel shaped and extends N for about 6 miles. The bay is deep
 (727) Chart 16683.-Procession Rocks, 4.3 miles N of Point    throughout and free from dangers except for rocks and reefs close
Elrington Light, are a group of jagged rocks, the highest rising to    inshore.
about 70 feet. There are four principal rocks, with a number of     (743) Goat Harbor is an inlet on the E side of the bay about 4
smaller rocks and reefs surrounding them. Deep water extends    miles from Cape Puget. It affords good anchorage in 12 to 14 fath-
close up to the rocks. Fish pens are about I mile W of the rocks at    oms, sticky mud bottom, but is exposed to the swell from the SW.
the entrance of Port Bainbridge.                                   A gravel and shingle bar with a least known depth of 52' fathoms
 (728) Port Bainbridge is a deep body of water that extends    extends across the entrance. A rock awash is 0.2 mile W of the
about 12 miles N from a line joining Cape Puget and Procession    small islet off the N entrance point. Near the head of Puget.Bay,
Rocks. Depths of over 100 fathoms are carried nearly to the head    and on the E side, is a small cove that affords shelter for small
of the bay.                                                        craft. A rock awash is about 100 yards off the S entrance point.
 (729) Point Pyke, the E entrance point to Port Bainbridge, is a    (744) Cape Junken is a bold, rounding headland with eroded
prominent headland that rises almost vertically.                   bluffs and landslides. At the foot of Cape Junken are two steps that
 (730) At the head of Port Bainbridge, the W arm extends about    show up prominently from offshore. In thick weather this feature
1.5 miles to the N. The water in this arm is deep, but the entrance    is valuable in identifying the cape.
is blocked by a gravel bar with a least depth of about 1 /2 fathoms.  (745) Johnstone Bay is a large open bight W of Cape Junken. A
The best water is close to the E entrance point.                   black sand beach is across the head of the bay. Deep water extends
 (731) Bainbridge Glacier, about 1 mile wide, discharges into    close up, there being 50 fathoms within 0.5 mile of the beach.
Port Bainbridge opposite Bainbridge Passage.                       Excelsior Glacier terminates 0.5 mile from Johnstone Bay and
 (732) Auk Bay, on the W  side of Port'Bainbridge, opposite    drains through a stream at the E end of the sand beach. A small
Point Pyke, is small but affords good anchorage in 20 fathoms,    cove with a shingle beach is at the E entrance to the bay, but it is
muddy bottom. A rock that uncovers is about 150 yards off the N    wide open to the SW and affords little shelter. A black rock, 35
shore, 1 mile inside the entrance. The S entrance point is marked    feet high, marks the W  entrance, and there is a low rock nearly
by a prominent pinnacle rock.                                      awash at the E entrance.
 (,133)  A prominent brown rock about 10 feet high is 0.3 mile off-  (746)  Cape Fairfield is a bold, rounding cape with eroded bluffs
shore, 2.5 miles N of Cape Puget.                                  and many rockslides. A large pinnacle rock, 126 feet high, is off
                                                                    the SE pitch of the cape.
 (734) Chart 16702.-Swanson Bay, a long narrow bay just N of        (747) Whidbey Bay, a large open bight just W of Cape Fairfield,
Point Pyke and extending 3.5 miles to the E, is deep, but no good    has a black sand beach at the head. About 3 miles up the valley is
anchorages are available. Indifferent anchorage can be found near    a prominent hanging glacier.
the head of the bay in 28 to 30 fathoms, mud bottom.                (748) Depths shoal to 12 fathoms about 1 mile from the sand
 (735) Hogg Bay, about 2 miles N from Point Pyke, is the largest    beach, and anchorage can be had in black sand and glacial silt.
bay in Port Bainbridge. It is free from dangers except for a rock    Both sides of the bay are foul, with numerous rocks and reefs
that uncovers 3 feet, 0.2 mile off the N shore about 1 mile inside    extending 100 to 200 yards off the rocky beaches. A stream enters
the entrance, and a rock awash at low water 180 yards off the S    at the W end of the sand beach.
shore, 1.7 miles from Swanson Point.                                (749)  Cape Mansfield is bold, with high eroded bluffs and rock-
 (736) Fair anchorage can be had near the head of the bay at the    slides. A small pinnacle rock awash at high water is about 0.3 mile
entrance of the N arm, in 25 fathoms, hard bottom, with patches of    off the cape. Deep water is close up to this rock.
sand and gravel. Small craft can find excellent shelter at the head  (750) Just W  of Cape Mansfield is a small cove with a sand
of the N arm. A beach suitable for beaching small craft is behind    beach at its head. Except for this sand beach, the shore between
the N island near the entrance to the N arm.                       Cape Mansfield and Day Harbor is rugged, with high bluffs and
 (737)  Bainbridge Passage was discussed earlier in this chapter.  rockslides. Numerous rocks are at the foot of the bluffs and close
                                                                    offshore.
 (738)  Chart 16683.-The coast between Cape Puget and Cape          (751) . Day Harbor, a spacious body of waterjust E of Resurrec-
Resurrection is high and rugged, with numerous glaciers showing    tion Bay, is free from dangers except close inshore. Deep water
in the valleys. No shelter is available except in Day Harbor, where    extends to the head of the bay, which is formed by the moraine of
the anchorage is very good. The coast is clear except for a few    Ellsworth Glacier. This glacier shows up prominently when
rocks extending not more than 0.3 mile offshore. The first range of    entering the bay.
mountains varies from about 2,000 to 3,500 feet in height, while    (752) Fault Point, the E entrance point to Day Harbor, termi-
the back range is about 5,000 feet high. Much of the hinterland is   nates in a narrow point showing several remarkable faults in the
covered by an ice cap.                                             rock formation.



114                                           4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


 (753) Anchor Cove, about 2 miles N from Fault Point, is a small    (766) Lone Rock stands well SW of Chiswell Islands and is a
cove affording excellent shelter for small craft. A short distance    good mark. It is a round rock, 154 feet high, and has a rock cov-
off the E shore of the cove near its head is a reef awash at high    ered at high water, about 0.1 mile N of it. The passage between
water. The shores are heavily wooded.                              Seal Rocks and Lone Rock is clear and is frequently used by ves-
 (754) Bowen Anchorage, 4 miles N of Fault Point, affords the    sels between Resurrection Bay and the coast SW.
best anchorage in Day Harbor. It is about 500 yards wide at the     (767)  Chiswell Islands, a group of high precipitous, rocky
entrance and narrows gradually to the head of the cove. Anchor-    islands, on the W side of the approach to Resurrection Bay, are
age can be had in the center in 14 fathoms, sticky mud bottom. In    sparsely wooded, most have off-lying rocks, and there are strong
the entrance is a small reef cleared to 251/2 feet. Bowen Anchorage    tidal currents between them.
is suitable for a vessel up to about 400 feet long.                 (768)  Pilot Rock, 9.5 miles SW of Cape Resurrection, is a bare,
 (755)  Deep water extends close up to the head of Day Harbor,    rounded, rocky islet about 100 feet high. Pilot Rock Light
and the 50-fathom curve is about 350 yards offshore. A flat in the    (59044.5'N., 149'28.2'W.), 100 feet above the water, is shown
NW corner of the bay, NW of Bowen Anchorage, affords anchor-    from a skeleton tower with a diamond-shaped red and white day-
age 0.4 mile offshore in 15 to 18 fathoms.                         mark on the highest part of the rock.
 (756) Talus Bay is a small cove on the W shore of Day Harbor,      (769) Agnes Cove, just W of Cheval Island, is sheltered from
affording anchorage in 10 to 15 fathoms, but it is exposed to the    the SE, but is too deep for convenient anchorage. However, it is
SE. A rock bare at low water is about 100 yards off the E entrance    reported that during E gales small vessels can find good anchorage
point.                                                             in the E part of the cove.
 (757) Safety Cove is a small deep cove about 1 mile S of Talus
Bay. Anchorage can be had in the center of the cove in 25 to 30    offers a good anchorage for small craft in all except SE weather.
fathoms.                                                           At the head of the cove is a graysand beach with stumps below
 (758) Killer Bay, a small cove about 2 miles S of Safety Cove,    the high-water line which indicates that there has been a subsid-
is too deep for convenient anchorage, with 32 to 39 fathoms in the    ence of the beach. A detached rock about 30 feet high is 200 yards
middle of the bay. A rock, 15 feet high, is about 100 yards off the   -off the W shore.
S entrance point.
  (759)  Driftwood Bay is about 3 miles N from Cape Resurrec-       (771) Bulldog Cove, the first cove S from Bear Glacier, affords
                                                                   a good anchorage for small craft in SW weather. In N weather it is
tion. It is about 0.5 mile wide at the entrance and is free from dan-
gers. Anchorage can be had in the middle of the bay in 25 to 30
fathoms, hard bottom. Small craft will find excellent shelter in a
bight in the S shore of the bay.                                    (772) Bear Glacier, large and prominent, is on the W  shore W
                                                                   of Cape Resurrection. It is inactive and has an earthy appearance.
 (760)  Chart 16682.-Cape Resurrection (59ï¿½52.1'N.,                 (773) Toward the E shore in the entrance of Resurrection Bay
149017.0'W.), at the E entrance to Resurrection Bay, is a precipi-    are three large, high, rugged islands, named in order from S, Rug-
tous headland of solid rock, with little vegetation except some    ged, Hive, and Fox. The passages between the islands are deep.
trees on the lower slopes. From the E two dome-shaped peaks, the    Their shores are generally bold, but two rocks bare at low water
N one the higher, show at the end of the cape, and a low saddle-    are about 200 yards off the SE end of Fox Island.
back of the peaks rises to higher mountains farther N. These are    (774)  Marys Bay, a large cove indenting the S shore of Rugged
the only dome-shaped peaks in the vicinity, which assures easy    Island, affords fair anchorage in E weather. Anchor in the E part
recognition of the cape.                                           with Pilot Rock about on range with the S entrance point. An
 (761)  Barwell Island, 0.4 mile S from Cape Resurrection, is    Army pier, in poor repair, is on the S shore of the cove. Rugged
small, bare, rounded, precipitous, and high.                       Island Light (59050.3'N., 149ï¿½22.4'W.), 438 feet above the
 (762) The passage between Barwell Island and Cape Resurrec-    water, is shown from a square frame with a diamond-shaped red
tion is deep and clear, midchannel depths ranging from 45 to 48    and white daymark on the SE end of the island.
fathoms. This passage is reported to be dangerous for small craft   (775)  Sunny Cove, the S bight on the W side of Fox Island, is
in E weather because of tide rips, confused seas, and seas bounc-    the best anchorage in Resurrection Bay. No ocean swell makes
ing back off the cliffs of Cape Resurrection.                      into the cove, and it is sheltered from all but W winds. The willi-
 (763) Resurrection Bay extends about 16 miles inland N from    waws are bad with E winds. The cove, wide and clear, has anchor-
Cape Resurrection. The depths are great throughout, and there-are    age in the middle, 300 to 800 yards from its head, in 15 to 25
no dangers in the usual track of vessels. A flat extends 0.5 to 0.6    fathoms, muddy bottom.
mile from the entire N shore at the head of the bay. The shores and  (776) Small craft can also anchor in the SE arm of Humpy
islands are steep and high, with precipitous slopes in many places.    Cove, the two-arm bay on the E shore 1.7 miles NNE of Fox
The valleys are wooded up to about 1,000.feet. Anchorages, few    Island. In the winter this bay affords better protection than Sunny
and indifferent because of the great depths, are subject to strong'   Cove, which is bad for small craft in NW weather. The anchorage
williwaws.                                                         is in 7 to 8 fathoms, sandy bottom. The narrow bight extending E
 (764) Harding Gateway, the S entrance to Resurrection Bay, is   is filled with a sandflat which bares at low water.
between Cheval and Rugged Islands.                                  (777)  Thumb Cove, on the E shore NE from Caines Head, is
 (765) Seal Rocks, the southernmost land feature in the W         0.8 mile wide. The cove is subject to strong williwaws in E
approach to the bay, are a group of four small, rocky islets. The    weather. In N weather, good protection is reported close to the
northernmost and largest is 278 feet high and has an arch through    bluff just W of Likes Creek, at the N end of the cove. Anchorage
the middle. Seal Rocks Light (59ï¿½31.2'N., 149ï¿½37.8'W.), 285 feet    can be selected 0.4 to 0.5 mile from its head in 25 to 30 fathoms,
above the water, is shown from a small house with a diamond-    soft bottom. A flat makes out 200 to 300 yards from the N shore
shaped red and white daymark on the summit of the largest islet.   for a distance of 0.4 mile from its head. The point on the N side of
















                         yY2 



                                                                                        
4                  {                      

                                          
                                                              44
                                                















                                                                                                                    z
                                                                                                                    CII

                                                                                                                    C
                                                                                                                    0
                                                                                                                    C


                                                                                                                    CII



 116                                             4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


 the entrance is marked by a light. Caines Head is marked by a    600 feet of berthing space on each side and a 200-foot outer face;
 light.                                                               35 feet alongside; deck height, 24 feet; cranes up to 140 tons, and
                                                                     forklifts up to 30 tons are available; 18,000 square feet of covered,
   (778) Seward is on the W side of the N end of Resurrection Bay.     heated storage, 21/2 acres of paved and 41/2 acres of unpaved open
 The town is the S terminus of the Government-owned Alaska    storage area; diesel fuel is piped to W  berth, gasoline is available
 Railroad. Seward is 1,234 miles from Seattle via the outside route    via local tank truck deliveries; water is available; receipt and ship-
 from Strait of Juan de Fuca, and 1,398 miles via the inside passage    ment of containerized and general cargo; receipt of petroleum
 to Cape Spencer.                                                     products; shipment of logs, log cants, and steel products; bunker-
  (779)  Prominent features.-Cape Resurrection, Bear Glacier,    ing vessels; owned by Alaska Railroad and operated by Northern
 and the mountains that rise precipitously from the shores of the    Stevedoring and Handling Corp., and Harbor Enterprises, Inc.
 bay are conspicuous in the approaches, and the 202-foot tower of       (797)  A coal loading terminal dock, about 100 yards W of the
 radio station KRXA on the shore near the waterfront is prominent.    railroad pier, extends 1,700 feet from shore. The dock has a 900-
  (780)  Channel.-The approach to Seward is in depths of over 50    foot face and reported alongside depths of 58 feet. The terminal is
 fathoms and is clear of obstructions.                                owned by Suneel Alaska Corp.
  (781)  Anchorages.-Suitable anchorage in 30 fathoms is avail-        (798) Seward Small-Boat Harbor, 0.25 mile W of the Alaska
 able for deep-draft vessels at the head of the bay in 60ï¿½06.5'N.,    Railroad Pier, is protected by breakwaters. The entrance channel is
 149ï¿½22.1'W. and in 60ï¿½06.5'N., 149ï¿½25.3'W.                           marked by lights and is 120 feet wide. In April 1994, the control-
  (782) Dangers.-The bay is clear but care should be taken when       ling depths were 15 feet in the entrance channel, except for lesser
 approaching the head of the bay to avoid the flats that extend 0.6    depths to 13 feet near the N end, thence 12 to 15 feet in the basin.
 mile from the head.                                                  A lighted buoy marks a submerged jetty S of the entrance.
  (783)  Submerged ruins and obstructions may exist in an area         (799)  The basin has about 400 berths; however, more than that
 about 550 yards channelward of the high water line at Seward.        number of boats use the basin in the summer. Transient spaces are
  (784)  Routes.-Eastward: From the entrance point, 0.6 mile    available; the harbormaster assigns berths. Vessels over 150 feet
SSW of Barwell Island, set courses to pass 0.6 mile W  of the SW     long are requested to contact the harbormaster on VHF-FM chan-
part of Fox Island, 0.5 mile E of Caines Head Light, and thence to    nel 16 before entering the small-boat harbor. Water (in the sum-
the waterfront at Seward.                                            mer), electricity, gasoline, and diesel fuel are available. A
  (785) Westward: From the entrance point, I mile E of Pilot    launching ramp, grid, seaplane float, and a 50-ton boatlift are in
Rock, set courses to pass 2.5 miles W  of the S extremity of Rug-    the basin. The basin is owned by the State and operated by the city.
ged Island, 0.5 mile E of Caines Head Light, and thence to            (800) The City Pier, Seward Fisheries Wharf, and the Munic-
Seward.                                                              ipal Pier are at the N end of the small-boat harbor. There is a total
  (786)  Tides.-The diurnal range of the tide is 10.5 feet at Seward.  of about 1,000 feet of docking space. A depth of 13 feet is along-
  (787)  Weather.-Winter gales strike suddenly and considerable    side Seward Fisheries Wharf and City Pier; 15 feet is alongside
sea makes into the bay with S winds. At Seward the prevailing    Municipal Pier. The deck heights are 18 feet. The facilities are
wind is from the S from April to September and N during the    used mostly by fishing vessels and Seward Fisheries, and owned
remainder of the year. The high mountain ranges give some pro-    by the city.
tection, but the region is subject to violent williwaws. The annual    (801)  Fourth Avenue City Dock: I mile S of the small-boat
snowfall averages 78 inches at Seward.                               harbor and at the S end of Seward; 190-foot wharf with about 35
  (788) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-    feet alongside; deck height, 17 feet; five fender pilings that extend
sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of -  7 feet above the deck are along the face; landing for passenger and
Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)                      vehicular ferry; receipt and shipment of general cargo; owned by
  (789)  Vessels en route Seward meet the pilot boat about I mile    the city and operated by the Alaska Marine Highway System and
SE of Caines Head Light (59059.0'N., 149ï¿½23. 'W.).                   Northern Stevedoring and Handling Corp.
  (790) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "SEWARD             (802) Note: Submerged obstructions, caused by the 1964 earth-
PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearranged fre-    quake, may exist off either end of the wharf.
quency between pilot and agent/vessel.                                (803)  University of Alaska Institute of Marine Science
 (791)  Towage.- Tug services are available 24 hours a day at    Wharf: 0.1 mile SW of the Ferry Terminal; 150 feet of berthing
Seward and can be obtained through ships' agents.                    space; 40 feet alongside; deck height, 18 feet; water (April to
 (792)  Quarantine.-A U.S. Public Health Service Contract Phy-    June), fuel, and electricity are available for the research vessels
sician is located at the hospital in Seward. (See appendix for addi-    using the wharf; owned and operated by the University of Alaska
tional information.)                                                 Institute of Marine Science.
 (793)  Quarantine is enforced in accordance with regulations of      (804)  Note: A section of sheet metal, submerged 3 feet, extends
the U.S. Public Health Service. (See Public Health Service, chap-    10 feet SW of the SW end of the wharf. Also, a deepwater intake
ter 1.) There is a hospital in Seward.                               pipe extends 900 feet seaward from the wharf. Mariners are
 (794)  Coast Guard.-A Coast Guard cutter is stationed at    advised to seek local knowledge before approaching the wharf.
Seward in the small-boat harbor.                                       (805)  Seward Marine Services Dock: 300 yards SSW of the
 (795)  Wharves.-Seward has a deep-draft terminal, coal termi-    University of Alaska Wharf; 250-foot face; 14 feet alongside;
nal, ferry terminal, small-boat harbor, and many shallow-draft    deck height, 181/2 feet; receipt of herring and other fish products;
wharves. For a complete description of the port facilities refer to    owned and operated by Seward Marine Services, Inc.
Port Series No. 38, published and sold by the U.S. Army Corps of      (806)  Supplies.-Some marine supplies are available and there
Engineers. (See appendix for address.)                               are stores in town. Gasoline, diesel fuel, and lubricating oil are
 (796)  Alaska Railroad Terminal and Port Facility: A pier    available by truck and diesel fuel is available at the Alaska Rail-
with a light on the outer comers at the N end of Resurrection Bay;    road Terminal and Port Facility.
















































                                                                                                                                                                                                               c-i

                                                                                                                                                                                                               m
                                                                                                                                                                                                               Cd)
                                                                                                                                                                                                               m
                                                                                                                                                                                                               z
                                                                                                                                                                                                               c-i
                                                                                                                                                                                                               r1

                                                                                                                                                                                                               -3
                                                                                                                                                                                                               0

                                                                                                                                                                                                               0
                                                                                                                                                                                                               0



                                                                                                                                                                                                               m











                                                                                 :6


                                                                                                A    A        A   

a         -                 A    *j












                                                                                                                                                                                                               -3




118                                           4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


 (807) Repairs.-Limited small boat hull and engine repair facili-  (817) Holgate Arm is the largest indentation on the W side of
ties are available. A 50-ton boatlift is at the Municipal Pier. A  Aialik Bay. The arm is too deep for anchorage and terminates in
shipyard about 1.5 miles S of the ferry terminal has a marine rail-    Holgate Glacier.
way that can handle vessels to 140 feet. Seward Marine Indus-      (818) Slate Island, long, narrow, and high, is close to the W
trial Center, on the E side of Resurrection Bay, just above the    shore near the head of the bay. The head of Aialik Bay consists of
mouth of Fourth of July Creek, has a 3,600-ton synchrolift capa-    sunken rocks and icebergs that are discharged from the glaciers
ble of handling vessels to 300 feet. In August 1992, shoaling to 18    feeding into the bay.
feet was reported off the entrance to the Seward, Marine Industrial  (819) Coleman Bay, Tooth Cove, and Bear Cove, are bays on
Service facility.                                                 the E side of Aialik Bay. None of them afford good anchorage
 (808) Communications.-The Alaska Railroad maintains ser-    except the SE arm of Coleman Bay. It is reported that good protec-
vice throughout the year from Seward to Anchorage and Fair-    tion from E and S weather can be had for small craft in about 6
banks; large amounts of supplies and equipment bound for all    fathoms.
parts of Northern Alaska are moved over the railroad. Seasonal     (820)  Anchorages.-The anchorages in Aialik Bay are few and
passenger service is available. The Alaska Marine Highway Sys-    indifferent because of the great depth. With S weather a swell
tem maintains ferry service to Valdez-Cordova and Kodiak-Sel-    makes well into the bay.
dovia-Homer. Charter air service is available. Seward has          (821) The best anchorage is in 30 fathoms, good holding bottom,
scheduled highway transportation to Anchorage.                    near the head of Paradise Cove in Three Hole Bay, on the E side
 (809) Seward has radio and cable communications with the    of Aialik Bay about 3 miles N of Harbor Island. Small craft find
other Alaska ports and Seattle. Telephone and telegraph communi-    good shelter along the S shore of the cove in 3 to 10 fathoms, mud
cations are maintained.                                           bottom.
 (810) Aialik Bay, W of Resurrection Bay, extends 16 miles         (822)  Anchorage can be had in 28 fathoms near the center of the
inland from the N end of Harbor Island. It is enclosed by rugged    cove on the W side of the bay, W of the N end of Harbor Island.
mountains and glaciers and is of no importance except occasion-    On each side of the entrance to this cove is a sharp conical, high,
ally as an anchorage. The shores are steep and high, with precipi-    wooded hill. Close inshore off the point at the N entrance is a
tous slopes in many places, and are partly wooded in the S part of    sharp pinnacle rock about 12 feet high; about 600 yards NE of this
the bay to an elevation of about 1,000 feet. The N shores are cov-    pinnacle is Hub Rock which covers at about half tide.
ered with alders in places.                                         (823) Vessels can find convenient anchorage in the area about I
 (811) Aialik Bay is deep except for rocks near the shores, and a    mile SE of the S end of Harbor Island. There is good shelter here
bar that crosses the bay from the glacial flat fronting Pedersen    with winds from N around to SE.
Glacier. The least depth found on the bar in midchannel is 18 feet,  (824) Ice.-There are discharging glaciers at the heads of Aialik
but it and the broken ground near the shores at the entrance of    Bay and Holgate Arm, and ice is frequently driven to Harbor
Holgate Arm are likely to have boulders and less water than    Island by N winds. Holgate Arm and the entire bay above the bar
charted. As a measure of caution vessels should avoid the pas-    are frequently filled with ice.
sages among the islands in the mouth of the bay. To take advan-    (825) Harris Bay is about 5 miles NW of the peninsula termi-
tage of smoother water, small vessels coasting SW from    nating in Aligo Point. The bay is deep throughout. The 50-fathom
Resurrection Bay sometimes enter the bay at Aialik Cape, pass S    curve extends to within 0.5 mile of the head of the bay. The upper
of Chat Island, round the N end of Harbor Island, and pass out at    part of the bay is usually filled with floating ice.
Granite Cape.                                                      (826)  Granite Island is a high, long narrow island. Its shores
 (812) Chat Island is a steep, high, rocky, and wooded island;    are bold and its slopes are very steep except at the N end.
two conspicuous pinnacles are close to its S shore. Between it and  (827)  Taz Basin is a remarkable cliff-walled harbor on the SW
Aialik Cape are a smaller island and a number of rocks.           side of Granite Island about 2 miles from its NW end. It has depths
 (813)  Harbor Island is the largest of a group of high, precipi-    of 18 to 20 fathoms and is an ideal shelter for launches. The
tous, rocky, and partly wooded islands in the mouth of the bay and    entrance is narrow and has a rock 5 feet high in the middle. It is
NW of Chiswell Islands. The shores in many places are sheer    reported that vessels enter on the N side of the rock where there is
cliffs, especially the E shore of Natoa Island, Midway in the    a depth of about 2 fathoms. Once inside there is plenty of room.
channel between Beehive Island and the small island at the SE    The channel S of the rock is shoal and foul with rocks nearly;
end of the Harbor Island group is a rock that is awash at lowest    awash at low water.
tides.                                                             (828)  Granite Passage, which leads from Aialik Bay to Harris
 (814) Small vessels proceeding along the coast use the pass    Bay, is deep and free from dangers. At the narrowest part of the
locally known as Petes Pass, between Harbor Island and the first    passage, just N of Fire Cove, a ridge with 61/4 to 18 fathoms
island to the E. A rock, awash at minus tides, has been reported in    extends across the passage. The ridge affords convenient anchor-
the narrowest part of this passage close E of the center. Vessels    age in any but heavy weather.
using this passage should favor Harbor Island when passing         (829)  Fire Cove is the southernmost of three coves in the main-
through this narrow opening.                                      land opposite Granite Island. It is deep throughout and affords no
 (815) Granite Cape, the S end of Granite Island, is bold, with    satisfactory anchorage. The shores are precipitous and rocky.
almost vertical rocky bluffs. Rocks awash at low water, are a short  (830)  Ripple Cove, the next cove to the N, is also deep and
distance off the cape. Between Granite Cape and the main shore    affords no anchorage except in 28 to 30 fathoms, hard bottom. The
are two small, high, wooded islands; with a rock about 10 feet    third cove is also deep and not suitable as an anchorage.
high between them.                                                 (831) Crater Bay is a large inlet about I mile N from the N end
 (816) Twin Islands, in Dora Passage, resemble each other in    of Granite Island. A good anchorage will be found in the bight just
contour and are high and wooded. The arch off the S end of the N  E of the projecting point on the S shore, in 25 fathoms, sticky bot-
island is conspicuous.                                            tom. This anchorage is well protected but is subjected to severe




                                                4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                    119


williwaws. In the S cove at the head of Crater Bay is a stream       (844) Chart 16681.-Black Mountain (59032.0'N.,
where water can be obtained.                                        150ï¿½11.5'W.), the highest peak between Thunder and Black Bays,
 (832) Cataract Cove, just N from Crater Bay, is another of the    has a large granite boulder at its summit.
characteristic small deep bays of this region. It is exposed to the S,  (845) The point on the N side of the entrance to Black Bay is
and is not recommended as an anchorage. Water can be obtained    marked by a 660-foot hill; reddish-brown tinted cliffs form the
from cascades at the head of the bay.                               base on its seaward side. The island immediately adjacent to the
 (833) A terminal moraine bar, about 4 miles N of Granite Island,    point is wooded, 150 yards in diameter, and 165 feet high
forms a barrier.completely across the head of Harris Bay and sepa-   (846) The NW  arm of Black Bay is not recommended as an
rates the bay from Northwestern Lagoon. The terminal moraine    anchorage because it is too deep and narrow. The NE arm of the
bar consists of a series of low islands and rocks that bare at low    bay is 0.4 mile wide. There is safe anchorage close in near the
water. The lagoon, unsurveyed, extends about 9 miles NW, has a    head in 16 to 20 fathoms, mud bottom. A shoal of gravel and boul-
steep barren island, 1,263 feet high, near its center, and can only    ders extends 100 yards offshore on the E side of the head of this
be entered by small craft with local knowledge. A steep-walled   S arm. The anchorage is subjected to usual williwaws. A high, light-
fiord extends about 3 miles N from this island and heads into    gray granite peak separates the two arms of Black Bay.
Northwestern Glacier from which small icebergs are discharged.       (847  The point 1.2 miles S of the W  entrance point of Black
An inlet over 1 mile long and with shoals at its head is SW of the    Bay has a large granite rock about 150 feet high close to the S
island. Most of the shoreline of Northwestern Lagoon is barren as    side. The rock makes a good mark when it is seen clear of the
a result of the recent rapid recession of the glaciers.             point. Between.this point and Black Bay is a low grassy wooded
                                                                    ravine that extends inland from the coast. Between the ravine and
 (834) Harris Point, a prominent point on the W side of the
                                                          Harris    ,  si   of    Black Bay are rocky, almost perpendicular cliffs several hundred
entrance to Harris Bay, is easily recognized by a succession of
                                                                     feet high and light gray in color. The open bay to the W  of the
rocks and islets that extend 0.3 mile off. The outer rock of this    feethigh and light gray in color. The open bay
                                                                     point is not recommended as an anchorage.
group is 78 feet high.
       group is 78 feet high.                                         (848) Nuka Bay has its main entrance between Pye Reef and
 (835)  Cup Cove is a small indentation just N of Harris Point. It    Nuka Point. The bay may be entered from the E through McArthur
has depths of 5 to 9 fathoms, mud bottom, and affords good    Pass or Wildcat Pass and from the W through Nuka Passage. It
anchorage for small craft except that it is exposed to E winds.     extends into the mainland above the passes in two long arms.
  (836) Sandy Bay is an indentation about 1 mile long between    Good protected anchorage can be found in several small bays and
Harris Point and Two Arm Bay. The depths decrease gradually    coves. There are several small gold mines in the West Arm and
from 20 fathoms at the entrance to 3 fathoms at the head with sand    North Arm.
bottom throughout. It is exposed to the S and suitable for anchor-   (849) Nuka Bay is generally deep throughout. There is, how-
age in fine weather only.                                           ever, a considerable area of irregular depths, less than 25 fathoms,
  (837) Two Arm Bay has Paguna Arm on the N and Taroka Arm          adjacent to the W shores of the lower bay.
on the W.                                                            (850) Pye Islands, on the E side of Nuka Bay, are three rugged
  (838) Surok Point is on the E side of the entrance to Two Arm     mountainous islands, densely wooded on the lower slopes. Outer
Bay. It is bold and high, with deep water extending close up.       Island, the outermost and smallest, has a high prominent peak at
                                                                     its E end. A good landmark, this peak is part of a ridge whose top
  (839) ' Paguna Arm is deep and affords no anchorage except at
                                                                     is covered with huge granite boulders. A prominent bare rock, 70
the very head, where vessels may anchor in 20 to 25 fathoms, hard    is covered with huge granite boulders. A prominent bare rock, 70
                                                           bottom. There are several coves along the E shore where small    feet high, is 20 yards off the SE shore of the island. A large reef,
bottom Theref are several coves along the b Ea.   shore where small    part of which shows at all stages of tide, is 300 yards S of the rock.
craft can find anchorage close to the beach. The shores are steep
craftcanfind precipitor agexcept forasmall onthe Ebshoreneah .  the  shorA large, bare, granite rock, 82 feet high, is close to the SW point of
and precipitous except for a small sandspit on the E shore near the    the island.
head. There are numerous places in Paguna Arm where water can
be obtained.                                                         (851)  A 21/2-fathom shoal that breaks is 0.4 mile SE of the E
                                                                     point of Outer Island. A 10-fathom shoal is 1.8 miles 130ï¿½ from
  (840)  Bear Point is a bold, high point separating Paguna and    the point, and a 9-fathom shoal is 0.9 mile 2000 from the same
Taroka Arms. A group of rocks extend 100 yards off the point.       point.
  (841) Taroka Arm is deep but affords anchorage near the head        (852)  The S shore of Outer Island is a Steller sea lion rookery
in 20 to 25 fathoms, hard bottom with occasional patches of sand    site. There is a 3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer zone around the
and mud. Small craft can find shelter in several of the bights along    entire island. (See 50 CFR 227.12, chapter 2, for limits and regu-
the S shore.                                                        lations.)
  (842)  Cloudy Cape, on the S side of the entrance to Two Arm        (853)  Pye Reef, awash at high water, is 2.1 miles 205ï¿½ from the
Bay, is bold and high. On the coast about midway between Cloudy    high peak of Outer Island. The line of the W  ends of Outer Island
Cape and Thunder Bay are lines of corrugated strata on two light-    and Rabbit Island barely clears to the W of the reef, and the line of
gray cliffs.                                                        the E end of Outer Island and Hoof Point on Ragged Island leads
  (843) Thunder Bay is 2 miles wide at the entrance, and about    0.4 mile E of it.
2.5 miles long with the upper end extending in an E direction. Safe  (854) Rabbit Island, the second of the Pye Islands, is densely
anchorage for small craft can be had in the cove at the head of the    wooded. The E shore of the island is bold and rocky, with no dan-
bay in 10 to 20 fathoms, mud bottom. Water is available from sev-    gers except close inshore.
eral waterfalls at the head of the bay. A cup-shaped bight on the N  (855) Between Outer and Rabbit Islands is a deep body of water
side of the entrance to the bay affords anchorage in 12 fathoms,    with no good anchorage. At its E end is a small opening called
gray sand and rock bottom. A landslide is on the coast about 0.5    Kitten Pass. The pass is between a small islet and a group of
mile SW from Thunder Bay.                                           three bare rocks to the N. The islet has a few scrub trees on it. A




120                                            4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


rock, covered 13 feet and marked by kelp, is in the pass; it is    ders. A spit of gravel and boulders makes out from the S shore, in
nearer to the islet than to the rocks.                              the narrowest part, with deep water close-to.
  (856)  Kitten Pass is only 65 yards wide. By favoring the group     (865) The tidal currents in McArthur Pass have an estimated
of rocks on the N side, a depth of 5 fathoms can be carried    velocity of 3 to 4 knots. All except low-powered vessels will have
through; but because of strong tidal currents and the narrowness of    little difficulty through the pass at any stage of tide, but E weather
the pass, it should be attempted only by very small craft, at slack    and ebb tide may cause dangerous seas in the entrance.
water and with a smooth sea. In rough weather, breakers obstruct     (866)  Extensively used by small vessels proceeding along the
the pass.                                                           coast, McArthur Pass affords a shorter and more protected route
 (857)  Ragged Island, the third and largest of the Pye Islands, is    than the route outside the Pye Islands, and is especially valuable
very mountainous, and is partly wooded on the lower slopes. The    when used in connection with the route through Nuka Passage.
island is broken by numerous coves and bights, most of which are     (867) McArthur Cove is a large cove in the N side of Ragged
too deep to afford good anchorage. The few known dangers    Island, I mile SW from the narrowest part of McArthur Pass.
around this island are the rocks close inshore; a rock awash at high    Large vessels can find good anchorage near the head of this cove
water 200 yards off the rounding point 1.2 miles N of Wildcat    in 28 to 30 fathoms, mud bottom; small craft anchor closer inshore
Pass; and the rocks off Hoof Point.                                 in 5 to 10 fathoms, good holding bottom and good shelter. The two
 (858)  Hoof Point, 3.5 miles NE of Wildcat Pass, is the SE end     small coves on the N side of Ragged Island, W of McArthur Cove,
of the E part of Ragged Island. Bold and rocky, it is at the base o  are deep and clear of dangers but are subject to strong williwaws
a detached hill. A bare granite rock, 105 feet high, 60 yards off the    in stormy weather. Indifferent anchorage for small craft can be
point, makes a good mark. Bare ledges are 400 yards S of the    found in the first cove to W, in the center of the bight near its head,
point. A rock, covered at high water 0.5 mile S of Hoof Point, can    in 16 to 18 fathoms, rock and gravel bottom; or in II to 12 fath-
be cleared to the S by keeping open water showing through Wild-    oms in the bight on the S side of the cove, near the center.
cat Pass. Fair anchorage for small craft can be had in the cove       (868) Morning Cove, on the S side of the E approach to
behind Hoof Point, in 10 to 20 fathoms.                             McArthur Pass, affords protected anchorage for small craft near
                                                                     its head in 10 to 12 fathoms, rocky bottom.
 (859)  Wildcat Pass, between Rabbit and Ragged Islands, is    its head in 10 to 12 fathoms, rocky botto
about 400 yards wide in its narrowest part, and is deep and free     (869)  Chance Cove, on the N side of the E approach to
from danger. A shoal marked by kelp with a least depth of 6 fath-    McArthur Pass, is deep, and is a poor anchorage. Chance Lagoon,
                 oms over it is in the center of the W  approach to the pass, 400    at the head, has a large flat rock in its entrance. The passage E of
yards W  of the line of the W ends of Rabbit and Ragged Islands.    this rock is foul, but a depth of 8 feet can be carried into the lagoon
                                                                     through the passage W of the rock, the best water being found by
This shoal has deep water all around it. In the E approach the only
known dangers are the rocks off Hoof Point. In the narrow part of    favoring the W  side of the passage. Protected anchorage for small
                                                                     craft can be had in this lagoon in 8 to 12 fathoms, mud and rock
the pass a bank, with 8 fathoms over it, extends from the N point    craft can be had in this lagoon in 8 to 12 fathoms, mud and rock
to the center of the pass, but 20 fathoms and over can be found 100  ottom, but anchors will not hold well in heavy weather. The diur-
                                                                     nal range of tide in Chance Lagoon is 11 feet.
yards off the S point. The tidal currents in Wildcat Pass have an
estimated velocity of 4 to 5 knots.                                   (870)  Small vessels can find good anchorage in the small bight
                                                                     on the S side of McArthur Pass, close W of the narrowest part, in 7
 (860) Anchorage can be found in the cove just S of the pass, in
24 to 27 fathoms, rocky bottom. Small vessels can find indifferent      I fathoms,  mud bottom. This     anchorag  e     is subject to strong
anchorage in the cove in the W  end of Rabbit Island, close    the  open bight on the N side of the pass, NW from McArthur
inshore, in 8 to 10 fathoms, rocky bottom.
                                                                     Cove, in 10 to 15 fathoms, rocky bottom.
 (861) Wildcat Cove is a large arm in the SE shore of Ragged         (87i)  McCarty Fiord (East Arm), the NE extension of Nuka
Island, 2.8 miles N from Wildcat Pass, and is the second cove W     Bay, has average depths of over 100 fathoms except for a terminal
from Hoof Point. Protected anchorage for small craft can be had    moraine shoal with depths of 10 fathoms or less, which crosses
about 100 yards from the head of this cove in 11 fathoms, mud    the fiord between McCarty Lagoon and James Lagoon. Between
bottom. There is also anchorage in 22 fathoms, mud bottom, oppo-    the moraine shoal and McCarty Glacier, 15 miles N, water depths
site the indentation on the E shore of the cove,                    of more than 150 fathoms have been sounded, but caution should
 (862)  Roaring Cove is a small bight in the W shore of Ragged    be exercised as the area has not been surveyed. McCarty Glacier,
Island, 2 miles N from the W  approach to Wildcat Pass. A small    which ends in shoal water at the head of the fiord, discharges occa-
wooded island is on the N side of the entrance, and a wooded        sional small icebergs. The N part of McCarty Fiord is barren
point, resembling an island, is on the S side. Partially protected    because of the recent recession of McCarty Glacier.
anchorage for small craft can be found in the center of this cove in  (872)  The square-shaped bay on the E side of McCarty Fiord, 2
4 to 5 fathoms, mud bottom.                                         miles N from the W entrance of McArthur Pass, affords indifferent
 (863) McArthur Pass, between Ragged Island and the main-    anchorage off its SE side in 12 to 15 fathoms, rocky bottom. The
land, is about 120 yards wide in its narrowest part but is straight    small bight on the NE side of the bay is foul.
and easily navigated. McArthur Pass Light (59ï¿½27.8'N.,                (873)  Moonlight Bay, on the E side of McCarty Fiord, about 1.8
150020.1'W.), 45 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton    miles from the terminal moraine, is deep and clear. Large vessels
tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the N          can find good anchorage near its head in 15 to 30 fathoms, sticky
side of the pass.                                                   mud bottom. Small vessels can find better protection in Midnight
 (864) There are no known dangers in the approaches, and a clear    Cove, a long bight making off to E from the N side of Moonlight
channel 60 yards wide is in the center of the narrowest part of the    Bay, but they must avoid a 5-foot shoal about 300 yards off the N
pass, with a depth of 6ï¿½/4 fathoms. Both shores of the pass are lined    side of the entrance.
with thick kelp that extends approximately out to the 5-fathom        (874) Good anchorage is available in the middle of the cove, just
curve. The bottom is composed of smooth rock and small boul-    past the turn, in 9 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom, or near the head of




                                                4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                  121


the cove in 14 to 16 fathoms, mud bottom. A spit, bare at low       (885) A reef makes out for 0.2 mile E from Yalik Point, the S
water and covered with boulders, extends out 150 yards from the    entrance point to Yalik Bay. A least depth of 2 fathoms was found
head of the cove. This cove is the best anchorage for small vessels    at the outer end of this reef. A rock, covered I foot and possibly
in McCarty Fiord, as it is doubtful that ice would drift in here in    marked by kelp, is about 0.2 mile off the N entrance point to Yalik
quantity.                                                          Bay.
 (875) The small cove just N from Moonlight Bay has depths of       (886) Surprise Bay indents the E side of West Arm. Anchorage
from 5 to 8 fathoms, mud bottom, but with W winds is apt to be    can be had 0.3 mile from the entrance to the lagoon at its head, in
filled with ice. A narrow spit, bare at low water and covered with    17 to 20 fathoms, mud bottom.
boulders, extends out from the head of the cove for 75 yards.       (887)  Palisades Lagoon, at the head of Surprise Bay, has a nar-
 (876) McCarty Lagoon, on the E side of McCarty Fiord and    row entrance 40 yards wide and 350 yards long that is too narrow
about 1.5 miles N of Moonlight Bay, has not been surveyed. The    and crooked to be navigated by any except very small vessels. A
entrance nearly bares at low water, but shallow-draft vessels can    depth of about 4 fathoms can be carried by favoring the E side of
enter at high tide. The tidal currents in the entrance have an esti-    the entrance until past the point on the W  side, to avoid a rock
mated velocity of 8 to 12 knots, so that high water slack is the only    lying E of this point; thence favor the W side of the channel into
time to enter. Depths of 15 to 20 fathoms, mud bottom, are    the lagoon. A large sandspit with boulders on it, is on the E side of
reported inside the lagoon. The entrance is narrow, with sand and    the entrance of the inner end.
mud bottom. The lagoon probably freezes over in the winter.
            mud bottom. The lagon probably freezesover in the winter.  (888) General depths in the lagoon range between 18 to 20 fath-
 (877) James Lagoon, on the W side of McCarty Fiord opposite    oms, mud and rock bottom, and afford secure anchorage. The
McCarty Lagoon, is about 1 mile long and 0.8 mile wide. There is    lagoon may freeze over in winter. Babcock Creek, a small stream
a prominent 90-foot dirt cone on the NE side of the entrance. The    empties into the lagoon over a large sandflat that uncovers at low
entrance, about 0.8 mile long, has a least midchannel depth of 3    water.
feet. In entering, favor the W shore to avoid a long sandspit, partly
bare at low water, which:makes out to S for about 300 yards from          Aradne Cove s behind prominent Ariadne Island on the
                                                                     S side of the entrance to Surprise Bay. There is good anchorage for
the W end of the large, flat, sandy island on the E side of the chan-
                                                                     small vessels in this cove in 5 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom, but in
nel. The tidal currents in the entrance have an estimated velocity
eof.6 to 10 knots. 0  0                                            the winter, with NW winds, the cove becomes quite rough. There
                                                                     are two entrance channels, one on each side of Ariadne Island. The
 (878)  Vessels should not attempt to enter James Lagoon except    N entrance has a rock, bare at low water, near midchannel SE of
at high water slack. The entrance is often:obstructed by ice which    the island; the best water is E of this rock, but care should be taken
is carried through the entrance into the lagoon. The lagoon has    to avoid reefs that make out from the N shore of the cove.
general depths of 8 to 15 fathoms, mud bottom. Vessels should                                                 of 
approach the shore with caution, since large mudflats make off for  (sso  The W  entrance has a shoal of 2f/o fathoms in midap-
a considerable distance, especially along the N shore. The lagoon    proach. A reef bare atlow water makes off for 125 yards from the
may freeze over in the; winter.                                    point on the S side of the entrance. The best water in this entrance
 (879) Harrington Point, the S tip of the peninsula separating    is found by favoring the island, being careful to avoid a reef awash
McCarty Fiord and West Arm, is bold and rocky, with rocks close    at high water that extends 60 yards S from the second point from
inshore. A bank with a least depth of 10 fathoms is 0.6 mile S of
the point. Another bank, with a least found depth of 11 fathoms, is  (891) Quartz Bay is on the E side of West Arm, 4 miles NW
0.5 mile W of alarge rock, 35 feet high, close to the SW side of    from Harington Point. Beautiful Isle, a wooded islet with a clus-
the peninsula.                                                     ter of bare rocks, is on the S side of the entrance. A shoal with a
 (880) West Arm of Nuka Bay is about 7 miles long in a NW         least depth of 31 feet is 300 yards W. Another shoal is 0.2 mile off
direction from Harrington Point. Nuka River and Ferrum Creek    the N shore of the entrance. A rock, reported covered 6 feet, is in
empty into Beauty.Bay, the head of West Arm. A large mudflat    the S part of the shoal in about the middle of Quartz Bay. Anchor-
makes out from the head of Beauty Bay with deep water close-to,    age can be found in the center of the bay, 0.3 mile from its head, in
The diurnal range of tide is 11.4 feet in Beauty Bay.              14 to 18 fathoms, mud bottom. The I10-fathom curve is about 325
 (88 i) 2Shelter (C:ove, on the S. side of Beauty Bay, is small but    yards from shore at the head of the bay. The water shoals very rap-
                                                                     idly inside this curve.
affords anchorage with moderate swinging room in 14 to 16 fath-    idly inside this curve.
oms, mud bottom. At the head of the cove is a grassy flat, in front  (892) Moss Point separates Beauty Bay from North Arm. It has
of which is a large mudflat that covers at high water.             a number of grass-covered rocks and wooded islets close-to.
 (882) Diablo Peak, on the W  side of Beauty Bay, is a good         (893)  North Arm branches off for 5 miles to N from West Arm.
mark.                                                              A large flat back of the head of the arm is covered with grass and
 (883) Yalik Bay, on the W  side of West Arm, opposite Har-    alders, in front of which is a mudflat that covers. Deep water
rington Point, has a shoal with a least found depth of 31/2 fathoms    approaches to within 250 yards of the head of the arm and to
in midbay, 1.2 miles from the entrance. Depths of over 20 fathoms    within 100 yards of the low water line.
can be found all around this shoal, the better channel lying to S.  (894) Pilot Harbor is on the E side of North Arm about 1 mile
This shoal is the only danger in the bay except rocks close inshore    from its head. A bare rock, 3 feet high, is 275 yards off the S point
and two rocks, bare at low water, 150 yards off the N shore 0.6    of the entrance and a submerged rock is 100 yards NE. A large
*mile from the head.                                               bare rock, 4 feet high, is 125 yards S of a wooded islet close off
 (884) Anchorage can be had in the center near the head in 14 to    the N point of the entrance. There is a clear entrance between
16 fathoms, mud and gravel bottom, but there is limited swinging    these rocks. A large shoal area, 200 to 300 yards wide and mostly
room for large vessels.. Small vessels can find partially protected    bare at low water, extends across the head of the bay. Entering in
anchorage in the small bight on the N side of the bay, 0.5 mile    midchannel, a secure anchorage will be found in the middle in 14
from the entrance, in 3 to 5 fathoms, and sand bottom.             to 16 fathoms, mud bottom.




122                                           4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


 (895) Small vessels can anchor 100 yards to W of the point that    shore, and makes a good mark for entering Nuka Passage. Deep
resembles a small wooded islet, on the NE side of Pilot Harbor in    water is fairly close outside these rocks; the 100-fathom curve is
5 to 8 fathoms, mud bottom. This is the best anchorage for small    0.4 mile offshore.
craft in North and West Arms in stormy weather.                     (907) Nuka Passage, between Nuka Island and the mainland, is
 (896) A small cove, on the W side of North Arm about I mile    about 12 miles long from the E entrance to the S entrance.
from its head, is very deep and has no anchorage. A large, promi-   (908) When used with McArthur Pass, this passage affords a
nent waterfall, with a sheer drop of about 900 feet, is about 1.5    shorter and protected route for vessels proceeding along the coast.
miles NW from the head of the cove.                                It is of special use to small low-powered craft. The passage is deep
 (897) Nuka Island, on the W side of Nuka Bay, is mountainous    and is easily navigated in clear weather.
and densely wooded on the lower slopes in the N part and grass      (909) In the approach to the E entrance is a bank with a least
covered in the S part. The E shore rises precipitously to the moun-    depth of 8 fathoms I mile S of the point on the N side. Between
tain tops and is bare shale and talus formation. The W shore, bor-    this bank and the N shore of Nuka Island are depths of over 100
dering on Nuka Passage, is broken up into numerous bays and    fathoms. A shoal, with a least depth of 43/4 fathoms, is in midpas-
coves.                                                             sage, 1 mile SW of the N point of the entrance, and nearly 0.5 mile
 (898) Nuka Point, the S end of Nuka Island, is fairly prominent.    SE of a prominent wooded islet on the N side of the pass. Between
This point is formed by a peninsula with a high peak near its   this shoal and the S shore are depths of 90 fathoms. About 1.5
inshore end. The peninsula is connected with the main part of the    miles inside the E entrance, on the N side, is a small cove open to
island by lowland; from a distance it appears to be an island. The    the E; good anchorage is available for small craft in 41/2 to 10 fath-
E and S shores rise in sheer cliffs, making a landing impossible.    oms, mud bottom, and water may be obtained from the stream.
Two rocks about 3 feet high are 0.3 mile off the point E of the     (910) Division Island, a group of three wooded islands con-
peak, and a reef covers the area inshore of them.                  nected at low water, is in midpassage about 2.2 miles from the E
 (899) Nuka Rock, 3 feet high and 20 feet across, is 0.4 mile S of    entrance. The ship channel is S of the islands.
the SE tip of Nuka Point. Irregular depths of less than 25 fathoms  (91l) A rock awash at high water is 180 yards S of the E tip of
extend about 3 miles S from Nuka Point. A rocky patch of 8 fath-    Division Island. A rock bare at minus tides is in midchannel N of
oms is 1.5 miles ESE from Nuka Rock; another patch of 8 fathoms    the island. A shoal with a rock awash extends S from the W
is about 2.8 miles NE from Nuka Rock, 1.2 miles offshore.          extremity of the Division Island group, reaching almost halfway
 (900) Pinnacle Rock, 3 miles NE of Nuka Rock and 0.3 mile    across the channel towards Hardover Point.
offshore, is 68 feet high and the most prominent landmark along     (912) A near midchannel course, slightly favoring the S shore, is
this coast. Numerous small rocks and reefs, marked by kelp, are    recommended in making this passage. The tidal currents have con-
inshore from this rock.                                            siderable strength.
 (901)  Along the coast between Pinnacle Rock and Nuka Point,       (913) From Hardover Point, the NW end of Nuka Island, the
and for 0.5 mile N of Pinnacle Rock, are numerous rocks, some of    pass trends S toward Gore Point. About 0.6 mile NW of Hardover
which are 250 yards offshore. About 1.5 miles N of Pinnacle    Point, on the N side of the channel, a large sand-and-gravel flat
Rock, a small foul bight is filled with a cluster of rocks and islets.    extends NW for about 1.5 miles to the foot of the moraine of Yalik
 (902) An area with sandy bottom extends about I mile S of the    Glacier, a prominent mark. Deepwater approaches close to this flat
bight and offshore from two prominent sand beaches. The bottom    except at its SW end where it is shoal for a considerable distance
is smooth, with gradually increasing depths to the 10-fathom    offshore.
curve, nearly 0.5 mile offshore.                                    (914) Home Cove, 1.5 miles S from Hardover Point, is small.
 (903) A prominent reef 5.2 miles NE of Nuka Point and 3 miles      (915) Berger Island is a prominent wooded islet, 25 feet high,
S of the entrance to Nuka Passage makes a good mark. This reef is    about 5 miles S from Hardover Point. The island is the outermost
formed by two large rocks, 25 and 30 feet high, the outermost    of a group making off from the E shore, and appears from N to be
being the smaller and 400 yards off the E shore of Nuka Island.    in the center of the channel.
Many rocks are along the coast inshore of this reef, but deep water  (916) A rock 8 feet high is 250 yards NE from the island, and a
approaches within 200 yards on the offshore side.                  reef bare at low water, extends 85 yards off this rock. A rock
 (904) The small inlet about I mile S from the E entrance to Nuka    awash at low water and not marked by kelp, is 1.2 miles 213ï¿½ from
Passage is the only important indentation in the E shore of the    Berger Island.
island. Off the N point of the entrance is a prominent wooded islet  (917)  About 0.6 mile S of Berger Island is a grass-covered islet,
about 70 feet high, the outer face of which is bare white granite.    45 feet high and topped by a spruce tree which shows up well
There are numerous high bare rocks and wooded and grassy islets    from the N or S, but blends into the background when viewed
on both sides of the entrance. The inlet is exposed to SE, and the S    from the W. The spruce tree in range with the W tangent of Berger
side is foul, but small craft can approach its head as follows:    Island to the N, marks the 3 /2-fathom spot in the middle of the
 (905) Enter in midchannel and when 200 yards past the wooded    entrance to Westdahl Cove.
islet on the N side, anchor in 6 to 9 fathoms, sandy bottom. If     (918) Westdahl Cove is I mile S of Berger Island. A rocky
going to the head of the inlet, favor the N side above this anchor-    patch of 13 to 18 fathoms extends nearly across the bay. The
age to avoid submerged rocks almost in midchannel. A large sand-    anchorage is inside this rocky patch in 22 fathoms, mud bottom. A
flat is at the head, with shoal water 125 yards offshore from it.   reef bare at low water and marked by thick kelp, is 0.3 mile W of
Very small craft can anchor abreast the last point on the S shore,    the S entrance point. A 3 '2-fathom shoal is in the middle between
200 yards from the low-water line, in 2 fathoms, sandy bottom,    the entrance points.
but there is very little swinging room. This inlet affords fair-    (919) Yalik Glacier formerly discharged into the W  arm of
weather anchorage only.                                            Nuka Passage. There is good anchorage off the SW end of the gla-
 (906)  For 1.5 miles NW of the inlet there are rocks as much as    cier moraine in 14 to 17 fathoms, soft bottom; however, care
250 yards offshore. The last of these is 2 feet high, 300 yards off-    should be taken to avoid a 2-fathom rocky shoal about 0.4 mile S



                                               4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                 123


of the low waterline of the moraine and about 0.3 mile E of the W  at high water, is about 100 yards from the cliff at the SE end of the
shore. An unusual rocky reef, bare at low water, extends 300 yards    cove. A large kelp area extends about 200 yards NW from the
in a SE direction from the extreme SW end of the moraine.         rock. The anchorage is in 18 to 25 fathoms, soft bottom, 250 to
 (920) Petrof Point, on the W side of the passage opposite the    300 yards from the beach of the low neck and about 0.3 mile from
middle part of Nuka Island, is a prominent, low, rounding point    the cliff on the S side. The water deepens rapidly NW, the swing-
with a wide sand beach.                                           ing room is scant, and the anchorage is uneasy. It is recommended
 (921) Petrof Glacier, which shows prominently from the S, dis-    only as a temporary anchorage.
charges into the W side of the passage around the base of a promi-  (932) Port Dick, W of Gore Point, extends N for 2.5 miles to the
nent ridge about 2 miles S of Petrof Point.                       junction of its three main arms. Abrupt shoals are within a radius
 (922) Brown Mountain, between Petrof Glacier and Tonsina    of 2 miles about the point at the W  side of the entrance to Port
Bay, is of a distinctive brown shade during the summer and has a    Dick. The areas near the point are foul.
prominent round shoulder jutting to the E.                         (933) Takoma Cove and Sunday Harbor are branches of the
 (923) Tonsina Bay, 7 miles N from Gore Point, is small and    arm or bay on the E side of Port Dick, 2.5 miles above the
marked by a large island, known locally as Long Island, nearly in    entrance. A dangerous reef, covered 114 fathoms, is 0.3 to 0.5 mile
the center of the entrance. The entrance N of Long Island is pre-    W from the S side of the entrance to the arm. Takoma Cove is the
ferred, as it is deeper and wider. Firm sandflats are at the head of    anchorage generally used in Port Dick. Sunday Harbor has irregu-
the bay where vessels of any size can be beached in an emergency.    lar depths and is not recommended as an anchorage.
On the N side of the N entrance is a bold wooded islet. About 380  (934) Anchor in the entrance to Takoma Cove with the shore to
yards S of this islet is a reef awash at high water. Thick kelp    the SW open with the point at the W side of the entrance to Port
extends between the reef and the islet.                           Dick; select a depth of 17 to 18 fathoms, sticky mud-bottom. In the
 (924) A rock awash at half tide is 660 yards 275ï¿½ from this reef;    lesser depths near the head of the cove, the bottom is rocky and
it is 250 yards S of the N shore, and there is kelp inshore of it.   has poor holding quality.
Numerous rocks and islets make off to N from Long Island. The      (935) Taylor Bay, the N arm of Port Dick, extends in a N direc-
northernmost is a well-defined rocky islet sparsely covered with    tion for 3.5 miles and is 1.5 miles wide at the entrance. Except for
grass and about 25 feet high.                                     rocks fringing the shores, no dangers were found in the bay. A
 (925)  Entrance should be made at low water when the various    rock, 4 feet high, is 1.5 miles N of the entrance and 130 yards off
rocks and reefs are visible. Anchorage can be had in 22 fathoms,    the first well-defined point on the E shore. At the beginning of the
mud bottom, NW of Long Island in the basin formed by Long    narrows are two rocks, awash at half tide and about 100 yards off
Island, the islets, and the mainland. Good anchorage for small    the E shore.
craft can be had near the head of the bay in 5 to 10 fathoms, sand
                                                                     (936) At the upper end of the bay is a basin, with depths of 20 to
bottom.
                                                                    25 fathoms, surrounded by extensive mudflats.
 (926) Front Point, rising abruptly to 170 feet, is 5 miles NNW
of Gore Point, on an island which is separated from the mainland   (937)  West Arm extends W for a distance of 7.5 miles. There
                 by a narrow band of water about 25 yards wide    are two coves on the N side of the arm, 1.5 and 4 miles, respec-
                                                                    tively, from the entrance. The first cove has two islands in the cen-
 (927) A reef bare at minus tides is 0.4 mile E from the point and 
                                                                    ter. Anchorage can be had E of the islands in 16 to 19 fathoms,
there are several covered rocks and kelp patches inshore from this   k      an d mud bottom. The westernmost cove is practically bare at
danger. The coast from the S entrance to Tonsina Bay to the bight    roc
N      of Gore Point has numerous rocks awash at low water, and keip    low water. At the head of the arm on the S side are two islets, the
                 patches that extend about 0.3 mile offshore.     W one marking the low-water line which extends directly across
patches that extend about 0.3 mile offshore.
  (928) Anchorage can be had anywhere in the bight N of Gore
Point by keeping clear of the kelp and avoiding the rock, which    (938) In the SW approach to Port Dick is dangerous Gore Rock,
bares 3 feet at low water, 300 yards NE of the well-defined rock    covered I l4 fathoms, 7.5 miles 244ï¿½ from Gore Point and approxi-
point at the W end of the bight.                                  mately 3.5 miles from shore.
                                                                     (939) The second small bay, 5 miles W of Port Dick, has good
  (929)  Chart 16645.-Gore Point (590 ll.9'N., 151057.7'W.) is    anchorage for small craft in 15 fathoms and less. Between Port
the SE end of a prominent headland on the E side of the entrance    Dick and this bay the shore should not be approached closer than 2
to Port Dick. From E and W, the headland has the appearance of    miles, because of rocks awash that extend 1.5 miles off.
an island, with Gore Peak, near the middle and a broad, high       (940) Rocky Bay, the large bay N of East Chugach Island, is
shoulder at the ends, and separated from the highland N by a nar-    broken by numerous rocks, islets, rocks that uncover, and shoal
row gap. The arch in Arch Rock, at the E end of Gore Point,    spots. The depths are irregular and of little use as guides for navi-
shows over a small arc from S, and a folding in the strata in the    gation. For small boats there is sheltered anchorage in Picnic Har-
face of the cliff shows on the S side of the headland.            bor, which is 220 to 300 yards wide. A gravel road connects
  (930) Within a radius of 1.2 miles of Gore Point, the bottom is   Picnic Harbor with Jakolof Bay and continues to Seldovia.
very irregular, depths of 14 fathoms being found at that distance  (941) Two rocks that uncover 9 feet are 1.2 miles S from the
off. A depth of 5 /2 fathoms was found 0:4 mile S of the point in    large wooded island in the middle of Rocky Bay. There is also a
general depths of 10 to 15 fathoms.                               2/2-fathom spot 1.3 miles SW from the E entrance point of the
  (931) The neck joining the headland at Gore Point to the main-    bay. A sunken wreck is on the NE side of the bay in about
land is low and wooded. On the W side of the neck is a cove    59014'43"N., 151ï¿½23'43"W.
affording indifferent anchorage with E winds. The S point of the   (942) Windy Bay, just W of Rocky Bay, extends 3.5 miles W
cove is the W end of the headland, and is a shelving ridge of bare    and is 440 yards wide near its head. Good holding mud bottom in
rock. Close to this point is a rocky islet, from which rocks, bare at    41/2 to 8 fathoms near its head is not recommended as a desirable
low water, and kelp extend about 200 yards NW. A rock, covered    anchorage because of the strong W breeze that draws through the



124                                             4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


bay. Boats entering this bay should favor the S side, keeping about    (950) The waters of the inlet are much discolored by glacial silt.
440 yards offshore when N of the S entrance point.                   At low water the discoloration may extend to the mouth of the
 (943)  Chugach Bay, the large bay S of Windy Bay, has a N           inlet, and at high water it may be comparatively clear to East and
bight with deep water close inshore, and a W  arm, 2 miles long,    West Forelands or even farther N. Frequently with either a flood or
with good holding mud bottom. This anchorage, which is affected    ebb current the water above the Forelands appears as liquid mud.
by a strong W  breeze that draws through it, can be used by small    This water is very damaging to salt water pumps and shaft bear-
boats except in E weather. The bottom in the S half of the entrance    ings.
is broken, with a rocky spot covered 13/4 fathoms.                     (951)  During winter months most buoys in Cook Inlet are
                                                                     removed from station. (See the Light List.)
 (944)  Charts 16660, 16640.-Cook Inlet, on the W  side of            (952) Routes.-For vessels approaching Cook Inlet, the chart is
Kenai Peninsula, merges with Shelikof Strait through a wide          the best guide.
unobstructed passage W  of the Barren Islands. Leading from the        (953)  Kennedy Entrance and Stevenson Entrance are the main
Gulf of Alaska to Cook Inlet are Kennedy Entrance and Stevenson    deep-draft entrances to Cook Inlet from the E. (See chart 16606.)
Entrance, N and S respectively of the Barren Islands, and Chugach    When entering Kennedy Entrance, between Perl and Amatuli
Passage, inside the Chugach Islands. The distance is 1,254 miles    Islands, caution is necessary to avoid the two off-lying dangers:
from Seattle to the entrance to Cook Inlet at a point 3 miles S of    the 41/2-fathom rocky shoal about 16.2 miles E of East Amatuli
East Chugach Light, via the outside route by way of Strait of Juan    Island Light, and Cowanesque Rock, covered 21/2 fathoms, 7.3
de Fuca. From the entrance it is 48 miles to Seldovia, 59 miles to    miles SE of East Amatuli Island Light.
Homer, I 10 miles to Nikishka, and 175 miles to Anchorage.             (954)  Some vessels approaching from the E, pass N of East
                                                                     Chugach Island and enter the inlet via Chugach Passage, while
 (945)  Prominent features.-The shore on both sides of the inlet
can be seen in clear weather, but it is sometimes difficult to deter-
                         mieof the lack of marked features on the E  passage. Local knowledge is desirable in using Chugach Passage.
shormine a position because oflthenlack of marked featureson theE    Vessels approaching from the S and passing between East Amatuli
shore. Conspicuous and useful marks are Augustine, Iliamna, and      Island Light and the 2 fathom shoal SE of it, should make due
Redoubt Volcanoes in the lower inlet, and Mounts Susitna and    Island Light and the 21/2-fathom shoal SE of it, should make due
                                                                     allowance for the set of the tidal current and, especially during
Spurr in the upper inlet. Prominent in their respective localities are 
                                                                     periods of low visibility, keep a sharp lookout for the shoal. (See
four parabolic antennas, lighted atop, along the E shore from Cape
Starichkof to Kenai; the numerous peaks S of Kachemak Bay and    chart 16645.)
N from Kamishak Bay; Anchor Point; the 1,900-foot hill 10 miles        ()  Courses inside the inlet should be set as prudent naviga-
                                                                     tion demands, with due allowance for weather conditions and set
from the E shore between Capes Starichkof and Ninilchik; Chisik
                                                         from the E shore between Capes Starichkof and Ninilchik Chisik    of the currents. See the section on the Port of Anchorage, later in
Island; Kalgin Island, East, West, and North Forelands; Point Pos-    this chapter for more information on routes
session; and Fire Island.
                                                                       (956)  Tides and currents.-The diurnal range of tide in Cook
 (946)  Anchorages.-Port Graham, Seldovia Bay, Kasitsna and    Inlet varies from 14.3 feet at Port Chatham to 29.0 feet at Anchor-
Coal Bays in Kachemak Bay, Iniskin Bay, Tuxedni Channel, and    age
Knik Arm are the secure harbors in the inlet. Temporary anchor-        (957)  Tidal currents in Cook Inlet are strong and must be consid-
age in thick weather can be selected at most places in the inlet    ered at all times. The small local steamers plan their trips so as to
with the aid of the chart. The great range of the tides must always  have favorable current and prefer to anchor rather than steam
be kept in mind when anchoring.                                      against the current of a large tide. A vessel with a speed of 8 knots,
 (947)  Dangers.-The shoals in Cook Inlet are generally strewn    picking up the flood current of a large tide a little N of Anchor
with boulders that are not marked by kelp. These boulders, on the    Point, can carry it to Fire Island.
otherwise flat bottom, are not normally found by echo sounder or      (958)  At the entrance to Cook Inlet the tidal currents have an
lead lines unless directly over them. Most of those located by the  estimated velocity of 2 to 3 knots, and in general increase up the
survey were found by sighting them at low water. It was noted in    inlet, with very large velocities in the vicinities of Harriet Point,
places that the boulders rise as much as 30 feet above the general    East and West Forelands, and the entrances to Knik and Turnagain
level of the bottom. The boulders may be moved during the ice    Arms. The current velocity measured by the survey ship
breakup in spring and by the action of strong currents. As a mea-    McARTHUR was 5 knots at anchorage near East and West Fore-
sure of safety, it is considered advisable for vessels to avoid areas    lands, Tyonek, and Point MacKenzie. These anchorages were out
having depths no more than 30 feet greater than the draft. At low    of the full strength of the current, and it is estimated that the veloc-
water, deep-draft vessels should avoid areas with charted depths of    ity of the current during a large tide is as much as 8 knots between
less than 10 fathoms.                                                East and West Forelands and probably more between Harriet Point
 (948)  In general, the shoal banks fronting the marshy parts of the    and the S end of Kalgin Island.
shores in the upper inlet are free from boulders but there are indi-  (959) In general, the direction of the current is approximately
cations that boulders do exist in the deeper water outside these    parallel to the trend of the nearest shore and, when flats are uncov-
banks.                                                               ered, parallel to their edges. Off the various'bays a set may be
 (949)  With an average tidal current there are swirls throughout    expected, toward the bay on a flood current and from the bay on an
the inlet, but they do not necessarily indicate dangers as they show  ebb current.
in depths of 15 fathoms if the bottom is uneven. Heavy swirls with     (960) Information for several places in Cook Inlet is given in the
slight overfalls should be avoided, and any disturbance which has    Tidal Current Tables.
a recognizable wake in the water should be considered as indicat-      (961)  The following statements give information not contained
ing a dangerous rock or shoal. A dangerous wave condition exists    in the Tidal Current Tables. Current table information should be
over the shoals in Cook Inlet when the current opposes winds over    relied upon for all localities listed in those tables. The available
12 knots.                                                            current information for Cook Inlet is derived largely from obser-




                                               4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                   125


vations near the shores. In the middle of the channel it is likely    bold and precipitous and devoid of trees. They are thickly covered
that velocities are larger and times of current somewhat later than    with grass in the depressions and on the less precipitous slopes. In
near the shore.                                                    general, the anchorages around Ushagat Island are preferable to
 (962) Dangerous Cape.-A current of nearly 3 knots sets at times    the others in the group.
across the broken ground around the cape, causing heavy rips and    (976) Dangers.-A pinnacle rock, covered 4t/2 fathoms, is in the
overfalls.                                                         approach to Cook Inlet 16.2 miles E from East Amatuli Island
 (963) Kachemak Bay.-From Dangerous Cape, a flood current    Light and 10.7 miles S of East Chugach Light. The top of the rock
sets up Kachemak Bay with a velocity of I to 2 knots in a NE       is of very small area and apparently is the high point of a larger
direction, and the ebb flows in a SW to W direction. The currents    shoal. It may or may not be marked by a current slick. Another
at the mouth of the bay are uncertain, and may vary from place to    shoal area, Cowanesque Rock, unmarked and with a least depth
place, making it difficult to make correct allowance for set in    of 21/2 fathoms, is 7.3 miles 124ï¿½ from East Amatuli Light. Mari-
crossing from Anchor Point to Seldovia.                            ners are cautioned to give both of these shoals a wide berth.
 (964) Seldovia.-The currents have an estimated velocity of 1 to    (977) A rock awash at half tide is 1.2 miles N from the northern-
2 knots.                                                           most point of West Amatuli Island.
 (965)  Knik Harbor.-The currents have moderate velocity at the    (978)  A bare rock, 8 feet high, is about 0.8 mile W of the NW
anchorage near the shore, and are strong in midchannel.            point of Ushagat Island. Two rocks awash at half tide are 220
 (966) Turnagain Arm.-The currents are very strong and the    yards NW and 0.5 mile ESE of the bare rock.
flood frequently comes in as a bore, with large tides, under certain  (979)  Operators of small boats should take particular care to
weather conditions. This bore is said to be 4 to 6 feet high at times,    avoid being caught in the tide rips off the Barren Islands. With a
and is very dangerous for small craft. Boats should be beached    moderate W sea, wind force 4 to 5, coaming seas in series of three
well above the level of the flats, to avoid the bore when it comes    to four high waves have been seen N of Nord Island with sufficient
in. The bore can be heard about one-half hour before it arrives,    height and force to seriously endanger, if not swamp, the ordinary
sounding like breakers on the beach; it travels slowly.            fishing launch. In moderate weather small boats should not leave
 (967) Harriet Point.-The currents are very swift at Harriet Point,    these islands until the current sets with the sea.
exceeding 5 knots on large tides, and with S breezes bad tide rips  (980) Tidal currents of considerable velocity are found in
occur between Harriet Point and Kalgin Island, and extend some    Kennedy Entrance and Stevenson- Entrance, the flood current set-
distance S.                                                        ting approximately NW and the ebb SE. Heavy tide rips occur
 (968) Kamishak Bay.-In the N part of the bay, the currents fol-    with strong winds in the vicinity of the islands, and are frequently
low the coast, flooding NE and ebbing SW at a rate of about 1 knot    dangerous for small vessels. The wind among the Barren Islands is
at strength. The current is more noticeable near the shore. With a    generally stronger than it is a few miles away.
strong W wind, tide rips occur about 2 to 4 miles N of Chinitna     (981) In the deep waters of Kennedy and Stevenson Entrances
Point.                                                             and their approaches, the current usually is regular and appears to
  (969) Ice.-The upper part of Cook Inlet is more or less    have less force than along the sides of the passages. At the edges
obstructed during the winter by ice which forms on the flats and in    of the banks.bordering the islands and on the detached 20- and 30-
the shallower waters.                                              fathom banks, in fact wherever there is much change in depth, the
  (970) During a mild winter or after a period of several days of    current increases greatly in force. Such currents are usually, but
mild weather, vessels will probably have no difficulty in reaching    not always, marked by ripples, eddies, or boils.
the head of the inlet and lying at the docks long enough to dis-    (982) Ebb currents set strongly to the E along the edge of the
charge their cargoes.                                              bank bordering the N side of the Barren Islands, to the S between
  (971) During a severe winter or after a considerable period of    Ushagat and Amatuli Islands, and to the E, N of Sugarloaf Island.
severe cold, full-powered vessels usually reach the head of the    The ebb currents are variable for a few miles S from the Barren
inlet but because of the heavy masses of ice floating in the strong    Islands. Farther S, they set steadily SE.
currents, find it difficult to dock without the aid of an icebreaker.  (983) On the flood a narrow band of strong current will be felt a
  (972) Ice does not generally interfere with navigation S of    few miles N of the Barren Islands. Some lee from the flood current
Anchor Point except on the W side of the inlet, where large fields    is afforded closer inshore, but even there a steady set to the W will
of ice are sometimes carried by wind and tides as far as Augustine    generally be found.
Island, closing Iliamna Bay for brief periods.                      (984) The current in general probably does not exceed 4 knots.
  (973) (See Page T-21 for details on ice breakup and freezeup in    Reports indicate that slack waters do not occur at the times of
Cook Inlet.)                                                       local high and low tides, and the navigator is cautioned against
  (974) Supplies.-The principal settlements along Cook Inlet are    assuming such a relation to exist.
Seldovia, Homer, Kenai, and Anchorage; supplies and water are       (985) Kennedy Entrance, one of the two main deep-draft
available. Water also can be obtained from numerous streams    entrances to Cook Inlet from the E, is between East Amatuli and
along all the high shores but is sometimes accessible only at high    Perl Islands. It has a clear width of about 7 miles, with general
tide; in the upper inlet the only known streams where vessels can    depths of 30 to I 110 fathoms, though detached rocks and reefs
approach the shore close enough to boat water in any quantity are    extend 3 miles off Perl Island and 1.5 miles off East Amatuli
on the N side of East Foreland, on the N side of Point Possession,    Island.
and in Knik Arm.                                                    (986) Stevenson Entrance, S of the Barren Islands, is the sec-
                                                                    ond main entrance to Cook Inlet from the E. It has a clear width of
  (975)  Chart 16606.-Barren Islands, a group of mountainous    about 8 miles between the dangers that extend off the Barren
islands in the middle of the entrance to Cook Inlet between    Islands on the N and off Shuyak Island on the S, with general
Chugach Islands and Shuyak Island, occupy an area about 13    depths of 26 to 100 fathoms. The S shore of Stevenson Entrance is
miles long and 5 miles wide. East and West Amatuli Islands are    described in chapter 5.



126                                            4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


  (987) East Amatuli Island, at the E end of the group, has high    1 mile by a wide open bay with two bights. Good anchorage for all
peaks along its length, except 0.8 mile from the SW end where it    E winds can be had in the bight at the N end of the bay.
drops to a valley having a level of less than 200 feet. A rocky islet,  (998) Anchorage with shelter from S weather, and some protec-
118 feet high and 200 yards off the E end of the island, is marked    tion from W weather, can be had off the N side of Ushagat Island
by East Amatuli Island Light (58054.9'N., 151ï¿½57.1'W.), 120    near the head of the deep bight 2.5 miles from the NW promon-
feet above the water, and shown from a skeleton tower with a dia-    tory. Anchor in 12 to 15 fathoms, rock bottom, about 0.5 mile off
mond-shaped red and white daymark. A rock awash is 250 yards E    the two small sand beaches. A small boat can get more shelter by
of the light.                                                      anchoring close in.
 (988) Puffin Peak, with a conical top on East Amatuli Island, is   (999) Good protection in N or W weather can be had in the bight
the highest peak in the E group of the Barren Islands.             on the S side of Ushagat Island, N of Sud Island. Williwaws are
 (989) Amatuli Cove, on the N side of East Amatuli Island and    strong, but a small boat can avoid the worst of them by anchoring
close to the W end, affords fair anchorage near its head for small    under the cliffs to the W of the head of the bight. A large vessel
craft, in 6 to 8 fathoms, sand and gravel bottom. With a heavy NE  should anchor in 12 to 18 fathoms, rock bottom.
wind, considerable sea makes into the cove and the williwaws are
heavy. Winds draw through the cove with great force, especially     (oo000) Charts 16645, 16646.-Chugach Islands consist of
from the SE and S. The holding ground is not good. Kelp grows    mountainous East Chugach, Perl, and Elizabeth Islands near the
along the shores, and there is a small stream at the head of the    coast of Kenai Peninsula at the entrance to Cook Inlet.
cove.                                                               (oo01) East Chugach Island has a low valley through the middle
 (990o) West Amatuli Island is mountainous. A cluster of rocks    in a NE and SW direction. The S peak is 1,400 feet high, and the
about 30 feet high is 0.5 mile E from the NE end of the island,    peak near the W end is higher. The SE point of the island is a cliff
with a reef between. A rock, 6 feet high, is 370 yards off the N   with a peak at its crest and slightly lower land between it and the
point of the island. A rock awash at half tide, which does not    mountains. The point is marked by East Chugach Light
always break, is 1 mile N of the 6-foot rock.                      (59ï¿½06.4'N., 151ï¿½26.5'W.), 325 feet above the water, and shown
 (991)  Sugarloaf Island is 1.1 miles S from East Amatuli Island;    from a skeleton tower with a diamond-shaped red and white day-
deep water is between it and the other Barren Islands. A large    mark on the SE end of the island.
grass-covered rock, 75 feet high, is 0.4 mile S of Sugarloaf Island,  (1002) Considerable foul ground extends from the island into the
with foul ground between. A rock awash is 200 yards from the SW    passage to the N. A rock awash at low water is 0.5 mile off the NE
corner of the island and a 10-fathom bank, on which tide rips are    point. A 41/4-fathom, kelp-marked shoal is 1.4 miles NE of the
common, is about 0.4 mile W.                                       low-wooded spit at the NW end of the island. The passage is
 (992) Sugarloaf Island is a Steller sea lion rookery site. There is    apparently clear between the 41/4-fathom shoal and the shoal area
a 3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer zone around the entire island.    making off the points at the entrance to Chugach Bay.
(See 50 CFR 227.12, chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)         (1003) The passage between East Chugach and Perl Island is
 (993) Nord Island is 1.3 miles N from the E end of Ushagat    clear, and is preferred by vessels passing inside of Perl and Eliza-
Island with deep water between. Its S half is a dome 690 feet high,    beth Islands, because it is considered safe and easy to navigate.
while its N half is lower and irregular.                            (1004) If the passage from Gore Point N of East Chugach Island
 (994)  Sud Island, 1.1 miles off the SE side of Ushagat, is high    is used, care should be taken to make proper allowance for the cur-
near its SW end. Near its NE end is a knob 203 feet high. Islets,    rents which set in and out of Port Dick and diagonally across the
covered rocks, and rocks awash at low water, extend out 400 yards    approach to East Chugach Island. This passage should not be
in many places around the island.                                  attempted unless the weather is clear enough to use leading marks.
 (995) A small rocky grass-topped island, 380 feet high, is 1.5     (005os) Perl Island is in the middle of the Chugach group. Its NW
miles SSE from the SW point of Ushagat Island. Foul ground sur-    point is sandy on the W  side and has a high cliff on the N side.
rounds the island and extends almost to a bare rock 48 feet high,    Several cabins and a gravel airstrip are on the point. Pert Island
about I mile to the S. A low rock is between the island and the    Light 1 (59007.1 N., 151'38.3'W.), 80 feet above the water, is
bare rock. Strong tide rips in this vicinity extend to the S of Ush-    shown from a skeleton tower with a square green daymark on the
agat Island. A barrier against the ebb current is formed by the    extreme NE point of the island.
island, rocks, and shoal area, which reduces the strength of the    (1006) A pinnacle rock, covered 41/2 fathoms, is about 0.5 mile
current along the SE shore of Ushagat Island.                      off the SE side of the island.
 (996)  Ushagat Island, the westernmost and largest of the Barren   (1007) Perl Rock, 87 feet high and marked by a light, is a large
Islands, is wide near its W end. Ushagat Island is grass covered    prominent detached rock about 0.5 mile S of Perl Island. A rock
except on the tops of peaks and where the cliffs are steep. The    that uncovers is 185 yards W from Perl Rock.
trees are spruce, ranging from about 50 feet high near the lake to 3  (1008o  Nagahut Rocks, about 50 feet high, are large-prominent
feet high near the W end. The island is practically inaccessible    bare rocks, close together and about 1.5 miles W of the SW end of
except at the low neck near the NE end, and at the beaches front-    Perl Island. Rocks and foul ground are between them and the
ing the valley in the NW part. The summit of the island is the    island. Safe passage between Nagahut Rocks and Perl Island is
highest in the Barren Islands. Table Mountain, at the NE end, is    possible in depths greater than 20 fathoms, but extreme caution is
separated from the other high land of the island by a low narrow    advised.
neck. There are several brackish lakes which are probably fresh in  (1009) Dora Reef is a small patch of covered rocks about I mile
the spring.                                                        SW of Nagahut Rocks. The reef is steep-to and breaks at low
 (997)  Outlying rocks are to the N and W of the NW point of    water with moderate seas.
Ushagat Island. Outlying rocks and islets are to.the S and W of the  (1010) There is deep water in the passage between Elizabeth
SW point of the island. The W side of the island is indented about    Island and Nagahut Rocks; however, a shoal of 6 to 9 fathoms is




                                               4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                  127


0.4 to I mile E from the SE end of Elizabeth Island, and a shoal    (1023) Kelp Point is 0.5 mile NE from Claim Point. A bare rock
covered 41/2 fathoms is I mile W from the W end of Perl Island.    is 250 yards S of Kelp Point, and a dangerous detached reef with
 (t011) Chugach Passage is between Perl and Elizabeth Islands    rocks bare at low water is about 300 yards E of the bare rock. This
and the rounded end of the mainland. A lighted buoy marks the    reef is covered by kelp, but usually the kelp does not show at high
NE side of the channel in the turn of the passage.                 water.
 (1012) The end of the mainland is fringed with reefs, isolated    (1024) Chatham Island, small, low, rocky, and partly wooded, is
rocks, and extensive kelp beds. In rounding it from the E, the out-    in the middle of Port Chatham, about 1.2 miles inside the entrance.
ermost danger is a rock, bare at half tide, 0.4 mile off the S side of    Port Chatham Entrance Light (59012.6'N., 15 1ï¿½46.5'W.), 40
the rounding mainland shore.                                       feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red
 (1013) Chugach Passage is commonly used by vessels entering    and white diamond-shaped daymark on the W point of the island.
Cook Inlet from E. Depths of 51/2 to 10 fathoms were found in the   (1025) The channel leads W  and N of the island, and the only
shallowest part of the channel between the SE end of Elizabeth    known danger is a rock covered 11/4 fathoms, 500 yards N of the
Island and the dangerous reefs that extend from the mainland. An    light. The rock is marked on its W side by a buoy. There is deep
abrupt rocky spot, covered 7 fathoms, is about 0.5 mile NW of the    water on either side of the rock. A depth of 51/4 fathoms was found
N end of Perl Island.                                              250 yards SW of the light.
 (1014) Elizabeth Island has two mountain masses, separated by      (1026) The passage E of Chatham Island is foul and should not be
a low valley that extends in a NW direction. The NE point is a    attempted by strangers. A rock, covered 21/4 fathoms, is 0.4 mile
sandspit marked at its outer extremity by a buoy. A depth of 1 /2   from the E shore and 0.7 mile 1650 from Chatham Island Light.
fathoms is 0.3 mile SE and a prominent large bare rock is 0.3 mile  (1027) On the E side, 0.6 mile NE from Chatham Island, is a pro-
WSW, respectively, from the buoy. Cape Elizabeth is the W end of    jecting rocky, wooded point, where the port changes direction.
the island. Cape Elizabeth Light (59008.8'N., 151'52.6'W.), 48    The opposite side, NE from this point, is a low grassy spit. A lum-
above the water, is shown from a square tower with a diamond-    ber camp is on the spit.
shaped red and white daymark near the S end of the cape. A sub-     (1028) Anchorages.The best anchorage is in the broad part of
merged rock, dangerous to navigation, is 0.4 mile W of the cape.   the harbor 0.3 mile SE of the spit, in 10 to 13 fathoms, soft bot-
 (1015) Currents, Chugach Passage.-E of Elizabeth Island the    tom.
flood sets N and the ebb S with velocities of 3.1 knots and 1.8     (1029) At the E end of the harbor are rocks showing but little
knots, respectively. Currents of about twice these velocities have    above high water. On the S shore, 1880 from these rocks, water
been reported during heavy weather. (See the Tidal Current Tables    can be obtained by boats which can be placed under a waterfall at
for daily predictions.)                                            the higher stages of the tide. Just N of the low spit is an excellent
 (1016) It is reported that the turn of the current in the main pas-    place for beaching a vessel.
sage S of Elizabeth Island occurs earlier, possibly as much as 1    (030) Routes.-When entering Port Chatham from Cook Inlet it
                                 hour, than in Chugach Passage. In the area   of the Chugach    is well to keep at least 0.5 mile S of Claim Point and Kelp Point.
                                                                    When approaching from Chugach Passage, the white scar on the
Islands, tidal currents are much stronger near the islands than the    When approaching f    rom Chugach Passage  the whit     h
                 ~~~~deep water farther S.         ~cliffs E of Kelp Point is a good mark. Keep midchannel between
                                                                    Chatham Island and the N shore, passing about 100 yards S of the
 (1017) Heavy tide rips occur from the NW end of Perl Island to
                                                                    buoy marking the I '/4-fathom rock N of the light. From there to the
the W end of the passage. The heaviest rips are in the vicinity of
Perl Island with an ebb current and E wind. Heavy rips also occur   0   ) Ti des     and
                                        off the SE poin ofE(a031) Tides and currents.-The diurnal range of tide is 14.3 feet
off the SE point of East Chugach Island.
                                                                    at Port Chatham. The tidal currents have little velocity in the
 (l018) Detailed sailing directions for Chugach Passage are not    entrance and harbor, but in the approach on either side of Eliza-
considered necessary; the chart is the guide, having due regard for    beth Island there are strong tidal currents, and at times tide rips.
existing conditions of weather and set of current. Midchannel       (1032) The coastline between Port Chatham and Koyuktolik Bay
courses are clear in the approach to the passage N of East Chugach    is foul, and thick kelp extends as much as 0.5 mile offshore.
Island and between that island and Perl Island. Local knowledge is  (1033) Koyuktolik Bay is about 5 miles WNW of Port Chatham.
desirable.                                                        Its N shore consists of bare rocky cliffs, while the S shores are
 (lo19) Port Chatham, indenting the end of Kenai Peninsula N of    lower. The S entrance point is a low yellow bluff. Rocks and reefs
Elizabeth Island, is a secure harbor for vessels of any size, and    extend 0.2 mile from the S entrance point. Temporary anchorage
easily entered in the daytime with clear weather. During heavy    for a moderate-sized vessel, in 8 to 10 fathoms, hard bottom, can
gales some williwaws are felt at the anchorage, but they are not    be found 0.5 mile from the head of the bay. In heavy weather a
dangerous.                                                         considerable swell may reach this anchorage. It is constricted by a
 (1020) Below Chatham Island the shores on both sides of the    sand and gravel shoal that extends from the S shore near the
entrance are foul, but above the island the main part of the harbor    entrance to a lagoon and by rocks that uncover off the N shore.
is clear. The dangers are marked by kelp with the water below half    The lagoon is navigable by skiff at high water.
tide. The mountains on either side of the harbor rise abruptly from  (1034) Point Adam, just W of Koyuktolik Bay, is low at the end,
the water and are wooded about half way to the summits. The    and rises in a steep grassy slope to mountains. Magnet Rock is
small cannery and wharf at Portlock on the S shore were in ruins    3.3 miles 345ï¿½ from Point Adams and about 0.5 mile off Point
in 1982.                                                           Bede. The rock is 25 feet high, black, and prominent.
 (1021) Claim Point, on the W side of the entrance, is a wooded     (1035) Flat Island, 1.4 miles N from Magnet Rock, is small, flat,
hill with a low wooded neck in back of it. Bare rocks and kelp    and grass covered; it is composed of two closely connected islands
extend about 250 yards off the SE side of the point.              joined by bare reefs. Flat Island Light (59ï¿½ 19.9'N.,
 (1022) Chrome Bay is on the N side of the entrance to Port        151059.7'W.), 70 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton
Chatham.                                                           tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the NW




128                                            4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


point of the northernmost island. The island is surrounded by kelp.    10 fathoms. These anchorages are exposed to a heavy swell in S or
A group of rocks that uncover and marked by kelp are 0.2 mile off    W weather.
the W  side of Flat Island. Heavy tide rips occur in the area        (1045) When inside Passage Island, anchorage in 10 to 17 fath-
between Point Bede, Magnet Rock, and Flat Island.                   oms can be had in any part of Port Graham except the cable area
                                                                    about 0.9 mile ESE of the wharf. One of the bestis N or NE of the
 (1036) Chart 16646.-Port Graham, on the E side of Cook Inlet,    wharf, in 10 to 13 fathoms, sticky bottom. The cove SE of the
4 miles NE of Flat Island, is a secure harbor inside Passage Island,    wharf is shoal.
and with care is easily entered in the daytime. Its entrance between  (1046) Routes.-The safest time to enter Port Graham is at low
Russian Point on the S and Dangerous Cape on the N, has exten-    water, and the better entrance is N of Passage Island. The channel
sive outlying reefs, covered at various stages of the tide. The dan-    S of Passage Island should not be used by strangers. The chart is
gers are generally steep-to and marked by kelp.                     the guide.
 (1037) English Bay is an open bight on the W  side of Russian       (1047) The entrance S of Passage Island is approached through a
Point (59ï¿½21.6'N., 151ï¿½55.3'W.). English Bay Reef, bare at low    narrow unmarked channel with depths of 6 to 8 fathoms over a
water, is about I mile W of Russian Point. There is broken bottom    rocky bar N of Russian Point. The bar channel rounds a reef, bare
and thick kelp between the reef and the foul ground that extends    at low water, that extends 600 yards N from Russian Point.
from Russian Point; strangers should not cross this area. Depths of  (1048) Tides and currents.-The diurnal range of tide is about
3'/4 and 5 fathoms are about 0.5 mile SSW of English Bay Reef.    16.5 feet. Strong tidal currents, both ebb and flood, set across the
English Bay, a small native settlement, is on the NE side of    mouth of the harbor, but there is little current at or inside of Pas-
English Bay. A gravel airstrip is near the village.                 sage Island. With opposing wind and current, heavy tide rips occur
 (1038) Dangerous Cape (59ï¿½24.0'N., 151ï¿½54.3'W.) is on the N       off and well N and S of the entrance to Port Graham.
side of the entrance to Port Graham. Dangerous Cape Reef             (1049) Point Pogibshi (see also chart 16645) is a prominent flat-
extends 0.5 mile W from the W  side of the cape. Bird Reef, 250    topped grassy point about 50 feet high, with rocky sides, on the E
yards long, is 0.6 mile S from Dangerous Cape. The highest rock    side of Cook Inlet 1.5 miles N of Dangerous Cape. At this point
at the N end of the reef is covered at extreme high tide; The shore    the coast changes direction NE for about 5 miles to Seldovia Bay.
reef inside of Bird Reef is composed of rocks which uncover and    Point Pogibshi Light (59025.5'N., 151I53.1'W.), 94 feet above
some bare rocks. A detached rock, covered 1 /4 fathoms, is in the    the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a diamond-shaped
channel between Bird Reef and the shore reef. Midway between    red and white daymark on the S side near the end of the point.
Bird Reef and Passage Island, and 0.5 mile from the N shore, is a    (loso) Kelp extends 0.5 mile off the bight 2.7 miles NE of Point
small shoal with 2'/2 fathoms, marked by a buoy. Vessels should
pass S of it, as another shoal makes out 650 yards from the shore.
                                                                   (1051) Seldovia Bay, 7 miles NE of Port Graham, is a secure har-
 (1039) Passage Island, I mile                                     inside the entrance, IS high and    bor in any weather. There are several shoals covered less than 3
wooded. It is generally fringed with reefs to a distance of 150
yards, and a shelvring spit, covered at high water, extends 350    fathoms in the entrance, and the inner part of the bay is very shoal.
yards, and a shelving spit, covered at high water, extends 350
yards E from its E end. The end of this spit is marked by a buoy. A  (1052) Point Naskowhak (59'27.3'N., 151044.4'W.), on theW
                                                                    side of the entrance to Seldovia Bay, is the N of two small high
reef, with numerous rocks bare and covered at various stages of
the tide, extends 0.9 mile WSW from the W  end of the island.    rocky wooded knobs which stand on a low grassy spit surrounding
Port Graham Entrance Light (59022.3'N., 151I54. l'W.), 50 feet    a lagoon. A reef with rocks awash extends about 0.1 mile N from
above the water, is shown from a small house with a red and white    the point, and kelp-marked broken ground extends almost 0.5 mile
diamond-shaped daymark on the N end of the island.                  NE. Kelp-marked shoals with a least depth of 2 fathoms are 700
 (1040) Rocks, bare at low water and marked by a buoy, are 250    yards ENE from the point.
yards W of the point on the N shore E of Passage Island. This is      (l053) Gray Cliff, the E entrance point of Seldovia Bay, is abare
the worst danger in the entrance. The channel has a width of 250    rock cliff 60 to 70 feet high. Seldovia Bay Entrance Light
yards between the rock and the reef fringing Passage Island.        (59ï¿½27. 'N., 151 43.3'W.), 64 feet above the water, is shown from
 o(041) The only serious danger E of Passage Island is a narrow,    a small house with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark at
submerged reef with kelp that extends halfway across Port Gra-    the S end of the cliff.
ham from the N shore 0.6 mile SE of Passage Island, and is            (1054) Seldovia Point, I mile N of Gray Cliff, is a 200-foot-high
marked at the S end by a buoy. There are small streams on the    cliff, wooded on top. A shoal with a least depth of 2A/4 fathoms is
shores of the port and a large stream and valley are at its head.   about 0.4 mile N of the point. Kelp extends 0.6 mile from shore in
 wo42) Port Graham has a cannery and pier on the S side, 1.9    the bight NE of the point.
miles beyond Passage Island. The pier has a 100-foot face with 15    (1055) Red Bluff, 0.2 mile S of Gray Cliff, is high and reddish in
feet reported alongside. The cannery is owned by Port Graham        color. Foul ground extends from the bluff to about 0.2 mile W and
Corporation and has not been in use since the Valdez Oil Spill of    0.1 mile SW. Several groundings have been reported on the rocks
March 1989. A small store is in the village. A commercial air    in the vicinity of Seldovia Bay Lighted Buoy 1; caution is advised.
taxi makes runs to Homer and Seldovia, weather permitting.          A rock that uncovers 4 feet is about 300 yards W of the bluff. This
 (1043) About 900 yards NW of the wharf is a shoal that extends    rock is steep-to on its W side and the principal danger in the bay.
about 300 yards offshore and marked at its outer end by a buoy.      (1056) Watch Point, 0.6 mile S of Gray Cliff, is a small 30-foot-
 (1044) Anchorages.-Temporary anchorage for a small vessel can    high grassy head with a few trees and a short low grassy neck
be selected in the middle of Coal Cove, inside Dangerous Cape, in    behind it. A high pointed rock is near the E shore 300 yards N of
5 to 10 fathoms, rocky bottom; the shore of the cove is fringed    the point.
with kelp to a distance of 350 yards. The cove should be              (1057) Seldovia Bay Light 3 (59026.5'N., 151ï¿½43.3'W.), 45 feet
approached with caution. A better anchorage with more room will    above the water, is shown from a small house with a square green
be found in the bight on the N shore, N of Passage Island, in 7 to    daymark off the end of Watch Point. Kelp-marked rocks with a




                                                4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                  129


least depth of 3/4 fathom are between the light and the Seldovia    (1071) Chart 16645,.-Kachemak Bay is a large bay on the E side
waterfront to the S.                                               of Cook Inlet. The entrance is between Seldovia Point
 (1058) Seldovia, on the E side of Seldovia Bay just S of Watch    (59028.3'N., 151ï¿½42.0'W.) on the S and Anchor Point (59046.8'N.,
Point, is a fishing and logging town. It has a cannery, some stores,    151052.0'W.) on the N. It affords excellent anchorage for vessels
hotel, hospital, and churches. A local magistrate is in the town.  of all classes and sizes.
  (1o59) Channel.-The channel to Seldovia is from 400 yards to       (1072) Weather.-Winds in the Kachemak Bay area are predomi-
100 yards wide between the shoals and rocks that extend from    nantly from the NE from late fall to early spring. During the rest
either side of Seldovia Bay. These obstructions are marked by kelp    of the year, SW winds are the most frequent. Winds are strongest
at slack water in summer and fall, but the kelp tows under during    during the late summer and early fall.
the strength of the tidal currents. In August 1984, the buoyed      (1073) Fogs are common to the area. Ground fogs occur most
channel had a controlling depth of 18 feet.                        frequently in winter with the heaviest fogs reported to be in Janu-
  (1060) Anchorages.-The best anchorage is in the middle of Sel-    ary. Homer and Seldovia occasionally report fog conditions. The
dovia Bay,0.8 mile S of Seldovia Bay Light 3, in 9 to 10 fathoms,    more frequent occurrence is in the summer when it may last for
sticky bottom. A small vessel can anchor in the channel W of Sel-    days at a time. It is reported that fog banks frequently hang over
dovia with Red Bluff open W  from Watch Point and the charted    the open water after harbors have been cleared.
church cross bearing 068ï¿½.                                          (1074) The annual mean temperature of the area is reported to be
  (1061) Tides and currents.-The diurnal range of tide is 17.8 feet    about 35ï¿½F. July and August are usually the warmest months. The
at Seldovia. (See the Tide Tables for daily predictions.) Additional    temperature can range from a high of nearly 90ï¿½F in the summer
information on the predicted hourly heights of the tide can be    to well below zero in the winter.
obtained from the publication "Supplemental Tidal Predictions -     (1075) Ice forms in the freshwater streams and within areas of
Anchorage, Nikiski, Seldovia, and Valdez, Alaska," published by    relatively little water movement. The boat harbor at Homer will
the National Ocean Service. The tidal currents have an estimated    pack with slush and pan ice during the colder periods, but rarely
velocity of 1; to 2 knots.                                         halts small-boat traffic completely. The headwaters of Jakolof
  (1062) Wharves.-Seldovia has three piers and a small-boat har-    Bay reportedly Will form ice, but it is not considered a problem to
bor.                                                               navigation.
  (1063) City Pier: an L-shaped pier 200 yards S of Watch Point;    (1076) Caution.-Heavy concentrations of fishing vessels, crab-
210-foot face; 25 feet reported alongside; deck height, 27 feet;    pots, and fixed fishing gear are in Kachemak Bay. Marker buoys
gasoline, diesel fuel, electricity, and water are available year-    on some of the fixed gear may be submerged at half tide and invis-
round; 3/4-ton hoist; receipt of petroleum products and general  ible at higher tides. Vessels transiting to and from Homer not more
cargo; Alaska Marine Highway Ferry Terminal; owned by the City    than 2 miles seaward of the 10-fathom curve from Anchor Point to
of Seldovia.                                                       Bluff Point should clear the fixed gear.
  (1064) Pacific Pearl Seafood Pier: an L-shaped pier just behind    (1077) Nubble Point, 4.2 miles NE of Seldovia Point, is a long
and N of the City Pier; 87-foot face; 14 feet reported alongside;    sandspit, terminating in a rocky knoll, which may be mistaken for
one 3/4-ton and one 1/2-ton hoists; receipt of king crab for the can-    Point Naskowhak if not sure of the position. The E part of the
nery; owned and operated by Pacific Pearl Seafood Co.              point is wooded.
  (1065) Seldovia Small-Boat Harbor, about 0.2 mile S of City       (1078) Kasitsna Bay, between Nubble Point and Herring
Pier, is protected by breakwaters. A light marks the end of the N  Islands, has anchorage in 12 to 15 fathoms, good holding ground.
breakwater. In April 1994, the controlling depth was 12 feet in the    The water shoals abruptly to the shore and to the flat which fills
entrance channel and basin except for shoaling to 10 feet near the    the cove formed by Nubble Point; the flat in the cove will be
SW corner of the dredged basin. The SE half of the basin is locally    avoided by keeping the E end of the point bearing W of 014ï¿½.
maintained and had depths of about 10 feet. The harbor provides     (1079) Two rocks close together and marked by a buoy on the NE
moorage for 140 vessels; some transient spaces are available. The    side are 0.5 mile NE of the N end of Nubble Point. The W rock is
harbormaster assigns berths. The harbormaster's office, at the N   covered 2 fathoms and the E rock bares at extreme low water. The
end of the small-boat harbor parking lot, monitors VHF-FM chan-    buoy marks the entrance between the rocks and Hesketh Island. A
nel 16 and can be contacted by calling 907-234-7886. Water and    shoal with a least depth of 51/2 fathoms is 500 yards SE of the
electricity are available at the floats and fuel is available. A 102-    rocks. A least depth of 12 fathoms was found between the rocks
foot and a 106-foot grid are in the basin. The basin is owned by the    and Nubble 'Point by giving the N end of the point a berth of over
State and operated by the city.                                    200 yards. A private mooring buoy is 1.3 miles SSW of the
  (1066) Supplies and repairs are limited.                         buoyed rocks.
  (1067) Communications.-The Alaska Marine Highway System            t0os0) In 1981, the NOAA Ship RAINIER found numerous
has scheduled ferry service from Seldovia to Homer and Kodiak.    uncharted rocks and shoals while surveying in the vicinity of the
Small commercial ferries make daily runs in the summer  to    Herring Islands; caution is advised.
Homer. A commercial air taxi makes runs to Homer and Port Gra-       1081s  Jakolof Bay is entered at the SE corner of Kasitsna Bay.
ham,weatherpermitting. AgravelroadleadstoJakolofBay.               Private ferries make occasional runs between Jakolof Bay and
  (1068i  Landline telephone, radiotelephone, and radiotelegraph    Homer in the summer months. An overhead power cable with a
communications are maintained.                                     clearance of 51 feet crosses the entrance of the bay.
  (1069) Seldovia Slough, just S of the small-boat harbor, leads E   (1082): Jakolof Bay is a long, narrow finger of water about 1.7
and N to Seldovia Lagoon. It is dry at low water and only navi-    miles long and 0.25 mile wide, lying in a general NNW and SSE
gated by skiffs.                                                   direction. The entrance to the bay is about 0.125 mile wide and
  (1070) The remainder of the cove is nearly dry at extreme low    unmarked. A small island which connects to the W  shoreline at
water. A grassy head with a few trees forms the SW side of the    lower stages of tide is located near the center of the entrance.
cove that is joined to the main shore by a low narrow neck:        However, a rock ledge extends outward from the island an esti-





                                               0





















                                    :
                                               rI
                                               c/I
                                               m


-SELDOVIA SMALL BOATBASIN '
                                               0
                                               0
                                               0





                                                4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                  131


mated 250 feet or more, reducing the clear channel to about  250    (1089) Lancashire Rocks, 1.8 miles NE from Cohen Island, are
feet or less. In 1981, the NOAA Ship RANIER reported a clear    awash. They are 0.5 mile offshore with foul ground inshore from
depth of about 20 feet at zero tide in the easternmost 250 feet of    them.
the channel.- The E shoreline drops away to maximum depth very      (1090) Gull Island, 93 feet high, marked by a light, 5 miles NE
rapidly. A rock, covered 10 feet, is about 140 yards SSE of the    from Cohen Island, is among a group of prominent bare rocks that
island at the entrance. A shoal, covered 15 feet, is about 270 yards    are visible about 10 miles. China Poot Bay, S of Gull Island, is
inside the entrance and about 85 yards off the E shore. A shoal,    nearly dry at low water. An overhead power cable with a clearance
covered 5 feet, is about 700 yards SE of the entrance, and a rock,    of 152 feet crosses near the head of the bay. A narrow channel is
covered 4 feet, is about 300 yards SE of the shoal. Navigation    along the NE side of the bay. It terminates at a small lagoon at the
above this point is not recommended as the bottom shoals rapidly    head of the bay. A well protected anchorage can be found in the
toward the S shore.                                                lagoon in 3 to 5 fathoms; the bottom is mud. Transiting the chan-
  (1083) A small floating pier, maintained by the State, is on the W  nel at low water, in a boat larger than a skiff, should not be
shore about 0.2 mile inside the entrance to the bay. Berthing is    attempted without local knowledge. Peterson Bay, 1.5 miles N of
available at the pier for about 15 to 20 small boats. Depths of    China Poot Bay, provides good protection from E-W winds. A
about 25 feet were reported in the center of the bay to the E of the    foul area exists around the small islands near the head of the bay.
floating pier.                                                     A 5 to 7 fathom channel on the W side of the foul area runs to the
  (1084) Both ebb and flood currents reportedly run fair with the E    head of the bay. A submerged rock covered 8 feet is in the center
shoreline of the bay. Small eddies formed by the current have    of the channel abeam of the largest island. Depths at the head of
been observed near and in the entrance during a period of approxi-    the bay are 6 to 14 fathoms.
mately half floodtide. The reported maximum velocity of the ebb     (l09t) Charts 16645, 16646.-Homer Spit, on the N  side of
and flood currents is about 3 knots. The average is reported to be    Kachemak Bay, is a low gravel and shingle spit, partly covered
1.5 knots.                                                        with grass. It is 4.5 miles long and from 100 to 500 yards wide. It
  (1085) Hesketh Island, Yukon Island, and Cohen Island are    is described as the longest inhabited spit in the world.
high and wooded. An islet is on the reef that extends 0.5 mile NW   (1092) Coal Point, the outer end of Homer Spit, is marked by
from Hesketh Island. Cohen Island Rock Light (59ï¿½33.0'N.,    Homer Spit Light (59036.0'N., 151ï¿½24.6'W.), 34 feet above the
151-27.9'W.), 79, feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton    water and shown from a tower on top of a hotel roof. A private
tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on Sixty-    flashing light, visible from seaward and shown from a 35-foot
foot Rock at the N end of a reef that extends 0.3 mile N from    brown tower, is about 0.4 mile 284ï¿½ from Homer Spit Light. Care
Cohen Island. The light shows a higher intensity beam toward    must be taken not to confuse this light with the breakwater light,
Cook Inlet. There is a prominent yellow cliff on the W  end of    which is not visible over the spit.
Cohen Island. The passage between Yukon Island and Hesketh          (1093) Coal Bay, the bight NE of Homer Spit, is shoal but there
Island has a 2-fathom shoal in midchannel at both ends. Eldred    are no outlying dangers.
Passage, E of the islands, is deep near the middle, except at the N  (1094) Homer, at the base of of Homer Spit, is a fishing and tour-
end where there is a bar on which the least depths found were 8 to    ist town with several stores, hotels, and a small hospital. From
12 fathoms.                                                        Homer it is about 143 miles to Anchorage, 158 miles to Seward,
  (1086) Tutka Bay has no desirable anchorages for large vessels.    and 1,313 miles to Seattle.
Broken ground, on which some pinnacle rocks have been found,        (10o95) Prominent features.-Homer Airport, at the base of
extends across the entrance. There is an abandoned salmon can-    Homer Spit, has an aerolight and approach lights that are aligned
nery on the shore just E of the southernmost island in Tutka Bay, 3    with the runway. When lighted, the approach lights are highly vis-
miles inside the entrance. It is a difficult place for large vessels.    ible, however, they are lighted only when needed by aircraft.
Just NW of this island is a half-tide rock that closes the channel  (1096) Anchorage.-Excellent anchorage can be had 0.8 mile or
behind the island to all but small boats. An overhead power cable    more N of Homer Spit Light, in 10 to 15 fathoms, soft bottom.
with a clearance of 78 feet crosses the narrow part of the bay. Mar-  (1097) Weather.-The climate of Homer is marine but with pre-
iners are warned that numerous submerged rocks and rocks awash,    cipitation amounts modified by the Kenai Mountains. The annual
some in relatively deep water, have been found in the various    precipitation is reduced when air being lifted over the mountains
coves and in Tutka Bay; caution is advised,                        leaves most of its moisture on the windward side. For this reason
  (1087) Tutka Bay Lagoon is about 4 miles inside the mouth of    the usual Gulf Coast amount of near 60 inches is reduced to less
Tutka Bay on the SW side. The Lagoon, well protected, has depths    than half that amount. The relatively low annual snowfall is a
to 27 feet. The entrance, a small narrow channel, is a' stream    reflection of the midwinter temperatures. Often precipitation will
except at high water. The sill which holds the lagoon is at the head    begin as snow but turn to rain shortly afterwards. The occurrence
of this channel and is about 10 feet above low water. Boats up to    of the heaviest monthly amounts during the fall and winter months
30 feet in length can enter the lagoon at high water. The entrance    is the result of the increased frequency of storms into the Western
to the channel is protected by a rock awash and a 1-fathom sub-    Gulf of Alaska during those months.
merged delta plain that extends about 0.25 mile offshore.           (098i Temperatures experienced at Homer are more nearly rep-
  (1088) Sadie Cove, the inlet in the E side of Eldred Passage, is    resentative of marine climate than is precipitation. Winters are
not completely surveyed W of the bend but is apparently clear    mild, seldom getting colder than 0ï¿½F and summers are cool with
near midchannel. Foul ground extends about 0.2 mile off the N      the .maximum temperature seldom going above 70ï¿½F. The range
and S entrance-points. An overhead power cable with a clearance    between average maximum and minimum temperatures does not
of 170 feet crosses the mouth of the cove. Anchorage for large    exceed 16 degrees during any of the 12 months. The freeze-free
vessels can be found at midchannel where the cove bends S, in 13    period on the average begins in-late May and ends in mid-Septem-
to 15 fathoms.               -                                     ber.








































en
z
w
-3
0
r)

0























 CA
 CA




134                                             4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


 (1099) Surface winds at the station are seldom strong even in    feet offshore; 324-foot E face with 40 feet reported alongside,
winter. However, a short distance to the SE, over Kachemak Bay,    additional 200 feet with mooring dolphin; 240-foot W face with
and to the W  over Cook Inlet, wind speeds requiring warnings to    30 feet reported alongside; 110 x 116-foot staging area on main
small craft are fairly common in winter and summer.                  pier. A 150-ton mobile crane, 40-ton forklift, and pumpout station
 (10oo) The occurrence of a thunderstorm is rare. Heavy fog is    are available; owned and operated by the city of Homer.
infrequent and of short duration, but patchy ground fog is common      (1114) From January to March, ice floes interfere with operations
in spring and fall.                                                  of Homer City Pier. During heavy ice floes, cargo barges use a
 (1101) Tides.-The diurnal range of tide is 18.1 feet at Homer.     wharf in the small-boat harbor.
 (1102) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-     (1115) City of Homer Fish Dock: on the E side of small-boat
sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of    harbor; 383-foot face with 20 feet alongside; deck height; 31 feet;
Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)                      receipt of fish and handling of fish equipment; owned by city of
 (1103) Vessels en route Cook Inlet ports, Homer, Kenai, Anchor-    Homer and operated by Seward Fisheries, division of Icicle Sea-
age, etc., meet the pilot boat about 1 mile S of Homer Spit Light    food Inc.
(59036.1'N., 151ï¿½24.5'W.) in Kachemak Bay, off Homer.                  (1116) Homer Small-Boat Harbor, protected by a breakwater, is
 (1104) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "KATMAI" on    just NW of the City Pier. A light on the outer end of the breakwa-
VHF-FM channels 10 and 16, or through the Southwest Alaska    ter marks the entrance. A dredged channel leads between the
Pilots office at Homer, call sign, KCE-203, on the same frequen-    breakwaters to the beginning of the piers at the SE end, thence
cies. The pilot boat is an aluminum boat. Vessels picking up a pilot    turns NW to separate the basin in half. The basins on either side of
should maintain a speed of about 6 knots and have the pilot ladder    the entrance channel are maintained by local interests. In Septem-
3 feet above the water. The pilot boat displays the appropriate day    ber 1994, the controlling depth in the entrance channel was 16 feet
and night signals when on duty.                                      (19 feet at midchannel) in the entrance channel to the beginning of
 (1105) Caution.-Ships entering Kachemak Bay to pick up a pilot    the piers, thence 14 feet. In 1989, there were depths of 14 to 20
off Coal Point before continuing into Cook Inlet have been    feet in the SE part of the basin and in November 1989, 10 to 15
reported coming dangerously close to the Archimandritof              feet in the NW part with lesser depths toward the SW edge.
Shoals, which extend W  from Homer Spit and are marked on the          (1117) The harbor has moorage for about 740 vessels with some
SE side by a lighted buoy. These instances occur with foreign    transient spaces; the harbormaster assigns berths. The harbor-
ships or strangers to the area who are piloting on small-scale Brit-    master's office monitors VHF-FM channel 16; channels 10 and 68
ish Admiralty Charts, which do not show these shoals. The strang-    are used as working frequencies. During the summer this basin is
ers tend to steer for the lights of Homer. Mariners are advised to    very crowded. Electricity is available on the floats, and gasoline,
use the largest scale chart available for this area and to give these    diesel fuel, and water are available at a floating fuel pier at the SE
shoals a wide berth.                                                 end of the basin. A 100-foot grid, a 168-foot grid, and a launching
 (1106) Customs and Immigration are handled by Anchorage    ramp are also available. The basin is owned by the State and oper-
officials on advanced notice.                                        ated by the city.
 (1107) Quarantine.-A U.S. Public Health Service Contract Phy-        (lil8) From January to March, ice floes clog the entrance chan-
sician is located at the hospital in Homer. (See appendix for addi-    nel and cause the NW part of the basin to freeze, limiting the use
tional information.)                                                 of the basin to the first three finger piers.
 (l108) Two Coast Guard Cutters are stationed in Homer.               (1119) Supplies and Repairs.-Provisions, water, ice, gasoline,
 (1109) Harbor regulations.-The waterfront facilities are oper-    diesel fuel, and some marine supplies are available. A machine
ated by the City of Homer. The City Pier and Fish Pier (in the    shop is in town.
small-boat harbor) are administered by a Port Director (telephone,     (1120) Communications.-Landline telephone, radiotelephone,
907-235-2964); his office is 300 yards WSW of City Pier. The         and radiotelegraph service are available in Homer. Scheduled air
Port Director's office monitors VHF-FM channel 16. The small-    service is available to Anchorage, and air taxies run to Seldovia
boat harbor is administered by a harbormaster (telephone, 907-    and Port Graham. The Alaska Marine Highway System makes
235-3160); his office is on the SW side of the small-boat harbor.    scheduled runs to Seldovia and Kodiak, and private ferries make
 (tllo) Wharves.-Homer has 2 deep-draft piers and a small-boat    runs to local communities during the summer. Homer is connected
harbor.                                                              with the Alaska Highway System.
 (111i) Homer City Pier: on the N side of Coal Point; 410-foot        (1121) Halibut Cove, on the S shore about 6 miles E of Homer
offshore wharf with about 30 feet alongside, 62-foot SE face with    Spit, affords excellent anchorage in 23 fathoms with good holding
12 feet reported alongside, and 144-foot NW face, used for moor-     bottom. Halibut Cove Light 2 (59036.0'N., 151ï¿½12.9'W.), 70 feet
ing-a Coast Guard cutter, with about 20 feet reported alongside in    above the water, is shown from a small white house with a red tri-
August 1989; Alaska Marine Highway System Terminal; receipt    angular daymark on the NE point of Ismailof Island on the S side
and shipment of general cargo and petroleum products; pipelines    of the cove. A daybeacon, 0.3 mile S of the light, marks a rock
extend from the wharf to storage tanks in rear, total capacity       awash. Shoals of 4 and 5 fathoms are near the middle of the cove
732,250 barrels; water is at the pier; ice is supplied at the pier sea-    due E of the light. The village of Halibut Cove has a school. The
sonally by the city and year round by Seward Fisheries; owned by    community of Halibut Cove operates a small-craft float facility at
the city of Homer and operated by city of Homer, Chevron,            the community center, providing about 1,000 feet of berthing
U.S.A., Inc., U.S. Coast Guard, and the State. Shoaling to about    space.
10 feet exists 100 yards NW of the NW pier face.                      (1122) Halibut Cove Lagoon, at the head of Halibut Cove, has
 (1112) Pilings of an old pier may exist just SE of Homer City    depths to 38 fathoms. The lagoon is isolated at low water by a
Pier.                                                                gravel bar which reduces the entrance to a swift, shallow stream.
 (1113) Homer Spit Deep Water Pier: just NNW  of Homer               At high water, the navigable-channel on the NW  side of the
Breakwater Light 2 and marked by private lights, extends 527         entrance is not well defined; local knowledge is advised.



                                               4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                 135


 (1123) Bear Cove, on the S side of Kachemak Bay near the head,    ficult and, in the absence of local knowledge, should be used only
offers good anchorage in 12 fathoms, although the williwaws are    in daylight and during relatively calm weather. The boat basin has
violent and the swinging room is constricted. A pinnacle rock    one floating pier, which is removed in wintertime. No supplies or
which covers at high water is near the middle of the entrance to    repair services are available.
the cove.                                                          (1134) The basin has no local governing body and is used on a
 (1124) The head of Kachemak Bay consists of extensive mud-    first-come basis. It was designed to safely moor 32 vessels; how-
flats. The N side is bordered with mudflats and the 10-fathom    ever, as many as 100 boats have crowded into the basin at one
curve is about 2 miles offshore. From this curve the water shoals    time.
abruptly toward shore.                                             (1135) Landline telephone service is available, and Ninilchik is
 (1125) From Homer Spit to Anchor Point the coast is a line of    connected to the Alaska Highway System.
bluffs, with the greatest height of 750 feet at Bluff Point. In front  (1136) N of Cape Ninilchik the coast is very foul, being charac-
of the bluff is a narrow rock and shingle beach. Numerous hazard-    terized by immense boulders not marked by kelp. The boulders
ous rocks are offshore between Homer and Anchor Point. The    apparently rest on comparatively flat bottom, so that soundings
depths inside the 10-fathom curve are irregular, and there is a pos-    give no indications of them. It is probable that many more exist
sibility of detached boulders not found by the survey. Anchor    than were found by the survey.
Point Light (59046.1'N., 151052.0'W.), 41 feet above the water, is  (1137) Clam Gulch, 14 miles NE of Ninilchik, has a gravel road
shown from a skeleton tower with a diamond-shaped red and    leading from Sterling Highway to the beach. A state camping
white daymark on the point.                                       ground is along the road.
 (1126) Charts 16640, 16661.-The main bluff line recedes about
0.4 mile from the shore at Anchor Point (59ï¿½46.3'N., 151ï¿½52.0'W.)  (1138) Charts 16640, 16648.-On the W  shore of Cook Inlet,
and approaches the coast again about 1 mile to the N, then contin-    from Cape Douglas (58ï¿½51.0'N., 153ï¿½15.0'W.) to Chisik Island
ues close to the shore up to Cape Starichkof. The bluff attains an    about 80 miles to the NNE, the mountains generally rise abruptly
elevation of 270 feet 2.8 miles N of Anchor Point, then gradually    from the water, and Iliamna and Redoubt Volcanoes tower well
descends to the N.                                                above the surrounding peaks, affording excellent marks from all
 (1127) At Cape Starichkof about 7 miles NNE of Anchor Point,    parts of the lower inlet.
the bluff recedes again, is less steep, and is covered with vegeta-  (1139) Sukoi Bay, on the N side of Cape Douglas, is shoal, and
tion. N of the cape the bluff follows the shore, varies from 100 to    can be used only by small craft with local knowledge. Rocks bare
240 feet in elevation, and continues nearly to Cape Ninilchik    at low water in the middle of the entrance, and a ledge bares at low
about 15.5 miles NNE of Anchor Point.                             water between the rocks and the S shore.
 (1128) From N of Anchor Point to Cape Ninilchik, the coast is     (1140) In 1972, the NOAA Ship RAINIER anchored outside of
free from dangers so far as known, and anchorage can be selected    Sukoi Bay 0.5 mile N of Cape Douglas in 13 fathoms. The ship
in sand bottom. The survey vessel used an anchorage close inshore    experienced dragging during 20-knot winds.
just N of Cape Starichkof, in 6 to 7 fathoms. The holding ground   (1141) The two bluff points 5 and 8 miles NW of Cape Douglas
is fair, and there is some shelter from S weather.                are the ends of two sharp, rocky ridges that extend from the high-
  (1129) The 1,900-foot peak 10 miles back of Cape Starichkof is   land of Mount Douglas. Anchorage can be had in the bight
sharp with a high saddle between it and a slightly lower peak just    between the points in 6 to 10 fathoms, sandy bottom, with shelter
S. It is the only prominent and distinctive highland feature    from S and W winds, but the williwaws are bad during W gales.
between Anchor Point and Forelands. A lighted parabolic antenna    Vessels navigating between Cape Douglas and Shaw Island are
is on Cape Starichkof.                                            cautioned to avoid a rocky area with a least depth of 21/2 fathoms
  (1130) Deep Creek, 2 miles SW of Ninilchik, is recognized from    about 3.5 miles SE of Shaw Island and a rocky area with a least
seaward by a break in the bluff 0.4 mile wide. A gravel road leads    depth of 31/4 fathoms 2.7 miles SSE of Shaw Island. At the head of
from Sterling Highway to the beach and a State camping ground.    the bight is a short valley with a glacier. Just clear of the bluff
  (1131) Ninilchik, a fishing settlement at the mouth of Ninilchik    point on the SE side of the bight is a pinnacle rock as high as the
River, has a small-boat basin and cannery. A Russian Orthodox    bluff. The bight between this point and the N point of Sukoi Bay
Church on the bluff above the village is prominent from offshore.  appears shoal.
  (1132) Ninilchik Small-Boat Harbor, 400 feet above the mouth      (1142) Shaw Island, flat and grass covered, is 10 miles NW from
of the Ninilchik River, is 400 feet long by 125 feet wide and used    Cape Douglas and 1.8 miles from shore. A depth of 12 fathoms
by fishing boats.                                                 was found midway between it and the shore. Ledges extend N
  (1133) Ninilchik Channel Entrance Light (60003.3'N.,    from the island for 0.8 mile.
 151 ï¿½39.9'W.), 15 feet above the water, is shown from a spindle    (1143) Kamishak Bay, about 20 miles NW of Cape Douglas, has
with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the seaward    numerous reefs rising to within a few feet of the surface scattered
end of the north jetty; the light marks the entrance to a small-boat    throughout the area. Because of these hazards, vessels should pro-
basin inside the mouth of the Ninilchik River. The approach to    ceed with caution in the bay.
Ninilchik is through scattered off-lying rocks to the entrance chan-  (1144) The shores of Kamishak Bay are mountainous with bare-
nel, which should be used only with local knowledge. A sub-    faced headlands and palisades of stratified rock. The lower hills
merged rock sill about 9 feet above MLLW, extends across the    are covered with grass and alder brush. There is no timber except
entrance channel about 50 yards above the entrance light. A day-    for sparsely wooded areas near the mouth of the Kamishak River
beacon on a pole, just inside the seaward end of the S jetty, warns    and N of Iniskin Bay. The shoreline along the S and W sides of the
of the approach to the sill, and another daybeacon on a pole marks    bay is characterized by a low flat bluff, 50 feet above mean high
the NE end of the sill. In May 1993, the entrance channel was 91/2   water. The islands in the bay appear to be detached parts of this
feet above MLLW with greater heights along the edges and the    bluff. The shore throughout the bay is bordered by dangerous
basin was 31/2 feet above MLLW. The channel is narrow and dif-    reefs, most of which uncover at low water.



138                                           4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


miles from the head of the bay. From Oil Bay a valley leads    mile inside the entrance. These waters are quite well protected
through to Chinitna Bay, and a good trail to Iniskin Bay extends    from all winds except williwaws blowing from the N end of Tux-
along the N side of Mount Pomeroy.                                 edni Channel. The holding ground is good throughout the entire
 (1186) Dry Bay is a rocky shoal bight between Oil Bay and Chin-    area and safe anchorage can be found on either side of the channel
itna Point. The bay has a sand beach at its head.                  except when floe ice is present to varying degrees between
 (1187) A 6-fathom shoal, about 2 miles NE of Chinitna Point and    November and May, depending on the severity and the stage of the
about 1.5 miles offshore, is usually marked by turbulence that can    tides when the ice leaves the lagoons and streams at breakup time.
be hazardous to small craft. Because of the irregular bottom and    (1198) A former cannery on the E side of Snug Harbor serves as a
swift tidal currents, seas two or three times as high as the seas in    seasonal supply and maintenance facility for a small fishing fleet.
adjacent areas may be in the vicinity of the shoal.                A T-head pier at the facility has about 10 feet reported alongside.
                                                                      (1199) Tides and currents.-The diurnal range of tide is 16.6 feet
 (1188) Chart 16640.-Chinitna Bay is shoal, and an anchorage in    in Tuxedni Channel. The current floods NW at a velocity of 1. 1
4 to 5 fathoms in the entrance is exposed to all E winds. The bot-    knots and ebbs SSE at a velocity of 1.9 knots.
tom is muddy and good holding ground, and anchorage can be          (1200) Tuxedni Bay consists largely of shoals and reefs. A nar-
selected anywhere in the bay where there is sufficient depth to    row channel extends from Tuxedni Channel nearly to the head of
remain afloat at low water. There are strong williwaws with W      the bay. This channel shoals rapidly after leaving Chisik Island.
winds. The bay is filled with ice during the winter. Tidal currents    The passage N of Chisik Island should be avoided, even by small
average I knot in Chinitna Bay.                                    craft.
 (1189) Gull Island, 100 feet high, rocky and grass covered, is on  (1201) To enter Tuxedni Channel give the S end of Chisik Island
the S side of the entrance to Chinitna Bay. Reefs extend 0.6 mile    a berth of over 0.5 mile, keep in midchannel until about 2 miles
NE and SE from the island. A deep channel, 0.3 mile wide, leads    inside the entrance, and then follow the Chisik Island shore at a
into Chinitna Bay between Gull Island and the mainland to the    distance of 0.5 mile. The anchorage is about 3.5 miles above the
SW.                                                                light, in 13 to 14 fathoms, mud and sand bottom, and has a clear
 (1190) From Chinitna Bay to the prominent waterfall 5 miles S of    width of 0.7 mile. On the island side, the shore is bold but a shoal
Chisik Island, the coast is low and wooded, with lagoons and    makes out 0.6 to 1 mile from the main shore abreast the anchor-
marshes in places, and some quicksand. Along Tuxedni Channel    age; the shoaling is abrupt on the sides of the channel and there are
the coast comprises rocky bluffs and rises abruptly to high land.  boulders in places on the shoals.
 (1191) An extensive shoal, with rocky, very irregular bottom       (1202) In 1978, the NOAA Ship FAIRWEATHER reported the
extends 6 miles from the W shore between Chinitna Bay and Tux-
                                                     extends 6 miles from the W shore between Chinitna Bay and Tux-    shifting of rocks and the possibility of uncharted rocks in Tuxedni
edni Channel. The least depth is about 31/2 fathoms, but there is    Bay W of longitude 152'40'W. Caution is advised in this area.
probably less. Tide rips mark the shoal except at slack water, and
are dangerous to small craft in heavy weather; the heaviest rips are
near the extremity of the shoal, about 6 miles offshore. Numerous   (1203) Charts 16661, 16662, 16663, 16665, 16660.-From Tux-
boulders, some awash, are just N of the entrance to Chinitna Bay    edni Bay to Harriet Point, the W shore of Cook Inlet is a gravel
and extend as far as 1.2 miles offshore. Small craft without local    bluff with trees on top and a few boulders in the water. Redoubt
knowledge should avoid this area. Deep-draft vessels should avoid    Point (60017.3'N, 152025.0'W.), 7 miles NE of Tuxedni Bay, is
areas with depths of less than 10 fathoms.                         an alder-covered bluff from 200 to 300 feet high, with a number of
 (1192) Floating debris, including large logs, often forms long    bare slides. There are boulders in places on the shoals which
windrows parallel to shore about 4 miles off the coast in the vicin-    fringe this shore, and vessels should proceed with caution when
ity of Chinitna Bay. Although logs are common throughout Cook    inside the 10-fathom curve.
Inlet, they seem to gather here more frequently than at other       (1204) Redoubt Volcano is an important mark 15 miles inland
places.                                                            from Harriet Point. There is a notch on its SE slope just below the
 (1193) Red Glacier, 7 miles N of Chinitna Bay, is a prominent    summit.
landmark which derives its name from the red soil covering the      (1205) Double Peak (see chart 16013), 15 miles N of Redoubt
seaward edge.                                                      Volcano, has two knobs on top, and is easily identified from the
 (1194) Iliamna Volcano is an important landmark. Steam gener-    inlet.
ally issues from fissures just below the summit and from one of     (1206) Harriet Point is a clay bluff about 100 feet high, with
the lower peaks on the SE slope.                                   boulders at the water. A boulder reef, bare at low water, extends
 (1195) Chisik Island has a narrow ridge, comparatively smooth    0.8 mile E from Harriet Point: The point should not be approached
on top, that slopes gradually upward from the SE end of the island    closer than 1.5 miles on the line of the reef. In 1975, the NOAA
to its NW end where it terminates in a conspicuous cliff. Chisik    Ship DAVIDSON observed a dangerously steep, short, and
Island Light (60ï¿½05.8'N., 152ï¿½33.7'W.), 215 feet above the water,    choppy sea condition between Harriet Point and the S part of Kal-
is shown from a square frame with a diamond-shaped red and    gin Island. This sea condition resulted from strong currents and
white daymark on the S end of the island; a reef extends 0.3 mile    opposing winds, and the steep waves were of short duration. Har-
S.                                                                 riet Point Light (60023.8'N., 152ï¿½14.2'W.), 95 feet above the
 (1196) Tuxedni Channel, on the SW side of Chisik Island, is a    water, is shown from a square frame structure with a diamond-
secure anchorage. Heavy williwaws occur with gales from any    shaped red and white daymark on the end of the point.
direction, and raise a choppy sea dangerous to open boats. The      (1207) Fair anchorage is available in moderate weather on the N
channel is reported to be blocked with ice from December to    side of Harriet Point, which so far as known is safe during the
March.                                                             summer except for S, SE, and NE gales. Very small vessels can
 (1197) Snug Harbor is generally accepted as including all the    anchor in about 5 fathoms about 0.5 mile from shore, with the
waters of Tuxedni Channel from Chisik Island Light to about 1    point bearing 1770. At the anchorage the ebb current has a velocity





                                               4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                   139


of 2 to 3 knots, while the flood current is weak and of short dura-    boulders which uncover are 2.5 miles from the island in depths of
tion.                                                              22 feet. It is advisable to proceed with caution where the depths
 (1208) From Harriet Point to West Foreland, two shallow bights    are no more than 30 feet greater than the draft.
form Redoubt Bay. The shore in the bay is generally low and         (1220) Small vessels can select anchorage off the middle of the N
backed by patches of woods which appear continuous, and is sub-    end of Kalgin Island, with good shelter from S gales drawing up
ject to overflow at extreme high tides. It is fronted by a flat that    the inlet. Fair holding ground is from the middle of the N shore W.
extends off a greatest distance of 2.5 miles. The edge of the flat is    The currents are as weak as will be found at any of the exposed
generally steep-to, but no boulders were seen on those parts lying    anchorages. Caution must be observed, however, at low water
in front of the marshy shore. Drift River is shallow, rapid, and    when crossing the broken boulder-strewn area where depths of
obstructed by rocks and snags.                                     less than 5 fathoms make off from the N end of the island.
 (1209) About 10 miles N of Harriet Point and S of Drift River, is  (1221) The highest parts of the shoal between Kalgin Island and
the Drift River Marine Terminal, a privately owned offshore    West Foreland uncover between 3 and 4 feet. The shoal has been
loading platform in 60 feet of water; a helicopter deck and living    shifting S and is 5.5 miles from the N end of Kalgin Island.
quarters are on the platform. Breasting and mooring dolphins, con-    Although the shoal is rocky in places, no boulders show at lowest
nected by walkways, are adjacent and on the sides of the loading    tides. There are boulders in places on the bottom between the
platform. Privately maintained lights on mooring dolphins mark    shoal and West Foreland.
the extremities of the terminal facilities; a fog signal is at the S  (1222) West Foreland is a flat headland with a bluff at the water.
light. Two 30-inch oil lines lead from a crude oil tank farm on    The shore at West Foreland and for a distance of 4 or 5 miles N is
shore to the platform. The platform headings are 035ï¿½-215ï¿½. Tank-    fringed with boulders which extend below low water.
ers can be loaded at a rate of 50,000 barrels per hour. A small air-  (1223) Kustatan River has its entrance 3.5 miles W  of West
field is maintained ashore by the pipeline company.                Foreland. It connects inland with McArthur River, which enters
 (1210) The platform is a good radar target.                      the inlet 12 miles N of West Foreland.
 (1211) The U.S. Coast Guard Captain of the Port, Western           (1224) For a distance of 8 miles N from West Foreland the bluff is
Alaska, has issued the following order to impose vessel traffic    at the water, and numerous boulders are on the beach. The bluff
movement control in the vicinity of the offshore loading platform    then trends inland to a conspicuous wooded ridge, 5 miles long
(Christy Lee) at the Drift River Marine Terminal:                  and 300 feet high, which is 2.5 miles inland at its N end.
 (1212) No vessel shall maneuver, anchor or moor in such a man-     (1225) For a distance of 15 miles N from the end of the bluff, the
ner as to endanger itself, any other vessel or facility in order to    shore of Trading Bay is flat, grass covered, and subject to over-
prevent any vessel from mooring or departing the Drift River    flow, and has several sloughs. This part of the bay is fronted by a
Marine Terminal.                                                   flat that extends off a greatest distance of 2.1 miles at the mouth of
 (1213) From early December to mid-March, large pieces of ice    McArthur River. This river is about 1 mile wide at its entrance at
have been reported to approach the platform during flood tides.    high water, but because of a bar across its mouth it cannot be
Caution is advised.                                                entered at low water.
 (1214) A prominent wooded butte is 4 miles inland and 14 miles     (1226) Nikolai Creek is a narrow slough 19 miles N of West
W of West Foreland.                                                Foreland. A depth of I to 2 feet at low water is in the channel
 (1215) Kalgin Island, wooded and fringed with boulders, is    across the flat. A depth of about 15 feet can be taken into the river
higher at its N and S ends. Kalgin Island Light (60029.0'N.,    at high water. The water in the river is fresh nearly to its mouth
151ï¿½50.6'W.), 140 feet above the water, is shown from a square    except for a short time at high water.
frame structure with a diamond-shaped red and white daymark on      (1227) About 3 miles E of Nikolai Creek is a prominent gulch
the NE point of the island. Kalgin Island South Light    with a small stream in it. The bluffs come to the shore at the gulch
(60ï¿½20.7'N., 152ï¿½05.1'W.), 65 feet above the water, is shown from    and continue around North Foreland. Anchorage 1 mile off the
a square frame structure with a diamond-shaped red and white    gulch is in 31/2 fathoms, hard bottom.
daymark on the S point of the island.                               (1228) Granite Point is a prominent gray bluff I mile E of the
  (1216) A shoal, marked at its S end by a seasonal lighted bell    gulch. Between the point and North Foreland, 5.5 miles to the
buoy, extends 16 miles S from Kalgin Island. (See chart 16640.)    ENE, is Beshta Bay, a shallow bight with anchorage in 7 to 10
There are spots bare at low water for nearly 8 miles from the    fathoms, mud and gravel bottom. The anchorage is: good during
island, and thence S the least depth found is 2 fathoms. The bot-    moderate weather or with offshore winds. Care should be taken to
tom is very broken. No boulders show at low water, however,    avoid the rocky shoal that bares at low water and extends 1 mile
except near the island.                                            from shore 1.5 miles E of Granite Point. The flood current has a
  (1217) A passage with general depths of 12 to 15 feet, which is    velocity of 4 to 5 knots and the ebb 2 to 3 knots. North Foreland,
used by cannery tenders, leads across the shoal from 1 to 2.5 miles    on the NW side of Cook Inlet 25 miles above West Foreland, is a
S of Kalgin Island. A range should be picked up in the opening N   bluff about 150 feet high at the shore end of a hilly wooded ridge;
of Chisik Island to insure making the course good, as the currents    thence N the bluff is lower. A large T-head pier, marked by private
on either side of the island have a velocity of 3 to 4 knots at times,    lights at the outer ends, extends about 0.25 mile SE from North
and are nearly slack in the lee of the island. There are boulders    Foreland.
near Kalgin Island and possibly in the passage.                     (1229) Tyonek is a native village near the mouth of Indian
  (1218) A sand ridge, which nearly uncovers, is about 2.5 to 3.5    Creek, 1.5 miles NE of North Foreland. The village has a Bureau
miles W of Kalgin Island. A lighted seasonal bell buoy is off the    of Indian Affairs school. Vessels call at Tyonek, and a landing
W  side of the shoal. During the summer months, floating debris    strip just N of the village is suitable for light planes. Mail is
and logs may be encountered in the channel W of the buoy.          received once a week from Anchorage.
  (1219) A boulder-strewn shoal with depths of 7 fathoms or less     (1230) Chuitna River, 3 miles N of North Foreland, is marked by
extends 8 miles N from the NE point of Kalgin Island. The outer    a low break in the bluff. A depth of about 8 feet can be taken into



140                                            4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


the mouth of the river at high water, and the tides are felt about 1    10 miles S from the cape and is strewn with boulders 15 to 50 feet
mile upriver. In 1966, a pipe covered about 2 feet at mean higher    high.
high water was reported E of the entrance to the river in about      (1245) Temporary anchorage is possible in 4 fathoms I mile from
61006.2'N., 150ï¿½55.0'W.                                             shore a little S of Cape Kasilof. The area is exposed except in NE
  (1231) A prominent bluff 150 feet high is on the S side of Thre-    weather.
emile Creek. Bluffs continue N for 2.5 miles from this creek, and     (1246) Kasilof River empties into the E side of Cook Inlet 2.5
then the tree line is from 2 to 3 miles inland from the ordinary    miles NE of Cape Kasilof. The narrow winding channel that leads
high-water mark, the strip between being subject to overflow at    through the inner shallows to the river mouth is not navigable at
extreme high tides. This feature continues to within 2 miles of    low water. The entrance channel is marked by a light and buoys. A
Point MacKenzie.                                                    lighted buoy, about 2.5 miles W of the light, marks the approach to
  (1232) Beginning at Threemile Creek, the shore is fronted by a    the entrance channel; the light, entrance buoys, and approach buoy
broad mudflat. Its low-water edge is about 2 miles off the mouth    are maintained seasonally. Entrance should not be attempted with-
of Beluga River, 5.5 miles off the mouth of Susitna River, 3.5    out local knowledge of conditions.
miles off the shore E nearly to Little Susitna River, and then meets  (1247) A dock with a 78-foot face and a launching ramp are on
the shore at Point MacKenzie.                                       the N side of the entrance. A 200-foot detached float is moored in
 (1233) Beluga River is 11.5 miles N of North Foreland. The        the entrance just off the dock.
channel through the flats at the mouth of the river has a depth of   (1248) Kasilof is a small agricultural settlement on the N side of
about 2 feet or less at low water, and is said to shift in the winter    Kasilof River, about 5 miles above the mouth. Cohoe, another
and spring from the action of ice.                                  small settlement on the S side of the river mouth, has a store. Both
 (1234) The effect of the tide is felt in Beluga River 6 to 8 miles    villages are connected by the Sterling Highway with Anchorage,
above the mouth, and it is said that boats can navigate as far as    Homer, and other points along the W side of Kenai Peninsula.
Beluga Lake, about 20 miles from the mouth.                          (1249) Kasilof River is narrow and has a strong current. Boats
 (1235) Theodore River is 3.5 miles NE of Beluga River. Three    drawing up to 6 feet can find good shelter in the river and remain
or 4 miles up, the two rivers are within I mile of each other and    afloat at low water. Vessels drawing as much as 10 feet enter the
there is an easy portage between them.                              river and go as far as 6 miles upstream.
 (1236) Susitna River is on the N side of Cook Inlet 22 miles NE     (1250) Ice.-(See page T-21 for dates of ice breakup and freezeup
of North Foreland. Mount Susitna, a prominent landmark along    for Kasilof River.)
the upper part of the inlet, is about 6 miles W of the river at a point  (1251) Karluk Reef, 4 miles N of Cape Kasilof and 3.5 miles
13 miles above the mouth.                                           from the E shore, is partly bare at low water. There are other
 (1237) The channels across the flats at the mouth of Susitna River    shoals and submerged rocks between the reef and the shore.
have depths of 2 feet or less at low water and change during the     (1252) Salmo Rock, 9.5 miles N of Cape Kasilof and 2 miles
winter and spring because of ice and freshet action. The channels    from shore, is one of the outer boulders off Kenai River and shows
above the mouth are said to change frequently in the spring and    well at low water.
early summer. Vessels navigating the deep channels of Cook Inlet     (1253) Kenai, I 11 miles N of Cape Kasilof and on the N side of
should keep well away from the flats because their outer limits    the Kenai River mouth, is a fishing town and a support base for
have been known to change drastically.                              offshore drilling operations in Cook Inlet.
 (1238) Launches navigate Susitna River to Yentna River, about       (1254) Prominent features.-Three towers with red flashing
20 miles above Cook Inlet, thence run occasionally up the Yentna    lights are prominent at night S and E of town.
to the forks about 65 miles from the Susitna. The tides are not felt  (1255) The entrance channel to the Kenai River is marked by a
more than 7 miles from the inlet, and above this the current is    lighted 049ï¿½ range and a seasonal lighted buoy. The area surround-
swift. Overhead power cables with a least clearance of 37 feet    ing the mouth of Kenai River, for about a radius of 2 to 4 miles, is
cross the Susitna River about 5 miles above its mouth.              strewn with rocks, boulders, shoals, wrecks, and other obstruc-
 (1239) Alexander is a small settlement on the W side of Susitna    tions. The bars at the entrance to the river are nearly dry at low
River 10 miles above the mouth. Susitna is on the E side 18 miles    water, but there are depths of 8 to 10 feet in places in the river.
above the mouth and just below the mouth of the Yentna;    Because of the shifting bars at the river entrance, the range may
launches, occasionally towing scows, run to and from Anchorage.    not mark the best water. Mariners are advised not to enter Kenai
Mail is delivered to both settlements twice monthly by airplane    River without local knowledge.
from Anchorage.                                                      (1256) It is reported that small craft navigate the river to Sol-
 (1240) Ice.-(See-page T-21 for dates of ice breakup and freezeup    dotna, about 14.5 miles above the mouth.
for Susitna River.)                                                  (1257) A fixed highway bridge with a clearance of 15 feet crosses
 (1241) Talkeetna is 65 miles above the mouth of Susitna River.    the river about 4.5 miles above the mouth.
 (1242) Little Susitna River, 9 miles W  of Point MacKenzie, is      (1258) (See 162.245, chapter 2, for navigation regulations for the
said to be navigable for launches at high water for about 8 miles.  Kenai River.)
                                                                      (1259) Tides and currents.-The diurnal range of tide is 20.7 feet
 (1243) Cape Kasilof (60022.0'N., 151 ï¿½22.0'W.) is on the E side    at the Kenai River entrance. The currents in the river mouth attain
of Cook Inlet opposite Kalgin Island. The high bluffs characteris-    velocities of 5 knots or more.
tic of much of the E shore are absent between the cape and Kenai      (1260) Weather.-Prevailing winds in the summer are from the
to the N.                                                           SE and SW; NE winds prevail in the winter. Fog occurs from
 (1244) Five miles SW from Cape Kasilof and 2.3 miles from    December to February, with some fog in the early spring.
shore are The Sisters,  three prominent rocks, the highest of        (1261) Ice.-(See page T-21 for dates of ice breakup and freezeup
which is 5 feet. The foul ground back of The Sisters extends about    for Kenai River.)





                                               4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                  141


 (1262) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-    vate lights mark each end of the pier; owned and operated by
sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of    Union Chemical division of Union Oil Co. of California.
Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, and Pilotage, Homer, for details.)  (1277) Kenai LNG Dock: a T-head pier just N of the Union
 (1263) Customs.-Kenai is a customs station.                      Chemical Wharf; 100-foot face, 1,050 feet of berthing space with
 (1264) Quarantine.-A U.S. Public Health Service Contract Phy-    dolphins; 40 feet alongside; deck height, 40 feet; shipment of liq-
sician is located at the hospital in Kenai. (See appendix for addi-    uefied natural gas and petroleum products; receipt of crude oil;
tional information.)                                               private lights mark each end of the pier; owned by Kenai LNG
 (1265) Wharves.-Five wharves for barges and fishing vessels are    Corp., and operated by Phillips Petroleum Co. and Tesoro-Alas-
along the Kenai River.                                             kan Petroleum Co.
 (1266) Kenai Packers Wharf: N side of Kenai River, I mile          (1278) Kenai Pipeline Co. Wharf: a T-head pier just N of Kenai
above the mouth; 720-foot face; dries at other than high tide; deck    LNG Dock; 348-foot face, 1,310 feet of berthing space with dol-
height, 25 feet; cranes to 10 tons; receipt of fish; owned and oper-    phins; 42 feet alongside; deck height, 35 feet; receipt of crude oil,
ated by Kenai Packers, Inc.                                        and shipment of petroleum products; private lights mark each end
 (1267) From June to October, private mooring buoys are placed    of the pier; owned by Kenai Pipeline Co. and operated by Kenai
on the S side of the river channel from about 300 yards W  of    Pipeline Co., Chevron U.S.A., Inc., and Tesoro-Alaskan Petro-
Kenai Packers Wharf to 400 yards E of the wharf.                   leum Co.
 (1268) Kenai City Dock (Army Dock): a marginal wharf 460           (1279) Rig Tenders Dock (Port Nikiski Dock), a wharf just N of
yards upstream (ESE) from Kenai Packers Wharf; 300-foot face; 7    Kenai Pipeline Co. Wharf; 600-foot face; depths alongside 10-14
feet to bare; deck height, 28 feet; receipt of fish; owned by the City    feet, except for a 6-foot shoal at the S end, in 1974; deck height,
of Kenai and operated by Salamatof Seafoods Inc.                   32 feet; 7-acre terminal servicing the offshore oil-drilling industry,
 (1269) Port of Kenai Wharf: 550 yards SE of Kenai City Dock;    and shipment of petroleum products; five fuel and water stations
365-foot face; 18 feet to bare alongside; deck height, 20 feet;    capable of transferring 1,000 gallons per minute; three crawler-
receipt of construction materials, general cargo by barge, fish, off-    type cranes up to 150-ton capacity; pipelines lead from wharf to
shore oil well supplies, and bunkering vessels, 18 acres of open    storage tanks in rear, total capacity 510,000 barrels; heliport adja-
storage and 30,000 square feet of covered, heated, storage; owned    cent to terminal; owned and operated by Crowley Maritime Corp.
by Cherrier and King, Inc. and operated by Cherrier and King, Inc.    and Tesoro-Alaskan Petroleum Corp.
and Dragnet Fisheries, Inc.                                         (1280) Phillips Petroleum Co. monitors VHF-FM channels 10
 (1270) A small-boat launching ramp and a 240-foot sectional    and 16 continuously. Kenai Pipeline Co. Wharf and Rig Tenders
mooring float are just S of the Port of Kenai Wharf. The mooring    Dock monitor VHF-FM channel 10 (156.50 MHz) continuously.
float is removed during the winter. It is owned by the State and    (1281) The T-head piers are reported to be good radar targets.
operated by the city.                                               (1282) A shoal area, about 5 miles long with depths of 21/4 to 51/2
 (1271) Fishermans Packing, Inc. Piers: lower and upper piers    fathoms, marked by a seasonal buoy, is about 2 miles off the piers
with 50- and 40-foot faces, respectively; 3 feet alongside; deck    at Nikiski. Deeper water is between it and the piers.
heights, 27 feet; receipt of fish and bunkering vessels; owned and  (1283) Tides and currents.-The diurnal range of tide at Nikiski
operated by Fishermans Packing, Inc.                               is 20.4 feet. (See Tide Tables for daily predictions.) Additional
 (1272) Columbia Wards Wharf: 540 yards S of Fishermans    information on the predicted hourly heights of the tide can be
Packing, Inc. Piers; 100-foot face; 415 feet of berthing space with    obtained from the publication "Supplemental Tidal Predictions-
dolphins; 2 to 3 feet alongside; deck height, 27 feet; pipeline on    Anchorage, Nikiski, Seldovia, and Valdez, Alaska," published by
wharf extends to storage tanks in rear; receipt of fish and bunker-    the National Ocean Service. Tidal currents at Nikiski attain a
ing vessels; owned and operated by Columbia Wards Fisheries.       velocity of about 3.8 knots on the flood and about 2.6 knots on the
 (1273) Supplies and repairs.-Gasoline, diesel fuel, berths,    ebb. (See Tidal Current Tables for daily predictions.)
water, ice, a lift, and a launching ramp are available. Most supplies  (1284) Ice floes are a severe problem at Nikiski during January
are available in Kenai. Repair service is available and machine    and February; more so on the flood than the ebb. Ships usually
shops are in town.                                                 keep their engines running on or standby while moored in case
 (1274) Communications.-Kenai is connected with the Alaska    they are needed to help resist the force of these ice floes.
Highway System and scheduled air service to Anchorage is avail-     (1285) East Foreland, 60 miles N of Anchor Point and about 56
able daily. Landline telephone, radiotelephone and radiotelegraph    miles from Anchorage, is a nearly level wooded headland with a
communications are available.                                      276-foot bluff at the water's edge. East Foreland Light
 (1275) Nikiski, 8.5 miles NNW of Kenai, is the site of three    (60ï¿½43.2'N., 151024.3'W.), 294 feet above the water, is shown
deep-draft piers and a shallow-draft wharf. For a complete    from a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-shaped day-
description of the port facilities refer to Port Series No. 38, pub-    mark on the highest part of the bluff. A shoal, marked near its W
lished and sold by the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. (See appen-    edge by a seasonal buoy, and with a least depth of 31/2 fathoms,
dix for address.) All facilities are used in connection with the    extends 2 to 3.5 miles W and SW of the light.
petroleum industry. Oil tanks on shore are conspicuous; three       (1286) Nikiski No. 2 (Nikiski), 2.5 miles NE of East Foreland, is
brown tanks above the Kenai LNG Dock are the most prominent.       the site of a commercial facility (Arness Landing) that was inac-
 (1276) Union Chemcial Wharf: a T-head pier 3 miles S of East    tive in 1976. It consists of three grounded liberty-type ships and a
Foreland Light; 228-foot face, 1,135 feet of berthing space with    gravel surfaced wharf. The grounded vessels provide about 3,000
dolphins; 40 feet alongside; deck height, 38 feet; bulk urea loading    feet of berthing space alongside. The majority of the facility is dry
tower with a telescopic loading spout with loading rate of 1,000    at low water. It is owned by Dillingham Corp.
tons per hour; storage buildings in rear, total capacity 125,000    (1287) A coastal radio station is at Nikishka No. 2.
tons; shipment of anhydrous ammonia and dry bulk urea, and          (1288) Nikiski Bay is the bight between Nikishka No. 2 and
receipt of sulfuric acid, caustic soda and petroleum products; pri-    Boulder Point, 3 miles to the NE. Boulders, bare in places at low





142                                            4. CAPE SPENCERTOCOOK INLET


water, fill the bight. The bight provides anchorage in depths of I to  (1303) Information concerning seismographic operations is not
5 fathoms. The smooth sloping bottom provides good holding    published in Notice to Mariners unless such operations create a
ground. The anchorage is sheltered from E and S winds, but is    menace to navigation in waters used by general navigation. Where
open to N and NE blows which generally prevail except during the    seismographic operations are being conducted, obstructions such
summer. Currents reach 3 to 6 knots on both the ebb and flood and    as casings (pipes), buoys, stakes, and detectors are installed. Cas-
increase greatly with the distance from shore. Mariners should    ings are marked with flags by day and fixed red lights by night;
avoid a strong current area around the small, 3-fathom shoal lying    buoys have colored international orange and white horizontal
0.25 mile offshore between Arness Landing and East Foreland.       bands, and stakes are marked with flags.
 (1289) Middle Ground Shoal, which uncovers 6 feet for 3.5          (1304) From Boulder Point, a prominent boulder reef with few
miles of its length, is a long ridge of hard sand with rocky bottom    breaks in it, extends for 20 miles along the shore to Moose Point.
in places, in the middle of the inlet 9 miles N of East Foreland.  For the greater part of this distance the boulders, some very large,
 (1290) Oil Well Structures.-Extensive oil drilling operations are    show at low water to a distance of 2 miles from shore, and there
being conducted in Cook Inlet extending as far N as Anchorage.    are occasional ones which show above high water.
The heaviest concentration of these operations is in the vicinity of  (1305 A prominent yellowish bluff is 4 miles E of Boulder Point.
Middle Ground Shoal.                                               Gray Cliff, 10 miles NE of Boulder Point, is a good mark. There
 (1291) Obstructions in these waters consist of submerged wells    is a break in the boulder reef off Gray Cliff where a small vessel
and oil well structures (platforms), including appurtenances    can approach the shore as close as 0.8 mile and find anchorage in
thereto, such as mooring piles, anchor and mooring buoys, pipes,    about 5 fathoms, mud bottom, sheltered from easterly and south-
and stakes.                                                        easterly weather.
 (1292) In general, the oil well structures (platforms), depending  (1306) Rocks awash are about 4.2 miles W and 4 miles NNW,
on their size, depth of water in which located, proximity of vessel    respectively, from Gray Cliff. Because of the size of the boulders
routes, nature and amount of vessel traffic, and the effect of back-    along this shore, it is not safe to skirt it with less than about 5 fath-
                                                                      along this shore, it is not safe to skirt it with less than about 5 fath-
ground lighting, may be marked in one of the following ways:       oms beneath the keel.
 (1293) Quick flashing white light(s) visible at least 5 miles; fog  (1307) Moose Point, low and wooded with  grassy flat at its end,
                                                                        01307) Moose Point, low and wooded with a~ grassy flat at its end,
signal sounded when visibility is less than 5 miles.
                 signal sounded when visibility is less than 5 miles.  is not prominent; it is marked by a light equipped with a racon.
 (1294) Quick flashing white light(s) visible at least 3 miles; fog    Between it and Point Possession, a distance of 10 miles, there are
signal when visibility is less than 3 miles.
                 signal when visibility is less than 3 miles.      few boulders so far as known but the bottom is generally rocky
 (1295) Quick flashing white or red lights visible at least 1 mile;    and irregular. Moose Point Shoal, 5 miles long and partly bare at
may or may not be equipped with fog signal.                        low water, begins opposite Moose Point and is 1.8 to 2.2 miles
 (1296) Structures on or adjacent to the edges of navigable chan-    from shore.
nels and fairways, regardless of location, may be required to dis-
                                                                        (1308) A 21/4-fathom spot, 6.5 miles 2930 from Moose Point
play lights and fog signals for the safety of navigation.
                 play lights and fog signals for the safety of navigation.  Light, is marked by a lighted seasonal buoy; shoaling may have
 (1297) Associated structures within 100 yards of the main struc-    taken place between it and the SE shore. Beluga Shoal,  covered
                                                                      taken place between it and the SE shore. Beluga Shoal, covered
ture, regardless of location, are not normally lighted, but are    4'/ fathoms, isin the middle of Cook Inlet about midway between
marked with red or white retro-reflective material. Mariners are    Nthos      an   n  ie Ilna   about    mid a                 e
                                                                      North Foreland and Fire Island and about 8.5 miles N of Moose
cautioned that uncharted submerged pipelines and cables may    Point.
exist in the vicinity of these structures, or between such structures
and the shore.                                                      (1309) About 6 miles NE of Moose Point is a prominent reddish
 (1298) During construction of a well or during drilling operations    bluff, on the N side of which is a small stream in a deep canyon,
and until such time as the platform is capable of supporting the    the latter showing from SW.
required aids, fixed white lights on the attending vessel or drilling  (1310) Point Possession, 36 miles NE of East Foreland, is on the
rig may be shown in lieu of the required quick flashing lights on    S side of Cook Inlet and on the SW side of the entrance to Turna-
the structure. The attending vessel's foghorn may also be used as a    gain Arm. The point, marked by a light, is a low, rounding, heavily
substitute.                                                        wooded headland with a bluff at the water's edge. Possession, a
 (1299) Submerged wells may or may not be marked depending on    small native village occupied only during the summer, is on the W
their location and depth of water over them.                       side of the point where the bluff is low and a valley leads inland.
 (1300) All obstruction lights and fog signals used to mark the var-    About 1 mile S of the village the bluff is 140 feet high, and 1.5
ious structures are operated as privately maintained aids to naviga-    miles inside Turnagain Arm, it rises to 284 feet..
(ion. (see 67.01 through 67.10, chapter 2, for regulations.)        (1311) A reef extends about 1 mile off the NW side of Point Pos-
 (1301) Information concerning the establishment, change, or dis-    session. There are depths of 13/4 fathoms on its NE edge; the N
continuance of offshore oil well structures and their appurtenances    edge drops off abruptly to depths of 12 to 20 fathoms about I mile
are published in Notice to Mariners. These structures and aids are    offshore. Care should be taken when rounding the point at low
subject to heavy damage and/or destruction from ice in winter;    water not to open this range until well clear of the reef. A current
unlocated debris and remains may exist. Mariners are advised to    line generally indicates the edge of the reef when the tidal current
navigate with caution in the vicinity of these structures and in    is strong in either direction.
those waters where oil exploration is in progress, and to use the   (1312) Temporary anchorage for a small vessel can be had 0.8
latest and largest scale chart of the area.                        mile from shore and 2 miles SW of Possession in 4 fathoms, sandy
 (1302) During the continuing program of establishing, changing,    bottom. It is sheltered from easterly and southeasterly winds, but
and discontinuing oil well structures, special caution should be    considerable sea makes-around Point Possession at times from the
exercised when navigating the inshore and offshore waters of the    violent northeasterly winds that blow at intervals out of Turnagain
affected areas in order to avoid collision with any of the structures.  Arm.



                                               4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                   143


 (1313) Shoals with least depths of 2 to 21/4 fathoms are between  170 feet above the water and shown from a skeleton tower with a
Point Possession and Fire Island, in the entrance to Turnagain    red and white diamond-shaped daymark.
Arm.                                                                (1325) Fire Island is wooded and has elevations of more than 250
 (1314) On the N side of Point Possession temporary anchorage    feet in its central part. Near the SW end are high sandhills, with
for a small vessel can be had in 4 fathoms, hard bottom, 0.3 mile    bare summits, and a small lake. Another lake is in the NE central
off a gulch 1 mile NE of Possession. The anchorage is out of the    part of the island. The shores are mostly high bluffs except at West
strong tidal currents that set in and out of Turnagain Arm. Water    Point and North Point, the NE extremity.
can be secured by boats at high tide from the gulch, but in the late  (1326) Shelter Bay, on the W  side of Fire Island between West
summer the flow is small and the water discolored from flowing    Point and Race Point, is mostly mudflats, bare at low water.
over the clay bluff.                                               Anchorage for small vessels has been recommended in 4 to 5 fath-
 (1315) Fire Island Shoal, marked by a seasonal lighted bell buoy,    oms off the N part of the bay, 0.5 mile from shore. The current is
is about 6 miles N of Point Possession; a description of the shoal    strong throughout the flood, but the ebb is weak and after the first
is given later in this chapter, under Shelter Bay.                 2 hours is nearly slack. With fresh southwesterly, northwesterly or
 (1316) Turnagain Arm is only partially surveyed. Most of it is a    northerly winds, the anchorage has rough seas and tide rips.
large mudflat, bare at low water and intersected by winding         (1327) Fire Island Shoal, which bares at low water, is about 2
sloughs. Navigation is safe only for small craft drawing 6 feet or    miles NW of West Point. The shoal, about 3.5 miles long and 0.9
less. Local knowledge is necessary since the channels wind from    mile wide and marked on the S edge by a seasonal lighted bell
side to side and are subject to change, and strong currents and tide    buoy, is rapidly  shifting ESE.  In July 1990, the shoal was
rips increase the difficulties of navigation. It is reported that sedi-    encroaching the Race Point rangeline; caution is advised.
ment from the rivers is causing further general shoaling in the arm.  (1328) Point Campbell, on the NE side of the entrance to Turna-
The flood comes in at spring tides as a bore, sometimes attaining a    gain Arm, is 2.5 miles E of Fire Island. The area between is a
height of 6 feet. Its rate of advance is about 6 knots but the veloc-    mudflat that bares at low water.
ity of the current may exceed 6 knots in places.                    (1329) Point Woronzof, 3.5 miles NE of Point Campbell, is on
 (1317) A submarine pipeline extends from the mainland shore    the S side of the entrance to Knik Arm. A 2420 lighted range NE
close E of Burnt Island in a 024030' direction across the arm to the    of Race Point Light, a 081ï¿½06'  lighted range on Point Woronzof,
opposite shore.                                                    and a 061ï¿½ lighted range on Point MacKenzie mark the channel in
 (1318 Launches can be beached on the gradually sloping,    Cook Inlet from Fire Island to Point Woronzof. Point MacKenzie
smooth sand in the bight on the W side of Gull Rock, 4 miles E of    is on the N side of the entrance to Knik Arm about 2.3 miles NNE
Burnt Island, or in the bight 2 miles W of Gull Rock.              of Point Woronzof. Point McKenzie Light 11 (61 14.3'N.,
 (1319) Small craft generally use the anchorage on the W side of    149ï¿½59.2'W.), 80 feet above the water, is shown from a square
Fire Island until conditions are favorable for proceeding up Turna-    frame structure with a green square daymark on the point. It is
gain Arm.                                                          reported that the range on Point MacKenzie is sometimes difficult
 (1320) Hope is on the S side of Turnagain Arm 23 miles above    to see when the sun is directly behind the range markers.
Point Possession. Girdwood is on the N side 14 miles farther up.    (1330) Anchorage, on the SE side of Knik Arm, 175 miles from
Formerly mining towns of some importance, both have stores and    the entrance to Cook Inlet, and 1,428 miles from Seattle, is
can be reached by small boats at high water. Girdwood is on the    Alaska's major seaport and largest city. The main industries are
Alaska Railroad and the Anchorage-Seward highway which fol-    government, tourism, and transportation.
low the N shore of Turnagain Arm. Portage is at the head of Tur-    (1331) Prominent features.-When approaching Anchorage, the
nagain Arm, 8 miles above Girdwood, and at the mouth of Placer    lights on Fire Island and Point MacKenzie, the gantry cranes on
River.                                                             the city wharf, the control tower and aerobeacon at the Interna-
  (1321) Turnagain Arm is noted for the violent winds which blow    tional Airport, a number of radio and television towers, and water
out of it whenever the wind is easterly, and is locally referred to as    tanks in the vicinity of Ship Creek are among the conspicuous
the Cannon, which expresses the opinion held of it. With light to    landmarks. The N tank near Ship Creek is painted in red and white
moderate easterly winds in other parts of the inlet, a moderate gale    checkers.
will frequently blow out of the arm and a heavy sea and tide rips   (1332) Channels.-The main channel leads between Fire Island
will be raised from its mouth across to North Foreland on the W    and the shoals to the N and W of the island. The channel is marked
shore of Cook Inlet.                                               by lighted ranges and seasonal buoys at critical locations. The
  (1322) Charts 16665, 16663, 16660.-Fire Island is about 6    chart is the best guide. (See Routes.)
miles NNE of Point Possession. The channel in Cook Inlet W of       (1333) Anchorages.-The best anchorage for deep-draft vessels is
Fire Island is marked by a 058ï¿½ lighted range at the NW end of    W of Anchorage in depths of 10 to 12 fathoms, silt bottom. The
Fire Island.                                                       usual anchorage for small vessels is nearer Anchorage in depths of
  (1323) Note: Due to the narrow width of the channel between    8 to 10 fathoms. Holding bottom is good and there is little chance
Fire Island and Fire Island Shoal, the Coast Guard recommends      of dragging if the chain scope is 5 to 7 times the depth, but the
that all inbound and outbound traffic broadcast a voice security    anchor probably will foul in a blow if it remains down through
call on VHF-FM channel 16 (156.80 MHz), and establish voice    two tides. It is dangerous to remain at anchor in this area when the
communications with opposing traffic on VHF-FM channel 13    ice breaks in the spring.
(156.65 MHz), prior to transiting the 058ï¿½ Race Point range.        (1334) Dangers.-In addition to the dangers in Cook Inlet previ-
  (1324) West Point, the SW extremity of Fire Island, is marked by    ously described, North Point Shoal, about 2.5 miles NE of North
Fire Island Light 6 (61007.6'N., 150016.9'W.), 30 feet above the    Point on Fire Island, changes radically from year to year and bares
water, shown from a skeleton tower with a red triangular daymark,    several feet at low water. In May 1994, the NOAA Ship RANIER
and equipped with a racon. Race Point, the NW extremity of Fire    reported the shoal was shifting ESE and had encroached onto the
Island, is marked by Race Point Light (61010.1'N., 150013.5'W.),    Point Mackenzie Range. Knik Arm Shoal, with a least depth of



















ti










:r
n
0
0n

A!




                                               4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                  145


18 feet and marked by two seasonal buoys, is in about the center    during December and January, and most of these low visibilities
of the channel, about 2 miles W of Point Woronzof. Woronzof    are associated with fog. Snow visibilities generally range from I
Shoal, a long shoal that bares about 1.2 miles W  of Point    to 3 miles though heavier snowfalls will, of course, restrict visibil-
Woronzof. North Point Shoal, 1.2 miles NW of Knik Arm Shoal,    ities to less than I mile on a few occasions. The first measurable
has a least depth of 16 feet. Woronzof Shoal, a long shoal that    snow occurs, on the average, on October 15, but has been as early
bares about 1.2 miles W of Point Woronzof, rocks close NW of the    as September 20; latest measurable snow in the spring averages
point, and the flats off Anchorage, should be avoided. Two sub-    April 14, but has been as late as May 6. Snow occurs on 20 to 25
merged dolphins are off the Anchorage waterfront in about    percent of the midwinter days, and most of the snow falls in rela-
61ï¿½13'45"N., 149054'25"W., and 61ï¿½13'59"N., 149053'54"W.           tively small daily amounts, with only 2 percent of the midwinter
 (1335) In November 1983, a partially submerged barge was    days having more than 4 inches. The heavier snows occur in con-
reported about 0.5 mile WNW of the Anchorage cargo terminals    junction with vigorous storm centers moving N across south-cen-
in about.61ï¿½14'42"N., 149054'06"W.                                 tral Alaska. Normally, the depth of snowfall on the ground does
 (1336) In 1992, three submerged obstructions were reported in    not exceed 15 inches. Strong, gusty, N winds which occur, on the
the vicinity of General Cargo Terminals 1, 2, and 3 in the follow:    average, once or twice during the winter will, under favorable
ing approximate positions:                                         snow conditions, cause drifting and packing of snow cover.
 (1337) 61ï¿½14'47.4"N., 149ï¿½53'14.7"W.                             Although normally an area of light winds, strong "Northers" at
 (1338) 61ï¿½014'35.4"N., 149053'12.4"W.                            Anchorage occasionally result from the rapid deepening of storms
 (1339) 61014'35.8"N., 149'53'14.3"W.                             in the nearby Gulf of Alaska at a time when the interior is covered
 (1340) Tides and currents.-The diurnal range of tide at Anchor-    by an extensive mass of quite cold air.
age is 29 feet and the observed extreme low water is 6.5 feet       (1344) Spring is the period immediately following the famed
below mean lower low water. (See Tide Tables for daily predic-    Alaska "Break-up." This season is characterized by warm, pleas-
tions;) Additional information on the predicted hourly heights of    ant days and chilly nights; the mean temperature rises rapidly; pre-
the tide can be obtained from the publication "Supplemental Tidal    cipitation amounts are exceedingly small.
Predictions-Anchorage, Nikiski, Seldovia, and Valdez, Alaska,"      (1345) Summer comprises the period from June through early
published by the National Ocean Survey. Close off the town, the    September, and is, in reality, two seasons of about equal length,
current floods NE at a velocity of 1.5 knots and ebbs SW at a    the first of which is dry, the second wet. At the time of the summer
velocity of 2.5 knots. One mile off the town, the current averages    solstice, possible sunshine in Anchorage amounts to almost 191/2
2.9 knots. Strong currents and swirls in the area make navigation    hours, and the sound of singing birds and pounding hammers is
difficult. It is reported that the flood following the higher of the    nearly as common at midnight as at noon. About the middle of
low waters is unpredictable, especially during the last 3 hours, in    July average cloudiness increases markedly, and the remainder of
the vicinity of the Port of Anchorage wharves. An eddy flows up    the summer usually accounts for about 40 percent of the annual
Knik Arm during the ebb. Vessels anchored close in avoid the    precipitation.
stronger currents, which attain velocities of 6 knots or more, at   (1346) Autumn is brief in Anchorage, beginning shortly before
times, in midchannel.                                              mid-September and lasting until mid-October. The frequency of
 (1341) Weather.-The Alaska Mountain Range lies in a long arc    cloudy days and precipitation drops sharply in early October.
from SW, through NW, to NE, approximately 100 miles distant    Measurable amounts of snow are rare in September, but substan-
from Anchorage. During the winter, this range is an effective bar-    tial snowfalls sometimes reaching 10 to 12 inches occasionally
rier to the influx of very cold air from the N side of the range.    occur in mid-October. Some of the stronger southerly winds, a few
Extreme cold winter weather, associated with a high pressure sys-    with damaging effects, occur in the late summer or fall; these are
tem over interior Alaska, may lead to a succession of clear days in    post-frontal winds following the movement of a storm from the
Anchorage, with temperatures dropping to -15ï¿½F to -25ï¿½F, as con-    southern Bering Sea or Bristol Bay, northeastward across the
trasted to the -50ï¿½F and even -60ï¿½F readings in the interior. There    Alaskan interior. Somewhat less frequent, but more damaging, are
are some factors, however, which tend to offset the sheltering    the southeasterly "Chugach" winds which are funneled down the
effect of this mountain barrier. Chief among these is cold air    creek canyons on the NW slopes of the Chugach mountains E of
entrapment in various suburban areas during periods of light    the city; gusts estimated at 80 to 100 m.p.h. have caused consider-
winds. This results occasionally in temperatures on the outskirts of    able damage to roofs, powerlines and trailers on a few occasions.
Anchorage as much as 15ï¿½F to 200F colder than observed at the       (1347) The growing season in Anchorage averages 124 days,
official observation sites.                                        with the mean Daily temperature above freezing from April 8 to
 (1342) The four seasons are well marked in the Anchorage area,    October 23. May 15 is the average date for the occurrence of a
but in length, and in some major characteristics, they differ con-    temperature as low as 320F, while September 16 is the average
siderably from the usually accepted standards in middle latitudes.    first date with 320F in the fall. The latest date with 32ï¿½F in spring
 (1343) Winter is considered to be the period during which the    has been June 6, and the earliest with 320F in the fall August 16.
ponds, streams, and lakes are frozen; this normally extends from    (1348) (See page T-4 for Anchorage climatological table.)
mid-October to mid-April. The shortest day of the year has 5        (1349) Ice.-Upper Cook Inlet rarely, if ever, freezes solid because
hours and 28 minutes of possible sunshine. Periods of clear, cold    of the enormous tidal range. Vessels can navigate Cook Inlet in the
weather normally alternate with cloudy, mild weather during the    winter, but reinforced hulls are recommended; screws can sustain
Anchorage winter. The clear, cold weather is frequently accompa-    serious damage unless properly protected. The inlet is ice free
nied by significant fog because of the important low-level mois-    from about May to November. The ice floes move with the tide,
ture source provided by the arms of Cook Inlet which surround the    and patches of open water are occasionally visible.
area on three sides; while considerable floating ice is prevalent,  (1350) Routes.-From the entrance point to Cook Inlet, 3 miles S
the high tides maintain some open water throughout the winter.    of East Chugach Island Light, set courses to pass 6.5 miles S of
Visibilities of 0.5 mile, or less, occur about 5 percent of the time    the W  end of Cape Elizabeth Island, 4.5 miles 208ï¿½ from Flat




146                                           4. , CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET


Island Light, 6 miles W of Anchor Point Light, 5 miles E of Kal-    (1366) Kaiser Cement Corp. Anchorage Terminal Dock has a
gin Island Light, 5 miles 302ï¿½ from East Foreland Light; from this    grounded 250-foot LST 0.3 mile S of the Port of Anchorage facili-
position continue on a course to intersect Race Point Range. Fol-    ties. Depth alongside, 18 feet to bare; receipt of cement by barge;
low Race Point Range to a point 1.15 miles 331  from Fire Island    owned by Kaiser Cement Corp. and The Alaska Railroad and
Light, then set a course to intersect Point MacKenzie Range at 0.4    operated by Kaiser Cement Corp.
mile 319ï¿½ from Race Point Light. Follow Point MacKenzie Range       (1367) Pickworth & Associates Marine Division Dock: a wharf
to the intersection with Point Woronzof Range, thence 081ï¿½ to the    100 yards S of Kaiser Cement Corp. Anchorage Terminal Dock;
intersection with Fire Island Range (back range), thence 062ï¿½    290 feet of-berthing space; depth alongside, 16 feet to bare; cranes
along Fire Island Range to a point 1.05 miles 304ï¿½ from Point    to 53 tons' and three forklifts are available; 5 acres of open stor-
Woronzof Rear Range Light, thence 070ï¿½ to the city of Anchorage    age; owned by The Alaska Railroad and operated by Pickworth &
facilities.                                                        Associates.
 (1351) Mariners are-cautioned that the Point MacKenzie             (1368) Anderson Terminal: 400 yards S of Pickworth & Associ-
Range should not be used S of Race Point and that the use of    ates Marine Division Dock; 100-foot outer face, 557-foot N side,
Point Woronzof Range should be limited to higher tide stages.      and 217-foot S side, outer face 11 feet to bare alongside; cranes to
 (1352) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-    150 tons are available; 10,000 square feet of covered storage, and
sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of    7 acres of open storage; receipt and shipment of general cargo and
Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, and Pilotage, Homer, for details.)    heavy lift equipment by barge; owned and operated by North Star
 (1353) Towage.-Tugs are usually available at Anchorage, but    Terminal and Stevedore Co.
they must lay on the mud at low water, and previous arrangements    (1369) An abandoned fish-processor pier is 50 yards S of Ander-
for their use must be made.                                        son Terminal.
 (1354) Quarantine, customs, immigration, and agricultural          (1370) Pacific Western Lines Cement Dock: 100 yards S of
quarantine.-(See chapter 3, Vessel Arrival Inspections, and    Anderson Terminal and on the N side of Ship Creek; 100-foot
appendix for addresses.)                                           wharf with 18 feet to bare alongside, and a 350-foot grounded Lib-
 (1355) Quarantine.-A U.S. Public Health Service Contract Phy-    erty ship used as a wharf and storage for cement and barite; cranes
sician is located at the- hospital in Anchorage. (See appendix for    up to 40 tons are available; receipt of bulk cement and general
additional information.)                                           cargo by barge; owned and operated by Alaska Aggregate Corp.,
 (1356) Customs.-Anchorage is a customs port of entry.            doing business as Pacific Western Lines.
 (1357) Coast Guard.-A Marine Safety Office is in Anchorage.        (1371) Whitney Fidalgo Anchorage Dock: N side of Ship Creek,
(See appendix for address.)                                        300 yards above the mouth; 212 feet of docking space; depth
 (1358) Harbor regulations.-The Port Commission of the city of    alongside, 3 feet to bare; receipt of fish and seafood; owned and
Anchorage establishes rates and regulations for the port facilities    operated by Whitney Fidalgo Seafoods, Inc.
under their control. The Port Director enforces harbor regulations  (1372) Anderson Pier (61ï¿½17'3 1"N., 149ï¿½54'58"W.), on the W
and assigns berthing at all municipal piers, wharves, and bulk-    shore of Knik Arm, is accessible only at high water.
heads.                                                              (1373) Supplies.-Bunker C, gasoline, diesel fuel, and water are
 (1359) Wharves.-Anchorage has one deep-draft wharf with ber-    available at the Port of Anchorage Petroleum Terminal. Some
thage for three vessels, a petroleum terminal dock, many commer-    marine supplies can be obtained in town.
cial barge wharves, and a small-boat marina. For a complete         (1374) Repairs.-Repair facilities for large ships are limited to
description of the port facilities refer to Port Series No. 38, pub-    machinery. Limited engine and hull repairs are available for small
lished and sold by the U.S. Army Corps of Enginers. (See appen-    boats.
dix for address.)                                                   (1375) Communications.-Anchorage isserved by coastwise and
 (1360) Port of Anchorage, General Cargo Terminals No. 1, No. 2,    ocean freight; truck lines serve the port via the Alaska Highway
and No. 3: (61ï¿½14'23"N., 149ï¿½53'13"W.); 2,108-foot face; dredged    System. The city is the railroad, highway, and aerial center for
annually to 35 feet alongside; deck height, varies from 37 to 40    western Alaska. It is the headquarters of the Alaska Railroad, the
feet; four level-luffing gantry cranes to 40 tons and two 27 /2-ton    State-owned and operated line which connects with Seward, Whit-
container cranes; 35,000 square feet of heated, covered storage,    tier, and Fairbanks.
and 26 acres of open storage; water, electricity, and telephone ser-  (1376) Highways connect with places on the Kenai Peninsula,
vice are available; receipt of general cargo, mostly containerized;    Fairbanks, Valdez, and other places in Alaska. The Alaska High-
owned by Municipality of Anchorage and operated by Sealand    way also provides a land route through Canada to the contermi-
Service, Inc., Totem Ocean Trailer Express, and Port of Anchor-    nous United States.
age.                                                                (1377) The International Airport, 4 miles SW of Anchorage, is
 (1361) In 1992, three submerged obstructions were reported in    the hub of trans-Pacific air service; flights are offered to all parts
the vicinity of the terminal in the following approximate positions:  of the world.
 (1362) 61ï¿½14'47.4"N., 149053'14.7"W.                               (1378) Radiotelegraph, radiotelephone, and cable communica-
 (1363) 61014'35.4"N., 149053'12.4"W.                             tions are available. The Port of Anchorage guards 2182 kHz and
 (1364) 61014'35.8"N., 149053'14.3"W.                             VHF-FM channel 16 (156.80 MHz); call letters are KBT-42 and
 (1365) Port of Anchorage Petroleum Terminal: offshore wharf    WHJ-82, respectively.
just S of General Cargo Terminal No. 1; 605 feet of berthing space  (1379) Small-craft facilities.-Anchorage Marina, 200 yards S of
with dolphins; dredged annually to 35 feet alongside; deck height,    Whitney Fidalgo Seafoods, Inc. on Ship Creek, has moorage for
40 feet; receipt of petroleum products, bunkering vessels, occa-    40 craft on three floating finger piers from May to November. The
sional receipt and shipment of general cargo; owned by Munici-    floating piers go dry at low water and have about 10 feet alongside
pality of Anchorage and operated by Port of Anchorage.             at high water. A launching ramp is available. Moorage is free, but





                                                4. CAPE SPENCER TO COOK INLET                                                   147


is limited to 72 hours. The marina is owned by the State and oper-    is close'to the W shore of Knik Arm, then winds E and N; it is nar-
ated by the city.                                                  row and intricate, navigable only on the tide, and then only with
 (1380) A small-craft float is at the N end of the Port of Anchorage    knowledge of conditions.
General Cargo Terminal No. 3. A small-craft ramp and float are      (1383) Knik is a village on the NW side of Knik Arm, about 15-
approximately 300 feet S of the mouth of Ship Creek.               miles above the entrance. Small craft go to Knik at high water and
 (1381) Ship Creek, on the NE side of the Anchorage waterfront,    lie on the bottom at the ends of the landings between tides. The
bares at low water and there is no range for entering. Boats rest on    channel to Knik is close along the W shore. Eklutna is on the S
the bottom at low water, and local knowledge is recommended.       bank at the entrance to Knik River.
 (1382) From about 7 miles above the entrance to Knik Arm to the
head are extensive mudflats that bare soon after high water. The
flats are cut by numerous channels and sloughs. The main channel







                                                   5. KODIAK ISLAND


 (1)   This chapter describes Afognak and Kodiak Islands and    bare rocky outcrops. Proceeding N the trees gradually disappear
the numerous smaller off-lying islands which surround their    and the N part is entirely grass covered.
shores. Also described are the various passes and straits leading  (Ii)  Stevenson Entrance, the passage between the Barren
between these islands, the port of Kodiak, and the numerous other    Islands and Shuyak Island (see chapter 4), is navigable in clear
fishing villages.                                                weather. Kennedy Entrance, the passage N of the Barren Islands,
                                                                    is generally used if bound for Shelikof Strait from the E.

 (2)   Chart 16580.-Kodiak Island and Afognak Island, close       (12)  Latax Rocks, the northernmost feature of the Kodiak-
together and separated from the mainland SW of Cook Inlet by    Afognak-Shuyak group, are three rocky islets lying in line of the
Shelikof Strait, are large and have numerous small islands along    trend of the W coast of Shuyak Island. They are 32, 27, and 20 feet
their shores. The group is about 54 by 155 miles in extent, with its   high, respectively, the outer one being the lowest and the most
greatest length in a SW direction. The land is rugged and moun-    ragged. A rock, which uncovers 7 feet, is about 0.5 mile N of the
tainous, with elevations of 2,000 to 3,000 feet along the shores and    outermost rock, and a reef, which uncovers 6 feet, is about 0.4
more than 4,500 feet in the interior. The rocky shores are indented    mile W of the outermost rock. Several detached shoals are in the
by deep, narrow inlets.                                          vicinity of Latax Rocks. Ships using Stevenson Entrance should
  (3)   The 1912 eruption of Katmai Volcano, on the mainland 90    pass N of Latax Rocks. Latax Rocks Light (58041.4'N.,
 miles W of Kodiak, covered this group with a thick deposit of vol-    152ï¿½28.9'W.), 40 feet above the water, is shown from a pile with a
canic ash. The effects of the eruption have gradually disappeared    red and white diamo nd-shaped daymark on the Nend of the north-
 and large ash deposits are seen only in a few places.In the vicinity of Latax Rocks it has been noted
  (4)   Kodiak, on Kodiak Island, is the principal business center  (13)  CurrentIn the vicinity of Latax Rocks it has been noted
  (4)   Kodiak, on Kodiak Island, is the principal business center    that the current flows in a W direction on a rising tide and E on a
 in the area. Afognak Island, mostly timbered, is a Government for-
 est reserve. Some cattle and sheep are raised, and a few mineral    falling tide with velocities reaching about 3 to 4 knots. The current
 prospects have been located. Salmon canneries operate during the    Rocks. (See chapter 4.)
 fishing season. The crab, halibut, and herring fisheries also are
 important; the halibut fleet operates on Albatross and Portlock   (14)  Tide rips in the vicinity of Latax Rocks are particularly
 Banks. The periods of good weather are longer on these islands  - heavy and should be avoided by small vessels. (See caution as to
 than on the adjacent mainland, and considerable success has been    tide rips in the locality of the Barren Islands, chapter 4.)
 attained in growing vegetables.                        -(15)  Party Cape is the NW end of Shuyak Island. It is 178 feet
                                                                      high and grass covered for 1 mile or more back.
   (5)   Afognak Island is separated from Kodiak Island by Mar-    high and grass covered for  mile or more back
 mot Bay, Kupreanof Strait, and the passages on either side of     (16)  Dark Island, between Party Cape and Latax Rocks, is
                                                                      about 0.8 mile in diameter, 115 feet high, and grass covered. Sev-
  Whale Island. These waters provide a direct route from Kodiak    erallarge black rocks are off the SW end of Dark Island. Starr
 Harbor to Shelikof Strait. Kodiak, on  the NE coast of Kodiak    R        ocks, which uncover 6 feet, are  betweend of Dark Island. Starr
  Island, lies behind the islands in the NW part of Chiniak Bay; one    Rocks, which uncover 6 feet, are between Dark Island and the E
  approach is from the N, and the other is from the SE through Chin-    part of Party Cape.
                                                                        (17)  Currents observed during one-half day in June on the SW
  iak Bay.                                                        side of Dark Island set W on the flood with a velocity of 1.3 knots.
   (6)   Weather.-On Afognak Island the prevailing winds are NE    The ebb velocity was I knot.
  except in spring and again in late summer when they shift to SW    (18)  The passage between Latax Rocks and Dark Island has a
  and W directions. At Kodiak, the winds, usually NW in late fall,      athom shoal near the middle where the currents and tide rips
  winter, and spring, shift to NE in early summer and then to SEhoal near  e middle where the currents and tide rips
  until the end siof                    Se pembr. he verge ind speed    is   20  knots at  S may appear heavier than elsewhere in the passage. The passage
  until the end of September The average wind speed is 20 knots at    can be used by well-powered vessels by keeping 0.45 mile N of
  Kodiak, and the area is subject to violent williwaws.            Dark Island on a due E or W course, with careful attention to the
    (7)   Annual precipitation averages 67 inches on Kodiak Island,    set from the strong currents.
  and 53 inches on Afognak Island. Annual 'nowfall averages 47      (19)  Dark Passage, between Starr Rocksand Party Cape, may
  inches at Kodiak, and measurable snow has been recorded in    be navigated by keeping 0.4 mile off the cape and passing N of a
   every month of the year except July and August.                  rock 3 feet high lying 0.9 mile WNW of Party Cape. Because of
    (8)   Mean annual temperature is 41ï¿½F at Kodiak. Extreme tem-    the strong currents and heavy tide rips, the passage should be
   peratures noted were 85ï¿½F in August and -2ï¿½F in January. Water    avoided.
   temperatures are about 1ï¿½F lower than air temperatures in summer,  (20)  Shag Island and the W  coast of Shuyak Island are
   and 1ï¿½ and 2ï¿½F higher in late fall, winter, and early spring. Wom-    described later in this chapter.
   ens Bay, on the NE coast of Kodiak Island, is frequently blocked  (21)  The N coast of Shuyak Island from Party Cape to Point
   by ice in midwinter.                                             Banks is very irregular and fringed with numerous rocks and
     (9)   Fogs are common over the area and are most frequent at   islets. Heavy currents and tide rips are found along this coast.
   Kodiak in June and July. Cloudiness is considerable.             Carry Inlet and Shangin Bay, the main indentations, are narrow
                                                                        and tortuous. They may be used only by small craft with local
     (10)  Chart 16604.-Shuyak Island appears as part of the N       knowledge. Carry Inlet has its entrance channel about 2 miles SE
   end of Afognak Island, but is separated from it by Shuyak Strait.    of Party Cape. The narrowest part of Shangin Bay, 1.2 miles from
   The S portion is densely wooded, with the higher hills showing    its entrance, has a midchannel rock which is awash at minus tides.


    148





                                                       5. KODIAK ISLAND                                                          149


 (22)  Perevalnie Islands, 95 feet high and grass covered, are    in the center of the passage E of the island, and the best water is
close to the N shore of Shuyak Island and 0.5 mile W  of Point    270 yards off the E points of Delphin Island. Boats can anchor in
Banks. Perevalnie Passage, between the islands and the main-        16 fathoms, hard bottom, in the center of the head of the arm, after
land, may be used as a boat passage with a depth of about 5 feet.   passing the island. A heavy swell comes into Delphin Bay in N
 (23)  Temporary anchorage during S weather appears feasible I    weather.
mile WSW of the W end of Perevalnie Islands.                          (34)  Discoverer Bay, the SE arm of Perenosa Bay, has excel-
 (24)  Point Banks, an island about 0.4 mile long, and 130 feet    lent anchorage in 15 fathoms, muddy bottom, E of Discoverer
high, is entirely grass covered. The narrow passage between it and    Island, which is tree covered and northernmost in the bay. A 33/4-
the NE end of Shuyak Island has several rocks and is choked with    fathom shoal is about 0.5 mile NW from the E entrance point, and
kelp.                                                               a I-fathom spot is between the shoal and the point. Small boats
 (25)  Sentinel Island, a rock 33 feet high 0.9 mile NW of Point    can enter the channel on the W  side of the island and go to the
Banks, is a good landmark from the E or W. Its sides are nearly    head of the arm. Two mooring buoys are in the SE part of Discov-
vertical.                                                           erer Bay,
 (26)  Fronting the E coast of Shuyak Island, 1.5 to 3.5 miles off-  (35)  Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-
shore, are a series of reefs and rocks separated by broken bottom    sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of
areas and extending 7 miles in an approximately true S direction    Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)
from a 21/2-fathom reef, 1.4 miles SE of Point Banks, to the vicin-  (36)  The Kodiak Island area is served by the Alaska Marine
ity of a bare rock 52 feet high. A similar series crosses the former    Pilots and Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.
in the latitude of Sea Otter Island.                                  (37)  Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots
 (27)  Routes.-Vessels using the passage along the E coast of    and en route to Discover Bay can meet the pilot boat about 2 miles
Shuyak Island, inside the series of reefs and rocks, should proceed    N of Posliedni Point (58026.0'N., 152020.0'W.).
with caution. The bottom in this passage is extremely broken. It is
considered that only a wire-drag survey would prove the absence         )   The pilot boat can be on  tacted by channel  16 or on a prear-
                                                                    ERER BAY PILOT BOAT" onVHF-FM channel 16 or on a prear-
of all dangers. The known dangers may be avoided by rounding
the SE end of Point Banks Island by 0.5 mile until the E end of the
island bears true N. Then proceed 5.8 miles on course 175ï¿½ until     (39)  Phoenix Bay, the arm of Perenosa Bay just W of Posliedni
the prominent group of rocks, highest 15 feet, are a little less than    Point, is a good anchorage for all weather except NW; anchor in
         0.8 mile to theW, then teer 205  into Peenosa Bay. Tidal cur-    10 to 17 fathoms, muddy bottom, 1.2 miles from the entrance.
                 rents0.8~ ~ milare ver stong .Shields Point forms the W entrance of the bay.
rents are very strong..
 (28)  The main approach from seaward to Andreon Bay, Shuyak         (40)  Seal Bay, in general, extends from Posliedni Point to Tols-
Strait, and Perenosa Bay, is S of the rocks SE of Sea Otter Island    toi Point. From a point 1.1 miles N from Posliedni Point a series
and between the 52-foot bare rock and Seal Islands, but its use by    of rocky islands and reefs extend in an ESE direction across Seal
large vessels cannot be recommended. Indications of shoals along    Bay. Navigation in this area should not be attempted without local
the approach are numerous, but they have not been examined with    information.
the wire drag. There are evidently pinnacle formations in this       (41)  Tonki Bay, on the W  side of Tonki Cape, has two arms
region. To avoid the known areas of extreme broken bottom, steer    separated by a headland. A 106-foot rocky islet is 0.5 mile N of
course 2820 from seaward, pass 3.2 miles N of Tolstoi Point, then    the headland. Three rocks awash are about 0.3 mile from the E
1.9 miles S of the large rock, 52 feet high, lying SW of Sea Otter    shore and 2 miles S of Tonki Cape. Anchorage is about 0.3 mile
Island, and then pass 1.5 miles N of the sharp black rocks N of    from the head of the E arm in 10 fathoms, soft bottom, but it is not
Posliedni Cape.                                                     secure with N winds. Small boats may anchor in the small cove on
 (29)  Sea Otter Island, 7.5 miles SE from Point Banks, is grass    the E side of the head of the E arm in 8 fathoms, muddy bottom, in
covered, 0.4 mile long, and 105 feet high. Bare rocks and breakers    any weather
extend to the E and SE for 2.3 miles.                                 (42)  The W arm of Tonki Bay extends 6.5 miles S of the head-
  (30)  Little Fort Island, 85 feet high, off the E coast of Shuyak    land separating the two arms. Anchorage may be had in 18 fath-
Island and 8 miles S of Point Banks, is grass covered and marks    oms, muddy bottom, about 0.3 mile from head of the arm.
the entrance to Andreon Bay. Big Fort Island forms the S side of     (43)  On the E part of Afognak Island is a series of mountain
the bay. Big Fort Channel separates the island from the mainland.    ridges with low depressions between them running through the
This channel bares at half tide. Anchorage for small boats may be    island from N to S. From a distance Marmot Island appears as the
had in Andreon Bay near the entrance to Big Fort Channel in 12    easternmost of these ridges. The lower parts of Afognak Island are
fathoms, muddy bottom. The axis of the entrance channel is a little    wooded, except its E coast, and its SW end S of Paramanof Bay.
less than one-third the way from the NE end of Big Fort Island to    (44)  Caution.-In making Tonki Cape or Marmot Strait from
Little Fort Island, it then follows the rounded N end of Big Fort    the N, a very irregular set to the W has been experienced. In foggy
Island about 350 to 400 yards offshore.                             weather a vessel is liable to be too close to the breakers off Sea
  (31)  Shuyak Strait has a navigable entrance at its W end and is    Otter Island unless precautions are taken. Likewise in running to
described later in this chapter.                                    this locality from Seward, abnormal set has been experienced.
  (32)  Perenosa Bay, on the N side of Afognak Island, is    From the experience of a survey vessel making these runs and in
between the E entrance to Shuyak Strait and Posliedni Point. The    lying-to offshore, there seems to be two factors for which allow-
NW part of the bay is foul. Anchorages may be found in several    ance should be made. First, if the run is made during the time of a
arms of Perenosa Bay, but the approach to the bay from seaward is    flood spring tide, extra allowance should be made for set to the W.
characterized by a very broken bottom, as described above.          Second, if the course of the vessel passes over a bank or even a
  (33)  Delphin Bay is the W one of the S arms of Perenosa Bay.    locality where the water is shoaled, extra allowance for a stronger
The channel W of tree-covered Delphin Island is foul. Rocks are    current should be made.




150                                                    5. KODIAK ISLAND


 (45)  Tonki Cape, the NE end of Afognak Island, is a narrow    rises abruptly from deep water to 14 to 17 fathoms. These areas
grass-covered point 87 feet high near its N extremity. A low-lying    should be avoided because there may be less water than indicated.
gap connects it with the ridge separating Tonki Bay and Marmot        (56)  The route from Marmot Strait to Kodiak is E of the broken
Strait. A short reef extends N from the cape 0.3 mile, terminating    bottom in the center of Marmot Bay entrance. However, shoal
in a rock awash at high water. It is recommended that vessels clear    spots exist along this route E of Spruce Island and in the vicinity
the N end of the cape by at least 1.5 miles. Tonki Cape Light    of Spruce Cape.
(58ï¿½21. 'N., 151ï¿½59.2'W.), 75 feet above the water, is shown from
a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark.         (57)  The route in Marmot Bay from the vicinity of Marmot
                                                                    Strait to the passes at Whale Island lies between the general bro-
 (46)  Sealion Rocks are two bare rocks close together, the    ken ground in the center of the bay and the N shore. Pillar Cape
larger about 35 feet high, about 5.5 miles E from Tonki Cape and 4
                                                                    may be rounded at 1.5 miles in depths of 20 fathoms or more.
miles N from Marmot Island. A reef that uncovers 7 feet is 0.6
                                                                    Similar depths exist 0.8 mile off Cape Izhut. In the W end of Mar-
mile NE from these rocks. Sealion Rocks have been used as a
                    bombing,~~     target~~. ~mot Bay danger will be avoided by keeping well E of a line
bombing target.                                                     between the E end of Cape Kostromitinof and Stripe Rock, and E
 (47)  Marmot Island, about 6.5 miles long, parallels the E side    of this line extended S until Hog Island is open from the NW side
of Afognak Island. Marmot Island is wooded to a height of about    of Whale Island.
500 feet. The N end is low and rises gradually to the highland. The
E side and S end of the island are bluffs over 1,000 feet high in    (58)  The route along the S side of Marmot Bay through Narrow
places. The W  shore is also steep but lower. Three high rocks are
close to Marmot Cape, the S end of the island, and two more are    Kodiak bound for Shelikof Strait. Passage at the time of maximum
close to its SE side.                                               current in Whale Passage should be avoided. Current predictions
 (48)  The SE shore of Marmot Island is a Steller sea lion rook-    for Whale Passage may be obtained from the Tidal Current Tables.
ery site. There is a 3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer zone around    (59)  Pillar Cape, the outer end of the N shore of Marmot Bay,
all but the NW shore of the island. (See 50 CFR 227.12, chapter    is a bluff over 500 feet high, similar to the SE side of Marmot
2, for limits and regulations.)                                     Island. A high pinnacle rock is at the foot of the bluff, 0.5 mile E
 (49)  Shoal areas adjacent to the NW shore of Marmot Island    of the S end of the cape. About 1.5 miles W of the cape is an open
extend N toward Sealion Rocks and border the N approach to    bight from which lowland extends through to the W arm of Tonki
Marmot Strait. A 4-fathom spot in this area is 2 miles off the N    Bay.
end of Marmot Island.                                                 (60)  Izhut Bay, a N arm of Marmot Bay, is about 5 miles wide
 (50)  The point on the NW shore of Marmot Island, 1.5 miles    between Pillar Cape and Peril Cape and extends about 7.5 miles in
from the N end, is marked by a rock, 12 feet high, 600 yards off-    a NW direction. The only dangers are along the shores and in the
shore.                                                              arms of the bay. The bay proper is exposed to S weather, but some
 (51)  Two covered rocks, on which the sea generally breaks, are    of the arms afford protected anchorages.
about 1 mile apart and 2.5 miles E of Cape St. Hermogenes, the E      (61)  The most important of these anchorages is Kitoi Bay, an
end of Marmot Island. The N rock lies in the bearing 288ï¿½ to the N  arm on the W side. Its head is a landlocked basin about 0.5 mile in
end of the island. The S rock lies in the bearing 225ï¿½ to the SE end    diameter. The swinging radius from the center of the basin is about
of the island. Two pinnacle rocks close to the SE side of Marmot    300 yards. To enter Kitoi Bay pass the N entrance point of this arm
Island bear 232ï¿½ when in range, the range passes SE of both break-    slightly less than 0.5 mile off on a course 3050, picking up the
ers. A vessel should pass over 2 miles outside the breakers to    range defined by the prominent point on the N side about 1.8 miles
avoid broken bottom.                                                in and the stream at the head of the small bight at the head of the
 (52)  Marmot Strait, between Afognak and Marmot Islands, is    arm. Continue on course or range until 0.3 mile from Midarm.
2.5 miles wide at its narrowest part. The strait is apparently free    Island, a small prominent midbay island, 50 feet high. This posi-
from dangers except along the shores. A shoal of I l/4 fathoms is    tion is between another islet 600 yards to starboard and a 3-fathom
650 yards off the W  shore of Marmot Strait, 6 miles from Tonki    spot 125 yards to port. The islet on the starboard beam is 100
Cape. A midchannel course through the strait is recommended.        yards from the N shore. The 3-fathom spot is marked by only a
Tidal currents have an estimated velocity of 1 to 3 knots, the flood    few streamers of kelp which are difficult to see. Then change
setting N through the strait.                                       course to pass S of the islet and steer midchannel course to the
 (53)  King Cove, 6 miles W  of Marmot Cape, is an open bight    center of the basin which is clear to within a few yards from shore.
1.5 miles long, indenting the coast 1.8 miles. It may be used as a    A low-water spit extends a few yards off the N entrance point of
temporary anchorage in 7 to 12 fathoms, sand bottom. It is    the basin. Anchor in 20 to 22 fathoms, good holding ground.
exposed to E and S weather.                                         Small vessels may anchor in a small bight SW of the basin in 11 to
 (54)  The W  coast of Marmot Strait for about 5 miles S from       12 fathoms.
Tonki Cape is broken and rocky, with reefs extending offshore.        (62)  Two fingerlike arms in the NE part of Izhut Bay extend N
Along this stretch is a low bluff with a grass- and muskeg-covered    about 5 miles. Saposa Bay, the E arm, has an island about 0.5 mile
plain, extending 0.3 mile inland to the main ridge which rises    from its entrance. A rock, covered l2 fathom, is about 125 yards S
abruptly. S to King Cove the bluffs increase in height with the    of the island. The passage is W  of the island. The controlling
shores steep-to. From King Cove to Pillar Cape the shoreline is a    depthis 2 fathoms. Small vessels may anchor above the island in 7
steep, bare bluff from 500 to 1,000 feet high.                      to 10 fathoms, sand bottom. The W arm is not recommended as an
                                                                    anchorage.
 (55)  Charts 16594, 16576.-Marmot Bay extends W  between            (63)  Peril Cape, the outer end of the W shore of Izhut Bay, is a
Afognak and Kodiak Islands to Whale Island. In the center of the    prominent precipitous headland about 600 feet high with a high
bay, near the entrance and N of The Triplets, in places the bottom    pinnacle rock close to its S side.




                                                      5. KODIAK ISLAND                                                       151


 (64)  Cape Izhut, 2.5 miles SW of Peril Cape, is a projecting,    0.6 mile from the head of the bay. The anchorage is about 0.4 mile
long, wooded, hilly point from 250 to 500 feet high. There is deep    W of this rock in about 18 fathoms, mud and gravel bottom. The
water around the cape as close as 0.3 mile.                       head of Kazakof Bay separates into two arms. Small vessels can
 (65)  Duck Bay is about 6 miles long from Cape Izhut to Cape    anchor in 8 to 10 fathoms, either in the broadest part of the W arm
Kostromitinof. At the E end of the bay temporary anchorage, with    0.3 mile from its head, or in the entrance to the E arm.
a swinging radius of about 300 yards, may be had in the middle of  (76)  From SW, keep Hog Island open from the NW side of
the cove 1.5 miles NW of Cape Izhut, in 6 to 7 fathoms. The    Whale Island until Stripe Rock is in range with the E side of Cape
anchorage is E of an islet, 16 feet high, 0.3 mile from the N shore    Kostromitinof. Then steer 0410 for 2.3 miles to a position 0.25
and should not be approached closely. Selezen Point forms the W   mile E of Stripe Rock. Then steer 006ï¿½ for 1.1 miles to a position
side of the cove.                                                 0.25 mile E of a bare ledge about 15 feet high. Then steer 333ï¿½ for
 (66)  A round, rocky island, 168 feet high and grass covered on    0.9 mile. Then steer 358ï¿½ for 0.8 mile, keeping Stripe Rock open
top, is 2.5 miles W from Cape Izhut and 0.6 mile from shore. Kelp    W of the bare ledge astern until Parrot Island is 0.5 mile on the
extends nearly 0.3 mile W and N of the island, and numerous bare    starboard beam. From this position a 005ï¿½ course will lead to the
rocks extend 0.5 mile E of the island and to the shore NE of it. On    head of the bay.
Selezen Bay, the cove N of the island, is the small native settle-  (77)  Afognak Bay, the W tributary to Marmot Bay, makes into
ment of Little Afognak. Temporary anchorage may be had in the    Afognak Island about 3.5 miles. There is secure anchorage off an
middle of the cove in 10 to 12 fathoms. Enter the cove W of the    abandoned cannery at Rivermouth Point, near the head. (See
island between the island and a large rock awash at high water,    Routes, Afognak Bay.) Litnik is an abandoned village on
which lies 0.3 mile S from the W point of the cove.               Afognak River at the head of the bay. The approach from Marmot
 (67)  Mary Anderson Cove, the next cove W, with its entrance    Bay is through Eastern Passage, between Hog Island and Big
1 mile NW of the 168-foot island, is 1 mile long and 0.7 mile    Rock, which are off Afognak Bay. This approach is endangered by
wide. The bottom is rocky and kelp extends some distance from    a rock awash, marked by a buoy, 0.6 mile SE of Big Rock. Foul
shore in places. Small craft entering with care can anchor in 5 to 8    ground marked by kelp extends about 350 yards from Hog Island
feet at the head.                                                 into Eastern Passage, and shoal water extends about 0.3 mile SSW
 (68)  Cape Kostromitinof, on the N shore of Marmot Bay, is a    of Big Rock.
projecting, long, level, wooded point, about 200 feet high, with   (78)  A straight channel, bordered by dangers, leads from East-
bluffs in places at the water. N from the cape the land rises gradu-    ern Passage to the central part of Afognak Bay. On the NE side of
ally in a distance of 5.5 miles to Duck Mountain, a prominent    the channel are the Skipwith Reefs, with shoal water projecting
peak, 2,048 feet high.                                            channelward. On the SW side are Danger Reef, which uncovers
 (69)  Kazakof Bay, referred to as Danger Bay by local fisher-    about 5 feet. An unmarked 31/4-fathom shoal is 0.9 mile SE of the
men, extends 6 miles in a N direction from the NW part of Mar-    reef. A rock, covered 21/4 fathoms, is 0.6 mile NW of Danger Reef.
mot Bay. Anchorage for small vessels is found at the head of the   (79)  Hog Island is the prominent mark for approaching
bay. (See Routes, Kazakof Bay.)                                   Afognak Bay and also Afognak Strait. It is 0.4 mile long and has
 (70) - The cove on the E side, 3.5 miles above the entrance to    two wooded knolls with a saddle in between.
Kazakof Bay, affords shelter for a small vessel anchored in 12 to  (80)  Hog Island Light (58000.2'N., 152041.2'W.), 40 feet
14 fathoms. Small craft can anchor in the SE end of the cove in    above the water, is shown from a square frame with a red and
about 5 fathoms. A reef extends about 100 yards off the S side of    white diamond-shaped daymark on the S side of Hog Island.
the entrance. The small bight in the E shore is shoal. In 1981, a  (81)  Big Rock, 1 mile from Hog Island with Eastern Passage
logging camp was operating on the E side of the cove.             between, is comparatively narrow, irregular, and 100 yards long in
  (71)  Parrot Island, round, rocky, and 70 feet high, is in the    a N and S direction.
entrance to Kazakof Bay. Channels for entering are on either side  (82)  Skipwith Reefs, a chain of bare rocks and reefs, extend
of the broken ground on which Parrot Island and other rocky islets    about 2.5 miles NW from the rock awash in Eastern Passage to
and rocks awash are grouped. A submerged ledge with some kelp    Lamb Island. The SW side of the rocks should be given a berth of
and a depth of 31/2 fathoms is about 0.8 to 1.5 mile SE of Parrot    over 0.4 mile.
Island; its N end is 0.5 mile off Cape Kostromitinof.              (83)  Lamb Island, 0.5 mile long and wooded, is near the point
  (72); Stripe Rock, 2.8 miles S of Parrot Island, is marked by a    which marks the outer end of the E shore of Afognak Bay. The
prominent white streak which extends along the entire height of    area between the point that marks the outer end of the E shore of
the rock. It is composed of two pinnacles close together, about 35    the bay and Lamb Island is foul and should be avoided.
feet high; the white streak is on the higher of the two pinnacles. A  (84)  Alexander Island, 0.8 mile E of Lamb Island, is grass
large bare ledge, 30 feet high, is between Stripe Rock and Parrot    covered and has a knob about 80 feet high at its N end. Foul
Island.                                                           ground surrounds the island and extends 1.2 miles toward Stripe
  (73)  W  of Stripe Rock and the large bare ledge, the area    Rock.
extending to the shore is mostly foul and should be avoided by     (85)  Dot Island, small and wooded, is the westernmost of three
vessels.                                                          small islands close to Posliedni Point, where Afognak Bay nar-
  (74)  Routes, Kazakof Bay.-From E, shape the course for a    rows to 0.5 mile. On the W shore opposite Dot Island is a cascade
position about 0.5 mile S of Cape Kostromitinof. Head for Parrot    where water can be obtained by boat.
Island on a 3050 course until the SW end of the cape is a little for-  (86)  Graveyard Point marks the outer end of the W shore of
ward of the beam. Change to 330ï¿½ and pass 0.25 mile off the SW    Afognak Bay; Lipsett Point is the next point inside the bay. Alent
end of the cape and the same distance NE of Parrot Island.        Village is on the shore of the bight between these points.
  (75): Then steer 359ï¿½, with Parrot Island astern, to the head of  (87)  Village Reefs, partly bare at low water and covered with
the bay. Above Parrot Island, give the shores a wide berth and    kelp, extend over I mile E from the shore around Graveyard Point
avoid the low bare rock about 0.4 mile from the E shore and about    toward Hog Island. The point of the reefs is midway between




152                                                    5. KODIAK ISLAND


Graveyard Point and Hog Island. SE from the point of the reefs is    (96)  A reef awash is 0.4 mile NNW from Chiachi Point or 400
a detached shoal with a least found depth of 3z1 fathoms. Between    yards N of Kupreanof Mountain-Deranof Rock range.
this shoal and the reef extending 650 yards W from Hog Island is a   (97)  Most of the N half of Afognak Strait is foul. SW of Head
channel 0.5 mile wide. The channel is sometimes used by vessels,    Point the foul ground extends 0.3 mile offshore and its S edge is
with local knowledge, to enter Afognak Bay from Afognak Strait.    near the Kupreanof Mountain-Deranof Rock range.
 (88)  Head Point is 1.4 miles S of Graveyard Point, and             (98s  Dolphin Point is the NE end of Whale Island. A reef,
between these points is the former village of Afognak, whose        partly bare at low water, extends 600 yards from Whale Island at a
inhabitants moved to Settler Cove in 1965. The white church with    point 0.3 mile W of Dolphin Point.
green roof, 0.3 mile S of Graveyard Point, is the best mark in the   (99)  Fox Bay, the bight in Whale Island I mile W of Dolphin
village.                                                            Point, has in its entrance a reef which uncovers at low water. A
 (s8)   Small vessels can anchor in 5 fathoms near the kelp on    small vessel can anchor in the bay inside the reef in 4 to 5 fathoms,
Village Reefs, with the church in Afognak bearing 344ï¿½ and Head    but the S shore must be given a berth of 300 yards.
Point in line with Deranof Rock. Little current will be felt here,   (l00)  W of Fox Bay the shore of Whale Island is clear to Chia-
but there is exposure to E winds.                                   chi Point, the NW end of the island, from which a shelving reef
 (90)  Routes, Afognak Bay.-From NE, keep Hog Island open           makes out about 350 yards in a NW direction.
from the NW side of Whale Island, bearing anything W of 250ï¿½;        (io)  Temporary anchorage may be had in the channel of
this range will lead about 0.3 mile SE of the rock awash 0.6 mile    Afognak Strait between Fox Bay and former Afognak village, in 7
SE of Big Rock. After Big Rock appears in range with the E end    to 8 fathoms, but exposed to the full strength of the currents and to
of Lamb Island, turn to pass midway between Big Rock and Hog    E and N wids.
Island, and steer 315ï¿½ for the old cannery building at Rivermouth     102  A good anchorage in Afognak Strait, but exposed to E
Point, showing midway between Dot Island and Posliedni Point.    weather, can be had in 5 to 7 fathoms about 400 yards off a gravel
Keep this range for about 2 miles until the W end of Lamb Island    beach on the SE end of Little Raspberry Island. The bottom is
is abeam. Then steer 308ï¿½ for 1.8 miles and pass 400 to 500 yards    sand and gravel and the anchorage is suitable for large or small
S of Dot Island. Keep this course for about 0.3 mile past Dot    vessels. To make this anchorage from the E, hold a 270ï¿½ course
Island until 0.25 mile off the cascade on the W shore. Then steer    with the S end of Little Raspberry Island ahead. The end of this
3530 for 0.8 mile, favoring slightly the W shore. Anchor near mid-    island can be recognized as the N side of the passage N of Deranof
channel off the old cannery at Rivermouth Point in 8 to 10 fath-    Island. Remain on the bearing 2700 on the S end of Little Rasp-
oms. The anchorage is clear if Winter Island, in the W  arm, is    berry Island in order to avoid foul ground off Shoal Point and to
                                                                   avoid a rock S of this course which uncovers I foot. This rock is
400 yards.                                                          marked by kelp which tows under at most stages of the tide. If this
                                                                   course is used coming into this anchorage, or for small vessels in
                                                                   The Narrows, it is possible to select a good range for this course,
Alexander Island on rangthe S tip of Little Raspberry Island against the slope of a
the N end of Hog Island is abeam, turn from the range to pass mid-
                                                                   mountain on Raspberry Island near Last Timber Point.
way between Big Rock and Hog Island.                                 (103) With E winds, small vessels can anch6r in about 4 fathoms
 (92)  Whale Island, at the W  end of Marmot Bay, is about 4    about 0.3 mile W  of Afognak Point, on the N side of Afognak
miles in diameter. Its S half is a grass-covered mountain, 2,028    Strait; caution is required. When rounding into the anchorage, pass
feet high, with a narrow light streak down its E slope. The N side    NE of a reef, bare at low water, 0.4 mile SW of the point; give the
of the island is low, and the lower parts of the island are generally  oint a berth of over 300 yards.
wooded. Treeless Islet, rocky and grass covered, is 0.4 mile off      (04) Deranof Island, 0.5 mile long, low and wooded, is the
the E side of the N end of the island. Whale Passage and Afognak    southernmost and largest of the islands at the W  end of Afognak
Strait are S and N of Whale Island, respectively.                   Strait.
 (93)  Afognak Strait, between Whale and Afognak Islands, is         (105)  Deranof Rock, about 15 feet high, is nearly 200 yards S
used mostly by small vessels.                                       of the island. Broken ground with a least depth of 21/2 fathoms is
 (94)  The currents in the strait are only half as strong as in    0.4 mile E of the island and 074ï¿½ from Deranof Rock.
Whale Passage. The dangers are marked by kelp, which grows in        (106)  Tides, Afognak Strait.-High and low water occur about
depths up to about 6 fathoms and shows at slack water.              I/2 hour later than at Kodiak. The diurnal range of tide is about 10
 (95)  If precaution is taken, navigation is not difficult on a clear    feet.
day when the marks for the strait can be seen, and when the sum-      (107) The tidal currents in Afognak Strait set W on the flood
mit of Kupreanof Mountain is not hidden. The range formed by    and E on the ebb. The estimated velocity is 2 to 5 knots at
this mountain peak and Deranof Rock, off Deranof Island, effec-    strength, depending on the range of the tide. During the flood there
tively marks the channel through Afognak Strait, except in the    is a strong set into Raspberry Strait; this should be kept in mind
central part of the strait and just inside the W entrance. In the cen-    when in the W end of Afognak Strait.
tral part of the strait the range passes close to the edge of foul   (lot) Routes, Afognak Strait.-From E in Marmot Bay, keep
ground making out from the N shore; here a vessel should guard    Hog Island open from the NW side of Whale Island, bearing any-
against going anything N of the range. Just outside the W           thing W  of 250ï¿½; and pass 0.25 mile or more S of Hog Island and
entrance, a 2'/2-fathom depth on a rock lying 600 yards from the    0.5 mile N of Dolphin Point.
Whale Island shore is on or a very little N of the range. The chan-   (o09)  Passing 0.5 mile NW of Dolphin Point, steer for Deranof
nel is just S of the rock, and here it is necessary to deviate a little S    Rock in range with the summit of Kupreanof Mountain; or if the
of the range to avoid the rock; the channel is only 300 yards wide    mountain is obscured, steer for Deranof Rock with the S end of
between the 21/2-fathom rock and the reef making out from Chia-    Hog Island astern,course 253ï¿½. Off Head Point and for 0.8 mile to
chi Point; the general depth is 24 feet.                            the W, go nothing N of the range. When approaching the W end of




                                                      5. KODIAK ISLAND                                                        153


the strait, keep a little S of the range to avoid the rock with 21/2   is marked by heavy kelp. Ostrovka Point, 2 miles W of Chernof
fathoms over it; but give the shore of Whale Island a berth of over    Point, is low and wooded; a high grassy islet is close-to.
300 yards; on the flood, guard against a N set toward Raspberry     (120) Broken ground, covered 41/2 to 10 fathoms, extends 4.5
Strait.                                                            miles NW from Chernof Point up to 0.8 mile off Ostrovka Point
 (11o) When the E one of the two highest peaks on the S side of    and Dry Spruce Island.
Whale Passage opens W of Whale Island, bearing 184ï¿½, steer 2380     (121) Last Timber Point Light 6 (57ï¿½58.7'N., 152ï¿½58.8'W.), 35
and pass 0.25 mile SE of Deranof Rock. Continue the course 0.8    feet above the water, is shown from a small house with a triangular
mile past the rock, and then steer 286ï¿½ with the summit of Whale    red daymark on the point on the N side of Kupreanof Strait, 7.4
Island astern. This course made good will lead through Kupreanof    miles NW of Ilkognak Rock Light 1. Thomas Rock, 1.5 miles SE
Strait, passing 0.4 to 0.5 mile S of God Point, 0.9 mile N of Outlet    of Last Timber Point Light 6, is awash at low water; a patch, cov-
Cape, and 0.5 mile S of Malina Point.                              ered 6 fathoms, is 0.3 mile SW of the rock.
 (il)  Raspberry Strait is described later in this chapter.         (122) Gori Point, 2.5 miles W of Last Timber Point Light 6, is
 (112) Raspberry Island, extending from Shelikof Strait to    the base of an abrupt sloping ridge with its summits close to the
Afognak Strait, is about 15 miles long in a NW and SE direction,    shore.
and averages about 5 miles wide. On the NE side it is separated     (123) Kupreanof Mountain, on Kupreanof Peninsula 10 miles
from Afognak Island by Raspberry Strait, and Kupreanof Strait    W  of Ilkognak Rock Light 1, is 2,440 feet high and consists of
borders its SW side. This island is rugged and mountainous with    prominent broken gray rock.
elevations up to 2,350 feet. Most of the shores are bold and precip-  (124) Dry Spruce Island, on the S side of Kupreanof Strait 8.5
itous except where numerous valleys meet the shore. The island is    miles W of Ilkognak Rock Light 1, is 225 feet high and wooded.
grass-covered except along-the Shelikof Strait side, where it is for    Dry Spruce Island Rock Light 7 (57ï¿½57.9'N., 153ï¿½04.2'W.), 30
the most part bare sheer cliffs, and along the SE half of Raspberry    feet above the water, is shown from a post with a square green
Strait where the island is heavily covered with spruce.            daymark off the NW end of the island on a ledge which uncovers
 (113) The description of features along the various shores of this    about 6 feet. Two grassy islets and a pinnacle rock are off the N
island is given in connection with the information pertaining to    side of the W end of the island.
Kupreanof, Raspberry, and Shelikof Straits.                         (125) A small wooded island and shoals, dry at low water, are
 (114) _Whale Passage, S of Whale Island, joins Kupreanof    between Dry Spruce Island and Drying Point, the end of the
Strait to form a part of the main route between Kodiak and She-    mainland on the N side of Dry Spruce Bay.
likof Strait. Strong tidal currents occur in Whale Passage. Eddies  (t26) Bare Island, just W  of Dry Spruce Island, is partly
may cause vessels to veer toward danger. The S shore of Whale    wooded on its E half. Dry Spruce Bay Entrance Light
Passage is foul with rocks and kelp; the N shore is generally clear    (57ï¿½57.3'N., 153ï¿½06.2'W.), 76 feet above the water, is shown from
of obstructions. The islands bordering both sides of Kupreanof    a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark
Strait are grass covered and mountainous, especially the N shore    on a small grassy island 0.4 mile W of Bare Island.
which rises abruptly. The timber extends W  along the shore to      (127) Anchorages.-Temporary anchorage can be had in the
Last Timber Point and Dry Spruce Island, where it terminates    bight on the N side of Whale Passage if stopped by too strong a
except for scattered clumps. Navigation in the daytime is not diffi-    flood current in the passage E. There is an eddy current in the
cult when the current is not too strong; however, careful attention    bight, and care should be taken to get in far enough to ride to the
to steering is required under any condition.                       eddy alone. A good place is in 8 fathoms, 300 yards from Whale
 (115) Ilkognak Rock Light 1 (57ï¿½54.8'N., 152ï¿½47.0'W.), 18    Island, with Koniuji Island bearing about 238ï¿½.
feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower, with a        (128) A better anchorage can be had 0.3 to 0.4 mile off the W
square green daymark in the middle of the E entrance to Whale      side of Whale Island, in 8 to 10 fathoms. This is convenient to
Passage. Broken ground, covered 31/2 fathoms, is 0.3 mile E of the    either Whale Passage or Afognak Strait, and is well out of the cur-
light, and a rock, covered 23/4 fathoms, is 0.1 mile W of the light.    rent; the anchorage is exposed to W winds.
Broken ground, covered 31/2 fathoms, is ;0.2 mile NE of the light.  (129) Anchorage may be had in places near the shore of Kupre-
A strong ebb current, heavy swirls, and upwelling occur in the    anof Peninsula, but the only secure harbor is Dry Spruce Bay.
wake of this broken ground, and dangerous tide rips prevail at      (130) Tides and currents.-Passage through Whale Passage at
such times with NE gales. A rock, awash at high water, is near    times of maximum current should be avoided. Floating aids to
Whale Island, 0.4 mile N of the light. A rock, covered 2 fathoms,    navigation may be dragged under or off station during these peri-
is 0.3 mile off Whale Island and 0.9 mile NW of the light; heavy    ods; mariners are urged to exercise particular caution. The tidal
swirls and eddies occur in this area,                              currents in Whale Passage set NW on the flood and SE on the ebb.
 (116)  Shag Rocks, 0.4 mile SW of Ilkognak Rock Light 1,    During large tides, the currents are very strong with boils and
uncovers about 5 feet.                                             swirls. The current velocity is about 4.5 knots. (See the Tidal Cur-
 (117) Koniuji Island, marked by a light, 0.3 mile from the S    rent Tables for predictions.) In summer 1981, slack water was
side of Whale Passage and 2 miles NW of Ilkognak Rock Light I,    observed to occur from I to 2 hours later than predicted.
is 40 feet high and grass covered. Kelp extends 0.2 mile W from     (1311 The tidal currents at Kupreanof Strait have an estimated
the island. Koniuji Island should be given a good berth on the N   velocity of 2 to 3 knots during large tides. At the W end of Kupre-
side as the current sets toward it at times.                       anof Strait near Onion Bay, high and low water occur about the
 (11)  Kupreanof Strait, 1.8 to 3 miles wide, is clear in mid-    same time as at Seldovia. The diurnal range is 14.4 feet. The tides
channel but several shoal spots must be avoided.                   meet in the strait a little W of Dry Spruce Island.
  (119)  Chernof Point, on the S shore of Kupreanof Strait, 5.3     (132) Routes.-Enter Whale Passage on a 262ï¿½ course from
miles W of Ilkognak Rock Light I, is low and wooded but promi-    Kizhuyak Bay, passing S of the buoy off Yuzhni Point and 0.25
nent. A ledge of rock about 150 feet long and 50 feet wide, 0.5    mile N of Ilkognak Rock Light 1. When Ilkognak Rock Light 1
mile W of the point and 0.2 mile offshore, uncovers about 5 feet; it   bears I 180, 0.5 mile, and Inner Point bears 180ï¿½, change course




154                                                  5. KODIAK ISLAND


to 2980. Gori Point open a little S of the S end of Koniuji Island    divide. Laida Rocks are a cluster of bare rocks 350 yards off the
heads S of the 21/2-fathom rock. When Uzkosti Point bears 023ï¿½,    NW end of the cape.
0.3 mile, change course to 3170 until 0.3 mile N of Koniuji Island,  (145)  Viekoda Bay is described later in this chapter.
then change to course 2920 until 0.4 mile off Gori Point where a   (146)  Onion Bay makes into Raspberry Island about 2 miles,
286ï¿½ course. will lead into Shelikof Strait, passing 0.5 mile S of    and from its head a low divide extends through to Shelikof Strait.
Malina Point Light 8. This route passes 0.5 mile N of a buoyed    The entrance is narrow, and just inside, the bay is blocked by
21/2-fathom shoal, 3.9 miles W of Gori Point.                     shoals partly bare at low water, between which are narrow chan-
 (133) Some of the courses are at an angle with the axis of the    nels suitable only for small craft. The tidal currents have an esti-
current; natural ranges should be used to aid in maintaining the    mated velocity of 3 to 5 knots in the entrance. Temporary
courses.                                                          anchorage can be had 0.4 to 0.5 mile off the entrance in 10 to 15
 (134) Dry Spruce Bay, on the N side of Kodiak Island and on    fathoms.
the S side of Kupreanof Strait, may be entered on either side of   (147)  Malina Point Light (58002.3'N., 153ï¿½22.0'W.), 80 feet
Bare Island.                                                      above the water, is shown from a small house with a red and white
 (135)  Approaching Dry Spruce Bay from E, give Dry Spruce    diamond-shaped daymark at the S end of the mountainous head-
Island a berth of 0.8 mile and steer for the W end of Bare Island on    land on the SW partof Raspberry Island. The point itself is pro-
any bearing S of 2260 until past Dry Spruce Island Rock Light 7;    jecting and prominent. It has a grass-covered knoll at its end, with
then haul E and pass midway between Dry Spruce and Bare    a low neck behind it, and then a steep slope to 1,570 feet.
Islands, course about 139ï¿½. This route is contracted to about 400  (148) During NE weather, small craft can find excellent protec-
yards by a low water rock about 200 yards from shore inside the    tion behind Malina Point.
W end of Dry Spruce Island. Shoal water extends from the E end     (149) Raspberry Cape, at the W end of the mountainous head-
of Bare Island.                                                   land on the SW part of Raspberry Island, is steep and high and has
 (136) In approaching Dry Spruce Bay W of Bare Island, care is   areas of bare rock. There are some bare rocks in the water close to
necessary to avoid the foul ground extending over 0.2 mile from    the foot of the cape.
the S shore of Kupreanof Strait, 1.8 miles W of Bare Island.       (150) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as
 (137)  Port Bailey cannery and wharf are on the S shore of Dry    3ï¿½ from normal variation have been observed in Kupreanof Strait
Spruce Bay. The cannery is operated by Columbia-Wards Fisher-    about 0.4 mile S of Raspberry Cape.
ies and manned from about mid-May through August. The can-         (151) Kizhuyak Bay is the continuation of Marmot Bay, and
nery's VHF-FM radio has call sign, KJD-83; the single sideband    from Whale Island and Kizhuyak Point it extends S for about 14
(SSB) radio has call sign, KWC-56. The cannery uses 2450 kHz    miles into Kodiak Island. The outer bay is exposed to NE weather,
SSB and VHF-FM channel 79A as working frequencies. During    and only at or near the head is protection afforded from seas
the open season, the services of a nurse are available and water    sweeping in from Marmot Bay: A landlocked anchorage for small
can be had at the wharf. The cannery has a machine shop and a    vessels is available in Anton Larsen Bay, but local knowledge is
store; emergency supplies of diesel fuel and gasoline are usually    required to navigate its narrow entrance channel. Sharatin Bay,
available. The 150-foot-long wharf has depths of 27 feet along-    another arm, is exposed to seas from the NE.
side. Unlighted mooring dolphins are along the shore SE of the     (152) A midchannel course in Kizhuyak Bay is clear of known
cannery.                                                          dangers; however, a bank of 6 to 9 fathoms, irregular in outline
 (138) Air service is available to and from Kodiak once a week    and rocky in places, extends across the bay, 2 to 3 miles S of Pere-
during the off season and daily except Sunday during the open    grebni Point. A somewhat similar bottom exists between opposite
season.                                                           shores in the locality of the islet, 2.5 miles from the head. A small
 (139) The best anchorage for large vessels is about 0.5 mile E of    rock and a rock awash are 300 yards W of the islet.
Bare Island and 0.4 mile off the cove in Dry Spruce Island, in 16  (153)  Peregrebni Point, on the W side of Kizhuyak Bay, is on a
to 19 fathoms. A small vessel can anchor in the middle of the    wooded peninsula that is backed by Settler Cove. The bottom of
entrance to this cove in about 6 fathoms taking care to keep clear    the cove, favoring the W shore, is sandy, and rises gradually from
of the flat, that extends 250 yards from its NE side, and the    a depth of about 2 fathoms just inside the entrance to the mudflats
unlighted mooring dolphins across the entrance to the cove. With    at the head of the cove.
strong SW winds, some williwaws are felt from Kupreanof Moun-      (154) Port Lions is the name given in 1965 to a settlement near
tain. A midbay rock awash is 0.8 mile from the head of Dry    the head of Settler Cove, created when all the inhabitants of
Spruce Bay.                                                       Afognak moved in and declared it their new home. A good small-
 (140) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-    craft anchorage is 0.5 mile NE of the village. Two breakwaters
sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of    forming a small-boat harbor are about 0.5 mile NE of Port Lions.
Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)                   A light is on the E end of the outer breakwater, and a daybeacon
 (141) The Kodiak Island area is served by the Alaska Marine    marks the E side of the harbor entrance. In June 1992, the control-
Pilots and Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.                   ling depth was 13/4 fathoms in the approach and harbor entrance,
 (142) Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots    except for shoaling to I /2 fathoms just NE and E of the daybeacon
and en route to Port Bailey can meet the pilot boat about 1 mile N  and I /4 fathoms off the end of the outer breakwater. Depths of I /2
of Dry Spruce Bay Entrance Light (57057.3'N., 153006.2'W.).       to 274 fathoms were available along the piers. The small-boat har-
 (143) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "PORT    bor has moorage for about 125 vessels. A graded landing field is
BAILEY PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prear-    here, providing Port Lions with mail service three times weekly
ranged frequency between pilot and agent/vessel.                  from Kodiak. The Alaska State Ferry will make flag stops at Port
 (144)  Outlet Cape is the W end of Kupreanof Peninsula,    Lions.
included between Kupreanof Strait and Viekoda Bay. The cape        (155) Port Wakefield is at the head of Port Wakefield, a cove on
has a steep slope to a peak 1,607 feet high, E of which is a low    the W side of Kizhuyak Bay about 0.7 mile SW of Peregrebni



                                                      5. KODIAK ISLAND                                                       155


Point. A reported shoal, marked by a lighted buoy, is off the    and the shore W of it. A vessel may anchor about 0.3 mile S of the
entrance to Port Wakefield. A causeway across the shallow head of    rock in about 15 fathoms.
Settler Cove connects Port Wakefield with Port Lions.              (168) A road runs from the W  side of Anton Larsen Bay to
 (156) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-    Kodiak. It is closed during the winter.
sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of  (169) Kizhuyak Point marks the outer end of the E side of
Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)                   Kizhuyak Bay. A 21/4-fathom depth in a kelp patch is about 0.8
 (157) The Kodiak Island area is served by the Alaska Marine    mile 210ï¿½ from Kizhuyak Point.
Pilots and Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.                    (170) The broad point 0.8 mile NE of Kizhuyak Point is partly
 (158) Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots    wooded and terminates in white cliffs in places. A rock, which
and en route to Port Wakefield can meet the pilot boat about 1 mile    uncovers about 4 feet, is 400 yards N from this point. Shoal water
NW of Kekur Point (57ï¿½51.5'N., 152047.2'W.).                      extends 300 yards N of the rock.
 (159) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "PORT WAKE-      (171) Between the broad point and Shakmanof Point is Shak-
FIELD PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prear-    manof Cove. A rock, covered 3 feet, is near the center of this
ranged frequency between pilot and agent/vessel,                  cove.
 (160) At Peregrebni Point the bay narrows to a width of 1.5       (172) Shakmanof Point, on the S side of Marmot Bay about 2
miles. The W shore from 1.2 to 4.5 miles S of Peregrebni Point is    miles W of the entrance to Narrow Strait, is prominent and heavily
foul; a rock awash is 2.3 miles S of the point and 0.4 mile from the    wooded. Some rocks awash are close to the point, and it should be
W shore.                                                          given a berth of over 300 yards.
 (161) A flat extends 0.5 mile from the head of Kizhuyak Bay,                   g
                                                                     (173) Shakmanof Point Light (57ï¿½55.5'N., 152ï¿½35.3'W.), 60
where there is a large valley. Vessels may anchor off this flat in 19    feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red
fathoms, mud bottom; the depths are regular and there is ample    and white diamond-shaped daymark.
room.
                                                                    (174) Low Island Anchorage, the cove between Shakmanof
 (162) Kekur Point marks the N end of the E shore of the narrow
                                                                   Point and Low Island, affords anchorage in suitable depths but it is
part of Kizhuyak Bay. A rocky patch of 6 fathoms and probably
par of Kizhuyak Bay.     A 0 froky patch of 6 fathoms and probably    exposed to N weather. N winds in this locality are infrequent.
less depth, is 0.9 mile 0320 from Kekur Point.
 (163) Between Kekur Point and Kizhuyak Point, the W shore of      (175) Three Brothers, 1.2 miles E of Shakmanof Point, is a
 the outer bay is indented by Sharatin Bay andi Anton Larsen Bay  kelp-marked reef 600 yards long and steep-to on its W side. Parts
the outer bay is indented by Sharatin Bay and Anton Larsen Bay.    of the reef uncover about 2 feet. Near its SW end are two rocks
The waters along the intervening shore between the two bayshe reef uncover about 2 feet. Near its SW end are two rocks
from Three Pillar Point to Crag Point, have several submerged       ich uncover about 4 feet, and at its NE end is a       rock which
rocks about 0,3 to 0.4 mile from that shore; and a patch of broken
ground, with a depth of 9 fathoms, is 1 mile offshore in Kizhuyak
Bay. Off Anton Larsen Bay is a kelp patch with a depth of only 3   (176) Low Island, in the middle of the bight on the S shore of
feet, 0.9 mile 006ï¿½ from Crag Point.                              Marmot Bay between Shakmanof Point and the W entrance to
 (164)  Sharatin Bay, E of Kekur Point, has a small grass-cov-    Narrow Strait, is grass covered, and about 40 feet high at its S end.
ered islet near the center of the bay. A rock, covered 3 feet, is 400    Most of the island is wooded.
yards N of the islet. A rock, that uncovers 9 feet, is 300 yards off  (177) Vessels cross the 7-fathom bank or bar about 0.3 mile
the projecting point of the bay shore W of the islet. A rock, cov,-    NNE of Low Island, bound to or from Narrow Strait. A range con-
ered 6 feet, is about 0.5 mile NNW of Three Pillar Point. A tide    sisting of Prokoda Island Light just open on the nearly vertical
flat extends 0.8 mile from the head of the bay.                   bluffs of Ouzinkie Point leads between a red buoy marking a sub-
 (165)  Anton Larsen Bay, between the point 0.9 mile S of    merged rock on the N side of the crossing and a green buoy
Kizhuyak Point and Crag Point, has its entrance nearly blocked by    marking a 3 /2-fathom shoal on the S side of the crossing. A wire
islands; and only small craft can enter. A rock, covered 3 feet and    drag examination along the range reveals a clear depth of 30 feet.
marked by kelp, is about 0.5 mile N of the outer entrance island N  It is required, however, that no deviation from the range be made.
of Crag Point. A reef, bare at minus tides, lies 260 yards 045ï¿½ from    The submerged rock is 800 yards from Low Island and has less
Crag Point. The passage into the bay E of Crag Point and the two    than 14 feet over it. The 3/2-fathom shoal is at the end of a reef
passages at the N entrance are very narrow,                       extending N from Low Island. These dangers are marked by kelp.
 (166) The northernmost passage into Anton Larsen Bay was          (178) The passage S of Low Island is blocked by shoals that bare
used by a survey tender, 77 feet long and drawing 61/2 feet. The    at low tide.
entrance to this passage is between the northernmost island in the  (179) Narrow Strait and Ouzinkie Narrows are described later in
bay entrance and the N point of the bay. About 0.3 mile inside this   this chapter.
entrance and about 130 yards from the mainland is a large rocky    (180) Spruce Island, on the S side of Marmot Bay, is about 6
patch, part of which uncovers. The channel is S of this rocky    miles long in an E and W direction. The island is rugged, with
patch. At the narrowest part of this passage is a small, narrow islet    Mount Herman, 1,595 feet high 2 miles W of East Cape. The
which hugs and parallels the mainland. The survey indicates that    lower elevations are in general heavily wooded, with a low
the channel borders close along the outer side of the narrow islet    wooded area 0.8 to 1 mile wide extending between the E shore of
and makes a slight turn around the W end of the islet. Opposite the    the island and the base of Mount Herman. Grass is quite pro-
W  end of the islet, the SW side of the channel is bordered by    nounced on the higher slopes of Spruce Island. The higher sum-
rocks. Extreme caution and local knowledge are necessary.         mits are barren. The waters adjacent to the N and E shores of the
 (167) Anton Larsen Bay has a 3-mile stretch of water about 0.5    island have not been completely surveyed.
mile wide, extending in a S direction from the N entrance passage.  (181) About 1 mile off the W shore of Spruce Island and approx-
A rock, awash at high tide, is in the middle of this stretch, about I    imately on a line between Three Brothers and Wooded Island are
mile from the entrance passage. The channel is between the rock    two dangers: a kelp-marked shoal with a depth of 2 fathoms is



156                                                  5. KODIAK ISLAND


about 1 mile from Three Brothers, and a rocky islet, 24 feet high,  (195) The W approach to Narrow Strait is S of Three Brothers
is 0.9 mile from Wooded Island.                                   and across the buoyed 7-fathom bank 0.3 mile NNE of Low
 (182) Reefs extend 600 yards off the W shore of Spruce Island,    Island.
0.8 mile N of Ouzinkie Point, described later in this chapter.      (196) The best anchorage in Narrow Strait is in the middle of
 (183) Wooded Island, 174 feet high, is 300 yards off Zapadni    Ouzinkie Harbor between Prokoda Island and Ouzinkie, in 18 to
Point, the promontory on the W side of Spruce Island. It is heavily    20 fathoms, somewhat exposed to an E swell. A small vessel and
wooded. A fair anchorage protected from E winds can be had just    small craft can anchor at the head of Ouzinkie Harbor near
to the S of the island. A 3-fathom shoal is 700 yards 098ï¿½ from the    Ouzinkie, slightly favoring the W side, in 5 to 10 fathoms.
SW end of Wooded Island.                                            (197)  South Point, the E end of Spruce Island, is marked by a
 (184) The Triplets,   2 miles W of North Cape, are a chain of    high black rocky islet about 600 yards off the point. This rocky
three high, grassy islets extending 1 mile in a general N and S    islet is 65 feet high; several lower ones are just to the S and W
direction. The northernmost islet, 275-foot Taliudek Island, is the    thereof.
highest of the group.                                               (198) Two islands are on the N side of Narrow Strait. Eider
 ([85) North Cape, the N headland of Spruce Island, is a    Island, the E one, is very uneven and grassy on top. A small low
wooded knob 551 feet high. Rocky islets and rocks awash at vari-    rocky islet is 400 yards E of the E island, and a rock awash at low
ous stages of the tide fringe the N side of the cape within 400    water is 200 yards S of the E island. Nelson Island, the W one of
yards of the shore. A shoal of 21/4 fathoms is 0.4 mile off the E    the two islands, is higher and wooded. A group of rocks, which
point of the cape.                                                uncover 5 feet, is 350 yards S of Nelson Island and similar rocks
 (186) Island Bay, just S of North Cape and opening to the E, has    are 0.3 to 0.4 mile W of the island.
not been surveyed. It affords fair anchorage for medium-size craft  (199) ThepassagesleadingtothecovebackofNelsonslandare
from W wind. If small craft use the head of the bay, care should be    mainly foul or composed of broken bottom. They should be
taken to pass N of a rock awash at low water about 0.3 mile from    avoided by vessels of any size, except perhaps by small craft with
the head.                                                         local knowledge.
 (187) Knee Bay is the outer portion of the indentation in the N   (200) Sunny Cove, the bight on the N shore of Narrow Strait,
shore of Spruce Island about 2 miles S of North Cape. Balika    2.3 miles NW of South Point, affords anchorage for small craft in
Cove, narrow and about 1 mile long, is the continuation of Knee    3 to 4 fathoms sand bottom. A ledge covered 1 '/ fathoms is 0.3
Bay. The bay and cove have not been surveyed. The first enclosure    mile S from the W point of the entrance to Sunny Cove. Two bare
of Balika Cove affords excellent shelter for small craft, but can be  roks are off the middle of the entrance . A rock awash is 90 yar
                                                                    rocks are off the middle of the entrance. A rock awash is 90 yards
entered only at high tide because of a ledge at the entrance to the    NW from the E point of the entrance. In entering, the W shore of
cove.                                                             Sunny Cove should be favored.
 (188) The N shore of Spruce Island between Knee Bay and East
                                                                     (201) A rocky patch, covered 23/4 fathoms and marked by kelp,
Cape is bordered by rocky islets and rocks awash at various stages  (201) A  rocky patch, covered 23/4        fathoms and mar ked by kelp,
                 of the tide. Some of these are over 0.3 mile offshore  is 0.3 mile from the N shore of Narrow Strait just SE of Black
of the tide. Some of these are over 0.3 mile offshore.            Point.
 (189) East Cape, the NE end of Spruce Island, is a wooded flat
extending about 0.8 mile inland to the base of Mount Herman. A      (202) Prokoda Island, in the middle near the W  end of the
group of bare rocks is within 300 yards E of the cape. Banks with    strait, is 114 feet high and partly wooded. An islet is 100 yards off
depths partly under 10 fathoms extend nearly 2 miles NE of the    its NE end, and kelp extends 100 yards off the islet and the SE side
cape.                                                             of the island.
 (190) A rock awash at low water is about 0.5 mile S of the point  (203) Prokoda Island Light 2 (57054.6'N., 152030.4'W.), 40
of East Cape and 400 yards from the E shore of Spruce Island.     feet above the water, is shown from a small house with a red trian-
 (191) Two wooded islands, forming Ostrof Point, about I mile    gular daymark on the SW point of the island. The light is a guide
S of East Cape, are surrounded and connected to the E shore of    for navigating the passage S of the island.
Spruce Island by a reef. The outer part of this reef terminates in a  (204) The channel N and W of Prokoda Island is 300 yards wide
rock, which uncovers about 2 feet, 300 yards E of the outer island.    and clear, but the turns are sharp and difficult to make when the
Rocks awash at low tide are 0.3 mile NE of the outer island. A    current is running.
rock, which uncovers about 4 feet, is 250 yards S of the outer      (205) Ouzinkie is a small native village at the head of the cove
island.                                                           in Spruce Island N of Prokoda Island. The most conspicuous fea-
 (192) Icon Bay is the small indentation in the E shore of Spruce    tures in the town are the warehouse close to the near shore of the
Island halfway between East Cape and South Point. This bay, as    cove, the Russian Orthodox Church spire, and the boardwalk
well as the adjoining small bays to the S, has not been surveyed. It    which runs around the N side of the cove. Fishing is the principal
is reported that a medium-sized craft may find temporary anchor-    industry in Ouzinkie.
age in W weather. A rock awash baring near low water, is 300        (206) An L-shaped pier, connected to land at both ends, is on the
yards from the head and 150 yards from the N shore of Icon Bay.   W side of the cove and can handle vessels up to 120 feet long and
 (193) Narrow Strait, between Spruce and Kodiak Islands, is    drawing about 15 feet. A grid of sawed-off pilings is along the E
used by vessels bound from Kodiak to Shelikof Strait. It has a    side of this pier; the grid is considered hazardous because of the
clear width of 1 mile at its E end, while at its W end the channel is   steel spikes protruding upward from the piles. A foul area is about
100 to 300 yards wide with a least depth of about 7 fathoms. With    100 feet SW of this pier. A cannery and pier were built over the
E gales a heavy swell sets into the strait, but this generally loses    water on the E side of the cove. The pier can accommodate vessels
much of its force toward the W end.                               80 feet long and drawing 12 feet. A rock, covered 6 feet, is 400
 (194) Ouzinkie Narrows, the narrow passage of Narrow Strait in    feet SSE of the S corner of the pier; the rock is usually marked
the vicinity of Otmeloi Point and Prokoda Island, is described later    with a fishing float. Fuel is available on the W pier. There is sched-
in this chapter.                                                  uled air service between Ouzinkie and points on Kodiak Island.




                                                      5. KODIAK ISLAND                                                       157


Radiotelephone and radiotelegraph communications are main-    consisting of the NE end of Long Island open N of the outer Hanin
tained.                                                           Rocks, clears the rocks off Miller Point.
 (207) In entering Ouzinkie from the E, care should be taken to    (218) Tidal currents in Narrow Strait are weak except in the W
avoid the reef that extends some distance off the SE shore of    entrance where the velocity is about 1.5 knots. The times of the
Prokoda Island. A small general store is in the warehouse at    slacks and strengths may be obtained from the Tidal Current
Ouzinkie.                                                         Tables.
 (208) Ouzinkie Point, SW end of Spruce Island, is the point on
the N side of the W entrance to Narrow Strait. At the point are    (219) Charts 16594, 16593, 16595.-Chiniak Bay, a 13-mile-
cliffs above which a wooded slope rises steeply to a knoll about    wide indentation in the NE coast of Kodiak Island between Spruce
110 feet high. The knoll is connected with the land back of it by a    Cape and Cape Chiniak, is the approach to the important commer-
low, narrow, grass-covered neck.                                  cial port of Kodiak on the N side and a Coast Guard base in Wom-
 (209) Kelp is close to Ouzinkie Point and the point should be    ens Bay on the W side.
given a berth of about 125 yards.                                  (220) Spruce Cape, the NW point of Chiniak Bay and marked
 (210) Entrance Point, on the S side at the W entrance of Nar-    by a light, is a low bluff, grass covered on top and backed by
row Strait, is grassy with some scattered trees, and a rock 12 feet    woods. Bare rocks and foul ground extend 0.6 mile N from the
high is 100 yards off its E side. A kelp-marked shoal, with 7 to 12    cape to Hanin Rocks which are two rocks about 30 feet high with
feet over it, extends 250 yards N from Entrance Point. A rocky    an extensive surrounding ledge. Hanin Rock Light (57ï¿½50.1'N.,
ledge, covered 7 feet and marked at the outer end by a buoy,    152ï¿½18.7'W.), 43 feet above the water, is shown from a white
extends about 325 yards NNE of the point.                         cylindrical house on the SW rock. A reef, mostly bare at low
 (211) Neva Cove, between Entrance Point and Otmeloi Point,    water, extends 250 yards N of Hanin Rocks.
provides good anchorage for medium-size craft from all winds       (221) Williams Reef, 5 miles E from Spruce Cape, is the outer-
except NW, in 13 fathoms, soft bottom.                            most danger in the NE approach to Chiniak Bay. The reef consists
 (212) Mariners using Ouzinkie Narrows, the narrow passage of    of two rocks, 100 yards apart, that uncover at lowest tides; deep
Narrow Strait in the vicinity of Otmeloi Point and Prokoda    water is close-to and breakers generally occur, except near high
Island, should be careful because the currents will set a vessel into    water with a smooth sea. A lighted whistle buoy is NE of Williams
danger rapidly. Depths of 5 fathoms or less extend 200 yards SE of    Reef.
Prokoda Island, and depths of 4 fathoms or less extend 200 yards   (222) A small patch, covered 31/4 fathoms, is 1.7 miles 2850
N from the small mainland point 0.5 mile E from Otmeloi Point.    from Williams Reef.
Between these areas are depths of over 10 fathoms for a width of   (223) Hutchinson Reef, 0.8 mile NE of Spruce Cape, is 0.4 mile
150 yards. The best route through Ouzinkie Narrows from the E is   in extent with a least depth of 13/4 fathoms. A large kelp patch is
midway between the SE point of Prokoda Island and the small    between the reef and Hanin Rocks. A lighted whistle buoy, 0.4
mainland point to the SE, thence proceed at midchannel until    mile NE of Hutchinson Reef, marks the W side of the N approach
abreast of Prokoda Island Light 2. From abreast the light to abreast    to Kodiak.
of Ouzinkie Point, the route is practically a straight course that  (224) Broken ground, 0.9 mile E of Spruce Cape, is covered 41/4
passes between Otmeloi Point and a rock which uncovers about 6    fathoms and marked by a lighted whistle buoy.
feet. The rock, marked by a daybeacon, is about 275 yards N of     (225) On the W side of the channel, 0.4 to 1 mile S of Spruce
Otmeloi Point. The channel between the rock and a shelving spit    Cape, are two bare reefs; the outer edges are about 600 yards from
with kelp that extends 125 yards from Otmeloi Point has a depth    shore. The E edge of the S reef is marked by a lighted buoy. Chan-
of 7 fathoms, and is about 100 yards wide. Vessels usually pass    net Rock, on the S reef, is black, 7 feet high, amid extensive
about 80 yards S of the daybeacon to avoid the shelving spit. Mar-    ledges. Kelp surrounds the reefs and extends SSW of Channel
iners should favor the N half of the passage between Entrance    Rock, gradually trending toward the shore and joining the shore
Point and Ouzinkie Point, so to pass clear of a 2-fathom ledge    kelp. Deep water extends close to the edge of the kelp at 150 yards
which extends 350 yards N of Entrance Point. The ledge is marked    off Channel Rock.
by a buoy.                                                         (226) A rock, covered 11/2 fathoms, is 0.9 mile SE from Spruce
  (213) Course Point, on the S shore of Narrow Strait, about 2    Cape; it is marked by a lighted whistle buoy.
miles E of Otmeloi Point, is prominent and is marked by a small    (227) Woody Island, 2 miles S of Spruce Cape, is about 200
rocky, grass-covered islet, 150 yards from shore.                 feet high and heavily wooded except for a high grass-covered
  (214) A pinnacle rock, 70 feet high, is near the S shore of Nar-    bench at the S end and a small area back of Icehouse Point, the
row Strait about 0.9 mile SSE of Course Point. The cove SE of the    site of an orphanage. The orphanage buildings are conspicuous
pinnacle is foul except for a small area in the center. A 41/4-fathom    from the W. Just N of Icehouse Point is a 200-foot finger pier with
shoal is 400 yards from the S shore near Azimuth Point.           two floats; depths alongside range from 6 to 9 feet. Ruins of an old
  (215) Termination Point is the E limit of the S shore of Narrow    concrete pier are 75 yards NE of the present pier; caution is neces-
Strait. Foul ground extends nearly 0.5 mile N of the point.       sary. An aero radiobeacon is on the SE side of the island.
  (216) Monashka Bay, just E of Termination Point, is clear        (228) Anchorage is prohibited in the area between Woody Island
inside except within 0.3 mile of the shore. Anchorage may be    and the Kodiak shore as shown on chart 16595.
found near the SE part of the head of the bay, but there is full   (229) Foul ground extends 1.3 miles N from the NE side of
exposure to NE weather.                                           Woody Island. A shoal, covered 33/4 fathoms, is 1.5 miles 092ï¿½
  (217)  Miller Point, on the E side of Monashka Bay entrance, is    from Woody Island Light.
partly wooded and terminates in a rocky bluff. High, bare rocks    (230) There are three large white buildings back of Shahafka
extend more than 200 yards off the point, and rocks baring at vari-    Cove on the N shore across the channel from Woody Island.
ous stages of the tide are outside of them. The outermost rock     (231) Woody Island Light (57047.8'N., 152ï¿½20.2'W.), 50 feet
uncovers 9 feet and is 0.6 mile 0400 from Miller Point. The range,    above the water, is shown from a square frame with a red and




158                                                  5. KODIAK ISLAND


white diamond-shaped daymark at the top of the bluff on the W       (242) A well-enclosed bay, making in from the W side of Long
side of the N point of the island. The light marks the E side of the    Island, is accessible to small vessels and affords good shelter and
passage between Woody Island and the mainland. The outer limits    holding ground of mud. An island, just inside the middle of the
of foul ground and kelp surrounding the N part of Woody Island    opening, is connected with the E bay shore by a bar. A black rock,
are 0.4 mile W and 0.6 mile NNE from the light.                   about 6 feet high, is between the island and the S point of the
 (232) A kelp patch of a 4-fathom shoal, marked by a buoy, is    opening. To enter the S part of the bay, steer 179ï¿½ and pass
0.35 mile 255ï¿½ from Woody Island Light. Another kelp patch of a    between the black rock and the S point, slightly favoring the rock
4-fathom shoal, marked by a lighted bell buoy, is 0.7 mile 265ï¿½    and then the W bay shore at the point. Anchor in the center of the
from the light. The recommended channel is between these shoals.    basin. Access to the N part of the bay requires local knowledge.
 (233) The group of islands W of Woody Island is surrounded by     (243) Vasilief Rock, covered /2 fathom and marked by kelp, is
foul ground. Bird Islet, the easternmost of the group, is 68 feet    about halfway between the S point of Woody Island and Refuge
high, small, and grass topped; foul ground and kelp extends 550    Island.
yards N and 350 yards S of the islet. A 21/4-fathom spot is about  (244) Inner Humpback Rock, 0.5 mile 170ï¿½ from the S point
550 yards SSW from the southernmost extremity of Bird Islet.    of Woody Island, is an 11-foot-high pinnacle; the intervening area
Holiday Island, W of Bird Islet, is 131 feet high and wooded on    is foul. Foul ground extends 600 yards SW of Inner Humpback
its N half. Near Island, the largest of the group, is 202 feet high    Rock.
and grass covered.                                                  (245) A detached rocky patch, covered 3 fathoms and marked
 (234) The area between the N side of Near Island and the    off its SW side by a lighted buoy, is 0.6 mile W from the S end of
Kodiak shore is shoal and mostly foul, except for the 200-foot-    Woody Island.
wide dredged channel at the E approach to Kodiak. Cyane Rock,      (246) A rock that uncovers is 0.4 mile SW of Icehouse Point. A
350 yards NE of Near Island, is awash at lowest tides; a lighted    shoal, covered 31/2 fathoms, is 600 yards 348ï¿½ from the point. A
bell buoy marks the rock. The NE entrance to the dredged channel    rock that uncovers is between the 3/2-fathom shoal and Bird Islet.
is between the buoy marking Cyane Rock and the foul ground    The channel W of Woody Island is marked by buoys.
which extends nearly 200 yards from the bight NW of the rock.      (247) St. Paul Harbor, the W part of Chiniak Bay between
 (235) Long Island, the easternmost island in the N end of Chin-    Crooked Island on the N and Cliff Point on the S, is fronted with
iak Bay, is 3.5 miles long, 251 feet high, hilly, with cliffs at the    many reefs and islets, but affords a S passage to Kodiak.
water, and wooded except toward its N end. The NE end of the        (248) St. Paul Harbor Entrance Light (57044.3'N.,
island is formed by two grass-covered knolls, the E one is joined    152025.8'W.), 38 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton
to the other by a narrow neck almost covered at high tide. The NW  tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark, 0.9 mile
corner of the island is a prominent vertical bluff more than 100    NNE of Cliff Point. A buoyed channel through the reefs is 500
feet high, rising to a grass-covered knoll 178 feet high. Two prom-    yards N of the light. A lighted whistle buoy marks the approach to
inent pinnacles, 50 feet high, with lower bare rocks nearby, are off   the channel.
the N extremity of the island.                                      (249) A 31/2-fathom spot and a 41/2-fathom spot are about 600
 (236) Kodiak Rock, covered 3/4 fathom, is about halfway    yards W, and 900 yards SSW, respectively, from the light.
between Long Island and Williams Reef. Extensive reefs, partly      (250) Puffin Island, near the center of St. Paul Harbor, is 80 feet
marked by kelp and having some high bare heads, extend 0.6 to    high, small, and grass covered. The end of the foul ground,
0.9 mile N from the N shore of Long Island. Shoal spots are    extending 600 yards SW from the island, is marked by a lighted
between the end of these reefs and Kodiak Rock. Shoal rocky    bell buoy. A 41/2-fathom spot, marked on its SE side by a lighted
spots, covered 33/4 to 8 fathoms, extend 1.8 miles E of Kodiak    buoy, is about 0.38 mile W of Puffin Island.
Rock; a rock, covered 21/2 fathoms, is 1.6 miles W of Kodiak        (251) A 4-fathom spot and an obstruction, covered 6 fathoms,
Rock.                                                             are 175 and 475 yards NW, respectively, from the NW extremity
 (237) The SE side of Long Island is fringed with rocks and kelp;    of Puffin Island.
detached dangers are 0.3 to 0.5 mile from the shore. Refuge         (252) The W part of St. Paul Harbor is bordered by dangerous
Island, a small, steep, grass-covered rocky islet, 80 feet high, con-    reefs and shoals up to 0.6 mile offshore.
nected with Long Island by a reef, is off the S extremity of Long  (253) Gull Island, 0.5 mile W of Near Island, is 24 feet high and
Island.                                                           narrow. A shoal extending 350 yards SW from the S point of the
 (238) An extensive covered ridge with extremely broken bottom    island is marked at the W extremity by a lighted buoy. The foul
extends NNE for 10 miles from the S side of Chiniak Bay. A dis-    ground N of the island is marked by a lighted buoy about 260
tinctive submarine valley borders the W side of the ridge; its sea-    yards off the N point. More foul ground, marked by a buoy at the
ward outlet leads around the N end of the ridge, while the S part    outer extremity, extends about 300 yards SE of the island.
leads into Kalsin Bay. The valley forms a deep basin S of Long     (254) Kodiak is the fifth largest and one of the oldest towns in
Island.                                                           Alaska; the domes of the old Russian church are conspicuous.
 (239) The outermost danger on the ridge is a rock, covered 414    Most of the people are employed in the fishing industry.
fathoms, 4.2 miles E from Refuge Island, which breaks in a heavy   (255) Weather.-Kodiak has primarily a marine climate that is
swell.                                                            exemplified by the limited daily and annual temperature ranges.
 (240) Humpback Rock, 2.8 miles SE from Refuge Island, is    For instance, the mean annual temperature range is about 25ï¿½F.
low and of small extent. Vessels should pass not less than I mile N  The normal monthly temperature is less than 320F for December
of the rock to avoid the broken ground; a lighted whistle buoy is   through February, and 50ï¿½F or higher, July through September.
0.6 mile NE of the rock.                                          During the summer, the mean air temperature closely approxi-
 (241) Numerous reefs comprise the ridge from Humpback Rock    mates the mean sea surface temperature, rising slightly above it
to the S shore. Kalsin Reef, 1.8 miles SW from Humpback Rock,    during August but falling below again in September. In winter, the
is awash at high water.                                           mean maximum air temperature more closely resembles the mean



                                                     5. KODIAK ISLAND                                                      159


sea surface temperature curve. Because of the proximity of a large    W of Woody Island, and N of Near Island; controlling depth,
landmass to Kodiak, the absolute temperature range is 98ï¿½F    about 22 feet; or S of Long Island, SW of Puffin Island, and thence
regardless of the marine influence. Records show a low of -12ï¿½F    in St: Paul Harbor W of Gull Island; the controlling depth is 29
in February 1971, and a high of 86ï¿½F in June 1953. In summer,    feet.
maximum temperatures will vary 10ï¿½ to 20ï¿½F, depending on          (264) Anchorages.-Inner Anchorage, locally known as Winter
whether the NW gradient is strong enough to maintain a flow of    Anchorage, is 0.4 mile W  of Kodiak, 250 to 300 yards off the
air from over the island, or whether it is weak enough that the sea    Kodiak Island shore. In May 1985, the City of Kodiak declared
breeze predominates. The highest daily maximum temperatures    that vessels do not anchor within this area due to possible fouling
occur with NW winds in summer.                                   and damage to the waste water discharge lines of the canneries in
 (256) Precipitation is normally abundant.throughout the year.    the-vicinity. (Kodiak City Ordinance No. 653, ï¿½18.28.190(g)
Maximums normally occur in September and October with March    applies.) The mooring buoy in the anchorage, still in use, has
and July the driest months. All months, however, have a wide vari-    capacity for mooring large vessels. Other vessels may anchor just
ation in the amount of precipitation. The normal annual precipita-    outside the Inner Anchorage, location depending on weather con-
tion is over 56 inches but ranges from about 40 to 80 inches. A    ditions and vessel size; however, never anchor in or near the cable
very high percentage of the precipitation falls during NE to SE    areacrossing the narrow passage between Near Island and
winds. Small amounts of snow may fall as late as May or as early    Kodiak. Anchoring information is available from the harbormas-
as September with good ground cover anticipated in November.    ter who monitors 4125 kHz and VHF-FM channels 12, 14, and
The mean annual snowfall is about 90 inches with extremes of    16.
178.1 inches in 1956 and 15.9 inches in 1945. Precipitation mea-  (265) A fixed highway bridge with a clearance of 101 feet
surement is often difficult due to strong, gusty surface winds    crosses Kodiak Harbor, connecting Kodiak and Near Island.
which frequently accompany precipitation. Drifting and blowing    (266) Dangers.-Chiniak Bay and approaches are full of dangers
snow occasionally close the airfield for periods of up to twenty-    that must be avoided.
four hours.
                                                                    (267) The March 1964 earthquake caused a bottom subsid-
 (257) Although the prevailing wind direction is NW every
month except May, June and July, and the average speed is about    the area, caution is necessary because depths may vary from
10 knots, these data may be misleading because of the extreme    those charted and mentioned in the Coast Pilot.
variability in both direction and speed. The maximum gust
recorded at the station was 99 knots in January 1950. However,    (268). Routes.From Northward: In coming from Narrow Strait,
Coast Guard cutters docked in Womens Bay, have reported willi-    pass  mile N of Hanin Rock Light, thence E of Hutchinson Reef
waw winds off Old Womens Mountain in excess of 120 knots, in    Lighted Whistle Buoy 4, and then follow the buoyed channel N of
January 1973. Gusts of over 50 knots have occurred during each    Woody and Near Islands to Kodiak Harbor. From Marmot Strait, a
month of the year, but are most likely to occur in the winter    206 course will enter Chinak Bay E of Hutchinson Reef Lighted
months. An average of eight storms each year brings winds -in   Whistle Buoy 4, then follow the buoyed channel to Kodiak Har-
excess of 55 knots with the average duration of gusts in excess of    bor The routes from N pass over or near a 52-fathom spot NE of
                 55 knots about eight hours per storm.           Spruce Cape which has not been examined with the wire drag.
55 knots about eight hours per storm.
 (258) Prominent features.-The N part of Kodiak Island W of       (269) From Northeastward: Keep N of the line to Spruce Island
Chiniak Bay is mountainous; there are several prominent peaks    summit bearing 2940 until the cliffs near the SW end of Long
near the shore. Spruce Cape, Cape Chiniak, and the islands over-    Island are well open W of the sheer cliff at its NW corner. Then
spreading the N part of the bay are comparatively low.           steer 2410 for about 4 miles with Barometer Mountain ahead and
 (259) Devils Prongs, 2 miles NW of Kodiak, are three promi-    Spruce Cape slightly to the right. This course passes E of Hutchin-
nent peaks that appear nearly equal in height approaching from    son Reef Lighted Whistle Buoy 4, thence through the buoyed
SE; the middle one is flat on top and the N prong is 2,075 feet high    channel to Kodiak Harbor
and sharp.                                                        (270) The N approach to Kodiak Harbor is not difficult in clear
 (260) Pillar Mountain, a short 1,274-foot ridge, rises steeply    weather, but is dangerous at night or in thick weather. Exercise
from the shore back of Kodiak.                                   care to avoid Williams Reef and the other dangers in the entrance.
 (261) Barometer Mountain, 5 miles SW of Kodiak and 2 miles    Depths are irregular in the approach so that surroundings cannot
inland from the W shore of Chiniak Bay, is 2,488 feet high and a    be relied upon as a guide to the entrance or to avoid danger.
useful guide in clear weather for the N approach. A notch shows   (271) The narrow passage N of Near Island leading to Kodiak
the W  side of its summit from N. An aerolight, 1.5 miles E of    Harbor requires careful piloting: strangers should not attempt it
Barometer Mountain, is 178 feet above the water and useful in the    without thorough knowledge of the dangers, and tide and current
approach to Chiniak Bay when it is not obscured by the islands to   conditions.
the NE and the mainland to the S.                                 (272) From Eastward and Southward: Enter Chiniak Bay N of
  (262) The gantry crane at the Container Terminal, 1 mile WSW   Humpback Rock Lighted Whistle Buoy 1, then follow the buoyed
of Kodiak, and the landslide just NE of the terminal are prominent    channel through the reefs N of St. Paul Harbor Entrance Light and
when approaching Kodiak from the S.                             St. Paul Harbor to Kodiak Harbor. If it is desired to approach
  (263) Channels.-There are three marked approaches to the    Kodiak Harbor through the narrows N of Near Island, use the
wharves in Kodiak Harbor. From N, the channel is N of Woody    buoyed channel W of Woody Island after entering Chiniak Bay N
Island and Near Island. In June 1992, the controlling depth was    of Humpback Rock. Exercise caution to avoid Inner Humpback
22 feet, except for shoaling to 18 feet along the S channel edge in    Rock and the dangers SW of it.
the vicinity of the fixed highway bridge, in the 200-foot-wide    (273) In approaching Chiniak Bay, the bank with a least depth of
dredged feet (22 feet at midchannel) in the 200-foot-wide dredged    41/4 fathoms, 3.5 miles SE of Long Island, and the reefs extending
channel N of Near Island. From S, the channel is S of Long Island,    from Humpback Rock SW to the mainland should be avoided.











































C



ci,




                                                     5. KODIAK ISLAND                                                      159


sea surface temperature curve. Because of the proximity of a large    W of Woody Island, and N of Near Island; controlling depth,
landmass to Kodiak, the absolute temperature range is 980F    about 22 feet; or S of Long Island, SW of Puffin Island, and thence
regardless of the marine influence. Records show a low of -120F    in St. Paul Harbor W of Gull Island; the controlling depth is 29
in February 1971, and a high of 86ï¿½F in June 1953. In summer,    feet.
maximum temperatures will vary 10ï¿½ to 200F, depending on          (264) Anchorages.-Inner Anchorage, locally known as Winter
whether the NW gradient is strong enough to maintain a flow of    Anchorage, is 0.4 mile W of Kodiak, 250 to 300 yards off the
air from over the island, or whether it is weak enough that the sea    Kodiak Island shore. In May 1985, the City of Kodiak declared
breeze predominates. The highest daily maximum temperatures    that vessels do not anchor within this area due to possible fouling
occur with NW winds in summer.                                   and damage to the waste water discharge lines of the canneries in
 (256) Precipitation is normally abundant throughout the year.    the'vicinity. (Kodiak City Ordinance No. 653, ï¿½ 18.28.190(g)
Maximums normally occur in September and October with March    applies.) The mooring buoy in the anchorage, still in use, has
and July the driest months. All months, however, have a wide vari-    capacity for mooring large vessels. Other vessels may anchor just
ation in the amount of precipitation. The normal annual precipita-    outside the Inner Anchorage, location depending on weather con-
tion is over 56 inches but ranges from about 40 to 80 inches. A  ditions and vessel size; however, never anchor in or near the cable
very high percentage of the precipitation falls during NE to SE    area crossing the narrow passage between Near Island and
winds. Small amounts of snow may fall as late as May or as early    Kodiak. Anchoring information is available from the harbormas-
as September with good ground cover anticipated in November.    ter who monitors 4125 kHz and VHF-FM channels 12, 14, and
The mean annual snowfall is about 90 inches with extremes of    16.
178.1 inches in 1956 and 15.9 inches in 1945. Precipitation mea-  (265) A fixed highway bridge with a clearance of 101 feet
surement is often difficult due to strong, gusty surface winds    crosses Kodiak Harbor, connecting Kodiak and Near Island.
which frequently accompany precipitation. Drifting and blowing    (266) Dangers.-Chiniak Bay and approaches are full of dangers
snow occasionally close the airfield for periods of up to twenty-    that must be avoided.
four hours.
                                                                   (267) The March 1964 earthquake caused a bottom subsid-
 (257) Although the prevailing wind direction is NW every    ence of 5.8 feet at Kodiak. Until a complete survey is made of
month except May, June and July, and the average speed is about    the area, caution is necessary bs may vary from
                                                                  the area, caution is necessary because depths may vary from
10 knots, these data may be misleading because of the extreme
                                                                  those charted and mentioned in the Coast Pilot.
variability in both direction and speed. The maximum gust
                                                                   (268)  Routes.-From Northward: In coming from Narrow Strait,
recorded at the station was 99 knots in January 1950. However,
Coast Guard cutters docked in Womens Bay, have reported willi-    pass 1 mile N of Hanin Rock Light, thence E of Hutchinson Reef
waw winds off Old Womens Mountain in excess of 120 knots, in    Lighted Whistle Buoy 4, and then follow the buoyed channel N of
                                                                  Woody, and Near Islands to Kodiak Harbor. From Marmot Strait, a
January 1973. Gusts of over 50 knots have occurred during each
month of the year, but are most likely to occur in the winter    206 course willenter Chinak Bay E of Hutchinson Reef Lighted
months. An average of eight storms each year brings winds in    Whistle Buoy 4, then follow the buoyed channel to Kodiak Har-
                                                                  bor. The routes from N pass over or near a 5 l/2-fathom spot NE of
excess of 55 knots with the average duration of gusts in excess of
                                                                  Spruce Cape which has not been examined with the wire drag.
55 knots about eight hours per storm.
 (258) Prominent features.-The N part of Kodiak Island W of       (269) From Northeastward: Keep N of the line to Spruce Island
Chiniak Bay is mountainous; there are several prominent peaks    summit bearing 2940 until the cliffs near the SW end of Long
near the shore. Spruce Cape, Cape Chiniak, and the islands over-    Island are well open W of the sheer cliff at its NW corner. Then
spreading the N part of the bay are comparatively low.           steer 2410 for about 4 miles with Barometer Mountain ahead and
 (259) Devils Prongs, 2 miles NW of Kodiak, are three promi-    Spruce Cape slightly to the right. This course passes E of Hutchin-
nent peaks that appear nearly equal in height approaching from    son Reef Lighted Whistle Buoy 4, thence through the buoyed
                                                                  channel to 'Kodiak Harbor.
SE; the middle one is flat on top and the N prong is 2,075 feet high
and sharp.                                                        (270)' The N approach to Kodiak Harbor is not difficult in clear
 (260) Pillar Mountain, a short 1,274-foot ridge, rises steeply    weather, but is dangerous at night or in thick weather. Exercise
from the shore back of Kodiak.                                   care to avoid Williams Reef and the other dangers in the entrance.
 (261) Barometer Mountain, 5 miles SW of Kodiak and 2 miles    Depths are irregular in the approach so that surroundings cannot
inland from the W shore of Chiniak Bay, is 2,488 feet high and a    be elied upon as a guide to the entrance or to avoid danger.
useful guide in clear weather for the N approach. A notch shows   (271) The narrow passage N of Near Island leading to Kodiak
the W side of its summit from N. An aerolight, 1.5 miles E of    Harbor requires careful piloting: strangers should not attempt it
Barometer Mountain, is 178 feet above the water and useful in the    without thorough knowledge of the dangers, and tide and current
approach to Chiniak Bay when it is not obscured by the islands to    conditions.
the NE and the mainland to the S.                                 (272) From Eastward and Southward: Enter Chiniak Bay N of
 (262) The gantry crane at the Container Terminal, I mile WSW   Humpback Rock Lighted Whistle Buoy I, then follow the buoyed
of Kodiak, and the landslide just NE of the terminal are prominent    channel through the reefs N of St. Paul Harbor Entrance Light and
when approaching Kodiak from the S.                              St. Paul Harbor to Kodiak Harbor. If it is desired to approach
 (263) Channels.-There are three marked approaches to the    Kodiak Harbor through the narrows N of Near Island, use the
wharves in Kodiak Harbor. From N, the channel is N of Woody    buoyed channel W of Woody Island after entering Chiniak Bay N
Island and Near Island. In June 1992, the controlling depth was    of Humpback Rock. Exercise caution to avoid Inner Humpback
22 feet, except for shoaling to 18 feet along the S channel edge in    Rock and the dangers SW of it.
the vicinity of the fixed highway bridge, in the 200-foot-wide    (273) In approaching Chiniak Bay, the bank with a least depth of
dredged feet (22 feet at midchannel) in the 200-foot-wide dredged    41/4 fathoms, 3.5 miles SE of Long Island, and the reefs extending
channel N of Near Island. From S, the channel is S of Long Island,    from Humpback Rock SW to the mainland should be avoided.











































0


0


C,)



162                                                   5. KODIAK ISLAND


 (274) Tides and currents.-The diurnal range of tide at Kodiak      (291) Kodiak Small-Boat Harbor, just SW of downtown
is 8.5 feet. Daily predictions for Kodiak are given in the Tide    Kodiak, is protected by two breakwaters. A light marks the outer
Tables.                                                            end of the W breakwater. In 1975, depths of 8 to 12 feet were
 (275) In Chiniak Bay, the flood current sets NE and the ebb cur-    available in the basin. In April 1981, a submerged rock was
rent SW with considerable velocity in places around the islands. In    reported in the entrance in the vicinity of Kodiak Boat Harbor
the N entrance, the tidal currents have a velocity of 2 to 3 knots    Daybeacon 2; caution should be used in the area. The basin has
during the strength of the larger tides. They turn sharply around    150 commercial berths, 66 berths for pleasure boats and skiffs,
Spruce Cape and across the reefs N of it.                          and 587 feet of transient space; contact the harbormaster for ber-
 (276) In the narrows off Kodiak, the current velocity is about 0.9    thing assignments. Electricity and water are available on the floats.
knot. The flood sets NE. (See the Tidal Current Tables for predic-    Two loading wharves, two boat grids, and a launching ramp are
tions.)                                                            available. A seaplane float is just outside the basin. The basin is
 (277) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-    owned by the State and operated by the City.
sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of   (292) Star of Kodiak Wharf: E of the small-boat harbor; 200 feet
Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)                    of berthing space; 30 feet alongside; deck height, 20 feet; receipt
 (278) The Kodiak Island area is served by the Alaska Marine    of seafood; owned and operated by All Alaskan Seafoods, Inc.
Pilots and Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.                     (293) The STAR OF KODIAK, a grounded 440-foot ship, is
 (279)  Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots    used as a seafood processing plant and cannery.
and en route to Kodiak or Women's Bay can meet the pilot boat       (294)  Alaska State Ferry Terminal, City Pier No. 1: a wharf just
about 2 miles 100ï¿½ from St. Paul Harbor Entrance Light    NE of the STAR OF KODIAK; 204-foot face; 28 feet alongside;
(57044.3'N., 152025.8'W.).                                         deck height, 19 feet; landing for passenger and vehicular ferry;
 (28o) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "KODIAK         receipt of petroleum products; bunkering vessels; pipelines extend
PILOT BOAT" or "KODIAK KING" on VHF-FM channel 16 or    from wharf to storage tanks in rear, total capacity 41,700 barrels;
on a prearranged frequency between pilot and agentivessel.         owned by the City of Kodiak and operated by the State and Chev-
 (28!)  Quarantine, customs, immigration, and agriculture    ron, U.S.A. Inc
quarantine.-(See chapter 3, Vessel Arrival Inspection, and          (295) Vessels moored at the Ferry Terminal must be attended by
                                                         appendix for addresses.)  a crew member at all times and be capable of moving on notice.
appendix for addresses.)
                                                                   No vessel may moor at the wharf when the amber light on top of
 (282) Quarantine is enforced in accordance with regulations of
the U.S. Public Health Service. (See Public Health Service, chap-                   dig 
                   ter,~~~~~~ 1.)\~~~ '(296) City of Kodiak, Transient Float: 200 yards E of the Ferry
                                                                   Terminal; 425 feet of berthing space on each side; 28 to 30 feet
  s283) Cus toms.-Kodiak i s a customs station.                    alongside; deck height, 1/2 feet; mooring transient vessels; owned
 (284) Kodiak Coast Guard Support Center is in Womens             by the State and operated by the City of Kodiak.
Bay, 5 miles SW of Kodiak. It is described later in this chapter.   (297) Berthing assignments at the transient float are made by the
Kodiak Coast Guard Air Station is at the Support Center.           harbormaster; his office is on the NE side of the small-boat harbor.
 (2s5) Wharves.-The waterfront facilities at Kodiak consist of      (298) There are more private commercial wharves NE of the
three deep-draft municipal wharves, administered by a Port Direc-    transient float for a distance of about 500 yards.
tor; a small-boat harbor, administered by a harbormaster; and       (299) A small-boat harbor, protected on its SW side by a floating
many private wharves used mostly by the fishing industry.          breakwater, is at the head of St. Herman Bay between Uski
 (286)  Kodiak City Pier 3, Container Terminal (57ï¿½46'55"N.,    Island and Near Island. The outer end of the breakwater is
152ï¿½26'00"W.): a wharf I mile SW of Kodiak; 360-foot face, 660    marked by a light. Construction of new breakwaters W  of the
feet of berthing space with dolphins; 38 feet alongside; deck    floating breakwater was underway and partially completed in
height, 19 feet; one 271/-ton gantry crane; receipt and shipment of    1993, with work expected to continue into 1995. The completed
containerized general cargo; storage space for 180 containers;    work is all underwater. Depths of about 14 feet were reported over
owned by the City of Kodiak and operated by Sealand Service,    the underwater construction area and lighted buoys have been set
Inc.                                                               to mark the ends. Caution is advised.
 (287) There is a heavy surge at the Container Terminal during      (300) The National Marine Fisheries has a pier and New
and after SW through SE gales.                                     England Fish Co. has a wharf in Gibson Cove, 1.3 miles SW of
 (288)  Kodiak City Pier 2, Cargo Terminal: a wharf 0.4 mile NE   Kodiak. There is a heavy surge in the cove during NE through SE
of the Container Terminal; 925-foot face; 38 feet alongside; deck    gales. The entrance to the cove is foul, with rocks on either side,
height, 19 feet; receipt of conventional and containerized general    and an obstruction is 0.15 mile E of the entrance in 57046'41.5"N.,
cargo; storage for 170 containers; owned by the City of Kodiak     152026'17.0"W.
and operated by Alaska Terminal & Stevedoring Co., Inc.; the Port   (301) Supplies.-Marine supplies and provisions are available in
Director's office is on this wharf.                                limited quantities. Water, gasoline, and diesel fuel are available at
 (289)  Union Oil Pier: a T-pier just NE of the Kodiak City Pier 2,    the Union Oil Pier and the Standard Oil facility at the Ferry Termi-
Cargo Terminal; 125-foot face, 180 feet total berthing space; 35    nal.
feet alongside; deck heights, 18 feet; receipt of petroleum prod-   (302) Repairs.-General repairs can be made by local machine,
ucts; bunkering vessels; 30-foot floating pier adjacent; gasoline,    electronic, and welding shops.
diesel fuel, and water are available; pipelines extend from wharf to  (303) Communications.-Freight vessels call weekly. Alaska
storage tanks in rear, total capacity 35,700 barrels; owned by    Marine Highway System has ferry service to Seward, Seldovia,
Union Oil Co. of Calif. and operated by Kodiak Oil Sales, Inc.     Homer, Dutch Harbor, and connecting ports. Air transportation is
 (290) There are many cannery wharves from the Union Oil Pier    available daily to Anchorage and bi-weekly to Seattle from
NE to the small-boat harbor.                                       Kodiak Airport, which is 5 miles SW of town.




                                                      5. KODIAK ISLAND                                                         163


 (304) Telephone; radiotelephone, and radiotelegraph communi-        (316)  Permission will not be granted for large vessels to navi-
cations are maintained.                                             gate the channel to or from Womens Bay and between the shoal
                                                                   waters of St. Paul Harbor entrance after dark or during low visibil-
 (305) Chart 16596.-Womens Bay, SW of St. Paul Harbor at the    ity unless a qualified pilot is on board or the master assumes full
extreme W end of Chiniak Bay, is the site of the Coast Guard Sup-    risk. Nor will vessels, except at the master's risk, enter or depart
port Center, Kodiak.                                                from Womens Bay and between the shoal waters of St. Paul Har-
 (306)  Prior to entering into the channel to Womens Bay, the    bor during periods of wind velocities of 35 knots or more, except
master of the vessel must first obtain channel clearance permission    in emergencies or extreme necessity, and then only by authoriza-
from the Port Services Officer, Coast Guard Support Center,    tion of the Commanding Officer, Coast Guard Support Center,
Kodiak, via 2182 kHz or 156.80 MHz.                                 Kodiak.
 (3i07)  Naval Defensive Sea Area and Airspace Reservation.-        (317) Wharves.-The Coast Guard's waterfront facilities are in
Under the authority of Executive Orders 8717 of March 22, 1941,    Womens Bay on the NW side of Nyman Peninsula. They consist
8597 of November 18, 1940, and 9720 of May 8, 1946, the area in    of three deep-draft wharves. The Coast Guard facilities are used
and about Womens Bay is a designated Naval Defensive Sea Area    only by U.S. Government vessels and commercial vessels han-
and Airspace Reservation. Restrictions imposed under the author-    dling military cargoes. Mooring spaces are assigned by the Port
ity of the above executive orders have been suspended subject to    Services Officer, Coast Guard Support Center, Kodiak.
reinstatement without notice at any time that the interests of       (318)  Coast Guard Marginal Wharf (57'43.4'N., 152031.3'W.):
national defense may require such action.                           1,680-foot face; 27 to 39 feet alongside; deck height, 10 feet;
                                                                   (awash up to 1 foot at extreme high water); water and electricity
                                                                   are available; docking of U.S. Government vessels. This wharf is
numerous and extensive rocks and reefs; some are awash at
                                                                   in poor repair and submerged broken fender pilings are at the face
extreme low water while others are up to 6 feet high. A 400-foot-r and submerged broken fender pilings are at the face
wide buoyed channel passes through this foul area NW of Zaimka       f the wharf.
Island to deeper water inside. The channel is marked by buoys         319  Coast Guard Fuel Pier: 250 yards NNE of the Coast Guard
and a 211.10 lighted range. The controlling depth to the wharves    Marginal Wharf; 570 feet long; 29 to 34 feet reported alongside;
is about 29 feet.                                                   deck height, 18 feet; water, electricity, and fuel for government
                                                                   vessels are available.
 (309) In the winter, buoys are often moved off station due to ice    vessels ard Cargo Wharf: 500 yards NNE of the Coast
floes.    -(320)  Coast Guard Cargo Wharf: 500 yards NNE of the Coast
floes.
                                                                   Guard Fuel Pier; 1,015-foot face; 33 feet reported alongside; deck
 (310)  Cliff Point, on the S side of the entrance to Womens Bay,    height, 18 feet; water and electricity are available; receipt of mili-
is the end of a prominent 192-foot-high headland that is covered    tary cargo.
with grass and scattered brush; two prominent pinnacle rocks are     (321) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as
among the reefs E of the point. Broken ground and rocks extend    20ï¿½ to 400 from the normal variation have been observed just off
about 0.5 mile NE of the point. Cliff Island, 0.3 mile N of Cliff    the Coast GuardCargo Wharf.
Point, is small and 62 feet high with steep cliffs on all but the SE
side; pinnacle rocks are on the NE and S sides.
                                                                     (322)  Chart 16593.-Middle Bay, between Cliff Point and
 (311)  Zaimka Island, the largest of the islands at the entrance to    Broad Point, is exposed to NE weather. Viesoki Island, near
Womens Bay, is 151 feet high, bordered with cliffs, and covered    midentrance, is 101 feet high, small, and flat topped with sheer
with bushes and grass. Blodgett Island, 0.7 mile SW of Zaimka    rock bluffs. A rock that uncovers is 0.4 mile NE from the island.
Island, is 70 feet high.                                             (323) Broad Point is the end of a long peninsula separating
 (312) Nyman Peninsula, on the W side of the entrance to Wom-      Middle Bay from Kalsin Bay. Broken ground with some dangers
ens Bay, forms a protected inner bay. Nyman Spit, a submerged    extends I mile N from the point.
sandspit, extends about 800 yards SE from the S end of the penin-    (324) Kalsin Bay, the largest indentation in the SW side of
sula; a lighted buoy marks its outer end.                           Chiniak Bay, provides anchorage for large and small vessels. The
 (313) Tides and currents.-The diurnal range of tide in Womens     low valley between Kalsin Bay and Ugak Bay, 9 miles SW, is used
Bay is 8.8 feet.                                                    as a portage.
 (314) In the outer part of Womens Bay, the currents follow the      (325) Queer Island, Kalsin Island, and other small islands in
general direction of the channel, flowing SW on the flood and NE    the W part of the entrance to Kalsin Bay, are surrounded by foul
on the ebb with a velocity of about I knot. An eddy has been    ground. A large expanse of reefs and small islands overspreads the
reported N of Blodgett Island which will set a vessel to the S at the    E part of the bay.
strength of an ebb current; this should be guarded against. Also,    (326) The foul ground can be avoided by entering Kalsin Bay
the ebb current flows NE across Nyman Spit. Ships passing near    0.8 mile SE of Queer Island, then favoring the W shore. The rec-
the spit at such a time might experience a set onto it. There are    ommended anchorage is 2 miles from the head about 0.5 mile off
marked eddies near Frye Point at the W  end of Womens Bay.    the E shore in 9 to 10 fathoms; this anchorage may be untenable
Although deep water is close to this point, ships should guard    during a NE storm. Caution is necessary to avoid the rock that
against passing too close to it.                                    uncovers 9 feet on the W side of the bay and the rock that uncov-
 (315)  Routes.-Vessels entering Womens Bay, may approach    ers 4 feet on the E side of the bay.
from NE through the channel W  of Woody Island, thence through       (327) A well defined channel along the E shore of Kalsin Bay
the buoyed channel N of St. Paul Harbor Entrance Light, and then    leads to a V-shaped cove SE of Svitlak Island, where excellent
follow the marked channel SW into Womens Bay. From E and S,    anchorage for small vessels is afforded in any weather.
the approach is the same as that for thewS approach to Kodiak until  (328) Routes.-To reach the V-shaped cove SE of Svitlak Island
St. Paul Harbor Entrance Light is passed, then the buoyed channel    from a position 1.2 miles 000ï¿½ from Cape Chiniak Light, steer
should be followed to Womens Bay.                                   267ï¿½, heading for Kekur Island with Middle Island summit on




164                                                 5. KODIAK ISLAND


range, until the sharp point on the W end of Isthmus Bay bears    face of the cape is an abrupt grass-topped cliff, 165 feet high and
1910. Then turn left to course 2400 and head for the large square    1.1 miles long.
rock S of Svitlak Island until abeam of the N end of Svitlak Island,  (339) Ugak Island, 2.5 miles off Narrow Cape, is discernible
then turn left to 2200 and head for the point at the S entrance of the    against the distant background of higher mountains from well out
cove until the large square rock bears four points on the starboard    to sea. A ridge over 1,000 feet high runs the full length of the
bow. Then steer 1800 and anchor in 61/2 to 7 fathoms 400 yards off   island close to the offshore side. The shore is steep and rocky and
the S shore. To go farther into the cove requires local knowledge.    fringed with rocks and reefs, except at the NW end where a grassy
The channel abreast Svitlak Island is narrow with shoal water on    slope spotted with a few scattered spruces descends gradually to a
both sides; caution should be exercised to avoid depths of less    sandspit.
than 10 fathoms. The shoal water on the E side of the channel is  (340) In February 1984, a submerged obstruction was reported
extensive and surrounds the point forming the N limit ofthecove.  about 1.2 miles S of Ugak Island in about 57ï¿½20'51"N.,
 (329) Isthmus Bay, just E of Kalsin Bay, affords anchorage for    152016'39"W.
vessels in S weather. The range of Kekur Island and the summit of  (341) A rock and sandbar extends from Ugak Island to the S tip
Middle Island, course 267ï¿½, clears the dangers off the E end of    of Narrow Cape; the least found depth near the middle is 6V2 fath-
Isthmus Bay. In an emergency, a vessel may be beached on the    oms. Although not wire dragged, the passage is considered safe
sand at the head of the bay.                                     for moderate-sized vessels. It is regularly used by fishing boats of
                                                                   8- to 10-foot drafts. Tide rips are experienced, particularly on and
  (330) Chart 16580, Kodiak Island, southeast coast.-A com-    near the bar, except at slack water. These rips increase with strong
prehensive survey was made of the waters along the SE coast of    NE winds, producing breakers and causing the false impression
Kodiak Island to and including part of Albatross Bank. A vessel    that the passage is foul. At such times the passage is dangerous for
equipped with echo sounding apparatus would be aided in deter-    small craft.
mining its position by soundings taken while. cruising over this  (342) The current floods NE through the passage between Ugak
area.                                                            Island and Narrow Cape. There are strong cross currents N and S
  (331) The shoaler, outer parts of two extensive submarine pla-    of Ugak Island and tide rips near the shore.
teaus form Albatross Bank. A trough of deep water lies between    (343) If the passage S of Narrow Cape is used to Ugak Bay,
them and branches extend into both entrances of Sitkalidak Strait    avoid the rock awash at minus tides 0.7 mile SW of the S tip of
and toward Sitkinak Strait. A very regular trough, NE of Albatross    Narrow Cape, a rocky 4-fathom shoal 3.6 miles W of the cape, and
Bank, leads directly from seaward to Chiniak Bay.                a /2-fathom rock 6.6 miles W of the cape.
  (332) A depth of 8 fathoms, rocky bottom, is in 56ï¿½22.5'N.,      (344) Ugak Bay has its entrance between Pasagshak and Gull
 152056.0'W. on Albatross Bank.                                   Points and extends W about 19 miles; its inner end branches into a
                                                                    basin at the N and a narrow arm at the S. In entering, vessels
  (333) Chart 16593.-Cape Chiniak, the SE point of Chiniak    should pass S of the l/2-fathom rock a little N of midentrance.
Bay, is low and wooded for 0.8 mile back and then rises to higher    Depths of 40 to 55 fathoms will be found I mile off the points
land. Chiniak Island, 0.5 mile NE of the cape, is flat and grass    along the S shore from the entrance to Saltery Cove, then the bot-
covered; numerous high bare rocks extend 1.1 miles NE from it.   tom abruptly shoals to about 16 fathoms and deepens again to
 Cape Chiniak Light (57037.7'N., 152009.1'W.), 120 feet above    about 45 fathoms near the junction of the basin and arm at the
 the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white    head of the bay.
diamond-shaped daymark on the NW side of the island. An           (345) Local magnetic disturbances.-Magnetic boat com-
 anchorage, 1.3 miles NW of Cape Chiniak Light, provides protec-    passes have been observed to swing 15ï¿½ to 1800 in Ugak Bay.
 tion from S weather in 18 to 20 fathoms. The cape should be
                                 cleardby1.5mlesoavodth offshoe rks  (346) Pasagshak Point, 4 miles W of Narrow Cape, is a promi-
  (334)  Cape revie 21.5  miles to  of Cape Chiniak, is fronted by    nent, narrow mountainous headland 894 feet high. The point pre-
  (334) Cape Greville, 2 miles S of Cape Chiniak, is fronted by    sents the appearance of a pyramid when viewed from the SW.
 several rocky islets. Broken bottom extends 0.8 mile NE from the    sents the appearance of a pyramid when viewed from the SW.
 cape. In approaching from the vicinity of Ugak Island, Cape Gre-  (347) Pasagshak Bay is rectangular shaped, I mile wide at its
 ville should not be mistaken for Cape Chiniak.                   entrance, and has its E side formed by Pasagshak Point. It is shal-
  (335) The land is thickly wooded for about 5 miles S from Cape    low a short distance inside and exposed to any existing swell.
 Chiniak, then to Narrow Cape it is bare except for scrubby brush  (348) Long Island, the 127-foot-high island off the N shore of
 in the gulches and valleys and some grass and scattered clumps of    Ugak Bay W of Pasagshak Bay, is rocky and grass topped. It is
 small spruce trees on the lower slopes. The valley, 8 miles S of    surrounded by a reef and numerous rocky islets. Foul ground is
 Cape Chiniak, terminates in a sand beach.                        between the island and the N shore and 1.2 miles SE of the island.
  (336) Submerged rocks and rocks awash extend up to 0.5 mile      (349) Portage Bay is the rounded bight 4.5 miles W of Pasag-
 offshore for 8 miles S from Cape Chiniak, then they extend up to I    shak Bay. This bay is identified by a small flat-topped, sheer-bluff
 mile offshore to Narrow Cape; there is thick kelp in the vicinity of    islet 42 feet high in the middle of the entrance, and a pinnacle rock
 Narrow Cape. Outside these areas the bottom is mostly sand and    34 feet high 270 yards SW from it. Both are surrounded by deep
 gravel with some rocky sections off the points. No anchorages are    water. The bottom has a gentle slope toward the head of the bay.
 recommended along this coast.                                     (350) Eagle Harbor is an open cove on the S side of Ugak Bay,
  (337) A 10-fathom bank is 8.3 miles 166ï¿½ from Cape Greville.   5.5 miles from the entrance. Its NW point is marked by two pinna-
   (338) Narrow Cape, 13 miles S from Cape Chiniak, is flat, but    cle rocks. At the NW shore of the cove are several shacks of the
 gradually drops close to sea level about 0.3 mile back of the cliff,   deserted village of Eagle Harbor. There is no secure anchorage
 having the appearance of an island when seen off Cape Chiniak.    here. The cove is exposed to E swells.
 From this low part, grassy slopes with a few scattered spruce trees  (351) Between Portage Bay and Kalsin Bay, and between Eagle
 roll gradually upward to the mountains N of Ugak Bay. The SE    Harbor and Shearwater Bay are portages.




                                                      5. KODIAK ISLAND                                                        165


 (352) Saltery Cove, on the N shore of Ugak Bay and 8.5 miles    oms, sand bottom, but is exposed to swells and seas accompanying
above the entrance, is a half-moon shaped bight. It is marked on    SE weather. Kiliuda Rock should be avoided in entering.
its E extremity by a reef point surmounted by a pinnacle rock 32     (364) Shearwater Bay, the NE arm of Kiliuda Bay, is about 2.5
feet high. The cove has a gently sloping sand and mud bottom, but    miles in extent. Rocks awash extend from either side of the
shoals abruptly to flats along the shore. A rock is just outside of    entrance. In the entrance channel between the rocks there are
the flats near the head of the cove. The recommended anchorage is    depths greater than 20 fathoms for a width of 0.4 mile. The rocks
along the 1 0-fathom curve near the E end of the bight. This is    extending 0.2 mile W of Pillar Point bare at low stages of the tide,
regarded as the best general anchorage in Ugak Bay.                and shoal water extends about 200 yards channelward from the
 (353)  Hidden Basin, the N branch at the head of Ugak Bay, has    outermost rock. Near the outer end of the group of rocks on the
a slightly curving bottle-neck entrance. The controlling depth    NW side of the entrance is a dry patch of rock 3 feet high. The out-
through the approach is only 5 feet. The channel is along the W    ermost rock uncovers and is 300 yards from the dry patch in a
shore of the approach. Strong currents are encountered in the    direction toward the head of the bay.
entrance. Depths charted in the approach to the basin are reported  (365) Pillar Point marks the SE side of the entrance to Shearwa-
to be inaccurate; this and the swift and turbulent current during    ter Bay. A small islet is about 110 yards N of Pillar Point. Bluff
periods of maximum and minimum flood make the entrance haz-    Point, 0.5 mile farther inside the bay, is marked by the eroding
ardous.                                                            bluff of a knoll which overlooks the lowland back of Pillar Point.
 (354) The S branch at the head of Ugak Bay is about 7 miles        (366) The small enclosure, back of the narrow strip of land at
long and about 0.5 mile wide. A rock, which bares 5'/2 feet at    Bluff Point, provides secure shelter for small craft with local
about half tide, is near the middle of the constricted part of the    knowledge.
arm. The channel is S of the rock which may be avoided by keep-     (367) About 0.7 miles from its head, Shearwater Bay contracts
ing 200 yards off the S shore in 10 fathoms.                       to a width of about 0.4 mile between Observation Point and the
 (355) Gull Point and the point 1.8 miles S have bold rocky faces    opposing point on the SE side. The ruins of a cannery are on
with islets of massive rock close by. The small cove on the S shore    Observation Point. Anchorage may be had about 0.3 mile beyond
of Ugak Bay W of Gull Point provides anchorage for small boats    this contraction midway between the shores in about 6 fathoms,
in S weather. A sand beach is at the head.                         mud bottom, avoiding shoal water extending 200 yards N of the
 (356) The cove about 3 miles S of Gull Point is connected by a    opposing point and the shoal depths adjacent to the flats along the
tidal channel to a marsh which is flooded at high tide. The bottom    NW side at the head of the bay.
at the entrance to the lagoon and along the beach for about 1 mile  (368)  Routes, Shearwater Bay, from the southwestward.-
N is sandy and apparently free from rocks. A rock, covered 2ï¿½/2    Round Cape Barnabas 2 miles off and make good the following
fathoms, is 0.8 mile NE from the rocky point at the S end of the    courses: (1) 3310 for 9.5 miles to Pillar Point bearing 069ï¿½, 1.4
cove.                                                              miles; this course passes 1.1 miles off Left Cape and heads for
                                                                   Shearwater Point. (2) 048ï¿½ for 1.4 miles to Pillar Point abeam, 0.5
  (357) Chart 16592.-Dangerous Cape, on the SE coast of    mile; this course heads for the deteriorating cannery wharf at
Kodiak Island between Ugak and Kiliuda Bays, is the S end of a    Observation Point. (3) 056ï¿½ for 1.6 miles to anchorage.
ridge. On the S side of the cape is a bluff over 500 feet high. A   (369) From the northeastward.-Round Dangerous Cape 3.5
large rock, about 30 feet high, is about 400 yards S of the cape.  miles and make good the following courses: (1) 276ï¿½ for 3.5 miles
  (358) Boulder Bay, just W  of Dangerous Cape, affords poor    to Outer Right Cape (E end) bearing 0000, 2.5 miles. (2) 305ï¿½ for
anchorage on hard sand bottom. There are numerous rocks several    3.4 miles to Inner Right Cape bearing 052ï¿½, 1.6 miles; this course
hundred yards offshore. These rocks are mostly submerged or    heads for the tangent of the bold shore about 2 miles NW of Left
awash at high water, and extreme care should be taken in navigat-    Cape. (3) 330ï¿½ for 3.8 miles to Pillar Point bearing 069ï¿½, 1.4
ing this bay.                                                      miles; this course heads for Shearwater Point. Then follow courses
  (359) Inner and Outer Right Capes form a double cape 3.5 to 5    (2) and (3) of the preceding paragraph.
miles SW of Dangerous Cape. Outer Right Cape is compara-            (370) The N side of Kiliuda Bay is indented by an open bay
tively low with eroded bluffs about 100 feet high; however, land-    about 1.2 miles wide between Shearwater Point and Coxcomb
slides extend almost to the summit of the mountains along the    Point. Foul ground extends 0.3 mile from Shearwater Point to
coast I mile NE of the outer cape. On a clear day these are recog-    Coxcomb Point. A rock, 4 feet high, is 0.5 mile E of Coxcomb
nized a long distance offshore. Inner Right Cape rises to 493    Point. The entrance channel is 200 yards E of this rock. A N
feet. Broken ground extends about 1 mile offshore between the    course leads to the center of the open bay which has a depth of 3
outer and inner capes.                                             fathoms. The bottom has a gentle rise to an extensive sand beach
  (360) Kiliuda Bay has its entrance between Left Cape and Inner    at the head. A vessel may be beached here in the event of an emer-
Right Cape. It extends about 4 miles NW and then about 6 miles    gency.
W.                                                                  (371) A rock, 45 feet high and 0.5 mile SW from Coxcomb
  (361) Indenting the NE side of Kiliuda Bay are Santa Flavia Bay    Point, marks the outer limit of shallow depths. A triangular-shaped
and Shearwater Bay. The shore between these bays is fringed with    bank is outside the line drawn from the rock to Shearwater Point
islands and rocks.                                                 and N of Pivot Point. Anchorage depths on the bank are 14 to 17
  (362)  Kiliuda Rock, 2 feet high and about 1 mile W of Inner    fathoms, sand bottom.
Right Cape, is on the range of the tangents of Inner and Outer      (372) The point on the N side of Kiliuda Bay, about 3 miles to
Right Capes and about on the range of the small points along the    the W of Coxcomb Point, is a low grass-covered sandspit. The
W shore of Santa Flavia Bay. The rock is surrounded close-to by    axis of a channel of deep water is 300 yards from the sandspit, and
depths of 17 fathoms.                                              the 40-fathom curve is only 150 yards from the spit. Just S of this
  (363) Santa Flavia Bay, between Inner Right Cape and Ermine    channel the depths are very irregular and the area should be
Point, is apparently clear in the center with depths of 12 to 15 fath-    avoided.




166                                                   5. KODIAK ISLAND


 (373) Left Cape is a bold headland separating Kiliuda Bay from    breaks all the way across. Small vessels with local knowledge may
the E part of Sitkalidak Strait. The SE face of the cape is covered    enter the lagoon which deepens inside. and has good holding
with a series of long rockslides extending almost to the mountain    ground.
summit back of the cape. Numerous boulders are close inshore,       (384) Port Hobron is the second deep-indenting bay along the
and submerged rocks fringe the cape.                               N side of Sitkalidak Island W of Table Island. The bay is a good
ï¿½(374)  Sitkalidak Island, about 18 miles long, is adjacent to the    harbor for all vessels except during a NE gale, when a compara-
SE coast of Kodiak Island. The island is grass covered and in gen-    tively heavy sea enters the bay.
eral devoid of trees. The easternmost mountain summit at Cape       (385) A former whaling station and wharf in ruins are on the E
Barnabas is a good landmark from the E and SE.                     side of Port Hobron.
 '(375) Sitkalidak Strait borders both the N and W sides of Sit-     (386) At the head of Port Hobron is a small settlement known as
kalidak Island, separating that island from Kodiak Island. Sitkal-    McCord. A cattle ranch is on the E shore.
idak Passage is the name applied to the narrow part of the strait.  (387)  Cathedral Island, the largest island in Sitkalidak Strait, is
 (376) That part of Sitkalidak Strait N of the Sitkalidak Island    in the middle of the strait at the entrance to Port Hobron. The
extends from the E entrance between Dangerous Cape and Cape    island is 192 feet high and covered with grass. It is dome shaped,
Barnabas to Sitkalidak Passage. The broken bottom NE of Barna-    with steep eroded cliffs on all sides except on the S side. The best
bas Rock had been examined with a wire drag and no dangers    water is found passing S of the island.
were revealed. This part of the strait is navigable by all vessels as  (388) Nut Island Light N (57012.2'N., 153ï¿½09.6'W.), 40 feet
far as Sheep Island, and offers several secure anchorages. The    above the water, is shown from a square steel frame with a red and
controlling depth through Sitkalidak Passage is 7 feet. The pas-    green triangular daymark 0.9 mile W from Cathedral Island.
sage and its E approach are marked by lights and a lighted buoy.    (389) Aberdeen Rock, in the middle of Sitkalidak Strait 0.7
 (377) During June and July thick white fogs occur around the S    mile W of Nut Island, is covered 1 fathom. It is unmarked and
end of Kodiak Island which sometimes last for several days. These    breakers occur over it only in the heaviest NE weather at extreme
fogs generally drift about the sea, but frequently do not enter the    low tide.
strait and adjacent bays. The E entrance to Sitkalidak Strait is fre-  (390) The recommended passage in the vicinity of the three mid-
quently clear when a thick fog is less than 1 mile offshore.       strait obstructions, Cathedral Island, Nut Island, and Aberdeen
 (378) Cape Barnabas, the E end of Sitkalidak Island, is marked    Rock, is to the S of them. To avoid Aberdeen Rock when using the
by a conspicuous mountain 1,719 feet high. There are rockslides    passage and when in the vicinity of the rock, do not go N of the
on the slopes of this mountain and a series of eroded bluffs along    line between Nut Island Light N and Bush Point Light 2. The pas-
the NE face. Submerged rocks and rocks above high water border    sage N of the three midstrait obstructions is clear and is used by
around the cape and numerous kelp patches are several hundred    local craft. Three Sisters Rocks, near the N shore, are low; after
yards offshore. In thick weather this cape is usually easier to pick    passing S of these when bound W in the N passage, care must be
up than Dangerous Cape.                                            taken to stand well over toward the N shore in the vicinity of
 (379) Vessels making Sitkalidak Strait from the SE should pass    Aberdeen Rock.
Cape Barnabas 2 miles off and steer 3210, heading for the NE tan-   (391) Amee Bay, 2 miles W of Port Hobron, is clear in midchan-
gent of Left Cape until Table Island Light bears 195ï¿½, then change    nel and offers fair anchorage, but violent williwaws blow out of
course to 252ï¿½ and follow directions given below.                  this bay in S weather.
 (380) Barnabas Rock, which uncovers about 3 feet, is 0.8 mile      (392) Shag Rock, 6 feet high, is about 150 yards N of Cub
075ï¿½ from Table Island. The sea breaks over this rock at high tide    Island which in turn is about 2.4 miles W of Cathedral Island.
when there is a moderate swell, but often in calm weather at high    Shag Rock forms an important turning point for vessels using the
tide there is no indication of the rock. It has no kelp. The passage    narrow parts of Sitkalidak Strait. It is reported that on the rising
between the rock and Table Island is apparently clear and has been    tide a S set is noticeable between Shag Rock and Bush Point.
used by steam whalers operating from Port Hobron; but because of    (393) Bush Point is on the N shore of the narrow part of Sitkal-
uncertain currents the passage is not recommended. The water    idak Strait 2.8 miles W of Cathedral Island. Bush Point Light 2
between Table-Island and Sitkalidak Island is foul with submerged    (57ï¿½13.1'N., 153ï¿½13.0'W.), 17 feet above the water, is shown from
pinnacles.                                                         a skeleton tower with a red triangular daymark on the S extremity
 (38s) Table Island is a flat-topped island about 100 feet high 2    of the point.
miles WNW  from Cape Barnabas. Table Island Light                   (394)  Midway Bay, known locally as Sheep Bay, is that part of
(57ï¿½ 1 .4'N., 152ï¿½55.1 'W.), 106 feet above the water, is shown    Sitkalidak Strait between the narrows at Bush Point and Sitkalidak
from a small house with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark    Passage. Sheep Island, 50 feet high, covers the central part of
on the N end of the island.                                        Midway Bay. The bay affords the best anchorage in the general
 (382) Tanginak Anchorage, the bight E of the entrance to    vicinity of the strait. The recommended anchorage for large ves-
McDonald Lagoon, is a good anchorage in S weather. A rock    sels is between Sheep Island and Bush Point; small vessels usually
awash at low water is about 0.5 mile off the eroded bluff forming    anchor NE of Sheep Island in 5 fathoms, sticky bottom.
the W end of the bight. Shoal water is between the rock and the     (395) The through passage is S of Sheep Island. A shoal bar,
point.                                                             strewn with boulders, extends W from the shoal area surrounding
 (383) McDonald Lagoon, about 4.5 miles W of Table Island,    Sheep Island to the E end of the N shore of Sitkalidak Passage.
almost divides Sitkalidak Island. It has a bottleneck entrance. A  The channel for entering Sitkalidak Passage borders the S side of
bar channel, 13 feet deep, is W of the l/2-fathom shoal 0.2 miles    the shoal area and bar. The shoal on the S side of this channel is
NW of the bottleneck and follows the N side of the W entrance    marked by a lighted buoy.
point until about 200 yards W of the bottleneck; here it is neces-  (396) Sitkalidak Passage separates the N end of Sitkalidak
sary to avoid a small shoal making out from the N side of the    Island from Kodiak Island and is the link between the two sections
point. Strong currents run in the entrance and in N weather the bar    of Sitkalidak Strait. The controlling depth is only 7 feet through




                                                        5. KODIAK ISLAND                                                        167


the passage. The passage is fairly straight and about 1 mile long.  (409) Ship Rock, 6 feet high, is at the SE entrance of Sitkalidak
Inside the E entrance the channel slightly favors the N shore; in    Strait. Vessels should give the rock a wide berth to avoid the bro-
the W half of the passage it slightly favors the S shore.          ken bottom extending almost 2 miles SW of it.
 (397) Sitkalidak Passage Light 4 (57012.6'N., 153016.4'W.),       (410)  Puffin Island, 75 feet high, is a grass topped irregular
30 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red    mass of rock 0.6 miles NE of Ship Rock. Several bare rocks, some
triangular daymark on the N side of the W end of the passage.      of the pinnacle type, are near the island. The passages on either
 (398)  Currents.-The currents seem to meet at Sitkalidak Pas-    side of the island are not safe
sage under ordinary conditions of wind and weather, but in strong   (411) Tallapoosa Shoal, with the least depth of 9 fathoms over
S weather the current occasionally flows NE continuously. No cur-    it, is in the middle of the strait 3.5 miles NW of Ship Rock.
rent velocities have been measured, but it is estimated that the    (412) Rolling Bay, the first bay on the E side of Sitkalidak Strait
maximum velocity never exceeds 3 knots.                            from the S entrance, has a sand beach and tide lagoon at the head,
                                                          -etta mid-  and a valley leads to Ocean Bay. The bay is exposed to the prevail-
 (399)  Routes.-From eastward, enter Sitkalidak Strait on a mid-
                                                                     ing SW swell.
channel course. Proceed to 0.5 mile 163ï¿½ from the E end of Cathe-
dral Island, thence 600 yards S of Nut Island Light N, thence 300    43  A prominent rock, 83 feet high, havg vertical sides and
yards S of Aberdeen Rock, thence 150 yards N of Nut IShag Rock     300terminating in a dome-shaped top, is on the extensive reef project-
                                                                thence  ing from the N point of Rolling Bay. A needle-top rock, 40 feet
thence 175 yards S of Bush Point Light 2, thence 400 yards 155h
from the W  end of Sheep Island, thence 125 yards E of Sheep    high, is near the point.
                                                                       (414) Sitkalidak Lagoon is the upper part of Natalia Bay, the
Island Lighted Buoy 3, and leave Buoy 3 to port. From this point,    5-mie inlet        st N of Rolling Bay. The restricted entrance to the
                                                                     5-mile inlet just N of Rolling Bay. The restricted entrance to the
make a slow left turn to enter the narrows, avoiding the shoals W
                                                                     lagoon around the end of the spit is navigable only by small craft.
of Sheep Island. Keep in midchannel through Sitkalidak Passage,
favoring the SE side opposite Sitkalidak Passage Light 4. Con-
                                                                     on the E side of Sitkalidak Strait opposite Cape Kasiak, has two
                                                                     knolls; one of these is at the NW end of the headland, the other is
 (400) Outer coast of Sitkalidak Island.-For several miles W      at Natalia Point, the SW end. A 31/2-fathom shoal is 0.5 mile off
from Cape Barnabas, the outer coast is particularly bold and rocky    the headland.
and seldom free of breaking seas. A series of mountain peaks        (416) Newman Bay is on the E side of Sitkalidak Strait opposite
stands close to the rounded outline of this projecting coastal sec-    Three Saints Bay. A 5-fathom shoal is 0.5 mile off the N entrance
tion.                                                              point. Several dangers are near the S shore. A shoal of 4 fathoms
  (401) About 5 miles W of Cape Barnabas, a channel navigable    extends 400 yards N of the point marked by a 50-foot elevation
by launches in moderate weather leads to a lagoon. Practically all    which appears as an island from a distance. Anchorage is available
of the lagoon dries at low water.                                  in 8 to 9 fathoms in the center of the upper bay.
  (402) Partition Cove, having a small islet in the center and sep-  (417) Old Harbor is a native village on the W side of Sitkalidak
arated from McDonald Lagoon by a low narrow neck of land, is    Strait 1 mile from the W end of Sitkalidak Passage. A school and a
foul.                                                              trading post are in the village.
  (403) Ocean Bay, the pronounced indentation of the outer coast     (418) An L-shaped pier, at Old Harbor, has a 67-foot face with
of Sitkalidak Island, has a wide sand beach several miles long. The    about 15 feet reported alongside. A dolphin is about 45 feet NE of
waters adjacent to a long section of the beach are apparently free    the pier and parallel with the face.
of rocks. A sheltered anchorage during prevailing SW weather        (419)  Commercial air service is available from Kodiak.
may be found in 4 fathoms in the lee of the prominent rocky point   (420)  Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-
marking the S end of the sand beach.                               sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of
  (404)  On the coastal ridge between Ocean Bay and Black Point    Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)
are two tips, 1,715 feet and 1,527 feet high, between which the     (421) The Kodiak Island area is served by the Alaska Marine
ridge sags in a smooth curve. This feature may be recognized from    Pilots and Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.
seaward even against the distant background of higher mountains.    (422) Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots
                                                                     and en route to Old Harbor can meet the pilot boat about 1 mile E
  (405) Black Point, the SW end of Sitkalidak Island, is a low
grass-covered cape sloping gently to the adjacent hills. It does not    of Cape Liaki (570069'N. 153027.0'W.)
                                           show darker than the surrounding country, but there are some low  (423) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "OLD HAR-
                                                                      BOR PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearranged
eroding bluffs around the cape and scattered boulders along the
                  ~~~~~~~~~shore.~~                                            ~ ~frequency between pilot and agent/vessel.
shore.
                                                                       (424) A small-boat basin has been dredged at the head of the
  (406) A coastal shelf, approximately defined by the 18-fathom    unnamed cove on the W side of Sitkalidak Strait, about 700 yards
curve around Black Point, extends 4 miles offshore and spreads    N of Old Harbor. A marked dredged channel leads W  from the
fan shaped about the point. Very broken bottom exists on the shelf.    strait to the basin. A diversion dike protects the basin on the N
In some places the survey indicated rather deep water where live    side, and a 240-foot-long groin on the S side of the entrance pro-
kelp appeared. It is recommended that Black Point be given a    tects the channel from shoaling. In December 1993, the control-
berth of at least 4 miles.                                         ling depth was 8 feet in the entrance channel and basin except for
  (407) That part of Sitkalidak Strait W  of Sitkalidak Island    lesser depths along the W edge. The basin will provide protected
extends from its S entrance between Black Point and Twoheaded    moorage at a 562-foot float in the SW end of the basin for resident
Island to Sitkalidak Passage.                                      and transient commercial fishing vessels.
  (408) The most prominent point on the SW end of Sitkalidak        (425) Between Old Harbor and the round point on the opposite
Island is at the W extremity of the coastal ridge back of the low-    shore, Sitkalidak Strait narrows to about 0.5 mile. The W half of
land in the vicinity of Black Point.                               this part of the strait is a sandy shoal having depths less than 3





168                                                    5. KODIAK ISLAND


fathoms. Some piles are at the S end of the shoal, 450 yards E of    (438) Anchorage for all weather except E gales is provided in
the L-shaped pier, at Old Harbor. A small reef, which uncovers 4    the SW part of Kaiugnak Bay. Large vessels should not proceed W
feet, is 100 yards off the E shore of the strait opposite Old Harbor.  of a line bearing S from the small island off the projecting point at
 (426)  Barling Bay is the first bay S from Old Harbor. In NW      the head of the bay.
weather violent williwaws blow out of the bay. The bay near its       (439) Knoll Bay is about 2.5 miles S of Cape Kiavak and N of
head affords excellent holding ground for small craft and is secure    Twoheaded Island.
except in NW weather. The anchorage for large vessels is just        (440) The coast from Cape Kiavak to the N entrance point of
inside the entrance.                                                Knoll Bay is foul for 0.3 mile offshore. The coast and shore of the
 (427)  A broad grass-covered sandpoint projects into Sitkalidak    bay are fringed with covered and visible rocks, which extend
Strait forming the S entrance point of Barling Bay. One mile S of    about 0.2 mile offshore.
the point and about 0.6 mile off the W shore of the strait are a clus-  (441)  Knoll Point, the S entrance point to the bay, is fringed
ter of dangerous rocks marked by kelp. The least depth over them    with many dangers. A rock awash, marked by kelp, is about 0.4
is I foot at low water. The outermost rock is 0.9 mile 204ï¿½ from    mile E of the point, and a large group of rocks, with kelp close E,
the point. The area between the rocks and the W shore is shoal.     are about 0.5 mile S of the point.
 (428)  Three Saints Bay, on the W  side of Sitkalidak Strait,       (442) Anchorage in Knoll Bay may be had in 12 fathoms during
affords anchorage at the head in 14 to 18 fathoms, mud bottom. At    W  weather, and small craft may anchor under the bluff in the S
the entrance, which is between Cape Liakik and Cape Kasiak, a    corner of the bay.
shoal borders the SW shore.
 (429)  A spit, with some rocks awash, and covered 23/4 fathoms      (443)  Chart 16590;-Twoheaded Island, off the S extremity of
near its outer end, extends about 0.6 mile SSW of Cape Liakik.    the W  shore of Sitkalidak Strait, rises to two irregularly rounded
John Island, 90 feet high, is near the outer end of the spit, with    peaks; the higher, 1,837 feet, is NE of the S extremity of the
another islet between it and Cape Liakik. Foul ground extends       island, and the lower, 1,724 feet, is W. A ridge, 1,442 feet high,
from John Island to a submerged rock 2.2 miles N and about 150    extends along the NE part of the island.
yards off the E shore.                                                (444) The coast of the island is bold and precipitous, with
 (430)  A course through the middle of the entrance leads between  numerous large boulders and rocks awash along the shores. Two
the shoal on the SW shore and a 4-fathom shoal 0.5 mile NNW of    bare rocks, 24 and 28 feet high, are near the SW shore. The 28-
John Island.                                                        foot rock is block shaped and the 24-foot rock is shaped like a fin-
 (431) The first Russian settlement on Kodiak Island was estab-    ger pointing up from a heavy base.
lished on this bay in August 1784 and named for the vessel           (445) The passage N of Twoheaded Island, to Japanese Bay and
THREE SAINTS.                                                       Kaguyak Bay, has a channel width of 0.8 mile. In navigating the
                                                                    passage, vessels should avoid the foul area extending S of Knoll
 (432)  The cannery on the sandspit on the W side of Three Saints    Point and favor Twoheaded Island.
Bay, was destroyed by fire in 1931. The face of the cannery wharf    Poit and favor Twoheaded Island.
remains. Depths at the wharf are II feet at the NW corner, 4 feet    r(446) Japanese Bay, consisting of an inner and outer bay, is nar-
about 5 yards farther inshore, and 24 feet at the downstream cor-    ro   covered 2 fathoms and genrally not marked by kelp, is in
ner. SE of the wharf the low water shore areas extend beyond the    the middle of the enrance. Broke  bottom extends NE of the rock
                                                                    the middle of the entrance. Broken bottom extends NE of the rock
line of the face of the wharf. A port landing is always made. With
a heavy wind broadside on, it is impossible for a vessel under her    of tleaentrance The E and W  shores of the bay are    ged wt
                                                                    of the entrance. The E and W shores of the bay are fringed with
own power to leave the wharf.
                                                                    many submerged and rocks awash. The channel for entering the
 (433)  An excellent anchorage for small vessels is in the cove    bay is W of the 2-fathom rock.
formed by a long sandspit inside the entrance on the SW side of      (447  Vessels may anchor near the head of the outer bay. After
the Three Saints Bay. A vessel about 65 feet long may anchor    entering proceed midchannel until the inner tangent of the group
 434)h Two                                                        streams enter at  the.    he a d   of  Th Iree Saints Bay drain- of large rocks in the entrance is in range with the outermost of the
 (434)  Two streams enter at the head of Three Saints Bay drain-    two high rocks off Twoheaded Island. Then anchor in 15 to 16
ing separate valleys. The S valley is said to have a trail leading    fathoms, mud bottom.
across Kodiak Island to Uyak Bay.                                    (448)  The restricted entrance to the inner bay is about 190 yards
 (435)  The three rocky peaks on the ridge that terminate at the    wide. The channel curves around the end of the gravel spit, but has
headland at the turn of Three Saints Bay are locally known as The   a depth of 11 fathoms. A vessel may be beached on the N side of
Three Saints. The peaks are over 3,000 feet high and when clear    the spit. It has been reported that vessels should avoid anchoring
form a leading mark at sea for identifying the S entrance to Sitkal-    NW of the spit, as the holding ground is poor. Several vessels have
idak Strait.                                                        reported being blown ashore in heavy NE weather.
 (436)  Cape Kasiak is a prominent headland on the W side of         (449)  Cape Kaguyak is about 2 miles SW of Twoheaded Island
Sitkalidak Strait S of the entrance to Three Saints Bay.            and between them is the passage leading to Japanese Bay. The
 (437)  Kaiugnak Bay and Kiavak Bay, collectively known as    area in the vicinity of the cape is foul. The 163-foot rocky islet at
Wide Bay, indent the W shore of Sitkalidak Strait between Cape    the SE tip of the cape has the appearance of a huge sun dial. The
Kasiak and Cape Kiavak. A small shoal of 311, fathoms is I mile    outermost danger is a rock, covered 21/, fathoms, 0.6 mile NE of
SW of Cape Kasiak. A shoal of 2 fathoms is near the middle of the    the cape. Kaguyak Bay, immediately W  of the cape, affords
upper part of Kaiugnak Bay. A rock, which uncovers 5 feet, is 0.5    anchorage at the head of the bay in 6 to 9 fathoms from W and S
mile NE of Cape Kiavak, and a rock awash, about 700 yards off-    winds. With NE winds small craft may find a fairly comfortable
shore, is about I mile NW of the cape. There are two lagoons, one    anchorage under the bluff on the SE side of the head of the bay.
at the head of each bay; neither permits entrance except at high      (450))  The coast of Aliulik Peninsula from Cape Kaguyak to
water. A large waterfall is in the NW branch of Kaiugnak Bay.       Cape Trinity, the SW extremity of Kodiak Island, is bordered by






                                                       5. KODIAK ISLAND                                                        169


foul ground. Extensive foul areas also surround Geese Islands and   (465)  Geese Channel, the passage N of Geese Islands, has a
Aiaktalik Island which are along this coast. Geese Channel is not    controlling depth of about 33/4 fathoms. Shoals and reefs are scat-
navigable except for small vessels, and ships proceeding along    tered in the passage. Several buoys mark the channel; they are
this coast pass through Sitkinak Strait. Old Kaguyak Bay and Rus-    numbered from E to W. Heavy kelp marks the shoal patch 0.5 to
sian Harbor provide anchorage for small vessels.                   0.9 mile W of the W island of the Geese Islands. In October 1979,
 (451)  The southernmost peak, 2,215 feet high, on Kodiak Island,    a submerged obstruction was reported at the W end of the channel,
is about 5 miles W of Cape Kaguyak. This detached mountain is    about 200 yards SE of Geese Channel Lighted Bell Buoy 4.
regular in outline and forms a distinctive mark. From the mountain  (466) Russian Harbor, between Aiaktalik Island and Kodiak
toward Cape Trinity is a long gradual slope.                       Island, is a temporary anchorage in moderate weather, in about 8
 (452) Flat Island, about 0.9 mile off the entrance of Old        fathoms, hard sand bottom. There is but little shelter, and strong
Kaguyak Bay and 6 miles SW of Twoheaded Island, is flat topped    tide rips are frequent.
and 119 feet high. This island has sheer rocky bluffs. A pinnacle   (467) In general it is difficult to make courses good passing
rock, 38 feet high, and another rock outside of it, are close to the    through Russian Harbor because of the strong currents, swirls, and
SW end of Flat Island. The rocky reef extending 0.7 mile to the    eddies. Aiaktalik Island Light 5 (56ï¿½43.9'N., 154ï¿½02.9'W.), 57
NE shows in small groups of rocks.                                 feet above the water, is shown from a square frame with a green
 (453)  A channel is between Flat Island and the mainland; its    square daymark on the N point of the island. A middle ground in
width is narrowed by heavy kelp beds on either side.               Russian Harbor has depths of 21/2 fathoms.
 (454) Old Kaguyak Bay affords protection to small craft in N       (468) In Aiaktalik Cove, the seas and wind sweep around the
weather. A rock, 28 feet high, is in the center of the entrance and a    point in moderate weather, making the cove an uncomfortable
rock, which uncovers about 3 feet, is 100 yards SW of the elevated    anchorage. The best anchorage for small vessels, affording excel-
rock. To enter pass between the elevated rock and Boot Point but    lent protection from the prevailing NE weather, is on the Kodiak
favor the shore around Boot Point to avoid the rock that uncovers    Island side of Russian Harbor. This anchorage is 0.8 mile N of the
3 feet. Anchor in about 3 fathoms, sandy bottom, a little N of the    point 3.4 miles E of Cape Trinity, opposite a stretch of sand beach
center of the bay.                                                 in a break of the shore reef. The anchorage is in 4 fathoms, soft
 (455) Boot Point, forming the W  side of the entrance of Old    sand bottom.
Kaguyak Bay, is marked by a humped hill 496 feet high.              (469) Sitkinak Strait is the broad strait lying between Trinity
 (456) About 0.5 mile SW of the W  extremity of the headland    Islands and Kodiak Island. It is navigable for large vessels.
forming Boot Point are two islets close together. The highest part,  (470) The E approach is marked by Geese Islands on the N and
the N end of the W  islet, is 41 feet. The islet 0.2 mile farther off-    Cape Sitkinak, the E end of Sitkinak Island, on the S. As viewed
shore is 19 feet high. The islet 0.1 mile inside is 10 feet high.  from seaward, this end of Sitkinak Island shows as precipitous
 (457)  Geese Islands, three in number, are flat in appearance, the    dark rock and shale bluffs dominated by two peaks or heads; the N
E and highest is 150 feet high. The passages between the islands    one is 605 feet high and the S one is 821 feet.
are dry at low tide and the area for I mile S of the islands is foul.  (471) Two groups of two bare rocks are 0.5 mile and 1 mile off
 (458) A reef and shoal area extends 3 miles E from the E Geese    Cape Sitkinak. The outer group, light gray in appearance, is 17
Islands, terminating in a rock covered 21/2 fathoms. The rock    feet high, and the inner group is 13 feet high. Rocks awash are
breaks in a moderately heavy sea but not in ordinary weather. The    outside of the outer group of bare rocks.
reefs, 1 mile inside of the rock, bare 4 to 7 feet. It should be noted  (472) An extensive fan-shaped reef, the limits of which are
that the bottom shoals very abruptly in this locality.             marked by thick growing kelp, extends almost 2 miles E and S of
 (459) Aiaktalik Island, about 2.5 miles W  of the westernmost    the SE point of Aiaktalik Island. It is made up of two rocky ledges
of the Geese Islands, shows as two knolls; the E one, 308 feet    and many individual rocks, most of which uncover. It is believed
high, is the sharper and higher. The area S of the island is foul for    that the rock on which the PAVLOF struck is located near the edge
1.5 miles offshore.                                               of this reef.
 (460) A cylindrical grass-covered rock, 50 feet in diameter and    (473) A bank of considerable extent, with a least depth of 41/4.
58 feet high, stands on the shore reef at the W  end of Aiktalik    fathoms, is near the middle of Sitkinak Strait about 2 miles N of
Island.                                                            Whirlpool Point.
 (461) Sundstrom Island is just off the SW end of Aiktalik          (474) Whirlpool Point, N point of Sitkinak Island, is low, flat,
Island. Several wart-like projections rise above the general level    and sandy. Whirlpool Point Light (56037.0'N., 154ï¿½05.5'W.), 51
of the island which is about 70 feet; the highest is 158 feet. The    feet above the water, is shown from a small house on a skeleton
shores consist of rocky bluffs.                                    tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the point.
 (462) The passage between Sundstrom and Aiktalik Islands    The tower is reported to be a good radar target.
should prove useful to small craft in that it avoids the whirlpools  (475) Currents.-The currents in Sitkinak Strait set WNW on
and tide rips around the SW point of Sundstrom Island. Both sides    the flood and ESE on the ebb. There are heavy tide rips in the strait
of the narrow passage are lined with heavy kelp but the midchan-    particularly SW and W  of Aiaktalik Island. So far as observed,
nel is clear of kelp and has a controlling depth of about 21/2 fath-    they are heaviest with a W wind and a flood current. The tide rips
oms.                                                               are often dangerous for small vessels. At times when the current
 (463) The passage between Aiaktalik and Geese Islands is navi-    opposes seas from E in the vicinity of Whirlpool Point; the seas
gable for small vessels and has a controlling depth of about 6 fath-    become very steep. Current predictions for Sitkinak Strait may be
oms. The chart is the best guide.                                  obtained from the Tidal Current Tables.
 (464) The passage between Kodiak Island and the chain com-         (476) Routes, Sitkinak Strait.-A rocky ridge on Albatross
posing Aiaktalik Island and Geese Islands, via Geese Channel and    Bank on which a depth of 8 fathoms was found, is in the seaward
Russian Harbor, is used considerably by small local vessels.       approach to Sitkinak Strait from the SE. The ridge is about 42




170                                                   5. KODIAK ISLAND


miles 1050 from the summit of Sitkinak Island. It should be    bank with its center 9.5 miles SSW from Cape Sitkinak has not
avoided,                                                           been fully surveyed. The bank has depths of 11 fathoms to 20 fath-
 (477) Enter the strait on a 270ï¿½ course passing about 4.3 miles N  oms, and covers an area about 0.5 to 1.5 miles wide and about 6
of Sitkinak Cape and I mile off Whirlpool Point Light. Continue    miles long. It extends in a NNE-SSW direction and is an extension
on this course for 4 miles until Dolina Point bears 190ï¿½. Then    of an extensive area along the S coast of Sitkinak Island having
change to 000ï¿½ and continue to a position 2.2 miles W from Cape    depths less than 20 fathoms with irregular bottom in most places.
Trinity. Due regard must be had for the strong currents in this     (490) A temporary anchorage is off the S entrance to Sitkinak
strait.                                                            Lagoon. This part of the S coast of the island is recognized off-
 (478)  If bound for Alitak Bay, follow routes given later in this    shore by the flatland at the lagoon. A prominent rocky point with
chapter.                                                           an arched opening 50 feet high marks the entrance to the lagoon.
                                                                    To reach this anchorage from outside the 20-fathom curve, steer
 (479)  Chart 16580.-Albatross Bank, about 45 miles off the SE    for the point with the arched opening bearing 026ï¿½, and anchor in
coast of Kodiak Island, has depths of 8 fathoms to about 61 fath-    not less than 11 fathoms about I mile from the point.
oms.                                                                (491)  Tugidak Passage, between Sitkinak and Tugidak Islands,
 (480) An area, having depths of 12 to 20 fathoms and covering    has very strong and freakish tidal currents and rips. Only the N
about 50 square miles, is between 153ï¿½00'W. and 153ï¿½20'W., and    approach has been surveyed. The S approach is apparently
between 56ï¿½20'N. and 56ï¿½28'N. The bottom characteristics noted    blocked by shoals. Tide rips in the middle of the passage are
on this area include gray mud, fine black sand and gravel, and    extremely dangerous to small boats and should be avoided by hug-
rock. Kelp has been seen in this area at various times. On occa-    ging the Tugidak Island shore.
sion, moderate tide rips have been noted.                           (492)  Tugidak Island, in its N part, is chiefly sandflats, but little
 (481) A rocky shoal is a short distance to the E of the large shoal    above high water. A level boulder patch that uncovers is 0.5 mile
just described. The depths range from 8 to 20 fathoms with a very    off the N coast of Tugidak Island, 5 miles W of Tugidak Passage.
irregular rocky bottom. The shoalest part, in 56ï¿½22.5'N.,           (493) The higher parts of the island are low grassy sandhills
152ï¿½56.5'W., is a sharp rocky ridge with a depth of 8 fathoms.    which terminate in bluffs in places along the shores. The N part is
Currents with a velocity of about 3 knots were observed in this    separated from the S or higher part by a large lagoon having one
area. It should be avoided in heavy weather because of possible    entrance from the SE.
breakers.                                                           (494) The lagoon is reported to bare, except near the SW side of
 (482) A 16-fathom bank is in 56ï¿½40'N., 152ï¿½10'W. There may    the entrance where there is a pocket or basin of about 5 to 6 fath-
be less water. This shoal is separated from the shoals previously    oms, sand bottom. The basin is a suitable anchorage for small
described by an extensive trough of deep water. This trough    boats, and is protected from the sea by a long sandspit that extends
extends N, and branches extend into both entrances of Sitkalidak    E from the entrance point on the SW side. A narrow channel fol-
Strait and toward Sitkinak Strait.                                 lows the SE side of Tugidak Island, however, it is almost bare at
 (483) Trinity Islands, off the S end of Kodiak Island, consist of    low water so passage in and out is possible only at half or greater
Sitkinak and Tugidak Islands inhabited only by occasional hunters    tide.
and fishermen in the summer and trappers in winter. Unsurveyed      (495) In 1909, Mr. S. Applegate located the foul and broken area
areas include the SW coast of Sitkinak Island and all of Tugidak    which extends about 10 miles S from the S end of Tugidak Island,
Island except the N end. Soundings in these unsurveyed areas are    as shown on the chart, by compass bearings on Tugidak Island and
from reports.                                                      the summit of Sitkinak Island. Until a survey is available it is con-
 (484) The island beaches are heavy shingle, gravel, and in places    sidered unsafe for vessels to cross this area. The bottom is very
fine sand; a few alder bushes are on both islands. Landings are    uneven, the depths changing abruptly from 2 to 4 fathoms in
easy with offshore winds, but with any change the sea makes up    places, and boulder reefs with little depth may be expected. There
rapidly. Water can be obtained from the ravines and pools on the    are strong currents and heavy rips and overfalls.
islands.                                                            (496) The waters off the N end of Tugidak Island have been sur-
 (485) Sitkinak Island (see also chart 16590), the E island, is    veyed. The general absence of kelp in this comparatively shoal
divided into two parts by Sitkinak Lagoon, which is navigable    area may be taken as an indication of the existence of but little if
through the N entrance by small vessels, except during E swells or    any ledge rock. The bottom apparently is composed of loose mate-
seas. The S entrance, fringed with rocks that uncover, should be    rial including boulders leveled down by the action of the sea to
attempted only with a calm sea; a small launch may enter at high    form the more or less flat area of this region of 5 to 7 fathoms.
water. The lagoon is a flat traversed by tidal channels, which are    Slight shoaling occurs in patches where apparently there is a pre-
fairly deep near and inside the entrance, but the connecting chan-    dominance of boulders resisting the general leveling action of the
nel between them is only 3 feet deep at high water.                sea.
 (486) Sitkinak Dome, 1,600 feet high, prominent, and with a        (497) The N and W sides of Tugidak Island may be generally
smooth rounded top, dominates the W side of Sitkinak Island. A     approached as close as 1.5 miles in good weather by a careful use
parabolic antenna is just NE of the dome.                          of the lead. Care should be exercised near the middle of the W side
 (487) The E end of Sitkinak Island and Whirlpool Point have    of the island, as an unsurveyed bank reported to be covered as lit-
been described under Sitkinak Strait,                              tle as 2 fathoms is possibly 2 or 3 miles off. Anchorage can be
 (488) The island E of the lagoon is composed of many hills,    found on the E side of the island between the entrance to the
some of which are separated from one another by low valleys. The    lagoon and the foul area extending off the S end.
NW side of the island, SW of Dolina Point, is made up of earth      (498) Ptarmigan have been found in great number on Tugidak
cliffs several hundred feet high, broken by narrow ravines.        Island.
 (489) The S coast of Sitkinak Island is foul and should be         (499) Chirikof Island (see also chart 16013) is about 60 miles
avoided. Kelp beds extend 0.5 to 2 miles off the E and S shores. A  SSW of the Trinity Islands. The S part of the island has bold, high





                                                      5. KODIAK ISLAND                                                        171


peaks and bluffs, from which it gradually slopes to the N end, ter-  (509) The country is treeless and except for outcropping ledges
minating in a low, green undulating country. An islet is near the    of bare rock on the knolls and peaks, the land is covered by thick
SE end. The island is easily recognized and is visible for many    moss and grass. A herd of reindeer is maintained in the vicinity of
miles in clear weather.                                            Lazy Bay by the natives.
 (500) The S shore of Chirikof Island is a Steller sea lion rookery  (5s0) The prominent feature in the approach is Twin Peaks on
site. There is a 3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer zone around the    the peninsula between Lazy Bay and Kempff Bay. It can be seen
southern half of the island. (See 50 CFR 227.12, chapter 2, for    from off Cape Ikolik on a clear day. The peninsula between
limits and regulations.) In emergency situations anchorage may    Kempff Bay and Olga Bay is mountainous and rises to 2,000 feet.
be found in the bight at the SW corner, Southwest Anchorage, at      (51 ) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-
the mouth of the stream and opposite the houses; or in 10 fathoms,    sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of
on the W side off the bluff just S of the stream, possibly 2 miles    Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)
from the NW point. Anchorage can also be found in the wide bay      (512) The Kodiak Island area is served by the Alaska Marine
on the NE side of the island. In May-June 1978, it was reported    Pilots and Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.
that depths less than those charted were in this area, possibly due  (513) Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots
to the March 1964 earthquake. Anchorage difficulties may be    and en route to Alitak Bay can meet the pilot boat about 2 miles
experienced in heavy weather due to williwaws and limited swing-    SE of Cape Alitak (56ï¿½50.7'N., 154ï¿½18.2'W.).
ing room. Foul ground is between Chirikof Island and the islets W   (514) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "ALITAK BAY
of it. These islets are known as Round Rock, which is the largest    PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearranged fre-
and resembles a haystack, and Nagai Rocks.                         quency between pilot and agent/vessel.
 (501) On numerous occasions breakers have been observed off        (515) Cape Trinity, the S entrance point to Alitak Bay, is a
the S end of Chirikof Island. The position of the breakers is    tableland terminating in an almost vertical bluff. Rocks and reefs
reported to be 55ï¿½42'N., 155ï¿½36'W. A least depth of 4 fathoms    extend a short distance off the cape.
was reported on the reef. The area of possible shoal water does not  (516) Cape Alitak, the N entrance point of Alitak Bay, is the S
appear to be over 50 to 100 yards in diameter.                     end of a sloping ridge with numerous knolls. It is partly grass cov-
 (502) A shoal is reported to extend from the E side near the mid-    ered with much bare rock. Deep water extends close up to the cape
dle of the island; breakers have been reported 3 miles 114ï¿½ from    on its SW side, but a long shoal of fine gray sand makes off its SE
the middle of the island. A breaker is reported in an estimated    side in the direction of Cape Trinity. Numerous rocks are also
position 4 miles ESE from the SE point of the island. A shoal with    close off the N, E, and W sides of the cape. The 10-fathom curve
kelp is reported to extend about 1 mile W  from the NW point of    extends 3 miles off the cape and the 5-fathom curve is about 1.3
the island.                                                        miles off. At the outer end of the shoal the depth increases rapidly
 (503) In 1923, the U.S.S. CARDINAL was wrecked on the E    to 20 fathoms. Cape Alitak Light (56'50.6'N., 154ï¿½18.3'W.), 63
side of Chirikof Island and the survey ship DISCOVERER while    feet above the water, is shown from a small house with a red and
engaged in rescue work struck a reef about 1.5 miles offshore.     white diamond-shaped daymark on the S end of the cape.
 (504) The wide passage between Chirikof Island and Tugidak         (517) Lazy Bay, 4 miles NE from Cape Alitak, is well marked
Island has not been adequately surveyed. From widely scattered    by Twin Peaks and Egg Island on its N side, and some white rocky
soundings taken in this locality, it appears that a submarine ridge    ledges close to its S entrance point. The shore S of the entrance is
with depths less than 19 fathoms extends from one island to the    clear if given a berth of 0.4 mile with the exception of the shoal
other. Foul and broken bottom extends about 10 miles S from    making off the SE side of Cape Alitak.
Tugidak Island. Fairly regular depths across the ridge are indicated  (518) A cannery with a wharf, operated by the Columbia-Wards
in the more closely sounded area 10 miles N of Chirikof Island.    Fisheries, is on the N shore about I mile W from Egg Island. The
Tugidak Island is low and featureless and cannot be used as a navy-    wharf is 180 feet long with 30 feet reported alongside the face.
igational guide in the passage. Vessels bound for Chignik from the    Water is available at the wharf, and the cannery has limited
E use this passage.                                                machine shop facilities. Diesel and fuel oils are stored in some
 (505) Currents.-Between Sitkinak and Chirikof Islands the    quantity for cannery use. The cannery season is May through Sep-
general set of the current is reported to be about 249ï¿½, 0.5 knot.    tember. Caretakers man the cannery in the off-season. The cannery
The current between Chirikof Island and Lighthouse Rocks has a    monitors VHF-FM channel 16 and 4125 kHz single sideband
S set, less than 0.5 knot. From Lighthouse Rocks to Kupreanof    (SSB); call sign is KBL-75. VHF-FM channel 79A is used as a
Point the current sets generally 260ï¿½ and varies from 0.3 to 0.7    working frequency; 2450 kHz SSB is also available. Telephone
knot.                                                              service is available at the village of Akhiok. The cannery main-
  (506) On three runs between Chirikof Island and Castle Rock on    tains a store seasonally. A nurse or first aid technician is available
the Shumagin Islands, a S set-was experienced each time, an aver-    during the canning season, but there are no hospital accommoda-
age of as much as 1.5 knots having been noted.                     tions. Injuries or illnesses requiring hospitalization are flown to
  (507) Vessels crossing the Gulf of Alaska westbound are often    Kodiak. Air service is available to and from Kodiak on Tuesdays
subjected to a strong N set and should verify their position by    and Fridays during the off-season, and six days a week during the
sounding when approaching the meridian of Chirikof Island. It    open season.
was this N set in conjunction with thick weather that was responsi-  (519) A slipway capable of hauling out vessels up to about 130
ble for the loss of the CARDINAL in 1923.                          tons, with a maximum draft of 6 feet forward and 8 feet aft is at
                                                                    the cannery.
  (508) Charts 16590, 16591.-Alitak Bay, at the S end of Kodiak      (520) The N part of the bay beyond the sandspit above the can-
Island has its entrance between Cape Alitak and Cape Trinity, and    nery consists of mudflats and many boulders.
extends 26 miles in a N direction to the head of Deadman Bay.        (521) Anchorage in 9 to 15 fathoms, mud bottom, may be had
Lazy Bay is a good anchorage.                                      between the cannery and the E entrance point to Rodman Reach.





172                                                  5. KODIAK ISLAND


With E gales the wind blows directly in Lazy Bay and there is lit-  (533) Nelson Reef, which has a least known depth of 21/2 fath-
tie room in case of dragging or parting a cable. Northwesters blow    oms, is 1.5 miles N of Middle Reef and 2.7 miles ESE from the
with great force into Lazy Bay from over the ridge back of the    entrance to Moser Bay. A thin growth of kelp is sometimes seen
head of the bay. Small craft can find excellent shelter and smooth    on this reef.
water in the entrance to Rodman Reach during E weather.            (534) Moser Bay, the large NW arm of Alitak Bay, has depths
 (522) Rodman Reach is a narrow arm that extends SW from    of 1.0 to 15 fathoms, soft mud bottom. It is a secure harbor and an
Lazy Bay and inside of Tanner Head to Cape Alitak where it   excellent anchorage. The entrance is between Bun Point, low,
forms a shallow basin from which Alitak Lagoon, also shallow,    sandy, and marked by a light, and Amik Island, rocky, on the S; it
extends 3 miles N, being separated fromthe sea by a narrow shin-    is obstructed by a rocky shoal that makes N from Amik Island for
gle spit. About 100 yards off the E entrance point are two rocks    about 0.5 mile. The N end of the shoal is marked by a buoy.
awash. Excellent shelter for small craft will be found in the      (535) The channel between Bun Point and the N end of the
entrance to Rodman Reach.                                         rocky shoal is 175 yards wide and is close to Bun Point. It has a
 (523) Egg Island is the low, flat rocky islet off the N entrance to    least depth of about 51/2 fathoms, and strong tidal currents flow in
Lazy. Bay. Lazy Bay Light 2 (56053.5'N., 154ï¿½12.9'W.), 25 feet    the direction of the axis of the channel.
above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red trian-  (536)  About halfway between Bun Point and Fassett Point is a
gular daymark on the S side of the island.                        shoal that extends halfway across from the NE shore toward a spit
 (524) Twin Peaks, between Lazy and Kempff Bays, are a mark    on the opposite shore. The shoal has a depth of 3 fathoms at its
from as far W as Cape Ikolik. North Twin Peak, the higher one, is   outer end which is marked by a buoy.
1,494 feet and South Twin Peak is 1,310 feet. Both peaks are       (537) A gravel shoal, which uncovers, extends 400 yards ENE
fairly definite, devoid of vegetation, and very rocky and stony.    from the spit on the S shore opposite the shoal described above.
From the W they are first raised as an island.                     (538) Fassett Point, a low grassy head with lower land back of
 (525) Kempff Bay, on the N side of Twin Peaks, is too deep for   it, is the turning point on the NE side of Moser Bay, about 2 miles
convenient anchorage and on its N side has broken bottom that    inside the entrance.
should be avoided. There are neither settlements nor improve-      (539)  Trap Point is the low point across the channel from Fas-
ments in Kempff Bay.                                              sett Point. The Alaska Packers Association maintains a ware-
 (526)  Favoring somewhat the S shore through the bay, anchor-    house, wharf, and ways for hauling out scows here. The wharf has
age can be selected near the head in about 18 fathoms. A spit with    a face of 100 feet and a least depth of 34 feet alongside.
deep water close-to extends 350 yards from the N shore at a point  (540) Snug Cove, SW from Trap Point, shoals gradually to its
0.7 mile from the head.                                           head. A pass between the mountains extends from Snug Cove to
 (527) A reef, covered at high water, is between Drake Head and    the sea.
White Rock, and extends 0.5 mile from the shore just S of          (541)  Chip Cove is on the W side of Moser Bay, 1.5 miles N of
Kempff Bay. White Rock, 10 feet high, should be given a berth of    Trap Point. The cannery pier, on the W side of the cove entrance,
0.3 mile when passing E of it in Alitak Bay and the same distance    has depths of 20 feet alongside the working faces.
when passing N of it entering Kempff Bay.                          (542) Radiotelephone and radiotelegraph communications are
 (528) Akhiok, a native village on the beach of Akhiok Bay       maintained by the cannery.
about 1.5 miles NE from Kempff Bay, has a schoolhouse and a        (543) Olga Narrows connects Moser Bay with Olga Bay. It is
Russian Orthodox Church. The village has telephone service. A     possible to carry about 21 feet through the passage only by care-
foot trail leads from the cannery at Lazy Bay to Akhiok. Akhiok is   fully following the narrow and crooked channel. It should not be
best reached by launch via the passage from Kempff Bay. This    attempted except with local knowledge.
passage is shoal and has many rocks. A pilot can usually be        (544) The current in the narrowest part of Olga Narrows attains
obtained at the Lazy Bay cannery,                                 an estimated velocity of 8 knots. During large tides there is no
 (529)  Round Hill, 193 feet high, is a symmetrical, round grassy    stage at which there is slack water the entire length of the narrows.
knoll at the E end of Akhiok Island which forms the N side of the    During small tides there is said to be a period of slack water last-
entrance to Kempff Bay.                                           ing from V2 to 1 /2 hours.
 (530) Akhiok Reef, awash at extreme high water and always         (545) Olga Bay is an irregularly shaped body of water 17 miles
showing, is a group of black jagged rocks about 0.6 mile off the    long. The W end is separated from the ocean by a strip of land 1
SE point of Akhiok Island. In clear weather the reef makes a good    mile wide at a point 6 miles N of Low Cape. The shores of Olga
landmark. A deep pocket of 30 fathoms is 350 yards SE of Akhiok    Bay are rocky except at the W end where low grassy bluffs are
Reef. A 41/4-fathom spot, marked on its E side by a buoy, is 0.4    from 10 to 80 feet high. On the N and S shores of the bay the land
mile E of Akhiok Reef.                                            rises abruptly from 800 to 2,000 feet.
 (531) Small vessels, with local knowledge, when bound from        (546) The bay has the appearance of a lake and the rise and fall
Lazy Bay to Moser Bay pass between Akhiok Reef and Akhiok    of the tide is only from I to 2 feet at the former cannery which was
Island. Strangers are advised to keep to the E of the buoy marking    on the N shore about 8.5 miles above the narrows. The buildings
the 41/4-fathom spot.                                             and wharf of the former cannery now are used as a base camp for
 (532) Middle Reef covers an area about 2 miles long in the cen-    big-game guides. The wharf has depths of 7 to 11 feet alongside.
tral part of Alitak Bay. The NW end of the reef area is marked by a  (547) Anchorage for fishing craft can be found at several places
group of black rocks that uncover about 7 feet and will usually be    along the shores. The best anchorage is in Anchor Cove on the S
seen or breaking. A kelp-marked rock, which uncovers 2 feet, and    side of Olga Bay, 5.5 miles above the N end of the narrows. The
a ledge, which uncovers 51/2 feet, are along the E side of the reef    cannery company had dolphins here where small boats tied up
area. The kelp-marked shoal at the S extremity is covered 23/4 fath-    over the winter.
oms. There is little if any warning of shoaling of the general     (548) Deadman Bay is deep except near the head where it
depths of the bay adjacent to the reef area.                      divides into two arms. The N arm terminates in a mudflat, while




                                                       5. KODIAK ISLAND                                                          173


the E arm, known as Alpine Cove, affords excellent anchorage.    and enter the bay. (2) If coming from Sitkinak Strait, follow routes
The NW shore of Deadman Bay is fringed with numerous rocks    given earlier in this chapter, to a position 2.2 miles W from Cape
and reefs, while the SE shore is bold and unusually clear. No set-    Trinity. Then steer 0030 for about 8 miles until the S shore of Lazy
tlements are along the bay, only an occasional cabin used by trap-    Bay bears 2870. Then change to 3090 until Egg Island is abeam on
pers during the winter,                                             the starboard hand, 350 yards. Then change to 2840 and enter the
 (549) Between Bun Point and Fox Island are several off-lying    bay.
islets and rocks and much foul ground. The shore here should not     (563) To enter Moser Bay: (1) From Alitak Bay midentrance
be approached closer than I mile except with local knowledge.       position given above, steer 034ï¿½ for 9.2 miles until Akhiok village
 (550) Fox Island, about 0.5 mile off the W  shore near the    bears 297ï¿½, 3 miles. Then change to 3480, heading 150 yards off
entrance to Deadman Bay, is bordered by bluffs and is 90 feet    Bun Point. When nearly up to Bun Point change to 005ï¿½, passing
high. It is grass covered, comparatively flat, and a good mark in    150 yards off the highwater line at the point. When the buoy bears
entering Deadman Bay.                                               2370, haul W to a 2900 course, passing about 275 yards N of the
 (551) Alpine Cove, the E arm at the head of Deadman Bay, is a    buoy.
beautiful cove surrounded by high rugged mountains. An excel-        (564) Continue on this course for I mile until past the buoy
lent anchorage is near the entrance in 12 to 15 fathoms, mud bot-    marking the end of the long shoal that makes out from the NE
tom, and sheltered from all winds and seas.                         shore. Then haul to the N and anchor as desired.
 (552) From Cape Trinity, the E shore of Alitak Bay trends NNE       (565) Strong tidal currents will be found at Bun Point setting
for about 14 miles to Shag Bluff, the S entrance point of Portage    along the axis of the channel. Large vessels should wait for slack
Bay. This section of the coast has many visible and submerged       water.
rocks, and reefs, extending in places as much as 0.6 mile offshore.  (566)  (2) If coming from Sitkinak Strait, follow directions given
 (553) Portage Bay opens into Alitak Bay from the NE. Bert    earlier, to a position 2.2 miles W  from Cape Trinity. Then steer
Point, dark and rocky, 3.7 miles E of Cape Hepburn, separates the    0190 for 11.5 miles until Akhiok village is abeam on the port hand,
bay into two arms.                                                  2.6 miles. Then change to 3480, heading 150 yards off Bun Point,
 (554)  Sulua Bay, the main or W arm, extends 3.5 miles N from    and follow directions given above for entering Moser Bay.
Bert Point. Between Cape Hepburn and the W entrance point of         (567) To enter Deadman Bay: From a position with the NW
Sulua Bay, a bank, with reefs and rocks, submerged and awash,    Middle Reefs bearing 1210, 1.5 miles, make good a 0410 course
extends as much as 0.5 mile offshore.                               for about 4 miles until the S end of Fox Island is on the port beam,
 (555) The shores of Sulua Bay are precipitous, except at its head    nearly 1 mile. This course leads 0.5 mile NW of Nelson Reef, a
where a stream enters through the flats. Several short gravel spits    shoal with a least known depth of 2'/2 fathoms. When the S end of
extend from the W  side, and on the two nearest the entrance are    Fox Island is abeam haul to the N and steer midchannel courses up
cabins used by fishermen during the season. Mooring piles are on    Deadman Bay, if anything favoring the SE shore.
the N side of these spits.
 (556) On the E side of this arm, a bank, with depths of less than
                                                                     (568) Chart 16580.-Shelikof Strait separates Kodiak and
5 fathoms, extends about 0.3 mile offshore. Two rocks, the S one    adjoining islands from the mainland of Alaska. The strait is
of which uncovers 2 feet, are on this bank, and are about 1.7 and    reached      from  the E v ia the passages N and of  he B arren Islands
2.1 miles, respectively, N of Bert Point.                           reached from the E via the passages N and S of the Barren Islands,
2.1 miles, respectively, N of Bert Point.
                                                                    or via Kupreanof Strait.
 (557) The E arm of Portage Bay is short and terminates in a
                 large shoal lagoon extending 2.5 miles NE. A stream enters  (569) From Barren Islands to Cape Ikolik, depths ranging from
t hrough the flaots-at the head of the lagoonenters    80 fathoms in the N end to 140 fathoms in the S entrance will be
                                                                    found in midchannel. Along the E shore, the 100-fathom curve is
  (558) Shag Bluff is on the S side of Portage Bay, 2.4 miles S of00-fathom curve is
                                                                    from 1 to 3 miles off the various headlands. Suitable depths for
Bert Point. A group of rocks, bare and awash, the highest, 10 feet,    from 1 to 3 miles off the various headlands. Suitable depths for
is about I mile W of the bluff. Between Shag Bluff and the head of    temporary anchorage will be found near the shores in most places.
the E arm, a bank covered less than 3 fathoms, extends about 0.4     (570)  In thick weather when not sure of the position, depths
mile offshore. A shoal covered 3s'2 fathoms, is on this bank about    should not be shoaled less than 50 fathoms. For deep-draft vessels
                 ~~~~0.5 mile SW of Bert Point.  ~it is considered safer to favor the E shore.
0.5 mile SW of Bert Point.
  (559) A good anchorage is about 0.5 mile SE of a 44-foot pinna-     (571)  Currents-The limited current data available for Shelikof
cle rock at the head of Sulua Bay in 10 fathoms, mud bottom.        Strait indicate that the flood sets into the strait from both ends.
  (560)  Routes, Alitak Bay.-Coming from the W, steer 0750 for        (572) Current observations have been made for short periods at
88 miles from Foggy Cape bearing 327ï¿½, 10 miles. This will lead    various anchorages used by surveying vessels near the shore. On
to a position in the middle of the entrance to Alitak Bay 3.6 miles    the W side of the strait currents of I knot have been recorded, set-
1450 from Cape Alitak. The southernmost peak, 2,215 feet, on    ting alongshore in either direction, with the current in the SW
Kodiak Island should be about 30 on the port bow while passing    direction predominating. Apparently the current is less along the
Cape Alitak on the course given.                                    W coast of Afognak Island than on the opposite side of the strait.
  (561) If following the SW coast of Kodiak Island in approaching     (573) At the NE entrance to the strait in the vicinity of Dark
Alitak Bay, follow the routes given later in this chapter-Cape Kar-    Island and Latax Rocks, heavy tide rips, variable in position, are
luk to Cape Alitak bearing 0100, 1.5 miles. Then steer 121ï¿½ for 2.7    frequent; strong tidal currents are encountered along the coast of
miles to clear the shoal making SE from Cape Alitak. This will    Shuyak Island.
lead to the midentrance position 3.6 miles 145ï¿½ from Cape Alitak.    (574) Weather.-NE winds invariably bring rain and thick
  (562) To enter Lazy Bay: (1) From Alitak Bay midentrance    weather, and it is from this direction that most of the heavy
position given above, steer 015ï¿½ for about 5.5 miles until the S    weather comes.
shore of Lazy Bay is abeam. Then change to 309ï¿½ until Egg Island     (575) SE winds generally bring clouds, but may be accompanied
is abeam on the starboard hand, 350 yards, then change to 284ï¿½    by either rain or fair weather.




174                                                  5. KODIAK ISLAND


 (576) SW and W winds are invariably accompanied by fine clear   . (590) Shag Island, a group of grass-covered islets, is 36 feet
weather, but they often blow with great force. The SW gale is per-    high and 0.9 mile W of Party Cape. A bare rock, 3 feet high, is 0.6
haps the most to be dreaded in Shelikof Strait, as it raises a short,    mile N of Shag Island. A shoal with a least depth of 4 fathoms is
heavy sea that is trying to a small vessel.                       about 1.7 miles NW of the islets.
 (577) S winds generally bring haze, which is sometimes so thick   (591) Wonder Bay, SE of Shag Island, is rock strewn and
as to resemble fog.                                               should not be entered except by launches with local knowledge.
 (578) NW winds bring fair weather and a clear atmosphere;         (592) Gull Island, 2.8 miles SW of Party Cape, has a distinctive
however, in the wake of the Katmai region, the air may be hazy    dome-shaped top, grass covered, and 83 feet high. Several large
due to volcanic dust.                                             reddish rocks are to the N of it. It marks the entrance to Western
 (579) During the early spring NW gales are often accompanied    Inlet, which is shallow and foul. Gull Island is connected to the
with freezing weather and vessels are in danger of becoming iced    large island at the entrance of Western Inlet by a sandspit which
down. Small craft especially should hug the NW shore under such    bares at minus tides. This area is extremely foul.
conditions, so that they may seek shelter before the icing becomes  (593) Big Bay, 2.5 miles S of Gull Island, is of considerable
serious.                                                          size, having a main arm branching into four smaller arms at its
 (580) Gales in this region last without intermission anywhere    head. The main arm has a controlling depth of 21/4 fathoms, and
from 1 to 3 days.                                                 although it affords protection in NE weather, it should not be
 (581) NE winds are generally accompanied by a low barometer    attempted without local knowledge, as its entrance is obstructed
and SW winds by a high barometer, but the rule is not invariable.    by numerous rocks, many of which uncover. The smaller arms are
The barometer is of little or no value in foretelling the weather, as    not accessible except to very small craft.
it accompanies rather than precedes corresponding conditions.      (594) In 1971, the 231-foot NOAA Ship RAINIER anchored a
The slope of the barometric curve is apt to change suddenly, the    number of times off the W  side of Shuyak Island in about
weather changing with equal suddenness. A sure sign of rainy    58033.6'N., 152ï¿½42.4'W., 1.7 miles NW of Eagle Cape, in 18 fath-
weather and wind from the NE is the gathering of clouds on the    oms for protection from E winds. The ship reported that the
NE side of the mountains.                                         anchor nearly always dragged some when dropped before setting
 (582) During strong W winds, the atmosphere often becomes    in rocky bottom. The holding quality was fair, though on one
filled with a fine volcanic ash reducing visibility to I mile or less.    occasion no dragging was experienced in winds of 50 knots.
 (583) Blinding snowstorms are frequent in early spring.
 (584) In May-August 1975, the NOAA Ship FAIRWEATHER,              (595) Chart 16605.-Shuyak Strait, between Shuyak and
working in Shelikof Strait, reported:the following weather condi-    Afognak Islands, is not recommended as a through passage for
tions: July and August afforded the best weather and May the    ships because of its restricted E entrance and broken bottom in the
worst. Storms with winds to gale force occurred about twice a    seaward approach from the E. Its W approach in Shelikof Strait is
month. Some snow showers were experienced in May.                 characterized by less uneven bottom and the W entrance is mainly
 (585) The wind in Shelikof Strait usually blows in only two    clear and 1.5 miles wide.
directions, either "up" (SW to NE) or "down." The direction usu-   (596)- Entering Shuyak Strait from Shelikof Strait, vessels pass
ally depends on whether the area S of Kodiak Island contains a    about 1 or 1.5 miles N of Rocky Island and head for the middle of
low pressure (when down the strait winds result accompanied by    the strait on a course of about 113ï¿½.
driving rain) or a high pressure (when up the strait winds result).  (597) Islets and rocks, which uncover, are on both sides of the W
Winds and seas can increase suddenly and subside just as quickly.  approach to Shuyak Strait. The best water is found by favoring the
 (586) During windy conditions, wind force is sharply higher in    N side of this approach.
the vicinity of, and even in the lee of the capes and point which  (598) Shuyak Strait is apparently clear of dangers in midchannel
extend into Shelikof Strait. During these conditions, entry well    except as noted below. Soundings indicate depths of 60 to 80 fath-
into the bays is necessary for refuge. With "down" wind condi-    oms near midchannel as far E as Redfox Bay. Wooded hills, about
tions, seas on the W  side become considerably worse as one    400 feet high, line the rocky shores on both sides, and there is
progresses NE from Kukak Bay, and with "up" wind conditions,    practically no low flatland.
the same applies along the W side from Cape Kuliak to the SW.      (599) Rocky Island, 4 miles W from Lighthouse Point, is on the
 (587) Weather conditions in Shelikof Strait can also be of wide    S side of the W approach to Shuyak Strait. It is a bare rock 12 feet
variance from one location to another at any one time. However,    high and about 100 feet wide. Midway between Rocky Island and
as a rule, weather and seas are much more amenable on the    Lighthouse Point, but S of a line between them, is a reef bare at
Kodiak Island side of the strait than on the mainland side. In 1975,    half tide. The reef is marked by kelp and surrounded by shoal
there was no longer much evidence of volcanic dust in the air.    water.
 (588) The W coasts of Shuyak and Afognak Islands trend 2180.      (600) The outermost danger on the N side of the W approach to
The distance from the northernmost Latax Rocks, described ear-    Shuyak Strait is a group of submerged rocks with a least depth of
lier in this chapter, to Raspberry Cape is 48 miles. From Raspberry    21/4 fathoms about 3 miles 052ï¿½ from Rocky Island. A rock baring
Cape the E coast of Shelikof Strait trends 230ï¿½ for 45 miles to    at minus tide is 400 yards NE of the rocky shoal, and the area
Cape Karluk.                                                      inside of them to Green Island and thence to the shore at Neketa
                                                                   Bay is foul.
 (589) Chart 16604.-The W side of Shuyak Island is irregular       (601) Neketa Bay is a small bay E of Green Island, very shoal,
and fringed by a chain of islets and rocks about I mile offshore,    with a reef extending nearly across its entrance.
Between them and the island are many rocks and kelp patches.       (602) A rocky bank of 12 to 17 fathoms is about 1.5 miles NE of
The outer ones are nearly on a line through Gull Island from Black    Rocky Island. In approaching the W entrance of Shuyak Strait it
Cape.                                                             would be advisable to pass N of the bank.




                                                       5. KODIAK ISLAND                                                        175


 (603) Alligator Island, so called from the resemblance from    about 100 yards in diameter, partly grass covered and wooded.
certain directions, is grass covered, 0.3 mile in diameter, and 64    The kelp marking this spot usually is drawn under by the current.
feet high; the island is 1.3 miles S from Rocky Island. Alligator   (617) Cape Current Narrows, about 1 mile long, forms the E
Island Light (58028.5'N., 152047. 'W.), 72 feet above the water,    end of Shuyak Strait. Rocky obstructions in the narrows near the E
is shown from a small house with a red and white diamond-shaped    end greatly reduce the width of the channels on either side of
daymark on the NW side of the island.                              them.
 (604) Cape Newland, the SW extremity of Shuyak Island, is 75       (618) The Shuyak Island shore of the narrows is abrupt, wooded,
feet high and grass covered to the tree line. Rocks awash at vari-    and about 500 feet high. The Afognak side is grass covered for
ous stages of the tide, are detached 500 yards W  and about 600    about 200 feet back from the shore and about 50 feet high with
yards S from the cape. Broken bottom extends into the entrance to    level top and abrupt shore.
Shuyak Strait about one-third the way from the cape to Lighthouse   (619) In the middle of the W part of the narrows, general depths
Point.                                                             are about 81/2 fathoms or more. In the E part of the narrows, bro-
 (605) Lighthouse Point, 4.2 miles E of Alligator Island and    ken ground with numerous rocks awash extends almost com-
grass covered to the tree line, is on the S side of the W entrance to    pletely across from Cape Current to Shuyak Island. Two narrow
Shuyak Strait. The bight just E of the point is foul. Lighthouse    channels lead through the broken ground, one about 450 yards
Point Light  (58ï¿½28.9'N., 152039.2'W.), 60 feet above the water,    NW of Cape Current, and the other about 75 yards off the S shore
is shown from a small house with a red and white diamond-shaped    of Shuyak Island. The former channel has a least found depth of
daymark on the point.                                              41/2 fathoms; the latter channel has a least found depth of 51/2 fath-
 (606) Shuyak Harbor is about 1.3 miles N of Lighthouse Point    oms. Mariners are advised to seek local knowledge before
and SE of Cape Newland. Two bare rocks, 12 and 5 feet high and    attempting to make passage through Cape Current Narrows.
100 yards apart, are in midentrance to the harbor; they are sur-    (620) The tidal currents at Cape Current Narrows are strong,
rounded by rocks awash and are nearly connected at low water. A    and bad tide rips are frequent. Current predictions may be
pinnacle rock, covered 11/4 fathoms, is E of the midentrance rocks,    obtained from the Tidal Current Tables.
leaving a narrow channel between it and the E entrance point. The   (621) A large kelp patch is NE of the E entrance to the narrows
better channel into Shuyak Harbor is W of the midentrance rocks.    just S of Big Fort Island.
The harbor has about 200 yards of swinging room. The salteries in   (622) Bluefox Bay, indenting the shore of Afognak Island SW
this harbor have been abandoned and the wharves are no longer    from Lighthouse Point, has an entrance about 2 miles wide.
maintained.                                                         (623) Teck Island, Hogg Island, and Bear Island are the three
 (607)  Port Lawrence is a bight on the N shore of Shuyak Strait,    principal islands overspreading the entrance and the area inside of
1.5 miles from the W  entrance. A small grass-covered 10-foot    Bluefox Bay. The buildings of an abandoned herring reduction
islet, surrounded by foul ground, is in the E part of the bight. The    plant, now used as family dwellings and for the storage of fishing
wharf at the abandoned herring plant is in bad condition and unus-    gear, are on the S side of Hogg Island.
able.                                                               (624)  Three channels lead into Bluefox Bay. The W channel has
 (608) Port William, 0.5 mile E of Port Lawrence, is 0.3 mile    been used by small craft, but it is foul and is not recommended.
wide and 0.5 mile long. The wharf of a former cannery is in disre-  (625) The E channel is the one in general use, but it also has sev-
pair.                                                              eral dangers and should be navigated with caution. A 41/4-fathom
                                                                    spot is in midchannel about 200 yards off the middle of the E side
 (6o9) Rocks awash are about 250 yards offshore between Port
Lawrence and Port William. Nearby and closer inshore is a rock    of Hogg Island. A rock with a least depth of 11/2 fathoms is 375
about 10 feet high.                                                yards E from the SE point of Bear Island. A rock awash is about
                                                                    0.5 mile S from the same point. At this rock the tangents of Hogg
 (610) Redfox Bay, the largest indentation on the S side of
                                                                    and Bear Islands are nearly in range. A rock with 21/4 fathoms over
thuyak Strant, has general depths or less than 20 fathoms, mud     it is 200 yards off the SE side of the small island just S of Bear
bottom, and affords excellent anchorage in any weather.            Island.
 (611)  An islet, 158 feet high, and wooded on its S half, is in the  (626) To enter Bluefox Bay, vessels are reported to hold the
middle of the entrance. W of the islet, about 100 yards off the W  course into Shuyak Strait until the E channel opens; then to
shore of the bay, is a rock awash. Freight steamers use the channel    change course to about 1770 and proceed through the E entrance
between these rocks and the islet, which is about 200 yards wide    in midchannel, heading for a wooded point on the E side of the
and clear, and anchor just S of the islet to discharge cargo to boats    bay near its head, but favoring the W side of the channel near the
and barges; swinging room of about 700 yards is available here.    41-fathom spot mentioned above. Navigation beyond Bear Island
 (612) A rock awash, unmarked by kelp, is off the entrance to a    is difficult, and the chart should be followed closely.
small cove on the E shore of the bay 0.8 mile S from the entrance
islet.
                                                                     (627) Chart 16604.-The W  coast of Afognak Island from
 (613) Tide-The diurnal range of tide in Redfox Bay is 13.7 feet.  Shuyak Strait to Black Cape is irregular, rocky, and wooded to an
 (614) The bay, about 1 mile E of Redfox Bay, is foul in places    elevation of about 700 feet. Some grass appears on the points. The
and has an irregular bottom.                                       small island about halfway between Black Cape and Alligator
 (615) Daylight Harbor is 0.5 mile SE of Port William. The her-    Island is about 0.3 mile in diameter, 48 feet high, and covered with
ring plant here has been abandoned, and the wharf is in ruins.    grass. Inside a line from Black Cape to Alligator Island the water
From this harbor to Cape Current, about 3 miles, there are no    is generally foul with numerous rocks and islets.
important indentations.                                             (628) Devil Inlet, 3 miles NE from Black Cape, has wooded
 (616) A dangerous patch of small rocky heads with a least depth    shores. About 0.3 mile inside the entrance, rapids run heavily
of 31/4 fathoms is in about the middle of the strait 2.3 miles from    except for short periods of nearly slack water preceding and fol-
its E end. This danger is abreast of two small islets, the W one is    lowing high tide. The inlet level inside the rapids is about 11 to 12




176                                                   5. KODIAK ISLAND


feet above low water. Vessels drawing 3 feet or less may enter      (635) The lower levels of Afognak Island in general are wooded
about 21/2 hours before high tide. Numerous rocks exist in the    with the exception of the E coast and the SW end S of Paramanof
channel and caution is required in making the passage. The pre-    Bay.
ferred time to navigate this passage is during the slack before ebb  (636)  Cape Paramanof is the NW end of the peninsula included
which occurs about 2 hours after high water. Both slack water    between Paramanof and Malina Bays. It is a low tongue of land
periods last for about 5 minutes. Within the inlet, shoal areas exist    projecting 0.5 mile N from the mountains. A reef is on the N side
off the inshore points of the two islands about I mile S of the    of the cape inside Paramanof Bay, and a part of it, about 0.5 mile
entrance. Passage must be made to the W of the northernmost    from shore, is awash.
island, thence SE between the islands leading to the S portion of   (637) The peninsula between Paramanof and Malina Bays is
the inlet where depths in excess of 20 fathoms exist. The entrance    marked by two mountain ridges trending E, with a small stream in
outside the rapids is a good anchorage in heavy weather for small    the valley between. The land is grass covered, with bare rocks in
craft.                                                             places, and has no timber. The N ridge rises in steep, grassy slopes
 (629)  Black Cape is low and grassy at the end, and rises gradu-    to 1,830 feet, with a saddle behind it and then extends E with
ally in a narrow heavily wooded ridge to a prominent bald knob,    about the same height. Tanaak Cape is the N point at the entrance
1,151 feet high. Bare and submerged rocks extend a short distance    of Malina Bay.
off the cape, and a reef, mostly showing above water, is on its S
side. A fair anchorage protected from SE weather can be found 1.2   (638)  Charts 16576, 16594, 16597.-Malina Bay, indenting the
miles NE of the cape in 17 fathoms, rocky bottom.                  W coast of Afognak Island, is between the mountainous peninsu-
 (630)  Foul Bay, between Black Cape and Ban Island, is about 4    las terminating in Tanaak and Steep Capes. It is about 10 miles
miles wide at its entrance. The bay extends E about 4 miles where    long and is a secure harbor. Water can be obtained from numerous
it divides into a N arm extending E for about 2.5 miles and a S arm    small streams. Some timber is found near the head of the bay and
extending S for about 4 miles. The bay was surveyed in 1973, and    in some of the valleys. Steep Cape and the high cliff at the S point
depths in excess of 10 fathoms were found throughout most of the    at the entrance and a prominent slide about I mile SE of Tanaak
bay. Vessels wishing to enter Foul Bay are advised to parallel the    Cape on the N side of the bay mark the entrance.
Ban Island shore about 0.4 mile off, passing S of the island 1 mile  (639) The bay, 2.5 to 3 miles wide for nearly 4 miles, narrows to
E of the N point of Ban Island. The 231-foot NOAA Ship RAIN-       a neck about 1.5 miles long with a least width of 0.4 mile, and then
IER used this passage to enter and anchor about 0.5 mile off the    separates into two arms. The S arm, known as Malka Bay, extends
point dividing the bay into N and S arms. The bottom throughout    from the S side of the neck 1.5 miles SE. The E arm is about 800
the bay is broken with numerous rocky areas, and several attempts    yards wide near its entrance; it then opens out, forming a basin
at anchoring may be necessary in any given area before finding    about 2 miles long and about 1.2 miles wide. A shallow arm, about
soft bottom. Small craft may find shelter in the numerous coves    0.2 mile wide, extends 2 miles E from the E end of the basin.
within the bay. The SE arm of Foul Bay leads to an extension of     (640) The outer part of the bay is clear, with the exception of a
Paramanof Bay and may be navigated by small vessels steering    rock awash 0.2 mile from shore in the bight on the S side about 4
midchannel courses.                                                miles inside the entrance. Rocks awash extend 300 yards off the S
                                                                    side at the entrance to the neck, and 0.5 mile W of the island in the
 (631) Ban Island, separating Foul Bay from Paramanof Bay, is
mountainous with steep slopes on all but the E end. The island is    entrance of Malka Bay. The depths are suitable for anchorage 0.3
about 6 miles long in an E-W direction, and about 1.8 miles wide    to 0.4 mile from shore nearly anywhere in the bay. Holding is
in a N-S direction. Kelp is close to its W end.                    good in 12 to 18 fathoms, sloping bottom, along both shores about
                                                                    1 mile inside the entrance. An anchorage with fair holding is avail-
 (632) Paramanof Bay, between Ban Island and Cape Para-    able on the N side of its E end, about 0.3 mile W of a rocky islet,
manof, was surveyed in 1973 and found to be deep and nearly    and the same distance from the shore NE, in 15 fathoms. This
clear of hazards. In the outer bay, it is recommended to favor the    anchorage is exposed to W weather, and NE winds sometimes
Ban Island side when entering. Care must be taken to avoid two    blow with considerable force.
rocks which are about 4.5 miles E of Cape Paramanof. The west-      (641) In the neck off the entrance of Malka Bay is an island 0.4
ernmost rock is bare and is 0.3 mile 025ï¿½ from a rocky islet close    mile long and 115 feet high, with a clump of trees near its middle.
to the S shore of the bay. A submerged rock, covered about 5 feet,    There is no safe passage between it and the shore SE. An islet 30
is 0.5 mile 065ï¿½ from the same rocky islet.                        feet high is on the S side of the neck 0.4 mile E of the island, and
 (633) An excellant anchorage is in the cove on the S side of the    foul ground extends 225 yards from the S shore just E of the islet.
bay about 5 miles E of Cape Paramanof. Vessels should pass N of    A rock, 15 feet high, with a small one close W, is 400 yards NE of
the rocks mentioned above, thence steer a S course to the center of    the islet. The best channel is between the 30-foot islet and the 15-
the cove where good protection is afforded from all but strong NW  foot rock. A rock awash is 400 yards E of the 15-foot rock and
winds. Holding ground is good in 20 fathoms, soft bottom, with    over 300 yards from the N shore.
ample swinging room. Smaller vessels may anchor closer in. The      (642) To pass through the neck, pass 200 yards N of the island,
long straight inlet leading S from this cove can be entered by small    steer 121ï¿½, and pass 100 yards S of the 15-foot rock, in the middle
craft at one-half tide or higher.                                  of the neck.
 (634) The E end of Paramanof Bay narrows to a pass with a          (643) The basin has depths of 30 to 47 fathoms in its W half and
small wooded island in the center. Passage S of this island pro-    shoals gradually E, affording secure anchorage. A rock covered at
vides the best water with a minimum of 41/2 fathoms-at midchan-    high water is 400 yards W from the N point at the entrance to the
nel. Current measurements just W  of the island indicate the    narrow arm extending E, and a shoal extends 600 yards SW from a
existence of weak tidal currents, less than 1 knot. The two bays    point on the N shore 0.4 mile N of the rock. The best anchorage is
extending SE from Ban Island are clear of hazards and gradually    about 0.4 mile off the bight at the N end of the basin, with the
shoal towards the streams at the head of each bay.                 entrance (neck) just closed, in 15 to 18 fathoms, sticky bottom.





                                                      5. KODIAK ISLAND                                                        177


 (644) Malka Bay is a secure anchorage with a clear width of 0.2    the W. The NE of these two bights is clear; the SW bight is foul,
mile. The NW point of the island in the entrance should be given a    and coming in from the N vessels should keep at least 800 yards
berth of over 100 yards; a rock awash is 100 yards from the shore    offshore.
SW of the same point.                                               (655) N of the entrance to Raspberry Strait and S of Steep Cape
 (645) To enter Malka Bay, steer 163ï¿½, pass 150 yards S of the    is a small bight with suitable protection from E storms and where
NW point of the island, and follow the SW shore of the arm at a    anchorage may be had in 10 to 15 fathoms, sand and gravel bot-
distance of about 250 yards. Anchor in the broad part about 0.6    tom. The shore of this bight is a gravel beach just N of which are
mile from the head, in about 10 fathoms, sticky bottom. A flat    low grass-covered hills of glacial gravel.
extends nearly 0.4 mile from the head.                              (656) About 1.5 miles NW of Dolphin Point, vessels may anchor
 (646) High and low water in Malina Bay occur about 10 minutes    off the NE shore of the strait, in 12 to 15 fathoms, sand bottom,
earlier than at Seldovia. The diurnal range of the tide is 14.5 feet.  with good protection from E storms about 400 to 500 yards off-
 (647) Raspberry Strait, between Raspberry Island and    shore.
Afognak Island, is about 16 miles long, uniformly narrow, and       (657) Fair anchorage for deep-draft vessels is 0.9 mile about
about 1 mile wide from Shelikof Strait, at its NW end, to Afognak    210ï¿½ from Dolphin Point Light 3, in 12 to 15 fathoms, mud bot-
Strait at its SE end.                                              tom.
 (648) The approach to the NW entrance is clear of dangers, no      (658) The best anchorage in the strait for large vessels with pro-
known shoals or detached rocks are more than 100 yards offshore.    tection from E storms is 2 miles SE of the mouth of Muskomee
The Shelikof Strait sides of Raspberry Island and Afognak Island    Bay and 600 yards off the NE shore. A prominent white cabin,
are rugged with barren cliffs and bluffs except where valleys make    which bears between 250ï¿½ and 270ï¿½, is at the Port Vita Cannery
into the interior of the islands.                                  ruins. Depths are 12 to 18 fathoms, sticky bottom.
 (649) The SE end of Raspberry Strait ends in two passes which      (659) Another possible anchorage is located in deeper water, in
lead into Afognak Strait around Little Raspberry Island. Both    midstrait off Selief Bay in about 18 fathoms, sand bottom.
passes are dry at from 2 to 3 feet above low water, and numerous    (660) Anchorage for small vessels with good protection in any
reefs border the shores of Raspberry Island in this vicinity and of    weather may be found in Selief Bay.
Little Raspberry Island. However, the NE pass is used at high       (661) Dangers.-There are no off-lying dangers or shoals at the
water by local boats drawing less than 8 feet. Neither of these is    NW approach and entrance to Raspberry Strait. From the entrance
recommended without local knowledge.                               of the strait to Selief Bay, the only dangers are inside 300 yards of
 (650) Steep Cape, also known as Twin Heads, about 2.5 miles    the strait shore except for a shoal of 31/2 fathoms about in mid-
N of the NW entrance to Raspberry Strait, is the most prominent    strait, 0.75 mile 1249 from Dolphin Point Light 3. This shoal is
headland between Malina Bay and the strait. Its bare, gray rocky    passed to the N as broken bottom is between the shoal and the
sides rise abruptly from the water's edge to its twin summits,    gravel point on the S side of the strait.
1,535 and 1,562 feet high. A light-colored rockslide is quite       (662) From Selief Bay to the SE end of the strait are numerous
noticeable. A prominent 78-foot-high pinnacle rock is about 100    shoals and dangers, and local knowledge is required even by small
yards offshore; it is indistinguishable when seen against the cape. ; boats. Deep-draft vessels should not proceed beyond the entrance
 (651) Between Steep Cape and the entrance to the strait is a    to Selief Bay. Between this bay and The Narrows, are four rocky
bight with a gravel beach at the foot of a valley blocked by a bluff    shoals well offshore; one of these has a least depth of 11 feet and
of glacial moraine about 250 feet high. The shore between the    is in midchannel about 0.4 mile N of Tiger Cape. From this cape
cape and this bight consists of a steep gravel bluff, 213 feet high,    SE to The Narrows, sandspits make well out into the strait from
grass covered at the top, and giving the appearance of a tableland.    many of the points.
The bluff is in the form of a point from which shoals extend for    (663) Routes.-The NW entrance to Raspberry Strait may be
0.5 mile offshore.                                                 approached from any direction by keeping I mile offshore. Come
 (652) The rounding point of the headland on the SW side of the    into the middle of the entrance off Raspberry Strait Light 1 and
entrance to Raspberry Strait when seen from the SW is somewhat    steer a course 1380 for about 4 miles until Dolphin Point Light 3 is
similar to Steep Cape. However, its cliffs and rockslides are cov-    abeam about 700 yards. Thence steer 090ï¿½ for about 1.5 miles
ered with grassy patches and do not have the general gray appear-    until abeam the end of a low gravel point. Pass this gravel point
ance which makes Steep Cape more prominent. The summit of    about 0.4 mile and change course to 1200. Hold this course for
this headland is 1,996 feet high and the slopes are steep. A pinna-    about 1 mile and when the abandoned Iron Creek Cannery comes
cle rock, 25 feet high off the SW shore, makes a good landmark    abeam, follow the middle of the strait on a course 1510.
when not seen against the foot of the headland. Between this head-  (664) Approaching The Narrows at the SE end of Raspberry
land and Raspberry Cape are bights from which low valleys lead    Strait from Kupreanof Strait set a course 0070 with the E end of
into the interior of Raspberry Island. The shores of these bights are    Little Raspberry Island ahead. Approaching from the E, that is
gravel and the valleys are easily distinguished from offshore.     from Afognak Strait, set a course 2700 with the S tangent of Little
  (653) Anchorages.-Since Raspberry Strait itself is not wide,    Raspberry Island ahead, and pass 500 yards S of the foul ground S
small vessels may anchor along the shores throughout the strait    of Shoal Point. Give the E tip of Little Raspberry Island a berth of
where depths appear suitable, depending upon the protection    400 yards as reefs make out 200 yards off the high-water line.
required. The following anchorages are recommended for deep-    Enter the pass favoring the N side and pass about 100 yards off
draft vessels:                                                     Nochlega Point and the next point which is adjacent. These two
  (654) On the NW shore of Raspberry Island in Shelikof Strait    points form a double point with a short gravel beach between
are two bights, with gravel beaches, about 3 and 5 miles SW of the    them. The Narrows uncovers several feet and is not recommended
entrance to Raspberry Strait. At the head of these bights deep val-    to vessels without local knowledge. This pass can be negotiated at
leys extend inland. Anchorage may be had in 10 to 15 fathoms,    high water springs by vessels up to 8-foot draft with extreme cau-
sand bottom, with good protection from E storms but exposed to    tion.




178                                                   5. KODIAK ISLAND


 (665) Tides and currents.-At Dolphin Point the diurnal range    strait another 100 yards or more. One of these is on the NW side of
of tide is 14.0 feet. The tide at Tiger Cape is 5 minutes later than at    the strait about opposite Selief Bay.
Dolphin Point and the ranges are about 0.5 foot more. (See Tide     (673) Selief Bay is on the SW side of the strait about 6 miles SE
Tables.)                                                           of Dolphin Point. The outer part of the small peninsula on the E
 (666) Tidal currents in Raspberry Strait are weak, except at The    side of the entrance to Selief Bay is a grass-covered glacial hill 93
Slough and The Narrows where the range at the N end is greater    feet high, serrated at the top and the most prominent landmark SE
than the range at the S end as a result of which it is estimated that    of Dolphin Point. This bay offers good protection and anchorage
from approximately midtide to high tide and vice versa, the cur-    for small vessels in any weather, particularly from SE or E storms.
rent flows from Raspberry Strait into Afognak Strait. This current    The entrance to the bay is shoal with a bottom formation similar to
probably amounts to from 2 to 3 knots during spring tides. At    a bar and with a least depth of 8 feet. Inside the bay the best
approximately midtide the tidal level at the two ends of The Nar-    anchorage is with the end of the point at the E side of the entrance
rows is equalized and as the tide falls below midtide the current    bearing about N and in 1 /2 to 3 fathoms. The bottom is mud and
reverses and flows from SE to NW until the pass goes dry at 2.5    the W side is shoal.
feet above low water.                                               (674) Tiger Cape, about 2 miles SE of Selief Bay on the same
 (667) Weather.-W winds prevail from June to September,    side of the strait, is a low grass-covered shale point with several
mostly from the SW. This prevailing wind is attended by good    abandoned houses near the foot. More abandoned buildings of a
weather, mostly clear skies with little rain. These winds, however,    former sawmill are about 0.25 mile farther to the SE.
often blow with such force as to build up heavy seas in Shelikof    (675) The two islands opposite Tiger Cape and about 2 miles E
Strait, uncomfortable for all vessels except full-powered steamers.    of the entrance to Selief Bay are also prominent. The crests of
The storms with E winds come with a frequency of one or two per    these islands are wooded and the westernmost is 100 feet high, the
month from June to October. During the summer, July is the worst    other 160 feet.
month as the prevailing wind seems to be E attended by much rain    (676) No other landmarks are between Tiger Cape and the S end
althrough there are no severe E storms.                            of Raspberry Strait.
 (668) Raspberry Strait Light (58009.6'N., 153ï¿½13.3'W.), 50         (677) On the opposite side of the strait N of Tiger Cape is
feet above the water, is shown from a small house with a red and    Yukuk Bay, a shallow bay, about I mile wide in a NW and SE
white diamond-shaped daymark on a small grass-covered island    direction, locally known as Cottonwood Bay. This bay shoals to I
off Cape Nuniliak on the NE side of the entrance. This island    fathom about 300 yards inside the general trend of the NE shore of
blends with the shore and it is difficult to pick up except when    the strait. Throughout the bay the depth varies from 2 to 8 feet. A
approaching from the N. Inside the strait, about I mile SE from    long gravel and rocky spit making into the bay from the N point at
Raspberry Strait Light on the NE side is a prominent light-gray    the entrance uncovers. Favor the opposite side in entering.
rocky bluff, which rises from the water's edge 150 to 200 feet      (678) Another bay, locally known as Waskanareska Bay, is E
high.                                                              of Tiger Cape and on the SE side of a gravel spit which separates it
 (669)  Both shores of Raspberry Strait, from the NW entrance for    from Yukuk Bay. Depths vary from 3 to 6 feet. The inner part of
about 7 miles, consist of rock ledges and numerous short gravel    the bay and the part along the NE shore for 200 yards offshore
beaches between small rocky points. The shores rise steeply to the    uncovers. The E half of the entrance is foul and uncovers.
mountains except where valleys intervene. Close along the SW        (679). Through The Narrows, which is the pass on the NE side
shore about I mile inside the entrance are a number of off-lying    of Little Raspberry Island, and the approaches in Afognak Strait,
pinnacle rocks, 5 to 41 feet high.                                 the shores are mostly rock ledges with many off-lying dangers,
 (670) Dolphin Point Light 3 (58006.3'N., 153ï¿½09.1'W.), 17 feet    some of which are dangerous to small craft.
above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a square       (680) Rocks and shoals too numerous to mention are in the
green daymark on a small rocky islet off the end of the point, 4    passes among Deranof Island, Little Raspberry Island, and Rasp-
miles inside the strait. Dolphin Point, when approached from    berry Island. The pass on the W side of Little Raspberry Island is
Shelikof Strait, appears as a long grass- and tree-covered point    The Slough. These passes are used only by small vessels with
with several low hills or nobs between it and the foot of the steep    local knowledge, and at high tide only.
slope inland.                                                       (681) The W side of Raspberry Island is mountainous and grass
 (671) Muskomee Bay, receding 1.5 miles, is about 3 miles E of    covered, the principal points are three high cliffs, between which
Dolphin Point on the E side of the strait. This bay is not suitable as    are two deep valleys trending E. The S valley, about the middle of
an anchorage for large vessels, and it offers little protection for    the island, is especially low and extends through to Onion Bay.
smaller vessels as E and W winds draw through the deep valleys at    The S side of Raspberry Island and Kupreanof Strait have been
the head of the bay. Along its shores are outcropping ledges and a    described earlier in this chapter.
few gravel beaches. The bottom near the head is rocky. At the S     (682) Viekoda Bay is on the E side of Shelikof Strait between
side of the entrance, 200 yards off the shore, is a reef which    Outlet Cape and Uganik Island. It extends ESE about 15 miles into
uncovers 71/2 feet. Off the N shore at the entrance to the bay are    Kodiak Island to a narrow head. Uganik East Passage enters
three rocky shoals with least depths of 6 to 20 feet. The head of the    Viekoda Bay on the S side about 7 miles inside the entrance. Good
bay is foul except around the N side of an island in the head of the    anchorage for moderate sized vessels in 12 to 17 fathoms may be
bay.                                                               had 0.5 to 1 mile NW from the islands 1.5 miles from the head of
 (672) From Muskomee Bay, the shores of the SE part of the    Viekoda Bay.
strait consist of boulder and gravel beaches, and several low,      (683) Off the entrance, about 3 miles from Outlet Cape, is a
grass-covered shale or gravel points. The terrain back of these    bank on which the least depth found is 63/4 fathoms.
shores is not as steep as in the NW part of the strait and is tim-  (684) A narrow point, its end detached, extends 0.4 mile from
bered from Dolphin Point. The points extend from 200 to 300    Uganik Island 1 mile E from its N end. Broken ground, with
yards and have shoals or outcropping ledges extending into the    depths of 4 and 5 fathoms, extends 0.6 mile N from the point. A




                                                      5. KODIAK ISLAND                                                       179


fair anchorage in S weather is in the bight on the E side of the    East Point, shoals extend 0.5 mile from the N shore for 1 mile
point, 0.3 to 0.4 mile from shore, in 10 to 15 fathoms.           from its head. From this bight a broad, low divide extends across
 (685) A rock covered 43/4 fathoms, which should be avoided, is   the island.
0.6 mile from Uganik Island and 2.5 miles NW of Naugolka           (698) Anchorage in 12 fathoms, good holding ground, and good
Point.                                                            protection from all except W weather, can be found 0.45 mile off
 (686) This point has an islet near it, and a rock that uncovers, is   the N shore of the passage in 57ï¿½50.7'N., 153ï¿½21.8'W.
0.8 mile E of the islet and 0.4 mile from the S shore of Viekoda   (699) Rocks that uncover, extend 0.5 mile from the S shore of
Bay. Depths of 3 to 5 fathoms extend 0.3 mile N of the rock.      the passage 1.8 miles E of East Point, and 0.5 mile farther E rocks
 (687) Uganik Passage and Uganik East Passage border the S    make out 600 yards on the NW side of a point on the S shore.
and E sides, respectively, of Uganik Island, and connect Viekoda
and Uganik Bays.                                                   (700)  Charts 16576, 16597.-Uganik Bay is on the E side of
 (688) That part of Uganik East Passage on the NE side of    Shelikof Strait between Cape Uganik and Miners Point. In general
Uganik Island is clear of dangers in midchannel except for a flat   the bay and its arms, with exception of East Arm, have depths too
that extends about 600 yards from the E shore, about 5 miles SSE    great for anchoring. Several small shoal spots rise abruptly from
of Naugolka Point, leaving a channel 350 yards wide. An islet is   the general level of the bottom. One of these is in midchannel
close to Uganik Island in the bight about 0.2 mile SW of the flat.  about 1 mile NW from Mink Point at the junction of East and
 (689)  Terror Bay extends several miles S from the turn of    South Arms, and two others are in the passage between Sally
Uganik East Passage at the SE end of Uganik Island. The main    Island and the shore at Starr Point. The shores of Uganik Bay rise
part of the bay is clear with the exception of three rocks about 300    abruptly from cliffs in places and are generally covered with grass
yards from the W shore, as indicated on the chart. Secure anchor-    and alder bushes.
age for vessels of any size is 3 miles above the entrance and about
                                                                     (701) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-
 )2.5 m      ies from the he ad   of  gthe bay, i n 7to 15 fathoms.  sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of
 (690) The part of Uganik Passage S of Uganik Island is 9 miles    Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)
long from the SE end of Uganik Island to East Point, where it joins
                                                                     (702) The Kodiak Island area is served by the Alaska Marine
Uganik Bay.                                                       Pilots and Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.
 (691) A rock that uncovers, is 0.3 mile from the S side of Uganik
Island and 0.7 mile from its SE end. A 5-fathom spot is reported
                                                                   and en route to Uganik Bay can meet the pilot boat about 1.5
500 yards SE of this rock.
                                                                   miles W of East Point (57ï¿½50.5'N, 153ï¿½28.3'W.).
 (692) A peninsula, 500 feet high, extends S from Uganik Island      s       ast   nt(57 .5N., 5328.3.)
2 miles from its SE end and narrows the passage to 0.2 mile. From  (704) The pilot boat canbe contacted by calling "UGANIK
the point on the S shore SE of the peninsula, a ledge, which    Ba prearranged frequen VHF-FM channel            .
uncovers, makes out nearly half way across the narrowest part of    a prearranged frequency between pilot and agent/vessel.
the passage. Vessels should favor the SE end of the peninsula in   (705) Cape Uganik, the NW end of Uganik Island, is low and
this part of the passage.                                         flat for about 0.3 mile back and then rises 1,200 to 1,500 feet. Foul
 (693) An island is in the middle of the passage W of the penin-    ground extends 1.5 miles S from the cape and 0.3 mile or more
sula. Several rocks, submerged and bare at various stages of the    offshore. Vessels should give the cape a berth of I mile.
tide, are in the vicinity and W of the island. The more prominent  (706) Noisy Islands, a group of two, are 0.5 and 0.6 mile from
of these dangers are: a rock that uncovers, about 100 yards NE; a    Uganik Island and 2.5 miles SW from Cape Uganik. The N island
bare rock 0.3 mile NW, and a rock that uncovers, 250 yards N of    is rolling with round-topped, grass-covered hills, the highest of
it.                                                               which is about 192 feet. Noisy Islands Light (57ï¿½55.9'N.,
 (694) Vessels from E may pass N of the foul ground, and clear    153033.8'W.), 80 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton
these dangers, by following the SW shore of the peninsula at a dis-    tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the W
tance of 200 yards, taking care to avoid a rock awash that is 350    bluff of the N island. The S island is also grass-covered, but is low
yards offshore, until the island is abaft the port beam, and then    and flat. Two fine sand beaches are near the N end of this island
steer 3000 for the southernmost point of Uganik Island which    and a house is nearby. When off Uganik Bay, these islands are
shows ahead with the summit of a peninsula a little on the port    sometimes hard to pick up as they merge into the brown hills of
quarter.                                                          Uganik Island. Noisy Islands should be given a berth of I mile.
 (695)  Foul ground and rocks awash extend 0.3 mile from           (707) Noisy Passage, between Noisy Islands and Uganik Island,
Uganik Island 0.4 to 0.9 mile NW of the peninsula.                appears to be clear in midchannel with a least known depth of 7
  (696) The channel S of the island is narrower than that N. To go    fathoms. It is in constant use by small coasting vessels but it is not
through this channel from E, bring the S end of the peninsula    recommended for deep-draft vessels. Vessels using this channel
barely open from the point E, astern; and steer for the prominent    should avoid the rock awash, about 0.2 mile N of the N Noisy
point on the S shore 0.8 mile W of the island, course 2810. Keep    Islands.
close on this line, passing midway between the island and an islet  (708) Miners Point, 8 miles SW from Cape Uganik, is distinc-
near the S shore 0.3 mile SW of the island. When the islet is   tive in appearance as it terminates in three moundlike hills, the
passed, haul N and give the point a berth of over 200 yards. The    inner one is 390 feet high, and the outer one about 188 feet high.
principal dangers are: A rock that uncovers, 200 yards SE of the   (709) Broken Point, about 3.5 miles ESE of Miners Point, is
island; a rock with 8 feet over it 0.4 mile W of the island and 0.3    low and flat for 0.4 mile back and then rises to the highland back
mile N of the islet. The islet should be given a berth of over 100    of it. The outer end of the point is detached and appears as if it had
yards.                                                            been broken off. A reef, which uncovers on a 2-foot minus tide, is
  (697)  W of these dangers Uganik Passage is broad and free from    about 250 yards off the point. The point should be given a berth of
outlying dangers. In the large bight of Uganik Island 5 miles E of    0.8 mile.




180                                                  5. KODIAK ISLAND


 (710) Anchorage in 12 to 18 fathoms, fair holding ground and      (725) East Arm extends SE from Uganik Bay 7 miles S from
protected from S wind, can be found about 1 mile W of Broken    East Point. It is I mile wide at the entrance and over 3 miles long,
Point in 57ï¿½53.4'N., 153ï¿½39.0'W.                                  but a flat extends 1.5 miles from its head or 0.3 mile below the
 (711) A stream enters the bay in the bight 1.6 miles S from Bro-    unnamed island on the bight on the S side of the arm. Depths
ken Point. Good anchorage sheltered from S to W winds is off the    range from 15 fathoms at the entrance to 3 fathoms near the flats.
mouth of the stream in 8 to 15 fathoms.                           A rock 450 yards NW from the island near the S shore uncovers 2
 (712) West Point is a comparatively low rocky cliff that rises    feet. Between this rock and the shore is another rock that uncov-
rapidly to the highland behind it.                                ers. A row of four rocks, covered about 2 feet, is reported near the
 (713) East Point, 5 miles SE from Broken Point, is the NW       W shore about 0.4 mile SE of Mink Point and to extend S about
extremity of the peninsula separating Uganik Bay and Uganik Pas-    0.2 mile to the beach. A saltery is on the S shore W  of the
sage. Two flat rocks with bluff sides are close to the point and    unnamed island. It has a small wharf that bares at low water. In
from the point is a long gentle slope to the high land.           approaching the saltery care should be taken to avoid the rocks
 (714) Northeast Arm, the first and largest arm in Uganik Bay, is    mentioned above.
about 3.3 miles S of East Point. Northeast Arm Light 1             (726) EastArmaffordsanexcellentanchorageforvesselsofany
(5747. I'N., 153ï¿½27.2'W.), 58 feet above the water, is shown from    size in 10 to 15 fathoms, sticky mud bottom. It is subject to heavy
a skeleton tower with a square green daymark, and marks the N     williwaws during S gales.
entrance point to this arm.                                        (727) South Arm extends 5.5 miles S from Mink Point, the S
 (715) Rock Point, the S entrance point, has several bare rocks    entrance point to East Arm. The arm near its head is only 0.2 mile
which extend 250 yards N.                                         wide. A rock, covered 1/2 fathom, is 225 yards off the E shore, 0.6
 (716) Starr Point is the low rounding point on the NE side of    mile S of Mink Point. Between the point and the submerged rock
Northeast Arm where the channel is split by Sally Island. Starr    is a rock which uncovers 2 feet, 200 yards offshore. Anchorage
Point Light 3 (57045.3'N., 153ï¿½22.1'W.), 30 feet above the water,    may be had near the head in 16 fathoms, sticky mud bottom,
is shown from a skeleton tower with a square green daymark on a    where the arm is 0.7 mile wide.
rock just off the point. The rock is awash at extreme high tide and  (728) Routes, Uganik Bay.-From N, round Cape Uganik I mile
attached to the shore at low tide.                                and steer 2220 for 3.5 miles to a position 1 mile off of Noisy
 (717) Sally Island,just 2 miles long, occupies a central position    Islands. Round the islands I mile and steer 158ï¿½ for about 6 miles
in the basin at the head of Northeast Arm. The 1,000-foot-high    to a position midway between East and West Points.
island is covered by grass and alder bushes.
                                                                     (729) From S, give Cape Ugat and Miners Point a berth of 1.5
 (718) Sheep Island is a small island just off the SE point of    miles and Broken Point a berth of 0.8 mile. Then steer 1430 for 4
Sally Island and is connected to it by a gravel spit which is co v- miles to a point midway between East and West Points.
ered at high water.
                                                                     (730) To enter Northeast Arm.-From a position midway
 (719) A cannery is about 1.3 miles ESE of Starr Point. The
 ()wharf at the cannery has a face I0 feet long, with a least depth    between East and West Points steer 163ï¿½ for 2.3 miles until the N
wharf at the cannery has a face 110 feet long, with a least depth
alongside of about 30 feet. In approaching this wharf care should    tangent of the largest and most N   of the Village Islands is on the
be taken to avoid the spit which bares, 150 yards off a small
                                                                   Arm Light 1 is on the port beam, about 0.5 mile. Then change to
stream 0.3 mile W from the wharf. Deep water extends close up to    Ar   m Lig ht I is on the port beam, about 0.5 mile' Then cha nge to
                                                                   101ï¿½ for 1.6 miles; thence change to 132ï¿½, heading about 0.2 mile
 (720) the spit.                                                 off Starr Point. Round Starr Point 0.2 mile or less and continue in
 (720) The cannery at Port O'Brien, 2.2 miles SE of Starr Point,
                                                                   midchannel along the E side of Sally Island to anchorage or wharf.
has a wharf 390 feet long with a 105-foot face, and a depth of
about 32 feet alongside. The oil wharf parallel to this main wharf  (731) To enter South Arm.From a position midway between
is of equal length with a 30-foot face, and has a depth of about 20    East and West Points, steer 1630 for 2.3 miles until the N tangent
feet alongside. Both canneries store fuel oil, diesel oil, and gaso-    of the largest and most N of the Village Islands is on the starboard
line for their own use, and have an abundant supply of water. They    beam. Then change to 1900, heading 0.4 mile off Mink Point
have some machine shop facilities and scow ways. Tides of 16.5    which separates East and South Arms. From midchannel off Mink
feet are necessary to use these ways. There are no marine railways.    Point, steer midchannel courses taking care to avoid the rocks
The cannery at Port O'Brien maintains radiotelephone and radio-    which are as much as 225 yards offshore for 0.8 mile S from Mink
telegraph communications.                                         Point.
 (721) Deep water surrounds Sally and Sheep Islands except for     (732) To enter East Arm.-Follow courses as above until off
the narrow passage between Sheep Island and the mainland, where    East Arm and then enter on a midchannel course taking up anchor-
it is nearly bare.                                                age as desired.
 (722) A shoal with a least depth of 51/4 fathoms, sand and gravel  (733) Cape Ugat, on the E shore of Shelikof Strait 12 miles SW
bottom, is about 300 yards N from the N tip of Sally Island.      from Cape Uganik, is a high ridge sloping to a low rocky cliff at
 (723) Anchorage may be had off either cannery in about 30 fath-    the point of the cape. A short distance off the cape is a small,
oms.                                                              rocky, grass-covered islet 104 feet high that can be seen for 15
 (724) Village Islands are numerous islands and rocks 2 to 3.5    miles up and down the coast on a clear day. A reef that uncovers
miles S from West Point. A cannery back of the islands maintains    about 5 feet is about 175 yards W of the islet. Between the islet
radiotelephone and radiotelegraph communications. An aban-    and the cape is a channel used by the local cannery tenders. Little
doned native village is in the cove just S of the islands. Anchorage    River is a meandering stream that enters the strait a short distance
for small craft may be had in 6 to 12 fathoms, but the approach is    S of Cape Ugat.
over broken ground making it safe for launches only. There are     (734) Cape Kuliuk, about 5 miles SW from Cape Ugat, is a cliff
apparently no continuous channels between the various rocks and    at the end of a ridge about 2,000 feet high. A peculiar and promi-
islands.                                                          nent clump of rocks is on the summit back of the cape.




                                                      5. KODIAK ISLAND                                                       181


 (735) Uyak Bay is on the E side of Shelikof Strait, S of the    To enter Weasel Cove keep from 250 to 300 yards off the W shore
mountainous peninsula terminating in Capes Ugat and Kuliuk.       and enter the cove in midchannel, taking up anchorage as desired.
 (736) The approach between Cape Kuliuk and Rocky Point (see
also chart 16598) is about 11 miles wide, E of which the bay con-  (746) Chart 16599.-Harvester Island, about 9 miles S of Cape
verges rapidly to Harvester Island. It extends 25 miles SE from    Kulink and 0.3 mile off the SW entrance point to Uyak Bay, is
Harvester Island. The shores of the bay rise in steep slopes of    over I mile long, 844 feet high, steep sided, and grass covered.
2,000 to 4,000 feet, and have many mountain streams. The only    The 20-fathom curve is about 0.3 mile off the N and E sides of the
timber is some alders in the gulches and some cottonwoods at the    island, and foul ground extends off the N and E sides for 350 yards
heads of the bays. Uyak Bay is an important salmon fishery. The    in places. A spit, which uncovers and is steep-to, extends 425
best anchorage in Uyak Bay is found S of Harvester Island, and in    yards SW from the S end of the island. Harvester Island Spit
Zachar Bay.                                                       Light 2 (57ï¿½38.3'N., 153ï¿½59.5'W.), 22 feet above the water, is
 (737)  Chief Point, on the N shore of Uyak Bay opposite Har-    shown from a square frame with a red triangular daymark on a
vester Island, is formed by a grass-covered island about 90 feet    dolphin on the end of the spit.
high, and has several ridges and small hills. Several rocks awash
                                                                     (747) Bear Island, 249 feet high and grass covered, is about I
are about 0.3 mile W from the NW point of this island. The high-   (747)  Bear Island, 249 feet high and grass covere, is about 
                                                                   mile W of Harvester Island. It is 0.3 mile from the shore, with
est of a group of rocks 0.8 mile SE from Chief Point is 110 feet
high.                                                             which it is connected by a boulder spit that uncovers about 7 feet.
 (738) Chief Cove is the narrow strait behind the island forming  (748) Uyak Anchorage, between Harvester Island and the coast
Chief Point. A rock which uncovers 6 feet is in the N entrance.    to the SW, is one of the best harbors on the E side of Shelikof
The S entrance is very shoal. Depths of 8 to 12 feet are in the N  Strait S of Uganik Bay. It has two entrances of which the S is pre-
part of the cove. It is used as an anchorage by cannery tenders and    ferred. The depths range from about 6 fathoms between Harvester
pile drivers during the fishing season.                           Island and Bear Island to 20 fathoms 0.4 mile NNW of Harvester
 (739) Spiridon Bay opens into Uyak Bay NE of Harvester    Island Spit Light 2. The best anchorage is about 0.6 mile NNW of
Island. It extends 12 miles inland in an E direction. Broken ground    the light, in 12 to 14 fathoms. Good anchorage, except with heavy
extends about 1.2 miles NW from the point on the S side of the    NE or E winds, can be had about 500 yards S of the light 0.3 mile
entrance. The only good anchorages for large vessels in Spiridon    offshore, in 12 to 14 fathoms.
Bay are at the head in 13 to 16 fathoms, sand and mud bottom.      (749) The NW entrance is 0.4 mile wide between two reefs,
Care should be taken to avoid the 23/4-fathom shoal 0.3 mile off    partly bare at half tide and marked by kelp, one extending 400
the E shore and 1.2 miles SE from Telrod Cove. A temporary    yards W from the NW end of Harvester Island, and the other 250
anchorage can be had in 16 to 18 fathoms about 0.5 mile N from    to 550 yards E from Bear Island. With care this entrance is not dif-
Clover Rock. The bottom is volcanic ash, which has the appear-    ficult in the daytime, especially at low water when the principal
ance of yellow sand and has fair holding qualities.               dangers show above water.
 (740) In entering Spiridon Bay from the N, Chief Point should    (750) The better and safer entrance to the anchorage is around
be given a berth of 1 mile. In approaching from the S, the point    the S end of Harvester Island. Cormorant Rock, which uncovers
separating Spiridon and Zachar Bays should not be approached    about 7 feet, is about 0.6 mile SSE of Harvester Island and 300
closer than I mile to avoid the rock which is nearly 0.5 mile off    yards offshore.
the point. From a position 1.5 miles S from Chief Point steer 0970
for about 8 miles until Ditto Islets are abeam to starboard, about  (751) Uyak is a native village. The cannery on the SW side of
0.3 mile. Then change to 1380 and anchor as desired.
  (741)  Clover Rock, 34 feet high, is a rocky islet 0.2 mile off the  (752)  Tides.-The diurnal range of tide at Uyak Anchorage is
S shore and 1.5 miles from the S entrance point to Spiridon Bay. It    13.8 feet.
is connected to the mainland by a gravel shoal which bares at      (753) Routes, Uyak Anchorage,-From northward, round Cape
minus tides. A large stream enters the bay just E of Clover Rock.  Ugat about 1.5 miles and steer 2200 for 6 miles to a position 2.5
  (742)  Thistle Rock is a small islet consisting of black jagged    miles off Cape Kuliuk, bearing 102ï¿½. Then steer 172ï¿½ for 10 miles,
rocks,about 10 feet high, a short distance E of Clover Rock. It is   giving the E shore a berth of about 2 miles, to a position 0.5 mile E
always bare and affords a good mark in clear weather. A rock,    of Harvester Island. (See chart 16597.)
which uncovers about 7 feet, is about 300 yards NW from Thistle    (754) Then steer 2370, passing about 0.3 mile SE of Harvester
Rock.                                                             Island. Anchor 500 yards NE or N of the slipways, in 10 to 14
  (743) Ditto Islets, a pair 30 feet high, are in the middle of Spiri-    fathoms.
don Bay about 7 miles inside the entrance. The bottom between
                                                                     (755) To go to the inner harbor, follow the preceding directions,
the pair and the S shore is broken and has several rocks awash an  and then haul NW round the light at 100 yards and steer 341 for
a rock 25 feet high. A group of islands in a foul area adjacent to00 yards 
the S shore is SW of theDitto Islets; of these, Anguk Island is the
largest.     0                                           \        ruins of the cannery wharf at Uyak, and continue the course to
  (744) Telrod Cove is a small cove on the N side of the bay about    midchannel.
10 miles from Chief Point. It affords good shelter in W weather    (756) From soutbward.-Give Cape Uyak, Rocky Point, and
for small craft. The cove shoals rapidly with mudflats at its head.    Bear Island berths of 1 mile or over, and follow the E shore of
Anchorage may be had in 7 to 15 fathoms, sand and shell bottom.    Harvester Island at a distance of 0.5 mile or more. Then follow
A large stream enters the bay here.                               directions as given above.
  (745) Weasel Cove, which forms the W arm at the head of Spir-     (757) In passing Rocky Point care should be taken to avoid Wol-
idon Bay, is 0.3 mile wide and has depths of 6 fathoms, sand and    cott Reef which is 0.3 mile off the point and bares only at extreme
mud bottom. The cove is an excellent anchorage for small craft.    low water.




182                                                   5. KODIAK ISLAND


 (758) Chart 16597.-A rock, covered 21/2 fathoms, is inside the    rows, in 5 to 6 fathoms. A 214-fathom spot is about 500 yards off
entrance of Uyak Bay about 1.9 miles SE of Harvester Island Spit    the lagoon entrance.
Light 2, 0.9 mile off the W shore.                                  (772) Thence for 2 miles the passage is clear to the second nar-
 (759) Zachar Bay, about 7 miles SE of Harvester Island, is 0.8    rows where a spit, partly bare at low water, extends halfway across
mile wide at the entrance and extends SE for 5.5 miles where the    from a low grassy point on the W side and leaves a channel 125
bay terminates in an extensive mudflat that uncovers. This mudflat    yards wide between the S end of the spit and an island. The chan-
affords an excellent place for beaching a vessel in an emergency.  nel is W of this island and the next island 0.4 mile S; the W shore
 (760)  Carlsen Point, the S entrance point, is low and shows as a    should be favored until over 0.2 mile S of the S island. S of this
bluff when off the entrance.                                       point the passage is clear. Some prospecting has been done on the
 (761)  A dangerous rock, covered 23/4 fathoms, is 1.6 miles N    E side of the passage 2 miles from its S end.
from Carlsen Point and 0.6 mile offshore.                           (773)  During the fishing season a floating cannery is usually
 (762)  Carlsen Reef, which uncovers 10 feet, is a danger about    moored near the old mining camp on the E side of the strait.
0.5 mile NW from the NE tip of Carlsen Point.                       (774)  Lying 0.8 to 2.5 miles S of Amook Island is a chain of
 (763)  A reduction plant is on the N shore of Zachar Bay 3 miles    islands with foul ground between them and about 300 yards off the
                                                                    NW end of Alf Island.
above the entrance. The plant has a wharf with a 100-foot face and
a least depth alongside of 18 feet. Large vessels dock port-side-to.  (775) The safer and recommended passage is E of the chain
                                                                    composing Alf Island. Broken bottom extends about 300 yards
Radiotelephone and radiotelegraph communications are main-
tained. There is also float plane service available from Kodiak.   into the passage from the central islets of the chain, and directly
                                                                    opposite, a reef extends 200 yards from the E side of the passage.
 (764) A large stream, with many cottonwood trees along its
                                                                    The reef is marked at its outer end by a bare rock visible at all
sides, enters the head of the bay. Kodiak bears are numerous in the                                       a bare rock visible at all
area.
                                                                      (776) At the S end of the chain of islands is a small inlet in the
 (765)  Excellent anchorage sheltered from all winds may be had    W  shore about 0.8 mile long and 300 yards wide, affording
in 12 to 15 fathoms, mud bottom, off the mudflats at the head of    anchorage in about 12 fathoms
Zachar Bay. The anchorage is subjected to moderate williwaws. In    (777)  From 3 to 6 miles S of Alf Island, Uyak Bay shoals gradu-
anchoring, care should be taken to avoid the mudflats which    ally from 20 to 4 fathoms, and anchorage may be selected in any
extend 1.5 miles from the head of the bay.                         depth desired. The swinging room is about 1,400 yards in diame-
 (766)  In entering Zachar Bay, the shore on the port hand should    ter.
not be approached closer than I mile and a course should be laid    (778) The upper end of Uyak Bay is bordered by high snow-cov-
to pass 300 yards off the 23/4-fathom rock. From this point steer    ered mountains and is a well-known hunting ground for the large
127ï¿½ until Carlsen Point is abeam on the starboard hand, then    Kodiak brown bear.
change to 145ï¿½ and continue, keeping in midchannel.
 (767) Amook Island, formed by a mountainous ridge, divides         (779)  Chart 16599.-Larsen Bay is on the W side of UyakBay,
an 8-mile stretch of Uyak Bay into two passages. The E passage is    6 miles S from Harvester Island. Depths are 30 to 40 fathoms near
narrow and obstructed in places, and as a through route should be    its N side and less on the opposite side. From its head, a trail leads
used only by small vessels with local knowledge. Reefs extend 0.3    over a low divide to the Karluk River. A large cannery is in the
mile N from the N end of Amook Island.                             bight just S of the inner S entrance point at the village of Larsen
 (768) The ship passage is W of Amook Island. Aleutian Rock,    Bay. Gasoline, kerosene, and diesel oil are stored for cannery use
marked by a buoy on its SW side, is 0.3 mile off the SW shore of    and may be purchased. A machine shop is maintained for cannery
Amook Island, in the S end of this passage. This dangerous rock    use, and a store is available for the purchase of food and clothing
uncovers 1 foot and is not marked by kelp. Vessels should pass    in small quantities. A small dispensary and first aid station are
between Aleutian Rock and Alf Island. The steamship ALEU-          available but no doctor is in residence. The cannery maintains
TIAN was lost here in 1929.                                        radiotelephone and radiotelegraph communications. The marine
 (769) A cannery is on the W  shore of Uyak Bay opposite the S    railway can handle vessels up to 100 tons and 20-foot draft.
end of Amook Island.                                                (780) The entrance is between a spit extending 150 yards S of
 (770)  In the bight on the W  side of Amook Island, 2.5 miles    the N entrance point and a 20-foot rock near the outer end of the
from its N end, is an anchorage for a small vessel in about 10 fath-    spit extending 150 yards from the outer S entrance point. A
oms, with shelter from E and S winds. The bottom is uneven with    buoyed reef, which uncovers, is in the middle of the entrance. Two
a possibility of dangers. The entrance is between the S point of the    narrow crooked channels lead on either side of the reef. The pre-
bight and a bare rock 0.6 mile N from the point and 0.5 mile from    ferred S channel, between the midentrance reef and the 20-foot
Amook Island. Between this rock and the island is a reef, partly    rock, 200 yards SE from it, is marked by a 248ï¿½ range. The front
bare at low water, which extends 0.5 mile SE from an islet.        mark is a dolphin on the flats bearing a yellow wheel-type device,
 (771) The passage E of Amook Island for about 2.5 miles from    and the rear mark is a yellow circular disk painted under the gable
its N end has suitable depths and sufficient width for anchoring    of a building. This channel has a least depth of 24 feet on the
vessels of moderate size. The passage then narrows to 300 yards,    range.,
and from the point on the E side a kelp-marked reef extends W       (781) The channel N of the midentrance reef is deeper but neces-
and NW more than halfway across, leaving a narrow channel    sitates a more difficult turn and for that reason is not recom-
between the reef and the W shore. Near the NW end of the reef is    mended. A lighted buoy and a 226ï¿½ range of the yellow dolphin
a bare rock. An anchorage for small vessels may be found on the    and the twin cannery stacks mark the channel. This channel has a
W side of the S end of the narrows, around the point, in 5 to 8 fath-    least depth of 22 feet on the range. Both channels join SW of the
oms. A small vessel can also anchor 300 yards off the narrow    reef, thence form a common entrance WNW into Larsen Bay. The
entrance of the shallow lagoon 0.4 mile NE of the point of the nar-    channel into Larsen Bay is marked by unlighted buoys and a





                                                       5. KODIAK ISLAND                                                        183


291030' lighted range. The channel has a least depth of 28 feet on  (797) Between Cape Uyak and Karluk are two long cliffs about
the range.                                                         1,300 feet high, the S one having a marked slide extending from
 (782) A good anchorage for larger vessels will be found about    its highest point almost to the water. In the valley between the
400 yards N from the small island on the S side of the bay, and    cliffs are two waterfalls. Beach seining is carried on here during
about 700 yards off the cannery wharf in 20 fathoms, mud bottom.    the season, and a number of shacks used by fishermen are on the
In W weather winds blow down the bay with great force, but the    beach at the foot of the cliffs.
holding ground is good. In former years the cannery company
moored its sailing vessels here during the summer months.           (798) Chart 16599,-Karluk, 5.5 miles S from Cape Uyak and
 (783) Routes.-Small vessels can enter Larsen Bay at any stage    1.5 miles E from Cape Karluk, is a native village with a school
of the tide, but large vessels should choose a high-water slack with    and a church. Fishing is the principal industry. The old cannery
calm weather for entering or leaving.                              buildings are still standing but they are no longer used, as the fish
 (784) Enter on the range and pass midway between the reef    are now taken to Uyak Bay for canning. A strong set S toward the
marked by a buoy on the N side and the 20-foot rock, 200 yards S    shoals inshore has been experienced.
from it. Hold this range, 248ï¿½, until within about 300 yards of the  (799) Radiotelephone and radiotelegraph communications are
yellow dolphin and then pick up the 291ï¿½30' inner range, passing    maintained.
100 yards off the end of the spit off the N entrance point and 150  (800) The entrance to Karluk River is through a narrow chan-
yards off the inner entrance point on the port hand. When the inner    nel at the S end of a spit and is only passable by launches at high
S entrance point is a little abaft the beam change to 263ï¿½ for 0.3    water. Some wharves arejust inside the mouth. About 1.5 miles up
mile, then haul S and anchor as desired.                           the river is a weir where the salmon are counted as they ascend the
 (785) Tides and currents.-The diurnal range of tide in Larsen    river. The weir is removed during the winter.
Bay is 13.7 feet.                                                   (801)  Karluk Anchorage, off Karluk, is sheltered from offshore
 (786) A strong tidal current sweeps through the entrance with    winds but is exposed to winds from the SW around through W to
an estimated maximum velocity of 4 to 5 knots.                     NE. Vessels should be prepared to move on short notice. Anchor-
 (787) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-    age may be had off the town in 12 to 14 fathoms, sandy bottom.
sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of    During the fishing season a number of scows and launches are
Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)                    usually found moored in the roadstead.
 (788) The Kodiak Island area is served by the Alaska Marine        (802)  The abandoned cannery buildings and the church spire are
                                                                    the principal objects to be seen in approaching Karluk.
 (789) Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots
                                                                     (803)  Tanglefoot Bay is the bight adjacent to Cape Karluk on its
and en route to Larsen Bay can meet the pilot boat about I mile E
                                                                    E side. It is separated from Karluk by a high cliff, the base of
of Harvester Island (57038.8'N., 153059.5'W.).
                              T o Harv c e ter callin  "LARSE.8'N., 153which is not passable by pedestrians at high water. Tanglefoot
                  (79) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "LARSEN  Beach is very steep and has a bad undertow. Landing here is dan-
BAY PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearranged    gerous if there is any surf.
frequency between pilot and agent/vessel.
 (791) The wharf built out over the shoal water is 1,035 feet long
and has a depth of 8 feet at its outer end. A 5-ton crane is on the  (804)  Chart 16598.-Cape Karluk is the most conspicuous
wharf. Water is available through a pipeline.                      landmark along the W coast of Kodiak Island. The cape is a prom-
                                                                    inent, projecting head, 1,420 feet high, with bare rock cliffs on its
                                                                    seaward face and grassy slopes on its E side to lowland. It is
  (792) Chart 16598.-Sevenmile Beach is the long boulder-
                     stCrt -even   beach fr        o BearIslandtoRockyPoint. Itreadily identified by its cone-shaped appearance, a notch in the
strewn beach from Bear Island to Rocky Point. It is backed by low    
cliffs from which a broad grassy valley extends back several miles    summit, and the lowland behind it.
toward Karluk Lake.                                                 (805) Sturgeon River has its mouth about 2 miles S from Cape
                                                                    Karluk. The entrance is between 2 shingle spits covered with drift-
                                                 . R- P. i. a       wood. It can be entered by small boats at half tide or better. For
approach to Uyak Bay. It consists of bold cliffs which rise rapidly
                 to the ridges of which the point is a termination.  about 1 mile back of the beach the river flows through a mudflat,
to the ridges of which the point is a termination.
  (794) Wolcott Reef, a dangerous group of rocks that bare at
extreme low water, is 0.3 mile off the E spur of Rocky Point. A     (806) Sturgeon Head is a high whitish eroded headland 5 miles
channel is between the reef and the point and has a least known    SW from Cape Karluk. Several rocks and reefs are as much as 200
depth of 4 fathoms. This channel is used by local cannery tenders    yards offshore at the foot of Sturgeon Head.
in good weather. A buoy is 0.2 mile W of the reef.                  (807) Cape Grant, about 10 miles SSW of Cape Karluk, is a
  (795) Cape Uyak, on the E side of Shelikof Strait about 4 miles    rugged headland at the end of a high ridge, the summit of which is
SW from Rocky Point, is a precipitous high headland at the end of    marked by a small cluster of peculiar pinnacle rocks.
a ridge. From the water the slope rises abruptly to 647 feet. There  (808) A rock nearly awash at low water is 0.3 mile off the SW
is then a slight fall to a deep notch in the narrow neck back of the    tip of Cape Grant. Shoal water extends some distance beyond this
cape, from which there is a rise in steep, grassy slopes to higher    rock and vessels rounding the cape into Halibut Bay should give it
land.                                           *                  a berth of 0.8 mile.
  (796) Northeast Harbor is the bight on the S side of Cape          (809) Halibut Bay is the large bight just SW from Cape Grant.
Uyak. In NE weather it affords excellent shelter for small craft    The bight is bordered by eroded bluffs and a broad sand beach. A
that can anchor close under the shore in 3 to 5 fathoms, sandy bot-    stream enters the sea at the S part of Halibut Bay. Vessels anchor
tom. Larger vessels anchor farther out in 9 fathoms with some pro-    in 7 fathoms, hard sand bottom, 0.8 mile off the beach. Small craft
tection but subject to an uncomfortable swell.                     may find more protection closer in near the mouth of the lagoon.




184                                                    5. KODIAK ISLAND


        (810)  Anchorage is also available in the N corner of the bay, but    (823) Ayakulik Island, 5 miles SE of Bumble Bay, is small and
      care should be taken to avoid the reef which makes out from the       220 feet high. A reef extends E from the E point of the island to a
      SW tip of Cape Grant.                                                sandspit on the mainland of Kodiak Island. About 300 yards W
        (811) An abandoned cannery is at the S end of Halibut Bay at        and N of the island are bare rocks and rocks awash.
      the entrance to the lagoon; the cannery wharf dries at low water.      (824) Small launches will find shelter in SE or E weather in 5
        (812) Middle Cape, the westernmost promontory on Kodiak             fathoms, 300 yards NE of the island. Larger vessels will find shel-
      Island, consists of two headlands having precipitous, rocky cliffs   ter from E weather in 7 fathoms, 0.5 mile N of the island.
      facing the sea, and smooth grassy slopes facing inland. The N          (825) Ayakulik River, known locally as Red River, discharges
      headland is the higher, a little over 1,000 feet. Its summit consists  at a point 1.8 miles SE of Ayakulik Island. With local knowledge,
      of three rocky clumps, the middle one of which is the highest.        the river can be entered at high tide in smooth weather by small
      These rocky clumps are prominent and easily distinguished from        launches. The Fish and Wildlife Service maintains a station here
      the N.                                                               during the salmon season.
        (813)  A prominent high pinnacle rock is at the foot of the N         (826) From a point 3 miles N of Ayakulik Island to Low Cape,
      slope of Middle Cape.                                                 the shoreline runs in a nearly N-S direction and is marked by earth
        (814) Tombstone Rocks consist of two detached rocks about           bluffs varying fro m a few feet to 267 feet high.
      100 yards apart 0.8 mile off Middle Cape. The S rock is 99 feet
       high while the N rock is only a few feet high. From some direc-       (827)  Ikpik Hill, a prominent high dark-colored earth bluff is
      high while   the   N  rock is only a few feet high. From some direc-  3.2 miles N of Low Cape, and in approaching from Cape Ikolik,
      tions these rocks appear as the headstone and footstone of a grave .  this bluff may b       e mistaken by and in approaching from Cape Ikolik,
                                                                            this bluff may be mistaken by a stranger for Low Cape.
      Deep water is close to the rocks.
        (815) Mushroom Reef, which uncovers 13 feet, is about 0.3             (828) Low Cape, 11.5 miles NW from Cape Alitak, is the W
      mile offshore and I mile SE from Middle Cape. This rock when         extremity of the lowland in this vicinity. The extremity of the cape
      exposed by the tide is round and has the appearance of a huge         is marked by a peak-shaped light-colored earth bluff about 90 feet
      mushroom. Deep water is close up to it.                              high. A spit, bare at low water, extends nearly 0.3 mile off the
        (816) A prominent pillarlike shaft of rock, 170 feet high, with     cape. The water deepens gradually, the 10-fathom curve lying 2.3
      overhanging sides, is about 100 yards offshore and E from Mush-       miles off the cape.
      room Reef.                                                             (829) From a position 2 miles W  of Low Cape, heavy kelp
        (817) Middle Bay is a small bight about midway between Mid-         extends ESE. Soundings in this kelp showed depths of from 3 to 7
      die Cape and Cape Ikolik. The 5-fathom curve is about 0.3 mile        fathoms, but much shoaler water probably exists. Low Cape
      off the beach.                                                       should be given a berth of about 3 miles.
       (818)  Gurney Bay is the bay immediately NE from Cape Ikolik.         (830)  Sukhoi Bay has its entrance about 6 miles S of Low Cape.
      The head of the bay is shoal with a sand beach strewn with boul-      The entrance is narrow and is between two sandbars. It has a depth
      ders. Anchorage may be had in 10 fathoms, sandy bottom, mid-          of about 6 feet, but should not be attempted except with local
      way between the two entrance points. This is a comfortable and       knowledge.
      secure anchorage in E weather.                                         (831) The coast from Low Cape to Cape Alitak apparently has
                                                                            no off-lying dangers.
       (819) Chart 16601.-Cape Ikolik, 4 miles S of Middle Cape, is         (832) Cape Alitak has been described earlier in this chapter.
      a rugged headland 1,008 feet high, with its summit forming a           (833) Routes, Cape Karluk to Cape Alitak.-From a point 2
      ridge lying in a NE and SW direction.                                miles off Cape Karluk (see chart 16598), steer 222i for 5.5 miles
       (820)  Outer Seal Rock, 1.8 miles W  from Cape Ikolik, resem-       to a position with Sturgeon Head (a high white eroded cliff)
      bles a sail and is 89 feet high. The rock has deep water close-to     abeam. Then change to 2130 for 11.5 miles until Tombstone Rock
      except about 200 yards to the SW where there are submerged           is on the port beam, 2 miles.
      rocks. Outer Seal Rock is a sea lion rookery.
       (821)  Inner Seal Rock, 0.3 mile W from Cape Ikolik, is a steep-     (834) Then change to 1960 for 4 miles or until Outer Seal Rock
       sided bare rock 125 feet high, surmounted by a rocky nub which      (a sail-shaped pinnacle) is a little abaft the beam, 2 miles.
      sided bare rock 125 feet high, surmounted by a rocky nub which
      gives it the appearance of a lighthouse. From some directions it       (835) Then change to 154  for 23.3 miles to pass 2.8 miles off
      appears as a huge bell.                                              Low Cape. On this course Low Cape should be passed in a depth
       (822)  Bumble Bay is 2.5 miles E of Cape Ikolik. The W point of     of 14 fathoms.
      the bay is marked by three pinnacle rocks, while the E point is        (836)  When Low Cape bears 083ï¿½, 3 miles, haul to 1320 for 12.5
      marked by a single pinnacle rock 127 feet high. Small craft will      miles, passing about 1.3 miles off Cape Alitak, to a position with
      find shelter from E winds in the E part of the bay, while large ves-  the cape bearing 010ï¿½, 1.5 miles.
      sels will find anchorage in the center of the bay in 12 fathoms,       (837)  If bound to Alitak Bay, follow routes given in the descrip-
      sand bottom.                                                          tion of that place.







                                               6. ALASKA PENINSULA

 (1)   This chapter describes the S coast of the Alaska Peninsula    storm gives warning by strengthening this current; in many places
from Cape Douglas to Isanotski Strait, as well as the Semidi    the current will indicate NE weather a day before the barometer
Islands, Shumagin Islands, Sanak Islands, and many other smaller    falls. W winds weaken the current.
off-lying islands that fringe this part of the coast. Also described  (10)  On three runs between Chirikof Island and Castle Rock, a
are Katmai Bay, Wide Bay, Chignik Bay, Stepovak Bay, Unga    survey ship experienced a S set indicating an average strength of
Strait, Pavlof Bay, Ikatan Bay, Isanotski Strait, and many smaller    current of 1.5 knots.
bays and lagoons, and the fishing communities of Sand Point,         (II)  The tidal currents in the vicinity of the S coast of the
King Cove, Cold Bay, and False Pass. The N coast of the Alaska    Alaska Peninsula are strong in many of the constricted passages.
Peninsula is described in chapter 8.                                In the open waters offshore they are generally weak.
                                                                     (12)  Weather.-Winds along the rugged Alaska Peninsula are
 (2)   Charts 16013, 16011.-Alaska Peninsula, extending SW         local and variable. At Chignik, they are mostly from the W
over 400 miles from Alaska-mainland (59ï¿½30'N., 155ï¿½00'W.) to    through NW in early winter, the SE in midwinter, and SE through
Isanotski Strait (54052'N., 163ï¿½23'W.), is mountainous with many    SW from March through September. Strong winds often blow
irregular and bold peaks reaching 2,000 to 9,000 feet. Pavlof Vol-    from the Bering Sea through the mountain pass over Chignik
cano (55ï¿½25'N., 161054'W.), the most prominent of several active    Lake. In the Shumagin Islands, summer winds are often out of the
volcanos on the peninsula, has three symmetrical peaks in a gen-    SW, while winter winds frequently blow out of the S. At Cold Bay,
eral N-S line; the middle and highest peak rises to almost 8,300    southeasterlies are common all year around. Northwesterlies are
feet. Frosty Peak (55ï¿½04'N., 162ï¿½50'W.), a conspicuous snow-    also frequent in winter. In summer, W  through NW  winds are
capped mountain with several irregular peaks near the SW end of    common. In winter, windspeeds at Cold Bay average 15 to 16
the peninsula, reaches nearly 5,800 feet. There are many lakes and    knots and reach gale force 3 to 5 percent of the time.
sizable streams on the peninsula; several portages cross between     (13)  Annual rainfall ranges from 20 to 60 inches, with heaviest
the adjacent bays.                                                  amounts usually occurring on the SE side of the peninsula. At
 (3)   The S coast of the Alaska Peninsula from Cape Douglas       Cold Bay, which averages 33 inches annually, measurable precipi-
(58ï¿½51'N., 153ï¿½17'W.) to Cape Pankof (54ï¿½40'N., 163ï¿½02'W.) is    tation falls on 320 days in an average year; on about one-third of
irregular and broken by numerous indentations affording anchor-     those days, it snows. August through November are usually the
age. Some settlements, canneries, and fishing stations are scattered    wettest months, while snow is common from October through
along the coast and among the off-lying islands.                    April.
 (4)   Many of the points are high rugged cliffs with offshore       (14)  January and February are usually the coldest months of the
reefs, while other points are low with shoal water extending from    year. The average daily maximum is around the freezing mark or
the shore. Kelp does not always mark rocks and shoals, especially    above on the SE side of the peninsula, and 3 or 4 degrees cooler on
in early or late summer. Sometimes only thin ribbon kelp grows on    the NW side. Average daily minimum temperatures on the SE side
the dangers which is either drawn under by currents and seas, or    range from 16ï¿½F in the N to 28ï¿½F in the S. On the NW side, they
cannot be seen until the kelp is entered.                           fall to an average of 16ï¿½F at Port Heiden, increasing to 280F to the
 (5)   Many vessels from southeast Alaska use the Shelikof    S and decreasing to below 10ï¿½F to the N. At Cold Bay, extreme
Strait route SE of the Alaska Peninsula to the Bering Sea. The      low temperatures have fallen to -13ï¿½F, while Coal Harbor has
route is described in chapter 3. The run between Shelikof Strait    recorded a -19ï¿½F temperature. Temperatures climb steadily from
and Shumagin Islands is one of the most difficult in Alaska    March through July. In July on the average, daytime highs range
because of the prevalent thick weather and unknown currents. The    from the midfifties to low sixties, while nighttime lows drop into
current effect near Foggy Cape (5631 'N., 157ï¿½00'W.) is particu-    the midforties. Extreme temperatures have reached the mideight-
larly confusing.                                                    ies at sheltered locations.
 (6)   Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences from the nor-        (is)  Though fog may be encountered along this coast at any
mal variation of as much as 14ï¿½ have been observed along the    time during the summer, it is most prevalent from June through
Alaska Peninsula.                                                   August. The SE winds bring in the fog banks that lie over the
 (7)   Currents.-A continual current of considerable strength    North Pacific. Fog is reported on an average of 18 to 25 days per
follows the coast all the way from Shelikof Strait to the Aleutian    month at Cold Bay in midsummer; however, visibilities fall below
Islands. This W current is considered an eddy which accompanies    2 miles on only about 3 to 6 days. Fog often hangs about the head-
the general E drift across the Pacific S of latitude 50ï¿½N., and forms    lands and entrances to bays when the upper parts of the bays are
a part of the general circulation of the North Pacific Ocean.       clear. Land fog and precipitation reduce visibilities in winter.
 (8)   The current along the Alaska Peninsula has been called a      (16)  All harbors on the SE side of the peninsula are free from
warm current originating in the Gulf of Alaska and it doubtless    ice and open to navigation throughout the year. Pack ice has been
assists in causing the S side of the peninsula to be warmer than the    known to drift through Isanotski Strait and interfere with naviga-
Bering Sea side. It is also well known that the islands off this coast    tion in Ikatan Bay.
have a milder climate than the mainland; almost the entire popula-
tion of the area is found on them as a result.                       (17)  Prominent points and most off-lying islands on the S
 (9)   The coastal current searches out all the passages, large and    side of the Alaska Peninsula are adequately charted. However,
small, between and around the many islands, and in some of them    much of the coast between Cape Douglas and Chignik Bay has
it becomes strong enough to be important. An approaching NE         not been surveyed. Notes on the unsurveyed portions are from


                                                                                                                                185




186                                                6. ALASKA PENINSULA


the most reliable sources available; these waters should be    the S end of the chain of grass-covered Shakun Islets. A 1975
used with caution.                                                survey indicated that the channel between the islets and the reef
                                                                   was clear of rocks and had depths of 1V2 to 3 fathoms. The waters
 (18)  Chart 16580.-Cape Douglas (58ï¿½51'N., 153ï¿½17'W.), the    between the N tips of Shakun Islets and the reef that extends NE
mainland promontory on the W  side of the N end of Shelikof    of Shakun Rock and the S side of Kiukpalik Island are clear, with
Strait, is a grassy peninsula about 3 miles long and 190 feet high.    depths of 5 to 10 fathoms. The waters between the mainland and
At its W end it breaks off in a bluff to a low, narrow neck which    Shakun Islets are free of danger, except for reefs just off the main-
connects it to the mainland. Rocks that uncover, extend about 0.2    land. Depths of 1 to 3 fathoms are in this area.
mile E from the cape.                                              (27)  Swikshak Lagoon, about 5 miles N of Shakun Islets, is a
 (19)  The three points on the SE side of Cape Douglas and the    lagoon which is practically closed at all stages of the tide. The
small projecting point on the mainland in 58ï¿½49.8'N.,    entrance is about 200 feet wide and rocky. Depths inside the
153ï¿½21.3'W., about 1.5 miles SW of Cape Douglas, are reported to    lagoon average less than 1 /2 fathoms. Just SE of the lagoon
be distinctive radar targets at 10 miles.                         entrance is a group of reefs, one of which is bare at all stages of
 (20)  In 1971, the NOAA Ship RAINIER reported that good    the tide.
anchorage in 12 fathoms, very even sand and mud bottom, good       (28)  Kaguyak, an abandoned village in ruins, is behind a large
holding ground, and sheltered from W and N weather, could be    bare rock that is joined to the beach at low water. Approaching
found about 1.5 miles S of Cape Douglas and about 1.5 miles off    from SE, a Coast Guard vessel anchored in about 7 fathoms, hard
the mainland shore. There is some shelter from SW and NE winds,    sand bottom, with Cape Chiniak bearing 205ï¿½, Shakun Rock 096ï¿½,
but if heavy, NE swells roll around the point. In making the    and the rock in front of Kaguyak 346ï¿½. Between Cape Chiniak and
anchorage, keep 2 miles NE of the 28-foot-high rock near the cen-    Shakun Rock, the bottom was found to be uneven, depths 10 to 30
ter of Douglas Reef, and maintain a distance of 1.5 miles off the    fathoms, mud and hard sand alternating.
mainland shore when anchoring. The small projecting point on the   (29)  Cape Chiniak, the N point of Hallo Bay, is 27.5 miles
mainland, 1.5 miles SW of Cape Douglas, is a good radar target    SSW of Cape Douglas. It has a high hill near its end.
for approaching the anchorage, and the 28-foot-high rock is also a  (30)  Hallo Bay, between Cape Chiniak and Cape Nukshak, is 6
good radar target at 5 miles, but only when the tide is high enough    miles wide and ends in tidal flats that extend out up to 0.5 mile
to cover the rest of the reef (half tide or higher).              along the head of the bay.
 (21)  Mount Douglas, 7,064 feet high, and Fourpeaked              (31)  Ninagiak Island, in Hallo Bay, has a knob 305 feet high.
Mountain, 6,903 feet high, are snow-covered mountains W and    A rock, bare at most stages of the tide, is 0.7 mile SE of the island.
SW, respectively, of Cape Douglas.                                A reef extends 0.3 mile NE of the rock, and a submerged rock is
 (22)  Douglas Reef, 5.5 miles S of Cape Douglas, is about 2
                                                                   0.3 mile SW. Good anchorage, open to NE weather, can be had
miles in diameter. Part of the reef uncovers; near its middle is a    close into the mainland between the island and the tidal flats to the
rock 28 feet high. A sounding of 6 fathoms with 40 to 60 fathoms    W. Safe passage can be made on either side of the small island 0.5
close-to was obtained I mile 081ï¿½ from the rock. Several rocks,
                                                               from the rock. Several rocks,    mile SW of Ninagiak Island, but the passage between the N side of
close together and awash at high water, are 2.8 miles SW from
Douglas Reef and 1.5 miles offshore. A reef bare at low water
extends about 0.8 mile SE from them. About 10 miles SW of Cape     (32)  A reef, about 1.2 miles long E and W, is in Hallo Bay
                                                                   about midway ï¿½between Ninagiak Island and Cape Nukshak. The
Douglas is a point marked by a hill 673 feet high. In the valley S    about midwaybetween  Ninagiak Island and Ca pe Nukshak  The
                                                                   reef is bare in places at low water and has no kelp.
of the point is a small glacier. About 1.2 miles from the point and
168ï¿½ from the hill is a rock awash at about half tide. There is no
kelp on the rock, and the sea seldom breaks on it when it is cov-  (33)  Charts 16576, 16603.-Cape Nukshak (58023.5'N.,
ered.                                                             153059.0'W.), 36 miles SW from Cape Douglas, is flat and grass
 (23)  Two submerged rocks with kelp patches are about 1.5    covered to the foot of a prominent sharp peak. Just off the cape is
miles SW of the preceding rock and the same distance from shore.    narrow Nukshak Island, which is 0.5 mile long, 133 feet high,
The kelp shows well only at low water, and the sea seldom breaks    and has two knolls. Between the island and the cape is a narrow
on the rocks.                                                     passage about 75 yards wide that has a depth of 5 fathoms in mid-
 (24)  Dangerous pinnacles are in the area N of 58ï¿½40.0'N., and    channel; A prominent pinnacle is close to the W end of the island.
W of 153027.0'W., about 5.5 miles NNE of Kiukpalik Island. Mar-    Anchorage and shelter from W winds can be had 0.2 mile S of the
iners are advised to exercise extreme caution while navigating in    island in 10 fathoms, sandy bottom. In 1972, the NOAA Ship
the area.                                                         RAINIER anchored in 31 fathoms, hard bottom, with the pinnacle
 (25)  Kiukpalik Island, 17.5 miles SSW of Cape Douglas and    bearing2330, 0.6 mile.
2 miles offshore, is 1.2 miles long, 155 feet high, nearly level, and  (34)  Reconnaissance soundings show depths of 17 to 50 fath-
grass covered. A reef with a submerged rock at its outer end    oms in the area 400 to 1,200 yards N and E of Nukshak Island.
extends about 0.3 mile N of the island and, a shoal, scantily      (35)  A large reef, that uncovers 9 feet, is 0.5 mile off the main-
marked by kelp, is about 0.5 mile NW of the island. The channel    land and 1.8 miles SW of the outer end of Nukshak Island. A rock,
between the island and these outlying dangers is not safe. Tempo-    covered 3 feet and not marked by kelp, is 0.6 mile ESE of the reef.
rary anchorage, with shelter from E winds, can be had in the bight    From Cape Nukshak to Kukak Bay the cliffs along the shore are
on the W side of the island in 8 fathoms, muddy bottom. The    irregular, and numerous high-water and submerged rocks extend
mainland opposite the island should be avoided, as there is a pos-    about I mile offshore.
sibility of shoals on that side.                                   (36)  Yugnat Rocks, about 3 miles SW of Cape Nukshak, are
 (26)  Shakun Rock, a prominent dark pinnacle 50 feet high, is   several prominent rocks about 20 feet high. The area around the
5 miles 232ï¿½ from Kiukpalik Island. From the rock, a semicircular    rocks is foul and ships are warned to keep outside the 20-fathom
reef, partly bare at low water, extends NE 2 miles and S and W to    curve.




                                                     6. ALASKA PENINSULA                                                         187


 (37)  Kukak Bay, between Cape Nukshak and Cape Ugyak, has           (47)  Between Kaflia Bay and Cape Gull, the bottom is irregular
depths as great as 66 fathoms and extends inland about 6 miles.    and rocky for a distance of 1 mile offshore and should be avoided.
The entrance is 0.6 mile wide and is easy of access. The shores are  (48)  Cape Kuliak, 52.5 miles SW of Cape Douglas, is the out-
steep in most places and anchorage area is limited.                 ermost headland on the midsection of Shelikof Strait's W shore.
 (38)  Kukak Point, 4.5 miles SW of Cape Nukshak, is low and    The cape rises gradually from a crumbling bluff at the end to high
grassy; a reef extends 0.5 mile SE from the point. Devils Cove,    mountains inland.
between Kukay Point and Tiny Island, has a flat muddy bottom         (49)  Kuliak Bay, immediately N of Cape Kuliak and locally
and depths of 4 to 7 fathoms. There is a waterfall at the W end of    known as Halferty Bay, is over 4 miles long and 3 miles wide at
the cove. Entrance to the cove is obstructed by three reefs that are    its entrance. The only obstruction in the entrance is a rock awash
covered at high water. The best passage into the cove is between    about 1.25 miles SW of the small grassy island off the point S of
the W  reef and Tiny Island. Strangers are cautioned not to enter    Cape Gull. The area between this rock awash and the N shore of
unless the reefs are visible.                                       the bay is generally foul and should be avoided. A shoal, covered
 (39)  On the S side of Kukak Bay are two islands; Aguligik    about 41/2 fathoms, is about 1.25 miles SE of the rock awash.
Island is just inside the entrance and Aguchik Island is near the    (50)  The head of Kuliak Bay is separated into two arms by a
head of the bay. The ruins of an abandoned salmon and clam can-    peninsula. The S arm is deep and clear of hazards except for a pin-
nery are in the small cove opposite the E side of Aguligik Island.    nacle covered 4 fathoms in its center. The N arm contains a basin
The face of the cannery wharf bares at extreme low water.           0.7 mile long with depths of 8 to 15 fathoms but it is separated
 (40)  Cannery tenders formerly anchored in a small bight S of    from the outside bay by a sandbar extending 0.3 mile from the NE
Aguligik Island in 28 fathoms, mud bottom. A large anchorage is    shore. The basin is entered through a narrow channel, about 75
available S of Aguchik Island in 11 to 27 fathoms, mud bottom.    feet wide, with depths of about 2 fathoms; the channel is discern-
Both anchorages afford good protection against wind and swell.    able only a low tides.
The holding bottom is good. The diurnal range of tide is about 13    (51)  Missak Bay, between Capes Kuliak and Atushagvik, is
feet, and the currents are negligible.                              nearly 4 miles long and has deep but good holding ground. A reef
 (41)  A rock, covered about 8 feet, is near the center of the inner    and bare rocksextend from the N shore, and rocks are close to the
                                                                     S shore. A midchannel course should be steered into the bay.
part of Kukak Bay. The rock is 0.5 mile from the N shore, 0.8 mile    S shore A midhanne course shoud be steered into the bay.
from the S shore, and about midway between Aguligik and              (52)  The 231-foot NOAA Ship FAIRWEATHER anchored in
Aguchik Islands,.                                             0     Missak Bay in July 1975, but experienced no storms during this
                                                                     period.
 (42)  Cape Ugyak, 8 miles SW of Cape Nukshak, is the E end
             the  outainous peninsula between Kukak an  Kaflia Bays.  (53)  Cape Atusbagvik is 4.2 miles 225ï¿½ from Cape Kuliak. It
of the moutainous peninsula between Kukak and Kaflia Bays.
                                                                     has a low bluff at the water, and rises in a gentle slope to a promi-
Kulichkof Island is a small grass-topped rock 0.2 mile N of the
Kulicape.kof  Island is a small grass-toppedirk 0.2 m i l e    of the nent knoll, 904 feet high, with a decided saddle between it and the
cape.
                            (43   The area N of Cape Ugyak is foul for a radius of about 2    higher land farther back. A reef with a submerged rock at its outer
 (43)  The area N of Cape Ugyak is foul for a radius of about 2    end marked by kelp extends 0.7 mile S of the cape.
miles. Bare and covered rocks, and reefs are numerous. A rocke                                                    a
                                                                      (54) Between Capes Atushagvik and Ilktugitak are Kinak and
awash, not marked by kelp, is 1.3 miles NNW from Kulichkof      Amalik Bays. Kinak Bay is over 8 miles long and about 3 miles
Island and 0.8 mile off the mainland. A rock, covered 11 feet, is
0.8 mile NNE from Kulichkof Island; a small patch of thin kelp is    wide at the entrance On the E side of the bay 15 miles NW 
                                                                     Cape Atushagvik, is a low peninsula 0.6 mile long, with a bluff
visible only at extreme low tides. A small rock, covered 1 foot, is    Cape Atushagvik, isa low peninsula 06 mile longn with a bluff
                                                                     150 feet high near its end. Russian Anchorage, on the N side of
0.3 mile NE of Kulichkof Island; a small patch of kelp is visible    the peninsula, has good holding ground, 300 to 500 yards from
on the lower tide.
                                                                     shore, in 10 to 18 fathoms. Water, except during dry periods, can
  (44)  Kaflia Bay, between Capes Ugyak and Gull, has at its    be obtained by boat. The only directions necessary are to give
head two small basins with depths of 20 to 35 fathoms in the mid-    Cape Atushagvik a berth of about 1 mile and the islands on the
dle and joined by a very narrow channel which passes S of a large    SW and the Russian Anchorage peninsula a berth of at least 0.5
islet just off the N shore. The channel into the first basin is about    mile. The final course into the anchorage should be SE straight
30 feet wide and subject to very swift currents during ebb and    toward the middle of the bight. The bottom levels out between 15
flood. Approach the channel S of several rocks in the entrance,    to 20 fathoms where large vessels should anchor. This anchorage
then turn N passing between the rocks-and islet in the center. Hug  is completely protected but is subject to williwaws, during north-
the E and N sides of the islet as you pass around. The channel has    erly blows, with gusts comparable in force to those blowing simul-
depths of 2 to 3 fathoms but is not recommended to those unfamil-    taneously in Shelikof Strait.
iar with the area.
                                                                      iar with the area.  (55)  The remainder of Kinak Bay is mostly deep. When en
  (45)  In the outer bay, a rock, which bares at low water, is 0.6    route to Hidden Harbor, at the head of Kinak Bay, favor the W
mile SW of the prominent point on the N side.                       side of the bay to avoid reefs and rocks awash on the E side. Take
                                                                     care to avoid the rock awash at 58009.6'N., 154026.8'W. The
  (46)  Charts 16576, 16580.-Cape Gull, about 47 miles SW of    entrance to Hidden Harbor is constricted by ledges on both sides.
Cape Douglas, is a bold headland, terminating in a cliff 503 feet    The channel is about 20 yards wide, clear of obstructions, and 2 to
high. Temporary anchorage can be had in the cove on the S side in    3 fathoms deep at midchannel. The harbor offers good anchorage
9 fathoms, sandy bottom. The S point of the cove is a rocky islet    for small craft. Fresh water is available from a stream on the SW
about 15 feet high. Foul ledges and reefs extend seaward 0.6 mile    side of the harbor.
from this point, to a small grassy island. Dangerous pinnacles are   (56)  Amalik Bay, 3 miles W of Kinak Bay, is separated from
in the area extending about 0.5 mile N, 0.5 mile E, and 1.5 miles S    Kinak Bay by a high peninsula and numerous small islands. Takli
of the island: Mariners are advised to exercise extreme caution    Island, the largest of these islands, is in the entrance to the bay.
while navigating in the area.                                       About 0.6 mile N of Takli. Island is an inner chain of islands that



 188                                                  6. ALASKA PENINSULA


 extend 1.5 miles W  from the high peninsula. Small vessels can    the stream can dispose of it. Occasional steam and smoke from
 find excellent anchorage with good holding ground and protection    Mount Katmai volcanic activity can be seen in the area. Strong N
 from any weather in the basin to the N of the chain of islands.    winds raise large clouds of pummice which cause a murky haze
 Enter Amalik Bay W of Takli Island, and then around the W  side    throughout the area.
 of the chain of islands to the anchorage. Avoid the foul areas       (66)  The area in the vicinity of Mount Katmai from Cape Dou-
 which extend about 300 yards N from the westerly and northerly    glas to Cape Kubugakli is the Katmai National Monument. The
 islands in the chain.                                               most spectacular feature of the monument is the mountain-encir-
  (57)  Takli Island is about 2 miles long, and its E part is low,    cled Valley of Ten Thousand Smokes in the NW portion of the
 broken, and rocky. At its W end, a hill, 455 feet high, has a sheer    reservation. Here the ground is broken open, giving vent to several
 drop to the water. A chain of reefs and rocky islands extend 1.5    million fumaroles or little volcanoes, from which rise jets of
 miles E from Takli Island. Passage between them is dangerous and    steam. Some of the jets throw their steam 1,000 feet into the air,
 should be avoided. When navigating between Amalik Bay and    and hundreds of others go up to a distance of 500 feet, all merging
 Kinak Bay through the passage N of Takli Island, keep to the cen-    above the valley into one colossal cloud.
 ter of the channel and pass to the N of the islands at 58004.8'N.,   (67)  Kashvik Bay, just SW of Katmai Bay, offers good anchor-
 154025.5'W.                                                         age in 10 fathoms or less near the center of the bay. A submerged
  (58)  About 3 miles NW of Takli Island at the head of Amalik    reef extends about 0.8 mile from the N shore, and scattered rocks
Bay is Geographic Harbor. The middle of the narrow channel    are close off the SW and W shores. The entrance and middle of the
leading into the harbor has a least depth of 51/4 fathoms and is clear    bay are free of hazards.
of obstructions, except for a rock awash and a 21/2-fathom shoal     (68)  Mount Katmai, a volcano 6,715 feet high, is part of a
off the NE shore at about 58ï¿½06.2'N., 154ï¿½33.8'W., and    high ridge and is not easily distinguishable from Shelikof Strait. In
58005.5'N., 154032.7'W., respectively. Geographic Harbor is actu-    1912 this volcano gave vent to a violent eruption, the initial stages
ally two large bays and two narrow fjords that branch from the    lasting three days, during which several cubic miles of material
entrance channel. The bays are separated by two prominent    were emitted. This eruption was of such violence as to rank in the
islands. The S bay is deep and offers numerous anchorages. The N    first order of volcanic explosions. The volcano is now quiet and in
bay is shoal on the N and W  sides but offers some anchorage for    its crater is a lake over 1 mile long and about 1 mile wide.
smaller vessels. The fjords are narrow with uneven bottom and         (69)  Mount Mageik, a volcano 7,250 feet high, is about 10
should be avoided.                                                  miles SW from Mount Katmai. It has a more definite summit and
  (59)  Cape Ilktugitak (58ï¿½01.5'N., 154ï¿½35.0'W.), just SW of    can be easily identified from Shelikof Strait.
Takli Island, is fairly low, but rises rapidly to the high land back of  (70)   Cape Kubugakli, 83 miles SW of Cape Douglas, is bold
it. Between the cape and Takli Island is a small islet. The passage    and rises rapidly to Mount Kubugakli, a prominent mountain
between this islet and Takli Island is clear. A reef extends from    with two summits. The 2,920-foot S peak is the higher. The area
this islet toward the S and SE for 1.5 miles with numerous sub-    off Cape Kubugakli is foul and should be given a wide berth.
merged rocks. Vessels should stay outside the 25-fathom curve         (71)  Alinchak Bay, opening S of Cape Kubugakli, is divided
when navigating in this area.                                       into two arms. Little Alinchak Bay, the S arm, is shallow with
  (60)  The passage between the small islet and Cape Ilktugitak    extensive foul areas and should be avoided by those without local
has depths of 5 to 10 fathoms, except for lesser depths over the    knowledge. Big Alinchak Bay, the N arm, is an excellent harbor
pinnacles which are scattered throughout the area.                  of refuge with protection from all but NE and E winds. The center
  (61)  The steamer GOLDEN FOREST was lost on the S side of    of the arm has good anchorage in 10 fathoms, mud and fine sand
Cape Ilktugitak in 1929. In 1980, the remains of the steamer were    bottom. Depths decrease to 2 fathoms in the NW and SW corners.
visible on the beach and in the surf in 58ï¿½01.6'N., 154035.7'W.     Vessels should keep 0.5 mile off the N shore of the bay and 0.15
 (62)  Dakavak Bay, between Cape Ilktugitak and Katmai Bay,    mile off the S shore. The approach to Big Alinchak Bay is from
is foul along the W side. A foul area that bares is near the center of    SE on a course midway between the extensive foul area off the
Dakavak Bay in about 58ï¿½02.1'N., 154ï¿½41.6'W. Depths from 8 to    mouth of Little Alinchak Bay and a 7-fathom shoal in about
23 fathoms are in the E half of the bay. Fair anchorage, but    57048.0'N., 155ï¿½13.0'W.
exposed to S and SW winds, can be found in the NE corner of the      (72)  Cape Kekurnoi, between Alinchak and Puale Bays, is
bay about 0.5 mile from shore in 15 to 18 fathoms, mud bottom.      fairly low, but rises gradually to over 1,500 feet. Reefs and rocky
 (63)  Vessels transiting between Dakavak Bay and Katmai Bay    islets extend 3.5 miles S from the SW tip of the cape. There are
should stay at least 1.5 miles offshore because the area is foul in    bad tide rips off these reefs, which is frequently the case along the
places. An extensive foul area with submerged rocks and rocks    W side of Shelikof Strait.
awash extends 1.5 miles SW of the W point of Dakavak Bay.             (73)  Puale Bay is open to the S and is only partly protected on
 (64)   Katmai Bay is a large roadstead which offers protection    the E by the reefs and islets extending S from Cape Kekumoi. The
fron N, NW, and W weather. In 1980, hydrographic surveys by the    N shore has low rocky bluffs and small rocky beaches. The W
NOAA Ship DAVIDSON revealed that the bay has several large    shore has two long sandy beaches separated by a rocky bluff 400
submerged reefs with least depths of 4 to 8 fathoms. In the NW      feet high. The SW shore is formed by the bold rocky bluffs of
corner of the bay, about 0.5 mile offshore, is a reef with a least    Cape Aklek.
depth of 2 fathoms, in 57ï¿½58.2'N., 155000.4'W. In the NE corner      (74)  The E and NE sections of the bay have numerous danger-
of the bay is a reef with a least depth of 23/4 fathoms, in    ous rocks and reefs. The W  part has fairly regular sand bottom.
58000.0'N., 154050.2'W.                                             Reefs and kelp-covered rocks extend 0.2 to 0.4 mile off the E side
 (65)  Katmai River, its head extending to Mount Katmai before    of Cape Aklek.
the eruption in 1912, was navigated by launches at high tide to the  (75)  Routes, Puale Bay. -From Shelikof Strait steer a course
abandoned village of Katmai. In 1980, the river was choked with    of 325ï¿½ for the highest point on Cape Aklek. When about 2.4
pummice which washes down from the higher slopes faster than    miles off the cape, change course and steer about 015ï¿½ through the





                                                    6. ALASKA PENINSULA                                                        189


bay entrance for about 4.5 miles to a point in about 57ï¿½42'N.,    violent williwaws with W  weather, and at such times the inner
155031'W. From this point, the vessel can proceed to a variety of    anchorage should not be used. The wind is apt to shift from NW to
anchorages in the inner bay. By steering 338ï¿½ for 4.5 miles the    SE with little warning. In such cases, launches make for Kanatak
vessel will find anchorage near the head of the bay in 10 fathoms    Lagoon for shelter.
on even sand bottom. If seeking shelter from S winds and seas, the
                                                                     (86)  Vessels with passengers or freight usually anchor as far in
vessel may run 2.5 miles on course 276ï¿½ to anchorage in 10 fath-    as their draft permits With NW winds there is but little swell.
oms. Protection from E to N winds may be found by steering 075ï¿½
for 3 miles to anchorage in 12 fathoms, taking care to avoid the     (87)  Kanatak Lagoon, on the W  side of the bay about 3.5
3/2-fathom rock in 57043'N., 155027'W.                              miles from the head, has a narrow entrance with less than 4 feet at
 (76)  There are no satisfactory ranges for entering the bay but    low water, but has depths of 4 to 15 fathoms, mud bottom, inside.
they are unnecessary. Cape Aklek can be approached with safety    It affords excellent anchorage in E weather, but is a maelstrom
on any heading between 305ï¿½ and 020ï¿½. The channel between the    with NW winds. Under such conditions the williwaws blow with
10-fathom curves at the entrance to the bay is over 2 miles wide.   almost hurricane force, and the water level at the E end is higher
 (77)  Fishing craft sometimes enter the bay from the E, using a    than that at the W end.
narrow channel between the mainland and the S rocky islets. This     (88)  In approaching Portage Bay from Shelikof Strait, keep a
channel has a least depth of 6 fathoms but is only about 350 yards    careful track of the reckoning, as the various headlands are similar
wide, is bordered by kelp-covered rocks, and has a 4-fathom rock    and the bay is difficult to recognize from a distance. Enter on a
near its outer end.                                                 midchannel course and, if bound to the inner anchorage, pass 200
 (78)  Anchorages in Puale Bay are indifferent to poor. There is    yards SW of the 3/4-fathom rock, then head N and anchor as
no protection from SE weather. S swells enter the bay a large part    desired.
of the time and increase in size in the shoal water. Williwaws are
frequent. Even in W  weather the winds funnel through the low        (89)  Cape Igvak (57026.1'N.  156001.3'W.), a conspicuous
passes to the W of the bay with greater velocity than that encoun-    headland separating Portage and Wide Bays, is the S extremity of
tered in Shelikof Strait.                                           a ridge of mountains rising 2,000 to 2,600 feet, and covered with
                                                                   clouds most of the time.
 (79)  Cape Aklek, the most prominent headland in the vicinity,
rises to 1,877 feet within 0.6 mile of the shoreline in a series of  (90)  Wide Bay, between Cape Igvak and Cape Kayakliut, is
bare slides, bluffs, and cliffs. Two large rocks about 75 feet high    obstructed across the entrance by many islands which are sur-
are off its S and SE shores, but they are inconspicuous from sea-    rounded by foul ground.
ward against the rocky background of the cape.                       (91)  In August 1983, a 3-fathom shoal was reported about 5.5
 (80)  Dry Bay is between Cape Aklek and Cape Unalishagvak.    miles E of the islands in about 57020'37"N., 156ï¿½06'54"W. The
As the name implies, the entire inner bay bares at low water. The
                                                                   preferred entrance to the inner bay for deep-draft vessels is
outer bay has a rocky, irregular bottom. Here again williwaws are    through a 300-yard-wide channel between East Channel Island
frequent and W winds are increased in violence in the low passes    and Channel Rock; the channel has a least depth of 9 fathoms.
to the W.                                                           Rocks and reefs, marked by kelp and usually breakers, extend
                                                                   almost 1.5 miles SE and 0.3 mile N of Channel Rock. Foul ground
 (81)  Chart 16570.-Jute Bay is between Cape Unalishagvak          extends almost 2 miles NE and 0.2 mile S of East Channel Island.
and Cape Kanatak. The part inside Jute Island is called Island    Small shallow-draft vessels may enter the inner bay between Ter-
Bay. Reefs marked by kelp and breakers extend SE from Jute    race Island and West Channel Island or between Hartman
Island and WSW from the E side of Island Bay to about halfway    Island and the unnamed islet 0.4 mile SW. Ledges and shoals sur-
to Jute Island; both reefs tend to break the swells during SE winds. round the islands, and in the channel between Terrace and West
The channel between the reef extending WSW and the island has    Channel Islands a distance of 175 yards should be maintained off
depths ranging from 11 to 5 fathoms. The channel W of Jute Island    the SW side of West Channel Island; a midchannel course should
has depths of 1 V4 to 5 fathoms, but its S end is obstructed by rocks    be maintained in the channel between Hartman Island and the
and reefs extending SW from the island, and its use is not recom-    unnamed islet. Passage elsewhere should not be attempted without
mended except by boats with local knowledge. A 23/4-fathom    local knowledge. Moderate rip currents have been observed in all
shoal is 0.7 mile SW of Jute Island. Indifferent anchorage, shel-    the entrances to Wide Bay during maximum currents. Once inside
tered except from SE winds, can be obtained N of Jute Island in    the inner bay, secure anchorage in any weather is available in 5
Island Bay.                                                         fathoms to more than 20 fathoms, excellent holding ground. The
 (82)  As in all of the bays in this vicinity, the williwaws are vio-    williwaws are disagreeable with W winds but are not dangerous to
lent with W winds and are very troublesome, if not dangerous, to    moderate-sized vessels. Small craft can anchor in the lee of the
small craft.                                                        islands.
 (83)  Portage Bay, between Cape Kanatak and Cape Igvak, is
clear except for reefs and rocks about I mile from its head. The     (92)  The ruins of an abandoned pier, causeway, and oil drilling
bay is open to SE winds and is subject to NW winds, which draw    platform are about midway on the W side of Wide Bay. In 1971, it
down from the mountains with great force.                           was reported that only about a 150-yard inshore section of the pier
 (84)   A kelp-covered reef extends 0.5 mile SW from Kelp          remained. The abandoned oil drilling platform, about 0.3 mile off-
Point. Just off the reef and separated from it by a narrow channel    shore, was reported to be about 3 feet in diameter and to stand
is a rock, covered 3/4 fathom, leaving a clear channel 0.2 mile wide    about 15 feet above the water Mariners are advised to navigate
W of it for entering the inner part of the bay.
 (85)  The best anchorage is in depths of about 5 to 10 fathoms      (93)  Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as
SE of the 3/4-fathom rock; coasting vessels sometimes use the    14ï¿½ from the normal variation have been observed on Terrace
inner anchorage NW of the rock. The anchorages are subjected'to    Island and as much as 30 on East Channel Island.




190                                                  6. ALASKA PENINSULA


 (94)  Chart 16568.-Small-craft inshore route between Wide           (105)  The coastline from Agripina Bay to Port Wrangell is very
Bay Bay and Sutwik Island has many dangers; mariners are    broken, with many indentations and small inshore islands. The
advised to used caution when navigating this area.                  area is rocky and foul within 400 yards of the beach. Outside the
 (9s)   Cape Kayakliut (57017.7'N., 156018.9'W.), on the S side    small islands, some pinnacle rocks exist. Kelp extends 500 yards
of Wide Bay, has a generally flat appearance, sloping smoothly      SE from the point 0.5 mile SSW of Agripina Bay.
back to the mountains. The shoreline is formed by low, steep cliffs  (106)  Offshore are numerous rocks and islands.
and close to the point is a prominent grass-topped island.            (107)  Ashiiak Island is high and rocky with a rounded central
 (96)  Imuya Bay is 4 miles S of Cape Kayakliut. A group of    dome. The W side has sheer cliffs to the waterline and the water is
islands is in the NW comer and a shoal area with a least depth of,  deep close inshore. The E side of the island appears foul, with
/2 fathom extends about 2.8 miles ENE from the S point of the    small islets extending 0.3 mile offshore and with one submerged
entrance. Depths shoal gradually from 17 fathoms inshore from a    rock, that breaks in heavy weather, about 0.7 mile offshore. A
line between the N and S points to 5 fathoms at a point 0.4 mile    small rocky islet about 10 feet high is 400 yards W of the island. A
from the center of the sand and gravel beach which heads the bay.    rock, that uncovers about 8 feet, is 0.9 mile SW of Ashiiak Island.
The area close-to and between the islands is shoal and foul, and    Another rock, that uncovers, is about 150 yards to the E. In a mod-
the area between the largest island and the mainland to the N and    erate swell these rocks break at high water.
W is mostly bare at lower low water. A large stream enters the bay    (108) Port Wrangell, 7 miles SW of Agripina Bay, is a deep,
at the W end of the sand and boulder beach at the head.             narrow indentation in the coastline. The outer bay, open to the SE
 (97)  The wreck of a large vessel is against the shore W  of the    and E, has depths in midchannel ranging from 130 fathoms at the
islands at the S point of the bay.                                  entrance to 14 fathoms at the inner end. The shoreline is steep and
 (98)  To enter Imuya Bay from the N, follow the trend of the    rocky
shoreline from the N point around the islands, keeping the islands   (109) The inner bay has depths from 10 fathoms near the
at least 0.4 mile on the starboard hand, and thence midway          entrance to 5 fathoms at the head. The shoreline rises steeply all
between the islands and the S shore to the head of the bay. Indif-    around the bay and there are often williwaws on strong NW
ferent anchorage can be had for small craft in 5 fathoms, hard, fine    winds. The ground swell does not make into the inner bay.
sand bottom, 0.4 mile from the beach at the head of the bay.          (10)  About 500 yards inside the inner bay on the E shore is a
                                                                    small stream, dry during extremely dry weather, where small craft
 (99)  In entering the bay from the S, care should be taken to
                                                                    can come close alongshore and take water aboard with 200 feet of
avoid the shoal area extending about 2.8 miles ENE from the S hose at about 30-foot head.
                                                                    hose at about 30-foot head.
                                                                     t of the bay.  (1) E of Port Wrangell is a group of three large islands. David
 (100) Kilokak Rocks, two rocky islets, are about 2 miles off-    Island, the most N and largest of the group, is high and bold with
shore and just SE of Imuya Bay; the 30-foot NW rock is the    steep rocky sides marked by numerous caves and clefts. Two
higher. The area W  of these rocks is clear for 1 mile toward the    small, rocky islets are close inshore on the N side.
shore. Depths of 15 fathoms or more can be carried to within 100      (112)  Lone Rock, 1 mile NE of David Island, is about 100 feet
yards of the N, W, and S sides of the higher rock. A shoal area    high, of a distinct brick red color, and with vertical or slightly
                                                                    overhanging cliffs on the W end that rise to a flat grassy top.
 (101)  A rock, that uncovers about 6 feet, is 1.3 miles NW of       (113)  Poltava Island, 0.8 mile SE of David Island, has the same
Kilokak Rocks. This rock marks the SE end of a foul area that    general appearance as David Island but is smaller and lower. The
extends inshore to a group of reefs and islets near the shoreline.  passage between David and Poltava Islands is not recommended
 (102) Agripina Bay, 12.5 miles SE of Cape Kayaklut, is a deep    without local knowledge. In December 1987, a 5-fathom spot was
indentation with a generally low but bold rocky shoreline indented    reported about midway between David and Poltava Islands in
with numerous small bights and clefts. The N and S points form-    about 57'01'52"N., 156028'52"W.
ing the entrance are marked by groups of small steep rocky            (114) Navy Island, the most S and smallest of the group, is 0.4
islands; a larger group of very prominent islands and rocks, near    mile SE of Poltava Island. Several detached rocks or islets extend
the S central part of the bay, roughly divides the outer and inner    600 yards W  from the main island. The passage between Poltava
parts of the bay. A large shoal area, with a least depth of 3 fath-    and Navy Islands is not recommended without local knowledge.
oms, is about 0.5 mile N of the E end of the largest island.        Thick kelp and foul ground are between Navy Island and a low
 (103)  Anchorage for large vessels can be had in 16 to 18 fath-    rock 400 yards to the NE.
oms in the W end of the outer bay about 0.3 mile N of the islands    (115)  Cape Providence, 3 miles' S of Port Wrangell, is fairly
and 0.3 mile from the W shore. This area is protected from all but    low with a steep rocky shoreline and many small indentations. A
NE to SE weather. One of the best small-boat anchorages along    group of five rocky islets extends SE about 0.6 mile from the tip of
this section of the coast is in the bight at the head of the inner bay,    the cape. Submerged rocks extend about 0.6 mile N and NE of the
midway between the E and W shores, in 5 to 11 fathoms, sticky,    islets.
mud bottom. No swell makes into the bight even in heavy weather,      (116)  Chiginagak Bay, between Cape Providence and Cape
and there are no williwaws even in strong winds. NW of the bold    Kuyuyukak, is 6 miles long, 10 miles wide between the capes, and
rocky hill which forms the W  side of the bight, is an extensive    2 miles wide at the inner end. The outer bay has scattered groups
gravel flat bare at low water except for the shallow delta channels    of rocks and small islands, and a group of four larger islands is
of a large stream that enters the bay at this point.                along the W shore. In 1989, numerous uncharted shoals, covered
 (104)  The only danger in the inner bay is a reef near the W side.    rocks, and foul areas were reported to exist throughout the north-
The outermost part of this reef is about 350 yards off the W shore    ern and eastern parts of Chiginagak Bay.
and about 400 yards S of the anchorage. The area between this        (117)  Offshore from the bay and 5 miles S from Cape Provi-
reef and the prominent point about 800 yards S of the anchorage    dence is a prominent group of islets known as the Aiugnak Col-
has several submerged rocks.                                        umns. The highest islet rises to about 102 feet. The areas





                                                     6. ALASKA PENINSULA                                                       191


immediately surrounding the columns are extremely complex,          (129) Central Island, midway between Ugaiushak Island and
particularly the area NE of the highest islet. Vessels should give    Nakalilok Bay, is a small but very prominent island with a single
them a wide berth. A surface current of about 2 knots often sets to    high peak shaped like a conical beehive. A small rocky islet is 200
the NE in the vicinity of the columns.                             yards S of the larger island.
 (118s) Devils Finger (56ï¿½52'10"N., 156037'27"W.), about 2.5       (130) The southernmost of a second group of islands is 4 miles
miles SW of Aiugnak Columns, is a narrow rock pinnacle covered    due W from Ugaiushak Island. On the N are 3 small rocky islets;
1 fathom rising abruptly from general depths of 20 fathoms.        in the center is an island 1.1 miles long and 0.2 mile wide, with
 (119) A group of four major islands and numerous islets, about 3    grassy top and steep rocky shoreline; on the S is a large, high
miles NW of Aiugnak Columns, cover an area approximately 1    island, 0.6 mile long and 0.1 mile wide, with very high vertical
mile by 0.5 mile. The islands are about 50 feet high, generally    cliffs to the waterline. Depths obtained around these islands were
flat, and covered with grass. Ledges and foul area extending as    15 to 18 fathoms, very smooth sand bottom, but the formation of
much as 0.3 mile offshore surround the Islands.                    the islands suggests hidden dangers. Shoaling to 41/2 fathoms
 (120) An extensive foul area surrounding several islets is about    exists on the SW side of the northernmost islands.
4 miles NNW of Aiugnak Columns. An isolated rock that uncov-        (131) Five miles ESE of Cape Kunmik is Hydra Island, large
ers about 7 feet is 0.7 mile NW of the center of this foul area,   and flat-topped, 0.5 mile long and 0.2 mile wide, and with a small,
 (121) The inner part of Chiginagak Bay, about 2 miles square, is    rocky islet 300 yards to the N. A shoal area 2 to 3 miles to the S of
separated from the outer part by Derickson Island, 1.2 miles long    Hydra Island has a least depth of 5 fathoms. Shoaling occurs
and 0.3 mile wide, between a bold headland on the E and a low    about 0.5 mile E of the island with a least depth of 51/2 fathoms.
rocky point on the W. A smaller island is 1.1 miles due N from the    Shoaling also occurs about 4 mile SW of Hydra Island with depths
300-foot peak of Derickson Island. Large vessels enter the inner    of 53/4 fathoms.
bay from Cape Providence, passing E of Derickson Island.            (132) Nakalilok Bay is divided into an E and W part by a low
 (122) In November 198 8, a rock covered V1/, fathoms was    double-headed cape. The E part is 4 miles long, 3 miles wide at
 r                 eported 1.2 miles SSW of the S end of Derickson Island.  the entrance, and 1.5 miles wide at the head that terminates in a
                                                                    low sandy beach. The bay is generally deep except for a small
 (123) At the head of the bay is a flat sand and gravel beach that    shoal area marked by       is g  of the double-headed cape
bares 200 to 400 yards offshore at low water. A large unnavigable           shoal area                              the 
                                                                    and for a shoal area that extends 0.4 mile E from the same cape.
stream enters the head of the bay on the W side over a broad sand    The W  shore is a boulder and ledge beach backed by steep cliffs.
delta, bare at low water. Two smaller streams enter the NE corner    The E shore is boulder strewn near the entrance, with gravel
W of a prominent rocky headland distinguished by several small    toward the head, and is backed by ver steep hills. A very promi-
caves at the high-water line. A ledge showing considerable area at    nent waterfall is 2 miles from the head of the bay on the    side.
low water is just E of the delta. Several pinnacles on this ledge
                                                                    This section of the bay affords good shelter for small craft except
                                                                    in heavy S weather. The anchorage is in 7 to 9 fathoms, sand bot-
 (124) Anchorage for vessels of any size can be had in the inner    tom, 600 yards offshore from the E end of the sand beach at the
bay. In moderate weather from any direction, or in heavy weather    head of the bay. Large craft can anchor in 10 to 15 fathoms about
from the W, N, or E, the best anchorage is 0.2 to 0.5 mile SW of    0.5 mile offshore.
the rocky point E of the beach at the head of the bay. Depths are 8  (133) The W part of Nakalilok Bay has a long stretch of sand
to 11 fathoms, sand or mud bottom, good holding ground. Willi-    beach, shaped like a flat crescent, that is between the double-
waws have been experienced in the bay on N winds. They gener-    headed cape and the N point of Yantarni Bay. Very smooth and
ally blow out of the valley leading NW to Mount Chiginagak. In    flat, the beach is backed by low grassy dunes on the W half. The
S weather, better shelter can be found 500 yards N of Derickson    bottom off this beach is of fine sand and is unusually smooth and
Island in 13 fathoms. In moderate S weather very little swell    flat, with no indications of submerged reefs. Depths vary from 5
makes into the anchorages.                                         fathoms 0.4 mile offshore, to 18 fathoms 1.6 miles offshore.
 (125) Cape Kuyuyukak (56054.0'N., 156050.0'W.), between            (134) Yantarni Bay, on the E side of Cape Kunmik, is about 2.5
Chiginagak Bay and Nakalilok Bay, is bold and prominent with    miles wide at the entrance and 4 miles long. The E side of the bay
high grassy hills sloping steeply to sheer cliffs at the beach.    is a low cape with a very flat top and vertical cliffs of an unusual
Numerous rocks and islets are close inshore S of the cape, and a    red-yellow color dropping sheer to the high-water line. A narrow
chain of reefs extends 2 miles E from the cape. S of the reef, a    reef extends 400 yards S. The head of the bay has depths of less
shoal area extends for 1.3 miles with numerous kelp patches.       than I fathom, and is not recommended for anchorage.
 (126)  Radial Island, about 5 miles SSE of Cape Kuyuyukak, is      (135)  Cape Kunmik (56ï¿½46.5'N., 157010.0'W.), high and bold,
a bare rock about 100 feet long, 50 feet wide, and 60 feet high.    is one of the most prominent capes along this section of the coast.
There are indications of shoal areas about 1 mile NW of the island.  A prominent waterfall, 40 feet high, is on the S end of the cape.
 (127) Ugaiushak Island, 6 miles S of Cape Kuyuyukak, is    The highlands are rounding in contour, covered with grass and
really a double island with a narrow, low boulder ridge connecting    alder patches on the lower slopes and prominently marked by deep
the two parts. The W part of the island is high, with a broken sky-    gullies. The shoreline is formed by vertical cliffs 20 to 400 feet
line and very tall, steep cliffs on the W and N sides. The E half is    high and deeply indented with small bights and clefts. The beach
much lower, flat on top, with sheer cliffs to the shoreline on the N  is generally foul and boulder strewn, with submerged rocks, reefs
and W, and a gradual slope to a low and rugged shoreline on the E.    and small rock islets extending 200 to 900 yards offshore. There
A group of buildings is at the W end of the ridge.                 are no known dangers farther offshore other than the visible islets.
 (128)  A narrow chain of reefs about 0.5 mile long is 1.4 miles S  (136) The southernmost tip of the cape is a small semidetached
of Ugaiushak Island. The SE reef is marked by two pointed rocks    rocky island with very steep sides terminating in a wedge-shaped
about 60 feet high and the NW reef by a single point about 25 feet    rock about 70 feet high. About 600 yards NE of this point and
high.                                                              close inshore is a detached islet of very striking appearance. As



192                                                 6. ALASKA PENINSULA


viewed from the S and E, it resembles a cathedral, with a single    ing to Aniakchak Bay from the S is a channel between Kumlik
central spire about 200 feet high on the S face, and a lower round-    Island on the E and Cape Kumlik on the W, thence between the
ing dome on the N. In sunlight this formation stands out promi-    prominent pinnacle rock on the E and Elephant Head Point on the
nently against the black cliffs behind.                             W. This channel is used by cannery tenders operating out of
  (137) Six hundred yards off the SE side of the cape is a small    Chignik, but is not recommended for general use without local
islet, 70 feet high, with vertical black rock sides and a smooth tur-    knowledge.
tleback top of grass. A low reef is 200 yards SE, and submerged       (142) About 1.2 miles NW of Elephant Head Point is a low,
rock is 500 yards E of the islet. The area between the islet and the    rock-cliff point with a rock awash at high water about 300 yards to
cape is foul and thick with kelp. A submerged rock, covered I    NE. In the slight bight just W  of Elephant Head Point temporary
foot, is about 3.8 miles S of the cape in about 56ï¿½42.6'N.,    anchorage can be obtained in 8 fathoms.
157008.5'W.                                                          (143)  Vessels can select anchorage in 12 to 20 fathoms in the
 (138) Amber Bay, large and open, is just W of Cape Kunmik.    SW, W, or NW parts of the bay about 0.6 to 1.5 miles from the
The outer part of the bay has moderate depths and regular bottom    sand and gravel beach. The bay is protected from the SW through
except for ledges and reefs alongshore, and the inner half is shal-    W to N. E and SE swells pile up heavily in this bay.
low, with numerous reefs and kelp patches. Being exposed, the        (144) Sutwik Island, about 7 miles off the Alaska Peninsula and
bay is not recommended for anchorage, but emergency anchorage    about 90 miles SW from Kodiak Island, is 12 miles long and 4
for small craft can be obtained in 31/2 to 6 fathoms, sand and shell    miles wide. The S side of the island, low and marshy in places, is
bottom, under the NE shore just NW of a long reef awash at high    very foul for 1 mile from the beach. The N side has steep shores
water. The reef is 3.2 miles NW of the prominent beak-shaped    and is foul along an 8-mile stretch of shore W  from Foggy Cape.
cliff that marks the S tip of Cape Kunmik. The bight inshore from    This stretch should be given a berth of not less than I mile in pass-
the reef is foul with rocks, bare at various stages of the tide. There    ing. The bottom is generally foul along this stretch.
is a reef that uncovers 11/2 fathoms on the NW shore in about         (145)  There are several deep-water channels between the NW
56049.7'N., 157026.9'W.                                             side of Sutwik Island and Cape Kumlik. Vessels can navigate par-
 (139) Eagle Island and Garden Island, separating the              allel to the W side of Sutwik Island about I mile offshore in a NE
entrances to Amber and Aniakchak Bays, are grass-covered, table-    or SW direction. Reported currents up to 3 knots flow along the
topped formations, with sheer cliffs on all sides. Eagle Island is    axis of this channel and can create dangerous wave conditions
nearly round and Garden Island is crescent-shaped. A large    when the wind is opposing the current. A wider channel is found
breaker is just SE of the line between Eagle and Garden Islands.    about 4 miles off the W side of Sutwik Island, but care should be
From the N point of Garden Island is a sand and gravel spit    taken to avoid the dangerous rocks about 4.5 miles NW of the NW
extending toward Cape Ayutka, which divides Amber and    tip of Sutwik Island.
Aniakchak Bays. S and W  of the cape is an extensive foul area       (146)  An excellent anchorage for small and medium-sized ves-
marked by kelp. The passage between Garden Island and Cape    sels, protected from SW to SSE weather, exists in the small bay
Ayutka should be avoided until it has been surveyed. At the S end    0.5 mile E of the NW tip of Sutwik Island, about 9 miles W  of
of Garden Island are two prominent pinnacles, the outermost is    Foggy Cape
needle shaped. Good anchorage for small craft can be obtained
close under the shore on the W  side of Garden Island in 7 to 10    S ik Island that provide g orages exist along the W shore of
                                                                    Sutwik Island that provide good protection from NE to S weather.
fathoms, sandy bottom.   Shoaling to 7ï¿½2 fathoms exists                                  4 miles SE8'N
                                                                    These are all in small coves centered in about 56ï¿½34.8'N.,
of Garden Island in about 56ï¿½42.2'N., 157012.4'W. Shoaling to    15715.7'W.; 5634.5'N., 15716.4'W.; and 5632.4'N.,
1/2 fathoms exists between Garden Island and Cape Ayutka in.   15719.7'W respectively
about 56044.9'N., 157024.0'W.
                                                                     (148)  Small to medium-sized vessels can find protection from
 (140)  Aniakchak Bay, wide and open, is entered between Gar-
den Island on the N and Kumlik Island on the S. Reconnaissance          N      W to NE weather on the S  side of Sutik Island in about
examination indicated moderate and regular depths to the steep
sand and gravel beach at its head. Along its N shore, for about 1.5  (49) Foggy Cape, the E end of Sutwik Island, is a prominent
miles W of Cape Ayutka, foul area marked by kelp, extends 200 to    landmark for vessels passing along the coast. It rises to 418 feet,
800 yards offshore. Two rocks awash are SW of Cape Ayutka, 0.8    and is first raised as a detached island because of a low neck of
and 1.7 miles, respectively. In the NW corner of the bay is a small    land that separates it from the rest of Sutwik Island. Preliminary
island, 82 feet high, with vertical cliffs along its E side. Immedi-  data from surveys in 1994 indicates a 3/4-fathom depth I mile SW
ately NW of this island, in the restricted area between the island    of the Cape, and 53/4 fathoms  1  miles SSE of the Cape. Mariners
and the mouth of a river, cannery tenders and barges moor to pil-    are advised to give it a wide berth. Foggy Cape and the S side of
ing in favorable weather, but a SE swell piles up in this anchorage.  Sutwik Island are often covered with fog when the N side is clear.
                                                                    Blankets of fog have been observed when the entire outline of the
 (141) Along the S side of the entrance to the bay (see chart
16566) and about 1.2 miles NNW of Kumlik Island is a prominent    island was indicated'without any part of it being actually visible.
flat-topped pinnacle rock, 85 feet high. SE of this rock 0.4 mile is  (l50) The current velocity is about 1.5 knots off Foggy Cape.
a breaker marked by kelp, and about 400 yards off the N point of
Kumlik Island are two small rocks, close together, 3 feet high.      (151)  Chart 16013.-The Semidi Islands are about 90 miles SW
Between the breaker and the small rocks is a deep channel. SW of    of Kodiak Island, and about 23 miles SE of Foggy Cape.
the pinnacle rock about 0.4 mile, is another breaker, marked by       (152) Aghiyuk Island, the N of the group, is long and narrow
kelp; and W  of the pinnacle about 0.4 mile is a 3-fathom spot    and rises vertically from the shoreline in high rocky cliffs, that are
marked by kelp. A prominent headland, locally known as Ele-    practically unscalable, especially along the W side of the island. In
phant Head Point, is 1.3 miles NW of the pinnacle. Rock ledges    the S center of the island is a grassy plateau, with a prominent
extend N and E about 400 yards from Elephant Head Point. Lead-    rockpile, the highest point on the island, rising to over 1,000 feet.




                                                     6. ALASKA PENINSULA                                                          193


 (153) On the E side of the island is a fair-sized bight, with a    is 500 feet long and 90 feet high. Deep water surrounds these bar-
sandy beach that is clear except near its N end, where kelp-marked    ren rocks and they can be safely approached to within 0.5 mile;
rocks extend offshore. E of the bight, about 1 mile offshore, is    there are large sea lion rookeries on the rocks. A S set is generally
small sheer-sided Aghik Island, 528 feet high. Scattered ledges    experienced between Lighthouse Rocks and Chirikof Island. A
and rocks extend about 500 yards off the SE point of Aghik Island.   rock awash (reported) is charted 11 miles SE from Lighthouse
 (154) Anchorage can be had 400 to 600 yards off the bight in 10    Rocks.
to 15 fathoms, sand bottom. It can be safely approached from the
NE, passing Aghik Island about 600 yards off; or from the SE on a      (165)  Chart 16566.-Cape Kumlik (56ï¿½38.0'N., 157ï¿½27.0'W.),
midchannel course between Aghik Island and Aghiyuk Island.           the promontory on the Alaska Peninsula nearest to Sutwik Island,
 (155) A small group of rocks is 500 yards W of the SW point of    is foul with ledges and reefs along its S shore. Near the E end of
Aghiyuk Island. The highest has an elevation of 20 feet.             the S shore and extending 0.5 to 1 mile S is a group of rocks and
 (156)  Chowiet Island, the S large island, is triangular in shape,    islets. The S islet, narrow and about 400 yards long, is 81 feet
and has sheer cliffs alongshore, especially on its W side. It reaches    high; it is a valuable landmark for the approach to the channel
a height of 810 feet near its W  side, slightly N of its center. The    between Cape Kumlik and Kumlik Island. From the SW point of
island has alder- and grass-covered ridges with many bedrock out-    Cape Kumlik, ledges and reefs, that break in a heavy swell, extend
crops and cairn-shaped rockpiles. Some of the latter are very large,    2.8 miles SW and obstruct the NE side of the entrance to Kujulik
and in various odd forms.                                            Bay.
 (157)  At the S end of Chowiet Island is a small bay formed by a     (166)  Kumlik Island, 0.8 mile off the E end of Cape Kumlik, is
chain of low rocks and two steep-sided islets extending SE; Alik-    1,053 feet high. The shores are steep and rocky; reefs border its N,
semit Island is the largest. The S shore of Chowiet Island is a    E, and S sides. About 3 miles E of the island (see chart 16013) is a
Steller sea lion rookery site. There is a 3 mile vessel exclusionary  lone high water rock. Midway between Kumlik and Sutwik
buffer zone around this rookery which encompasses most of the    Islands is a rock that bares at half tide, and about I mile to the E,
island and islets off shore. (See 50 CFR 227.12, chapter 2, for    are three rocks that bare 3 feet at high water. From the SE end of
limits and regulations.) In emergency situations anchorage, with    Kumlik Island on a bearing of 204ï¿½, and at distances of 2 and 3
about 200 yards swinging radius, can be had in the N center of the    miles, respectively, are a rock awash at low water and a rock 55
bay in 20 fathoms, sand bottom. This bay is protected from SW        feet high. The latter is particularly valuable as a landmark for the
through W to NW.                                                     passage E of Kumlik Island.
 (158)  A double bay is on the NW side of Chowiet Island which        (167)  Kujulik Bay, entered about 14 miles W of Sutwik Island,
also offers emergency anchorage in the center of the E arm in 10    is a large open bay that affords good shelter in NW winds. Reefs
fathoms, sand bottom. This anchorage is most favorable for winds     and rocks fringe the shores of the bay and the entrance is flanked
from the NE and around through E to SE, but a SW swell creates    by reefs on each side. The W  arm of the bay is shoal for 8 miles
considerable surge. Additional and emergency anchorage can be    from the head. The best protection is in the N part of the bay.
had in the center of the W  arm in 22 fathoms, sand bottom, and       (168)  Unavikshak Island, off the entrance to Kujulik Bay, rises
provides about 250 yards swinging radius and is favorable for    to 465 feet near its N side, and is used as a fox ranch. Numerous
winds out of the E and around through S to SW. This anchorage is    rocks and reefs fringe the shores. Two rocks, 25 feet high, are 1.5
less subject to surge with a SW swell than in the E arm.             miles S of the island. The W  rock is conspicuously flat-topped.
 (159)  Kateekuk Island, 0.6 mile NW of Chowiet Island, is 0.8    The passage between the rocks and the island is deep and free of
mile long, 0.4 mile wide, and 509 feet high. Between this island    obstructions. A smaller island, 153 feet high, is off the NE point of
and Chowiet Island to the S, and Aghiyuk Island to the N, are    the island. Anchorage can be had on the NW side of the island in
strong tidal currents, that cause very bad tide rips.                15 fathoms, hard rocky bottom.
 (160)  Anowik Island, 591 feet high, and Kiliktagit Island, 404      (169)  Cape Kumliun, S of Kujulik Bay, is a broad bold head-
feet high, are about 1.2 miles NE of the N end of Chowiet Island.    land rising to a 1,671-foot peak near the SE part of the cape. This
Between these islands and Chowiet Island are strong currents that    peak is the most conspicuous object in the vicinity, but is often
cause moderate tide rips; a heavy SE swell piles up excessively.     covered by clouds. The cape is foul with reefs and rocks extending
  (161)  Suklik Island, 345 feet high, is about 0.9 mile S of Kilik-  1 mile offshore at its E point. Some of these dangers do not break
tagik Island and about 1.2 miles E of Chowiet Island. A low flat    even at low water and may not be marked by kelp.
rock is about 150 yards off the NW end of the island, and numer-       (170)  Chignik Bay, about 50 miles W of the Semidi Islands, can
ous sheer pinnacles extend S about 0.5 mile.                         be entered from either N or S of Nakchamik Island. The S part of
  (162) South Island, 2 miles SW of Chowiet Island, is a huge        the bay is irregular but deep. Important salmon fisheries are in
bare rock, 260 feet high, with vertical sides. Several high, sheer    Chignik Bay.
rock pinnacles are just W  of it. The breaker charted about 5.5       (171) Nakchamik Island is an irregular-shaped island in miden-
miles WSW of Chowiet Island is reported to be much closer to the    trance to Chignik Bay. The conical peak, 1,450 feet high, in the S
island.                                                              central part of the island is a distinctive landmark and prominent
  (163)  A few reconnaissance sounding lines indicate deep water    from all directions except through an arc of about 90ï¿½ around the S
adjacent to the islands and clear channels between them. Strong    part of the island, where other mountains obscure it.
tidal currents and bad tide rips are found among the Semidi           (172) The bight on the E side can be used as an anchorage. Enter
Islands, especially in the channels, between Aghiyuk and             the middle of the bight and anchor in 12 fathoms, sand bottom.
Kateekuk; and between the latter island and Chowiet.                 The N end of the island is steep-to, and no anchorage is afforded.
                                                                     The W point is fringed with reefs extending about 300 yards off-
  (164)  Chart 16013.-Lighthouse Rocks (55ï¿½47'N., 157ï¿½25'W.)    shore. There are no off-lying dangers.
are spread over an area 0.2 mile in diameter that is 27 miles SW of   (173)  Kak Island, 1.3 miles S of Nakchamik Island, is 400 feet
Chowiet Island and 57 miles W of Chirikof Island; the largest rock    high, bold, and generally reddish or grayish in color, with grassy





'194                                                 6. ALASKA PENINSULA


patches on the gentler slopes. The S bluffs are of marked columnar    feet alongside. Vessels of over 16-foot draft should approach the
structure. The island has deep water on all sides and can be    wharf bow-on and maneuver alongside. On both sides of the
approached close-to.                                                wharves is a line of dolphins. There are depths of 8 fathoms 50
  (174) Atkulik Island, 3 miles SE of Nakchamik Island, is about    feet off the dolphins.
0.8 mile long and 0.6 mile wide, and 725 feet high with precipi-     (184) Radiotelephone and radiotelegraph communications are
tous shores on its S side. It has no anchorages. Two detached    maintained.
rocks, one about 25 feet high and the other about 35 feet high, are  (185) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-
at the NE and SE ends, respectively, of Atkulik Island. A small    sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of
rock awash is close off the W side.                                 Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)
  (175)  Castle Cape, on the S side of the entrance to Chignik Bay,   (186) The Alaska Peninsula is served by the Alaska Marine
is narrow and precipitous; stratification is a conspicuous feature of    Pilots and Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.
many shades of light-colored rocks varied by bands of black. The     (187) Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots
cape has been worn into many curious castellated pinnacles and    and en route to Chignik can meet the pilot boat about 1 mile N of
buttresses, hence its name.                                         Chignik Spit Light (56ï¿½18.6'N., 158022.9'W.).
  (176) A pair of towering eminences near the end of Castle Cape      (188) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "CHIGNIK
reach 1,200 feet and form a most distinctive feature. Between the    PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearranged fre-
towers are needle peaks of lesser elevation.                        quency between pilot and agent/vessel.
  (177)  Castle Bay is deep, with mud or clay bottom, and presents    (189) Mud Bay, shallow and of no commercial importance, is
no known outlying dangers. Small boats can anchor along the S    filled with eel grass that interferes with the operation of launches.
shore of the bay about 4 miles W from Castle Cape, where the bot-    The only anchorage is in the entrance.
tom and shore slope gradually to a sand and gravel beach. The        (190) Negro Head, between Mud Bay and Chignik Lagoon, is a
remaining shore rises almost vertically from the water. Grass and    high, round-topped vertical bluff.
some scattering alders are the only vegetation.                      (191) Chignik Lagoon, at the SW end of Chignik Bay, is shal-
  (178) Anchorage Bay is W of the fourth ridge from Castle Bay,    low but a channel with depths of 7 to 42 feet follows off the E
the ridges forming a succession of headlands on the S shore of    shore to an inactive cannery at Chignik Lagoon, 2.3 miles above
Chignik Bay. This ridge terminates in vertical bluffs about 200    the entrance sandspit.
feet high, and rises to a rounded hill, 1,050 feet high, that is cov-  (192) A cannery on the W  shore of Chignik Lagoon, 4 miles
ered with grass and alders. The ridge W  of Anchorage Bay is    above the entrance sandspit, maintains radiotelephone and radio-
irregular in form, with bluffs at the water. Off the W  point are    telegraph communications.
Eagle Rock, a large grass-covered rock, 100 feet high, connected      (193) The best anchorage is off the E shore cannery wharf, near
with the shore at low water, and a lower rock, 30 feet high, 100    the small-boat mooring dolphins. Beyond the wharf, which is dry
yards farther out. A shingle spit extends SW from the E shore,      at low water, the lagoon shoals, and only launches use the chan-
  (179)  Chignik Spit Light (56ï¿½18.6'N., 158ï¿½22.9'W.), 35 feet    nels to the head. Chignik Lagoon has an important run-of red
above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and    salmon. Vessels of 14-foot draft enter the lagoon at all stages of
white diamond-shaped daymark on the end of the spit.                the tide. A frequently used portage connects Chignik Lagoon to
  (180) Anchorage Bay is easily recognized, and when nearly    the head of Kuiukta Bay.
abreast of it the smokestacks of the cannery show over the shingle   (194) A reef, 3 miles 040ï¿½ from Negro Head, is covered 41/2
spit. In entering, give the spit a fair berth. In thick weather care    fathoms and breaks in heavy weather. This is the only outlying
should be taken to avoid entering Mud Bay by mistake. By follow-    danger in Chignik Bay found during the survey of 1924.
ing the S shore of Chignik Bay little difficulty should be experi-   (195)  Anguvik Island, about 8 miles NNE of Anchorage Bay, is
enced.                                                              bordered by a reef extending about I mile to the E and 0.3 mile to
  (181) Anchorage is good throughout most of Anchorage Bay,    the W, that breaks at all stages of the tide. The island is flat topped,
but dragging can be expected during the heavy winds and willi-    50 feet high, covered with grass, and has precipitous sides. The
waws prevalent here. If the anchor is on the bottom long some dif-    coast NE of the island is foul for about 0.6 mile offshore, and
ficulty may be experienced in weighing. Care should be used in    should be avoided.
anchoring at high tide, for the flats make out for a distance and     (196) Hook Bay, W  of Cape Kumliun, is deep, except near the
drop off sharply. An anchorage for small craft is on the E side of    head where the slope of the beach is very gradual, with the 10-
the bay near the sandspit, with soft mud bottom; however, this    fathom curve 0.3 mile off the high water mark. The area behind
anchorage should be used with caution because of the possible    the spit is shoal. Fair anchorage may be obtained for small craft
existence of an old wreck (uncharted) that is likely to foul an    just W of the outer end of the spit in 3 fathoms. Large vessels can
anchor.                                                             find no protection from SE weather. If anchoring near the head of
  (182)  Chignik is a fishing settlement at the head of Anchorage    the bay, avoid dragging onto the shoals that rise abruptly.
Bay. The cannery at the village has been abandoned and the wharf      (197) Weasel Mountain, 2,410 feet high, is I mile S of Hook
is in bad condition. The mail steamer from Seward makes regular    Bay and is the most prominent mountain in this vicinity.
calls.                                                                (198) A group of bare rocks is about I mile S of the S coast of
  (183)  Peter Pan Seafoods Company has a wharf about 0.2 mile    Cape Kumliun; the highest is 39 feet. They are connected by reefs,
W  of the village. The wharf has a 63-foot face with a reported    but otherwise are apparently steep-to. The rocks are grass covered
depth of 26 feet alongside. An opening in the center of the wharf    and there is but little kelp bordering them. Between the rocks and
has a lift for small craft. The cannery of the Alaska Packers Asso-    the cape to the N is a clear passage but it is of no importance and is
ciation, 0.7 mile W  of the village, has two wharves. The W  one    rarely used.
has a 62-foot face with depths of 18 feet alongside, while the E     (199) Katmai Reef, 3.3 miles 009ï¿½ from the N point of Nak-
wharf, about 90 feet distant, has a 50-foot face with depths of 21    chamik Island, is narrow and about 600 yards long in a NE-SW





                                                     6. ALASKA PENINSULA                                                       195


direction. A small rock on the reef bares at extreme low tide.    entrance. The entrance to the bay is between a small, grass-topped,
There are usually breakers, even with a smooth sea, but the breaks    pinnacle-tipped islet, just off the W side of the cape separating it
may occur at long intervals. A light growth of kelp is on the reef.    from Necessity Cove, and a broken rocky point on the W side, that
There is deep water between this reef and the detached rocks about    separates the entrances to Warner Bay and Ross Cove. Anchorage
3 miles to the NE, in the direction of Unavikshak Island, but the    in the small cove behind the sandspit is close under the shore in 20
passage is not recommended.                                        to-22 fathoms. It is protected from sea and swell, but the space is
 (200) To enter Chignik Bay from the N, stay at least 8 miles SE    too restricted and the water too deep for safe anchorage during
of Foggy Cape (see chart 16013) to avoid the position of the    violent williwaws which occur with a strong NW wind. The
reported rock S of the cape, then change course to pass 1 mile N of    anchorage in Warner Bay can be reached by steering midchannel
Nakchamik Island and enter Anchorage Bay in midchannel. From    courses.
the S, stay 1 mile outside Castle Cape and the shore to Anchorage   (210) Ross Cove is a small, deep, triangular-shaped bay on the
Bay.                                                               W side and at the head of the short arm just W  of the entrance to
                                                                    Warner Bay. The entrance to the cove, between the N end of a nar-
 (201) Chart 16013.-The Alaska Peninsula coast from Castle    row shingle spit and the N shore of the short arm, is only 150
Cape to Mitrofania Bay is characterized by steep rock-cliff shore-    yards wide and cannot be identified until nearly at the head of the
line, high jagged ridges, sharp peaks, steep slopes of bare rock,    short arm. A bar at the entrance has a least known depth of 11 fath-
alder brush or grass, and numerous rockslides. It has many water-    oms. The cove, which can only be used by small craft, is 23 fath-
falls, striking cliffs of contrasting colors, and intermittent stretches    oms deep at its center, but anchorage in 16 to 20 fathoms can be
of boulder and shale beach, the latter resulting from broken cliffs    had close under the shore. From the head of the cove a long deep
and large rockslides. Close alongshore are numerous pinnacle    valley extends toward 3,697-foot-high Virgin Peak. The depth of
rocks, most frequently off capes and points.                       water, restricted area, and violent williwaws make it a dangerous
 (202) The water is generally very deep in all of the bays and    place during NW weather, but during SE or SW winds it is very
arms throughout this area. No known dangers are more than 500    quiet. The short arm leading to the cove and entrance into the cove
yards offshore.                                                    may be traversed by steering midchannel courses.
 (203) Not all of this area has been surveyed, particularly in
the bays and coves. Most of the Coast Pilot notes are from pre-     (211)  Chart 16013.-Devils Bay, 15 miles SSW of Castle Cape,
liminary information obtained by a survey party working on    has a wide deep entrance about midway between Warner Bay and
control in 1945.                                                   Seal Cape. The N side of the entrance is marked by a high,
                                                                    detached pinnacle rock, close to the point of a narrow peninsula
 (204)  Chart 16566.-Chankliut Island, as it opens out from    that has precipitous rocky cliffs and high rugged peaks. About 1.5
Castle Cape, appears as three separate islands tangent to each    miles inside the entrance, the bay divides into two main parts, one
other. The parts are connected by low necks of land; the E and    extends NW 2 miles, with three small arms at its head, the other, in
central ones appear generally flat while the W part is conical. The    the form of a hook, extends SW 1.5 miles, then SE for about 1
slopes are grassy. Six pinnacle rocks are off the W point of the    mile.
island and a small rock 10 feet high is 250 yards off this point.   (212) The main portion and center arm of the N part of the bay
 (205) In the E cove on the N side of the island, small craft can    are too deep for anchoring. The NE and W arms of the N part of
find anchorage by steering 180ï¿½ toward the lowest part of the neck    the bay were not investigated. In the hook-shaped S part of the bay
of land and anchoring in 51/2 to 10 fathoms, sandy bottom. Surge    is a small bight at the head of the first arm, that trends S. Anchor-
from current and swell is felt in this anchorage.                  age, with restricted swinging room, can be had 400 to 600 yards
 (206) The channel between Chankliut Island and the mainland    from the head of the small bight in 16 to 20 fathoms, mud bottom.
has been surveyed and found free from dangers. It is subject to     (213) During periods of SW and NW weather, no williwaws
moderate tidal current rips, especially in NE weather.             were experienced in this anchorage, and during fresh NE weather
 (207) Nikolai Cove and a small unnamed cove, on the mainland    only moderate williwaws were encountered. No sea or swell
1.5 and 6 miles, respectively, SW of Castle Cape, afford tempo-    entered the anchorage during this storm, although the seas and
rary restricted anchorages for small craft with winds from SW      swell were heavy outside. The anchorage was not tried during SE
through W  to N, but are subject to strong williwaws and are    weather.
exposed to any swell. Necessity Cove, farther W, is considered a    (214) The SE arm of the hook-shaped S part of the bay was
better anchorage.                                                  found too deep for anchorage. At the head of this arm are large
 (208) Necessity Cove, 9 miles SW of Castle Cape, is reported to    sections of flat shale spits, formed by rockslides from sheer cliffs
be a safer anchorage in NW weather than Warner Bay or Ross    that rise from the shoreline to a high rock-faced ridge with many
Cove, but is exposed to swell. The conspicuous cape on the S side    towering pinnacle tips. The pinnacle tips and the sheer wall of this
of Necessity Cove has a rock-cliff shoreline and high rugged    ridge present a very striking formation upon entering this arm of
peaks. Approaching from E a prominent light-colored rock cliff is   the bay.
visible along the E shore of the cape. A rock awash is 600 yards    (215) Seal Cape (56ï¿½00.0'N., 158ï¿½25.0'W.) and Cape Ikti are
off the E shore of the cape and about I mile S of the entrance to    twin headlands on the Alaska Peninsula, 2.5 miles apart, each hav-
the cove. Small vessels anchor in Necessity Cove close to shore in    ing high rugged peaks, jagged ridges, and sheer rock cliff shore-
7 fathoms; although subject to strong williwaws the cove affords    lines. Seal Cape, 13 miles SW of Chankliut Island, is the most off-
good anchorage with winds from SW through W to N.                  lying tangent as seen from the channel between Chankliut Island
                                                                    and Castle Cape. From the same direction the summit of a 2,074-
 (209) Charts 16566, 16013.-Warner Bay, II miles SW of Cas-    foot-high narrow ridge, about 0.6 mile inside the tangent of the
tie Cape, extends N for 4 miles; it is too deep for anchorage except    cape, appears as a very sharp peak. A breaker is 0.2 mile off the S
behind the narrow shingle spit on its W shore, 2.5 miles above the    end of Seal Cape.





196                                                 6. ALASKA PENINSULA


  (216)  Cape Ikti, W  of Seal Cape, marks the E side of the    arm is a small bight just SE of a small grass-topped islet. A
entrance to Kuiukta Bay. Numerous knife-edged pinnacles are    restricted anchorage in 15 fathoms, sticky bottom, may be had for
very close alongshore near the end of Cape Ikti. A prominent high    small craft at the entrance to this bight, about abeam of the SW
peak, 2,281 feet, is about 2 miles from the point of the cape.      end of the small islet.
  (217) The open bay between Seal Cape and Cape Itki is gener-        (224) The fourth arm (see chart 16566) on the E side of Kuiukta
ally deep and marked by extensive kelp in its NE portion. Anchor-    Bay, about 1.7 miles from the head of the bay, extends SE about
ing depths for small craft can be found close under the shore in the    1.5 miles. It has not been examined. The N side of the entrance to
NW part of the bay, however, it is wide open to all swell and sea    this arm is marked by a grass-topped U-shaped islet, with steep,
and not recommended.                                                rock-cliff shoreline.
 (21S)  Kuiukta Bay extends 14 miles inland and has 11 arms or       (225) The fifth arm (see chart 16566) on the E side of Kuiukta
bays of various sizes and shapes, 6 on the E side and 5 on the W    Bay, about 0.7 mile from the head of the bay, extends E about 0.9
side. Its shores, especially for the first 9 miles, are extremely pre-    mile between sheer rock cliffs. It has not been examined.
cipitous, and have striking bare cliffs of great height, in contrast-  (226) The sixth arm (see chart 16566) on the E side and at the
ing shades of gray, red, brown, and black. The rocks appear to be
                  ing shades of gray, red, brown, and black. The rocks appear to be    head of Kuiukta Bay, extends E for about 2.3 miles. A small islet
well metamorphosed. A prominent band of black rock, resembling    is about 1.4 miles E 
a lava flow, is on the E shore 4.8 miles NW from Cape Ikti, or just
N from the prominent point marking the N side of the entrance to     (227) The first arm on the W  side of Kuiukta Bay indents the
the first arm on the E side of the bay. A very prominent triangular-    cape opposite the abandoned Indian village of Mitrofania. It is
shaped high vertical cliff, dark brown in color, with irregular    separated from the small lagoon on which the village was by a
streaks of light color rock across its face, is directly ahead about    narrow boulder-gravel spit. The arm, 1.8 miles long, extends W
6.5 miles upon entering the bay from the SE.                        between sheer rock cliffs to its head at the steep-to boulder-gravel
 (219)  Kuiukta Bay entrance, 5 miles wide, is between Cape Ikti    beach. Anchorage on the centerline of the arm about 0.6 mile from
on the E and the sharp E point of an unnamed double headland on    its head may be had in 18 fathoms, sandy bottom, but any swell
the W. This double headland marks the N side of the entrance to    piles up in this bay, as evidenced by large amounts of driftwood
Mitrofania Bay. From midchannel at the entrance, Kuiukta Bay        high up the boulder-gravel beach, and in NW weather williwaws
trends NNW for 4.5 miles where it narrows to a width of 2 miles,    are very strong. Anchorage here is not recommended except in
thence NW for another 4.5 miles at an average width of 2 miles,    favorable weather
and thence NE at an average width of 1 mile, interspersed by a few    (228) The second arm on the W side of Kuiukta Bay, about 4.5
small islets, for about 5 miles to the head of the bay, where arms    miles N of the point marking the W  entrance to Kuiukta Bay,
spread out to the E and W. The bay is a natural funnel for winds    extends SW about 1.5 miles, and is restricted at its deep entrance
and is known as being one of the windiest bays in Alaska. The    to a width of 400 yards by a hook-shaped boulder-gravel spit that
water off the entrance and in the lower part of the bay is subject to    extends from the SE shore of the arm. Within the hook itself the
tide rips, especially during NW weather.                            water is very shallow; and SW of the hook for a short distance
 (220)  The water is generally deep close to shore throughout    along the SE shore the water is shallow. Otherwise the arm,
Kuiukta Bay and with few known exceptions in the arms leading    including the narrow entrance, is very deep. There is no anchorage
from it.                                                            in the bay, except for very small craft on the shoal bank close to
 (221)  The entrance to the first arm on the E side of Kuiukta Bay,    the SE shore, just SW but not within the boulder-gravel hook.
4 miles NW from Cape Ikti, is I mile wide between a rounding,         (229)  Foot Bay is the third arm on the W side and about 6 miles
undercut, dark rock cliff point on the SE and a prominent gray cliff    N of the W  entrance to Kuiukta Bay. Foot Bay is about I mile
point with two large off-lying gray pinnacles on the NW. About I    wide and extends W about 2 miles. It is deep throughout, except
mile inside the entrance, the deep channel is constricted to a width    close up in the NE corner where the bottom rises abruptly from 25
of 500 to-600 yards between the N shore and the end of a steep-to    to 2 fathoms or less in the vicinity of the mouth of a fair-sized
boulder-gravel spit that extends from the S shore. The average    river entering the bay. The only available anchorage is in the SW
width of the bay inside the spit is 0.5 mile; and the general depths    corner of the bay, about 300 yards from the shore, in 20 fathoms,
are 40 to 50 fathoms, with deep water close alongshore, which is    muddy bottom. This anchorage is off a small sand beach and a low
fringed by a very narrow strip of boulder gravel or shale. The bay    valley that extends to the NE arm of Mitrofania Bay. The anchor-
is landlocked and no sea or swell enters it. Anchorage for a small    age is swept by strong squalls in bad weather.
vessel, with restricted swinging room, may be had within 0.5 mile     (230)  Windy Bay is the fourth arm on the W side and is about 8
of the head of the bay in 16 to 20 fathoms, muddy bottom. This    miles N of the W  entrance to Kuiukta Bay. The S side of the
anchorage was found to be very quiet when fresh NW winds pre-    entrance to Windy Bay is marked by a sharp, dark-colored pinna-
vailed outside in Kuiukta Bay. During the storm with fresh NE       cle close to a dark-colored, high rock cliff point. From the
winds, moderate williwaws were experienced, but the survey ves-    entrance, about 1.3 miles wide, the bay trends NW for 1.5 miles,
sel did not drag anchor. An all-season stream from a low waterfall    narrowing to 0.6 mile in width, where there is a small shallow
is on the S shore inside the boulder-gravel spit.                   bight extending 0.5 mile SW; and where the bay changes direction
 (222) The second arm on the E side of Kuiukta Bay, about 6    at a right angle to the NE to enter the N part of the bay, through a
miles from Cape Ikti, is a small narrow finger that extends 1.5    deep passage about 600 yards wide between low steep-to gravel
miles E between extremely high steep slopes. It is too narrow and    spits on either shore. After entering the N part of the bay it widens
the water too deep, 30 to 40 fathoms, for any suitable anchorage.    to about 0.8 mile and trends in a N direction for about 1 mile,
A number of waterfalls enter this bay.                              thence WNW, in a narrowing arm for about 2 miles. Anchorage,
 (223) The third arm on the E side of Kuiukta Bay, about 9 miles    about 0.8 mile N of the gravel spit marking the W  side of the
from Cape Ikti, has not been investigated. It is very narrow and    entrance to the N arm, can be had about on the centerline of the
extends SE about 1.3 miles. On the N side of the entrance to this    bay in 15 to 20 fathoms, sticky bottom. Almost continuous fresh




                                                     6. ALASKA PENINSULA                                                        197


winds and williwaws, accompanied by fog and mist, were experi-       (239) The NE arm of the unnamed bay affords an anchorage,
enced here during a 36-hour period of W and NW winds.               with restricted swinging room, in its SE part, just inside of a low
 (231) The small bight on the S side of Windy Bay shoals rapidly    gravel point, in 15 to 20 fathoms, muddy bottom.
a short distance inside its entrance. A temporary anchorage, with    (240)  In the entrance to the NW arm, about 0.8 to 1.2 miles from
restricted swinging room, can be obtained at the entrance in 15    the head of the arm, good anchorage, with 300 to 600 yards swing-
fathoms, muddy bottom.                                              ing radius in 15 to 20 fathoms, can be obtained. This anchorage
 (232) The fifth and last arm (see chart 16566) on the W side and    was used by the survey vessel during a period of stormy weather,
at the head of Kuiukta Bay extends W by N 2.8 miles from a small    when a heavy swell was breaking high on the gravel beach at the
but high grass-covered islet to a low valley at the bay's head,    head of the small first arm leading off Kuiukta Bay, opposite aban-
where an easy portage leads to Chignik Lagoon. Good anchorage,    doned Mitrofania village, but effects of the swell were barely
0.5 to 1 mile W  of the small but high grass-topped islet marking    noticeable in the anchorage.
the S side of the entrance to the arm, can be had in 19 to 15 fath-  (241) Ivan Bay, an arm leading off the NW corner of Mitrofania
oms, muddy bottom. This anchorage is exposed in NW weather to    Bay, is between rock-cliff shoreline and high rugged peaks on
winds funneling through the low valley from Chignik Lagoon.         either side, and has a steep-to sand beach at its head, with a low,
 (233) Routes.-Passage into Kuiukta Bay from its entrance to    narrow river valley extending N. There are two small lakes, one on
Windy Bay may be made with safety by clearing either shore 0.5    the E side and the other on the W side of the valley, just inshore of
mile, and the arms leading off this part of the bay may be entered    the low gravel beach. The water in Ivan Bay is deep and there is
safely on midchannel courses. The narrower N part of the bay    no anchorage.
should be entered on about midchannel courses between various        (242) Long Beach, about 3 miles of steep-to black sand, forms
islands and the opposite shore as follows:                          the head or W  shore of Mitrofania Bay. The sand beach is flanked
 (234) From a point in about midchannel, about 1 mile 040ï¿½ from    on the N end by a vertical cliff, 600 to 800 feet high, made con-
the pinnacle point marking the S entrance to Windy Bay, steer    spicuous by many strata of different colored rocks, and on its S
040ï¿½ with the pinnacle point astern. On this course pass W  of the    end by a precipitous double headland, covered with a dense
low grass-covered island just off the E shore about opposite the N  growth of alder bushes, and terminating at the S end in a long nar-
side of the entrance to Windy Bay; thence about 3 miles farther    row point. An isolated rock is on Long Beach, about 300 yards
pass E of the next island; which has a sugarloaf top. From abeam    back from the shoreline and near the base of the higher and N
of the sugarloaf-topped island steer 020ï¿½ for about 1.8 miles pass-    mountain of the double headland. This isolated rock, nearly rect-
ing W of a U-shaped island.                                         angular in shape with vertical sides, is 60 feet high, and its slightly
 (235) About 0.8 mile above the sugarloaf-topped island the    rounded top is covered with grass, ferns and small bushes. Seen
water shoals abruptly from 45 fathoms to 71/2 fathoms, then deep-    from a distance it has the appearance of a huge native sod house.
ens to 30 fathoms or more. Pending a detailed survey, caution    Extending back from Long Beach to the foothills of Veniaminof
should be used when navigating this area. Directly after passing    Crater is a broad river valley, in which are many ponds of fresh or
the U-shaped island, round on the port hand and on midchannel    brackish water. A large river empties into Mitrofania Bay about
courses two closely spaced islands, the N one of which is the    through the center of Long Beach. From a distance the double
higher and is the last island at the head of Kuiukta Bay. Anchor in    headland at the S end of Long Beach appears as an island located
the W arm about 0.5 mile to 1 mile W by S of the last island in 19    well offshore from the mainland.
to 15 fathoms, mud bottom.                                           (243) Mitrofania Island, about 5 miles wide between its N and
                                                                    S tangents, and about 6.5 miles wide between its E and W tan-
 (236)  Charts 16011, 16013.-Mitrofania Bay, large and open, is    gents, is somewhat crescent shaped, has a cluster of four rippled
bordered on the S by Mitrofania Island, on the W by Long Beach,    gray ridges, with steep jagged peaks of nearly the same height, and
and on the N by high, rugged capes of the mainland. The bay is    a rock cliff shoreline. The highest peak, a little E of the center of
deep and free of dangers, except for the area SW of the Brother    the island, appears fan shaped from the NE and is 2,011 feet high.
Islands.                                                            The island is reported to be visible in excess of 30 miles when
 (237) The E side of the entrance to Mitrofania Bay is marked by    approached from the SW from a point S of Kupreanof Point
an unnamed double headland, which is connected to the mainland    (55ï¿½34.0'N., 159ï¿½35.5'W.); see chart 16540.
by a low narrow strip of gravel beach just E of the abandoned        (244) Within the crescent on the S side of the island is a large
Indian village of Mitrofania. Close inshore off the S tangent of the    open bay. The bay has a considerable anchorage area in depths of
E headland is a towering brown pinnacle rock. Between the dou-    15 to 20 fathoms along its NW shore, where cliffs of white and
ble headlands is a small arm with a short section of steep-to gravel    reddish hues rise vertically to a ridge of numerous pinnacle tops.
beach at its head, and many huge pinnacle rocks in its NW part.    In the SW part is a bight, formed by a sharp hook of the island to
This arm is exposed and not recommended for anchorage. At the E     the E, with anchoring depths of 10 to 20 fathoms, sandy bottom.
entrance to this arm is a prominent gray pinnacle rock about 200    This bight is well protected from wind and sea from the SW
yards off the shore.                                                through NW to N or NE, but is affected by any heavy swell. A
 (238) About 200 yards off the W  point of the W  headland is a    small arm, with very restricted anchorage in 15 to 18 fathoms,
rock that uncovers about 3 feet. Between this point and the S end    sandy bottom, extends E about 0.4 mile from the NE part of the
of a high rugged cape 1.5 miles NW, is the entrance to a large    large open bay.
unnamed bay with three small arms. The E arm affords an anchor-      (245) In March 1975, the Coast Guard Cutter CONFIDENCE
age, with restricted swinging room, in its W part in 18 to 20 fath-    anchored in the NW part of the crescent-shaped bay on the S side
oms, muddy bottom; but the inner part entered through a very    of the island. The ship entered from the S on a course of 000ï¿½ until
narrow passage, is a shallow lagoon. The site of the abandoned    midpoint between the SE and SW entrance points (crescent points)
village of Mitrofania is at the NW corner of the lagoon. This site is    of the bay, then changed course to 315ï¿½ and headed directly for the
not visible from the anchorage in the outer portion of the arm.     cluster of four rippled gray ridges on the island until within 1,600




198                                                6. ALASKA PENINSULA


yards of them, and anchored in about 18 fathoms, sandy bottom    the mainland the water is deep and clear of any known dangers.
with good holding qualities, on the following additional ranges:    Both Brother Islands have about the same elevation.
snubbed peninsula on NE side of crescent (55050.7'N.,
158047.2'W.), 2,400 yards; and snubbed peninsula on the NW side    (252)  Charts 16556, 16540.-The character of the shoreline
of crescent (55049.8'N., 158ï¿½51.0'W.), 2,100 yards.               between Mitrofania Bay and Ivanof Bay differs from that to the E
 (246) The ship reported that the bottom contour during the entire    in that it has several stretches of steep-to sand beaches, interrupted
entering transit remained flat, about 35 fathoms, then shoaled    by low rocky headlands or high rocky capes. Long Beach,
when about 3,000 yards from the cluster of four rippled ridges.    described previously, is the first of several beaches. The second
The only danger noted was a rock awash about 200 to 300 yards S    stretch of sand beach, about 2.5 miles long, marks the head of a
of the SE crescent tip. The ship experienced strong NW winds,    large open bay between the sharp pointed headland at the S end of
however, the anchorage provided excellent protection, free of wil-    Long Beach on the E and Coal Cape on the W. The low valley N
liwaws. Only slight winds, occasionally gusting to 20 knots, were    of this beach joins that extending inland from Long Beach. Just
encountered from a funneling wind over the lower center part of    inshore from about the center of this sand beach are two detached
the island. Negative currents were noted in the area. The report    mountains on the valley plain. Thesetwo mountains appear as
further stated that the SE and SW corners of the crescent proved to    islands from a distance offshore. The S one, known locally as Red
be good radar targets, and that perhaps this bay provides the best    Bluff Mountain, 1,041 feet high, has reddish jagged pinnacle tips
protected anchorage in the area S of the Alaska Peninsula from    and is very prominent.
winds WSW through N to ENE. The bay is easily accessible, how-     (253) Small craft can find temporary anchorage in 2 to 10 fath-
ever, because of its wide entrance, protection is not afforded from    oms, sand bottom, about 1.1 miles SW of Red Bluff Mountain.
winds from the SW through the SE.                                 Water may be obtained from a stream that empties into the NW
 (247) On the N side of Mitrofania Island, a very small bay, open    part of the open bay.
to the W, has anchorage for small craft in 15 to 20 fathoms, sandy  (254) Coal Cape and Coal Point, about 10 miles apart, are two
bottom. A sandy beach is at its head. The bay is well protected    separate and distinct features of the Alaska Peninsula. Coal Cape
from weather out of the N around through E to S. Sea and swell    is about 4.5 miles NW of Mitrofania Island (see chart 16013), and
from the SW are reduced by the low sand and gravel spit that    Coal Point is about 2.5 miles N of Paul Island.
extends off the point about 3 miles W of the bay.                  (255) Coal Cape (55ï¿½53.5'N., 159ï¿½00.0'W.) is a prominent
 (248) Spitz Island, 1,073 feet high and 1.2 miles S of the SW   rock-cliff headland that rises to 1,818 feet and whose skyline is
                                                                    cxtremely broken and serrated. About 2 miles from its S tip the
tangent of Mitrofania Island, has sheer rock cliff sides and is con-    extremely broken and serrated. About 2 miles from its S tip the
                               E and W. The island is reported to be a good    cape is about 2 miles wide and from its rock-cliff shoreline, long,
spicuous from the E and W. The island is reported to be a good
                 radartagetantslsprmicu  from the  Slow, sand beaches extend to the E and W. Fair-sized rivers break
radar target, and that it is less prominent from the SW than from
                                                                    through the beaches on either side and close to the base of Coal
the NE because of its blending with the background of larger
Mitrofania Island to the N. A line of rocks extends S for 0.7 mile    Cape Mountain Range. The ridge that continues inland from the
                             The most S rock is long, narrow, irregular, and    cape is a spur from Veniaminof Volcano. This spur is flanked both
from the islandT. The most S rock is long, narrow, irregular, and
                 abr~outm40~ feet heislang                        E and W by extensive river valleys that extend inland from the
about 40 feet high.
                                                                    long sand beaches.
 (249)  Brother Islands, two in number and about I mile apart,     (256)  Perryville, an Indian village, about 5 miles NW of Coal
are on a NNW line in the W central part of Mitrofania Bay and    Cape, was established to provide for people who were driven
across the N part of the opening between Mitrofania Island and the    away from the vicinity of Mount Katmai Volcano by the eruption
double headland at the S end of Long Beach.                       of 1912. It consists of a number of wooden houses, including a
 (250) The E Brother Island, 1.5 miles N of the N point of Mitro-    small store and school, standing on the flat beach about 2.5 miles
fania Island, is wedge-shaped with point to S, 0.3 mile on its    W of the foot of Coal Cape Mountain Range. There is no wharf
longer E side and 0.2 mile on its N side. The island, 395 feet high,    and the water is too deep for anchoring off the steep-to beach in
presents a flat profile, and from its summit drops sheer to the    front of the village. Temporary anchorage for small craft can be
water's edge along the E side, where the high rock cliffs are under-    found in 6 to 10 fathoms, 0.3 mile SE of the W of two conspicuous
cut with caves inhabited by thousands of birds. A large rock, that    rock ledges just E of the village; a small 6/2-fathom shoal, 0.6
uncovers 1 foot, is about 0.6 mile SSW from the S point of the    mile SE of the same ledge, is the controlling depth for the area, but
island; and about on the same line 0.8 mile beyond the rock is the    there are depths of 12 to 15 fathoms between this shoal and the
N end of a kelp-marked shoal area, that is 0.3 mile long and has a    beach. Radiotelegraph service is maintained.
least known depth of 4 fathoms. This shoal has not been thor-      (257) Three Star Point, a low alder- and grass-topped rocky
oughly surveyed and there may be less water over it. Between this    headland about 1.5 miles SW of Perryville, separates two long
shoal and the nearest point of Mitrofania Island, 0.7 mile to the E,    curving stretches of sand beaches at a point about midway
is a deepwater channel that passes the shore of Mitrofania Island    between Coal Cape and Coal Point Ranges. A prominent line of
300 to 500 yards off on a course of 2340 with the end of the low,    pinnacle rocks extends E about 400 yards from Three Star Point
grass-covered gravel spit forming the NW point of Mitrofania    and a prominent pinnacle rock is about 200 yards S of the point. A
Island about dead ahead; and holding this course until about 0.5    series of low hills extending inland from Three Star Point divides
mile from the gravel spit, thence changing course to the W and    the broad valley between the spurs leading to Coal Cape and Coal
rounding the steep-to spit, then about 300 to 500 yards off.      Point.
 (25s) The W Brother Island, about 1.5 miles E of the S shore of   (258) Chiachi Island, the largest of the Chiachi Islands, lies
Long Beach, is nearly round, 3.5 miles in diameter, with flat top    with its most N point about 1 mile SE of Three Star Point and its S
and sheer cliff sides. A large rock, 22 feet high, and rock that    tangent about on line with the S tangents of Coal Cape, 5 miles to
uncovers I foot, are 0.4 mile SSW and 0.6 mile S, respectively,    the NE, and Paul Island, 7 miles to the SW. The island is about 3
from the center of the island. Between the W Brother Island and    miles in extent from its sharp N point to its rounding S side and





                                                     6. ALASKA PENINSULA                                                          199


about the same distance from its most E point to its sharp W point.    cape, about I mile N of Alexander Point, is a jutting rocky point
It has several rugged peaks of about the same elevation. A some-    that is heavily covered with grass and alder, and just off the end of
what prominent one in the SW part of the island is 1,450 feet high.    this jutting point is a large pinnacle.
Pinusuk Island, Shapka Island, and Petrel Island also comprise         (268) Paul Island, somewhat hook shaped and for its entire
Chiachi Islands.                                                     length, has high sharp ridges and peaks that reach an elevation of
 (259) Chiachi Bay, in the E end of Chiachi Island, is about 0.6    1,558 feet in its N part. For a short distance along the NW side of
mile in both width and depth. Anchorage is available for small    the island is a low grass-covered sandspit, and inside of the hook
vessels in 10 to 17 fathoms, mud bottom, protected from winds    of the island, which forms the N shore of Kupreanof Harbor, the
out of the SW through W to N, but any moderate swell, even from    beach is low sand and gravel. In this region is a small saltwater
the SW, surges into the bay.                                         pond at the foot of the steep grass- and alder-covered slopes.
 (260)  Pinusuk Island, 0.9 mile long E to W, is 700 yards off the    (269)  In 55ï¿½46.9'N., along the E side of Paul Island, is a semicir-
point on the N side of the entrance to Chiachi Bay; a high wedge-    cular 0.3-mile-wide cove that is danger free except for the rocky
shaped ridge, rising to about 800 feet, has its point to the E and    point and reef that form the SE side. Small boats can anchor in 3 to
makes the island easy to identify from that direction. A towering    5 fathoms, sand bottom, 200 to 400 yards off the sand beach.
pinnacle rock, 79 feet high, is 400 yards off the E end of Pinusuk    Water can be obtained from any of the several streams in the vicin-
Island. A rock island, 0.6 mile long and about 800 feet high, has    ity. Along practically all the rest of the Paul Island shores are sheer
its W  end 350 yards off the point on the S side of the entrance to    rock cliffs.
Chiachi Bay.                                                           (270)  Jacob Island, shaped like a leg of mutton with its point to
 (261) Two more islands are off the NE shore of Chiachi Island.    the S, is about 4 miles long. The highest point, about 1 mile from
The N one, Shapka Island, is a sugarloaf 622 feet high, about 0.8    its N end, is 1,647 feet high. From the highest point a sharp ridge,
mile NE of the N point of Chiachi Island; the other, Petrel Island,    that drops almost vertically to the E shore, extends S to Noon
is a small flat rock mass, about 400 yards off the midpoint of the    Point, meeting the sea in a narrow overhanging precipice. N of the
NE shore of Chiachi Island.                                          highest point alder-covered slopes broaden out to form the S side
 (262)  Coal Point, 5 miles SW of Three Star Point, is broad and    of Kupreanof Harbor. The coast of Jacob Island is foul with kelp
irregular, has rock cliffs along the shores and a high sharp ridge    and numerous rocks.
that extends inland; two needle-shaped rocks are on the cliff slope    (271)  Kupreanof Harbor, enclosed by Paul and Jacob Islands,
on the SW point. A reef, marked by kelp at its outer end, extends    is circular in shape, 1.1 miles across, and free from dangers. It is
0.4 mile from the SE point. A rock, covered 13/4 fathoms, is 0.25    sheltered from all directions and is the most accessible safe harbor
mile SSE of the southernmost tip of the point, and a rock, covered    in a wide region. Williwaws have been experienced here with NE
1/2 fathom, is 1.1 miles E by N of the same tip.                     and E gales, but the muddy bottom provides good holding ground.
 (263)  Humpback Bay, W of Coal Point and between Egg Island          (272) The W entrance to Kupreanof Harbor is 0.7 mile wide and
and the mainland, has a relatively flat bottom and depths of about    danger free. To enter, steer 090ï¿½ through the middle and change
21 fathoms in its central part. Anchorage can be had in 7 to 10    course to 0580 when the point on the N side is abeam; when the S
fathoms, sand bottom, in the NE part of the bay, about 0.5 mile    entrance is about to open, anchor in the N central part of the har-
NW of a lone grass-topped pinnacle rock 22 feet high, and about    bor in 10 to 11 fathoms, mud bottom, with the tangents of the
0.5 mile offshore from the sand beach marking this part of the bay.    point at the S entrance in range and bearing 151ï¿½.
Caution is advised, however, as swells pile up in the bay through     (273) The curving S entrance is 0.5 mile wide and has a channel
the entrance between Egg Island and Coal Point. For about 1 mile    controlling depth of 4 fathoms NE of the middle. Vessels should
along the NW side of the bay the shore is rocky, with several    approach from the SW on a course of 020ï¿½, passing 0.75 mile NW
detached rocks close alongshore. In the W  part of the bay about    of the S tip of Paul Island and 0.25 mile SE of the easternmost
1.5 miles NW of Egg Island, is a short stretch of sand beach, from    point of Jacob Island; when abeam of the latter, steer 000ï¿½ for 0.25
which a portage leads to Ivanof Bay.                                 mile, thence 317ï¿½ for 1.2 miles to anchorage. The 3170 course will
  (264)  Egg Island, about 1 mile long and 0.5 mile wide, has ver-    carry a vessel in the best water NE of midpassage and about 0.15
tical cliffs on its E side and steep grass-covered slopes on its W   mile off the shore of Paul Island.
side. In the E central part of the island are several round-top sum-  (274) The current movement within the harbor is irregular in
mits of about equal height that rise to 500 feet.                    direction and velocity. Current velocities of one knot have been
  (265)  A low sandspit extends well offshore from about midway      observed.
along the W  shore of Egg Island, and a rock, 5 feet high, is about   (275)  Fox farms and attendant buildings are on shore in Kupre-
125 yards off the N end. From the reef at the S end of the island a    anof Harbor on Paul Island and Jacob Island.
narrow underwater ridge of sand and gravel extends to the N shore     (276) Ivanof Bay, between Alexander Point and Kupreanof
of Paul Island; on a course of 233ï¿½, with the tangent of Alexander    Peninsula, is from 1 to 3 miles wide and about 7 miles long in a N-
Point ahead, the least depth is 53/4 fathoms over the ridge, which    S direction. Bluffs and high ridges parallel both shores from the
drops off abruptly both to the NE and SW.                            entrance to the N part of the bay where low valleys lead off from
  (266)  A deepwater passage can be made through Humpback Bay        both the E and W  shores. When SW of Alexander Point and pro-
by steering midchannel courses around Egg Island, taking care to    ceeding up the bay, Road Island, a round-topped, steep-sided
avoid the 33/4-fathom shoal NW of the island, thence midchannel      island 421 feet high, is seen in the channel 4 miles ahead. Two
between Paul Island and the pinnacle off the jutting point on the E  miles above Alexander Point a grassy headland and a grass-
side of Alexander Point.                                             topped, taper-pointed islet 115 feet high are on the E shore. The W
  (267)  Alexander Point, opposite the W  point of Paul Island, is    shoreline here is precipitous and rugged, the bluffs rising from
sheer and rocky and marks the end of the high cape bordering the    1,000 to 2,500 feet above the shoreline. W and N of Road Island is
E side of Ivanof Bay. The first definite peak on the cape, about I    an area of sandspits, tideflats, and lowland. Several steep-sided,
mile N of Alexander Point, is 1,572 feet high. On the E side of the    grass-topped islets are connected to the sandspits at low water. W




200                                                  6. ALASKA PENINSULA


of northern Ivanof Bay is a large lagoon and beyond are marshy    Island and about 0.6 mile off the long pointed headland at the S
flats across which Granville Portage leads to Stepovak Bay. The    end of Long Beach.
N shore of Ivanof Bay is hilly. To the NE of the bay a low valley    (288) When Red Bluff Mountain opens on the Long Beach
and flats extend into the interior.                                 headland, bearing 3050, steer 2460 to a position 0.8 mile S of Coal
 (277) A cannery wharf, with a least depth of 22 feet alongside,    Cape; thence 270ï¿½ to a position 0.3 mile S of Shapka Island;
and marine ways are midway along the N shore of Ivanof Bay.    thence 292ï¿½ to a position 0.3 mile N of the N tip of Chiachi Island;
The buildings of a fox farm are along the cove in the NW shore of    and thence 240ï¿½ for 6.2 miles to a position 0.8 mile N of the most
Road Island; a dilapidated wharf in the cove is usable only by    N tip of Paul Island. Then steer 233ï¿½, with Point Alexander ahead
small boats on the higher half of the tide. Radiotelegraph service is    and the prominent, low headland of Three Star Point astern, for
maintained.                                                         2.8 miles, using the marked passage, described earlier, between
 (278)  Vessels can anchor in 15 fathoms, sticky mud bottom, 0.3    Egg Island and Paul Island.
mile SSE of the cannery wharf. To be avoided are the mudflats         (289) When the W tangent of Paul Island comes on range, bear-
that rise abruptly from depths of 10 fathoms on the E side, and the    ing 1650, with the highest point of Jacob Island, steer 2010 for 16
ledge that makes out from the northernmost point on the. same       miles with the center of Egg Island astern. This course passes
side.                                                               about midway between Paul Island and the jutting point on the E
 (279) A ledge with places that uncover I to 3 feet is 0.4 mile SE  side of Alexander Point; about 0.8 mile off the W coast of Jacob
of the NE point of Road Island; a rock, that uncovers 2 feet, is 0.9    Island; midway between Noon Point and Leader Island; 1.8 miles
mile E by N of the same island point and 0.3 mile from the E shore    E of Fox Cape; and 2 miles E of Kupreanof Point.
of the bay. A pinnacle rock, covered 1 fathom, is about 150 yards     (290)  The E shore of Kupreanof Peninsula from Ivanof Bay to
SW of the cannery wharf.                                            Kupreanof Point is bold and precipitous, broken only by a broad
 (280)  When SE weather prevails along the coast, the wind often    sand beach, 1.5 miles long, 9 miles N of Kupreanof Point, and by
blows in the N part of Ivanof Bay from the NE, coming down    a small sandy cove 4.5 miles N of Kupreanof Point.
through the valley on that side of the bay. The N part of Ivanof     (291)  Leader Island, between Kupreanof Peninsula and Jacob
Bay is well protected from S swells.                                Island, is a turtleback-shaped, rocky, islet 131 feet high. It may be
                                  (28   ApilotforvanofBayoccasionallymaybesecuredfro passed in depths of 23 to 37 fathoms on the W side and 32 to more
 (281) A pilot for Ivanof Bay occasionally may be secured from
                                                                    than 50 fathoms on the E side. A 17-fathom bank is I mile N of
Kupreanof Harbor or from Squaw Harbor, Unga Island.
 (282)  Depths of 12 to 15 fathoms can be carried through the        (292) Hag Peak, a black dome-shaped mountain, the seaward
channel W of Road Island. From a position 1.4 miles W of Alex- .  face of which consists of rows of tilted basalt columns, is at the S
ander Point, steer 337ï¿½ until the S end of Road Island is 450 yards    side of the entrance to the long sandy beach cove and 3 miles
on the starboard beam; thence 353ï¿½ for 0.9 mile to a position    WSW of Leader Island. The peak is a distinctive landmark.
where the N end of the island is 600 yards on the starboard beam;    (293)  Fox Cape, 4 miles SSW of Leader Island, appears as a
and then 0140 for the cannery wharf, taking care to avoid the cov-    pyramidal-shaped headland with several off-lying islets. The larg-
ered rock 150 yards off the SW corner.                              est of these islets has a sloping flat top and sides with a number of
 (283)  The channel E of Road Island has a controlling depth of 18    deeply carved caves.
fathoms but rocks off both shores make navigation dangerous for      (294)  S of Fox Cape the shoreline is bold and reef fringed. A
strangers; passage should be made at low tide when the rocks are    group of three pinnacles, 25 feet high, are 1.5 miles S of the cape.
bare and can be seen. From a position 1.4 miles W  of Alexander      (295)  Kupreanof Point (55034.0'N., 159035.5'W.), the SE end
Point, steer 336ï¿½ until the small grass-topped islet 2 miles NW of    of Kupreanof Peninsula, appears as a row of rugged monoliths,
Alexander Point is 0.6 mile on the starboard beam; thence 000ï¿½    graduated downward from the high point of the 862-foot cape.
until the N end of Road Island is 0.5 mile on the port beam; thence    Several reefs fringe the base of the cliffs at the SE end of the point.
334ï¿½ until the highest islet on the W side of the upper bay is 1 mile    A reef, that breaks in a moderate-to-heavy swell, is 700 yards NE
on the port beam; and thence 014ï¿½ for the cannery wharf.            by N of the outer end of Kupreanof Point.
 (284)  Routes, Castle Cape to Kupreanof Point (Along-               (296)  The S shore of Kupreanof Peninsula between Kupreanof
shore).-From a point 1.5 miles SE of Castle Cape (see chart    Point and Bluff Point is bold and rugged, broken only by a sand
1601 1), steer 220ï¿½ for 5.4 miles. When abeam of the W  end of    beach-bordered cove about midway between the points.
Chankliut Island, I mile, steer 216ï¿½ for 12.8 miles to clear Seal    (297) Stepovak Bay, NE of the Shumagin Islands, is large and
Cape by 1 mile. A breaker is 0.2 mile off the S end of Seal Cape.    open with numerous small bays and coves indenting the E and W
In thick weather it is recommended that the course be shaped to    shore. They are between steep ridges on both sides. At the heads
pass Seal Cape 1.5 miles off.                                       of each of these smaller bays are stretches of sand beach behind
 (285)  When the E tangent of Seal Cape and the point at the S    which are lagoons and grassy flatlands.
entrance to Devils Bay are on range, bearing 0000, steer 249ï¿½ for     (298)  Kupreanof Peninsula on the E side of the bay is mountain-
9.1 miles with the N tangent of Mitrofania Island ahead. This    ous. The higher peaks are rocky, barren, and scarred from erosion.
course passes Cape Ikti about I mile off.                           The lower slopes are grass covered with patches of alder. The
 (286) When the prominent rocky points marking the entrance to    draws and lines of drainage on the lower slopes have dense
the first arm on the W side of Kuiukta Bay close, bearing 013ï¿½,    growths of alder.
steer 282ï¿½ for 6.9 miles with N slope of mountain on flats W of      (299) The N shore of Stepovak Bay is a long stretch of wide
Long Beach ahead. This course passes N of the W Brother Island    sandy beach, behind which are grass-covered sand dunes. Beyond
at a distance of I mile.                                            the dunes a belt of flat tundra extends.into Ivanof Bay.
 (287) When 0.5 mile beyond the range of the W  tangents of the      (300)  The W shore of Stepovak Bay is mountainous, on a more
W  Brother Island and Mitrofania Island, bearing 194ï¿½, steer 2010    rugged and massive scale than is the terrain of Kupreanof Penin-
for 3 miles. This course passes about 0.6 mile off the W  Brother    sula. Snow and ice fields fill the upper plateaus. A small volcanic




                                                    6. ALASKA PENINSULA                                                      201


vent in the high country above Ramsey Bay often sends out a        (311)  Dome Point, the N entrance headland of Fox Bay, is pre-
cloud of vapor. The steep terrain surrounding the fluted shafts of    cipitous with a somewhat level grass top. A large yellow scar on
Mount Stepo (55ï¿½43.0'N., 160ï¿½11.0'W.) is rich in beauty and gran-    the eroded face identifies this headland.
deur.                                                              (312) Island Bay, N of Fox Bay, is large and open. Its shores are
 (301)  Stepovak Bay is much traveled by fishing craft during the    indented by several coves. An islet, 26 feet high, is in the inner
salmon season, and gill nets are laid out from many of the rocky    part of the bay and makes a good leading mark for vessels entering
points. Brown bear, wolverines, and foxes track the shores, and    the bay. In entering Island Bay vessels should keep at least 0.5
there are trappers' cabins in several of the tributary bays.      mile offshore. An extensive submerged ledge makes off from the
 (302) In the central part of Stepovak Bay, the bottom is regular,    cove 0.8 mile WSW of the islet. This must be avoided when
with depths ranging from 40 fathoms in the N part to 90 fathoms    approaching the anchorage.
in the S part. Near the E shore the depths vary from 20 to 40 fath-  (313) Anchorage WSW of the 32-foot islet is in 17 to 20 fath-
oms. N of Pad Island the bottom is rough, and there are several    oms, mud bottom. Fishing craft sometimes anchor E of the islet in
submerged pinnacles. On the W side of the bay, reefs and sub-    3 to 6 fathoms, blue mud bottom. A submerged ledge makes off
merged shelves make off from many of the headlands. Some of    from the E end of the islet, and a shoal, covered 4 feet, is near the
these reefs bare for a few hundred yards offshore, then continue as    bay's N shore NW of the islet.
submerged shelves with depths of 10 to 20 fathoms extending sev-   (314) Stonehouse Cove is a small cove 1 mile inside the N
eral miles off these points.                                      entrance point of Island Bay. A long reef extending halfway across
 (303) The bottom in most of the bays is a sticky dark-green mud,    the entrance breaks the sea in this cove which has a very smooth,
in depths of 15 to 20 fathoms.                                    white sand bottom that bares at extreme low tides. The cove is
 (304) Kupreanof Peninsula partly protects this bay from the SE    used by fishermen to careen their craft.
swell common along this coast during the summer. The bays and      (315) Pad Island, off the N approach to Island Bay, is low, flat,
coves on the W side of Stepovak Bay are more exposed to the SE    grass covered, and about 0.5 mile long and 0.2 mile wide. A nar-
swell. These bays are also subject to violent winds and downdrafts    row channel separates the island from the main shore. Kelp
during NW weather. For this reason the bays on the E shore offer    patches and foul ground extend N from Pad Island. A pinnacle,
more protected anchorages than do those on the W shore.           covered 3/4 fathom, is 0.9 mile S of the island and another pinnacle,
  (305) Bluff Point, the southernmost feature on the E shore of    covered 11/2 fathoms, is 0.4 mile NNE of the island. A large shoal
Stepovak Bay, is a sharp narrow promontory about 700 feet high.    with a least depth of 43/4 fathoms is 1.3 miles N of Pad Island.
It bristles with a descending series of projecting nobs and points.  (316) The shore from Pad Island N consists of rugged cliffs.
  (306) Boulder Bay, N of Bluff Point, the southernmost bay on    Two striking rock formations are 1.5 miles N of Pad Island. One is
the E side of Stepovak Bay, offers good anchorage but is some-    a chimneylike column, 120 feet high, projecting from the cliff
what exposed to S swells. The bottom is very even, sloping gradu-    slopes. The other is a spikelike rock, 400 feet high, projecting
ally from 20 fathoms at the entrance to 15 fathoms near the    above the cliff line. This spike is noticeable from a distance.
anchorage. The bottom is a black gritty mud. The anchoring depth   (317) The small cove in the NE corner of Stepovak Bay is
and swinging room make Boulder Bay suitable for medium-draft    rimmed with rocks and reefs except at its head where there is a
vessels.                                                          sandspit and a lagoon. Depths are 4 to 8 fathoms, mud bottom at
  (307) Cub Point, on the N side of Boulder Bay, is a broad-    the entrance and decrease gradually toward the head.
topped, rounding headland about 900 feet high. It has almost per-  (318) Along the N shore of Stepovak Bay is Stepanof Flats, a 5-
pendicular faces that are strongly marked with inclined bands of    mile stretch of broad sand beach. Behind the beach are grass-cov-
light and dark stratified rock. A patch of white rock halfway up the    ered sand dunes and beyond are extensive flats of tundra. Two
outer face of Cub Point makes an identifying landmark.            streams flow out of these flats, often bringing silt that discolors the
  (308) Fox Bay, on the N side of Cub Point, is the largest tribu-    sea for large areas around their mouths.
tary on the E side of Stepovak Bay. Vessels of any size can find   (319)  Gull Rock, just offshore from Stepanof Flats and about
 protected anchorage in Fox Bay except during very strong W        midway along the N shore of Stepovak Bay, are two bare rocks
 winds. An islet, 90 feet high, in the SE part of the bay is a good    joined by reefs; the S rock is about 19 feet high and the N one
 leading mark for vessels entering. The entering course is 090ï¿½ for    about 4 feet high. From S they appear light colored against the
 the islet; when 1 mile from the islet, and with a low gravel point    dark background of the hills. The water is shallow between the
 that begins near the inner end of a grass-topped bluff abeam to    rocks and the shore.
 starboard, change course to 065ï¿½ and proceed to anchorage in 15    (320) Louies Corner is at the W end of Stepanof Flats. Hills
 to 18 fathoms, or less if desired, in the large cove at the head of the    and a rocky headland are W of Louies Corner. Behind Louies Cor-
 bay.                                                              ner is a detached cone-shaped hill, 746 feet high, that shows dis-
  (309) The cove on the SE side of Fox Bay is the most protected    tinctly from the S end of the bay. An anchorage with 17 to 20
 anchorage for small craft in Stepovak Bay. Enter Fox Bay as in the    fathoms, mud bottom, and exposed to S weather, is 1.3 miles W of
 preceding paragraph and when 1 mile from the islet change course    Gull Rock.
 from 090ï¿½ and steer 108ï¿½ for 0.9 mile to a position where the islet  (321) Ramsey Bay, at the N end of the W shore of Stepovak
 is 0.3 mile on the port beam; thence 135ï¿½ for 0.6 mile to anchorage    Bay, is fairly open and exposed, and in the central part of the bay
 in 8 to 9 fathoms, sticky mud bottom. Water can be obtained from    the depths are too great for anchoring. A broad sand beach
 a waterfall on the SE side of the cove.                           stretches for several miles around the N and NW shores of Ram-
  (310) The N part of Fox Bay should be avoided by strangers. A   sey Bay. At the E end of this beach is Bales Landing. Small ves-
 reef, 750 yards long, 300 yards wide, and awash at lower low    sels can anchor in 5 to 10 fathoms, green mud bottom, 0.3 mile S
 water, is 1 mile SSE of the headland on the N side of the entrance.    of the landing; the anchorage is exposed to S weather.




202                                                 6. ALASKA PENINSULA


 (322) W of Bales Landing two streams form deltas off the sand      (333) An alternate anchorage that offers some protection from
beach. On these deltas, sandbars and sandflats bare at low water    SE weather is found off the midbight in the S shore, 0.8 mile
for more than 0.5 mile offshore from the high-water line.          WNW of the E end of Elephant Point. Anchor in 13 fathoms, mud
 (323) From Ramsey Bay S to Dent Point, the shore is steep and    bottom. Two abandoned buildings are at the head of Orzinski Bay.
rocky. At the Ramsey Bay end of this stretch is a rocky headland;    One is near the mouth of the stream and the other is farther
reef and rocks, that uncover 1 to 4 feet, extend 0.2 mile SE from    upstream at the base of a hillside.
the headland.                                                       (334) Elephant Point, on the S side of the entrance to Orzinski
 (324) Dent Point, between Ramsey Bay and Grub Gulch, is    Bay, is a sharp-ridged promontory, 655 feet high, bound by sheer
broad and rounding, backed by steep cliffs, and fringed with reefs.    cliffs having striking bands of stratified rock. The cliffs at the
Two conspicuous rocks, 19 and 36 feet high, are joined at low    outer extremity of Elephant Point are deeply undercut. A ledge
water with the southernmost tip of the point. A rock, covered 2    that uncovers, extends for 0.5 mile ENE to SE from the point.
feet, is 0.3 mile offshore, 1.1 miles NE of the same tip. Vessels    Shoal indications extend 1.5 miles ESE of the point; vessels
should keep at least 0.5 mile off this shore.                      should clear the point by at least 1.5 miles.
                                                                      (335) American Bay is open and exposed in its outer part, but
 (325)  Charts 16553, 16540.-Grub Gulch (55048'N.,    narrows into a long fiord which is fairly well protected from the
159057'W.) is marked by two grass-covered islets and several low,    outside swell. This inner bay is surrounded by tremendously high
bare rocks and reefs. The bottom near the entrance is very broken,    peaks of a striking and rugged appearance. In the outer bay a pin-
but a channel with 12 fathoms or more can be carried to the head    nacle, covered 41/4 fathoms, is 0.6 mile SW of Elephant Point, and
of the bay by favoring the W shore well away from the vicinity of    another pinnacle, covered 43/4 fathoms, is 0.3 mile SW of the
the islets. The anchorage at the head of Grub Gulch is deep, 20 to    rocky point 2 miles along the N shore from Elephant Point. A
23 fathoms, mud bottom; swinging room is limited. At the NE end    sandspit projects from the NE shore and a gravel spit from the SW
of the beach at the head of the bay, the mouth of a stream is sur-    shore 2.5 and 3.5 miles from the entrance.
rounded by sandflats that bare at low tide. A vessel should favor   (336)  The valley at the head of American Bay shows consider-
the SW end of the beach when anchoring.                            able evidence of glacial deposit. There are shoals and low-water
 (326) The outer part of Grub Gulch is not suitable for anchorage    sandflats off the mouth of the stream that flows from the valley.
because the average depth is about 45 fathoms, and there is little    Depths in the inner bay are 12 to 30 fathoms, and the bottom rises
or no swinging room in the shoaler depths near shore.              steeply except off the flats at the head. Anchorage is possible for
 (327) Red Hill, a sharp, steep, red-hued mountain, 2,343 feet    small craft in 8 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom, near the head of the
high, is on the point between Grub Gulch and Clark Bay. A reef    bay; other anchorage is not recommended because of the depths
extends 0.3 mile SSE from the outer end of the point to a conspic-    and limited swinging room.
uous pinnacle rock 20 feet high.
                                                                      (337) Blunt Point, on the S side of the entrance to American
 (328)  Clark Bay is a large open bight backed by two valleys. A  Bay, is a broad cape with grass-covered slopes above a shoreline
grass-covered islet is near the E shore of the bay. It is reported that    of eroded bluffs. Reefs make off Blunt Point and vessels should
small fishing craft anchor NW of this islet in 6 or 7 fathoms, find-    stay well clear of it
ing some lee from SE storms.
 (329) Near the W end of the E bight of Clark Bay are two pinna-    (338)  Wind Bound Bay is a small cove 1 mile W  of Blunt
 (329e rocks. The bottom is foul between these pinnacles and the W  Point. Inside the cove is a small valley surrounded by high moun-
cle rocks. The bottom is foul between these pinnacles and the W    tains. It is reported that small fishing craft anchor off the mouth of
shore. The W bight of Clark Bay is called Little Norway. Anchor-    t    t is reported that small fishing craft anchor off the mouth of
age off the sand beach is in 15 fathoms, mud bottom. During NE
storms the winds draw down across this bight with terrific force.   (339)  Chichagof Bay (55'39.0'N., 160015.0'W.), 3 miles W of
 (330) The W shore of Clark Bay consists of a rocky bluff line. A  Blunt Point, is used as an anchorage by small fishing craft. A reef
conspicuous waterfall is about I mile N of the entrance to the bay.    extends off the N side of the bay and a 23/4-fathom shoal is 0.3
An odd-shaped, slender, pinnacle rock is about 0.2 mile S of the    mile off the N entrance point. A reef fringes the bold headland
waterfall.                                                         separating Chichagof Bay and West Cove to the S. A shoal area
 (331) Waterfall Point is a broad, rounding headland and ridge    with depths increasing to 41/2 fathoms extends 0.5 mile SE from
separating Clark Bay and Orzinski Bay. A waterfall, visible for    the headland; the outer extremity is marked by kelp. Depths
many miles, marks the S tip of this point. This waterfall, viewed in    decrease from 10 fathoms at the entrance to 5 fathoms 0.4 mile
profile, appears to spout its stream clear of the bluff line. Reefs    from the beach at the head of the bay. The anchorage in the upper
and rock ledges make off Waterfall Point for 0.5 mile, and a 33/4-    part of the bay is sheltered except from the SE; the bottom is hard
fathom shoal area is I mile E of the point; clear the point by at    sand.
least 1.5 miles.                                                    (340) West Cove is small and fringed on both sides with cov-
 (332) Orzinski Bay has steep slopes along most of its shores,    ered rock ledges. A ledge extending almost 0.5 mile SE from the
but there are grassflats and a lagoon at the head. It is shoaler than    SW point of the cove has pinnacles that bare at various stages of
the adjacent bays but seems to have better protection at times from    the tide; a 33/4 fathom shoal is 0.7 mile SE of the point.
NW storms. A shoal with depths of 7 feet or less extends 0.5 mile   (341)  Dorenoi Bay, 7.5 miles SW of Blunt Point, is open and
off the N shore. The bay must be navigated with caution; the best    exposed to the E and SE, and subject to strong winds through low
water is found by favoring the N side of the entrance, then heading    ground to the NW. Both sides of the bay are mountainous, and
for the middle of the bight in the S shore and strongly favoring the    rock ledges border the shores. At the head of the bay is a long
S shore to the head. The bottom rises rather abruptly but anchor-    stretch of sand beach. The bottom near the entrance is extremely
age is possible in 10 to 20 fathoms, mud bottom, about 0.2 mile    broken; depths vary from 20 to.over 70 fathoms. Approaching in
from the head; the anchorage has good holding ground but is    midchannel. a good anchorage in 30 to 10 fathoms, good holding
exposed to SE weather.                                             ground, is at the head of the bay.




                                                     6. ALASKA PENINSULA                                                        203


 (342)  Renshaw Point, at the base.of a rugged mountain, marks    Bay is the preferred anchorage. Reef Point is on the E side of the
the S entrance of Dorenoi Bay. The deeply eroded orange-buff    entrance to the harbor; a reef extends almost 0.1 mile off the point.
cliffs are conspicuous for many miles. Black rocks and reefs make    The best anchorage is in midchannel, 0.6 mile N of Reef Point,
off the point.                                                      and W  of Ballast Island, in 5 to 8 fathoms. Small craft may
 (343) San Diego Bay, the open bight N of a string of islets and    anchor in the bight on the W side opposite Ballast Island in 8 to 12
rocks between Guillemot Island and the mainland, is marked on its    feet and secure better protection; avoid a ledge that uncovers about
N side by a low yellow cliff. San Diego Bay is much used during    4 feet in the N part of the bight.
the salmon fishing season as an anchorage and as a fish transfer     (353) Lefthand Bay, known locally as Left Arm, on the W side
point. The approach N of Guillemot Island is deep and clear.    of Balboa Bay, is well protected and a good anchorage, mud bot-
Smaller vessels may carry 4 fathoms through the passage between    tom, for any size vessel. Shoals extend about 500 yards off the N
the W  end of the island and a conspicuous pinnacle rock that is    and S shores at the entrance, and about 200 to 300 yards off the
midway of the distance to the mainland shore.                       shores inside the bay. Midchannel depths are 30 fathoms at the
 (344)  Guillemot Island, about 1.6 miles long, 0.3 mile wide,    entrance, shoaling gradually toward the sand beach at the head of
and 623 feet high, has bold precipitous cliffs on the N side and low    the bay. Kagayan Flats, between Lefthand Bay and Beaver Bay,
bluffs on the S side. Above the low bluffs the grass-covered    are low and marshy.
ground slopes evenly upward to the top of the cliffs on the N side.  (354) Cape Aliaksin separates Balboa Bay and Beaver Bay and
A neck of land extends off the S side of the island to a rocky,    has no distinctive form; it is of a rounded outline and a low
round, and steep-sided headland. On the E shore, between this    rounded profile. Lowland extends for some distance from the
round headland and the cliffs to the N, is a bight with a sandy    shore all around the cape. The summit, 2,073 feet high, is broad
beach.                                                              and flat. There is shoal water near shore all around and a rock
 (345) Off the SW end of the island is a flat and sandspit. A fish-    awash about 0.3 mile off the SW side. A reef extends SE 600
erman's cabin is on this flat. Smaller craft often anchor on the S    yards off the cape. The cape is difficult to identify from W.
side of the island in the bight E of the sandspit, in I to 5 fathoms.
NW and NE weather causes strong winds to sweep down the              (355) Chart 16540.-Shumagin Islands, comprising 15 sizable
grassy slopes, so this anchorage should be used with caution.       islands and many islets and rocks, extend for a distance of 60
 (346) The water is fairly deep off the N and S sides of the island,    miles from the coast of the Alaska Peninsula from which the
but a ledge covered 61/2 fathoms is 1.1 miles E of its E end.       group is separated by Unga Strait.
 (347)  S of Guillemot Island the coast is bold and precipitous,     (356)  The inside passage along the Alaska Peninsula in the
except for two stretches of low sand beach bordering valleys that    vicinity of the Shumagin Islands is through Gorman, Korovin, and
break through from the interior. Rocks and reefs fringe the bases    Unga Straits, and N of Jude Island.
of the cliffs. A pinnacle, 40 feet high, is off a point 3 miles SW of  (357)  In general, the Shumagin Islands are bold and mountain-
Guillemot Island.                                                   ous, and the shores are broken in many places by inlets that afford
 (348)  Lumber Bay, known locally as Rough Beach, is on the E      good anchorages. The shores are rockbound close-to. Fishing sta-
face of Swedania Point, 2 miles NE of its SW end, and consists of    tions and camps are scattered throughout the group, and good fish-
a shallow bight at the entrance of a valley; the beach is a dike of    ing banks are off the islands. Fox and cattle raising are carried on
cobbles thrown up by the sea, and is capped by a great windrow of    to some extent.
driftwood.                                                           (358)  Caution.-Many areas adjacent to the Shumagin Islands
  (349)  Swedania Point is the seaward end of a ridge 1,309 feet    are unsurveyed and may present unknown hazards to navigation.
high; at the extremity are rugged cliffs, and on the SW side is a    (359)  Weather.-The prevailing winds in summer are SW. This
gravel spit at the foot of the cliffs. The profile and end slope are    wind brings in a sea fog which lasts as long as the wind prevails,
striking and unusual, resembling in magnified outline the end of    and usually covers Unga and Popof Islands, the SW section of
an artificial earthwork or bunker, back of which the mountain rises    Nagai Island, the SW shores of Big and Little Koniuji Islands and
steeply. Strong williwaws blow on the lee side off the E face. One    Simeonof Island. In Popof Strait and Humboldt Harbor, the lay of
mile E of Swedania Point a group of rocks, bare at low water,    the land thins the fog to mist through which the shores are visible
extend S.                                                           and often these waters are in a clear pocket when the fog around is
  (350) Balboa Bay, known locally as Portage Bay, offers good    heavy. The SW wind also produces a moderate swell and choppy
shelter on the E side about 5 miles from Swedania Point in a small    sea on the SW side of the islands. While this condition prevails on
bight with a low gravel point S of it at the mouth of a large ravine    the SW side of the group, it is generally clear on the opposite side,
containing a stream. The midchannel into the N aim is deep. When    with light breezes, smooth sea, and no swell. A landfall for the
the coal mine at Herendeen Bay, on the other side of the Alaska    Shumagins, in summer, should therefore be made to NE, and the
Peninsula, was in operation, supplies were landed here and carried    most unmistakable point is Castle Rock. A N breeze dries and
across the trail by pack train, a distance of about 15 miles. The    clears the islands to crystal clearness.
highest point on the trail, less than 600 feet, is near the S side of
the peninsula. This portage is still used frequently.                (360)  Charts 16553, 16540.-Unga Strait separates the Shuma-
  (351) On the W  shore of Balboa Bay, a reef extends 600 yards    gin Islands from the Alaska Peninsula and has a narrowest width
off the entrance point and then fringes the shore to the N at a dis-    of 2.9 miles between the N end of Unga Island and Cape Aliaksin
tance of 200 to 600 yards offshore. Outside the reef the water    and depths of 16 fathoms or more. Either shore of the strait should
deepens rapidly to the middle of the bay.                           be cleared by at least 1 mile. The current generally sets W. (See
  (352) Albatross Anchorage, near the head of the N arm of Bal-    Tidal Current Tables for predictions.)
boa Bay, is a secure harbor with depths of 8 to 2 fathoms. During    (361)  Unga Spit Light (55024.4'N., 160043.5'W.), 40 feet above
strong N winds, Albatross Anchorage is subject to strong wind-    the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white
funneling from the mountain passes. During this period Lefthand    diamond-shaped daymark on the N end of Unga Island.




204                                                 6. ALASKA PENINSULA


 (362)  Chart 16540.-Simeonof Island, the most E of the Shum-    holding ground. At the head of a small well-protected boat harbor
agin Islands, is about 5 miles long and 3.5 miles wide. It is cornm-    are several houses.
posed of two clusters of hills, the SE and higher ones being about  (374)  Chernabura Island, the most S of the Shumagins, is high
1,436 feet. These hills are separated by a low plateau that is nearly    and mountainous, and has few breaks in its profile, the highest part
cut in two by a very irregularly shaped inlet known as Simeonof    being at the E end. A rocky islet, apparently connected with the
Harbor.                                                            main island by a bar, is off its N end. On the E side are three small
 (363)  The coast of the island is fringed with reefs and shoals.    bays; the middle one is reported to afford anchorage in W winds.
Those on the S and SE sides are variously reported to extend from   (375)- The S shore of Chernabura Island is a Steller sea lion
3 to 7 miles offshore; those on the E side, 3 miles; and those off    rookery site. There is a 3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer zone
the other shores, 0.5 mile. A rock, on which the sea breaks at low    around this rookery which encompasses all but the NW portion of
water, has been reported halfway between Simeonof and Chern-    the island. (See 50 CFR 227.12), chapter 2, for limits and regula-
abura Islands.                                                     tions.)
 (364) Simeonof Harbor makes in from the W side of the island.      (376) Bird Island, about 4 miles W  of Chernabura Island, is
A reef extends about 0.5 mile W from the N point of the entrance    more irregular than that island, but several of its peaks are nearly
to the harbor. Off the S point of the entrance is a low, flat, rocky    as high. Passing well S, Bird Island appears as four principal
island fringed with reefs. Thick kelp beds are parallel to the reefs    peaks connected by low valleys. Almost its entire SE side is a
on either side of the harbor entrance. The harbor is protected from    series of cliffs. A rock is a short distance off its S end.
all winds, the entrance is tortuous, with reefs on either side; the  (377)  An anchorage is reported in the bight on the E-side of Bird
shores are rocky and the water very shoal. The inner anchorage is   Island, just inside Point Welcome, in 5 to 12 fathoms. The wreck
in 21/2 fathoms, with not over 2 fathoms at the lowest tide; the bot-    of a schooner is at the head of the bight. Temporary anchorage,
tom is smooth gravel. Anchorage, exposed to W winds, may be    exposed to all but winds from the SE quadrant, may be had in the
had in the outer part of the harbor in about 4 fathoms, about 0.5    bight in the NW side of the island in about 12 fathoms, sand bot-
mile inside the entrance.                                          tom, SW of the reef making out about I mile in a NW direction off
 (365) Twelve Fathom Strait separates Simeonof and Little    the NW point of the island. Rocks are 0.5 mile offshore in a W
Koniuji Islands and is 2.2 miles wide and has depths of 10 to 20    direction from the S point of this bight, and a shoal about 1 mile in
fathoms except for a 6-fathom shoal area near the middle. A few    a NW direction off the SW point of the island Submerged rocks
kelp patches are on the Simeonof Island side.                      are found about 0.5 mile off the N shore of the large bight on the E
 (366) In 1991, a dangerous submerged rock with an unknown    side of the island.
depth was reported in about 54'57'24"N., 159021'30"W.               (378) Otter Strait, between Bird and Chernabura Islands, is
                                                                    said to have depths between 20 to 35 fathoms, sandy bottom.
 (367) Little Koniuji Island is very irregular in shape, consisting                            t
of three parts, 1,200 to over 1,600 feet high, connected by raised  (379) Big Koniuji Island, the N and largest of the E group of
                                                                    the Shumagin Islands, is about 13 miles long and about 7.5 miles
sand beaches. The S end terminates in a high rocky pointed cape,
                                                                    wide at its widest or S end. The island is rugged and very moun-
with a reef marked by a breaker extending about 0.3 mile SW
                                                                    rutainous, with a well-defined central ridge and spurs projecting
from it. The E coast is indented by two coves, and there is a large    ta inous, with                 a well-defined central ridge and spurs projecting
harbor on the W side.                                              toward the points. The coast is broken by many inlets and the
                                                                    points are rockbound close inshore. The highest peaks are fre-
 (368) Sandy Cove, on the E side of Little Koniuji Island, is    quently mist covered. Cape Thompson, its N point, is compara-
about I mile wide at the entrance and 1.5 miles long. On its W
                                                     mie e     he  e ad s  tively low, and its SW end terminates in a long narrow point with a
shore are prominent granite cliffs. The cove affords good anchor- high connecting ridge that resembles an island from some points
age in its S bight in about 10 fathoms, sheltered from all but SE    of view.
weather. Excellent anchorage was reported 1.1 miles 155ï¿½ from
weather. Excellent isanchorage was reported 1.1 miles 155d from     (380) Flying Eagle Harbor, on the E side of the island, 6 miles
Entrance Point in sand bottom; this anchorage affords good pro- S of Cape Thompson, offers well-protected anchorage for small
                                                                    S of Cape Thompson, offers well-protected anchorage for small
                                                                    vessels, especially in S gales, in 7 to 10 fathoms.
 (369) Atkins Island, about 1.5 miles long and about 0.6 mile       (381)  Hall Island, about 0.9 mile long and 0.2 mile wide, is
wide, is connected to the NE headland of Little Koniuji Island by a    about I mile off the E shore of Big Koniuji Island. Two bare rocks
shoal. The island rises to 800 feet at its SE end.                 are close to the SE face of the E end of the island, and a reef
 (370) Atkins Island is a Steller sea lion rookery site. There is a    extends about 0.3 mile SW from the SW point.
3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer zone around the entire island.    (382) Murre Rocks are a group of three islets about 0.6 mile
(See 50 CFR 227.12, chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)        NW from Hall Island. A rocky ledge extends about 0.3 mile SW
 (371) Northwest Harbor, a bight in the N side of Little Koniuji    from the S islet.
Island, S of Herendeen Island, may be entered from either side. It  (383) Yukon Harbor is SW of Hall Island. A rocky ledge cov-
affords fair anchorage and protection from all but NE winds in 5 to    ered with kelp is close around the E entrance point, and rocks are
10 fathoms. The harbor is about 0.5 mile wide. An abandoned    close to the W point. Anchorage, protected from W weather, may
fishing station is here.                                           be had in the center of the harbor in about 7 fathoms, but the hold-
 (372) Herendeen Island is triangular shaped, about 0.9 mile    ing ground is poor.
long and 0.5 mile wide. An islet is off the W end.                  (384) Koniuji Strait, between Big and Little Koniuji Islands, is
 (373) Northeast Harbor, the large bay in the W side of Little    about 1.5 miles wide, and has reported depths of 16 to 28 fathoms.
Koniuji Island, has two bights and is about 4.5 miles long. The SE
bight of the harbor is somewhat open to W winds and the holding     (385) Charts 16556, 16540.-Four prominent bights are on the
ground is rocky and poor. The extreme SE end of the harbor is    W side of Big Koniuji Island. They are open and easy of access
more protected and is a favorite refuge for fishermen, though the    and their shores are clear, except close-to. Anchorage in 24 to 26
bottom, being alternately patches of rock and sand, is not good    fathoms may be had near the head of the bight 146ï¿½ from Penin-





                                                     6. ALASKA PENINSULA                                                       205


sula Island which is 3.5 miles NNE from Spectacle Island. In        (397) The passage between Spectacle and Bendel Islands is 0.6
approaching the anchorage it is necessary to keep N of midchannel    mile wide, and a midchannel course leads through 21 to 11 fath-
to avoid a shoal extending 300 yards off the S shore about 0.5 mile    oms.
from the head of the bight.                                         (398) Turner Island, 1,207 feet high, is separated from Bendel
 (386) The other bights do not offer anchorage because of the    Island by a passage from 0.8 to 1.5 miles wide. The island is 2.8
great depth of water. Anchorage for very small craft may be found    miles long and about 0.9 mile wide. Its shore is rockbound and the
in any of these bights, close inshore, and in the numerous indenta-    SE coast is very foul for about 0.5 mile offshore. There is a low
tions and small coves. The winds draw through the divides into the    flat on the NW end with a 400-foot knoll on the point. The bluffs
bights, and the williwaws are very strong.                         on the N, SE, and S sides are 400 to 800 feet high.
 (387) Two bays indent the S coast of Big Koniuji Island; the      (399) The passage between Bendel and Turner Islands is deep at
reported depth in the W one is too great for anchorage, but in the    both entrances and shoals gradually to 41/4 fathoms in its narrowest
easterly large bay, vessels have anchored in 16 fathoms, poor    part, about midchannel off the SW point of Bendel Island. Dense
holding ground of hard bottom, with protection from N and W        kelp grows on this shoal and small craft find difficulty in passing
winds.                                                             through. This passage is not recommended for large vessels.
 (388) A 3-fathom shoal extends from the S end of Big Koniuji       (400) The Twins, about 4 miles S of Turner Island, consist of
Island.                                                            three small islands with precipitous and bare sides; the highest,
 (389): Castle Rock, about 1.5 miles NNE of Cape Thompson,        410 feet, is also the largest of the group. Three small islets and
theN point of Big Koniuji Island, is rugged and serrated, and its    another s                                             ly, of
highest peak is 825 feet. It makes an excellent landmark. A 3-    the largest island, and a small islet and a larger islet are off the SE
fathom shoal extends about 0.8 mile off its: S end.                side and SW side, respectively, of the most S island. Several rocks
                                                                     awash extend SE from near the NW end of the most W island to
 (390) The bottom between Big Koniuji Island and Castle Rock    near the NW end of the S island.
is said to be even, averaging 28 fathoms.
                isa  E.aist be evga, StraitseparateNgaiIand ig 2t o m s (401)  Near Island, in the S approach to East Nagai Strait near
                (39   EastNagaiStraitseparatesNagaislandandBigKoniuj  Nagai Island, is about 1.4 miles long and 1,289 feet high, with pre-
Island of the Shumagin group, and has an average width of 6 miles    cipitous, rocky sides. The island is easily recognized by a regular
and a minimum width of 1.6 miles. Peninsula, Spectacle, Bendel,    serration that cuts its crest into five little peaks. There are rocks
and Turner Islands are in a general NNE-SSW direction in this    close to the shore.
passage, and the waters between this chain of islands and Nagai
Island on one side and Big Koniuji Island on the other are deep     (402) Charts 16540, 16553, 16556
                                                                      (402) Charts 16540, 16553, 16556.-Nagai Island, in the center
and clear, and midchannel courses may be safely steered.
         and clear, and midchannel courses may be safely steered.  of the Shumagin group, is about 29 miles long, 9 miles wide, and
 (392) Peninsula Island, 3.5 miles NNE from Spectacle Island    near the center reaches an elevation of 1,837 feet in a group of
and the most N island in East Nagai Strait, is 1.5 miles long and    confused ridges. Its coast is irregular and indented by numerous
0.8 mile wide. It has a central peak 1,145 feet high. The shore is   inlets, several of which extend nearly through the island and have
rugged, steep, and rockbound. A long boulder spit extends off the    low, narrow isthmuses at the head. The island is mountainous and
SE end. The NE end should not be approached closer than 0.3    its shores are rockbound.
mile and the SE end no closer than 0.5 mile. Exposed anchorage      (403)  Cape Wedge, the N end of the island, is a pointed head-
may be found on the tail of the shoal extending off the SE point in    land with a rounded, slopin hill, 762 feet highs  TheN end of the
51/2 to 12 fathoms, 0.5 mile from the narrow point.                cape terminates in a double point, 262 and 316 feet high and a
 (393)  Spectacle Island, 2.5 miles long and 1.5 miles wide at its    rocky bluff 150 feet high between. Its shores are rocky and forbid-
S part, is rockbound and has steep cliffs on the N, E, and S sides.    ding, and dangers are within 0.3 mile of the shore. Clear the cape
The N part is distinguished by two peaks over 900 feet high and    by at least 1 mile.
the S part reaches 1,252 feet. In general, the island may be        (404) Mountain Point, the S end of Nagai Island, is narrow,
approached within 0.2 mile.                                        about 500 feet high, and surrounded by rocks at a distance of
 (394) Anchorages, under favorable conditions, for small craft    about 0.5 mile. A covered rock is about 1 mile SSW off the point.
are in the large bight on the E side of Spectacle Island in 6 to 9  (405) Pirate Shake is a local name for the low, 65-yard-wide
fathoms, in the bight on the W  side in 4 to 5 fathoms, and in the    neck of Nagai Island, 4 miles SSW of Cape Wedge. The cove on
small cove in the S side in 3 fathoms. The bights on the E and W   the E side of the neck is a good anchorage but is exposed to winds
sides are open and easy of access. The entrance to the small cove    from about ENE to ESE. The outer points at the entrance are sur-
on the S side is about 70 yards across with foul ground on either    rounded by reefs, and a rock, 8 feet high, is in the middle of the
side to a point about 0.1 mile inside the entrance.                entrance. The better entrance is N of the rock, heading for an islet,
  (395) The passage between Peninsula and Spectacle Islands is    40 feet high, on the N side of the cove, on a 286ï¿½ course. Pass 300
about 3.5 miles wide and is deep and free from dangers.        .   to 500 yards S of the islet, and anchor in the middle of the cove
  (396)  Bendel Island, SW of Spectacle Island, is separated from    WSW of the islet in about 7 fathoms, soft bottom in places.
it by a passage 0.6 mile wide. It is about 2 miles in diameter and    Anchorage can also be selected in the entrance of the cove just NE
1,250 feet high. The E end terminates in a narrow neck. There are    of the islet in 7 to 8 fathoms, bottom generally rocky, taking care,
high bluffs on the S side and sloping valleys on the others. The    however, to avoid the reef that extends about 0.2 mile from the NE
coastline is rocky, with kelp, and the depths around the island are    shore of the cove. The flat islet, 40 feet high on the N side of the
irregular. A flat extends off the SW side for about I mile with    cove, and a rock, 25 feet high, off the outer point on the S side of
depths of 4/4 to 10 fathoms and with several shoaler spots. Depths    the cove are good marks for the entrance.
of 7 to 8 fathoms are also found off the NW and SE sides. Exposed   (406) Northeast Bight, on the E side of Nagai Island, about 6
anchorages for small boats may be found in the bights and on the    miles S of Cape Wedge, is 1.3 miles wide, open, deep, and free
flats.                                                             from dangers except close to shore. The main body of the bight is





206                                                 6. ALASKA PENINSULAr


too deep for anchorage, but a vessel may anchor in the two coves    (416)  A reef extends 0.3 mile SW from the S entrance point of
at the head in about 20 fathoms.                                   Falmouth Harbor; and a rock, bare at low water and marked by a
                                                                    breaker and kelp, is 0.8 mile from that point in the same direction.
  (407)  Chart 16540.-Mist Harbor, a landlocked basin about I        (417) The S shore of the harbor is low, rising steeply to the inte-
mile long and 0.4 mile wide, is on the E side of Nagai Island, 10    rior hills. Cape Horn, a low point, with a rock close off it, is about
miles S of Cape Wedge, and NW from Bendel Island. The depths    halfway up the bay on this shore.
in the middle of the basin are 27 to 35 fathoms, but small craft can  (418) The N entrance point rises some 500 feet in a perpendicu-
find secure anchorage in the cove on the S side of the W end of the    lar cliff. The shore is rocky and bold. A rock, 5 feet high, is 0.3
harbor, in 6 to 7 fathoms. The S side of the harbor is formed by a    mile offshore and 1.2 miles NW from this point.
long spit; the 200-yard-wide entrance is around the W end of the    (419) Wooly Head, on the W side of Nagai Island between Fal-
spit and necessitates a sharp turn in entering. A midchannel course    mouth and Eagle Harbors, is a promontory, 1,200 feet high; there
should be followed through the entrance, and also when entering    are rocks 0.2 mile from shore all around its face, some of them
the cove at the W end of the harbor to the anchorage. A flat fills    awash and others forming towers and pinnacles 50 feet high. A
the E end of the harbor; otherwise there are no dangers away from    vessel may pass 0.4 mile off in 20 fathoms. Violent williwaws are
the shores. frequent here.
  (408) A fishing camp is usually on the cove at the W end of Mist   (420) Eagle Harbor, 13.5 miles SSW of Cape Wedge, about 1.2
Harbor and small temporary wharves may be found. Water may be    to 1.5 miles wide, has depths of 15 to 23 fathoms, with no outlying
had from small streams on the NE side of the harbor. Strong willi-    dangers except near the spits that are 1.5 miles from the head of
waws draw down from the high mountains at times. A low neck of    the harbor. In passing between the spits, favor the one on the SW
land, about 150 yards wide, separates the W  end of the harbor    shore. Good anchorage is anywhere in the head of the harbor
from the head of Northeast Bight.                                  above the spits in 14 to 18 fathoms, soft bottom. Small craft can
  (409) East Bight on the E coast of Nagai Island, 3 miles SW of    anchor in the lagoon behind the N spit in 6 fathoms.
the entrance to Mist Harbor, is about 3.2 miles long and 2 miles    (421) A fishing station with a large warehouse and boat wharf is
wide. It is deep, open to the SE, and the shores are clear except    on the S side of Eagle Harbor 1.3 miles inside the entrance, and a
close-to. Anchorage for moderate-sized vessels may be found on    small abandoned fish station and boat wharf are on the N shore 1.8
the shelf on the NE side in 15 to 20 fathoms, about 1 mile inside    miles inside the entrance.
the N entrance point and about 0.4 mile offshore.                   (422) Sanborn Harbor is on the W side of Nagai Island about
  (410) The two W arms do not afford good anchorage because of    10 miles from Cape Wedge. The pinnacle rock 103 feet high off
the depth, about 29 fathoms. A 7-fathom spot, surrounded by deep    East Head, the N entrance point, and two waterfalls on the W face
water, is in the N of the two arms, 650 yards off the W  shore and    of the'S entrance point, are conspicuous landmarks. The harbor is
about 0.9 mile from the head of the arm.                           5 miles long and has good anchorage at its head. To secure good
  (411) The entrance to the more S of the W arms is restricted to    shelter, a vessel should pass between Macks Head and Granite
about 450 yards by a shoal that extends 900 yards N off its S    Point, and then anchor as desired, avoiding only the shoal upper
entrance point. In entering, favor the N shore at a distance of 0.1 to    half of the NE arm. There are no outlying dangers in Sanborn Har-
0.2 mile. Small boats may find protected anchorage behind the    bor.
hook at the S entrance point in 9 to 15 fathoms. After passing well  (423) A fishing station is in a small exposed bay on the N side of
through the entrance to the arm, head 180ï¿½ to pass about 100 yards    Sanborn Harbor, 2.3 miles SE of East Head; it has a warehouse
W of the W end of the hook spit. When abreast of the end of the    and a boat-wharf, dry at low water.
hook, round into the cove and select anchorage in about its center.  (424) Caton Cove is on the N side of Sanborn Harbor, 3.5 miles
 (412)  Larsen Bay, on the E side of Nagai Island opposite Turner    SE of East Head; there is shelter in The Kitchen for light craft
Island, affords good anchorage in 4 to 10 fathoms, sandy bottom.    back of the sandspit. The channel, close to the spit, until through
The bight is open and easy of access but is exposed to E winds.    the narrowest part of the entrance, has a least width of 100 feet and
The W  shore is low and is distinguished by white sand dunes. A    a least depth of 10 feet.
bold headland, about 100 feet high, projects from the S side. There  (425) Porpoise Harbor, about 3 miles NE of Sanborn Harbor,
are several open bights on the E coast of the island between    affords no useful anchorage because of its great depth.
Larsen Bay and Mountain Point.                                      (426)  The bight about 2.5 miles NE of Porpoise Harbor has tem-
 (413) John Island, off the W side of Nagai Island about 7 miles    porary anchorage in 8 to 15 fathoms, giving the shore a berth of
N of Mountain Point, is 580 feet high. S of John Island, Nagai    over 300 yards. Porpoise Rocks are a small cluster 10 feet high,
Island consists of two clusters of rocky hills, 1,611 and 1,130 feet    with deep water close-to, 0.8 mile from the N shore in the
high, joined by a low isthmus.                                     approach to the bay.
 (414) The isthmus is called Saddlers Mistake because of a ves-     (427) The narrow bight W of Pirate Shake, described previously,
sel attempting at night to pass between the adjacent high parts of    affords anchorage for small craft about 0.3 mile inside the
the island.                                                        entrance and about on the middle line of the cove in 4 to 6 fath-
                                                                   oms, rocky bottom. The bight is exposed to W winds and its E half
 (415) Charts 16553, 16540.-Falmouth Harbor, on the W side    is foul and shoal to the head.
of Nagai Island, about 6 miles N of John Island, affords a secure,  (428) West Nagai Strait, between Nagai and Andronica Islands
though limited, anchorage for a small vessel in the basin behind    of the Shumagin group, is 3.3 miles wide at its narrowest point
the spit at its head in 7 to 8 fathoms, sandy bottom. The entrance    between Porpoise Rocks and The Haystacks, with depths from 25
to the basin is not over 300 yards wide, has a depth of 6 fathoms,    to 40 fathoms and no outlying dangers. A vessel should pass E and
and has no known dangers. The basin is 0.3 mile wide, and its N    S of The Haystacks and on these sides may approach as close as
side is a broad sandflat that drops suddenly to 4 fathoms.         0.3 mile in 25 fathoms.




                                                     6. ALASKA PENINSULA                                                      207


 (429) The currents in West Nagai Strait set with the wind and    Both bights are free of danger except for numerous reefs near
reach a velocity of 1.5 to 2 knots in strong winds. Under ordinary    shore.
conditions the prevailing set of the current is said to be SW in this  (442) Scotland Point, the NE end of Korovin Island, is distin-
vicinity.                                                         guished by the large pyramid-shaped rock 100 yards off the point.
 (430) The Haystacks are a formidable appearing group of four    A 10-fathom shoal is 1.8 miles NW of the point.
islets 265 to 293 feet high, with a broken chain of rocks running  (443) Grosvold Bay, 2 miles W of Scotland Point, may be used
through them. Broken ground, on which the least depth found is 9    as an anchorage for small craft. The entrance is foul on both sides
fathoms, is 1.3 miles SW from the SW bare rocks. A rock called    but safe in the middle; inside the bay, foul ground is along the
The Whaleback, 1 mile W of The Haystacks, is 22 feet high, and    shores. The 623-foot peak of the bold rocky headland on the W
300 yards SSW of it is a covered rock. Temporary anchorage in 20    side of the entrance to the bay and a waterfall W of the headland
fathoms or less can be had in the bight E of The Haystacks. A     are prominent.
landing can be made on the boulder beach.                          (444) The bay between Scotland Point and Grosvold Bay is not
 (431) The soundings indicate clear passage between Andronica    recommended for anchorage.
and The Haystacks, between The Whaleback and The Haystacks,        (445) Henderson Island, 0.2 mile off the W end of Korovin
and between the N Haystack and the rest of the group, but none of    Island, is small and 58 feet high. From W it is hard to distinguish
these passages are recommended.                                   from Korovin Island until close-to. Rocks extend 0.1 mile off the
 (432) Andronica Island, one of the Shumagin group, is W from    W end of Henderson Island and shoals, covered 8 fathoms and
the N end of Nagai Island. The island, 2 miles wide, 3 miles long,    less, extend up to I mile around the island, except on the E side
and 1,175 feet high, is bordered by rocks to a distance of 0.2 mile    where a reef extends to Korovin Island.
from the shore; vessels should give the shore of the island a berth  (446) Korovin Strait, between Korovin and Popof Islands, has
of 0.5 mile. A flat islet, 22 feet high, extends 0.4 mile off the SE    a least width of 2 miles and is free of dangers. The bottom is rough
point toward The Haystacks.                                       with depths of 25 to over 100 fathoms.
  (433) Andronica Island Light (55020.8'N., 160ï¿½03.6'W.), 115      (447) Karpa Island, 4 miles NE from Korovin Island, is 0.7
feet above the water, is shown from a square frame on the NE    mile wide, 1.3 miles long, and 1,373 feet high. The island is grass
point of the island. E of the point is a prominent, conical-shaped    covered with a smooth profile; a remarkable cliff, 900 feet high, is
rock, 280 feet-high, that is useful during low visibility in identify-    at the NE point. The island may be ascended only from the SW
ing the N point of the island to assure passage through the desired    point; 70 yards off this point is a pinnacle rock, 50 feet high. A
strait. The light is obscured by the rock.                        reef extends 140 yards off the SE point and a narrow kelp field is
  (434) A rock that uncovers 5 feet, 0.4 mile W of the N point and    along the S and SE sides of the island; otherwise there are no out-
0.4 mile offshore, is the farthest outlying danger in the approach to    lying dangers.
Gorman Strait.                                                     (448) Popof Island, close E of Unga Island in the Shumagin
  (435) A bare rock, 5 feet high, is 0.2 mile off the W point of    group, is irregular and rough in shape, with many hills over 1,000
  (435) A bare rAndronica Island.                           of    feet high. The highest point, 1,520 feet, is a short distance NE of
  (436)TemporAnryroaca Islan d             0.5.                 mile from shorethe center of the island. The shores are generally rocky and steep
  (436) Temporary anchorage may be found 0.5 mile from shore    and have many ledges covered with kelp extending 200 to 300
in the bight on the NE side of Andronica, off the sand beach near    yards offshore.
the N point, in 20 fathoms. Small vessels can anchor closer to     (449) The N and E shores of Popof Island have no outlying dan-
shore in this bight, and also in the bight on the SW side of the   (449) The N and E shores of Popof Island have no outlying dan-
shore in this bight, and also in the bight on the SW side of the    gers, but the shore should be given a berth of about 0.5 mile. The
island; landing can usually be made in one of these bights        water is deep and-clear between Andronica and Popof Islands.
  (437) Gorman Strait between Andronica and Korovin Islands,    Temporary anchorage may be found 0.3 mile off the N shore of
is clear if the shores are given a berth of 0.5 mile. Deepest draft    Popof Island anywhere W of Pirate Cove in 10 to 20 fathoms.
 vessels should also use caution passing the 7/4-fathom shoal 0.9   (450) Pirate Cove, 4.5 miles ENE of East Head, was formerly
 mile SE of Cape Devine.                                           an important codfishing station but has been abandoned for many
  (438) The currents in Gorman Strait set with the wind and reach    years.
 a velocity of 1.5 to 2 knots in strong winds. Under ordinary condi-  (451) Pirate Cove Light (55021.8'N., 160ï¿½21.6'W.), 85 feet
 tions the prevailing set of the current is said to be SW in this vicin-    above the water, is shown from a square frame with a red and
 ity.                                                              white diamond-shaped daymark on the bluff at the N side of the
  (439) Korovin Island in the N-central part of the Shumagin    entrance to the cove.
 group, has two summits, separated by low land and marsh extend-    (452) High Island, 0.4 mile off the NE part of Popof Island, is
 ing from Korovin Bay to Grosvold Bay. The E part of this island    0.2 mile in extent and 310 feet high, with its greatest height near
 rises to 1,209 feet, and the W part to 1,808 feet near its S end.  its N end. It is grass covered, but has reddish cliffs showing W and
  (440) Cape Devine, marking the NW side of Gorman Strait, is a    grassy slopes on the other side. There are 30 fathoms and more
 gray headland, 885 feet high, joined to the remainder of Korovin    200 yards from it all around, and the passage between it and Popof
 Island by a low neck. The shore is fringed with rocks, and a rock    Island is clear. The island can be passed fairly close-to, and is a
 awash at low water is 400 yards off the S side of the cape. A pin-    useful mark for making Gorman Strait in thick weather.
 nacle rock, 65 feet high, is 1.5 miles N of Cape Devine, and a 51/4-  (453) Fox Hole, on the E side of the N end of Popof Island, is
 fathom shoal is 0.4 mile NE of the pinnacle, off the E side of    about 1.2 miles long in a SSW direction. It affords well-sheltered
 Korovin Island. A 10-fathom bank extends 0.8 mile S from the    anchorage for small vessels in all weather except E and NE.
 cape.                                                             Depths range from 15 fathoms at the entrance to 51V4 fathoms near
  (441) Korovin Bay, the W bight on the S side of Korovin Island,    the edge of the flat which extends 0.3 mile from the head. The har-
 affords fair shelter in N weather, but the holding ground is poor.    bor has a clear width of about 400 yards; foul ground extends over
 Anchorage may also be had for smaller vessels in the E bight.    100 yards in places from the shores, and a reef extends about 250





208                                                  6. ALASKA PENINSULA


yards N from the point on the S side of the entrance of the narrow    (464) The current velocity is about 0.5 knot in the N part of
part of the harbor. The N point of the entrance is a sheer cliff about    Popof Strait and sets N on the flood and S on the ebb. (See Tidal
150 feet high. The only directions necessary are to keep in midhar-    Current Tables for predictions.)
bor.                                                                  (465) Humboldt Harbor, on the E side of Popof Strait 1.3 miles
 (454) Popof Head, 970 feet high and connected to the SE part of    NE of Sand Point, is an excellent shelter with good holding
Popof Island by an isthmus, is a high precipitous headland with a    ground. Sometimes a second anchor is needed to prevent dragging
steep talus. Depths of 20 fathoms are within 200 yards of the head,    during strong SW winds. Vessels can anchor in 10 fathoms 0.3
but vessels should give this headland a berth of 0.5 mile, although    mile offshore with Humboldt Harbor Breakwater Light 2 bearing
in fog it might be approached more closely.                         105ï¿½ and Popof Strait Entrance Light I bearing 005ï¿½.
 (455)  Two large bights, with sand beaches, the W one known as      (466) A small-boat basin, protected by breakwaters, is in Hum-
Red Cove and the E as Simeon Bight, are on the S side of Popof    boldt Harbor. The S breakwater is marked by two lights; the N
Island. Both of the bights furnish anchorage in N weather, in 8 to    breakwater is marked at the S end by a daybeacon. In November
                                                                    1993, the controlling depth was 16 feet (17 feet at midchannel)
because of considerable surf and shoal water near the shore. The    except for shoaling to 12 feet along the E channel edge near the
                 point separating the bights is a narrow, rocky projection, fringed    head of the project. Depths of about 15 feet are generally available
point separating the bights is a narrow, rocky projection, fringed
with foul ground for 300 yards; rocks awash at low water are 600    in the basin except for severe shoaling along the W  and NW
yards from shore and 0.4 and 0.7 mile W of the point.               edges. The basin provides moorage for 230 craft. The harbor-
                                                                    master assigns berths. The harbormaster's office monitors VHF-
 (456)  Popof Strait, between Popof and Unga Islands of the    FM channel 6.
Shumagin group, is constricted in the N part by rocky ledges, but    (467) Sand Point, on the N side of Humboldt Harbor, is a fish-
fans out in the S part into a deep and wide passage.                ing port. The westernmost wharf at the village is owned by the
 (457)  Egg Island, in the middle of the S part of Popof Strait, is    Aleutian Cold Storage Company. The wharf has a 180-foot face
small, 165 feet high, and grassy on top. Little Egg Island, close    and depths of 24 feet alongside. A machine shop at the plant can
W, is 25 feet high and grass topped. There are some detached        make minor repairs to small craft.
rocks about the islands; vessels should not approach closer than     (468)  The oil wharf, the easternmost and smaller of the two
0.3 mile.                                                           wharves, has a 60-foot face and depths of 15 feet alongside.
 (458)  Sand Point, at the W  end of Popof Island, is a flat 0.4-    (469)  Quarantine, customs, immigration, and agricultural
mile-long sandspit that marks a turning point to the narrow N part    quarantine.-(See chapter 3, Vessel Arrival Inspections, and
of Popof Strait. Its S shore is fringed close-to by rocky ledges and    appendix for addresses.)
its N shore has sandy bottom. A shoal shelves off about 150 yards    (470)  Quarantine is enforced in accordance with regulations of
W from the point and then drops off abruptly to deep water; clear    the U.S. Public Health Service. (See Public Health Service, chap-
the point by 0.3 mile.                                              ter 1.)
 (459)  Range Island, in the N part of Popof Strait, is small and    (471)  Gasoline, kerosene, lubricating oil, diesel oil, and water
30 feet high. Foul ground surrounds the island; vessels should not    are available in sufficient quantity to supply fishing craft operating
pass between it and Popof Island. Popof Strait Entrance Light 1    in the area and local needs. A general store handles fresh and dry
(55ï¿½21.4'N., 160ï¿½30.3'W.), 50 feet above the water, is shown from    stores, and marine supplies.
a skeleton tower with a square green daymark on the N end of         (472) A small steamer from Seward makes regular calls on mail
Range Island.                                                       contract, and a vessel from Kodiak makes regular calls at Sand
                                                                    Point. Nonscheduled vessels from Seattle call occasionally during
 (460) East Head, on the E side of the N entrance to Popof Strait,
has foul ground and kelp for 0.3 mile off its W side extending SW   the fishing seasons. Mail and passenger service by air usually is
                                                                    available weekly from May to September. Radiotelephone and
to Range Island. The radio towers 0.3 mile S of the point are
                                                                    radiotelegraph service is maintained.
                                                                     (473) A municipal airport and a wharf of the Sand Point Can-
 (461) West Head, a projecting point of Unga Island on the W       nery owned by the New England Fish Company are on the N side
side of the N entrance to Popof Strait, is a 40-foot-high black cliff;    of the spit at Sand Point, 1.2 miles SW of Sand Point village.
0.5 mile S of it are cliffs 300 feet high. The land W of the head is  (474) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-
higher but is broken by numerous valleys. A depth of 10 fathoms    sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of
is 300 yards off West Head, but as Popof Strait is approached a    Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)
rocky shoal of 31/4 fathoms is 0.4 mile offshore.                     (475) The Alaska Peninsula is served by the Alaska Marine
 (462) A depth of 6 fathoms can be taken through the narrow    Pilots and Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.
channel, marked by lights and buoys, in the N part of Popof Strait,   (476) Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots
thence depths of 20 to over 80 fathoms through the open passage    and en route to ports in Popof Strait can meet the pilot boat about
E of Egg Island in the S part.                                      2.5 miles S of Popof Head (55ï¿½14.7'N., 160ï¿½20.0'W.).
 (463) In addition to the dangerous reefs in the N part of Popof     (477) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "SQUAW
Strait, marked by buoys, the following dangers must be avoided: a    HARBOR PILOT BOAT" or "HUMBOLDT HARBOR PILOT
5-fathom rocky shoal 4 miles SSE of Egg Island and 0.5 mile off    BOAT" or "SAND POINT HARBOR PILOT BOAT" on VHF-
the Unga Island shore; a I /4-fathom pinnacle rock 3 miles SE of    FM channel 16 or on a prearranged frequency between pilot and
Egg Island; a 53/4-fathom spot 0.5 mile 0130 from Sand Point;    agent/vessel.
Caton Shoal, 0.6 mile N of Sand Point, with a 3-fathom spot;
Unga Reef, 0.8 mile N of Sand Point, with 13/4-fathom spots; and      (478)  Charts 16540, 16553, 16551.-Unga Island, the largest
reefs covered 23/4 and 31/4 fathoms on both sides of the N entrance    and most important of the Shumagin group, has several large
to Popof Strait.                                                    indentations, among which are Baralof Bay and Delarof Harbor on




                                                     6. ALASKA PENINSULA                                                       209


the E side and Zachary Bay on the N. It is quite mountainous,    fathom. A large reef on the S side of the entrance to the inner har-
especially the E half. The W half is comparatively low, that part W  bor uncovers at extreme low water. Flagstaff Hill, on the N side
of Zachary Bay having somewhat rolling topography. The highest    of the narrow passage, is a rounded 8 I1-foot-high point surmounted
mountains are just SE of Zachary Bay, a 2,270-foot peak being the    by a flagpole. An island is close SW of the point.
highest. In general, the shoreline is rocky and precipitous. The S  (490) Unga, back of Flagstaff Hill, consists of a fishing station,
and W coasts are particularly foul. Near the W end of the N shore    several stores, a school, church, and several houses. It is the center
is a 3-mile-long sand beach with sand dunes immediately behind.    of a codfishing industry. The anchorage off Unga is not recom-
 (479) The E coast of Unga Island should be cleared by 1 mile to    mended except under most favorable weather conditions.
avoid the several offshore dangers, particularly the 5-fathom shoal  (491) The wharf at Unga is suitable only for small craft at high
0.5 mile offshore and the 1-fathom rock 0.4 mile offshore between    tide; cargo is lightered ashore from the outer harbor. A ledge, that
Baralof Bay and Delarof Harbor.                                    uncovers, extends 400 yards S from the wharf.
 (480) N of Baralof Bay the shore is mostly foul. A few settlers    (492) The S coast of Unga Island should be approached with
live along the coast. A fishing station is in the bight W of Hards-    caution. There is no shelter or protection, and often a SE storm
cratch Point, 3.3 miles S of Sand Point.                           comes on suddenly, making it a bad lee shore. It is a poor landfall
 (481)  Baralof Bay, 5 miles S of Sand Point, is a good anchorage    when approaching from seaward in, unfavorable weather, and the
except in heavy E weather. Baralof Bay Light (55 14.5'N.,    currents cannot be foretold. Dangers along the S coast are within
160ï¿½32.1'W.), 60 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton    0.5 mile of the shore.
tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the N          (493)  Unga Cape, the SE point of Unga Island, is a bare, gray,
entrance point.                                                    rugged cliff 855 feet high. A wall-like slab of rock 500 feet high,
 (482) Favor the N side in entering Baralof Bay and anchor in the    connected to the cape by a narrow bar, is just S of the cliff and per-
middle in 16 to 18 fathoms, sticky bottom. Small vessels can    pendicular to it. At the foot of the cliff are ledges. A vessel may
anchor nearer the head in not less than 6 fathoms; fair holding    pass 0.5 mile off in 25 fathoms.
ground. A small rocky area, covered 3 fathoms and surrounded by     (494) Sealion Rocks, 3 miles SSE of Unga Cape, are 0.2 mile in
sandy bottom, is in the middle 0.5 mile from the head of the bay. A  extent, 130 feet high, flat topped and grassy. A breaker extends 0.4
sandy shoal extends 0.3 mile off the S side of the bay entrance.   mile NE of them. A vessel may pass 0.5 mile off in 26 to 32 fath-
 (483) A salmon cannery is at Squaw Harbor, on the N side of    oms but should give them a greater berth. Between Sealion Rocks
Baralof Bay 0.5 mile inside the entrance. The cannery does not    and Unga Cape is a clear width of 2.5 miles, with depths from 20
open up until nearly abreast of it. The cannery wharf has a 190-    to 30 fathoms and no outlying dangers.
foot face with a depth of 27 feet alongside; water is available dur-  (495) Acheredin Bay, a large open bight in the S shore of Unga
ing the summer. The cannery has a small machine shop, and stores    Island, is 3 miles across and 2 miles in depth. Its shore is a sand
diesel oil, fuel oil, and gasoline for its own use. An oil wharf, on    and pebble beach, behind which is a lake 7 feet above high water.
the NW side of the cannery wharf, has a least depth of about 3 feet    A vessel may approach to 0.6 mile off the sand beach in 8 fath-
along its face.                                                    oms. Anchorage is satisfactory only in N weather.
  (484)  Small amounts of fuel oil and gasoline can usually be       (496) Acheredin Point, the SW end of Unga Island, is a black
obtained from the general store in emergencies. Vessels of the    mountain 1,402 feet high with an exceedingly rough surface and
Pacific American Fisheries sailing from Bellingham, Washington,    serrated profile. At the end of the point is a separate hill 500 feet
make regular calls. Radiotelephone and radiotelegraph service is   high. The 20-fathom curve is within 0.3 mile of the S end of the
maintained.                                                        point. There are numerous rocks and pinnacles around the point,
  (485) The codfishing station has a wharf across Baralof Bay    particularly along the SE and E shores; the most prominent is 50
from the cannery. A trail leads overland to Unga.                  feet high and about 0.7 mile E of the point. A sharp pinnacle also
  (486) Kelly Rock, 3 miles SE of Baralof Bay, is a small, flat-    forms the S tip of the point.
topped, grassy islet 65 feet high 200 yards offshore; kelp grows    (497) Sombrero Point is the first prominent headland 5.5 miles
between the rock and the shore.                                    N of Acheredin Point. The 1,071-foot peak on the headland resem-
  (487) Delarof Harbor, 9 miles S of Sand Point, is only sheltered    bles a sombrero from most directions to seaward. The waters
during NW weather and the holding ground is poor. The harbor is    fringing the point are mostly foul for 600 yards offshore.
not recommended as an anchorage. Depths decrease from 15 fath-      (498) Bay Point, 12.2 miles N of Acheredin Point, is a rounded
oms in the entrance to 5 fathoms about 300 yards from the inner    rocky headland 315 feet high; it is a good landmark all around and
harbor entrance; it is not safe to anchor in less than about 6 fath-    shows over the land in Unga Strait. The low sandy neck that joins
oms.                                                               the point to the mainland encloses a shallow lagoon that can be
  (488) Rocks and islets obstruct the entrance to Delarof Harbor.    entered from N. The sea bottom is steep-to W of Bay Point; the
Halfway Rock, 0.2 mile offshore on the N side, is 70 feet high.    10-fathom curve is less than 200 yards from shore. Anchorage,
Cross Island, 0.8 mile W of Halfway Rock, is 265 feet high; a    with satisfactory protection from E weather, is available in 7 to 19
 13/4-fathom shoal extends over 100 yards SSE of the island. Ele-    fathoms N and NW of Bay Point and 10 to 15 fathoms in the large
phant Rock, the S entrance point, is a narrow projecting rocky    open bight S of the point. Foul areas extend 0.5 to 0.8 mile off the
mass 155 feet high. The base of the rock has been hollowed out by    W shore of Unga Island N of Bay Point.
sea action and from N resembles an elephant. A reef extends N for   (499) The 16-mile-wide area between Unga Island and Wosne-
300 yards from the point to a rock, 40 feet high. Dangerous Blind    senski Island is full of broken ground and islets. Kennoys Island,
Breaker, 0.4 mile NE of Elephant Rock, uncovers at extreme low     10 miles W  by N of Acheredin Point, consists of several small
water; depths of 10 to 14 fathoms surround the rock. The W part    islets. Jude Island, 13 miles NW of Acheredin Point, is 150 feet
 of the outer harbor has depths of 31/4 fathoms and less.           high and less than 0.3 mile across. It is rounded, grassy on top, and
  (489) A 23/4-fathom, narrow, constricted passage, leads from the    rocky at the shore. Omega Island, 5 miles W by S of Jude Island,
 outer harbor to the shoal inner harbor that has depths of less than 1    is 90 feet high.



 210                                                 6. ALASKA PENINSULA


  (500)  Pinnacle rocks, covered 3 to 8 fathoms, extend as much as    tom, was found 1.2 miles S of Seal Cape; the area was not devel-
3.5 miles off Sombrero Point. A rock, covered 2 feet that breaks in    oped by further soundings.
moderate swell, is 2.3 miles ENE of Jude Island; a ridge with sev-  (511)  Coal Bay, W of Seal Cape, is a good shelter for small ves-
eral 3- to 10-fathoms spots extends about 2 miles NNE and SSW      sels in NE weather. However, only a small part of the bay has been
of the rock. The area W of a line between Kennoys Island and    surveyed; vessels should not enter without local knowledge.
Jude Island to Wosnesenski Island has many rocks covered 1 to 10    (512) Cape Tolstoi, 8 miles W  of Seal Cape Light at the E
fathoms. A rock awash is 1.4 miles W of Omega Island.              entrance to. Pavlof Bay, is high and bold with eroded bluffs from
  (501) Unga Spit Light (55024.4'N., 160ï¿½43.5'W.), 40 feet above    200 to 600 feet high. The cape is marked by two peaks that are
the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white    separated by a deep, narrow valley. Two prominent pinnacle rocks
diamond-shaped daymark at the N end of Unga Island. Depths of    abut the W face of the cape. The shore around the cape is foul, but
 10 fathoms or more are 0.3 mile N of the spit, but depths of less    depths of 10 fathoms or more are within 0.5 mile of the cape. A
than 10 fathoms extend over 1.5 miles E and W of the spit. Tem-    small, flat, 20-foot-high, rocky island along the outside coast, I
porary anchorage can be had W  of Unga'Spit during favorable    mile E of the cape, connects with the mainland at low water by a
weather.                                                           reef awash.
  (502) Gull Island, 3 miles E of Unga Spit, is a flat-topped,       (513) Pavlof Bay, on the SE coast of the Alaska Peninsula 25
grassy islet 37 feet high and 80 yards across with deep water    miles W of Unga Island, is open but leads to Canoe Bay, a land-
within 200 yards.                                                  locked arm. Several cabins along the shores are occupied by fur
  (503) Zachary Bay, on the N side of Unga Island, is open and    trappers during the winter.
easily entered. Anchorage is available in the outer part of the bay  (514)  Dangerous rocks and small islands are in the entrance to
in 10 to 20 fathoms, sticky bottom, but the area is exposed to N   Pavlof Bay. The E shore is bold and strewn with rocks and reefs;
and NE winds,                                                      the interior is mountainous. The N shore consists of reddish
  (504)  Dangers extend off both shores at the entrance to Zachary    eroded bluffs 30 to 70 feet high giving way to a sand and ash
Bay. A kelp-marked ledge that uncovers, extends 0.6 mile NE        beach near the entrance to Canoe Bay. The W shore is compara-
from the W side. Weedy Shoals, two small reefs 0.2 mile off the E    tively low with rolling grassland in the interior.
shore halfway from the entrance to North Head, show well at low     (515) NW winds sweep out of Pavlof Bay with great force in the
water. The lower part of the bay is constricted by shoals extending    early spring and fall. The prevailing winds in summer are SE to
from both sides; the head of the bay is shoal.                     SW, and they draw up the bay with considerable force causing at
                                                                    times a heavy sea in the upper part of the bay. Fog is more preva-
  (505) A better anchorage in Zachary Bay is 0.5 to  mile SW of    times a he entrance than in the upper part of the bay.
Round Island in 6 to 12 fathoms, sticky bottom. The narrow
                 channel to the anchorage passes 500 yards W of North Head and  (516) In N weather, anchorage may be selected at any place in
channel to the anchorage passes 500 yards  W of Rounorthd Island.  the N part of Pavlof Bay. The bottom consists of mud and ashes,
200 yards W of Round Island.
    y(506)  Coal Harbor indents the E shore of Zachary Bay and is   .and has good holding qualities. In SE weather, good protection
                                                                    may be had just NW of Cape Tolstoi in 15 fathoms, sticky mud
the best anchorage for small vessels. Anchor in about 6 fathoms          bottom. In W weather, anchorage Tolstoi in 15 fathoms, sticky mud
0.5 mile SE of Round Island, sticky bottom. Enter in midchannel     bout 2 miles S      of Ivan Island.
N of Round Island, then follow the shore at a distance of 300        out  mles  o  van sland.
yards. Avoid the sandspit, covered 1 foot, that extends 0.3 mile SE  (517) Flat topped,   and, in midentrance to Pavlof Bay, is 62 feet high,
           from Round  r  r asd The head of the harbor is shoal,   flat topped, and has precipitous shores. A detached reef that
from Round Island. The head of the harbor is shoal.
                                                                    uncovers, extends 0.5 mile S of the island. Detached reefs extend
                                                                    0.3 mile N and 0.2 mile W of it, but the E side is clear with deep
 (507)  Chart 16551.-Beaver Bay, across Unga Strait from Unga    water 0.3 mile off the island. Irregular bottom, covered 11 to over
Island and W of Cape Aliaksin, is open to the S but is free of off-    20 fathoms, extends 3 miles S from Flat Island. Although volcanic
shore dangers. An exposed anchorage is in the upper part of the    ash bottom is indicated, the banks are probably of rock structure
bay in 5 to 25 fathoms; there is little protection from the N winds    and may have less water over them; vessels are cautioned to avoid
that tend to draw down over the mountains and through the valleys    the area.
into the bay with intensified force. Dangers are within 0.4 mile of  (518) Black Rock, 1.3 miles off the W entrance shore 4 miles
the E shore and I mile of the W shore of the bay; the head of the    SW of Flat Island, is 15 feet high and surrounded by deep water.
bay shoals gradually.                                               (519) Lump Island, 1 mile NNW of Flat Island, is 45 feet high,
 (508) Foul ground with considerable kelp is within the 10-    small, and rocky. A 20-foot-high detached rock is connected to the
fathom curve that extends from 0.4 to 2.5 miles offshore between    S:side of the island by a reef that uncovers. A rock that uncovers is
Beaver Bay and Pavlof Bay; relatively shallow water is along the    300 yards N of Lump Island.
shore. A shoal spot, covered 71/4 fathoms, is 2.5 miles SE by S of  (520) A dangerous shoal, covered 7 feet, is 0.7 mile E of Lump
Seal Cape Light.                                                   Island. Kelp marking the shoal may be drawn under by strong tidal
 (509) Seal Cape Light (55ï¿½21.0'N., 161015. 'W.), 75 feet above    currents.
the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white      (521) Black Point, forming the W entrance to Pavlof Bay W of
diamond-shaped daymark on a small island 3 miles E of Seal    Lump Island, is low and indefinite; it is composed of black cinders
Cape. A hog-backed mountain is 0.8 mile NE of the light. A rock,    and ashes.
covered 1 V2 fathoms, is 0.6 mile offshore 0.8 mile E of the light; a  (522)  Settlement Point, 7.5 miles N of Cape Tolstoi, is a low
ledge and broken ground extend to the shore.                       narrow tableland. The 208-foot-high hill just back of the point is
 (510) Seal Cape has a flat-topped mound 100 feet high at the    prominent. Shelter for small craft may be had on either side of the
outer end, and is joined to the mainland by a low neck of land; it is    point in all except SW winds. A dangerous reef that uncovers
difficult to recognize. Moses Rock, 3 miles W of Seal Cape Light,    about 4 feet is 0.2 mile S of the point. A 23/4-fathom patch is 1.2
are two breakers 0.3 mile apart. A 10-fathom depth, irregular bot-    miles N of the point.





                                                     6. ALASKA PENINSULA                                                       211


 (523)  Gull Island, 4.5 miles W of Settlement Point, is a bird    (538) Volcano Bay is free from rocks and shoals, except near
rookery; a reef extends 0.2 mile W of the island.                  the shores which should be given a berth of 0.4 mile. The shoaling
 (524) A bank between Settlement Point and Gull Island has a    is abrupt from about 30 fathoms to the flats at the N side of the
least surveyed depth of 12 fathoms; because of the irregular bot-    bay. Good anchorage and shelter from all except SE winds may be
tom, there may be lesser depths.                                   had near its head in 10 fathoms, sticky bottom. Shelter for small
 (525) Ivan Island, 1.5 miles NW of Gull Island, is the largest in    craft from SE wind may be had in 2 fathoms behind the sandspit
Pavlof Bay. It is 200 feet high and flat topped with vertical cliffs    that makes out from the S side of the NW part of the bay. Water
rising abruptly from the water. On the E side is a shallow basin for    may be had here. Rocks and ledges extend 500 to 700 yards off-
launches; about 6 feet can be carried through the two entrances at    shore between this spit and Bear Bay.
high water. Shoal water with scattered kelp is between Ivan Island  (539) Bear Bay is a small inlet that affords fair anchorage in the
and the mainland.                                                  middle of its entrance. The inner part of the bay can be entered
 (526) Round Island, over 2 miles NE of Ivan Island, is 90 feet    only by pulling boats.
high, small, and round topped. Two 25-foot-high rocky islets are
NE of the island.                                                   (540)  Charts 16549, 16551.-Pavlof Islands, consisting of
 (527)  There is considerable foul ground with depths less than 1    seven, extend for over 15 miles from the Alaska Peninsula coast S
fathom extending as much as 2 miles from the W shore of Pavlof    of Pavlof Bay. Most of the water area inside the outer perimeter of
Bay from Gull Island to and including the N side.                  Wosnesenski, Ukolnoi, Poperechnoi, and Dolgoi Islands has not
 (528)  Canoe Bay joins Pavlof Bay at the NE end by a 175-yard-    been surveyed and should be avoided; many covered and uncov-
wide channel between 50-foot-high rocky entrance points. The    ered rocks, ledges, and breakers are in the area.
controlling depth is 23 feet between deep water in both bays, but   (541) Wosnesenski Island, the easternmost of the Pavlof group,
care is necessary to avoid several shoal spots of less than 3 fath-    has a 1,200-foot, rocky, flat-topped peak near the E side. Most of
oms and a I l/4-fathom rock 0.7 mile E of the S entrance point. The    the shore around the island is foul. Small vessels can anchor in the
current velocity is estimated at 5 to 7 knots in the entrance; slack    bight on the N shore or in the small bay with sand bottom on the
water occurs at about the time of high and low water in Canoe    NE side of the island. Dangerous rocks, covered less than 10 fath-
Bay.                                                               oms, extend 3 miles N of the island. A submerged rock, covered 3/4
 (529) A mountainous ridge that culminates in a remarkable vol-    fathom, is 1.2 mile N of the NE end of the island.
cano with an extinct circular-shaped crater borders the N side of   (542) Ukolnoi Island, 5 miles W of Wosnesenski Island, is high
Canoe Bay. Cone Peak, on the S side of Canoe Bay, is 1,280 feet    and mountainous; it is steep and bold at the NW point. Ukolnoi
high and prominent from Pavlof Bay.                                Island Light (55ï¿½14.7'N., 161ï¿½39.5'W.), 35 feet above the water,
                                                            not blow strongly in Canoe Bay, but  s shown from a square frame with a red and white diamond-
 (530) NW winds do not blow strongly in Canoe Bay, but it is
reported that NE winds of winter sweep down the bay with great    shaped daymark on the NW point of the island. The N shore
violence,                                                          should be cleared by more than 1 mile to avoid the broken ground
 (531) Anchorage in Canoe Bay may be selected just inside the                         off the island.
entrance in 4 to 10 fathoms, hard bottom, or in the E part in 23
fathoms, sticky bottom.                                            has rugged cliffs 1,200 feet high along its NE shore and a 1,800-
                                                                    foot peak in the N part. Foul ground surrounds the island.
                                                                      (544) Dolgoi Island, 9.7 miles across and grass covered, is
 (532)  Chart 16549.-On the S side of Alaska Peninsula from    divided into two mountain masses by Dolgoi Harbor and the low-
Pavlof Bay to Arch Point is a long, low, sandy beach. The ground    land at its head. The greatest height at the E and W  ends of the
back of the beach rises gradually to the three peaks of Pavlof Vol-    island are 1,450 and 1,510 feet, respectively. The shore is gener-
cano.                                                              ally abrupt and high. The N point of the island is an overhanging
 (533) Arch Point, at the N entrance to Volcano Bay, is moder-    cliff. The S part of the island is particularly bold, the cliffs being
ately low with cliffs about 100 feet high; it is joined by a low neck    several hundred feet high. At the middle of the SE side is a head-
to the high land farther back. The cliffs are undercut in several    land with a cliff over 900 feet high.
places forming caves and arches. The rock is black near the water,  (545) Dolgoi Cape, the S point of Dolgoi Island, is marked by
changing to light brown above with grassy land back of it. Deep    several large detached rocks a few yards off the shoreline.
water extends to the S side of the point.                           (546) The area from 5 miles SE of Poperechnoi Island to 5 miles
 (534) A flat-bottom area makes out from the shore about 6 miles    SW of Dolgoi Cape is full of dangerous rocks and islets; extreme
NE from Arch Point, affording good anchorage in 14 to 15 fath-    caution is necessary.
oms on the outer part of the flat area. The anchorage is useful for  (547) Dolgoi Harbor is well protected and provides excellent
vessels waiting for the weather to clear before attempting the pas-    shelter from violent williwaws; however, the bottom is volcanic
sage among the islands.                                            ash with poor holding ground. Two islets are on the W side of the
 (535) Arch Point Light 2 (55012.4'N., 161054.3'W.),- 78 feet    entrance and two larger islands are inside the harbor.
above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red trian-   (548) To enter Dolgoi Harbor, steer 020ï¿½ for the highest point
gular daymark on the SE part of the point.                         (500 feet) of the ridge at the head of the harbor showing W of the
  (536) An area of broken ground is between Arch Point and Dol-    two islands in the harbor, and pass 200 yards or more E of the
goi Island. A 13/4-fathom rock, 1.5 miles SE of the light, is marked    outer one of the two islets on the W side of the entrance. Pass W of
by a lighted buoy. A 53/4-fathom spot is 0.8 mile NW of the rock    the first island within the harbor, favoring, if anything, the side
and broken ground with a least found depth of 61/4 fathoms    nearest this small island.
extends 0.5 mile ESE from the rock.                                 (549) The deeper passage then leads between the two islands in
 (537) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as    Dolgoi Harbor, taking care to give the N end of the S island a berth
10ï¿½ from normal variation have been observed near Arch Point.     of over 150 yards, and the SE end of the N island a berth of over







212                                                  6. ALASKA PENINSULA


300 yards; the best course through is about 109ï¿½. Or, vessels can    for any butlight-draft vessels; the tendency is to cross too far from
take the passage W of the upper island, which has a depth of about    the large boulder.
4 fathoms, by keeping the island at a distance of about 200 yards.   (559) Sarana Island, 270 feet high, is a rocky island off the S
This channel obviates the turn between the two islands, which is    point of Outer Iliasik Island. The island is fringed with reefs and
somewhat difficult for long ships, especially during SE winds.      should be avoided. The passage between it and the'Outer Iliasik is
 (550)  Anchorage in Dolgoi Harbor can be selected anywhere    foul. A reef, bare at low water, is I mile E of Sarana Island, and an
above the islands in 7 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom. The best    extensive reef with occasional bare rocky islets extends to the S
anchorage is reported to be 1.5 miles NNE of the N of the two    from the S point of Outer Iliasik Island.
large islands inside the harbor.                                      (560)  A rock, covered 1/4 fathom, is about midway between the S
 (551)  Dolgoi Harbor is easily approached with the aid of the    end of Outer Iliasik Island and Deer Island. Vessels should keep
chart, passing on either side of Goloi Island. The principal outly-    well to the N of this rock, as the area to the S is foul.
ing dangers in the approach are a rock covered 1 foot, marked by     (56)l  Chart 16549.-Belkofski Point is the first point on the
kelp, with a 51/4 fathom area nearby, I mile W of Entrance Island,    Alaska Peninsula W  of the Iliasik Islands. A reef extends 600
and a cluster of rocks about 1.5 miles SSE of Entrance Island with    yards SW from the point, and the shore for 0.5 mile on either side
a least depth of 1 foot.                                            is fringed by a reef that extends from 100 to 200 yards offshore.
 (552)  Bluff Point is a rocky headland forming the NW end of    Because of the broken and uneven bottom here, the cape should be
Dolgoi Island. It rises abruptly to 50 feet, with a gentle grassy    rounded not less than 0.8 mile.
slope to the E. S                                                    (562) Belkofski, a native settlement on the E side of Belkofski
                                                                     Point, has a prominent church. Vessels anchor off the village in 10
                             Id   ithin the W   mit of the Pavlof group,  fathoms and land supplies on the sand and boulder beach unless S
970 feet high and the sides are generally abrupt except at the two    weather makes the surf too heavy.
sandspits, one at the W end and the other at the middle of the NE
side of the island. Goloi Sandspit Light (55006.7'N.,                (563) The mail steamer from Seward makes regular stops. In the
161'55.4'W.), 17 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton    summer the village is nearly deserted because most of the natives
                                                                     work in nearby salmon canneries. Radiotelegraph communication
tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the point    is maintained.                     Radiotelegraph communication
                                                                       (564)  Belkofski Bay is deep and free from hidden dangers,
 (554)  A sandspit makes out from Moss Cape I mile NW of    except for reefs and ledges near the shore
Goloi Sandspit Light; a lighted buoy marks the outer limit of the    (565)  Local Magnetic Disturbance.Differences of as much as
shoal extending SE from the cape. When on S courses approach-    5ï¿½ from the normal variation have been observed on the E coast of
ing the passage between Moss Cape and Goloi Island, use care not    Belkofski Bay.
to mistake a pinnacle rock, midway of the E shore of Inner Iliasik                                                Belkofski Bay, is
Island and skylined in the low center of the island, for the light on    e asy to reach an d affords good shelter in all except NW  wds. In
Goloi Island. Also, use care in passage to avoid foul ground mak-    strong Sweather, the williwaws become frequent and violent. The
ing out from either side.                                           bottom is soft volcanic mud and its holding quality is good. A
 (555)  Iliasik Islands, each about 2.7 miles long and 0.7 mile    large stream flows into the head of the harbor. From the N
wide, are both high and have cliffs at the water. Viewed from W,    entrance point of Kitchen Anchorage, for 1 mile to the entrance to
they appear as three islands, as Inner Iliasik Island is nearly    the outer portion of Captain Harbor, the shore is a steep-to cliff,
divided by a low neck of land into parts about 800 feet high. The    and may be approached within 200 yards.
high N end of Outer Iliasik Island is also separated by low          (567) Captain Harbor is the indentation at the extreme NE end
ground from the rest of the island. Ledges and kelp extend about    of Belkofski Bay. It extends NE for about 2 miles with an average
200 yards from the E side and about 0.3 mile from the W side and    width of 0.4 mile, and is divided into an outer and inner anchorage
SE end of Inner Iliasik. Outer Iliasik is surrounded by ledges and    by a shingle spit that extends from the W shore. The outer portion
kelp to a distance of 0.3 mile in places; bare rocks and foul ground    is narrowed to a width of 300 to 450 yards between the 3-fathom
extend 0.5 mile WSW from the W end of the island,                   curves, and the anchorage is in 10 fathoms in the center with the E
 (556)  Iliasik Islands Light (55002.3'N., 161056.2'W.), 95 feet    end of the shingle spit bearing 033ï¿½ distant 600 yards. The holding
above the water, is shown from a square frame with a red and    ground is poor, of soft volcanic ash over a hard substratum. The N
white diamond-shaped daymark on the S end of Inner Iliasik    shore of the outer anchorage is a low cliff, with shoal water
Island. A lighted buoy is 0.3 mile off the NW extremity of Outer    extending 300 yards offshore in places.
Iliasik Island. A house is on the NW slope of the inner island.       (568) The outer part of the harbor has general depths of 8 to 12
 (557) Caution should be used in making the passage between the    fathoms and 10 fathoms can be carried into it. At the entrance, a
Iliasik Islands because of reefs that make out from each island,    slight bar extends off the N side with a shoalest sounding of 71/2
constricting the navigable channel to a width of 0.6 mile. Growing    fathoms near the middle of the entrance. Depths of 4 to 8 fathoms
kelp has been seen midway between the islands in the middle of    prevail over most of the inner part and the 3-fathom curve carries
the summer.                                                         practically to the head of the bay, affording good shelter for small
 (558)  From the N point of Inner Iliasik Island a reef extends to    boats.
the mainland. Just E of the mainland end of the reef and close to    (569) The W  entrance is formed by two low sand-and-gravel
the shore is a large boulder that is easily recognized. There is little   islets, with flats extending 250 yards to the E and similar flats
depth on the reef near the island, and about 8 feet on the greater    extending 400 to 600 yards off the 2-mile stretch of beach to the
part of it. Near the mainland a depth of 11 to 12 feet can be taken    W.
across the reef by passing 100 to 300 yards off the' large boulder   (570) The entrance to the inner basin is about 350 yards wide,
on a course parallel to the shore. The passage is used by local fish-    with 9 fathoms in midchannel. The inner anchorage, entirely land-
ing vessels of about 6 feet or less draft and is not recommended    locked, is a secure anchorage for small craft in 7 fathoms, mud





                                                     6. ALASKA PENINSULA                                                        213


bottom, with the end of the shingle spit bearing 185ï¿½ distant about  (580)  Water is not always available for vessels as the supply is
600 yards. This is the best small-boat harbor along this section.   limited. Radiotelephone and radiotelegraph communications are
 (571) To enter Captain Harbor, round the prominent point at the    maintained by the cannery.
S entrance to Kitchen Anchorage at a distance of 0.5 mile, and       (581) The cannery company maintains a slipway for hauling out
steer 030ï¿½ to a point 250 yards off the SE entrance to Captain Har-    their own boats; this is available during the cannery season for
bor. Then steer 0540 and anchor. To enter the inner harbor, con-    emergency repairs. Vessels up to about 100 feet in length can be
tinue on the 054ï¿½ course until midway between the end of the    hauled out. A good machine shop is operated in connection with
shingle spit and the opposite shore; round the spit and steer 0030    the cannery, and carpenters are usually available. A small amount
for a small stream. Anchor as indicated in previous paragraphs.     of gasoline is kept on hand and might be available in emergencies.
                                                                     (582) During the fishing season, vessels of the Pacific American
                                                                    Fisheries, sailing from Bellingham, Washington, make regular
feet high, projecting 0.5 mile into Belkofski Bay on its W shore. It   Fisheries, sailing from Beingha   Washington  make regular
                                                                    calls and the monthly mail steamer from Seward makes regular
is distinguished by several pinnacles near the outer end; a reef
extends250 yards off the point.                                     cas.
                                                                     (583) To enter King Cove, steer for the wharf on a midchannel
 (573) . The bight N of Indian Head has even bottom, with the 3-    course. On the ebb, a strong current parallel with the shore sets E
fathom curve about 600 yards offshore. Vessels of any size will    along the face of the wharf. This current is caused by the discharge
find excellent shelter from all except S winds in this bight.    of water from the lagoon.
Anchorage can be had in 10 to 20 fathoms, sticky bottom. In          (584) The deep-water pier is located about 250 yards S of the
severe N winds, anchorage can usually be found in some section    entrance to the smallboat harbor and is marked by private lights.
free from the wind. The survey ship found this anchorage by far      (585) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-
the best in this section except for S weather, and the Fox Island    sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of
Anchorage, described later in this chapter, the best for S winds.   Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)
 (574) Slavna Point is the high rocky point on the W side of the     (586) The Alaska Peninsula is served by the Alaska Marine
entrance to Belkofski Bay, 1.6 miles S of Indian Head. It is steep-    Pilots and Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.
to, with depths of 8 fathoms 200 yards off the point.                (587) Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots
 (575) Bold Cape (55ï¿½01.1'N., 162ï¿½15.4'W.), on the Alaska Pen-    and en route to King Cove can meet the pilot boat about 1 mile SE
insula opposite Deer Island, is a rugged headland faced with verti-    of Morgan Point Light (55ï¿½02.5'N., 162020.1'W.).
cal cliffs, above which the mountain rises in steep rock-strewn      (588) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "KING COVE
slopes. Several prominent boulders stand a few yards offshore.      PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearranged fre-
 (576)  King Cove, W of Bold Cape, reaches inland between high    quency between pilot and agent/vessel
ridges that rise from the shore on either side of the cove. The outer  (589)  King Cove Harbor, a dredged basin formed by a round-
bay is deep and free from dangers except those close to shore. Ves-    ing spit and a dike which extends from the W  side at the head of
sels may anchor in 16 fathoms 0.5 mile off the wharf and about    King Cove, is entered from the cove through a dredged channel. In
midway between two shores. The anchorage is subject to violent    May-June 1992, the controlling depth in the entrance channel was
williwaws that are apt to sweep across the bay from all points of    15 feet with 12 to 15 feet in the basin and alongside the piers.
the compass, but the holding ground is excellent.                   Greater depths were available with local knowledge. The entrance
                                                                    is marked by lights. The harbormaster, controls the use of the
 (577) MorganPointLight(55ï¿½02.5'N., 162ï¿½20.1'W.),120feet
                                                                    grid and assigns berths. The harbormaster's office monitors VHF-
above the water, is shown from a square frame with a red and
white diamond-shaped daymark on the W  side of the entrance to
King Cove. The shoal areas extending E from Morgan Point and   I           K
                 King Cove. The shoal areas extending E from Morgan Point and    cannery is located. It is entered through a narrow channel between
from the W  shore inside the cove are rocky and marked by kelp.    this spit and King Cove Harbor. The lagoon exten
Near the head and on both sides of the cove a line of piles or dol-
                                              phins, serwhitiabout 2 miles with depths of 5 to 8 fathoms over most of the area.
7phins some marked with private lights, markthe offshore limits    However, an extensive shoal separates the deep water in the N sec-
of the shoal areas. The bar across the mouth of the cove, 0.5 mile    tion from the entrance channel. A fixed bridge with a vertical
inside Morgan Point, has depths of II and 12 fathoms, with sand    clearance of 7 feet and a horizontal clearance of 15 feet crosses the
bottom overlaying a harder stratum.    X                            entrance channel to the lagoon about 0.2 mile from the E end. The
  (578)  Anchorage in the outer part of King Cove is in 13 to 15    pilings of the bridge are protected by a stone riprap which extends
fathoms, very good holding ground. Anchorage in the deeper    across the channel and uncovers 21/2 feet. It has been reported that
upper part is in 16 to 21 fathoms, mud bottom mixed with volcanic    only skiffs and very small boats pass under the bridge into the
ash.                                                                lagoon.
  (579) King Cove has a wharf and salmon cannery and a deep-          (591)  Small craft can be beached on the sandspit that forms the
water pier. The S and main side of the wharf consists of two faces    N shore of the entrance to the lagoon. The beach slopes evenly and
with a small basin between them. Vessels of considerable size    is smooth.
(4,800 gross tons) can moor across the two faces of the wharf. In    (592) Because of the extensive flats that block the entrance to
going alongside either of the S faces of the wharf, vessels should    the upper basin of the lagoon, the plane of low water in that part of
make a starboard landing on the ebb and a port landing on the    the lagoon is about 2 feet higher than the corresponding plane in
flood. The ebb sets out of the lagoon at the head in a SE direction    the cove, and there is a considerable lag in the times of high and
with considerable strength, such that a portside landing with an    low water.
ebb current is almost impossible, whereas a starboard landing        (593) Deer Island, near the coast of the Alaska Peninsula W of
should be made easily. It may be necessary to use a bower anchor    the Pavlof Islands, is separated from the peninsula by Deer Pas-
for going alongside and hauling off with a S wind.                  sage. The passage is a part of the inside route along the Alaska




214                                                 6. ALASKA PENINSULA


Peninsula. The island has many high conical peaks of about the      (608) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "COLD BAY
same height, making it difficult to identify most of them.         PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearranged fre-
 (594)  Stag Point, at the N end of Deer Island, is a short sandspit,    quency between pilot and agent/vessel.
except for which the shore is rocky and steep. Stag Point Light     (609) Vodapoini Point, at the E entrance to Cold Bay, is low
(54059.2'N., 162ï¿½18.0'W.), 23 feet above the water, is shown from    and flat topped with high mountains behind it extending to Lenard
a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark    Harbor; the shore to Cold Bay isrocky and bold.
on the point. Back of the point is a high sugarloaf peak. The point  (610) Local Magnetic Disturbance.-Difference of as much as
may be recognized by a steep, high, triangular-shaped bluff at the    140 from the normal variation, has been observed near Vodapoini
end of a shoulder of the peak that is conspicuous in the otherwise    Point.
sloping sides. West Cape is a ridge of bare rock that ends in sheer  (611) Prominent Bear Rock, 300 yards offshore and 2 miles
faces at the W extremity and at the two sides. Fawn Point is the S    NW from Vodapoini Point, is 25 feet high, black, and jagged.
cape.                                                               (612). Kaslokan Point Light 2 (55006.2'N., 162ï¿½31.5'W.), 15
 (595) Approaching Deer Island from W, Fox Island shows up    feet above the water, is shown from a square frame with a red tri-
low and irregular and is not very distinct until some time after    angular daymark on Kaslokan Point on the E side of Cold Bay.
passing Umga Island, distant 14 miles, unless the weather is    Kelp Point, 0.7 mile N of the light, is low and rocky.
exceptionally clear. West Cape off Deer Island shows as a flat-     (613) A reef marked by heavy kelp extends almost across the
topped sugarloaf, appearing as a detached island, but later is rec-    entrance to Cold Bay near Kaslokan Point. A buoyed 10-fathom
ognized as a part of Deer Island, while at the same time Stag Point    natural channel passes through this area near the E shore to deeper
shows as a high sugarloaf beyond West Cape. S of West Cape are    water in the bay. The foul area with depths of 2 to 5 fathoms W of
two barren craterlike peaks, that form an excellent landmark.      the buoyed channel should be avoided. During large tides, the cur-
 (596)  Fox Island Light (54057.4'N., 162ï¿½26.9'W.), 40 feet    rent velocity in the channel may reach 4 knots; with an adverse
above the water, is shown from a small house with a red and white    wind, tide rips make it dangerous for small boats.
diamond-shaped daymark on the NW point of Fox Island. Just          (614)  The N shore of Cold Bay has many boulders. The W shore
back of the light is a prominent knob that is separated from the rest    consists of low bluffs and sand beaches strewn with boulders,
of the island by a low neck of land. The SE part of the island is    backed by rolling tundra.
high and nearly flat topped.                                       . (615) Lenard Harbor, a small but well-protected harbor formed
 (597) Fox Island Anchorage, on the E side of Fox Island, offers    by an arm of Cold Bay, has anchorage in 16 to 22 fathoms, pro-
good anchorage in 10 to 16 fathoms, soft bottom, well sheltered    tected from all seas. The holding bottom is good, but during
from the wind and sea from NE to SW.                               stormy weather the harbor is subject to the usual williwaws com-
 (598) The passage between Fox Island and Deer Island is clear    mon in this section, and during SE weather the wind may funnel
except for a rock, covered 3 fathoms, about midway between Fox    through with terrific force. An extensive reef, awash: at ordinary
Island and West Cape. In leaving the anchorage through this pas-    high water, is 0.3 mile -off the S shore of Lenard Harbor. This reef
sage, round the S end of Fox Island at a distance of 400 yards and    constricts the anchorage near its head to an effective width of
lay a course W until the lighted whistle buoy about 2.5 miles S of    about 0.4 mile. The water shoals abruptly to the mud flats at its
Thin Point bears about 228ï¿½, and Fox Island Light about 068ï¿½.      head and to the reef. A fine stream of water flows into Lenard Har-
 (599)  A rock, covered 3 fathoms and buoyed, is 1 mile W  of    bor from its N shore.
West Cape. The SW side of Deer Island is very foul.                 (616) Kinzarof Lagoon, at the head of Cold Bay, is large and
 (600) E of Deer Island the flood current sets N and the ebb S. N  irregular in shape. Although it consists mostly of mudflats, it may
of Fox Island the flood current sets NE and the ebb SW. The tidal    be entered at high tide by small launches; with local knowledge
currents here are weak.                                            such boats may be taken to the cabin on the N shore of the lagoon.
 (601)  Deer Passage, between Deer Island and Alaska Peninsula,    Just inside the W entrance is a cabin and a small area of deep
is well marked and a depth of 9 fathoms can be carried through by    water.
following the inside route described in chapter 3. Exercise caution  (617) Delta Point Light (55011.6'N., 162ï¿½38.5'W.), 48 feet
to avoid the dangers on both sides of the passage.                 above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and
 (602) Cold Bay, indenting the Alaska Peninsula N of Deer    white diamond-shaped daymark on the spit on the W  shore of
Island, is large and can be entered by deep draft vessels: An aero-    Cold Bay. In SE weather good protection with excellent holding
light is on the W side of the bay.                                 ground may be had behind Delta Point. In N weather, comfortable
                                                                   anchorage may be selected any place in the upper bay with mud
 (603) Mariners should exercise extreme caution when transiting
                                                                   bottom and good holding ground.
this area in winter as heavy icing may cause floating aids to lie on
their sides, submerge, be extinguished or off station.              (618) Weather.-The climate at Cold Bay is basically maritime,
                                                                   because of its nearness to extensive open ocean areas; and temper-
 (604) The village of Cold Bay is on the W side of the bay, and is
                                                                   ature extremes, both seasonal and diurnal, are generally confined
one of the larger communities along the Alaska Peninsula.
                                                                   to fairly narrow limits. Differences between maximum and mini-
 (605) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-    mum temperatures for all individual months average less than
sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of    10ï¿½F. Although it is practically impossible for cold, continental
Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)                    airmasses to reach the Cold Bay area by moving overland along
 (6o6) The Alaska Peninsula is served by the Alaska Marine    the somewhat narrow Alaskan Peninsula, air overlying the frozen
Pilots and Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.                    ocean surface of the Bering Sea may take on continental character-
 (607)  Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots    istics and bring rather cold temperatures to the Cold Bay area.
and en route to Cold Bay can meet the pilot boat about 3 miles S    Although below zero readings have been recorded from December
of Cold Bay Channel Lighted Buoy 1 (55005.6'N., 162ï¿½31.8'W.).      to March, inclusive, below zero readings are extremely rare.




                                                    6. ALASKA PENINSULA                                                       215


 (619) Winds reaching the station from the SW or E are quite    marked by a lighted whistle buoy at the outer end, extends 1.3
light, rarely exceeding 15 m.p.h. The open bay area to the SSE    miles S from the point.
provides not only direct access to winds from that specific direc-  (628) Telegraph Hill, 370 feet high, is about 2.5 miles NW from
tion, but tends to provide, also, a funneling effect upon all winds    Thin Point. It is a grassy, symmetrical, dome-shaped hill that
of consequence approaching the Cold Bay area from the SW to the    stands out conspicuously as the only high ground near the point. It
SE to produce strong SSE winds. From WNW to the NE the land    is a valuable landmark, for it is often visible when the higher hills
is relatively flat with considerable swamp and numerous small    are cloud-covered.
lakes. Winds from N directions are little influenced by this rela-  (629) Frosty Peak is the sharp rocky summit of a snow- and ice-
tively flat terrain.                                               covered mountainous mass between Cold Bay and Morzhovoi
 (620) The high frequency of cyclonic storms crossing the North-    Bay. It is 5,784 feet high and prominent from seaward, although
ern Pacific and the Bering Sea are the dominant factors in the    its snow capped summit is seldom visible through the low-hanging
weather at Cold Bay. These storms account for the high winds and    clouds.
the frequent occurrences of low ceilings and low visibilities       (630) Walrus Peaks, the S of two, 10 miles W of Thin Point, is
encountered at this station. Average wind speeds of 20 m.p.h. for    a ragged 2,927-foot summit that is prominent when clear. Other
24-hour periods are very common; and frequently speeds averag-    peaks blend into the general mountain mass.
ing 30 m.p.h. for a 24-hour period are observed. Average monthly    (631) Thinpoint Cove is just W of Thin Point. The E part of the
wind speeds of 20 m.p.h. or more are recorded at Cold Bay. These    cove is foul and should be avoided. Numerous kelp-marked reefs
winds generally result from the strong pressure gradient develop-    extend into the cove for 2.3 miles W from Thin Point. The W half
ing between the Pacific High and the cyclonic storms in the North-    of the cove is clear except for reefs fringing the shore. At the head
ern Pacific and Bering Sea.                                        of the cove is a series of shallow lagoons that extend N for several
 (621) Because of the moderating effects of the large, nearby    miles, and are connected with Thinpoint Cove by a small stream.
ocean areas, it is difficult to define the seasonal periods at Cold    The lagoons can be entered by small launches at high tide. The
Bay. The beginning of spring is late; the vegetation does not begin    cove affords excellent shelter for small craft in N weather, but care
to grow until late May or early June. August is regarded as the    should be exercised in entering to avoid the reefs to the S and W
midsummer period and autumn arrives in early October. The    of Thin Point.
greatest frequency of fog usually comes in the summer, with the     (632) The coast from Thinpoint Cove to Morzhovoi Bay is
foggy period extending from the middle of July to the middle of    rather rocky, with an occasional sand beach and grassy bluffs ris-
September. During the winter months visibilities are frequently    ing from the water. The shore is fairly steep-to, and the shore reef
restricted because of the blowing snow.                            that extends 200 to 500 yards offshore is heavily marked by kelp.
 (622) The shortest day of the year at Cold Bay has 7 hours and 7   (633) Sandy Cove is a small bay 8 miles W of Thin Point and
minutes of possible sunshine; the longest day has 17 hours and 27    2.3 miles E of Cape Tachilni. The head of the cove, which is at the
minutes of possible sunshine. The abundant cloudiness realized in    foot of a deep valley making through the mountains, is clear. The
the area greatly restricts the amount of sunshine actually received.    E entrance point is steep-to. A reef extends S about 0.5 mile from
Cloudiness averages about nine-tenths sky cover the year around.    the W entrance point. Good shelter in N weather is afforded small
Precipitation is frequent, but not abundant. Measurable precipita-    craft.
tion is realized on slightly more than 200 days per year, on the    (634) Sozavarika Island (see chart 16549), low and grassy, is 6
average.                                                           miles S from Thin Point and 3.5 miles SW from Deer Island. The
  (623) (See page T-6 for Cold Bay Climatological Table.)          island is composed of shells deposited on rock. Between this
  (624) A T-head pier with a 775-foot face, 2 miles NW of Delta    island and Deer Island are many rocks and reefs.
Point Light, has depths of 30 to 33 feet alongside. The pier is     (635) Umga Island, about midway between Deer Island and
marked by private lights at its NW and SE ends. In 1969, only 364    Cape Pankof, is a small, grass-covered, rocky island about 250
feet of the SE section of the pier was usable; the remainder is in    feet high. It is surrounded by deep water. The route from Deer
partial ruins and condemned. In 1972, the State of Alaska, Depart-    Passage to Cape Pankof passes N of Sozavarika and Umga
ment of Public Works, Division of Aviation, advised that the Cold    Islands.
Bay pier may be used only during calm weather, and that vessels     (636) Rush Rock, covered 6 feet, is 1.5 miles ENE from Umga
using the pier must be prepared to move away as quickly as possi-    Island, and nearly on range with the S side of Umga Island and
ble in the event of adverse wind and/or sea conditions. This action    Cape Pankof. This reef is of small extent and breaks only with a
is necessary for protection of personnel and to prevent oil pollu-    heavy swell.
tion should the pier give away.                                     (637) Amagat Island, off the entrance to Morzhovoi Bay, is
  (625) Because of the possibility of further weakening of the pier    high and bold, and shows as two parts; the SE part is 1,065 feet
resulting from additional ice damage and/or high wind loads, the    high and has a dome-shaped peak, while the other part is 660 feet
entire pier is subject to immediate closure with little or no notice    high, broader and flat topped. The island is the nesting place for
at the discretion of the Cold Bay Airport manager. The pier is also    many birds. A fair anchorage may be had in 16 fathoms just NE of
closed to all vehicular traffic until further notice.              the island. A deepwater passage is between the island and Cape
  (626) An airstrip at the abandoned airbase at Cold Bay is used    Tachilni.
by commercial aircraft; an aerolight is at the airstrip. Radiotele-  (638) A shoal spot of small extent and covered 51/4 fathoms, is
graph and radiotelephone communications are maintained.            1.7 miles SSW from Amagat Island. Deep-draft vessels should
                                                                    avoid this spot.
  (627)  Chart 16535.-Thin Point (54057.4'N., 162ï¿½33.2'W.),          (639) Kenmore Head, forming the W entrance to Morzhovoi
forming the W entrance to Cold Bay, is a low, grassy, gently roll-    Bay, shows prominently from the usual coasting track. There is a
ing point. The extremity is a yellow eroded bluff with reefs, bare    small summit just W of the point which drops off with a vertical
at low water, extending from its SW and SE points. Shoal water,    cliff to the water.




216                                                 6. ALASKA PENINSULA


 (640) Cape Tachilni, forming the E side of the entrance to         (653)  Ikatan Bay, on the N side of the Ikatan Peninsula, is deep
Morzhovoi Bay, is an indefinite rounding point with grassy bluffs.  and free from dangers except for the area N of Sankin Island.
 (641) Egg Island, 325 feet high, is a rocky precipitous island     (654) Ikatan Point, the N end of Ikatan Peninsula, is bold and
with a fairly definite summit. Shoal water, covered with kelp,    rocky. There is indifferent anchorage just W of the point, but ves-
extends from the island to the mainland. The S side of the island    sels are apt to drag off into deep water.
affords temporary anchorage for small vessels while waiting for     (655) Ikatan Bay Light 1 (54046.6'N., 163010.9'W.), 81 feet
the NW winds to moderate before crossing Morzhovoi Bay.            above the water, is shown from a square frame with a triangular
 (642)  Morzhovoi Bay, the last bay indenting the coast of the    red daymark on the N tip of Ikatan Point.
Alaska Peninsula, is about 15 miles E of Isanotski Strait. The      (656) Sankin Island, about I mile from the N shore of Ikatan
broad, deep entrance has no known dangers except a rock with 12    Bay, is high and rocky. In the passage between the island and the
feet over it, 400 yards E of Kenmore Head. The land bordering the    mainland is a reef awash at low water. For several years, during
entrance is very mountainous, giving way to rolling tundra at the    the early part of the fishing season, two or three floating salmon
head of the bay. The bay forms a natural draw for the wind that    canneries have operated from the anchorage just W  of Sankin
sweeps in and out with great violence.                             Island. After the middle of July, they usually move to the Bristol
 (643)  Littlejohn Lagoon, N of Reynolds Head, is marked by a    Bay region.
grassy islet off its entrance. The lagoon offers excellent protection  (657) The SW side of Ikatan Bay is separated from Otter Cove
in all weather, but can be entered only by small craft. About 5 feet    by a sandy isthmus 20 to 30 feet high; a shifting river enters the
can be carried through the crooked channel leading through the    bay at the middle of this lowland and the flat off its mouth drops
entrance, but once inside, there are depths of 4 fathoms, sticky    off abruptly to deep water. Several abandoned fish traps are along
mud bottom. Mooring dolphins may be near the entrance. Little-    this shore. In September 1980, it was reported that the fish traps
john Lagoon is occasionally used as a refuge for piledrivers and    along the S and SW shores of Ikatan Bay had been removed but
tenders.                                                           stumps may remain; caution is advised.
 (644)  Big Lagoon, the large irregular lagoon at the head of the   (658) Isanotski Strait (False Pass), between the end of the
bay, has no entrance channel and is full of mudflats.              Alaskan Peninsula and Unimak Island, has its S entrance at the
 (645) Middle Lagoon leads to a large lake that is a spawning    NW end of Ikatan Bay.
place for a large run of salmon. A cabin is at the E entrance point.  (659) Isanotski Strait Light 4 (54049.0'N., 163021.6'W.), 15
The lagoon has no channel, and with a S wind, breakers extend    feet above the water, is shown from a square frame with a red tri-
across the entrance. During the autumn, great flocks of wild geese    angular daymark on the spit off high and rocky Kabuch Point at
frequent the lagoon. From Middle Lagoon it is about 7 miles by    the E entrance to Isanotski Strait. A reef that uncovers makes off a
the easiest route to the Bering Sea shore.                         short distance from the point. The W side of the entrance is a low
 (646) Boiler Point, on the SW side of Morzhovoi Bay, marks    sand beach.
the end of the mountain ridge extending from the entrance. A good   (660) Whirl Point, on the Unimak side about 1 mile within the
anchorage, protected from all except NE winds, mud bottom, is in    S entrance to Isanotski Strait, is bold and marked by a light. A reef
the cove just NW of the point.                                     that uncovers makes off a short distance from the point, then drops
 (647) In N weather good anchorage with mud bottom may be    abruptly to deep water. At high water the end of this reef is made
had at any place along the N shores. In SW weather the cove near    evident by the swirls of the current.
Boiler Point offers good protection, while in E weather fair        (661)  A private wharf owned by a fish processing company is on
anchorage may be had off Littlejohn Lagoon. Indifferent anchor-    the Unimak Island side at False Pass, 3.5 miles N of the S
age may be had in the cove just NW of Kenmore Head.                entrance to Isanotski Strait. The wharf has a 60-foot face and a
 (648) The shores from Kenmore Head to Kabuch Point are bold    depth of about 26 feet alongside. A general store is maintained the
and mountainous, with deep water extending close-to. Ikatan Bay    year round; A mail plane calls daily except Sunday. The fish pro-
and Isanotski Strait separate Unimak Island from the Alaska Pen-    cessing company office maintains radio and telephone communi-
insula. Isanotski Strait, known locally as False Pass, is in general    cations (call sign, KIJ-23, False Pass, on 4125 kHz and VHF-FM
used for fishing boats and other craft of less than 10-foot draft    channels 16 and 6). Gasoline, distillate, fuel oil, and water are
when bound for Bering Sea points. Vessels up to 419 feet in length    available year round. There is also a small oil dock with shallow
have entered the strait and docked at the False Pass cannery which    water along its face. The ebb current flowing S sets toward the low
is on the Unimak side, 3.5 miles within the entrance. The region is   flat point just south of the wharf, and with such a current, care
approached by steamers from the inside route along the Alaska    must be taken to avoid being set onto this point on leaving the
Peninsula through Deer Passage, from seaward through the pas-    wharf. Because of strong currents and changeable eddies, this
sage between Sanak Island and Hague Rock, and from the W           wharf must always be approached with caution.
through the passage between Cape Pankof and Sanak Island.           (662) A public dock is about 0.5 mile NW of the fish processing
 (649) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-    wharf and has a 40-foot face and reported depths of 25 feet along-
sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of    side. It is a scheduled stop on the Alaska Marine Highway System
Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)                    and water and electricity are available.
 (650) The Alaska Peninsula is served by the Alaska Marine          (663) Isanotski Strait Light 8 54051.4'N., 163ï¿½23.4'W.), 21
Pilots and Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.                    feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red tri-
 (651) Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots    angular daymark on Island Rock just off Nichols Point.
and en route to Isanotski Strait (False Pass) can meet the pilot boat  (664) Routes, Ikatan Bay to False Pass.-In entering Isanotski
about 1.5 miles NW of Ikatan Point (54ï¿½46.5'N., 163ï¿½11.0'W.).      Strait from Ikatan Bay the Unimak side should be favored to avoid
 (652) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "FALSE PASS     the reef off Kabuch Point. Follow the Unimak shore until almost
PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearranged fre-    up to Whirl Point; this shore drops off abruptly and can be passed
quency between pilot and agent/vessel.                             close-to. Off Whirl Point, the tidal current may attain a strength of




                                                    6. ALASKA PENINSULA                                                      217


7 knots when a tidal current of 4 knots is predicted off the wharf of    approach to Bechevin Bay from the Bering Sea is marked by a
the fish processing company at False Pass. The reef making off    lighted bell buoy and unlighted buoys; local knowledge is advised
Whirl Point, when covered, is generally made evident by swirls of    because of the constantly shifting shoals in this entrance.
current. During the ebb current this reef deflects a violent current  (676) Hotsprings Bay, a large bight in the SE corner of
directly against the axis of the pass, tending to turn a northbound    Bechevin Bay, is a fair anchorage sometimes used by fishermen. A
vessel toward the E shore of the strait. Careful steering is required    small reef, awash, is in the entrance, about 0.4 mile NE of the N
to offset the effect of this current.                             end of Traders Head, but good water lies on either side of the reef.
 (665) After rounding the reef at Whirl Point stand directly for    The bottom is generally black mud and moss.
the fish processing wharf, taking care to avoid being set too near  (677) St. Catherine Cove is the W bight in the N end of the
either shore; avoid the 3-foot ledge that extends SW from the    strait. In former years there was a channel leading into the cove
point 0.4 mile S of Nichols Point, and Island Rock 0.2 mile    affording anchorage for small schooners, but it has shoaled and
WSW of Nichols Point. A range consisting of the end of the wharf    the cove is nearly bare at low water.
and some mark on shore back of the wharf would be helpful along    (678) Rocky Point, about 4 miles SE of St. Catherine Cove, is
the reach from the turn at Whirl Point direct to the wharf. If unable    marked by a light.
to go alongside, a temporary anchorage may be had in the cove      (679) About 2.7 miles NW from Rocky Point and 0.5 mile off-
just N of the wharf.                                              shore is a reef.bare at extreme low water. Several local boats have
 (666) A vessel must be able to make 11 knots to be able to stem    struck this reef.
the maximum current. Large vessels should enter only at slack      (680) Ikatan Peninsula, the SE extremity of Unimak Island and
water.
 w(667  Currents.-(See the Tidal Current Tables for daily predic-  S of the end of the Alaska Peninsula, is about 10 miles long and is
 (667) Currents.-(See the Tidal Current Tables for daily predic-
                            tions.a -sanoi Strait.)               composed of several mountain masses separated by low depres-
                                                                   sions. The wind blows through the low depressions of the land
 (668) Routes, False Pass to Bering Sea.-A route, partially    with great force. The S shore of the peninsula has rocks and break-
marked by buoys, can be taken from the food processing company    ers.
wharf at False Pass through Bechevin Bay to the Bering Sea. From
abreast the wharf, steer a course to the upper end of the buoyed   (68)  Cape Pankof, the E end of Ikatan Pentnsula, is a sheer
                 channel through Bechevin Bay about 1.1 miles WSW of the N  rocky headland consisting of a single 1,243-foot peak dropping
channel through Bechevin Bay about 1.I miles WSW of the N
extremity of Traders Head, thence follow the buoyed channel    immediately to a bluff that forms the SE side of th
through the bay and across the entrance bar to the Bering Sea.     (682) The slope of the top of the bluff descends gradually from
 (669) Mariners are advised that the approach to Bechevin Bay    the peak to the N, whereas to the S the descent is broken in the
from the Bering Sea is marked by buoys but is very changeable.   form of vast steps. From the S the peak has a sharp outline and an
Vessels passing N through Isanotski Strait should call at the food    abrupt rise from the sea.
processing company office at False Pass to obtain information      (683) Cape Pankof Light (54'39.5'N., 163003.7'W.), 82 feet
concerning the Bering Sea approach to Bechevin Bay.               above the water, is shown from a square frame with a red and
 (670) Transiting in either direction requires extreme caution    white diamond-shaped daymark on rocks off the southernmost
because of the presence of shoal bars at the edge of deep water    part of the bluff.
between Chunak Point and Bechevin Bay Entrance Lighted Bell        (684) Another prominent headland, 1,070 feet high, rises precip-
Buoy BB. The bars shift frequently. The passage requires local    itously from the bluffs on the S shore of Ikatan Peninsula, 1.5
knowledge. Vessels familiar with the area transit with historically    miles W of the S extremity of Cape Pankof. The mountain masses
gathered Loran-C coordinates that are continually updated. Ves-    of the two headlands are separated by a low depression 0.8 mile W
sels with a draft greater than 14 feet should not attempt passage;    of the cape. The bluffs are rust and gray in color. The slopes are
vessels with a lesser draft should try to time transit at or near low    grass covered in the summer with frequent bare spots. On the
water slack current. The safety factor represented by a rising tide    higher bluffs is evidence of small rockslides.
is a requirement in this area.                                     (685) A shoal with a least depth of 7 fathoms has been reported
 (671) Tides.-The tides at False Pass are somewhat irregular and    2.7 miles 022ï¿½ from the light. A depth of 7V/2 fathoms is about 10
become diurnal at the time of the Moon's maximum declination.    miles SW of Cape Pankof in 54'31.5'N., 163ï¿½14'W. This shoal,
The diurnal range of the tide is 4.1 feet.                        about 350 yards across, is surrounded by depths of 25 to 30 fath-
 (672) Ice.-As a usual thing, the strait is open to navigation    oms (see chart 16520).
throughout the winter, but during the winter 1923-24 the pass was  (686) A submerged rock that breaks with a light swell during
entirely blocked with ice and the mail steamer could not get    low stages of the tide, is about 1 mile W from Cape Pankof Light
beyond Sankin Island. At this time drift ice extended from Cape    and about 300 yards offshore. Another offshore danger is off the E
Pankof to Sanak Island, a very unusual condition.                 point of the entrance to West Anchor Cove.
 (673) Traders Cove on the E side of Isanotski Strait, is a good   (687) Pankof Breaker, a sharp pinnacle rock with 3/4 fathom
anchorage,                                                        over it, is a little over 2 miles 053ï¿½ from the SE point of the
 (674) It has been reported that during NE gales, the wind in the    entrance to East Anchor Cove. During the summer the rock sel-
locality of Traders Cove is deflected to such an extent as to blow    dom breaks. Depths of 12 to 14 fathoms are close to the rock. A
in an opposite direction.                                         buoy is 400 yards E of the breaker.
 (675) Bechevin Bay, which is an enlargement of the N end of       (688) East Anchor Cove, on the N side of Cape Pankof, is a
Isanotski Strait, is shoal and full of sand and mudflats. The bay    good anchorage except for winds from the N to SE, through E.
enters the Bering Sea between Chunak Point on the W, and Cape    The cove is large and easily entered. Pankof Breaker is the only
Krenitzin on the E. Cape Krenitzin Light 7 (55003.8'N.,    danger in the approach. An abandoned fishtrap is just inside the
163ï¿½25.3'W.), 30 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton    SE entrance point. Anchorage may be selected as desired in 7 to
tower with a square green daymark on the W side of the cape. The    10 fathoms.



218                                                  6. ALASKA PENINSULA


 (689)  Westdahl Rock, covered 3 fathoms, is 7.9 miles 104ï¿½          (698)  In entering Dora Harbor care should be taken to avoid a
from Cape Pankof Light. It is a rocky patch of small extent,        rock, that uncovers, about 0.3 mile 2200 from the E point at the
 (690) Bird Island, about 0.5 mile in extent, is the most promi-    entrance. The rock is detached and 200 yards from the edge of the
nent landmark between Capes Pankof and Aksit. From the S, the    shore reef. In calm weather, when the rock is covered, a light swell
island appears as a single elevated rocky mass, rounded but some-    may not cause a breaker. Favor the W side in the entrance to avoid
what ragged in outline; the highest point, 775 feet, is a knob    the reef extending about 0.3 mile W from the point on the E side
readily identified. Steep sides, fringing rocks, and breakers make a    of the entrance, and then steer midharbor courses to the inner har-
landing very difficult. The only practical landing place is on the N  bor, where anchorage with somewhat restricted swinging room is
tip which has a steep beach of rather coarse gravel.                afforded vessels of 7 feet or less draft. Care must be taken to hold
 (691)  A bar, consisting of a submerged reef, connects Bird    the midharbor course in entering the inner harbor in order to avoid
Island with the W point of the entrance to Dora Harbor. The great-    reefs that make out 325 yards from the points on each side.
est depth is 51/4 fathoms, and passage is not recommended. This       (699)  Otter Cove is an open bight between Ikatan Peninsula and
bar depth is on the line passing through the 1,760-foot peak 1.6    Cape Aksit. The shores on both sides are characterized by high
miles N of Cape Aksit and the summit on the W  point of the    bare rocky cliffs. The sand beach forming the head is bordered by
entrance to West Anchor Cove. The line crosses the bar a little    a series of grass-covered dunes. Other dunes in the form of ridges
more than halfway from the point, on the N, to Bird Island. A sub-    are farther inland.
merged rock on the bar is a little less than halfway from the point  (700) Otter Cove is exposed to S winds and ocean swells, and
to the island. The rock does not break in ordinary weather.         always has a heavy surf. N winds blow with great violence over
                                                                     the low isthmus separating it from Ikatan Bay. The only safe boat
 (692) West Anchor Cove, the largest indentation on the S side
                                                                     landing is in the NE corner of the cove. Two rocks, close together
of Ikatan Peninsula, affords indifferent anchorage. Anchorage in    landing  n     th  e NE corn er of the cove. Two rocks, close together
                                                                     that uncover 1 foot, are over 0.5 mile from the shore of Ikatan
East Anchor Cove is preferable. The anchorage for all but small    Peninsula and 3.5 mile       from Bird Island.
craft is confined to the open part of West Anchor Cove, which is
exposed to S and SW weather, always accompanied by heavy              (701) The story has been handed down among the natives that a
                                                                     channel once existed between Otter Cove and Ikatan Bay and that
ocean swells. The bottom in West Anchor Cove is fine, dark, gray    Russian vessel once sailed Ot ter Co ve and katan Bay and that
sand, which is good holding ground. The entrance is wide and
clear, but rocky reefs extend from the points on either side. A nar-  (702)  Cape Aksit, the W  point of Otter Cove, is bold and rug-
row shelf of rocks extends along the shore at the E point of the    ged.
entrance, the outer edge of which shows at half tide and probably     (703)  Cape Lazaref and the S coast of Unimak Island are
breaks all the time. A rock covered 21/2 fathoms is off this ledge,    described in chapter 7.
0.5 mile SW from the point. This is the outermost danger in the
approach from the E.                                                  (704)  Charts 16520, 16547.-Sanak Islands, the southwestern-
 (693) A prominent flat rock, 4 feet high, is 0.5 mile off the round    most group of islands along the Alaska Peninsula, cover an area
point on the E side of West Anchor Cove and about the same dis-    20 miles long and 10 miles wide. The group consists of two large
tance inside the entrance. This feature marks the W  limit of the    islands, Sanak and Caton, and numerous small islands and rocks,
dangers on the E side of the cove and has been found useful for    all of which are bare of trees.
making the anchorage in thick weather. A detached shoal of 23/4      (705)  Sanak Peak, part of the mountain mass at the NW end of
                                                                     Sanak Island, is 1,740 feet high and a prominent landfall. A 787-
fathomiles   is ifrom the   mihead. Thdle shoal marks the in upper limit of anchorage 1.2    foot peak, 1.5 miles to the NW, is often visible when Sanak Peak is
miles from the head. The shoal marks the upper limit of anchorage    obscured by clouds. A ridge rises to more than 200 feet on the E
for all but small craft. Rocky ledges extend from the N and S
                 for all but small craft. Rocky ledges extend from the N and    side of the mountain mass, but most of the remaining land area in
shores but not over 300 yards. A prominent rock, 46 feet high, is
close off the E shore, about 1.2 miles NE of the E entrance point.  the group is low in comparison, being over 100 feet high on the N
                                                                     side, decreasing to less than 40 feet high among the S islands and
 (694) The bight between West Anchor Cove and Dora Harbor is    rocks.
small and exposed. Rocky reefs extend about 400 yards from the       (706)  Anchorage at Sanak Islands is suitable for small or moder-
shore off the entrance points. A prominent rock, 32 feet high, is    ate-sized vessels. Caton Harbor affords the only shelter from all
330 yards off the W side of the headland at the E end of the bight.    winds.
A prominent rounded rocky hill, 788 feet high, dominates the         (707)  Dangers along the N side of Sanak Islands are within 0.5
         headland,                                                  mile of the shore, except Crowley Rock, 1.5 miles offshore 348ï¿½
 (695)  Dora Harbor, on the S side of Ikatan Peninsula, provides    from Sanak Peak. This rock has several small pinnacles with a
the only good anchorage with protection from all winds and sea on    least depth of V2 fathom over them. The rock, not always marked
the S side of Unimak Island, but the harbor is limited to small ves-    by kelp, only breaks in a disturbed sea and occasionally shows a
sels. The entire shore is fringed with ledges, partly bare at low    prominent slick.
water, to a distance of about 300 yards. The reef extending 0.3      (708) Foul ground of numerous reefs, islands, islets, shoals, and
mile W  from the E point of the entrance and the bar from the W     covered and uncovered rocks extends almost 6 miles S and over
point toward Bird Island afford protection from ordinary S and W    12 miles W of Sanak Islands; heavy breakers extend a consider-
swells at the outer anchorage, but a heavy swell from S is uncom-   able distance offshore. Aleks Rock, 16.7 miles 241ï¿½ from Sanak
fortable. The outer anchorage, however, is seldom used.             Peak, is covered I V2 fathoms and is the farthest outlying known
 (696)  Low tableland terminates in bluffs at the shores on both    rock SW of Sanak Islands. A 71/2-fathom pinnacle is 4 miles N of
the E side of Dora Harbor and the middle point of the W side.       the rock.
 (697)  The inner harbor of Dora Harbor is a slight expansion at     (709)  The harbors on the S side of the Sanak Islands, except pos-
the head with depths of 9 to 12 feet in the middle. A heavy swell    sibly Peterson Bay, should not be approached without local
from the S will cause this anchorage also to be uncomfortable.      knowledge.




                                                      6. ALASKA PENINSULA                                                         219


  (710)  Caton Island, at the E end of the Sanak group, is rolling     (719)  Finneys Bay, at the NE end of Sanak Island, is obstructed
 and grass covered. Most of the beaches are composed of rocky    by rocks; steep and prominent rocky bluffs are NW of the bay.
 ledges, or boulders and gravel. Steep and prominent bluffs are on     (720)  Northeast Harbor, on the NE side of Sanak Island,
 the NW point. The low E side and the S side of the island are    affords temporary anchorage about 0.2 mile SSE from 100-foot-
 fringed with rocky ledges up to 1 mile offshore.                     high Northeast Point, in 13 fathoms. Eagle Rock, near the mid-
  (711)  Whale Bay, on-the NE side of Caton Island, is extremely    dle of the harbor, is 58 feet high and surrounded by a ledge that
 shoal.                                                               uncovers and a reef that connects it with the head of the harbor. A
  (712) Temporary anchorage in S winds can be had W  of Caton    reef that uncovers extends along the N side of the harbor; a 24-
 Island and S of Lida Island. Approaching the anchorage from E,    foot-high rock is 0.4 mile W  of Northeast Point. Small vessels
 stand in near the visible rocks off the E end of Lida Island, taking    may anchor between Northeast Point and Eagle Rock, with Cherni
 care to avoid the partially covered reef, nearly 0.5 mile E of Lida    Island, 13 miles NE, just open of Northeast Point, in 6 to 9 fath-
 Island, that extends N from Caton Island. Anchor about 0.4 mile    oms, sandy bottom. The harbor is exposed to E winds. Water can
 from Caton Island, and 0.3 to 0.5 mile S of Lida Island, in 6 to 7    be obtained.
fathoms, sandy bottom. Care should be taken not to approach the        (721) Johnson Bay, 1.5 miles W  of Northeast Point, has an
 S side of the anchorage.                                             inner harbor for small craft, where there is a fishing station. Ves-
  (713)  If the anchorage S of Lida Island is approached from W,     sels may anchor just inside the entrance to the bay, favoring the E
steer for the SW side of Caton Island on 1440, passing about 0.5    side, in 9 fathoms, with protection from S and W winds. Rocks are
mile S of Lida Island, and leaving a rock that uncovers, 0.5 mile N  close to the W entrance point.
from Wanda Island, about 0.4 mile on the starboard hand, and          (722) Unimak Cove, 2.5 miles W  of Northeast Point, is an
anchor as directed above. The W end of Lida Island should not be    unimportant open bight.
approached closer than 0.5 mile.                                      (723) Pavlof Harbor, 4 miles W of Northeast Point, is reported
  (714)  Caton Harbor, between Sanak Island on the E and Caton       to be a good shelter for small craft, but local knowledge is
Island on the W, is large and affords anchorage in 2 to 3 fathoms,    required to enter because of reefs at the entrance. Pavlof Harbor
sandy bottom; it is protected on the S by Elma Island and on the    is a village at the head of Pavlof Harbor.
N by the islands and reefs between Caton Island and Sanak Island.     (724) Murphys Cove, 7 miles W  of Northeast Point, is pro-
The harbor is protected from all swells, and schooners of consider-    tected by a reef and affords shelter for boats of local fishermen.
able size have wintered here. These waters provide the best all-      (725)  Sanak Harbor, at the NW end of Sanak Island, affords
weather anchorage for small vessels in the Sanak Islands. Water in    restricted anchorage for small vessels with protection from S and
small quantities may be obtained.                                    W  weather, but is exposed to winds from NW to E, and a swell
  (715) Princess Rock, off the W  end of the islet in the center of    makes in with strong W winds. Temporary anchorage may be had
Caton Harbor, is the most prominent feature in the vicinity. It is    about 0.2 mile NE of Point Petrof, in 10 fathoms. The diurnal
high and grassy on top; extensive reefs surround the rock.           range of tide is 6.6 feet.
  (716) The best entrance to Caton Harbor is from the N through a      (726) Approaching Sanak Harbor from N. steer for the 787-foot
narrow channel close to the W  end of Caton Island. Proceed as    peak of Sanak Mountain on any course between 140ï¿½ and 1760,
directed for entering the anchorage S of Lida Island from W, and    taking care to avoid Westdahl Rock. When off the entrance, steer
when well past the rock that uncovers, 0.5 mile N of Wanda           1930 for the middle of the entrance and anchor in midchannel in 3
Island, bring the S side of the rock that uncovers in range with    to 4 fathoms. The covered rocks off the entrance points are
Northeast Point astern, and stand in, keeping the range astern,    marked by kelp. Take care to avoid the 23/4-fathom spot, 0.2 mile
course 125ï¿½, until close to Caton Island. Then keep the bare rocks    N of the E entrance point, and a rock, covered 7 feet, 200 yards off
and kelp projecting from Caton Island close aboard on the port    the E shore 300 yards inside the entrance.
hand, but do not approach the kelp on the starboard hand; the least   (727) A bight on the E side of Clifford Island (54023.0'N.,
depth in the narrowest part of the passage is 31/2 fathoms, shoaling  162ï¿½47.0'W.), on the S side of Sanak Island, affords anchorage for
inside to 3 fathoms. When past the rocks on the port hand, steer    small craft in 2/V2 fathoms, rocky bottom. Local knowledge is nec-
1930 for about 0.5 mile, and anchor in about 3 fathoms with Prin-    essary to reach the anchorage because of the numerous rocks and
cess Rock in line with Sanak Mountain, bearing 294ï¿½. This    reefs on the S side of Sanak Island.
anchorage is about 0.5 mile from Caton Island, and the same dis-      (728)  Peterson Bay, on the SE side of Sanak Island, is well pro-
tance from the nearest reef on the W side. Anchorage, with proba-    tected from all but SE winds, especially for small vessels of 12
bly better shelter from NE gales, can be made off the sand beach    feet or less draft that can anchor well inside the bay. It is reported
on Caton Island, just inside the narrow entrance.                    that during NE winter gales a heavy swell makes into the bay. In
 (717)  To enter Caton Harbor from the S through Devils Pass, W     the widest part of the bay near the head are depths of 2 to 21/4 fath-
from Elma Island, or through Southeast Pass, E of Elma Island,    oms. A 1'/4-fathom spot is in midchannel about 0.5 mile inside the
requires local knowledge to avoid the reefs and breakers. These      S entrance point. Another shoal of 13/4 fathoms, marked by heavy
passes should not be attempted by a stranger. Surveys indicate a    kelp, is about 350 yards off the S shore and about 0.2 mile inside
controlling depth of 1 /4 fathoms in the approach to Devils Pass    the S entrance point. The diurnal range of tide is 6.2 feet.
with deeper water through the narrow part of the pass. Tide rips in   (729)  In approaching Peterson Bay from E, give the E and SE
Devils Pass are at times dangerous to small craft.                   sides of Caton Island a berth of about 2 miles to clear the reefs and
 (718)  Sanak Island, largest of the Sanak group, has rocks and    the breakers that extend more than I mile offshore, and steer 2620,
reefs along its shores and is indented by several harbors that can    passing 1 mile S of Umia Island and Telemitz Island. When
be used by small vessels. The westernmost breakers of the rocks,    Telemitz Island is abeam, bring the tangent of the N side of Peter-
which form a continuous barrier from the W  side of the island, are    son Bay in line with the slight saddle between Sanak Peak and the
2 miles offshore, or 1 mile W  from the northwesternmost bare    E shoulder of Sanak Mountain, and run in on this range, course
rocks of the barrier. Cattle are raised on the island.               3180. When the S point of the bay is about 0.7 mile distant, haul N




220                                                  6. ALASKA PENINSULA


a little so as to bring the N side of the bay in line with the extreme  (732)  Hague Rock, at the S end of Sandman Reefs, is 47 feet
SW tangent of Sanak Mountain, and run in on this range, course    high, rocky, and grass covered, with deep water close to the S side.
311ï¿½, until the S point at the entrance bears 177ï¿½. Then steer 2940    A reef extends over I mile NW from the rock. Hague Rock Light
for the middle of the bay but avoid the l/-fathom spot S of the    (54033.1'N., 162ï¿½24. 'W.), 60 feet above the water, is shown
course, and select anchorage according to draft.                    from a square frame with a red and white diamond-shaped day-
                                                                    mark.
 (730)  Charts 16547, 16540.-Sandman Reefs, a large area of          (733) The wide and clear passage between Hague Rock and
foul ground with numerous islands, islets, and rocks, extend from    Sanak Islands is used by large vessels going between the Pacific
the Pavlof Islands and Deer Island on the N almost to the Sanak    Ocean and Ikatan Bay.
Islands on the SW. This area has not been completely surveyed         (734)  Cherni Island, 5 miles N of Hague Rock Light, is grass
and should be avoided.                                              covered, and shows as rolling land in the N part gradually rising to
                                                                   two prominent 162-foot sharp hills near the S end. The SW side of
 of Sandman Reefs respectively, are Steller sea lion rookery sidtes    the island is a bare rock cliff, rising to 90 feet. There is a good
of Sandman Reefs respectively, are Steller sea lion rookery sites.
                                                                    small boat anchorage at the N end of the island; strong N winds
There is a 3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer zone surrounding    here only cause smal   l swells at  high tide. The anchorage can be
these rocks. (See 50 CFR 227.12, chapter 2, for limits and regula-    here only cause small swells at high tide. The anchorage  can be
tions.)                                                             approached only from the N with local knowledge. Cattle are
                                                                    reported on the island.







                                                7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS

 (1)   This chapter describes the Aleutian Islands and the many       (10)  Currents are highly complex, making generalizations
passes leading from the Pacific Ocean into the Bering Sea. Also    impossible. They set counter to general trends in many places
described are the harbors of Dutch Harbor on Unalaska Island,    along shores, even within major passes. Whirls and eddies in wide
Kulukï¿½ Bay on Adak Island, Massacre Bay on Attu Island, and    distribution further complicate the problem.
many other smaller harbors in the Aleutian Islands.                   (11)  All passages in the Aleutian Islands have strong currents.
                                                                    In the narrow Akun Strait, the current is reported to reach a veloc-
 (2)   Charts 16011, 16012.-Aleutian Islands, extending in a    ity of 12 knots. Because of the scarcity of reliable observations,
900-mile arc from Unimak Island to Attu Island, are a westward    definite current predictions can be made for only a few of the
continuation of the Alaska Peninsula and form the southern limit    passes. Current predictions for some of the more important passes
of the Bering Sea. The most important groups of islands in the    may be obtained from the Tidal Current Tables. The effect of the
chain are Fox Islands, Islands of the Four Mountains, Andreanof    tidal currents has often been felt offshore at a considerable dis-
Islands, Rat Islands, and Near Islands.                              tance from the passes, resulting in unexpected sets. Mariners
 (3)   Most of the islands are mountainous; the coasts are bluff    should guard against such contingency. In the region of the Aleu-
and exposed; the shores are bold, with many off-lying islets, rocks    tian Islands the navigator must heed the currents carefully; a ves-
and reefs; the beaches are rocky and narrow; and the water is usu-    sel is in more danger there from that cause than from any other,
ally deep close to shore. As a rule, seabottom features are similar    except the lack of surveys. In bad weather, the currents cause
to those of the adjacent land.                                       much heavier seas, and this effect has been noticed as much as 20
 (4)   Anchorages.-Most of the larger islands in the Aleutians    miles off the passes
provide some sheltered anchorages as mentioned in the text for the    (12)  In general, tide rips occur to the S of the passes on the ebb
individual places. The better known harbors are: Akutan Harbor    and to the N on the flood, furnishing a rough means of determining
on Akutan Island, Dutch Harbor on Unalaska Island, Nazan Bay    the set of the current, although local tide rips may be caused by
on Atka Island, Kuluk Bay on Adak Island, Constantine Harbor on    detached banks.
Amchitka Island, Kiska Harbor on Kiska Island, and Massacre           (13)  Tide rips even well off the entrances may appear as bro-
Bay on Attu Island.                                                  ken, choppy seas, with a few steep, short swells near the edge. In
 (5)   Dangers.-Nearly all beaches in the Aleutian Islands    rough weather, the effect is to make the seas higher and steeper.
present natural obstacles to landing. The shores are generally pre-    The tide rips are much more noticeable during periods of tropic
cipitous; the breakers are heavy and in many cases the approaches    tides. Whirls are more likely to occur in the passes near the times
are filled with jagged rocks and kelp beds which are unusually    of slack water.
abundant in the Aleutians; in winter, the kelp disappears entirely.   (14)  A characteristic of the currents in the vicinity of the Fox
Sand beaches are rare; usually being found only at the heads of    Island Passes is the sudden change from slack to strength of flood.
bays; and in no case does a beach extend more than 50 yards    A change from slack to almost 2 knots in 10 minutes has been
inland from the high-water line.                                     noted, and in many cases the maximum flood occurs within 11/2
 (6)   When heavy swells and seas are encountered along a    hours after slack. It is therefore probable that the worst tide rips
beach, a landing in a small boat should not be attempted as there    occur at the first of the flood, and under exceptional combinations
are strong and dangerous undertows accompanied by variable cur-    of weather and tropic tides an effect resembling a bore may be
rents. In addition to the lack of surveys, navigation in this region is  caused in the narrower passes.
made difficult by the prevailing thick weather and further by the     (15)  In Unimak Pass the current is probably strongest between
lack of knowledge of the currents which attain considerable veloc-    Scotch Cap Light and Ugamak Island, where at strength of flood
ity at times.                                                        or ebb the velocity averages about 3 knots, but the maximum may
 (7)   Currents.-S of latitude 500N., is an E drift across the    exceed this figure considerably during tropic tides when 6 knots
Pacific. An eddy, accompanying this flow, sets W  along the S        during the flood and 6.5 knots during the ebb are to be expected.
shore of the Alaska Peninsula and the Aleutian Islands and then       (16)  The current has a large diurnal constituent that at times of
drifts through the passes into the Bering Sea. These currents form    tropic tides may cause the current to set continuously in a flood
a part of the general circulation of the North Pacific Ocean.        direction for as much as 18 hours.
 (8)   Through the Aleutian Islands passes, the velocities of the     (17)  The set of the flood in Unimak Pass averages about 300ï¿½.
currents caused by tidal and wind effects are large enough to mask    A vessel proceeding from Unimak Pass toward Avatanak Strait
the continual N drift through the passes.                            will experience a set when off Ugamak Strait and off Derbin
 (9)   In the past, numerous reports have been received to the    Strait. When crossing the deep, usually marked by tide rips, N of
effect that the flood currents flowing into the Bering Sea are very    Derbin Strait, a strong set in the direction of the axis of the deep is
much stronger than the ebb currents. These reports have been    often experienced. Only weak currents are noted along the shore
largely discounted by observations in a number of the passages    of Tigalda Island, but farther to the N strong ebb currents, setting
which in general reveal equally strong ebb currents flowing    toward Avatanak Strait, have been encountered.
through the passes from the Bering Sea. It is believed that because    (18)  Tide rips occur off the E end of Ugamak Island and in
of the large diurnal inequality in the current of this region, mari-    places where there is a sudden change of depth.
ners have been deceived by the long periods of flood current that     (19)  Instances have been reported of vessels, hove-to N of Uni-
occur near the times of the moon's maximum declination.              mak Pass and waiting for clear weather, being carried through the


                                                                                                                                 221




222                                                 7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


pass by the current and finding themselves on the opposite side    eral flow. On Unimak Island, southeasterlies are common in
when the fog lifted.                                               midwinter. Southeasterlies are also prevalent on the N side of
 (20)  In Akutan Pass the currents have an average velocity at    Unalaska Island from November through February. At Atka, NW
strength of about 5.5 knots; however, velocities of 9 knots may    winds are frequent year round. Williwaws and intense lows bring
occur.                                                             gales from October through March. Winds have climbed to 65
 (21)  The tide rips in Akutan Pass are strong during the periods    knots at Dutch Harbor, and to 74 knots on Umnak Island. A maxi-
of largest tides. With a heavy NW wind, the rips are menacing in    mum wind of 104 knots has occurred at Adak.
the vicinity of the 15-fathom spot just S of Cape Morgan. They are  (30)  In the W Aleutians over the Rat and Near Islands, winds
confused and make a vessel very uncomfortable; they are danger-    are also strong and variable. From about April through November,
ous for small craft. However, the strongest rips are not generally    S through NW winds are common, while N through SE winds
found in the middle of the pass. With a current setting N, the rips    blow frequently in winter. Williwaws can be violent; windspeeds
will be strongest in the N entrance, and with a current setting S,'  reached 91 knots at Attu one February.
the strongest rips will be found at the S entrance to the pass. When  (31)  In the Aleutians, about 30 to 75 inches of precipitation
the current setting N is opposed by a strong N wind, the tide rips in    occurs on 200 to more than 300 days. This means there are a lot of
the N entrance to the pass are dangerous, and it is advisable not to    days with snow and drizzle. For example, at Adak there is an aver-
use this pass in a gale. Under ordinary conditions, when there are    age of 335 days with measurable precipitation, but only 100 days
no strong winds, this pass can be used by full-powered steamers at    when 0.1 inch or more is measured. In general, precipitation
any stage of the current, but sailing vessels should not use it   increases W along the chain, but exposure can have some influ-
except at or near slack water. It is said that the most dangerous rips    ence on larger islands. Snow is a frequent form of precipitation
occur at the N entrance to the pass.                               from November through April, when 30 to 100 inches fall on 10 to
 (22)  In Unalga Pass, NE of Fisherman Point near the center of    25 days per month.
the pass, the average tidal current at strength is about 6 knots. At  (32)  Temperatures are mild, and their range is small. In the
times of tropic tides, current velocities may reach 9 knots. The    coldest part of the winter, usually January, average daily maxi-
maximum velocity occurs in a short stretch between Fisherman    mums range from the mid-to upper thirties ï¿½F, while minimums
Point and Unalga Island, and the strongest current can be avoided    fall to the 250 to. 30ï¿½F range. Occasionally a cold air outbreak will
by favoring the Unalga Island shore. The current along the S side    drop temperatures into the teens. Extreme low temperatures range
of Unalga Island will rarely exceed 2 knots.                       from about 8ï¿½ to 150F. This is considerably warmer than along the
 (23)  The tide rips in Unalga Pass accompanying a flood current    Alaska Peninsula, where extremes drop well below 0ï¿½F. Tempera-
are most pronounced NE of Erskine Point. With an ebb current the    tures begin to moderate after February. July and August are usu-
most pronounced tide rips occur off Brundage Head. During the    ally the warmest months. Daytime highs from 55ï¿½ to 600F are
periods of tropic tides, however, tide rips may occur throughout    common, while at night temperatures usually fall about 10ï¿½F to
the length of the pass. Small boats can avoid the tide rips by keep-    the 450 to 50ï¿½F range. Extreme high temperatures range from
ing close to the Unalga Island shore.                              about 65ï¿½ to 75ï¿½F; a few places have had a high of 80ï¿½F.
 (24)  Treacherous seas caused by wind or ocean swell opposing      (33)  The poorest visibilities in the Alaska area occur along the
the current may be encountered in the narrow part of Unalga Pass.    Aleutians. They are best in winter, although even then they can be
When tide rips are heaviest in Akutan and Unalga Passes, the    hampered by fog, snow, and rain. In summer when warm air from
water is broken into heavy choppy seas which board a vessel and    the Pacific moves over relatively cooler waters near the Aleutians,
make it difficult to control the steering. Tide rips are dangerous for    extensive fog formation takes place. Often the sun's heat has little
small vessels even if there is no wind or sea.                     effect in dissipating this fog, and it takes a change in air flow to
 (25)  Additional information on currents will be found else-    clear the region. This advection or sea fog forms most often from
where in the text under their respective localities.               June through September. At its peak in July and August, it can
 (26)  Tides.-General tide information in the Aleutian chain is    reduce visibilities to below 2 miles on 10 to 20 days per month
contained in the Tide Tables.                                      throughout the chain. It is most likely to affect the S shores,
 (27)  Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences have been    although quite often it blankets the entire region. In winter, land
found in many areas in the vicinity of the Aleutian Islands. On    fog is more local and can be expected, along with snow and rain,
land, differences from normal variations of as much as 8ï¿½ have    to drop visibilities to less than 2 miles on 1 to 4 days per month.
been observed, with 3ï¿½ and 4ï¿½ rather common. Unusual distur-        (34)  The Aleutian Trench begins off Cape St. Elias in the Gulf
bances have been observed on the NW coast of Tigalda Island E of    of Alaska and parallels the Alaska Peninsula and the Aleutian
Kelp Bay; on the S shore of Akun Bay; on Cape Aiak, Unalaska    Islands for more than 2,200 miles. The axis of the trench is 60 to
Island; in Nazan Bay, Atka Island; on Yunaska Island; and on    90 miles S of the Aleutians, and depths range from 2,400 fathoms
Amutka Island.                                                     in the E part to more than 4,000 fathoms in the W part.
 (28) Weather.-The weather of the Aleutians is characterized
by persistently overcast skies, strong winds, and violent storms. It  (35)  Chart 16520.-Unimak Island, the first of the Aleutian
is often variable and quite local. Clear weather is seldom encoun-    Island chain, is separated from the end of the Alaska Peninsula by
tered over a large area. N shores are usually better off than S ones.    narrow Isanotski Strait (also called False Pass). This pass is practi-
The winter temperatures are moderated by the relatively warm    cally closed by shoals at its entrance from the Bering Sea. Unimak
waters of the Japan Current, so the islands are usually free from    Island is about 50 miles long and 23 miles wide; it is extremely
ice, which would hamper. navigation.                               mountainous, bare of trees and generally grass covered.
 (29)  Winds are variable, local, and often strong. From the Fox    (36)  Unimak Island is one of the group known as the Fox
Islands to the Andreanof Islands, SW through NW winds are the    Islands, the others being Unalaska and Umnak and their associ-
most common except in midwinter, when winds from all direc-    ated islands. The Krenitzin Islands, a part of the Fox Islands
tions are frequent. There are numerous local variations to this gen-    group, are between Unimak and Unalaska Islands. All these





                                                    7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                      223


islands are bare of trees and are generally grass covered. They are    from the swell. The bottom is sandy, and shoaling toward the
frequented by many birds, and immense flocks are frequently    beach is gradual.
encountered in the vicinity.                                       (46)  Cape Lutke, the SW headland of Unimak Bight, is a cliff
 (37)  The higher peaks on Unimak Island are excellent land-    610 feet high, joined by a lower ridge to the higher land farther
marks if they can be seen, but in summer they are usually    back. At this point the coast changes direction to SW and then W
obscured by fogs or low-lying clouds. The lower hills and islands    for 13 miles to Seal Cape.
and objects near the sea level are generally the only landmarks    (47)  Seal Cape, on the N side of Unimak Pass in entering from
available.                                                        the Pacific, is not particularly noticeable, but the locality is well
 (38)  Shishaldin Volcano, 9,372 feet high, near the center of    marked by Arch Point, Promontory Hill, and Scotch Cap. The
Unimak Island, is cone shaped and very regular in outline, with    coast is bold and can be approached close enough (0.3 to 0.5 mile)
faint wreaths of smoke and vapor drifting at times from its sum-    in moderately thick weather to be seen and followed.
mit. It is for the most part snowclad, except where the rocky cliffs  (48)  Arch Point, 3 miles NE of Seal Cape, is a rocky projec-
and projections afford no lodgment.                               tion 172 feet high with an arch through the point near its extrem-
 (39)  Isanotski Peaks are E of Shishaldin. They are rugged and    ity. The arch is visible only from onshore or close to shore. A
have a broken or castellated double summit, the highest point ris-    small sand beach on the W side of Arch Point is well protected
ing to 8,135 feet. The summit is bare and looks as though it were    from any weather, except from the S, by the point itself and by a
composed of great vertical rock masses. This mountain is known    projecting ledge. The heavy surf, which generally prevails along
locally as Ragged Jack.                                           most of this coast, is reported to be absent on this beach. Small
 (40)  Roundtop Mountain is a rounded summit 6,140 feet    boats could probably land here in an emergency.
high, surrounded by snowfields.                                    (49)  Promontory Hill, 5 miles NE from Seal Cape, is a short
 (41)  Pogromni Volcano, about 9 miles from the W end of Uni-    ridge, about 1,100 feet high, having a NW and SE direction, and
mak Island, is 6,568 feet high and is a snowclad, conical peak with    detached from the interior high land. Its outlines are smoothly
vertical ridges cropping through the snow. Pogromni is a guiding    rounded and it has a slight saddle, the whole having a bare, brown,
landmark in clear weather for making Unimak Pass both from S    appearance. It is isolated and prominent, and together with Scotch
and from the Bering Sea.                                          Cap is a good landmark for the E entrance to Unimak Pass.
 (42)  The S coast of Unimak Island has cliffs in places, with    Approaching Unimak Pass from the E and SE, Promontory Hill
lower land and sand beaches, between, and is backed by the high    can often be seen when other landmarks are fog covered.
mountain masses of the central part of the island. The coast is    (50)  From Seal Cape around to Cape Sarichef, a distance of 19
fairly regular, with no indentations of any extent, and there are no    miles, the coast of Unimak Island has a number of projecting
harbors nor sheltered anchorages W of Ikatan Peninsula. The coast    points, is low in appearance, and slopes gradually upward to the
is exposed to the ocean swell and there is generally a heavy surf,    high land of the island. Between Seal Cape and Sennett Point, the
which makes landing dangerous. The 10-fathom curve is less than    10-fathom curve is from 0.3 to 0.7 mile offshore. The 20-fathom
0.8 mile from the beach in most places, and there are no known    curve is close inshore in places and is irregular. A study of the
outlying dangers.                                                 chart will show that great care is required in navigating on sound-
                                                                   ings alone around the W end of Unimak Island which is a region
  (43)  Chart 16535.-Cape Lazaref, about 800 feet high, on the    of strong currents. There are no dangers if the coast is given a
S coast of Unimak Island, is the southwesternmost of three high    berth of 0.5 mile.
cliffs, with sand beaches between them. The NE cliff of the series  (51)  Along this part of the coast there are several prominent
is at Cape Aksit. From the sharp point of the cape, Lazaref Reef    hills. Red Hill, a very distinctive formation, is near Cape Sarichef.
extends 1 mile S. On this reef are North Pinnacle Rock and    This isolated hill, 798 feet high, is closer tothe shore than the
South Pinnacle Rock, about 100 feet high. Anchorage, with fairly    other peaks in the vicinity and is easily recognized by its reddish
good protection from W winds, can be had NE of this reef, about    hue. It is prominent from the N, NE, and W, and is often clear
0.5 mile S of a group of rocks that are about 0.4 mile off the E side:  when higher peaks are obscured by fog or clouds.
of the cape, in 10 fathoms, sandy bottom. Rock Island, small and   (52)  Scotch Cap, 420 feet high, is a precipitous cliff of rock
112 feet high, is 1.5 miles W from the cape and 0.4 mile from the    that extends along the beach nearly 1 mile. Back of the cliff the
beach. In February 1984, the NOAA Ship MILLER FREEMAN             land slopes downward for nearly 1 mile, then rises uniformly to
reported finding anchorage with excellent protection from a N     the higher land of the island. Scotch Cap can be seen many miles
storm close to shore between Cape Lazaref and Rock Island. Out-    in clear weather and is unmistakable.
side this protected zone, winds of 50 to 60 knots were encoun-     (53)  Scotch Cap Pinnacle, a rock 172 feet high, is 50 yards
tered.                                                            seaward from the cliff.
                                                                     (54)  Scotch Cap Light (54023.7'N., 164044.7'W.), 110 feet
  (44)  Chart 16520.-From Cape Lazaref the coast trends W,    above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and
curving gradually W and S, for about 30 miles to form Unimak    white diamond-shaped daymark about 1.8 miles ESE of Scotch
Bight, broad and open, and having a sandy beach. This sand beach    Cap.
is broken by a lava bed 8.5 miles W of Cape Lazaref, and by three  (55)  Sennett Point, midway between Scotch Cap and Cape
conical hills, the southernmost formed into several columns and    Sarichef, is a low, flat, grass-covered bluff with a bold rocky coast-
reaching the water to make a small projection, Cape Rukavitsie,    line. Many detached rocks are near the surf-worn ledges that
 15 miles W of Cape Lazaref.                                      extend offshore from the base of the bluff.
  (45)  At the S end of the sand beach is a broad valley; the S     (56)  About I mile N of Sennett Point a reef makes out 0.2 mile
point is a sharp steep-sided projection, about 350 feet high, which    from shore; the rocks at the outer end of the reef are 3 feet high.
forms Promontory Cove, small, and open to N. The cove is    The bight between the reef and Sennett Point offers the best shel-
reported to afford anchorage with protection from S winds but not    ter and has the best holding ground in this locality. Anchorage





224                                                 7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


inside the 10-fathom curve is usually free from current, no matter    age velocity of about 0.2 knot; with an E wind it reaches a velocity
how strong it may be running in Unimak Pass. In 1938 a survey    of more than I knot along the 100-fathom curve. Tide rips are of
ship rode out several SE gales at this anchorage.                  frequent occurrence.
 (57)  A good landing is just N of Sennett Point. It is a small pro-  (67)  A vessel should be sure of its position before attempting to
tected beach between the rocky ledges of the point and a group of    enter Unimak Pass, and in thick weather should not attempt the
inshore rocks, the highest is 13 feet. In S weather, this is the best    other passes.
small-boat landing on the W  coast of Unimak Island. Mail and       (68)  Vessels should approach Unimak Pass through the pre-
supplies for both Scotch Cap and Cape Sarichef Lights are landed    scribed Unimak Pass Shipping Safety Fairway. The Unimak
on this beach when landings cannot be made at either light. A      Pass Safety Fairway is composed of an E-W fairway with a con-
small cabin on the shore is kept in repair by the U.S. Coast Guard,    necting N-S fairway in the W  section. (See 166.100 through
and is equipped with stove fuel and a few necessary supplies. In N  166.110 and 166.400, chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)
weather landings are made in the bight S of Sennett Point.          (69)  Approaching Unimak Pass from the E, care must be taken
 (58)  About 2 miles S of Cape Sarichef Light is a small, rocky    to avoid Sanak Reef and Aleks Rock. A good rule is to stay on, or
beach, which is well protected by rocks and ledges and could be    S of 54ï¿½N. and make 163ï¿½W., while still outside the 100-fathom
used as an emergency landing in rough weather. The beach is at    curve; then stand WNW across Davidson Bank for a position
the S edge of the black lava flow from a prominent, extinct vol-    about 3 miles S of Scotch Cap Light.
cano, 1,240 feet high and 3 miles inland.                           (70)  If the weather is very clear, the mountains of Unimak
 (59)  Cape Sarichef is a steep, grassy bluff about 175 feet high;    Island can be seen and recognized, but under ordinary conditions
back of it is a tableland, then a gradual slope upward to Pogromni    the first land sighted will be Promontory Hill, Ugamak Island, or
Volcano. The black lava flow extends N along the coast to within    Tigalda Island. From a distance Tigalda Island will appear as a
0.5 mile of the light. At Sealion Point, 1.5 miles S of the light, is a    number of small islands, but closer to, it is one island with six dis-
flat rock, 35 feet high, which is prominent from seaward.          tinct peaks or short ridges. Some navigators prefer to stand W on
 (60)  A shoal area extends W from Cape Sarichef for about 3    54ï¿½N. beyond 164ï¿½W. so as to sight Tigalda or Ugamak Islands;
miles. Depths on the shoal are 71/2 to 15 fathoms; the bottom is    these islands often show when Unimak Island is fogged in.
mainly gravel, with some rocky patches. The shoal appears to be a   (71)  The comparatively low land in the depression on the mid-
submerged extension of the lava flow on the coast. Ships should    die part of Avatanak Island is often clear when no other land is
avoid crossing it because of the heavy tide rips, overfalls, and    showing, especially in N weather. The grotesque irregularities of
eddies; the current reaches a velocity of 4 to 6 knots. During    the topography make it easy to identify the locality. If approaching
favorable weather and sea, passage may be made inside the rocky    from the S, this stretch probably offers the best chance for identifi-
patches by following the shore at a distance of 0.5 mile.          cation of surroundings, especially since it is easy of approach and
 (61)  Cape Sarichef Light (54035.9'N., 164055.8'W.), 170 feet    comparatively free from current.
above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and
white diamond-shaped daymark on the W end of Unimak Island.         (72)  Chart 16531.-Ugamak Island, marked by a light on its N
Several large buildings are near the light. In very smooth weather,    side, is the easternmost of the Krenitzin Islands, which extend
boats can land in the small cove directly below the light.         from Unimak Pass to Akutan Pass. The island has a sharp peak,
 (62)  Unimak Pass is the first ship passage SW of the Alaska    1,042 feet high, at the E end; when viewed from the SE, several
Peninsula into the Bering Sea. It is about 10 miles wide between    pinnacles protrude from the side of this peak, giving it an
the SW end of Unimak Island and Ugamak Island, which is one of    extremely rugged appearance. Near the middle of the island is a
the smaller islands of the Krenitzin Group.                        knob 905 feet high. The island is mainly tundra covered. The
 (63)  Unimak Pass is the widest of the Fox Islands Passes and    shore is backed by bluffs 50 to 1,000 feet high. Off the SE point of
the most generally used by deep-draft vessels. Unalga and Akutan    the island is a conical pinnacle, 310 feet high, which is separated
Passes, 50 miles farther to the W, are convenient under certain    from the island by a narrow gorge 10 to 15 yards wide. About 0.3
conditions if bound for Dutch Harbor, but Unimak Pass is the only    mile off the SE end are two rocks awash, generally marked by
one of the three that is lighted.                                  breakers. Twin grassy islets, the N of which is 127 feet high, are
 (64)  Besides being a gateway to the Bering Sea, Unimak Pass    0.6 mile S of the E point of Ugamak Bay, a cove on the S side of
is also used by some vessels to effect a shorter and better weather    Ugamak Island. The islets are separated by a deep gorge and
route across the North Pacific Ocean. The route W via the Bering    appear as one; the collective name of Round Island is applied to
Sea avoids the prevailing head winds and heavy seas that are    them.
encountered S of the Aleutians.                                     (73)  Strong currents sweep around the E end of Ugamak Island
 (65)  Unimak Pass is free from outlying dangers, but the cur-    and heavy tide rips occur. It is advisable to give this end of the
rents and prevailing thick weather make it necessary to exercise    island a berth of about 2 miles.
unusual care in approaching the pass, especially from S. The        (74)  The E end of Ugamak Island is a Steller sea lion rookery
Krenitzin Islands furnish considerable protection from S and SW    site. There is a 3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer zone around this
weather, but during E or N weather the seas in Unimak Pass are    rookery which encompasses the entire island and the islands and
accentuated by the current. A northeaster will also augment the    islets within the 3 mile limit. (See 50 CFR 227.12, chapter 2, for
prevailing SW current along the Alaska Peninsula. (See the Tidal    limits and regulations.)
Current Tables for current predictions for Unimak Pass.)            (75)  Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as
 (66)  SE of Unimak Pass is Davidson Bank, on which the    5ï¿½ from the normal variation have been observed on Tigalda
depths vary between 35 and 50 fathoms; the seaward edge of the    Island and as much as 3ï¿½ between Akutan and Rootok Islands.
bank drops off sharply into deep water. At times there is a marked  (76)  Aiktak Island, 556 feet high, is S of the W part of Uga-
change in the color of the water from blue to green when coming    mak Island; the two islands are separated by a pass 0.5 mile wide
from deep water onto the bank. The current runs W with an aver-    and 6 to 10 fathoms deep. Small vessels use this pass for tempo-





                                                     7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                        225


rary anchorage, but moderately strong currents make the anchor-    area that extends 0.8 mile N of the point, large vessels should pass
age unfavorable. On the S side of Aiktak Island are sheer bluffs,    at a distance of not less than 1 mile. Anchorage is found in the
the tops of which approach the highest parts of the island. The islet    center of Kelp Bay in 7 to 10 fathoms just inside the entrance.
off the NE end is grass covered and less than 100 feet high.         (86)  A small bay 2 miles E of Kelp Bay provides anchorage for
 (77)  Temporary anchorage in N weather may be found in Uga-    small craft in S weather. Care should be taken to avoid covered
mak Bay in 16 fathoms about 0.5 mile from shore. In S weather,    rocks 170 yards off the E entrance point and others 150 yards off-
some shelter may be found on the N side of Ugamak Island in a    shore on the W  side. Anchorage in 7 fathoms is found 0.3 mile
small bight 1.5 miles on the E end; depths are 16 to 20 fathoms,    from the head of the bay.
0.3 mile from shore.                                                 (87)  At the W end of the S shore of Tigalda Island is a pinnacle
 (78)  Ugamak Strait has a width of 3 miles between Ugamak         rock, 165 feet high, and about 100 yards offshore, that shows
and Aiktak Islands on the N and Kaligagan Island on the S. A        prominently in a SE and NW direction. The point about 3 miles E
detached shoal, covered 10 fathoms, is in the middle of the NW      of the W end is marked by Derbin Island, about 0.4 mile long and
entrance to the strait. Heavy rips and swirls occur in this area at    206 feet high, lying close to the shore. E of this point the S shore
certain stages of the tide. Passage of Ugamak Strait has been made    of Tigalda Island consists of high cliffs intersected by low valleys.
on a 2880 course, heading approximately for Billings Head on    About 2.5 miles E of Derbin Island are two round bare rocks, 85
Akun Island; this course passes about 1.3 miles N of the northern-    and 27 feet high, about 0.4 mile from the shore. The section of the
most rock off Tigalda Island. Allowance must be made for the cur-    coast abreast of the rocks is a steep rocky bluff rising to a 1,682-
rent which sets across this course. The velocity of the current is    foot peak. About 2.5 miles E of the two rounded rocks is a 191-
3.8 knots; velocities greater than 6 knots have been observed. (See    foot pinnacle near the shore. An arch through the pinnacle rock
the Tidal Current Tables for current predictions for Ugamak         gives it the appearance of a huge chair.
Strait.), i                                                          (88)  Derbin Bay, the bight E of Derbin Island, provides tempo-
  (79)  Tigalda Island, on the S side of Ugamak Strait, is 11    rary anchorage in N weather. The recommended anchorage is in
miles long in an E-W direction and 3 miles wide. It has six moun-    16 to 18 fathoms, 0.5 mile from shore and 0.8 mile from Derbin
tain ridges, 1,000 to 1,600 feet high, which trend NW and are sep-    Island. The E shore of the bight is foul, with a covered rock 300
 arated by low valleys. The W  end of the island is comparatively    yards SW of a 134-foot rocky islet. Small craft should favor the W
 low. Grass and tundra cover the island.                             shore of the bight in running to anchorage in 7 to 10 fathoms, 0.4
  (80)  Kaligagan Island, in Ugamak Strait, 0.8 mile off the NE     mile from the head of the bight.
 end of Tigalda Island, is 0.8 mile long and 478 feet high. A large   (89)  A small indentation, 0.3 mile long and 0.1 mile wide, is 1
 number of bare rocks or islets extend 2.5 miles W  and NW of    mile SW of the E extremity of Tigalda Island. Rocky bottom and
  Kaligagan Island. The northernmost is the highest (63 feet) and is
 * Kaligagan Island. The northernmost is the highest (63 feet) and is    rocks awash along the shores make this anchorage acceptable only
 about 1.8 miles N of the Tigalda Island shore. Passages between    incase of an emergency,  The depths range from 5 to 7 fathoms. A
 groups of these rocks are deep and safe for small craft.            low pass extends in a NW direction across the island to Tigalda
  (sl)  Proceeding to Tigalda Bay from among the islets, care
                                                                     Bay.
 should be taken to avoid a group of rocks awash that extend 270      ay.
 yards off the N side of the entrance point of the bay. These rocks   (9)   Derbin Strait, separating Tigalda and Avatanak Islands, is
 are marked by thick kelp. Currents in the passage between Kali-    a little over I mile wide. No known dangers are more than 0.3
 gagan and Tigalda Islands are approximately as strong as in the;   mile from shore. A safe course through the strait is 3260 in mid-
 main passage of Ugamak Strait and currents are present among the    channel, with Billings Head of Akun Island ahead. On the E side
 main g       roups of islets.         X re present among thei   of the S entrance is Derbin Island; on the W side is a bare rock, 30
   (82)  Tigalda Bay, on the N side of Tigalda Island, 3 miles from    feet high and 400 yards off Avatanak Island.
 its E end, is sheltered from all except NW winds. The bay is about   (91)  A reef awash at half tide extends 330 yards W from the
 0.6 mile wide and 1.5 miles long in an E-W direction, and has       165-foot pinnacle rock about midway on the E side of Derbin
 depths of 8 to 10 fathoms, rocky bottom. Because of the poor    Strait. On the W side of the N entrance is a bare rock 2 feet high,
 holding bottom, the anchorage is not secure in strong winds. An     400 yards off the NE point of Avatanak Island.
 anchorage off the entrance to the bay in 12 to 15 fathoms, gravel    (92)  Tidal currents in Derbin Strait average about 5.5 knots,
 bottom, is preferred, and furnishes just as good shelter in S and E  although velocities of almost 8 knots have been observed. The
  weather. The diurnal range of tide is 3.3 feet.                     flood sets NW and the ebb SE. In midchannel, with wind and cur-
   (83)  The small bay just E of Tigalda Bay is not recommended      rent opposing, the strait becomes exceedingly rough. A swell from
  as an anchorage for small craft because the swell making in from    SW to SE makes into the strait and is accentuated by the current.
  the N or W is not broken up by the group of islets.                 There are numerous eddies and cross currents near the shore. The
   (84)  Welcome Bay, just W of Tigalda Bay, is an open bay 0.8    ebb current causes tide rips a considerable distance offshore, espe-
  mile wide. At the head, a narrow passage leads to a lagoon largely    cially on spring tides. Small boats should avoid Derbin Strait
  bare at extreme low water. The passage at its narrowest part is 90    except under favorable conditions. (See the Tidal Current Tables
  yards wide and 21/2 fathoms deep. The bay anchorage is in 15 fath-    for current predictions for Derbin Strait.)
  oms, sand and gravel bottom, 0.4 mile from shore. An anchorage       (93)  Avatanak Island is 9 miles long and 3 miles wide at its E
  for small craft is in 4 to 6 fathoms, sand bottom, at the entrance to    end, but the W  half of the island averages less than 0.8 mile in
  the passage.                                                        width. The middle of the island is a depression less than 100 feet
    (85)  Kelp Bay, on the N side of Tigalda Island and 2 miles    high, the sides of which slope gently upward to 1,635 and 1,276
  from the W  end, provides temporary anchorage in S weather.'The    feet on the E and W ends, respectively. The low land of the depres-
  entrance is constricted by a reef that extends 0.3 mile from the W  sion is often clear when no other land is showing especially in N
  entrance point. The point to the E of the bay is marked by several    weather. There are many grotesque irregularities in the topogra-
  off-lying rocks, the outermost showing 9 feet. Because of a shoal    phy.




226                                                 7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


  (94)  Avatanak Point, the S end of the island, is sharp and bold   (106) Avatanak Strait is a broad passage separating Avatanak
and has a ragged chain of rocks and rocks awash that extend over    and Rootok Islands from Akun Island. The strait has a general NE-
0.3 mile in a S direction. The southernmost of these is a symmetri-    SW direction and is 3 miles wide at its narrowest part. There are
cal oval rock 6 feet high. '                                       no hidden dangers over 0.3 mile from shore and navigation is not
  (95)  In 1981, the NOAA Ship MILLER FREEMAN anchored    difficult in clear weather. It is reported that strong NW winds draw
in the center of the bight E of Avatanak Point in a 35-knot NNW    heavily through Akun Strait into the W end of Avatanak Strait.
wind; good holding ground was in 15 to 16 fathoms, sand bottom.     (107) Currents with a velocity of 6.5 knots have been observed
  (96)  Two pinnacle rocks are W  of the W  extremity of the    in Avatanak Strait; but average strengths of flood and ebb are
island; the highest and outermost is 200 yards offshore and 60 feet    about 4 knots and 3.5 knots, respectively. The ebb sets to the W,
high.                                                              and the strength of the current is felt well to the W  of Rootok
  (97)  Near the center of the island on the S side is Chimney     Island; but to the E of the strait along the N side of Tigalda Island
Cove, which affords temporary protection to small craft from N     the currents are weak. (See the Tidal Current Tables for predic-
weather. It is exposed to the ocean swell. The cove is marked by a    tions for Avatanak Strait.)
vertical chimney-shaped slab of rock, over 200 feet high, which     (108) Tide rips and swirls occur in the narrowest part, off the
projects from the ground surface on the W point of the cove. The    entrance to Akun Strait, and among the islands off the S shore of
rock also shows in Avatanak Strait over the low-lying middle    Akun Island. A pronounced set is often experienced when cross-
ground. Larger vessels may find temporary anchorage in 15 to 20    ing the narrow depression abreast of Derbin Strait, and light tide
fathoms S of this rock, well clear of any currents,                rips occur there.
  (98)  Rootok Strait, separating Avatanak Island from Rootok        (09)  Basalt Rock, in Avatanak Strait and 1 mile N of Avatanak
Island, is a little more than I mile wide, but the clear channel is    Island, is a symmetrically rounded rock 50 feet high; it is steep-to
reduced to about 0.5 mile by a reef that extends from the E side    and the channel inside is clear, with depths of 10 to 20 fathoms.
and by rocks that extend from the W side. The reef, composed of     (10)  Jackass Point, the S extremity of Akun Island, terminates
separate rocks and heavily fringed with kelp, is bare at various    in a chain of irregularly shaped rocky islets, the highest of which
stages of the tide, and extends 525 yards in a SW direction from    is 80 feet. Tall and conspicuous Pinnacle Rock, 145 feet high, is
the highest of the two pinnacle rocks off the W extremity of Ava-    0.5 mile W of Jackass Point and 0.3 mile offshore.
tanak Island. The rocks on the W side extend 250 yards from the     (111)  Easy Cove, at the S end of Akun Island, is 0.4 mile wide
Rootok Island shore. Depths less than 10 fathoms extend almost    with about the same distance to its head. Small vessels may find
0.5 mile N and NE from the NE point of Rootok Island.              temporary shelter from N winds in 8 to 10 fathoms.
 (99   A detached shoal covered 31/2 fathoms is near the middle     (112)  Poa Island, about 2.5 miles NE of Jackass Point, is steep
of the S entrance, about I mile NE of the E end of Rootok Island.  sided, about 0.6 mile long in an E-W direction, and 305 feet high.
                                                                      (113) Tangik Island, about I mile NE of Poa Island, is about 0.4
 (100) A flat-topped rock about 20 feet high is just off the E end
 of Rootok sland and other rocks extend 400 yards utfrom the Erock    mile long and 225 feet high at its E end. It is surrounded by rocks,
of Rootok Island and other rocks extend 400 yards from the rock
into the strait.                                                   and a reef extends about 350 yards SW from its SW end. The
                                                                    channel between Tangik and Poa Islands is clear except for reefs
 (101) In the bight indenting the E shore of Rootok Island, a rock    close to the S side of Tangik Island, which should be given a berth
awash at low tides is about 500 yards from the shore. Several pin-    of at least 0.3 mile.
nacle rocks fringe the S shore of this bight.                       (114) Trident Bay, W of Tangik and Poa Islands, is about 0.8
 (102) To make the passage through Rootok Strait, steer 2980 for    mile wide and 1 mile long. The entrance is constricted to less than
the N end of Rootok Island, leaving the E end of the island 0.6    0.5 mile by an islet, 82 feet high, on the N side and a chain of
mile to port; when the W end of Avatanak Island is abeam, change    rocks, terminating in a flat-topped rock 32 feet high, on the S side.
course to 331ï¿½ and pass in midchannel between the bare rocks off    Three small coves indent the shore at the head of the bay. A rock
Avatanak Island and those close to the N end of Rootok Island.     awash at low water is about 225 yards off the point between the
 (103) The currents in Rootok Strait have an estimated maximum    middle and S coves. The heads of the coves are shoal.
velocity of 4 knots. Tide rips and whirls occur off the N entrance,  (115) Anchorage can be found in the middle of Trident Bay in
but, as this area is sheltered from winds from most directions, they    20 fathoms, with good protection from all directions but the SE;
are mild compared to the rips that occur in other passes.          however, the islands off the entrance provide some protection
 (104) Rootok Island, the westernmost island on the S side of    from this direction. With a SW swell, small boats find better pro-
Avatanak Strait, is 3 miles by 2.2 miles in extent. The island's    tection at the entrance to the W cove in 2 to 6 fathoms. The survey
most prominent features are the twin peaks, 1,545 and 1,532 feet    ship found this bay the best sheltered in the vicinity, and had suffi-
high and 600 yards apart in an E-W direction. The S side of the    cient swinging room.
island is a continuous cliff broken only by a small valley slightly E  (116) To enter Trident Bay from S, steer 3500, heading for the W
of the twin peaks. A flat-topped rock about 20 feet high is off the E    tangent of the islet at the N entrance point. Pass midway between
point of Rootok Island. The island is fringed with rocks and kelp    Pao Island and the land to the W. When the outermost flat-topped
and affords no secure anchorage. It is used as a fox farm, the    rock is abeam to port, swing sharply to 300ï¿½, heading for the sand
buildings being in the S valley of the bight on the E side.        beach in the middle cove with the S tangent of Poa Island directly
 (105)  Akun Island, 23 miles SW of Unimak Island, is the north-    astern. In making this turn, favor the flat-topped rock which is
ernmost island of the Krenitzin Group. It is about 12 miles long,    steep-to, as the currents eddying around the entrance to the bay
and very irregular in shape, being nearly divided by Akun Bay and    have a tendency to keep the ship's head from coming around. A
Lost Harbor and a low depression joining them. The island is high    bank of 8 fathoms extends across the entrance channel.
and rugged, particularly its N part, which reaches an elevation of  (117)  Cross Bay is an indentation about 1 mile wide on the SE
2,620 feet at Mount Gilbert, an extinct crater on the N side of    side of Akun Island and to the N of Tangik Island. Rocks extend
Lost Harbor.                                                       about 300 yards off its middle point. The channel N of Tangik




                                                     7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                       227


Island is clear, but the channel W of the island with 4 fathoms or    25 feet high and some smaller bare rocks, are near the N end of the
less should be avoided.                                            strait and 0.3 mile from its W  shore. Akun Strait Light
 (118) Round Head, the SE point of the peninsula that extends E    (54ï¿½08.0'N., 165ï¿½39.7'W.), 46 feet above the water, is shown from
from Akun Island, is a rounded steep-sided headland 465 feet    a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark
high; a pinnacle 52 feet high is 200 yards off the point. From    on Race Rocks.
Round Head the shore of Akun Island trends W for 3 miles and is     (128) Shoal water and heavy kelp surround Race Rocks for a
less rugged. It then turns to the S for 1.5 miles to Cross Point    distance of about 250 yards; Swirl Rock, awash at half tide, is 250
forming an indentation known as Seredka Bay. Anchorage with    yards N of the light and is conspicuous by the heavy overfall and
good shelter from N and W winds can be found in 10 to 20 fath-    swirls. The main channel is to the E and N of Race Rocks and
oms about 0.4 mile from the shore. The NE side of Cross Point is    Swirl Rock and has a least depth of 41/2 fathoms. The channel to
fringed with rocks and kelp.                                       the W of Race Rocks has a least depth of 2 fathoms and is subject
 (119)  Tanginak Island, of small extent but 270 feet high, is 2.2    to currents which are just as strong as in the main channel.
miles off the E end of Akun Island. Although it appears to be one   (129) With NW winds in the summer, a bank of fog frequently
rounded island, it is in reality two islets separated by a narrow pas-    streaks through Akun Strait, but under such circumstances, vessels
sage. The passage between Tanginak and Akun Islands is deep,    navigating Avatanak Pass will usually sight the S shore of Akutan
but strong currents sweep through it, accompanied by tide rips and    Island.
swirls.                                                             (130) Currents in Akun Strait attain an estimated velocity of 12
 (120) About 4.8 miles N of Tanginak Island and in the approach    knots in the narrowest part, setting N with the flood. The slack
to Akun Bay is Fathometer Reef, a 31/4-fathom rocky shoal,    period is very short. Tide rips, swirls, and overfalls occur, and with
which is about 0.3 mile in diameter and is surrounded by depths of    a N wind or swell are extremely heavy. By skirting the kelp off
over 30 fathoms. Heavy tide rips and swirls occur in the vicinity    Race Rocks and passing within 100 yards to the N of Swirl Rock,
except at slack water. Vessels should keep well clear of the reef, as    local vessels are able to keep out of the strength of the current.
no kelp has been reported on it and breakers may not be distin-     (131) Green Bight, indenting the SE shore of Akutan Island at
guishable from the tide rips.                                      the entrance to Akun Strait, offers temporary anchorage in 6 to 8
 (121) Akun Bay is the broad indentation in the NE side of Akun    fathoms 0.4 mile from shore. It is convenient while waiting for
Island; it affords anchorage at its head except with winds from the    slack water to pass through the strait.
SE to NW, but heavy williwaws are experienced with offshore         (132) The W  or Akutan Island shore of Akun Strait is low,
winds. There are no known dangers in the bay except close to    except in the middle where a rounded peak 650 feet high forms a
shore. At its head, where the bay is 2.5 miles wide, there are two    steep cliff on the N point of Green Bight. Shoal water marked by
large bights; the N bight is known as Helianthus Cove. Anchor-    heavy kelp extends about 500 yards E from this point.
age may be made in either of the bights, about 0.5 mile from        (133) From this low point with an arch, 1.6 miles W from Jack-
shore, in 10 to 15 fathoms. Small vessels can find fairly good shel-    ass Point, the E shore of Akun Strait extends NW for about 2 miles
ter from all directions in the S part of Helianthus Cove. Both    to a point with a flat grassy islet, 80 feet high, close by. Shoal
bights have freshwater lakes at the head; the lakes are about 10    water marked by heavy kelp fringes this shore. A rounded rock, 10
feet above high water. A very low depression extends across the    feet high, is 650 yards NW from the arch. A group of rocks, bare
island from Helianthus Cove to Lost Harbor.                        at low water, are about 500 yards NW of the rounded rock and
 (122) A long peninsula extends E from the middle of Akun    about the samedistance off the E shore of the strait.
Island; off the N point at the outer end of the peninsula is a twin  (134) The W  end of the flat grassy islet can be approached to
pinnacle, 230 feet high, which marks the SE limit of Akun Bay. A   within 250 yards on the W, but shoal water marked by heavy kelp
gully indents the cliffs at the most E point of the peninsula.     extends about 700 yards S. A flat islet, 200 feet high, is 0.4 mile N
 (123) The N ends of Akun Island are Billings Head and Akun    of the grassy islet; the passage between the two islets is obstructed
Head, 4 miles to the W. These massive heads, separated by Little    and foul.
Bay, both have precipitous faces. Akun Head has a flat top 1,645    (135) Akutan Bay opens into the Bering Sea between Akun
feet high. The bluffs on its N and W sides are marked by rust-col-    Head and North Head. This approach from the Bering Sea is used
ored stratification. Billings Head rises to 1,660 feet.            to reach Akutan Harbor and other arms of the bay. Akun Strait,
 (124) Billings Head Bight, on the N side of Billings Head, is a    previously described, connects Akutan Bay with Avatanak Strait
Steller sea lion rookery site. There is a 3-mile vessel exclusionary    and the Pacific, but it is comparatively shoal and contracted, and is
buffer zone around the rookery which encompasses Akun Head,    not recommended.
Little Bay, Billings Head, and the N portion of Akun Bay. (See 50   (136) Akutan Harbor opens into Akutan Bay on the N side of
CFR 227.12, chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)                the peninsula which juts into Akun Strait from Akutan Island; the
  (125) Billings Head Light (54ï¿½17.8'N., 165031.4'W.), 210 feet    preferred approach to the harbor is from N through Akutan Bay.
above the water, is shown from a small house with a red and white    The harbor is 4 miles long and from 0.5 to 1.8 miles wide. Except
diamond-shaped daymark on the N side of the head.                  for crabpots, there are no known dangers over 300 yards from
 (126) Little Bay indents the N end of Akun Island. A spit makes    shore. From the head of the harbor, a trail leads inland to the hot
out from the W shore. The area S of the spit is closed by a rocky    springs.
bar and only boats drawing a few feet can enter. Anchorage out-     (137) Akutan Point, on the N side of the entrance to Akutan
side of the spit may be had in 8 to 10 fathoms, sandy bottom.      Harbor, is a grassy hummock 175 feet high, which is connected
                                                                    with the island proper by a low grassy neck. A light is on the
  (127) Chart 16532.-Akun Strait,-between Akun and Akutan    point.
Islands, is about 1 mile at its narrowest part, but the navigable   (138) Akutan is on the N side of the harbor about 2 miles W
channel is reduced to 400 yards by reefs that extend from the E    from the E end of Akutan Point. Two wharves are at Akutan. On'
shore and by Race Rocks on the W. Race Rocks, a flat rocky islet    the opposite side of the harbor I mile farther W is a former whal-




228                                                  7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


ing station with a wharf in disrepair. A processing ship is perma-    (151)  Chart 16531.-Akutan Island, largest of the Krenitzin
nently moored alongside the wharf; the vessel is fastened to    Group, is about 9 miles NE from Unalaska Island and is separated
mooring buoys near the wharf. A concrete piling, covered at high    from the latter by Akutan and Unalga Passes.
water, is just off the wharf; this wharf is not recommended for      (152)  The shore of Akutan Island bordering on Akutan Bay and
mooring. There is a post office in Akutan. Unscheduled seaplane    Akun Strait is described in connection with those bodies of water.
flights to other areas are about 3 times a week.                      (153)  Akutan Peak, 4,244 feet high, rises about 600 feet on the
 (139)  A recommended anchorage is about 300 yards off the vil-    S rim of a crater, about 1.2 miles in diameter, to form a sharp sum-
lage in 22 fathoms. Vessels can also anchor in the broad bight in    mit. It is the highest peak between Unimak and Unalaska Islands.
the S shore in 15 fathoms, with the E end of Akutan Point bearing    (154) North Head, the N end of Akutan Island, is a high bold
0180. The bottom at both anchorages is very sticky. The harbor is   cliff, with a large, deep grassy valley in the otherwise high shore
well sheltered from all except E winds, but heavy williwaws are    on its E. side. About 2 miles SW of the cape, a narrow, grassy val-
encountered during gales.                                           ley separates the high ridge behind North Head from another high
 (140) A cannery (54007'55"N., 165047'12"W.), about 0.5 mile    ridge; the W  side of the valley is a bluff. North Head Light
W of Akutan, has a dock with 500 feet on the S face and 200 feet    (54ï¿½13.3'N., 165ï¿½58.8'W.), 60 feet above the water, is shown from
on the E and W faces. Fuel, water, electricity, and limited marine    a small house with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on
supplies are available. The cannery monitors VHF-FM Channel 6.    the point 1.5 miles W of the head.
 (141) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-     (155) Open Bight is an indentation just E of North Head. No
sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of    depths greather than 10 fathoms are found in the bight. It is
Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)                     exposed to N swell from the Bering Sea and is not recommended
 (142) The Aleutian Islands are served by the Alaska Marine    as an anchorage.
Pilots and Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.                      (156) A rock awash is about 250 yards off the rounded point just
 (143)  Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots    E of Open Bight; a covered rock is inshore from the rock awash.
and en route to Akutan can meet the pilot boat about 1 mile E of     (157) Lava Point, 6 miles SW of North Head, is a fairly flat lava
Akutan Point (54ï¿½08.7'N., 165ï¿½43.6'W.).                             bed varying in elevation from 150 feet along the-shore to 300 feet
 (144) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "AKUTAN          at the base of the hill back of it. The cliffs all around the point are
PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearranged fre-    nearly vertical except in places where they are broken off. Numer-
quency between pilot and agent/vessel.                              ous tunnels are under the cliffs. The NW face of the hill back of
 (145) Surf Bay, on the Akun Island side of Akutan Bay and just    the point is concave and very steep.
N of Akun Strait, is an open bight exposed to the W  and N. A         (158) At the end of Lava Point is a flat rock having the same
group of rocky islets, the highest, 64 feet, is in the middle of the    height as the point and slightly detached from it. In foggy weather
bay about 1 mile from shore. A group of rocks, awash at low    low points will sometimes be seen below the fog, and the lava
water, is 0.3 mile N of the islets, and irregular bottom, with least    flow terminating in Lava Point often enables the navigator to iden-
depth of 21/4 fathoms, is found 0.3 mile NW of the rocks. The    tify this point. Due to the similarity of the headlands along these
channel S of the islets is clear and anchorage can be found in 10    islands, this area is one where the navigator has unusual difficulty
fathoms, 0.4 mile from shore, with good shelter in S and E    in identifying landmarks.
weather. On the E side of Surf Bay is a sand beach about 1 mile      (159) Lava Bight, just S of Lava Point, provides temporary
long.                                                               anchorage in S and E weather. On the S shore of the bight are sev-
 (146) Lost Harbor, 3 miles N of Surf Bay, affords fairly good   - eral waterfalls, including a large one to the E of a group of small
shelter, although in NW weather considerable swell rolls in from    ones. The anchorage is in 12 to 15 fathoms, sandy bottom, 0.5
Akutan Bay. The N side of the harbor has gently sloping sand bot-    mile from shore, with the large waterfall bearing 160ï¿½.
tom, with depths of 6 fathoms or more 0.4 mile from shore. A         (160) A large circular reef is off the W coast of Akutan Island
prominent stack and buildings mark the remains of a former sul-    between Lava Bight and Reef Point; the outer edge of the reef is
phur mine on the N shore.                                           about 0.9 mile from the shore. The reef is marked by heavy kelp
 (147)  In July 1990, numerous submerged obstructions were    and is studded with numerous rocks which uncover 3 feet. The W
reported about 0.6 mile E of the stack in about 54ï¿½14'07"N.,        part of North Head open at Lava Point is a good range to clear this
165036'39"W.                                                        reef in passing to the N of it. Between the reef and the shore is a
 (148) Sandy Cove is a small bight about 3 miles NW of Akutan    passage which has a least depth of 23/4 fathoms and is clear of
Point. Small craft can anchor in the center of the bay in about 5    kelp; small boats use the passage to avoid the disturbed water out-
fathoms, sandy bottom. The cove is exposed to the NE.               side.
 (149)  Hot Springs Bay is a wide indentation in Akutan Island       (161) Reef Bight, on the S side of the reef, is not recommended
opening into Akutan Bay. The point on the NW side of the    for anchorage because of poor holding ground.
entrance is a high, rock cliff; Ridge Point, on the E side of the    (162) Reef Point, the W extremity of Akutan Island, is steep and
entrance, is a narrow ridge about 356 feet high, which has bare    rocky and reaches a height of 500 feet. A low rock 150 yards off
rock cliffs on its W  side, but slopes rapidly on its E side into a    the point has the appearance of a stranded freighter when seen
grassy valley and sandy cove. At the head of the bay are three    from the N or S.
bights; a stream drains into the middle bight from the hot springs    (163) Currents.-Flood currents with an estimated velocity of 2
0.5 mile inland.                                                    knots set along the W  shore of Akutan Island as far N as Reef
 (50) A rock, covered 2h/4 fathoms, is 0.5 mile from the SE shore    Point. Near Lava Point an ebb current of 1 knot has been
1.5 miles inside Hot Springs Bay from Ridge Point. There are no    observed. Off North Head, currents are weak. A N wind blowing
other known dangers in the bay. Anchorage in S and W weather    against a flood current produces tide rips as far N as Lava Point.
can be found in the W part of the bay 0.5 mile from shore, in 14 to  (164) The S shore of Akutan Island between Green Bight and
16 fathoms, sandy bottom.                                           Sarana Bay is a steep rocky bluff with numerous boulders that




                                                     7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                       229


extend about 200 yards offshore. A rectangular rock, 75 feet high,  (174) The shore between Reef Point and Flat Bight is an eroded
is 225 yards offshore, about 1 mile SW from the S end of Green    bluff 300 to 600 feet high; when close by, a reddish outcrop is dis-
Bight. Numerous waterfalls are visible along this shore in rainy    cernible.
weather.
 (165) Talus Point, on the E side of the entrance to Sarana Bay,   (175) Chart 16528.-Akutan Pass and Unalga Pass, on either
is the end of a rocky ridge, about 1,700 feet high, which has sev-    side of Unalga Island, are ship passages, secondary to Unimak
eral massive pinnacles split from the top. It is more easily distin-    Pass, for entering the Bering Sea from the Pacific through the E
guished from offshore than Battery Point.                          part of the Aleutian Chain. Akutan Pass is 2.5 miles wide in its
 (166) Sarana Bay, between Talus Point and Battery Point, is 4    narrowest part between the Baby Islands on the SW and Triplet
miles wide: at its entrance, but narrows rapidly to an inner cove    Rocks off Cape Morgan. The depths in the pass are very irregular,
about 1 mile wide and 0.7 mile to its head. Vulcan Point, on the E    but no hidden dangers havebeen found. Depths less than 10 fath-
side of the entrance to the inner cove, is marked by a flat-topped    oms extend about 0.4 mile S from Triplet Rocks, and the tide rips
rock 45 feet high; a reef extends 450 yards SE from the rock.    there are intensified, appearing as breakers. Small craft should
Anchorage in 5 to 10 fathoms can be found in the inner cove, but    avoid them. A narrow, crescent-shaped shoal with a least depth of
the shore should not be approached closer than about 450 yards     8 fathoms is 3.5 miles NW from Cape Morgan. The shoal can be
The bay is wide open to the S and in a S swell is very uncomfort-
able.                         :                  V                  (176) Akutan Pass is wider than Unalaga Pass, but the currents
                                                                    and tide rips are similar. However, the current is felt over a much
 (167) Battery Point, the southernmost headland of Akutan    greater distance, so that with an adverse current it has been found
Island, is marked by a peak with a distinctively shaped conical top    that better time can be made by using Unalaga Pass. On the larger
resembling a liberty cap; it is faced by steep, high cliffs. Large    tides, the flood creates such heavy tide rips N of Unalaga Island,
vessels should give Battery Point a berth of 1.5 miles to avoid a 7-    even incalm weather, that it is advisable to be prepared to take
fathom shoal 1.3 miles offshore in a SE direction; swirls and tide                    rips 15 feet high have been observed. In
rips mark the shoal. A 33/4-fathom shoal, marked by kelp, is 0.4    approaching both Akutan Pass and Baby Pass, fewer rips will be
mile off the SE side of Battery Point, and a rock awash is 370    encountered if courses are directed for the area SE of the Baby
3yards off the SW side.  : -                :Islands and then swing over to either pass. This area is compara-
 (168) Broad Bight and Cascade Bight are the E and W bights,    tively quiet on the ebb when both of the passes have heavy tide
respectively, between Battery Point and Cape Morgan. This region    rips.
can be used only for temporary anchorage in N weather. The heads    (177)  Akutan Pass, in the daytime and with clear weather and a
of the two bights have beaches of sand and gravel and each is   fair current, furnishes a convenient route for vessels bound to or
backed by a low, grassy valley. The bights are separated by a ridge    from Unalaska Bay. From E it is recommended that courses be
terminating in a bold rocky headland with steep cliffs 800 feet    steered to make land in the vicinity of Tigalda Island and Ava-
high. Anchorage in Broad Bight can be found in 16 to 20 fathoms,    tanak Island; then follow the S side of these islands until the
sandy bottom, 0.8 mile from the beach and 1.1 miles 1050 from    course is shaped from Rootok Island to Cape Morgan. A midchan-
the point of the headland; anchorage in Cascade Bight is in 14 to    nel course through the pass is recommended.
16 fathoms, sandy bottom, 0.8 mile from the beach and 0.6 mile      (178) Remarks on currents in Akutan Pass will be found in the
W of the same point.                                               first part of this chapter. (See the Tidal Current Tables for predic-
 (169) About 1.3 miles SW of Cascade Bight is a group of rocky    tions for Akutan Pass.)
islets; one of them, 298 feet high, is 0.8 mile E of Cape Morgan.   (179)  Baby Islands, a group of six low islands in Akutan Pass
Close to these islets on the offshore side the depth is 14 fathoms.  and N of the E end of Unalga Island, have numerous rocks among
 (170)  Cape Morgan, the SW end of Akutan Island, is a promi-    them. The islands are all tundra covered. On the W  island is a
nent headland with steep, high cliffs intersected by dikes of hard    large rookery and the ground is very pitted over almost the entire
rock of characteristic color. Triplet Rocks, three pinnacles 8 to 15    top. The SE island is used as a fox ranch. When seen apart from
feet high, are 600 yards off the cape. In navigating Akutan Pass,    Unalga Island, the Baby Islands are prominent although they tend
Triplet Rocks should be given a berth of over 0.5 mile.            to blend together to appear as one island.
                                                                      (is)  Strong currents sweep among the Baby Islands. The S end
 (1711 Cape Morgan is a Steller sea lion rookery site. There is a
3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer zone around this rookery which    bare at low water, forming a small protected bay, but strong cur-
encompasses Flat, Cascade, and Broad Bights and Triplet Rocks.    bare   at low  water, forming a small protected bay, but  s trong cur-
                                                                    rents make it a rather uncomfortable anchorage for small boats.
(See 50 CFR227.12, chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)s, about 0.8 mile wide, separates Unalga Island
                                                                      (1811 Baby Pass, about 0.8 mile wide, separates Unalga Island
 (172) Flat Bight is N of a bold headland which forms the NW      from the Baby Islands. Ledges along the shore restrict the naviga-
part of the Cape Morgan peninsula. At the headland, foul ground    ble width, but depths up to 20 fathoms will be found in midchan-
with thick kelp extends 0.5 mile offshore, and a covered rock is   nel. Less water is found at the N end of the pass.
near a rock awash 0.3 mile N of the headland. The bight is bor-     (182) On the Unalga shore of Baby Pass is a shallow cove in
dered by a gravel beach I mile long, which in turn is backed by a    which small boats may get fair protection from S and W weather;
low, grassy valley. Temporary anchorage in E weather can be    however, a rock awash at low water is a little S of the middle of
found 0.6 mile from shore in 12 fathoms, sand bottom.              the cove. Off the N point of the cove is a group of bare rocks that
  (173)  A large rock 2 feet high is I mile S of Reef Point and 400    extend into Baby Pass. The outer rock, 12 feet high, is 300 yards
yards from shore. A depth of 12 fathoms can be carried to the face    from the point. Foul ground extends 400 yards into Baby Pass
of this rock. There is no kelp around it. Several other rocks are    from the 0.8 mile stretch of shore W of the cove.
inshore of this one, but they are inside the kelp line. A rock awash  (183)  Very heavy tide rips occur to the NW of the Baby Islands
is 0.8 mile farther to the S and 250 yards from shore.             on the flood, and extend a considerable distance to the SE on the





230                                                 7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


ebb. (See remarks on tide rips in Akutan Pass.) The flood and ebb    outer reaches of Beaver Inlet it has been found possible to catch a
current velocity is about 4 and 5 knots, respectively. Flood and ebb    glimpse of the shore during the summer fogs. For this reason and
velocities of 5.5 and 7 knots occur at times of tropic tides. (See the    because of ease of access, it can be recommended as good practice
Tidal Current Tables for predictions for Baby Pass.                in thick weather to make the slight detour into the inlet to check
 (184)  Unalga Island is separated from Unalaska Island by    the vessel's position before entering Unalga Pass. The currents in
Unalga Pass. The island is low compared to the neighboring    the entrance to Beaver Inlet generally do not exceed 2 knots.
islands, the highest point being a rounded hill of 707 feet SW of   (194)  (See the Tidal Current Tables for current predictions for
the central point. The E end of Unalga Island is a flat-topped hill,    Unalga Pass.)
145 feet high.                                                      (195) Deep Bay, indenting Unalaska Island on the N side of the
 (185)  Malga Bay, on the NW side of Unalga Island, is about 0.6    entrance to Beaver Inlet, is protected on the NE by rocks awash
mile in diameter and affords shelter in S weather. The E shore of    and small islets which make offshore about 0.3 mile; the ledge
the bay is a chain of jagged rocks and islets, the highest being 106    continues, totally submerged, 0.3 mile farther and terminates in a
feet. Temporary anchorage in S weather can be found in the center    kelp-marked 3/4-fathom rocky shoal which breaks in SE weather. A
of the bay in 11 fathoms.                                          kelp-marked 1 V4-fathom rocky shoal is 0.3 mile off the bluff point
 (186) On the N coast of Unalga Island, precipitous bluffs rise    on the SW side of the entrance. Temporary anchorage in NW
100 to 200 feet, blending abruptly at the top into rolling, slightly    weather can be found at the entrance to the small cove in the NW
rising, tundra-covered tableland. There is generally no beach,    corner of the bay, in 10 to 20 fathoms.
though a flat rock shelf, from 10 to 30 feet wide, extends from the  (196)  Beaver Inlet is described later in this chapter.
bluffs to the water's edge. In places a few scattered boulders may  (197)  From the ledge marking the E part of Deep Bay, the shore
be found on the shelf.                                             extends NE for 2 miles to Brundage Head. This stretch of shore
 (187)  On the S shore of Unalga Island, a prominent cylindrical    has numerous rocks and islets that extend as much as 0.3 mile off-
rock, 120 feet high, is 0.5 mile S of the E end of the island and 375    shore, and strong currents are noticeable.
yards offshore. A point terminating in a rounded knoll, 150 feet    (198) Brundage Head, on the W  side of the S entrance to
high, is 1.8 miles SW of the E extremity.                          Unalga Pass, has a knoll 192 feet high at its outer end. A pinnacle
 (188) A large barn, about 1 mile SW of the E end of Unalga    rock, 22 feet high and 300 yards E of the point, has deep water
Island, is on the side of a hill over 100 feet high, and is conspicu-    outside of it.
ous from the S. Several small houses are in the gully below the     (199) Fisherman Point, about I mile NW from Brundage Head,
barn, but can be seen only when close-to,                          is 140 feet high. A reef, with several bare rocks about 15 feet high
 (189) Numerous boulders and rocks border the S shore of    and marked by heavy kelp, extends over 400 yards N from the
Unalga Island. A dangerous rock, covered 21/4 fathoms, is 700    point. The shore between Fisherman Point and Brundage Head is
yards off, midway of this shore.                                   fringed with rocks, but none extend more than about 300 yards
 (190)  Off the SW extremity of Unalga Island, a group of rocks    into the pass.
extend about 200 yards into Unalga Pass, and a rock about 4 feet    (200) English Bay, on the W  side of Fisherman Point, is a
high near the outer end of the group is conspicuous while entering    secure anchorage for small vessels. The W shore of the bay trends
the pass. The 4-foot rock should be given a berth of 300 yards.    due S for about 2 miles to a low point, where it turns sharply W for
 (191) Unalga Pass, the narrowest of the three principally used    0.9 mile to the head of an arm about 0.3 mile wide. The most
passes in the E Aleutians, is about 1.3 miles wide in its narrowest    secure anchorage is in this narrow arm, SW of the low point at the
part and, with the exception of rocks which make out a short dis-    turn. The width of this anchorage between the 5-fathom curves is
tance from Unalaska and Unalga Islands, is free from dangers. The    about 300 yards. Good anchorage with more swinging room can
depths in Unalga Pass vary from 9 fathoms, at the SE end of the    be found E of the low point in 8 to 10 fathoms, but a shoal area
pass, to over 50 fathoms.                                          that extends 400 yards off the shore N of the point must be
 (192)  Under normal conditions the pass is not difficult to navi-    cleared.
gate as the current sets fair with the pass. In thick weather the   (201)  In entering English Bay, account must be taken of the
shore of Unalga Island can be approached close enough to pick up    strong currents in Unalga Pass; follow a midchannel course, giv-
an echo and followed through the pass. The soundings, especially    ing the W shore a berth of at least 0.3 mile, and when heading into
in the S approaches, furnish numerous characteristic depths to    the arm at the head of the bay favor the S shore slightly. Good
assist a vessel, equipped with echo sounding apparatus, to deter-    holding ground in 12 to 20 fathoms will be found near the
mine its position. For these reasons, coupled with the fact that this    entrance.
pass has been thoroughly surveyed, it is believed that it has dis-  (202)  From English Bay N, the Unalaska shore of Unalga Pass is
tinct advantages over Akutan Pass for vessels going N, especially    much higher.
in thick weather. However, under exceptional circumstances, cur-    (203) Erskine Point, about 3 miles NW of Fisherman Point, is
rents and tide rips of unusual magnitude may be encountered; and    the N extremity of a ridge 1,432 feet high. Along the shore from
treacherous seas, particularly in the narrow part of Unalga Pass,    English Bay to Erskine Point are numerous rocks, but none are
caused by wind opposing the current, often sweep a vessel without    more than 250 yards off.
warning. These have caused severe damage and men have been          (204) Lofty Mountain, 2,284 feet high and 2.5 miles SW from
washed overboard with resultant loss of life. There are temporary    Erskine Point, is a symmetrically-shaped conical peak, the highest
anchorages, easy of access, at either end of Unalga Pass where    point in the vicinity. It is easily identified, and as it is often clear
better conditions may be awaited.                                  when surroundings are obscured, makes a valuable landmark.
 (193) S of Unalga Pass, a belt of deep water leading into Beaver
Inlet makes the approach to the pass on echo soundings compara-     (205)  Chart 16011.-Unalaska Island, one of the larger of the
tively easy; the 50-fathom curve can be followed along the E limit    Fox Islands which form the E group of the Aleutian Island chain,
of the deep, and the 100-fathom curve along the N limit. In the    is about 67 miles in length along the axis of the chain. The island






                                                     7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                       231


is mountainous, and during the greater part of the year the higher    of an extinct volcano with three points, the highest being 2,293
elevations are covered with snow. The irregular coastline is bro-    feet, W of Eider Point, are distinctive. Either peak may be used as
ken by three long deep bays, Beaver Inlet, Unalaska Bay, and    a leading mark in approaching Cape Cheerful until close enough
Makushin Bay, as well as by numerous smaller bays and coves. In    to distinguish the surrounding features; however, the crater W of
general, the bays have deep water close to shore, sometimes too    Eider Point can be used only when it is not obstructed from view
deep for convenient anchorage. Makushin Volcano, the highest    by the higher elevations NW of it. On getting close to the island,
point on the island, is near the NW side and about 25 miles from    when the fog hangs over the land but leaves a clear space just
the E end of the island. In clear weather the volcano is a prominent    along the water's edge, Wislow Island (see chart 16518) forms a
landmark for vessels bound to Dutch Harbor, in Unalaska-Bay.       good mark. It is in a small bay about 2 miles W of Cape Cheerful,
 (206) Naval Defensive Sea Area and Airspace Reservation.-    and is a small, rounded island, regular in shape, and stands far
Under the authority of Executive Orders 8680 of February 14,    enough from the land to be seen as not a part of the main island.
1941 and 8729 of April 2, 1941, Unalaska Island is a designated    W, under similar conditions, Koriga Point can be seen at times.
Naval Defensive Sea Area and Airspace Reservation. Restrictions    The land slopes gently to the point from Makushin Volcano, and
imposed under the authority of the above executive orders have    ends in a small peak-like formation. From E the cascade SE of
been suspended subject to reinstatement without notice at any time    Cape Cheerful is also useful as a mark, particularly in low visibil-
that the interests of national defense may require such action.   ity. Strangers, when in the vicinity and uncertain of the identity of
                                                                    the bay and its landmarks, should endeavor to pick out Ulakta
 (207) Chart 16528.-Kalekta Bay is a broad, open bay in the N     Head. Looking into the bay, its flat top breaking off abruptly to
end of Unalaska Island just E of Unalaska Bay. An obstruction,    sloping sides presents an appearance unlike any other in the vicin-
covered 11 feet, is reported to be 800 yards off the W shore of the    ity, and shows up well against the background of mountains.
bay in about 53ï¿½59'N., 166021'W. There are no other known dan-    When sighted, steer for it, leave it on the starboard hand, and fol-
gers over 400 yards from shore. There are a number of places    low around, keeping out of kelp.
where a vessel may anchor; but as this bay is open N, English Bay   (212) Chelan Bank, the extensive 45-fathom bank that extends
and Dutch Harbor are recommended. A pinnacle rock is off Ersk-    about 7 miles NE from the vicinity of Cape Cheerful, may be
ine Point, the E point at the entrance, somewhat similar to Priest    found useful in fixing the position of a vessel by soundings. The
Rock off Cape Kalekta, but the rock off Erskine Point is distin-    bottom on the bank is composed of black sand and gravel; on the
guished by a smaller one between it and the point. On the W side    shelving areas the bottom is of gray sand and gravel up to about
of Kalekta Bay, 1.8 miles in from Cape Kalekta, is a narrow pinna-    the 80-fathom depth. Chelan Bank, at its NE end, almost makes a
cle rock 45 feet high, 100 yards offshore.                         junction with a similar bank that extends N and W  from Cape
 (208) On the W side of Kalekta Bay, 3 miles S from Cape Kale-    Kalekta, the two banks practically enclosing Unalaska Bay. A
kta, a gap cuts through to Constantine Bay in a WSW direction.    light tide rip occurs along the outer edge of Chelan Bank.
This gap is filled by a lagoon not connected with either bay. A reef  (213) Routes, Unalaska Bay.-When bound for the bay from
extends 400 yards offshore just S of this gap. Anchorage may be    any part of Bering Sea, it is recommended to shape the course for
found in the S end of the bay 0.5 mile from shore in 12 to 20 fath-    Cape Cheerful. In thick weather it is better to fall W  of Cape
oms, sandy bottom. Small craft may find anchorage in the center    Cheerful and th6n round it than to fall to the E, with the possibility
of the small bight 0.5 mile in diameter on the E side of the bay, 1    of being carried by currents into the dangerous regions of the
mile in from Erskine Point, in 5 fathoms, rocky bottom. The hold-    passes.
ing ground is poor and this bight is not recommended for anchor-    (214) Cape Kalekta is the headland at the E side of the entrance
age except in emergency.                                           to Unalaska Bay. The headland has two summits 785 and 904 feet
 (209) Unalaska Bay opens into the Bering Sea between Cape    high, and a ridge, which sags to about 700 feet, connects the head-
Kalekta and Cape Cheerful when on the N side of Unalaska           land with the mountains to the S. The rounded extremity of the
Island. The bay has little commerce except: for diesel oil and sup-    cape is the base of the slope from the lesser summit. When viewed
plies for the local village of Unalaska. The shores of the bay are in    sidewise, this slope which forms the end of the headland is
general mountainous, with precipitous sea faces. Amaknak Island    rounded in outline, rising precipitously at the water's edge and
is near the S end of the bay. W of the island the water is deep, but    then bending gradually to meet the lesser summit.
there is no good harbor in this part of the bay; E of the island are  (215) The 904-foot summit is very close to the W  side of the
the important harbors and anchorages of Iliuliuk Bay, Dutch Har-    cape. It is predominant, being the highest point on the headland.
bor, and Iliuliuk Harbor. The channel to Iliuliuk Bay and Dutch    Viewing the cape from either side, this summit has somewhat the
Harbor is free from dangers, except along the shores. Iliuliuk Har-    shape of a crown. When off the extremity of the cape it appears as
bor is obstructed at its entrance by ledges, but with the aid of the    a sharp peak and the outline of a spur along the W  descent
buoys, it is not difficult to enter with a vessel under 250 feet in    becomes visible. This spur is composed of the massive protuber-
length.                                                            ances, the most prominent of which takes the shape of a vertical
  (210) Unalaska Bay is open to navigation at all seasons. It is   shaft of rock rising above the level of the top of Priest Rock.
reported that on two occasions the drift ice of Bering Sea entered  (216) Cape Kalekta is rugged and precipitous at its extremity
Unalaska Bay, but such an occurrence is so rare that it need not be    and particularly so on its W side. The headland rises almost verti-
considered. Ice often forms in the sheltered coves and harbors in    cally at the waterline with a few detached rocks including Priest
cold, calm weather, but it never attains any thickness or interferes    Rock, but no beaches. The area about the extremity is foul and
with navigation.                                                   marked by kelp, and a dangerous ledge which uncovers I foot,
  (211)  Prominent features.-Makushin Volcano (see chart    usually marked by breakers, is nearly 0.4 mile N from the cape.
16518), 6,680 feet high, is the highest point on Unalaska Island.    The ledge is roughly in line with the pinnacle of Priest Rock and
The volcano can generally be seen in clear weather. Table Top    the W  parts of the low islets N of Priest Rock. Broken bottom
Mountain, 2.710 feet high, back of Cape Cheerful, and- the crater    extends about 200 yards farther out. The N end of the cape should




232                                                 7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


be given a berth of at least 1.2 miles to avoid being carried toward    oms in midchannel to the sand shore at the head. The depths in the
the dangers by strong currents. There are pronounced tide rips.    S cove are shallow and irregular.
 (217) Priest Rock, close-to, off the N side of Cape Kalekta, is a
pinnacle 204 feet high. It is one of the most important landmarks   (225) Chart 16529.-Second Priest Rock, a pinnacle 75 feet
in making Unalaska. Priest Rock should not be confused with the    high, is close to the N side of the headland between Summer and
pinnacle rock off Erskine Point. Two low rocky islets of apprecia-    Iliuliuk Bays. The pinnacle stands on the reef bordering the shore
ble area are N of Priest Rock.                                     of the headland. A dangerous rocky shoal extends 0.2 mile N from
 (218) The cascade S of Cape Cheerful is visible off Cape Kale-    the headland.
kta.                                                                (226) Ulakta Head, the N end of Amaknak Island, is about
 (219) The point on the E shore of Unalaska Bay, about 1.4 miles    900 feet high. It has a flat top, and in clear weather it is one of the
S of Priest Rock, presents a smooth, rounded profile and is grass    best landmarks for fixing the position of Unalaska Bay. Looking
covered. The shore on either side of the point has little or no irreg-    into the bay, its flat top, breaking off abruptly to sloping sides, pre-
ularity. The land about the point rises somewhat abruptly at the    sents an appearance unlike any other in the vicinity, and shows up
shore to about 150 feet, then rounds to assume a more or less flat    well against the background of mountains. From its NW point a
area. This area has a gentle slope toward the steeper slopes leading    reef extends 0.1 mile, marked by Needle Rock, similar in appear-
up to a series of jagged peaks 0.5 mile inland from the point. The    ance to Priest Rock, but not so large.
peaks have no particular distinctiveness. The 10-fathom depth       (227)  Ulakta Head Light(53055.5'N., 166030.4'W.), 61 feet
curve is almost 0.5 mile off the point and broken bottom with a    above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and
I /2-fathom spot is inside the curve.                              white diamond-shaped daymark on the reef bordering the NE side
                                                                     of Ulatka Head. A pinnacle rock, 30 feet high, adjacent to the
 (220) Princess Head, on the E side of Unalaska Bay, about 1.9    shore, is about 50 yards W of the light. Another rock, 20 feet high,
miles from Priest Rock, is a wall-like rock formation that extends    is 75 yards N   of the light
out for 200 yards from the shore cliff of that locality. The outer                Ballyhoo, 1,589 feet high, dominates Amaknak
200-foot length forms the highest part or head of the feature. The    I                                      dominates  Amaknak
head has a fairly level top 214 feet high. The side facing the SW
                                                                       (229)  Iliuliuk Bay has its N entrance between Ulakta Head and
presents the surface of a rough square, distinguished from the
remainder of the rock formation by its lighter shade. Small knobs    Second Priest Rock. The entrance is marked by a light bell buoy
            on the top of the head mark the upper coe rs of the square. The    N of Spithead is a covered ridge that extends across the bay with
on the top of the head mark the upper corners of the square. The
head is an important and distinctive landmark, especially when in    at least 7 to 8 fathoms near the middle of the bay kelp has been
                                                                     seen on this ridge in about midchannel. S of this ridge the depths
close to the E shore of Unalaska Bay, in thick weather or when fog
                                                                     increase to 20 fathoms. There is anchorage almost anywhere in the
closes out the peaks. Two low detached rocks are off the end of
      Princess Head.                                               bay. The usual anchorage is at the head in 14 to 16 fathoms,
                                                                     muddy bottom, where, even with N winds, the force of the sea
 (221) The rounded shore in the vicinity of Princess Head is the    does not seem to reach.
base of a mountain rising to a peak 1,729 feet high. The S slope of  (230) At the head of Iliuliuk Bay, behind the town of Unalaska,
this mountain descends gradually to the lagoon in, a low gap which    is a ravine or break in the mountains, that extends through to the
bisects Cape Kalekta peninsula. The point on the rounded shore is    water S. This is sometimes useful as a guide in entering the bay.
a spur from the base of the mountain. The spur parallels Princess    Buildings at Unalaska, on the lowland at the head of the bay, are
Head and is 0.3 mile SW of it. A smaller projection from the shore    prominent.
is close N of the point. A group of bare rocks are off the point;   (231) Spithead is the end of the long, low, sandspit which forms
about 100 yards off the outer one of this group is a rock that    the E side of Dutch Harbor. Spithead Light (53053.9'N.,
                                                                     166ï¿½30.8'W.), 38 feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton
 (222) Constantine Bay, on the E side of Unalaska Bay, has    tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the S end
shoal and irregular depths, less than 10 fathoms, and its use as an    of the spit. Shoal water, less than 6 fathoms, marked prominently
anchorage, except by small craft under favorable conditions, is not    by kelp, extends 0.3 mile into Iliuliuk Bay from the middle part of
recommended. The shore at the head of the bay is sandy. The SW     the sandspit.
shore is fringed with rocky ledges. On the E side of the bay is a   (232) The W shore of Iliuliuk Bay S of the sandspit is fringed
gap in the land that extends ENE to Kalekta Bay. This gap is filled    with rocks and should not be approached closer than 0.3 mile.
with a lagoon which is not connected with either bay.               (233) Rocky Point has a kelp-marked reef that extends 400
 (223) The headland W of Constantine Bay is rugged and precip-    yards toward Spithead; the outer limit is marked by a lighted buoy.
itous and the area near and around its extremity is foul with rocks    A rock, covered 3/4 fathom, is 250 yards NE of the point. Along the
and kelp. The bluffs along the 1.5-mile stretch of shore S of the    E side of Rocky Point the reef is extensive; the 10-fathom curve,
extremity, facing Unalaska Bay, are especially high. They are very    which marks the outer limit of broken bottom in this part of Iliu-
rugged and have gray, rocky knobs and deep vertical scars, giving    liuk Bay, roughly parallels the side of the point at a distance of
the appearance of vertical stratification. Split Top Mountain      nearly 400 yards.
marks the S end of this formation; the bluffs rise to more than     (234)  A signal station and six oil storage tanks are on the hill-
1,600 feet near the peak.                                          crest W of Rocky Point. Eight additional tanks are 0.1 mile S of
 (224)  Summer Bay, a wide opening in the E shore of Unalaska    Rocky Point.
Bay, opposite Ulakta Head, is composed of several coves, the        (235) Dutch Harbor, on the W  side of Iliuliuk Bay, has its
heads of which are low and sandy. Morris Cove, on the E side just    entrance between Spithead and Rocky Point. The water is deep
N of a prominent headland, has depths less than 4 fathoms, and the    close to the shores and in all parts of the harbor, except off Rocky
bottom is somewhat irregular. In the small cove between the S    Point. The entrance is about 0.5 mile wide and 16 to 18 fathoms
cove and the headland, the depths decrease uniformly from 4 fath-    deep.





                                                      7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                        233


 (236) Mariners are advised not to anchor in the area W of a line    (248) The Aleutian Islands are served by the Alaska Marine
from Rocky Point to the city dock (53ï¿½54'15"N., 166ï¿½31'33"W.),    Pilots and Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.
because their anchor may be fouled on lost ground tackle on the      (249) Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots
bottom of the harbor. Anchorage may be had elsewhere in the har-    and en route to Dutch Harbor can meet the pilot boat about 1 mile
bor (except in or near cable areas), in 14 to 22 fathoms. Violent    E of Ulatka Head Light (53ï¿½55.5'N., 166030.4'W.). The pilotage
williwaws are experienced during gales, especially from the SW,     outer boundary is 2 miles N of Ulaka Head Light.
and the best shelter will be found under the high part of the island  (250) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "DUTCH HAR-
well N of the entrance. SW gales practically have a clear sweep    BOR PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearranged
across the entrance because of the lowland W. Vessels forced to    frequency between pilot and agent/vessel.
moor at Chevron U.S.A., Dutch Harbor Terminial Wharf during          (251)  Dutch Harbor is a customs station.
the early spring and fall will find it necessary to use chains and   (252)  Tides.-(See the Tide Tables for predictions for Dutch Har-
wire cables in addition to mooring lines during the severe gales.   bor.) The diurnal range of tide is 3.7 feet. The tidal current in
  (237)  Wharves.-Numerous wharves, piers, and docks are at    Dutch Harbor is inappreciable, and in Iliuliuk Harbor the velocity
Amaknak and Unalaska Islands. For a complete description of the    does not exceed I knot.
port facilities refer to Port Series No. 38, published and sold by the  (253)  Supplies.-Provisions and fuel are available in Unalaska
U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. (See appendix for address.)           and Dutch Harbor.
  (238) Pacific Western, Dutch Harbor Terminal Wharf: a T-
                   (238) Paci   Western, Dutch Harbor Terminal Wharf  a T-  (254) Repairs.-A shipyard is at the old submarine base at Dutch
head pier about 0.3 mile W of Rocky Point; 320-foot face; 31 feet    Harbor. A covered marine railway at the shipyard can handle craft
                  alongside; deck height,  8 feet; pipelines extend from wharf to    over 100 feet long and to 300 tons. A boat repair facility at Dutch
storage tanks in rear, total capacity of 381,000 barrels; receipt and    Harbor has a machine shop and specializes in underwater repairs.
shipment of petroleum products; bunkering vessels; owned and         (255) CommunicationPassengers, freight, and mail for Dutch
operated by Pacific Western.  '(255) Communication.-Passengers, freight, and mail for Dutch
  noperated by Pacific Western.                        .            Harbor are handled by air. Dutch harbor has regular airline service
  (239) In 1976, a 45-foot section of the northernmost third of the    year round. Telephone service is available. The Dutch Harbor
loading face was unusable. Submerged piles, the remains of a pre-    marine operator monitors VHF-FM channel 28.
vious structure, may exist close to the SE end of the pier; this area    marine  operator mo nt    ors VHF-FM channel 28.
should be avoided. Large vessels berthing at this pier should drop    assistants on call 24 hours a day. The clinic  on itor s 4125 kHz
 anchor well offshore and warp in to enable them to get away at    during working hours and may also be reached through the
 once in case of a sudden onshore wind.                              during working hours and may also be reached through the
  (240) Unalaska City Dock: 0.7 mile NNE of PacificWestern,    Unalaska Police Department on VHF-FM.channel 16.
 Dutch Harbor Terminal Wharf, 427-foot face, 650 feet total ber7      (257) Unalaska is on a low strip of land between the shore at the
 thing space; 35 feet alongside; deck height, 18 feet; 5,000 feet   of head of Iliuliuk Bay and a stream which empties into Iliuliuk Har-
 covered storage area; open storage area for 100 containers; receipt    bor. The wharf is at the W end of the strip of lowland. The N side
                                                           and shipment  of the wharf faces the passage connecting the bay and harbor and
 ansipeno ow n       tainerized and operated ba City of Unalaska.    the W  side faces the harbor. The channel approach to the passage
  (241) The Coast Guard maintains a wet storage area for buoys,    is endangered by  iuiuk Reef which is off the town in  iuiuk
 close NE of Unalaska City Dock.                                     Bay.
  (242)  Sea Alaska Products Docks: 0.6 mile NE of Unalaska           (258) Unalaska is the largest settlement in the Aleutian Islands.
 City Dock; 1,310 feet total berthing space; 35 feet alongside; deck    The original Russian settlement was known as iliuliuk. The princi-
 heights, 10 feet; receipt of seafood; handling supplies and equip-    pal sources of income are trapping and seasonal employment in
 ment; owned and operated by Sea Alaska Products, subsidiary of    the Pribilof Islands. Unalaska has a public grade and high school,
 ConAgra Corp.                                                       and a general store.
   (243)  Unalaska Small-Boat Harbor Wharf: midway on the W            (259)  A radio station is at Unalaska. Telephone service is avail-
 side of the spit; 975 feet total berthing space; 20 to 30 feet along-    able. Passengers, freight, and mail for Unalaska are handled by air.
 side; deck heights, 2 to 12 feet; mooring commercial vessels and     (260)  Iliuliuk Reef, a ledge bare in places, extends 250 yards in
 recreation craft; owned and operated by the City of Unalaska.       an E-W direction. From the E dry rocks, a ledge covered 12 to 15
   (244) Ounalaska Corp. Docks: N end of the harbor; 220 feet of    feet and marked by kelp extends 150 yards S.
 berthing space; 20 feet alongside; deck heights, 16 feet; handling   (261) East Channel is a dredged, buoyed passage connecting
 fishing equipment and supplies; owned and operated by Ounalaska    Iliuliuk Bay and Harbor. In August 1993, the controlling depth
 Corp.                                                               was 24 feet. South Channel, a buoyed passage between Captains
   (245) American President Lines Dutch Harbor Wharf: 0.35    Bay and Iliuliuk Harbor, has a controlling depth of about 28 feet.
 mile SW of Rocky Point; 260-foot face, 324 feet berthing space    A fixed highway bridge with a clearance of 20 feet crosses South
 with dolphins; 40 feet alongside; deck height, 12 feet; cranes to 40    Channel about 300 yards SSE of Expedition Island.
 tons; 9,000 square feet of covered storage area; open storage area   (262)  The channel N of Iliuliuk Reef has a least depth of 17 feet,
 for 306 containers; receipt and shipment of containerized and con-    but it should not be attempted without local knowledge. On the N
 ventional general cargo; owned by Dutch Harbor Development    side of the channel at its E end, 200 yards N of the E end of Iliu-
 Corp. and operated by American President Lines; Ltd.                liuk Reef, is a depth of 11/4 fathoms off the end of a pointed reef
   (246)  Immediately S of the container pier, and fronting Iliuliuk    that extends from the shore.
 Bay, are the ruins of another oil pier; submerged piles and broken   (263) The Alyeska Fisheries Shore Plant Wharf at Unalaska pro-
  dolphins may exist.                                                 vides 910 feet of berthing space with a depth of 35 feet alongside.
   (247) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-    It is owned and operated by Pan Alaska Fisheries, Inc., subsidiary
  sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of    of Castle and Cooke, Inc. A spit makes out from the N shore of the
  Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)                     passage N of the wharf.




 234                                                 7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


   (264) The Coast Guard reports that an eddy has been noted mak-    Pacific Pioneer. Fuel and water are available. In March 1982,
 ing against the E end of the wharf at Unalaska on the ebb but it is    unexploded ordnance was reported about 40 feet seaward of the
 not dangerous. The currents setting in and out of the harbor gener-    wharf; vessels are advised not to use anchors in this area.
 ally follow the trend of the channels and do not exceed I knot in   (274)  Anchorage may be had in 17 to 20 fathoms, even bottom
 the main entrance channel.                                         of mud and sand, about 0.4 mile E of the northernmost island of
   (265) Iliuliuk Harbor, the harbor for Unalaska, may be entered    the group at the head of Captains Bay. In approaching this anchor-
 through East Channel from Iliuliuk Bay or through South Channel    age favor the E shore to avoid Swallow Reef and the shoal to the
 from Captains Bay. The latter channel carries the greater depth    S, which is NE and E of the northernmost island. A reef extends
 and is the most easily navigated during N weather. The distance    150 yards from the E shore about abreast of Swallow Reef. A
 through East Channel is shorter for vessels from Dutch Harbor or    buoy is about 200 yards NE of Swallow Reef. Small craft may
 the Bering Sea but South Channel is nearer for vessels from Cap-    obtain secure shelter in 9 fathoms, sand and mud bottom, at Port
 tains Bay. Iliuliuk Harbor is small but landlocked with good hold-    Levashef, E of the most S of the larger islands.
 ing ground, and an average depth of 10 fathoms. There is            (275) Hog Island, 300 feet high, is off the W side of Amaknak
 sufficient room for backing and filling in turning a moderate-sized    Island in Unalaska Bay. Foul ground extends nearly 0.5 mile N of
 ship. Violent williwaws are experienced with S gales. Vessels    Hog Island. The reef that extends 0.3 mile from the N point, a part
 under 200 feet in length have ridden out gales here, but the short    of the foul ground, has numerous rock ledges jutting up from the
 scope of chain allowable usually causes the anchor to drag.    rocky bottom. Clear passage exists between Hog Island and
 Because of the limited swinging room, an anchorage in Dutch    Amaknak Island. Favor Amaknak Island to avoid a 31/4 fathom
 Harbor or Unalaska Bay is recommended during severe weather.    shoal, that is 600 yards NE of the S end of Hog Island. A large,
 During the fishing season, the harbor entrances become highly    thick kelp patch is S of Hog Island and should be avoided.
 congested with fishing vessels, and caution should be exercised     (276) Nateekin Bay, on the SW side of Unalaska Bay, affords
 when entering or leaving.                                          good anchorage, except for NE winds, for small craft in 3 to 4
  (266)  Seafood processing facilities are along the shores of Iliu-    fathoms, 490 yards E of the head of the middle bight on the NW
 liuk Harbor.                                                       shore. A shoal area covered I fathom is SE of this anchorage.
  (267) Expedition Island is in the S part of Iliuliuk Harbor. On
 the island is a small grove of evergreens. The trees are from Sitka  (277) Chart 16528.-Broad Bay, a bight in the W  shore of
 and were transplanted in 1805 by a Russian Orthodox priest. A      Unalaska Bay 2.5 miles S of Eider Point, affords fair anchorage in
 similar grove is near the old Indian village of Amaknak. The trees    25 fathoms, sandy bottom, 0.5 mile offshore. The anchorage is
 are 25 feet in height and their number apparently has not    exposed to NE weather.
 increased.                                                          (278) Wide Bay, 1.2 miles SW of Eider Point also affords fair
  (268) The dock resembling an off-center "T" on the NE side of    anchorage in 25 fathoms, mud and sand bottom, 0.4 mile from the
the island has a 210-foot face with 25 feet alongside; it is owned    W head of the bight.
and operated by Great Land Seafood and Universal Seafood.           (279) Makushin Valley, which borders on Broad Bay, is a flat,
  (269) Bailey Ledge, near midchannel at the S end of the passage    covered with grass, and about 15 feet above high water. A sizable
leading from Captains Bay to Iliuliuk Harbor, is of small extent,    stream courses through the valley. The shore along Broad Bay is
steep-to, and marked by a red and white daymark on a pile. Only a    composed of very coarse sand. A similar valley and shore are
small amount of kelp marks this ledge, which uncovers 2 feet.      found at Wide Bay. The cascade just N of Broad Bay can be seen
  (270) South Amaknak Rocks is in a foul area that extends from    only in the restricted area to the SE.
the S extremity of Amaknak Island. The smaller 15-foot rock near    (280) Eider Point is at the S end of a rocky bluff-formation of
the S edge of the foul ground is about 250 yards SE of the larger    great height which characterizes the coast for several miles along
30-foot rock. A deepwater channel is indicated midway between    the W  side of the entrance to Unalaska Bay. In places along this
this group of rocks and Bailey Ledge and also about 250 yards E    shore there are massive accumulations of loose rock and earth
of the E South Amaknak Rock, thence deep water may be carried    lying at the base of the bluffs, formed by slides. The bluffs are of
to the S entrance of Iliuliuk Harbor by favoring the E shore.      horizontal strata and like those about Cape Cheerful have a dis-
                                                                    tinct reddish hue. Eider Point is a comparatively low projection
  (271) Chart 16530.-Captains Bay is the arm at the head of    pointing S, and from it a narrow reef extends in the same direction
Unalaska Bay. Its entrance from Unalaska Bay direct is W  of    for 0.6 mile into Unalaska Bay. The reef uncovers 2 to 4 feet and
Amaknak Island. The bay is also entered, as previously indicated,    usually breaks at high tide but not generally along its outer limit.
by passing E of Amaknak Island through Iliuliuk Harbor, and    Although deep water can be carried from seaward to the vicinity
through the channel leading S from the harbor.                     of the end of the reef, Eider Point should be given a berth of at
 (272) The entrance to Captains Bay W  of Amaknak Island is    least I mile when passing S of it.
marked by Arch Rock, 4 feet high, adjacent to the point 0.8 mile    (28i) A 133-foot-high cascade, 1.5 miles N of Eider Point, is the
from the S extremity of the island. Directly opposite Arch Rock is    most distinguishable feature between the point and Cape Cheerful.
a bold point marking the W side of the entrance. A reef extends    It is an excellent landmark during a low-ceiling fog when only the
220 yards channelward from the bold point, and from the reef a    lower part of the cascade can be seen. The bluff at the cascade has
bar of 5 to 8 fathoms extends to a point nearly three-quarters of the    a remarkably smooth, stratified face, up to an elevation of about
distance across the entrance toward Arch Rock. Large vessels in    100 feet, where it forms a distinct horizontal line directly above
entering should pass about 100 to 200 yards off Arch Rock as the    which the upper strata have very irregular surfaces and appear to
deepwater channel will be found at those distances.                overhang in places. The cascade emerges from a slight depression
 (273) A wharf about 200 yards long with reported depths of 6 to    at the top to form a comparatively narrow white waterfall to a sea
8 fathoms alongside is on the E side of the bay about 1.7 miles    level bench at the foot of the bluff. On either side of the cascade
below Arch Rock. The wharf is owned by Crowley Maritime/    are rockslide and earthslide accumulations.





                                                     7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                      235


 (282) Chart 16518.-Cape Cheerful, on the N coast of    feet high, is between them. Several large waterfalls emerge from
Unalaska Island just W of Unalaska Bay, consists of a main and    the gullies between these bluffs; the most prominent of the water-
secondary headland about I mile apart, the two headlands being    falls is about 1.7 miles W of Cape Wislow. Emerging from a V-
separated by a low grassy valley emerging on the coast. The valley    shaped gully, the water makes a vertical drop of 139 feet to the
is flat at the base and resembles an amphitheater; it is called The    high-water line. Being a spray of white foamy water, it is visible
Dry Dock.                                                         against the dark rocky cliff for some distance, and makes a good
 (283) The main headland is the W of the two and is adjacent to    landmark when viewed from the NE.
Reese Bay; it projects farther to seaward and is marked by a peak  (291) Irishmans Hat, a square tower rock 85 feet high, is about
1,808 feet high. The peak is close to the extremity of the headland    0.2 mile offshore from the foot of the W cliff 3 miles SW of Cape
and dominates the end of the cape from most directions of    Wislow. This rock can seldom be identified from any direction
approach. It may, however, merge with the higher elevations back    except NE where it shows clear of the land. Irishmans Hat is sur-
of the secondary headland or be shut out by them when the peak    rounded by a kelp-covered reef.
and higher elevations are on range.                                (292) Driftwood Bay, just W of Irishmans Hat and about 6
 (284) ' Table Top Mountain, 2,710 feet high, is the highest sum-    miles W from Cape Cheerful, is an open bight, with a sand and
mit back of Cape Cheerful, but there are several peaks to the E of    gravel beach at its head. The lowland inshore from the bay is a
it approaching this elevation. The W  slope of this mountain    large, swampy valley covered with marsh grass. The lowland to
descends to the deep valley that extends inland from Reese Bay.    the S, separating the mountainous mass of Makushin Volcano
The mountain has a wide flat top.                                 from the highland in the vicinity of Mount Marshall Reese, often
  (285) The bluffs about Cape Cheerful present a rugged and    can be recognized from offshore when the mountains are in
almost vertical appearance, and rise to 1,000 feet.' They are of hor-    clouds.
izontal strata and have a distinct reddish hue. Large slides of loose  (293) Anchorage with some shelter from SW and SE weather
rock at the waterline can be seen along the cape. The area outside    can be found in 1-1 fathoms 0.5 mile from the W shore; with Point
the base of the bluffs, that is at or near the high-water line, is very    Tebenkof bearing about 275ï¿½. The depths shoal rapidly towards
rocky and strewn with boulders. Foul ground extends several hun-    the head of the bay, and depths of 3 fathoms and less are found
dred yards off the extremity of the secondary headland and its NE    600 yards offshore near the SE part of the bay.
side. Depths of over 20 fathoms are found 0.5 mile off Cape        (294) Point Tebenkof, the W point of Driftwood Bay, is proba-
z Cheerful.         :                                             bly the most readily identifiable of any of the points along this
  (286) The currents apparently meet in the vicinity of Cape    stretch of coast, especially from the SW. The point terminates in a
Cheerful, the flood setting NW from Unalga Pass and.NE from    grassy bluff 800 to 1,000 feet high which overlooks the points to
Point Kadin, creating eddies which set toward the shore. In rough    the SW.
weather the seas are apparently accentuated in the vicinity of the  (295) From Point Tebenkof the land rises gradually and evenly
cape and it is therefore advisable to give it a wide berth under such    to a flat-topped peak or ridge 3,505 feet high, 2.8 miles inland.
conditions.
  (287) Reese                                                   B    ay, a co v e   .between Cape Cheerful  and Cape Wis-   From the SW this ridge is seen on the skyline as a straight line
                   (27)  Reese Bay, a covebetween Cape Cheerful and Cape Wis-    slightly inclined to the horizon and terminating at the inshore end
low, is about I mile wide at the head, which consists of a low, nar-    in a smoothly rounded peak which is a spur from the higher land
row strip of sand with some marsh grass. It indents the shoreline    about Makushin Volcano.
about 1 mile, but appears larger because of the pronounced valley
or mountain gap that extends inland from the coarse sand beach at    Tebenkof and to the E of the ridge. This crater peak shows over
the head of the cove. It is a long flat, covered with grass, partly
                  filled by McLees Lake, and flanked by  the side slopes of  ridges thedge to the W as a flat-topped hump appearing as a part of this
filled by McLees Lake, and flanked by the side slopes of ridges         It is a useful landmark because it is often clear when all
 that terminate at each cape. Wislow Island is in the middle of    ridge. It s a useful landmark because t s often clear when all
                                                                     other peaks are obscured. It can be identified readily from NE as it
 Reese Bay, and although rocky, appears regularly rounded in    shows clear over the lower land at the head of Driftwood Bay,
 shape. It is 121 feet high, and the top is grass covered. Wislow    shows clear over the lower land at the head of Driftwood Bay,
 shape. It is o121 feet high, and the top is grass covered. Wislow    while all other points and landmarks merge with the higher land in
 Island stands out prominently against the low background and is a 
 good landmark during low visibility. Anchorage in 14 fathoms    the background
 may be found 0.5 mile NE from Wislow Island, with some shelter     (297) Point Tebenkof should be given a berth of at least 0.5 mile.
 from SE weather. There are depths of 2 to 3 fathoms S of Wislow    Two rocks awash at high water are 200 yards offshore about 0.4
                                                                     mile W of the point, and a 21/4-fathoms shoal, marked by heavy
 Island, but no shelter in N weather, and the shape of the bay appar-
 ently concentrates the effect of any N swell, so that it breaks well    kelp, is 375 yards offshore, outside of the rocks awash.
 off the shore at the head of the bay.                              (298) A large slide 1.3 miles W of Point Tebenkof may be iden-
  (288) The channel W of Wislow Island is blocked by a detached,    tified under certain conditions of light. The bare place has the
 rocky shoal, marked by kelp, with a depth of 1/4 fathoms, lying    shape of an enormous keyhole, about 600 feet high.
 350 yards W from the S end of Wislow Island.                       (299) Bishop Point is a level tablelike projection, 254 feet high,
  (289)  Cape Wislow, 2.5 miles W of Cape Cheerful, is domi-    about 3 miles SW from Point Tebenkof. It terminates in a pinnacle
 nated by Mount Marshall Reese, 2,545 feet high. This peak is at    102 feet high. A deep gorge extends 3.5 miles S from the point.
 the N end of the long ridge which parallels the low valley that    Cascades are visible in summer high up on the walls of this gorge.
 extends inland from Reese Bay. The land slopes gradually and       (300) Temporary anchorage in S weather may be found 0.4 mile
 evenly from Mount Marshall Reese to the end of Cape Wislow    from shore in about 16 fathoms 1 mile ENE from Bishop Point or
 where it terminates in a bluff about 600 feet high.               0.5 mile WSW from it.
   (290) SW of Cape Wislow, about I and 3 miles, respectively, are   (301) Two large waterfalls, one of which is divided into two cas-
 two remarkable rocky cliffs about 2,000 feet high. They appear as    cades about 100 feet high, are 1.6 miles SW from Bishop Point,
 equilateral triangles from the NW. A small triangular bluff, 560    -and are visible to the N and NE.




236                                                7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


 (302) Koriga Point, 5 miles SW of Point Tebenkof, is about 140    (314) The N side of the entrance to Makushin Bay is marked by
feet high and is difficult to distinguish except from the SW. There    Rock Islet, 104 feet high, 0.5 mile SW of Makushin Point, with
are a number of rocky islets close to shore E and W of the point.    several rocks between it and the point. There are no known dan-
Deep water, 40 fathoms, is found within 0.3 mile of the point.    gers if the S shore is given a clearance of at least 0.3 mile. An
 (303) A round hill, 320 feet high, isabout 0.8 mile SW of    abrupt shoal, with least depth of 16 fathoms is 1.2 miles SW from
Koriga Point, and can be identified from the SW when it is clear of    Rock Islet.
Point Tebenkof but is difficult to distinguish when seen against the  (315) A prevailing current sets in a N direction off Makushin
higher land.                                                      Bay. The combined effect of the currents, including tidal currents,
 (304) The shore SW of Koriga Point is composed of rocky bluffs    and winds causes a very noticeable choppy sea with attending tide
100 to 300 feet high. A small cove, with a sandy beach, 1.8 miles    rips across the entrance of the bay.
SW of the point, has depths of less than 5 fathoms, and the E part  (316) Vessels have anchored in 15 fathoms, mud bottom, about
of the cove is obstructed by rocks and kelp.                      0.3 mile off the beach in the cove E of Makushin Point with Priest
 (305) Point Kadin, 3 miles SW of Koriga Point, is an inconspic-    Rock, 80 feet high just S of the abandoned village, bearing 2300.
uous, rounding section of the NW coast of Unalaska Island. A      This anchorage is good for W and N weather, but with S weather
group of rocks 18 feet high are 250 yards off the cape. About 0.4    considerable swell makes in, and in E weather, it becomes quite
mile SW is another group of rocks 7 feet high, 350 yards offshore    rough.
from a waterfall about 60 feet high, visible only from the N.      (317) Humpback Bay, on the NE side of Makushin Bay, offers
Extending NW and W more than 0.5 mile from these rocks is a    good anchorage for large vessels in all but W weather. Enter the
rocky bank with depths from 51/4 to 8 fathoms, while depths of 11    bay from the SW on a course of 055ï¿½, keeping Cathedral Rocks
fathoms are found about I mile W. Tide rips occur in this vicinity,    about 600 yards to starboard. Anchorage can be had in 25 to 47
and in heavy weather the seas are perceptibly heavier. It is recom-    fathoms, mud bottom.
mended that Point Kadin be given a wide berth, especially in bad   (318) Anderson Bay, the S arm of Makushin Bay, affords sev-
weather.                                                          eral good anchorages of moderate size and at least one anchorage
 (306)  Makushin Volcano, 6,680 feet high, is a flat-topped    for one or more larger ships. A gravel spit, forming Tarasof Point,
snow-covered mass with several jagged peaks of about the same    on the W side of the entrance, is a distinctive feature. The bay
elevation surrounding it. It can easily be identified when not cov-    extends about 6 miles in a SE direction and terminates in two
ered by clouds. The westernmost of these jagged peaks is particu-    arms, Naginak Cove on the W and Udamak Cove on the E, with
larly sharp and distinct and has an elevation of 5,242 feet. A large    wedge-shaped Iksiak Point between them. Four well-rounded,
glacier covers the entire top of the peak and extends down into the    grass-covered islands are in the E half of the bay. These islands are
large valleys at its base. Faint clouds of vapor steam from the NE    well apart from one another; Peter Island, the northernmost, is
end of the snow field may be visible.                             near Anderson Point, the E entrance point of the bay, and the
                                                                   southernmost is well inside the entrance to Udamak Cove.
 (307)  Cape Kovrizhka, 5 miles SW of Point Kadin, is very
prominent and easily distinguished by the dome-shaped rocky hill,  (319) Anchorage in Anderson Bay is in 20 fathoms, mud bot-
233 feet high, that forms its westernmost extremity. Numerous    tom, in a bightbetween the second island from the N and the main
rocks are found around this cape, and it should be given a berth of    shore. The anchorage in Naginak Cove is in a mud bottom N of
1 mile. Under certain combinations of wind and current compara-    the narrow pass formed by two opposing points. The pass is about
tively heavy tide rips occur in the vicinity of the cape.         1.2 miles from Iksiak Point, and is obstructed by a dangerous 1/2-
                                                                   fathom shoal in midchannel. Anchorage in Udamak Cove is E of
 (308) Round Top, about 1 mile inland at Cape Kovrizhka, is a                                                        ridge that
massive, round-topped peak, 2,452 feet high, separated from the                                island to ' 
peaks surrounding Makushin Volcano and higher than any of the    extends from the middle of the island to the main E shore.
                                                                     (320) Cannery Bay, 1 mile to the E of Anderson Bay, extends
nearby peaks. It is a useful landmark.
                                                                   about 3 miles in a SE and E direction. Near the head and on the S
 (309) On the N side of Cape Kovrizhka is a small open bay
                  (309)  On the N side of Cape Kovzhka IS a small open bay    side of the bay is an abandoned wharf and cannery. The only
which affords a temporary anchorage during moderate SE    anchorage i the bay is at the E end, about 0.4 mile NE of the
weather. Differences from normal magnetic variation of as much    abandoned cannery in 15 to 17 fathoms, soft bottom.
                                                                     (321) Portage Bay extends about 4 miles in an E direction from
                                                                   Cannery Point. Two shoals, with least depths of 53/4 and 61/2 fath-
 (310) Chart 16517.-Volcano Bay, immediately S and E of    oms, are almost in midentrance. Indifferent anchorage for small
Cape Kovrizhka, is small and open to the W and S, forming a fair    vessels may be had in 19 fathoms, sticky bottom, midway between
anchorage for E weather. However, strong winds are to be    the N shore and the l1/2-fathom shoal and rocks near the head of
expected, and with winds shifting to the S and W the bay becomes    the bay.
quite rough and dangerous for small craft.                         (322) A trail to Unalaska begins at the prominent valley about 1
 (311) Makushin Bay, indenting the W side of Unalaska Island,    mile from the head and on the N side of Portage Bay. The trip to
is 2.5 miles wide at the entrance and extends in an E direction for    Unalaska takes about 8 hours.
5 miles to the entrance of Anderson, Cannery, and Portage Bays.    (323) Cape Starichkof, forming the S entrance point to
 (312) Makushin Point, on the N side of the entrance to    Makushin Bay, is marked by an off-lying rock 27 feet high.
Makushin Bay, rises to 762 feet and is grass covered. It is made    Numerous rocks, covered and awash, are found along the shore in
prominent by a number of small knolls scattered over its top. Just    this vicinity, but are not known to extend more than 0.3 mile from
N of the point there is a low valley that extends from Makushin    the beach. The mountains rise abruptly from the beach in this
Bay to Volcano Bay.                                               vicinity to 1,600 feet.
 (313) The abandoned village of Makushin is on the E side of       (324) Two miles S of Cape Starichkof is a deep narrow valley,
Makushin Point. Water is obtainable from a stream nearby.         trending E. Convenient anchorage in SE weather can be found 0.5





                                                     7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                        237


mile from shore off this valley in about 20 fathoms, with the cen-   (336)  At the head, the inner bay widens forming a basin 0.5 mile
ter of the valley bearing about 110ï¿½ and a conspicuous small 4-    in diameter where good anchorage may be found in 20 fathoms or
foot rock, 150 yards off the shore at the S edge of the valley, bear-    less. The SE part of this basin shoals abruptly from 10 fathoms to
ing about 1500. Launches can find more shelter by anchoring         less than I fathom.
closer to shore. A small bank with least depth of 61/4 fathoms is    (337)  Kashega Point, on the S side of the entrance to Pumices-
450 yards W of the rock previously mentioned.                       tone Bay, is 1,447 feet high and deep water is found close to its N
 (325) Skan Bay, on the W  side of Unalaska Island, has its NE     shore.
entrance point at the ledge 2 miles S of Cape Starichkof. It is 2
miles wide at the entrance and extends about 4 miles in a SE direc-  (338)  About 1.5 miles S of Kashega Point is a bold rocky island
                                                                    about 80 feet high, 600 yards from shore. McIver Bight, about 1
                                                                    mile in diameter, indents the shore E of this island. Good anchor-
 entrbance, 14 mileas 205p from 3the point on the NE side and 0.8    age can be found in the center of the bay in about 10 fathoms with
                                                                    the island bearing W. The bay is exposed to the W and NW, but
mile N of the SW entrance point.
                                                                    small boats can find some shelter from W weather by anchoring
 (327) The two arms at the head of Skan Bay are separated by
 Skan Point     sa high   e headland. Th e  E arm i s too deep for convey    closer to shore. The SE part of the bay has depths of 2 to 4 fath-
Skan Point, a high headland. The E arm is too deep for conve-
nient anchorage. The entrance to the S arm is about 0.4 mile wide    oms.
and choked with heavy kelp, but has a least depth of about 5 fath-   (339)- Kashega Bay is on the NW side of the long W extension
oms in midchannel. This arm extends over I mile to the S, has    of Unalaska Island and about 25 miles from Umnak Pass. At the
depths over 30 fathoms, and provides good shelter from all direc-    SW side of the entrance is Buck Island, low and grassy. About 1.5
tions; but the depth is too great in that the length of anchor cable    miles NW of Buck Island is a narrow rocky ledge that extends
required would not allow sufficient swinging room.                  NW about 0.4 mile on which are the two conspicuous Kashega
 (328) The survey ship used an anchorage just inside the SW        Pinnacles. The outer one is about 95 feet high, the inner one about
entrance point of Skan Bay, a little less than 0.5 mile from shore in    35 feet high. These pinnacles are the most conspicuous landmarks
15 fathoms, where some shelter from W weather was found.            in approaching the bay. About 0.3 mile NW of the higher pinnacle
                                                                    is a small rock 5 feet high.
 (329) Chart 16515.-Spray Cape, about 3 miles W  of the SW           (340) The bay has a navigable entrance 0.5 mile wide and is
entrance point of Skan Bay, is conspicuous from the N. A small    about 1.5 miles long in a SE direction. Kashega, a small village at
islet, about 80 feet high, is close to shore off its NW side, and    the SE end, has a school, church, sheep-ranch buildings, and a few
rocks covered at high water extend SW from this point.              houses. The village shows seaward through a small angle and then
 (330) The shore between Skan Bay and Spray Cape is fringed    is not visible until arriving well inside the bay. Neither a post
with pinnacle rocks and islets, and a bank, covered 63/4 fathoms at    office nor supplies are available. The anchorage in the bay is
its outer edge, extends more than 0.5 mile offshore.                exposed to the NW and the holding bottom is reported none too
 (331) From Spray Cape the shore trends S for 3.5 miles to the    good. In proceeding to the anchorage, favor the N shore to avoid a
entrance of Pumicestone Bay. It is high and steep, fringed by    kelp-marked 21/4-fathom shoal 250 yards from the S shore and 0.5
rocks. An anchorage with good shelter in SE weather can be found    mile NW of the village church; anchor in 6 fathoms with the
0.4 mile from shore at the entrance to Pumicestone Bay in 20 fath-    church bearing about 1650.
oms off a small bight.                                               (341) The valley at the head of Kashega Bay leads to Kuliliak
 (332) Pumicestone Bay, on the NW side of the long W  exten-    Bay on the Pacific Ocean side of Unalaska Island. It is about 4
sion of Unalaska Island, is 1.5 miles wide at the entrance, but nar-    miles long and I mile wide, and extends in an E-W direction. The
rows rapidly to less than 0.5 mile. The bay extends about 7 miles    floor of this valley is covered with freshwater lagoons which are
in an E direction with an abrupt S-turn to the N and E about 4    fed by small streams. The sides of the valley are bounded by high
miles from the entrance. The turn is partially blocked by a small    hills entirely covered with grass. The hills to the N are rolling,
flat-topped island about 30 yards in extent and 36 feet high, leav-    while to the S they are steep with a jagged skyline. The streams
ing a clear channel 300 yards wide.                                 which empty from the lagoons into Kashega Bay are shallow at
 (333) The N shore of Pumicestone Bay is formed by low, grass-    their mouths. Local residents of Kashega village report that during
covered hills. The shore is extremely rocky and rugged, the bluffs    heavy NW weather the tide backs up into the lagoons. The shores
having a general elevation of 50 feet. The S shore is almost verti-    of the lagoons are mostly rocky with'very few stretches of sand
cal and is characterized by many slides. The bay is divided by the    beach.
turn into an outer and an inner bay. The inner bay is almost sur-
                                                                      (342)  Just W of Kashega Bay is Buck Bight. It is clear, except
rounded by high, precipitous mountains, except at the head where
the mountains recede from the shore, leaving a narrow, flat grass-    near the head. The bight is open tothe N.
land some 200 to 400 yards in width.                                 (343) Sedanka Point, 175 feet high, is the W  extremity of the
 (334) Two large streams flow into the bay, one on the NE and the    ridge bordering the S side of Kashega Bay. A conspicuous rocky
other at the S side of the head of the bay. At the turn of Pumices-    pinnacle, 43 feet high, is 1.5 miles NW of the point of the cape
tone Bay is a strip of shingle beach on the E side, backed by a nar-    with a smaller pinnacle 200 yards to the SE. A long ledge extends
row strip of grassland, that extends to the high bluffs in back of it.   toward the pinnacles from the point and a conspicuous flat-topped
A conspicuous waterfall about 800 feet high is at the S end of the    islet, 105 feet high, is 0.3 mile off the point.
beach.                                                               (344) Kismaliuk Bay is an irregular-shaped bay that extends
  (335)  The outer bay is very deep. The water shoals gradually    roughly SE for 2 miles, then branching into two arms. The arms
from over 40 fathoms at the entrance to less than 30 fathoms at the    are separated by a low broad point from which a chain of bare
turn. There is little shoal water suitable for anchorage, and no pro-    rocky islets extend about 0.5 mile in a NW direction. The outer
tection from W weather.                                             islet is 20 feet high.






238                                                7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


 (345) The N arm is of little importance and affords little protec-    seaward on the line of the ridge. A deep, wide cleft across the mid-
tion from NW weather. The depth shoals gradually from 17 fath-    die of this peninsula may be identified when bearing S of SE.
oms at the entrance.                                               (355) Several small detached banks, covered 10 to 12 fathoms,
 (346) The S arm, protected by the chain of islets, affords excel-    surrounded by deeper water are to the N of Chernofski Point.
lent protection. The entrance channel is clear and about 500 yards  (356) Chernofski Harbor is a small, land-locked harbor that in
wide, with a midchannel depth of 11 fathoms. The water shoals    its inner part affords complete shelter from swell and from winds
gradually to the head of the arm,                                 except williwaws. Depths are suitable for anchorage; bottom is
 (347)  Alimuda Bay is the long bay immediately W of Kisma-    mud. With heavy S and SE winds the harbor experiences a strong
liuk Bay and separated from it by Manning Point, a bold, blunt,    sweep from the valleys at the head. the entrance between Chernof-
precipitous point of land from which an exposed rock ledge makes    ski Point and West Point is through a narrow canal formed by low
out some 400 yards in a NW direction. The bay extends about 3.5    promontories, about 4 miles SW of Cape Aspid.
miles SE, with a width at the entrance of over 1.5 miles.          (357) The entrance to Chernofski Harbor is difficult as there are
 (348) The water shoals gradually from 20 fathoms at the    no conspicuous landmarks. From the entrance, the NE tangent of
entrance to the gravel beach at the head. About I mile inside the    Umnak Island (Cape Idak) bears 309ï¿½ (see chart 16500). Wedge-
entrance a low, flat, reef, with several exposed rocks, makes out    shaped Ram Point, about I mile E of Chernofski Point, may help
some 300 yards from a point on the E shore. About 1 mile farther   to identify the locality. A shoal with a least depth of 51/2 fathoms is
inside, shoal water, that extends some 600 yards off the same    almost in the middle of the entrance, about 900 yards SW of Cher-
shore, has a least depth of 11/2 fathoms. A bar, covered 43/4 fath-    nofski Point. A midchannel course should be followed into the
oms, extends SW across the bay about 0.7 mile from the head.    harbor because of the projecting ledges that extend on both sides.
Between this bar and the head of the bay, a depth of 8 fathoms is    Anchorage can be had in the middle of Mutton Cove in 10 to 12
found, where small vessels can anchor. As this bar is exposed to    fathoms, mud bottom.
all N and W weather, large swells rolling over it, often breaking  (358) A large pier is on the NE side of the cove; a smaller pier is
there, reform to pile up in breakers at the head of the bay. This bay    on the SW side.
affords no real protection for any but small boats and then only in  (359) Water can be obtained from a stream in the S part of the
the extreme SE bend behind a small reef making out from the SE    bay. The head of the bay, at the SE end, is shallow and can be used
shore.                                                            only by small boats.
  (349)  Wedge Point, a bold narrow ridge having remarkable ser-    (360) The N coast of Unalaska Island W of Chernofski Harbor is
rations, separates Alimuda and Aspid Bays. Aspid Bay extends    described in connection with Umnak Pass.
about 2.2 miles in a S direction and affords little protection from N
and NW weather. The depth at the entrance is about 15 fathoms;     (361)  Chart 16522.-Sedanka Island, close to the E end of
from there the water shoals gradually to the head of the bay. The    Unalaska Island on the Pacific side and separated from the latter
bottom is good for anchoring in 9 to 10 fathoms.                  island by narrow, deep Udagak Strait, appears as a part of
  (350) Cape Aspid, on the N side of Unalaska Island about 15    Unalaska Island. The island is mountainous and covered with tun-
miles from its W extremity at Umnak Pass, has a conical hilltop,    dra. There are numerous peaks, separated by deep valleys, running
901 feet high, near its outer end. The shape of the hill, terminating    NW, but none of the peaks are conspicuous from E. The highest
in bluffs at the shore, is unlike any other land in the vicinity, as all   peak, 2,130 feet, is in the SW part of the island. The outer coast is
the adjoining hills are flat topped with comparatively gentle    broken by bays and coves separated by bold, rocky headlands.
slopes. The cape is a useful landmark from all directions except N  (362) Cape Sedanka, the E point of the island, terminates in a
where the hill merges with the higher land to the S. A ledge    knoll 375 feet high. Rocks and islets fringe the shore, but deep
extends about 400 yards offshore, terminating in an islet about 24    water is found at a distance of 400 yards. The coast on the SE side
feet high.                                                        of the cape is unusually steep and reaches an elevation of 1,269
  (351) The wide bight SW of Cape Aspid affords shelter in E and    feet.
 S weather in 12 to 15 fathoms, 0.4 mile from shore. A 43/4-fathom  (363) Egg Island is 0.6 mile in diameter, 541 feet high, and is
 spot, marked by kelp, is 0.6 mile NE of Ram Point and about 0.4    about 1.5 miles NE from Cape Sedanka. It is a grassy island with a
 mile from shore.                                                  bluff rocky shore, and has numerous rocks and islets within 200
  (352) At some distance off the coast, between Capes Aspid and    yards of the shore, but beyond this distance deep water is found all
 Spray, the currents vary in intensity from little or nothing off    around the island.
 Spray Cape to about I knot off Cape Aspid. The current generally   (364) Old Man Rocks, a group of four, two of which are promi-
 sets E, the flood being stronger than the ebb. Farther inshore, at   nent, are 0.9 mile NW of Egg Island. The two conspicuous rocks
 Cape Aspid, the currents are stronger and small tide rips appear at    are 100 and 39 feet high. The group is surrounded by deep water at
 the turn of the current. These rips extend as far E as Sedanka    a distance of 200 yards.
 Point.                                                             (365) Sedanka Pass separates Egg Island and Old Man Rocks
                                                                     from Sedanka Island. It is about 1.5 miles wide and has depths of
  (353) Chart 16516.-Ram Point, 2.7 miles SW of Cape Aspid,    30 to 40 fathoms. The Sedanka Island shore should be given a
 is a prominent wedge-shaped rock 240 feet high. Ledges, bare at    berth of 0.5 mile. Strong currents with rips are experienced occa-
 low water, extend 0.2 mile offshore from the point. To the W of    sionally around Cape Sedanka and just S of Old Man Rocks.
 the point there is a stretch of low land over which the masts of ves-  (366) The Signals are three rocks off the E coast of Sedanka
 sels anchored in Chernofski Harbor are visible from offshore.     Island. Outer Signal, 30 feet high, is 3.2 miles S of Egg Island
  (354) Chernofski Point, the E entrance point of Chernofski    and has a small rock, 10 feet high, 0.3 mile SE of it. Deep water is
 Harbor, is the extremity of a narrow peninsula composed of sev-    found close to these rocks. Inner Signal is 3 miles S of Cape
 eral hills, the highest being 315 feet. The seaward face of the pen-    Sedanka and 0.8 mile off the nearest Sedanka Island shore; it is
 insula is rugged and broken and there are rocks that extend    126 feet high and is surrounded by a shoal and reef area 0.4 mile





                                                     7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                        239


in diameter. A bar, covered 7 to 8 fathoms reaches from this area    (375) Udagak Bay, an indentation in the W  shore of Udagak
to the nearest point of Sedanka Island. The passage between the    Strait, affords anchorage in 12 to 19 fathoms, sand and mud bot-
Inner and Outer Signals is clear.                                   tom, about 0.3 to 0.4 mile from the head of the bay. Small boats
 (367)  About 15 miles SE of Egg Island (see chart 16520), after    may anchor in 6 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom, farther toward the
gradual shoaling from the 100-fathom curve to about 45 fathoms,    head. The bay affords good protection in any weather.
the water deepens to over 60 fathoms, forming an underwater          (376) Light tide rips were frequently observed in the area off the
basin about 6 miles wide that leads NW into Beaver Inlet, furnish-    mouth of Udagak Bay, sometimes they extended well into the bay.
ing an excellent pathway for vessels equipped with echo sounding    These rips usually occurred when the wind was contrary to the
apparatus. A crescent-shaped bank of rock formation within the    current. Numerous swirls were also encountered in the same area
basin of deep water and 2 miles E of Egg Island has general depths    at all times when the currents were more than I knot.
of 12 to 14:fathoms and a least depth of 9 fathoms on the W part of  (377) Beaver Inlet has its entrance between Brundage Head and
the bank. The 50-fathom curve surrounding the bank approxi-    Cape Sedanka and extends 17 miles SW into the E end of
mates a circle about 1.5 miles in diameter.                         Unalaska Island. It has an average width of about 3 miles in its
 (368) When navigating on soundings in thick weather this bank    outer reaches, narrowing to about 1.6 miles near its head. The
and the characteristic deep water afford an opportunity to check a    deep water in the bay extends E between Unalga and Egg Islands,
vessel's position. The navigator in finding his way on soundings to    making access to the inlet comparatively easy for a vessel
the bank must guard against the mischance of nearing Egg Island;    equipped with echo sounding apparatus.
the shoaling of the depths in doing so may mislead him in assum-     (378)  Currents in Beaver Inlet are negligible, and in the entrance
ing that he is approaching the bank. A definite knowledge from    between Egg and Unalga Islands will not ordinarily exceed 2
soundings taken regularly along the course from seaward is neces-    knots.
sary to avoid this error.
                                                                     (379)  Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as
 (369)  From Cape Sedanka the shore on the Pacific side trends    40 from the normal variation have been observed on Round Island
SW for 3 miles, then turns SE for 1 mile to a precipitous point,                      on the N shore of Erskine Bay.
enclosing a small bight where temporary anchorage in W  weather
can be found. A depth of 7 fathoms is 0.5 mile from shore in the     (380)  From Cape Sedanka, the SE entrance point of Beaver
SW part of the bight. Thebottom of fine gray sand slopes gradu-    Inlet, the shore trends NW for 1.6 miles to a point marked by a
ally from the sand beach at the head of the bight to the 20-fathom    small natural arch and having a chain of rocky islets that extend N
curve 1 mile offshore. To enter the bight,ipass midway between    about 200 yards. Just W of this point is an open bight, 1 mile wide
Outer Signal and Egg Island.                                        and 0.4 mile long, which furnishes convenient temporary anchor-
                                                                    age in S weather, well out of any swell. Anchor in the middle of
 (370) On the SE side of Sedanka Island, E of Udagak Strait, are               ther, well out of any shor in the middle of
three bays separated by bold headlands; the largest bay is 4 miles    the bight about 0.3 mile from shore, with Old Man Rocks showing
                 NE of the entrance to Udagak Strait and extends 2 miles inland in    between the rocky islets off the point to the E, in about 16 fath-
NE of the entrance to Udagak Strait and extends 2 miles inland in    oms. Smaller boats canmove farther into lesser depths near the W
a fNW direction. Good anchorage may be found 0.5 mile from theom      s. Smaller boats can move farther into lesser depths near the W
a NW direction. Good anchorage may be found 0.5 mile from the
head of the bay in 7 fathoms. This bay is protected from all except
SE weather. The two other bays, that are nearer Udagak Strait,       (381) Sisek Cove, about 4 miles SW from Old Man Rocks, is
afford protection from the N and W.                                 too deep for anchorage.
 (371)  The S end of Sedanka Island is a double point. On the E      (382)  Udamat Bay makes into Sedanka Island from Beaver
prong is a conspicuous sharp pinnacle rising about 100 feet from a    Inlet 5.5 miles SW from Old Man Rocks and just W of Biorka, a
flat ledge.                                                         small native settlement having a conspicuous church. The bay is 1
 (372) Udagak Strait, between Sedanka and Unalaska Islands,    mile wide to a point 0.8 mile from its head where it narrows to 0.3
provides a direct passage from the Pacific Ocean to Beaver Inlet.    mile. A low valley extends SE from the head of the bay to the
Foul ground extends 300 yards from the W  shore of the strait at    outer coast. About 1.4 miles S of the E entrance point, a reef
the entrance, but a midchannel course clears this ground. The nar-    makes out 200 yards from the E shore. With this exception the
rows at the halfway point in Udagak Strait have a width of 0.25    shores are clear, and a depth of 20 fathoms will be found within
mile, and the channel is slightly over 0.1 mile wide in a depth over    250 yards or less of the shore. If necessary to anchor in the bay, the
10 fathoms,                                                         best places are at the head of the bay or just N of the reef, men-
 (373)  The current velocity is about 2 knots on the flood and    tioned above, in a small bight indenting the E shore, but there will
about 1 knot on the ebb. At the S entrance of the strait and through    be scant swinging room. A small rocky patch, covered 15 to 25
the narrows the flood sets from the Pacific. (See the Tidal Current    fathoms, is 0.4 mile NW from the same reef, and may offer
Tables for current predictions.)                                    anchorage with more swinging room.
 (374) The strait has good water throughout. However, in the nar-    (383)  Strait Bay, about 8 miles SW from Old Man Rocks, is 1.1
rows, which run E and W, the channel turns around a reef on the S    miles long, tapering from 1 mile wide at its entrance to 0.4 mile
side of the E end, and then in a reverse turn passes around a rocky    wide near the head. The bay is clear except for a 5/2-fathom spot
shoal on the N side at the W end. The reef is off the NE side of a    in the center. Anchorage may be had at the head of the bay in 20
broad gravel spit that forms the S side of the narrows. The reef is    fathoms about 250 yards from shore. A valley extends S and E
marked by kelp and rocks awash at three points. One or more of    from its head and during a blow the wind is funneled into the bay
the rocks are generally visible. The rocky shoal has a least deptfi   through this valley.
of 3/4 fathoms and extends 200 yards from the S side of a pointed,   (384) Amugul Bay makes S from Beaver Inlet about 3 miles
gravel spit which forms the W  end of the N side of the narrows.    SW of the entrance to Udagak Strait. Round Island, 136 feet
The currents in the narrows necessitate caution as to their sheering    high, marks the E side of Amugul Bay entrance. The bay affords
effect on a vessel swinging to avoid the dangers. Anchorage in the    fair anchorage for medium-sized craft in 22 fathoms, mud bottom,
S entrance of the strait is uncomfortable because of the current.   0.2 mile from the head of the W bight. The S arm affords excellent




240                                                  7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


anchorage for small craft in 10 fathoms, mud bottom, 0.1 mile    coasts of Sedanka Island and Unalaska Island, as far W  as Eagle
from the head.                                                      Point, are free from outlying dangers.
 (385)  At the head of Beaver Inlet are four small bays; named in    (396) Between Udagak Strait and Kayak Cape the valleys
order, following the S shore around to the N shore, they are:    between the headlands have been partially filled with debris, form-
Tanaskan Bay, Final Bay, Kisselen Bay, and Erskine Bay. Tem-    ing a series of bights with shingle beaches at their heads. Behind
porary anchorage only can be found near the heads of these bays    these beaches are grassy flats and, in most cases, lagoons. The
for medium-sized craft. The small bight on the S side of Kisselen    headlands between the bights protrude from the generally high
Bay affords excellent anchorage for small craft in 5 fathoms, mud   mountain mass. The valleys, with the exception of one that leads
bottom, 0.1 mile from the head. In approaching this anchorage,    through a mountain pass to the head of one of the bays of Beaver
care should be taken to avoid a reef, which uncovers 1 foot, 160    Inlet, are in the form of amphitheaters. Numerous rocks and ledges
yards S of the S island of a group of four. In Final Bay are heavy    are within 50 to 100 yards from the shores and occasionally as far
williwaws and a strong draw.                                        as 200 to 350 yards. The waters along the shoreline are generally
 (386) Dushkot Island is along the N shore of Beaver Inlet near    foul with covered and bare boulders.
the head.                                                             (397) Hive Bay, about 5 miles SW of Udagak Strait, is the larg-
 (387) Uniktali Bay makes into the N shore of Beaver Inlet about    est of these bights, its two arms affording good protection from N
15 miles above its entrance. This bay is nearly 3 miles long in a W  weather. The W arm of the bay affords good anchorage in 8 to 10
direction and 0.3 mile wide at its narrowest part near its head. An  fathoms with generally good holding ground. A rock that uncovers
anchorage, practically landlocked, but limited to medium-sized      3 feet is on the W  side of the entrance to the E arm of Hive Bay.
vessels, may be found in 20 fathoms, muddy bottom, 0.5 mile    The headland between the two arms is recessive and undistin-
from the head of Uniktali Bay. In entering, keep to midbay as far    guished. The headland W  of Hive Bay is deeply eroded. It has
as the narrows, then favor the S shore to avoid a 6-fathom shoal    sharp ridges and three closely spaced summits of nearly equal ele-
that is 260 yards off the N shore.                                  vation, with successively lower spurs toward the point. The cliffs
       (388) Small Bay, E of Uniktali Bay, affords good anchorage in    are marked by narrow dark strata rising toward the point. The W
 (10 fathoms 0.3 mile from the head.                               side of this headland has a very conspicuous boulder slide.
10 fathoms, 0.3 mile from the head.
                                                                     (398)  The bightjust W of Hive Bay has a short stretch of shingle
 (389) Ugadaga Bay is an indentation in the N shore of Beaver
 (389)  Ugadaga Bay is an indentation in the N shore of Beaver    beach, behind which is a valley leading inland over gentle slopes
Inlet 8 miles above the entrance. From the head of Ugadaga Bay a    beach, behm d which is            imated elevation of 400 feet.
                                                                    to a mountain pass with an estimated elevation of 400 feet.
trail leads to Unalaska. Fair anchorage may be found 0.4 mile
                                                                    Beyond the pass is Tanaskan Bay, an arm of Beaver Inlet. The
from the head of the bay in 20 fathoms, even bottom.                headland forming the W  side of this bight has a reddish cliff, par-
 (390)  Agamgik Bay, indenting the N shore of Beaver Inlet, 5.5    ticularly noticeable from the SW.
miles SW of its entrance, offers anchorage in good holding ground     (399)  Staraya Bay, N of Kayak Cape, is divided into two parts
with fair shelter, except in severe SE weather. The bay is 1.2 miles    by a bold promontory on which the remnants of volcanic craters
wide at the entrance. Opposite a small rocky peninsula jutting out    are easily seen. Near the outer end of the headland forming the E
from the W  side about 1.4 miles from the W  entrance point, the    side of the N arm of the bay is a natural rock bridge arching from
width is reduced to 0.4 mile. The anchorage is in this narrow por-    the cliff and footing in the shallow water near the shore. This span
tion in 16 to 20 fathoms. The bay is comparatively free from willi-    is about 50 feet, and the height under the arch is about the same.
waws.                                                               Ledges extend about 200 yards offshore from the outer end of this
 (391) Eagle Rock, a large, flat-topped pinnacle 75 feet high, is    headland. The W  arm of Staraya Bay is a bight which has a shin-
125 yards off the rounded point on the E side of the entrance to    gle beach of unusual length and height, 20 to 25 feet, and a large
Agamgik Bay. Off the W point of the entrance, covered rocks and    lagoon behind the beach. In the center of the mouth of this bight is
rocks awash extend from 0.1 to 0.3 mile into the entrance. A rock,    a shoal area with a 1-fathom rock.
6 feet high, is outside of this rocky area and 600 yards E of the    (400)  Kayak Cape is the first prominent point W  of Udagak
point.                                                              Strait. It is lower than points to the W, bold at the extremity and its
 (392) The N shore of Beaver Inlet (see chart 16528) extends E     narrow ridge is marked by several prominent humps, 1,000 to
from the E entrance point of Agamgik Bay for almost 3 miles to    1,400 feet high. Both sides of the cape display a conspicuous
the W entrance point of Deep Bay, where it turns sharply to the N   black stratum about 400 feet high at the point of the cape. These
and NW for 1.2 miles, forming the W shore of Deep Bay, which    strata may be seen when the overcast is not too low.
has been described earlier with Unalga Pass. About halfway
between the two bays is a conspicuous waterfall, 350 feet high,       (401)  Chart 16521.-From Kayak Cape W the shoreline trends
with a pinnacle rock 40 feet high just to the W of its base.        to the SW and is deeply indented by several large bays, affording
 (393) The gap between the mountains on either side of the S part    various degrees of protection. Only two of these, Usof Bay and
of Udagak Strait stands out in a measure, from a SE direction,    Blueberry Bay, are considered to give adequate protection from all
against a background of mountains on the W  side of the N end of    kinds of weather. Raven Bay is landlocked at the head and gives
the strait. The 1.5-mile stretch of shore forming the S entrance of    excellent protection for small craft.
the strait on the Unalaska Island side is at the base of a very steep  (402) Protection Bay, just W of Kayak Cape, extends about 2
side of a ridge, the summit of which is 1,920 feet high.            miles inland. There is a slight hook to the W at the head of the bay,
 (394)  Mountain ridges just W of Udagak Strait are normal to the    giving some protection for small craft from the S. Rocks extend
trend of the outer coast, generally ending in deeply eroded cliffs.    500 yards SE off the point of the hook. This bay has the least shel-
The mountains appear in confusion and can be identified only by a    ter of any in the vicinity, but its depth is more convenient for
close study of the chart.                                           anchoring.
 (395) With the exception of Outer Signal, Inner Signal, the reef    (403)  Cape Yanaliuk, about 4 miles SW of Kayak Cape, is eas-
off Reef Point, and the rocks and ledges close to shore, the S    ily identified by the mushroom-shaped rock just off the point.




                                                      7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                      241


Altogether there are two small rock islets just off this point. The    the set is to the E on a rising tide. There is not sufficient proof that
cape is narrow and precipitous except for a short distance on the    this condition exists on every rising tide.
SW side, which is a grass-covered slope, topped and flanked at     (410) Cape Prominence, the W entrance point of Usof Bay, is
each end by rock cliffs. The cape has a markedly jagged appear-    marked by a tall cylindrical pinnacle connected at its base with the
ance. A small bight on the E side of the cape extends 1 mile inland    main point; it shows conspicuously from SSW. A flat ledge makes
but affords no protection in bad weather.                         off 200 to 300 yards, and may be mistaken for the ledges off Reef
 (404) Three Island Bay, W of Cape Yanaliuk, extends inland    Point.
for about 5 miles in a NNW direction; it affords fair protection for  (4H) Another cylindrical rock is about 700 yards N on the E
small craft in any weather in 8 to 15 fathoms at the head of the    side of the cape. It is not so noticeable, but is an aid in identifying
bay, behind three small islands which give the bay its name. Deep    Cape Prominence. Breakers extend for about 500 yards off the
water carries through to the head of the bay between the islands.    cape.
Care must be exercised not to anchor too close to the rocks N of   (412) Open Bay is the bight between Cape Prominence and
the E island, nor to the shoal water at the N end of the bay. Swing-    Reef Point. It has anchorage for large or small vessels in 20 to 5
                                                                     Reef Point. It has anchorage for large or small vessels in 20 to 5
ing room is restricted for vessels exceeding 100 feet in length, and    fathoms with good holding ground and sufficient swingiig room.
the area affords only fair anchorage and protection for small craft.   It affords limited protection from the SW and E, but none from the
It is subject to violent williwaws, and in S weather a rather heavy    S and SE.
swell from outside makes it uncomfortable. Foam Cove, 1 mile
                 swell from outside makes it uncomfortable. Foam Cove, I mile  (413) Reef Point is easily identified by a conspicuous cathedral
above the W entrance point, provides fair temporary anchorage    rock, 240 feet high, just off the S extremity. A ledge, just a few
near the mouth of a stream which shows conspicuously from the    feet above high water, extends 0.5 mile off the point. No dangers
bay entrance.                                                     were noted outside of this ledge. All of this ledge is not above high
 (405)  Blueberry Bay, the next bay W  of Three Island Bay,    water; the depth is 5 fathoms between the outer end and inner
extends inland in a NW direction for about 3 miles. A fairly sharp    parts. The outer end is a reef which is continually awash, because
turn to the N for about 1 mile makes the head of the bay land-    of the ocean swell, at all stages of the tide, but may actually be 2
locked and affords good shelter. The upper half of Blueberry Bay    feet above low water.
has a rugged shorelinecharacterized by narrow gravel and boulder
                                                                       (414) Raven Bay, on the W side of Reef Point, is entered on
beaches, or rocky shoreline with smooth rock slopes. Anchorage    either side of Ogangen Island and extends 3.5 miles inland. The
                                                                     either side of Ogangen Island and extends 3.5 miles inland. The
may be had in 15 to 20 fathoms in the middle of Blueberry Bay    island, 1,180 feet high and 2 miles long by 0.5 mile wide, has its
                                                                     island, 1,180 feet high and 2 miles long by 0.5 mile wide, has its
about 0.5 mile below the head in good holding bottom. The swing-
                                                                     longer axis paralleling the W shore of the bay; the passage
ing room is entirely adequate for small craft and should suffice for    l e    is prlein  th           of t    a thos
                                                                     between is 0.2 to 0.4 mile wide and has depths of 9 to 15 fathoms.
ships of moderate size. Being entirely landlocked, there is almost
entire freedom from swell. Winds are generally more moderate (415) E of Ogangen Island, the bay narrows from a width of2
than in nearby localities and, as far as is known, never blow across    miles at the entrance to 0.3 mile at the N end of the island; depths
than in nearby localities and, as far as is known, never blow across ae2 o4 ahm.N fteilnCo rnro n
the bay. Water is available.
                 the bay. Water is available. ~~are 25 to 40 fathoms. NE of the island, Crow Arm, narrow and
                  thalebay  WCatpe is chavraciz abae              stocking-shaped, extends 1 mile to the N; the arm is too deep for
 (4o6) Whalebone Cape is characterized by a bare, rocky, 2,000-
                  (4o6  Whlebne   apeis  caraterzedby  bar, rcky 2,00- the restricted swinging room and is subject to considerate swell
foot peak, that appears as a series of broken rust-colored cliffs the restricted swinging room and is subject to considerate swell
                                                                     during S weather.
from offshore. At the base of the mountain is a gray rockslide
about 300 feet high. The foot of the slide extends to the high water  (416) The W arm of Raven Bay narrows to 250 yards 0.6 mile N
line. The shore around the point of the cape is very rugged and    of Ogangen Island and continues N for another mile; excellent
broken, and dangerous for boat landings because of numerous    anchorage for small boats may be had in 3 fathoms just S of the
rock islets, rocks awash, and covered rocks close inshore,        prominent islet at the head of the arm. The sandflats at the extreme
 (407) Usof Bay, just W  of Whalebone Cape, extends inland    head are suitable for beaching small craft.
about 8 miles in a NNW direction and affords good anchorage at     (417) The small cove W  of the middle part of the narrows
the head in 20 fathoms, sand bottom. The width of the bay nar-    affords anchorage for small boats in 3 to 5 fathoms, but the swing-
rows to 0.5 mile about 5 miles from the entrance and a slight turn    ing room is restricted by the reef on the W side. At the head of the
to the N for about 1 mile makes the head of the bay landlocked.    cove are abandoned saltery buildings.
The general depth of the bay is over 60 fathoms. A small hanging   (418) A rock that uncovers is 400 yards S of the cove and
glacier shows at the head of the bay over the W side of the nar-    slightly to the E of midchannel; the best water is W of the rock.
rows as seen from the entrance.                                   Just S of the entrance to the narrows, a 43/4-fathom rocky shoal can
 (408) Good anchorage for small craft is found in Johnson Cove,    be avoided by favoring the shore on either side.
at the mouth of a canyon on the W side about 5 miles in from the   (419) Eagle Bay, 3 miles W of Raven Bay, is about 1.3 miles
entrance, in 7 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom. The S arm of Johnson    wide at its entrance and extends 2.5 miles in a N direction; it is
Cove should be avoided as it is shallow and filled with rocks. To    characterized by a particularly rugged and precipitous shoreline.
the N of the canyon is a conspicuous cascade.                     High rocky cliffs rise directly from the high waterline in most
  (409) The shoreline of Usof Bay is rocky and precipitous except    parts of the bay and even where cliffs do not exist, the rise is very
at the heads of several coves or bights which occur at irregular    steep and broken. The very rugged country surrounding Eagle Bay
intervals. Thick, long grass covers the flats and ascends the moun-    causes violent williwaws in NW, N, and E weather. Snipe Point,
tains, in some cases covering the slopes as high as 2,000 feet.    which divides the bay into two arms, is very rugged at its S tip and
There are numerous rock islets offshore at short distances and    quite rough and weathered on the top.
irregular intervals. Kelp is general along the rocky shoreline. A  (420) The E side of the entrance to the bay is marked by Spire
strong W set of the current was noticed on the rising tide off the W  Rock, a very sharp pinnacle, 100 feet high and about 100 yards
side of the entrance to Usof Bay in 1939. This condition was noted    offshore. On the W side of the entrance Label Reef, awash at high
by the survey party because it was generally taken for granted that    water, extends about 400 yards offshore from the E side of Eagle




242                                                 7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


Point. This reef is plainly visible at any stage of the tide because of    wise the bottom of the outer bay is very even, decreasing in depth
breakers.                                                          very gradually from 30 fathoms at the entrance to 12 fathoms at an
 (421) Each arm of Eagle Bay is about 1 mile long and both    average distance of about 200 yards off the N shore.
extend in a NE direction. The northernmost arm is only 0.4 mile     (432) Inner Kililiak Bay affords good shelter E of Nest Rock in
wide at its widest point and has numerous islands near its head.    7 fathoms in all weather. The entrance is about 500 yards wide
The islands are flat, grass covered on top, with steep rocky sides    between the cliffs 200 feet high on the W side and on the steep tip
rising directly from the water, and are used as nesting places by    of Repetition Point on the E side.
many birds in the summer months. The arm is navigable as far as     (433) Dome Rock, the outer rock of a conspicuous group that
these islands.                                                     extends 120 yards SW from Repetition Point, is a good landmark
 (422) The E arm of Eagle Bay is about 0.5 mile wide for half of    on the E side of the entrance to the inner bay; the rock is about 30
its length, and affords good shelter in all but extreme S weather    feet wide and 5 feet high.
about 0.3 mile inside the entrance.                                 (434) Along the W shore of the entrance to inner Kuliliak Bay,
 (423) Good anchorage may be had in Eagle Bay, but the S swell    flat reefs, rocks awash, covered rocks, and heavy kelp form a
is often uncomfortable. Anchorage with protection from all    fringe some 200 yards wide. In this area is a large black rock, part
weather is available below the island in the N arm, but swinging    of which rises to a sharp point 10 feet above high water, 75 yards
room is limited. Depths of 11 fathoms extend into both arms of the    out from the base of the shore cliff. About 160 yards NE from this
bay; however, broken bottom with a 31/4-fathom spot extends from    large, black rock and 180 yards offshore is Perch Rock, a small,
Snipe Point almost halfway across the entrance to the N arm.       black rock about 1 foot high and surrounded by kelp.
 (424) A portage at the head of Eagle Bay leads to Pumicestone      (435) Trava Point is a small, flat, grassy point on the S side of
Bay on the N side of the island.                                   inner Kuliliak Bay and 0.5 mile NE of the entrance. Nest Rock is
 (425) Eagle Point is the prominent headland between Eagle and    a small, grass-covered rock island, 15 feet high and 0.9 mile NE of
Kuliliak Bays. The point is very rugged at its S end, and is distin-    the entrance. Williwaw Point is a low, sandy point 0.3 mile
guished by two prominent mountain peaks. The S peak, at the    beyond Nest Rock. A cascade is 0.5 mile inland from the head of
extreme S end of the point, is 1,340 feet high; when viewed from    the bay.
the S, it appears conical in shape with a very sharp top, but from  (436) The W  shore of the inner bay is a curving, pebble beach
the E or W it appears flat on top, with a sharp, rock peak at the S    fronting a low, grassy bluff. A low, wide valley, through which fog
end of the flat portion. The N peak, about I mile NE from the S    often drifts and winds always draw in N and W weather, extends
one, is 1,520 feet high, and appears pyramidal in shape from all    across Unalaska Island to Kashega Bay. The W and NW shores of
directions, with a bare rock top. The blunt, S face of the cape is    the inner bay, E of Nest Rock, are lined with low reefs, rocks
much weathered, with high rock cliffs, numerous slides, and many    awash and covered, and heavy kelp for a distance of 100 to 300
pinnacle rocks along the shore.                                    yards offshore. A rock, awash at half tide and surrounded by kelp,
 (426) A shoal, with 14 fathoms 0.4 mile from shore, makes out    is 300 yards off the N shore directly N of the entrance. A fringe of
to S from the most S tip of Eagle Point. Passing vessels are    heavy kelp, 50 yards wide, lines the S shore from the entrance to
advised to stay at least 0.5 mile off the cape in order to keep out-    Trava Point.
side the 20-fathom curve.                                           (437) Proceeding to sheltered anchorage inside the inner bay, the
 (427) Appreciable tidal current was noted for a distance of 1    controlling depth is 41/2 fathoms after passing the entrance. A
mile off Eagle Point. The flood sets W  and the ebb E. With an    channel with this depth is close to the SE shore of the bay and just
appreciable swell running against this current, high, sharp, broken    outside a heavy fringe of kelp along the NW shore of Repetition
seas, with curling tops resembling tide rips, were noted off the    Point. On the N side of this channel the water shoals very gradu-
point.                                                             ally to the opposite side of the bay. NE of Trava Point the water
                                                                    deepens and the bottom is flat.
 (428)  Chart 16514.-Kuliliak Bay indents the SE coast of           (438) In N and W weather violent williwaws occur in the head
Unalaska Island immediately to the W of Eagle Point. The bay is    of inner Kulikiak Bay, above Williwaw Point. In S weather short
divided by a narrow ridge of land into two parts, forming an outer    seas, almost breaking across the entrance, make it difficult to
bay and a well-protected inner bay. The end of this narrow ridge of    enter.
land, Repetition Point, is the E point of the entrance to the inner  (439) W of Kililiak Bay the country is less rugged; the peaks are
bay.                                                               lower and are separated by wide valleys. In the spring and early
 (429) A chain of low, black rocks extends 325 yards offshore in    summer the snow disappears from all the peaks to the W, while in
a SW direction from the SW comer of Eagle Point and marks the    the area E of Kuliliak Bay many peaks remain snow-covered
E side of the entrance to outer Kuliliak Bay. A shoal, covered 18    throughout the summer.
fathoms, 0.8 mile from shore, extends SW from the outer rock of     (440) From Kulikiak Bay the shore trends SW for 11 miles to
this group.                                                        Lance Point. Rocky ledges extend some distance off the interven-
 (430) Outer Kililiak Bay is open to the S. The shores are charac-    ing points.
terized by rock cliffs, except at the head of the deep bight which  (441) Lance Point, 12 miles SW of Eagle Point, is 465 feet high
forms the NE part of the outer bay. At the head of this bight is a    and has the appearance of a low tongue projecting from the higher
sand beach and a valley passes N of Eagle Point into Eagle Bay.    land N of it. Huddle Rocks, four small islands, the largest 170
Anchorage in 13 to 14 fathoms may be had at the opening of the    feet high, are about 1 mile SW of the point.
bight, with some protection in SE weather and good protection in    (442) About 5 miles W  of Lance Point is a small bight that
N and NW weather.                                                  affords shelter for small craft in all but SE weather. Many rough
 (431) A reef, with the outer part of it awash at half-tide, makes    rocky ledges extend from the shore between Lance Point and this
out from the center of the N shore of outer Kililiak Bay, and a    small bight, at the head of which is a broad sand beach divided
shoal covered 8 fathoms extends 330 yards S from the reef. Other-    into two parts by a small rocky point. Three streams flow through




                                                     7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                        243


the low, grassy valley behind the beach, An islet, 70 feet high, is    depth of 8 fathoms surrounded by much deeper water, is 1.8 miles
SE of the low point that forms the S side of the bight; rocks awash    W  from Konets Head. Heavy tide rips occur on this bank on the
are 300 yards NE of the islet. A chain of small rocky islets extends    ebb.
across the entrance to the bight, and a broad, flat reef that uncovers  (456) About 1.5 miles S of Konets Head is Emerald Island, a
I foot is NW of these islets.                                       flat-topped, grassy island 0.3 mile in diameter and 204 feet high.
 (443)  Local Magnetic Disturbance.-Differences of as much as    The island is fringed by reefs, and a rock that uncovers 3 feet is
6ï¿½ from the normal variation have been observed at Cape Aiak and    700 yards SE of it. Another group of rocks, the highest 8.feet, is
as much as 3ï¿½ on Huddle Rocks and at Lance Point.                   0.5 mile to the N of the island. Rocks extend 350 yards off the W
 (444)  Cape Aiak, on the S coast of Unalaska Island, 8 miles SW   side of the island.
of Lance Point or about 15 miles from Konets Head, is 1,820 feet     (457) By using the channel between Emerald Island and Konets
high, and from the NE at a distance appears like a flat-topped    Head the tide rips to the S of Emerald Island can be avoided. The
island with a massive horn or pinnacle on the S slope. Breakers    narrowest part of the channel is at the NW end, where it is less
extend 300 yards S from the S end of the point.                     than 0.4 mile in width. The shores bordering the pass are broken
 (445) Between Cape Aiak and Konets Head, the flood current    with many projecting ledges, but these can be distinguished easily.
sets W toward Umnak Pass and increases in velocity as the pass is    (458) Irregular bottom with depths of 61/2 to 12 fathoms extends
approached. It is strongest near the shore. The ebb is weaker than    3.5 miles S of Emerald Island. Tide rips which have the appear-
the flood.                                                          ance of breakers occur on these spots on the ebb; with a strong ebb
 (446)  Surveyor Bay, on the W  side of Cape Aiak, is 4 miles    and an opposing breeze they attain considerable size. It is advis-
wide and 2 miles to its head. About 2 miles NW of Cape Aiak, the    able to avoid this area.
Gargoyle Islands, a group of fantastically eroded pinnacles about    (459) Polivnoi Rock, 17 feet high and 100 yards in diameter, is
250 feet high, make out 0.4 mile from a point on the N shore and    5 miles SW from Konets Head; a breaker is 300 yards SW of the
divide the bay into two bights. A reef, awash at high water, con-    rock. Sea lions are often seen in the vicinity. In heavy weather,
nects the islands to the shore.                                     seas wash over the rock. An 8-fathom rocky shoal, marked by
 (447) A shoal, which has a least depth of 3 fathoms and breaks    heavy tide tips, is 1.2 miles 0650 from the rock.
in heavy weather, is 0.3 mile S from the SW extremity of the         (460) A convenient anchorage in S weather can be found about 1
islands; another 3-fathom shoal is 0.6 mile W  of the same point    mile NE of Konets Head in about 20 fathoms. In approaching this
and 0.5 mile S of a reef-fringed:islet close to shore.              anchorage on the ebb, allowance should be made for the current.
 (448) Small-boat anchorage with some shelter from SE can be    The flood is not felt immediately N of Konets Head.
found in 5 fathoms 250 yards from the shore in the cove NW of        (461) A small bank, with a least depth of 51/4 fathoms, is about
the Gargoyle Islands. In using the anchorage, care must be taken    0.5 mile from shore, 2 miles NE from Konets Head. NE of the
to avoid a covered rock 400 yards from shore that breaks in mod-    bank, the shore is steep-to and is exposed to the strong current of
erate weather. The anchorage is not recommended but is the best    Umnak Pass.
available shelter between Kuliliak Bay and Umnak Pass.               (462) Boulder Bay, 5 miles NE from Konets Head, is a small
 (449) The W bight of Surveyor Bay has low sand dunes along its    bay with a kelp patch in the middle of its entrance. Two small
N shore; the W shore is fringed with ledges, one of which extends    shacks are in a cove on the E shore.
700 yards off. A 43/4-fathom rocky patch, 1.5 miles NNE from Ser-    (463) No Name Cove, 3 miles NE of Boulder Bay and on the W
pent Point, is about in the center of the bight.                    side of Ranchers Point, is a small bay about 0.5 mile wide and
 (450) Serpent Point, on the W  side of the entrance to Surveyor    0.5 mile to its head. A small indentation on its W  side furnishes
Bay, is a low narrow point projecting SE. Anchorage with good    good shelter for small craft except in severe N weather.
shelter except from the S and SE can be found 0.8 mile N of the      (464) Station Bay, on the E side of Ranchers Point, is divided
point and 0.5 mile from the W  shore of the bay in 15 fathoms. An   into two arms. The E arm is about 0.3 mile wide and 1.5 miles
8-fathom shoal is 0.5 mile S of the point.                          long in a SE direction. The buildings of a ranch are on the W shore
                                                                    near the head of this arm. Anchorage for small vessels can be
 (451) Chart 16513.-About 1.8 miles W  of Serpent Point, a    found off these buildings in 7 fathoms. Near the entrance to this
chain of grassy islets projects S from Cape Izigan and terminates    arm is a conspicuous column rock about 94 feet high. Peacock
in South Rock, 23 feet high; this is the southernmost land feature    Point, separating Station Bay from the unnamed bight to the E,
of Unalaska Island. South Rock is 6 miles SW of Cape Aiak and 9    has broken ledges and rocks that extend 700 yards NW. The W
miles SE of Konets Head, the W end of Unalaska Island. Depths    arm of the bay is about 0.5 mile wide and almost I mile long in a S
of 20 fathoms are found 300 yards off the S side of the rock.       direction..
 (452) Tiderip Point, 6 miles NW from South Rock, is marked          (465) Chernofski Harbor, 2 miles E of Station Bay, was
by a round hill 397 feet high. A chain of rocks, one 25 feet high,    described earlier in this chapter.
extends 0.5 mile S from the point.                                   (466)  Umnak Pass, separating Unalaska Island from Umnak
 (453) Konets Head, the W  extremity of Unalaska Island, is    Island, is about 3 miles wide and about 10.5 miles long in a NE
marked by a conspicuous knoll 127 feet high.                        and SW direction from the vicinity of Polivnoi Rock to that of
  (454)  Lone Peak, about 3.5 miles NE of Konets Head, is the top    Pustoi Island. For description of the shore, see various headings
of a long narrow ridge, 1,847 feet high, running roughly parallel to    previously described in connection with Unalaska Island and those
the coast. From NE and SW the peak appears like a sharp cone and    following in connection with Umnak Island.
forms a useful landmark.                                             (467)  Currents.-The current in Umnak Pass is similar to that in
  (455)  The shore between Tiderip Point and Konets Head is    Unimak Pass. At times of tropic tides the current may set in a
fringed by reefs and ledges that extend almost 0.5 mile offshore.    flood direction for as much as 18 hours. The current velocity is 3.5
Ledges extend about 300 yards W  from Konets Head but deep    knots on the flood and sets NE, and 2.5 knots on the ebb and sets
water is found 400 yards W  of the ledges. A bank, with a least    SW. Velocities of 4.5. knots have been observed.




244                                                 7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


 (468) The current velocity is 2 knots on the ebb and 3.5 knots on    high that from certain directions resembles a kettle. It is the first
the flood between Konets Head and Emerald Island. Velocities of    prominent point W of Umnak Pass. The point is more conspicuous
4.5 knots have been observed. The flood current causes a set    than its height or the configuration of the shore would indicate, as
almost at right angles to the course when navigating Umnak Pass.   low land surrounds it.
 (469) The current velocity is 2.5 knots near Polivnoi Rock.        (481) Kettle Cape is fringed by rocks; the outer ones to the SE
 (470)  (See the Tidal Current Tables for predictions for Umnak    are about 0.2 mile offshore and are visible only at about low water.
Pass.)                                                             A large area of shoal water, 1.5 miles SE of Kettle Cape, has a
 (471)  The effect of the current in Umnak Pass is felt in a dimin-    least found depth of 13/4 fathoms. This area breaks heavily in mod-
ishing degree as far as Cape Idak and Cape Aspid on the N side,    erate S weather. It is marked by kelp but the kelp is difficult to see
and on the S side it is felt about 10 miles to the S of Polivnoi Rock.  except in flat calm weather. Depths of 10 to 14 fathoms are found
 (472)  On the ebb, very pronounced tide rips occur on the S sides    between this shoal and Kettle Cape. Some shelter can be found E
of the shoaler banks in Umnak Pass and in the S approach. These    of Kettle Cape from W and N weather.
tide rips are different from the tide rips encountered in Akutan    (482) The shore NE from Kettle Cape is composed of sections of
Pass and Unalga Pass. In smooth weather they look like a line of    sand beach backed by low, earth bluffs and gulleys from whence it
breakers and may attain a considerable height. In moderate or    rises gradually to the rim of the enormous crater of Tulik Volcano
stormy weather they merge with the seas, increasing their rough-    which occupies the whole N part of Umnak Island. Outside the
ness to a considerable extent.                                     high water line are several shoals and reefs.
 (473)  On the flood, light confused tide rips occur in the vicinity  (483) Two miles NE from Kettle Cape and extending several
of Ship Rock and on the banks to the NE of it, while the pass, with    miles NE, the shore is fringed by rocks that extend 500 yards off-
its countercurrents, resembles a broad, shallow river, the effect    shore, and comparatively shoal water, less than 10 fathoms
being caused by several lanes of currents and countercurrents. Off    extends 1.3 miles offshore. Heavy tide rips, dangerous for small
the points along the Umnak Island shore, tide rips are dangerous    boats, occur in this area.
for skiffs and small launches, especially between Otter Point and
                                                                     (484) Black Rock, a flat rocky ledge 10 feet high, is 7.6 miles
Kettle Cape.                                                       NE of Kettle Cape and 0.5 mile from shore. Depths of 12 to 20
 (474) From the S, navigation is more difficult, as Polivnoi Rock
is low and Kettle Cape is not easily distinguishable against the
higher background. With a heavy, S swell and a strong ebb it        (485)  About 2.7 miles NE from Black Rock is a point with a
                                                                    rocky ledge that extends about 350 yards NE; a landing can be
might even be found dangerous to attempt the pass because ofe 
heavy tide rips. The passage N of Emerald Island might be found
preferable under such circumstances.                                (486) Otter Point is 12 miles NE of Kettle Cape. The interven-
 (475) In the approach to the pass the soundings are confusing as    ing shoreline is featureless and Otter Point, when abreast of it, is
there are numerous banks with depths of 6 to 10 fathoms at dis-    only recognizable from the change in direction of the shoreline
tances of 4 to 6 miles from Emerald Island and Polivnoi Rock.      which turns to the N. From the NE, a knoll 275 feet high, rising
 (476)  Routes.-The following courses through Umnak Pass will    above a comparatively flat area just W of Otter Point, stands out
avoid the worst of the tide rips: From a position 1 mile E of Ship    conspicuously.
Rock make good course 217ï¿½ for 5 miles to a position abeam of       (487) Ship Rock, 1 mile SE of Otter Point, is one of the most
the rocks N of Emerald Island. After passing Konets Head look    conspicuous landmarks in the vicinity. It is an island about 500
out for a strong set from the passage N of Emerald Island. Tide    yards long and 200 yards wide with a sharp inaccessible peak 424
rips will be seen on the 8-fathom bank, 2 miles W of Konets Head,    feet high at its S end. At its N end is a lower peak ending in an
if the current is ebbing. Thence proceed on a course 205ï¿½, with    abrupt bluff, giving the island its distinctive shape, but from NE
Ship Rock astern, for 3.5 miles, to position abeam of Polivnoi    and SW only the single higher peak is visible. The channel
Rock, 1.5 miles distant. If bound SW, the 6-fathom spot 2.5 miles    between Ship Rock and Umnak Island has depths of over 20 fath-
195ï¿½ from Polivnoi Rock can be avoided by continuing course    oms, but because of strong currents and tide rips it should be
205ï¿½ beyond it.                                                    avoided.
                                                                     (488) A bank covered 9 fathoms, on which swirls and tide rips
 (477) Chart 16500.-Umnak Island, third largest of the Aleu-    occur, extends almost 0.5 mile E of the island, with deep water
tian Islands, is about 65 miles by 15 miles in extreme length and    beyond.
breadth. On the island are reindeer, foxes and a few head of horses  (489) Pustoi Island is flat and grassy, 68 feet high and about
and cattle. Mount Vsevidof, a volcano 6,920 feet high, is the sum-    500 yards in diameter. It is 0.9 mile NE of Otter Point. The chan-
mit of the island. It is situated SW of the center of the island, near    nel between Pustoi Island and Otter Point has a depth of 8 fath-
the W shore, with no other mountains SW from it. Several promi-    oms. Deep water is close off the E end of the island.
nent buildings and antennas are on High Hill, on the W end of the   (490) From Otter Point, the shore trends N for 2 miles, then
island.                                                            NNW for 1 mile, then NE for 2 miles forming broad Otter Bight.
                                                                   Good anchorage can be found with shelter from S, W, and N, in 8
 (478)  Chart 16513.-Tulik Volcano, an enormous crater 7 miles    to 20 fathoms. The adjoining beach is suitable for landing except
across, is situated in the N part of Umnak Island. Dense smoke    in heavy N weather.
may be visible from various parts of the crater.                    (491) A vessel could remain in Otter Bight in moderate SE
 (479) Mount Tulik is a conical peak 4,111 feet high on the SE    weather but not in severe storms. In approaching the anchorage,
rim of the crater; another very sharp peak, 3,519 feet high, is on    the depths shoal rapidly from 20 to 10 fathoms about when Pustoi
the opposite side of the rim.                                      Island comes on range with Ship Rock. Depths of 10 fathoms are
 (480) Kettle Cape, on the SE side of Umnak Island and at the S    found I mile from shore, but depths of not less than about 6 fath-
entrance to Umnak Pass, is a jagged rocky ridge about 490 feet    oms will be found 600 yards from shore.





                                                     7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                        245


 (492) A reef extends 400 yards from shore at a point 3 miles N    edge, extends SE for about 3 miles to Cape Aslik. Back of this
of Otter Point. One mile N of the reef, high land begins and    beach, for about 3 miles, the terrain is a regular and fairly consis-
extends N to Cape Idak.                                             tent slope.
 (493) The shore NE of Otter Bight to Cape Idak is composed of       (504) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences from normal
steep bluffs, with several rocky islets close to shore. It has no hid-    variations of as much as 4ï¿½ have been observed at Aguliuk Point.
den dangers except very close to the land and the shore can be
skirted at a distance of 0.5 mile.                                   (505) Bogoslof Island (53ï¿½56'N., 168ï¿½02'W.) is in the Bering
 (494)  Cape Idak, the NE point of Umnak Island, is the N end of    Sea about 22 miles N of Cape Tanak. It is of recent volcanic for-
a long, flat ridge about 1,570 feet high, sloping gradually to the N.    mation, and eruptions have completely changed the topographic
From the E this point appears as the N end of the island as the land    features several times. Accordingly to existing records, eruptions
to the W is low, but Cape Tanak extends about 2.7 miles farther N.  have occurred in 1796, 1883, 1906, 1910, and 1923-27, but it is
                                                                    probable that there have been other eruptions of which there are no
 (495)  Chart 16500.-Between Cape Idak and Cape Tanak is a    records. It now consists of one main island and a rocky islet
flat bight. The shore of the bight is regular and lined with sand,    known as Fire Island. Bogoslof Island forms a useful landfall on a
while inland the terrain is low and grassy except in the region    course W from Cape Cheerful.
about 1.5 miles W  of Cape Idak, where a mountain slope termi-       (506) Bogoslof Island is a Steller sea lion rookery site. There is
nates in bluffs near the beach. Depths of 20 to 30 fathoms are    a 3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer zone around the entire island.
about 1 to 2 miles off the shore of the bight with the bottom shoal-    (See 50 CFR 227.12, chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)
ing gradually toward the beach.                                      (507) The 500-fathom curve around Bogoslof Island approxi-
 (496) Cape Tanak, about 7 miles WNW from Cape Idak, is a    mates a circle about 5 miles in diameter.
low, rounding point with a number of hummocks about 50 feet          (50s) The main island, once known as Castle Island because of
high. Depths of over 100 fathoms are within 1 mile of Cape Tanak,    a castle-shaped rock on it, is about I mile long and 0.5 mile wide,
though two narrow ledges with depths less than 100 fathoms    and extends in a NW and SE direction. The S end terminates in a
extend into much greater depths and cause tide rips which may be    low, black sandspit which is now the haul-out place of a large
mistaken for signs of a shoal. Good shelter from S weather can be    number of sea lions. This point was found to shift its position dur-
found E of Cape Tanak.                                              ing the season of 1935. On the NW part of the island is the vol-
 (497) The flood currents, which set NE along either side of    cano crater of recent time from which steam emits occasionally,
Umnak Island, unite in the vicinity of Cape Idak, causing tide rips.    and adjoining the crater is a pond that is 4 feet below high water;
The ebb divides in the vicinity of Cape Tanak.                      the crater is 141 feet high. The rocky portion of the island is the
 (498) Ashishik Point is a narrow point about 3 miles W of Cape    home of thousands of birds.
Tanak. It is low and from offshore blends with the higher land in    (509) Castle Rock on the SW part of the main island no longer
back of it. The point extends almost as far N as Cape Tanak and it   resembles a castle. Its outline is ragged and consists of two main
should be given a berth of more than 0.5 mile. Landing can be    pinnacles, 333 feet high.
made on this point except in N weather and there is a good supply    (510)  Fire Island, 225 feet high, is 440 yards NW of the main
of water nearby.                                                    island and practically connected with it by a rocky ledge which
 (499) The bight between Cape Tanak and Ashishik Point fur-    uncovers. It is a steep, rocky island, 220 yards long and 100 yards
nishes good anchorage in S weather. Since the prevailing winds in    wide, and has three distinct summits, the middle one being square
summer are SW there are frequently long intervals when this bight    and resembling a castle. This summit is lower than the adjoining
is comparatively smooth.                                            ones. A small islet, 190 feet high, adjoins Fire Island.
 (500)  From Ashishik Point the coast of Umnak Island trends         (511)  Fair-weather anchorage can be had on the NE side of the
SW. Boiling Pinnacles, with least depth of 31/2 fathoms, are about    island, offshore in 20 fathoms, sandy bottom, and on the NW side
3 miles W  of Ashishik Point, with the outer end of the point in    of the island, 800 yards offshore, in 10 fathoms.
range with the outer end of Cape Tanak. The shoal is about 1.5       (512)  A current is often reported setting E in this vicinity; it is
miles from the shore of Reindeer Point. Deep water is found out-    variously reported to set toward Cape Cheerful and toward Umnak
side of this shoal. It is marked by kelp, and tide rips occur to the N  Pass, with a velocity of 0.1 to 0.4 knot. It is inferred that with a
of it. With the exception of this shoal, no indications of dangers    barometric depression near Unimak Pass it sets toward Cape
have been found along the W  coast of Umnak Island as far S as    Cheerful, but with a depression in the Pacific Ocean S of Unalaska
Cape Kigushimkada and vessels in general may approach I mile    Island it sets toward Umnak Pass. Vessels coming from W often
off the shore.                                                      made Point Kadin ahead instead of to starboard. Maximum NW
  (501) Reindeer Point is 3 miles W of Ashishik Point.              currents of 1.3 knots were found on the NE side of the island.
  (502) Cape Chagak, about 6 miles WSW of Ashishik Point, is    There were also indications of a stronger E current on the N side
not conspicuous. On the N side of the cape there is a bold bluff ris-    of the island. A I-knot current, setting continuously N for 21
ing about 200 feet. SW of Cape Chagak the beach is about 3 miles    hours, was observed at a location 0.5 mile W of Bogoslof Island.
in length and generally sandy.
  (503) Aguliuk Point is 5 miles SW of Cape Chagak and 4.5           (513)  Chart 16511.-The shore of Cape Aslik is the face of an
miles NE of Cape Aslik. NE of the point, for about 2 miles, the    old lava flow. It is very precipitous and irregular, with numerous
coast is broken and irregular with bluffs, sand beaches, lava out-    covered rocks that extend well offshore. Heavy kelp fringes the S
crops, and off-lying rocks, the farthest of the latter being within    side of the cape. The cape is prominent, with vertical cliffs 60 to
125 yards of the high waterline. Rocks are off the lava outcrops    150 feet high. Back of the cape, about 2 miles inland, is a conspic-
forming the foot of Aguliuk Point, and a long, narrow edge of    uous, conical hill, 865 feet high. This hill is of a dark red color,
rocks, 100 feet high, extends breakwaterlike for 225 yards into the    with a distinct hole in the slope on its SW side. Farther inland,
sea on the S side of the point. A sand beach, beginning at this    about 6 miles E of Cape Aslik, a distinctive peak rises to 3,310






246                                                7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


feet (see chart 16500). It is very ragged with deep slopes and a    the 10-fathom curve. Above the beach near the center is an over-
shoulder 600 feet lower than the summit, that extends about 0.5    hanging cliff, 1,000 feet high. The beach in Cemetery Cove is
mile to the NW. Between Cape Aslik and Cape Kigunak the shore    rocky and bends N toward Broken Point. Water may be obtained
is a beach of fine black sand. Back of this beach is a large, flat val-    from a small cliff stream on the N part of this beach.
ley bordered by mountain ridges on the N and S, and having a lone  (523) Broken Point is not conspicuous. It has a rocky beach
and prominent mountain in the middle. The valley, which extends    with deep water off the point; the 20-fathom curve is about 0.3
to the Pacific Ocean side of Umnak Island, is a swamp land cov-    mile offshore.
ered with a heavy growth of grass. A large stream flows through    (524) Geyser Bight, W of Broken Point, indents the shoreline
this valley.                                                      about 1.5 miles from a line tangent to Broken Point and Cape
 (514) Cape Kigunak, about 5 miles S of Cape Aslik, is easily    Ilmalianuk. Its beach is rounded and about 4 miles in length, with
distinguishable and is a very prominent point on approaches from    the E half sandy while the W half is rocky and bordered with kelp.
the N. It has a sharp, conical peak, 1,164 feet high, near its outer    There are 3 small rock islets 0.3 mile offshore in the center of the
end. Its shore consists of a steep beach of boulders and broken    bight and another the same distance off the beach in the E part.
rocks, with steep, grass slopes rising directly behind. Two rocks    Some protection may be found in Geyser Bight in S weather but it
about 15 feet high, 300 yards off the W part of the cape, and a    is not recommended in heavy weather.
third rock, same height, on the low-water line show up very con-   (525) Cape Ilmalianuk, the S entrance point bof Inanudak Bay,
spicuously. Many boulders and rocks and a band of heavy kelp    is about 500 feet high and conspicuous. It has a rounded shore,
extend about 400 yards offshore around the cape. The bight N of    with a number of rocks and kelp that extend seaward for about 300
Cape Kigunak affords some protection in S and E weather, but is   yards. A rock, 0.4 mile NW of the point is conspicuous at low tide.
not recommended in heavy weather.                                 A shoal area that extends 1.5 miles off the cape is 10 fathoms deep
 (515) Inanudak Bay, between Capes Kigunak and Ilmalianuk,    0.5 mile offshore and 20 fathoms about I mile farther off. Ships
has depths of 10 to 40 fathoms and affords shelter except from the    should keep 1.5 miles off the cape.
W and NW. The shore of the bay is rocky and precipitous except at  (526) Anchorage may be found in any part of Inanudak Bay
the heads of the several coves and bights which form part of the    about 0.4 mile from shore. By shifting, shelter may be had from all
bay. Sand and pebble beaches are found at the heads of these    directions except the NW. No anchorage will give protection from
coves, and low bluffs, from 5 to 20 feet high, rise abruptly from    severe NW weather. Good anchorage is available for large ships in
the beaches. Beyond these bluffs are flat lands or valleys..      20 fathoms about 1.5 miles from the beaches at the heads of
  (516) From the westernmost point of Cape Kigunak, the shore-    Stepanof Cove and Hot Springs Cove.
line curves sharply SE and E and the shore of the bay for about 2
                                                                     (527) Stepanof Cove affords the best shelter from SE around to
miles is along the foot of a ridge almost straight up from the    NNW  Anchorage may be found in 8 fathoms with Cape Kigunak
waterline. At the end of the ridge, and at the head of Izhiga Cove,
                                                                    just open of Cider Poi t. Whe n the wind gets around to S or SW,
is a sand beach that extends to Cinder Point. The water is shallow    this cove becomes uncomfortable.
along the beach and several lines of breakers make small-boat
along the beach and several lines of breakers make small-boat      (528) Hot Springs Cove affords shelter in S and E weather. Cem-
landing difficult. Back of the beach, beyond the low bluff border-       Hot Springs Cove affords shelter in S ands from   ther. Cem-
      ingit, is a flat valley.                                    etery Cove affords shelter except from winds from the NW quad-
ing it,                    is a flat valley.                      rant. Anchorage may be found in Izhiga Cove 0.3 mile from shore
                                                                    in-8 to 10 fathoms, but better shelter from N weather can be found
feet high near the shore, except in the middle where there is a    in Steanof Cove.
slight draw. A cinder cone 564 feet high is near the center of the
point.
  (518) Stepanof Cove, SE of Cinder Point, has a sandy beach        (529) Chart 16500.-Between Cape Ilmalianuk and Cape
about 1 mile in length at its head. Shoal water and several lines of    Kigushimkada, for nearly 13 miles, there are no known dangers to
breakers make small-boat landing difficult except on the N side of    navigation; ships are advised to keep 1 mile offshore in order to
the cove where the water is usually quiet; fresh springs and seep-    hold a depth of 25 fathoms or more. Kelp extends from 200 to 300
ages exist along the beach. A 70-foot pinnacle rock at the S end of    yards off the rocky areas.
the beach is conspicuous from all parts of this cove.              (530) The currents off the coast between Cape Ilmalianuk and
  (519) A low, narrow valley with steep sides extends SE from the    Cape Kigushimkada are estimated to be from 2 to 3 knots, the
head of Stepanof Cove to the Pacific Ocean side of Umnak Island.    strongest being opposite Kshaliuk Point. The current sets NE on
The buildings on the S side of the valley are stocked and main-    the flood and SW on the ebb.
tained for land-air rescue work. A road extends from Stepanof      (531)  The weather along this coast may change after passing
Cove to Fort Glenn, about 20 miles to the NE.                     Derby Point. When foggy, wet, windy weather prevails SW of the
  (520) Steeple Point, forming the S side of Stepanof Cove, has a    point, good or comparatively clear weather may be encountered to
very prominent, tall pinnacle projecting out of the side of its steep    the NE and vice versa.
bank and numerous large rocks and boulders off its shore. The pin-  (532) Between Cape Ilmalianuk and Derby Point, for about 10
nacle resembles an inverted carrot and is 200 feet above the beach.    miles, the coast extends in a general SW direction. A practically
  (521) Hot Springs Cove has about I mile of sand beach at its   straight sand beach about 3 miles in length begins on the SW side
head with a small stream in the S part. Salmon spawn in a stream    of Cape Ilmalianuk.
 about 2 miles back of the beach beneath several small waterfalls.  (533) Kshaliuk Point is a rounded, prominent point at the SW
The steam from several small, hot springs at the head of this    end of the beach. This point has grassy bluffs about 400 feet high,
 stream can be seen from the E side of Inanudak Bay.               except on its N side which is practically straight up and down with
  (522) Between Hot Springs Cove and Cemetery Cove to the W       prominent horizontal layers of stratified rock. SW of the point, the
 are 1.5 miles of rocky shore. Near and W of the center of this    land back of the shore is low, the beach consisting of short
 shore, shoal water, marked by kelp, extends 0.4 mile offshore to    stretches of sand, rock, and lava formation. The most conspicuous




                                                    7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                      247


lava flow is at Twinlava Point, about 4 miles SW of Kshaliuk    tom along the shoreline of both Umnak Island and Ananiuliak
Point.                                                            Island is very uneven and has some dangers to navigation.
 (534) S of Kshaliuk Point, between it and Mount Vsevidof, are
three sharp prominent peaks about 2,000 feet high and about 0.5    (545) Chart 16511.-Okee Bay is a small, shallow cove on the E
mile apart. Less than I mile from the peak nearest the shore is   side of a small peninsula on the N side of Okee Point. This bay
another prominent peak of about the same elevation. It has a    affords some shelter for small craft and has a sand beach where
broad, rounded base, rising almost from the shore and has two    landings can be made in most any weather. Another small, shallow
points on the top; a low saddle connects the points.              inlet is on the W side of the small peninsula.
 (535) Derby Point, about 1.5 miles SW of Twinlava Point and 3     (546) Okee Point is a headland on the N side of the entrance to
miles N of Cape Kigushimkada, has cliffs and rock outcroppings    Nikolski Bay. It has steep, rocky bluffs back of the high water line
along its shore. The steep sides of the point are grass covered    and rocky ledges extend offshore.
above the cliffs, but the top is bare and strewn with cinders and  (547) Anangula (Ananiuliak) Island, on the N side of Nikolski
small lava boulders. The rounded hill on the point resembles the    Bay and off Okee Point, is a kite-shaped island about 1.4 miles in
crown of a derby hat when viewed from seaward, the rocky shore-    length and 301 feet high near the center. Bare rock ledges extend
line forming the brim of the hat. This point is a conspicuous fea-    50 to 60 yards from the grass line on the shore of the W side of the
ture of this coast, and also serves as a line of demarcation for    island. Passage between this island and Umnak Island through
different weather conditions.                                     Seaweed Pass is not advisable as there are no natural ranges that
 (536) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences from normal    can be recommended. During the summer, kelp may extend across
variation of as much as 40 have been observed at Derby Point.     the passage.
 (537) The coast between Derby Point and Cape Kigushimkada         (548) Nikolski Bay, between Anangula Island and Cape Starr, is
has a S direction and consists of a bold, rocky cliff at the base of    about 12 miles S of Mount Vsevidof. It is about 4.5 miles wide
Mount Vsevidof.                                                   and 3 miles long, and is open from the W to the NNW. The shore
 (538) Mount Vsevidof is an extinct volcano 6,920 feet high and    of the bay consists mostly of gravel and rock beaches. It is fringed
the highest peak on Umnak Island. It is about halfway between    to varying distances offshore by reefs, large boulders and kelp.
Inanudak Bay and Nikolski Bay, and approximately 40 miles SW      Many of these reefs actually are above high water but are covered
of Cape Idak.                                                     by the heavy swell except on very calm days. The area bordering
 (539) The upper reaches of this mountain are usually covered    the reefs along the shore is foul, with numerous covered rocks. It
with snow the year round. The W side slopes gradually to the.  should not be approached too closely.
shore between Twinlava Point and the N end of the large open       (549) The bay is surrounded by rolling hills, that are covered
bight S of Cape Kigushimkada.                                     with a thick mat of grass, and frequent, marshy areas. High Hill,
 (540) The peak appears conical from the NW with a slightly flat-    712 feet high, is near and N of the center of the bay and is a prom-
tened top, but the large crater so plainly visible from the Pacific    inent landmark in approaching anchorage. It is cone shaped but
side of Umnak Island, does not show at all. The two small glaciers    flat topped, and the sides, except inland, are steep, rocky, and rug-
on the N side of the extinct volcano are not prominent from off-   ged.
shore, but the valley that extends inland on this same side has    (55sso) Except on very calm days there are few places where safe
many bare, cinder patches and lava outcrops visible from offshore.    landings can be made. It is reported by the natives that in the win-
This valley goes back toward the large, jagged, saw-toothed    ter when heavy northwesters are blowing, it may be impossible to
mountain range, 6,510 feet high, to the NE of Mount Vsevidof.     land even in Nikolski in Mueller Cove. Landing is possible in
  (541) Cape Kigushimkada is the N point to a large open bight.:   most any weather in River Cove in the mouth of Sheep Creek.
This cape, at the base of Mount Vsevidof, is the outer end of a    (551) The currents are strong, especially around Anangula
lava-flow which forms a rugged, rounded headland having precip-    Island, but are not dangerous, as they generally run parallel to the
itous, rocky bluffs, 80 to 90 feet high, with numerous jagged    shoreline.
indentations. Many rocks and pinnacles are adjacent to the shore   (552) Anchorage with protection from W  and N weather is
of this cape. The shelf on top of the cape is covered with many    found in the N end of Nikolski Bay behind Anangula Island in 10
lava outcrops, cinder beds and fissures, and rises gradually inland    to 25 fathoms with good holding ground. A good anchorage in E
to form part of the W slope of Mount Vsevidof.                    weather is off Kelp Point in 10 to 20 fathoms.
  (542) On the. SE side of Cape Kigushimkada is a bold headland,    (553) Eider Rock, about 1 mile NW of High Hill, is a small
prominent from seaward. A broad sand beach, about 1.5 miles S of    island reef 600 yards offshore in the NE portion of Nikolski Bay.
this headland extends for about 2.5 miles SSW. Behind the beach    (554) The head of Nikolski Bay S of Kelp Point is a rectangular-
is a broad, grassy valley with three prominent streams, the two    shaped bight with a large, rocky ledge along the shore at its head.
northermost carrying the drainage from the S slopes of Mount    The two coves in this bight are River Cove at the NE corner and
Vsevidof.                                                         Mueller Cove in the S. The large rocky ledge separating the two
  (543) At the S end of the sand beach is a rocky headland with    coves is almost covered at high water.
outlying ledges that are partially awash at high water. A rocky islet  (555) Sheep Creek is the largest stream in the vicinity and emp-
is about 0.6 mile W of the headland. About 0.5 mile S of this islet   ties into River Cove. The creek extends NE into a broad, marshy
is a covered rock which breaks in heavy weather, and another islet   valley dotted with numerous ponds.
is about I mile N of Okee Bay. From the headland the shore runs    (556)  Mueller Cove, the inner anchorage of Nikolski Bay, is the
in a SW direction and is very irregular, with numerous indenta-    cove in which the village of Nikolski is situated. Only very small
tions.                                                            fishing boats attempt to enter this cove because of the constricted
  (544) From Cape Kigushimkada to the SW end of Umnak             entrance caused by the reef in midchannel. With any kind of
Island, the land is rolling, with numerous rounded hills. The bot-    weather from the W or N, seas break across the entrance.




248                                                   7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


  (557) Rudisell Reef, at the entrance to Mueller Cove, is practi-    tide rips extend between the two points of land and for a consider-
cally covered at high water and in heavy weather the seas break    able distance N and S. There are impenetrable patches of kelp and
over its narrow, outer ledge of rocks that are about 4 feet above    the current goes through at a very high velocity, probably 7 knots.
high water. This ledge, however, serves as an excellent natural        (568) Vessels drawing more than 4 feet should avoid this pas-
breakwater and protects the beach at the head of Mueller Cove        sage. Boats of less draft may go through only during periods of
except when heavy northwesters are blowing up the bay.               slack water and in fair weather. Such craft should clear Cape
  (558)  A rock covered 3/4 fathom, is 0.1 mile W of Rudisell Reef    Sagak by 0.25 mile on a course 160ï¿½.
and in the entrance to the channel into Mueller Cove. The location     (569) Samalga Island, the long and narrow island about 2 miles
of this rock nearly always can be determined by the breaker over    SW of Cape Sagak, is 4 miles long and 0.5 mile wide at its widest
it. At high water, in W  weather, it may break very heavily and    part. The high water line is strewn with rocks and small boulders,
cause a dangerous surge across the channel toward Rudisell Reef.     and occasional stretches of sand beach are found around the
  (559) Nikolski is one of the most frequented places for small    island. Back of the shore the terrain rises abruptly in the form of
trading schooners W  of Unalaska. Fishing, trapping, and the har-    grassy slopes. The interior is flat and entirely covered with grass.
vesting of seals in the Pribilof Islands are the means of livelihood.    Foxes and sea lions are the only wild life on Samalga Island. It is
A good shingle beach is in front of the village. The store and the    not inhabited, except for 1 month during the winter when the trap-
church are painted white and are the most prominent buildings in    pers come to get fox pelts.
the village. The church has two crosses, one of which is on the        (570)  The entire island is fringed with a rocky ledge, that uncov-
belfry tower. This tower is the most conspicuous point in the vil-    ers, and extends from 100 yards to 0.5 mile offshore. On the SW
lage. The store carries a few supplies, but is stocked only during    end of the island this ledge becomes an extensive reef stretching
the trapping season. Mail is delivered by airplane. The ranch    WSW along the prolonged axis of the island for nearly 2 miles. In
buildings of the Harris Livestock Co. are about 0.3 mile SW of the    heavy weather there are breakers for a considerable distance over
village. The buildings of the company consist of living quarters,    this area.
barns, and storehouses. The largest of these buildings is a land-      (571)  Landings can be made at various places except in heavy
mark looming prominently on the skyline from the anchorage off    weather when the island is almost surrounded with breakers. The
Kelp Point. The wool-storage building, painted red, also makes a    best landing is in a small bight just N of a cabin on the N side of
conspicuous landmark.                                                -the N end of the island. Vessels may anchor in 10 to 15 fathoms on
 (560) Cape Starr, about 3 miles to the W of Nikolski, is a bold    the bank that extends 160ï¿½ from the middle of Samalga Island, or
headland with steep rocky bluffs, 150 to 350 feet high, backed by    in not less than 15 fathoms, N of the SW end of the island. There
rolling, grass-covered hills. The shoreline is bordered by rough,    is no protection in either of these anchorages.
irregular, rocky ledges and reefs, numerous rocks and extensive        (572)  The currents are treacherous in the vicinity of Samalga
kelp beds. Several small islets, reefs and rocks awash are from 0.5    Island.
to 3 miles off Cape Starr.                                             (573) The SE coast of Umnak Island should be navigated with
 (561)  S of Cape Starr is a wide, flat beach of fine white sand,    great caution. SW of Vsevidof Island, fog appears to be more
back of which are low, grass-covered, sandy bluffs. Inland a broad    prevalent than to the N. With W  and SW weather the fog drifts
valley that extends across the island, bends NE to the chain of   - across the low, SW part of Umnak Island while the high moun-
lagoons S of Nikolski. The remainder of the Bering Sea coast of    tains NW of Mount Vsevidof form a barrier that may cause clear
Umnak Island is mostly rocky and rugged. SW and W  from the    weather in their lee when all the area SW of Vsevidof Islands is in
beach are numerous jagged, rocky projections, and rock pinnacles.    fog.
The area outside the high water line is filled with rocks, small       (574)  W of Samalga Island currents of about 4 knots have been
ledges and patches of kelp. The most prominent and highest place    observed setting N when the tide at Dutch Harbor is rising and S
on the SW end of Umnak Island is Elbow Hill, 442 feet high,    when it is falling.
about 4 miles SW of Cape Starr. It is grass covered and prominent      (575)  Currents are weak over the bank inside the 100-fathom
from seaward. Idaliuk Point is 2.4 miles W of Elbow Hill.            curve S of Umnak Island.
 (562)  Pancake Rock, about 2.5 miles W  of Cape Starr, is a 22-      (576)  NE from Cape Sagak, the Pacific side of Umnak Island is
foot islet which sometimes has, from a distance, the appearance of    fringed with rocky ledges and kelp beds. The shallow bight I I
a flat pancake on the surface of the water. This islet is the E end of    miles from the cape has a sandy beach above the ledges and is
a low, flat, rocky reef about 500 yards in length.                   backed by low, grassy, bluffs about 100 yards inland. A chain of
 (563)  Several reefs and rocky islets are SE of Pancake Rock.    three lagoons are in the low valley that extends N from the bight to
The farthest from the shore of Umnak Island is a rocky islet, sur-    the village of Nikolski. On the NE side of the bight is a bold head-
rounded by ledges and rocks awash, about 1 mile SE of Pancake    land with steep, rock bluffs rising to 561 feet.
Rock and 1.5 miles offshore from Cape Starr.                           (577)  Driftwood Bay, about 40 miles SW of Konets Head,
 (564)  Adugak Island, about 7 miles W  of Cape Starr and 4    Unalaska Island, is on the SE coast of Umnak Island opposite
miles off Idaliuk Point, is 160 feet high.                           Nikolski. The bay is between Cape Udak and Black Cape. It is
 (565)  Adugak Island is a Steller sea lion rookery site. There is a    about 3.5 miles across the entrance and is divided into two arms
3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer zone around the entire island.    by a headland about 435 feet high. Water may be obtained in
(See 50 CFR 227.12, chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)          either arm.
                                                                      (578) The W arm is clear of dangers and shoals gradually. From
 (566)  Chart 16500.-Cape Sagak, the SW end of Umnak Island,    its head a trail leads across the island to the village of Nikolski.
is long and generally low with rolling grass-covered hills and short    Good anchorage may be found in 15 fathoms. In SW weather
stretches of sand beaches.                                           some shelter may be obtained in the lee of Cape Udak. In S or SE
 (567) The passage between Cape Sagak and the NE point of    weather, there is no good anchorage, but in an emergency small
Samalga Island is dangerous. Foul ground and extremely heavy    boats might find some shelter in the E arm.





                                                     7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                         249


 (579) The E arm, Traders Cove, is more or less foul and should    ledge, 16 feet high, is about 1 mile E of the S entrance point. This
not be entered without local knowledge. Small boats could be    ledge should be given a wide berth to the SW to avoid a rock that
hauled out on the sandy beach in the NE corner of this arm. In this    uncovers 425 yards SW of the ledge. The point on the NE side of
corner is a shack in which fuel and food supplies are kept for    the entrance should also be given a wide berth to avoid the foul
sheepherders.                                                        area that extends SW of the point for about 0.3 mile. At the head
 (580)  Cape Udak, on the W side of Driftwood Bay, appears as a    of Russian Bay is a sandy beach where a stream of considerable
flat plateau about 600 feet high and about 1.2 miles across its sea-    size flows into the bay. This bay offers protection from N weather
ward face. All sides of the cape are precipitous, rocky cliffs.      in 10 fathoms, sandy bottom. In SE weather the bay is not recom-
 (581)  Black Cape, about 392 feet high, is on the E side of Drift-    mended except in an emergency.
wood Bay. The cape slopes gently down to the water's edge and         (591)  The Pillars are a pair of pinnacle rocks, the larger 130 feet
has a group of rocky islets, about 135 feet high, 175 yards off-    high, about 3 miles off the shore of Umnak Island and 15 miles
shore.                                                               NE from Vsevidof Island. These rocks stand out prominently from
 (582)  Lookout Point is 4 miles NE of Black Cape. From Look-    all directions and may be seen many miles on clear days. From the
out Point for 6 miles to the point opposite Kigul Island, the shore    N and S they have the appearance of a single pinnacle. From the E
of Umnak Island trends ENE. Numerous rocky islets extend off-    both rocks are visible. A rock awash at high water is about 175
shore for 1.5 miles. In addition to these visible objects, numerous  yards E of The Pillars. Depths of more than 14 fathoms can be car-
kelp patches mark depths of 2 to 5 fathoms. The outermost of    ried to within 0.3 mile all around these rocks.
these is S of Kigul Island and has a depth of 41/2 fathoms.            (592) Thumb Point, about 3 miles W  of The Pillars, is a long,
 (583) Amos Bay is 8 miles NE of Black Cape and about 3 miles    narrow point, on the tip of which are three large pinnacles. Two of
N of Vsevidof Island. It is about 0.7 mile wide and 1 mile long in a    these, about 150 feet high, are on the beach. The third, 121 feet
N-S direction. The W  side of the bay is bordered by reefs that    high, is about 150 yards offshore. From distances less than 5 miles
extend about 400 yards offshore, and the head is shoal. Anchorage    these three pinnacles are very distinct; though several others of
with shelter from NE to W  can be found 0.3 mile W  of the E         like size are in the vicinity, these cannot be mistaken, there being
entrance point, in 7 fathoms.                                        no other group of three.
 (584) To approach this anchorage, from a position 0.8 mile W of      (593) The broad bight between Thumb Point and Kettle Cape is
Vsevidof Island steer 000ï¿½ for 3.5 miles, passing 0.4 mile W  of a    fringed by off-lying ledges. Two valleys lead across Umnak Island
rocky islet that is about 1 mile S of the E entrance point. Favor the    toward Inanudak Bay from the head of this bight.
E shore of the bay to avoid the reefs bordering the W shore. A trail
leads from the head of the bay to Nikolski on the W coast. On the      (594)  Chart 16501.-Islands of Four Mountains are a group of
E side of the bay is a cabin in which food and fuel are kept for    five, treeless, volcanic islands W  of Umnak Island. Their names
sheepherders.                                                        are Uliaga, Kagamil, Chuginadak, Carlisle, and Herbert. The
 (585)  Vsevidof Island, 280 feet high and about I mile across, is    group is about 16 miles from Samalga Island and about 18 by 25
the largest of the group of islands on the SE side of Umnak Island    miles in extent.
and is SE of Mount Vsevidof. A small bay indents the S shore of       (595) These islands are high and snowcapped, with some snow
Vsevidof Island. Covered rocks at the entrance prevent anything    remaining throughout the year. Clouds obscure the peaks most of
larger than a small launch from entering and then only when no    the time. Frequently in the summer, while low fog banks are over
surf is running. Rocks extend SE 0.4 mile from the SE point of the    the adjacent waters, the peaks stand clear above and are visible
island, terminating in a rocky islet about 30 feet high. Depths of    away from the fog banks. Fog is often in patches that may be
more than 20 fathoms are 0.3 mile E of these rocks.                  avoided by passing around one of the islands, or by moving out of
 (586)  Ogchul Island, 1.7 miles E of Vsevidof Island, is about    the sweep of wind through a pass. The winds play about the
0.3 mile across, 180 feet high, and is surrounded by deep water.    islands with all the vagaries common to williwaws and may some-
The island is flat topped. The channel between the two islands has    times be avoided by making a move of I mile or so.
depths of 35 fathoms or more.                                          (596) Navigation among the islands is beset by frequent fogs,
 (587)  Ogchul Island is a Steller sea lion rookery site. There is a    strong and treacherous currents, and tide rips that may be danger-
3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer zone around the entire island    ous for small craft. Because of the frequent fogs and strong cur-
which also encompasses Vsevidof Island. (See 50 CFR 227.12,    rents it is emphasized that navigation is safe only by frequent
chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)                              sounding and constant reference to the chart. All waters are clear
 (588)  Kigul Island, 3.5 miles N of Vsevidof Island and about 2    for large ships beyond about 1 mile from the shores, and for small
miles E of Amos Bay, is the largest of the inshore islands. It is    craft beyond 0.25 mile except where obstructions are charted. It is
about 0.5 mile in diameter and 219 feet high. The island is 0.5    not safe to attempt passage inside any of the off-lying rocks.
mile off the coast of Umnak Island, and the channel in the passage     (597)  In Samalga Pass, between Samalga Island and the Four
between the island and the coastis restricted by shoals to a width    Mountains Group, the waters are deep and 15 miles in width; how-
of about 150 yards. N of Kigul Island, anchorage with shelter from    ever, a good berth must be given the shoals that extend SW from
S and W winds can be found in about 12 fathoms. Anchorage with    Samalga Island.
shelter from E winds can be found W of the island in 7 fathoms.        (598)  A bank, with a minimum depth of 13 fathoms, is about 5.5
The approach to this anchorage is difficult without local knowl-    miles S of Concord Point, Chuginadak Island. Apparently it is the
edge.                                                                high spot of a large shoal area rather than a pinnacle.
 (589)  Lone Rock, 1.5 miles NE from Kigul Island and 42 feet         (599) Among the group, the passes are probably all clear, though
high, is the northernmost of the group of rocks and islets in this    they have not been swept with wire drags.
vicinity.                                                             (600)  It is strongly recommended that a vessel proceeding along
 (590) Russian Bay, near the middle of the Pacific Ocean side of    the N side of the Aleutian Islands avoid anchorage in the Four
Umnak Island, is about I mile wide and 2 miles long. A rocky    Mountains Group in bad weather. With a heavy sea running in the





250                                                 7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


Bering Sea, dangerous tide rips will be encountered among the    to NW weather is available in the bight at the NE corner of Chugi-
islands, and any lee afforded by indentations on the islands' shores    nadak Island, about 0.9 mile S of Corwin Rock.
is offset by the sudden shifting of the wind that may necessitate   (610) A fair anchorage for medium-sized craft is in a cove on the
shifting anchorage during thick fog through narrow passes subject    N side of Kagamil Island. Another anchorage is in a bight on the S
to strong tide rips.                                               side of the extreme E end of Kagamil Island.
 (601) Uliaga Pass, between Uliaga and Kagamil Islands, has 9       (611) 'No other anchorages about these islands can be recom-
fathoms across almost its entire width, and a midchannel course    mended and none around Carlisle and Herbert Islands. Small craft
clears all known dangers. In the middle of the pass is a light    may find bights here and there where the depths and swinging
growth of kelp; it is towed under and difficult to see except during    room are suitable for anchoring, but the prevalence of strong cur-
the periods of slack water.                                        rents, heavy seas, and bad wind conditions make them unsafe. The
 (602) Kagamil Pass, between Kagamil and Chuginadak Islands,    bottom in and around this group of islands, where it is not rocky, is
is wide and clear; no obstructions NW of Corwin Rock. The least    essentially cinders and volcanic ash mixed with sand and gravel.
depth in the pass is 7 fathoms 1.2 miles N of Chuginadak Island.    (612) Uliaga Island, the northernmost and smallest of the Four
 (603)  In Carlisle Pass, between Chuginadak and Carlisle    Mountains Group, consists of one central mountain cone with a
Islands, a midchannel course will carry 28 to 32 fathoms in the    few prominent spurs. On the slopes are several spirelike rocks.
shoalest part. The depths increase quickly to 80 and 90 fathoms at    The crest of the peak, 2,915 feet high, has two points, one sharp
both ends of the narrowest part of the pass. On either side of mid-    and the other flat, larger, and slightly lower. The NW side of the
channel the water shoals rapidly toward land, but no danger exists    mountain is very steep and is greatly eroded. A serrated ridge pro-
until about 550 yards from the shoreline. The currents in this chan-    trudes from the S side of the mountain, and the S one of three
nel are strong and therips and swirls are of moderate intensity.    peaks on this ridge is a good landmark.
Small boats should avoid the center of the pass to clear the worst  (613) The cove on the N end of the island is filled with kelp and
of these.                                                          affords poor protection for small boats. The E side of this cove is a
  (604) Chuginadak Pass, between Chuginadak and Herbert    cape, formed by a rough, lava outcrop, with a sharp, narrow ridge
Islands, is about 3 miles wide, with depths of more than 100 fath-    leading down to it. The W side of the cove is a wall of rock 340
oms.                                                               feet high. The largest stream is on the W  side of the island. A
  (605) Between Herbert Island and Yunaska Island, to the W of    sharp, needlelike pinnacle with two points, the higher 65 feet, is
the Four Mountains Group, the passage is 14 miles wide and Very    less than 0.5 mile from the NW shore and about 1.1 miles N of the
deep.                                                              westernmost point of the island. This point is comparatively long
  (606)  Current observations among the Islands of Four Moun-    and consists of a narrow ribbon of lava that extends into the sea
tains have not been sufficiently detailed to serve as a basis for pre-    from one of the mountain ridges. On the S slope of this ridge and
cise predictions. The best index to the times of flood and ebb    about 0.8 mile E of the W point of the island is a sharp spur, 956
appears to be the information for a location I mile E of Yunaska    feet high.
Island which is given in the Tidal Current Tables. Flood sets gen-  -(614)  A rock, which uncovers 3 feet, is about 0.2 mile from the
erally N and ebb S. The duration of slack is usually very short.   E shore of the island and well outside the thick kelp line. The best
  (607) Among the islands the water swirls and counters in a    landing site on the island is on the E side about 0.5 mile from the
highly confused manner, so that rips and eddies may be encoun-    SE corner. This landing is on a boulder beach behind a barrier of
tered almost at random. Rips in some cases indicate bottom con-    kelp and near a trapper's cabin, which is occupied during some
figurations, but often not. Particularly in bights along the shores,    winters. A prominent scar is in the low, grass bluff bordering the
currents counter to those outside may be anticipated.              shore in this vicinity. The small cove S of the landing is marked by
  (608) Strong tidal currents set through all the passes. Velocities    a 40-foot pinnacle rock at the S end of a boulder beach.
exceeding 4 knots have been noted and it is probable that they      (615) Kagamil Island, between Uliaga and Chuginadak Islands,
reach 5 and 6 knots at times. Heavy tide rips may be anticipated    has a large mountain in the center of its S half. The mountain is
except at slack water. In Uliaga Pass and in Carlisle Pass, the flood    2,930 feet high, and has a circular crater on its NW side. Its upper
 sets NE. Between Herbert Island and Chuginadak Island flood is    slopes are steep and rocky, while those nearing the base make a
 to the NW. In Kagamil Pass the currents are confused and the    somewhat abrupt change to large, gently sloping or flat areas of
 flood appears to enter the passage from the E, passing to the NW   grass or tundra which generally terminate in bluffs. Near the SE
 to mingle with the flood current from Carlisle Pass, and thence    end of the island a number of fumaroles emit vapor near the tops
 turns N along the W  side of Kagamil Island. S of Chuginadak    of the cliffs, and at the S end is a strong steam jet in the cliff a few
 Island considerable differences in the direction and strength of the    feet above the sea.
 current over short distances may be noticed. Heavy rips, except in  (616) The hills in the N part of the island culminate in a 1,640-
 calm weather and at slack water, are about 1.5 miles SE of Con-    foot peak, that is close to the N shore. The two largest valleys are
 cord Point, the SE point of Chuginadak Island. Current boils have    on the E side of the island; the northernmost is quite flat, with
 been noted as far as 7 miles offshore. Inshore, the set appears to be    some grass-covered bluffs, and is drained by two small streams.
 to the E most of the time. Offshore, about the 500- to 1,000-    What is probably the best camp site on the island is in the valley at
 fathom curves, it seems to be principally to the W.                the head of North Cove, the largest of the coves on the N shore.
  (609) Anchorages in the group of Four Mountains Islands are    This valley, circular in shape, and the smallest on the island, has
 few and inadequate. The principal one is in Applegate Cove, a    one permanent stream. North Cove has the only sand beach on the
 bight on the N shore of Chuginadak Island. Protection from N       island.
 weather may be found in South Cove on the opposite side of this     (617)  Candlestick Point, on the W  side of North Cove, has
 island from Applegate Cove. About 3.5 miles to the E of South    striking topographic features in a long, thin wall of rock with a 75-
 Cove is another anchorage, of small extent but offering excellent    foot arch to form the point proper, and a group of 10 tall pinnacles
 protection from the N. An anchorage giving protection from SW      close by. The wall of rock is 315 feet high and juts out N into the





                                                     7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                       251


sea. The pinnacles, the tallest being 156 feet, are grouped slightly    sides of this volcano are streaked by series of lava flows, with
offshore about the outer end of the wall. The NW point of the    intervening, grassy patches on the slopes, most of these patches
island is a detached spur, 591 feet high, with a conspicuous    being on the S side. Because of the heat of its active crater, Mount
smooth, red cliff, about 0.3 mile W of Candlestick Point.          Cleveland loses its snow more rapidly than the other high peaks. A
 (618)  From the red cliff the coastline trends S. High cliffs with a    wisp of smoke or vapor issues most of the time from the small cra-
series of gray pinnacles border the shore. S of these cliffs, the only    ter in the top of Mount Cleveland; a dim glow may be seen at
valley on the W  side of the island begins at the head of a small    night. An unusual condition consisting of a clear patch of sky in
cove. This valley is narrow, about 2 miles in length, and is drained    the lee of the volcano has been observed when all other places
by the largest stream on the island. A small lake is reported to    were heavily overcast. No waterfalls are on this part of the island
exist in this valley. To the S, the cliffs along the shore rise almost    and there may be water only after a rainfall, as the entire cone is
vertically from the sea 300 to 500 feet, with no talus or ledge at the    apparently so porous that no stream of water from the melting
waterline. The cliffs at the SE end of the island are broken in many    snow reaches the shore. The coastline is more regular than around
places by caves. The shore around the S end of the island is of    the E part of the island, and the kelp beds bordering the shores are
very rough lava and boulders, the lava being most prominent at the    less extensive. A few rocks awash are found close inshore along
SW corner of the island.                                           most of the beaches and cliffs.
 (619) A fair anchorage for medium-sized craft in 10 fathoms,       (624) There are no good places to land on the island in unfavor-
rocky bottom, is on the N shore of Kagamil Island in North Cove.    able weather. However, in moderate weather landings may be
It is subject, however, to violent williwaws. Water may be found    made in some of the smaller coves indenting the point on the NE
in the cove. Entrance is from due N of the center of the cove and    side of Applegate Cove. It is generally possible to land on the S
well clear of the vicinity of the pinnacles on the W side. Another    side of the island in South Cove. The landing is on the E side of
anchorage may be found in 16 fathoms in a bight just S of the E    the cove, at the end of the sand beach or on the adjacent, rocky
end of the island. The bottom is reported to be coarse, black sand    shore. The best place for a small boat to obtain water is in a small
and fine gravel. This bight is marked by a high ridge, that extends    cove about 1 mile E of this landing, near a waterfall with a pecu-
from the mountains, and a gablelike headland. There are a stream    liar white deposit at the top. This deposit can be seen 20 miles off-
and a cabin in the bight. Williwaws may be encountered here, and    shore on clear days. A small boat can pass inside the 140-foot
the currents are troublesome; nevertheless good shelter from W     pinnacle near this waterfall.
weather may be had.                                                 (625) No houses are on the island but a large shallow cave is in
 (620) Chuginadak Island, the largest of the Four Mountains    the face of the cliff at the head of South Cove. With the exception
Group, consists of two mountain masses divided by a low, wind-    of Corwin Rock no dangers are very far offshore, the farthest
swept valley across a narrow neck of land. The low area of the val-    being about 500 yards. Rocks awash, and others bare at low water
ley has rolling grassland interspersed with areas of lava flow, cin-    extend about 350 yards from the shore of the SE side of Concord
der patches, and conical cinder hills.                             Point. A 13/4-fathom spot is 0.3 mile off the S end of the point. The
 (621) The E part of the island is an area of rugged terrain formed    kelp around the island is not always visible because of the strong
by a group of eroded volcanic peaks, the highest being 3,840 feet.    currents.
Numerous valleys and ridges descend to the rocky bluffs border-     (626) The anchorages in Applegate Cove, the largest bight on
ing the shore. The peaks, almost constantly hidden by clouds, are    the N shore of Chuginadak Island, and in South Cove on the
covered with snow nearly the year round. The lower levels have a    opposite side of the narrow neck of land have a most unfavorable
vegetation of thick grass, while the higher altitudes are of barren    weather condition. The fog hangs frequently over them when the
rocks and lava ash. Many prominent waterfalls may be seen    two main parts of the island are comparatively clear.
around this part of the island. In about the middle of the E coast  (627) Applegate Cove affords protection from all weather
are several areas where steam escapes from the top of the shore-    except from the NW to NE. However, winds of great intensity are
line cliffs. On the S side, Concord Point, the SE end of Chugi-    almost constantly encountered. The valley across the narrow neck
nadak Island, is a high headland of rolling, grassy hills.    in the center of the island acts as a draw, causing the winds to be of
Immediately to the NW of this headland, Black Peak, the remnant    much greater intensity than would be normally expected. Wind
of a large crater, the W rim of which is a distinctive black crag, is a    forces double those prevailing outside may be encountered in
conspicuous landmark from the SE and SW. It is 1,525 feet high,    stormy weather. Bottom is of dark-colored sand and mud, but
and is usually visible when the higher peaks inland are hidden by    rocky patches may be found. The bottom holds fairly well in mod-
clouds.                                                            erate weather but dragging may be expected during severe blows.
 (622) The coastline of the E part of the island is indented by    Anchorage may be found in the center of the cove in 14 to 20 fath-
many coves and bights. Extensive kelp beds are found in the shoal    oms. Small craft should anchor well into the cove in 7 to 9 fath-
areas and numerous large boulders and off-lying rocks along the    oms, from 600 to 800 yards offshore opposite the central part of
shore. Corwin Rock, 56 feet high, stands prominently at the    the sand beach. Both the wind and fog may be avoided to some
extremity of a submerged reef making out from the NE shore of    slight extent by anchoring near the W part of the cove, opposite a
the island. The outer limits of Corwin Rock are within about 0.7    prominent, dark, rocky outcrop in the bluff.
mile from the nearest point of Chuginadak Island. Although this     (628) An anchorage with good protection from the NW to SW, is
rock appears as a single island, it consists of two small islets, sep-    available in a bight about 0.9 mile S of Corwin Rock in about 14
arated by a small, narrow strait. On the SW side of Corwin Rock    fathoms, rocky bottom.
the kelp extends well out toward the shore of the island. Currents,  (629) Protection from N weather may be found in South Cove,
swirls, and tide rips indicate foul waters, and no passage exists    the large cove on the S side of the valley between the two moun-
between:the rock and the island.                                   tain masses. Conditions regarding fog and wind correspond
 (623) The W part of Chuginadak Island consists of a tall, sym-    exactly with those of Applegate Cove. South Cove is smaller and
metrical cone, known as Mount Cleveland, 5,675 feet high. The    has a shoal in the W part. The bottom is rocky and anchors may be





252                                                   7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


fouled. The best anchorage is in 9 fathoms NE from the shoal and    behind it. NW of the valley, and about 0.5 mile offshore, is a 60-
it can be approached from the SE to SW bearing in mind the shoal    foot rock which stands out very prominently from both N and S. A
in the W part. The nearest source of water is on the exposed coast,    small rock is about halfway between it and the shore.
about 1.5 miles E, where small boats may obtain it in favorable        (637) The S shore of the island consists of narrow beaches at the
weather.                                                             foot of cliffs of varying heights. All offshore rocks are within 200
 (630) A small anchorage in a bight about 3.5 miles E of South    yards of this shore except off the SE corner of the island, where a
Cove and 3 miles NW of Concord Point gives excellent protection    prominent pinnacle rock 135 feet high is about 0.3 mile off the
from N winds. Because of the shielding effect of high cliffs, it may  beach. The passage inside this rock is not clear, because of a rock
be free from fog when South Cove is not. Several waterfalls mark    awash, and another pinnacle 2 feet high. Back of the pinnacle rock
this bight. Anchorage is in 15 fathoms, with rocky bottom and    is a distinctive reddish headland.
very limited swinging room.
 (631)  Carlisle Island, about 1.2 miles NW  of Chuginadak            (638)  Chart 16500.-Yunaska, Amukta, and Chagulak Islands
Island, is a mountain consisting of a single, extinct volcanic cone    are a group of islands WSW of the Islands of Four Mountains.
5,283 feet high. The island is somewhat circular in shape, with a    Yunaska, the nearest, is about 14 miles from Herbert Island while
diameter of about 4 miles. The upper part of the mountain is snow    Chagulak and Amukta Islands are about 3 miles apart and about
covered. Below the snow line, the slopes are dark lava, while    10 and 14 miles, respectively, to the W  of Yunaska. The pass
below 1,500 feet they are covered with grass or tundra. The lower    between Herbert and Yunaska Islands and the pass to the W of the
slopes flatten out and generally terminate in rocky cliffs or steep    latter are deep and clear of dangers. Navigation about these islands
bluffs. On the W and N sides are numerous seepages on the face of    requires caution and frequent soundings during poor visibility.
the bluffs. The westernmost point of the island is an almost flat,    (639)  Current observations taken 1 mile E of Yunaska Island
oblong plateau 1,000 by 1,400 yards, with an average elevation of    indicate velocities of about 2 knots. The greatest velocity observed
about 160 feet. The only stream on the island that may be flowing    was nearly 4 knots. The flood sets N and the ebb S. (See the Tidal
continuously is on the SE side about I mile S of a shack.            Current Tables for predictions.) The velocity of the current
 (632)  The most prominent features along the shore are: on the    changes very rapidly around the times of slack water, and the cur-
NE side of the island, a small peninsula 0.4 mile long, formed by a    rent frequently runs near its maximum flood or ebb velocity for 4
lava-flow jutting out NE into the sea; on the SE side, a knoll form-    or more hours. Strong currents and dangerous tide rips are
ing a rocky point; on the S, a peculiar, dragon-shaped, rock dike    reported in the vicinity of Amukta and Chagulak Islands. In a
protrudes in the shape of a curving ridge and headland at the    small gale and during spring tides, the tide rips are built up by an
extremity forming Dragon Point; off the NW point, a rock has the    opposing swell. A strong ebb against a small swell is reported to
appearance of a partly submerged ship when viewed from the E.    cause 10-foot rips in a dead calm. Currents opposing the swell and
Also a low, offshore rock is in this vicinity.                       a little wind may bring about such seas and rips that small vessels
 (633)  Herbert Island, the southwesternmost of the Four Moun-    are forced to proceed slowly.
tains Island, is separated from Chuginadak Island by 3-mile wide       (640) Yunaska Island is a treeless volcanic island, divided into
Chuginadak Pass. The mountain on the island may be likened to a    two parts by a generally flat valley, with gentle slopes from the
truncated cone, the truncated section being the rim of a crater    bluff back of the shoreline to the base of the mountains. The island
about 1 mile in diameter. The rim is lower on the N side, and from    is mostly grass covered below 1,000 feet, especially in the lower
well offshore to the N the inside of the crater is partly visible. The    flats where the grass is extremely thick and matted. Weather con-
highest part of the island, 4,235 feet, is the S rim of the crater. The    ditions are similar to those of the Islands of Four Mountains.
N side of Herbert Island appears fairly flat when approached from    Yunaska is a wildlife refuge; it has been stocked with blue foxes
the E or W. The N side of the mountain is deeply eroded and the    which are now quite plentiful and tame. Two cabins are on the
most abrupt. The S and W  sides of the island are marked by yel-    island. In general, the landing facilities are poor and there are not
low scars on the cliffs. The island is tundra- and grass-covered,    many sources of drinking water.
with snow from fall to early summer. The lower slopes are regular     (641) A large crater, about 2 miles in its-greatest diameter, is in
and in places gentle.                                                the E part of the island. The highest point of the crater's rim, 1,968
 (634)  Along the W part of the N side of the island is a low bluff,    feet, is found on the NW side. This point appears as a lone peak
less than 50 feet high, which gives way on the E side to high, sheer    from some directions. The crater is surrounded by various conical
bluffs of from 200 to 400 feet. Under these high bluffs, the shore-    and ridgelike hills, interspersed with small craters and lava flows.
line is mainly a boulder beach, 10 to 20 yards wide, with kelp off-    Within the large crater is a small peak, 1,804 feet high, which has
shore. On the flat part of the N end, however, the beach is fairly    its own small crater. Eruptions in this part of the island have been
wide, and reefs, with many rocks awash, extend well offshore, and    known to occur. A prominent lava flow extends from the SW rim
beds of heavy kelp for some distance outside the reef and foul area    for about I mile to the S; it does not reach the shore. The cliffs
line.                                                                along the S shore of this part of the island are honeycombed with
 (635) E of the northernmost point of the island is a shallow bight    caves and marked with many bridges and arches.
which may be used for anchorage in calm weather, though it has a       (642) Near the NE shore of Yunaska Island is a prominent sad-
boulder bottom and in S weather is subject to heavy seas coming      dle-shaped peak, 1,051 to 1,066 feet high. A bold promontory, 747
from the S around the NE corner of the island. Strong currents    feet high, adjacent to the shore, is at the end of a ridge leading NW
tend to form tide rips with any sea that might be running. A cabin,    from the saddle-shaped peak. To the W of this ridge and N of the
at the NW end of the bight, is occupied at frequent intervals by fox    crater is a broad, smooth valley. The surface is composed of
trappers.                                                            porous ash covered with a moderate growth of grass. The entire
 (636) On the W side of the island, near the SW corner, is a cup-    area is well drained by a few narrow ditches 4 to 6 feet deep.
shaped valley, apparently the eroded remains of a crater. The shore    Through the middle of the valley is a long lava flow, about 20 feet
at the foot of this valley is a boulder beach with moderate slopes    high and very rough. The lava flow extends NNE to the shore





                                                     7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                       253


where it spreads along the water's edge and where, under favor-    where charted obstructions exist. A pinnacle rock 91 feet high is
able conditions, landing might be made. A good supply of drink-    off the SE shore.
ing water can be obtained from an underground stream about 150      (652) Around Yunaska Island are three or four fair anchorages.
yards E of and behind the westernmost corner of the lava flow.    South Anchorage, the largest bight on the S side of the island,
The stream flows below and around the boulders of the old beach.    affords protection from N as well as W  weather, and to some
 (643) The NE shore of Yunaska Island is a Steller sea lion rook-    extent also from the NE, in 13 to 15 fathoms with even bottom of
ery site. There is a 3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer zone around    rocks and cinders. The off-lying reef and low rocks in the W part
the rookery which encompasses East Cove. (See 50 CFR 227.12,    of the bight must be avoided, as well as the shoal in the E part. A
chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)                            safe entrance may be made by heading for the middle of the long,
 (644) Along the E and N coast of this part of the island the shore    conspicuous black cinder bluff along the head of the bight on a
is bordered, in general, by steep rocky cliffs that can be scaled in    course 000ï¿½. A tall shaft of rock, leaning slightly, is on the steep
several places. The most important break in the cliffs is at the foot    slope at the W end off the bight.
of the lava flow. East Cove is a broad indentation on the extreme   (653) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences from the nor-
E end of the island. Landing sites are found in East Cove and at    mal variation of as much as 3ï¿½ have been observed at South
the head of a bight N of East Cove where some water can be had.    Anchorage.
 (645) The central valley of the island is composed of flats occa-  (654) East Cove, indenting the E side of the island, affords fair
sionally broken by hills and knolls, and is covered with tundra. No  anchorage in emergency situations, for one ship, in about 10 fath-
dependable permanent source of drinking water has been found in    oms with good holding ground of cinders and mud. The cove is
this valley.                                                       small, with a dangerous off-lying ledge and rocks on the S side,
 (646) On the W part of the island is the highest peak, 3,119 feet.    and with troublesome currents. It affords fairly good protection
It is an apparently lifeless volcano, somewhat eroded, with rem-    from W weather; however, it is subject to violent williwaws dur-
nants of craters on its side and about its base. From the W, the    ing W storms, making it inadvisable to anchor there. Heavy swells
island appears as having grass-covered hills, with high bluffs on    reach this anchorage during SW storms. Launches may find good
the N and S rising abruptly toward the summit of the two-pointed    protection inside the kelp behind the rock reef in the S side of the
peak. The points stand out, particularly from the W, when they are    cove.
not covered by clouds, which is seldom.                             (655) Protection may be found by small craft in a small but pro-
 (647) A low bluff extends along most of the W coastline. N and    nounced cove near the middle of the W shore of Yunaska Island,
S of it much higher bluffs begin and rise 300 to 600 feet in places.    in 52ï¿½36'N., in about 3 fathoms, with a bottom of boulders. A nar-
A 300-foot bluff, beginning about 1 mile from the NW corner of    row channel, about 100 yards wide, leads through the heavy kelp
the island, extends S for about 0.5 mile. A black sand beach, about    to the head of the cove.
40 yards wide and 600 yards long, is at the foot of the S half of this  (656) The best anchorage in emergency situations from S
bluff.                                                             weather is found in a small cove on the N shore of the island in
 (648) With the exception of this short stretch of sand beach, the    170ï¿½41.5'W., in about 16 fathoms, with rock and mud bottom. A
W shore is rugged and has many reefs and rocks awash offshore.    6-fathom depth is at the E end of the cove. About 0.5 mile to the
Many lava points extend outward from the general bluffline. The    W  is a smaller cove, where launches may find good protection
kelp is thick and extends from 50 to 200 yards outside the rocks.    from S weather in 3 fathoms, sandy bottom. A cabin is at the top
On the N and S ends of this shore, where the bluffline is higher,    of the high black bluff at the head of this cove.
the beachline becomes a narrow, boulder shelf at the foot of the    (657) Crater Anchorage, a bight on the W  side of the island,
bluff, and boulders extend out into the water for some distance. A  affords fair anchorage with some protection from E and S weather
large reef extends offshore for over 300 yards from the SW point    in 18 to 20 fathoms, cinder bottom. The bight is marked by a
of the island. On the E side of the bold southernmost point of the    curved black bluff on its E side, the remnant of a crater. Rocks,
island, for a short distance the cliffs drop immediately into the    covered 7 feet, are encountered a very short distance inside 15
water without even a shelf at their foot. Several large offshore    fathoms in 170ï¿½46'W. which constitute a serious danger in this
rocks exist in this locality. A large pinnacle, about 200 feet high, is    anchorage.
about 150 yards offshore and about 1.2 miles NE from this point     (658) Chagulak Island is a steep, volcanic mountain having a
of the island.                                                     sharp peak, 3,750 feet high. Its rugged slopes, mainly a series of
  (649) The shoreline around the island is rugged and has many     sharp, steep-descending rocky ridges marked by numerous pinna-
off-lying rocks and pinnacles. Heavy kelp extends several hundred    cles, terminate generally in rocky cliffs at or near the shore. It is
yards offshore, except off the sand beach in the middle of the S    uninhabited and has no good landing places. The island is steep-to
shore of the island and a few other places where there is deep    on all sides and soundings give little indication of danger. It
water off vertical, lava cliffs. Heavy tide rips and strong currents    should be given a clearance of at least 1 mile. The cove on the W
are encountered off the points, especially those at the NE and SW  side formed by the SW point offers some protection and a possible
ends of the island. All around the island the bottom breaks off    landing for small craft during SE weather; its approach, however,
fairly sharp, becoming more even as the 30-fathom curve is   is endangered by violent tide rips.
approached. Passing ships are advised to keep outside this curve.   (659) Great caution should be exercised during thick weather
  (650) Dangerous shoals extend off the E shore of the island in    while navigating in the vicinity of Chagulak Island. Very strong
the vicinity of an off-lying rock and on the S side of the island in    currents make it impracticable to use soundings as a guide in thick
South Anchorage.                                                   weather. The 200-fathom curve is dangerously close in places,
  (651) Ships should not approach within 1.5 miles of the island's    barring the use of depth curves for rounding the island. There are
shore except with extreme caution. Small craft may consider    no recommended ship anchorages near Chagulak. The island is
themselves safe at distances beyond 0.3 mile from shore, except    small, steep-to, and affords no protection. The two principal




 254                                                  7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


 exceptions to the genera! steepness of the slopes of the ridges are    knowledge or during very clear weather. The flood current sets
 at the SW and SE points of the island.                              NW and the ebb SE. The current is probably in excess of 3 knots.
  (660) The SW point is a peninsula formed by a comparatively    Tide rips were noted through the entire pass.
 long and flat, grass-covered ridge some 300 feet high, and the       (671) Amukta Island has a volcanic mountain cone with a cra-
upward continuation of the ridge toward the mountain summit    ter at the summit. The highest point of the rim of the crater is
which has a comparatively regular and moderate slope. By reason    3,463 feet at its W end. On its S end is an appreciable depression
of its low elevation, the peninsula is generally not fog- or cloud-    of the rim. The mountain is closest to the N shore of the island,
covered during the prevailing low visibility. A slight, rounded rise    where its slopes descend directly to the shore. The base of the
near the shoulder of the ridge at the NW extremity of the penin-    mountain cone proper is at about the 1,000-foot level, and to the E
sula, and another on the S side of the peninsula, are distinctive as    and W the lower slopes reform into spurs, hills, and ridges.
they alone project above the smooth appearing tabletop of the        (672) Near the NE shore a prominent, cinder hill, 1,486 feet high
ridge. On the S face of the peninsula below the second rounded    rises at the side of the cone.
rise is a small white scar in the shore bluff.                        (673) A group of fingerlike pinnacles mark approximately the
  (661) The SE point is the extremity of a moderately descending    flattened, 1,000-foot level that appears as a ridge bordering the E
grass-covered ridge projecting seaward to form a peninsula. The    shore. This apparent ridge descends to the S and is linked with the
rounded NE end of the island above the rocky cliffs along the    prominent ridge forming the peninsula at the SE end of the island,
shore is grass covered and also has a fairly moderate slope.        a low saddle is between them. Rising on the slopes of the moun-
  (662) On the N part of Chagulak Island, about halfway in dis-    tain halfway between its summit and the SE peninsula is a group
tance and elevation along the ridge between the summit and north-    of reddish knolls. A spur projecting from the mountain toward the
ernmost point, is a pronounced saddle. On the N end of this saddle    NW shore is marked by two summits, the inner and higher one
is a summit, with a pinnacle, 1,905 feet high. A second smaller    being a conical peak 1,036 feet high.
and lower pinnacle is just to the N. From these pinnacles the ridge  (674) A ridge of varying elevation borders practically the entire
slopes in a general convex form to the N point of the island. On    W coast and terminates in the peninsula forming the SW end of
the next prominent descending ridge to the E, is a rounded thumb-    the island. On this ridge are some distinctive summits and a
like protrusion, 1,120 feet high, that is visible along the line of the    decided break occurs about halfway along the W  shore. The E
NE tangent of the island. A similar thumb, 1,495 feet high, is on    slopes of the S part of this ridge border the large cove indenting
the W descending ridge, that forms the S boundary of a deep val-    the S side of the island and the adjacent low lava fields.
ley on the W side of the island. It is seen along the line of the SW  (675)  A very distinctive feature on the island is a massive rect-
tangent of the island and particularly well when snow is in the    angular outcrop of rock, crowning one of the summits of the pen-
locality, as the steep sides of the feature itself are generally bare.  insula ridge at the SE end. This 615-foot-high block-shaped
  (663)  Chagulak Island is a nesting place for whalebirds and    landmark is the highest part of the ridge. Another massive outcrop
small gulls which fly in great numbers around the island within a    of rock, peaked in shape, appears on the summit to the N. These
radius of a few miles, and in foggy weather may indicate the prox-    remarkable features are dark, in contrast to the grassy surface of
imity of the island.                                                the remaining part of the ridge, and may sometimes be recognized
  (664) The shore is either of large boulders, vertical cliffs, or out-    well to seaward against the 3-mile distant mountain background of
cropping rock. There are several off-lying features. Off the NW     the island.
side are two prominent rock ledges; the inshore ledge is 55 feet     (676) Amukta Island is generally covered with lava and cinders,
high. Off the E side is a small rocky islet, steep and roughly    and is black in general appearance. However, some grassy areas
rounded in outline at the top and 150 feet high. About 0.6 mile to    are on the ridges along theW side of the island, in the area to the S
the N of the rocky islet and farther offshore is a very dangerous    of the cone, and on the ridge forming the SE peninsula.
detached ledge, it shows 18 feet above the surface and seas sweep     (677) During low visibility the SW peninsula of the island may
over it in moderate weather. Several rocky islets are off the S    be recognized by a 130-foot rock detached from the headland at its
shore and there is a low, rocky ledge off the SW point.             S extremity; it appears as a pointed shaft of rock when viewed
 (665)  On the S shore is a prominent, smooth, narrow slide of    from the NW and the SE sectors. Against a shore background, the
snow and sediment which may be distinguished well out at sea.       rock is not discernible at a distance.
 (666) On the W side is a 225-foot pinnacle rock. A beach land-      (678) High Rock, off the deep cove indenting the S side of
ing may be made on the S side of the pinnacle. About 400 yards N    Amukta Island, is a prominent landmark. It appears as a columnar
of the pinnacle is a 20-foot dike that extends about 20 yards out-    monument rising 68 feet from a rocky ledge base. The top.of the
side the high water line. Many rocks, awash and covered, are off    column is a smooth, truncated surface facing seaward and with
the point 250 yards N of the dike.                                  favorable light, has a light-gray appearance, making it partly dis-
 (667) The N shore is very rugged, with precipitous rocky bluffs.    cernible from offshore against the island background.
In general, the kelp near the shores is thickest along the W shore.  (679) The easternmost point of Amukta Island is formed by a
 (668) A submerged pinnacle having only 2 fathoms over it is    projecting ledge, and directly off the ledge is a rocky islet, the
just within the 100-fathom curve, 0.5 mile NW from the SW point.    inshore side rises vertically to 65 feet. In this locality the shore
In this vicinity are strong, erratic currents and heavy tide rips.  rises abruptly in steps and thence to a jagged, ascending ridge. A
 (669) The small, rocky islet close to the S side of the peninsula    prominent rock pinnacle on the ridge about 200 feet above the
at the SW point affords some protection for making a landing on    water level is about 300 yards from the point.
the island. The cove on the N side of the peninsula affords anchor-   (680) The NE shore of Amukta Island bordering Chagulak Pass
age for small craft in S and E weather,                             is in general composed of lava bluffs or large boulder beaches.
 (670) Chagulak Pass is clear except for the 2-fathom shoal    Along this shore are many detached rocks. A good landing place is
mentioned in the description of Chagulak Island. It is about 3    in the small bight about I mile SE from the northernmost point of
miles wide but passage should be attempted only with local    the island. A temporary small-boat anchorage and landing may be





                                                     7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                       255


found in the small and deeply indented bight around the E side of   (694) A remarkable bottom configuration has been noted in the
the northernmost point.                                            area to the E of High Rock. With a general depth of some 35 fath-
 (681) The W  shore of the island is composed of high bluffs    oms 1 mile off the S side of the island, the depth may increase rap-
meeting the slopes of the nearby ridges.                           idly to 70 fathoms as the shore is approached. There is a
 (682)  A trapper's cabin is on the shore of the bight on the S side    considerable basin of about 50 fathoms, about 0.8 mile in length
of the island; some water is available in this locality,           from E to W, this depth being found about 200 yards NE from
 (683)  Almost the entire coast of Amukta Island is fringed with    High Rock. The 31/2-fathom shoal in this vicinity is on the SW rim
detached rocks and ledges of various description. Off the S coast    of this basin.
of the island an area of broken bottom extends from the SW penin-   (695) As in all other parts of the Aleutian Islands, currents
sula for over 1.5 miles in a SE direction; High Rock is in and near    around Chagulak and Amukta Islands are strong and somewhat
the middle of this area. The section between High Rock and the    erratic in their nature. The general flood direction is to the N, and
peninsula is extremely foul and passage across it should not be    the ebb to the S. Tide rips make up swiftly and furously at times.
attempted. The outlying section has a depth of 31/2 fathoms about    While the channel between the two islands is clear, tide rips give
0.5 mile SE of High Rock.                                          the impression of heavy seas in shoal water. On the flood, the cur-
 (684) An area of broken bottom also extends in a W direction    rent seems to divide on the S side of Amukta Island near the 31/
from the SW peninsula for about 0.8 mile, in which a 21/2-fathom    fathom shoal previously mentioned where the seas are very con-
depth was found 0.3 mile W from the S end of the peninsula.        fused. The currents rejoin near the N point of the island and the
                                                                    reverse action seems to take place on the ebb.
 (685) Along the W shore abrupt changes in depth occur withinilarly,                         the strongest currents along Chagulak Island are
the 20-fatho  curve, which approximately parallels the shore at a    found near the S W point    islatrongesthe  currents alo dividing    Island are
                                                                    found near the SW point of the island, the current dividing some-
                                                                    where near the center of the S shore and rejoining on the N side of
 (686)  From the middle section of the NW shore an area of irreg-    the island. The strong currents are particularly noticeable at times
ular bottom extends 0.8 mile to the 20-fathom curve, thence there    along the E side of this island where the general N trend of the
is an abrupt deepening of several fathoms to seaward.              current is unobstructed.
 (687) From the northernmost point, an area of broken bottom        (697) The currents vary considerably in velocity, and they prob-
with shallow depths less than 5 fathoms extends for about 0.6 mile    ably often exceed 3.5 knots.
in a NW direction. Off each of the several points along the NE      (698) Tide rips are conspicuous off all points, their violence
shore are small detached shoals of 1 V2 to 3 fathoms. Along the E    being somewhat in the following order: Strongest; along the W
shore broken bottom is within the 20-fathom curve that is 0.8 mile    part of Chagulak Island and in the pass between the two islands;
from the shore near the middle of this section. From the SE penin-    around the SW point of Amukta Island and near the 21/2-fathom
sula of the island, a shallow area with depths less than 8 fathoms    shoal; around the N point of Amukta Island; around the SE point
extends in a S direction for about 0.4 mile.                       of Amukta Island, and around the SE point of Chagulak Island.
  (688) As in the case of Chagulak Island no satisfactory anchor-
ages are found in the vicinity of Amukta Island. During storms,     (699)  Chart 16012-Andreanof Islands extend in a 310-mile
the gales draw around its entire coastline to the lee side, causing    chain from Amukta Pass to Amchitka Pass.
violent gusts of wind successively from opposite directions along
the shore. Also, no section of the coast is free of strong currents,  (700)  Chart 16480-Amukta Pass, often called the Seventy-
tide rips, and seas that sweep around the island. The bottom, gen-    second Pass, is a 35-mile-wide clear passage between Amukta
erally of gravel, affords only fair holding ground.                and Seguam Islands; depths are from 55 to 300 fathoms. Both
  (689) The best anchorage for SW weather is in 18 to 20 fathoms,    islands may be seen across the full width of the pass in fair
gravel bottom, about I mile E of the northernmost point of    weather; their shores should be given a clearance of not less than I
Amukta Island, off the cove in that locality. Attention is called to    mile.
the detached 1- to 2-fathom shoals off the several points close to  (701) Seguam Island is rocky and cinder covered, has numer-
this anchorage. The strength of the current here is less than else-    ous lava flows, and is steep-to on all sides. It has, however, several
where along the NE coast.                                          good landing places and an abundant water supply. Irregular
  (690) In SE weather anchor in 18 to 20 fathoms, gravel bottom,    mountain masses are on both the E and W ends of the island and a
about 0.8 mile W of the northernmost point, or in 18 to 20 fathoms    saddle is in the E central section. The formation is volcanic and
off the middle of the cove about 2 miles SE from the northernmost    the peaks are rocky, extinct craters.
point. In coming to anchor at the latter location, a strong NE cur-  (702) The mountains on the W end are higher; Pyre Peak, 3,458
rent may set the vessel toward the foul areas that extend from the    feet, in the W central part, is the highest on the island. The highest
point of the N end of the cove, and a range on the slope of the    peak on the E end is a jagged pinnacle on a small crater within a
shore ridge should be selected and held in order to avoid this.    larger crater and is 2,768 feet high. The mountains on the W end
  (691) In NW weather anchor in Traders Cove, in 24 fathoms    of the island are more ragged. The N coast is low rock and grass
about 0.8 mile E from the SE point of the island. Care must be    bluffs. The other coasts are steep and high, with the peaks close to
taken to avoid the dangerous shoals just within the 20-fathom    the coast. The two good anchorages are Finch Cove on the N, and
curve.                                                             Lava Cove on the S. Numerous pinnacles are close to shore, the
  (692) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as    most prominent are those off the NW point, the highest 98 feet.
6ï¿½ from normal variation have been observed in Traders Cove.        (703) The precipitious E end of the island, except for a small
  (693)  Overnight anchorage is not recommended in the large    peninsula, is at the base of a volcanic mountain having a crater
cove on the S side of Amukta Island. Strong winds from the SE    within a crater, 0.5 mile in diameter, at its summit. The summit has
may make up suddenly and the approach and anchorage are bor-    a confusing appearance; a pronounced rise along the N rim of the
dered by dangers.                                                  main crater is 1,930 feet high and appears as a sharp peak when




256                                                   7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


viewed endwise. Also a pronounced rise is along the N rim of the       (713) Finch Cove offers good protection in SW weather. The
inner crater which is 1,934 feet high. The S rim of the inner crater    survey ship EXPLORER remained at anchor in Finch Cove during
merges with that of the main crater and is 1,820 feet high.          a storm in 1952, with S winds up to force 12. The ship anchorage
 (704)  Relatively shoal-water areas extend off all the principal    is in 14 to 17 fathoms off the center of the N bight. Enter on course
points of Seguam Island, and are usually marked by breakers in    2740, heading for the 58-foot elevated, block-shaped rock. Anchor
bad weather. Kelp grows profusely in most of these areas.            on this bearing (a cross current may be experienced) and on cross
 (705)  Currents around Seguam Island are strong and very    bearing 191ï¿½ to the left tangent of the dividing point of land. Tidal
erratic. As around Amukta and Chagulak Islands, the general flood    currents setting NW and SE have been observed. The NW current
direction is N, with the ebb S. On the flood, the current seems to    has a velocity of about 2 knots. The SE current has a velocity of
divide somewhere near Turf Point, and to rejoin near Finch Point    about 0.5 knot. A 4-fathom spot is 0.3 mile S from this anchorage.
on the N. The reverse appears to take place on the ebb.                (714)  Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as
 (706)  Tide rips are severe off many points; they make up sud-    7ï¿½ from normal variation have been observed in Finch Cove.
denly and furiously, and are dangerous to small craft. Passage         (715)  Finch Point is the dividing point between the N and NE
through the rips by small boats should not be attempted unless the    sides of Seguam Island. It is formed by a broad, gently sloping
operator is familiar with the danger. The worst rips are found    ridge, the shore extremities of which break off into cliffs and
along the W  end, with lesser ones off Moundhill Point and Finch    ledges. Detached rocks of various descriptions lie about the point
Point. These are all conspicuous and while they seem to indicate    and these are particularly numerous at its N extremity. Directly at
shallow water by their whiteness, they make in deep water and so    the N extremity, an 80-foot elevated, massive rock is a prominent
are no menace to navigation for the larger ship.                     landmark, when viewed along the line of the NE tangent. In this
 (707)  Strong currents and tide rips occur around the E end of the    direction it appears vertical at the sides and its irregular top is
island.                                                              roughly in the form of a gable. The outermost rock to the N is
 (708) On the S end of the E coast is Moundhill Point, a small,    lime-covered but it is small and only a few feet high.
rounded peninsula that forms a very important landmark during
the prevailing low visibility. The peninsula is a mound-shaped hill,  (716)  At the northernmost part of Seguam Island just W of Finch
                 465 feet high, and has four, small, rounded protuberances at its    Point a large area of broken bottom extends more than 1 mile off-
summit. The easternmost of these is separated from the remainder    shore. Several lumpy spots of about 8 fathoms are well offshore in
                                                                     this area.
of the group by an appreciable distance and by an apparent depres-
sion in the top. Rounded protuberances also characterize the           (717)  The N shore of Seguam Island is irregular; the beaches are
slopes of the hill. The hill is separated from the mountainous    principally of lava or boulders and in general cliffs or grass-cov-
mainland by a draw about 100 feet high at the neck of the penin-    ered bluffs are directly back of the beaches. The cliffs are compar-
sula. At the water's edge, the hill slopes descend to form almost    atively low. The slopes from the clifftops are covered with a heavy
vertical cliffs of rock. A fair landing is on the N side of the neck.    growth of grass and rise gently toward the high interior regions.
Fair anchorage for small craft is in the cove on the S side, that is    Numerous gullies break up the terrain and are approximately nor-
marked by three tall pinnacles near its SW end.                      mal to the general trend of the coast. Several waterfalls are along
 (709)  Several lumps of about 3 fathoms are in the shallow area    this coast.
0.2 to 0.5 mile E of Moundhill Point. It is advisable to round the    (718) A dangerous 21/2-fathom pinnacle rock with surrounding
cape by at least 1.5 miles.                                          depths of 23 fathoms close-to, is about I mile off the N shore of
 (710)  At the N end of the E coast the land projects to seaward    Seguam Island. The danger is not marked by kelp.
forming prominent Wharf Point, which resembles a wharf or pier        (719)  Saddleridge Point is the northwesternmost point of Seg-
from a distance. The point has a more or less flat top, 50 feet high,    uam Island. The small rise directly inshore from the saddle, is a
and the bluffs on its three sides are approximately rectangular,    definite summit from all offshore directions, but not particularly
forming two distinctive corners at the extremity.                    prominent. A rocky islet 98 feet high, about 0.2 mile NE from the
 (71 )  Finch Cove is an indentation 2 miles in extent along the    point, and several smaller intervening rocks obscure the extremity
NE side of Seguam Island; its N extremity is Finch Point. A long,    of the point when viewed from the NE. A narrow cliff 231 feet
rocky point formed by a spur divides the cove into two parts. At    high, facing seaward and topped by a small grass-covered mound,
the head of the cove, N of the dividing point of land, is an 0.8-mile    rises at the inshore end of a long, narrow, projecting ledge 1.7
stretch of sand beach providing good landing. The approach to the    miles E from Saddleridge Point.
middle section of this beach is apparently free of rocks and the
                                                                       (720)  A mound 80 feet high, resembling a haystack, is 3.7 miles
depths decrease gradually, making this a favorable site for beach-
                 depths decrease gradually, making                   NE from Saddleridge Point. The mound has the appearance of an
ing a vessel in an extreme emergency. The N half of this part of    island but is connected to the       shore. A  -mile stretch of san   an
                                                                     island but is connected to the shore. A I-mile stretch of sand and
the cove is foul with rocks of various description, among which is
                                                the cove is foul with rocks of various description, among which is    cinder beach extends to the SW from this vicinity, and there is a
a 58-foot elevated, block-shaped rock. Along the shore of the cove   waterfall about 0.2 mile NE from the mound.
E and W  of the dividing point of land are stretches of high, promi-
nent cliffs. The W stretch is about 0.3 mile long and 300 feet high,   (721)  From the N rock off Saddleridge Point, foul ground
and the E rounding stretch of cliff is about 0.5 mile long and 500    extends N for 0.2 mile.
feet high. To the E of the latter is a deep valley that extends inland.  (722) Very favorable anchorage for S weather may be had along
A cone-shaped peak, 1,447 feet high is 1.5 miles inland from the    the N central section of the coast of Seguam Island 1.5 to 3 miles
cove.                                                                E of Saddleridge Point. The ship anchorage is 0.5 to 0.6 mile off-
 (712)  Near the center of Finch Cove, an area of extremely bro-    shore in 16 to 18 fathoms, sand and gravel bottom. In coming
ken bottom with shoal depths of about 4 fathoms extends out from    from the E care must be taken to avoid the 2/2-fathom pinnacle I
the dividing point for more than 0.3 mile. In the S part of Finch    mile offshore; passage between the pinnacle and the shore is not
Cove, along the shore E of the dividing point, are heavy kelp beds.  recommended.





                                                      7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                         257


 (723) Saddleridge Point is a Steller sea lion rookery site. There    ate elevation. Curtains of waterfall at two places about 0.2 mile
is a 3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer zone around the point. (See    inland from the E end of the sand beach are visible from the cove.
50 CFR 227.12; chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)               A row of pinnacle projections marks the near-shore ridge, 335 feet
 (724) Camel' Islet is about 0.5 mile off the middle of the NW      high, between Lava Point and the curtains of waterfall.
shore of Seguam Island. It is a massive rock, 53 feet high, and its   (732)  From the point at the W  end of Lava Cove an area of bro-
top from the N or S resembles a camel's hump.                        ken bottom extends SE for 0.7 mile, with a depth of only 13/4 fath-
 (725) The NW coast, from Saddleridge Point to the W end of the    oms 0.4 mile off the SE side of the point.
island, a stretch of 5.5 miles, is in general a boulder beach directly  (733)  On the S side of Seguam Island, Lava Cove and the next
in front of irregular cliffs ranging from 200 to 600 feet high. In    large cove to the W  offer good protection in N weather. The
some places the cliffs rise abruptly from the water's edge. The      anchorage in Lava Cove is in 14 to 17 fathoms, cinder and gravel
slopes from the tops of the cliffs to the mountainous interior are   - bottom, off the indentation at the head of the cove. It has little or
decidedly steeper than those E of Saddleridge Point; also, the    no current. Enter on the N course heading for the E half of the
draws and valleys are steeper and occur at less frequent intervals.    sand beach at the head. In coming from the W, the broad gravel
About 1.2 miles N from the westernmost point of the island, the    point at the W end of the cove should be given a wide berth.
slope is very steep and the cliffs are especially high. The water-     (734)  The SE coast of Seguam Island from a point about 1 mile
falls go dry in late summer. Numerous detached rocks are found    E of Lava Point for about 4 miles to Moundhill Point is dominated
off this coastal stretch.                                            by a chain of three mountain peaks over 2,000 feet high and a very
 (726) Between the westernmost point of Seguam Island and a    distinctive mountain 1,410 feet high, close to the shore in
high, dome-shaped, detached rock about 1 mile to the N is a deep     172ï¿½23'W. The shore slopes of these mountains generally termi-
valley, with gentle ascending lower slopes, that extend inland 1 or    nate in steep, rocky cliffs, and the coast has a bold appearance. A
2 miles.                                                             steep bluff rising to 690 feet marks the promontory near the three
 (727) Along the W  end of Seguam Island very irregular bottom    high pinnacles in the SE part of the cove at the E end of this moun-
is within the 20-fathom curve which follows the coast at a distance    tainous stretch. The upper reach of this bluff overlooks the draw.
of about 0.5 mile. A reef is about 0.3 mile off this end, which is    back of Moundhill Point.
marked by a low rock, 4 feet high, discernible for some distance      (735) Off the middle part of this bold coastal stretch is a group
with a quiet sea. A depth of 33/4 fathoms was found 0.2 mile NW      of five rocky islets; the outer islet is 55 feet high near its inshore
of the reef. Strong currents and tide rips occur in this locality.   end where it drops almost vertically to form its NW side. The area
 (728)  From the W end of the island the coast trends SE for about    between this group of islets and the shore is foul.
1.5 miles to Rue Ledge. This offshore rocky ledge, 36 feet high, is   (736) The 1,410-foot peak, close to the shore about 1.5 miles W
conspicuous when viewed along the SW tangent of the island. The      of the group of islets, has a steep and rugged seaward face and a
inshore side of the elevated part of the ledge has vertical corners;    definite peak. With N winds this mountain may be free of clouds
from here the top slopes to the offshore end. Halfway between this    while those in the background are covered. A small cave about 5
ledge and Turf Point, 2.6 miles to the E, is an off-lying rocky islet    feet deep with an almost rectangular entrance is at the foot of this
which is marked near its offshore end by a cylindrical pinnacle      mountain near the shore. The cave is prominent when the light
rounded at the top. A waterfall over the shore cliff is about 0.2    illuminates the surrounding.yellow portion of the rocky cliff.
mile NE from this pinnacle.                                           (737)  About 0.2 mile SW from the cave, a chain of rocks extend
 (729) Turf Point, the southernmost point of Seguam Island, is a    offshore for a distance of about 230 yards. The inshore rock is 110
comparatively low, broad, and extensive grass-covered projection    feet high while the offshore rocks are low in comparison.
terminating in a rounding bluff. The top of the point is flat and      (738)  An area of broken bottom with shallow depths is within
then rises gently to the steeper inland slopes, which on either side    0.3 mile of the section of the SE shore of the island 0.6 mile to 1.4
of the point terminate in bold rocky bluffs, making the point con-    miles from Moundhill Point.
spicuously low by contrast. A foul area fringes the rounding point.   (739)  Seguam Pass is between Seguam and Amlia Islands. It
W  of Turf Point, the S shore of Seguam Island is high and precipi-    has been regarded with suspicion, and a sailing vessel has been
tous. The cliffs are close to the rocky beach and in places over-    lost on Agligadak Reefs, on the SW side. The pass is about 12
hang it. The bordering mountains are high; grass extends from the    miles wide, and it is reported to have strong currents, rips and
cliffs to about 1,100 feet.                                          overfalls, but no offshore dangers.
 (730)  From Turf Point an area of broken bottom extends S for        (740) Vessels have reported high breaking seas in Seguam Pass.
0.7 mile to the 20-fathom curve, thence abruptly deepening to over    The bottom is irregular, the currents strong, and tide rips may be
40 fathoms.                                                          encountered at any place, but particularly near the shore. The flood
 (731) On the south shore about 5 miles NE from Turf Point is    current sets to the NNW and the ebb to the SSE; probable velocity
Lava Point, a broad, jagged, and comparatively low point form-    exceeds 4 knots. The pass is not recommended.
ing the terminus of an extensive lava flow. A narrow bight, but
deep in extent, indents the middle of the extremity of the point.      (741) Chart 16480.-Amlia Island, on the W  side of Seguam
Lava Cove, immediately W of Lava Point, extends for 2.5 miles    Pass, is 40 miles long and has a greatest width of about 8 miles.
to a rounded gravel point fringed with covered and detached          On the island are a few small lakes. A chain of sharp peaks extend
rocks. The gravel point is formed by a short broad spur 196 feet    the length of the island, but none is especially distinctive. The E
high, projecting from a regular, grass-covered mountain slope that    end of the island is visible for a considerable distance and is a
descends to shore cliffs on either side of the point. At the head of    good landmark in fair weather; it has a straight profile at a moder-
Lava Cove is a decided indentation in which are several streams    ate elevation and drops to the sea in a precipice. The point should
and a 0.8 mile stretch of sand beach. An ocean swell generally    be given a berth of several miles because of the rocks and reefs to
makes landing difficult. The remaining shore of the cove is com-    the E and S. The unsurveyed areas around the island should be
posed mainly of jagged projections of rock or lava cliffs of moder-    approached with caution.




258                                                  7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


 (742)  Agligadak Reefs extend about 4 miles from the E extrem-    Point, and 0.6 mile from the N shore of Amlia Island. There are
ity of the island.                                                  probably other dangerous pinnacles in this area.
 (743)  Agligadak Island, Tanadak Island, and Sagigik Island         (754) In approaching Amlia Pass from S or N vessels should
are small islets off the E end of Amlia Island. Their only impor-    stay in the area of charted soundings to avoid reported dangers off
tance is as dangers to navigation.                                  the islands. Courses through Amlia Pass should pass 0.5 mile off
 (744)  Agligadak Island is a Steller sea lion rookery site. There    Pinnacle Point, 200 yards off Swift Point, and 400 yards off Eddy
is a 3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer zone around the entire island    Point to avoid the reef on the W  side of the pass. Extreme caution
which encompasses Tanadak and Sagigik Islands. (See 50 CFR          is necessary to avoid the 21/2-fathom reef 500 yards W of Swift
227.12, chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)                     Point.
 (745) Sviechnikof Harbor is on the S shore of Amlia Island
about 15 miles from the E point. The entrance is about 0.2 mile       (755)  Chart 16480.-Atka Island, separated from Amlia Island
wide and is difficult to make out, and should be attempted only in    by Amlia Pass, is 10 by 50 miles in extent and the largest of the
clear weather. Sagigik Island, about 9 miles E, and the pyramid    Andreanof group. Korovin Volcano, 4,852 feet high, is 3 miles
peak to the right of the entrance, may be recognized. The harbor    inland from the N end of the island. The formation of the island is
extends about 2 miles in a NNW direction and has an average    volcanic and similar to the other islands of the Aleutian Chain.
width of about 0.3 mile. It can be entered without difficulty, is well    Many species of birds frequent the island, but the island and adja-
sheltered, and has good holding ground. Excellent anchorage is    cent islets are reported to be overrun with rats.
available in the N end of the harbor in 10 fathoms, soft bottom.      (756)  Several peaks varying in elevation to 3,200 feet extend
The W side of the entrance should be favored until past the long    along the interior of Atka Island. These peaks are seldom visible
island and the rocks and reefs on the E side.                       because of fog, mist, and low ceiling. A 1,100-foot-high peak at
 (746)  Chalugas Bay, just W of Cape Idalug on the N coast of    the W  end of the island is frequently clear. Because of the preva-
Amlia Island, is a small harbor reported suitable for small boats    lent weather conditions, extreme caution should be exercised in
only; however, the anchorage for small vessels in 20 to 22 feet is    approaching the land. There is considerably less fog and mist dur-
just off the entrance.                                              ing the colder months when the higher peaks show more fre-
 (747)  The bight on the E side of Cape Idalug offers a lee in S    quently. Currents are weak, except at the passes E and W  of the
weather for vessels of all sizes. The recommended anchorage for    island.
deep-draft vessels is in 9 fathoms, soft bottom, at the entrance to  (757)  There are several anchorages along the S coast of Atka
the inner basin.                                                    Island, but care should be exercised in approaching the coast
                                                                    because of the numerous rocks and shoals, and currents. A rock,
 (748)  Chart 16490.-Amlia Pass, a 1-mile-wide strait between    3.5 miles offshore and 18 miles from the W  end, is covered 3/4
Amlia Island and Atka Island, has depths of 5 to 22 fathoms    fathom and breaks in moderate seas. Several shoals with least
through a narrow 400-yard passage restricted by a reef that    depth of 10 fathoms, as much as 5 miles offshore S of Vasilief and
extends I mile off the Atka Island shore. The pass should be used    Kobakof Bays, show current boils, slicks, and tide rips during
only by small light-draft vessels at slack water because of the    calm weather. Other shoals with lesser depths are farther inshore.
strong and complex currents.                                        Fairly strong E-W currents have been observed S of Sagchudak
 (749)  Mid Reef, a high part of the reef that extends from Atka    Island to S of Cape Tadluk..
Island shore, shows at all times, but is awash in extremely heavy     (758)  There is a suitable small-craft anchorage at the E end of
weather. Other small areas may occasionally appear at extreme    Atka Island, 3 miles W of Amlia Pass in 52ï¿½06.7'N., 174ï¿½09.3'W.,
low water.                                                          in 18 to 20 fathoms, sand and shell bottom, but the swinging room
 (750)  The shores on both sides of Amlia Pass are steep, rock    is limited and the water is quite deep. The off-lying islands and
bluffs rising to low hills. Kelp grows along the shores. A ledge    rocks give protection from SE seas but the anchorage is open to S
extends 100 yards outside the bluff line at Eddy Point, the west-    and SW weather. To reach the anchorage from 52005.0'N.,
ernmost point on Amlia Island. Deep water is outside this ledge    174ï¿½08.3'W., make good a course of 0000 for 1.7 miles, then
and off the shore at Swift Point, Amlia Island. At Pinnacle Point,    change course to 2700 for 0.7 mile to anchorage.
Amlia Island, is a prominent pinnacle on the shore with an 80-foot   (759)  Vasilief Bay, on the S side of Atka Island 10 miles W of
off-lying pinnacle immediately SE.                                  Amlia Pass, offers anchorage in 25 to 30 fathoms, fine sand with
 (751)  A current of l0 knots has been observed in Amlia Pass;    broken shell bottom, at 52006.0'N., 174ï¿½20.0'W. The offshore
when the current is strong large tide rips usually occur. The cur-    islands offer some protection from S seas. This anchorage should
rent floods N and ebbs S. In general, tide rips exist in and outside    be entered from the SE, keeping 0.5 mile E of the offshore islands.
of the N end of the pass during the flood, and in and outside of the    There is a rock awash in 52ï¿½02.4'N., 174ï¿½21.0'W.
S end during the ebb. When the current is running, small tide rips   (760)  Kobakof Bay, 15 miles W of Amlia Pass, offers excellent
exist over the reef. During strong currents, heavy swirls exist in    anchorage in all but moderate to heavy seas. Anchorage in 25 to
the pass and its approaches, the greatest intensity being near Eddy  30 fathoms, mud and sand bottom, is available at 52ï¿½03.7'N.,
Point.                                                              174ï¿½28.6'W. The NW arm of the bay offers protection from S seas
 (752)  N of Eddy Point the current floods NE and ebbs SW, set-    in 20 to 30 fathoms, but is limited in swinging room. In entering
ting a vessel off course just N of the pass. Duration of slack is    the bay from a point midway between Sagchudak Island and
about 10 minutes; however, there is often a period of I to 3 hours    Amtagis Island, steer a midchannel course of 347ï¿½ until the point
when the current is not strong, and there are practically no tide    of land ahead is 0.7 mile distant, thence a course of 293ï¿½ to the
rips.                                                               anchorage. Some fairly strong rotary currents may be encountered
 (753) Heavy tide rips that extend several miles NE of Amlia    along the E side of Sagchudak Island.
Pass have been observed with a moderately heavy swell from the       (761)  The pass on the N side of Sagchudak Island is generally
NE. A pinnacle, covered 41/2 fathoms, is 1.5 miles NE of Eddy       foul, containing kelp and shoal areas which break in a moderate





                                                     7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                       259


swell. Only small craft having local knowledge should use this    colored radio masts about 0.2 mile N of the cape are reported to be
pass.                                                              conspicuous landmarks.
 (762) Explorer Bay, 18 miles W  of Amlia Pass, offers a pro-       (770) Palisades Point, 3.5 miles W  of Cape Kudugnak, has
tected anchorage in any weather in 11 to 13 fathoms, fine sand bot-    rocky bluffs with a 375-foot plateau that extends inland to the
tom. However, there is limited swinging room and the entrance is    mountains. A 60-foot-high rock is close to shore just W of the S
through a narrow channel between dangerous rocks and shoals. In    end of the point.
entering from a position at 52ï¿½00.0'N., 174ï¿½30.4'W., steer a course  (771) Cone Island, near the W  part of Nazan Bay, is 83 feet
of 000ï¿½ until the N end of Sagchudak Island-bears 090ï¿½, then    high; the northernmost of the three islands has three remarkable
shape course to 327ï¿½, keeping 0.3 mile off the point of land on the    pinnacles on it.
W side of the bay, until the SE point of the W arm of the bay bears  (772) Bolshoi Islands are a group of grass-covered islands
2160, distant 0.5 mile, thence on course 2770 for 0.4 mile to the    along the S shore of Nazan Bay. The westernmost and largest
anchorage. This course passes over or just N of an 8-fathom shoal,    forms the E side of the inner harbor at Atka. A waterfall on the S
0.2 mile S of a 4-fathom shoal, and 0.1 mile N of a 6-fathom    shore of the bay, 1.7 miles SE of Atka, is prominent.
shoal. The area outside the channel, on the W side of Sagchudak     (773). Anchorage for large vessels is available in the outer harbor
Island, is very broken with scattered rocks which generally are    W of Palisades Point in 35 to 17 fathoms; vessels can also anchor
apparent to the navigator.                                         close to the N shore of the bay E of the point. Anchorage W of
 (763)  Beaver Bay, 23 miles W of Amlia Pass, offers anchorage    Bolshoi Islands in the inner harbor in 6 to 12 fathoms is sheltered,
for small craft in the outer and W arm. Protection from all except    but is limited in area to only small vessels.
SE seas is available in 15 to 20 fathoms, fine sand with broken     (774)  The tide in Nazan Bay is chiefly diurnal, the range being
shell bottom. Entrance to the anchorage must be made by keeping    3.3 feet. The harbor in the W part of the bay will often be clear
to the SW of the small islands in theentrance.                     when there is fog in the entrance.
                                                                      (775) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as
 (764) The small bays between Explorer Bay and Beaver Bay
offer some protection for small vessels, but the bottom is generally    50 from normal variation have been observed in Nazan Bay.
broken and the lee afforded from onshore winds in negligible.       (776) Vessels proceeding to anchorage in theW part of Nazan
                                                                    Bay should pass N of Uyak Island taking care to avoid the 5-
 (765)  Tillanmook Cove, 30 miles W of Amlia Pass, is of little    fathom rock 0.7 mile E of the island. Small vessels continuing to
value as an anchorage because it is open to the sea and has poor
                                                                    the inner anchorage should pass midway between the highest part
holding ground.A more comfortable anchorage is in 13 fathoms
                 hoding ground. A more comfortable anchorage IS    13 fathoms,    of the S islet S of Cone Island and the high-water rocks at the NW
just outside the cove. A 40-foot pinnacle rock marks the seawardI
end of the W side. A shoal extends some distance seaward of the    point of Boshoi Isand.
                                                                      (777) Trading vessels bound through Amlia Pass use a channel S
point of land marking the E side of the entrance. The W side of the    of the Bolshoi Islands, but this route is not recommended without
cove is practically vertical to about 100 feet, then slopes steeply to  local knowledge beca use i t is near many   covered and uncove red
over 1,000 feet. At the head of the bay is a black sand and volcanic
ash beach. The E shore is characterized by rocky ledges; the land    rocks.
                                                                      (778) Atka, at the W end of Nazan Bay behind Bolshoi Islands,
rises to about 300 feet from the water to a relatively level shelf    isn77   A tka, at the W         end of Nazan Bay behind Bosho Islands,
                                                                    is not visible until after the largest island is passed. Most of the
before rising to the mountains farther inland. There is considerable
                 surf with only a slight swell setting into the cove  village population is employed in fishing and sealing at Pribilof
                                                                    Islands. Mail is delivered by air from Anchorage. Water is avail-
 (766) Sergief Bay, 35 miles W of Amlia Pass and 13 miles E of    able from a stream near the village. Small boats can be beached on
Cape Kigun, is a suitable anchorage except during strong S winds;    a well-sheltered tide flat behind Bolshoi Islands, 0.4 mile SE of
holding ground is probably poor. The gently sloping beach at the    the village.
head of the bay is black sand or volcanic ash. In entering the bay
from a position in 5P059'N., 175000'W., hold a course of 0000       (779) Chart 16480.-The N coast of Atka Island is indented by
until the end of the W entrance point is abeam, then shape course    numerous small bays. Most of the points are bold headlands rising
to pass 300 yards off the rock awash in 52001.6'N., and after pass-    tosheer300 to 800-footknobs or heads, and then rising more
ing this rock steer 315ï¿½ for the head of the bay.
                                                                    gradually to the peaks farther inland. The land area is treeless and
  (767) Anchorage in 20 fathoms, fine sand bottom, is near the    is covered with tundra to about 1,000 feet, above which there is
center of the small bight 10 miles E of Cape Kigun, the W end of    little vegetation. Bluffs generally extend into the bays and bights,
Atka Island. A point and off-lying reefs offer some protection    but as a rule the heads of the bays are low, with sand, gravel, or
from W  seas. Vessels can also anchor in 17 to 20 fathoms, sand    small boulder beaches, back of which valleys carry into the inte-
with broken shell bottom, 0.5 mile offshore near the center of a    rior. A low pass crosses the island between Nazan Bay and
small bight 3 miles E of Cape Kigun.                               Korovin Bay. SW of the pass the island is lower and runs off to the
                                                                     narrow W end.
  (768) Chart 16490.-Nazan Bay, indenting the E coast of Atka        (780) A high conical peak is near Cape Shaw, the E extremity
Island N of Amlia Pass, provides good anchorage. The greater part    of Atka Island. The slopes of the Korovin Volcano mountain break
of the outer harbor is partially protected, but strong winds draw    off in a rocky escarpment at North Cape, the N end of the island.
through the lowland between Nazan and Korovin Bays. The bay
is subject to heavy swells and is at times unsafe for small boats.  (781) Chart 16487.-Korovin Bay, on the N side of Atka Island
  (769) Cape Kudugnak, the N point of Nazan Bay entrance, is a    across a low pass from Nazan Bay, is a good anchorage except in
200-foot rounded, grassy knoll rising abruptlyfrom the shore. The;    heavy W  weather. The shores are bold, sheer cliffs bordered by
island behind the cape rises uniformly for 2.5 miles to a 2,687-foot    numerous pinnacles, except for the low gravel beach at the head
mountain. Uyak Island, 3.5 miles WSW from Cape Kudugnak, is    and low land near a lagoon on the N shore. The entrance points,
100 feet high, rounded with grass top and rocky bluffs. Five silver-    Cape Korovin on the N and Egg Point on the S, are bold head-





260                                                 7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


lands rising abruptly to mountain ranges. Egg Point terminates in a  (796) Banner Point, on the NE side of the entrance to Banner
prominent 135-foot-high pinnacle rock at the shore.                Bay, is lined by bluffs. Above the bluffs the land slopes upward to
 (782) Korovin Bay has depths of 80 to 10 fathoms to within 0.6    a 1,590-foot peak about 1 mile from the outer end of the point. A
mile of the shore, except for rocks about 2 miles from the E end.    grass-covered islet, 165 feet high, is 0.3 mile NE of Banner Point.
The higher of these two rocks bares 2 feet and can be used as a     (797) A rock that uncovers is 0.5 mile N of Banner Point; 0.1
navigational aid. A prominent 100-foot-high pyramidal-shaped    mile N of the rock is a 3-fathom shoal; 0.2 mile NW of the rock is
pinnacle rock is near the head of the bay about 0.2 mile off the S    a 5-fathom shoal. Kelp grows on both shoals.
shore.                                                              (798) Banner Bay is about 3 miles long and 0.8 mile wide. The
 (783) Anchorage is available in the NE part of Korovin Bay in    trend of the bay is E and W. The- shores are bold but free of dan-
40 to 10 fathoms with gray sand bottom, fair holding ground. The    gers except for two groups of rocks, 2 and 25 feet high, in the NE
small coves on the S shore provide shelter for very small vessels,    half of the entrance, and for an 8-fathom spot 0.3 mile off the S
but the swinging room is limited. The bay is not sheltered from the    shore, 1 mile inside the entrance. Anchorage is available 0.6 mile
SE or SW because strong winds howl through the draws and    from the head of the bay in 33 fathoms, which is the general depth
ravines which cut the hogback on Atka Island; caution is neces-    in this part of the bay. Strong winds pull through this bay and as a
sary to avoid being forced onto the N shore. Oftentimes, when it   rule, are diverted to blow in or out of the bay.
seems as though the winds coming out of the draws in a SE direc-    (799) Approaching Banner Bay, a large group of rocks, from
tion are the prevailing winds, it will be found that outside the bay    which a foul area extends 0.8 mile S, are about 1 mile N of the
the general winds are SW.                                          entrance and 0.6 mile off the shore of Atka Island. The highest of
 (784) Sarana Cove, indenting the S shore of Korovin Bay 4    these rocks, 57 feet and grayish in color, serves as an aid in reach-
miles E of Egg Point, is foul and should not be attempted by any    ing the bay.
craft without local knowledge. Martin Harbor, 6 miles E of Egg      (800) To enter, from a position with the NE point of Salt Island
Point, is small but offers good protection for small craft in all    bearing 290ï¿½, distant 0.5 mile, steer 156ï¿½, heading for the highest
weather at the head in 11 fathoms with mud and sand bottom.        bluff (also the highest nob on a ridge of low hills) at the S point of
 (785) Egg Bay is separated from Korovin Bay by the rugged    the entrance to Banner Bay. Hold this course until the group of
cape that terminates in Egg Point. The shores of Egg Bay are    rocks in the entrance to the bay bears 090ï¿½, then haul to the port
mountainous, with humpy, grass-covered slopes. At the head of    into the bay on midchannel courses.
the bay is Egg Island, steep sided, round topped, and grass cov-    (801) Salt Island, about 2.5 miles W of Banner Point, is a valu-
ered.                                                              able aid to the navigator in approaching Atka Island. This island is
 (786) Starichkof Reef is 1.5 miles W of Egg Point. The eastern-    1.3 miles long in a NE and SW direction and about 0.5 mile wide.
most and largest islet is a vertical-sided block of rock 61 feet high.    The highest point of the island, 543 feet, is in the NE half. All
The second most conspicuous rock is a spurlike pinnacle about 0.5    shores are rocky and bold, the NW shore and NE and SW points
mile NW of the block-like rock. There are several other rocky    being particularly so, with sheer cliffs over most of the shoreline,
islets, as well as a number of reefs or shoals in this area.       that is fringed by high pinnacle rocks. These pinnacles are particu-
 (787) A dangerous 21/2-fathom shoal is 0.3 mile N of the islets    larly evident when the island is viewed from the SW or NE. The
and 1.6 miles W of Egg Point.                                      island is covered with grass and tundra. A small cabin is near the E
 (788) Two shoals SW of Starichkof Reef make it inadvisable to    end of the S shore.
enter Egg Bay from the W side of the reef. One shoal, having a      (802) A group of bare rocks are 0.5 to 1 mile SE of Salt Island.
least depth of 21/4 fathoms, is 0.5 mile SW from the W group of    The highest of these is a light-colored, gray pinnacle of 38 feet. A
islets. The other shoal, having a least depth of 33/4 fathoms, is 0.8    reef covered with heavy kelp obstructs the passage between Salt
mile SW from the same islets.                                      Island and these rocks and then continues SE. A small-boat pas-
 (789) A 4'/2-fathom shoal is 0.3 mile offshore on the E side of    sage is about 0.3 mile off the shore of Atka Island. It has a least
the bay, 0.8 mile S of the entrance at Egg Point.                  depth of 6 fathoms, and scattered kelp over most of the passage.
 (790) Several other shoals having least depths of 8 to 12 fathoms    Foul ground extends 300 yards offshore, and heavy kelp may be
are near or in the bay. They should be avoided.                    encountered 0.5 mile off the Atka shore.
 (791) Numerous rocks and reefs border the shores of Egg Bay.       (803) A 2-fathom shoal is 1.3 miles S of Salt Island and 1.4
The E shore for the first 2 miles S of Egg Point is especially dan-    miles W by N from the nearby prominent point of Atka Island.
gerous and should not be approached closer than 0.3 mile.           (804) Several reefs extend offshore from the N side of Salt
 (792) A pinnacle rock with a least depth of 3 feet is 250 yards    Island, up to a distance of 0.3 mile.
off the NE shore of Egg Island.                                     (805) Anchorage in 22 to 24 fathoms, sand bottom, is available
 (793) Approach Egg Bay on a course of 180ï¿½ to pass 0.5 mile E    S of Salt Island, affording protection from N and E weather.
of the easternmost islet in Starichkof Reef. When this islet is    Anchor with the trend of the E shore of Salt Island in range and
slightly abaft the beam, change course to 134ï¿½, heading for the left    bearing 0200, and the 38-foot pinnacle in the group of rocks off
tangent of Egg Island. When 0.5 mile from Egg Island, haul to the    Salt Island bearing 090ï¿½. Small vessels may anchor close inshore.
left and round the island, keeping approximately in midchannel.    Considerable shelter is afforded by the reef and kelp patch that
 (794) Anchorage for medium-draft vessels is found NE of Egg    extend out from Salt Island.
Island in 20 to 25 fathoms. The bottom is soft, fine, green sand,   (806) In W weather suitable anchorage is available in 20 fath-
with rather poor holding ground. The lower end of Egg Bay offers    oms, sand bottom, about 0.5 mile off the E shore of Salt Island,
fair protection in both N and S weather. The least swell is found S    with the 38-foot pinnacle bearing 200ï¿½.
of Egg Island.                                                      (807) Anchorage for large vessels is available in the bight of
 (795) From Egg Bay to Banner Bay the shoreline is irregular and    Atka Island to the S and SW of Salt Island, in 20 to 25 fathoms,
has several small bights. The bights, as well as the approaches to    hard bottom, with protection from E to SW weather. The
them, are foul. This area should be avoided.                       approaches to the shores and anchorage are free of dangers except




                                                     7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                       261


for scattered off-lying rocks which are well within the 20-fathom    anchorage. The point on the E side of the bay appears as a long,
curve.                                                             broken, sloping ridge terminating in detached rock reefs at the
 (808) Deep Bay, about 3 miles S of Salt Island, is about 2 miles    waterline.
long and averages 0.3 mile wide, making into Atka Island shore in   (818) A 9-fathom shoal is on the E side of the entrance to the
a SE direction. General depths range from 20 to 26 fathoms. From    bay, about 0.6 mile E of the Kovurof Point shoreline and about 0.3
the NW a long flat ridge can be seen at the S side of the entrance to    mile N of the rocks on the E side of the bay entrance.
the bay. The shores are bold but clear of dangers, except for sev-  (819)  A small dome-shaped, rocky islet 14 feet high is 0.1 mile
eral rocks at the middle of the entrance, and adjacent foul ground    off the W shore of the bay about 1 mile S of Kovurof Point. A 3-
and rocks 100 to 200 yards off the entrance points. The most    fathom shoal is 270 yards 115ï¿½ from the rocky islet; a 21/2-fathom
prominent rock in the middle of the entrance is 6 feet high.    shoal is 550 yards 175ï¿½ from the islet.
Anchorage in this: bay is not suitable for large craft because of   (820) A reef that uncovers 1 foot is in the lower part of the bay
insufficient swinging room. Medium-sized craft may anchor in 20    0.1 mile off the E shoreline and 0.5 mile SE from the islet. A cov-
fathoms about 0.5 mile inside the entrance, or in suitable depths at    ered reef, marked by kelp, extends 200 yards NW from the 1-foot
the head of the bay. Bottom in the bay is hard. About 0.5 mile    reef. Because of these various shoals it is not advisable for vessels
inside the entrance to the bay, a small inner bay makes into the S    to proceed S of the islet.
shore. This small bay is about 0.3 mile long, and depths range      (821) Approach Wall Bay on a heading of 180ï¿½, passing the
from 2 to 5 fathoms. It is suitable for small craft. To enter Deep    Kovurof Point shoreline at a distance of 0.3 mile. When the rocks
Bay, pass 200 to 300 yards W to SW of the 6-foot rock in the mid-    on the E side of the entrance are 1 point forward of the port beam,
die of the entrance.
                                                                    anchor in 17 fathoms, gray sand bottom.
 (809) Island Point, 4 miles SW of Salt Island, is an irregular-
 (809) Issland Point, 4 miles SW of Salt Island, is an irregular-  (822)  Small boats can land on the sand beaches at the head of the
topped, grassy headland 515 feet high. Because of the low valley
between the headland and the main shore, this point may appear as    bay.
an island to ships approaching from the W. Rocks and reefs fringe
Island Point from 200 to 500 yards offshore. A conspicuous rock     (823)  Chart 16486.Kovurof Point is the most prominent point
22 feet high is 0.2 mile NE of the point.                          W of Salt Island along the N shore of Atka Island. It is a double
 (810) The bight in the shoreline between Island Point and    point, both parts of which slope gradually to to a common peak
Kovurof Point is about 1.5 miles to its head. Three inner bays    1,320 feet high. This peak is quite prominent on the few days out
open into this bight.                                              of the summer when it can be seen. The E point is the more prom-
 (8si) Bluefox Bay is the open bight that extends for several    inent of the two and makes out farther to the N. It is distinguished
miles W of Island Point. Two arms extend to the E and the S. A     by four flat-topped pinnacles directly off the point. Two of these
conspicuous, rugged hill 1,495 feet high is west of these arms. The    pinnacles blend in together from certain directions and only three
shoreline of Bluefox Bay, especially in the arms, is irregular and    can be seen. The pinnacles identify this point.
broken, with many inshore reefs and pinnacles.                      (824) Between Kovurof and Bechevin Points is a bight I mile in
 (812) The E arm is open and easy to approach. It offers some    depth. Two small inner bays open into this bight, Kovurof Bay and
protection from E weather. Anchorage is in 16 to 20 fathoms, the    Podsopochni Bay. They are separated by a peak 1,225 feet high,
bottom irregular and rocky, and offering poor holding ground.      which stands alone. The summit is a sloping ridge as seen from
 (813) A rock awash is at the entrance to the S arm, 0.2 mile W of    offshore; a sharp peak as seen from the E and W.
the E shore. This S arm has a hard bottom and is an indifferent     (825) Kovurof Bay is suitable as a small-boat refuge. There are
anchorage for shallow-draft craft. A 31/2-fathom shoal is in the    numerous islands and rocky islets at its entrance. The passage W
middle of the entrance to the bay, S of the rock awash. The W      of these islands into the head of the bay is free of all dangers,
shore should be favored in entering the arm.                       except close alongshore. Anchorage for small craft is available in
  (814) A small unnamed bay about 2.5 miles W of Bluefox Bay    4 to 10 fathoms, sand bottom.
is behind a chain of rocky islets making out from the shore in a NE  v (826) Podsopochni Bay, between Bechevin Point and Podso-
direction. The larger and closer inshore islets are flat topped and    pochni Point, has a general depth greater than 10 fathoms and
grass covered; the outer islets are bare, black rock and of lesser    may be used as an emergency anchorage for small- and medium-
height, the outermost being 20 feet high. A number of kelp    sized craft in any but N weather. The bay is free of dangers to
patches on 3- to 5-fathom shoals are from 0.1 to 0.5 mile offshore    within 0.3 mile of the shore. Enter the bay midway between the
NW of these rocks. The offshore point of these rocks should be    small, grass-covered island, 40 feet high, off Podsopochni Point,
given a berth of at least 0.8 mile.                                and the kelp-marked 6-fathom shoal 0.7 mile NE of Bechevin
  (815) The shoreline between the chain of rock islets and Wall    Point.
Bay has two indentations or inlets. At the head of these, as well as  (827) Bechevin Point, 5 miles SW of Kovurof Point, is also a
at the heads of the two first-mentioned arms, are small beaches    double point, with a small bight in the shoreline between. The
where pulling boats can land.                                      bluffs at the ends of these points rise to about 250 feet and are
  (816) The bottom in the area between Bluefox Bay and Wall    brown in color, streaked with gulleys and studded with pinnacles.
Bay is irregular and spotted with rocky patches.                   The E part of the point rises abruptly to a sharp: peak of 710 feet;
  (817)  Wall Bay is on the E side of Kovurof Point. It is a small    the W part rises to a head of 615 feet, and then drops to a saddle
bay that may be used as an anchorage by medium-draft vessels.    before rising to the 1,000-foot-ridge behind.
This bay is about 1.5 miles long in the N and S direction and about  (828) N of the W part of Bechevin Point at a distance of 0.7 mile
0.3 mide wide. High hills and bluffs border the W side of the bay,    is a rocky 14-foot islet that is the most conspicuous and dangerous
and moderate hills are on the E side. A valley leads off to the S    menace to navigation in this locality. Matted kelp and submerged
from the head of the bay. In S weather strong winds sweep out    reefs make out from the point and surround this rocky islet for
from this valley into the bay, making the bay an indifferent    some distance. Passage between the islet and the point should not




262                                                   7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


be attempted, except by small craft; a low, flat reef which uncovers    is open to the W. The other is a small lagoon, at the middle of the
2 feet is 400 yards off the point.                                   head of the bay, suitable only for the smallest launches.
  (829) The deep bight between Bechevin Point and White Point          (830) Slope Point, the W side of Crescent Bay, is a grassy slop-
contains two small inside bays. The bay to the E, Portage            ing ridge, rising gradually to a hill 865 feet high. Several rocky
Lagoon, is marked by numerous bare, black, rocky islets at its    islets I to 5 feet high extend from the end of this point.
entrance, and by a high, steep-sloped peak directly W  of the         (837) Klgun Bay, the bight between Slope Point and Cape
entrance. This lagoon which extends from Bechevin Bay across    Kigun, is backed by low hills appearing as a low pass through the
Atka Island almost to the Pacific side of the island, when seen    island. Depths of 10 to 15 fathoms are in the outer part of the bay,
from the NW, appears as a low pass through Atka Island; Small    decreasing to about 3 fathoms within 0.2 mile of the shore. The
boats can enter Portage Lagoon as heavy seas do not enter this    head of the bay is light-colored sand which is evident from sea-
lagoon because of the string of reefs and islets across the entrance    ward. In the E half of the bight, a low point of scattered, rocky
that act as a breakwater. Passages between these reefs are narrow    islets makes out from the shore; the point is surrounded by kelp.
and dangerous, especially in heavy weather, and should not be    Foul ground is near the shore around most of the bay.
attempted by strangers. One passage is between the southwestern-       (838)  Cape Kigun, the W  extremity of Atka Island, is a bold
most reef and the W  shoreline. Several kelp-covered reefs are in    point of brownish cliff with close, alongshore reefs. The ridges
this passage. A second passage is E of the grass-topped islets and    making up from the several small points converge on a round-
about midway in the line of reefs. This passage is about 50 yards    topped peak, about 1,130 feet high, that is prominent in clear
wide and has covered rocks on both sides.                            weather. It is a single peak 0.6 mile E from the extreme W  end of
  (830)  Bechevin Bay, when approached from the N, is identified    the island.
by the aforementioned low pass or valley cutting through the           (839)  Koniuji Island, 14 miles NE from Cape Kigun, is volca-
mountainous coast of Atka Island to the Pacific. The rocky islet    nic, and all sides, except the S and SE, are sheer and precipitous,
0.7 mile off Bechevin Point helps to identify the bay. The SW side    rising to two sharp summits of 896 feet and 790 feet. The S side of
of the entrance to the bay is marked by a rugged hill with deeply    the island, above lower bluffs at the shore, slopes gradually to a
eroded scars and slides. The base of the hill is fringed with whit-    ridge about 0.2 mile N and drops off again into a ravine that passes
ish-gray rock along the shore. Farther in, a low, grassy headland island at some elevation. The slope up from the S side
rounded when entering the inner part of the bay.                     is grass covered. The NW end of the island is a low, flat, rocky
  (83i)  Bechevin Bay is about 4 miles long and I mile wide. It is    point about 200 yards long. About 75 yards off the N shore is a
fairly open and exposed. Strong, gusty winds drawing through the    detached rock, 8 feet high, that is distinguishable from certain
mountain passes are common. Large ships anchoring in the outer    directions. An extensive kelp patch makes out to the S of the
bay will find less wind in the lee of the prominent 1,510-foot hill    island. Also, in the summer, heavy kelp is found along and well
just SW of Portage Lagoon. The survey ship frequently anchored    off the W  shore. The island is clear of dangers at a distance of 0.5
0.5 mile off the shore under this hill in 20 fathoms, with the N tan-    mile from the shoreline.
gent of the hill bearing 090ï¿½ and the low, grassy headland on the N          This island is the nesting place of thousands of sea fowl
side of the entrance to the inner bay bearing 250ï¿½. The bottom is    that make their nests among the grass-covered, volcanic boulders
even and consists of coarse, dark sand with broken shell.
 (832)  The inner bay offers good anchorage to shallow-draft
  (832)  The inner bay offers good anchorage to shallow-draft          (841) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as
craft. The N side is shoal and has a boulder bottom; it should be
                                                                    i0ï¿½ from the normal variation have been observed on Koniuji
avoided. A broad, sandy beach stretches across the head of this
bay. Anchorage in 3 to 5 fathoms with sandy bottom is found off    Island and as much as 7ï¿½ at a distance of 2 miles in all directions
this beach, which is a good landing place for small boats.           around the island.
 (833)  Medium-draft vessels will find anchorage in 11 fathoms at     (842)  Kasatochi Island, 10 miles NW from Cape Kigun, is an
the entrance to the inner bay midway between the S shore and the    extinct volcanic crater rising to 1,038 feet. The S and SE sides are
low, grassy headland on the N side. This grassy headland and the    grassy slopes; the W and SW sides are high, rocky bluffs. There is
whitish, gray cape beyond should be on range. The bottom is sand    a small islet adjacent to the SW side. As seen from the S and SW,
and is fair holding ground.                                          the sides are gradual slopes, and the summit (rim of the crater)
 (834) The peninsula.to the N and W of Bechevin Bay consists of    shown as a ridge with several nobs of varying heights. The N side,
two rounding points, White Point and Stripe Point. Between the E     as seen from the E and W, appears abrupt and sheer, with the N
and W points is a low valley where there is a lake, the overflow of    part of the crater rim showing as a sharp nob. As one proceeds to
which empties into the Bering Sea at a waterfall, This waterfall    the N or S of the island, these nobs, being parts of the crater rim,
can be distinguished well offshore. To the E, White Point, which    change to ridges.
is the W shore in approaching Bechevin Bay, is identified by light-   (843)  The island can be approached by deep-draft vessels to
colored gray bluffs. Stripe Point consists of two ridges that rise    within 1 mile. An exposed anchorage is available in an emergency
gradually to a common peak. Conspicuous gray-colored rock    on the S side in 15 to 20 fathoms, hard bottom. A trapper's cabin is
slides mark this point with a striped effect that identifies it.    on the slope on this side.
Between the two heads at Stripe Point, is a light-colored boulder      (844) The N half of Kasatochi Island is a Steller sea lion rookery
beach.                                                               site. There is a 3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer zone around the
 (835) Crescent Bay, SW from Stripe Point, is a bight in the    rookery which encompasses the whole island. (See 50 CFR
shoreline of I mile depth. The head of this bight shows a low pass    227.12, chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)
across the island. The shores are rocky except at the W end of the
head of the bight which is sand and gravel. Two inner bays are         (845)  Chart 16484.-Oglodak Island is about 4.5 miles SW of
suitable for small craft. One, at the E end of the head of the bay, is    Cape Kigun, the W extremity of Atka Island. It is about 1.3 miles
0.5 mile long and 0.2 mile wide with anchorage in 3 fathoms and    long and 0.7 mile wide and is steep and mountainous. The shores





                                                     7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                       263


are precipitous and rocky, and fringed with off-lying islets and    that prevail at Shelter Cove. It is about 0.8 mile long and has an
rocks.                                                             entrance about 0.3 mile wide with black sand bottom. Depths
 (846) Atka Pass, 4 miles wide between Atka Island and Oglo-    inside range from 6 to 2 fathoms, but there are rocks and foul
dak Island, has depths of 10 fathoms or more to within 0.5 mile of    ground varying distances offshore. The bight is open to the N.
each shore. A shoal with a least depth of 2 fathoms is 0.5 mile N   (859) Igitkin Pass, separating Chugul and Igitkin Islands, is
of Oglodak Island; broken ground with depths of 7 to 9 fathoms    clear and deep and perhaps the best pass from the N and E to
extends 0.8 mile SE of the island. There are heavy tide rips and    Kuluk Bay. It is 3.5 miles long and the navigable channel is about
strong currents in the pass. Atka Pass is one of the best passages in    0.5 mile wide at the narrowest point at the W end. A midchannel
the Andreanof Islands between the Bering Sea and the Pacific.      course of 248ï¿½ leads directly into the pass N of Umak Island
 (847) Ikiginak Island, 1 mile W of Oglodak Island, consists of    through which entrance into Kuluk Bay can easily be made. Tide
an almost cone-shaped mountain, 872 feet high. The island is 700    rips have been reported between Kingfisher Point, on Igitkin
yards in diameter with detached islets at the E and W ends. The    Island, and the NW point of Tagalak Island, between Kingfisher
shores are steep, rocky, and fringed in places by off-lying rocks.  Point and the E end of Chugul Island, and at the W end of Igitkin
 (848) The pass between Oglodak Island and Ikiginak Island has    Pass. When the current is setting W through Igitkin Pass there is a
rocks that extend from both shores; it is not recommended without    strong S set near the W end of the pass.
local knowledge.                                                    (860)  Chugul Pass (see also chart 16460), between Chugul
 (849) Fenimore Rock is.1.7 miles W of Ikiginak Island and 1.6    Island on the E and' Anagaksik and Umak Islands on the W, is
miles NE of the easternmost of the rocky islets that extend E of    about 4 miles wide, and is deep and clear.
Tagalak Island. The rock is about 300 yards long and 220 feet       (861) Next to Atka Pass, Chugul Pass, in combination with
high. There are several off-lying rocks covered,2 to 4 fathoms.    Asuksak Pass, is considered the best passage from the Bering Sea
 (850) Fenimore Pass, W of Fenimore Rock, has depths of 13 to    to the Pacific between Seguam Pass and Adak Strait. It is the best
27 fathoms. Tide rips are found in several parts of the pass, and    passage to Kuluk Bay from the SE. Prominent landmarks that can
currents in excess of 4 knots have been observed.                  be used during the approach from S and E are the island of Ana-
 (851) Tagalak Island, about 6 miles W  of Ikiginak Island, is    gaksik; Cape Azamis, the SE'tip of Little Tanaga; the prominent,
mountainous, roughly triangular in shape, and about 3.2 miles    two-fingered pinnacle near the SE end of Chugul; and the conical-
long and 2.5 miles wide. From the E point of Tagalak Island, a    shaped island of Ikiginak. From a position 3 miles E of Anagak-
chain of small rocky islets, fringed by foul ground, extends to the    sik, a course made good of 303ï¿½ will pass Cape Ruin, the NE tip of
E about 2.7 miles. The highest peak on Tagalak Island is 1,761    Umak, at a distance of 1 mile. From this point, making good a
feet. The shores in general are steep and rocky with a few small    course of 263ï¿½ will lead down the middle of Asuksak Pass, pass-
beaches. The shoreline in most places is fringed by detached    ing 1.5 miles off Cape Chakik, the W tip of Umak. Throughout
rocks.                                                             Chugul Pass are strong tidal currents. In thick weather, dead reck-
 (852) On the N side of the island chain is a bight that affords    oning is difficult because of these currents. (See the Tidal Current
temporary anchorage in good weather with fair protection from    Tables for predictions for Chugul Pass.)
the S and W in 10 to 15 fathoms, sand bottom; holding ground is
fair. Currents are quite strong.                                    (862) Chart 16471.-Great Sitkin Island, about 24 miles W of
 (853) Tagalak Pass, 1 mile wide in its narrowest part between    Atka Island, is about 10 miles long and 8 miles wide. It is volcanic
Tagalak Island and Chugul Island, has depths of 5 fathoms or    and extremely mountainous, the highest summit; an active vol-
more to within 0.3 mile of the shores. The pass has the strongest    cano, is 5,710 feet. Much of the shore is steep and rocky, but with
tide rips and overfalls encountered in the Andreanof area. The    considerable stretches of sandy beach. It has some off-lying rocks
pass is not highly recommended, but if used, midpass courses    both exposed and covered. Two large indentations are Sand Bay,
should be followed.                                                on the SW side, and Yoke Bay, on the SE side.
                                                                     (863) Teapot Rock is a large teapot-shaped rock about 150
 (854)  Chart 16478.-Chugul Island is 4.5 miles long from NW      yards off the NE extremity of Great Sitkin Island.
to SE and 2.5 miles wide from N to S. The highest summit reaches
1,668 feet. There are several small lakes and streams on the island.  (864) Chart 16478.-Ulak Island is about 2.3 miles E of Bugle
The coast is generally steep and rocky, but there are indentations    Point, the E extremity of Great Sitkin Island, and about 2.5 miles
with sandy beaches at the heads. Cape Kagalus marks the SE    N of Igitkin Island. It is a barren rock, about 0.9 mile long, 0.2
extremity of the island.                                           mile wide, and 675 feet high. Deep water is close to the island on
 (855) Igitkin Island, about I mile NW of Chugul Island, is 5.5    all sides, except the SW point where rocks extend out 300 yards.
miles long and quite narrow. It is divided into two parts, connected  (865) Yoke Bay, on the SE coast of Great Sitkin Island, has three
by a low isthmus about 0.3 mile wide. Aside from this isthmus, the    arms. The best anchorage of the three is the middle or West Arm;
island is mountainous and rocky. N of this isthmus is a small cove,    it is about 1,500 yards in extent and affords anchorage in about 20
Igitkin Bight, and to the S is a somewhat larger indentation, Shel-    fathoms. The bottom is sticky hard mud, affording good holding
ter Cove. The coast of Igitkin Island is in general steep and rocky    ground. Limited anchorage space is available in both North Arm
and fringed with islets and detached rocks.                        and South Arm. The bay is subject to williwaws, but their effect
 (856) Igitkin Bank, with depths of I to 10 fathoms, extends 2    is not serious on ships equipped with good ground tackle. Yoke
miles W of Igitkin Point, the W extremity of the island.           Bay is open to swells from the Pacific Ocean from the SW,
 (857) Shelter Cove is a small cove opening on Igitkin Pass. It is    although they are somewhat broken in their approach by nearby
not recommended as an anchorage due to its size, rock bottom,    islands; it is entirely open in a NE direction to the Bering Sea.
and its exposure to draw winds from N and S.                        (866) Great Sitkin Pass is between the S peninsula of Great Sit-
 (858) Igitkin Bight probably affords partly sheltered anchorage    kin Island and the islands of Igitkin, Tagadak, Kanu, and Tanak-
for small vessels; it is presumably subject to the same draw winds    lak. The pass has depths of 7 fathoms or more. Between Zaliva





264                                                 7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


Point and Passage Point currents of 2.5 knots have been observed    (877) Umak Bight is about 2 miles in extent and its principal
and greater velocities are to be expected. Yoke Pass is at the N   arm is about 0.6 mile wide at its entrance. The bight is open on the
entrance to Great Sitkin Pass, between Igitkin Bank and Rip Point.    E to Chugul Pass, and considerable swell from the ocean may be
Because of tide rips, currents, and the frequent changes of course    expected in heavy E weather. In all other weather the bight is one
required, Great Sitkin Pass is not recommended, but if used, clear    of the better anchorages in this area, with depths of 26 fathoms
Rip Point by 0.6 mile and Igitkin Point by 1.2 miles to avoid the    and excellent holding ground of green mud near the head of the
covered rocks that extend from the points; thence change course to    bight. Stray winds sweep over the bight from the low pass to the
pass 0.2 mile N of Box Island, thence a midchannel course    W of Umak Bight. A sand beach is at the head of the bight.
between Tanaklak Island and Great Sitkin Island.                    (878) Asuksak Pass, separating Umak Island from Kanu and
 (867) Tagadak Island, about 2 miles SW of Igitkin Island, is    Asuksak Islands, is 1.3 miles wide at its narrowest point and is
small and roughly triangular in shape. The island is very rugged;    deep and clear, but the currents are strong between Kanu and
the shores are steep and rocky except part of the W side which has    Umak Islands. It is inadvisable to attempt the pass in thick
a sandy beach. The coast in most places is fringed with reefs or    weather.
shoals. It has been reported that Tagadak Island is used as a breed-
ing ground by geese and ducks.                                      (879) Umak Pass, between Umak Island and Little Tanaga
 (868) Kanu Island, 1,055 feet high, is about 0.5 mile SW of    Island is 0.6 mile wide at its narrowest point and 7 miles long with
Tagadak Island. The island is rocky and mountainous and about    depths of 71/2 to over 50 fathoms. Currents of 3 knots have been
1.5 miles long and 1 mile wide. The shores in general are steep    observed in the pass and greater velocities probably occur. The
and rocky, except on the W side where there is a sand or gravel    changes of current are accompanied by erratic movements and tide
landing beach about 0.5 mile long protected by other islands from    rips. (See the Tidal Current Tables for predictions for Umak Pass,)
all except SW winds. The coasts are mostly fringed with reefs and    A rock awash is 0.5 mile SE of Cape Chakik and 500 yards off-
exposed and covered rocks. A relatively shoal area extends to the    shore, In clear weather a midpass course can be taken through the
N for nearly 0.7 mile. Near the N end of this area is Box Island, a    pass. In thick weather the N side should be favored, entering the
small rocky islet about 40 feet high. A small cove on the E side of    pass from E, until W of the narrows, then it is best to favor the S
Kanu Island might afford some shelter for small craft.             side.
 (869) Tanaklak Island, about 1.5 miles W of Kanu Island, is        (880) Little Tanaga Island is about 8 miles long and has a
about 1.8 miles long and 0.5 mile wide and is rocky and rugged.    greatest width of about 7 miles. The island is extremely irregular
The island is one of low relief and rolling hills.                 in form. Two long bays, separated by a narrow isthmus, nearly cut
 (870) The channels between Tanaklak Island and Kanu Island    it into two parts. The island is very rocky and mountainous; the
and between Tanaklak Island and Asuksak Island are deep and    highest peak is 1,747 feet. The shores in general are steep and
clear.                                                             rocky, and the coast generally is fringed with reefs, islets, and
 (871) Asuksak Island, 0.5 mile S of Tanaklak Island, is steep    detached rocks. Several streams and small lakes are on the island.
and rocky and consists mainly of one mountain 955 feet high. The    (881) Scripps Bay, on the N coast of Little Tanaga Island, is a
island is about 0.7 mile long and about 0.5 mile wide. On the NE   well-protected anchorage though subject to williwaws. The bot-
end of the island is a low point with a gravel beach on each side.  tom is coarse sand with pebbles, but appears to hold fairly well. A
 (872) Aziak Island, 765 feet high, 0.5 mile W  of Tanaklak    sandy beach, intersected by a stream is at the head of the bay.
Island, is about I mile long and 0.6 mile wide and is rocky and    Scripps Bay!is subject to fog and reduced visibility; it is frequently
hilly.                                                             thick here when the W and N sections of Kuluk Bay (Adak Island)
 (873)  Sand Bay, on the SW coast of Great Sitkin Island, pro-    are clear. In entering the bay, pass 400 yards off the rocky islet 0.3
vides suitable anchorage in 12 to 15 fathoms about 1,000 yards    mile inside the E shore to avoid the 21/4-fathom spot off the W
offshore. The bay is protected on the N and E but is subject to    point at the entrance. Anchor in 18 fathoms 750 yards SW of the
heavy seas during a W gale. Strong tidal currents run in the bay.  islet. Small vessels can anchor in shallow water near the shore.
 (874)  In 1964, the outer section of the long pier in Northeast
                                                                     (882) Chisak Bay, on the S coast of Little Tanaga Island, is
Cove, Sand Bay, was reported uprooted and washed ashore; the    about 2.5 miles long and 0.8 mile wide. Depths are suitable for
inshore section was in poor condition.
                                                                    anchorage, but only small vessels may find swinging room which
                                                                    is reduced by numerous small islands. A 3-fathom depth is 0.4
 (875)  Chart 16477.-Anagaksik Island is about 2 miles E of the    mile SE and a 23/4-fathom.shoal is 0.2 mile E of Chisak Island. The
E end of Umak Island and on the S side of the entrance to Chugul    upper end of the bay is clear, but the channel, close W of Chisak
Pass. The islet is a precipitous rock about I mile long, 0.5 mile
                 Pass. The islet is a precipitous rock about  mile long, 0.5 mile    Island, leading to it is very narrow. The bay is almost landlocked,
wide, and 890 feet high. It has a few off-lying rocks, but in most    but is reported to be exposed to swells and seas from the Pacific
places deep water extends close to the shore.                      Ocean. A stream enters at the head of the cove. The shores of
 (876) Umak Island, about 5 miles SW of Chugul Island,            Chisak Bay consist of narrow rocky beaches.
mountainous, irregularly shaped island about 6 miles long and 3
miles wide with a deep bight indenting the NE coast. From this      (883) Azamis Cove, on the S coast of Little Tanaga Island, is
bight a low pass extends to the opposite side of the island. The    about 2 miles long and 1 mile wide at the entrance. Depths are
shores are in general steep and rocky with occasional stretches of    suitable for anchorage, but it is not recommended. The bay pro-
sandy beach. The N coast is foul, with many detached rocks,    vides shelter from the N and W but is open to seas and swells from
exposed and submerged. A number of islets are off the E coast.    the Pacific Ocean.
The S coast is in general clear, with few off-lying rocks, except   (884) Round Cove, E of Azamis Cove, is about I mile in diam-
toward Cape Chakik, the W extremity, where there are stretches    eter, open to the S and SW, and moderately subject to heavy seas
of fringing reefs. Birds of many species frequent the island, there    and ground swells. The depths are not too great; therefore anchor-
are also seals on the island.                                      age is not recommended.





                                                     7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                        265


 (885)  Chart 16475.-Little Tanaga Strait, between Little Tan-       (894)  Kagalaska Strait separates Adak and Kagalaska Islands.
aga and Kagalaska Islands, is about 7 miles long and at its narrow-    Although narrow, it can be navigated by moderate-sized vessels
est point about 1.2 miles wide; however, the navigable channel    without difficulty at or near slack water. An 8/4-fathom shoal is in
between Little Tanaga and Silak Islands has a width at one point of    midchannel 1.6 miles inside the S entrance. S winds with ebb cur-
less than 0.5 mile. Tidal currents attain a maximum velocity of 5    rents cause heavy tide rips from the S entrance N as far as Adak
knots through the pass E of Silak Island, producing swirls and    Bight, and are apt to cause a vessel approaching from the S to yaw
heavy tide rips N and S of the island. The heaviest rips observed    badly. Because of strong currents, rips and whirlpools are encoun-
were in the middle of the pass about I mile N of Silak Island.      tered in the narrow parts of the strait except at slack water.
 (886) The waters W of Silak Island are foul except for a passage    (895)  Both N and S entrances are clear, with deep water close to
about 0.2 mile wide along the shore of Kagalaska Island, which is    the shores. Care must be taken not to mistake Blind Cove for the N
recommended only for small boats. Large vessels must pass E of    entrance since the former is about I mile W of the strait, and has a
Silak Island. Rip Rock, at the SE end of the strait, covered I '/,    much wider appearance. The shores of the N entrance are bold and
fathoms, is marked by breakers in moderate swells.                  precipitous while those of the S entrance are relatively low, with
  (887) To pass through the strait from a position 2.8 miles 270'    outlying rocks. Navigators not familiar with the area are cautioned
from Cape Chisak, make good a course of 0000, keeping Silak    against attempting an entrance in any but clear weather.
Island a little on the port bow and heading for Tana Point on Little  (896) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differencs of as much as
Tanaga Island. Hold the N course until abeam of Silak Island, then       from normal variation have been observed in Kagalaska Strait
change to 330ï¿½ and pass through the channel. When abeam of    near the N entrance.
Cemetery Point, a course of 000ï¿½ may be shaped to pass clear of      (897)  Ragged Point, the SE extremity of Kagalaska Island, is
the strait;.                                                        4.5 miles E of Kagalaska Strait and is an unmistakable landmark
                                                                     for the S approaches to the strait because of its serrated ridge
  1888) Piper Cove, on the W  side of Little Tanaga Island, about    forming the summit of the point. A natural arch in the tip of
 1.8 miles N of Cape Chisak, is open to the W and SW, but affords    Ragged Point is noticeable when the point bears 0170.
temporary anchorage for small vessels.                               (898) Adak Bight, about 2 miles from the S entrance to Kaga-
  (889)  Tana Bight, an indentation on the W coast of Little Tan-    laska Strait, affords good shelter for vessels up to about 100 feet in
 aga Island about I mile N of Tana Point, affords temporary          length. A 3-fathom shoal, marked with kelp, is 0.3 mile SE from
 anchorage for medium-sized vessels and fair shelter in S weather.    the N point of the bight. Vessels approaching from the N should
 The bottom is rocky and irregular. Currents in the bight are slight    clear this shoal 0.3 mile before turning to enter. Either arm of the
 and usually flow in a direction opposite to that of the mainstream    bight is suitable for anchoring, but the northernmost affords more
 current through the strait.                                         swinging room. A shoal is just off the the point between the two
  (890) Kagalaska Island, 8 miles long and 5 miles wide, is    arms. In entering either arm, a vessel should keep in midchannel.
 extremely rugged and mountainous; the highest peak, 2,331 feet,      (899) Campers Cove, just N of Adak Bight, is suitable only for
 is in the NW part. The shores are, in general, steep and rocky    small boats because of the narrow, shallow entrance. Relatively
 except on the W  coast, where they have a more gradual slope,    small vessels can anchor in about 10 fathoms in the indentation
 becoming steeper inland. The S shore consists of jagged cliffs.    just N of Campers Point and thus avoid currents and rips in the
 The E and N coasts are also steep in many places. The brief    strait.
 stretches of sand or gravel beach are often backed by vertical       (900) Laska Cove, on the E side of Kagalaska Strait, is deep and
 cliffs. The coasts are generally clear except the S and SE coasts    well protected. Small vessels usually anchor in the NE portion of
 and part of the N coast, which are fringed by islets and detached    the cove.
 rocks. Several lakes and streams are on the island.
   (891)  Cabin Cove, opening into Little Tanaga Strait, is a two-     (901)  Chart 16471.-Adak Island, the most important of the
 armed bay which indents the E coast of Kagalaska Island for 2.5    Andreanof Group, is about 30 miles long and 20 miles wide at its
 miles. Upper Arm, 1.5 miles long and 0.5 miles wide, is bordered    widest part. The island is rugged and mountainous and has numer-
 by steep, sloping hills on all sides; it is free of dangers. Approach-    ous small bays and indentations. Mount Moffett, 3,900 feet high,
 ing the entrance, the 10-fathom curve makes out from the N shore    near the NW end, is the highest point of the island; it is snow cov-
  200 yards, and 100 yards off the low gravel point on the N shore at    ered the greater part of the year. The island is grass covered on the
  the entrance. Anchorage can be had in 30 to 40 fathoms in the    lower levels; the higher levels have a heavy growth of moss. Small
  upper part of the arm. The shores are free of off-lying rocks and    lakes are numerous and there are many small streams.
  shoals. Lower Arm, I mile long with an entrance width of 800         (9o2) The Commanding Officer, Naval Air Station, Adak,
  yards, is smaller than Upper Arm, but most of it is suitable for    Alaska, advises that Sweeper Cove is within the boundaries of a
  anchorage. The surrounding terrain, especially at the head, rises in    U.S. Naval Air Station, and only U.S. government vessels or spe-
  gentler slopes than in Upper Arm, but the summits are over 1,000    cific contract vessels are permitted to enter. Emergency entrance
  feet high. A stream flows into the head of the arm.                 for bonafide vessels in distress will be allowed.
   (892)  Crater Cove, on the E shore of Kagalaska Island and 1.7      (903) All fishing, commercial, and other vessels desiring to enter
  miles N of Ragged Point, affords temporary anchorage in 30 fath-    U.S. waters contiguous to Adak Island, N of 51 ï¿½50'N., are
  oms, sand and gravel bottom. High bluffs and hills on the nearby    required to provide a 24-hour or maximum reasonable advance
  shore provide good shelter from N and W winds.                      notice of arrival. Such advance notice of arrival should be
    (893) Quail Bay, on the S coast of Kagalaska Island, is fringed    addressed to the Commanding Officer, Naval Air Station, Adak,
  by steep cliffs to E and W-with many rocks along the beach. The    Alaska, and include information concerning the vessel's name,
  bay is deep and clear of dangers to a point about 1.2 miles NW of    homeport, owner, and the number of non-United States nationals
  Ragged Point. Temporary anchorage for small vessels may be had    aboard. Entry into Lake Andrew, Clam Lagoon, Kuluk Bay and
  in 20 fathoms, sand bottom.                                         Sweepers Cove is restricted. Adak is a closed military reservation




266                                                  7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


and access will be granted only in actual emergency situations in    (915) Pit Rock, the southernmost of the two large rocks on the
which life is at risk.                                              SE side of the entrance to Sweeper Cove, is bare and surrounded
                                                                    by foul ground. Finger Shoal, 0.4 mile E of Pit Rock, has a rock
 (904)  Chart 16475.-Boot Bay is on the S coast of Adak Island    that uncovers in the detached shoal area. A lighted bell buoy is
about 3 miles W of Kagalaska Strait. The inner harbor has depths    about 300 yards NE of the shoal.
of 11 to 35 fathoms over bottom varying from rock to mud; the        (916) The diurnal range is 3.7 feet in Sweeper Cove. (See the
mud bottom is in the deeper water. Seas and swells from the    Tide Tables for daily predictions for Sweeper Cove.) During
Pacific Ocean are broken up by the islands in the bay; however,    severe weather, a surge may be experienced inside the cove, mak-
the islands offer little protection from S winds. As the land to the    ing it difficult at times to remain alongside any of the piers. Heavy
N is mountainous there is a probability of williwaws with N         float fenders should be used, and vessels should be prepared to get
winds.                                                              underway.
 (s905)  Blind Cove, indenting Adak Island just W  of the N          (917) Harbor regulations.-Sweeper Cove is part of a U.S.
entrance to Kagalaska Strait, is suitable for temporary anchorage    naval air station. Permission to enter or move about the cove must
only; it is exposed to the N and is subject to williwaws from the S.    be obtained from the Commanding Officer who can be contacted
A midchannel course is clear for small vessels to an anchorage in    by calling ADAK CONTROL on 4125 kHz or VHF-FM channel
16 fathoms in the S end of the cove. Caution is necessary to avoid    16. Vessels entering the Port of Adak will request channel clear-
the shoal spots covered 1 /2 to 6 fathoms off the entrance points.  ance from and give an accurate estimated time of arrival to Adak
 (906)  Kuluk Bay, on the NE side of Adak Island, is about 4    Port Control on 4125 kHz or other designated frequency at least 2
miles long and 4 miles wide, and is one of the best natural harbors    hours prior to arrival. The Port Services Officer will assign a berth
in the Aleutians. It is entered between Zeto Point on the N and    and provide advisory pilotage service and tug if needed. The pilot
Thunder Point on the S, and includes Kuluk Bay proper, Clam         advisor will board from a tug in the vicinity of Gannet Rocks. Two
Lagoon, Sweeper Cove, Finger Bay and Scabbard Bay. Tidal cur-    2,000-hp tugs and salvage equipment are available at port ser-
rents in the bay are weak and the flow appears to depend mainly    vices.
upon the winds.                                                      (918) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-
 (907) Zeto Point is a prominent butte rising well above the sur-    sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of
rounding land and has several jagged pinnacles along its S face     Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)
About 1.5 miles NE of the point is Head Rock, which is large and      (919)  The Aleutian Islands are served by the Alaska Marine
bare.                                                               Pilots and Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.
 (90o) Kuluk Shoal, consisting of several rocks covered 114l to 9    (920)  Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots
fathoms and marked by kelp, is about 0.8 mile S of Head Rock    and en route to Adak can meet the pilot boat about 2 miles E of
and I mile E of Zeto Point. A lighted bell buoy is about 0.6 mile E  Gannet Rocks Light 4 (51052.l'N., 176-36.4'W.).
of the shoal.                                                        (921) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "ADAK PILOT
                                                                    BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 (156.80 MHz) or on a prear-
 (909) A 9-fathom shoal with rocky bottom is 0.5 mile 0120 from
the Head Rock (see chart 16471); a 17-fathom bank with rocky    rang ed frequency between pilot and   agent/vessel.
bottom is 2 miles 096ï¿½ from the rock.                                 (922) Wharves.- Piers 3 and 5, on the N side of Sweeper Cove,
                                                                    are used by vessels drawing up to 30 feet. A short barge pier is E
 (10)  Clam Lagoon, 0.5 mile NW of Zeto Point, can u         nbe entered    of Pier 3; 30 feet is reported alongside. Pier 10 is a T-head fuel pier
only by small boats. A fixed bridge with an unknown clearance    at the extreme W  end of Sweeper Cove with a leastdepth of 35
crosses the entrance. In the S part of the lagoon and outside the    feet alongside. A black tank with a red light on top is inshore of
entrance are mudflats. The ruins of a long pier are 0.5 mile W of    Pier 10. Water and telephone connections are available at Piers 3
the lagoon entrance.                                                and 5.
 (911)  A naval restricted area is in the NW part of Kuluk Bay       (923) A small-boat basin is at the SW end of the cove. In 1978,
beginning at Zeto Point. (See 334.1320, chapter 2, for limits and    most of the piers in the basin were reported to be in poor condi-
regulations.)                                                       tion. In August 1983, it was reported that the entrance channel to
                                                                    the basin was marked by private buoys, had a depth of 4 feet, and
 (912)  Chart 16476.-Sweeper Cove, on the SW side of Kuluk    kelp along the S side. In May 1984, a submerged obstruction was
Bay, provides good shelter in 7 to 20 fathoms inside a breakwater,    reported in the NW end of the basin in about 51ï¿½51'06"N.,
marked by a light on the outer end, that extends from the N side of    176039'14"W.
the entrance; bottom is gray sand. A fuel tank at the W end of the   (924) Hammerhead Cove, on the S side of Sweeper Cove, has
cove is prominent.                                                  depths of 6 to 24 feet.
 (913) Sweeper Cove,.Entrance Light 5 (51ï¿½51'33"N.,                  (925) Finger Bay, on the S side of Kuluk Bay, is about I mile
176ï¿½35'22"W.), on the NW side of Lucky Point, is shown from a    long and 1 mile wide and has two narrow arms that extend in S
steel structure with a square green daymark.                        and SW directions. Both arms are open to the NE but no sea pene-
 (914) Gannet Rocks, on the N side of the entrance to Sweeper    trates their narrow entrances. In the outer part of the bay depths
Cove, are bare and surrounded by shoal water. A detached shoal,    are generally too deep for suitable anchorage, although temporary
covered 31/2 fathoms, and a group of small islets, surrounded by    anchorage may be found in about 30 fathoms 400 yards SW of
shoals, are between Gannet Rocks and the shore. Gannet Rocks    Lucky Point and in 24 fathoms off the entrances to the two arms.
Light 4 (51ï¿½052.1'N., 176ï¿½36.4'W.), 45 feet above the water, is      (926) The SW arm is narrow but clear in midchannel, with a
shown from a skeleton tower with a triangular red daymark on the    least depth of 5 fathoms. Submerged pier ruins and pilings extend
S end of the largest rock. Two water tanks, red and blue are on the    up to about 180 yards from the N shore between 51 ï¿½50'04"N.,
high ground at the head of Kuluk Bay about 1.2 miles NW of Gan-     1.76ï¿½37'14"W and 51 ï¿½49'53"N., 176037'36"W. Holding ground
net Rocks Light 4.                                                  near the head of the arm is good. Winds through Finger Bay tend





                                                     7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                        267


to be very strong because of the high bluffs on each side. Wind     smooth rock. The bay is well protected from swells; the bottom is
direction is along the axis of the piers, and vessels should have lit-    mud and probably fair holding ground. Violent williwaws and
tie trouble holding alongside. Surge in Finger Bay is at a mini-    gales are encountered in E and SE weather. A good weather
mum.                                                                anchorage is indicated I mile NW of the entrance and 0.7 mile off-
 (927)  Scabbard Bay, just E of Finger Bay, is open to the N.    shore in 17 fathoms, flat sand bottom.
Anchorage can be had near the entrance in 20 fathoms, gray sand
and broken shell bottom. At the S end of the bay is good shelter in  (936)  Chart 16474.-Bay of Islands, on the NW side of Adak
15 to 20 fathoms, brown mud bottom. Water is obtainable. Mid-    Island, is protected by the many islands at the entrance; wire-drag
channel courses will avoid all dangers.                             depths of 34 feet or more are in the main passages. The bay is
                                                                   about 6 miles in a SE direction and varies in width from 3 miles at
 (928)  Charts 16471, 16467.-Cape Adagdak, the northernmost    the entrance to less than I mile at the SE end. Although the bay is
point of Adak Island, is a bold headland 2,072 feet high. From      protected from sea swells, violent and severe gales occur, espe-
Cape Adagdak, the coast trends SW and then curves W to form 3-    cially with winds from E and S.
mile-wide Andrew Bay. A 20-foot-high rocky dike separates the        (937) The approaches to Bay of Islands are clear to within 500
head of the bay from freshwater Andrew Lake.                        yards of North Island on the E and Careful Point on the W. Cur-
 (929)  Acorn Rock is 0.2 mile off the N coast of Adak Island,    rents are strong near Careful Point. Cascade Rock, in about the
5.5 miles SW of Cape Adagdak. A shoal covered I fathom is 0.4    middle of the entrance, is only 2 feet high and breaks in heavy
mile offshore 0.6 mile W of the rock.                               weather; shoal water surrounds the rock.
 (930)  Cape Moffett, 8 miles SW of Cape:Adagdak, is a cliff 600     (938)  The preferred passage to Expedition Harbor, in the SE
feet high behind which the land rises gradually to Mount Moffett.    part of Bay of Islands, is W of Green Island through The Race
The cape is the NW headland of Adak Island and is prominent for    between the W end of Ringgold Island and Plum Island Rocks,
entering Adak Strait. Cape Kiguga, 2 miles S of Cape Moffett, is    thence through Ringgold Sound and Hell Gate.
the westernmost projection of Adak Island at the N entrance to       (939) The Race is dangerous because vessels must pass close to
Adak Strait; it is a very steep eroded slope rising abruptly from the    Plum Island Rocks. A speed of 8 to 10 knots is essential for a large
water. The 30-fathom curve extends about 1 mile off Cape Moffett    single-screw vessel to make the necessary changes in course.
and Cape Kiguga; there are no off-lying dangers.                     (940)  Hell Gate narrows to about 70 yards and is dangerous for a
 (931)  Adak Strait, between Adak Island and Kanaga Island, is    large vessel in case of strong beam winds or mechanical failure.
16 miles long and from 6 to 8 miles wide; depths are from 30 to      (941) At the E end of Hell Gate, the kelp-covered rocks on the S
over 100 fathoms. The only dangers are the rocks and reefs off    side and Eaglet Rocks on the N narrow side of the channel, makes
Eddy Island and Argonne Point on the E side and Shoal Point    it particularly difficult for an outgoing vessel because it is neces-
and Naga Point on the W side. Vessels should clear both shores of    sary to head for Eaglet Rocks, and, when the rocks are close at
the strait by not less than I mile. Since the current velocity may  hand, make a sharp turn in order to pass through the deep and nar-
reach 4 knots, passage in heavy fog without radar is not recom-    row part of Hell Gate.
mended. (See the Tidal Current Tables for predictions for Adak       (942)  Expedition Harbor can be reached through Argonne
Strait.)                                                            Channel, N of Ringgold Island, but this passage is dangerous
 (932)  The coast of Adak Island along the E side of Adak Strait is    because the reefs at the turn N of Black Island narrow the channel
bordered by steep bluffs and rocky cliffs; islands, rocks, and reefs    width to 90 yards.
are close to shore. Eddy Island, at the N entrance, is prominent.    (943) Vessels can anchor in the W or E parts of Expedition Har-
Whirlpool Rock, 1 mile E of Eddy Island, is small, flat on top,    bor. The main part of the harbor, with depths of 30 to 85 fathoms,
and awash at extreme high tides; kelp grows close to it. Currents    is too deep for anchorage. Anchorage areas: Unalga Bight, at the
are strong and erratic in this area. Wedge Point, a rocky bluff 7.5    W end, in 16 to 25 fathoms, mud bottom; Gannet Cove, at the E
miles S of-Eddy Island, is prominent. A good anchorage for small    end, in 16 to 25 fathoms, mud bottom; and Beverly Cove, N of
vessels in S weather is 0.8 mile E of Wedge Point, 0.3 mile off-    Gannet Cove, in 10 to 18 fathoms.
shore in 17 fathoms, sand bottom. The point 9.5 miles S of Eddy      (944) An excellent anchorage for small vessels is in Fisherman
Island resembles the head of a huge gorilla.                        Cove, on the S side of Ringgold Sound, in 10 to 22 fathoms, mud
 (933) The coast of Kanaga Island along the W  side of Adak    bottom.
Strait is fringed by kelp beds, islets, and rocks. There are several  (945) Anchorage can also be had on the S side of North Island in
anchorages that provide protection from W weather. One is in the    20 fathoms or more, mud and rock bottom. The area can be
cove between Round Head and Shoal Point; another is midway    reached by passing W  of North Island until past North Rocks,
between Shoal Point and Naga Point in 17 fathoms, gray sand bot-    thence a 1100 course between shoal spots of 33/4 fathoms on the N
tom. A reef covered 6 fathoms is I mile NE of Naga Point and 0.8    and 4 fathoms on the S to the anchorage.
mile offshore; another reef covered 13 fathoms is 0.7 mile E of the  (946)  Water can be obtained from several waterfalls in the Bay
point. When the current is ebbing heavy tide rips occur on these    of Islands. The waterfall 0.3 mile SE of Vincennes Point has the
reefs in S weather.                                                 most accessible natural water supply in the bay.
 (934) Cape Chlanak, on the W  side of the S entrance to Adak
Strait, is low and rocky. Shallow water marked:by kelp is close to   (947)  Charts 16471, 16467.-Three Arm Bay, on the W side of
the shoreline. Currents are strong and medium tide rips occur off    Adak Island, has depths of 19 fathoms or more in the outer part,
the point.                                                          but the depths decrease to less than 5 fathoms in the arms. Most of
 (935) Shagak Bay, 3 miles SE of Cape Kiguga, has depths of 20    the covered dangers are within 300 yards of the shore. In S
fathoms or more, but only 4 feet can be carried through the 400-    weather small vessels can anchor 0.3 mile E of Three Sisters
yard-wide entrance between grass-covered sandspits. A band of    Island in 17 fathoms, sandy bottom. North Arm, 0.2 mile wide
very heavy kelp extends across the entrance; the bar is relatively    with steep sides, extends 2 miles inshore to a low draw. A short




268                                                  7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


overland trail leads from the upper end of the arm to the S shore of    of all clouds and with wisps of steam around the crater. During the
Unalga Bight in the Bay of Islands. In SW and W weather, swells    summer of 1953, the phenomenon was noted on several occasions,
from Adak Strait enter North Arm; in E or W weather, winds draw    but it is not infallible, as evidenced at other times when bad
through this arm. Anchorage is suitable only for small craft in    weather did not follow clear visibility of the peak.
good weather. A fair anchorage for small vessels is in Middle
Arm, 0.5 mile N of Split Point, and rock bottom is poor holding       (956) Chart 16471, 16467.-Most of the N coast of Kanaga
ground. South Arm is well sheltered, but the holding ground was    Island between Cape Miga and Round Head is fringed by kelp
reported poor in 1973. It is entered from Middle Arm through a 6-    beds, islets, and rocks. Depths of 100 fathoms reach within 0.5
fathom passage between the W  shore of the small island off Split    mile of shore from Cape Miga for 2 miles E. where the shoreline
Point and the shoreline to the W. The passage is foul between Split    trends SE for 4 miles to Round Head, and depths of 30 fathoms
Point and the island off the point.                                 reach within 1 mile of shore. The water over this relatively shoal
 (948) Lake Point, the southwesternmost point of Adak Island, is    area appears much disturbed and currents are strong and erratic.
a Steller sea lion rookery site. There is a 3-mile vessel exclusion-  (957) False Bay (51ï¿½43'N., 177ï¿½09'W.), 0.5 mile N of Cape
ary buffer zone around the rookery which encompasses most of    Chlanak, has landing places protected from all but heavy SE
Cape Yakak. (See 50 CFR 227.12, chapter 2, for limits and regu-    swells on the sand beaches at the head of its two arms. The bay
lations.)                                                           may be used as an emergency anchorage for very small vessels, in
 (949)  Bay of Waterfalls, on the S side of Adak Island just E of    8 fathoms, sand bottom, and affords protection from W  and N
Adak Strait, is 8 miles long and 5 miles wide at the entrance but    winds.
narrows to 0.5 mile at the N end. Depths of 10 fathoms or more        (958) Kanaga Bay, on the S coast of Kanaga Island 2 miles W
are within 0.3 mile of the shore, except for a pinnacle rock, cov-    of Cape Chlanak, is 2 miles long and 0.4 mile wide with depths of
ered 1 V2 fathoms, 5.5 miles inside the bay at a point 0.5 mile W of    10 to 3 fathoms, except for the shallow N part which nearly dries
Low Point. Most of the bay is too deep for anchorage; it is    in places. The hazardous entrance channel is only 130 yards wide
exposed to the seas and swells of the Pacific Ocean and to heavy    between reefs plainly marked by kelp.
gusts sweeping through the mountain passes of Adak Island. Ves-       (959) The shoreline of Kanaga Bay consists of rocky cliffs or
sels can anchor in 16 fathoms within 0.5 mile of the head.          steep grassy bluffs, with a sand beach and low ground at the head.
 (950)  Cape Yakak, on the W  side of the entrance to Bay of    Good anchorage is afforded medium-sized vessels in shallow
Waterfalls, is a long, flat tableland, well defined and easily recog-    water, with excellent holding ground of sticky mud mixed with
nized because it has no high peaks on it.                           black sand. The anchorage is protected from all winds except SE,
 (951)  Chapel Roads, the E arm of Bay of Waterfalls, offers    and the bay is apparently not subject to williwaws, the heaviest
anchorage in 20 fathoms, rocky bottom, but is also exposed.    gusts coming from NE. With heavy swells from S through SE, the
Chapel Cove, the inner bight of Chapel Roads, affords temporary    entrance is impassable, and it should never be attempted without
anchorage in 10 fathoms, hard to soft gray sand bottom. The    good visibility.
entrance is narrow, being restricted by McCulloch Rock, a pinna-      (960) The wreck of the USS SWALLOW on the W  side of the
cle covered 2V/2 fathoms, on the N side of the cove. Pulpit Rocks,    entrance to Kanaga Bay is prominent and appears red in color
inside the cove, are a ledge of bare rocks.                         from offshore. If any appreciable swell is running, the sea breaks
 (952)  Cataract Bight, on the E side of Bay of Waterfalls near its    on both sides of the entrance channel near the wreck.
head, affords anchorage in 24 fathoms 200 yards off the beach;       (961) In 1954, the outer part of the dock at the abandoned site,
water can be obtained. A perceptible swell reaches the bight with    1.4 miles above the entrance of Kanaga Bay, was in fair condition;
S winds.                                                            small vessels could berth along its face where the depth is 13 feet.
 (953) Hidden Bay, 12 miles NE of Cape Yakak, is a 0. -mile-    The dock has been gutted by fire near the beach end and buildings
wide inlet 1.2 miles long with depths of 10 fathoms or more in    along the waterfront have been burned. A prominent radio mast on
midchannel; high hills are on both sides. Small boats will find    a hill 175 yards NE of the inner end of the dock is visible through-
good shelter in the W arm at the N end of the bay in 11 fathoms,    out the bay. A cabin is across the bay NW of the dock.
mud bottom. A 6-foot-high rock, 0.6 mile S of the entrance, marks
a foul ground area with deep channels on either side; boats should    (962) Chart 16460, 16467.-The S coast of Kanaga Island is
keep well clear of the E entrance point.                            low, rocky, and very broken with numerous offshore rocks and
                                                                   reefs marked by kelp fringing the shore. The coast should be
 (954)  Chart 16460.-Kanaga Island, across Adak Strait from    cleared by at least 2 miles to avoid the dangers.
Adak Island, is roughly right-angled and extends 18 miles N and       (963) The waters off Cape Tusik, 3 miles W  of Kanaga Bay,
S, 28 miles E and W, and has a maximum width of 7 miles.    appear much disturbed with strong currents. A dangerous shoal
Kanaga Volcano (chart 16471), at the N end of the island, is cone    extends SSW for 2 miles off the prominent headland 2 miles NW
shaped, rising directly from the water to 4,416 feet; steam may    of Cape Tusik. Depths of 16 fathoms are on the outer part,
emit near the summit. In clear weather this excellent landmark is    decreasing to much shoaler depths closer inshore.
visible from all directions. There are several lesser peaks S of the
volcano from which the land slopes down abruptly to rolling tun-     (964)  Chart 16463.-Sentry Rock, 9 miles W of Cape Tusik and
dra-covered hills, 600 to 100 feet high, interspersed with numer-    1 mile off the S coast of Kanaga Island, is 94 feet high and promi-
ous streams and lakes.                                              nent. Passage between the rock and the shore should not be
 (955)  The Bering Sea Aerological Unit stationed at Kanaga Bay    attempted.
found that the Kanaga Volcano could be utilized as a means for       (965) Cape Chunu, the SW end of Kanaga Island, has grassy
forecasting bad weather. The volcano peak is seldom absolutely    bluffs and rocky cliffs 100 to 200 feet high; rolling grassland is in
clear of clouds. During April 1934, it was observed that invariably    the interior with hills up to 345 feet high. The shoreline is ragged
the day or night before a gale the peak made its appearance, shorn    and rocky; rocky reefs and prominent rock islets and pinnacles




                                                    7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                      269


fringe the shore. Castle Island, a small grass-covered rocky islet   Christmas tree in profile outline, undercut by surf action to bal-
off West Chunu Point, is 165 feet high and prominent from the    ance on a small pedestal, is on the beach at Christmas Tree Point,
SE and NW. Vessels are cautioned to pass at least 1.5 miles off    on the W  side of the entrance. The shores on both sides of the
Cape Chunu to avoid the shoal area of very irregular rocky bottom    entrance to the bay are 100-foot-high vertical cliffs with reefs that
with depths of 2 to 6 fathoms. The waters for several miles S of    extend more than 0.1 mile into the bay; the surrounding country is
the cape are usually much disturbed, indicating strong currents.  rolling grassland. Foul ground extends 0.7 mile S of Christmas
 (966) Kanaga Pass, between Kanaga Island and Tanaga Island,    Tree Point.
is 3.8 miles wide at its narrowest part, but it is full of small rock  (977) A boulder beach, with a very shallow valley beyond, is at
islets, dangerous reefs, and strong currents; passage is not recom-    the head of the NE arm of Twin Bays; a sand beach backed by a
mended except during periods of good visibility and calm seas.    narrow, deep valley is at the head of the NW arm. A trapper's
 (967) Foul ground extends into Kanaga Pass for over I mile    cabin is near the beach in the NW arm, and a stream empties into
from the W side of Cape Chunu to more than 3 miles off Western    this arm about 150 yards E of the cabin.
Point, Kanaga Island, thence over 1.5 miles offshore along the N   (978) Small vessels can anchor in Twin Bays in 8 fathoms, flat
coast of Kanaga Island. Eddy Rock, Goose Rocks, and Annoy         sand bottom, when the Christmas tree rock bears 242ï¿½. Larger ves-
Rock, a part of the foul ground, are prominent. A dangerous reef,    sels should anchor in 16 fathoms, flat sand bottom, 0.6 mile off the
covered 5 feet to 3 fathoms, is 0.4 mile N of Annoy Rock. The    rock when it bears 310ï¿½.
dangerous area from this reef E to Kanaga Island is rocky and very  (979) Hot Springs Bay, on the Tanaga shore of Kanaga Pass 12
irregular; many underwater pinnacles exist. The kelp that marks    miles N of Cape Sasmik, is small but offers good protection from
the area during the summer is towed under by the current except at    W weather. Low bluffs line the S shore with a rise at the head to a
slack water and cannot be relied upon to indicate the shoals.     high ridge. Warm springs are along the central part of the S shore.
 (968) Cape Sasmik, the S end of Tanaga Island on the W side of    The N shore is lined by steep bluffs rising toward the mountains; a
Kanaga Pass, is a relatively flat grassland with steep grassy bluffs    prominent waterfall is 0.3 mile from the head. A good sand beach
and rock cliffs rising abruptly from the shoreline to 100 feet.    is at the foot of a low valley; a stream enters the bay at the S end of
Rocky islets and reefs border the coast close inshore. Herd Rock    the beach. Two cabins are just in back of the beach near its N end.
(chart 16462), a 20-foot detached black rock on the SW side of the  (980) The only off-lying danger in Hot Springs Bay is Village
cape, is conspicuous from the SE and NW. The cape should be    Reef, 600 yards off the S shore I mile NW of Trunk Point. Good
cleared by at least 1 mile.                                       anchorage is found in 13 to 17 fathoms, sand bottom; small craft
 (969) Foul ground extends up to I mile off the Tanaga Island    may anchor in shoaler water close to the beach.
shore on the W side of Kanaga Pass, except in the approach to
Twin Bays. The bottom is very broken and irregular, and the        (981) Charts 16460, 16471, 16467, 16463.-The N coast of
shoreline is made up of low cliffs.                               Kanaga Island W of Cape Miga trends S for 7 miles, then SW for
 (970) A good anchorage in W weather is 3 miles N of Cape Sas-    20 miles to Kanaga Pass. From Cape Miga for 7 miles S to Belle-
mik and 0.8 mile offshore in 18 fathoms, sand bottom; Twin Bay    view Beach, the coast is steep-to with off-lying dangers within 0.5
is also a good anchorage.                                         mile of the shore. The 2-mile sand beach is backed by low ground
 (971) Trunk Point, 11 miles NE of Cape Sasmik, shows as a    and dunes. Good anchorage is afforded in SE weather off the
low rounded knoll.                                                beach; avoid the several detached offshore rocks. Landings can be
 (972) Cape Sudak, the long finger-shaped easternmost point of    made on the beach.
Tanaga Island on the N side of the N entrance to Kanaga Pass, ter-  (982) The coast between Belleview Beach and Kanaga Pass is
minates in a small flat-topped, steep-sided 70-foot-high promon-    generally rocky and irregular, with a wide band of kelp and rocks
tory that appears detached from offshore. A dangerous shoal, with    parallel to the shore. Most of the points of land are low rocky
bare rocks, extensive heavy kelp, and underwater pinnacles,    cliffs; steep grass bluffs between the points rise to the relatively
extends 2 miles NE from the cape. The waters from the shoal to    flat and rolling interior. The coast should be given a clearance of
the 100-fathom curve appear greatly disturbed. The cape should    1.5 miles to avoid the dangers.
be cleared by over 2 miles.                                        (983) Ship Rock, 1 mile offshore and 5 miles W of Belleview
 (973)  Anchorage protected from W and N swells is 1 mile SE of    Beach, is 49 feet high and resembles a ship; foul ground is
the end of Cape Sudak in 20 fathoms, flat cinder bottom,          between the rocky islet and the shore. Good anchorage in S
  (974) The current velocity may reach 4 knots in the narrow part    weather can be had 4.5 miles W of Ship Rock in the cove W of
of Kanaga Pass. In calm weather, tide rips are visible among the    Cabin Point in 18 fathoms, smooth sand bottom; approach with
covered reefs between Annoy Rock and Kanaga Island. With a    caution to avoid the covered rocks and pinnacles off Cabin Point
heavy S swell and the current ebbing S, seas break across the    and Pincer Point. A trapper's cabin is on the W  side of Cabin
entire pass. (See the Tidal Current Tables for predictions for    Point. A group of pinnacles, covered 7 to 25 feet and marked by
Kanaga Pass.)                                                    kelp, is 0.4 mile off double-ended Pincer Point, 5.2 miles W of
  (975) The recommended routes through Kanaga Pass with    Ship Rock.
depths of 10 fathoms or more are through Explorer Passage,         (984) Hive Rock, 7.5 miles W of Ship Rock and 0.4 mile off-
between Annoy Rock and Hazard Point, Tanaga Island, thence    shore, is an 80-foot-high hive-shaped pinnacle. Heavy kelp is
either midchannel between Kanaga Island and Tanaga Island, or    between the rock and the shore. Good anchorage is afforded in S
the 0.3-mile-wide passage through The Ditch between dangerous    weather 0.6 mile NE of the rock in 20 fathoms, smooth sand bot-
Eider Reef, awash in places at half tide, and Trunk Point, Tanaga    tom; approach should be made from the N. A rock that uncovers
Island.                                                           and marked by kelp is 1.3 miles offshore, 8.7 miles W of Ship
  (976) Twin Bays, 5 miles N of Cape Sasmik, is a good small-    Rock; foul ground is between the rock and the shore.
boat anchorage in W and N weather; larger vessels may anchor       (985) The Signals, a prominent 60-foot-high twin-pinnacled
just off the entrance. A 75-foot-high distinctive rock resembling a    rock is 0.3 mile off Northwest Point, 10.2 miles W of Ship Rock.




270                                                  7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


Coolie Hat, 1.3 miles SE of Northwest Point, is a prominent 284-     (995) The two prominent peaks in the interior are connected by a
foot black cinder hill shaped like the crown of a coolie hat.       saddle; the E one is about 4,600 feet high and the W, Tanaga Vol-
                                                                    cano, is 5,925 feet high.
 (986)  Chart 16463.-Bobrof Island, 6 miles NE of Cape Sudak,        (996)  From Cape Sajaka SE to Tanaga Bay several shallow val-
Tanaga Island, is more than 2 miles long and almost 2 miles wide.    leys with black sand or gravel beaches across them indent the oth-
The shoreline on all sides except the N is rocky and precipitous,    erwise mountainous interior. Blackface Point, 7 miles SE of Cape
with steep slopes rising abruptly to 2,419-foot Bobrof Volcano.    Sajaka, is a prominent headland with black rock cliffs near the top
The N point of the island, connected by a low grassy area to the    of steep grassy bluffs. Dangers are within 0.5 mile of the shore. In
base of the volcano, consists of a very prominent flat-topped 402-    good weather vessels may anchor 3 miles NW of Cape Agamsik,
foot-high cylinder-shaped peak of black lava having bare vertical    0.8 mile off the sand beach, in 15 fathoms, flat sand bottom.
sides. It appears to be separated from the rest of the island when   (997) Tanaga Bay, on the W side of Tanaga Island, affords pro-
viewed offshore from the E or W.                                    tection from all except W weather. The bay is a good anchorage
 (987)  Currents are strong on all sides of Bobrof Island and the    for large and small vessels; depths and places can be selected as
waters appear disturbed for I mile offshore. Dangers are within    desired. The bottom is uniformly fine, black, hard sand with only
0.2 mile of the shore; the 1 0-fathom curve is less than 0.5 mile off-    fair holding qualities in heavy weather. The head of the bay shoals
shore. A band of impenetrable kelp parallels the NW coast to 0.3    gradually from 2 miles out to a sand beach. The S shore is irregu-
mile offshore.                                                      lar with reefs and kelp beds. Dangers are within 0.7 mile of the
                                                                    bay shore. Several visible rocks on Middle Ledge, that extend
 (988)  Chart 16460.-Tanaga Island, across Kanaga Pass from    almost 0.5 mile offshore at the head of the bay, are of some assis-
Kanaga Island, is irregular in shape with greatest N-S length of 20    tance when anchoring near the head.
miles and E-W width of 23 miles. The N part of the island is high    (998)  Cable Bay, a small cove on the N side of Tanaga Bay E of
and mountainous, while the S part is low with many streams and    prominent Cape Agamsik, affords protection to small craft in W
small lakes or ponds. The N shore has precipitous rocky cliffs or    weather. Water is available at the head of the bay.
very steep slopes which rise to the interior mountains. The other    (999)  Cape Amagalik, on the S side of the entrance to Tanaga
shores are rocky cliffs or reefs with numerous along shore pinna-    Bay, is low but backed by higher grassy hills. A shoal extends 1.5
cles, except for beaches in Tanaga Bay and a few other places. The    miles W of the cape. A dangerous reef, marked with heavy kelp
S coast and much of the E coast of Tanaga Island is fringed with    and rocks, is inside the shoal area. Tide rips are severe off the
detached rocks, reefs, and foul ground. Extensive kelp patches are    cape All vessels should clear the cape by at least 4 miles when a
                                                                    moderate swell is running against the current. Small vessels
in the foul areas. The dangers can be avoided by clearing the coast    moder                       ate swell is running against the current. Small vessels
                 ~~~~~by over 2 miles.~                                      ~ ~should not attempt passage with a heavy swell running. Seas 12 to
by over 2 miles.
                                                                     14 feet high have been encountered in the area in moderate
                                                                    weather. A flood current of 3 knots has been observed; larger
 (989)  Chart 16463.-The first 12 miles of the N coast of Tanaga    velocities probably occur. The flood sets N and the ebb S.
Island between Cape Sudak and Gage Point is indented with             (0loo00) Tide rips have been observed on the 26-fathom bank 4
coves that provide anchorage. The 30-fathom curve is 1 mile or    miles NW of Cape Amaglik.
less offshore; all dangers are within 0.5 mile of the shore.         (1001) A skeleton tower on top of a 145-foot bluff on the S side
 (990)  Portage Bight, 5 miles W of Cape Sudak, affords a good    of Cape Amagalik and Harem Rock, 0.6 mile SW of the tower
weather anchorage in 18 fathoms, sandy bottom.                      and usually marked by heavy breakers, are prominent.
 (991)  Rough Bay, 8 miles W  of Cape Sudak, is not recom-           (1002) Lash Bay, 3 miles E by S of Cape Amagalik, is the site of
mended as an anchorage because of violent williwaws in S and W      an abandoned World War II military installation. Only small craft
weather. A dangerous rock, 0.4 mile NE of the W entrance point,    should enter the bay, and then with caution under favorable
is awash at low water. A large shoal area, marked by kelp, makes    weather conditions. The inshore part of a 600-foot wharf remains
out from the SE shore to the middle of the bay. A sand beach is at    at the head of the bay; a depth of 8 feet is off its outer end. Broken
the head and a deep valley extends inland.                          piling of the outer section of the wharf is covered and constitutes a
 (992)  Gusty Bay, 10 miles W  of Cape Sudak, affords good         real danger. Two diamond-shaped targets set on a hill just W of the
anchorage in S weather. The gusty winds frequently encountered    wharf form an entrance range on course 002ï¿½. A shoal covered
do not, as a rule, impair safe anchorage. Two shallow valleys, sep-    less than 3 fathoms is in the approach on the range line extended;
arated by a bold headland, are at the head of the bay; a trapper's    dangerous covered rocks are near both sides of the range line
cabin is in the SE corner at the mouth of a large stream.           approaching the head. The bay is useful only as a temporary
 (993)  Pillbox Rock, 0.1 mile off the steep-sided, square-faced E  anchorage because of limited swinging room and shoal water.
entrance point to Gusty Bay, is a 150-foot-high conspicuous          (1003) Scarab Rock, 0.6 mile WSW of Tidgituk Island, is 50
dome-shaped pinnacle with grass on top; a 50-foot-high sharp-    feet high and prominent.
pointed pinnacle is just N of it. All dangers are within 0.5 mile of  (1004) South Bay, on the S coast of Tanaga Island just W of Cape
the shore. Anchor in the center of the bay with the sharp pinnacle    Sasmik, affords anchorage during N and E weather. A reef that
bearing 118ï¿½, in 16 fathoms, sand bottom.                           uncovers extends 0.5 mile S from the center of the head of the bay;
                                                                    a shoal with depths of 7 to 2 fathoms continues S for another 0.5
 (994) Chart 16462.-The N coast of Tanaga Island between    mile. A trapper's cabin is near the mouth of a stream NE of the
Gage Point and Cape Sajaka is very irregular with many vertical    reef. Anchor in the E half of the bay, 0.5 mile off the E shore, in 12
lava cliffs. A large waterfall, 2.5 miles W of Bumpy Point, is 348    fathoms, flat sand bottom.
feet high and pours from the top of a vertical cliff. Dangers are
within 0.5 mile of the shore. Currents are strong along this stretch  (loo005) Chart 16460.-Tanaga Pass, between Tanaga Island and
of coast.                                                           the Delarof Islands, is 13 miles wide at its narrowest part. Depths





                                                      7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                         271


of 50 fathoms or more can be carried through the pass by keeping       (1018) Ugidak Island, the easternmost of a chain of four islands
6 miles off Cape Amagalik, Tanaga Island, and 3 miles off the    in the central part of the Delarof group, is 75 feet high, small, and
Delarof Islands.                                                     rocky. The waters around the island are deep; currents are strong
 (1006) Currents.-The direction and velocity of the current is rad-    and tide rips, dangerous to small boats, may be encountered.
ically affected by the land areas and the banks. It appears that the   (1019) Skagul Island and Ogliuga Island, 2.5 to 7 miles W  of
flood is diverted by the chain of islands - Skagul to Unalga - and    Ugidak Island, are surrounded by numerous rocks, reefs, and kelp
the relatively shoal water between them to an E and W direction in    beds. An emergency landing field and buildings are on Ogliuga
moving around this chain. It was observed that S of Skagul Island    Island; a tower near the N shore is prominent.
the flood sets about NE, E of this island it sets N, and N of the      (1020) Skagul Pass, between Skagul and Ogliuga Islands, is only
island it sets N to NW.                                              for small craft. Currents in the pass are very strong and tide rips
 (1007) With erratic currents of this nature, dead reckoning cannot    develop when sea and current are opposed. Kelp in the pass is
be depended on and the navigator may find his vessel 1 mile or    towed under when the current is running.
more off his reckoning after a run of 1 hour.                         (1021) A good anchorage from N weather is 1.2 miles S of
 (1008) During observations made 4.5 miles SW of Cape Amaga-    Skagul Pass in 17 fathoms, sand and gravel bottom.
lik, the current was rotary, turning clockwise, and followed a defi-  (1022) Tag Islands, a group of rocky islets 3 miles SW of Ugidak
nite pattern. A minimum current averaging about 0.8 knot sets N      Island, are the breeding grounds for sea lions; the highest point is
to NE. As the current turned through E to S the velocity built up    75 feet. Several rocky islets are between these islets and Skagul
rapidly until it reached 3 knots. The velocity decreased to about 2    Island.
knots and at time of low water set WSW. The current turned NW,         (1023) Tag Islands are a Steller sea lion rookery site. There is a
and the velocity increased to a maximum of 3 knots. The current    3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer zone around the islands which
continued NW to N until the velocity averaged about 0.8 knot.    also encompasses Skagul Island. (See 50 CFR 227.12, chapter 2,
The current then set NW at a velocity of 2 knots. The current    for limits and regulations.)
turned through N to NE and decreased in velocity to a minimum          (1024) Kavalga Island, 10 miles W  of Ugidak Island, is 5 miles
of 0.8 knot.                                                         long with greatest width of 1.5 miles; the highest point is 315 feet.
 (oo09) On the opposite side of the pass, 4 miles E of Ugidak    The 1-mile-long prominent headland at the W end of the island is
Island, velocities of over 3 knots were observed.                    180 feet high and connected to the mainland by a low gravel
 (1010) Between Kavalga and Ulak Islands, the flood was             beach. Most of the island is covered with tundra. The shores are
observed to set to the NW.                                           fringed with prominent rocks and reefs.
 (1011) Tide rips and swirls may be encountered in any part of this   (1025) There are several reefs and rocks, large kelp beds, and
area, except well off the land areas in deep water. Generally they    winding channels 2 to 5 fathoms deep between Ogliuga Island and
will be encountered where a radical change in depth deflects the    Kavalga Island. Large numbers of sea otter have been seen in this
natural flow of the current or where land masses affect this flow.    area. Ogliuga Pass, close to Ogliuga Island, is only for small
The ebb appears to produce the heaviest rips and they are most    craft.
pronounced during the greatest range of tides. Also, strong winds      (1026) Sea Otter Pass, 0.7 mile NE of Kavalga Island, has
and heavy seas, opposing the flow of the current, cause large rips.  depths of 5 fathoms in the 0.4 mile-wide channel. The pass is
 (1012) Rips and swirls were observed by survey vessels to be par-    fringed with heavy kelp and prominent 3-foot-high rocky islets;
ticularly heavy to a distance of approximately 4 miles W of Cape    some kelp grows in the channel. Currents in the pass are moderate.
Amagalik. This area is dangerous to small craft except in favor-       (1027) A good anchorage during S gales is 1-mile N of Kavalga
able weather and should be avoided by medium-sized craft under    Island in 22 fathoms, sand and gravel bottom.
adverse conditions of current and sea or swell. Under unfavorable      (1028) A bank with a least depth of 18 fathoms is between
weather conditions, it is advisable to round this cape outside the    Kavalga Island and Unalga Island. Currents in this area are very
50-fathom curve.                                                     strong; dangerous tide rips develop when the sea or wind and cur-
 (1013) Heavy tide rips have been observed off Cape Sajaka; on    rent are opposed. The waters are extremely dangerous for small
the bank between Skagul and Ilak Islands; and on the shoal that    boats; under extreme conditions the area may also be dangerous
extends W from Unalga Island.                                        for larger vessels. Vessels using the pass should clear Kavalga
 (1014) (See the Tidal Current Tables for predictions.)             Island and Unalga Island by not less than 2 miles.
 (1015) The Delarof Islands, between Tanaga Pass and Amchitka.        (1029) Unalga Island, the westernmost of the central Delarof
Pass, are a group of nine islands and several small islets and rocks    group, is 240 feet high, grass covered, rimmed with steep bluffs,
covering an area of 38 miles N-S and 33 miles E-W.                   and flat on top. The shore is fringed by rocks and reefs. Prominent
 (1016) Ilak Island, the easternmost in the Delarof group, is 188    are a 50-foot-high rock 0.5 mile NW of the island and Dinkum
feet high on a ridge near the NE shore. The highest bluffs are on    Rocks, 0.8 mile SW of the island.
the N and E sides. From offshore the island appears tablelike; the     (1030) Gareloi Island, the northernmost of the Delarof group and
top slopes gently from E toward the W shore. The shoreline is bro-    20 miles W  of Tanaga Island, is almost circular and about 5 miles
ken and surrounded by detached islets, rocks, and reefs up to 2    in diameter. Mount Gareloi, a 5,160-foot active volcanic crater, is
miles W  of the island and 0.5 mile on the other sides. Gramp        near the center at the summit of the island; a smaller peak is S of
Rock, 1.5 miles W  of Ilak Island, is the breeding ground for sea    the summit. The land slopes steeply to the summit, except near the
lions. The 15-foot-high pinnacle 0.5 mile off the N shore of the    NW side where the slopes are more gradual. The island consists of
island is prominent. Strong currents and tide rips are near the    lava rock, black lava, eroded lava, and ashes; the lower slopes and
island.                                                              valleys are covered with grass and tundra in many places. The
 (1017) Gramp Rock is a Steller sea lion rookery site. There is a    shores have steep cliffs with rocks and boulders at the base; boul-
3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer zone around the entire island.    ders, pinnacles, and rocks awash extend around the shoreline.
(See 50 CFR 227.12, chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)          Heavy kelp surrounds most of the island, and extends offshore to




 272                                                   7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


 10 fathoms. Depths of 10 fathoms or more are within 0.5 mile of       (1042) Amchitka Pass, between the Delarof Islands and the Rat
 the island.                                                          Islands, has a least width of 50 miles and depths of 49 to over
  (1031) A trapper's hut is on the beach above the N shore of Gare-   1,000 fathoms. The islands on both sides of the pass should be
 loi Island. In moderate weather the survey ship anchored off the    cleared by at least 5 miles. Heavy tide rips have been observed off
 lee shore in the bight on the SE side, 800 to 1,000 yards offshore,    the E end of Amchitka Island. The pass is dangerous in heavy
 in 25 to 35 fathoms. The current velocity is about 0.5 knot off the    weather, particularly for small and medium craft; currents appear
 SE shore and sets NE and SW.                                         erratic in direction and velocities may be strong. This may account
  (1032) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as    for reports of very large seas and strong tide rips.
 7ï¿½ from normal variation have been observed on Gareloi Island SE
 of Mount Gareloi.                                                      (1043) Chart 16440.-The Rat Islands, between Amchitka Pass
  (1033) Ulak Island and Amatignak Island, 3 miles apart, are the    and Buldir Island, are a group of six large islands and several
 southernmost of the Delarof group.                                   smaller ones covering an area of 60 miles N-S and almost 150
  (1034) Ulak Island is irregular in shape, 6 miles long, and over 3    miles E-W. Strong williwaws frequently occur on the leeward
 miles wide at the center. There are two high points on the island,    sides of the N islands during periods of light to moderate breezes
 one on the ridge near the N shore and the other toward the S part    on the windward sides. Areas of clear weather are often found on
 of the island. Numerous rocks and islets border the island; several    the leeward sides during periods of heavy fog.
 reefs are close to shore and near the off-lying rocky islets. Strong
 currents and tide rips have been observed as far as 3 miles SE of      (1044) Chart 16460.-Semisopochnoi Island, the northeastern-
 the island. Pratt Cove, on the W side of the island, can be used as    most of the Rat group, has a N-S length of 9.5 miles and an E-W
 an emergency anchorage; currents are noticeable and the bottom is    width of 11 miles. The numerous rugged ridges and peaks, 1,200
 rocky. Patton Cove, on the S coast, is a good anchorage for N and    to over 4,000 feet high, surround an interior valley with a small
 NW weather; there is very little current and the bottom is sandy.    lake 300 feet above sea level. Most of the peaks or cones have
  (1035) The SE shore of Hasgox Point on Ulak Island is a Steller    deep craters and appear flat-topped from offshore. The shore is
sea lion rookery site. There is a 3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer    almost entirely steep cliffs or bluffs fringed with a narrow, rough,
zone around the rookery which encompasses all except the N half    boulder beach; kelp is alongshore. Dangers are within 400 yards
of the island. (See 50 CFR 227.12, chapter 2, for limits and regu-    of the shore, but the island should be cleared 1 mile or more. The
lations.)                                                            W  current velocity is about 1 knot and the E current about 1.5
  (1036) Tanadak Island, I mile off the W coast of Ulak Island, is    knots, but a 3-knot current may be encountered at times. The cur-
low and not prominent. A prominent 30-foot rock is 0.2 mile NW       rents are usually accompanied by tide rips off the points.
of the island. The survey ship used an anchorage 0.7 mile E of the     (1045) Sugarloaf Head, at the S end of Semisopochnoi Island, is
island.                                                              a rounding, low, irregular, rocky point forming the S base of a
                                                                     2,870-foot snow-capped conical peak which has a prominent sec-
  (1037) Ulak Pass, between Ulak and Amatignak Islands, is 3    ondary conical crater 1,620 feet high on its S slope. The small
miles wide and has depths of 35 fathoms or more. The current    bight just E of the head has a section of sloping sand beach which
velocity is over 2 knots in the pass and sets NW and SE. A mid- is fronted by several lines of breakers. Two small bights with slop-
channel course should be followed to avoid the rocks and islets    ing boulder beaches are about I and 2 miles W of the head.
near the shores of the islands.
                                                                      (1046) The valley drains to the SE coast of the island between
                                                                     Sugarloaf Head and a jagged ridge with twin pinnacles more than
Chain, is within 40 miles of the Seattle-Yokohama composite          3,000 feet high to the NE. E from the lake area, a low pass 600 to
course, The rugged island is 5 miles long and 3 miles wide; the    800 feet high leads between steep cliffs to a broad grass-covered
high tundra-covered hills and bare ridges and mountains of the    valley at the head of a small bight S of Pochnoi Point, the E end
interior rise to a height of 1,875 feet. The shores are generally    of the island. The point is broad, somewhat flat, and terminates in
steep and fringed with rocks; the W and NW coasts are steep-to.      sheer rock cliffs about 300 feet high. A small stretch of sloping
 (1039) Knob Point, a peninsula with a conspicuous knob-shaped       sand beach at the head of the bight is the best landing place on the
hill, is on the E side of Amatignak Island. Ulva Cove, just N of    island, but it is fronted by a small sand bar about 25 yards off-
Knob Point, is used as a small-boat anchorage. The survey ship    shore.
anchored off the entrance in 25 fathoms. Protection is fair from W     (1047) Petrel Point, the N end of the island, has a prominent
and SW gales except when there is a S and SE swell from the    waterfall on its NW tip that makes a sheer drop from the top of the
Pacific. A boulder beach is in back of the cove and a trapper's    bluff. Two small bights with sloping boulder beaches are about 2
cabin is on the small flat area at the head. A prominent waterfall is    and 4 miles along the shore SE of Petrel Point.
I mile N of the cove.                                                 (1048) The E shore of Pochnoi Point and the N shore of Petrel
 (1040) Nitrof Point, a rocky peninsula at the S end of Amatignak    Point on Semisopochnoi Island are Steller sea lion rookery sites.
Island, is narrow and steep with conspicuous off-lying pinnacles.    There is a 3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer zone around each
A rock awash with frequent breakers is 0.5 mile SSW of the most    rookery which encompasses the NE half of the island. (See CFR
S pinnacle rocks. A foul area extends 0.6 mile offshore midway       227.12, chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)
between Nitrof and Knob Points.                                       (1049) NW of the lake area, the old crater wall rises steeply to a
 (1041) The W  coast of Amatignak Island is very broken with    ridge with two prominent cones. Tuman Point, at the W  end of
prominent pinnacle rocks, steep cliffs, and small coves; rocks    the island, is faced with steep bluffs. A prominent triangular-
awash fringe the shore. A prominent 170-foot dome-shaped pinna-    shaped face of a 1,200-foot peak that drops steeply to the shore is
cle off the NW coast makes a good landmark. A small deep cove        1.5 miles E along the N shore of the point. A sloping boulder
on the NW coast affords the best protection for landings on the W    beach is about 2 miles E of the point. In the broad but slight bight
side of the island.                                                  just S of Tuman Point are small stretches of sloping sand beach,





                                                      7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                         273


 but they must be approached through heavy kelp growing on large    is necessary to avoid mistaking other indentations for Constantine
 boulder rocks.                                                       Harbor.
  (05o0) The best anchorage at Semisopochnoi Island is I mile off-     (1060) The S side of Constantine Harbor entrance is foul for 0.5
 shore between Tuman Point and Petrel Point in 18 to 22 fathoms,    mile offshore. On the N side a reef, covered less than 2 fathoms in
 sand and gravel bottom. This is inshore of the strength of the cur-    places and marked by heavy kelp, extends almost 1.5 miles E of
 rent, the approach is unrestricted, and it is well protected from    Kirilof Point. The head of the harbor is a sand beach; other shores
 most directions. Good anchorage is available in the center of the    are rocky bluffs.
 bight S of Pochnoi Point in 15 to 22 fathoms, sand bottom; it is       (1061) Currents in the entrance to Constantine Harbor are strong
 free of tide rips and the current that prevails around the point. A  and set across the narrow entrance channel. N to NE gales may
 fair anchorage is I mile offshore midway between Pochnoi Point    force vessels anchored in the harbor out to sea. The harbor is
 and Petrel Point in 27 fathoms, sand bottom; current is about 1.5    reported free of williwaws.
knots. Another fair anchorage is 2 miles W of Sugarloaf Head in       (1062) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as
 25 to 30 fathoms, sand and gravel bottom.                            50 from the normal variation have been observed in Constantine
  (1051) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as    Harbor.
7ï¿½ from normal variation have been observed near Sugarloaf Head        (1063) The 0.2-mile-wide channel between the reefs at the
on Semisopochnoi Island.                                             entrance can be made on course 235ï¿½; depths are 20 to 30 fathoms.
  (1052) Petrel Bank, that extends about 30 miles NE from Semi-    Once inside anchorage is available in 6 to 20 fathoms, fair holding
sopochnoi Island, is 16 to 20 miles wide within the 100 fathom    ground in sand and shell bottom.
curve. The highipoint on the ridge, covered 21 fathoms, is 15
miles NE of the island. A narrow ridge that extends 30 miles NE       (1064) Chart 16440.-Kirilof Bay, on the N side of Amchitka
of Petrel Bank has ridges of 38 and 48 fathoms. The tidal current    Island 8.5 miles W  of East Cape, is suitable only for small boats.
on Petrel Bank is rotary, turning clockwise. (See the Tidal Current    Breakers have been reported to run across the entire entrance to
Tables for predictions for Petrel Bank.)                             the bay.
                                                                      (1065) Chitka Cove, 24 miles NW of East Cape, affords good
  (1053) Chart 16012.-Bowers Ridge extends N and W  from             protection from S and W weather. The approach is clear except for
Petrel Bank in a circular direction for nearly 250 miles. The ridge    a 3-fathom shoal 0.7 mile NW of Chitka Point. Anchor 0.7 mile
between the 1,000 fathom curves is 30 to 35 miles wide and con-    offshore in 18 to 20 fathoms with good holding ground in sand
tains several well-defined ridges. Bowers Bank, about midway         bottom.
along the ridge, had a least depth of 6 fathoms reported in 1971.     (1066) Good protection from S winds can be had 0.7 mile off-
                                                                    shore 1.5 miles E of Bird Cape, the NW end of the island. The
  (1054) Chart 16440.-Amchitka Island, 27 miles SW of Semiso-    anchorage is midway between a kelp patch off the E side of the
pochnoi Island, has a NW-SE length of 34 miles and a greatest    cape and a rock awash off the first small point to the E of the cape
width of 4.5 miles. The SE part is very low, the highest point being    in 20 to 23 fathoms, sand bottom Enter on course 170ï¿½, heading
351 feet. The NW section is hilly and much higher, with peaks ris-    for a prominent 50-foot-high pinnacle rock.
ing to 1,200 feet. The high land levels out toward the middle of the   (l067) Protection from N and NE winds can be had about I mile
island to a low, rolling tundra and flat tableland. Many lakes and    offshore 12 miles along the S coast of Amchitka Island from Aleut
ponds are on the S half and a portion of the N half of the island.    Point, the W end of the island. The anchorage is midway between
Most of the coast is fringed with reefs and extensive kelp beds.    two prominent rocks in 17 to 20 fathoms, sand bottom. Enter on a
The shores are generally steep with many off-lying covered rocks,    N course.
especially on the N shore and the E part of the S shore. Vessels       (1068) Oglala Pass, between Amchitka Island and Rat Island, is
should stay outside the 50-fathom curve, up to 4 miles off the N     almost 10 miles wide; depths of 21 to over 30 fathoms can be car-
shore and 7 miles off the S shore, unless proceeding to anchorage.    ried through the middle of the pass. The current is somewhat
Weak tidal currents have been observed along the S side of the    rotary, turning clockwise. A 4-knot current has been measured in
island.                                                              the middle of the pass; greater velocities may be experienced. Cur-
 (t055) In December 1986, Amchitka Island and the nearby sur-    rents exceeding 7 knots have been encountered 1.5 miles NW of
rounding waters were closed to the public. The island is a military    Amchitka Island. (See the Tidal Current Tables for predictions for
reservation. (See 50 CFR 36.39; not carried in this Coast Pilot.)    Oglala Pass.) During moderately heavy S weather, heavy tide rips
 (1056) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as    extend across the pass at maximum ebb and attain heights of 30 to
50 from the normal variation have been observed on Amchitka    40 feet under storm conditions. The pass should not be attempted
Island.                                                              by small vessels during S weather when the current is ebbing
 (1057) South Bight, 3 miles W  of East Cape, is an excellent    strongly.
emergency anchorage on the S coast of Amchitka Island, offering       (1069) Little Sitkin Island, 32.5 miles W  of Semisopochnoi
shelter during N weather.                                            Island, has a N-S length of 5.5 miles and an E-W width of the
 (l058) East Cape and Column Rocks are Steller sea lion rookery    same distance. The interior is extremely rugged and mountainous;
sites. There is a 3-mile vessel exclusionary zone around these    only the lower slopes are grass covered. There are two prominent
rookeries which encompass the entire cape including South Bight    peaks, one 3,897 feet high in the NE part, and the other 1,960 feet
and surround column Rocks. (See 50 CFR 227.12, chapter 2, for    high in the S part. Numerous streams are on the island but no lakes
limits and regulations.)                                             or ponds. The coast is generally bold, rocky, and precipitous, with
                                                                    a fringe of kelp 200 to 400 yards wide. A bank with a least depth
 (1059) Chart 16446.-Constantine Harbor, on the N side of    of 10 fathoms extends about 1 mile off the N shore. No dangers
Amchitka Island 6 miles W  of East Cape, provides a fair anchor-    are more than 600 yards from the beach. (See the Tidal Current
age. Because there are no prominent features on the island, caution    Tables for predictions.)





274                                                  7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


 (1070) The sloping beach in the bight I mile E of Prokhoda        age than elsewhere along the N coast; however, the bottom is
Point, the S end of the island, is abrupt and composed of large,    irregular inside the 20-fathom curve.
irregular boulders. Temporary anchorage, protected from W  and        (1084) A good anchorage in N and E weather is 1.2 miles off-
NW  winds, can be had 0.5 mile offshore 1.5 miles NE of    shore midway along the S coast of Rat Island in 17 to 25 fathoms.
Prokhoda Point in 22 to 25 fathoms, sand bottom.                    The anchorage is 0.8 mile NW of the offshore group of rocky
 (1071 A good anchorage in SW weather is 600 yards offshore 2    islets, 20 feet high, that is the dominant feature along this coast.
miles NW of Pratt Point, the E end of the island, in 20 fathoms,    Approach the anchorage from the SW, passing 0.6 mile W  of the
sandy bottom.                                                       islets.
 (1072) An anchorage protected from S swells in 0.7 to I mile off-   (o085S  Davidof Island, 7.5 miles N of Rat Island, is irregular in
shore just E of Patterson Point, the N end of the island, in 20 to    shape with a N-S length of 2 miles and a greatest width of 0.7
25 fathoms, sand bottom. However, the williwaws off the island    mile. The high point in the S part is 1,074 feet and the summit in
reach gale force with only a moderate SW wind and currents set-    the N part is 922 feet high. The projecting E point of the island is
ting around the island cause tide rips.                             marked by a prominent cone-shaped grayish-tan summit. An islet
 0(073) Anchorage in Williwaw Cove, just W of Patterson Point,    and a knife-edged pinnacle are close off the N end of the island.
is not recommended. The beach at the head is flat and sandy, but     (1086) Khvostof Island, I mile NW of Davidof Island, is 1.5
bordered by several lines of breakers.                              miles long and 0.8 mile wide. The interior is rugged and moun-
 (1074) The sloping beach at the head of William Cove, 2 miles    tainous; the highest peak of 870 feet is in the W  part. Prominent
W of Patterson Point, is abrupt and composed of large, irregular    twin rock pinnacles are close off the N end of the island, and a low
boulders. Small steam jets and hot springs are in the valley at the    flat rock is 700 yards off the NW shore. A I 'A-fathom shoal is 0.4
head of the cove.                                                   mile off the N point of the island.
                                                                      (ls07) The passage between Davidof Island and Khvostof Island
 (1075) Small craft can anchor in the bight just N of Sitkin Point,  (1087) The passage between Davidof Island and Khvostof Island
the W end of the island, but strong williwaws are prevalent in E or
NE weather. A large prominent tan-colored bluff is at the head of    openings on either side of Pyramid Island are narrow and foul, and
the bight.                                                0         have extremely heavy kelp. The blocked passage helps protect
                                                                    Crater Bay, NE of Pyramid Island from SE to SW weather. Use
  (1076) Anchorage protected from the NE is 0.5 mile offshore in    of Crater Bay is restricted by a 2-fathom shoal 0.6 mile N of
25 to,30 fathoms, 0.7 mile SE of a prominent 100-foot islet about    of Crater Bay is restricted by a 2/2-fathom shoal 06 mie N of
1 mile S of Sitkin Point. The anchorage is fair in moderate NW      Pyramid Island. Thepart of the bay between Pyramid Island and
I mile  S of Sitkin Point. The anchorage is fair, in moderate NW,    Davidof Island is clear but too deep for anchorage except close
and E winds.                                           ;            under the shore of Davidof Island, where small craft can find
  (1077) Little Sitkin Pass, between Little Sitkin Island and    excellent protection. Small craft can also anchor, with limited
Davidof Island, is 3 miles wide with depths of 48 fathoms or more                                               of Khvostof Island.
in the middle part. Moderately heavy tide rips occur in the pass    Large vessels can anchor, free from tidal current, just inside the
during the strength of the tidal current..                          30-fathom curve midway between the N end of Khvostof Island
  (1078) Rat Island Pass, between Rat Island and the group of    and the knife-edged pinnacle off the N end of Davidof Island.
islands to the N, is 8 miles wide and has depths of more than 50     (1088) Khvostof Pass, between Khvostof Island and Segula
fathoms through a 4-mile middle width. Currents in the pass are    Island, is.deep and clear and may be navigated without difficulty.
moderate; some set may be expected opposite Little Sitkin Pass    The pass is subject to heavy tide rips at strength of spring currents,
and Khvostof Pass. (See the Tidal Current Tables for predictions.)  especially with moderate breezes from any direction.
                                                                      (1089) Segula Island, 10 miles NW of Rat Island and the most W
  (1079) Chart 16441.-Rat Island, 12 miles NW of Amchitka    of the group on the N side of Rat Island Pass, has a N-S length of 4
Island, is 8 miles long with a greatest width of 2 miles. The inte-    miles and an E-W width of 3.6 miles. The island is a lone crater-
rior is rugged and mountainous, and the shores are rocky. Most of    topped mountain, rising to 3,784 feet. A prominent deep fissure is
the N coast is precipitous and fringed with reefs; small islets and a    on the S face of the mountain. Just W  of the break is a broad,
reef extend 2 miles SE from Ayugadak Point, the E end of the    grassy slope that extends to the rocky bluff midway along the S
island.                                                             shore.
  (1080) Ayugadak Point is a Steller sea lion rookery site. There is  (1090) Iron Point, on the SE corner of the island, is a narrow,
a 3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer zone around the rookery. (See    grass-covered, rock bluff 72 feet high; foul ground, marked by
50 CFR 227.12, chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)              kelp and a breaker, extends 500 yards from the point. Gula Point,
  o(1081) Gunners Cove, about midway along the N side of Rat    the northernmost tip of the island, is low, narrow, and grass cov-
Island, has depths of 1 to 12 fathoms, but is not suitable for    ered. A distinctive dark, round-topped hill is at the end of the long
 anchorage. The bottom is smooth rock and the wind funnels    ridge E of the small cove on the N side of the island, W of Gula
 through the cove. A prominent 50-foot cataract is at the head of    Point. The cove entrance is nearly closed by reefs.
 the cove.                                                             (1091) On the S side of Zapad Head, at the NW corner of the
  (1082) Protection for small vessels in W-weather is available off    island, a prominent grass-covered slope rises gradually from the
 the entrance to Gunners Cove in 17 fathoms. Rocks and reefs on    gravel beach of a small bight; protected anchorage for small craft
 both sides of the cove restrict the swinging room. Larger vessels    is afforded in the bight during moderate NE to SW weather.
 can anchor farther off the cove in 28 fathoms, sand bottom. The       (1o092) A line of high, steep pinnacles extends W  from Chugul
 anchorage on the SW coast of Little Sitkin Island offers protection    Point, at the SW corner of the island. Between Zapad Head and
 from NE weather.                                                    Chugul Point irregular bottom, marked by heavy kelp, extends 800
  (1083) Fair anchorage during S weather can be had 2 miles E of    yards offshore.
 Krysi Point, the W  end of Rat Island, in 28 fathoms. The slope       (1093) Segula Pass, between Segula Island and McArthur Reef,
 between the 20- and 30-fathom curves is less abrupt at this anchor-    is wide, deep, and clear. Courses through the pass should be





                                                     7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                       275


shaped to clear Segula Island by at least 1 mile and McArthur    point at the NE corner of the island is topped by a grass-covered
Reef by at least 2 miles.                                          hill conspicuous from the NW and SE.
 (1094) McArthur Reef, 8 miles W  of Segula Island and about        (1104) In 1965, a volcanic outgrowth was observed making out
the same distance E of Kiska Island, is a menace to navigation.    from shore for a distance of 0.3 mile on the west side of Sirius
The reef is about 0.8 mile in diameter, it does not uncover, and it   Point.
does not break continuously even in a moderate swell at low         (1105) Pillar Rock,- 118 feet high, is a perpendicular rock of
water. The reef is not readily visible except close aboard, and then    remarkable form 9 miles W of Sirius Point and 6.6 miles from the
can be identified only by a small area of slick water surrounding    nearest part of the island. Sturdevant Rock, covered about 7 fath-
kelp.                                                              oms, is 3 miles 2820 from Pillar Rock.
 (1095) McArthur Pass, between McArthur Reef and Kiska              (1106) Northeast Rocks, with a high point of 115 feet, and Hay-
Island, is deep and clear and can be navigated without difficulty.  cock Rock, a lone 113-foot pinnacle I mile to the S, are 0.4 mile
 (1096) Krysi Pass, between Rat Island and Sea Lion Rock, has a    off the coast E of the volcano. These rocks mark the outer limits of
jagged ridge covered in some places with only 2 to 4 fathoms that    an extensive foul area and are excellent landmarks for visual or
extends across it. (See the Tidal Current Tables for predictions.)    radar navigation. Behind Northeast Rocks is a prominent red bluff
The pass is not recommended.                                       which is frequently visible when the other parts of the island are
  1097) Sea Lion Rock, 9 miles WNW of Rat Island and 8 miles    obscured by low clouds or fog.
ESE of Tanadak Island, is less than 200 yards in extent and is      (1107) Between Haycock Rock and Sredni Point, 2.5 miles to the
about 10 feet high. A thick kelp bed around the rock extends 2    SW, is Sredni Bight, an open bight that affords good shelter from
miles E and the same distance W.                                   NW weather in 15 to 20 fathoms, sandy bottom, 0.7 to 0.9 mile
  (1098) Sea Lion Pass, between Sea Lion Rock and Tanadak    from the beach. The anchorage may be entered on a course of
  Island, has depths of more than 20 fathoms over a 2-mile width    2850, heading for the end of the bluff that marks the S side of the
near the middle. Sea Lion Rock is an uncertain target except in    small, sandy beach at the head of the bight. Moderate williwaws
calm weather. Tide rips dangerous to small vessels may occur in    may be expected, and swells enter the anchorage after a storm in
the pass during spring tides. Tidal currents of 4 knots have been    the Bering Sea.
 observed. (See the Tidal Current Tables for predictions.)           (1108) Sredni Point is sharp, sheer, and high. SW from the point
  (1099) Kiska Island is about 600 miles W of Unalaska Bay and    to Reynard Cove and Salmon Lagoon, the high cliffs are bordered
 is the most important of the Rat Islands because of its well-shel-    by detached pinnacles, rocks awash, and submerged rocks. This
                                                                    section of coast should not be approached closer than I mile.
 tered anchorage. It is about 22 miles long and varies in width from
 1.5 to 6 miles. The island is very rugged and mountainous, the N    (1109) Reynard Cove, 2 miles SW of Sredni Point, is blocked by
 end being dominated by Kiska Volcano. The crater of the volcano    a reef that extends nearly the entire width just inside the entrance.
 has two tips, the W  and slightly higher being 4,004 feet high.     (1110) Salmon Lagoon, 2 miles SW of Reynard Cove and the
 Immediately S of the volcano is a low valley about 2 miles wide in    same distance N of Kiska Harbor, can be entered with a pulling
 which are several salt water lakes. The valley extends nearly    boat at high water, but the channel through the low, sand, outer
 across the island from a long, low stretch of shoreline on the W   beach is sometimes closed and often shifts position.
 coast, and a narrow draw leads over a low ridge at the head of the  (111i) Kiska Harbor and Little Kiska Island are discussed later in
 valley to a small steep-to sand beach on the E coast.              connection with chart 16442.
   (1100) Flat-topped, boulder-strewn ridges rise to over 1,000 feet  (1112) In general, the waters adjacent to the Pacific side of Kiska
 between the lake area and Kiska Harbor. A low, narrow pass cuts    Island, from Little Kiska Island to Cape St. Stephen, are irregular
 across the island from the SW corner of Kiska Harbor to a small,    in depth. Broken bottom, within the 30-fathom curve, extends 1.5
 foul bight on the W  coast. S of this pass, sharp, rugged ridges    to 2 miles offshore. Submerged pinnacles rise in deep water in
  1,500 to 1,700 feet high extend to the SW corner of the island.    Vega Bay, off Sobaka Rock, and off Cape St. Stephen. The several
 These ridges are precipitous on their W sides, but slope gradually    small bays and coves between South Pass and Vega Bay are
 on their E sides to the shore of Vega Bay. The valleys and lower    unsuitable for anchorage.
 slopes of the island are covered with tundra and grass, while the   (1113) Vega Bay is a broad indentation between Bukhti Point
 higher parts are generally bare and strewn with boulders, espe-    and Vega Point. The W part of the bay has irregular bottom, with
  cially the ridges N of Kiska Harbor.                               a 21/4-fathom shoal I mile 070ï¿½ from Vega Point. The rest of the
   (1101) The shores of Kiska Island are mostly rocky and steep and    bay is clear except for inshore rocks. In N or W weather, good
  bordered in many places by covered and uncovered rocks. Kelp    anchorage can be found in 22 to 30 fathoms, sand bottom, off the
  fringes most of the island. Kiska Harbor and Vega Bay are the two    entrance to Gertrude Cove in the NE corner of the bay. A pair of
  principal indentations of the coast.                               gray pinnacles on the shore W  of the cove bears 0000 from the
   (1102) Naval Defensive Sea Area and Airspace Reservation.-    anchorage. The cove is a good anchorage for small vessels in all
  Under the authority of Executive Orders 8680 of February 14,    except SW weather.
  1941 and 8729 of April 2, 1941, Kiska Island is a designated        (1114) Sobaka Rock is 1.4 miles 1550 from Vega Point. About
  Naval Defensive Sea Area and Airspace Reservation. Restrictions    2.4 miles due W of the rock is a 21/2-fathom shoal. Because of pos-
  imposed under the authority of the above executive orders have    sible set by currents, particular care is necessary to avoid this
  been suspended subject to reinstatement without notice at any time    shoal in rounding the S end of Kiska Island. Heavy tide rips occur
  that the interests of national defense may require such action.    in this area.
    (1103) Sirius Point is a jutting rock ledge at the N tip of Kiska  (1115) Dark Cove, small and shallow, is on the SW side of Kiska
  Island, and the coast for more than 2 miles in either direction is   Island just E of Cape St. Stephen. When the weather is rough out-
  formed of irregular, steep, rock cliffs, and minor points. Deep    side, small boats have been able to land safely in the NE comer of
  water extends to within 0.5 mile of the shore. The sharp rocky    the cove. Landing is impracticable with a swell from the SSW.





276                                                 7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


 (1116) Cape St. Stephen, the southwesternmost point of Kiska    the shores. Caution is necessary in anchoring to avoid fouling with
Island, should be passed no closer than 3.5 miles to avoid broken    the many wrecks and other obstructions in the harbor. The masts
ground in the area of the 8-fathom shoal 1.8 miles 230ï¿½ from the S    of one derelict show above water in 15 fathoms near the center of
tip of the cape. Heavy tide rips occur in this area at strength of cur-    the harbor, and a 23/4-fathom obstruction is just inside the 10-
rent.                                                              fathom curve off the W shore.
 (1117) Cape St. Stephan and Lief Cove are Steller sea lion rook-   (1126) Anchorage is recommended in the central part of the har-
ery sites. There is a 3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer zone around    bor in 13 fathoms 0.7 mile 185ï¿½ from North Head. Shelter from
these rookeries. (See 50 CFR 227.12, chapter 2, for limits and    NE to NW weather can be found in 15 fathoms 700 yards 150ï¿½
regulations.)                                                      from the outer end of the main wharf. The bottom is hard sand
 (1118) From Cape St. Stephen, the shoreline, that extends about    with fair holding qualities.
15 miles in a NE direction to Witchcraft Point, is in general steep  (1127) The diurnal range of tide is 3.6 feet in Kiska Harbor. (See
and rocky and indented by several small bights. Deep water    the Tide Tables for predictions.)
extends to within 0.5 to 0.8 mile of the shore for the first 12 miles.  (1128) The shortest route to Kiska Harbor from Seattle with the
Several pinnacle rocks and rocks awash fringe this part of the    best visibility is via Unimak Pass and the Bering Sea. From San
coast.                                                             Francisco the shortest distance is via Chugul Pass and Asuksak
 (1119) A prominent line of high rock pinnacles extends 700 yards    Pass, 20 miles E of Adak Island, thence N of the Aleutian Islands
offshore from Witchcraft Point on the NW side of Kiska Island.    to Kiska Harbor; however, a direct route through Amchitka Pass
S of Witchcraft Point low grass-topped bluffs, interrupted by the    and Rat Island Pass is only a few miles farther. Oglala Pass can
valleys of two stream beds, extend 2.7 miles to Conquer Point, a    also be used for the approach from the S. Offshore dangers in the
sharp and sheer rocky point at the foot of a razorbacked hill about    approach to Kiska Harbor are McArthur Reef and the 4-fathom
965 feet high. A 23/4-fathom shoal is about 0.5 mile WNW, and    rock 1.3 miles N of Tanadak Island.
two reefs with depths of 4 and 6 fathoms are about I mile off the   (1129) A ship pier and a small-craft pier are on the N side of
latter point.                                                      Kiska Harbor. The ship pier extends 500 yards out from the shore
 (1120) Temporary anchorage for small boats can be had in the    in a SE direction and can berth a large vessel on either side of the
small bight on the S side of the razorback, having due regard for    outer end. Depths along this part of the pier decrease from 36 feet
charted dangers. The bight has a sand beach.                       at the offshore end to 28 feet at a point 400 feet inshore. As depths
 (1121) Anchorage, protected from moderate NE to SE breezes    shoal gradually, smaller craft may berth inshore of the ship's berth.
and swells, can be found in 25 fathoms, sand bottom, 0.8 mile off   (1130) The small-craft pier NE of the ship pier is 450 feet long
the coast 1.1 miles S of Witchcraft Point. The anchorage should be    and will berth medium-sized craft up to 12 feet in draft. Depths of
approached on a course of 110ï¿½, heading for the small valley about    15 feet are at the outer endand 12 feet about 100 feet inshore.
midway between Witchcraft Point and the razorback to the S. In      (1131) Little Kiska Island, 0.5 mile E of South Head on Kiska
this anchorage Witchcraft Point is on range with Vulcan Point.     Island, is 3.2 miles long and I mile wide. The island is low and
 (1122) A low sand and gravel beach, with a prominent grass-    rocky, the highest point being 430 feet. The shores are, in general,
topped knoll about midway of its length, extends 2.5 miles NE      rocky and often precipitous, although there is a small stretch of
from Witchcraft Point. Then begins a rock cliff coast that extends    low beach facing on South Pass. The coasts in most places are
I mile N to Vulcan Point. NE from Vulcan Point to Sirius Point, a    fringed by covered and uncovered rocks; a group of islets or rocks
distance of 3 miles, the coast is rocky and steep with deep water    extend about 700 yards from the W end of the island.
close to shore.                                                     (1132) Anchorage with fair protection from the N can be found in
 (1123) A reef, covered 5 fathoms, extends NW from Witchcraft    20 fathoms, irregular rocky bottom, S of the center of Little Kiska
Point for 2 miles toward Pillar Rock, then E to a point inshore    Island. The highest peak, with two knobs at the summit, should
about 2 miles S of Vulcan Point. Heavy kelp marks the reef in the    bear due N.
summer, and extremely large tide rips occur in the area at strength  (1133) South Pass, between Kiska and Little Kiska Islands, is a
of current, especially during spring tides. It is not advisable to    narrow approach to Kiska Harbor from the SE. Twin Rocks is a
approach the reef closer than the 30-fathom curve. Small craft    group of small islets on the W side of the S entrance. A 2-fathom
passing between the reef and Pillar Rock should do so when the    rock that breaks in rough weather, 1.2 miles NE of Twin Rocks, is
currents are near slack, which periods occur approximately at the    a danger to vessels approaching the pass from the S.
same time as in Krysi Pass.                                         (1134) A 100-yard wide channel with a swept depth of 24 feet is
                                                                    between a pinnacle covered 11 feet 230 yards NE of South Head
 (1124) Chart 16442.-Kiska Harbor, midway along the E shore    and the near shore. E of this narrow channel, kelp patches show
of Kiska Island, is formed by a small peninsula to the N which ter-    across South Pass to Little Kiska Island during slack water. Only
minates at North Head, and a broad peninsula to the S which is    light-draft vessels with local knowledge should use South Pass.
separated from Little Kiska Island by South Pass; South Head is     (1135) The current velocity is 4 knots in South Pass, the flood set-
the NE point of the lower peninsula. The harbor proper is roughly    ting N and the ebb S. The ebb current is particularly strong S of
circular with a 1.3-mile diameter, although anchoring depths    the pass.
extend an additional 0.5 mile to E. The NE and S sides are rocky    (1136) Tanadak Island, 2.7 miles E of Little Kiska Island and 8
cliffs; the entire W side of the harbor is low and sandy except for    miles W of Sea Lion Rock, is a small grass-covered plateau; cliffs
several ridges that extend to the water's edge. A low valley open-    rise from the water's edge or close behind it. Foul ground extends
ing out at about the middle of the W shore extends well back into    for more than 0.5 mile from the shores; irregular depths of less
Kiska Island. A low ridge parallels the N shore at a distance of    than 10 fathoms extend 4 miles SE of the island.
about 0.5 mile.                                                     (1137) Tanadak Pass, between Tanadak and Little Kiska Islands,
 (1125) Depths do not exceed 17 fathoms inside a line between    is 2.5 miles wide but is full of shoals with depths of 2 to 9 fath-
North and South Heads. The 10-fathom curve is 0.3 to 0.5 mile off    oms. A 225-yard-wide channel with a least depth of 12 fathoms is






                                                     7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                       277


0.6 mile W of a prominent 20-foot rock, the most W of those off     (1146) In June 1981, a 14-fathom spot was reported about 9.4
Tanadak Island. A current velocity of 2.8 knots has been measured    miles SSW of the 2V/2-fathom spot, in about 51ï¿½57'35"N.,
in the pass. Tanadak Pass is not recommended for deep-draft ves-    176039'48"E.
sels.                                                               (1147) Currents up to 5 knots were encountered in the area of
 (1138) Caution.-Heavy seasonal growth of kelp completely fills    shoals between Kiska and Buldir Islands. The set was to the N or
Tanadak Pass and surrounds Little Kiska Island.                    NE on the flood. NW of Buldir Island the set was always N. Cur-
                                                                   rents are believed to be moderate except near shoals or islands.
                                                                     (1148) Middle Reef, a rocky shoal covered 3 fathoms, is 22 miles
 (1139) Chart 16440-Buldir Island is an isolated island between
Kiska Island and the Semichi Islands. This island forms an excel-    S of Buldir Island; it is not marked by kelp. Thin kelp extends for
lent landmark for the W  Aleutians. The island is about 4 miles    I mile S of the reef and from the appearance of the area on the
                                                                    swell, depths of less than 3 fathoms probably exist.
long and 2 miles wide, rugged and mountainous. The highest sum-
mit 2,150 feet, is on the S part of the island. Two lesser summits  (1149) Tahoma Reef, upon which the cutter TAHOMA was lost
2,013 and 1,768 feet, are on the NE end. High, steep landslides are    in 1914, is 33 miles S of Buldir Island. The main reef, which has
along the E end and on the SW side. The shores, in general, con-    an E-W length of 1.3 miles, breaks at the E end in a light swell,
sist of cliffs either rising from the water's edge or backing, narrow    and for its entire length in a moderate swell. Kelp beds extend I to
rock and sand beaches. The island is a bird refuge.                3 miles from all sides of the reef. A current velocity of 1.5 knots
                                                                   was observed in the vicinity of the reef. (See the Tidal Current
 (1140) A chain of bold rocks and conspicuous islets extends 1.2    Tables for predictions.)
miles NW from Buldir Island. The outermost of the three islets is
442 feet high, dome shaped, and an excellent landmark. It can
often be seen by vessels passing to the N when Buldir Island is 
                                                                    Semichi Islands and Attu and Agattu Islands.
obscured by fog or thick weather. Tide rips are generally in evi-    Semichi Islands and Attu and Agattu Islands
dence along the submerged ridge that extends 1.8 miles NW from      (Isl) The Semichi Islands are Shemya, Nizki and Alaid. She-
the islet, but no dangerous shoals or reefs are on the ridgroup, is about 65 miles WNW
                                                                    from Buldir Island.:Alaid Island, the westernmost, is about 16
 (1141) At the E end of the island are several groups of rocks, the    miles E by S from Attu. The group trends WNW over a distance of
farthest being about 0.3 mile offshore. The S coast is foul along-    11.5 miles. The islands have numerous lakes, are covered with
shore and should be approached with caution. Other shores are    tundra, and are treeless. The shores are fringed with reefs and
less rocky. Heavy kelp nearly encircles the island and probably    rocks, some as far as 1 mile offshore.
marks all inshore dangers. Vessels passing Buldir Island on any
                                                                     (1152) Currents estimated to exceed I knot occur E and W of the
                                                                    Semichi Islands and in the passes between them. S currents have
 (1142) The SE to the NW shore of Buldir Island is a Steller sea    been reported in the area betweenthe Semichi Islands and Agattu.
lion rookery site. There is a 3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer     (1153) Ingenstrem Rocks, 14 miles SE from the E end of She-
zone around this rookery which encompasses the entire island.    mya Island, is a group of four visible rocks and several others that
(See 50 CFR 227.12, chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)        uncover. The highest and northernmost of the group is 9 feet high.
 (1143) The anchorage on the NW side of Buldir Island is the shal-    The rocks are in an area about 350 yards in diameter.
low bight formed by the island and the chain of rocks and small     (1154) Depths of 3 to 9 fathoms extend 2.2 miles SE from the 9-
islets that extend to the NW. With the exception of the narrow val-    foot rock. This reef probably breaks along its entire length during
ley opposite the anchorage, the slopes rise precipitously from the    heavy weather. Vessels should not approach the rocks closer than
shoreline to the peaks. The sandy beach at the mouth of the valley    3 miles on the SE, and 2 miles on the N and W.
affords the best landing on the island and a small stream empties
into the bight at this point. Good anchorage, free from strong cur-  (1155) Charts 16436, 16423.-Shemya Island, 3.8 miles long
rents, can be found in 15 fathoms, sand bottom, with the middle of    and 1.8 miles wide, slopes gradually from the shoreline on the S to
the beach bearing 1700. The anchorage affords adequate protec-    a round bluff 250feet high along the N shore. A  Il-foottall
tion in fresh SE to SW weather but notin severe storms from any    building is at the top of the bluff. An aero radiobeacon is at the W
direction. Anchorage suitable for moderate E weather can be    end.
found in 15 to 20 fathoms I mile from shore just S of the chain of  (1156) The shoreline of Shemya Island is generally fringed with
rocks and islets.                    f                             reefs except for a few short stretches of sand beach. Rocks, kelp,
 (144) Extending SE from Buldir Island to Kiska Island is a sub-    and shoals extend 0.6 mile N of the N point of Shemya. The outer-
merged ridge which is marked by heavy tide rips. Buldir Reef, 18    most offshore danger is a 41/4-fathom shoal, 0.6 mile off the N
miles along the ridge from Buldir Island, is about 5 miles long and    shore. A danger zone extends 40 miles off the S shore of Shemya
0.5 mile wide. The dangerous part of the reef includes two areas    Island. (See 334.1290, chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)
where breakers can be observed. The E area is estimated to have     (1157) Several prominent rocky islets, highest 56 feet, are 0.7
depths of 2 to 3 fathoms over it. The W area, covered 3 fathoms, is    mile off the NE coast of Shemya Island. About 0.3 mile NW of
of considerable extent and marked by heavy kelp beds.              these islets is a rock covered 3 feet, which breaks much of the
 (1t45) A depth of 21/2 fathoms is about 14.5 miles ESE of Buldir    time. Foul area extends offshore to within 0.2 mile of the rocky
Reef in 52006.5'N., 176ï¿½45.0'E. Breakers 8 to 10 feet high and    islets. Between the outer end of the foul area and the islets is a
seaweed have been sighted in the vicinity of the 2 /2-fathom spot.    channel which may be used by launches.
In 1975, soundings of 13 fathoms were recorded within 100 yards     (1158) The waters for 1.2 miles E and S of the E point of Shemya
of the 2V2-fathom spot. A sonar evaluation indicated that this area    Island are foul with visible and covered rocks; the area is marked
may be a seamount about 300 to 500 yards wide. Mariners are    by kelp. Shoals with depths of 9 fathoms or less and marked by
urged to exercise caution in the area.                             kelp in the summer are 4 miles S and SSE of the point.





278                                                 7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


 -(1159) Alcan Harbor, on the NW side of Shemya Island, is pro-     (1167) Chart 16421.-Attu Island, the westernmost of the Aleu-
tected on the E and S, somewhat protected on the W, and is wide    tians, is 15 by 35 miles in extent and is indented by many bays and
open to N weather. When the seas are running, breakers can be    long inlets. The terrain is rugged and has practically no large level
seen along the submerged remains of a former breakwater which    area. The bays on Attu Island offer a striking similarity. They are
extends about 0.4 mile N from the point on the W side of the har-    apparently formed by submerged valleys between mountain
bor. A wreck marks the end of the point and the submerged    ridges. The heads of the bays are fed by streams which have car-
remains are marked by kelp. Several rocks are visible at low tide    ried down enough sand to give a good holding ground. The excep-
up to 100 yards N of the point; mariners are advised to exercise    tion to this is Holtz Bay, which is rock and sand. At the head of
extreme caution in this area. On the W side of the harbor is a 333-    each bay is a crescent-shaped, sand beach with a more or less high
foot sheet pile wharf with, a 250-foot mooring face with a deck    bank of sand across the middle. A course down the middle of the
height of 23 feet and a depth of 27 feet alongside. In the middle of    bay, with the exception of Massacre Bay, was found to be clear; all
the harbor lies a wreck on a reef which is marked by kelp. Depths    that have been investigated show deep water close inshore. Some
in the harbor cannot be relied upon because of the frequent    have rocks along the shore but these are easily seen. Anchorages
changes, and vessels should be extremely careful of the natural    are in from 10 to 15 fathoms, sand bottom. The best method is to
and structural hazards. In September 1982, it was reported that a    head into the bay until these depths are reached and anchor. At the
strong current had been observed to enter the harbor from the N,    heads of most of the bays are barabaras (huts) built by the Aleuts
move in a clockwise direction around the head of the harbor, and    for use during the fur-trapping season.
exit W past the point. The diurnal range of tide is 3.4 feet in Alcan  (1168) Currents.-Strong currents may be encountered along the
Harbor.                                                            N coast of Attu Island, and while variable, the consensus seems to
 (1160) (See page T-8 for Shemya climatological table.)           be that they follow strong winds and are noticeably affected by the
 (1161) The S side of Shemya Island is mostly fringed with reefs    weather. In calm weather the set is generally SE.
and rocks that extend as much as I mile off, but there are short    (1169) Survey operations in recent years have roughly defined
stretches of sandy beach. Skoot Cove, 0.7 mile from the W end of    tidal currents crossing the chain here, setting in a general NW and
the island, has depths of about 2 fathoms, and small boats may    SE direction at the flood and ebb respectively, except as diverted
find shelter here when weather conditions prevent landings in    by shoal and land areas. Slacks follow the times of local high and
Alcan Harbor. In 1970, it was reported that the submerged remains    low water except for a lag at times as great as 1 hour.
of a former breakwater extend about 100 yards seaward in a 150ï¿½
direction from a point (52043'00"N., 174ï¿½04'15"E.), on the W side   (1170) Chart 16432.-Chirikof Point is the end of the long pen-
of the.cove. The cove has been used as a dump and is reported to    insula jutting E from Attu Island. This peninsula forms the N side
be filled in N of 52ï¿½43'N.                                         of Massacre Bay and its approaches and the S side of Sarana Bay.
 (1162) Hammerhead Island, 55 feet high and 0.5 mile W  of    It is mountainous and has several deep valleys running approxi-
Shemya Island, is the southernmost of several small islands sur-    mately N and S across it. Its shores are rock or boulders; it has
rounded by foul ground near the middle of Shemya Pass, which is    rocky bluffs on the N shore, and like most of the land areas in the
between Shemya Island and Nizki Island. The controlling depth    Aleutians, gentler slopes and fewer bluffs along the S shore.
through the passages on either side of Hammerhead Island is about    Alexai Point, midway along th S side of the peninsula, is flat and
13 feet, but the E passage is the preferable of the two. During    low with sand beaches in the E and W bights. Foul areas surround
stormy weather or when swells are running high in the Bering Sea    this point for 1 mile. The channel to Massacre Bay passes 0.8 mile
or the Pacific, heavy breakers are likely to be encountered in the    SW of this point.
passages.                                                           (1171) As a rule the peaks on Attu Island are clouded in and are
                                                                    of little use to the navigator in making a landfall. Peaks on the
 (1163) Chart 16435.-Nizki Island, between Alaid and Shemya    peninsula are no exception to this rule. The lower hills and sum-
Islands, is 3 miles long and I mile wide, and is nearly connected to    mits on Chirikof Point are, frequently clear when the peaks are
Alaid by a shifting sandspit. The island with a high point of 165    cloud covered and consequently a landfall here is not as difficult.
feet is lower than either Alaid or Shemya. The shoreline is very    The end of the point is paralleled by a ridge of varying elevation,
irregular and is fringed by numerous rocks, reefs, and kelp-marked    more or less crescent shaped, that extends from the SE to the NE
shoals. Narrow channels between the reefs lead to small coves    extremities of the point. The highest part of this ridge is a peak
which provide shelter for small boats.                             1,315 feet high, approximately at the center of the point (N and S).
 (1164) During NW to NE weather there is good protection in an    The ridge terminates at its NE end in Buchanan Point, a promi-
anchorage I to 2 miles S of the narrow passage separating Nizki    nent knob and headland 320 feet high. To the S and SE of the sum-
and Alaid Islands in 10 to 20 fathoms, hard bottom.                mit, the ridge slopes down to a prominent 755-foot knob-topped
 (1165) Alaid Island is 3 miles long and about 1 mile wide. The E    hill and then drops still lower to a flat ridge carrying out E to the
part is low rolling tundra; the W part is made up of four hills, two    end of McCloud Head.
of which are over 600 feet high. Most of the shoreline is rocky and  (1172) A prominent black islet, 10 feet high, is about 0.5 mile
fringed with reefs, but there are several bights that might provide    NNE of Buchanan Point. Low rock ledges, mostly bare at high
anchorage for small boats in an emergency.                         water, make out in an E direction from the S part of the point. A
 (1166) A dangerous 1-fathom shoal is 0.9 mile W of the W end of    fair anchorage in 15 to 25 fathoms, sand bottom, can be had in the
Alaid Island. Seas pile up on this shoal and much of the time it is    bight between the two extremities of the point with good protec-
marked by a breaker. Currents are strong in the vicinity and cause    tion in SW to NW weather.
rips when the wind and sea are opposed. The deep channel            (1173) A 2-foot-high rocky islet is 2.4 miles ESE from McCloud
between this shoal and the shore reefs may be used by launches    Head. E, S, and SW of this islet for 0.8 mile are shoal areas of 7 to
under favorable conditions but is not recommended for large ves-    10 fathoms. No dangers were found except close in to the islet, but
sels.                                                              the area should be avoided and the rocky islet approached no




                                                     7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                        279


closer than 1 mile as the bottom is ragged and currents are strong.    tinue to Holtz Bay. A chain of rocks and reefs, including Hodikof
A safe channel exists W  of this islet and I mile E of McCloud      Island, makes out about 1.2 miles E from the small point at the N
Head.                                                               side of the inner bay. N of this chain of reefs is Hodikof Bay. A
 (1174) Reefs and kelp patches extend off the shoreline between    small-boat passage is W  of Hodikof Island between Sarana Bay
Alexai Point and McCloud Head to a distance of 0.5 mile.    and Hodikof Bay. A low single-pinracle rock, 4 feet high, is off
Anchorage can be had under this shore inside the 20-fathom    the approaches to Hodikof Bay about 0.5 mile SE of Hodikof
curve, having due regard for the charted foul areas. The bottom is    Point. About 0.7 mile ENE of Hodikof Point is an extensive area
hard, however. A prominent waterfall on this shore is about mid-    of irregular bottom with a least depth of I /2 fathoms, which breaks
distance between the two points.                                    in a heavy swell.
 (1175) Massacre Bay, on the S side of Attu Island 6 miles W of      (1187) Sarana Bay is not recommended as an anchorage except
Chirikof Point, is 4 miles wide between Alexai Point on the E and    for medium and small craft, as a cable area extends through the
Murder Point on the W, and recedes for about 3.5 miles in a N       middle of the bay and in the position of the only ship anchorage.
direction. Numerous shoal areas obstruct the bay but wire-dragged    Smaller craft may anchor N or S of this area depending upon
channels lead to the harbors. A radiobeacon is on the W  side of    weather conditions, or in Hodikof Bay. Also an emergency
Pyramid Cove.                                                       anchorage may be had along the shore W of Chirikof Point in not
 (1176) Caution.-Earthquake activity, in 1975, in the Attu Island    less than 15 fathoms but the bottom is hard and irregular and is
area has caused a bottom uplift of 4 to 7 feet at various locations in    subject to considerble current. Hodikof Bay seems to be the best
Massacre Bay. Until more complete information is developed,         anchorage for medium and small craft in this locality but it should
mariners are advised to exercise extreme caution as depths may    be entered with suitable visibility. Approach on a W course, pass-
vary from those charted and mentioned in the Coast Pilot.           ing 400 yards S of the 4-foot rock off Hodikof Point. Anchor in
 (1177) Anchorage in Massacre Bay can be had in 10 to 20 fath-    the middle of Hodikof Bay in 10 to 12 fathoms, sand bottom. This
oms; the bottom is volcanic ash and sand with some clay. The bay    anchorage is exposed to weather from the N around to the SE. SE
is protected on the N, E, and W by Attu Island, and in S weather    to SW winds blow with considerable force in Sarana Bay, proba-
heavy swells are broken up by off-lying reefs.                      bly augmented in funneling through the passes across the penin-
 (1178) The diurnal range of tide is 3.3 feet in Massacre Bay. (See    sula. Their effect in Hodikof Bay is not known.
the Tide Tables for daily predictions.)                              (1188) Kelliher Cove is a small bight 0.5 mile S of Khlebnikof
 (1179) In 1967, it was reported that the piers at the head of Mas-    Point. Small craft may obtain shelter from weather from S to NW.
sacre Bay and in Pyramid Cove were in ruins at the surfline, and    The shores are rocky except at the head of the cove which has a
only the pier in Navy Cove, close NE of Pyramid Cove, was           short gravel beach. The bottom is hard.
usable in this area. Numerous obstructions were reported to exist    (1189) From inner Sarana Bay to Holtz Bay the coast is rocky but
in Pyramid Cove and in the rest of the bay. Shallow-draft craft can    with gentle slopes back to the mountains in the interior. E of and
tie up to dolphins behind the breakwater in the SW part of Casco    close inshore from Khlebnikof Point are off-lying rocky islets, 5 to
Cove, which is midway between Pyramid Cove and Murder Point,    15 feet high, that serve as landmarks when cruising close inshore.
2.3 miles to the S.                                                 Middle Peak, 2,000 feet high, is the highest point between Sarana
 (1180) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is: compul-    Bay and Holtz Bay, but is usually covered by clouds.
sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of    (1190) Gibson Islands, are on the N side of the entrance to
Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)                     Chichagof Harbor, the largest island is a flat-topped grass-covered
 (1181) The Aleutian Islands are served by the Alaska Marine    island, 104 feet high. The smaller islets at the SE limits of this
Pilots and Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.                     group are bare pinnacles. Cooper Islands, 0.5 mile W  of Gibson
 (1182) Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots    Island, may be identified by the sheer pinnacle, 125 feet high, con-
and en route to Navy Cove can meet the pilot boat about 1.3 miles    stituting the S half of the middle island.
S of Murder Point (52%47.7'N., 173ï¿½11.7'E.).                         (1191) Kennon Island, a 92-foot grass-covered island about 0.3
 (1183) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "NAVY COVE      mile long, is at the NW side of the mouth of Chichagof Harbor. A
PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearranged fre-    narrow and shoal channel into the harbor is W of this island. Mid-
quency between pilot and agent/vessel.                              die Rocks and Inner Rocks are low bare rocks 10 to 20 feet high.
 (1184) A U.S. Coast Guard loran transmitting station is main-    Middle Rocks are adjacent to and E of Kennon Island; Inner
tained at Pyramid Cove. An airline calls at the landing strip near    Rocks are adjacent to and S of the island. The main channel is SE
Massacre Bay.                                                       of these rocks.
                                                                      (1192) Pisa Point, on the S side of the harbor entrance, is a low
 (1185) Chart 16433.-Sarana Bay is 5 miles W of Chirikof Point    point ending in a reef. Pisa Tower is a prominent leaning pinnacle
and on the opposite side of the peninsula from Massacre Bay.    44 feet high on the point. A rock that uncovers is 140 yards N of
From Buchanan Point to the head of Sarana Bay the shoreline is    the point.
rocky and precipitous with few valleys of appreciable depth.         (1193) Chichagof Point, between Chichagof Harbor and Holtz
Mountainous terrain carries abruptly to the water with few off-    Bay, is reasonably flat and 300 feet high. The shores are rocky
lying rocks or ledges except at the small points. The S side of the    bluffs.
bay and approaches consist of rock bluffs with close inshore rocks   (1194) Chichagof Harbor is small in area, shoal, and holding
and pinnacles. Square Point, 3.5 miles W of Buchanan, Point, is    bottom is poor, but it is well sheltered, although SE to SW winds
difficult to identify as none of the numerous points in this locality    appear to funnel through the valleys into the bay with augmented
are prominent; however, the waterfalls on either side of Square    velocity. There is little or no current effect. The bay is about 0.7
Point are fairly prominent.                                         mile wide and allows little swinging room except for small craft.
 (1186) The head of Sarana Bay and also Hodikof Bay are low    About 18 feet at low water can be carried into the head of the har-
sand beaches. At Hodikof Point rocky bluffs begin again and con-    bor where depths are about 6 fathoms. Turns are sharp for medium





280                                                   7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


craft. Fifteen feet is recommended as the maximum draft of ves-        (1206) The westernmost of these coves offers the best anchorage.
sels entering this harbor because of the concrete anchor clumps      Some protection from S and W weather may be obtained here. To
which stand 3 to 4 feet above the bottom. The bottom is mostly    enter the anchorage, steer 210ï¿½, heading about 200 yards W of a
hard or gravel.                                                      prominent grassy knoll at the head of the cove. Anchor in 8 or 9
  (1195) The head of Chichagof Harbor is a sand beach divided into    fathoms, with a fine gray sand bottom. The holding properties of
two parts by a rocky point. Other shores of the bay are ledge or    this anchorage are fair. The anchorage offers no protection, how-
boulders. The N part of the bay, SW of Kennon Island, is shoal    ever, from N weather. A current setting E along the shore may
and is recommended for small craft only. In the central part of the    cause a vessel to lay in the trough of the sea and roll excessively.
bay is a relatively large area of depths from 15 to 18 feet, with      (1207) Red Head, on the W side of Steller Cove, has a bluff-lined
scattered kelp. The channel is N and W of this area. The village of    shore with a tableland sloping inland to mountains 1,860 feet high.
Attu, at the head of the bay, has been razed. There is a dock, suit-    The upper slopes of these mountains show bare and red and form a
able for small craft, on the SW side of the bay. Depths at the dock    distinctive landmark in this region. A shoal area extends N from
shoal from 10 feet at the outer end to 4 feet 50 yards inshore. A    Red Head and marked currents swirl around this point. Red Head
road leads across the island to Massacre Bay.                        should be passed at least 1 mile off.
  (1196) Range Point is 400 yards SW of Inner Rocks. A 21/2-           (1208) The only dangers from Steller Cove to the W end of Attu
fathom spot is 200 yards N of Range Point.                           Island are the inshore reefs. Vessels can follow the coast with
  (1197) The diurnal range of tide is 3.6 feet in Chichagof Harbor.   safety I mile or more offshore.
  (1198) Holtz Bay, the first bay W  of Chichagof Harbor, is the       (1209) For several miles W of Red Head a low flat strip of land
largest and the most spectacular on the N coast of Attu Island. It is    about 0.5 mile wide is between the shoreline and the mountains.
a broad-mouthed bay thrusting deeply into the island and having    Several conspicuous boulders are scattered over this flat. The most
bluff-bordered beaches backed by tundra-covered mountain             conspicuous, a block of rock about 20 feet high in 53ï¿½00.8'N.,
masses on both sides.                                                172ï¿½46.4'E., forms an excellent landmark.
  (1 199) The head of the bay is divided into two arms, separated by *   (1210) Earle Cove, 7 miles W of Steller Cove, is at the W end of
Center Point, a promontory about 500 feet high and having mod-       the belt of flatland. At the entrance to this small cove are several
erate, tundra-covered slopes. At the head of each arm is a broad    rocks but anchorage for small boats may be had in 10 fathoms 0.2
sandy beach with low valleys beyond cutting back into the inte-    mile SW of the larger rock in the cove entrance. Another anchor-
rior.                                                                age in 11 fathoms may be had 0.2 mile S of this same rock. Care
  (1200) Holtz Bay is free from dangers except for inshore reefs. It    should be taken in approaching the anchorage to avoid the kelp
may be entered on any course provided the shoreline is given a    and foul ground off the E point of the cove.
berth of at least 0.5 mile until the inner arms are reached. When      (1211) The shoreline for several miles W  of Earle Cove is craggy
0.5 mile from Center Point and about abeam of a rocky islet off    and precipitous, rising rapidly to peaks over 2,000 feet high.
the W  shore, take up a midchannel course down either arm.    Kresta Point, 8 miles NE of Cape Wrangell, is a prominent bold
Anchor in 5 to 6 fathoms in West Arm and in 6 to 7 fathoms in    headland and marks the W end of this section of rugged coastline.
East Arim. Vessels also anchor at the entrance to West Arm in 10       (1212) W  of Kresta Point two small valleys make down to the
fathoms. The bottom in most of Holtz Bay is a fine gray sand, with    coast, ending in a stretch of easy-sloping shoreline about I mile
shells and some boulders. The holding properties are fair.           long. W  of these valleys is another region of high mountains and
 (1201) Holtz Bay offers protection from S and W  weather, but    craggy, precipitous shoreline, with a bold headland at its W end.
strong winds may draw up through the passes, especially in the    This headland is 5 miles E of Cape Wrangell.
fall and winter. One vessel reports having had an excellent lee        (1213) Two small coves are SW of this headland. W, between the
from strong W  winds when anchored in 17 fathoms in the central    coves and Cape Wrangell, the shore is bold and precipitous, with a
part of the bay about 0.6 mile off Center Point. The bay is wide    few islets, rocks and reefs near the shore.
open to storms from the N and E.                                       (1214) The current sets E on the flood and W on the ebb along the
                                                                     N coast of Attu Island near Cape Wrangell. Velocities of 1.5 knots
 (1202) Chart 16421.-W of Holtz Bay the N coast of Attu Island    have been observed and may reach 3 knots during spring tides. A
is precipitous, rugged and fairly straight for 7 miles. A number of    current velocity of about I knot, 5 miles NE of Cape Wrangell,
reefs and rocks, all less than 0.3 mile from shore, are off this coast.    sets ENE on the flood and SSW on the ebb.
Except for these inshore rocks this stretch of coast is free from
dangers.                                                               (1215) Chart 16430.-Cape Wrangell is the westernmost
 (1203) Austin Cove is an open bight about midway in this 7-mile    extremity of Attu Island. The cape appears as a string of rocky,
stretch of coast. It offers some protection from S weather to small    rugged islets, about 150 feet high, reaching out from a mountain-
boats anchoring close inshore. A ledge terminating in a rock    ous ridge. This ridge is bold and steep with a summit about 1,800
awash at high tide makes off the W side of the cove. A rock ledge,    feet high.
which projects from the inner part of the cove for 0.3 mile, must      (1216) On Peaked Island, just off the cape, a natural bridge and
be avoided.                                                          buttress forms an opening which has the deceptive appearance of a
 (1204) Steller Cove is a wide bight in the coast about 10 miles W   large patch of snow against the dark rocks. This is a distinctive
of Holtz Bay. Three open coves further indent the coastline of this    landmark to vessels N and S of the cape.
bight. The shoreline is bluff-lined except for the stretches of sandy  (1217) A rock 3 feet high is about 0.3 mile W of Peaked Island.
beach in the middle and W coves. The only dangers to navigation      Breakers usually mark this rock.
are the close inshore rocks.                                           (1218) Cape Wrangell should be rounded at 1.5 miles distance. At
 (1205) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as    maximum current the heavy tide rips extend for about 3 miles off
4ï¿½ from the normal variation have been observed in Steller Cove.     the cape.





                                                    7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                      281


 (1219) SE of Cape Wrangell, inshore currents were observed set-    rocks almost 0.4 mile offshore 1 and 2.5 miles N of Chuniksak
ting E at times.                                                  Point.
 (1220) Cape Wrangell is a Steller sea lion rookery site. There is a  (1234) Chuniksak Point, between Abraham Bay and Nevidiskov
3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer zone around the rookery. (See    Bay, is a broad, three-pointed promontory sloping moderately
50 CFR227.12, chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)             upward and back to two mountain ridges.
 (1221) Between Cape Wrangell and Etienne Head, the mountain-     (1235) Small-boat landings have been made in the cove just NW
ous coastline is indented by two coves. A shingle beach is at the N  of the easternmost point of Chuniksak Point.
end of Wrangell Cove, the E of the two. Small boats have made      (1236) A current with a W  set has been noticed close inshore
landings on this beach.                                           around this point.
 (1222) Etienne Head is a moderate-sized headland about 120        (1237) Nevidiskov Bay, on the SE side of Chuniksak Point, is a
feet high. A group of large black rocks and reefs are off the head-    fairly open, two-armed bay, surrounded by an irregular terrain of
land.                                                             mountain ridges and valleys. Nevidiskov Bay is fairly clear of
  (1223) Etienne Bay is the first large bay E of Cape Wrangell. It is   dangers and may be entered on any course, except that Chuniksak
broad and open, and has high mountains on both sides and a long    Point should be given a berth of at least 0.5 mile and Theodore
sandy beach at its head. A low valley and a pass run inland from    Point a berth of at least 1 mile.
this beach.                                                        (1238) The steep sided, rocky islet, 38 feet high, S of the point
  (1224) The bay is clear of dangers to navigation except for the    separating the two arms of the bay is a landmark for vessels enter-
reefs and kelp patches that border the E and W shores. The W      ing the bay.
shore should be given a berth of at least 0.5 mile. The bottom     (1239) At the head of the E arm of Nevidiskov Bay is a flat, sandy
 shoals gradually as the bay is entered. Deep-draft vessels- can    beach. Vessels of any draft can anchor off this beach in 15 to 17
 anchor in 14 fathoms in midbay about 1 mile from the head. The    fathoms, 0.7 to 1 mile E of the 38-foot islet. The bottom is fine
 bottom is fine green sand and pebbles and has fair holding proper-    gray sand mixed with small round boulders. It has fair holding
 ties.                                                             properties.
  (1225) A perpendicular-sided table-topped shelf about 500 feet    (1240) This bay offers shelter for any draft vessel from NW
 high is on the E shore 1.5 miles from the head of the bay. This    through NE to SE storms. It is open and exposed, however, to
 makes a good landmark from seaward.                               storms from the SW quadrant.
  (1226) Etienne Bay is wide open to S and W storms, and because   (1241) Low rocks and reefs fringe most of the E shore of the bay
 of the lack of protection is not recommended as an anchorage    for as much as 0.3 mile offshore. Kelp is found over and around
 except in N or E weather.                                         these rocks.
   (1227) Mikhail Point marks the SE approach to Etienne Bay. It is  (1242) The W arm of Nevidiskov Bay is constricted and has a
 a broad, gently sloping headland with a terrace-sided shoulder    rocky, submerged ledge across its inner part.
 near its NW part.                                                  (1243) Theodore Point, between Nevidiskov Bay and Temnac
   (1228) A narrow-mouthed cove cuts into the SE tip of Mikhail    Bay, is a bluff promontory sloping moderately to a knoll-like
 Point. This cove offers good protection to small boats, but the    shoulder and then steeply to the mountain ridge behind. Theodore
 swinging room is very limited.                                    Point is the southernmost promontory of Attu Island and the knoll-
   (1229) Mikhail Point should be given a berth of at least 0.5 mile    like shoulder is a conspicuous landmark for vessels SE or SW of
 by deep-draft vessels.                                           the point.
   (1230) Abraham Bay, E of Mikhail Point, is the second major      (1244) Reefs and rocks fringe Theodore Point on all sides for
  bay E of Cape Wrangell. It is wide-mouthed, narrowing to an    about 0.3 mile. Kelp patches cover and surround most of these
  inner arm at the NE end. This arm has parallel shores and a short,    reefs. A dangerous pinnacle rock, covered 5 feet, is 0.5 mile SW
  sandy beach at its head. The mountains surrounding Abraham Bay    of the W end of the point.
  rise steeply from the shoreline to between 1,500 and 2,000 feet    (1245) Small boats have landed in the cove on the SW side of
  high. The steep, rugged slopes of the inner arm give it a fiord-like    Theodore Point.
  appearance.                                                        (1246) W currents were encountered close inshore off Theodore
   (1231) An unusually large waterfall on the NW shore of Abraham    Point during the summer.
  Bay, 2.5 miles E of Mikhail Point, is a conspicuous landmark,      (1247) Fog covers the land above the 100- to 200-foot level much
  even to ships offshore.                                           of the time in the late spring and summer.
    (1232) A group of rocks and reefs mark the W side of the
  approach to the inner arm of Abraham Bay. The highest of these, a  (1248) Charts 16431, 16423.-Temnac Bay, the first bay W of
  steep-sided rock 48 feet high, is an excellent landmark for vessels    Massacre Bay on the S coast of Attu Island, is about 8 miles wide
  entering the bay. Vessels should steer a course to pass not less than    between Theodore Point on the W and Krasni Point on the E and
  0.5 mile off this rock, rounding it at that distance and then heading    indents the island about 4 miles.
  toward the middle of the sand beach at the head of the inner arm.  (1249) Coming from the E and Massacre Bay it is best to keep at
  Anchorage is found E of the innermost low flat reef in 13 fathoms,    least 1.5 miles off Krasni Point to clear the reef, that extends 1.2
  gravel bottom. The holding properties are only fair. This anchor-    miles S of the point, and the islands along the shore NW of the
  age offers some protection from N and E storms, but is exposed to    point. A rock that uncovers 4 feet is 700 yards S of the western-
  the W and S. In addition, fierce strong winds often draw through    most island. The W shore should be given a berth of 0.8 mile until
  the inner arm, when no winds are noticeable off the approaches to    well into the head of the bay.
   the bay.                                                           (1250) Large vessels can anchor about 1.5 miles from the head of
    (1233) The E shore is clear of dangers except for the almost con-    the bay in 20 fathoms;, fine gray sand bottom, of fair holding qual-
   tinuous string of reefs close inshore. The greatest dangers are the    ities. Smaller vessels can anchor farther in. The anchorage offers





282                                                   7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS


some shelter from strong SE breezes. No williwaws were experi-    tion, ending in a rock which uncovers. This reef is surrounded by
enced while survey operations were in progress.                      extensive kelp beds. Small craft may proceed to an inner anchor-
 (1251) Temnac Bay is not, in general, recommended for anchor-    age E of this reef and into the deepest part of the bay. A fox
age but it might prove useful in an emergency, and it would be    farmer's cabin is at the head of this bight.
easy to get out of in case of undesirable weather conditions.          (1264) No evidence of kelp or dangers has been found in other
                                                                     parts of the bight except very close inshore. Large or medium craft
 (1252) Charts 16434, 16423.-Agattu Island, about 22 miles SE        should anchor in 15 to 20 fathoms, sand bottom, 0.5 to 0.8 mile off
of Attu Island, is the second largest and the southerly island of the    the W  shore and about E of the end of Patricia Point. Shelter is
Near Islands. This island is roughly triangular in shape with the N  afforded from SE to SW. W  and E swells and sea make into the
shore or base of the triangle trending in a WSW direction. The N     bay.
shore is about 17 miles in length, the S shore 14 miles and the E      (1265) Binnacle Bay is a bight 1 mile SW of the end of Patricia
shore 9 miles in length.                                             Point. Kelp beds are off the N part of the E shore. A kelp bed also
 (1253) It is reported that at the time of the Russian voyages of dis-    makes out from the point at the W  side of the deepest part of the
covery to Alaska that 35 native Aleutian villages were on the    bay. The remainder of the area seems to be clear of kelp and
island. Many of the sites are in evidence at this time. The island is    anchorage can be had as needed in 17 to 21 fathoms, hard bottom.
not at present populated.                                              (1266) In Armeria Bay no dangers were found outside the kelp
 (1254) The island is volcanic in origin, and similar in terrain,    area. A 10-fathom bank is 1.5 miles E of Armeria Point. Anchor-
shoreline, and vegetation to the other islands of the aleutians.    age may be had 0.5 mile SE of the bank in 24 to 25 fathoms, hard
Mountain peaks 1,992 feet high are adjacent to the E half of the N   sand and rocky bottom.
shore and 2,080 feet to the SW. The shoreline is rocky and precip-     (1267) West Cove, a two-armed bight 1.5 miles SW of Armeria
itous and fringed with close-inshore pinnacles. Boulder or pebble    Point, is a fair anchorage for small craft. The bottom is hard and
beaches are at the heads of most of the bights; frequently the boul-    there is insufficient sea room for medium craft. Enter 200 to 300
ders are outside the low water line which renders landing in small    yards E of an islet off the W  side of the entrance. Anchor in the
boats, except in a smooth sea, difficult. Water may be boated from    middle of the bay in 15 fathoms or as desired.
streams in most of the bights. Most of the points rise 50 to 200 feet  (1265) A bight on the S side of the island, 1.5 miles E of Gillon
from the water to headlands and then slope more gradually to the    Point, is free of dangers except for the breaker off the end of Nile
interior.                                                            Point. Anchorage can be had in 17 fathoms, sand bottom, about
 (1255) The peaks are generally obscured by a low ceiling. For    0.5 to 0.7 mile from the shore. The bottom is hard sand, scattered
this reason the points are the most suitable features for naviga-    rocks and broken shell. Reefs are close inshore and a black
tional purposes. Krugloi Point, the NE end of the island; Cape       detached islet is at the W side of the head of the bight.
Sabak, the SE end of the island; and Gillon Point, the W  end of       (1269) Otkriti Bay, on the S side of Agattu Island, is the largest
the island, are hills and plateaus sloping to the water's edge or    bay on the island affording any protection; it is about I mile long
ending in sheer headlands. Gillon Point ends in a low flat-topped    and 2 miles wide. Two long narrow islands extend W  from the E
headland which appears separated from the island. Kohl Island,    entrance point; the highest point, 83 feet, of the outer island is a
156 feet high, is about 2.5 miles W  of Cape Sabak and is promi-    good landmark. About 0.6 mile SW of the outer island is a 1/,-
nent. Gillon Point should be given a berth of at least 1 mile and    fathom shoal that breaks in a moderate sea. Anchorage can be had
Krugloi Point 3 miles.                                               in 20 fathoms, coarse sand and shell bottom, SW of the bold point
 (1256) Cape Sabak and Gillon Point are Steller sea lion rookery    between Karab Cove and Otkriti Bay proper. Holding properties
sites. There is a mile vessel exclusionary zone around these rook-    are fair, but there is no protection from the S and W.
eries. (See 50 CFR 227.12, chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)     (1270) Karab Cove, the bight on the E side of Otkriti Bay, is
 (1257) Armeria Point, 5 miles NE of Gillon Point, is a sheer    small - 1 mile long and 0.5 mile wide - but affords the best protec-
double pointed headland 100 feet high, fringed with high pinna-    tion of any anchorage on the island for vessels less than 125 feet in
cles, and rising to greater elevations a short distance inland. Patri-    length; it is open only to the SW. The anchorage is in the center of
cia Point, 6 miles W of Krugloi Point, is low and slopes gradually    the cove in 12 fathoms, sand and gravel bottom; it is not recom-
back to the hills inland.                                            mended in S or SW weather.
 (1258) Nile Point on the S side, 2.3 miles E of Gillon Point, is a   (1271) Agattu Roadstead, on the E side of Agattu Island, is an
bold headland. A dangerous breaker is about 0.5 mile off this    extensive open bight. Numerous monolithic pinnacles are along
point. This is one of the few off-lying dangers.                     the shoreline; Monolith Point, which appears black against
 (1259) The hills and plateaus constituting most of the island give    lighter background, is on the N side of the entrance to McDonald
the appearance of flat tableland from a distance but in most of the    Cove. There are no dangers to navigation if the shoreline is given
areas are interspersed with numerous valleys.                        a berth of 0.5 mile. The depth of the roadstead slopes gradually up
 (1260) It is recommended that medium craft keep outside the 20-    from about 45 fathoms to 10 or 12 fathoms. The bottom is sand,
fathom curve around the island except when seeking shelter, and    although there is some rock opposite rocky promontories. Where
large craft outside the 40-fathom curve.                             there is sand it appears to be deep and affords good holding
 (1261) All anchorages about the island are limited as to shelter,    ground. Agattu Roadstead offers little protection from E and but
but the island is not large and both medium and large craft can    little from N and S, but it is protected from the W, subject, how-
proceed to such anchorages as the prevailing weather requires.       ever, to draw winds from that direction. The bight offers suitable
 (1262) The currents are weak and heavy tide rips will not be    anchorage for any type of vessel if weather conditions are favor-
encountered about this island except in rare cases.                  able.
 (1263) Patricia Bight is the best anchorage off the N shore.         (1272) A good anchorage is available in this locality off
Extensive kelp beds make well out from the E side of this bight    McDonald Cove in 15 to 20 fathoms, sand bottom. Depths seem to
and a long reef makes out from about the deepest part in a N direc-    be suitable for anchorage alongshore for some distance towards




                                                   7. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                                    283


Krugloi Point. Reefs, making out 0.3 to 0.5 mile from shore,      (3273) Chart 16012.-The area W of Attu Island was surveyed to
extend for 2 miles from Krugloi Point.                           170ï¿½E in 1946. Stalemate Bank, 55 miles W of Cape Wrangell,
                                                                  Attu Island, is a large shoal area with a least depth of 18 fathoms.







                                                       8. BERING SEA

 (1)   This chapter describes the N coast of the Alaska Penin-        (9)   Most reports indicate that during the open season there is a
sula, the W coast of Alaska including Bristol Bay, Norton Sound,    general drift N along the Bering coast and thence through the Ber-
and the numerous bays indenting these areas. Also described are    ing Strait into the Arctic Ocean. During the winter, ice moves
the Pribilof Islands, and Nunivak, St. Matthew, and St. Lawrence     from the Arctic into the Bering Sea. The N drift is probably not
Islands. The communities of Nome, Unalakleet, Bethel, King           more than 0.5 knot in the open sea well N of the Aleutian passes.
Salmon, Naknek, Port Moller, and St. George are also discussed.      Wind and atmospheric pressure are said to materially affect the
                                                                     drift. In a disturbed area the current will generally set with a strong
 (2)   Chart 16006.-The S limit of the Bering Sea is a line run-    wind or toward an atmospheric depression, and such a current may
ning from Kabuch Point (54049'N., 163022'W.) on the Alaska    serve as a storm warning.
Peninsula through the Aleutian Islands to the S extremes of the        (0o)  Along the N side of Unimak Island, the currents are fairly
Komandorski Islands and on to Cape Kamchatka in such a way           strong and generally parallel the coast. They attain a maximum
that all the narrow waters between Alaska and Kamchatka are    velocity of 2 knots 1 mile off Cape Mordvinof and probably do not
included in the sea. The N limit is the Bering Strait.               exceed 2.5 knots anywhere along this coast. Velocities have been
 (3)   Much of this area has been only partially surveyed, and    estimated at 2 to 2.5 knots as far as 12 miles from shore in depths
the charts must not be relied upon too closely, especially near    of about 40 fathoms.
shore. The currents are much influenced by the winds and are dif-     (0 )  Between St. Matthew Island and Nunivak Island, the cur-
ficult to predict; dead reckoning is uncertain, and safety depends    rent sets NW with prevailing NE winds during the navigation sea-
               upon constant vigilance.                              son and NE with NW or SW winds. This N current continues and
                                                                     increases between St. Lawrence Island and the mainland, being
 (4)   The chapter area is entirely within the 100-fathom-depth
                                                                     stronger toward the mainland N of the Yukon River where it has a
                 curve, which extends NW from Unimak Pass and passes to the    velocity of about 1 knot except in early summer when the Yukon
SW of the Pribilof Islands. Depths vary more or less uniformly in
                                                                     freshets may increase it to 2 knots or more. A strong N current,
the open sea except near the off-lying islands, which are volcanic    amounting at times to 2.5 knots, has been observed setting on the
                                                                     amounting at times to 2.5 knots, has been observed setting on the
                                                                     Yukon flats. The current sets N across Norton Sound to Sledge
 (5)   From the head of Bristol Bay to Norton Sound, shoals or    Island and is strongly marked along the coast between Sledge
banks formed by river deposits extend many miles from the main-    Island and Bering Strait.
land, in some places completely out of sight. Kuskokwim and            (12)  Captain Covell, of the Coast Guard Cutter BEAR, said of
Yukon Rivers are the principal drainage systems along this stretch    the currents in this area: "After a SE gale in the Bering Sea, during
of coast. As fog and thick weather are common during the naviga-    which the water is banked up against Siberia, a very marked cur-
tion season, coasting vessels are advised to sound constantly and    rent sets in the opposite direction. The reverse is true for a SW
to stay in depths greater than 10 fathoms unless feeling their way   gale. The exact interval between the gale and the strong counter-
in to the land.                                                      current is, so far, undetermined. Of the existence of this counter-
 (6)   Navigational aids are few, and all are seasonal. The rocky    current under such conditions, there is no doubt, and it demands
islands and the rocky parts of the mainland are frequented by thou-    consideration."
sands of birds whose constant cries may serve to indicate the          (13)  Weather.-The weather over the Bering Sea is generally
approach to these places in thick weather. Port facilities are rare,    bad and very changeable. Good weather is the exception, and it
and most of the villages scattered along the coast lighter their sup-    does not last long when it does occur. Wind shifts are both fre-
plies from vessels anchored offshore. Good water can always be    quent and rapid. The summer season has much fog and consider-
found in the vicinity of high land.                                  able rain. In early winter, the gales increase, the fogs lessen, and
 (7)   The navigation season depends largely upon ice condi-    snow is likely any time after mid-September. Winter is the time of
tions, discussed later. During the winter, the ice and snow along    almost continuous storminess. Heavy winds from any direction
the shore, as well as inland, are suitable for travel by dog team    are usually accompanied by precipitation; however, the rain or
over many miles of established trail. Tractors could be driven over    snow that comes with E or S winds is likely to continue steadily
long stretches of this beach area when the lakes and protected bays    until the wind shifts, while rain or snow squalls are characteristic
are frozen solid enough to support them. Airplanes equipped with    of the W  and N winds. Skies tend to clear more quickly with the
skis can also operate in winter from many points along the coastal    slackening of the speed if the winds have been blowing from N or
and inland areas.                                                    W directions.
 (a)   Currents-Strong tidal currents flow through the Aleutian       (14)  Taking the area as a whole, the winds are most frequent
Islands passes, setting into the Bering Sea on the flood and into the    from N and NE directions from October through May and are vari-
North Pacific Ocean on the ebb. Observed velocities have             able, with predominating winds from directions in the S half of the
exceeded 8 knots in some of the passes, but the decrease is rapid    compass at most stations during the period from June through Sep-
once the passes are cleared. The tidal currents set N and S along    tember. The local topography, however, influences the prevailing
the Bering coast and into and out of the various bays. The periodic    wind so that the general wind circulation does not show conditions
tidal flow along the coast is completely masked at times by wind    at the individual stations.
currents. In constricted bays the currents may have considerable       (15)  Over Bristol Bay, winter winds blow mainly out of the N
velocities. The tidal current has an average velocity of 0.5 to I    through E, while summer winds are more likely to come from the
knot at the off-lying islands.                                       SW through NW. In winter, gales can be expected 5 to 10 percent


284





                                                         8. BERING SEA                                                          285


of the time. At King Salmon, northerlies blow more than 20 per-    to 11 ï¿½F at Pilot Point, while average minimums are 19ï¿½F and -7ï¿½F,
cent of the time during the winter season, at average speeds of 10    respectively. At St. Paul, temperatures have dropped as low as -
to 12 knots. Calms occur 10 to 14 percent of the time. During    26ï¿½F, compared to a -440F at Pilot Point. In summer, the reverse is
June, July, and August, winds are out of the S through SW more    true. Pilot Point daytime readings are frequently in the low sixties
than 40 percent of the time, at average speeds of 8 to 10 knots.    with an 84ï¿½F extreme. At St. Paul Island, average daytime temper-
Gales occur about 2 percent of the time in winter.                  atures run in the low fifties, with a 64ï¿½F extreme. Along the coast,
 (16)  At Bethel, the head of ocean navigation on the Kuskok-    midwinter daytime temperatures usually climb to 20ï¿½ F in the S,
wim River, winter winds are out of the N through NE 40 to 50 per-    and 10ï¿½ F in the N and at upriver ports. At night, readings fre-
cent of the time; they blow at average speeds of 9 to 14 knots.    quently drop below 0ï¿½ F at Bethel and Nome, while at King
Northwesterlies are also common from March through-June, and    Salmon, 6ï¿½F readings are common. Extreme lows range from a -
then S through SW winds become predominant in midsummer;            13ï¿½F at Port Heiden to a -55ï¿½F along the shores of Norton Sound.
these summerwinds average 10 to 12 knots. Gales at Bethel blow    Significant warming takes place from March through May. Mid-
less than 2 percent of the time even in winter, although winds    summer temperatures reach the midfifties to low sixties during the
reach 17 knots or more up to 20 percent of the time. At Hooper    day and drop to the midforties at night. Extreme high temperatures
Bay, winds are frequently out of the NE from November through    have reached the low seventies to upper eighties. Highest tempera-
February, but quite variable the rest of the year. St. Paul Island is    tures occur at the more continental locations.
more exposed than many locations along the coast. Here winter        (21)  Ice.-Except in sheltered places the ice of the Bering Sea is
winds blow at 16 to 18 knots on the average, and gales can be    in detached fields, floes, and cakes, which are continually kept in
expected up to 10 percent of the time. Winds are variable, but    motion, breaking up, piling, and telescoping by the action of vari-
mainly out of the N through E during this season. By midsummer,     able winds and currents. At no time is the sea one solid sheet of
S through SW winds become prevalent, at average speeds of 10 to    ice, and in the winter, when it is forming, the ice is more scattered
12 knots. Northwesterlies are frequent during September and    than in the spring, when the N movement begins and packs it
October. Winter winds are also strong in Norton Sound, where    closer together. The general S limit of ice is from Bristol Bay to
they blow at 28 knots or more on up to 13 days per month, at    the vicinity of St. George Island, and thence about WNW to the
exposed locations like Unalakleet. Nome is more sheltered, and    Siberian shore. The S edge is ragged and very much scattered, and
winds reach this speed on less than 4 days per month. At Nome, N    continued N winds sometimes drive fields of ice far S. As a rule,
through E winds prevail during the winter; calms are also corn-    no heavy ice will be encountered S of the Pribilof Islands and the
mon. Summer winds are more variable, but often blow out of the S    ice in their vicinity is likely to be nothing more than detached
through W. Maximum winds have reached 65 knots in January. At    fields.
Gambell on the northernmost point of St. Lawrence Island, the        (22)  In the spring, beginning with April, the ice has a general N
prevailing winds are SW in summer and generally N through NE        movement, the shore clearing ahead of the center of the sea; but
in winter. In general, S through SW winds are prevalent over the N  the ice sometimes hangs on in the bays and around the islands
Bering Sea in the midsummer.                                        later than in the open sea. The movement and position of the ice
 (17)  Most of the precipitation over Bristol Bay and the Bering    depend greatly on the winds. Generally, by June 1, the whole body
Sea falls from July through October. Annual average amounts are    of ice is well up with St. Lawrence Island, and a passage opens to
20 to 25 inches in Bristol Bay. It rains about 20 to 25 days per    its W  side. The E side of the sea is likely to be obstructed a little
month during the peak period. Snow totals 40 to 60 inches per    later than the W  side, and ice is often met between St. Lawrence
year on the average and is most likely from November through    Island and Nunivak Island in the early part of June. The breaking
April. From Kuskokwim Bay to Norton Sound, precipitation drops    out of the rivers in the latter part of May clears the shores, but the
off to about 10 to 17 inches annually; rain falls on 10 to 25 days    ice is likely to remain in Norton Sound several weeks later. In gen-
per month in late summer. At Bethel in August, about 4 inches of    eral, for a vessel not fitted to encounter ice, Norton Sound is not
rain falls on an average of 26 days.                                navigable before the middle of June. At the opening of navigation
 (18)  Poor visibilities can be a problem all year around along the    the ice is likely to be heaviest and to remain longest on the N shore
Bering Sea coast. Visibilities are restricted by land fog and snow    of Norton Sound; in general it is the latter part of June before that
in winter, and by sea fog and rain in summer. Sea fog is more fre-    part of the sound is altogether clear.
quent and more widespread. However, it does not drop visibilities    (23)  In the fall young ice begins to form on the rivers, and in
below 0.5 mile any more frequently than land fog.                   the bays and sheltered places in October, and grows stronger and
 (19)  In general, sea fog or haze drops visibilities to 7 miles or    spreads according to the severity of the advancing season. At
less on 13 to 20 days per month in midsummer. St. Paul Island is    Nome, on the N side of Norton Sound, navigation is difficult from
the most exposed, and fog or haze occurs here 20 to 28 days per    early December to early June and is usually suspended from late
month from May through August. At King Salmon, Bethel, and    December to mid-May.
Nome, July and August are usually the worst months. Sea fog          (24)  (See page T-21 for dates of ice breakup and freezeup for
drops visibilities to 0.5 mile or below on about 2 to 5 days per    the Bering Sea and Yukon River areas.)
month in summer. Snow and land fog during the winter restrict        (25)  The National Weather Service publishes a Marine Weather
visibilities to less than 7 miles on about 8 to 12 days per month,    Services Chart of Alaska waters which shows ice limits, forecast
and to less than 0.5 mile on about 2 to 5 days per month. Upriver    areas, and radio stations that transmit marine weather and addi-
ports like Bethel are the most vulnerable.                          tional information of interest to mariners.
 (20)  There is a large continental influence in temperatures.
Sheltered or inland ports get much colder in winter and much         (26)  Chart 16011.-Bristol Bay may be said to include all that
warmer in summer, compared to those exposed to the sea. St. Paul    part of the Bering Sea E of a line drawn from Cape Sarichef, Uni-
Island and Pilot Point are at about the same latitude. However, the    mak Island, to the Kuskokwin River. Unimak Island and the
average daily maximum in February is 27ï¿½F at St. Paul, compared    Alaska Peninsula bound it on the S and E, and separate it from the




286                                                     8. BERING SEA


Pacific Ocean. The Naknek River is at the head of deepwater navi-   (34)  A danger zone of an air-to-air weapon range is in the N
gation, while the bay itself terminates in the Kvichak River a few    part of Bristol Bay. (See 334.1280, chapter 2, for limits and regu-
miles N. The region about Nushagak River, Kulukak Bay, and the    lations.)
Kuskokwim Bay forms its NW boundary.
 (27)  The shores are generally low and nondistinctive, but high    (35)  Chart 16520.-Cape Sarichef (54036.0'N., 164055.7'W.),
mountain ranges and volcanic cones extend along the central parts    described in chapter 7, the W end of the S coast of Bristol Bay, is
of Unimak Island and the Alaska Peninsula. These rugged snow-    low, with detached rocks close inshore, around which strong tidal
covered mountains and lofty peaks would serve as unmistakable    currents sweep. The land falls away E in a gentle curve forming
landmarks were they not obscured by the almost constant fogs that    Dublin Bay, about 3 miles in depth and 16 miles across between
prevail during the summer. The shore and objects near sea level    the cape and Cave Point. This bay may be used as a temporary
are often seen beneath the fog when the higher lands are obscured,    anchorage by vessels of any size. The holding ground is said to be
and, therefore, most of the available landmarks are found on or    good. From offshore the first 8 miles of this indentation is a
near the beach,                                                    smooth grassy slope gradually rising from low, rocky, grass-cov-
                                                                    ered bluffs, about 60 to 100 feet high, to the mountains several
 (28)  The Bristol Bay region must be regarded as a dangerous    miles inland.
locality to navigate; it is only by the greatest vigilance and con-
stant sounding that disaster can be avoided upon approaching the    (36) The        b     each is steep,  and the surf breaks almost at the shore-
land. This is particularly true of the NE arms and approaches that  s  gullies. Thigepartrof thgk s te        pr cmg    n ntdhmllr
receive the waters of the great salmon streams on which the Ber-t 
                                                                    ranging from 800 to 2,000 feet high at distances of 2 to 4 miles
ing Sea canneries are located. The rivers discharge a great quantity    back from the shore. Red Hill, although only 798 feet high, is a
of water into wide indentations which open on the arms of the
                                                                    very distinctive formation near Cape Sarichef; it is isolated and
great bay. The banks of the rivers are frequently marshy and gen-
great bay. The banks of the rivers are frequently marshy and gen-    closer to the shore than the other peaks in the vicinity. The hill is
erally muddy. The discolored waters of the rivers is charged with a
large amount of sediment, which, when deposited forms shoal
large amount of sediment, which, when deposited forms shoal    NE, and W. It is often clear when higher peaks are obscured by fog
areas.
                                                                    or clouds.
 (29)  The funnel-shaped configuration of the bay and river         (37)  A large valley, appearing not as a pass but as an indenta-
entrances creates tidal currents of great force, reaching, at times,    tion into the hills, is easily recognized from offshore. Beartrack
velocities up to 6 knots. The diurnal range of tide averages about    Creek, having a considerable drainage area, is a swift stream
18 feet at the river entrances. Vast areas of shoals uncover at low    flowing through a bed strewn with small boulders. About 6 miles
water, leaving only pools and narrow channels between them.        NE of Cape Sarichef are several waterfalls that may serve as land-
 (30)  In Bristol Bay and its tributaries, some lights and buoys    marks for vessels close inshore.
are maintained by the Alaska Department of Fish and Game dur-       (38)  The coast in the N half of this moderate indentation is a
ing the fishing season to mark fishing districts; they usually show    series of low sand dunes, and the shore is sandy. From the line of
quick flashing white lights and have no navigational significance.    dunes along the beach a large marshy area extends back for 2 or 3
Marine lights and buoys are normally maintained only during the    miles, where a low pass begins and leads between the peaks to the
navigation season.                                                 S side of Unimak Island. Two moderate-sized streams and a num-
                                                                    ber of small ones empty into the Bering Sea.
 (31)  Vessels operating in Bristol Bay, particularly at the head,
are warned concerning the use of seawater as a cooling agent in     (39)   SW of Cave Point the bottom is generally even, of fine
                                                                    black sand, and good holding ground; the 10-fathom curve is from
internal combustion engines, heat exchangers, condensers, and
evaporatorst Th e    heavy  amount of silt in susp ension in this area    0.4 to 0.8 mile from the beach. There are no charted shoals of any
evaporators. The heavy amount of silt in suspension in this area
can do great damage to the machinery or equipment if overlooked.    consequence, although the 10-fathom curve is a little farther off
This is especially true of small diesel or gasoline engines with    the points than off the bights and coves. The best anchorage is in
           gear-type water pumps, since the fine sand will pack itself    about 19 fathoms, 7.5 miles 048ï¿½ from Cape Sarichef Light. This
                                                                    anchorage affords protection from the NE through the SE, and
between the gears and cause them to bind. Also, the silt is likely to    anchorage     N             throh the            SE, and
                                                                    around to the SW. In N and NW weather the current may prevent a
settle in various parts of the cooling system and accordingly the
system may need regular flushing. Most small-boat operators in
the salmon fishing area, such as Kvichak and Nushagak Bays, use     (40)  Cave Point is a vertical rocky cliff formed by a ridge
freshwater cooling systems with piping led outboard.               extending from the N side of Black Hill. It is named for a cave on
                                                                    its face inhabited by sea birds which in summer hover about it in
 (32)  Reports of ice conditions at the head of Bristol Bay usu-    the thousands, making it conspicuous in clear weather by their
ally can be obtained from the National Weather Service Radio    numbers and in fog by their constant cries.
Weather Broadcast station at King Salmon near Naknek or the         (41)  The point is very prominent and can be easily seen in clear
nearby canneries. On May 17, 1948, the survey ship PATH-    weather from Cape Sarichef or from Cape Mordvinof. The water
FINDER encountered floe ice about 20 miles NW of Port Heiden    off Cave Point is deep; no shoals have been found. The 20-fathom
and a solid field of drift ice about 10 miles W of Egegik Bay. At    curve runs about I mile off the point.
this time of the year, the run from off Port Moller to the head of  (42)  Black Hill, a black-looking hill about 3 miles ESE from
Bristol Bay should be made during daylight because of possible    Cave Point, is the highest peak near the shore; it can be plainly
ice. In 1948, several commercial vessels encountered difficulties    seen from the W to the N. The hill is covered with snow in the
attempting the run at night.                                       winter, but is bare in the summer.
 (33)  Caution.-The State of Alaska has established a crab pot      (43)  Between Cave Point and Oksenof Point, the westernmost
storage area in the Bering Sea between 57000'N. to 58000'N. and    point of Cape Mordvinof, is another moderate indentation in the
164000'W. to 166ï¿½00'W.                                             coastline about 6.5 miles by 0.8 mile in size. The shore for 4 miles





                                                         8. BERING SEA                                                          287


NE-of Cave Point is a sandy beach with a series of grass-covered     (51)  Isanotski Strait (False Pass), used only by small vessels, is
dunes just back of the high-water line. From the line of dunes a    described in chapter 6.
large flat area extends back for several miles; in this area is a large  (52)  For 20 miles NE of Isanotski Strait to 175-foot-high Cape
pond which is about 0.5 mile NE of Cave Point. Between this    Glazenap, the coast is low with some grassy 50- to 100-foot
pond and the hills forming Cape Mordvinof is a large swamp. One    bluffs. Except off the entrance to Isanotski Strait, dangers are
large stream empties into the sea at the N end of the sand beach.    within 1 mile of the shore. Cape Glazenap is prominent, because it
Offshore the bottom is even and no shoals of any importance have    is higher than the other places in this area.
been found. The 20-fathom curve runs from 1 to 1.5 miles off the     (53)  The Kudiakof Islands, low, narrow, and grass covered,
beach. The indentation in the coastline between Cave Point and    extend from Cape Glazenap to Moffet Point, 16 miles to the NE.
Cape Mordvinof is a fair anchorage, giving some protection from    The wreck of an old schooner on Glen Island, the SW island, and
the NE around to the S. In N and NW weather, currents affect the    domes on Grant Point, E of Glen Island, are conspicuous land-
heading of an anchored vessel.                                      marks. The lights at the Cold Bay airport are visible over this gen-
 (44)  Snow-clad Pogromni Volcano, 8.3 miles E of Cape Sar-    eral area on clear nights.
ichef Light, forms a striking background to the low, monotonous      (54)  Behind Cape Glazenap and the Kudiakof Islands is Izem-
coast. The top of the 4,040-foot peak, 1.9 miles N of Pogromni    bek Lagoon, which is crossed by many shallow sloughs. Most of
Volcano, is a ridge with no definite point. It is covered with snow    the extensive lagoon area is bare or awash;- the bottom is mud and
most of the year and usually capped by clouds. However, at times,    sand. The sloughs are difficult to follow except at low stages of the
it is clear when Pogromni Volcano is not. On the NW slope of the    tide and are not recommended for craft drawing more than 3 or 4
volcano is a prominent arrowhead-shaped peak about 1,300 feet    feet.
high. It is very prominent on the skyline from the N and NE, but is  (55)  The Cape Glazenap channel into Izembek Lagoon is nar-
covered by clouds a great part of the time.                         row and shifting. The entrance is close to the cape and is between
 (45)   Cape Mordvinof, 26 miles NE of Cape Sarichef, consists    breakers that extend seaward about I mile. The entrance channel
of a succession of points and coves at the end of a series of round-    has a depth of about 6 feet. During the summer, fishermen mark
topped ridges separated by shallow valleys. The point, including    the approach with a drum buoy.
Oksenof Point, is characterized by precipitous rocky bluffs rang-
ing from 450 feet high on the W side of the cape down to 100 feet    (56)  Charts 16520, 16011, 16363.-Moffet Point, 95 miles NE
on the E end. Small clear streams run through the valleys, and the    of Cape Sarichef, is a curving sandy hook with dunes 40 to 60 feet
terrain slopes upward from the bluff line to a group of rocky peaks    high. A channel leads into the NE part of Izembek Lagoon
about 2,000 feet high. These peaks are snow covered in the winter    between Moffet Point and the NE end of the Kudiakof Islands.
and bare in the summer. The valleys and ridges are covered with    The depth over the bar is about 2 fathoms. The channel is between
grass and tundra. Good landmarks are lacking on Cape Mordvi-    breakers, and during the summer is marked by drum buoys placed
nof; the peaks are not distinctive and usually are hidden by clouds.  by local fishermen. Passage should not be attempted without local
  (46)  Good anchorage for large vessels is not found off the cape,    knowledge or by boats drawing more than 3 or 4 feet.
but shelter from S winds can be had in two of the coves indenting    (57)  Moffet Lagoon, behind Moffet Point, is a shallow area
the cape for boats no longer than 65 feet. The water deepens rap-    similar to Izembek Lagoon, but much smaller in extent. The two
idly and evenly off the cape, and the 20-fathom curve is from I to    lagoons are joined S of Moffet Point. Joshua Green River emp-
2 miles off the shoreline. No shoal of importance is known off the    ties into the E side of Moffet Lagoon.
cape, and no danger to navigation has been found at distances        (58)  Amak Island, 10 miles NNW of Cape Glazenap, is of vol-
greater than I mile offshore.                                       canic origin. Along the shores are bluffs and huge boulders except
                                                                    on the S side, where there is a small flat that was the site of a
  (47)  By making good a course of 0360 from 3 miles 270 of                    II 
Cape Sarichef for-25 miles, vessels will be well outside the 20-      5    Foul ground ext ends about 1.1 miles off the N side of
                                                                      (59) Foul ground extends about 1.1 miles off the N side of
fathom curve and the known dangers to navigation.                   Amak Island. A reef that uncovers is off the SE side of the island
  (48)  E of Cape Mordvinof, the coast falls away slightly for 6    and extends E about 0.3 mile. A good anchorage, affording protec-
miles, where it turns abruptly E for 5 miles, and then takes a N    tion from N to SW winds, is about 0.5 mile E of the island, I mile
direction forming Urilia Bay. This bay is open N, but affords pro-    NE of the rocky ledge off the SE point, in 81/2 fathoms, gravel bot-
tection from all winds from S of E or W. The approaches are clear,     tom.
and the water shoals gradually to 6 fathoms, black sand bottom,      (60)  The passage between Amak Island and the Kudiakof
about 0.8 mile from shore.                                          Islands is clear and is the usual track for small vessels. Depths in
  (49)  From Urilia Bay to Isanotski Strait the coast trends NE, is    midpassage are 10 fathoms or more; currents are about 2 knots.
very low, and has several rocky patches extending 0.5 to I mile      (61)  Sealion Rocks are about 2.5 miles NW of Amak Island.
from shore. Shishaldin Volcano, near the middle of Unimak    The largest of the rocks, 95 feet high and prominent, is marked by
Island, is described in chapter 7.                                  Sealion Rocks Light 55ï¿½27.9'N., 163ï¿½12.2'W.), 94 feet above the
  (50)  Swanson Lagoon is a shallow lagoon on the N side of    water and shown from a skeleton tower.
Unimak Island 7 miles W  from Chunak Point. It has a narrow          (62)  Sealion Rocks is a Steller sea lion rookery site. There is a
entrance and during some years light-draft launches can enter, but    3-mile vessel exclusionary buffer zone surrounding these rocks.
at other times only pulling boats can. Inside it is mostly a mudflat    (See 50 CFR 227.12, chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)
at low water with crooked channels I to 3 feet deep flowing          (63)  From Moffet Point the low coast trends almost 70 miles
between tidal flats. The lakes draining into the lagoon are spawn-    ENE to Cape Rozhnof, on the W  side of Port Moller. A strong
ing places for salmon, and the lagoon is important only as a fish-    inshore set is frequently noted in this area.
ery. About 0.8 mile E of the entrance is a cone-shaped hill, 85 feet  (64)  Black Hill, 24 miles NE of Moffet Point and 3 miles
high.                                                               inland, is prominent. About 16 miles to the NE of Black Hill and 2



288                                                     8. BERING SEA


miles inshore is a low prominent sandhill known locally as Last     (78)  The current velocity at Port Moller is I to 2 knots. (See
Knoll, as it is the last knoll on the coast to be seen by a vessel    Tidal Current Tables for predictions.) The diurnal range of tide is
bound E. Local vessels use this hill extensively in checking their    10.8 feet.
distance to Port Moller.                                            (79)  The cannery pier inside Entrance Point is 350 feet long;
  (65)  Lagoon Point, about 37 miles NE of Black Hill,, is on the    depth alongside the face is about 6 feet. It is exposed to S and SE
W side of the entrance to Nelson Lagoon. Nelson Lagoon Light    winds that blow across the peninsula and through the divides.
(56ï¿½00.9'N., 161ï¿½06.1'W.), 30 feet above the water, is shown from    Winds appear stronger at Entrance Point than at the anchorage in
a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark    the middle of the bay entrance.
just E of Lagoon Point; this light marks the entrance to the lagoon.  (80)  It is advisable to be ready to move on short notice if
In May 1986, extensive shoaling was reported to exist in the    moored at the wharf as SE winds come up very quickly, making it
approaches and in Nelson Lagoon; caution is advised.               difficult to get away with the limited turning room. Many fishing
                                                                    vessels moor starboard side to the wharf in order to leave quickly.
  (66)  Chart 16363.-Herendeen Bay and Port Moller, 175    Larger supply vessels anchor in about 7 fathoms I mile S of the
miles NE of Cape Sarichef, are mostly shallow, but deep channels    cannery.
lead almost to their heads. The common approach to both bays is     (81)  Fishing boats and barges find protection from the S and SE
over a very flat gently sloping bottom with low shores. Farther in    storms on the NW side of Harbor Point, 2.5 miles S of Entrance
are extensive sand and gravel flats between deep channels. The    Point.
earth bluffs along the beaches have hills behind them that increase  (82)  Water is available at the pier at Entrance Point; gasoline,
in height to the S. Herendeen Bay has deep water near its head,    fuel oil, and diesel oil are stored for cannery use. A marine railway
and the mountains are broken by several large valleys; the head of    is maintained for cannery small boats. Limited provisions can be
Port Moller is surrounded by high steep mountains, but deep water    obtained at a store. A paramedic is at Port Moller in the summer
is restricted to narrow channels that apparently are kept open by    and can be reached on 4125 kHz or VHF-FM channel 16. Air
tidal currents.                                                    transportation is reported to be available. Radiotelephone and
 (67)  Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-    radiotelegraph communications are maintained.
sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of   (83)  Point Divide, 9.5 miles SW of Entrance Point, has a 40-
Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)                    foot bluff with the land sloping gradually upward toward the
 (68)  The Bering Sea is served by the Alaska Marine Pilots and    mountain ranges. Doe Point, the SE end of Deer Island opposite
Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.                               Point Divide, is 50 feet high. The bluff on the E side of Deer
        (69)  Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots    Island is 150 feet high while the rest of the island and the main-
 (69)   Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots
and en route to Port Moller can meet the pilot boat about 7.5 miles    land to the S and W are generally lower
NW of Entrance Point (55059.5'N., 160034.6'W.).                     (84)  Hague Channel, marked by buoys and leading to Her-
 (70)  The pilot boat can be contacted by calling E"PORT MOL-     endeen Bay, is 1 mile wide at the N entrance, but contracts to 700
LER PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearranged    yards between Point Divide and Doe Point. Tidal currents are very
frequency between pilot and agent/vessel.                          strong in the channel; as much as 4 knots on the spring flood. The
                                                                    current does not follow the axis of the channel, but sweeps across
 adea(7lte) In the event pruior plotage arrangements have not been    the flats and narrow channel. As a result the channel is subject to
made, a stranger in the area should radio the cannery and request    change. In September 1983, a 3-fathom shoal was reported in
assistance.                                                        change. In September 1983, a 3-fathom shoal was reported in
 72assistheentance.  chnnl    oPot   ole i mrkdb eaonlHague Channel about 2.5 miles W of Port Moller Light 5 in about
 (72)  The entrance channel to Port Moller is marked by seasonal    5954'56"N  147028'06"W.
buoys.                                                              (85)  A survey vessel anchored 3 miles NE of Point Divide in
 (73)  Kudobin Islands, on the W side of the entrance to Port    10 fathoms, sand and gravel bottom, and 2.8 miles WSW of Point
Moller between Lagoon Point and Cape Rozhnof, are low and    Divide in 8 fathoms, mud bottom; holding ground was good in
difficult to identify. Walrus Island, the easternmost island of the    both places.
group, is marked by a light and at its E end by a distinctive 20-   (86)  On the flood tide, the current causes spectacular tide rips
foot knob.                                                         between Point Divide and Doe Point, with an extensive area of
 (74)  Entrance Point, on the E side of the entrance to Port Mol-    swirls farther inside Herendeen Bay. Small craft should use cau-
ler, is marked by Port Moller Light 5 (55058.6'N., 160034.6'W.),    tion during flood tide, especially when the wind is against the cur-
22 feet above the water and shown from a tower with a square    rent.
green daymark on the point. A cannery is inside the point at the    (87)  Johnston Channel, on the E side of Herendeen Bay and
village of Port Moller.                                            marked by buoys, is 6 to 15 fathoms deep and very narrow with
 (75)  Harbor Point, 4 miles S of Entrance Point and marked by    steep sides. Halftide Rock, on the E side of the channel 3 miles S
a daybeacon, is a low, narrow, grassy, sand and shingle sandspit    of Point Divide, is awash at half tide. The current velocity is about
with high land behind it. Doe Point and Point Divide at the    1.5 knots near the rock. Eagle Rock, near the E shore 3.8 miles S
entrance to Herendeen Bay are bluffs that can be seen outside of    of Point Divide, is pyramid shaped and prominent.
Entrance Point.                                                     (88)  Small craft can find protection on either side of Shingle
 (76)  Extensive shoals just inside Port Moller are subject to fre-    Point, in the small cove between Shingle Point and Bluff Point,
quent change.                                                      and in Mine Harbor. Larger vessels can anchor off Marble Point.
 (77)  Anchorage can be had 3 miles W of Entrance Point in 8    Crow Reef, off the entrance to Mine Harbor, bares at low water.
fathoms, fair to good holding ground. Discoloration of the water in    The reef, marked by a buoy, is an outlying danger in the upper bay.
this area is caused by streaks of sediment carried by the tidal cur-    Midway Reef, extending 0.4 mile from the E shore of Mine Har-
rents. Tide rips are caused by sand waves rising above the general    bor, shows at half tide. A reef extends 0.5 mile W from Crow
depths.                                                            Point.





                                                         8. BERING SEA                                                         289


  (89)  A trail leads from the head of Herendeen Bay to Balboa    done in the latter stages of a rising tide because of the flats that
 Bay on the Pacific side of the Alaska Peninsula.                   uncover at low water.
                                                                     (103) The diurnal range of tide in Port Heiden is 12.3 feet. The
  (90)  Chart 16011.-The coast is low between Port Moller and    current velocity is 1 knot; the ebb current seems to be increased by
 Cape Kutuzof, 20 miles to the NNE. The cape rises in a rounded    a SE wind. Sea ice conditions are variable, with navigation seldom
 bluff to 150 feet.                                                 entirely suspended; drift ice usually restricts navigation to full-
  (91)  Cape Seniavin Light (56ï¿½24.0'N.,  160ï¿½08.8'W.), 175    powered vessels from January through April.
 feet above the water, is shown from a small house with a red and
white diamond-shaped daymark on rocky Cape Seniavin. Except         (104)  Chart 16011.-From Port Heiden the same low coast
for a cluster of small hillocks about 12 miles from the cape, low    extends in nearly a direct line to Cape Menshikof (57ï¿½30.0'N.,
beach extends from Cape Seniavin to Seal Islands.                  157ï¿½55.0'W.), where the high land of Port Heiden gradually
  (92)  Seal Islands, 30 miles NE of Cape Seniavin, are several    recedes from the coast. Cape Menshikof is a high bluff, extending
barrier islets, barely above high water, strung along the coast for    some distance alongshore, with hilly country back of it.
about 10 miles. It is reported that small boats can find protection  (105)  Cinder River, about 10 miles SW from Cape Menshikof,
behind the islands. The coast continues low from Seal Islands to    is a shallow indentation in the coastline that is often mistaken for
Port Heiden.                                                       the Ugashik River.
                                                                     (106) Ugashik River empties into Ugashik Bay, the wide
  (93)  Chart 16343.-Port Heiden, 250 miles NE of Cape Sar-    indentation between Cape Menshikof and Cape Greig. The capes
ichef, is 9 miles in greatest width and extends inland about the    can be approached from W  to within about 2 miles. The coast
same distance. The seaward side of the bay is formed by barrier    between the capes, including the river valley, appears low. Smoky
sandbars 5 to 10 feet above high water. Strogonof Point    Point Light (57037.5'N., 157ï¿½41.5'W.), 40 feet above the water, is
(56ï¿½53.3'N., 158ï¿½50.7'W.), is the NE end of the barrier beach that    shown from a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-
extends from the SW. Farther to the NE is crescent-shaped Chis-    shaped daymark on Smoky Point, a bluff on the N side of the
tiakof Island, which extends nearly to the mainland on the NE      entrance, 7 miles S of Cape Greig. Here the river is about 4 miles
side of the bay.                                                   wide at high water. The indentations between the capes, including
  (94)  Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-    the mouth of the river, are filled with shoals. A channel in the river
sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of    has a depth of about 10 feet, but a stranger could not follow it with
Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)                    safety. Only launches can approach the cannery at low water
  (95)  The Bering Sea is served by the Alaska Marine Pilots and    because of boulders in the channel. The river is fresh at low water
Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.                               about 5 miles above Ugashik.
  (96)  Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots     (107) A seasonal lighted bell buoy marks the entrance to
and en route to Port Heiden can meet the pilot boat about 7 miles    Ugashik River. Each year the cannery company anchors two floats
WNW of Christiakof Island (56ï¿½55.8'N., 158042.8'W.).               on the N side of the channel at the entrance.
  (97)  The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "PORT             (108) A cannery is near the entrance at Pilot Point. The wharf is
HEIDEN PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prear-    144 feet long, but dries at low water. Water is available on the
ranged frequency between pilot and agent/vessel.                   wharf. Gasoline, fuel, and diesel oils are stored for cannery use. A
 (98)  The approach to Port Heiden should be recognized by the    machine shop and scowway are maintained by the cannery; a 4-
high, bold headlands and the airfield installations on the N side,    ton crane is on the wharf. Radiotelegraph communication is main-
but the bight back of Seal Islands, 20 miles to the SW, has been    tained.
mistaken for the bay. Aniakehak Crater (see chart 16011) is         (o09) A cannery at the village of Ugashik, 13 miles from the
about 15 miles E of Port Heiden, and Black Peak is about the    entrance, has a wharf 200 feet long with a depth of 14 feet at high
same distance to the S.                                            water, but is reported dry at half tide. Water is available on the
 (99)  On the mainland back of Chistiakof Island is the village of    wharf and by barge at the anchorage. Gasoline and diesel oil are
Meshik. A commercial airfield, numerous radio towers, and sev-    stored for cannery use. The wharf has a 2-ton crane. The cannery
eral prominent buildings are about 4 miles NNE of the village.     has a machine shop and a scowway. Small tenders are beached for
 (100) The seaward approach has a uniformly gently sloping bot-    light hull repairs.
tom, with shoals extending considerably offshore. The 10-fathom     (llo)  Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-
curve is 6 to 8 miles off the bay, and the 20-fathom curve about 15    sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of
to 20 miles off. Over this area there is good holding bottom of fine    Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)
sand and gravel, with some offshore sand waves lying perpendicu-    (11) The Bering Sea is served by the Alaska Marine Pilots and
lar to the beach. Inshore of the 5-fathom curve the bottom tends to    Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.
shoal abruptly.                                                     (112) Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots
 o01) No passage is recommended between Strogonof Point and    and en route to Vgashik Bay can meet the pilot boat about 0.5 mile
Chistiakof Island because of numerous shifting bars. Small boats,    W of Smoky Point (57ï¿½39.0'N., 157ï¿½42.0'W.).
however, can approach Meshik around the NE end of Chistiakof        (113) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "UGASHIK
Island, with local knowledge and by exercising caution. In Sep-    BAY PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearranged
tember 1982, Chistiakof Island and the islands to the SW were    frequency between pilot and agent/vessel.
reported to be submerged, forming more bars which close much of     (114)  Cape Greig, 7 miles N of Smoky Point, is a prominent
Port Heiden during inclement weather.                              brownish bluff, with a few yellow vertical stripes extending sev-
 (102) The bottom in Port Heiden is sand and mud, and the hold-    eral miles alongshore. It appears to be the seaward end of a low
ing properties are considered poor. The landing area off the can-    ridge with low land on each side. This and a peculiar notched
nery at Meshik is long and sloping, and heavy loading should be    mountain some distance inland are good marks. Cape Greig




290                                                     8. BERING SEA


Light  (57ï¿½44.5'N., 157ï¿½42.8'W.), 350 feet above the water, is      (123) Currents.-In Kvichak Bay and River the current is very
shown from a small house with a red and white diamond-shaped    strong, and consequently the channel shifts more or less each year.
daymark.                                                           The current velocity is 3.5 knots in the lower part of the bay and
 (115) Cape Greig is probably the best landfall for the approach    2.5 knots in the main ship anchorage off Naknek. In Naknek River
to Kvichak and Nushagak Bays from SW. N of Cape Greig, the    at the hole off Morakas Point, 4 miles above the entrance, the cur-
coast is low and has no distinguishing features, and even radar is    rent velocities are about 1 knot on the flood and 2 knots on the
not of much assistance until abeam of Egegik Bay. Particular care    ebb. (See the Tidal Current Tables for predictions.)
should be taken to clear the shoals off the entrance to this bay.   (124) It is recommended that vessels anchor against the current,
After passing the bay, Middle Bluff can usually be identified,    when it is at maximum strength, so that engines may be used to
although the lights on this bluff and on Red Bluff are small struc-    offset the sudden strain when the anchor is let go. Caution must
tures not easily seen from offshore. Johnston Hill, 357 feet high,    also be exercised, on flood current, to keep the vessel from being
is not readily identified by a stranger approaching from the SW,    carried beyond the anchorage area while maneuvering. Since the
but abeam of the hill and thence to the NE a sharp tip on the N side    currents usually follow the axes of the bay channels, navigators
is very prominent.                                                 should make ample allowance when proceeding between Kvichak
                                                                    and Nushagak Bays; otherwise they are apt to be set to the N or to
 (116)  Chart 16323.-Kvichak Bay, the large arm at the head of    the S when they are on an E or W course.
Bristol Bay, extends NE from a line between the S entrance point    (125) Weather and ice.-The best weather in Kvichak and
of Egegik River and Etolin Point. The bay is an important fishing    Nushagak Bays appears to be from the latter part of May through
area for red salmon and has several canneries in its N part.    July. The bays are frozen over during the winter, and the ice usu-
Kvichak Bay is navigable for deep-draft vessels as far as the    ally does not break up until May. Vessels approaching the bays
anchorage about 2700 from the entrance to the Naknek River. The    during this time of the year, which they frequently do in prepara-
approach from the SW is restricted to a channel about 4 miles    tion for the fishing season, are cautioned to do so during daylight
wide by Big Flat, an extensive tide flat extending off the E shore,    because of possible ice.
and by Dead Man Sands, the large shoal in-the middle of the bay     (126) Storms have a tendency to move into this area from the
NW of Johnston Hill. This shoal uncovers about 8 feet, and the    Aleutian Islands during August and September, and, while their
area N of it is very foul. Fishing boats and collecting barges use    intensity usually is, diminished, their rate of movement is
the area at half tide or higher. Caution is necessary as a number of    decreased and at times they remain stationary while the depres-
fishermen have been lost when trapped by the tides.                sions fill, thus causing extended periods of poor weather. Fog is
 (117) About midway between Middle Bluff Light and Johnston    not as prevalent in these bays as farther to the SW in Bristol Bay
Hill are two low spits which, while not discernible visually from a    proper. Storms S of the Alaska Peninsula at times cause strong
vessel in midchannel, are quite prominent on a radarscope and    winds to draw through the valleys, such as that of the Egegik
hence are valuable landmarks during periods of low visibility.     River, thus giving the effect of williwaws near the valley
 (118) N of Naknek River are numerous shoals and uncovered    entrances.
banks. The best water is on the E side of the bay between Naknek    (127) Ice begins to form in November, but the salmon pack usu-
River and Koggiung, but local knowledge is needed to avoid the    ally is shipped out in August and most canneries go on a caretaker
shoals. The land is low and flat, but the tanks and buildings of the    status in September, with all floating equipment hauled out on
canneries and the lights, which are maintained during the canning    ways. Winter activities in the area consist mostly of hunting and
season, are good landmarks.                                        trapping, with transportation by skiplanes and dogsleds. During
 (119) Kvichak River, which empties into the head of Kvichak    the ice-free months practically all transportation is by water or air,
Bay, is the outlet for Lakes Iliamna and Clark, on the W side of the    since there are virtually no roads.
mountain system that borders Cook Inlet. At maximum ebb, the        (128) Mirages are seen frequently in the Kvichak Bay area dur-
confluence of discharges from Naknek and Kvichak Rivers is apt    ing periods of calm, and particularly at low tide. They distort the
to cause overfalls that are dangerous to small boats. Winds in    appearance of bluffs and shorelines and make tanks and other ele-
excess of 20 knots, opposed to currents, make the bay quite rough    vated structures visible at greater distances than their altitudes
for vessels of light draft.                                        warrant.
 (120) Good holding ground is available any place in Kvichak        (129) Egegik River empties into Kvichak Bay 30 miles N of
Bay where depths are suitable for anchorage. The bottom appears    Cape Greig; Cape Chichagof is the N entrance point. It is a large
to consist of a layer of coarse gravel, sand, and stones, with mud    river, I mile wide at the canneries, and is the outlet of Becharof
beneath. The shoal depths permit a generous scope of chain, which    Lake. (See also chart 1601 1.) It flows in a W direction for more
is necessary because of the strong currents and frequent blows.    than 28 miles.
Only one anchor is recommended because a vessel tends to swing      (130) The lower part of the river forms Egegik Bay. A large part
to the direction of the current, despite wind direction, with conse-    of its area is bare at low water. At the entrance, shoal water
quent fouling if moored with two anchors. Experience has shown    extends 6 miles offshore and should be given a wide berth by pass-
that a scope of 8 or 10 to I will withstand the effects of a 60-knot    ing vessels. Entering vessels, depending upon their draft and con-
wind,and a 3.5-knot current. With a strong wind opposed to cur-    dition of the sea, generally cross the entrance bar between half and
rent, a vessel will usually lie broadside to both, and while such a    full tide stages only.
condition sometimes causes an anchor to walk, no such tendency      (131) A seasonal buoy is about 2.5 miles off the entrance bar.
has been experienced in this area.                                 Moderately heavy seas will break over this bar with any stage of
 (121)  Tides.-The diurnal range of the tide at the Naknek River    tide, although it has 4 fathoms over it at high water. It is consid-
entrance is 22.6 feet. (See Tide Tables for predictions.)          ered the most dangerous bar in the Bristol Bay area.
 (122) Navigators are reminded that the great range of tide in this  (132) In 1982, extensive shoaling was reported in the entrance to
bay must be considered when selecting an anchorage.                Egegik Bay; local knowledge is advised. In June 1994, a wreck





                                                         8. BERING SEA


was reported 2.2 miles E of the entrance buoy in about    at low water and proceed as far as the Diamond NN Can
58015'19"N., 157037'48"W.                                          April 1980, a wreck, which covers with 13- to 15-foot tic
 (133) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-    reported in the vicinity of the Bumble Bee Cannery, ab
sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of    yards off the opposite bank.
Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)                     (145) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is 4
 (134) The Bering Sea is served by the Alaska Marine Pilots and    sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the
Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.                               Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)
 (135) Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots     (146) The Bering Sea is served by the Alaska Marine Pi
and en route to Egegik can meet the pilot boat near Egegik    Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.
Entrance Buoy 1 (58015.5'N., 157ï¿½42.0'W.).                          (147) Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Associati
 (136) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "EGEGIK    and en route to Naknek can meet the pilot boat about
PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearranged fre-    WSW of Naknek Light (58ï¿½42.5'N., 157004.8'W.).
quency between pilot and agent/vessel.                              (148) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "Ni
 (137) At the entrance to Egegik River are two partially protected    PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearrar
anchorages with limited swinging room that are used by power    quency between pilot and agent/vessel.
scows and tugs. The principal one is the channel inside Coffee      (149) Naknek Light (58042.4'N., 157ï¿½05.0'W.), 78 fe
Point, with depths up to 5 feet. A smaller anchorage is just E of    the water, is shown from a small house with a red and w
the wharf at Egegik, with depths from 6 to 11 feet. Ebb current at    mond-shaped daymark on the S side of the entrance.
the smaller anchorage is very strong.                               (150) The Naknek River has several large salmon cann
 (138): Egegik River is navigable to small boats for its entire    have wharves that bare alongside at low water. Some of
length into and across Becharof Lake. Although tidal to the foot of    neries have not operated for years. Deep-draft vessel
the rapids, mean range in its lagoons is only 1 foot; 5- to 6-foot    about 6 miles off the entrance to the river and lighter the
drafts can be carried through the river, but the small lagoon    ashore in barges which are available at Naknek; the appr4
reduces this to 3 or 4 feet, depending upon water stage. The con-    the anchorages vary little from year to year. Vessels draw
trolling depth of the 1/4-mile rapids of the lake outlet is 4 feet at    10 feet can go alongside the cannery wharves at half tide
low water stage. Although its midchannel current averages 5    remain afloat at low water only by shifting to what is c
knots, slow-speed powerboats run it frequently with and without    hole just E of Morakas Point, which is 4 miles above
handline aid from the shore. The river is open from May to Octo-    mouth. The hole has depths of 9 to 14 feet at low water o
ber. In 1970, the river was obstructed by numerous boulders possi-    row crooked area 200 to 300 feet wide and about 0.5 n
bly carried in through ice action.                                 Mooring buoys are maintained in this hole by the can
 (139) Freight from oceangoing vessels is generally lightered into    seasonal basis for use of power scows, tugs, and barges
Egegik from the ship anchorage off Naknek. Egegik has limited    these types, drawing up to about 12 feet, can proceed ul
facilities; a cannery wharf that is 80 feet long dries at low water.    with local knowledge some 12 miles from the mouth. Ii
Water and a 5-ton crane are available. Gasoline and diesel fuel are    do this, vessels leave Naknek village 1 hour before hi
available for local use only. A pier, 70 feet long and 40 feet wide,    Beyond this point, small boats of 3-foot draft can proceei
with dolphins 10 feet off each outer corner, is 0.2 mile ENE of the    the rapids, a distance of about 7.5 miles.
cannery, just N of the twin tanks. Depths of 6 to 11 feet are off the  (t51) An overhead power cable with a clearance c
pier. A cannery wharf, across the river, is 150 feet long with little   crosses Naknek River about 1.3 miles above Morakas P(
water at its face. This cannery is inoperative, but its marine rail-  (152) (See page T-21 for dates of ice breakup and free:
way is active and hauls out barges, piledrivers, and tugs for winter  (153)  All active canneries maintain radio communicati
layup. A removable fish conveyor and three pile dolphins extend     (154) The only marine railways in the Naknek River
offshore from Coffee Point. The conveyor and dolphins are    which each cannery maintains. These have a capacit!
removed after the fishing season. Two stores remain open all year    tons, draft of 10 feet, and approximate length of 120 fee
in Egegik. Their supplies are principally food staples and clothing.  repair facilities, including machine work, are available
 (140) Radiotelegraph communications are maintained. Trans-    neries, as well as water in any quantity. During the fishi
portation is available by floatplane from May to October, and is    water is available at the main ship anchorage by water b
usually obtained from Naknek village or King Salmon Airport.        (155) Naknek is on the N side of the Naknek River
(See page T-21 for dates of ice breakup and freezeup.)             miles from the mouth. A nurse is on duty during the w
 (141)  Naknek River enters Kvichak Bay on the E side, about 10    during the cannery season, each cannery employs a do(
miles S of Koggiung. Cape Suworof is the point on the N side of    services are available to the public for a fee. Weekly m
the entrance. The large 60-mile-long river has its source in Lake  is by plane throughout the year. Regular scheduled ste
Naknek, where there are two villages.             .                carry mail during the summer. A road leads 0.8 mile
 (142)  Anchorage can be had off the entrance to Naknek River in    lake used as a landing place for floatplanes; another
35 to 40 feet; this is the head of navigation for deep-draft vessels.    about 12 miles SE to King Salmon Airport. Transpor
The approach channel to this anchorage has depths of 33 to 60    land in this area is entirely by plane. Several floatpl;
feet.                                                              inland lake are available for hire or charter. The airport
 (143) The extreme range of tide at the river mouth is more than    uled freight and passenger service to Anchorage. Thei
25 feet. (See Tide Tables for predictions.)                        phone line from Naknek to the airport.
 (144)  Shoals and banks, many of which uncover, fill the lower    (156) Diesel oil, gasoline, and lubricating oil are a
course of the river and extend 3 or 4 miles, then trend around N   quantities sufficient for normal demands, and limited;
and join the body of the banks that fill the upper end of Kvichak    coal- and stove oil also are available. Delivery can be n
Bay. With local knowledge, craft drawing 4 feet can enter the river    side the fuel dock for vessels drawing up to 10 feet at





292                                                     8. BERING SEA


half tide or by drums to ships at anchorage. There is no fuel oil.    going aground on a rising tide are floated in a very short time and
Provisions in limited quantities are available.                    may proceed. No known rocks exist on the shoals, and temporary
  (157) South Naknek on the S side of the Naknek River directly    groundings do not often damage vessels.
across from Naknek, has a school and a cannery that operates a      (168) Most of the area between Naknek and Kvichak Rivers
general merchandise store.                                         bares at some stage of the tide.
  (158) A cannery wharf with a removable fish conveyor and two       (169) The Bend Light (58049.8'N., 157ï¿½00.3'W.), 30 feet above
pile mooring dolphins extend from the S shore of the river, about    the water, is shown from a square frame with.a red and white dia-
0.7 mile W  of South Naknek. The conveyor and dolphins are    mond-shaped daymark. The light serves as a useful aid to vessels
removed after the annual fishing season.                           and barges of shallow draft using the E channel from Libbyville to
 (159)  Weather.-Nearness to the ocean tends to provide King    Koggiung where depths vary from 3 to 23 feet at low water. Local
Salmon with a climate that is predominantly maritime in character,    knowledge is necessary to avoid grounding on a falling tide.
with diurnal and seasonal temperature ranges normally confined to   (170) Koggiung, a village on the E side of Kvichak River, has
rather narrow limits. However, the area occasionally experiences    several canneries. All of the wharves are dry at low water and
definite continental influences that cause temperature extremes    have mud bottom alongside. All have water connections. Fuel oil,
which tend to exaggerate the climatic conditions generally prevail-    diesel oil, and gasoline are stored for cannery use.
ing. The extreme maximum temperature for King Salmon is 88ï¿½ F,      (171) The longest wharf at Koggiung is 450 feet. The marine
but days in summer with maximum readings reaching the 80ï¿½ F    railway at this wharf can haul out vessels up to 60 tons at high
mark are extremely rare. In fact, July, the warmest month, aver-    water.
ages only 5 days with temperatures reaching 70ï¿½ F or above. The     (172) Kvichak River (see chart 16013), from Koggiung to
coldest temperature on record is -43ï¿½ F in January 1919.           Iliamna Lake, is 50 miles long. In the upper half of its course it is
 (160) From December through March the area experiences    much broken by islands and bars into narrow, shallow channels.
rather strong winds, due to the passage of E moving Aleutian    The lower half is tidal.
lows. The strongest winds are usually from a N direction, develop-  (173) Occasionally vessels drawing 14 feet have ascended the
ing after the low centers have passed on E of the local area. Winds    river as far as the mouth of Alagnak River, but anchorage is diffi-
of 50 m.p.h. or more have occurred in all months with an extreme    cult to find. Kvichak River is navigable for cannery tenders of 10-
of 94~m.p.h. in February 1952.                                     foot draft to Alagnak River, 22 miles above the mouth of Kvichak
 (161) Cloud coverage in the King Salmon area is generally quite    River. Launches of 3- to 4-foot draft can go on up into Iliamna
high, averaging about eight-tenths the year around. Mountain    Lake.
ranges to the S, E, and W tend to provide uplift for air moving     (174) In 1984, the channels through the entrance to Kvichak
toward King Salmon from these directions and produce consider-    River were reported to be extremely changeable. Local knowledge
able cloudiness which is carried out across the local area. When   is advised.
the wind movement is inland from the SW, the air arrives carrying   (175) The Kvichak River has four recommended anchorages
a high moisture content to condense in low level cloudiness, and    where mooring buoys are maintained during the fishing season.
this action contributes to the frequent fog occurrences all months    Water is available at the canneries.
of the year. Fog development is most frequent during July and       (176) At Graveyard Point, near the mouth, fair protection is
August. During the winter the high moisture content of the air    available in depths of 10 to 12 feet in all weather except strong SE
causes substantial accumulations of frost on outside objects.      storms. The bottom is fine gray sand with good holding ground.
 (162) Seasonal snowfall averages about 45 inches; the maxi-        (177) Graveyard Point Light (58052.1'N., 157000.8'W.), 40
mum depth on the ground during the winter season averages about    feet above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red
10 inches. This indicates the extent of melting that takes place    and white diamond-shaped daymark 0.7 mile S of Graveyard
with the snow accumulation. Although most of the snow is    Point.
received during periods of general snowfall over most of the SW     (178) Off Nakeen and the mouth of Squaw Creek, good protec-
mainland, a considerable amount of snow is brought in as snow    tion in all weather is afforded in depths of 13 to 23 feet. The bot-
showers that move inland from the Bristol Bay area. These show-    tom is fine gray sand; the holding ground is good.
ers are generally quite local and usually of short duration, but they  (179) Duck Creek Light (58057.3'N., 157001 .7'W.), 48 feet
often follow in rapid succession to bring sizable accumulations of    above the water, is shown from a square frame with a red and
snow within relatively short periods of time. December, with an    white diamond-shaped daymark on S point of entrance to Duck
average of about 9 inches of snowfall, has the greatest monthly    Creek.
average snowfall amount.                                            (180) At Kvichak good protection is afforded in depths of 8 to
 (163)  Ice in the bay near King Salmonusually becomes safe for    10 feet in all weather except a strong N storm. The bottom is gray
man around November II11, with the Naknek River becoming safe    sand; the holding ground is good.
for man around November 25. Breakup on the bay averages about       (8s1) At Levelock (see chart 16011) good protection is afforded
April 6; the breakup on the river averages about April 18.         in all weather, in 8 to 10 feet, fine gray sand bottom, with good
 (164) (See page T-5 for King Salmon Climatological Table.)       holding ground.
 (165) Bristol Bay Cannery, about 2.5 miles N of Naknek River       (182) Common practice on the Kvichak River is to restrict navi-
entrance, has a wharf that bares alongside at low water.           gation to the direction of the current and to a stage about half tide,
 (166) Libbyville, on the E side of Kvichak Bay, 3.5 miles N of    if possible. Vessels grounding on a rising tide are floated in a short
Naknek River entrance, has a cannery with a 100-foot-long wharf.   time, and temporary groundings cause no damage since there are
 (167)  Common practice in this area is to avoid all movement of    no rocks on the shoals.
vessels N of Naknek River at the lower stages of the tide or on a   (183) Local knowledge of the channels is necessary, and anyone
falling tide. At or near high water it is safe to navigate almost any    not thoroughly familiar with the river is strongly advised to obtain
part of the area with vessels drawing up to 7 or 8 feet; vessels    a pilot from one of the canneries.




                                                         8. BERING SEA                                                         293


 (184) Chart 16013.-Iliamna Lake is about 70 miles long and        (198) At the SW end and on the SE side of the cape are the
generally from 7 to 17 miles wide. It is about 50 feet above tide-    entrances of two lagoons that can be entered by boats at high
water. Reported soundings indicate a depth at the E end of many    water when there is no surf. At low tide, water remains in the
hundred feet. The lake is usually frozen from late December until    entrance and for a short distance inside the first lagoon; the second
latein May; the snow leaves the low ground in April, remaining    lagoon is bare.
until June in the pass between Iliamna Lake and Cook Inlet. Some    (199)  Shoals with little water on them in places extend 6 miles S
snow may be expected in September, but the ground is not perma-    from Cape Constantine, and the outer shoal, Ustiugof Shoal, is 8
nently covered at low altitudes until some months later.           to 9 miles SE from the cape. These shoals are in the form of long
 (185ss) Old Iliamna is an abandoned village 3.5 miles above the    ridges trending in the direction of the set of the tidal currents
mouth of the Iliamna River, which drains into the E end of    around the cape to and from Nushagak Bay. They are steep-to,
Iliamna Lake.                                                      especially on the offshore side, and soundings will not give suffi-
 (186) A 15.5-mile State-maintained gravel road connects Pile    cient warning to avoid them. The tidal currents NE of Sterling
Bay, at the E end of Iliamna Lake, and Williamsport on the W       Shoal, off Cape Constantine, have a velocity of about 2 knots.
shore of Iliamna Bay. The road is open from June to October. (See    (See the Tidal Current Tables for predictions.)
chapter 4, for a description of facilities available at Williamsport.)  (200) Ustiugof Shoal is a narrow ridge with a least depth of 13
 (187) Newbalen River (59'41.5'N., 154056.0'W.), about 20    feet, and has a length of 15 miles in a 052ï¿½ direction. Close to its
miles long, connects Iliamna Lake with Lake Clark. The upper 10    SE side are depths of 11 fathoms or more. From a vessel near the
miles can be navigated by canoes and poling boats. Rapids and    shoal, Cape Constantine can be seen in clear weather. The greatest
reported falls make even canoe navigation impossible for the    care is required when S or SE of the cape. The shoaler ridges are
lower 10 miles. These rapids may be avoided by a 5-mile portage.   generally indicated by rip or breakers at low water, but there is
 (188) Iliamna is near the mouth of Newhalen River. An airfield    generally nothing to indicate Ustiugof Shoal.
is adjacent to the village.                                         (201) Protection Point, the E end of Cape Constantine, is a low
 (189) Lake Clark is about 45 miles long and from 1 to 3.5 miles    marshy spit which extends 1.5 miles from the higher land. On the
wide. It is about 220 feet above tidewater, and is tributary to    N side of the point, 2 miles WNW of its end, is the entrance to a
Iliamna Lake and Newhalen River.                                   lagoon; small boats can anchor in, or close inside the entrance, but
                                                                    the current is strong on the ebb. The current velocity off the point
                                                                    is about 2 knots on the flood and 3 knots on the ebb. A narrow
 (190)  Chart 16322.-Nushagak Bay and Nushagak River, on    shoal which uncovers in places at low water extends 4.2 miles S
the N side of Bristol Bay near its head, are important for the exten-    from the poin  The S halfof the shoal IS bo  a mile fo
sive salmon fishing and a number of large canneries that operate    between the point and the N end of the shoal is a narrow channel.
during the summer. The bay is 17.5 miles wide at the entrance    A detached shoal about 2 miles E from the point has a least depth
between Protection Point and Etolin Point. The surveys of 1948-    of 15 feet.
50 show that the bars and channels in the upper bay and river have  (202) Nichols Spit E of Nichols Hills, forms a cove, dry at low
changed considerably. Local authorities state that the area between
                                *,~~~~~~~ ~~~water, that can be entered by boats at high water and affords shel-
Clarks Point and Dillingham (Snag Point) is particularly subject to    ter except from N winds.
change on the ice runout each spring.
                                                                     (203) Igushik River, 15 miles N of Protection Point, is a
 (191)  Nushagak Bay and River are obstructed by extensive    crooked winding river on the W  side of the bay; vessels up to
shoals near the shores, and by long bars, partly bare at low water,    about 24-foot draft have been taken out. The channel into the river
which generally extend in the direction of the channels. In the    is not surveyed. The flat on the E side of the channel leading to the
absence of aids, navigation is safe only in the daytime when the    mouth of the river shows for nearly its full length at low water.
marks and distant peaks can be seen. The worst dangers in the    The bar at the entrance of the channel has depths of 5 to 14 feet on
approach are the extensive shoals S and SE of Cape Constantine,    it, and is about 7.5 miles SE of the mouth of the river and 8.8 miles
the outer one being nearly out of sight of land.                   N from Protection Point.
 (192) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-    (204) Igushik Ridge, on the W  side of Igushik River, is promi-
sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of    nent, being about 260 feet high near its N end, where it breaks
Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)                    sharply to the river. The peninsula E of the river is low.
 (193) The Bering Sea is served by the Alaska Marine Pilots and    (205) Snake River, 10 miles N of the mouth of Igushik River, is
Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.                               used only by fishing boats. The channel leading to the mouth of
  (194) Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots    Snake River has depths of about 7 to 29 feet, and is well defined at
and en route to Nashagak Bay can meet the pilot boat close aboard    low water by the flats, which uncover, except at the entrance.
Nushagak Bay Entrance Buoy 2 (58033.7'N., I 58ï¿½24.2'W.); a sea-     (206) The land on the E side of the bay is low and rolling tundra,
sonal aid.                                                         and the entrance point is rounding without a distinct point.
  (195). The pilot boat.can be contacted by calling "NUSHAGAK        (207) Etolin Point, the larger rounded point between Kvichak
BAY PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearranged    and Nushagak Bays, is flat, tundra covered, with several shallow
frequency between pilot and agent/vessel.                          lakes, some of which have been used for floatplane landings. The
  (196) N of Dillingham is a sparse growth of timber, which    W extremity of the point is a 90-foot-high bluff. A 149-foot-high
becomes heavy farther inland, but to the S are only occasional    rounded hill, 2 miles E of the point, is a prominent landmark when
clumps of alder bushes.                                            approaching from seaward.
  (197) The peninsula of Cape Constantine is low rolling tundra     (208) Shoals covered less than 12 feet extend 5 miles S of the
country, with bluffs in places. Nichols Hills, 125 feet high, are    rounding point SE of Etolin Point, while depths of 30 feet or less
small sand knolls, the highest part of a ridge that follows the E    are more than 10 miles from the shore. The shoaling is gradual,
side of the cape, and is 5 miles NW of Protection Point.           and sounding is a good guide in approaching the E shore when just




294                                                     8. BERING SEA


outside a line joining Etolin and Protection Points. A seasonal    cargo for the bay. Larger quantities are available at the Tesoro
buoy on the E side of the entrance to Nushagak Bay is near this    Bulk Plant.
line. Above this line in the E half of the bay are long shoals, most  (217) Vessels drawing 23 feet ascend the bay on high tide and
of which show in places at low water. A 341ï¿½ lighted range marks    anchor just below Snag Point. Supplies are lightered to Dilling-
the channel to Ekuk, Ekuk Bluff, NNW of Etolin Point, is 170    ham either by the canneries' equipment or by private equipment.
feet high and prominent. Ekuk is a native Village on a spit at the N  The oil and cannery wharves can be approached only at high tide;
end of the bluff. The lagoon inside the spit is bare at low water.    vessels drawing 12 feet moor at these wharves on higher high
The cannery wharf at Ekuk is 150 feet long with 7 feet alongside    tides. A 200-foot City Dock accommodates large ships and barges
at high water. Gasoline, diesel oil, and fuel oil are stored for can-    for unloading, but goes dry at low tide.
nery use, and water is available.                                   (218) The cannery at Dillingham has a wharf 178 feet long with
 (209) Clarks Point, 1.5 miles N of Ekuk, is low and has an    a depth alongside of 2 feet at low water and can be used by small
extensive gravel beach. On the point are a large Alaska Packers    tenders at high tide. Gasoline, diesel oil, and fuel oils are stored
Association cannery and the village of Clarks Point. The ridge,    for cannery use. Telephone service is available. The cannery main-
169 feet high, terminates in a bluff at the shoreline 0.6 mile S of    tains radiotelephone and radiotelegraph communications. A
the point and is prominent from seaward. Several large water    marine railway at the cannery can haul out vessels up to 100 tons
tanks near the shore end of the bluff are prominent landmarks. A   at high tide.
wreck, awash at low water, is about 1 mile SW of the cannery.       (219) Dillingham Small-Boat Harbor on the W side of Dilling-
 (210) The Alaska Packers Association wharf at Clarks Point is    ham provides about 950 feet of float space for small fishing and
175 feet long and has a depth alongside of about 8 feet at high    pleasure craft. A dredged 5-foot channel leads from Nushagak
water. A T-pier with a face of 80 feet and a depth alongside of    Bay to the basin, but should only be used with local knowledge.
about 13 feet at high water is extended out 90 feet from the face of    The basin retains less than 5 feet of water behind a rock sill. The
the main wharf during the cannery season. The main wharf has a    entrance channel and basin are subject to rapid shoaling due to
20-ton crane on the NE corner and a 3-ton crane on the SW corner.    sediments from Nushagak Bay, and annual maintenance dredging
Radiotelephone communication is maintained.                        is attempted each year. The harbormaster's office is across from
 (211) Water is piped to the wharf. A general store is operated    the small boat harbor.
throughout the year. Gasoline, diesel oil, and fuel oil are stored for  (220) An airport 1.5 miles W of the village, provides air services
cannery use. The marine railway can haul out vessels up to 150    the year round. An aerolight is at the airport.
tons at high tide; a small machine shop is nearby.                  (221) Wood River has its entrance N of Snag Point, and has a
 (212)  Clark Slough, 1.5 miles NE of Clarks Point, is navigable    length of about 24 miles to Lake Aleknagik. Its width varies from
for launches at high water for about 17 miles. The bar that must be    about 600 yards in its lower part to about 50 yards where it joins
crossed at the edge of Combine Flats when entering the slough    the lake. A depth of 3 to 31/2 feet at low water can be carried 15
bares at low water. Fishing craft and tenders use Clark Slough and    miles upriver and not more than 2V/2 feet to the lake; at high water
the part of Combine Flats behind Clarks Point for shelter during    4 feet can be carried this distance. The lake is about 24 miles long
heavy SW weather.                                                  and navigable for its entire length.
 (213)  Nushagak Point, on the E side of Nushagak Bay and 7         (222) Prominent features.-N of Nushagak Bay is a chain of
miles N from Clarks Point, is the outer end of a prominent 250-    prominent mountains that are snow-covered in early summer, but
foot ridge, to the E of which is a deep valley. Nushagak, a small    are bare except in the ravines by the middle of July. In clear
village on the point has two abandoned canneries which serve as a    weather the peaks show from a long distance seaward, but much
fish camp during summer. There are no wharves. Vessels may         of the time they are obscured by clouds and haze. Many of the
approach as closely as their draft permits and use small boats or    summits are shown on the chart.
barges for reaching the shore. Landing at low water is difficult    (223)  Channels.-The controlling depth in Nushagak Bay and
because of the very sticky mud on the flats, but a good landing can    River is about 10 feet to Dillingham, 30 miles above the mouth.
be made on the gravel beach at high water. Nushagak has no post    Small vessels of 21/2-foot draft can continue up Nushagak River to
office or supplies. Mail is received through Dillingham.           Nunachuak, 100 miles above the mouth.
 (214)  From Coffee Point to Snag Point, 9 miles to the NE, the     (224)  Anchorages.-Vessels can anchor in the outer part of
W  shore of Nushagak Bay consists mostly of bluffs. Bradford    Nushagak Bay in N weather. The wind from this direction does
Point, between Coffee Point and Snag Point, is opposite Grassy    not appear to blow with force during the summer. This part of the
Island, which is awash at highest tides.                           bay is exposed to a heavy sea during E to S weather. The strong
 (215) Kanakanak, at Bradford Point, is a small settlement    current causes a vessel at anchor to lie stern or broadside to the sea
which includes the former sites of Dillingham and Kanakanak,    when the wind opposes the current. The bars seem to afford little
and is connected by roads with the present site of Dillingham at    protection. In SW and NE weather, the W and E sides of the bay,
Snag Point. A hospital is in Kanakanak, about 7 miles from    respectively, should be selected.
Dillingham.                                                         (225)  Good anchorage can be found S of Ekuk Bluff, in 30 to 35
 (216)  Dillingham is the principal settlement and source of sup-    feet, mud bottom, where the current is not strong. During the can-
ply in Nushagak Bay. The village has a school and churches, and    nery season, mooring buoys, placed in a line parallel to the beach,
hospital facilities at Kanakanak may be reached by road. Ordinary    are maintained for tally barges in the area S of Ekuk Bluff and E of
supplies are available at several general stores. Petroleum prod-    the main channel.
ucts, except fuel oil, can be obtained from the Delta Western Plant.  (226) In SW weather, good anchorage in about 18 feet is offered
Fuel oil for the canneries in Nushagak Bay is generally brought in    to vessels drawing 12 feet or less, I mile 021  from Protection
by tanker early in the season and transferred to cannery barges at    Point. Deeper draft vessels should anchor farther NE.
the anchorage off Clarks Point. Limited quantities of fuel oil can  (227) Above Ekuk good anchorage will be found wherever the
be obtained from the tanks of supply vessels handling general    depth will permit. This part of the bay is very choppy in heavy






                                                         8. BERING SEA                                                           295


weather, but the sea seldom, if ever, is heavy enough to endanger a    and marked by a light, then shape the course for the entrance
vessel. The bottom is sand, but the anchor holds well if given a    lighted bell buoy, favoring the Etolin Point side in preference to
scope of about 60 fathoms. The currents are strong, and care    the Cape Constantine side. The currents that may be experienced
should be taken to avoid dragging. Vessels remaining long are    when crossing from Cape Greig are not known, but there may be
anchored in line in the channel to interfere as little as possible with    considerable set. Great care should therefore be exercised in
the nets. During the cannery season, mooring buoys are placed by    approaching the entrance. The land at the entrance when first seen
the canneries in lines parallel to the channel off Ekuk Bluff and    in approaching is indefinite, and presents no feature that can be
Clarks Point.                                                        readily identified.
 (228)  Tides.-The tides in Nushagak Bay are influenced to some       (235) After making the entrance buoy enter the bay on the 341ï¿½
extent by strong winds. The diurnal range of tide at Clarks Point is    lighted range through Ship Channel. Favor the E side of the range
19.5 feet. (See Tide Tables for predictions.)                        until clear of the 6-foot spot on the E edge of Long Sands and
 (229)  Currents.-The currents in Nushagak Bay have consider-    take care to avoid the 3- and 4-foot spots near the edges of the
able strength; velocities of about 4 knots have been observed on    channel through the N end of the bar. When through the cut on the
both the flood and the ebb. The ebb usually begins shortly before    bar, leave the range and follow the general trend of the shore to off
high water and continues to run after low water, roughly about 7    Ekuk.
hours ebb and 5 hours flood. The period of slack water is usually      (236)  Note.-On the flood, just inside the-bar, cross a distinct rip
short. The currents generally set fair with the channels, but in nav-    and keep it about 150 feet off the port side. The waters of the
igating the bay the course is often across the current and allowance    upper bay and river carry heavy sediment, and the only indications
must be made for it. The velocity is influenced by freshets and    of shoals usually are swirls or rips. On the ebb the waters of the
continued winds, which also affect the times of slack water. A cur-    upper bay are practically fresh, but they become brackish on the
rent of over 5 knots may be experienced at times. (See Tidal Cur-    flood.
rent Tables for predictions in Nushagak Bay.)                          (237) From Clarks Point to the upper canneries, numerous mud
 (230)  Weather.-The weather is variable, but it is considered    and sandbars are exposed at low water in the central and W  parts
better than farther W. Spells of bad weather occur, and their dura-    of the river. Shoal water in the middle of the river is extensive and
tion increases in the late summer. SW winds sometimes predomi-    restricts crossing during low water; nearly all navigation of this
nate in the early summer and E winds later. E winds bring thick    section is done on a rising or high tide. Navigation of this area
weather and rain, and are accompanied by a low or falling barom-    should not be attempted by large vessels except on a rising tide
eter. SW winds, if moderate, bring fair weather, but if strong bring    and then only with local knowledge or with a local pilot. Local
rain. NW winds bring fine clear weather, but seldom blow steadily.    authorities state that the area is subject to change on the ice runoff
In settled weather the wind may be light from any direction,    each spring.
accompanied by showers. After a gale there is usually no shifting     (238) Present traffic follows the E shore above Clarks Point,
of the wind or sudden breaking of the storm, but the wind    keeping about 1 mile off. The channel follows close along the
decreases, and there is a gradual return to fair weather. Fog some-    edge of the E mudflats and is marked by local buoyage during the
times sets in from the sea, but there is little fog during the summer,  summer. The W line of this buoyage marks the E edge of the chan-
 (231)  Ice.-The movement of the ice is variable, depending upon    nel, and the other two or three lines mark set-net sites. The chan-
the direction of the wind. It is said that the arrival of cannery ves-    nel is 0.8 mile offshore at the N end of Combine Flats and 0.5 mile
sels has been as late as June 17. The ice is not solid, but drifts in    off at Nushagak Point. One mile below Nushagak Point, vessels
floes with the wind and current. NE winds drive the ice out of the    cross over and pass 0.2 mile off Bradford Point, then follow the W
upper bay to ground and breakup on the shores and sandbars of the    shore at this distance to the anchorage off Dillingham. Traffic gen-
W  side of the bay. Cannery floating equipment is hauled out upon    erally starts upriver on half-flood tide.
completion of the season in mid-August, and the salmon pack is        (239)  Repairs.-The large tides and the flats make it easy to
taken out at that time. One winter supply vessel generally makes     beach a vessel of drafts up to about 18 feet. A good place is at
the last trip into the bay about the middle of September. (See page    Clarks Point. Small machine repairs can generally be done at the
T-21 for dates of ice breakup and freezeup.)                         companies' shops.
 (232) Routes.-The channels and bars of Nushagak Bay and              (240)  Communications.-The Northland Marine Lines makes
River are probably subject to constant change because of the    several trips a year into the Nushagak Bay area, the earliest about
action of currents and to a smaller extent by the action of the sea.    May 15 and the latest about September 15, depending upon ice
Changes of considerable extent are reported by those of long expe-    conditions. Commercial airlines serve the area. Dog teams are
rience. A margin of safety should therefore be allowed for the    used to some extent by natives and trappers during the winter, and
soundings found by the survey. It is also well to remember that    small boats are used for local travel during the summer. Tankers
with a very low tide the water may fall as much as 41/2 feet below    and barges bring in diesel oil, gasoline, lubricating oil, and fuel
the plane of reference of the chart.                                 oil. All canneries and their tenders are equipped with radiotele-
  (233)  The navigation of the bay is not easy, and a stranger    phone, and radio traffic can be handled through the cannery shore
should proceed with great caution. Tide rips may be taken as good    stations during the season. Radiotelephones are maintained by
evidence of shoals. The shoals are long ridges trending in the same  cannery caretakers during the winter.
directions as the tidal currents, and the danger of stranding is
greatly increased if a course is set across the currents. A stranger   (241) Charts 16011, 16315, 16305.-The area between Cape
should navigate only on a rising tide and is advised to communi-     Constantine and Cape Newenham (58ï¿½40'N., 162ï¿½10'W.) is unsur-
cate by radio with one of the canneries and arrange to have a pilot    veyed, and there are indications that the present charts are consid-
sent out.                                                            erably in error. Vessels setting a course from outside Ustiugof
  (234). It is recommended that vessels bound to Nushagak make       Shoal (58ï¿½17.0'N., 158ï¿½039.0'W.), to pass about 2 miles off Cape
Cape Greig (see chart 16011), which is high and easily recognized    Peirce (58ï¿½38.0'N., 161ï¿½45.0'W.), in thick but otherwise moderate





296                                                     8. BERING SEA


weather, have reported making Hagemeister Island dead ahead.        (254) Black Rock, 131 feet high, is 3 miles E of the N part of
This undoubtedly is because of a N set in this vicinity. In the thick    Crooked Island. From the air the rock appears to be an upthrust on
weather which prevails in this locality safety is assured only by    a submerged ridge, the axis of which parallels that of Crooked
constant sounding.                                                 Island. Black Rock, the SE tangent of Crooked Island, and the
 (242) Kulukak Bay, entered between Kulukak Point, 38 miles    Twins are very nearly on range.
NW of Cape Constantine, and Right Hand Point, about 9 miles         (255) Summit Island, 801 feet and 505 feet high near the S and
WSW, is shoal; there is a depth of 3 fathoms just inside the    N ends, respectively, is 8.5 miles WNW of Right Hand Point, and
entrance and the N half dries at low water. The buildings of an    2 miles from the E shore of Togiak Bay. Good anchorage, in 5 to 6
abandoned native village are above the bluff at the NW corner of    fathoms and sheltered from SW weather, may be had in a bight
the bay.                                                           about 0.5 mile off the middle of the NE side of the island in 5 to 6
 (243) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-    fathoms, sand bottom.
sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of   (256) Togiak Bay, N of the Walrus Islands, and about midway
Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)                    between Cape Constantine and Cape Newenham, is shoal; the
 (244) The Bering Sea is served by the Alaska Marine Pilots and    head of the bay uncovers to the S for 3 to 4 miles. A submerged
Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.                               ledge and rock extend 0.2 and 0.5 mile, respectively, from Rocky
 (245)  Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots    Point at the E entrance of the bay.
and en route to Kulukak Bay can meet the pilot boat about 3 miles   (257) Togiak is near the head of the bay. The waters off Togiak
S of Kulukak Point (58ï¿½51.0'N., 159ï¿½36.0'W.).                      are shallow and not navigable during low water. Good anchorage
 (246)  The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "KULUKAK       can be had for deeper draft vessels on the E side of the bay about I
BAY PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearranged    mile off Anchor Point in 5 to 6 fathoms of water, sand bottom.
frequency between pilot and agent/vessel.                           (258) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-
 (247) Right Hand Point is the S extremity of a mountainous    sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of
peninsula that separates Kulukak Bay from Togiak Bay.              Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)
 (248)  Walrus Islands, consisting of three islands and three       (259)  The Bering Sea is served by the Alaska Marine Pilots and
above-water rocks, are in the approach to Togiak Bay. Several    Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.
shoals of 3 fathoms or less are between the islands as well as S of  (260) Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots
the group. Shoaling is rapid after reaching a depth of 3 fathoms,    and en route to Togiak can meet the pilot boat about I mile S of
requiring continuous sounding while navigating these waters.    Summit Island (58ï¿½50.0'N., 160ï¿½12.0'W.).
Thick weather is frequent in this area, and often the higher islands  (261) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "TOGIAK
are fog-capped when the weather is otherwise clear. The diurnal    PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearranged fre-
range of tide is 9.5 feet. The land areas and adjacent waters of    quency between pilot and agent/vessel.
Round Island, Crooked Island, High Island, Summit Island, The       (262)  Hagemeister Island, 10 miles W of High Island, is moun-
Twins, and Black Rock are established as the Walrus Islands    tainous except for about 5 miles at the N end. Shoals surround the
State Game Sanctuary.                                              island and extend E 20 to 25 miles, including the area between
 (249) Round Island, the easternmost of the group, is 1,410 feet    Hagemeister Island and the Walrus group.
high and is about 10 miles SSW of Right Hand Point. Access          (263)  Shoals and sand waves with depths less than 2 fathoms
within a two mile radius of Round Island is prohibited without a    extend E and SE from the northern half of Hagemeister Island in
permit from the Alaska Department of Fish and Game. The W          the direction of High Island. Ice has been observed grounded
side of the island is precipitous and bare in the lower elevations. A  there. Foul ground is also reported as extending N of the N point
narrow beach makes around the E side. To the N the island termi-    of the island.
nates in a distinct pinnacle rock. A reef, bare in places and consist-  (264)  Current observations were made in June 1948 for a
ing of sand and smooth boulders, extends about 1.3 miles NW of    period of about 10 hours, about 8 miles SW of Hagemeister
the pinnacle rock.                                                 Island. The current sets approximately 335ï¿½ and 165ï¿½ with veloci-
 (250) Indifferent anchorage may be found about I mile NE of    ties at strength of about 0.8 knot and 1.5 knots, respectively. In
the island in about I I fathoms, hard sand bottom.                 June 1985, the NOAA Ship RAINIER anchored 3 miles off the SE
 (251)  Crooked Island, 1,254 feet high, is 9 miles WNW of    corner of Hagemeister Island observed currents flooding 070ï¿½ and
Round Island; it is almost entirely covered by tundra. There are    ebbing 240ï¿½ at velocities up to 4 knots.
large coves on both the SW and E sides of the island. These coves   (265) Hagemeister Strait is about 16 miles long between the
have been reported to be shoal; the 3-fathom curve extending    island of that name and the mainland. It is 3 to 4 miles wide, but
about 2 miles offshore on the W side of the island. About 0.5 mile    shingle spits contract it in two places to less than 2 miles. Good
off the E side of the island just S of the large cove, anchorage with    anchorage was found under Tongue Point, the shingle spit making
protection from W to SW  winds and good holding ground can be    out from the mainland about midway of the channel. Good
found. A bank, covered 2 fathoms or less, is about 1.5 miles off    anchorage can be found throughout the strait avoiding the shoal
the NW side of the island. Shoal extends the full length of the W  areas NE of Hagemeister Spit. In 1991 NOAA Ship RAINIER
side of the island.                                                observed currents of 0.5 to 1.5 knots flooding 060ï¿½ and ebbing
 (252) High Island, the westernmost of the Walrus group, is    220ï¿½ near Estus Point. Currents are significantly stronger near the
1,716 feet high and is 2 miles W of Crooked Island; this island is    western end of Hagenmeister Spit causing tide rips in the area.
steep-to on its E and W sides, with a few strips of sand beach.    Strong currents and an unstable bottom result in shifting sand
 (253)  The Twins   are two isolated rocks 3 miles S of Crooked    waves throughout the strait and its approaches. Shoal areas that
Island. The larger is 300 feet high; the lower and SW of the two is   lie directly S of the spits on both sides of the strait cause waves to
100 feet high.                                                     break at times of heavy swell.





                                                        8. BERING SEA                                                          297


 (266) The Osviak River empties into the strait about 13 miles    carried downriver and sank. Mariners are advised to exercise cau-
W of Tongue Point. In 1991, NOAA Ship RAINIER reported an    tion in navigating Kuskokwim Bay and River.
average river depth of 1.3 feet and that many portions of the river  (275) Cape Newenham is the landfall for this region, and can
bare at low stages of tide. The channel runs approximately mid-    be approached close-to with deep water. It is the end of a penin-
stream. The river is navigable in this channel for two miles    sula formed by a series of rough sawtoothed mountains. These
upstream of the entrance by shallow draft vessels when the tide is    mountains terminate in a level plateau that forms the immediate
5.3 feet or greater. The abandoned native village of Osviak is on    cape. In S weather a heavy sea and tide rips occur off Cape New-
the W bank of the river about 3 miles from the mouth.               enham. In 1981, during heavy N winds, the NOAA Ship MILLER
 (267) Cape Peirce (58ï¿½38.0'N., 161ï¿½45.0'W.), of moderate          FREEMAN found a good anchorage in a small cove on the S side
height and symmetrical form, is 22 miles W of the S end of Hage-    of the cape about 0.4 mile offshore S of Jagged Mountain in 10
meister Island, and 15 miles SE of Cape Newenham. A shoal area,    fathoms, sand and mud bottom. Satisfactory anchorage for S or E
with depths of 2 to 3 fathoms over it and possibly less, is reported    weather can be had in about 8 fathoms off the small cove on the N
to extend some distance W from the cape. Depths of 19 fathoms,    side of the cape and about 3.5 miles from its outer end. An aero
about 7 miles WSW of the cape, were found outside the charted    radiobeacon (58ï¿½39.4'N., 162004.4'W.) is shown from the N side
20-fathom curve. Depths of 10 fathoms are found 2 miles S of the    about 3 miles E from the outer end of the cape. About 1.3 miles
cape, and good anchorage in 10 fathoms is found inside Shaiak    ESE of the aero radiobeacon is a parabolic antenna.
Island, (see chart 16300), just E of the cape. There are reports of  (276) Jagged Mountain is a well-defined peak, the highest of
good anchorage, sheltered from N weather, in the bight NW of    the Cape Newenham group. Viewed from N, its slopes appear
Cape Peirce. To make the anchorage from E, give Cape Peirce a    jagged.
berth of about 3 miles and steer 009ï¿½ for the junction of the NW     (277)  Security Cove, 9 miles ENE of Cape Newenham, is a
end of the sand beach with the rocky shores; select anchorage at    good anchorage except with NW winds; the usual summer gales
will off the sand beach. The approaches from W  are clear except    are SE. The bottom is even and shoals gradually. The best anchor-
for the above-mentioned shoal.                                      age in 31/2 fathoms, mud bottom, is about 0.8 mile NE of Castle
                                                                   Rock and on the range of Castle Rock and the first promontory
 (268)  Charts 16300, 16006, 16305.-Kuskokwim Bay and              SW. Water can be obtained from a stream which enters the cove.
Kuskokwim River open into the Bering Sea N of the entrance to    There is also good anchorage in 2 fathoms with good holding
Bristol Bay. The bay, filled with many flats, and hard steep-to    ground in the middle of the bight on the SW side of Castle Rock.
shoals, is entered between Cape Newenham and Cape Avinof, 93    This anchorage is less affected by the ground swell making along
miles NW.                                                           the coast from Cape Newenham than the anchorage in Security
 (269) The channels through the bay are not always apparent by    Cove.
the surface indications of the water. At times the channels will be  (278)  Castle Rock, the SW entrance point of Security Cove, is a
smooth with rips on the shoals, and at other times the reverse will    small prominent headland, 260 feet high, joined to the land by a
be true. The edges of the channels are often marked by long lines    low neck. At the NE entrance point of Security Cove is a conspic-
of foam, but occasionally the foam extends across the channels; it   uous pinnacle rock, 169 feet high, covered with light tundra.
is well to approach these lines with caution. Navigation is recom-   (279)  Chagvan Mountain, between Security Cove and Chag-
mended only at low water, when the mudflats are visible, enabling    van Bay, is smooth shaped and terminates in two high rounded
the channels between them to be followed. Because of the inequal-    knobs.
ity of the tides, a vessel grounding at high water may not be        (280)  Chagvan Bay has a narrow shoal entrance. Inside it is
refloated for several days.                                         very shoal and cut up by bars that are bare at low water.
 (270) The 40-mile approach through Eek Channel to Kuskok-           (281) Red Mountain, just S of Goodnews Bay, is a reddish
wim River is a maze of shifting sandbars, both visible and cov-    color and conspicuous. From N it appears as a long ridge with the
ered, and blind channels. The channels in the bay and river    highest part at its N end.
undergo constant change from year to year, because of the action     (282)  Goodnews Bay is shoal except for a channel with depths
of the sea, currents, and ice; extreme caution and continuous       ranging from 11/4 to 12 fathoms that leads through the entrance to a
soundings are necessary.                                            point about 1 mile inside. This channel affords good anchorage,
 (271) The procedure usually followed is for a small pilot boat    either in the middle of the entrance or up to 0.8 mile inside the bay
from Goodnews Bay to precede the vessel, through these waters,    on a line approximately NE of the S tangent of North Spit. The
constantly feeling out the channels and sounding.                   diurnal range of tide is 8.9 feet. Inside the entrance the strength of
 (272)  During S storms a heavy sea makes up the bay nearly to    the tidal currents reaches a maximum of about 2.5 knots in a direc-
Eek Island, at the head of the bay, and vessels caught on a shoal    tion parallel to the axis of the channel. (See Tidal Current Tables
are in danger of breaking up.                                       for predictions.) Along the NE shore of South Spit the ebb current
 (273)  The channel through Kuskokwim Bay and up Kuskokwim    is very strong, and during the flood an eddy sets N along this
River to Bethel is marked by seasonal buoys. The markers above    shore. The holding ground is good. Small craft can select from the
Kuskokwim River Buoy 12 are oil drums that are set to mark the    chart a place that affords the best shelter. A restricted anchorage
best water. The deepest draft that should attempt to reach Bethel is    for small vessels is about I mile S of the S entrance point, but
about 15 feet.                                                      local knowledge is necessary for its use. The sea from the outside
 (274)  Caution: In November 1983, the Coast Guard reported    is broken by the shoals off the entrance and does not reach the
that as a result of flooding in the area in May 1983, about 20 ocean    anchorage. With S or E winds, tide rips dangerous for small craft
shipping containers were washed into the Kuskokwim River from    occur in the channel. The spits at the entrance are shingle and
the riverbank at the village of Napakiak, about 12 miles SW of    steep-to.
Bethel. Reports indicate that several of the containers sank in the  (283) Platinum, at the inner end of the spit on the S side of the
river near the village, and the remainder of the containers were    entrance of Goodnews Bay, is the headquarters of a mining com-




298                                                     8. BERING SEA


pany and of most of the commercial activity in this area. The vil-    and small craft, but without protection from N. A small stream,
lage has semiweekly airmail service during the summer and    known as Indian River, flows into the E side of Carter Bay near
weekly service during the winter; an airplane landing strip is here.    two abandoned cabins formerly called Carter. Water can be
Radiotelephone and radiotelegraph communications are main-    obtained by boats from Indian River at high water.
tained.                                                             (297) Explorer Mountain is the highest peak N of Goodnews
 (284) Groceries, general supplies, petroleum products, and    Bay. From S it appears as a long ridge, and is recognized by three
water are available at Platinum. The small-boat basin just S of the    deep gulleys on its side. From W it appears as a pyramid peak, the
oil-storage tanks on the NE side of South Spit can be entered only    highest of the group.
at high water as the entrance bares at low water. A road leads from  (298)  Tooth Mountain, a flat-topped mountain in the front
the village to the storage tanks and boat basin. The platinum mines    range, has a sharp, rocky pinnacle on the N edge of its summit. It
are about 15 miles SE of the village.                              is easily recognized from the vicinity of Carter Spit.
 (285) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-    (299) Figure IV Mountain is a sharp peak in the front range E
sory for all vessels navigating the inside waters of the State of    of Jacksmith Bay. The deep ravines on the side of this mountain
Alaska. (See Pilotage, chapter 3, for details.)                    form a Roman numeral IV, that is conspicuous from W when the
 (286) The Bering Sea is served by the Alaska Marine Pilots and    ravines are filled with snow. In the latter part of the summer, the
Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.                               snow disappears from the ravines.
 (287)  Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots    (300)  Cone Mountain is a large conical mountain in the first
and en route to Goodnews Bay can meet the pilot boat about 7.5    range.
miles SW of Platinum (59ï¿½01.0'N., 161049.4'W.).                     (301) Yukon Hill is low but is the N end of the front range par-
 (288) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "GOODNEWS       alleling the coast; it is visible from the entrance of Eek Channel.
BAY PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearranged    From W the hill is not distinguishable, as it has the receding range
frequency between pilot and agent/vessel.                          for a background.
 (289) Beluga Hill is a prominent conical hill, 924 feet high, with  (302) Thumb Mountain is a fairly sharp summit in the range
a steep, rocky face that rises abruptly from the N side of Good-    that recedes from Jacksmith Bay. From off Quinhagak it resembles
news Bay. Although lower than the mountains behind it, the hill    a huge thumb placed on a high flat mountain plateau. As Eek
usually stands out prominently from all parts of Kuskokwim Bay.    Island is approached, the mountain appears as a less distinctive
 (290) To enter Goodnews Bay from a point about 2.5 miles S by    ridge.
W of the entrance, stand in on the NE-SW range on course 037ï¿½       (303) Jacksmith Bay, the large indention 14 miles N of Carter
until the E-W range, nearing 090ï¿½30', closes; then steer 000ï¿½ for    Spit, is bare at low tide.
about 0.7 mile or until abeam of W tangent of the spit; then follow  (304) Quinhagak, 66 miles N of Cape Newenham, is difficult to
South Spit at a distance of 0.25 mile, and cross the entrance to the    approach by water because of the great mudflats bordering its
small-boat anchorage.                                              shores. Launches can enter the river here only at the highest tides,
 (291) To go to the anchorage in the N part of the bay, round    and even small craft can hardly get within sight of the village and
North Spit at a distance of 300 yards and steer 312ï¿½ for the high    remain afloat at low water. Supplies are landed with great diffi-
bluffs on the W side of the bay. Hold this course for about 2 miles,    culty, because of the extensive flats and their exposure. Quinhagak
or until the E side of Beluga Hill is in range with the flat-topped    has a Moravian mission, a store, and a school. Radiotelegraph
mountain just back of Goodnews Bay village. Then head up to    communications are maintained. A limited amount of supplies
Beluga Hill and hold the range until up to the anchorage under the    may be procured. The church steeple is sometimes visible from
mountain.                                                          Eek Channel. Kanektok River, entering Kuskokwim Bay at
 (292)  About 6 feet of water will be found here at low tide. In    Quinhagak, runs fine clear mountain water at all stages of the tide.
1913 the survey ship YUKON was at anchor here during a N gale.      (305) Warehouse Bluff, a long dark-colored bluff about 11
There is no protection in S or E weather. A stream enters the bay    miles NW of Quinhagak, is an important landmark, as it is the first
here. The bay has a good shingle beach.                            land on the E bank to be sighted when ascending Eek Channel. No
 (293) It should be noted that this route has not been surveyed,    objects on the W shore are visible until approaching the head of
and there may be, in places, less than 6 feet of water at low tide.    Eek Channel.
This route should be used with caution and only on a rising tide.   (306) Warehouse Creek, 2 miles above Warehouse Bluff, is
Keep sounding constantly. On the bluffs at the foot of Beluga Hill    deep and can be approached through a long tortuous channel that
is a cabin.                                                        can be followed by small craft when the mudflats are bare. Small
 (294) The UNITED, drawing 16 feet, was taken into Goodnews    craft may find shelter here. The greatest range of tide in the bay
Bay. Good anchorage is reported in 7 to 11 fathoms, 2 miles NNE    occurs in the vicinity of Warehouse Creek. Inside the creek there
from the bay entrance on line to Beluga Hill. This indicates that    is just swinging room for a 75-foot vessel riding to 15 fathoms of
deep water can be carried farther into the bay in the main channel    chain.
than is indicated on the chart.                                     (307) In the early days trading schooners ascended the bay only
 (295)  Goodnews Bay (Goodnews) is a small village with a    to Warehouse Creek. Natives and traders from various bay and
school at the head of Goodnews Bay. The channel to the village is   river points assembled here to await the coming of the schooner.
shallow and winding so that local knowledge is desirable, but can    At one time some small warehouses were built here, but no trace
be followed by small boats at low water when the bars are visible.  of them now remain.
 (296)  Carter Spit (59ï¿½19.0'N., 162ï¿½00.0'W.), on the E side of     (308)  Kuskokwak Creek flows into the E side of the bay 4
Kuskokwim Bay, is a low sandspit about 4.5 miles long and from    miles S of Beacon Point. It is approached through a short channel
50 to 300 yards wide. Carter Spit encloses Carter Bay, which is a    across the flats and affords a good shelter for launches and other
wide area of shoals and mudflats. Around the end of the sandspit a    small craft. Just inside the mouth of this creek is a depth of 4 fath-
narrow channel is scoured out, affording anchorage for launches    oms.





                                                        8. BERING SEA                                                         299


 (309) 'At Cape Avinof, on the W side of Kuskokwim Bay, the E    continental air becomes quite dominant, and Bethel's climate
shore of the Bering Sea turns NW.                                  becomes quite similar to other areas farther inland. Extremes of
 (310) Kwigillingok is a native village on the W side of the bay    temperature registered during these periods of dominant continen-
near the mouth of the Kwigillingok River. The approach to Kwig-    tal type climate range 1420 F from -52ï¿½ F in January to 900 F in
illingok is unsurveyed. Seasonal, unlighted oil drums mark the    June. Average temperatures through the entire winter season, how-
river channel and its approaches but pilotage or local knowledge is   ever, are considerably higher than those experienced in the Alaska
required due to constantly changing conditions. In 1994, reported    interior, and temperatures for the entire summer season average
depths in the river channel to the village and the buoyed approach    considerably cooler than in the Alaska interior. Annual precipita-
were 3-12 feet. There are no piers or docks in the village so small    tion averages nearly 19 inches. August is usually the wettest
boats tie off the bank or beach themselves. Pilotage can be    month, with an average of slightly over 4 inches of precipitation.
arranged by contacting "MAMIE 2" or "Council office" on VHF-    Thunderstorms are rare, the average being about two a year: The
FM channel 22. Telephone, mail, fuel, groceries, outboard motor    few thunderstorms that do occur are generally short in duration,
repair, and a health clinic are available in the village.          but rather severe. They usually develop and move out of the NE
 (311) Beacon Point, 12 miles N of Warehouse Bluff, is flat and    during June and July. Snowfall averages about 50 inches per year.
barely above storm high water. A line between Beacon Point and      (319) (See page T-10 for Bethel Climatological Table.)
Popokamiut, a native fishing village on the W  shore opposite       (320) At Bethel there is a large Alaskan Native Health Service
Beacon Point, is considered the dividing line between Kuskokwim    Hospital, a National Guard Armory, a Moravian mission, several
River and Kuskokwim Bay. The W shore of Kuskokwim Bay has    churches, hotels, and stores that are the distributors for the
not been surveyed.                                                 Kuskokwim district. Direct telephone communication, provisions,
 (312) Eek Island is a grass-covered mudflat cut up by deep    gasoline, and fuel oil are available. A limited amount of coal is
sloughs, and is covered by the higher tides. The island is a feeding    kept on hand.
ground for many thousands of ducks and geese.                       (321)  A large well-equipped airfield with a weather station and a
 (313) West Point is a fishing camp on the W bank of the river    FAA flight service station is 3 miles W of Bethel and is serviced
just above Eek Island. The mudbank making out from West Point    by an all-weather road. Daily airmail and transportation services
has extended itself considerably since the time of the survey.     with Anchorage are maintained.
 (314) Eek River is a large tributary flowing into the Kuskokwim    (322)  Communication between Bethel and the numerous outly-
River on its E side just above Eek Island. It is navigable by    ing villages is by floatplanes.
launches for 15 to 20 miles. The river rises in the mountains about  (323)  Ocean vessels make several trips during the summer
60 miles distant; its waters are muddy and silt laden.             between Seattle and Bethel, transporting freight and equipment
 (315) Eek, on the E side of the Eek River about 8-miles by boat    that are distributed from Bethel over a large area. A considerable
from its mouth, is a large Indian village with a general store and    amount is shipped upriver on barges and river steamers to the
school. Daily radio schedules are maintained with Bethel. Limited    many native villages along the river.
supplies of gasoline and canned goods are available.                (324) At Aniak, 125 miles from Bethel by river steamer, is an
 (316) Bethel, 65 miles up the Kuskokwim River, is considered    airfield. Limited supplies of gasoline, fuel oil, and provisions are
the head of ocean navigation. From here river boats operate to    available. General stores and a hotel are in the village.
points on the upper river. The diurnal range of tide is 4.0 feet, but  (325) Radiotelephone and radiotelegraph communications are
the stage of the river influences the depth.                       maintained.
 (317) Weather.-The two main topographical features affecting      (326)  McGrath, 400 miles above the mouth, is the head of navi-
Bethel's climate are (1) the Bering Sea, which is about 100 miles    gation on the Kuskokwim River.
to the W and SW; and (2) the Kilbuck Range of mountains, about      (327) Radiotelephone and radiotelegraph communications are
40 miles to the E and SE of the station. This range, averaging    maintained.
about 4,000 feet in height, extends roughly in a N-S direction in   (328) Routes.-Enter Kuskokwim Bay about 2 miles W of Cape
that part nearest to Bethel. Some 160 miles SE of the Kilbuck    Newenham, and make good a 028ï¿½ course for about 6 miles until
Range, the Aleutians, extending in a NE-SW direction, provides    the cape bears 1900; thence steer 010ï¿½ with Cape Newenham
an additional natural barrier to many of the storms originating on    directly astern for about 18 miles until Beluga Hill bears 065" and
the outward end of the Aleutian Chain and moving out through the    Red Mountain 121". From this position, steer 341ï¿½ for about 13
Gulf of Alaska. Both ranges tend to direct some of the storms NE   miles to a position 4 miles 256" from the elbow of Carter Spit.
into the Bering Sea, and thus directly affect the Bethel area. Dur-  (329) In thick or hazy weather a route nearer the coast may be
ing invasions of such storms, it is not uncommon for wind veloci-    taken as follows: Pass 0.5 mile off Cape Newenham and Bird
ties to exceed 50 m.p.h. Maximum speeds usually accompany NE       Rock, and then make good a 070" course for about 6.5 miles until
winds in the winter and SE winds in the summer. During the win-    Castle Rock, the SW headland of Security Cove, bears 177ï¿½.
ter, strong S winds tend to be considerably affected by the moun-    Strong tidal currents occur along the N shore of Cape Newenham.
tains to the S, producing at times, a pronounced foehn (chinook)    From here steer 357ï¿½ with Castle Rock astern for 14 miles until
effect. Temperatures have risen almost 50ï¿½F in less than 24 hours    the summit of Red Mountain is abeam, thence 341ï¿½ for 19.5 miles
under these conditions.                                            to a position 4 miles 2560 from the elbow of Carter Spit.
  (318) Bethel's climate is somewhat more maritime than conti-      (330) Next steer 302ï¿½ for 5.5 miles with Beluga Hill in range
nental in character, which tends to modify daily temperature    with Pyramid Mountain astern, then head up the channel on a 006"
extremes during most of the year. However, there are usually two    course.
periods during the year when the area becomes affected by conti-    (331) Vessels should arrange to make this point at the last of the
nental climatic influences. In June and July, temperatures in the    ebb, and go up the channel with the flood. After heading on the
area rise noticeably under the influence of warmer continental air.    006ï¿½ course, the long shoal on the E side of the channel should be
Around the latter part of December and early January, cold, clear    made out, either heaping or breaking. It is only with a very smooth





300                                                       8. BERING SEA


sea that this shoal is not in evidence at low water. After continuing  (343) (See Tidal Current Tables for predictions in Kuskokwim
on this course for about 10 miles, the long shoal on the W side of    Bay and River.) Variations from the predicted times and velocities,
the channel should be made out, either heaping or breaking. This    because of freshets and winds, may be expected.
shoal should be followed at a distance of about I mile until its N     (344)  Weather.-The best weather usually occurs in March and
extremity is reached. Here it becomes a mudflat, bare at about half,   April. During the summer, SE to SW gales are frequent and last
tide, of a yellowish color with deep water close-to. This flat is the    from 2 to 5 days. These storms gradually blow themselves out and
leading mark for entering Eek Channel, therefore it should always    are generally followed by a few days of good weather. In the early
be made at low water.                                                fall, N winds are frequent and are usually accompanied by clear
 (332) From here, the track veers W  and follows the flats on the    skies. After mid-September, strong gales become frequent and
W  side of the channel on a course of about 000ï¿½ for some 13    prolonged.
miles.                                                                 (345) (See page T-21 for dates of ice breakup and freezeup.)
 (333)  It is reported that extensive changes have taken place N of   (346)  Water can be obtained from small streams in Security
59ï¿½36'N. The chart is no longer a sufficient guide with respect to    Cove, Goodnews Bay, and Carter Bay. In the vicinity of Eek
the channels.                                                        Island, the river water is fresh at all stages of the tide; it is very
 (334)  In proceeding upriver the passage W of Eek Island is used.    muddy, but the silt settles readily.
A crossover from Eek Channel to the W channel is made in an
area subject to considerable change. It is generally necessary to     (347)  Chart 16380.-The Pribilof Islands, in the Bering Sea
wait for nearly high water before making a crossover to the W        about 200 miles NW of Unimak Pass, consist of St. Paul, St.
channel. Navigation in this region is difficult, and a pilot and his    George, Otter, and Walrus Islands; the latter two are small and
launch should be employed. There are no landmarks visible; if    uninhabited. St. Paul and St. George have the largest and most
buoys are in place the crossover is much easier.                     numerous fur seal rookeries in the world. The group is under-the
 (335)  Pilotage.-In 1994, the Coast Guard Cutter IRONWOOD          jurisdiction of the National Marine Fisheries Service and is
reported pilotage for transiting the river to Bethel could be    patrolled during the sealing season by vessels of the U.S. Coast
arranged by contacting HUSKY SECOND or CHEETAH on 4125               Guard, under provisions of the international treaty governing seal-
kHz or VHF-FM channel 22. The pilot boards at Kuskokwim              ing. From June 1 to October 15, the fur seal breeding and birthing
River Buoy 7.                                                        season, landing is forbidden at the rookeries in the vicinity of
 (336)  E side of Eek Island.-The channel along the N side of    English Bay, Reef Point, Lukanin Point, Polovina Point, and
Eek Island, once used by power schooners, has shoaled until it is    Northeast Point on St. Paul Island. Walrus and Otter Islands are
now bare at low water and is used only by small fishing boats.    bird reservations, landing is prohibited at all times, unless a permit
Small vessels now go as far as Apokak Creek. From Beacon Point    is obtained from the National Marine Fisheries Service.
the channel follows the E bank of the river.                          (348)  Radiotelephone and radiotelegraph services are main-
 (337)  Passage W of Eek Island.-Once in the W channel, follow    tained on St. Paul Island and St. George Island. In addition, inter-
the W bank of the river SW of Eek Island for 4 miles. The course    island radio and satellite communications are maintained.
then bears out into the river towards Eek Island. From here the        (349)  A supply vessel makes several trips a year between Seattle
channel crosses to the E bank and continues to Bethel, crossing    and the Pribilof Islands (St. George and St. Paul).
back and forth many times. There are no leading marks, and at         (350)  There are no landlocked harbors about the islands, but safe
some of the crossings it is necessary to wait for high water. A pilot    anchorage is always available on the lee sides. Residents of St.
is necessary.                                                        Paul Island say that the prevailing wind during the summer is from
 (338)  In 1994, the Coast Guard Cutter IRONWOOD reported    the NE, which makes Village Cove on St. Paul Island a good
good anchorage can be made just off Popokamiut, on the W  side    anchorage in all but severe SW winds. The bottom in Village Cove
of the mouth of the river, in hard mud bottom.                       is black sand, and the holding ground is good. During SW winds
 (339)  Vessels coming downriver stand out to sea from abreast of    good anchorage is available in. Lukanin Bay on the SE side of St.
Carter Spit. In entering, this track is not used because of the possi-    Paul Island.
bility of running up a blind channel.                                 (351)  The following regulations are from 50 CFR, Wildlife and
 (340)  Tides.-The diurnal range of tide is 12.2 feet at Kuskok-     Fisheries:
wak Creek entrance and 4.0 feet at Bethel.                             (352)  Part 215-Pribilof Islands
 (341)  Currents.-The currents of Kuskokwim Bay and River are         (353)  Subpart C-Administration
strong, attaining velocities of 5 knots at times. A strong tidal cur-  (354)  ï¿½215.21 Visits to fur seal rookeries.
rent sweeps past Cape Newenham, setting approximately N and S.        (355) From June 1 to October 15 of each year, no person, except
Along the N side of the cape, tidal currents of about 1 knot have    those authorized by a representative of the National Marine Fish-
been observed setting NE and SW. In general, the currents set in    eries Service, or accompanied by an authorized employee of the
directions parallel to the axes of the channels between the shoals.    National Marine Fisheries Service, shall approach any fur seal
In the channel leading to Goodnews Bay, about 1 mile from the N      rookery or hauling grounds nor pass beyond any posted sign for-
end of South Spit, flood and ebb each has a velocity of about 2.5    bidding passage.
knots, setting NE and SW, respectively. In the deep channels off      (356)  ï¿½215.22 Dogs prohibited.
Jacksmith Bay the flood current has a velocity usually of about 2      (357) In order to prevent molestation of fur seal herds, the land-
to 2.5 knots at strength, and the ebb from 2.5 to 3 knots. In the    ing of any dogs at Pribilof Islands is prohibited.
vicinity of Apokak Creek, the strongest current observed was 3.5       (358)  ï¿½215.23 Importation of birds or mammals.
knots. The flood current is felt only about as far as Bethel.          (359) No mammals or birds, except household cats, canaries,
 (342)  By arriving at the entrance to Eek Channel on the last of    and parakeets, shall be imported to the Pribilof Islands without the
the ebb, a favorable current can be carried nearly to Bethel, pro-    permission of an authorized representative of the National Marine
viding there are no delays.                                          Fisheries Service.




                                                         8. BERING SEA                                                         301


 (360) ï¿½215.24 (Reserved)                                         In the other 4 years, navigation remained easy throughout 1 year
 (361) ï¿½215.25 Walrus and Otter Islands.                          and became restricted to full-powered vessels for short periods in
 (362) By Executive Order 1044, dated February 27, 1909, Wal-    March and April of 3 years; at no time did navigation become sus-
rus and Otter Islands were set aside as birdreservations. All per-    pended or require the use of an icebreaker.
sons are prohibited to land on these islands except those           (376) In 1974, a pinnacle was reported 68 miles WNW of St.
authorized by the appropriate representative of the National    Paul Island in 57ï¿½39.2'N., 173024.0'W. (see chart 16006). Depth
Marine Fisheries Service.                                          of water over the pinnacle is not known.
 (363) ï¿½215.26 Local regulations.
 (364) Local regulations will be published from time to time and    (377)  Chart 16381.St. George Island, the southernmost of the
will be brought to the attention of local residents and persons    Pribilof Islands, consists mainly of high volcanic hills and ridges,
assigned to duty on the Islands by posting in public places and    and its entire coast is a precipitous cliff except for a few miles on
brought to the attention of tourists by personal notice.           the N side and short intervals at Garden Cove and Zapadni Bay.
 (365) ï¿½215.27 Wildlife research.                                 The E and W extremities of the island, Tolstoi Point and Dalnoi
 (366)  (a) Wildlife research, other than research on North Pacific    Point, are bold promontories. High Bluffs, on the N side of the
fur seals, including specimen collection, may be permitted on the    island, 1,012 feet high, is a prominent landmark and is visible
Pribilof Islands subject to the following conditions: (1) Any per-    from St. Paul Island, a distance of nearly 40 miles, on a clear day.
son or agency, seeking to conduct such research shall first obtain
any Federal or State of Alaska permit required for the type of      (378) St. George Harbor, on the SE side of Zapadni Bay, is the
research involved.                                                 only harbor on St. George Island. The channel is dredged with a
                                                                    controlling depth of 17 feet. The entrance is protected by break-
 (367) (2) Any person seeking to conduct such research shall    waters and marked by a 076ï¿½ lighted range and daybeacons.
obtain prior approval of the Director, Pribilof Islands Program,    There are two docks on the E side of the basin; N dock is 60 feet
National Marine Fisheries Service, National Oceanic and Atmo-    and S dock is 75 feet, both with 19 feet alongside and staging
spheric Administration, 1700 Westlake Avenue North, Seattle,    areas  An additional 250 feet of moorage is provided by dolphins
Wash. 98109, by filing with the Director an application which
                                                                    on the W side with 22 feet alongside. The harbormaster assigns
                                                                    berths (telephone 907-859-2263) and monitors VHF-FM channels
 (368) (i) Copies of the required Federal and State of Alaska per-    16 and 12. Water, sewage pumpout, a boat ramp, and marine sup-
mits; and                                                          plies are available. The harbor is owned and operated by the vil-
 (369)  (ii) A resume of the intended research program.           lage of St. George. Anchorage can be had at North Anchorage,
 (370)  (3) All approved research shall be subject to all regula-    Garden Cove, and Zapadni Bay, according to the direction of the
tions and administrative procedures in effect on the Pribilof    wind; the anchorages are poor except with the wind directly off
Islands, and such research shall not commence until approval from    the land. At a distance generally not greater than 2 miles from the
                                                                    island the depth of the water is but little less than the surrounding
 (371)  (4) Any approved research program shall be subject to    sea, and in thick weather it is not safe to depend upon soundings
such terms and conditions as the Director, Pribilof Islands Pro-    for picking up the land unless sure of the position. Vessels should
gram deems appropriate.                                            not approach the island in less than 12 fathoms of water. There are
 (372)  (5) Permission to utilize the Pribilof Islands to conduct an    no outlying dangers except the rock awash 0.6 mile NE of East
approved research program may be revoked by the Director,    Landing, and the small reefs at Zapadni Bay and North Anchor-
Pribilof Islands Program at any time for noncompliance with any    age. A rocky shoal, covered 13/4 fathoms, is 9.3 miles 0780 from
terms and conditions, or for violations of any regulation or admin-    Tolstoi Point.
istrative procedure in effect on the Pribilof Islands.
                                                                     p379) The anchorage in Zapadni Bay, on the SW side of the
 (373) Weather.-Fogs are especially thick and prevalent in this       9  The anchorage    Zapadn         , on the SW side of th
                                                                    island, in 10 fathoms, affords shelter with winds from ENE to
vicinity in the summer, and navigation is attended with difficulty    NNW. A reef extends about 0.2 mile offshore S of the anchorage.
and danger. A navigator should plan to make landfalls in the
Pribilof Islands during the summer based on no land being visible.  (380) With N winds, a landing may sometimes be made at Gar-
One annoying characteristic of the area is very thick fog accompa-    den Cove S of Tolstoi Point, on the sand beach. The anchorage
nying strong winds. Logs from survey vessels indicate that a typi-    affords shelter from NW winds, but with the exception of a small
cal summer day in the Pribilof Islands is as follows: Dense fog at    area the bottom is rocky.
daylight, vessels anchored 200 yards distant not visible, calm sea,  (381) Currents.-In the open water the tidal current is rotary,
light airs; by noon intermittent sun, a wet drifting fog, gentle    turning clockwise. Along the N and S shores of the island the cur-
breeze; by evening a dense fog, winds increased to force 6. Dense    rent in general sets E on the flood and W on the ebb. The largest
fog with visibility less than 0.5 mile is more common around St.    velocity observed over a period of about 6 days in July and August
Paul Island than around St. George Island. An unusual characteris-    was about 1.5 knots. With opposing wind and current, tide rips
tic off North Anchorage, St. George Island, was clear visibility    occur off Tolstoi and Dalnoi Points. These rips are not heavy
along the shore accompanied by dense curtainlike fog to seaward.   enough to be of any consequence, except that to strangers they
  (374) Winds do not continue to blow from the same quarter for    appear to be breakers. The water is deep off both points, which can
any length of time. From December through April winds blow    be passed close-to with safety.
from the NE more than from the other directions. After September    (382) The approach to North Anchorage is marked by a private
1, gales are frequent and violent, and blow from all directions.   marker about 0.5 mile N of St. George. The most prominent land-
  (375) Ice.-The Pribilofs are near the S limit of the ice in Bering    marks in the village of St. George are the white roofs of the quad-
Sea. On rare occasions the icefields extend as far as 35 miles S of    rangle of sheds, low down at the water's edge. The roofs loom up
St. George Island. In 7 years of National Weather Service ice    first through the fog. Also conspicuous is a tight group of build-
records at St. Paul Island, no sea ice at all was reported in 3 years.    ings on the slope and ridge back from the beach. Most easily iden-





302                                                     8. BERING SEA


tified is the-Russian Orthodox church whose bell tower has a green    high, near the E end, are conspicuous and the best landmarks in
onion-shaped roof topped by a white St. Andrew's cross.            clear weather when coming from S. From this latter hill the island
 (383) Vessels should keep the street which extends through the    stretches away, in a low, narrow neck to Hutchinson Hill, about
village bearing 164ï¿½. Good anchorage will be found about 700    100 feet high, on Northeast Point. W of Lukanin Bay the coast
yards from the landing. There is swinging room for a 400-foot    of the S side of the island is rocky, with bluffs at the points. The
vessel riding to 45 fathoms of chain.                              shore of the rest of the island is generally a sand beach, with rocks
 (384) The landing is a square block of reinforced concrete next    in the vicinities of the seal rookeries. A radiobeacon is about 2.7
to a cutting in the rocks. The area around the landing, and for    miles NE of the village of St. Paul, and a tall loran tower is about
about 75 feet to seaward, practically bares at extreme low water.    0.8 mile SW of the beacon. An aerolight is about 0.5 mile ESE of
The landing can be used by small shallow-draft boats 3 hours on    the beacon.
either side of high water. A launching ramp is at North Anchorage.  (395) A rocky ledge covered less than 3 fathoms with no visible
 (385) East Landing, just NE of the village, is better protected    kelp is 5 miles NE of Northeast Point. Kelp-marked reefs extend
from a W swell. A ledge awash is a short distance off the landing.    about 0.4 mile SE from the two low points S of Northeast Point. A
If desired, a boat will come out to anchored vessels when landing    dangerous ledge with two rocks covered less than 2 fathoms is 1
is practicable.                                                    mile N of Hutchinson Hill. With a moderate swell the sea breaks
 (386) Local magnetic disturbance.-Differences of as much as    over these rocks.
11ï¿½ from the normal variation have been observed on St. George      (396)  On the N side of St. Paul Island, depths of 5 fathoms or
Island.                                                            more are I mile offshore.
 (387) The U.S. Public Health Service maintains a Native Health     (397) A shoal covered 2 fathoms is 7.5 miles W  of St. Paul
Services clinic in the village of St. George.                      Island.
 (388) Communications.-St. George Airport provides air ser-         (398) Breakers extend 0.3 mile of more off Southwest Point.
vices four times a week. Peninsula Airways Aircraft Charter will    (399) A dangerous ledge, usually marked by breakers, extends
provide air transportation in an emergency.                        0.6 mile SW and S from Reef Point, the S point of the island.
                                                                      (400) Sea Lion Rock, about 0.3 mile S of Reef Point, is promi-
 (389)  Chart 16382.-Otter Island, off the S side of St. Paul    nent when approaching the point from an E or W direction.
Island, has an abrupt bluff 288 feet high at its SW end, slopes     (401) A reef extends about 0.3 mile off Stony Point, the NE
gradually to the N, and rises again in a crater, about 141 feet high,    point of Lukanin Bay.
at its extreme E end. Foul ground, marked by kelp, extends about    (402) Pilotage, except for certain exempted vessels, is compul-
0.8 mile from the island on its S, SW, and N sides. The N side,    sory          for all vessels navigating the inside waters  of the State of
from Crater Point to Northwest Reef, is clear of dangers. Proba-
bly the best anchorage near the island is in 9V2 fathoms, black sand
and broken shells, with the NE extremity of Crater Point bearing    (403  The Bering Sea is served by the Alaska Marine Pilots and
185ï¿½, distant 0.5 mile. This island must be approached with great    Southwest Alaska Pilots Association.
caution in thick weather, and at all times a vessel should keep out  (404) Vessels using Southwest Alaska Pilots Association pilots
of kelp. A 38-foot shoal is 2.1 miles ENE of Otter Island.         and en route to St. Paul can meet the pilot boat about 4 miles W of
 (390) Between Otter Island and Reef Point, St. Paul Island, the    Reef Point (57006.5'N., 1701 7.7'W.).
tidal currents are strong, and with heavy winds the tide rips are   (405) The pilot boat can be contacted by calling "ST. PAUL
dangerous especially on the ebb current. In 1976, the NOAA Ship    PILOT BOAT" on VHF-FM channel 16 or on a prearranged fre-
SURVEYOR observed currents setting NW at about 2.5 knots    quency between pilot and agent/vessel.
about 2.1 miles SW of the SW end of Otter Island.                   (406) Anchorage.-The usual anchorage at St. Paul Island is W
 (391) Walrus Island, off the E side of St. Paul Island, is low,    of Village Cove between Zapadni Point and Reef Point in the
about 39 feet high, level on top, and composed of irregular masses    vicinity of the 10-fathom curve. The bottom, in general, is sandy,
of volcanic rock. It is very hard to pick up in thick weather. It is    but rocky bottom will be found in the vicinity of Zapadni Point
about 0.4 mile long and 0.1 mile wide. Anchorage in emergency    and Tolstoi Point. Anchorage can be found NE from Reef Point,
situations can be had on either side of it, 0.3 to 0.5 mile offshore,    off Black Bluffs and East Landing, and in Lukanin Bay.
in 10 to 15 fathoms. Landing can be made with smooth water, the     (407) Lukanin Bay has a sandy bottom and is used when W
best place being a small cove at the SW corner. The island is a bad    swells make the Village Cove anchorage undesirable. From the
place to make in a fog. Parts of both other and Walrus Islands are    Village Cove anchorage the village of St. Paul is obscured by a
covered with sea birds in the breeding season.                     bluff although it is in full view from the Black Bluffs anchorage.
 (392) Walrus Island is a Seller sea lion rookery site. There is a  (408) In the spring (April-May) as the ice edge moves N, the
3-mile vessel exclusionary zone around the entire island. (See 50    winds can radically change its configuration. Vessels anchoring in
CFR 227.12, chapter 2, for limits and regulations.)                Village Cove or other areas around the Pribilof Islands should
 (393)  Current observations made in July and August W of Wal-    maintain a careful ice watch so as not to become entrapped.
rus Island show that the current is rotary turning clockwise, with  (409) Vessels should not attempt to ride out a gale at anchor near
velocities exceeding 2 knots at times.                             the islands, unless to leeward and well sheltered. The surf is apt to
 (394) St. Paul Island, the northernmost of the Pribilof Islands,    make quickly and is dangerous on the weather side of the island.
is about 235 miles NW from Unimak Pass. The-W and SW parts          (410) Prominent in the approach to the anchorage off Village
of St. Paul Island are high and mountainous, with precipitous cliffs    Cove are the three large steel tanks on a bluff just W of the village.
at the coast. The rest of the island is a comparatively low, rolling    Also on the bluff, just to the N, are eight smaller white tanks. Ves-
plateau, with a number of extinct volcanic peaks scattered over its   sels should steer 082ï¿½ for the center of the three large steel tanks
surface. Bogoslof Hill, 590 feet high, a conical crater near the cen-    and anchor in about 8 fathoms with Reef Point and the center of
ter of the island, and Polovina Hill, double-peaked and 470 feet    Sea Lion Rock in range.




                                                        8. BERING SEA                                                         303


 (411) Zapadni Point, Tolstoi Point, and Reef Point, 2.5 miles      (421) Tides and currents.-The diurnal range of the tide at Vil-
WNW, 0.6 mile NW, and 1 mile SW of Village Cove, respectively,    lage Cove is 3.2 feet. Around the island the current sets NW on the
are the best radar targets in the area at a range of 5 to 7 miles.  flood and S on the ebb, following the trend of the shore. The great-
 (412) In September 1993, an obstruction with an unknown depth    est velocity occurs at Northeast Point and between Reef Point and
was reported 0.7 mile SE of Zapadni Point in about 57ï¿½08'1 2"N.,    Otter Island. Average velocity at strength of current is I to 2 knots,
170019'54"W.                                                      but with continued strong winds from one direction it may
 (413) Village Cove is protected by breakwaters marked by    increase to 3 knots.
lights. Depths of 23 feet are available in the entrance and the har-  (422) There are heavy rips around Northeast and Southwest
bor by staying in the S section of the harbor near the shore. The    Points, also between Reef Point and Otter Island, where they are
harbor shoals rapidly in the NE section. There are three main    worse on the ebb. The tides and tidal currents are greatly influ-
docks with depths of about 23 feet alongside and deck heights of    enced by the winds.
11 feet. Caution should be used when approaching the harbor as
heavy swells may still break near the entrance.                     (423)  Chart 16006.-Nunivak Island, in the Bering Sea near the
 (414) St. Paul, about midway along a peninsula extending from    Alaska mainland, is about 330 miles N of Unimak Pass. Danger-
the S side of St. Paul Island, has small wooden dwellings painted    ous shoals and uneven bottom have been reported and are shown
white with dark-colored roofs, a church, hotel, a small hospital,    on the chart; the island should be approached with extreme cau-
several large buildings, and a machine shop with limited facilities.    tion.
The hospital patients requiring surgery are transferred to Anchor-  (424) From W, Nunivak Island shows gentle slopes terminating
age by jet medevac. A 10-ton marine skidway is available for    seaward in reddish cliffs 150 to 462 feet high. The highest point of
emergency repairs.                                                 the W part of the island rises to 866 feet 10 miles ESE from Cape
 (415) A commercial airline provides weekly mail and passenger    Mohican. Near the center of the island is Roberts Mountain,
service to and from Anchorage via Cold Bay or Dutch Harbor    1,675 feet high, the highest of a group; this mountain is built up of
when weather permits. A weather station and a loran station are on    a series of volcanic benches, the top being the steep side of a
St. Paul Island. The weather station monitors CB channel 9, and    breached crater. The E end of the island is low, for the most part,
the loran station monitors VHF-FM channel 16 (156.80 MHz).         except for some low hills and Twin Mountain, a breached crater
 (416) Landing is forbidden at the fur seal rookeries on St. Paul    627 feet high.
Island during the breeding season, June 1 to October 15.            (425) In clear weather the island generally can be made out for
 (417) Weather.-The climate is typically maritime, resulting in    30 miles from any direction. The island is inhabited by herds of
considerable cloudiness, heavy fog, high humidity, and rather well    reindeer.
restricted daily temperature ranges. Humidities remain uniformly    (426) In 1899 the U.S.S. CORWIN cruised completely around
high from May to late September, and during the summer period    Nunivak Island, following the shore and outlying islands at a dis-
there is almost continuous low cloudiness and occasional heavy    tance of about 2 miles, and found general depths of 7 to 10 fath-
fog. The differences between average maximum and minimum    oms. The coast is generally abrupt and rocky, with numerous
temperatures for the entire year are only slightly above 7ï¿½ F, and    bights in which anchorage was found in 3 V2 to 7 fathoms.
the greatest monthly variation in March is slightly less than 12ï¿½ F.  (427) Cape Mohican, the W point of Nunivak Island, is a nar-
Temperatures remain on the cool side even during the summer,    row promontory about 2 miles long. The point of the cape is a cliff
and the highest temperature on record is 64ï¿½ F in August of both    266 feet high from which the terrain descends E to 150 feet for 2
1936 and 1941. Extreme highs in summertime usually range    miles before ascending gradually to the higher ground inland.
around the middle fifties. Although record low readings fall well   (428) Cape Mohican Light (60012.7'N., 167ï¿½27.5'W.), 285 feet
below the zero mark, such extremely cold days are rather rare. On  above the water, is shown seasonally from a skeleton tower with a
the average only 5 days each winter season have temperatures fall-    red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the end of the cape.
ing below the zero mark.                                            (429) A shoal about 1 mile wide extends 5 miles 050ï¿½ from
 (418) Despite an environment of high humidities, precipitation   Cape Mohican and has depths of 2 to 4 fathoms over it. The shoal
on St. Paul Island is surprisingly light. The annual average is    area should be avoided until it has been completely surveyed. The
slightly above 24 inches, which is slightly below the average for    10-fathom curve extends 7.5 miles 058ï¿½ from the cape.
Alaska as a whole. The greatest 24-hour precipitation on record     (430) In 1979, the U.S. Coast Guard Cutter IRONWOOD
fell slightly short of 2 inches. April is generally the driest month,    reported possible shoreline charting inaccuracies on the NW side
with a gradual increase of precipitation until a mean monthly total    of Nunivak Island between Cape Mohican and Nash Harbor. Until
of over 3 inches is reached during August, September, and Octo-    surveys are made of this area, mariners are advised to use caution
ber. This is followed by a gradual decrease during the succeeding    when using shoreline features for navigation.
months until the return of April. Thunderstorms are extremely rare  (431) Nash Harbor, on the N coast of Nunivak Island 16 miles
on St. Paul Island. The only isolated occurrence ever reported was    E of Cape Mohican, is a good anchorage except with winds from
in June 1939.                                                      NW through N to NE. The coast to the W  of the harbor is fairly
 (419) Frequent windy periods are characteristic of the island    high and is backed by cliffs, while to the NE it is low. The S side
area throughout the year. Frequent storms occur from October to    of the harbor has a sand-and-gravel beach at the foot of a 30-foot
April, and these often are accompanied by gale force winds to pro-    bluff. The bottom slopes gradually from 10 fathoms outside Nash
duce general blizzard conditions. Under the influence of pro-    Harbor to the beach at the head.
longed N and NE winds between January and April, the ice pack       (432) The harbor is 1.5 miles wide and about 1 mile in depth.
occasionally moves S to surround the island. During recent years,    The bottom is sand except near the rocky parts of the shore, and
the S limit of this movement has been between St. Paul and St.    there are no indications of dangers over a large 4- to 6-fathom area
George Islands, some 40 miles to the SE of St. Paul.               in midharbor. Boats usually land off the village of Nash Harbor,
 (420) (See page T-9 for St. Paul Island Climatological Table.)   on the W side of a creek that empties into the SW part of the har-




304                                                      8. BERING SEA


bor; however, there are boulders close to shore at this landing as    fathoms were found in 59ï¿½59.0'N., 164ï¿½56.0'W. Proceeding essen-
well as in the cove on the W shore. The creek drains a lake, but the    tially W  from that position, depths increased to 5 fathoms, then
water is brackish because the lake level is affected by the tides.    quickly shoaled to 13/4 fathoms in 60ï¿½01.0'N., 165ï¿½05.0'W. The
The lake freezes every winter and makes an excellent landing    bottom was sand and mud. The 3-fathom shoal centered in
place for airplanes fitted with skis; it is also large enough for sea-    59049.0'N., 164055.0'W. was found in charted position. The
planes to use in summer.                                            STORIS further reported that the depths were found to be gener-
 (433)  In 1951, the survey ship PATHFINDER made the    ally as noted on chart 16006 in the area SE of the charted shoals
approach to Nash Harbor (see chart 16006) on course 090ï¿½ for 21     and changes in depth were very gradual.
miles from a position 4.5 miles N of Cape Mohican until abeam of     (443) In May 1977, the NOAA Ship MILLER FREEMAN
the harbor, then steered 180ï¿½ for midharbor to anchorage in 6 fath-    reported shoaling to 41/4 fathoms centered in about 59ï¿½49.9'N.,
oms.                                                                165ï¿½33.0'W. Caution is advised in this area.
 (434)  Cape Etolin, 40 miles ENE of Cape Mohican, is the            (444)  Cape Manning is 15 miles SE of Cape Etolin. Triangle
northernmost point of Nunivak Island. The cape is a narrow strip    Island is 5 miles NW of Cape Manning and 2 miles from the near-
of land with a ridge of low hills midway along its outer part; it   est shore of the main island, with foul ground reported between.
appears as two or more islands from a distance W. A small island     (445) Cape Corwin, 20 miles S of Cape Manning, is the east-
is about 2 miles off the end of the cape; between are ledges. A     ernmost point of Nunivak Island. The cape is low and has a rocky
dangerous rocky area extends W  from Cape Etolin for about 1.5    shore on its N side. The two peaks of Twin Mountain are 7 miles
miles.                                                              NNW of the point of Cape Corwin and can be seen for 25 miles in
 (435)  Cape Etolin Light (60026.3'N., 166ï¿½10.0'W.), 40 feet    clear weather.
above the water, is shown seasonally from a skeleton tower near      (446)  Cape Mendenhall, 18 miles WSW of Cape Corwin, is the
the N tip of Cape Etolin.                                           southernmost point of Nunivak Island. The cape is 255 feet high
 (436) Mekorynk, about 2 miles W of the inner end of Cape Eto-    and has a low rock bluff 10 to 20 feet high on its E side. A 23/4-
lin, and Nash Harbor are the only villages on Nunivak Island that    fathom shoal is 4 miles SW of Cape Mendenhall.
are inhabited the year round. A weather station is maintained at     (447)  During a N blow in August 195 1, the survey ship
Mekoryuk, and the village has weekly mail service by air; radio-    EXPLORER found satisfactory anchorage in 8'/2 fathoms about
telegraph communication is maintained.                              10 miles NW of Cape Mendenhall. The anchorage is about 1.5
 (437)  Anchorage can be found NW of Mekoryuk in 25 to 32 feet    miles off the beach of the second bight NW of the cape and is pro-
of water.                                                           tected from NW through N to E. As the ship approached on a NE
 (438)  In 1951, the PATHFINDER anchored on the W  side of    course, the water shoaled uniformly from 14 to 81/2 fathoms. The
Cape Etolin, 4.5 miles NW of Mekoryuk, in 5 fathoms, sand bot-    fine gray sand bottom is good holding ground. Currents along the
tom, on bearings 0800 to N tangent of Cape Etolin, 089ï¿½30' to    coast had velocities estimated to be as much as I knot.
highest knoll on Cape Etolin, 122ï¿½ to center of schoolhouse, the     (448)  From Cape Mendenhall the coast extends NW for about
largest building in Mekoryuk, and 246ï¿½ to N tangent of point 5.5    40 miles to what may be called the SW cape of Nunivak Island.
miles to the SW. From this anchorage the N tangent of Cape Etolin    The few soundings obtained show deep water fairly close to shore,
was open 001ï¿½30' from the S tangent of Cape Vancouver. The    and it is apparently safe to follow the shore at a distance of 2
anchorage was approached from W on a heading of 092ï¿½ for the    miles. Depths of 43/4 to 6 fathoms have been found on an extensive
highest knoll on Cape Etolin. The approach should be made with    shoal about 10 miles off this stretch of coast.
caution as the area shoals rapidly and the reference points are apt  (449) The SW cape has cliffs 100 to 150 feet high; the summit is
to be obscured by fog except during N winds. From the anchorage,    gently sloping tundra. In the small cove E of the cape, landings
a launch ran on a general course of 1200 toward Mekoryuk for 3    can be made on the sandy beach in front of the few barabaras of
miles and obtained a minimum depth of 25 feet.                      Tachikuga, an abandoned native village. Water can be obtained
 (439)  Shoals covered 3 fathoms have been reported about 7.5    from the stream just E of the abandoned village; at low water the
miles N and 15.5 miles NW from Cape Etolin, and a shoal covered    stream is fresh to its mouth. Temporary anchorage is possible in 7
412 fathoms has been reported 12.5 miles NNE from the cape; all    to 9 fathoms about 0.8 mile off the entrance to the cove.
with deep water surrounding them. Keeping Cape Vancouver              (450) From the SW cape, the coast of Nunivak Island extends N
bearing N of 086ï¿½, Cape Etolin can be rounded when coming from    for about 8 miles to Cape Mohican. Along this stretch are impass-
W in 10 fathoms. With Cape Vancouver bearing 0860 or E of this    able cliffs 150 to 450 feet high, and there are no landing places.
bearing, considerable shoal water and irregular depths are found.   The 6-fathom curve is about 1.3 miles offshore.
 (440)  Cape Etolin Anchorage, the bight on the E side of the        (451) Tides.-The diurnal range of tide at Tachikuga, on the SW
cape, has fair holding ground in 2 to 5 fathoms, but is open to the    side of Nunivak Island, is 4.3 feet. At Nash Harbor, on the N side,
NE. Near the S side, and about 0.3 mile from the head of the bight,    the diurnal range is 5.3 feet, and the tide occurs about 1 hour later
is anchorage in 3 fathoms; the holding ground is gravel and only    than at Tachikuga.
moderately good. Farther out, it is deeper but more exposed to the   (452)  Currents.-On the N and SW sides of Nunivak Island the
strong tidal currents and rips of Etolin Strait, the wide passage    current has a large diurnal inequality. NE of Cape Mohican a 4-
between Nunivak Island and the mainland.                            hour series of current observations in July 1951 showed a NE cur-
 (441) Several shoals have been reported in Etolin Strait. In 1968,    rent which at strength had a velocity of 1.8 knots. Observations
the U.S. Coast Guard Cutter NORTHWIND, in transiting the    made in June and August 1951 W  of Cape Etolin showed tidal
strait, reported that depths in some cases were found to be greater    currents setting along the shore in both directions with velocities
or lesser than now charted. Until surveys are made of this area,    of about I knot at strength of current. On the E side of the island in
mariners are advised to use extreme caution.                        Etolin Strait, it is stated that tidal currents are so strong that the
 (442) In 1971, the Coast Guard Cutter STORIS observed the fol-    middle portion does not freeze over in winter. (See the Tidal Cur-
lowing conditions on the E side of Etolin Strait: Depths of 2'/2    rent Tables for predictions off the W coast of Nunivak Island.)




                                                        8. BERING SEA                                                        305


 (453) Ice.-(See page T-21 for dates of ice breakup and freez-    were several depths of 5 fathoms. The best water over the ridge
eup.) Navigation is difficult from mid-December to mid-May and    was 9 fathoms 1.6 miles SW of the point below Sugarloaf Moun-
usually is suspended from early January to late March.            tain. Tide rips occur along the ridge with fresh winds.
 (454) St. Matthew Island and adjoining islands are 145 miles     (465) Rocks and islets 55 to 95 feet high are off the S shore of
W from Nunivak Island. They are rocky, uninhabited islands    Pinnacle Island. Gull Rock, 93 feet high, is 0.5 mile WNW of the
whose shores are poorly charted except for a small area between    S end of Pinnacle Island.
Sugarloaf Mountain and Pinnacle Island. St. Matthew Island is a    (466) Tides and currents.-The diurnal range of the tide at St.
succession of hills and low valleys. During the season of naviga-    Matthew Island is 2.1 feet. (See the Tidal Current Tables for pre-
tion, fog is prevalent in this vicinity. Anchorage can be made with    dictions at St. Matthew Island.)
an offshore wind on the N or S sides of the island.                (467)  In 1971, a rock covered 23 feet was reported 127 miles
 (455)  Cape Upright, the E point of St. Matthew Island, is high    SW of St. Matthew Island in 58ï¿½38.0'N., 175ï¿½02.5'W.
and vertical, and the land in its immediate vicinity is mountainous.  (468) St. Lawrence Island is in the N part of the Bering Sea
A mountain 1,505 feet high is 0.7 mile back of the cape, and    about 120 miles S of Bering Strait.
another mountain 1,280 feet high is 0.9 mile SW of the cape. Off   (469) The E end of this island is usually made by vessels bound
the cape is a detached rock 25 feet high. W of the highland of the    into Norton Sound, and in clear weather can be seen from a dis-
cape is a low neck, apparently of sand, and the cape might be eas-    tance of 30 to 35 miles. From Southeast Cape a ridge of mountains
ily mistaken for a detached island.                               extends in a N direction across the island, and another ridge
 (456) Glory of Russia Cape, the N point of St. Matthew Island,    extends in a N direction from Apavawook Cape to Northeast
is also high and mountainous. A 1,475-foot peak is about 1.3 miles    Cape. Between these two ridges a deep bight makes in from S, and
S of the cape.                                                    at its head very low land extends N across the island. The shore of
  (457) Numerous detached rocks along the shores of St. Matthew    the E end of the island is generally a low sand beach with outlying
Island should not be approached too closely. On the island is an    rocks; the mountain ridges begin 0.5 to 2 miles back from the
abundance of freshwater in streams and lakes.                     beach.
  (458) Sugarloaf Mountain, 1,380 feet high, is 11.5 miles W        (470) Northeast Cape, E end of St. Lawrence Island, is low tun-
from Cape Upright. From Sugarloaf Mountain the coast trends    dra land, with numerous freshwater lakes. The cape is 2 miles
about 0.8 mile SE to the westernmost point of a wide bight that    wide to the foot of a mountain that rises abruptly and has a peak
extends to Cape Upright. A rock is about 350 yards S of this point.  1,435 feet high. This peak can be seen on a clear day for 35 miles
  (459) Good anchorage may be had in about 14 fathoms, shel-    or more. At 0.3 and 0.6 mile from the end of the cape are two
tered from winds between SE and SW, in a bight on the E side of    hummocks 94 and 280 feet high, respectively; the lower hummock
St. Matthew Island, about 10 miles NW of Cape Upright, with    is in 63ï¿½18'N., 168ï¿½42'W.
Sugarloaf Mountain bearing 220ï¿½, and W of some rocks which         (471) Although the bottom is irregular off the point of the cape,
show well out of the water and should not be approached closely.    no breakers were noticed while passing it in rough weather. The N
Landing is difficult with any swell, as the beach is stony and steep.    shore of St. Lawrence Island, for 10 miles W of Northeast Cape, is
In 1951, the PATHFINDER anchored frequently in 9 to 10 fath-    a low sand beach and grassy tundra with numerous freshwater
oms, about 3.5 miles WNW of Sugarloaf Mountain, with broken    lakes. Anchorage with shelter from S or SE winds can be had
bottom and satisfactory holding ground. The PATHFINDER also    along this shore about 2 miles from the beach in 8 to 9 fathoms;
anchored in about 14 fathoms, with protection from N gales, 4    the holding ground is not good, the bottom being gravel. At a
miles E by S of Sugarloaf Mountain.                               point on the N shore 6 miles W  of Northeast Cape, breakers
  (460) Sarichef Stiait is a 2.5-mile-wide passage between St.    extend 1 mile offshore.
Matthew Island and Hall Island. Tidal currents and rips were not   (472) From the Northeast Cape the E coast of St. Lawrence
 found to be strong in 1951. The PATHFINDER obtained a least    Island has a general S trend for 4 miles to a point where a 450-
 depth of 10 fathoms in two passages of the strait near the middle,    foot-high spur from the higher hills reaches to within 0.5 mile of
 but the records indicated that shoaler depths could be expected.  the beach; along this stretch the 6-fathom curve is 0.8 to I mile
  (461) Hall Island, about 3 miles N of St. Matthew Island, is    offshore.
 1,665 feet high and is rugged on its NE, N and W sides; the SE     (473) The coast then trends SSW for another 4 miles, then
 point is low. Elephant Rock is a large detached rock off Cape    curves W and N for 5 miles, forming Apavawook Cape, which is
 Hall, the N point of the island, and Arre Rocks are several    so rounding that it has no definite point. This entire stretch of coast
 smaller detached rocks off the SW side of the island. Anchorage is   is a low, narrow strip behind which is a large lagoon. The moun-
 available in 10 fathoms in the bight on the SE side of the island.  tains are about 2 miles inland and about 900 feet high.
  (462) In 1993, the Canadian Survey Ship John P. Tully reported   (474) Punuk Islands, 4 to 5 miles SSE from Apavawook Cape,
 discolored water, confused and mounting seas, and being abruptly    are a group of three small islands 1.5 miles long; the NE end of the
 set to the E with currents of about 3 knots when passing on the E    group is about 13.2 miles 192ï¿½ from Northeast Cape. The north-
 side of Hall Island about 2 miles off Elephant Rock.              ernmost and largest island has two marked rocky hummocks, the
  (463) Pinnacle Island, with its spires and needle formations    higher being 230 feet high; on the SW end of the island are the
 making a striking appearance, rises abruptly from the sea with    remains of a native village. The southernmost island is an irregular
 scarcely a place for a boat landing. The N end of the island is 8    mass of rocks, the highest point about 75 feet above water.
 miles SSW of Sugarloaf Mountain. Pinnacle Island is 1.4 miles    Between these islands is a low, sandy islet, which is separated
 long, 0.3 mile wide, and rises to 1,250 feet midway of its length.  from the other two by narrow channels completely obstructed by
  (464) An unusual submerged ridge extends from the N end of    ledges, over which the sea breaks. The shores of all the islands are
 Pinnacle Island in a 021ï¿½ direction to the shore of St. Matthew    foul, and a ledge extends S from the southernmost island; a rocky
 Island. The ridge is about 300 yards wide between the 10-fathom    shoal covered 31/2 fathoms is 1.4 miles S of the southernmost
 curves. The least depth found in 1951 was 4 fathoms, and there    island; over 7 fathoms can be carried'2 miles S of the islands. A




306                                                      8. BERING SEA


reef covered 2 to 3 fathoms extends about 0.7 miles NNW of the       (484)  Between the highland E of Southwest Cape and Siknik
southernmost island. Vessels should approach these islands with    Cape the land is low. A vessel reported striking a submerged rock
caution.                                                            about 2 miles offshore at a point about 16 miles NE of Southwest
 (475) A reconnaissance survey in 1951 indicated a clear    Cape.
approach to good anchorage in N and W  weather off Maknik             (485)  A reef, bare at low water, makes off I mile in a 220ï¿½ direc-
Lagoon, NW of Punuk Islands. The anchorage, in 61/2 fathoms, is    tion from Siknik Cape. The submerged part of this reef extends
in 63ï¿½09'N., 169'15'W., about 1.5 miles off the beach. All sound-    about 4 miles in a general 175ï¿½ direction from the bare part. This
ings showed a uniform slope to the 6-fathom curve, where there is    reef is dangerous, as the water shoals abruptly when approaching
a break and a steeper slope to the beach. Maknik Lagoon is behind    the cape.
the low sand barrier beach.                                          (486) The rest of the island is generally high and rolling. There
 (476)  Heavy breakers have been observed in the channel    are some submerged rocks in the bight W of Southeast Cape, and
between Punuk Islands and Apavawook Cape; vessels should not    also some detached rocks showing off the N shore near Kookoolik
attempt to pass through. A depth of 3 fathoms is 1.7 miles NW of    Point and Savoonga Point. It is probable that with care an
the northernmost and larger island. Several areas with 31/ fathoms  anchorage may be found almost anywhere around the island, but
are in this passage. From E the islands can be approached as close    the shores must be approached with caution.
as I mile. It is reported that 2.8 miles 220ï¿½ from Punuk Islands the  (487) Savoonga, at the extreme end of Savoonga Point, has a
flood current was observed setting about 0240 with a maximum        school and a native store open the year round. Small quantities of
velocity of 1.1 knots.                                              gasoline, diesel fuel, and motor oil are available. Mail is delivered
 (477) Southeast Cape is about 5 miles across on its S face; the    from Gambell weekly, weather permitting, by boat in summer or
E point of the cape slopes gradually to the water for 0.3 mile from    dogsled in winter. There is a village nurse. An aerolight is shown
the highland, and a reef extends about 0.5 mile SE from the point.    at Savoonga. Radiotelegraph communication is maintained.
The W point is lower and slopes more gradually to the water for 3     (488) A bar that extends NE from the village breaks at low
miles from the highland, and a reef makes off from the point in a S    water. Anchor just W of the village in 6 fathoms. Good anchorage
direction for 2 to 3 miles. The bight between these points is very    can also be found about 1 mile W and I mile N of the village in 14
foul and should be avoided.                                         fathoms.
 (478)  Kialegak Point, about 5 miles NNE of Southeast Cape, is      (489)  Tides and currents.-The diurnal range of the tide at St.
a long sandspit strewn with rocks that extends in an E direction    Lawrence Island varies from 1.2 feet at Niyrakpak Lagoon
                                                       from the highland of the coast There are breakers about 0.8 mile    entrance, 26 miles W  of Savoonga, to 2.4 feet at Northeast Cape
from the highland of the coast. There are breakers     inside a    and Powoolak Point, 0.8  miles NE of Southwest Cape
3550 from the end of the cape, and there may be others inside; a
reef extends S from the S side of the sandspit for about I mile. The  (490) The current velocity about 0.8 mile off Savoonga is about
remains of a native village are on the sandspit.                    1 knot on the flood setting NW and 1.5 knots on the ebb setting E.
                                                                    The current velocity at other places around St. Lawrence Island is
 (479)  The bight between Cape Kialegak and Apavawook Cape    generally less than 1 knot. (See Tidal Current Tables for predic-
has a uniform slope from 16 fathoms to the 10-fathom curve,    tions.
where there is a steeper slope to the beach. The 10-fathom curve is
                                                                     (491) Weather.-During the ice-free months of May to Novem-
about 2 miles off and parallels the shoreline. Good holding ground    (491) Weather.-During the ice-free onths of May to     Novem-
can be found in most parts of the bight with good anchorage in N
                                                                    ary through March, the range is 10ï¿½ to 120F. In the winter, passing
                                                                    cyclonic storms exert the major control on air temperatures. Mean
 round is verypoor and is not recommended.                          monthly temperatures at Gambell range from 2.8ï¿½F in January to
 (480)  Northwest Cape, the NW end of St. Lawrence Island, 660    49.30F in August. Extremes of -280F have been recorded in
feet high, is a steep, black bluff and flat on top. A wide sand beach    March and 71 F in July.
is W of the bluff. Gambell is a native village with a school and a    (492) Relative humidity at Gambell is high, usually 80 to 90 per-
store, open the year round. Small quantities of oil and gasoline are    cent or more. At least a trace of precipitation occurs on 275 to 300
available. A visiting nurse calls at the village periodically. A small    days a year, yet the annual total is only about 15 inches, about half
airstrip is available. Mail and supplies are flown in weekly from    of which falls during July to October, the ice-free months. The
Nome. Radiotelegraph communication is maintained.                   greatest rainfall comes with SE winds of cyclonic centers to the S
 (481) The water is deep close to Northwest Cape, and anchorage    of the island. Snow accumulation is at a maximum of about 2 to
can be had in 9 fathoms, rocky bottom, 0.5 mile offshore on either    2'/2 feet in March, and by the first week in June it remains only in
side of the point of the sand beach with Gambell village bearing    drifts, some of which persist through the summer.
2250. In W  winds, breakers have been observed that extend 400        (493) During the winter, from October through April, the wind
yards NW from the NW tip of land about 1.7 miles W of North-    is prevailingly from the N or NE and averages over 20 m.p.h. The
west Cape. The bay, 6 miles SE of Northwest Cape, affords    peak recorded velocity was 80 m.p.h. in October 1947 and was
anchorage with protection from S and W  winds, in 9 fathoms,    from the N. During the summer, the wind is more variable, being
rocky bottom, off the house on the beach.                           from the N or NW about 30 percent of the time and from the SE or
 (482) The W end of the island, S of Northwest Cape, is rolling    SW about 40 percent of the time. The mean summer velocity is 12
land. From Tatik Point around to the bay E of Southwest Cape,    to 13 m.p.h.; the mean maximum is 38 to 40 m.p.h.
the land is mountainous and abrupt close to the coast, being high-    (494) Throughout most of the year, and particularly in the sum-
est at Southwest Cape. Only a few families live at Southwest    mer from May to September, broken to overcast sky conditions
Cape.                                                               prevail. Clear skies are seldom seen more than 2 or 3 days a
 (483)  Several rock pinnacles, the largest of which is 25 feet    month. The principal cloud types consist of fog, stratiform, and
high, are off the SW tangent of Southwest Cape on the E side of    rarely cumuliform clouds at various levels. Most are generally
the entrance to Murphy Bay.                                         below 10,000 feet. Low ceilings are most common during the





                                                        8. BERING SEA                                                         307


summer. The visibility is over 7 miles for about 70 percent of the    of the E end of the sandspit, about 2.5 miles SE of the village of
period June through September. The best visibility is in Septem-    Hooper Bay. The least depth found in the approach to the anchor-
ber.                                                               age was 31/2 fathoms on the series of sand ridges that parallel the
 (495) (See page T-21 for dates of ice breakup and freezeup.)    beach. The anchorage is in 8 fathoms in the channel between the
Navigation is difficult from mid-December to late May and is sus-    sandspit and a sandbar to the E that bares at low water.
pended during most of March and April.                              (504) Off the end of the sandspit, the channel is about 0.3 mile
 (496) Warning.-The soil, surface waters, and vegetation of St.    wide and its axis is in a NE-SW direction. Both sides of the chan-
Lawrence Island are potentially contaminated by the microscopic    nel are very steep, and depths of as much as 13 fathoms were
eggs of a parasite that causes a long-term and sometimes fatal    found close to the spit.
infection of the liver known as alveolar hydatid disease. Although  (505) Currents.-(See the Tidal Current Tables for predictions
this parasite occurs elsewhere on the W and N coasts of Alaska, it   for Kokechik Bay.) There are two floods and two ebbs each day;
is unusually common on this island, where it is carried by local    the flood sets NE and the ebb SW.
dogs, cats, and wild foxes. Visitors are warned to avoid contact    (506)  (See page T-21 for dates of ice breakup and freezeup.)
with these animals and not to transport them under any circum-      (507) The village of Hooper Bay, 62 miles NNW of Cape Van-
stances from the island to other localities.                       couver and 17 miles S of Cape Romanzof, is the most prominent
  (497)  Communications.-Air service is available to Savoonga    feature in the area. It is on the highest ground, and the school and
and Gambell from Nome. An aerolight is shown from the Gambell    tin-roofed buildings are visible for about 10 miles. To reach the
airport 0.5 mile S of the town.                                    anchorage, steer 075ï¿½ for the village until within 2.5 miles of
  (498) Ships visit St. Lawrence Island infrequently. A Northland    shore, then steer 130ï¿½ until abeam of the E end of the sand dunes
Marine Lines barge calls at Savoonga and Gambell once a year.    and within 1.1 miles of shore, then head for the anchorage off the
An Alaska Native Service vessel makes a trip or two each year,    sandspit.
and one or two visits by Coast Guard cutters can be expected.       (508) The village can be reached from the anchorage by small
Local vessels from Nome call occasionally.                         boat across the W end of the bay and up the creek along which the
  (499) Transportation about the island in summer is mostly by    village is situated. The entrance to the creek is marked by stakes
native walrus hide boats or whaleboats, which usually are pow-    which should be left to starboard when entering. The limiting
ered by outboard motors mounted inboard in a specially con-    depth depends on the stage of tide but in 1994 depths of 2 to 4 feet
 structed well. Dogsleds are used in winter and summer on tundra,    were reported at low water in the channel. The entrance to the
but are not particularly efficient in summer. There are no roads.    creek bares at low water, and the entire W end of the bay is very
 Trails are unmarked, but are readily followed in the areas around    shallow, but there is deeper water inside the creek. There are no
 Gambell and Savoonga.                                              docks or piers for mooring; most boats either make fast to the
  (5oo) Caterpillar tractors are available at Gambell and    shore or beach themselves. Services include telephone, mail,
 Savoonga, but their use for ordinary transportation is prohibitively    stores, and a health clinic. There are daily flights to Bethel from a
 expensive. Trains of tractors and go-devils can be used in many    nearby airfield; radiotelephone communications is maintained.
 parts of the island if heavy transportation is necessary. Weasels   (509) Small boats drawing I to 4 feet, depending on the season
 have proved their value on snow, on the tundra, and in small lakes;    of the year, can travel inland from Hooper Bay to the Yukon River.
 such vehicles can move over most of the island, except on the    The route follows the Keoklivik River, S and larger of the two
 coarsest boulder fields and the steeper slopes.             .      emptying into Hooper Bay, to a junction with the Kashunuk
  (501) Landings can be made on almost any part of St. Lawrence    River at the old village of Chevak; thence through a cutoff to the
 Island during the summer. The surf is not heavy, except where    Aphrewn River; thence up this river, also called the Kashunuk on
 brisk offshore winds pile up the shallow offshore water into large    some charts at this point, and into Driftwood Slough about 5 miles
 breakers. Supplies for Gambell are landed by whaleboat on both    S of the Yukon.
 the N and W  sides of the spit, depending upon weather and sea      (510) Entering Keoklivik River can only be done by small boat.
 conditions. At Savoonga, supplies can only be landed during peri-    In 1994, the USCGC IRONWOOD reported that the river forms a
 ods when a N wind is not blowing because of the heavy surf.        delta at the mouth and a small channel leads through numerous
                                                                     sand bars, shoals, and mud flats into the river. The transit should
   (502) Chart 16006.-Cape Vancouver (60ï¿½32.0'N.,    be made at low water to find the channel through the flats. Chevak
 165ï¿½24.0'W.), about 16 miles NE from Nunivak Island, is a bold    village reportedly marks the channel with a buoy and stakes, but
 promontory, 1,132 feet high. The shoal from the mouth of the    local knowledge is still required. Once inside the river, depths of 5
 Kuskokwim River is thought to extend along the coast to Cape    to 25 feet were reported to Chevak. The village can-be contacted
 Vancouver, so that on the S side of the cape the water is shoal;    via VHF-FM channel 73 by using the call sign "Corporation".
 about 6 miles W of the cape a 1.5-mile circular shoal covered 1 V2    There are no piers or docks at Chevak, so small boats tie off to the
 fathoms was reported in 1957. Immediately off the end of the cape    shore or beach themselves. Telephone, mail, store, and a Village
 is deep water that extends about 5 miles along the N side of the    Public Safety Officer are available. There are daily flights from
 bight on which the native village of Tununak (Tanunak) is situ-    Chevak to Bethel.
  ated. This bight is a series of mudflats mostly bare at low water.  (511)  Driftwood Slough has two entrances from the Yukon. The
  The BEAR anchored in 41/2 fathoms about 1 mile off the S point of    one most used is about 2 miles downriver from Pilot Station,
  the bight and reported shoals that extend NW off the mouth of that    which is about 115 miles above the mouth of Apoon Pass. The
  bight. Hazen Bay is also reported to be shallow.                   other entrance is about 12 miles above Mountain Village, which
   (503) Hooper Bay, 60 miles N of Cape Vancouver, and the sec-    in turn is about 85 miles above Apoon Pass. The part of the slough
  ond bay S of Cape Romanzof, appears to offer the best anchorage    leading from this latter entrance meanders considerably and is lit-
  for moderate-draft vessels in the area between Cape Vancouver    tle used. At the Yukon, Driftwood Slough is about 250 feet wide
  and Cape Romanzof. The recommended anchorage is 0.2 mile SE    and is 112 to 2 feet deep during the dry season.




308                                                    8. BERING SEA


  (512) Following the ice breakup in the spring, the least depth    (523) The S end of Sand Islands is 4.5 miles NE of Cape
along the inland route is about 3 feet; by early July it is about I to    Romanzof. These two islands, Neragon Island and Krekatok
 I V2 feet; and by early September, after the rainy season in August,    Island, extend in a general N and S direction about 13 miles,
it may be as much as 4 feet. The shallowest part of the passage is   including the interval between them. The N island is mostly cov-
about 20 miles SSW of Pilot Station.                              ered at high water.
  (513) This inland passage may also be entered from the Bering     (524) The coast trends in an E direction from Cape Romanzof 15
Sea by way of the Kashunuk River, which empties into the sea    miles to the mouth of Kun River, and throughout most of this dis-
between Hooper Bay and Hazen Bay, or from Hazen Bay by way    tance is bordered by abrupt cliffs and hills gradually diminishing
of the Aphrewn River.                                             in elevation.
  (514) Kokechik Bay (also see chart 16240) is the funnel-shaped    (525) Scammon Bay, entered between Cape Romanzof and
body of water on the S side of Cape Romanzof. The neck of the    Neragon Island, is very shoal with numerous bars bare at low
funnel is at the E end of the bay and is the mouth of the Kokechik    water. There are two small coves along its S side, Windy Cove
River. On the seaward side of the bay a long narrow sandspit    and Edmonds Cove, respectively I and 9 miles from Cape
extends N from Dall Point for about 6 miles. On the spit is a ridge    Romanzof, but both are quite shoal. Kongishluk Bay is the native
of low dunes that are visible about 5 miles to seaward on a clear    name for Edmonds Cove. A limited area with depths of 5 fathoms
day.                                                              is just S and E of the S end of Neragon Island, and a channel of the
  (515) About 0.8 mile N of the spit, a long narrow sand and mud-    same depth leads into it and passes about 2.2. miles N of Cape
flat, part of which bares at all stages of the tide, begins and extends    Romanzof. A narrow channel with a minimum depth of about 1 /2
to within 0.5 mile of Cape Romanzof. The gap between the spit    fathoms continues through Scammon Bay and into the Kun River.
and the flat is the best entrance to Kokechik Bay. Except for the    The depths are from 2 to 4 fathoms off Cape Romanzof, but the
deep water that extends I mile inside the entrance, the bay consists    water shoals quickly NE, so there is little protection except for
mostly of extensive flats 4 to 5 feet deep with numerous bars that    very light draft boats. A large shoal area with breakers is about
bare at low water.                                                halfway between the cape and Neragon Island, and another shoal
 (516)  About I mile off the entrance to Kokechik Bay is an    with less than 2 fathoms is 2.5 miles 338ï¿½ from the cape. Along
extensive breaking shoal that bars approach from the NNW and    the highland forming the S shore of Scammon Bay the water is I
W. The best approach to the bay is on an ENE course for Dall    fathom or less in depth throughout its length, except just inside
Point, which shows very well and is easily identified by radar in    Cape Romanzof.
thick weather. From off Dall Point, steer a N course, paralleling   526  The village of Scammon Bay is onthe S shore at the
the sandspit and about 0.8 mile off, and round the end of the spit at    entrance of Kun River Radiotelegraph communication is main-
                                                                   tained.
a distance of about 0.5 mile. The controlling depth along this
course to the end of deep water I mile inside the entrance is 12   (527) The coast is low and marshy from  un River N to the
feet.                                                             Yukon Delta. The waters along this stretch are extremely shallow
 (517) Large vessels must anchor at least 5 miles W of the sand-    and are navigated only by river boats.
spit in 5 fathoms, sand bottom. Vessels up to 12-foot draft will find  (528) Black River, 39 miles NE ofCape Romanzof, is marked
protected anchorage in the 10-fathom holes, one outside and the    by Black River Entrance Light (62'20.9'N  165'21.2'W.) 20
other inside the entrance to the bay. The outer anchorage, 0.8 mile    feet above the water and seasonally shown from a skeleton tower
                                                                   with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the E side of
NW of the end of the sandspit, is between the previously described  th   a red and white diamond-shaped damark on the E side of
shoal and the spit, and has mud bottom. The inner anchorage is 0.8
mile NE of the spit and has sand and mud bottom.
 (51   The diurnal range of tide is 6.5 feet in Kokechik Bay.      (529)  Chart 16006.-Norton Sound is one of the important
 5Tidal currents are estimated to have a velocity at strength of 15    arms of the Bering Sea. Some supplies for Yukon River by way of
to 2 kncurrts in thare estimated to have a velocity at strength of 1.5    St. Michael pass through it. The N. shore is important because of
to 2 knots in the entrance.
                                                                   the mining operations there. The S side of the entrance to the
                                                                   sound is occupied by the extensive Yukon Flats and should be
                  (59)  Charts 16006, 16240-Cape Romanzof (6148.0'N.,    avoided by deep-draft vessels. The rest of the sound generally has
166'06.0'W.), 85 miles N of Nunivak Island, is a bold and promi-    soundings of 8 to 12 fathoms; the greater depths are near the N
nent headland with cliffs rising abruptly from the water over 1,200    side. Off Cape Nome and Cape Darby are spots with depths of 15
feet along its W  face; at the sharp extremity of the cape are    to 19 fathoms. The bottom of the sound is very even, and the
remarkable perpendicular shafts of rocks on the side of the cliff.    depths decrease to the shore with marked regularity. There is drift-
The cape is the W termination of the Askinuk Mountains; the    wood on all the shores of the sound.
highest 2,363 feet is about 5 miles from the cape, and can be seen  (530) Weather-During the season of navigation the prevailing
a considerable distance at sea. An aero radiobeacon is on the cape.  winds are S with variable force. Severe storms are usually from
 (520)  Tide.-The diurnal range of tide at Cape Romanzof is 6.8    the SW. June, with less severe winds, appears to be the best month
feet.                                                             for navigation. July is about the same, but the rainy season and
 (521)  Current.-Past observations showed a diurnal tidal current    SW winds pick up in the latter part of the month and continue
velocity of nearly 0.5 knot about 7 miles SW of Cape Romanzof.    through August and part of September. September is usually
 (522) Wind effects are important at this location. Continued    somewhat drier, with more frequent winds from the N. Prevailing
strong S winds will cause the current to set N continuously for    winds during October are N to NW; the general weather is clearer
days at a time, and a similar S current results from N winds. The    and colder.
greatest velocities during nearly a month of hourly surface obser-  (531) Fog.-The remarks on fog in the Bering Sea apply to the
vations were 2.2 knots N and 2 knots S; in each case the current    region W  of Cape Nome, but not to Norton Sound E of it. On
was setting approximately with a wind of about 40 knots.          entering the sound with thick weather in the Bering Sea, a vessel





                                                        8. BERING SEA                                                         309


will find that the fog almost always thins out and gradually clears    (62?32.2'N., 165001.3'W.), 18 feet above the water, is shown sea-
as the vessel proceeds up the sound. At St. Michael fogs are rare    sonally from a skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-
except in the spring when ice floes are close in to Norton Sound    shaped daymark and marks the entrance to the pass on the S side.
and the winds are W. With E winds the area is clear of fog.        The village of Sheldon Point is on the S side 5 miles above the
 (532) Mirage.-In the vicinity of St. Michael and Stuart Islands    mouth; river barges call here at irregular intervals during the sum-
and the coast S, mirage often distorts the appearance of the land    mer.
and sometimes greatly magnifies small objects.                      (543) Kwikluak Pass, which empties into the Bering Sea along
 (533)  Because of this abnormal refraction, positions obtained by    the N side of the islands that separate it from Kwemeluk Pass, is
astronomic sights (especially on the flats) cannot be depended on    the main S mouth of the Yukon River. The bars at the mouth of the
and may be several miles in error although the sight seemed good.  pass were reported to have an average minimum depth of 17 feet,
                                                                  but constant shifting of the bars and the shoals in the pass make
 (534)  Charts 16006, 16240.-The Yukon Delta extends about    navigation hazardous. Entrance should be attempted only by per-
90 miles from Black River, 40 miles NE by N from Cape Roman-    sons familiar with existing conditions. The diurnal range of tide is
zof, to Apoon Pass. The land along the coast is only a foot or two    2.3 feet at the mouth of the pass.
above high water, is covered with low marsh grass, and is entirely  (544) The villages of Alakanuk and Kwiguk on the NW bank
lost to view when but a few miles offshore. The only landmarks     12 and 18 miles, respectively, above the mouth of Kwikluak Pass,
visible in clear weather are the sharp peaks of Kusilvak Moun-    have telephone communications and daily air transportation to
tains and the Askinuk Mountains back of Cape Romanzof, all    Anchorage. Diesel fuel is available at the village of Kwiguk. Ala-
very distant and often obscured by clouds or mist. The extreme    kanuk has radio service. The village of Akulurak is on the SE
flatness of the land and the remarkable mirage effect, often seen    bank 17 miles above the mouth.
over the shoals when bare, make the whole region deceptive at       (545) Kwiguk Pass, about 12.5 miles N of Kwikluak Pass, con-
times.                                                             nects Bering Sea with Kwikluak Pass at the village of Kwiguk. A
 (535) The river discharges by many mouths through the delta.    seasonal light marks the seaward entrance to the pass.
The bars at the entrances have little depth, and the channels       (546) Kawanak Pass and Kwikpak Pass have a common outlet
through the flats are narrow, crooked, and bordered by shoals bare    to the sea about 30 miles N of Kwikluak Pass. A seasonal light
at low water. They are also subject to constant change. Apoon Pass    marks the entrance to Kawanak and Kwikpak Passes. The diurnal
is the entrance used by the river boats.                           range of tide is 2.7 feet inside the mouth of Kawanak Pass.
 (536) When well inside the confined bank the country on each      (547) Head of Passes on Yukon River is the junction of Kwik-
side is covered with an almost continuous growth of willow and    luak and Kwikpak Passes at 62030'N., 1635 I'W.; the junction is
alder bushes. The water has a brownish white appearance, some-    42 miles from the mouth of Kwikluak Pass and 53 miles from the
thing like glacial water, without its.fine, sharp grit. It has no    mouth of Kwikpak Pass. Kawanak Pass and Apoon Pass join
unpleasant taste and is always fresh in the inner channels.        Kwikpak Pass 26 and 22 miles, respectively, above its mouth. By
 *(537) The main channels are free from snags, though trees    way of Kwikpak Pass, Head of Passes is 49 miles from the mouth
sometimes become temporarily lodged on the bars and quantities    of Kawanak Pass and 55 miles from the mouth of Apoon Pass. A
of driftwood are piled along the shores in places. Undoubtedly the    seasonal light marks the junction of Kwikluak and Kwikpak
ice carries off the snags when it goes out each season. The chan-    Passes.
nels and banks show indications of changing rapidly both from       (548) Pastol Bay, at the NE extremity of the Yukon Delta is
erosion and deposits. Very probably much of this is effected each    about 25 miles wide between the delta on the W  and Point
year during the breaking up of the ice, its consequent jams, and the    Romanof on the E and has general depths of 1 to 6 feet.
great floods following.                                             (549) Apoon Pass, at the head of Pastol Bay, is the principal
 (538) The 3-fathom curve is about 6 miles off Cape Romanzof    approach to Yukon River from St. Michael. In common with the
and about 18 miles off the Yukon Delta and the shore of Pastol    rest of this region, the surrounding country is only I to 2 feet
Bay, then comes close in to the shore of Stuart Island. From the    above high water. The banks of Apoon Pass, to within about 2
cape to the delta, detached shoals with depths of 23/4 to 6 fathoms    miles of its mouth, are mostly covered with willow and alder
are as much as 30 miles from shore. Deep-draft vessels should    bushes 8 to 10 feet high. At the mouth the land is more marshy,
avoid depths less than 8 fathoms.                                  and a large area to the W  appears to be entirely an open marsh.
  (539) There are several settlements along the passes of the    The channels and banks of the pass are subject to rapid changes
Yukon Delta. Strangers are advised to seek local knowledge    from erosion and deposit.
before entering the Yukon Delta passes. Local independent pilots    (550) The open country E of Apoon Pass is mostly marsh,
from Alakanuk and other settlements upriver monitor VHF-FM         ponds, and tundra. The only high ground is Hogback Hill, a
channel 16; telephone (907) 238-3629.                              rounded ridge about 300 feet high, 7 miles E of the pass and 2
  (540)  Currents varying from 0.5 to 1.5 knots have been    miles back of the coast. A range of hills and mountains 10 to 20
observed in the delta channels. Greater velocities occur in the bar    miles back of the coast extends SW to the first great bend in the
channels and up the river; none observed exceeded 3 knots.         Yukon.
  (541) The prevailing winds in summer are NE, E, and SE. The        (551) The approach to Apoon Pass is across unmarked shallow
strong blows are from the same directions, the most severe being    flats. The entrance to the pass is marked by a seasonal light.
the strong E winds that funnel from the Yukon Valley down low    Because the depths are only 1 to 2 feet, all but the shallowest draft
Unalakleet River Valley. In winter, 50-knot winds are common.    vessels must cross the flats at or near high water.
The area has considerable mist and rain.-                           (552) The tide in Apoon Pass is more or less diurnal; the diurnal
  (542) Kwemeluk Pass, 54 miles NE of Cape Romanzof, is the    range is 4 feet at the mouth of the pass and about 1 foot at the
most S of the Yukon Delta passes. A seasonal light marks the    Head of Passes. The tides at the entrance are greatly affected by
entrance to Kwemeluk Pass on the N. Sheldon Point Light    winds, that may be strong enough to entirely obliterate the natural





310                                                    8. BERING SEA


tides; N and E winds lower the water level, and S and SW winds    and Stuart Mountains, on St. Michael and Stuart Islands, appear
raise it. The ordinary outflowing current in Apoon Pass is much    above the horizon and are excellent landmarks.
less rapid than that in other passes, but there is a tidal inflow and  (564) An anchorage for medium-sized vessels is in the mouth of
outflow with velocities that depend upon the particular range of    the right-hand stream of Pikmiktalik River, 8 miles NE of Point
the tide.                                                         Romanof. The depth over the bar is about 21/2 feet. A shoal
 (553) Chaniliut, on the S side I mile above the mouth of Apoon    extends out from the S point at the entrance.
Pass, has a school and radiotelephone service. Kotlik is at the    (565) In moderate weather the ocean swell is not felt between
mouth of Kotlik River, which empties into the S side of the pass 5    the Apoon entrance and Stephens Pass; but in heavy weather and
miles above the mouth.                                            W weather, which is more likely to occur during the latter part of
 (554) Old Fort Hamilton is on the SE side about 22 miles    the season, a choppy sea develops and is heavier off Point
above the mouth of Apoon Pass. The abandoned village of Hamil-    Romanof than elsewhere. In general, this passage is safe for river
ton is near Old Fort Hamilton.                                    steamers in the summer season. During the latter part of the sea-
 (555) Nunachik Pass and Little Apoon Pass make off to the W     son, however, high winds become more frequent, and the boats are
from Apoon Pass just above Old Fort Hamilton. Apoon Pass joins    obliged to watch their opportunities.
Kwikpak Pass 25 miles above the Apoon mouth. New Fort              (566) Anchorages.-Riverboats anchor on the flats or in the
Hamilton, on the E bank of Kwikpak Pass, is 40 miles from the    channel, wherever exigency demands. In the S end of St. Michael
Apoon mouth.                                                      Canal in the S branch just above the junction, is a good and safe
 (556) Yukon River, one of the largest of the world, is the largest    anchorage in all kinds of weather. The depth is only about 3 feet
and most important river in Alaska. It is navigable for flat-bottom    on the outside bar, and it has to be crossed at high water.
boats along its entire course from the mouth to near the head of   (567) Good protection is available from all but SW weather in 6
Lake Bennett. No one company operates vessels along the entire    to 9 feet in the cove on the S side of Cape Stephens. Stebbins, on
river. Transfer points are at Marshall, 153 miles above Apoon    the shore of the cove, has a school and a nurse. Radiotelegraph
Pass; Tanana, 628 miles above Apoon Pass; Nenana, 50 miles    service is maintained. Mail is delivered from St. Michael and
SW of Fairbanks on the Tanana River; and Dawson, Canada,    Unalakleet.
1,197 miles above Apoon Pass. The Porcupine River, Chandalar       (568) Stuart Island, NW of St. Michael Island, is separated
River, Tanana River, Koyukuk River, and Innoko River are the    from the latter by Stephens Pass, which has a minimum width of
principal tributaries of the Yukon in Alaska.                     about 0.6 mile. The island is divided into two approximately equal
 (557) Between Tanana and the delta, Ruby, 526 miles above    parts by a narrow N-S waterway which is used considerably by
Apoon Pass, is the only town on the S side of the river  .        small launches and native craft. Stuart Mountain, 480 feet high,
                                                                   E of the center, is the highest point. The rest of the island is low
 (558) River steamers may ascend to Whitehorse, Yukon Terri-
                                                                   and rolling, with some small, scattered peaks. The shore of the
tory, Canada. The White Pass and Yukon Railway connects Skag-    island is y   irreular. From North Point to Observation Point
way, Alaska, and Whitehorse, Canada, the head of riverboat                  ry    g
                         The Alaska Railroad connects Seward and Fairbanks  and around through Stephens Pass is a line of conspicuous bluffs
navigation. The Alaska Railroad connects Seward and Fairbanks;
                                                              '   about 170 feet high; the rest of the coast is much lower. From
the latter is on Chena River. Chena River flows into the Tanana    Observation Point to the W point of the island the N shore is free
River.                                                            from outlying dangers; 5 fathoms can be carried 1 mile from the
 (559) Although the Yukon River is navigable all the way from    beach. Off the W point, some detached rocks extend about 300
the Bering Sea to Whitehorse, it can neither be entered by ocean-    yards. On the E face of the island, well toward the SE point, a
going ships nor navigated by them. The river itself is shallow in    shoal makes out about 3 miles. Cape Stephens Light (63032.7'N.,
many places and, like the Mississippi, is a maze of bars, bayous,    162018.0'W.), 200 feet above the water, is shown seasonally from
and side channels for much of the length. At the river mouth is a    a small house with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on
vast delta with sand flats reaching far out to sea. Such channels as    the SE side of Stephens Pass.
the currents have made are too shallow for the passage of ocean-   (569)  Egg Island, 16 miles E of Stuart Island, is small and
going ships and are perpetually shifting. The riverboats are built    affords little protection in heavy weather, but it is the only lee to
especially for this shallow-water work, as are those used on the    be had in N gales. The water off the W shore is deep, 6 fathoms
Mississippi.                                                      being found close inshore. Egg Island Light (63ï¿½36.0'N.,
 (560) (See page T-21 for dates of ice breakup and freezeup at    161043.2'W.), 90 feet above the water, is seasonally shown from a
places on the Yukon River.)                                       tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the high-
 (561) The mouth of Pastolik River, about 2 miles from the outer    est part of the island.
end of Apoon Pass, affords anchorage for small vessels. The        (570) St. Michael Island, separated from the mainland by St.
Apoon flats extend in front of the entrance, and it can only be    Michael Canal, is mostly low, but has two conspicuous rises: St.
entered at high tide.                                             Michael Mountain, 450 feet high, near the center of the island,
 (562) With the exception of the promontory of Point Romanof,    and sharp conical Stephens Hill, 331 feet high, overlooking Cape
the immediate coast is low and flat all the way from Apoon    Stephens and Stephens Pass.
entrance to St. Michael Island. Point Romanof, 360 feet high,      (571) St. Michael Canal is a narrow, crooked tidal slough that
stands well out about 12 miles W from the high hills of the coast    forks and comes together again. Distances through the canal are
range, It appears in clear weather like an island in the sea. Point    18 miles by way of the N fork and 20 miles by way of the S fork.
Romanof Light (63012.0'N., 162ï¿½50.0'W.), 25 feet above the    The S fork is generally used because it is wider. Depths in the
water, is seasonally shown from a steel tower with a red and white    canal are probably less than the 6 feet of the old improvement
diamond-shaped daymark.                                           project, but are sufficient for the traffic of the area; the depth over
 (563) After passing Point Romanof, Crater Mountain, on the    the bar at the SW entrance is about 3 feet. Canal Point is on the N
mainland back of St. Michael Island, and St. Michael, Stephens,    side of the SW entrance.





                                                        8. BERING SEA                                                          311


 (572)  Chart 16240.-St. Michael Bay is the harbor on the E side    (584)  Currents.-About 0.8 mile offshore in St. Michael Bay,
of St. Michael Island. Orizaba Reef extends 1.5 miles off Rock    the current velocity is about 0.8 knot. Like the tide itself, the tidal
Point, and is 0510 from St. Michael Mountain.                       current is chiefly diurnal and sets SE on the flood and N on the
 (573) Whale Island, close off the E end of St. Michael Island, is    ebb.
95 feet high and- small; on approaching the harbor its E end is seen  (585) (See page T-21 for dates of ice breakup and freezeup at St.
as a vertical bluff. Whale Island Light (63029.5'N.,    Michael.)
161059.8'W.), 53 feet above the water, is seasonally shown from a    (586)  St. Michael being the end of deepwater navigation, all the
small house with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the    Yukon traffic beyond this point has to be conducted with vessels
E end of the island. Four tanks are about 0.75 mile NE of the vil-    drawing 5 feet or less. The larger launches leaving St. Michael
lage of St. Michael. The passage between Whale and St. Michael    Bay go around the N side of St. Michael Island and through
Islands is blocked by rocks, bare at low water. E and N of the    Stephens Pass, between St. Michael and Stuart Islands. They give
island the water deepens rapidly.                                   a wide berth to the reef off Rock Point, on the N side of St.
 (574) A boulder covered 18 feet is 0.5 mile 064ï¿½ from Whale    Michael Island, and, after passing between the islands, make a
Island Light.                                                       straight course slightly W of Point Romanof. When the summit of
 (575)  Beulah Island, about 0.3 mile NNW from Whale Island,    Point Romanof is abeam, about 1.5 miles, the direction is changed
is 50 feet high, small, and rounded. It has bold water off its NE   and a course is steered for Apoon Pass. The most dangerous part
side. Between this and Whale Island the water is shoal.             of the passage is the 14 miles around the N end of St. Michael
 (576) St. Michael, near the E end of St. Michael Island, is about    Island,. which is exposed to the deepwater swell from the N. This
55 miles from Apoon Pass via Stephens Pass. The village shows    can be avoided by small craft by going through St. Michael Canal.
little evidence of the days when it was of major importance in the   (587)  Routes for small craft between Isanotski Strait (False
Yukon River traffic. Gone are most of the buildings of the Army     Pass) (55ï¿½05'N., 163ï¿½30'W.) and St. Michael (see chart 16006).-
post and the warehouses of the trading companies, and the tall    After passing out of Isanotski Strait, clear of the outlying breakers,
masts of the telegraph company; the waterfront is littered with the    the course is shaped for the E side of Amak Island. Shelter can be
rotting hulks of the once great river fleet.                        found on the S, SE, and E sides of the island.
 (577) The Northern Commercial Co. operates the only remain-         (588) Leaving Amak Island, the next course is set for Cape
ing trading post at St. Michael and maintains facilities for transfer    Newenham. Shelter can be obtained on either side, according to
of freight from ocean to river vessels. The village has a church,    the wind. From Cape Newenham the course is set for Nunivak
school, and health clinic.                                          Island. If heavy N or NE winds are encountered before the island
 (578) Limited amounts of diesel fuel and supplies can be    is reached, shelter is sought in the depth of the bight on the S side.
obtained at the trading post. Yutana Barge Lines reportedly has a    Weather conditions being good, it is only necessary to touch at this
fuel terminal at St. Michael and uses two sunken barges as make-    island if needing water. The anchorage on the N side, about 12
shift docks. Gasoline and lodging are also available in St. Michael.    miles E of Cape Etolin, is considered the best. (See Nunivak
A marine railway operated by Yutana Barge Lines can handle ves-    Island earlier in this chapter.)
sels to 100 tons and 9 feet in draft with limited machine shop facil-  (589) From the N end of Nunivak Island the customary course is
ities.                                                              to cross over diagonally to a little N of Hazen Bay, and then coast
 (579) Telephone and radiotelephone services are maintained.    along just outside the shoals in 3 to 5 fathoms of water until Cape
The village and Yutana Barge Lines can be contacted on VHF-FM       Romanzof is reached. If the weather is unfavorable or water is
channel 10 by calling "79 Yutana". Mail and daily flights to Nome   required, an anchorage in Scammon Bay is made close inshore on
and Unalakleet are available. Yutana Barge Lines runs boats in the    the S side, in a bight where a stream empties.
summer on an irregular schedule from St. Michael to Nenana, on       (590) After leaving Scammon Bay, by giving the spit on the N
the Yukon River.                                                    side of the entrance a good berth, the remaining distance to St.
  (580) Anchorage.-The harbor and anchorage for seagoing ves-    Michael is made by skirting along on the outer part of the Yukon
sels is an open roadstead exposed to winds from NW through N to    Flats, in 2 to 5 fathoms, where the courses are exclusively guided
E. Larger vessels anchor in the offing between St. Michael Bay    by sounding. On this crooked stretch, after the mountains of Cape
and Egg Island, and in heavy N gales shift their anchorage to get a    Romanzof and the Kusilvak Mountains disappear, no land will be
lee under Egg Island or go to sea. Anchorage is found about 0.5    visible until the high peaks on the mainland S from Stuart Island
mile SE of Whale Island in 31/2 to 4 fathoms, bottom dark-blue    are sighted; a little later the summits of Stuart and St. Michael
mud, and good holding ground. Care should be taken to avoid the    Islands become visible. After Stuart and St. Michael Islands
18-foot boulder.                                                    become defined, the course is shaped to go through the pass
  (581) Good anchorage in 5 fathoms is 3 miles off Whale Island    between them, and then skirt around the N side of St. Michael
Light on the following bearings: Egg Island 038ï¿½, Crater Moun-    Island to St. Michael.
tain 205ï¿½, Whale Island Light 227ï¿½, North Point of Stuart Island     (591) In the summer, N and E winds prevail a large part of the
294ï¿½. Use 45 fathoms of chain.                                      time between Cape Newenham and Cape Romanzof. The tidal
  (582) Light-draft vessels and river steamers can find shelter    currents in Etolin Strait are strong and at times cause heavy tide
from N and W winds by anchoring near the E side of the island, in    rips.
3 to 8 feet. The shores of St. Michael Bay are strewn with loose
rocks that are often frozen in the ice in winter and dropped as it   (592) Chart 16200.-The coast from St. Michael Bay to Cape
goes out in the spring. Light-draft vessels, when anchoring in    Darby is generally low and rock strewn, and the depths when
shoal water, should be careful not to anchor over any of these    approaching it shoal gradually from 6 fathoms toward the beach; a
loose, scattered rocks.                                             depth of 3 fathoms can be taken as close as 0.8 mile except in a
  (583) Tides.-The tides of St. Michael are chiefly diurnal, the    few places. There are no outlying dangers, but a reef makes off
range being 3.9 feet. (See the Tide Tables for daily predictions.)  about 0.5 mile from the shore 2 miles S of Black Point, about 26




312                                                     8. BERING SEA


miles E from St. Michael. Tolstoi Point and its vicinity are high   (600) Shaktoolik River Entrance Light (64022.8'N.,
and rocky, and from there to Unalakleet River the shore is low.    161ï¿½14.0'W.), 14 feet above the water, is seasonally shown from a
  (593) Anchorage with good protection from S winds can be    skeleton tower with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on
found in Klikitarik Bay, 15 miles E of St. Michael. There are sev-    the spit at the entrance to Shaktoolik River, 7.5 miles E of Cape
eral native campsites along this coast, but the only permanent set-    Denbigh.
tlement is Unalakleet.                                              (601) Shaktoolik is 4 miles S of Shaktoolik River entrance. Ves-
  (594) Unalakleet (63053'N., 160ï¿½47'W.), at the E end of Norton    sels can anchor 4 miles off the village in 7 fathoms, mud bottom.
Sound, is the largest village on the sound E of Nome. An Alaska    Tugs and barges and small boats beach themselves, or tie off, to
Native Service nurse is stationed in the village, which also has a    the gradually shoaling shale beach near the village, but the
mission church, a school, and a store. Fuel and haul-out services    approach is extremely shallow and should be made with caution.
are available. Radiotelephone and telephone services are avail-    Some small boats pass over the bar at the mouth of the river and
able. Daily flights to Nome and Anchorage are available.           follow the shallow slough on the backside of the spit SE to the vil-
  (595) A shoal extends about 1.5 miles offshore from the mouth    lage. In 1994, the USCGC IRONWOOD reported very shallow
of the Unalakleet River. The approach to the river is navigable    depths in the river entrance and slough. Local knowledge is
only by shallow-draft boats. During the navigation season    required. W winds cause considerable surf in the area. A Public
Unalakleet River South Spit Light (63052.1'N., 160ï¿½47.0'W.),    Safety Officer, telephone, mail, fuel, and a native store can be
15 feet above the water, is seasonally shown from a skeleton tower    found in Shaktoolik. Two local rescue teams can be contacted on
with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on a sandspit S of    VHF-FM channel 5. Daily flights to Nome and Unalakleet are
the river entrance. Seasonal buoys mark the approach. An aero-    available. Radiotelegraph service is maintained.
light is about 0.5 mile N of the entrance. The North River aero     (602) Cape Denbigh is a moderately high rounded hill, joined
radiobeacon has been found valuable as an aid to surface naviga-    to the mainland by a low narrow neck. The head of the bight, E of
tion. Vessels have anchored in 5 fathoms with 60 fathoms of chain    the cape, is shoal, but in the approach the water shoals gradually.
about 2 miles offshore. An alternate anchorage is about 6 miles N  A good anchorage in NE winds can be had E of the cape in depths
of Unalakleet.                                                     suitable to the draft of the vessel. The S end of the cape is bold-to,
  (596) Weather.-Unalakleet does not fall into any single climatic    and its W side, 2.5 miles N of the point, can be approached close-
regime. The proximity of Norton Sound places it principally under    to in 4 fathoms. The water shoals rapidly inside to a depth of 4
a marine influence during those months (late spring, summer, and    fathoms when approaching the shore.
early fall) that the sound is free of ice. The summer temperatures  (603) Protection from E weather is found in the lee of Reindeer
are cool with a relatively small number of days annually with    Hills, just NNE of Cape Denbigh.
readings above 700 F. The summer extreme of 86ï¿½ F in June           (604) Norton Bay is generally shoal. About midway between
reflects the fact that occasionally in summer warm dry continental    Point Dexter and Bald Head is a depth of about 6 fathoms, and
conditions prevail for brief periods. In winter the extreme temper-    from this depth the water shoals gradually as the shores are
atures are those of a cold continental climate, but the average min-    approached in any direction inside of Bald Head. In some places
imums for the season are inbetween the normal values for marine    the 6-foot curve is 5 miles or more from the beach. The N shore of
and continental climates at this latitude.                         the bay for 15 miles W of Bald Head is comparatively low, and the
 (597) Precipitation also appears to be variable between marine    water is shoal for some distance from the shore. From a point 15
and continental influences. The increased amount of precipitation    miles W of Bald Head to Cape Darby the land is high and wooded
in summer has an abrupt beginning and ending that closely coin-    along the coast; a few native villages are found in this stretch. For
cides with the marine predominated period. The relatively low    20 miles NE from Cape Darby, a depth of 4 fathoms can be taken
average annual snowfall relates to the dry continental winter.    0.3 mile from the shore, and in some places much closer. The
Because of the variable influences the coastal section of this W   water shoals gradually on approaching the coast, but the S and E
central part of Alaska is frequently described as being part of a    sides of Cape-Darby have deep water close-to. During strong N
transitional climatic zone between marine and continental cli-    winds the water is lowered considerably in Norton Bay.
mates.                                                              (605) The entrance to Koyuk River, flowing into the NE end of
 (598) Even though the Unalakleet River Valley is broad with no    Norton Bay, is marked by seasonal buoys; local knowledge is
extreme elevations on either side, surface winds are channeled by    required to enter the river. The village of Koyuk, on the N side of
the valley such that prevailing directions are either E or W. Fall    the mouth of the river, offers telephone, mail, fuel, stores, a Public
storms moving through the Bering Sea occasionally produce    Safety Officer, and a volunteer search and rescue group. Daily
winds of several hours duration blowing from the W with veloci-    flights to Nome are available. The village can be contacted on
ties in excess of 50 m.p.h., and because of the low elevation, the    VHF-FM channel 10 by calling "Public Safety Koyuk."
village and airport may be flooded by the wind-caused high tides.   (606)  Small boats land or moor in a narrow channel that sepa-
During winter, flooding does not occur because Norton Sound is   rates the spit at Moses Point, 13.1 miles WSW from Bald Head.
frozen from November until about May. In the spring storms with    An aero radiobeacon is just W of the channel. Small boats from
sufficient intensity to produce wind caused floods are rare. Occur-    the native village of Elim, about 7.5 miles to the SW, beach them-
rences in summer are also quite rare, but more likely than in    selves at Moses Point, or anchor in the small bay just off the vil-
spring, especially during the latter part of the season.           lage. Vessels can anchor to a hard bottom with good holding
 (599) Besboro Island is 1,040 feet high and very prominent; on    ground about 1 mile off the village in 41/2 fathoms of water. Ser-
a clear day it can be seen from St. Michael. It affords a poor lee, as    vices available in Elim include telephone, mail, fuel, store, small
the wind draws all around the island. A shoal covered 4 to 43/4    medical clinic, Public Safety Officer, and daily flights to Nome.
fathoms makes off 2 miles in a NE direction from the N end of the    The village can be contacted on VHF-FM channel 11 by calling
island. The W side of the island is bold-to, and the E side can be    "City Office Elim," or "Public Safety Elim."
approached as close as 0.5 mile, with a depth of over 5 fathoms.    (607) (See page T-21 for dates of ice breakup and freezeup.)




                                                        8. BERING SEA                                                        313


 (608) Cape Darby is the S extremity of Kwiktalik Mountain.        (619) Anchorage.-NW of the N end of South Spit, in the
The cape is high and rounded terminating at the water in steep    entrance to Golovnin Lagoon, anchorage may be had in 36 to 42
rocky bluffs.  -                                                  feet, with protection from all winds. For vessels whose size pre-
 (609) Rocky Point is a high bold promontory with irregular    vents the use of this anchorage, the best is off the point on the W
rocky cliffs. Rocky Point Light (64ï¿½23.9'N., 163ï¿½09.0'W.), 175    side of the bay in about 24 feet. This is unsafe in S weather, but is
feet above the water, is seasonally shown from a skeleton tower    the most convenient for communicating with the head of the bay..
with a'red and white diamond-shaped daymark at the W entrance    By shifting anchorage from one side to the other in Golovnin Bay,
to Golovnin Bay.                                                  good shelter is found from E or SW or W winds.
 (610) Golovnin Bay, on the N side of Norton Sound, has its        (620) An anchorage with good holding ground in 42 feet is on
entrance between Cape Darby and Rocky Point, with a width of 10    the following bearings: Rocky Point Light 2530, Golovnin Bay
miles. It extends in a general N direction for 12 miles to the    Light 2, 0400, and Golovnin Bay Light 4, 000ï¿½. Use 60 fathoms of
entrance to Golovnin Lagoon. The E shore is high and bold, with    chain. Keep at least 1 mile S of Carolyn Island.
occasional sand and gravel beaches.                                (621) Golovin, on the N spit at the entrance to Golovnin
 (611) Carolyn Island, low and rocky, is 0.2 mile off the E      Lagoon, is a distributing point for the mining district of the Fish
shore, about 8 miles N of Cape Darby. Golovnin Bay Light 2    River country. Small boats are beached or made fast to the shore
(64027.0'N., 162052.6'W.), 55 feet above the water, is seasonally    on the N side of the spit. The village has telephone, mail, a school,
shown from a small house with a red triangular daymark on the S    roadhouse, cold storage plant, two salteries, several stores, and an
end of the island,                                                airport.
 (612) The W  shore of Golovnin Bay for about 3 miles. N of        (622)  Golovnin Lagoon is very shallow and is navigable for
                                                                   small vessels of 31/2-foot draft to the mouth of the Fish River,
Rocky Point is high and bold, but beyond this is a low sand beach    small vessels of 3/2-foot draft to the mouth of the channel through
with a prominent point about 5 miles N of Rocky Point. The head    which empties into the head of the lagoon. The channel through
of the bay on the W side of the entrance to Golovnin Lagoon is   the lagoon is narrow and tortuous, and local knowledge is
between a sandspit projecting from the E shore and a low sand    required. In 1994, the USCGC IRONWOOD reported signifi-
island extending N from the W shore and connected with it at low    cantly greater depths once inside the river. The village of White
islwandextending N f rom the  shoe ad coneced wth t atlowMountain is just above where the river forks, about 7 miles above
                                                                   the mouth. Above the village, the river reportedly becomes very
 (613) The tidal current in Golovnin Bay is chiefly diurnal. The
                                                                   shallow with several gravel beds. The village provides telephone,
current velocity is about 0.5 knot off Carolyn Island; floods N and
                                                                   mail, fuel, stores, a Public Safety Officer, and daily flights to
,ebbs S.                                                          Nome. The village may be contacted on VHF-FM channel 5 by
 (614)  Deep water can be carried close under Cape Darby and    calling "City Office White Mountain."
Rocky Point. E of Rocky Point is an extensive middle ground on     (623) (See page T-21 for dates of ice breakup and freezeup.)
which the least depth found was 23 feet; on its E edge it rises    (624) For about 22 miles, from Rocky Point to Topkok Head, the
abruptly from 36 to 42 feet. Except for this middle ground, the bay    land is high abold, in many places rising abruptly. Beyond thi
is free from dangers S of the low point on the W shore, the deepest    to Cape Nome the coast is low, with high land farther back. Imme-
water being on the E side, and ranging from 66 feet close under    diately behind this lowland is a large shoal lagoon with two small
Cape Darby to 24 feet 0.5 mile NW of Carolyn Island. In the S    entrances, the W one called Port Safety. Between Rocky Point and
part of the bay the highland may be approached closely, but off the    Cape Nome the water is deep and the bottom regular; by giving
low land the 18-foot curve is in places nearly I mile offshore.   the shore aerth of 1 mile a depth of 6 fathom       re will b
                                                                   the shore a berth of I mile a depth of 6 fathoms or more will be
 (615) In 1952 the Bureau of Indian Affairs ship NORTH STAR    found.
reported striking a submerged object in 64020'N., 163006'W.,       (625) Topkok Head is 22 miles W of Rocky Point, and is the
about 4 miles SSE of Rocky Point; the vessel was drawing about    first highland close to the coast E of Cape Nome. Its seaward face
21 feet.                                                          rises abruptly from the water 586 feet and is a well-known and
 (616) In the N part of the bay an extensive shoal, with 4 to 9 feet,    conspicuous landmark.
makes out in a NE direction from the W shore to within 0.8 mile    (626) A yellow bluff, 572 feet high, on the E side of Bluff, about
of the E shore; its extremity is about 2 miles 093ï¿½ from the N point    6 miles E of Topkok Head, is conspicuous, but not as much so as
of South Spit on the S side of the entrance to Golovnin Lagoon.    Topkok Head.
The channel leading to the entrance to Golovnin Lagoon is on the   (627) In 1968, it was reported that small craft could find some
E side of the bay, passing around the E end of the shoal and fol-    protection from W winds in indifferent weather in a small cove W
lowing the E shore at a distance of 0.4 to 0.7 mile, with an average    of Bluff. The cove can be recognized by a small low house some-
width of 800 yards. The least depth in the channel is 13 feet, but    what back from a point. Caution should be exercised in this area to
15 feet has been taken in at high water. The diurnal range of the    avoid being swept into the cove as a result of sudden wind
tide is 1.8 feet, but this is influenced by the prevailing winds,    changes.
which have a tendency to bank up the water in heavy S weather      (628) Solomon is an abandoned mining village at the mouth of
and to lower it with N and NE winds.                              the Solomon River, 11 miles W of Topkok Head and 17 miles E
  (617) Golovnin Bay Light 4 (64031.2'N., 162055. 'W.), 106    of Cape Nome. A road runs N to Council and W to Nome via a
feet above the water, is seasonally shown from a skeleton tower    ferry at Port Safety. The depth on the bar at the entrance and inside
with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the NE shore of    Solomon River is about 3 feet, but local knowledge is necessary
the bay.                                                          to keep in the best water. In 1968, it was reported that no lights
  (618) Cheenik Light 6 (64ï¿½32.4'N., 163ï¿½02.6'W.), 22 feet    were visible from offshore, and that there were no good marks for
above the water, is seasonally shown from a skeleton tower with a    entering the river. A large steel warehouse and a few old steel oil
red triangular daymark on the end of the spit W of Golovnin,    tanks were reported to stand on the N side of the river W of the
marks the entrance to Golovnin Lagoon.                            entrance.





314                                                     8. BERING SEA


 (629)  It was further reported in 1968, that small craft should    entrance; these obstructions extend 0170 to shore from the charted
make a straight-in approach to the river entrance from well out-    obstruction in 64ï¿½29'39"N., 165023'50"W.
side. When once inside, however, the river to the W was particu-    (639) The bar is reported to shift its position from time to time
larly good, and that small craft could tie up to the shore on either    because of storms and the alongshore drift, and except at low
the N or S sides; the N side appeared to be a little deeper.       water, due to N winds, the bar is reported to be no problem for
 (630) An anchorage approximately 2 miles offshore in 81/2 fath-    small craft.
oms, hard gravel and sand bottom, is on the following bearings:     (640) The general anchorage for deep-draft vessels is in 7 to 8
Cape Nome 254ï¿½, largest house in village 3580, Topkok Head    fathoms about I mile from the beach abreast of Nome. Vessels of
079ï¿½. Use 45 fathoms of chain. The only protection against heavy    less draft anchor in about 6 fathoms a little closer to the beach. In
winds is to stand out to seaward.                                  strong S winds vessels should anchor farther offshore.
 (631)  (See page T-21 for dates of ice breakup and freezeup.)      (641)  Tides.-The diurnal range of the tide is 1.6 feet. The water
 (632) Port Safety, about 8 miles E of Cape Nome, is a small    levels are influenced more by the wind than tide. An offshore wind
anchorage for vessels of less than 7-foot draft. The channel is nar-    sometimes causes a level of from 2 to 3 feet below mean lower
row and has a depth of 7 feet. Small vessels can anchor in the nar-    low water for days at a time; a level of 14 feet above mean lower
row sloughs that lead between the flats inside the entrance.       low water has been noted as aresult of storms.
 (633)  A cable ferry travels across the entrance to Port Safety;   (642)  Currents.-About 2 miles offshore in Nome roadstead the
minimum vertical clearance of the cables is 3 feet. Sheltered    tidal current averages about 1 knot at times of strength. It is chiefly
anchorage for several small boats can be had in the entrance out-    diurnal. The flood sets E, and the ebb NW.
side of the ferry cables.
                                                                     (643) Weather.-The moderating influence of the open water of
 (634)  Cape Nome is a bluff about 650 feet high, I mile broad,    Norton Sound is effective only from early June to about the mid-
and rounded down to the water on either side, where the land at    dle of November. Storms moving through this area during these
the shore is low, with higher land farther back. The water off this    months result in extended periods of cloudiness and rain. The
cape is quite deep. The diurnal range of tide at Cape Nome is    nearly continuous cloud cover during July and August results in an
about 2 feet.
                                                                   average of 45 cloudy, 12 partly cloudy, and only 5 clear days for
 (635)  From Cape Nome to Cape Rodney, the coast, except    the 2-month period. During the summer the daily temperature
abreast of Sledge Island, is a comparatively straight stretch of low    range is very slight. The freezing of Norton Sound in November
sand beach, with no projecting points, and higher land some dis-    causes a rather abrupt change from a maritime to a continental cli-
tance back. Abreast of Sledge Island for a distance of several    mate. Most low-pressure systems during this period take a path S
miles the hills slope down to the beach, giving this part of the    of Nome, resulting in strong E winds, accompanied by frequent
coast the appearance of a point. The stretch of beach is broken by    blizzards, with the winds later becoming N and reaching Nome
a number of small rivers. The entrances to Nome River, Snake    across the colder frozen areas of N Alaska.
River, Penny River, and Sinuk River have shifting bars, but there   (644) Temperatures generally remain well below freezing from
is generally enough water in the channel over these bars to permit    the middle of November to the latter part of April; January is usu-
boats of 3-foot draft to enter. When approaching the coast between    ally the coldest month of the year. Temperatures usually begin to
Cape Nome and Sledge Island, the water shoals regularly and    rise near the end of February and continue to rise until they reach a
gradually until a depth of 5 fathoms is reached; inside this depth
the bottom is irregular, especially near the mouths of the rivers.  trend is the short period of thawing weather in January. Despite
                                                                   trend is the short period of thawing weather in January. Despite
                                                                   the generally low temperatures, the maximum during the month is
 (636)  Chart 16206.-Nome, the metropolis of NW Alaska, is on    often above freezing and the "January thaw" generally expected
the beach at the mouth of the Snake River, 11 miles W of Cape    by old time residents is a usual occurrence.
Nome. The harbor is a shallow, open roadstead. Large vessels
                 Nome. The harbor is a shallow, open roadstead. Large vessels  (645) Precipitation reaches its maximum during the late summer
anchor and the passengers and cargo are taken ashore in lighters. months and drops to a minimum in April and May. Snow begins to
Traffic using the dredged channel is handled over the revetment,    fall in September, but usually does not accumulate on the ground
where transfer facilities that are open to public use are available.  until the first part of November. The accumulated depth increases
 (637) Jetties, marked at the outer ends by seasonal lights and    during November, December, and January, reaching a maximum
distinguishable on radar to 4 miles, protect the entrance to Snake    depth usually in late February or early March. The snow cover
River. A seasonally maintained lighted 009ï¿½ range marks the    decreases rapidly in April and May, and normally disappears by
entrance channel. A large dish-shaped communications antenna    the middle of June.
about 0.25 mile E of the entrance is prominent. An aero radiobea-
con is 2.5 miles E of Nome (shown on charts 16200, 16206), and          ranging from around 10 to 12  r.ph Severe windstorms do occur
an aerolight is at the Nome Airport. A dredged channel leads to a    with winds over 70 m.p.h. recorded several times. Velocities
turning basin at Nome, 0.3 mile above the mouth of Snake River.
In June 1991-June 1992, the controlling depth was 71/2 feet to the    October through March  These strong winds during the winter
turning basin; thence in August 1992, 7 to 8 feet was available in    when there is snow cover produce blowing snow conditions that
the basin, except for lesser depths to 5 feet along the S and W    severely hinder transportation in the area.
edges. Rapid shoaling occurs at the entrance to the channel,
requiring maintenance dredging during the open season. With         (647  (See page T- I for Nome Climatoogical Table.)
heavy surf, boats crossing the bar before entering between the jet-  (648) Navigation is difficult because of the ice from early
ties will ground and are liable to overturn.                       December to early June and is usually suspended from late
 (638) In 1968, submerged obstructions consisting of concrete    December to mid-May.
blocks were reported to exist about 850 yards ESE of the channel    (649) (See page T-21 for dates of ice breakup and freezeup.)





                                                         8. BERING SEA                                                         315


 (650) The National Weather Service maintains a weather station     (666) Cape Rodney Light (64038.5'N., 166ï¿½23.8'W.), 24 feet
at the Nome Airport and monitors VHF-FM channel 16 (156.80    above the water, is seasonally shown from a skeleton tower with a
MHz) and 2182 kHz.                                                 red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the point.
 (651) Quarantine is enforced in accordance with regulations of     (661) King Island, 1,196 feet high, is about 34 miles W of Cape
the U.S. Public Health Service. (See Public Health Service, chap-    Douglas. It is triangular in shape, about 1.5 miles long and about
ter 1.) A hospital is in Nome.                                     1.2 miles wide, rugged and rocky, and has nearly perpendicular
                                        652) Supplies.-Water and some provisions  can be obtained.  liffs, deep water, and generally rocky bottom on all sides. Ukivok
 (652) Supplies.-Water and some provisions can be obtained.
        Diesel oil is not available in large quantities.          is a native village on the S side, the houses being built in the sides
                                                                    of the cliffs some distance above the water. Off the village, but
 (653) Communications.-Nome maintains radiotelephone and    close inshore, vessels may anchor in about 15 fathoms, muddy
radiotelegraph communications with other parts of Alaska and the    bottom, with good protection from NW winds. In clear weather
world. Air service for passengers, mail, and freight is available the    the island is an excellent landfall for vessels coming from S and
year round. Steamship service is available during the summer.    bound to Port Clarence,
From Nome, roads extend to Council, Teller, and to the Kobuk        (662) Cape York (65ï¿½25.0'N., 167030.0'W.), is a high, rocky,
River S of Taylor.                                                 nearly vertical cliff, with numerous ravines and a range of high
                                                                    rugged mountains immediately back of it. The cliff is about 10 to
 (654) Chart 16200.-Sledge Island, 31 miles W of Cape Nome        12 miles in extent. There is no distinct promontory, and no exact
and 4.5 miles offshore, is a rocky flat-topped island except near    point along the cliff that can be defined as the cape.
the S extremity where the highest point, a 760-foot jagged moun-    (663) The area from Cape York to Port Clarence has been sur-
tain, exists. Ruins of abandoned habitations are on the sandspit on    veyed with no depth less than 6 fathoms being found 1.5 miles
the N end of the island and along the beach about midway of the E    from the shore. The general depths fall off to a submarine valley
side. These are probably ruins of the former village of Aziak.    about 2 miles offshore, extending E, with depths of not less than
Except for the sandspit, the shores of the island are rocky and    10 fathoms, to within 6 miles of the entrance to Port Clarence. A
steep.                                                             rock is reported about 0.8 mile from the shore SE of York village.
 (655) Sledge Island Light (64ï¿½30.0'N., 166ï¿½11.5'W.), 32 feet       (664)  Between Cape York and the high land of Cape Prince of
above the water, is seasonally shown from a skeleton tower with    Wales is a bight, with comparatively low rolling land back of it,
a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the N point of the    that extends across the peninsula to the N shore. The beach is low,
island. The island may be safely approached from any direction    and the water shoals gradually when approaching the shore. The E
except the E where a depth of 3 fathoms is 0.9 mile E of the light.    part of the bight is slightly shoaler than the W part; about 6 fath-
Small vessels seeking shelter close in on the N side are cautioned    oms will be found 1 mile offshore; in the W  part of the bight 8
to stay clear of the submerged bar making off NW from the spit. It   fathoms will be found at the same distance from the beach. When
was reported that the cove just W  of the spit provides a good    standing W alongshore, and when abreast of Cape Mountain, the
anchorage. A depth of 6/V2 fathoms is about 3.7 miles offshore and    water deepens suddenly to 20 fathoms.
about 7.5 miles E of Sledge Island. The passage between Sledge
Island and the mainland has irregular bottom but has depths of 5    (665) Chart 16204.-Port Clarence, a large bay indenting the
fathoms or more. Tide rips have been observed in the passage and    Seward Peninsula about 35 miles SE of Cape Prince of Wales,
on the E side of the island during heavy weather.                  provides the only good harbor close to the Bering Strait. The bay
 (656) With heavy S winds, vessels at anchor in the Nome road-    is formed by a low sandspit which extends from the mainland in a
stead usually seek shelter behind Sledge Island. Ice is reported to    N direction for about 10 miles to Point Spencer. The highest ele-
hang on longer in this area than to the E toward Nome. ï¿½           vation on the spit is a round knoll near the S end, 24 feet above sea
                                                                    level. This knoll is inconspicuous except at close range. Near
 (657) Current observations were made in the passage between    Point Spencer, at the broad part of the spit, are several buildings
Sledge Island and the mainland for a period of 6 days in July 1950.    and structures of a loran station, the most prominent of which is a
The tidal current is diurnal with average velocity at strength of    1,365-foot loran tower. NOAA Ship DISCOVERER reported that
NW current of 1 knot and average velocity at strength of SE cur-    the loran tower had a maximum useful radar range of 16 miles.
rent of 0.5 knot. Maximum velocity observed during the period of    The Coast Guard maintains a lighted airstrip year-round at the sta-
the observations was about 1.5 knots setting NW. (See Tidal Cur-    tion and monitors 2182 kHz and VHF-FM channels 16 and 22.
rent Tables for predictions.) Vessels when in this vicinity should    Four green fuel tanks on the spit are visible from the E.
give special attention to the currents. Above Cape Rodney there is  (666) Point Spencer Light (65'16.6'N., 166'50.9'W.), 22 feet
no perceptible current S or E; the general set is N and W.         above the water, is shown seasonally from a skeleton tower with a
 (658) From Cape Rodney to Cape Douglas, the shore is a low    red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the N end of the point
sand beach, and the high land is farther inland from the beach than    at the entrance to Port Clarence. Except for the light and loran
E of Cape Rodney. This coast is seldom approached close-to; the    tower, there are no conspicuous landmarks to aid the navigator in
water is comparatively shallow and dangerous, shoals and ledges    making the entrance into Port Clarence.
are found between Cape Douglas and Point Spencer.
 (659) Vessels are cautioned to exercise care when approaching      (667) The channel between Point Spencer and Point Jackson on
the shore S of Cape Rodney and to give the shore off Cape Dou-    the N shore is 4 miles wide, free of dangers, and with depths of 42
glas a berth of at least 15 miles; an irregular bottom with depths of    to 48 feet. The N half of the bay has a general depth of 42 feet as
6 fathoms has been found by reconnaissance lines off this cape    close as I mile from shore. There are no dangers, and depths shoal
with indications of lesser depths inshore. From a point about 8    gradually to the beach. The S half of the bay shoals gradually to
miles NE of Cape Douglas the area to the N, covering the    the bars and flats along the low shoreline at the S end. Along the
approaches to Port Clarence, has been surveyed.                    W  side of the bay the sandspit may be approached fairly close




316                                                      8. BERING SEA


      except for the shoal 2 miles S of Point Spencer which makes into    at Teller at least once a week. The winter weather is generally bet-
      the bay from the spit with depths of 15 feet I mile off. To the E the    ter than the summer for plane service, as there is little or no fog
      water shoals to the entrance to Grantley Harbor, which is con-    during cold weather.
      nected with Port Clarence by a narrow channel marked by Grant-       (674)  The first surface fog appears after the spring break-up and
      ley Harbor Light (65ï¿½16.7'N., 166"20.8'W.), 15 feet above the    is of an intermittent character, generally local, and forming and
      water, which is seasonally shown from a tower with a red and    disappearing at intervals as short as one-half hour. As the season
      white diamond-shaped daymark on the N side of the entrance to    advances, the fog is more prevalent, of greater density and longer
      the harbor. The controlling depth in the channel is not more than    duration, but in general it offers no serious obstacle to surface nav-
      10 feet. The channel is subject to continual change; local knowl-    igation.
      edge is advised. The current is strong with many eddies and tide     (675)  (See page T-21 for dates of ice breakup and freezeup.)
      rips.                                                                 (676) Teller Mission is on the N shore of Point Clarence 9.5
        (668) Anchorage with good holding ground is available any-    miles NE of Point Spencer.
      where in Port Clarence. Being very careful in the entrance, shal-    (677)  Teller, 12 miles E of Point Spencer is on the base of the S
      low-draft vessels will find greater protection in Grantley Harbor.  spit at the entrance to Grantley Harbor; There is a school and a
        (669)  Routes.-In approaching Port Clarence from the S in fog    mission, with two general merchandise stores and a suboffice and
      or misty weather, the low sand and shingle spit forming the W side    warehouse of a commercial company at Teller.
      of Port Clarence is not visible until close-to. The best procedure is  (678) Wharves.-Two ramp-type docks furnish facilities for
      to make a landfall on King Island from the E keeping in depths    unloading supplies from lighters and shallow-draft vessels on the
      greater than 60 feet to avoid the foul ground N from Cape Rodney.    Grantley Harbor side. Freighters must anchor well offshore in Port
      From King Island a course may be set a little E of Cape York to    Clarence and lighter cargo to Teller.
      within 3 miles of the coast, thence on course 096ï¿½ through the       (679) Supplies.-Food, coal, diesel oil, lubricating oil, and gaso-
      entrance into Port Clarence, where good anchorage may be    line may be obtained in limited quantities from the two stores.
      obtained.                                                           Loading of oils and gasoline is by drum only. There is no connec-
        (670)  Tides.-The diurnal range of the tide at Port Clarence is 1.4    tion for obtaining water. Shallow-draft vessels may obtain water
      feet. This condition, however, is subject to radical changes due to    through a hose at the mouth of Fox Creek, 3 miles S of Cape
      meteorological conditions. Moderate to strong S or SW winds of    Riley. Larger craft may anchor 0.7 mile offshore in 25 to 30 feet
      several days' duration will raise the height of the tide in the area    and boat water from the beach.
      without appreciably increasing the range. This is actually a datum    (680) Communications.-Radiotelephone and radiotelegraph
      change and is appreciable along the entire S coast of the Seward    services are maintained. Passenger and light freight service is
      Peninsula. It is reported that continued strong N winds produce a    principally by plane, but occasionally freighters and tugs with
      lowered datum, but to a lesser extent.                              lighters furnish transportation for heavier supplies during the short
        (671) Currents.-Along the outside coast W  of Point Spencer    navigation season. An airstrip S of Teller provides mail service
      and S of Cape York there is a general W  set of I to 2 knots. This    from Nome. A gravel road connects Teller with Nome.
      velocity is appreciably affected by direction, force, and duration of  (681) Imuruk Basin (see chart 16200) is a shallow body of
      the wind.                                                           water SE of Grantley Harbor; the two are connected by narrow,
        (672) Current observations in the entrance to Port Clarence indi-    difficult Tuksuk Channel.
      cate that the velocity seldom exceeds 0.5 knot 2 to 3 miles N of     (682) Kuzitrin River rises in the Seward Peninsula and flows in
      Point Spencer. One mile E of the point, velocities up to I knot    a W direction about 75 miles to Imuruk Basin. The anchorage for
      were observed, the larger velocities generally setting W or N.      oceangoing vessels is in Port Clarence, the head of navigation for
       (673) Weather.-The weather, in general, is better than in the    powerboats and other vessels up to 12 feet in draft in the mouth of
      Aleutian Island area, with less fog and fewer bad storms during    Kuzitrin River. Shallow-draft lighters can navigate the Kuzitrin
      the short summer navigation season. Fog and high winds are gen-    for about 15 miles to Shelton. The river is open from June to
      erally of short duration so that it is seldom that planes cannot land    October.








                                                   9. ARCTIC OCEAN

 (1)   This chapter describes the Arctic Ocean coastline of         (10o)  Racons, radar beacons, have been established along the
Alaska from the Bering Strait to Demarcation Point, at the bound-    U.S. Arctic coast of Alaska from Point Lay (69ï¿½44. 'N.,
ary between the United States and Canada, and the waters of Kot-   163000.6'W.) to Brownlow Point (70009.6'N., 145050.6'W.) as
zebue Sound and Prudhoe Bay. Also discussed are the Diomede    additional aids to navigation. The Racons are generally seasonally
Islands, Barter Island, and many of the off-lying coastal islands,    maintained from July 1 to September 15.
and the more important towns and communities in this area           (1)  Currents.-Observations totaling about 6 days were made
including Wales, Kotzebue, Wainwright, and Barrow.                 in the Bering Strait off Cape Prince of Wales during the summer of
                                                                   1950. When not opposed by N winds, the current flowed N with
 (2)   Chart 16003.-Bering Strait, 44 miles wide between    velocities that sometimes exceeded 2.5 knots.
Cape Prince of Wales, Alaska, and Cape Dezhneva, Siberia, is the    (12)  From Bering Strait to Point Barrow the current sets N
gateway from the Bering Sea in the Pacific Ocean to Chukchi Sea    along the shore and has a velocity of not less than 1 knot when not
in the Arctic Ocean. The N limit of Chukchi Sea is a line from    opposed by winds or stopped by ice. A current from Kotzebue
Point Barrow, Alaska, to the northernmost point of Wrangel    Sound joins the current from Bering Strait N of Cape Krusenstern
Island, Siberia.                                                   and the resultant velocity in July and August is 1.5 to 2 knots as
 (3)   The Arctic coast of Alaska has a general length of 921    far as Point Hope. After rounding Point Hope the velocity
nautical miles and is mostly low; tidal shoreline totals 2,191 miles.    decreases to about 1 knot.
The lowlands have their greatest depth in the wide triangular plain  (13)  N of Point Lay the current is stopped if the ice has not
with its apex near Barrow and its base against the Brooks Range,    opened up from the shore; if the ice is open to Point Barrow, the
150 miles to the S. The W end of Brooks Range is near Cape Lis-    current continues along the shore but, because of the constricted
bume and the E end is near Demarcation Point; actually it is not    space between shore and ice, increases in velocity to 2 or 3 knots
one but a series of ranges, some reaching elevations of more than    at Point Barrow. The general current is affected by the winds and
8,000 feet.                                                        may be decreased or even stopped by N winds, but when such
 (4)   Most of the coastal plain is low, rolling tundra cut by    winds abate the current resumes; when the wind is with the current
numerous streams and lakes. The tundra is a cover of grasses,    the velocity is increased. Well offshore, the currents are variable
lichens, and shrubs which, for a short time during the summer, is    and not so strong; they are influenced considerably by the winds
brightened by flowers; during the rest of the year it presents a    but there is a definite general set N. E of Point Barrow the currents
dreary aspect. Tundra is poorly drained and most of it is perma-    are irregular and unpredictable but seem to be caused mostly by
nently frozen below the surface; this permanently frozen ground is    winds and moving ice.
known as permafrost. During the summer, the tundra thaws to a
depth of a foot or more but is kept moist because water cannot      (14)  Weather.-During July, August, and September, winds in
penetrate the permafrost.                                          the Bering Strait are most often out of the N or S at 13 to 15 knots.
  (5)   The frost mounds seen occasionally along the coast are    Gales blow less than 1 percent of the time, although winds reach
produced by frost action on the tundra and vary widely in size and    28 knots or more up to 5 percent of the time. This same flow is
duration. A large frost mound is known as a pingo and may reach    present over the open waters of the Chukchi Sea, where average
a height of 300 feet; the summit is usually fissured and may emit    windspeeds range from 14 to 18 knots, and gales occur about 2
drinkable water. Frost blisters usually form along sloping ground    percent of the time. In September, N winds become more frequent
and may shift in position from year to year; they seldom exceed 25    in the Bering Strait and Chukchi Sea, signaling a return to winter.
feet in height.                                                    At Kotzebue winds out of the SW through W are prevalent during
  (6)   The native sod houses stand 6 to 10 feet above the ground    the summer. In September, they return to the prevailing E winter
and are built of logs with sod piled around the walls and on the    flow; NE winds are also common in winter. Gales blow 2 percent
roof. They can be distinguished from frost mounds by the steep-    of the time in December, January, and February, while winds at
ness of their sides and the smoke pipe that usually projects from    Kotzebue and Cape Lisburne reach 28 knots or more about 3 to 7
the center of the roof.                                            percent of the time in winter.
  (7)   There are few harbors, port facilities, or aids to navigation  (15)  Off the North Slope in July, August, and September, winds
along the Arctic coast. Depths near shore may change as much as    blow mainly out of the NE through E, at average speeds of 11 to
6 feet because of ice gouging; storms also shift the sands in shal-    14 knots. Gales occur less than I percent of the time in July and
low water but there is little evidence of such shifts in the deeper    August, but 1 to 2 percent of the time in September. SW through
water. Abnormal refraction is a common occurrence; a pingo    W winds are also common in summer. N through NE winds pre-
may loom like a mountain, and landmarks may be sighted much        vail during the winter. At Barrow, northeasterlies and easterlies
farther from shore than the normal limit of visibility.            blow the year-round at average speeds of 10 to 14 knots. Gales are
  (s)   Loran.-In September 1980, U.S. Coast Guard Cutter    infrequent. At Barter Island, winds from the NE through E and
POLAR SEA reported that loran signals were unreliable above    SW through W  make up about 75 to 85 percent of the observa-
68ï¿½00'N., and that the signals were completely lost above Cape    tions. Westerlies are slightly more frequent in midwinter, while
Lisburne.                                                          easterlies, which are frequent at all times, reach a peak in early
  (9)   Omega.-In September 1980, strong Omega signals were    summer. Winds from the W  are strongest, averaging 17 to 18
experienced in the Beaufort Sea by the U.S. Coast Guard Cutter    knots during the winter, when gales blow 2 to 4 percent of the
POLAR SEA.                                                         time. Winds have exceeded 65 knots at Barter Island. Strong win-


                                                                                                                               317





318                                                    9. ARCTIC OCEAN


ter winds often blow parallel to the coast from Barrow to Barter     (22)  At Point Barrow, the pack breaks off from the flaw or
Island.                                                          -  shore ice in the spring and moves off and on until June. When the
 (16)  In these N seas, advection or sea fog is the primary restric-    pack moves off in June, it begins to take a NW movement and
tion to visibility during the warmer months of the year. It is most    continues to do so until it is out of sight. The movement of the
prevalent from June through September, affecting the exposed    pack, on and off, continues well into July, after which time heavily
coasts as well as open seas. It is most dense during the morning    massed floe ice, much broken and heavily jammed together, may
hours. In July and August, visibilities drop below 2 miles 10 to 25    be expected. Mariners are cautioned that the prevailing N currents
percent of the time in the Bering Strait, Chukchi Sea, and off the N  near Point Barrow will tend to carry vessels, which are beset, far-
coast of Alaska. They fall to 0.5 mile or less 5 to 20 percent of the    ther into the ice mass. The shore ice leaves the beach late in July
time and are worst off the North Slope. At Barter Island, visibili-    but remains in sight until the middle of August, or perhaps all
ties of 0.5 mile or less occur on 11 to 16 days per month from June    summer. In exceptional seasons the pack remains on the point the
through September, and visibilities of 0.25 mile or less occur both    year-round. E of Point Barrow, ice conditions are very uncertain.
here and at Barrow on about 3 to 5 mornings per month during this    When the pack ice moves offshore it does not go very far, and the
period. Cape Lisburne is subjected to 3 to 7 days per month when    shore and drift ice extend well inshore from its edge. The current
visibilities fall to 0.5 mile or below. At Kotzebue, midsummer vis-    along the W  shore of Alaska sets NE from Point Barrow; the
ibilities are good, while from November through June, poor visi-    movements of the ice to the E of Point Barrow are due entirely to
bilities occur on 3 to 7 days per month on the average. In winter,    the winds.
snow and blowing snow can reduce visibilities to less than 0.5       (23)  In the fall, young ice forms earlier to the E than to the W
mile. The snow that accumulates is often so dry and powdery that    and can be seen as early as mid-August. The prevailing winds are
a i 0-knot wind can pick up enough to reduce visibilities to less    NE and soon bring the pack down to the E of Point Barrow. When
than 5 miles. Ice fog and steam fog or arctic smoke also reduce    this ice movement commences vessels proceed to the W of the
visibilities in winter. Radiation fog can occur on calm, clear    point.
nights.                                                               (24)  At Point Barrow young ice begins to form around heavy
 (17)  Winters are cold and summers are cool along this coast. In    ice about mid-September and by the end of the month it forms in
November, average daily maximums drop to the low teens (ï¿½F) or    open water and makes rapidly along the beach. By this time the
below, while average minimums are around Q0F. February is gen-    pack has moved close to shore. The young ice makes out to the
erally the coldest month. Average maximums range from just    pack during the first week of October, and then the ice is in for the
above 0'F at Kotzebue to -I 3'F, E of Cape Lisburne. Low temper-    winter. The pack shuts down on Icy Cape the first week in Novem-
atures in the -20'F range are common. Extremes of -50'F or    ber, and after that time there is no open water between Point Bar-
below have been recorded. The big increase in temperature starts    row and Icy Cape except when the flaw opens.
in March. By April, daytime highs in the 10ï¿½ to 200F range, and       (25)  Freezeup normally begins at Kotzebue in late October, and
nighttime lows in the -5ï¿½ to 5ï¿½F range are common. By June, tem-    a southbound vessel should try to clear Bering Strait by early
peratures are often in the forties during the day and thirties at    November
night. Warmest weather usually occurs in July. At Kotzebue, the      (26)  (See page T-21 for dates of ice breakup and freezeup.)
average maximum is 59ï¿½F, while the average minimum is 47ï¿½F.           (27)  Small-boat operation in ice.-Launches usually can pro-
Along the North Slope, these readings are 80 to 10tF cooler.    ceed through the looser-packed floe ice during calm weather, but
Extremes can reach the midseventies to mideighties.                 slow speed and maneuverability are essential. Passage frequently
                                                                    can be made close to shore when large floes have been driven in to
 (18)  Since the air in this region holds relatively little moisture,    the beach. Large bergs m ay also make leads th rough the more
particularly in winter, annual precipitation amounts are light, rang-    solid floes. Small ice cakes can be pushed aside in the looser areas.
ing from 5 to 15 inches. The greatest amounts occur along the
                 ing from 5 to 15 inches. The greatest amounts occur along the    Caution must be observed to avoid the underwater projections of
shores of the Chukchi Sea and Kotzebue Sound. While amounts
                 shores of the Chukchi Sea and Kotzebue Sound. While amounts  the larger bergs and the growler type of berg which is low in the
are light, there are many snowy or rainy days. Some form of mea-    wat er   and difficu  lt to s ee. The bergs have a   tendency to roll or
                                                                    water and difficult to see. The bergs have a tendency to roll or
surable precipitation falls on about 200 to 300 days each year.
Snow falls in every month, but is the most frequent precipitation    operate close-to  and i n the lee of ice floes to take advantage of t
                                                                    operate close-to and in the lee of ice floes to take advantage of the
form from October through May. About 30 to 50 inches fall each    smoother seas and will sometimes leave the mainland to proceed
                                                                    smoother seas and will sometimes leave the mainland to proceed
year. Heaviest amounts of precipitation are most likely in July,    in the lee of offshore ice.
August, and September, when 2 to 4 inches per month are com-
                                                                      (28)  Aids to navigation are maintained only during the naviga-
                                                                    tion season. (See Light List.)
 (19)  Ice.-Unless there is an unusually late spring, the ice
begins to break in Bering Strait and Kotzebue Sound by early         (29)  Chart 16200-Cape Prince of Wales, on the Alaska side
June. Heavy drift ice from Kotzebue Sound is often found    of Bering Strait, is the W extremity of Seward Peninsula. Cape
between Cape Blossom and Point Hope in late June.                   Mountain, 2,289 feet high, is a mile back of the steep rocky
 (20)  At Point Hope and Cape Lisburne, the pack ice breaks off    shores on the SW side of the cape; a parabolic antenna is 1.7 miles
from the shore ice in May and moves off and closes in again with    ENE of the mountain.
changing winds, gradually working off to the N and W. Young ice      (30)  Tin City, an abandoned village, is on the beach about 2
forms in the spaces thus left but gradually gets thinner until it dis-    miles SE of Cape Mountain. The bight off Tin City affords N
appears in June.                                                    weather anchorage in depths of 10 fathoms a mile from a sand
 (21)   From Cape Beaufort to Point Barrow the pack moves          beach which is steep enough for good landing. There is a Govern-
gradually N, clearing from point to point. A shift of the wind to W  ment airstrip near Tin City.
brings the pack in on shore when a few hours before it was out of    (31)  Wales, 2.5 miles NW of Cape Mountain, is at the S end of
sight from the land.                                                a low sandy beach which extends 4 miles N, then turns NE toward





                                                       9. ARCTIC OCEAN                                                          319


Shismaref Inlet. The village has a mission, a school, a store, and    fathoms both N and S of the meeting place of lowlands and moun-
radiotelephone communication. Small planes carrying mail and a    tains. Anchorage is also possible in depths of 10 fathoms, muddy
few passengers land on the beach in front of the village. ï¿½         bottom, E of the cape.
 (32)    Cape Prince of Wales Light (65038.0'N., 168'07.2'W;),       (41)  From Cape Prince of Wales to Shishmaref Inlet, 60 miles
20 feet above the water, is shown seasonally from a skeleton tower    NE, the coast is a low sand beach backed by lagoons and marshes.
with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the beach 2    The mountains in the interior can be seen on a clear day; Potato
miles N of Wales.                                                   Mountain (65040'N., 167035'W.), 1,406 feet, and Ear Mountain
 (33)  Anchorage off Wales is in depths of 10 fathoms 0.8 mile    (65ï¿½55'N., 166ï¿½19'W.), 2,329 feet, are distinguishable.
from the beach. A narrow naval restricted area extends nearly 4      (42)  Shishmaref Inlet is large and extends about 15 miles into
miles due W from the beach midway between Wales and the light.    the land. Across its mouth is Sarichef Island, narrow and about 5
(See 334.1330, chapter 2, for limits and regulations). Caution is    miles long. Shishmaref Light (66015.5'N., 166ï¿½02.4'W.), 18 feet
advised to avoid being dragged N over the restricted area and on    above the water, is shown from a skeleton tower with a red and
to Prince of Wales Shoal by the nontidal current which usually has    white diamond-shaped daymark about 0.5 mile from the NE end
a velocity of more than I knot.                                     of the island.
 (34)  Ice.-Average breakup in Bering Strait at Wales is in early    (43)  Shishmaref, at the light on Sarichef Island, is the most
June and average freezeup is about the first of December. (See    important settlement along this section of the coast. The village
page T-21 for dates of ice breakup and freezeup.) Navigation is    has a school, mission, store, radio station, and an airstrip; limited
difficult from early December to early June and is usually sus-    supplies of gasoline, diesel fuel, food, and water are available. The
pended from late December through April.                            school building is reported to be conspicuous. Shishmaref uses
 (35)  Prince of Wales Shoal is a narrow ridge of sand, covered    Bering standard time.
3V,2 to 5 fathoms, that extends about 35 miles NNE from the W        (44)  Anchorage can be had in depths of 5 fathoms 1.3 miles
extremity of the cape. Vessels bound S through Bering Strait    WNW of Shishmaref Light. Beach landings can be made only in
should be careful not to fall too far E and be caught between the    calm weather on the seaward side of Sarichef Island because of the
shoal and the N shore of Seward Peninsula. The shoal is unmarked    shallow water that extends 250 yards from shore.
because of ice conditions and the remoteness of the locality.
 (36)  Fairway Rock (65038'N., 168044'W.), 15 miles W  of           (45)  The navigable channel into Shishmaref Inlet rounds the
                  ~(36)  Fairway Rock ï¿½6 '3          miles      ofNE end of Sarichef Island; a dangerous bar makes out 0.5 mile
Cape Prince of Wales, is 534 feet high, square headed, and steep    from the poin t o n the  N side of the channel. Vessels drawing as
sided. The rock has deep water on all sides, and there are no outly-
                                                                    much as 7 feet may be beached on the channel side of the sandy
ing dangers.
 in)g  Thangers. Dio.ed  Islandsmidway betweenCapePrinceof        NE end of Sarichef Island; drafts of 3 feet may be taken to within
                  (37)  The Diomede Islands, midway between Cape Prince of    100 yards of the inner beach SW of Shishmaref, and native skiffs
Wales and the Siberian mainland, have nearly perpendicular sides    have followed unmarked channe  ls c ompletely and the isand.
and are without beaches; the tops of the islands are broken table-
                                                                    Native pilots are available at Shishmaref.
lands. The waters around the islands are deep, the bottom is
   mostly rocky, and anchorage is poor. The U.S.- Russia boundary    (46)  Ice.-Average breakup at Shishmaref is in the latter part of
mopasses between the two islands                                    June and average freezeup is about the second week of November.
 (38)  Little Diomede Island (Alaska), with an elevation of    (See page T-21 for dates of ice breakup and freezeup.) Navigation
1,308 feet, is 20 miles WNW of Cape Prince of Wales and 8 miles    is difficult fromthe first of December until late June and usually is
NNW of Fairway Rock. Diomede, the only village on the island,    suspended from late December until early June.
is just N of the sandspit midway along the W shore. A reef extends   (47   For 60 miles NE and E from Shishmaref Inlet the coast is a
W from the sandspit toward the S end of Big Diomede Island. Ves-    line of low bluffs and small sand dunes that end in a very low spit
sels approaching Little Diomede Island from the S and E may run    at Cape Espenberg, which is difficult to make out. Native settle-
close along the S shore, keeping in depths greater than 14 fathoms    ments are scattered along the coast from Cape Espenberg to Cape
until the village is sighted, and anchor S of the sandspit. Approach    Prince of Wales.
from E also has been made along N shore at distances decreasing      (48)  Northwest Corner Light (66034.9'N., 164ï¿½24.2'W.), 75
from I mile to 0.4 mile and anchorage in depths of 17 fathoms 0.7    feet above the water, is seasonally shown from a skeleton tower
mile N of the spit.                                                 with a red and white diamond-shaped daymark 19 miles W of the
 (39)  Big Diomede Island (Siberia), 2.1 miles NW of Little    cape. Cape Espenberg Light (66ï¿½33.5'N., 163ï¿½36.4"W.), 28 feet
Diomede Island, rises to a height of 1,667 feet; close to the W     above the water, is shown seasonally from a skeleton tower with a
shore are some bare rocks, and a light is shown from the N end.    red and white diamond-shaped daymark on the cape.
Deep water is reported between the two islands but passage should    (49)  Kotzebue Sound, at the NE end of Seward Peninsula, is
not be attempted by large vessels.                                  entered between Cape Espenberg and Cape Krusenstern, 33 miles
                                                                    to the N; depths are 6 to 9 fathoms throughout most of the sound.
 (40)  Chart 16005.-Cape Dezhneva, 19 miles NW of Big                (50)  The 30-mile W side of Kotzebue Sound from Cape Espen-
Diomede Island, is the E extremity of the mountainous peninsula    berg S is relatively shallow, with depths of 3 fathoms as far as 5
at the NE end of the Russian mainland. This peninsula, which    miles from shore; the land on this side is mostly low but a small
rises to a height of 2,638 feet, resembles an island when seen from    hill is conspicuous about halfway between the cape and the S
the offing because of the low, marshy land back of it. The coasts of    shore.
the peninsula consist mainly of dark-colored cliffs rising in jagged  (51)  The 45-mile S shore of Kotzebue Sound proper is higher,
terraces steeply from the sea. Lights are shown from the N and S    rockier, and bolder than the W  shore; inshore depths too are
sides of the cape, and there are radiobeacons at the lights. A sub-    greater, with 4 and 5 fathoms quite close to the promontories.
merged rock is a mile off the NE face of the cape. Anchorage, with    Cape Deceit Light (66006.0'N., 162ï¿½45.0'W.), 200 feet above the
good proteciton from offshore winds, can be found in depths of 8    water, is shown seasonally from a skeleton tower with a red and




320                                                    9. ARCTIC OCEAN


white diamond-shaped daymark on the extremity of Cape Deceit,    of the extensive mud flats. The waters are little influenced by tides
which is halfway along the S shore.                                 and are mostly fresh because of the near absence of any E current;
 (52)  Deering, on the E side of Cape Deceit, has a school,    prolonged SE winds lower the level.
stores, and radio communication; anchorage is available in depths     (63)  Kotzebue, 11 miles N of Cape Blossom and on the outer S
of 5 fathoms I mile E of Cape Deceit Light.                         side of Hotham Inlet entrance, has a school, a hospital, missions,
 (53)  Kiwalik Lagoon, in the SE corner of Kotzebue Sound, is    stores, banking facilities, fur farms, airstrips, an aerolight and an
shallow and has a mud bottom. A narrow channel winds through    aero radiobeacon, and radiotelephone communication; the town
the lagoon to Kiwalik River which can be navigated only with    uses Bering standard time. Vessels of less than 6-foot draft can
local knowledge. Shallow-draft boats can operate in the lagoon    reach the town if they know the channel, which is shifting and dif-
during periods of high water, but the lagoon is almost dry when     ficult to follow. Seasonal buoys mark the entrance channel. Local
the water is lowered by adverse winds.                              pilots are available at Kotzebue. It is reported that information on
 (54)  Kiwalik, on the gravel spit on the W  side of the lagoon    pilotage, docking, and the facilities and supplies at Kotzebue can
entrance, has a rough landing strip that will accommodate small    be obtained from the B&R Tug Co. of Kotzebue. Out of season
planes; the diurnal range of tide is 2.7 feet at Kiwalik. (See Tide    this information is available from Roy Heinrich, manager of the
Tables for predictions.) Candle, about 6 miles upriver from Kiwa-    B&R Tug Co., 10116 SE 21st Street, Bellevue, Wash. 98004.
lik, has stores, a school, and a gravel airstrip.                    (64)  Deep-draft vessels approach Kotzebue as closely as possi-
 (55)  Spafarief Bay, also in the SE corner of Kotzebue Sound    ble and lighter their freight ashore. The usual anchorage for deep-
but N of Kiwalik Lagoon, has depths of 3 to 5 fathoms.              draft vessels is in depths of 5 to 6 fathoms 3 to 6 miles SW of
 (56)  Tundra-covered Chamisso Island, 231 feet high and           Cape Blossom; protection is afforded from N and E winds. The
about I mile long, is 11 miles N across Spafarief Bay from Kiwa-    trip by small boat from the anchorage to Kotzebue is about 15
lik Lagoon and 2.5 miles S of Choris Peninsula. The earth and    miles and over many sandbars that are constantly shifting; local
rock bluffs that rim the island range in height from 15 feet at the S    pilotage is advised.
end to 80 feet at the NW end. The shores are mostly broken boul-     (65)  On July 14, 1967, a merchantman reported anchoring
ders separated by short stretches of sand beach. Shallow water    about 10 miles W  of Kotzebue on the following bearings: Kotze-
extends 0.3 to 0.5 mile from the N and E sides of the island. Early    bue aero radiobeacon tower, marked with a fixed red light and an
in the open season freshwater can be obtained on Chamisso Island.   alternating flashing green and white light, 078ï¿½; microwave
 (57)  Tiny Puffin Island, 0.3 mile NW of Chamisso Island, has    "horns" or antennae, in about 66ï¿½50'N., 162ï¿½32'W., 094ï¿½; Cape
steep rocky shores; there are two conspicuous rocks S of the    Blossom Light, 121ï¿½; Igichuk Hills, 000ï¿½; and the left tangent of
island. The waters are deep on the N and W sides of Puffin Island    Cape Krusenstern (false cape), 325ï¿½. Caution is advised as vessels
but the passage between the islands is foul.                        in this anchorage may be subject to ice damage during W winds.
 (58)  Choris Peninsula, 300 feet in elevation, is a 6-mile S pro-   (66)  The report further stated that the vessel after passing
jection from much larger and longer Baldwin Peninsula. The N of    through Bering Strait found Ear Mountain (65ï¿½55'N., 166ï¿½19'W.)
two hills on the small peninsula is joined to Baldwin Peninsula by    and Midnight Mountain (65ï¿½47'N., 164ï¿½35'W.) to be good marks.
a narrow neck of land about 20 feet in elevation. The outer end of   Upon rounding Cape Lowenstern, the vessel attempted to enter
Choris Peninsula is the widest part, 2 miles, of the entire feature;    Kotzebue Sound, but after encountering solid ice in the approach,
the bluffs are 50 to 95 feet high and there are projecting rock    had to turn about and head in a generally N direction keeping
ledges. The passage between Choris Peninsula and Chamisso           about 60 miles offshore to avoid broken ice and growlers to a
Island has depths of 3 V2 to 6 fathoms.                             point about 4 miles SW of Kivalina. From this point the vessel
 (59)  Eschscholtz Bay, behind Choris Peninsula, Chamisso          headed in a generally S direction keeping about 10 miles offshore
Island, and Spafarief Bay, extends 20 miles E along the S side of    to the anchorage.
Baldwin Peninsula and is mostly shallow. The shore at the head of    (67)  In addition to the aids used in anchoring, the following
the bay is rimmed with long muddy flats which bare at low water    were reported good marks in the S approach to the anchorage; the
in some places as far as 0.3 mile from the beach. Buckland River,    2,070-foot peak NW of Igichuk Hills; a tripod or post on Cape
which empties into the head of Eschscholtz Bay, is large but shal-    Krusenstern; and the old unlighted radio towers in about
low and has little traffic; Buckland, 10 miles upriver, has a radio    67ï¿½18.5'N., 163040.0'W.
station.                                                             (68)  Cape Mountain, 2,289 feet high, at the-W end of Seward
 (60)  N of Choris Peninsula, Baldwin Peninsula is low for    Peninsula, and the bluffs behind Cape Krusenstern were reported
some distance, then rises to low bluffs which continue to the    to be good radar targets, but the actual cape and shoreline proved
mouth of Hotham Inlet, 40 miles to the NW. The faces of the    deceptive.
bluffs are deeply furrowed by the gradual melting and sliding of     (69)  Currents.-The average velocity of the tidal current is
the surface ice and frozen mud.                                     about 0.5 knot at the anchorage SW of Cape Blossom; the flood
 (61)  Cape Blossom is a distinctive point in the Baldwin Penin-    sets SE and the ebb NW. Observations at this location show a NW
sula bluffs, which are highest at the point and slope to either side.  nontidal flow which sometimes has sufficient velocity to over-
 (62)  Hotham Inlet entrance, 15 miles N of Cape Blossom and    come the flood of the tidal current and produce a continuous NW
30 miles ESE of Cape Krusenstern, is obstructed by vast mud flats    current of varyingv.elocity for days at a time. This NW flow
and sandbars, some of which are bare at low water; the 3-fathom    attains maximum velocities of I to 2 knots at times of the tidal
curve extends as much as 9 miles from shore and nearly as far S as    current's ebb strength.
Cape Blossom. The inner waters of Hotham Inlet are 4 to 15 miles     (70)  Weather.-Kotzebue is 26 miles inside the Arctic Circle
wide and extend 45 miles SE behind Baldwin Peninsula; charted    and very near the N end of a long narrow peninsula bounded on
depths are I to 2 fathoms in what passes for a channel through this    the N and W  by Kotzebue Sound and on the E by Hotham Inlet
inner expanse, which has been known locally as Kobuk Lake.    (known locally as Kobuk Lake). These water bodies produce a
Landings cannot be made at many places in Hotham Inlet because    maritime type of climate when the water is ice-free, which is





                                                       9. ARCTIC OCEAN                                                          321


roughly from late May to late October, although the W  portion of    through a maze of islands, has several entrances that are
the sound is not completely frozen until about December and not    obstructed by mud flats; navigable entrance depth is uncertain but
completely free of ice again until the middle of July. Local topog-    presumably is shallow. Selawik, near one of the entrances, has a
raphy is nearly uniform with a general low relief, so that there are    school, a mission, a radio station, and an airstrip.
no significant terrain barriers in the immediate area to impede sur-  (8l)  The coast is low from Hotham Inlet to Cape Krusenstern,
face air-flow or produce pronounced local variations in tempera-    and shallow water extends nearly half the distance from the mouth
ture and precipitation. The mountainous Seward Peninsula to the    of the inlet toward the cape; the edge of the shoal is steep and
S, however, does deflect some low pressure systems which origi-    should be approached carefully. For the rest of the distance there
nate in or beyond the Bering Sea area and move toward this    are depths of 4 to 6 fathoms close to the beach.
region.                                                              (82)  Behind Cape Krusenstern is a high, prominent range of
  (7i)  During the ice-free period cloudy skies prevail, fog    mountains which can be seen from great distances. On closer
occurs, daily temperatures are relatively uniform, relative humid-
ity is high, and W  winds predominate. These normal conditions    s       eries of steps and must not be  mistaken fo r the low    cape when
                                                                    series of steps and must not be mistaken for the low cape when
are altered only by cyclonic storms or by pressure systems strong    shaping a course into Kotzebue Sound. A shoal extends 3 miles
enough to overcome local circulation tendencies.                    NW from the N side of the cape.
  (72)  When the water surrounding the peninsula becomes fro-
zen, the climatic characteristics approach the continental type. The  (83)  N of Cape Krusenstern the coast is a low, shingle beach
change from maritime to approximately continental conditions    backed by numerous lagoons thatdischarge through small shallow
becomes progressively more pronounced as the ice cover    openings. The high ground behind the cape continues at some dis-
advances across the sound toward the Arctic Ocean. A similar, but    tance inland to Mulgrave Hills, about 30 miles N of the cape.
inverse, change occurs as the ice diminishes.                       Beyond the hills is a wide plain that extends another 30 miles
  (73)  Average winter temperatures are not as severe as might be    before the mountains again approach the coast and slope down to
expected at this latitude. Cyclonic storms and the influence of the    the water
Arctic Ocean, which is often relatively free of ice, moderate the    (84)  About 38 miles NNW of Cape Krusenstern is the Corn-
 winter temperatures.                                                inco-Red Dog Mine port site and loading facility. A large red,
  (74)  Annual precipitation is very light. The total for a normal    white, and blue building with a dark blue roof depicting an Alaska
 year is about eight inches, and over half of that usually occurs in    State flag is predominant and visible well off-shore. The mining
 three months; July, August, and September. Snow generally falls    camp maintains radiotelephone communications year round. Air
 in every month of the year except July and August, but the average    service is available. A racon (67ï¿½34.7'N., 164003.2'W.), loading
 snowfall per year is less than fifty inches.                        facility lights, and mooring buoys mark the site. Local knowledge
  (75)  (See page T-12 for Kotzebue Climatological Table.)          is advised in approaching the area.
  (76)  Ice.-Average breakup in Kotzebue Sound at Kotzebue is         (85)  About 42 miles NNW of Cape Krusenstern is the inlet to a
 about the last of May and average freezeup is in the latter part of    lagoon that extends another 8 miles NW behind the barrier beach
 October. (See page T-21 for dates of average ice breakup and    that separates it from the ocean. Kivalina, on the barrier beach N
 freezeup.) Navigation is difficult from late-October to the latter    of the inlet, has a prominent school (largest brown building), a
 part of June and usually is suspended from the second week in    store, radiotelephone service, Public Health clinic, and an airstrip
 November to mid-June.                                               NW of the village. Small-craft anchorage is available along the
   (77)  Noatak River, which empties into the N side of Hotham       inner side of the village where the channel bears in close to shore.
 Inlet entrance, has numerous rapids and is not navigated for any    Shifting shoals extend as much as 0.3 mile from either side of the
 great distance by anything larger than a canoe. The natives portage    inlet, and entrance should not be attempted without local pilotage.
 from the headwaters of Noatak River to Chipp River and follow        (86)  Ice.-Average breakup at Kivalina is in the latter part of
 the latter to Beaufort Sea. Noatak, about 35 miles upriver from    May and average freezeup is in the latter part of October. (See
 Hotham Inlet, has an airstrip and a radio station.                  page T-2  for dates of ice breakup and freezeup.)
   (78)   Kobuk River empties into the E side of Hotham Inlet
                                                        for about 30   (87)  At Cape Thompson (68'07.0'N., 165'57.0'W.), 80 miles
  through a many-mouthed delta aetofewhifch extends 3inland  miles aboNW of Cape Krusenstern, the mountains drop directly to the water
 miles; depths off the delta are 2 to 4 feet for as much as 3 miles.    in a series of steep bluffs and cliffs about 500 feet high and 6 miles
 The delta channels are difficult to navigate but the river proper is    long. Thousands of sea birds nest along the bluffs and their eggs
  comparatively wide and deep. The natives portage their canoes            a       re an Eskimo source of fres h food supply in early summer.
  from the headwaters of Kobuk River to Koyukuk River, a tributary
  of the Yukon.                                                        (88)  The coast is without distinct promontories. About midway
     (74)  Noorvik, 25 miles up Kobuk River from Hotham Inlet,    along the Cape Thompson cliffs is a rugged mountain face that has
  has a hospital, airstrip, and radio station. Kiana, at the junction    at its S end a distinct series of strata in an irregular semicircle. In
  with Squirrel River 45 miles up the Kobuk from the inlet, has    the ravine S of this point is a small stream from which freshwater
  stores, a school, an airstrip, and a radio station. Much farther up    can be easily obtained. Directly off the stream, anchorage can be
  Kobuk River from the inlet are Shungnak, 150 miles, and Kobuk,    had in depths of 5 fathoms, sandy bottom. At other places along
  155 miles; both have airstrips and Shungnak has a school, a mis-    the cliffs the bottom is mostly rocky.
  sion, and a radio station.                                           (89)  In the bight I mile N of Cape Thompson, the water is
    (80)   A narrow passage 4 miles long and I mile wide connects    fairly deep close to shore and remains calm in the severest N and
  the SE end of Hotham Inlet with Selawik Lake, which extends 35    E storms. Good anchorage, with sand bottom, is available for
  miles farther E and averages 15 miles in width. A depth of 2 fath-    small craft. A 69-ton vessel has been brought to within 75 yards of
  oms can be taken around the lake by giving the shores a wide    the shore without grounding. Good water can be obtained from
  berth. Selawik River, which empties into the E end of the lake    any of several streams.




322                                                    9. ARCTIC OCEAN


  (90)  Charts 16124, 16005.-From Cape Thompson the moun-    the coast 52 miles E by N of Cape Lisburne. There is no apprecia-
tains continue N to Cape Lisburne, while the coast curves NW and    ble break in the coast at Cape Beaufort, and it probably was named
W to Point Hope.                                                    a cape because it is the most N extension of high ground along the
  (91)  Point Hope, 22 miles NW of Cape Thompson and 102    coast of Alaska. At this point the mountains recede inland and the
miles from Cape Krusenstern, is the seaward extremity of a low    coast continues low.
tongue of land that projects 16 miles W from the general line of
the coastal mountains. The point has a steep shingle beach which     (99)  Charts 16102, 16101, 16088, 16087, 16005.-About 18
is backed by numerous lagoons. The village of Point Hope is the    miles N of Cape Beaufort is the S extremity of Kasegaluk
most important settlement along this part of the coast and has a    Lagoon, which extends to within a few miles of Wainwright Inlet.
school, a mission, a store, a radio station, and an airstrip. An aero    S and E of Icy Cape the lagoon is blocked by an extensive area of
radiobeacon (68ï¿½21.0'N., 166ï¿½47.2'W.) is about 1.4 miles NE of    marsh; there is no passage behind the cape even for native skin-
the tip of Point Hope.                                              boats. Separating the lagoon from the ocean is a narrow sand bar-
  (92)  Depths of 4 fathoms are found as far as 5 miles WNW of    rier, only a few feet above the water; S of Icy Cape are several
Point Hope, and a 21/4-fathom shoal extends about 2 miles from    small, shallow passages through the barrier and there are two
shore 6 miles ESE of the point. Vessels have anchored in depths of    larger openings N of the cape. The land on the inner side of the
6 fathoms about 0.8 mile S of Point Hope and in 5 fathoms 0.5    lagoon is mostly low but there are some small bluffs with rolling
mile NE of the tip of the point. The bottom is hard mud and only    terrain behind them. S of Icy Cape, Kasegaluk Lagoon has Kuk-
fair holding ground throughout the Point Hope area.                 powruk River, Kokolik River, Utukok River, and several
 (93)  Ice.-Average breakup at Point Hope is in the latter part of    smaller streams emptying into it but its whole expanse is filled
June and average freezeup is about the second week of November.    with flats and bars that make it scarcely navigable even for native
(See page T-21 for dates of ice breakup and freezeup.) Navigation    canoes.
is difficult from the latter part of November until mid-July and
usually is suspended from early December until the latter part of    (loo) Charts 16102, 16005.-Kukpowruk Pass, 41 miles NNE
June.                                                               of Cape Beaufort, has a controlling depth of about 6 feet into
                                                                   Kasegaluk Lagoon and S for about 2 miles through a narrow chan-
 (94)  Charts 16123, 16005.-Marryat Inlet, 10 miles ENE of    nel along the inner side of the barrier beach; the channel leads to
Point Hope, is the entrance to a large inlet; a draft of 5 feet can be    fair anchorage, protected from all directions. NE winds will lower
taken through the inlet but those not familiar with the channel    the water level about 3 feet, and the pass changes from year to
should be cautious about entering. When the ice breaks in the    year because of ice scouring. There is no channel N through the
inlet, there is a strong outflowing current and the moving ice is    lagoon to Point Lay.
more or less dangerous. Depths off the inlet range from 1 /2 fath-
oms near shore to 31/2 fathoms at a distance of 4 miles.             (101)  Charts 16101, 16005.-Point Lay is a slight bend in the
 (95)  N of Marryat Inlet the mountains slope down to rugged    barrier beach 49 miles NNE of Cape Beaufort. The village of
shore cliffs. The few ravines in the cliffs have running streams    Point Lay is on the beach 3 miles S of the point. Anchorage is in
with shore outlets where freshwater can be obtained.                depths of 6 fathoms 1.5 miles off the village. There is a prominent
                                                                   aero radiobeacon (69ï¿½44.1'N., 163ï¿½00.6'W.) at the airport on the
 (96)  Charts 16122, 16005.-Cape Lisburne (68ï¿½52.9'N.,    mainland 2 miles SSE of the village.
166ï¿½12.5'W.), 35 miles NNE of Point Hope, is a bare brown            (102) A radar beacon (Racon) is at Point Lay Airport
mountain 849 feet high. This rugged headland is distinctively    (69044.1'N., 163'00.6'W.). The Racon, on a 120-foot-high tower
marked by a parabolic antenna (68ï¿½52.2'N., 166ï¿½09.1 'W.), an aero    with an orange radar reflector, has an effective range of 19 miles
radiobeacon (68ï¿½52.0'N., 166ï¿½04.0'W.), pinnacles, and rocks near    and is seasonally maintained.
its summit, and its shore faces are very steep. The cliffs are rook-  (103) Ice.-Average breakup at Point Lay is in late June and
eries, and during the summer months the sky is sometimes dark-    average freezeup is in early November. (See page T-21 for dates of
ened by flights of birds. The wind rushes down from the    ice breakup and freezeup.) Navigation is difficult from early
mountains in gusts of great violence and varying directions, and at    November to late June and usually is suspended from mid-Decem-
such times passing vessels should stay well off the cape.           ber to late June.

 (97)  Charts 16121, 16104, 16005.-The coast turns abruptly E        (14) Charts 16088, 16087, 16005.-Icy Cape Pass, 2 miles SW
from Cape Lisburne. The land is lower; the hills are rounded and    of the cape, has a controlling depth of about 5 feet but entrance
slope to the sea. Toward Cape Sabine (68ï¿½55.0'N., 164ï¿½36.0'W.),    requires knowledge of bar and channel conditions. Fair anchorage
35 miles E of Cape Lisburne, is a series of ridges that terminate at    is available in depths of 5 to 7 feet in Kasegaluk Lagoon SW of
the coast in bluffs. Cape Sabine is the outer end of one of the    the pass. A radar tower and an airstrip are on the mainland oppo-
ridges and projects but slightly from the general line of the coast.    site the pass. Water can be obtained from a stream SW of the
Veins of coal I to 4 feet thick show plainly along the tops of the    tower.
bluffs at Cape Sabine; some of the veins have been worked but use    (0o5) Icy Cape (70ï¿½19.9'N., 161 ï¿½53.0'W.), 40 miles NE of Point
of the coal is limited because of its poor quality and the difficulty    Lay and 125 miles from Cape Lisburne, is a sharp turning point in
of mining it.                                                       the low flat barrier beach that separates Kasegaluk Lagoon from
                                                                   the ocean. A house and a tank are near the point of the cape.
 (98)  Charts 16103, 16005.-From Cape Sabine, the land con-          (106)  A radar beacon (Racon) is 2.5 miles S of Icy Cape
tinues of a rolling character until near Cape Beaufort              (70ï¿½17.3'N., 161 ï¿½54.5'W.). The Racon, on a 200-foot-high tower,
(69ï¿½02.0'N., 163050.0'W.), a dark mountain that comes down to    has an effective range of 19 miles and is seasonally maintained.





                                                       9. ARCTIC OCEAN                                                         323


 (107) Blossom Shoals, which extend 6 to 8 miles off Icy Cape,     (117) Ice.-Average breakup at Wainwright is about the last of
are a number of ridges that parallel the coast. In the approach to    June and average freezeup is about the first of October. (See page
the shoals, the bottom is lumpy and depths are irregular. The    T-21 for dates of ice breakup and freezeup.) Navigation is difficult
shoals are usually given a wide berth, and it is recommended that    from early November to mid-July and usually is suspended from
vessels rounding the cape stay in depths greater than 12 fathoms.  early December to early July.
 (108)  The shoals are the approximate S limit of the inshore ice   (118)  Kuk River, that empties into the head of Wainwright
during the July-September season for navigation in this area. The    Lagoon, has an even bottom and'no definite channel. Depths
ice moves inshore and offshore with the winds and, as the shoals    decrease gradually from 10 feet at the lagoon to a reported 4 feet
form a salient at this part of the coast, open water may extend N or    some 30 miles upriver. Three outcroppings of usable coal are 8 to
S of them, but access from one open-water area to another may be    18 miles from the mouth.
blocked by ice on the other side of the shoals.
 (109) Blossom Shoals show evidence of ice scour and probably       (119)  Charts 16084, 16005.-Point Franklin (70'54.4'N.,
change from year to year. Surveys made in 1948-1950 found          158ï¿½47.2'W.), 70 miles ENE of Icy Cape, is the E end of the bar-
depths of 10 feet 0.9 mile off Icy Cape, 16 feet 2 miles off, 20 feet    rier sand beach that extends 8 miles along the NW side of Peard
3.3 miles off, 19 feet 4.4 miles off, 26-feet 6.4 miles off, and 37    Bay. A prominent 120-foot steel tower is about 2 miles W of the
feet 7 miles off.                                                  point.
 (110)  There are deep channels between the outer shoals. One
                                                                     (120) A mile E of Point Franklin is the N extremity of the nar-
that has been recommended by the survey party, rounds the cape at    row barrier Seahorse Islands, that extend SSE for 3 miles. The
a distance of 3.8 miles with no depths less than 35 feet. About 6    largest island has an elevation of about 20 feet, and is the greatest
miles off the cape, and just inside the outermost shoal, is a passage    along this series of barriers. Between Point Franklin and the Sea-
with minimum depths of 10 fathoms.                                 horse Islands is a narrow, winding channel with a least depth of
 (1lm)  Behind the barrier beach that extends Eet; this channel may vary from year to year.
Kasegaluk Lagoon has midchannel depths of 9 to 11 feet; numer-
ous shoals project from both sides of the lagoon. The ice in the    than I fathom extend out 1.2 miles; the 5-fathom curve is about 2
lagoon breaks up about 10 to 15 days after the sea ice has moved    miles offshore, and the 10-fathom curve is 2.6 miles offshore.
out. New ice forms about the middle of September and soon
becomes about 6 inches thick. Launches not more than 41/2 feet in   (122)  Protection from S to W weather is available NE of Point
                 draft may pass around Nokotlek Point, on the mainland 18 miles    Franklin and the Seahorse Islands. This shelter does not afford
draft may pass around Nokotlek Point, on the mainland 18 miles
E of Icy Cape, through a very narrow channel.
 (112) Akoliakatat Pass, 12 miles E of Icy Cape, has a narrow       (123) A current sets NE along the shore except during strong NE
channel close to shore on the W side; a controlling depth of about    winds. It is estimated that the velocity is I to 2 knots under ordi-
7 feet can be carried into Kasegaluk Lagoon at normal tide levels.  nary conditions. This NE current forms a big eddy which circu-
Anchorage can be found back of the pass in depths of 7 to 10 feet,    lates in a clockwise direction in the bight E of Point Franklin. The
good holding ground. The current in the pass may reach a velocity    eddy extends about 20 miles to the NE of the point and 5 to 6
of 2 knots with strong SW or NE winds. A continuous period of    miles from shore.
NE winds will lower the water as much as 3 feet below normal        (124) When there is ice in this vicinity abnormal refraction can
levels.                                                            be expected at any time. A large amount of refraction can be
                                                                    expected at all times, whether or not ice is present.
 (113) Charts 16086, 16005.-Pingorarok Pass, 22 miles E of         (125) Peard Bay, behind the barrier beaches of Point Franklin
Icy Cape, has a controlling depth of 5 feet into Kasegaluk Lagoon    and the Seahorse Islands, has uniform depths' of about 20 feet over
through a very narrow channel on the E side. Breakers usually    the greater part of its area. The bottom, which is mud and clay, is
mark the shoals on both sides of the entrance.                     excellent holding ground. A depth of 12 feet can be carried into
                                                                    Peard Bay through a narrow channel just off the S end of the Sea-
  (114)  Charts 16085, 16005.-Wainwright Inlet (70'36.5'N.,    horse Islands. A depth of about 8 feet can be carried into the bay
160ï¿½06.5'W.), 39 miles ENE of Icy Cape, is the entrance to Wain-    on either side of the 4-foot shoal that is about I mile SE of the S
wright Lagoon. The narrow winding channel between Point Col-    end of the islands. The bay affords good protection from heavy S
lie on the E and Point Marsh on the W has a controlling depth of    and SW winds. A small spit in the SE part of the bay affords pro-
6 feet at normal water level, but passage should not be attempted    tection for small boats from winds from any direction.
without the aid of local guides. Shoals extend 0.7 mile off the inlet  (126)  At the SW end of Peard Bay is Kugrua Bay, into which
and are well defined by breakers during moderate weather; during    Kugrua River empties. A draft of about 4 feet can be carried into
W  storms the breakers stretch across the channel. Ice, that may    Kugrua Bay; depths in the middle of the bay are 10 to 12 feet. In
enter the inlet during SW storms, follows the channel, where the    the NE corner of the bay is a sandspit that affords good protection
current reaches a maximum velocity of about 2 knots. The mean      from all weather for small boats.
range of tide is only about 0.5 foot.
  (115)  Wainwright, on the beach 2.5 miles NE of the inlet, has    (1271  Charts 16083, 16082, 16005.-From Peard Bay E and NE
stores, a school, a church, and an airstrip.                       to Barrow the coast is rimmed with mud bluffs 25 to 90 feet high
  (116)  An aerolight (70038.2'N., 160ï¿½01.6'W.) is close S of    and furrowed by numerous small streams; the highest is Skull
Wainwright. An aerolight, aero radiobeacon, and a radar beacon    Cliff (70ï¿½56'N., 157ï¿½30'W.), 20 miles E of the bay. The coast has
(Racon) are at the Wainwright airstrip (70ï¿½36.6'N., 159ï¿½51.9'W.).    no projecting points or shoals and the 5-fathom curve is 0.5 to I
The Racon, on a 120-foot-high tower with an orange radar reflec-    mile from shore, but depths may vary as much as a fathom from
tor, has an effective range of 19 miles and is seasonally main-    year to year because of ice gouging. There is no protection from
tained.                                                            heavy weather.





324                                                    9. ARCTIC OCEAN


 (128) A radar beacon (Racon) is on Skull Cliff (70ï¿½54.8'N.,    sphere are not as marked as those observed at stations in the
157037.3'W.). The Racon, on a 50-foot-high tower, has an effec-    central interior.
tive range of 16.5 miles and is seasonally maintained.                (138) Temperatures at this N station remain below the freezing
 (129) The Will Rogers Memorial (71 ï¿½09.3'N., 157ï¿½03.5'W.) is    point through most of the year, with the daily maximum reaching
a 12-foot concrete monument on the NE side of a wide stream 10    higher than 32ï¿½ F on an average of only 109 days a year. Daily
miles SW of Barrow.                                                 minimums drop below the freezing point 324 days of the year, and
 (130) Barrow, 8.5 miles SW of Point Barrow, has a hospital, a    freezing temperatures have been observed in every month of the
school, a church, a radio station, and several stores; limited quanti-    year. February is generally the coldest month, with a normal mean
ties of supplies include gasoline, diesel fuel, food, and clothing.    of -18o F, and the lowest temperature at the station on record is -
Air-freight service is available throughout the year. An aerolight    560 F reached in February 1924. March temperatures are but little
(71ï¿½17'17"N., 156046'18"W.) is at the airport and an aero radio-    higher than those observed in the winter months. In April, temper-
beacon (70ï¿½18'17"N., 156ï¿½43'29"W.) is about 2 miles NE of Bar-    atures begin a general upward trend, with May becoming the defi-
row. Three miles NE of Barrow is the Naval Arctic Research    nite transitional period from winter to the summer season. During
Laboratory (NARL) and an aerolight (711 9'40"N.,                    the latter month an average of five daily maximum temperatures
156'40'38"W.). About 0.8 mile NE of the Naval Arctic Research    climb above the freezing point. July is the warmest month of the
Laboratory are the NARL airstrip and an aerolight (71020'08"N.,    year, with a normal mean of 39  F. During late July or early
156038'20"W.). The dome (71'19'40"N., 156037'57"W.) NE of    August, the Arctic Ocean is generally ice-free for the first time in
the laboratory is also very prominent.                              summer. The end of the short summer is reached in September. By
 (13)  Barrow is acustomsstation.                                  November about half of the daily mean temperatures are zero or
 (132) A radar beacon (Racon) is on Point Barrow (71ï¿½23.2'N.,    below.
156'27.2'W.). The Racon, on a 50-foot-high tower with two            (139) Ice.-Average breakup at Barrow is in late July and aver-
orange daymarks, has an effective range of 14.5 miles and is sea-    age freezeup is in early October. (See page T-21 for dates of ice
                                                                    breakup and freezeup.) Navigation is difficult from mid-October
sonally maintained.
                                                                    to late July and usually is suspended from early December to early
                                                                    July.
 (133)  Charts 16082, 16004.-Point Barrow (71ï¿½23'N.,                 (140) The ice barrier that extends from 0.5 mile off Barrow to
156ï¿½28'W.), the northernmost point of land in the United States, is    1.5 miles NW of Point Barrow can be dangerous to navigation.
the seaward end of a gravelly sandspit that extends 3 miles NE      Formed when onshore winds drive icebergs aground, the barrier
from the rest of the mainland. The point is also the NE corner of    may break and drift seaward during heavy offshore winds. While
Chukchi Sea and the SW corner of Beaufort Sea. The N limit of    aground the barrier it keeps the main ice pack from drifting onto
Beaufort Sea is a line from Point Barrow to Lands End, Prince    the beach and often gives protection along its inner side to shal-
Patrick Island, Canada.                                             low-draft vessels. During periods of offshore winds, leads may
 (134) Tides and currents.-The diurnal range of tide is about    open in the barrier through which, when winds reverse to onshore,
0.4 foot at Point Barrow. During the survey of May-August 1945,    small bergs sometimes drift to block the inshore waters and stop
the current NW of the point was observed to flow constantly in a    all navigation. Caution: A vessel beset in the ice near Point Bar-
NE direction at an estimated strength of 3 to 4 knots; along the NE  row will tend to drift N and farther into the ice mass.
side of the point the current flowed in a NW direction at an esti-   (141) During the 1945 survey the main ice pack was never out of
mated strength of 1 knot. Judging from the movement of the ice-    sight from Point Barrow. When the pack opened to the W it closed
bergs, there seemed to be an eddy centered several miles NE of the    to the E and vice versa. Icebergs 30 to 50 feet high floated around
point.                                                              continuously; some grounded at about the 5-fathom curve and
 (135) Caution.-Mariners are advised that in the shallow waters    remained stationary for a week or more until the wind changed
of the Beaufort Sea, water levels are strongly influenced by meteo-    with sufficient force to dislodge them.
rological conditions. Strong offshore winds can produce water         (142) In general, the main ice pack drifts with the winds and cur-
depths up to 21/2 feet less than those shown on the charts.         rents during July through September and permits intermittent nav-
 (136) A number of oil drilling platforms are in the Beaufort Sea    igation outside the ice barrier. Outside navigation is impossible
between 151ï¿½W and 1470W. These platforms are generally man-    when the pack drifts shoreward; inside passage possibly can be
made gravel islands about 500 feet in diameter. In 1992, a major-    made behind the barrier but charted depths may not be too reliable
ity of the platforms were reported abandoned and the lights    because of berg gouging.
marking the structures were removed. A few are reported com-         (143)  Medium-draft vessels should be able to round Point Bar-
pletely awash. The status of all known platforms is periodically    row at a distance of I mile; 30-foot drafts should stay at least 3
published in the 17th Coast Guard District Local Notice to Mari-    miles off. Caution: A 1957 report places a 25-foot shoal 7 miles
ners.                                                               NE of Point Barrow; this may indicate a possible NE extension of
 (137)  Weather.-Barrow is the most N first-order station oper-    Point Barrow spit. If passage must be made E of Point Barrow,
ated by the National Weather Service. Although this station gener-    August is the best month for the attempt.
ally records one of the lowest mean temperatures for the winter
months, the surrounding topography prevents the establishment of     (144) Charts 16082, 16081, 16004.-Elson Lagoon extends
the lowest minimum for the state. With the Arctic Ocean to the N,    from Point Barrow to Christie Point, on the mainland 21 miles to
E, and W, and level tundra stretching 200 miles to the S, there are    the SE. The lagoon is 2 to 5 miles wide and has depths of 8 to 11
no natural wind barriers to assist in stilling the wind, permitting    feet. Between the lagoon and Beaufort Sea are the barrier Plover
the lowering of temperatures by radiation, and no downslope    Islands which are low and difficult to distinguish except in peri-
drainage areas to aid the flow of cold air to lower levels. Conse-    ods of good visibility. The islands and the mainland are barren
quently, temperature inversions in the lower levels of the atmo-    stretches as viewed from offshore and are covered by snow and ice





                                                       9. ARCTIC OCEAN                                                         325


most of the year; there is nothing distinctive in the area. In January  (155) Smith Bay, between Cape Simpson and Drew Point, 14
1980, numerous obstructions were reported throughout the lagoon    miles to the SE, extends 8 miles back of the entrance points and
with the heaviest concentration in the cove at the W end, SW of    has general depths of 3 to 10 feet. Along the W  shore of the bay,
Point Barrow.                                                      rapid erosion of the 10- to 20-foot bluffs has caused shoaling, and
 (145) Eluitkak Pass, the most W  entrance to Elson Lagoon, is    launches drawing 3 to 4 feet must stay 0.2 to 0.5 mile off, but there
between tiny Doctor Island and the spit that extends 2.5 miles SE    is still some protection from W weather.
from Point Barrow; depths in the pass equal or exceed those in the  (156) The delta of Ikpikpuk River, which empties into the head
lagoon. Deadmans Island and Tapkaluk Islands are SE of Doc-    of Smith Bay, is building out steadily. Extensive shoals are form-
tor Island.                                                        ing as much as 3 miles out, and the 3-foot curve is 1 to 2 miles off
 (146)  Ekilukruak Entrance, 15 miles SE of Point Barrow, is    the delta. The SE side of the bay is very shallow; the 3-foot curve
between Tapkaluk Island and Cooper Island, 4 miles to the SE;    is 2 to 3 miles offshore.
the passage into Elson Lagoon has depths of 5 to 7 feet. Cooper     (157) Along the E side of Smith Bay are intermittent bluffs. The
Island is one of the largest of the Plovers and is midway along the    only possible landing place for small craft is on Drew Point, at the
chain.                                                             entrance. Boats drawing less than 2:/2 feet can anchor S of the
 (147) Sanigaruak Pass (71ï¿½11.5'N., 155023.5'W.), 24 miles SE    sandspit at the point.
Of Point Barrow, is a narrow and poorly defined channel through     (158) A radar beacon (Racon) is on Drew Point (70ï¿½51.9'N.,
the Plover Islands at the W end of Sanigaruak Island; the con-    153ï¿½54.8'W.). The Racon, on a 50-foot-high tower, has an effec-
trolling depth is about 6 feet into Elson Lagoon. Igalik Island, last    tive range of 16.5 miles and is seasonally maintained.
major island of the Plover group, is between Sanigaruak Island
and Tangent Point to the SE.                                        (159) Charts 16066, 16004.-Pitt Point (70ï¿½55.5'N.,
 (148) Dease Inlet, behind the SE Plover Islands, is 10 miles    153ï¿½08.2'W.), 69 miles ESE of Point Barrow, is about halfway
wide between Christie Point and Tangent Point and extends inland    between Smith Bay and Harrison Bay. An aero radiobeacon
about 20 miles. The inlet has depths of 8 to 10 feet except for the    (70054.6'N., 153ï¿½15.4'W.) is on the W side of the point. On the SE
shallows near the beaches. The principal entrances are from Elson    side is a large, shallow lagoon that is separated from Beaufort Sea
Lagoon and Sanigaruak Pass. Tiny Island and Oarlock Island,    by a narrow sand barrier. Heavy seas open and close passages that
known as the Kikiktak Islands, are 10 to 15 miles up Dease Inlet    have been used by native launches. There are depths of 8 to 10 feet
'from Christie Point; on Tiny Island is a small freshwater lake.    200 yards off Pitt Point.
Admiralty Bay, at the head of Dease Inlet, has depths and bottom
similar to the outer part of the inlet; several rivers empty into the  (160) Charts 16065, 16004.-Cape Halkett (70048.0'N.,
bay.                                                               152ï¿½11.0'W.), is a low promontory 20 miles ESE of Pitt Point. A
 (149)  During the 1945 survey of this area, the winter ice did not    I-foot shoal is 0.7 mile E of the cape; between the shoal and the
breakup in Elson Lagoon until July 28 and started forming again    cape are depths of 5 feet. In January 1984, a submerged obstruc-
on September 13. The survey launches had a difficult time getting    tion covered about 18 feet was reported about 6.1 miles E of the
out of Dease Inlet on September 15 as the entire inlet and lagoon    cape in about 70047'57"N., 151053'18"W.
were frozen over to a thickness of I inch. In the winter, the ice   (161) A radar beacon (Racon) is on Cape Halkett (70ï¿½49.8'N.,
freezes to a thickness of 6 to 10 feet.                            152ï¿½17.4'W.). The Racon, on a 50-foot-high tower with an orange
                                                                    radar reflector, has an effective range of 14.5 miles and is season-
  (150o)  Charts 16081, 16067, 16004.-Tangent Point                ally maintained.
(71008.8'N., 155O05.8'W.), 30 miles SE of Point Barrow, is the
low, flat, tundra promontory on the E side of the entrance to Dease  (162)- Charts 16064, 16063, 16004.-Harrison Bay is between
Inlet. There is a shallow entrance channel between the point and    Cape Halkett and Oliktok Point, 50 miles to the ESE; the inland
the islands to the NW.                                             extent is about 15 miles from the general line of the coast. The
  (151) The islands along the coast from Tangent Point to the SE    inner part of the bay is very shallow, and the Colville River delta
end of Fatigue Bay are low sand barriers separated from the main-    projects several miles from the SE side. Pacific Shoal, 3 to 5 feet
land by mud flats and shallow lagoons. These rapidly changing    deep and 5 miles in N-S length, is centered about 8 miles SE of
islands have steep beaches on their seaward sides, with depths of 8    Cape Halkett. In 1969, a vessel with a draft of 26 feet reported
feet or more only 100 yards off. Deep channels open and close    touching bottom in 70ï¿½57.5'N., 150033.5'W. (See chart 16004.) In
through the islands during summer storms.                          1992, a shoal with a depth of 7 feet was reported in about
  (152) Fatigue Bay (McKay Inlet) extends SE for about 6.5    70040'56.8"N., 150ï¿½55'28.6"W. (See chart 16003.)
miles from Tangent Point. The SE part of the bay, S of Tulimanik    (163)  Saktuina Point (70ï¿½34.9'N., 152ï¿½02.3'W.), 14 miles S
Island, is the only shelter for small boats between Tangent Point    from Cape Halkett, is the easternmost tip of the narrow peninsula
and Cape Simpson. This shelter, however, is extremely limited    that forms the N side of Kogru River. The Eskimo Islands, I mile
because of the shallowness of the lagoons behind the islands.    E of Saktuina Point, have bluffs up to 20 feet in height.
Remarks concerning frequent changes in channels are particularly    (164)  Kogru River is a series of connected lakes that form a 10-
applicable to the SE part of Fatigue Bay.                          mile-long lagoon that empties into Harrison Bay between Saktuina
  (153) The bluffs along the coast from near the SE end of Fatigue    Point and the Eskimo Islands. Entrance depth is about 4 feet and
Bay to Cape Simpson vary in height from 4 to 15 feet; the land    greater depths are reported inside.
behind is marshy and has numerous lakes. Launches may proceed       (165) Atigaru Point, 7 miles E of Saktuina Point, is a low head-
safely along this stretch of coast at a distance of about 100 yards.  land with extensive bars and shoals to the E and SE. Natives report
  (154) Cape Simpson (70059.4'N., 154ï¿½34.0'W.), is a low prom-    fair anchorage for small craft 3 miles S of the point.
ontory 14 miles SE of Tangent Point. There are shoals and sand-     (166) A radar beacon (Racon) is on Atigaru Point (70ï¿½33.3'N.,
bars near the cape but no shelter for small boats.                 151  42.5'W.). The Racon, on a 50-foot-high tower with an orange




326                                                   9. ARCTIC OCEAN


radar reflector, has an effective range of 14.5 miles and is season-  (176) From the Return Islands to Brownlow Point, barrier
ally maintained.                                                   islands parallel the coast and are separated from it by Stefansson
 (167)  Colville River, the largest along the Arctic coast of    Sound, an extensive lagoon. The mainland is low tundra with very
Alaska, has a delta that extends 20 miles. along the SE side of Har-    little relief except for three prominent mounds W and SW of Tig-
rison Bay. There are three major channels and numerous minor    variak Island. The mainland shore consists of low bluffs, up to 35
channels through the delta. It is probable that a draft of 3 feet can    feet in height, cut by river flood plains and deltas. The barrier
be taken over the entrance bars and upriver to the rapids a few    islands are low sand and gravel reefs less than 8 feet in elevation;
miles below the mouth of Anaktuvuk River, which empties into    the larger islands have some sparse vegetation. Between the
the Colville River 75 miles from Harrison Bay.                     islands are many shoals and bars that are awash. The lagoon
 (168)  A radar beacon (Racon) is on the Colville River delta    between the island and the mainland has depths of as much as 30
(70ï¿½28.1'N., 150ï¿½38.0'W.). The Racon, on a 50-foot-high tower,    feet but also has many areas too shallow for navigation by small
has an effective range of 16.5 miles and is seasonally maintained.  boats. The lagoon is 2 to 10 miles wide and extends in a continu-
                                                                   ous line from the Return Islands to Brownlow Point. Vessels fol-
 (169)  Charts 16062, 16004.-Oliktok Point, the first prominent    lowing the coast may avoid the heavy ice that is nearly always
mainland point E of Colville River, is a triangular sandflat with    present off the barrier islands by passing inside the islands by way
elevations of as much as 5 feet. There is an aero radiobeacon    of one of the deeper entrances. Ice frequently blocks these
(70029.8'N., 149053.2'W.) on the point. Excellent small-boat    entrances, but passage usually can be made through leads.
anchorage is found in depths of 5 feet behind the small bar that    (177) The Midway Islands, 7.5 miles NE of Point McIntyre, are
extends NW from the point; this anchorage is exposed to SW         very low and have little driftwood on them; good anchorage for
weather, but protection from such can be found E of the point.     vessels drawing up to 6 feet can be found behind Reindeer
 (170) Thetis Island is 6 miles NW of Oliktok Point and 5 miles    Island, the W island of the group.
off the Colville River Delta. Good anchorage, with protection       (178) A radar beacon (Racon) is on Reindeer Island (70ï¿½29.1'N.,
from SW winds, is found in depths of 12 feet E of the island.      148ï¿½21.5'W.). The Racon, on a 30-foot-high tower, has an effec-
 (171) Spy Island, 3 miles N of Oliktok Point and 4 miles E of    tive range of 14.5 miles and is seasonally maintained.
Thetis Island, is the westernmost of the Jones Islands; the island  (179)  Cross Island is 6 miles E of the Midway Islands. Some-
is very low and floods during storm high waters. Pingok Island,    what protected anchorage for vessels drawing up to 10 feet can be
largest and highest of the Jones group, is 6 miles long in an E-W  found behind the crescent-shaped island and the several small
direction and has several dunes or mounds. Bertoncini Island and    islets that extend to the S. Large ice floes remain hinged to the N
Bodfish Island are about 2 miles E of Pingok Island; both are tun-    and E sides of the island during the entire open season. Two miles
dra covered and have bluffs along their shores. Cottle Island, 1.5    SE of Cross Island is a shoal that extends 4 miles in a SE direction.
miles N of Beechey Point, is 3 miles long and is the easternmost of    Dinkum Sands, a gravel reef that bares, is halfway along the
the Jones group. Bars and shoals obstruct the passages between    shoal.
Pingok and Cottle Islands. An artificial island is about 4.5 miles  (180) A radar beacon (Racon) is on Cross Island (70ï¿½29.7'N.,
NNE of Cottle Island in about 70ï¿½35'05"N., 149ï¿½05'45"W.            147ï¿½57.5'W.). The Racon, on a 60-foot-high tower with an orange
 (172) On the mainland back of the Jones Islands is Milne Point,    radar reflector, has an effective range of 11 miles and is seasonally
which is 8 miles E of Oliktok Point and is rimmed with bluffs    maintained.
about 5 feet high. Beechey Point is 14 miles E of Oliktok Point;    (181) Prudhoe Bay (70020'N., 148ï¿½20'W.), SE of Point McIn-
launches can find fair shelter in depths of 4 feet behind the small    tyre, has shoals across most of its entrance. Gull Island, a small
sandbar that extends NW from Beechey Point.                        island midway along the shoals, is a conspicuous radar target. The
 (173) Simpson Lagoon, between the Jones Islands and the    bay proper has depths of 6 to 9 feet and affords good holding
mainland, has depths of 6 feet and affords protected passage from    anchorage with protection from all but NW weather. The best
Oliktok Point to Beechey Point.                                    access route has depths of 4 feet and parallels the W shore at a dis-
                                                                   tance of 0.4 mile. In 1967, a large oil strike was made in the Prud-
 (174) Charts 16062, 16061, 16004.-The Return Islands begin    hoe Bay area. This oil strike has made necessary the movement of
0.5 mile SE of Cottle Island and continue SE another II miles.    large amounts of cargo by barge to this area during the short sum-
Long Island is the westernmost and longest, about 5 miles, of the    mer shipping season.
Return group; the passage between Cottle Island and Long Island     (182) On the NW side of Prudhoe Bay, about 1.5 miles SE of
has depths of 2 feet. Off the SE end of Long Island are bars and    Point McIntyre, a causeway extends about 2.2 miles offshore. A
shoals that extend back into Gwydyr Bay, but depths of 5 feet can    barge dock is on the E side of the causeway and a seawater treat-
be carried into the bay between the bars and low, crescent-shaped    ment plant is near the outer end. Private daybeacons mark the
Egg Island, next island to the SE. Southeasternmost of the Return    intakes and outfalls of the seawater treatment plant. In 1969, a
group is Stump Island, which is about 2 miles long and extends to    360-foot wharf connected to the shore by a 1,200-foot causeway
within 0.5 mile of mainland Point McIntyre. The passage between    was constructed in the SE corner of the bay, about 3.3 miles from
Egg Island and Stump Island has depths of 3 feet, but there is little    Heald Point. Depths of 4, feet are reported along the wharf.
water between Stump Island and Point McIntyre.                      (183) Cargo is hauled from Seattle by oceangoing tugs and
 (175) Gwydyr Bay, the lagoon area between the Return Islands    barges which anchor about 6 miles offshore; the cargo is trans-
and the mainland, has depths of 3 to 5 feet as far'E as low Stork-    ferred to shallow-draft barges and moved to the wharf for transfer
ersen Point, which is 10 miles from Beechey Point; the best    to shore.
entrance to the bay is W of Egg Island. Kuparuk River empties       (184)  Heald Point, on the E side of Prudhoe Bay entrance and 8
into the S side of Gwydyr Bay W of Storkersen Point. There is lit-   miles from Point McIntyre, is a 15-foot-high tundra bluff with a
tle water between Storkersen Point and Point McIntyre, 3 miles    narrow sand beach at its base. Three small sand islets extend NW
to the SE.                                                         from the point. The submerged remains of an artifical island with





                                                       9. ARCTIC OCEAN                                                        327


a reported depth of 1 foot is about 2.9 miles N of the point. Put    Vessels drawing less than 7 feet can pass between Karluk Island
River aero radiobeacon (70013'25"N., 148ï¿½24'50"W.) is about 8    and the two sandbars, but caution is advised because of the current'
miles SSW of Heald Point.                                         action and berg gouging. The principal passage through Newport
 (185) The delta of Sagavanirktok River extends the 9 miles    Entrance is between the sandbars and the Pole Island shoal; least
from Heald Point to Foggy Island. The waters off the delta are    depth is 16 feet over a width of 1 mile.
extremely shallow and small boats find landing very difficult.     (193) Pole Island, 5 miles NE of mainland Tigvariak Island, is a
Howe Island, 5 miles E of Heald Point, is near the middle of the    narrow sand barrier 2 miles long and has elevations up to 5 feet;
delta area and is prominent from seaward; the island is 1 mile    the island has some vegetation, a few small ponds, and a consider-
long, 0.2 mile wide, and has an elevation of 35 feet near its E end.    able amount of driftwood. Belvedere Island, E of the Stockton
A mile E of Howe Island is Duck Island, a small silt mound, and    Islands, also is a narrow sand barrier about 2 miles long. The pas-
4 miles E of Howe Island is Point Brower, the N extremity of tun-    sage between the two islands is 0.2 mile wide and has a control-
dra-covered Foggy Island, which is part of the delta and separated    ling depth of 5 feet.
from the mainland by two branches of the river.
                                                                      (194) Charts 16045, 16004.-Challenge Entrance is between
 (186) Charts 16046, 16004.-Foggy Island Bay, which extends    Belvedere Island and Challenge Island, 6 miles to the SE. The W
12 miles along the mainland between Foggy Island and Tigvariak    side of the opening and the area immediately S of Belvedere
Island, has depths of as much as 20 feet but has wide shallow areas    Island are shallow and dotted with tiny islets and bare shoals. The
along its E and W sides.                                          best water is 0.8 mile W of Challenge Island where vessels draw-
 (187) Tigvariak Island, close to the mainland, is 2 miles long, 1I   ing 10 feet or less can enter with safety.
mile wide, and has elevations up to 30 feet. The tundra of Tig-    (195)  Challenge Island, the westernmost of the Maguire
variak Island is dotted with lakes and ponds from which freshwa-    Islands, is a strip of sand about 0.5 mile long and 3 feet high.
ter is obtainable; the shores of the island are mostly sand beaches    Alaska Island, that begins 0.2 mile E of Challenge Island and
backed by bluffs ranging in height from 5 to 30 feet. At the E end    continues 3 miles farther E, is a very narrow sand and gravel for-
of the island is Reliance Point, a sandspit that extends 0.8 mile to    mation; the easternmost third has been cut through in several
the S, and on the NE side is a large sea-level lake which is sepa-    places and is a series of sandbars, shoals, and islets. There is no
rated from the ocean by a sand barrier. Lion Point is the outer end    channel between Challenge and Alaska Islands.
of a long sandbar that begins 0.3 mile from the N end of Tigvariak  (196) Duchess Island, 1 mile E of Alaska Island, is I mile long
Island and continues 0.8 mile to the NW.
 (L88) . Mikkelsen    Island and continues 0.8 mile to the NW.   and 5 feet high. There is a narrow channel between Duchess and
 (188) - Mikkelsen Bay, between Tigvariak Island and Bullen    Alaska Islands but it is not recommended.
                                                                    Alaska Islands but it is not recommended.
(Savakvik) Point, 7 miles to the ESE, has depths of as much as 18  (197  North Star Island, 0.2 mile SE bf Duchess Island and
feet which decrease gradually as the beach is approached.
                                                   rad  beac  is  (70 ..  easternmost of the four principal Maguires, is another narrow sand
 (14685.) A radar beacon (Racon) is on Bullen Point tower5 wh    barrier about I mile long and has extensive shoals on the S and SE
146051.4'W.). The Racon, on a 120-foot-high tower with an    sides. There are narrow channels at both ends of the island but
orange radar reflector, has an effective range of 19 miles and is    they are shallow and subject to constant change.
seasonally maintained.
 (190) Returning to the island chain off the mainland, Narwhal     (198)  Mary Sachs Entrance, between North Star Islandand
                                                                    Flaxman Island, has extensive shoals on both E and W sides.
Island, northwesternmost of the McClure Islands, is 10 miles SE    Flaxman Island, has extensive shoals on both    and W  sides.
of Cross Island, and 8 miles NE of tmainland Foggy island. Nar-    There is a 0.7-mile-wide passage with depths of 10 feet about mid-
of Cross Island and 8 miles NE of mainland Foggy Island. Nar-
whal Island has some vegetation and there is some driftwood on it;   way between the two islands
near the center of the island are several small ponds. Protected   (199) Flaxman Island, which begins 2 miles ESE of North Star
anchorage is available in depths of 15 feet behind the NW end of    Island and continues 6 miles to within 2 miles of mainland Brown-
Narwhal Island; depths of 7 feet extend 0.5 mile SW from the    low Point, is the largest barrier island between the Return Islands
middle. Little ice is encountered during the open season, and the    and the point. The W part of the island is mostly sand and gravel;
anchorage can be approached from the SW. The SE end of Nar-    the E part has tundra bluffs up to 20 feet in height and numerous
whal Island, a low, narrow, sand strip, has been cut through in    small ponds, but freshwater is not available in any substantial
numerous places by storms and ice. The passage between Narwhal    quantity.
Island and Jeanette Island, I mile to the SE has irregular depths  (200) Passage has been made between Flaxman Island and
but can be navigated without difficulty by vessels drawing less    Brownlow Point by staying close to the E end of the island until
than 7 feet.                                                      well into the lagoon; the channel has depths of 8 feet which shoal
  (191) Jeanette Island and Karluk Island, 2.5 miles apart, are at   to 4 feet in the lagoon. The shoals that stretch from Brownlow
opposite ends of the crescent-shaped series of small sand islets,    Point to the E side of the narrow channel usually are marked by
some as much as 5 feet high, that forms the SE part of the    breakers or ice.
McClure group. These islets are exposed to vigorous ice and wind   (201) The mainland between Bullen Point and Brownlow Point
action, and there is continuous change in the shorelines and in the    has numerous other points, sandspits, and bluffs. The W branch of
shallower depths. Protected anchorage is available in depths of 9    Canning River empties into the lagoon SW of Brownlow Point;
to 15 feet S of the islets.                                       the river delta forms extensive shoals in the E part of the lagoon.
  (192) Newport Entrance is between Karluk Island of the           (202) Brownlow Point (70009.8'N., 145ï¿½51.0'W.), 20 miles E
McClure group and Pole Island, W of the two major Stockton    of Bullen Point, is the most N feature of Canning River delta; the
Islands, 5 miles ESE of the McClures. A sandbar is 1 mile SSE of    tundra point has elevations up to 25 feet. A sand and gravel bar,
Karluk Island, and a second sandbar is 2.3 miles SE of the island;    partly bare at high water, extends from Brownlow Point SE past
the two bars are only a few yards in width and are awash during    Canning River E branch to within 2 miles of Konganevik Point.
storm high waters. Shoals extend 1.5 miles W from Pole Island.    (See chart 16044.)




328                                                   9. ARCTIC OCEAN


  (203) A radar beacon (Racon) is on Brownlow Point    amounts of food and other supplies are stocked for sale to the
(70009.6'N., 145050.6'W.). The Racon, on a 50-foot-high tower,    natives and are available to outsiders only in emergencies. An aero
has an effective range of 14.5 miles and is seasonally maintained.  radiobeacon (70007.9'N., 143ï¿½38.5'W.) and an aerolight
 (204) From Brownlow Point to Canning River E branch, the    (70ï¿½08.2'N., 143ï¿½35.2'W.) are on the island.
lagoon between the delta and the barrier bar is about 0.5 mile wide  (211)  Kaktovik is a customs station.
and has depths of 2 to 3 feet. The discharge from the river discol-  (212) Off the NE end of Barter Island is Bernard Spit, a sand
ors the sea water for many miles. SE of the river's E branch is a    barrier that extends nearly 4 miles in an ESE direction. Between
lagoon that provides excellent small-craft anchorage in depths of 8    the over-lapping ends of Barter Island and Bernard Spit is Ber-
to 10 feet; the best approach from seaward is around the SE end of    nard Harbor, that has depths of 5 to 7 feet over good holding bot-
the barrier bar at a distance of 0.3 mile. A covered ridge that    tom but can only be entered by drafts of 4 feet or less. The N part
extends halfway from Konganevik Point to the bar protects the    of the harbor is out of the way of drifting bergs; ice does not get to
lagoon from NE wind-driven ice. The lagoon was ice free in mid-    this part of the harbor during W winds. Vessels entering Bernard
August 1976.                                                       Harbor from W should favor the Barter Island shore; this passage
                                                                    may become blocked soon after the ice starts in.
 (205) Charts 16044, 16004.-Konganevik (Kangigivik) Point           (213) Protection from ice and wind is available just E of the
(70ï¿½01.5'N., 145010.5'W.)Y- 16 miles SE of Brownlow Point,    sandspit at the NW end of Barter Island. The anchorage is not rec-
projects 2 miles NE from the mainland and is the W limit of Cam-    ommended for vessels drawing more than 5 feet.
den Bay. About 1 mile N of the point are extensive shoals that are  (214)  Weather.-The climate is determined by the surrounding
partly awash; between the shoals and the point is a channel with    open Arctic water surface. The island terrain and the terrain of the
depths of 7 to 17 feet. The lee provided by the shoals might be    mainland S of Barter Island is low, flat, and generally marshy tun-
helpful in some conditions.                                        dra with numerous lakes, and with no elevations of consequence
 (206) Launch anchorage has been reported E of Konganevik    until the Brooks Range 65 miles to the S-of the station. Conse-
Point, but there are large boulders in the area and boulders are    quently, there are no topographic features to affect temperature
seen along the entire shore of the point; natives use this anchorage    and precipitation.
in preference to Simpson Cove, to the ESE, to avoid the ice that    (215) During the long Arctic night, temperatures along this Arc-
moves back and forth across Camden Bay with the winds. A better    tic coastal region do not drop to the extreme low readings reached
small-craft anchorage is in the lagoon 2 miles S of the point; the    in Alaska's interior. The modifying effect of the surrounding
lagoon affords ample protection from all winds in depths of 4 feet.    ocean area, although frozen during the winter months, is one of the
Entrance to the lagoon can be made through the break in the bar-    factors preventing extremely low temperatures. During the warm-
rier bar across the mouth by staying close to the S shore.         est months of the summer the more open water surface is still
 (207) Katakuruk (Katakturak) River empties into the S side    more effective in modifying the warming effects of a continuous
of Camden Bay on the W side of Simpson Cove, and is 6 miles    period of possible sunshine which continues almost from the mid-
ESE of Konganevik Point. The cove has excellent holding ground    die of May to the end of July. High readings reaching 70ï¿½ F or
and affords protection from ice and wind for vessels drawing up to    above have occurred on only 5 days during the 23-year record
6 feet; approach should be made from NE of Collinson Point, the    period; these were in July 1953, 1967, 1969, and August 1957.
W end of the long narrow sandspit that extends from the mainland    Freezing temperatures are reached, as a general rule, during all
on the E side of the entrance. The best water is about 0.3 mile    months of the year. Diurnal temperature ranges are confined
from the point; once past the point, there are depths of 9 to 11 feet    within relatively narrow limits, reaching monthly maximums of
in the greater part of the cove. Vessels should anchor as close to    around 17ï¿½F in April and diminishing to their minimums of
the weather shore as their drafts will permit. Simpson Cove was    slightly less than 8ï¿½ F in June during the period of continuous day-
ice free in mid-August 1976.                                       light.
 (208) Anderson Point (70ï¿½01.5'N., 144ï¿½27.8'W.), 15 miles E of      (216)  Snow covers the ground about eight months of the year,
Konganevik Point, is the E limit of Camden Bay. The point is low    and snow usually falls every month of the year. The relatively
and flat but behind it is a bluff that ranges in height from 4 to 30    strong winds experienced from October through February make
feet and is prominent from W; from E the bluff blends with the    accurate measurement of snowfall and precipitation difficult
hills and is hard to see. W of Anderson Point the bottom slopes to    because of drifting and blowing snow. The winds, combined with
depths of 10 to 12 feet very close to shore; N of the point the slope    relatively high humidities, are prime factors in producing uncom-
is gradual to depths of 2 or 3 feet,. then sharp to depths of 12 to 30    fortable weather conditions during the winter months. The sun
feet.                                                              remains below the horizon from late November until mid-January.
                                                                     (217) Ice formation and movement is an important factor in the
 (209)  Charts 16043, 16004.-Low, narrow, gravelly Arey Island    Barter Island area. The dates of the appearance of ice in the fall
(70ï¿½07.3'N., 143ï¿½54.0'W.) begins about 10 miles NE of Anderson    varies greatly from year to year, but the breakup dates in the late
Point and extends 3 miles NE, then 2.5 miles ESE. The water is   spring, or early summer, appears to be better confined. Ice on the
deep close to the outer shore of the island except at the SW end.    Beaufort Sea and in the lagoon near the station have become safe
Incoming ice hits the northernmost part of Arey Island before any    for man as early as September 24, but has remained unsafe as late
other place in the vicinity. A vessel can navigate very close to this    as mid-November. The ice appears to remain safe for vehicles
part of the island if a lead can be found through the ice.         until the first of June and, sometimes, almost to the end of June. It
 (210) Barter Island, close E of Arey Island and about 45 miles    has become unsafe for man as early as June 10, but remained safe
E of Brownlow Point, is roughly triangular in shape, each side    as late as mid-July. Tidal action often makes travel over ice or
being 3 to 4 miles in length. The island rises to an elevation of 58    through the broken ice quite hazardous for considerable periods
feet, is the highest ground in this general area, and has bluffs along    during the freezeup in the early winter and, particularly, during the
its seaward side. Kaktovik is the Barter Island village. Small     breakup of late spring or early summer.





                                                       9. ARCTIC OCEAN                                                          329


 (218) Ice records of the National Weather Service for Barter    principal entrance to the lagoon is a narrow channel with a depth
Island are meager but indicate a similarity to conditions at Barrow.    of 2 to 5 feet about 1.8 miles SE of Angun Point; caution is
Observations of National Ocean Survey field parties from 1948    advised.
through 1953 show that the ice usually breaks off from shore in     (1228)  Nuvagapak Lagoon, with depths of 8 to 10 feet in the
late July or early August. After the breakup, ice is present in vary-    middle, is S of Beaufort Lagoon and extends SE to the delta of
ing amounts and moves on and off the shore with the winds until    Aichilik River from Nuvagapak Point, a high tundra I mile back
mid-September or early October when it freezes up for the winter.    of the reef and 3.5 miles SE of Angun Point. Egaksrak Lagoon, S
(See page T- 14 for Barter Island Climatological Table, and page    of Beaufort Lagoon between the delta of Aichilik River and Siku
T-21 for dates of ice breakup and freezeup.)                        Point, has not been surveyed.
 (219) Manning Point is a barrier spit that projects N from the
mainland to within 0.2 mile of the NE end of Barter Island. Kak-
tovik (Kaktoavik) Lagoon, between the spit and the island, and       (229)  Charts 16041, 16004.-Siku Point (69i49.0'N.,
Jago Lagoon, on the E side of the spit, have depths of 9 to 12 feet    141l54.7'W.), 16 miles SE of Humphrey Point, is the NW end of
but, like Bernard Harbor, cannot be entered by drafts greater than    Icy Reef, a barrier that extends 13 miles SE to Demarcation Bay
4 feet.                                                             without a break. Icy Reef has elevations of 1 to 10 feet and is more
 (220)  Martin Point (70007'N., 143016'W.), low and irregular, is    prominent than the barrier islands to the NW; the reef is a combi-
on the E side of the entrance to Jago River and 53 miles E of    nation of several ridges built by wave action and has considerable
Brownlow Point. The W end of a barrier island is 2 miles NW of    driftwood along its entire length.
Martin Point.                                                        (230)  Broken ice can be expected along the seaward side of Icy
 (221) From Martin Point ESE to Griffin Point, a distance of    Reef during most of the open season. Small boats usually can push
about 9 miles, the low, narrow barrier islands are less than 5 feet    through the ice by staying close to the beach or by taking advan-
high and are separated from the mainland by shallow lagoons.    tage of the loosely packed ice farther offshore. There are depths of
Considerable driftwood has been deposited on the higher parts of    15 feet within 100 yards of the beach and 30 feet within 0.3 mile.
the islands. The mainland shores of the lagoons have tundra bluffs   (231) The NW part of the mainland behind Icy Reef is low and
with elevations up to 20 feet. There is deep water along the sea-    relatively flat. Halfway along the mainland shore is a large ice
ward sides of the barrier islands, and small boats can navigate    field, about 3 miles long, which the Eskimos say never melts;
within a few yards of the beach except near the inlets.             observations from Icy Reef indicated that the ice field was fairly
                                                                    uniform and that it stood a few feet above the surface of the
  (222) Charts 16042, 16004.-Griffin Point (70ï¿½03.6'N.,    lagoon.
142ï¿½52.4'W.) is a low sandspit that projects out from the main-      (232) The SE half of the mainland shore behind Icy Reef has
land. A mile WNW of the point is Oruktalik Entrance, a narrow    bluffs with elevations of as much as 25 feet. Four miles NW of
barrier passage through which a depth of about 5 feet can be taken    Demarcation Bay is bluff Pingokraluk Point (69'43.7'N.,
into Oruktalik Lagoon.                                              141ï¿½32.0'W.), about 0.3 mile SE of the point is a 49-foot-high tun-
  (223) The barrier islands off Griffin Point continue SE for 3    dra mound that is very prominent.
miles; thence to Pokok Bay are 25-to 30-foot bluffs fronted by
narrow, steep sand beach except for the last 1.5 miles. Small boats  (233)  Demarcation Bay, 30 miles SE of Humphrey Point, is
ï¿½can navigate very close to the beach between Griffin Point and    about 5 miles in width by 3 miles in inland extent. Demarcation
Pokok Bay.                                                          Point (69041.2'N., 141017.5'W.), on the E side of the entrance, is
  (224)  Pokok Bay, 17 miles SE of Martin Point, is about 1 mile    low tundra that rises gradually to a 30-foot bluff
across. Bars extend out from both sides of the entrance. Depths are  (234)  A depth of about 13 feet can be carried into Demarcation
about 7 feet in the entrance and 10 to 12 feet in the bay proper. The    Bay 0.5 mile W of Demarcation Point; the bay has depths of 13 to
entrance should be approached from the W, but care must be taken    16 feet, sticky bottom, and good protection from all weather.
to stay off the sandbar that makes out from the NW side. The bay    Along the shores of the bay are bluffs with elevations up to 25
has good holding bottom and good protection from ice and winds.     feet.
  (225)  Tundra-covered Humphrey Point (69058.3'N.,                   (235)  From Demarcation Point, Alaska, to Clarence Lagoon, 10
142ï¿½30.9'W.), on the SE side of Pokok Bay, has a low bluff and a    miles to the ESE in Canada, the narrow, steep sand beach is
narrow sand beach. SE of Siku Point are low barrier islands that    backed by irregular bluffs. Small boats can navigate within a few
cover in many places at high water. The seaward sides of the    yards of the beach, and there are depths of 30 feet 0.3 mile off.
islands are irregular, and small boats must stay well offshore.
  (226)  Angun Lagoon, behind the barrier reef between Hum-         (69ï¿½38.8'N., 140ï¿½59.8'W.) is 6.5 miles ESE of Demarcation Point;
phrey Point and Angun Point, 4 miles to the SE has depths of 10    the 4-foot obelisk is 100 feet inland from the top of the bluff and is
to 11 feet. There is a 10-foot bluff at Angun Point. The lagoon
entrance, 1 mile NW of Angun Point, is 75 to 100 yards wide and
has a controlling depth of 8 feet. The barrier islands are subject to  (237) There is an aero radiobeacon (69ï¿½35'N., 140ï¿½11 'W.) about
change; entrance must be made with caution.                         17 miles E by S of the boundary monument.
  (227) Beaufort Lagoon, with depths of 5 to 12 feet in the mid-      (238) Herschel Island, Canada, about 40 miles E of the bound-
dle, extends about 14 miles SE behind the barrier reef from Angun   ary, rises to an elevation of 550 feet. The island has an extent of
Point to Siku Point. The SE part of the lagoon from the delta of    about 10 miles from E to W and 7 miles from N to S. Thetis Bay,
Aichilik River to Siku Point has not been surveyed but the    on the SE side of the island, affords fairly good anchorage, shel-
entrances are known to be very shallow and subject to change. The    tered from N and W winds, for vessels drawing up to 18 feet.








                                                         APPENDIX

 (1)   Sales Information.- National Ocean Service (NOS) and        (25)  U.S. Coast Pilot 8, Pacific Coast Alaska, Dixon Entrance
unclassified Defense Mapping Agency Hydrographic/Topographic    to Cape Spencer.
Center (DMAHTC) publications and nautical charts are sold by       (26)  U.S. Coast Pilot 9, Pacific and Arctic Coasts, Alaska-Cape
NOS and its sales agents in many U.S. ports and in some foreign    Spencer to Beaufort Sea.
ports. Mail orders should be addressed to:                         (27)  Distance Tables
 (2)   National Ocean Service,                                     (28)  Distances Between United States Ports.
 (3)   Distribution Division (N/ACC3),                             (29)  Tide Tables
 (4)   6501 Lafayette Avenue,                                      (30)  Europe and West Coast of Africa, including the Mediterra-
 (5)   Riverdale MD 20737-1199.                                  nean Sea.
 (6)   Telephone orders may be placed (Visa or Mastercard          (31)  East Coast, North and South America, including Green-
accepted) by calling 301-436-6990. Mail orders must be accompa-    land.
nied by a check or money order (payable in U.S. funds) payable to  (32)  West Coast, North and South America, including the
NOS, Department of Commerce. Remittance from outside the    Hawaiian Islands.
United States should be made either by an International Money      (33)  Central and Western Pacific Ocean and Indian Ocean.
Order or by a check payable on a U.S. bank. Chart catalogs, which  (34)  Supplemental Tidal Predictions, Anchorage, Nikiski, Sel-
include a listing of authorized sales agents, are free upon request.    dovia, and Valdez, Alaska.
The National Ocean Service maintains over-the-counter cash sales   (35)  Tidal Current Tables
offices at Distribution Division, Riverdale (see address above),   (36)  Atlantic Coast, North America.
and at 701 C Street, Box 38, Anchorage, Alaska 99513.              (37)  Pacific Coast, North America and Asia.
 (7)   National Ocean Service Offices                              (38)  Tidal Current Charts
 (8)   Washington, DC (Headquarters): Assistant Administra-        (39)  Boston Harbor.
tor, National Ocean Service, NOAA, Herbert C. Hoover Bldg.,        (40)  Narragansett Bay to Nantucket Sound.
14th Street and Constitution Avenue, NW, Room 5805, Washing-       (41)  Narragansett Bay.
ton, DC 20230-0001.                                                (42)  Long Island and Block Island Sounds.
 (9)   Silver Spring: Chief, Office of Coast Survey (N/CS),        (43)  Delaware Bay and River.
National Ocean Service, NOAA, 1315 East-West Highway, Silver       (44)  Upper Chesapeake Bay.
Spring, MD 20910-3282.                                             (45)  Charleston Harbor, S.C.
 (o0)  Norfolk: Director, Atlantic Marine Center, National         (46)  Tampa Bay.
Ocean Service, NOAA, 439 West York Street, Norfolk, VA             (47)  Puget Sound, Northern Part.
23510-1114.                                                        (48)  Puget Sound, Southern Part.
 (II)  Seattle: Director, Pacific Marine Center, National Ocean    (49)  Dates of Latest Editions gives the edition and date of the
Service, NOAA, 1801 Fairview Avenue East, Seattle, WA 98102-    latest edition of charts publications of the National Ocean Service.
3767.                                                             Published quarterly and available free from NOS Distribution
                                                                  Branch (see address above.)
 (12)  Charts and Publications-National Ocean Service.
 (13)  Nautical Charts (See Chart Catalogs)                        (50)  Charts and Publications-Other U.S. Government
 (14)  United States Coastal and Intracoastal waters, and posses-    Agench es
                 ~~~~~~~~~~~~sions.           ~~(51)  A partial list of publications and charts considered of nav-
                                                                  igational value is included for ready reference of the mariner. In
 (n5)  Great. Lake s, Lake  Champl ain, New York State Canals,    addition to the agents located in the principal seaports handling
                                              and the St. Lawrence River-St. Regis to Cornwall, Canada.  publication sales, certain libraries have been designated by the
 (16)  Publications (See the publication Dates of Latest Edi-
 (16)  Publica tions (See the publication Dates of Latest Edi-    Congress of the United States to receive the publications as issued
tions for latest editions and prices)                             for public review.
                                                                  for public review.
 (17)  Coast Pilot                                                 (52)  Government Printing Office.-Publications of the U.S.
 (18)  U.S. Coast Pilot 1, Atlantic Coast, Eastport to Cape Cod.  Government Printing Office may be ordered from Superintendent
 (19)  U.S. Coast Pilot 2, Atlantic Coast, Cape Cod to Sandy    of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC
Hook.                                                             20402-9325. Orders may be charged to Visa, Mastercard or
 (20)  U.S. Coast Pilot 3, Atlantic Coast, Sandy Hook to Cape    Choice by calling (202) 783-3238 during normal business hours.
Henry.                                                             (53)  Defense Mapping Agency Procurement Information.-
 (21)  U.S. Coast Pilot 4, Atlantic Coast, Cape Henry to Key    Unclassified publications and charts of the Defense Mapping
West.                                                             Agency Hydrographic/Topographic Center (DMAHTC) are avail-
 (22)  U.S. Coast Pilot 5, Atlantic Coast-Gulf of Mexico, Puerto    able from National Ocean Service Distribution Branch (see Sales
Rico, and Virgin Islands.                                         Information, beginning of this Appendix).  Classified DMAHTC
 (23)  U.S. Coast Pilot 6, Great Lakes, Lakes Ontario, Erie,    publications and charts are available to authorized users from
Huron, Michigan and Superior, and St. Lawrence River.             Defense Mapping Agency Combat Support Center (Attn: PMSR),
 (24)  U.S. Coast Pilot 7, Pacific Coast, California, Oregon,    Washington, DC 20315-0020. DMA Customer Assistance Officer
Washington, and Hawaii.                                           may be contacted at 1-800-826-0342 or 287-2495 (Autovon).


330




                                                        APPENDIX                                                          331


 (54)  Nautical Charts                                           (73)  Selected Worldwide Marine Weather Broadcasts: Pub-
 (55)  U.S. Waters:                                             lished by National Weather Service; for sale by the Government
 (56)  Apalachicola, Chattahoochee and Flint Rivers Navigation    Printing Office. (See Government Printing Office, early this
Charts, Alabama River Charts, and Black Warrior-Tombigbee    appendix.)
Rivers River Charts: Published and for sale by U.S. Army Engi-    (74)  Navigation Rules: Navigation Rules, International-Inland
neer District Mobile, P.O. Box 2288, 109 St. Joseph Street,    (COMDTINST M16672.2 series): Published by the U.S. Coast
Mobile, Ala. 36628.                                              Guard; for sale by Government Printing Office. (see Government
 (57)  Flood Control and Navigation Maps of the Mississippi    Printing Office, early this appendix.)
River, Cairo, Ill. to the Gulf of Mexico: Published by Mississippi  (75)  Federal Requirements for Recreational Boats: Pub-
River Commission and for sale by U.S. Army Engineer District    lished by U.S. Coast Guard; available without charge by contact-
Vicksburg, P.O. Box 60, U.S. Post OFfice and Courthouse, Vicks-    ing the toll free Boating Safety Hotline (telephone, 800-368-
burg, Miss. 39180.                                               5647).
 (58)  Upper Mississippi River Navigation Charts (Mississippi    (76)  Port Series of the United States: Published and sold by
River, Cairo, Ill. to Minneapolis, Minn.): Published by U.S. Army    Corps of Engineers, U.S. Army, Water Resources Support Center,
Engineer North Central Division and for sale by U.S. Army Engi-    Port Facilities Branch, Casey Building, Fort Belvoir, VA 22060-
neer District St. Louis, 210 N. Tucker Boulevard, St. Louis, Mo.    5586.
63101.                                                            (77)   Maritime Radio Users Handbook: Published and sold
 (59)  Charts of the Illinois Waterway, from Mississippi River at    by Radio Technical Commission for Maritime Services, 655 Fif-
Grafton, Ill. to Lake Michigan at Chicago and Calumet Harbors:    teenth Street, N.W., Suite 300, Washington, DC 20005-5701.
Published and for sale by U.S. Army Engineer District Rock
Island, Clock Tower Bldg., Rock Island, Ill. 61201.               (78)  Corps of Engineers Offices
 (60)  Foreign Waters: Published by Defense Mapping Agency       (79)  Alaska District Office: Bldg. 21-700, Elmendorf Air
Hydrographic/Topographic Center (see Defense Mapping Agency    Force Base, Box 898, Anchorage, Alaska 99506-0898.
Procurement Information above).                                   (80)  The Alaska District includes the coastal and tributary
 (61)  Marine Weather Services Charts: Published by the    waters of the State of Alaska.
National Weather Service; for sale by NOS Distribution Branch
(see Sales Information above).                                    (81)  Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Offices.-
 (62)  Publications                                             Regional offices and States in the EPA coastal regions:
 (63)  Notices to Mariners:                                       (82)  Region I (New Hampshire, Vermont, Maine, Massachu-
 (64)  The Local Notice to Mariners is available without charge    setts, Connecticut, Rhode Island): J.F. Kennedy Federal Bldg.,
upon application to the appropriate Coast Guard District Com-    Boston, Mass. 02203.
mander (see address further on). The Defense Mapping Agency       (83)  Region II (New Jersey, New York, Puerto Rico, Virgin
Notice to Mariners is available without charge by operators of    Islands): 26 Federal Plaza, New York, N.Y. 10278,
ocean-going vessels (see Defense Mapping Agency Procurement       (84)  Region III (Delaware, Maryland, Virginia, District of
Information above).                                              Columbia, Pennsylvania): 841 Chestnut Street, Philadelphia, Pa.
 (65)  Special Notice to Mariners are published annually in    19107.
Defense Mapping Agency Notice to Mariners 1. These notices        (85)  Region IV (Alabama, Florida, Georgia, Mississippi,
contain important information of considerable interest to all mari-    South Carolina, North Carolina): 345 Courtland Street NE,
ners. Interested parties are advised to read these notices.      Atlanta, Ga. 30365.
 (66)  Light Lists (United States and Possessions): Published    (86)  Region V (Illinois, Indiana, Michigan, Minnesota, Ohio,
by U.S. Coast Guard; for sale by the Government Printing Office.    Wisconsin): 230 South Dearborn Street, Chicago, Ill. 60604.
(See Government Printing Office, early this appendix.)            (87)  Region VI (Louisiana, Texas): First International Bldg.,
 (67)  List of Lights (Foreign Countries): Published by    1201 Elm Street, Dallas, Tex. 75270.
Defense Mapping Agency Hydrographic/Topographic Center (see       (88)  Region IX (California, Hawaii, Guam): 215 Fremont
Defense Mapping Agency Procurement Information above).          Street, San Francisco, Calif. 94105.
 (68)  Sailing Directions (Foreign Countries): Published by      (89)  Region X (Alaska, Oregon, Washington): 1200 Sixth Ave-
Defense Mapping Agency Hydrographic/Topographic Center (see    nue, Seattle, Wash. 98101.
Defense Mapping Agency Procurement Information above).
 (69)  Radio Navigational Aids, Pub. 117: Published by            (90)  Coast Guard District Offices
Defense Mapping Agency Hydrographic/Topographic Center (see       (91)  Commander, Seventeenth Coast Guard District, Federal
Defense Mapping Agency Procurement Information above).           Bldg., Box 25517, Juneau, AK 99802-5517. The coastal and trib-
 (70)  The Nautical Almanac, the Air Almanac, and Astro-    utary waters of the state of Alaska.
nomical Almanac: Published by U.S. Naval Observatory; for sale    (92)  Note: A Marine Safety Office combines the functions of
by Government Printing Office (see Government Printing Office,    the Captain of the Port and Marine Inspection Office.
early this appendix.)                                             (93)  The symbol (D) preceding an office indicates that a Docu-
 (71)  American Practical Navigator (Bowditch) (Pub. 9):    mentation Office is at the same address.
Published by Defense Mapping Agency Hydrographic/Topo-            (94)  Coast Guard Marine Safety Offices
graphic Center (see Defense Mapping Agency Procurement Infor-     (95)  Anchorage, Alaska: Federal Building & U.S. Court-
mation above).                                                   house, 222 West 7th Avenue 99513-7565.
 (72)  International Code of Signals   (Pub. 102): Published      (96)  (D) Juneau, Alaska: 2760 Sherwood Lane 99801-8545.
by Defense Mapping Agency Hydrographic/Topographic Center         (97)  Coast Guard Stations.-The stations listed are in Alaska.
(see Defense Mapping Agency Procurement Information above).      They have search and rescue capabilities and may provide look-






332                                                      APPENDIX


out, communication, and/or patrol functions to assist vessels in   (121) Yakutat (59ï¿½31'N., 139046'W.), 0503 and 1703 Ak.s.t.
distress. The National VHF-FM Distress System provides contin-     (122) NMJ-3, Valdez, Alaska:
uous coastal radio coverage outwards to 20 miles on 156.80 MHz     (123) Cape Hinchinbrook (60ï¿½15'N., 146ï¿½39'W.), 1633 and
(channel 16). After contact on channel 16, communications with    2233 Ak.s.t.
the Coast Guard should be on 157.10 MHz (channel 22). Ifchan-      (124) Boswell Bay (60ï¿½25'N., 146008'W.), 0415 and 1215
nel 22 is not available to the mariner, communications may be    Ak.s.t.
made on 156.60 MHz (channel 12). Selected stations guard the       (125)  Naked Island (60ï¿½38'N., 147ï¿½20'W.), 0415 and 1215
International Radiotelephone Distress, Safety and Calling Fre-    Ak.s.t.
quencies.                                                          (126) Point Pigot (60049'N., 148022'W.), 0433 and 1233 Ak.s.t.
 (98)  Alaska:                                                     (127) Valdez (61ï¿½08'N., 146ï¿½16'W.), 1615 and 2215 Ak.s.t.
 (99)  Juneau (58ï¿½17.9'N., 134ï¿½24.6'W.). On the NW side of the     (128)  NOJ, Kodiak, Alaska:
harbor at the U.S. Government Wharf (Subpart).                     (129) Diamond Ridge (59042'N., 151034'W.), about 4.3 miles
 (10o)  Ketchikan Base (55ï¿½19.9'N., 131ï¿½37.4'W.). On the NE      NW of Homer Airport, 0533 and 1633 Ak.s.t.
side of Tongass Narrows about 0.6 mile SE of Ketchikan.            (130) Rugged Island (59056'N., 149024'W.), 0703 and 2033
 (101)  Kodiak Support Center (57ï¿½44.3'N., 152ï¿½30.4'W.). On N    Ak.s.t.
side of Womens Bay about 4.5 miles SW of Kodiak.                   (131)  Site Summit (61ï¿½15'N., 149ï¿½32'W.), about 9.5 miles ENE
 (102)  Kodiak Air Station (57ï¿½44.3'N., 152030.4'W.). At Kodiak    of Anchorage, 0903 and 1733 Ak.s.t.
Support Center.                                                    (132) Narrow Cape (57ï¿½26'N., 152ï¿½25'W.), 0703 and 2033
 (103) Sitka Air Station (57ï¿½03.2'N., 135021.9'W.). On Japonski    Ak.s.t
Island.                                                            (133) Pillar Mountain (57047'N., 152ï¿½27'W.), 0533 and 1633
 (104)  Coast Guard Radio Broadcasts.-Urgent, safety, and    Ak.s.t.
scheduled marine information broadcasts are made by Coast          (134) Sitkinak Dome (56ï¿½33'N., 154ï¿½10'W.), 0903 and 1733
Guard radio stations. In general, these broadcasts provide informa-    Ak.s.t.
tion vital to vessels operating in the approaches and coastal waters  (135) Cape Gull (58ï¿½09'N., 154009'W.), 0533 and 1633 Ak.s.t.
of the United States including Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin         (136) Tuklung Mountain (58ï¿½51'N., 159ï¿½27'W.), about 6 miles
Islands. Transmissions are as follows:                            ENE of Kulukak Point, 0903 and 1733 Ak.s.t.
 (105) By radiotelephone: (a) upon receipt; (b) repeated 15
minutes later, (for urgent messages only); (c) text only on the first  (137) U.S. NAVTEX Transmitting Stations.-NAVTEX cover-
scheduled broadcast unless cancelled; (d) additional broadcasts at    age is reasonably continuous to 200 NM off the U.S. East, Gulf,
the discretion of the originator.                                 and West Coasts; Puerto Rico; Southwest Alaska; Hawaii; and
 (106) Urgent broadcasts are preceded by the urgent signal    300-400 NM off Guam. U.S. Coast Guard NAVTEX broadcast
PAN-PAN. Both the urgent signal and message are transmitted on    stations and message content follow:
2182 kHz, and VHF-FM channel 16.                                   (138) Long Beach (NMC)(Station Q)
 (107) Safety broadcasts are preceded bythe signal SECURITY.       (139) Eleventh Coast Guard District Broadcast Notices to Mari-
After the preliminary safety signal is broadcast on 2182 kHz and    ners.
VHF-FM channel 16, broadcast stations will shift to 2670 kHz and   (140) Distress, Urgent, and Safety messages.
VHF-FM channel 22A, respectively.                                  (141) Gale, storm, and hurricane warnings.
 (10os8) Scheduled broadcasts.-The following Coast Guard radio     (142) Coastal weather forecasts for Point St. George to Guada-
stations make scheduled broadcasts, preceded by a preliminary    lupe Island and 60 NM offshore.
call on 2182 kHz and VHF-FM channel 16 at the times and fre-       (143) Broadcast times: 0045, 0445, 0845, 1245, 1645, 2045
quencies indicated (VHF-FM channel 22A control stations are    GMT.
given, followed by remote antenna sites.):                         (144) San Francisco (NMC) (Station C)
 (109) NMJ-2, Ketchikan, Alaska:                                   (145) Eleventh Coast Guard District Broadcast Notices to Mari-
 (11o) Gravina Island (55022'N., 131ï¿½48'W.), 0615 and 1815    ners.
Ak.s.t.                                                            (146) Distress, Urgent, and Safety messages.
 (1ll) Cape Decision (56ï¿½00'N., 134'08'W.), 0533 and 1733          (147) Gale, storm, and hurricane warnings.
Ak.s.t.                                                            (148) Offshore marine weather forecasts for:
 (112) Zarembo Island (56ï¿½21'N., 132ï¿½52'W.), 0515 and 1715         (149)  North of 30ï¿½N., East of 160ï¿½E.;
Ak.s.t.                                                            (150)  South of 30ï¿½N., East of 1400W.
 (113) Sukkwan Island (55ï¿½06'N., 132ï¿½46'W.), 0515 and 1715         (151) Broadcast times: 0000, 0400, 0800, 1200, 1600, 2000
Ak.s.t.                                                           GMT.
 (114) Mary Island (55ï¿½05'N., 131 10'W.), 0533 and 1733 Ak.s.t.    (152) Astoria (NMW)(Station W)
 (115) NOU, Sitka, Alaska:                                         (153) Thirteenth Coast Guard District Broadcast Notice to Mari-
 (116) Mud Bay (57"09'N., 135ï¿½39'W.), on Kruzof Island, 0030,    ners.
0450, 1203, and 1603 Ak.s.t.                                       (154) Distress, Urgent, and Safety messages.
 (117) NMJ, Juneau, Alaska:                                        (155) Gale, storm, and hurricane warnings.
 (118) Cape Fanshaw (57ï¿½12'N., 133028'W.), 0503 and 1703           (156) Offshore marine weather forecasts for the Canadian bor-
Ak.s.t.                                                           der to Point St. George and 250 NM offshore.
 (119) Mount Althorp (58005'N., 136ï¿½24'W.), NE side of Lisian-     (157) Broadcast times: 0130, 0730, 1330, 1930 GMT.
ski Inlet, 0533 and 1903 Ak.s.t.                                   (158) Kodiak (NOJ)(Station J)
 (120) Mount Robert Barron (58ï¿½14'N., 134ï¿½50'W.), 0603 and         (159) Seventeenth Coast Guard District Broadcast Notice to
1803 Ak.s.t.                                                      Mariners.





                                                          APPENDIX                                                            333


 (160)  Distress, Urgent, and Safety messages.                    in their offices or by telephone; refer to the local telephone direc-
 (161)  Gale, storm, and hurricane warnings.                      tory for numbers.
 (162) Offshore marine weather forecasts for the Canadian bor-     (196) Anchorage, Alaska: 222 W. 7th Avenue; International Air-
der to 85 N including the Aleutian Chain.                          port.
 (163) Broadcast times: 0300, 0700, 1100, 1500, 1900, 2300          (197)  Barrow, AK: Wiley Post-Will Rogers Field, 99723.
GMT.                                                                (198)  Bethel, AK: Airport, 99559.
 (164) Adak (NOJ)(Station X)                                       (199) Cold Bay, AK: Airport, 99571.
 (165) Seventeenth Coast Guard District Broadcast Notice to         (200) Homer, AK: 2100 Kachemak Dr., Suite 4, 99603.
Mariners.                                                           (201)  King Salmon, AK: Airport, 99613.
 (166) Distress, Urgent, and Safety messages.                       (202) Kodiak, AK: Airport, 99619.
 (167) Gale, storm, and hurricane warnings.                         (203) Kotzebue, AK: Ralph Wein Memorial Airport, 99752.
 (168) Coastal weather forecasts for the Andreanof Island vicin-    (204) Nome, AK: Airport, 99762.
ity.                                                                (205)  St. Paul Island, AK: Airport, 99660.
 (169) Broadcast times: 0300, 0700, 1100, 1500, 1900, 2300          (206) Unalakleet, AK: Unalakleet Airport, 99684.
GMT.                                                                (207) Valdez, AK: Coast Guard VTS Bldg., 99686.
 (170) Honolulu (NMO)(Station O)                                    (208)  Yakutat, AK: Airport, 99689.
 (171) Fourteenth Coast Guard District Broadcast Notice to Mar-     (209) Radio Weather Broadcasts.-Taped or direct broadcasts
iners.                                   0of marine weather forecasts and storm warnings are made by com-
 (172) Distress, Urgent, and Safety messages.                     mercial and Coast Guard radio stations in the area covered by this
 (173) Gale, storm, tropical storm, and typhoon warnings.         Coast Pilot. These broadcasts usually are made several times a
 (174)  Offshore marine weather forecasts for:                    day; the transmission schedules are shown on the Marine
 (175)  North Pacific to 50ï¿½N. and 1600E. to 1400W.;              Weather Services Chart for Alaskan Waters.
 (176)   South Pacific to 25ï¿½S. and 1600E. to I 100W.               (210) The weather broadcasts schedules of Coast Guard radio
 (177) Broadcast times: 0040, 0440, 0840, 1240, 1640, 2040    stations are also listed in the descriptions of Coast Guard marine
GMT.                                                               services found elsewhere in this appendix.
 (178) Guam (Station V)                                             (211) The National Weather Service offices in Alaska broadcast
 (179) Marianas: Section Broadcast Notice to Mariners.            marine forecasts and warnings for coastal waters on the frequen-
 (180) Distress, Urgent, and Safety messages.                     cies and at the times (Alaskan standard time when the state is
 (181)  Gale, storm, tropical storm, and typhoon warnings.        observing standard time, and Alaskan daylight saving time when
 (182) Offshore marine weather forecasts.                         the state is observing daylight saving time) indicated.
 (183) Broadcast times: 0100, 0500, 0900, 1300, 1700 GMT.           (212) KDG-58, Annette: 4125 kHz, 0700 and 1645;
                                                                   (213) KDG-91, Yakutat: 4125 kHz, 0930 and 1930;
 (184) Rescue Coordination Centers.-Listed below are the           (214) KCI-98, King Salmon: 4125 kHz, 1100 and 1715; sea-
location of the centers in Alaska; refer to the local telephone direc-    sonal April 1 through October 15;
tory for numbers.                                                   (215) KCI-95, Cold Bay: 2512 kHz (April 1 through October
 (185) Juneau, Alaska: U.S. Coast Guard Station.                  15), 4125 kHz (October 16 through March 30), 1030 and 2030;
 (186) Anchorage, Alaska: Elmendorf Air Force Base.                 (216) WBH-29, Kodiak: 4125 kHz, 0800 and 1800;
 (187)  Kodiak, Alaska: U.S. Coast Guard Support Center.            (217) KCI-94, Nome: 4125 kHz, 1130 and 2130.
 (188)  Adak, Alaska: Adak Naval Air Station.                       (218) NOAA Weather Radio.-National Weather Service VHF-
                                                                  FM radio stations provide mariners with continuous FM broad-
 (189) Customs Ports of Entry and Stations                        casts, radar reports, and surface weather observations. These sta-
 (190) Vessels may be entered and cleared at any port of entry or    tions usually transmit on 162.55 or 162.40 MHz. Reception range
customs station, but at the latter only with advance authorization    is up to 40 miles from the antenna site, depending on the terrain,
from the Customs Service district director.                        type of receiver, and the antenna used. The following VHF-FM
 (191) Pacific Region                                             radio stations with location of antenna are located in Alaska.
 (192) Anchorage District:                                          (219) WML-18, Haines (59ï¿½17'N., 135027'W.), 162.40 MHz.
 (193) Ports of Entry: Anchorage, Dalton Cache (59027.1'N.,        (220) WXK-69, Yakutat (59030'N., 139039'W.), 162.40 MHz.
136021.6'W.), Juneau, Ketchikan, Sitka, Skagway, Valdez,            (221) WXJ-79, Cordova (60033'N., 145045'W.), 162.55 MHz.
Wrangell.                                                           (222) WXJ-63, Valdez (61ï¿½08'N., 146ï¿½21'W.), 162.55 MHz.
 (194)  Customs Stations: Barrow (supervised by Fairbanks port      (223) KEC-81, Seward (60007'N., 149ï¿½27'W.), 162.55 MHz.
of entry); Dutch Harbor (supervised by Anchorage port of entry);    (224) KEC-43, Anchorage (61ï¿½13'N., 149ï¿½53'W.), 162.55 MHz.
Haines (supervised by Dalton Cache port of entry); Hyder (super-    (225) WXJ-24, Homer (59045'N., 151o37'W.), 162.40 MHz.
vised by Ketchikan port of entry); Kaktovik (Barter Island) (super-  (226) WXJ-78, Kodiak (57047'N., 152026'W.), 162.55 MHz.
vised by Fairbanks port of entry); Kenai (Nikiski), Kodiak          (227) WXJ-62, Nome (64ï¿½30'N., 165025'W.), 162.55 MHz.
(supervised by Anchorage port of entry); Pelican (supervised by     (228) The National Weather Service provides Radiofacsimile
Juneau port of entry);7Petersburg (supervised by Wrangell port of    Weather Information for Alaskan waters through the Coast
entry).                                                            Guard Communications Station Kodiak, AK (NOJ). Broadcasts
                                                                  are made daily at 0400, 1000, 1800, and 2200 GMT, on 4298 and
 (195) National Weather Service Offices.-The following offices    8459 kHz. For further information, contact the National Weather
will provide forecasts and climatological data or arrange to obtain    Service National Meteorological Center at (301) 763-8442, or fax
these services from other offices. They will also check barometers    (301) 899-8903.





334                                                      APPENDIX


       (229) National Weather Service Forecasts Offices (WSFOs).-        (246) Department of Agriculture, Animal and Plant Health
      Scheduled coastal marine forecasts are. issued four times daily by    Inspection Service (APHIS) Offices.-   Listed below are ports
      Weather Service Forecast Offices. (See National Weather Service,    covered by this volume where APHIS inspectors are available to
      chapter 1, for further details.) Individual WSFOs and their specific    inspect plants, and plant and animal products, and locations of
      areas of broadcast coverage are as follows:                       Animal Import Centers where livestock and birds are inspected.
       (230) Anchorage, AK: (1) North Gulf Coast, (a) Cape Suckling      (247) Information on importation of plants, animals, and plant
      to Gore Point, (b) Prince William Sound, (c) Resurrection Bay; (2)    and animal products is available from APHIS, Department of
      Cook Inlet and Kachemak Bay; (3) Kodiak Island waters, Gore    Agriculture, Federal Building, 6505 Belcrest Road, Hyattsville,
      Point to Castle Cape; (4) coastal waters south of the Alaska Penin-    Md. 20782. The specific offices to contact are as follows: for
      sula, Castle Cape to Cape Sarichef; (5) Bristol Bay, (a) south por-    plants, including fruits and vegetables, and plant products, Plant
      tion, Cape Sarichef to Port Heiden, (b) north portion, Port Heiden    Protection and Quarantine, Room 635, telephone 301-436-6799;
      to Cape Newenham; (6) Cape Sarichef to Adak; (7) Adak to Attu;    for animalproducts, Import-Export Animals and Products Staff,
      (8) Cape Newenham to Dall Point; (9) Pribilof Island waters.      Room 756A, telephone 301-436-7885; and for live ruminants,
       (231) Fairbanks, Alaska: (I) Dall Point to Wales including    swine, equines, and poultry and other birds, Veterinary Services,
      Norton Sound and the St. Lawrence Island waters; (2) Wales to    Import-Export Animal and Products Staff, room 764, telephone
      Point Hope including Kotzebue Sound; (3) Point Hope to Point    301-436-8590.
      Barrow to the Canadian border (July I-October 1, only). Note.-     (248) Alaska:
      Broadcast coverage for Alaskan Coastal waters extends 60 miles     (249) Anchorage: Anchorage International Airport; Box 6191,
      out.                                                              Annex Post Office 99502.
       (232) National Weather Service Port Meteorological Officers       (250)  Animal ImportCenters:
      (PMOs).-Port Meteorological Officers provide assistance on mat-    (251)  Honolulu, Hawaii: 300 Ala Moana Boulevard, Room
      ters of weather chart interpretation, instruments, marine weather    4320, 96850.
      communications, and requirements affecting ship operations. (See
      National Weather Service, chapter 1, for further details.) The near-  (252) Miami, Fla.: 8120 NW 53rd Street, Suite 102, 33166.
      est PMO to the area covered by this Coast Pilot is at:             (253) Rock Tavern, N.Y.: New York Animal Import Center,
       (233) Seattle, Wash.: 7600 Sand Point Way, NE 98115.            Stewart Airport, Rural Route 1, Box 74, 12575.
       (234) Anchorage, AK: 701 C Street 99513
       (235) Anchorage, AK: 222 W. 7th Avenue 99513.                     (254) Immigration and Naturalization Service Offices
       (236) Valdez, AK: National Weather Service Office 99686           (255) Alaska:
       (237) Public Health Service Quarantine Stations.- For ports       (256) Anchorage: Federal Bldg., 701 C Street 99513.
      in Alaska, quarantine and/or medical examinations are usually      (257) Haines: Mile 41 Haines Highway (Dalton Cache), 99827.
      performed by Public Health Service Contract Physicians. For        (258) Ketchikan: 111 Main Street 99901.
      information where examinations are performed contact:              (259) Skagway: P.O. Box 475, 99840.
       (238) U.S. Public Health Service, Sea-Tac International Airport,
      Seattle, WA  98158.                                                (260) Federal Communications Commission Offices

       (239) Food and Drug Administration (FDA) Regional Offices         (261) District field offices:
       (240)  Northeast Region (New York, Maine, Connecticut, New        (262) Anchorage, Alaska: 6721 West Raspberry Road 99502.
      Hampshire, Vermont, Rhode Island): 830 Third Avenue, Brook-
      lyn, NY 11232.                                                     (263) Radio shore stations providing medical advice.-Mes-
       (241) Mid-atlantic Region (Delaware. Pennsylvania, Virginia,    sages to shore stations may be transmitted in code groups or plain
      Maryland, Ohio, New Jersey): U.S. Customhouse, 2nd and Chest-    language; messages should be signed by the master and be pre-
      nut Streets, Philadelphia, PA 19106.                              fixed "RADIOMEDICAL". The following stations will provide
       (242)  Southeast Region (South Carolina, North Carolina, Geor-    radio services for medical advice. (See Medical advice, chapter
      gia, Alabama, Louisiana, Mississippi, Florida, Puerto Rico): 60    1)
      Eighth Street, N.E., Atlanta, GA 30309.                            (264) NOJ, Kodiak, AK, U.S. Coast Guard on HF single-side-
       (243) Midwest Region (Illinois, Indiana, Michigan, Wisconsin):    band radiotelephone channels 424 (4134 kHz), 601 (6200 kHz),
      20 N. Michigan Avenue, Chicago, IL 60602.                         816 (8240 kHz), or 1205 (12242 kHz).
       (244) Southwest Region (Texas): 3032 Bryan Street, Dallas,        (265) WKN, Ketchikan, AK, Alascom, Inc.
      TX 75204.                                                          (266) WKQ, Point Lena, Juneau, AK, Alascom, Inc.
       (245) Pacific Region (California, Hawaii, Alaska, Washington,     (267) WKR, Nome, AK, Alascom, Inc.: 1000-1900 A.K.s.t.
      Oregon): 50 U.N. Plaza, San Francisco, CA 94102.                  Sunday and holidays, maintain a continuous guard on 500 kHz.






                                                                                                                                         T-1

                                                               CUMATOLOGICAL TABLES

       These tables were prepared by the NaBmini E~           SateIRa Dala, and If~                             ' means less 'dmn 0.5 pe~enL
     Seroice. Staticm level pressure rulers to ttm nctmd premmre takee. at the Mlvlfion ol the "mNns tsss 8urn 0.5 day.
      staU<x~. Wlmm it has been reduced to sea level, the tram sea level p~--~,~dre is used. Tene                t  means ~ace (nol meamJtat3;,e) ot pmcipitatioe.
     g~ ~ ~ sM~d time.

                                             YAKUTAT, ~ (59'31~., 138'~.) B~m~n 29 ~ (9,~)
            WEATHER ELEMENTS JAH. FEB. MAR. APR. MAY JUNE JULY AU~ ~                                                      OCT. NOV. OEC. YEAR YEARS OF
                                                                                                      ï¿½
                                                                                                                                      RECORD

           SEA LEVEL PRESSURE
Mean (Millibarn) ..................................................... 1008.4 1007.2 1009.0 1011.1 1014.9 1015,?. 1016.e 1014.6 1011.0 1004.0 1004.8 1003.5 1010.1 26
        TEMPERATURE (DE~;IEES F)
Mea~ ................................................................... 24.2 26.0 20.3 38.1 ~.3 49.7 50.4 ~0 46.4 ~.7 3~ 28.7 98.8
Mean DaJy Maximum .............................................. 31.2 35.0 37.9 43.6 50.8   5~.4 59.3 59.6   55.4 47.3 38.2 32.7 45.6 29
Mean Daily Minimum ............................................... 17.1   20.0 22.6 26.5 35.7 43.0 47.4 46.1 41.4 34.1 26.2 20.7 32.0 29
Extreme Highest. ................................................... 46  54 55  66 79 81 84 86 77 63                                    54 52           66 30
E~mft'm L~ ..................................................... -22 -~ -13 3 9 38    ~   20  26    5 -10 -24 -24
            REI.KIrWE HUMIDITY
Average Percentage ................................................ 63.4 85,3 82.6  62.9 82.9   84.6   87.4 88.7 99.1 87,2 86.9 86.0 85.5 30
               CLOUD COVER
Aver~ N~nt ~m~) ........................................ 7.3 7,6  7,4 7.5   6.1 0~    &6   8.3  6.3    6.1 7.9 7.9 6*0 25
               PREClP~A~ON
Mean Amouftt (Incbrai) ............................................ 10.36 9.28 9.57 7.65   8.02   5.68  8.46 10.81 16.45 19,52 14.60 12.96 132.46 29
GreabestAmount (Inches) ......................................... 23.98 32.13 18.66 12.93 16.95  16.24 21.49  23.89 27.10    36.89  43.88 28*54 0 32
Least Amount (inches) ............................................ 1.59 2.42 2.06  0.75 2.73 0.52 1.70   2.65 9.04 6.68 4.36 4.58                        0 32
        in 24 hrs. (Inches} ..................................... 5.11 4.99 5.28 3.93   4.96   4.42  5.36   5.56   6.38      6.97 7.13 6.10 7.13 27
M~  N~t of S~w (Inch~) ................................. 39.9 46.1 42.8 16.7 2.0 t 0.0   6.0 t 5.3 21.7 43.4 213.9 25
Mean Number of Days with Prncipitatiod ..................... 21 21 22           26      22     21 23 23                23 25 23 24 269 25
Snow(Mean Nombef of Days) ................................... 16 17 18 12 2 0 0 0 *' 5 12 19 103 25
                   "/IND
Percan1 of (7osewations with Gales ............................ 0.6    0.2 0.2 0.3    0.2 0.3                                   0.7 0,8    0.5 0.3                  29
Mean Wind S~    (Knots) ........................................ 7.5 7.3    6.9 6.6    6.8 6.6 6.1 6.0    6.5 8.0 7.9 8.1 7.0
~m~on (Pec~ of ~s.}
  North: ....................................................... ........ 0.7 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.0    2.0    1.7 1.5 1.6             1.4 0.6    0.5 1.3 29
  No~  No~(~st .................................................. 0.8 1.0 1.1 1,3 1,4 1.0 1.0    0.9 1.2 1.6 1.2 0.8 1.1 29
  Norlheast ........................................................... 5.2 4.4 4.4 3.5 2.7 1.6 1.4 1.7 3.3 4.6 5.0    6.0 3.6 29
  East ~ '~st ................................................... 14.3 12.7 11.0 9.0 5.7 3.4 3.8 6~   10.6 14.9 16.7 15.6 10.3 29
  :-ast ................................................................. 29.2 24.9 24.0  19.6 12.5 9.0  12.4 15.5   ~.2 245 28.9 27.9                20.5 29
  ;-' _~LSl Southeast .................................................... 15.2 16.O 16.8 14.3 14.1 11.0 14.4 15.7 15,0 ,16.0 14.9 15.0 12,1 29
  :~,3utheasl .......................................................... 5.4 6.2 5.3 6.8 7.9 7.8 7.4 6.8 6.4                    5.5 5.1 5.7 6,3 29
  ~   Sobeast ................................................. 2.2 1.9 2.3 2.9 4.3 4.2 4.2 3.6 3.5 3.5 2.3 2.5 3,1 29
  L~ ....................'..., .........................................
                                                1.3 1.4 1.7 2.1 3.4 3.5 3.1 2.9    22 2.2 1.7 1.9 2,3 29
  :~ SouIhwesl ................................................. 1.1 1.3 1.1 1.6 2.0 2.6 2.4 2.0 1,7 1.5 1.0 1.2 1,6
  .:~oulltwest ........................................................... 1.3 1.5 1.8 2.3 3.3 4.6 3.8    3.0 2,1 1.6 1.0 1.3 2,3                                  29
  ;'test ~Jthwest ................................................... 1.2  1.8 2.1 3.9 5.1 6.4 7.2 4.6    2.9 1.7 1.2 1.3 3.5                                      29
  West ................................................................. 0.9 1.2 2.0 2.9    5.5 9.7 7,5 5.2 2.8 1.4 0.8 0.8 314 29
  Wasl N~hwest .................................................. 0.6 1.1 1.4 3.0    5.8 7.5 6.1 4.8 2,9 1.0 0.5    0.8 2.9                                        29
  Northwest ........................................................... 0.7 0.9 1.7 3.0    5.9 5.9 5.2 4.9 2.9 1.4 0.7 0.8 2.6                                     29
  North Northwest .................................................. 0.4 0.5 !.0 1.8 2.7 3.0 2.3 2.1 1.7 1.3    0*5                           0.3 1.5 29
  ~lm ................................................................ 22.4 22.4 21.2 ~.1 16.1 14.8 16.2 18.4 19,0 15.6   17.4 16.8 16.3 29
~r~c~on (Mean Speed, knots).
  No~ ................................................................ 4.7 4.5 4.4 5.1 5.1 5.5          4.6 4.5 4.5 4.4 4.0 4.0 4.7 29
  ;do~  No~sl .. ............................................... 4.7 5.1 4.6 4.6 4.8 5.0 4.1 4.0 4.9 4.5 5.0 5.1 4.7 29
  No~e~t ........................................................... 6.6 6.1    6.5  5.4 5.0 4.6 3.9 4.4 4.9                    5.5 5.6    6.7 5.8                 29
  East Nm'theest ................................................... 7.6 7,8    8,0 7.0    6.8    5.6 5.9 6.1 6.8 7.4 7.7 7.8 7,3 29
  East ................................................................. 8.8 9,0 9,0  8.2 7.6    7.9 7.4 7.2. 7.8              8.8    8.8 9.3           6.5 29
  East So~easl ................................................... 12.5   11.0   10.7 11.3 11.2 10.3 9.4 . 9.9 10.6 12.5 11.9 11.2 11 I 29
  ~    e~l .......................................................... 13.9 13.2 -10.3 11.8 11.7 10.5. 9.2 10.2 11.9 14.6   15.3 14.3 12.1 29
  ~     Sou~esst ................................................. 14.5 12.0.  10.9 9.5 9.0 9.0         6.4 8.2 10,4 14.0 15.1 14.1 10.8 29
       ............................................................. '... ' 10.8   10.0    8.3 7.1 7.6    6.9 6.6' 6.9 8.4 10.8 11.9 13.3 6.6 29
  ~ h ~ ,~ ................................................. 12.6 11.4 8.4 6.7 7.0    6.2 5.9 5.9 7.5 10.4 11.9 12.4                                    8.2 29
  ~hwest .......................................................... 11.6 10.3 7.7 6.5    6.8    6.5 6.2 6.1 6.6 10.0 10.4 10.3 7.6
  W~  ~ hw~ .................................................. 12.3 9.8 6.5 7.1 7.6 7.8 7.1 6.8 ?.2 9.9 11.8 11.9 8.0                                              29
  W~ ................................................................. 9.9 .8.4 7.5  6.1 6.6 7.2        6.7 5.9 6.2 6.7 7.7 9.2                         6.9 29
  W~ N~hwesl .................................................. 7.7 6.9 6.5 6.3 6.1 6.6 6.3 ' 5.5    5.5 5.7    5.8 7.8 6.2 29
  ~x~w(~l .......................................................... 5.0 4.9 5.3 6.2 6.4 6.3 5.8 5.7 5.1 5~ 4.5 5.4 5.8 29
  N~h N~w(~t .................................................. 4.2 4.6 5.1 5.9 6.3 6.1 5.7 5.5 6.0 4.8 4.3    4.4 5.8 29
                 VI~BI~Y
M~n N~m of O~ m~ F~ ................................ 11' 14 14 14 15 16 21 ~ 16 14 12 12 1~ 25
~ys m~ V~   ~ ~ 1/2 m~e ......................... 5.7 4.9 7.1 2.0  3.0 4.9 2.4  5.9  4.6 1.0 1.4 3.8 ~.7                                                             6





'r-2


                                              CORDOVA, ALASKA (60'30'N., 145'30'W.) Elevatk)n 41 fl. (12.5m)


             WEATHER ELEMENTS JAN. FEB. MAR.    APR. MAY JUNE JULY AUG. SEPT.    OCT. NOV. DEC.  YEAR
                                                                                                                                          YEARS OF
                                                                                                                                           RECORD

            SEA LEVEL PRESSURE
Mean (Millibars) ...................................................... 1007.1 1005.5 1008.O 1010.0 1013,8 1014.5 1015.8 1013.5 1009.1 1001.5 1002.7 1001.9   1008.7 24
         TEMPERATURE (DEGREES F)
Mean ................................................................... 23.0 26.7 29.2 36.0   43.7 50.4 53.4 53.0   48.0 39.6   30.6 24.6 38.2                 29
Mean Daily Maximum ............................................. 30.1 34.3 37.2 43.6   51.5 57.9 60.6 61.1 55.8 46.9   37.4. 31.6                   45.7 24
Mean Daily Minimum ............................................... 13.4 17.3 20.0  27.6 35.1 42.3   46.2   44.5 39.8 32.0   23.5 16.8               29.9 24
Extreme Highest ................................................... 58  52 52  65 92 84 94 84 71 70 55    54 84                                                 24
Exbeme Lowest ..................................................... - 27 - 33 - 24 4 20 29 34                30 20 8 - 17 - 23 - 33 24
             RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Average Percentage ................................................. 82.5   82.7 79.3 78.5 80.1 81.5 85.2 85.0 84.8 83.6 84.8 83.8                  82.7 24
               CLOUD COVER
Average Arttaunt (Tenths) ........................................ 6.7 7.1 6.8 7.2    8.1 6.4         5.7 8.1   8.1 7.8 7.4 7.2 7.6 24
               PRECIPITATION
Mean Amount (inches) ............................................. 6.14 6.42 5.89 5.71 5.99 4.67 7,08 8.94 13.53 12.34   8,37   7.45 92.53 29
Greatest Amount (inches) ......................................... 14.21 16.97 12.41 11.63 10.65 9.68 18.28 16.31 27.72    26.63 21.13 18,67 0                  24
Least Amount (Inches) ............................................ 0.64 1.07 1.26 0.08 1.91 0.69 3.02 2,57 4.32             5,62 1.46 1.87 0 24
Maidmum in 24 hrs. (Inches) ..................................... 2,28 3.70 2.45 2.64   2.65   2.60 4.62   4,41 5.99        4.96 4.48 4.50 5.99 24
Mean Amount of Snow (Inches) ................................. 22.4 23.5 25.1 14.4 2.2 0.0            0.0 0.0         I 3.5 10.2   26.5 127.8 24
Mean Number of Days with Precipitation ..................... 18 19 19          20 23 22 24 23 22 24 22    22 260 24
Snow (Mean Number of Days) .................................. 15 16 17 12 3 "*                         O       O     ** 5 12 17 97 24
                    WIND
Percent of Obsewations with Gaies ............................ 0                0 0 0 0 0 0 29
Mean Wind Speed (Knots} ........................................ 4.2 4.5 4.6 4.8 4.8    4.1           3.6 3.5 4,4 5.1    4,5 4.5 4,4 24
Direc6on (Percentage of Obs.)
  North ................................................................ 4.9 3.9    4.1 4.0 2.3 1.9   2.0 2.7    3.2 3.6 4.4   4.7 3.5                          24
  North Norlheast .................................................. 3.3 2.8    2.8 1.9    1,6 1.8 2.0 2.1 2.5               3.3 3.2 3.0 2.5 24
  Northeasl ........................................................... 4.1 4.0 3.7  3.5 3.4    3.6 5.4 5.6 6.3 5.7 4.8 4.6 4.6 24
  East Northeast ................................................... 7.8 7.0 6.7 5.6 5.4 7.8          9.2    9.9 12.2 11.6 6.9 8.9 8.4 24
  East ................................................................. 13.6 14.2 12.O  12.6 12.0 10.2 12.0 12.8 15.4 18.8 16.3 16.2 13.8                      24
  Easl Southeast .................................................... 10.6   12.4 11.8 12.4 11.8    6.8  8.3 6.0    9.6     12.2 11,6 11.5 10.2                 24
  Southeast ......................................................... 3.9 4.0 5.4 7.0 7.5 5.6 4.5 4.1 5.0 3.9 4.1 4.0 4.9                                       24
  S,.3~th Southeast ................................................. 0.7 1.2 1.6 2.3    3.1    2.9 2,1 1.8 1.8 1.2    0.9 0.7 1.7 24
  Soeth ................................................................ 0.7 1.0 1.9 2.6 3.3 3.5      2.6 2.1 1.3 1.0 0.9 9.8 1.8                               24
 South Southwest ................................................. 0.4    0.7 1.4 2.4 2.6 3,6 3.2 2.3 1.3 0.7 0.4    0.3 1.6 24
  Southwasl .......................................................... 0,6 1.2 2.8 3.6    5.1    7.2  6.2 4,8 2,1 1.2 0.7    0.5 3.0 24
  West Southwest .................................................. 0.4    0.7 1.5 2.2 3.8 5.1 3.8 .3.3    2.0               0.8 0,3   0.4 2.0                  24
  West ................................................................. 1.0    1.9 2.4 2.4    3.6 4.3  2.9 2.6    2,1 1.4 1.1 6.9 2.2 24
  West Northwest .................................................. 1.2    2.0    2.5 2.5 2.6    2.8 1.8 1.6   1.5 1,6 1.3 1.2                       1.9 24
  Northwest .......................................................... 1,9 2.3    2.0 2.3 1.7 1.7 1.2 1.5    1.8 2,0 1.8 1,9 1.8                                24
  North Northwest .................................................. 2.6 2,5 2.1 2.4 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.4    1.7 1.7 2.4 2.3 1.9 24
 Calm ................................................................. 42.4 38.0  35.3  30.0   28.6   30.0  34,1   35.4 30.1 29,2   36,7 37,9 34,0            24
Direction (Mean Speed, K'rs}
  Nodh ................................................................ 5.8    5,5 5,3  4.8    4.3   3,8  3.6    4.0 4.6     4,6 5.6 5.9 5.0                    24
 North Northeast .................................................. 5.7    7.3    6,3  4.8    4.4 3.7  3.5 4.0 4,4 4.7    5.8 5.8 5.2 24
 Northeast ........................................................... 5.9    5,9    5.9 5.3 4.4 4.2  3.8 4.1 4.5           5,3 5.3 5.8             5,0 24
 East Northeast ................................................... 7.4    7.5   7,6  6.6    5.6    5.0  4.7 5.1 5.9 7.0 6.9 7.1 6.3 24
  Eeat ................................................................. 8.3. 8.5 8,1 7.8 7.2    6.5  5.1    5.6 8.9 8.3 7.8 8.0                     7,4  '     24
  Eest Southeast .................................................... 9,9    ï¿½,5    9.7  9,4    9.1    7.2  7.2    7,0    8.9 10.1 10.0 9,8 9.2                 24
 Southeeal .......................................................... 7.1 7,6    7,4  8.0    6.1 7,1 6.6 E.3    7.5         7.4    7.2   7.6        7.4        24
 South Sourbees[ .................................................. 5.9 6.3    5,9 7.0    7.2 6.6 6.2    5.7   5.6          6.4    6.4 6,6 6,5 24
  South ................................................................ 4,3    5,0   5,2 6.6    5.9    5.7  5.3    5,1 5.4 5,1 4.8 6.0 5,4 24
 South Southwest ................................................. 5.0    5.0    4,8  6,5    5.6 6,0  5.6    5.6   5.4 5.6 5,5 5.2                  5.6 24
 Southwesl .......................................................... 3.8 3,9 4.7 5.4 6.3 6,4 6.3    5.7 5.2                5,2    4.4    4,3 5.6 24
 West Soulhwest .................................................. 4.9 4.6 5.0  5.8 6,3 6,7 6,8 5,9 6.6 5.0    4.8 4.9                              6.1        24
 West ................................................................. 4.3    4.7 4,8  5.3 5.8   6,2  5.7    5.1    5.2    5.0 4.9 4.7 5.4 24
 West Northwest .................................................. 4,7 4.7 5.3 5,5 5.4 6,6           5.8 5.9 5.4            6,0    5,2    5.2       5.5        24
 Northwest ........................................................... 4,2    4,4 4.2 4.6 4.0 4.1 3.8 3.6 3.7 4.4 - 4.3 4.5                         4.2 24
  North Northwasl .................................................. 5.5    5.6 5.3 5.2 4.2 4.0       3,7 4.2    4,7         4.6 4.9 5.6 5.0                    24
                  VISIBILITY
Mean Number of Days with Fog ................................ 8 7 6             7      8     11 17 14 11 8                            8 7 112                   24
Days with Visibility less than 1/2 mile ......................... 2.9 2.7 1.8 1.6 1,1 1.6 1,1 1.6 0.5 0.2 0.4 2.2 17.7 12





                                                                                                                                                                                        T-3



                                                            VALDEZ, ALASKA (61'08'N.. 146'15'W.) Elevation 49 ft. (14.9m1)


                 WEATHER ELEMENTS                              JAN.  FEB.  MAR.    APR.  MAY JUNE   JULY  AUG. SEPT.   OCT. NOV.  DEC.  YEAR   YEARS OF
                                                                                                                                         AUG SEPT. OCT. WOY. YEARS OF
                                                                                                                                                                                   RECORD

           TEMPERATURE (DEGREES F)
Mean........................... ........................................    17.8    22.4    26.8  35.6    43.8    51.2   53.3    52.0    46.5        37,5    26.1    19.5         36.0           29
Mean Daily Maximum............................................. 25.4    29.1    33.8         42.9    51.3    58.5        60.2    59.5    53.3        43.5    32.3    26.7         43.0           42
Mean Daily Minimum.............................................. 11.5    13.8    17.4        25.8    34.3    41.9        45.3    43.8    38.6        31.3    20.6    13.7         28.2           42
Exlreme Highest ...................................................  55     59      57         68       79      87         84       84      82         69       59      54          87           56
Extreme Lowest .................. ...................................  -24  -28    -11          4        6      27         33       29      14           5     -9    -18          -28            56
                    PRECIPITATION
Mean Amount   (Inches).....................................      5.06    5.30    4.33        3.06    3.20    2.70        4.31    5.80    7.74        6.75    5.67    5.39       59.31            29
OGreatest Amount  (Inches)............... .......................  15.17   14.24   13.55    10.11    5.90    5.90        8.28   17.41   18.74       17.23   17.38   16.66       83.39         32-42
Leaslt Amount (Inches)............................................  041    0.23    0.40      0.41    0.33   0.46         0.88    1.07    1.23        2.22    0.32    0.14       39.12         32-42
Maximum in 24 hrs. (Inches) .................................... 3.07    4.00    3.30        2.36    1.80    1.66        2.41    2.97    3.71        3.00    4.30    5.10         5.10           54
Mean Amount of Snow (Inches) ..............................      56.3    47.2    36.7        13.1      2.1     0.0           t     0.0      0.1    8    .4    31.0    49.6      244.5            48
Maximum Snowfall in 24 hrs. (Inches).........................    32.5    43.0    25.0        17.0    12.0      0.0           t     0.0      2.0      35.0    26.0    30.0         43.0           48
0.01 Inch or More. Mean Number of Days ..................          12       11      11         11       14      13         18       19      19          18      13      13         170           38
                          WIND
Prevailing Wind Direction ........................................  NE     NE      NE         NE       SW      SW         SW       SW      SW          NE      NE       NE         NE            33







                                         ANCHORAGE, ALASKA (61ï¿½10'N., 150'01'W.) Elevations114 It. (34.8rn)
            WEATHER ELEMENTS JAI~  FEB. MAR. APR. MAY ,JUNE JULY AUG. SEPT. OCT. NOV. DEC. YEARS OF
                                                                                                                          YEAR
                                                                                                                                 REC'ORD

           SEA LEVEL PRES,~JRE
Mean ('Nkl~ ) ..................................................... 1010,2 1008.7 1009.8 1010.5 1012.2 1012,4 1014.6 1012,1 1009.1 1002.0 1002.8 1003.5 1008.9
        TEMPERATURE (DEGREES F)
Mean ................................................................... 11.8   17.8 23.7 35.3 46.2   54.6  57.9 55.9 48.1 34.8 21.1 13.0 35.0         29
Mean Daily Maximum ............... ............................... 20.0 26,6 32.8 43.8 55.2 62.9 65,6  63.8 55.7 41.8 28.3 20.6 43.1 29
Mean Dsily Minimum ............................................... 3.5 8.9 14.6 26.8 37.2 46.2 50.1 48.0  40.4 27.8   13.9 5.3 26.9 29
EWeme Highest 50 44 49 62 75 77 81 76 73 60 51 47 81                                                                                                   12
Ex'l~eme Lowesl ..................................................... ~23 . -26 -22 6 17 33 36 34    20               -5 -21 -30           -30 12
            RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Average Percentage ................................................. 72.7 70.5 63.5  64.4 60.8   65.5 71.9 74.6 76.1 73,5 74.2 73.9        70.1
              CLOUD COVER
Average Amount ('Tenths) ......................................... 6,8 6.8 5.9 6.8 7,2 7.7 7,7 7.8 7.7 7.1 6,9   6.8 7.1 12
              PRECIPITATION
Mean Amount (Inches) ............................................. 0.84 0.84   0.56  0,56 .0.59 1.07 2.07 2.32 2.37 1,43 1.02 1,07    14.74            29
Greatest Amount (Inches) ......................................... 2.09 3.07 1.48  1.78 1.52   3.40  4.44 3.26 5.43 2.81   2.71 2.07 0 12
Least Amount (inches) ............................................. 0.27 0.07 0.19 0,01 . 0.02 0.26 0.72 1.60 0.83 0.35 0.11 0.19 0 12
Marlmum in 24 hrs. {Inches) ..................................... 0.84   1.16 0,47 0.50 0.45 1.62 2.0~ 1.30   1,21 0.88 1.16 1.39 2,00 12
Mean Amount of Snow (Inches) ................................. 10.1 14.9 9,5 7.5 0,4     t      0.0 0,0 ! 8,3 12.6 14.7 78.0 12
Mean Number of Days with Pmcipilation ..................... 20 17 15 14 16 16 19 20   .21 18 19    22                                      217 12
Snow (Mean Number of Days) ................................. 18  17 13 12 1 0                    0 0 1 10 17 20 112 12
                  WIND
Percenl of Observahens with Gales ............................ 0.1 O 0 0                0        O 0 0 0 0
Mean Wind Speed (Knots) ........................................ 4.8 5.6    5.9 6.1 7.2    6.7 5.9' 5.4 4.9 5.2 5.0 4.8 4.9
Direction (Percentage of Ohs.)
 North ................................................................ 13.4 14.8   15.8 10.2 4.8 2.g 3.7 5.4    8.9 14.5   16.3 14.9 15.7 11
 North Nm'theast .................................................. 12.7 14.1 12.4 8.5 3,7 2.5 3.8 6.0 9,0 11.6 12.8 12.4 12.1 11
 Northeasl ........................................................... 8,8   10.3    9.6  6.5 3.3 2.3 3.5 5.1 8.1 8.7 9.6    9.0           6.9 11
 East Norlheast ................................................... 6.1 4.5   3.0 2.0 1.4 1.1 1.2 ' 2.0    2.8 4.1 5.3 5.7 3.2 11
 East ................................................................. 4.1 3.0 1.8 1,5 1.0 0.8 1.2 1.6 1.9 2.5 4.2 4.5                    2,7 11
 East Southeast .................................................... 2.7 2.6 1.5 1.7 1,4    1.4 1.4 2.0 2.1 2.4 2.7 2.8                    2.2 11
 Southeast .......................................................... 3.2 3.3 4.0 4.7 6.6    5.2  5.5 6,1 5.1 3.7 2.4 3.3 3,1 1 I
 South Southesst ................................................. 2.8 2,8 3.8  6.3 13.2. 13.3  10.9 11.2 8.6 5.2    3.4 2.4 2.8 11
 South ................................................................ 4.1 5.4 5.0 10.6 18.2 16,7 14.9   12.2 9.3   6.4 4.3 3.5           6.1 11
 South Southwest ................................................. 2.6 3.5    2.9 5.3 7.1 7.2 7.1    8.1 5.4 3.5 2.5 2.5 4.9 11
 Southwest .......................................................... 1.8 1.8 2.1 4.0 5.3 7.0 6.1 4,7 3.2 2.1 1.6 1.7 3.5                             11
 West Southwest .................................................. 1.7 1.8    2.6 3.8 4.3 6.4 5.9    3.8 2.7 1.8 1.5 1.8 2.5 11
 Wesl .....................' ............................................ 2.9 2.5 3.6  6.3 6,7 7.9 8.0    5.0 3,8 2.6 1,8 2.5 3.2 11
 Wes1 Northwest ................................................... 3.3 3.0    3.9 7.9 8.9 11.1 10,3 6.6    4.4 3.4 2,8 2.7 3.9 11
 Northwesl .......................................................... 4.6 3.8    6.2 6.5 4.9 5,2 5.1 4.9 5.9 5.2 3.9 4.3 4.7 11
 North Norbvest .................................................. 5.8 6,3    9.2 5.9 3.3 2.4 2.6 3.1 5.5 7.1 7.1 6.7 6.8 1
 Calm ................................................................ 19.1 16.5 12.7 8.4 5.8 6.6  8.9 12.2  16.1   15.2 17,9 19.3 15.6 11
Directio~ (Mean Speed, knots)
 No4't h ................................................................ 7.2    8.2 7.3 6,9   6.5 4,8  4.9 4.7 5.4 6.6 7.1 7,8            6.5 11
 North Norrheas1 .................................................. 7,0    8.5 7.6 6.8 6.4 5.5' 5.5    5.1    5.7 8.5 6.8 7,5              6.5 11
 Northeast ........................................................... 5.9 6.3   6.6 6.1 5.2 5.2  5.3 4.9 5.0 5,3 5.3    5,2               5,4 11
 East Northeast ................................................... 4.6    4.6 4.4 4.9 4.6 4.6 4.2    4.3 4.3 4.3 4.4 4,2 4.2 11
 East ................................................................. 3.5 3.7 3.8 4.3 4.4 4.1 3.9 3.8 3.9 4.1 3.4 3.7                    3.4 11
 East Southeast .................................................:.    4.1 3~5 4.0  5.1 5.6    4.5 4.1 4.6 4.6 4.2 3.5 3.7 3.8 11
 Southeast .......................................................... 5.1 4.8 6.5  7.9 8.1   7.0  6.4 6.4 6.4 6.6 4.5 4.2 4.6 11
 South Southeast ................................................. 6.8 7.1 8.5  9.4 10.1 .9.7 9,3 8.8    8.2 8.1 7.7 5,3 6.1 11
 South ........................................: ....................... 6.6 8.2 7.3  8.1 9.7 9,3 8.1 7.7 7.5 7.6 7.9 6.6 7.1 11
 South Southwest ................................................. 7.0 8.0 6.9,    6.7 7.;~   6.6 6.3 7,4 7.1 7,6 7.5 6.7 7.2 11
 Southwest .......................................................... 5.3    5.6   5.1 5.4 6.1 5.7 5.9 5.1 5.4 4,9    5.3 4.8 6.2 11
 West Southwest .................................................. 4.0    4.3 4.6  5.3 6.1 6.3 5.7 4.9 4.0 4.0 4.3 4,0                     5.1        11
 West ................................................................. 4.4    4.9 4.5 5.2    6.2 6.2  5.7 5.2 4.6 4.6 4.7   4.5 4,9 11
 West Northwest .................................................. 5.0 5.4 5.0 5.6 6.9   6.6   6.2 5.4   4.7 4.9 5.3 4.8 4.8 11
 Northwest .......................................................... 4.9 5.3 6.6 6.5 6.4 6.0 5.5 4.8 4.8 5.5 5.5   4.9 4.6                           11
 North Northwest .................................................. 6.7 7.1 8,6 '   6.7 6.3    5.0  ' 4.7 4.8    5,2  5,3 6.6    6.8 5.5 11
                VISIBILITY
Mean Number of Days wffh Fog ................................ 12  9 5 4 1 2 4 5 7 6 8 12 76
Days with Visibility lass than 1/2 mile ......................... 7.7 4.5 1,5 1.1 0.3   0.1 0.6 0.1 1.7 2.5    5,4 6.9 33.3






                                                                                                                                       T-5


                                          KING SALMON. ALASKA [58'41'N., 156'39'W.) Elevation 49.~ (14.9m)
            WEATHER EUEMENTS JAN. FEB MAR. AFR, lUY JUliE JULY AUG. SEPT OCT. NOV. DEC. YEAR YEAI~ OF
                                                       ï¿½
                                                                                                    ' RECOfiD

           5F.A LEVEL PRESSURE
Mean (191illibars) ..................................................... 1006.9 1005.1 1008.8 1009.5 1010.4 1012.1 1014.0 1011.4 1006,7 1001.1 1003.2 1004.0 1007.8  28
        TEII~'ERATURE (DEGREES F)
Mean,....'...... ........................................................ 13.4   16.6   20.4 31.6 42.6 50,7 54.5   53.8 47.3  33.6 22.1 11.7 33.2 29
Mean Daily Maximum ............................................... 21.0   24.6 28.6 39.1 81.3 59.7 62.5   60.9 54.6 40.9 29.0 19.6 41.0 29
Mean Daily Minimum ................................................ 5.7 6.6 12.1    23.5   33.8 41.7  46.4 46.7 39.7 26.3 15.1 3.8 25.3 29
Exb.eme Highest .................................................... 53 51 56  65 75 98 83    84    74 67    50 48                          88 28
Extreme Lowest ..................................................... - 39 - 40 - 35 - 19 4 29 30 31 16 - 11 - 25 - 38 - 40                            28
            RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Average Percentage ................................................. 77.5   77.9 77.7 76.4 74.5 74.9 79.6  82.5 61.3 81.7 80.2  76.6 78.4 28
              CLOUD COVER
Average Amounl (Tenths) ........................................ 5.9 6.2    6.3 7.0 7.8   8.3 8.5 8.6 7.8 7.0 6.3 6.3 7.2 24
              PRECIPITATION
Mean Amount' (inches) ............................................. 0.94   0.99 1.16 0.90 1.13 1.44 2.16 3.46 3.07 2`00   1.43 1.05 19.75              29
Greatest Amount (inches) ......................................... 3.02 3.00   2.41 2.99 2.40 3.78 4.32   6.44 7.30 6.35   2`96 3.42 0                 31
Least Amount (inches) ............................................. 0.16 0.11 0.04  I  0,11  0.00 0.32 1.95 1.00 0.20         t  0.12        0 31
Maximum in 24 hrs. (Inches) ..................................... 0.67   1.29 1.63 1.41 6.80   0.67 1.05 2.00 1.65 1.52   0.91  8].82 2.00 31
Mean Amoun! el Snow (Inches) ................................ 6.3 7.1 8.6 A.4    0.6 0.0    0.0    0.1 3,2    6.5 6.5 45.5 24
Mean Number oi Days with Precipitation ......~ ............. 17 16    19 18]   20 21 22 24 22 20                             19 19 237 24
Snow (Mean Number el Days) ................................. 14 14 17 1~,         5    '* 0             0     I 9 14 - 16                  104 24
                   WIND
Percenl of Ohse~ations with Gales ........................... 0,5 0.6 0.4 0.2   0.1   0.1 0.1 0.3 0.4 r 0.7 0.5 0.4
Mean Wind Speed (Knots) ........................................ 9,7 18].2 9.9  8].2 9.4 8,7 7.7 8.7 8.7 9.2 9,5 9.1 9.1
Direction {Percentage o! Obs.)
  NoYth ................................................................ 19.7.  ~t9.9 15.5 11.2 5.1 2.8  2.8   .3.1 9.2 14.3 19.g 21.4 11.8 28
  North Nerlhesst ................................................... 8.3   10.8    7.8 5,9 3.9 2.3 2.3 2.2    5.6 8.1 9.4  10.0 6.3 28
  Northeast ............................................................ 6.4 5.1 4.3 6,0 5.0    3.1 2.5 2.9 4.9 5.5    5.0 4.6 4,6 28
  East Northeast ................................................... 4.2 4.0    3.6 4,4 5.3 3.0  2`4 2.4 3.8 4.1 3.9 3.0 3,7                           28
  East ................................................................. 9.2 8.6    7.3  8,0 11.3 7.2 4,2 4.6    6.3 6.5    7.7 6.9 7,3                28
  East Southeast .........................................: ......... 6.6   5.4 5.1 5.4 7.0 6.6 - 4,0 4.0    6.1 5.9 7.3 4.3 5.6 28
  Southeast ................................................: ......... 4.9 4.6 4.2 4.3    6.2-  6.5 4,6 5.4 6.1 4,5    5.7   4.6 5.2 28
  South Southeast .................................................. 4.8 5.4 4.8 5.4 8.2 7.6 7.0    9.1 8.9 6,2 6.1 4.2 6.5                            28
  South...: ............................................................ 3.4 4,1   4.9  4.9 9.6 11.5. 12.9 11.5 8.1 4,9 3.9 3.4 7.0                    28
  South Southwest ................................................. 2.6 3,1 4.1 4.7 7.3 11.7 14.9 12.4 5.9 4,7 2`5 3.1 6.5 28
  Southwest .......................................................... 2.0   2,5 4.1 4.6    5.9 10.4 12.4 11.3    5.1 2.9 1.4 1.9 5.4 28
  West Sou9'wvest .................................................. 1.7 2,1 3.1 4.8] 4.3 6.1 7.5 8.9 4.0 2.3 1.3 1.6 4.0 28
  Wesl ................................................................. 1.3 1.6 2.9 4.7 4.3 6.0 5.9 6.0 4.1 3.3 1.5 1.3 3,6 28
  West Nor[hwest .................................................. 1.3 1.7 2.3  3.3 3.3 4.2 4.2    3.7 3.6 3.3 1.8 1.8] 2.9 28
  Northwest .......................................................... 3.0 3,5 4.4 4.3    2,7 2.4 2.5 2.8 4.4 5.3   3.7 3.8 3.5 26
  North Northwest ..............' .................................... 7.5 7.7 11.1 9.4 3,3 ~ 2.4  2.3 2.4 6.2 9.3    9.2 10.4 6.7 28
  Calm 13.0 10.8 10.6                                                     8.7 7,3 6.0           7.7 7.3   7,6 6.8 10.7 14.0                 9.4 28
Direction (Mean Sl~ed, knots)
  North .................................................... ..........~. 11.5 11.3   11.3 10.1 9,3 7.2 6.5 7,8 9.4 18].5 10.9 10.7 10.6               26
  North Norlhsast .................................................. 9.9 10.3 10.2  g.4 8,5    6.9 6.8 73    8.8 9.9 10.2 9.9 9.6 28]
  Nodhesst ........................................................... 9.6 8.4 7.7 9.5 8.2 6.9 6.4 7,1 8.0 8.5 8.5 8.2 8.3 28
  East Northeast ................................................... 12.5 11.0 10.3  9.4 9.8    9,1  7,6 9,1 8.6 10.6 10~8 11.0 10.1                   28
  East ................................................................. 14.7 16.2  14.2    12.3 13.8] 13.2 10.5 11,1 11.4 12.2 14,3 14.7 13.5         28
  East Southeast ................................................... 13.9 12.8 13.1 11.3 12.4 11.9  8.6 9.5 10.6 11.8 13,5 13.4 12.1 28
  Southeast .......................................................... 9.6 11.4 10.1 10.3 9.3 8.3  6.6   8.8   8.9 9.0 10,0    9.2 9.2 28
  E~uth Sourheas1 .................................................. 11.9 13.9 13.8. 12.8   11.8 9.7 8.9 11.1 16.5 .18].2 10,4 11.0 11.2               28
  South ................................................................ 9.5 11.4 10.4 6.9 10~6    9.9 9.4 10.3 10.2  9.3 9.3 9.3           9.9 28
  South Southwest ................................................. 18].I   10.5 10.2  8].9 9.2    8.9 8.9 9.3 8.9 9.3 8,8  10.2            9.2        26
  Southwest .......................................................... 9.4 10.3 10.6  9.0 8,6 8.6 6.2   9.0 8.0       B.7 7.3 9.0           8.8 29
  West ,~t ................................................... 10.0 11.2 11.2 10.0 9.1 8.7 6.3 9.6 8.9 10.4 10.0 9.6                        9.4 28
  West ................................................................. 8.9 9.3 8].9 9.8 8.4 8.4 5.0    8.9 8.9 10.0 9.2 8.0               8.9 28
  West No~.fiwest .................................................. 7.5    8.1 9.1 8.4 7.7 8.1 7.5 8.1 7.6           8.7    B.0    7.6     8.0 28
  N~sl .......................................................... 7.4 8.2    9.3  8].5 7.7 7.2 7.0    7.4 8.6 8.8 B.0 8.1 9.2 28
  North Northwest .................................................. 9.8 10.4 11.3 10.6 9.3 7.9 7.3 8.2 9.3 10-2 10.0 10.6 10.1 28
                 VISIBIMTY
Mean Number ot Days with Fog ................................ 9 7 g 8 9 12 17 20 12 10 11 11 133 24
Days with Visibility less than 1/2 mile ......................... 2.6    2.0 2.6 1.7 2.4 3.8   4.6 4.2    2`0         2.1 3.3 3.5 35.0                 12





T.-6


                                              COLD BAY. ALASKA (55'12'N.. 162'43~/.) Elevalion 96 ft. (29.3m)


             W1EAlr'HIER ELEMEHTS JAN.  FEB. MAR.    APR. MAY JUNE JULY AUG. SEPT. OCT. NOV.  DEC, YEAR
                                                                                                                                         YEARS OF
                                                                                                                                          RECORD

           SEA LEVEL PRESSURE
Mean (Millibars) ..................................................... 1005.6 1004.0 1009,4 1010.1 1000.3 1012.3 1014.9 1013.0 1007.8 1002.6 1001.4 1003.7 '1007.8 28
         TEMPERATURE (DEGREES F)
Mean ................................................................... 28.2 26.2   29.0 33.1 39.5 45.4  50.1   51.3 47.3 39.6 34.3 29.0 37.9                      29
Meen Daily Maximum .............................................. 32.6 32.8   33.7 37.6 44.2_ 49.8     54.4 55,3 51.6          44.0   38.6 33.4 42.3 29
Mean Daily Minimum ................................................ 23.8 23.6 24.2 28.5 34.8   40.8    45.7 47.3   43.0 35.1   30.0   24.5 33.5 29
Extreme Highest .................................................... 50 50  54   60     55 69 77 78 70                          69 54 54                 78 29
Extreme Lowest ..................................................... -5    -9 - 13 4 18        29       36 33 27 12 I -9 -13 30
             RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Average Percentage ................................................ 85.6 85.4  84.2 85.3 86.2   87.4 90.3 90.7 87.4           84,8 85.4 85.1          86,5 26
               CLOUD COVER
Average Aresent (Tenths) ........................................ 7.9 8.1 8.0   8.5    8,9 9.0 9.3 9.3 8.9                      8,3 8.0 8.0 8.5 22
               PRECIPITATION
Mean Amount (inches] ............................................ 2,42 2.59 1.93 1.54 2.19 1.84 2.22 3.89 3.95                 4,31 3,90   2.45 33.23 29
Greatest Amount (Inches} ......................................... 8,46 7.87   3.89 3.83 6.37   6.98 4.63 9.97 9.79            8.02   8.94 6.49 0 28
Leasl Amoun! (Inches).....- ....................................... 0.60   0.08 0.41 0.02   0.62 0.12 0.28 1.40 0.91 1.88 1.46   0,19 0 28
Maximum in 24 hrs. [Inches) .................................... 2,49 2.49 1.34 1.76   2.22 2.10 1.74   2.17 3.43 4.90 3.43 1,94 4.90 28
Mean Amount of Sncw (Inches) ................................ 10.5 9.6 9,9 5.0 1,1 t 0.0 I t 2.5 6.4 10.4 55.4 22
Mean Number ol Days with Precipitalion ..................... 26  24 27 26 27 26                          27 28 27 28                    26 27 '   320 20
Snow (Mean Numbe~ of Days) ................................. 17 18 19 16 8 ........ 10 15                                                      19 124 20
                    WIND
Percent of OI3servaï¿½ons with Gales ........................... 15.7 15.8 15.6 15.1 14,1 13.7 13,1 14.2 13.8 14.9 14.9 14.8 14.6                                     26
Mean Wind Speed (Knots} ....................................... 4.3 4.5 3.4 2.2 1.8 1.6 1.3 1.5    1,5 2.7 3.7 3.2 2.5 23
Direction (Percentage 01 Ohs.)
  Nofth ................................................................ 6.9 10.4 9.4 7.4 5.1 3.5 3,1    2.6    4.5 5.3 7.9 10,3 6.3 26
  North Northeast .................................................. 5.7 7.1 5.3 4.1 3.0 2.0 1,6 1.? 3.0 3.0 4.8 6.8 3.9 26
 Northeast ........................................................... 1.6 1.7 1.5  1.5 2.0 1.2 1,4 0.8 0.9 1.4 2.5 1.7 1.5 26
 Eesl Northeast ................................................... 1.5    1.0 0.8  1.3 1.9    1.4     0,8 0.9    1,0 0.7 1.1    7.0 1.1 26
 Easl ................................................................. 2.1 1,8 1.2  1.4 2.7 2.9 1,3 1.1 1.1 1.0 1.6    1.7 1.6 26
 ~:sst Southess1 ................................................... 5.2    4,6 3.7 3.5 6.0 6.1 4.4 4.9 3.4 3.0 3.5    3.4 4.3 26
 :~outheast .......................................................... 12.7 12,6 10.6 11.4 15.8 16.5 14.1 15.5 10.7            7.8 9.0 7.7 12.0 26
 L~P, outh Southeast ................................................. 15.5 15,3 13.6 12.4 15.3 18.4 18.1 15.5 15.3 9.1 11.8 11.7 14.3 26
 :~outh ................................................................ 4.7 4,6    3.9 3.5 5.4 2.8    2.8    2.6 3.2 3.2 4.9 4,4 3,8 26
 :7,outh Southwest ................................................. 1,5 1.9 1.4 1.1 1.4 0.4 0.3 0.6    0.9 1.4 1.7 1.6 1.2 26
 .'~hwest .......................................................... 1.9 2.5 2.5 1.4 1.7 0.9 1.2 1.6    2.4 3.7 3.4 2.9 2.2                                        28.
 West Southwest .................................................. 5.2 4.8 5.7 4.2 3.7 3.5 5.5 11.3 9.5 12`(I 8.3 6.8 6.8                                          26
 West ................................................................. 4.3 4.1 5.1 7.2    6.4 7.6 12,9 14.4   10.6 9.7    6.4 5.7 8.0                             26
 West Nodhwest .................................................. 6.0 5.9 7.1 11,0 9.4 13.5 14.0 13.4 11.8 10.5    7.8 7.6                             9.9 26
 Northwest .......................................................... 8.1 7.6 9.9 12`6 8.6 10.5 8.7 5.8 9.4 11,5    8.9 8.4 9.1                                    26
 North Northwest .................................................. 12.3 10.1 14.2  12,2 7.4 6.0       5.1 3.3 8.5 11.9 11.7 13.1 9.6 26
 Calm ................................................................ 5.0 4.2 4.1 3,8 4.4 3.8 4.7 3.9 3.7 4.7 4.8 5.1 4.4 26
Direc~n (Mean Speed, knots)
 North ................................................................ 14.3 15.2 14.7 14,0 11.6 9.7   8.4    9.2 11.3 13.7 14.8 15.8 13.6                         26
 Nodh Noaheast .................................................. 17.7 15.9 16.7  13.3 11.5    8.6     6,6    8.7 12.3 14.8 15.2 18.1 14.7                       . 26
 Nodheast ........................................................... 12`6   'Jl.9 3.3  8.2    9.1 6.8  5.5    5.8    9.0 10.3 15.2 12.4 10.3 26
 East Northeast ................................................... 17.6 13.0 9.6 11.1 11.2 13.0 6.9 8.2 14.7 11.9 13.9 13.7                          12.4 26
 East ................................................................. 18.1 16.2   11.3 13.9 13.5 14.8 10.2 10.1 10.8 12.2 15.5 17.3 14.1 26
 East Southeast .................................................... 20.4   18.9   21.1 18.4 17.6 18,2 19.2   17.3 16.2 16.5 16.6 18.7 18.3 26
 Southeast ........................................................... 20.4 20.6 19.6 18.7 18.1 18.0  16.7 18.5 15.9 17.5 18.0   17.6 18.3 26
 :-',outh Southeast ................................................. 19.3   20.2 19.5 19.4 18.5 18.0 17.7   18.8 17.5 18.5 18.5 19.3 18.7 26
 South ................................................................ 14,3 16,1 15.3 17.1 14.6 13.1 12,7   14.5   13.5 13.5 t3.6 13.7 14.4 26
 Soulh SouUw~esl .................................................. 10.7 15.1   14.2 12.9   12.1 6~7 8.2   10.3 7.0             9.7 10.6   10.6 11.3 26
 Soufilwest .......................................................... 11.9 15.9 15.7 11.0 12.1 11.8 13.7 11.0 10.8 11.7 11.1 12.7 12.5                            26
 West Southwest .................................................. 16,0 15.6 18.7 16.3 13.4 14.3 15. t 16.2   14.3 16.2 15.6   15.6 15.7 26
 West ................................................................. 12.3 13.3 14.6 14.5 13.2 12.7 13.3 13.5 13.4 14.9 14.4 12.6 13.6                           26
 West Northwesl ................................................... 11,8   11.6 13.8 14.2 12.4 11.5 11.2 12.3 13.1 14.6   13.3 11.4 12.6 26
 Northwest .......................................................... 14.4 13.6   15.8  14.7 12.3 10.7 10.3 10.7 14.2         15.9 14.7 14.2 13.6                  26
 Nollh Northwest .................................................. 16,3 14.7  15.2 15.1 13.5 10.8 9.7 9.7 13.9 17.6 17.5 15.6 15.0 26
                 VISIBILITY
Mean Number of Days with Fog ............................... 13 13 13            14 14 18 24 25 18                               13 13 13 192 20






                                                                                                                                         T-7


                                              ADAK, ALASKA (51'53'N., 176ï¿½39'W.} Elevation 17 if. (5.2m)


            WEATHER ELEMENTS JAN. FEB, MAR. APR.  MAY JUNE    JUlY AUG. SEPT. OCT. NOV. 0EC. YEAR YF. AIMS OF
                                                                                                                                     RECORD

           SEA LEVEL PRESSURE
Mean (Millibarn) ..................................................... 1002.2 999,9 1006,0 1010.4 1009.0 1010.6 1014,1 1011.9 1008.9 1007.7 $003.8 1002.6 1007,3 22
        TEMPERATURE (DEGREES F)
Mean ................................................................... 34.0 33.2 35.1 37,8 41.2 45,0 49.4 51.7 48.3 42.7 37.4  34A      40.9 22
Mean Daily Maximum ............................................... 37.6   37.1 39.1 41.8 45,2 48.8 53.8 56.1 52.3 46.6   41.2 38.0        44.8 22
Mean Didly Minkhum ............................................... 29.9   28.0 30.0 33.3 30.7 40.6  44.6 46.5   43.9 36.4 33.1 30.3 36.4 22
Extreme Highest .................................................... 50 50 51 56    65    65 72 75 66                 61 57 55 75 22
Extreme Lowest ..................................................... 3 3 13 21 25 29 33    33    28 26 12 13 3                                        22
            RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Avegage Percentage ..........: ...................................... 83.1 82.1 92.5  81.7 82.7 86.5  89,7   88.8 ' 85.9 62.3 82.6   84.1 84.3 22
               CLOUD COVER
Average Arnount ('Tenths] ......................................... 8.3 8.4 8,5  8,7 9.1 9.4 9,4 9.2 8.8             8.3 8.0    8.2 8.7 22
               PRECIPITATION
Mean Ameunl (inches) ............................................. 6.43 5.05 6.22 4.74 4.44 3.40 3,05 3.54 5.74 6.99 8.23 7.70    65.83 22
Greatest Amc~et (inches) ......................................... 14.45 9,57 13,31 10,t7 16.10 6.37 6.10 9,65 11.30 13.25 13.72 13.58       0        22
Least Amount (Inches) ............................................ 3.13 1.97 2.33 1.70 0.64 1.36 0.80 0.98 2.52 3.02 2.94 2.58               0        22
Maximum k~ 24 hrs. (Inches) .......................... ........... 3.59   2.25 3.22 4.76   4.85 2.52 1.92 2.46 3.52 3.36 2.94 4.66        4.85        22
Mean Amount o1 Snow (Inches) ................................. 17.0 19.5 18.9 10.0    2.1 t 0.0 t 0.1 1.9 12.t 19.2 100.7 22
Mean Number of Days with Prec'q3ita~en ..................... 26 26    29 28 28 26               27 28    27 30    2g    29 335                        22
Snow (Mean Number ol Days) ................................. 21 25 23 20 8              "        0 .... 8 18 22 145 22
                   WIND
P~cent of Observadons with Gales ............................ 1.5 2.3    3.0 1.8 t.4 0,3 0.2 0.6    1.1 2.3 2.1 2.9 1.7 23
Mean Wind Speed (Knots} ....................................... 12.5 12.7 13.4  13.3 12.1  10.3 10.2 10.8   11.7 13.5 13.2 13.0 12.2 22
Direc0on (Percentage of Ohs.)
  North ................................................................. 5.9 7.t 7,4 7,1 11.9 10.5 6.3 6.1 9.7 7.2    6.7 5.5 7.6 22
  North Northeast .................................................. 9.5 9.9 6.5 5.8 6.9 7.3 5.0 3.6    6.0 4.6    4.6    6.7 6.4 22
 Nc~lheast ........................................................... 5.6 4.4 3.7 2.9 3.1   5.4 4.7 3.4   4.6 2.7 2.8 4.6 4.0 22
  :last Northeast ................................................... 6.8 5.9 5.8 3.3 3.7 6.4 5.2    3.1 3.5 2.5    2.6    5.4             4.5 22
  ;.:aM ................................................................. 7.7 7.6 5.8 3.8    3.7 6.6 6.1 3.4 3.3 3.1 3.t 4.7 4.9 22
  :~ast Sourheas1 ................................................... 3.9    4.0 3.6 2.7 2.0 3.1 2.6 2.1 2.1 1.6 1.5 2.6 2.7 22
  :~Jtheest .......................................................... 3.2 3.1 3.6 2.4 2.7 2.8 3.0 2.4 2.1 1.6    1.6 2.7 2.6 22
  :~auth Southe,~A .............................: .................... 6.4 4.6 5.1 4,4   5,8 5,8 5.2 4.5 4.0 2.0 3.4 5.3 4.8 22
  :~.outh ................................................................ 7.4 6.0 6.8  7.4 6.4   6,6 6.9    6.8    5.4  5.0    6.3 5.9 6.4           22
  ~-outh Southwest ................................................. 4.9 6.0   6.7  6.3 4.8 3,4 3.7 4.6   4.2 4.9 6.2 5.6 5.1 22
  ?~outhwest .......................................................... 6.3 7.2   6.8 8.8 7.5 5,8  5.9 7.0   7.0 9,5 10.9 7.3 7.5 22
  West Southwest ..............................: ................... 7.3 7.3 8.9 14.2 11.5 11,5 15.1 16.2 13.0 14.3 14.6 10.1 12.0                    22
  West .............................................................. 6.0    5.3 7.9 11.4 10.0 10,6  20.1 23,1 15.1 14.9 11.6   9.4 12.2              22
 West Northwest .................................................. 3.5 3.0 4.8  5.4 4.8 2,9 2.3 3,1 4.7 7.2 5.4 5.0 4.3 22
  Northwest .......................................................... 2.0    2.0   3.4 3.5    3.4 1,9 {).6 1,3 3.5 5.3    4.7 3.3 3.0 22
  North Northwest .................................................. 2.9    4.1 4.7 4.9 5.0 3.2 1.1 1,7 5.6 6.t 5.6 4.1 4.1                           22
  Calm ................................................................ 10.7 10.5   8.2 5.7 6.8    6.4  6.3 7,2 6.3 6.7    8.6 11.6 7.9 22
Okectian {Mean Speed. knots)
  ;~orth ................................................................ 13.2 11.9   13.0 12.6   12.2 10.9  9.9 11,1 12.0 13.5 12.2 12.8 12.1 22
  ~4ofth Northeast .................................................. 13.7 13.0 13.7 13.0 12.2 9.7 7.9 9.9 10.7 13.1 12.8 13.9 12.1 22
  Hortheast ........................................................... 13.9 13.7 13.5 12.2 10.6    9.2 7.4 7.0 10.6  13.5 13.1 15.9 11.7 22
  ~-~ast Northeast ................................................... 14.4 13.6 15.2 12.1 9.7 8.9 6.6 7.5 9.4 12.4 12.2 15.0 11.7 22
  ~st ................................................, ................. 14.1 14,6  11.8 10.3    8.5    8.4  6.5 6.7    8.5  13.4 12.4 13.1 10.9 22
  ~est Southeast .................................................... 14.3 14.8 13.7 11.9 8.1 9.4 6.6    6.5 11.5 15.3 12.5 12.8 11.8 22
  Southeast .........................................: ................. 12.9 14.5 14.2 122 9.7 9.0 7.9    8.9 11.1 12.6 12.1 13.0 11.6                22
  South Southeast ................................................. 14,4   14.9 14.8 12.0 11.2 10.6 9.5 9.9 11.9 13.2 14.3 15.4 12.8                  22
  -~-outh ................................................................ 13.8 13.5 13.3 12.8 12.0 11.3 10.7 10.9 11.2 12.8 14.8 12.7 12.5 22
  -South Southwest ................................................. 14.1 15.4  15.5 15.5 14.2 12.0 11.9 12.2 13.7 14,7 15.1 15.4          14.4       22
  Southwest .......................................................... 15.2 16.9 17.5  16.1 16.1 12.7 13.2 13.6  14.9    16,0 16.2 15.5 15.5          22
  West Southwesl .................................................. 14.9 16.7 17.3 16.6 16.3 13.3 13.9 13.7 13.9 15,0 16,8 17,1 15.4 22
  West ................................................................. 13.2 13.6  13.9 14.6 14.1 12.3 13.3 13.1  12,6  14,3 14.3 14.5 13.6           22
  West Northwest .................................................. 15.5 13.9 16.0 15.2 15.0   12,3 12.9 13.3 14.9 15.6 15.0 16.4          15.0 22
  Northwest ........................................................... 12.5   11.4 13.5 13.4 12.3  ,11.2 10.2 12.6 13.4 13.6 11.9 12.4 12.6          22
  North Northwest .................................................. 13.5   12.5 14.4 13.4 12.4 11.5   . 11.0 12.6 14.2 14.5 14.0 14.9 13.6           22
                 VISIBILITY
Mean, Num13er ot Days with Fog ............................... 8  6 9 9 13 18                   25    24 16 11                8     8 154 22
Days with V'~bility less thsn 1/2 mile ........................ 3.3 2.0 2.9 0.8    0.3 1.7 3.3    2.9 0.4 0.2 1.0 3.5                      22.3 12





 T-8


                                               SHEMYA, ALASKA (52'43'N., 174'0~Af.) Elevation 122 fl. (37.2m)


              WEATHER ELEMENTS JAN. FEB. MAR. APR. MAY JULIE JULY  AUG. SEFT. OCT. NOV. DEC. YEARS OF
                                                                                                                                 YEAR
                                                                                                                                         RECORD
            SEA LEVEL PRESSURE
 Mean (Millb~'s): ..............: ..................................... 999.1 998.9 1004.8 1010.6 1010.0 1011.3 1011.2 1011.0 1011.1 1607.9 1002.8 1000.2
                                                                                                                                  1006.6
                                                                                                                                              25
         TEIMaERATURE (DEGREES F)
Mean ................................................................... 31.6   30.8 32.0  34.6   37.7
                                                                                  41.6 4.0 49.1 46.9 41.1   35.5 32.5 38.3
Mear~ Daily Maximum ............................................... ,29
                                                 34.4   33.4 34.6 37.8 40.9   44.7 48.7 51.6 50.3 45.0 38.8
                                                                                                                           35.6 41.3 25
Mean Daily Minimum ................................................ 28.9 27.9   29.2
                                                                     32.2 35.4 39.4 43.6   46.5 44.6 38.4 32.5 29.7 35.7 25
Exb'eme Highest .................................................... 44 41 42 44
                                                                            48 57 63 60    58                    54 48 46              63         25
Ex~eme Lowest ..................................................... 13 7 11 21
                                                                            25 27 37 38 33 28 15 15 7 26
             RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Average Percentage ................................................ 83.1 82.1 82.5  84.6 87.7
                                                                                 91.8 95.2 93.6   88.2 83.2   83.1 81.9 86.4 26
                CLOUD COVER
Average Amount (Tenths) ......................................... 8.3 6.4 6.4 6.4 9.2
                                                                                  9.6 9.6 9.3 8.2               8.0    8.0    8.1 8.7
               PRECIPITATION
Mean Amount (Inches) ............................................. 2.13 1.91 2.11 1.57 2.12 1.49 2.51
                                                                                                2.97 2.73 3.31 2.94 2.38 28.17                   29
Greatest Amount (inches) ......................................... 4.63   5.03 4.86 4.46 5.44 3.60 8.71 7.24 5.06
                                                                                                              8.59 7.96 6.00 0: 26
Least Amount (Inches) ............................................ 1.26   0.72   0.42 0.34   0.14 0.28 0.60
                                                                                                0.39   0.57 0.46   0.95 0.78 0                   26
Maximum in 24 hr$. (Inches) ..................................... 1.32   2.12   1.44 1.55   1.39 1.56
                                                                                          1.81 2.24 1.99       5.20   1.74 1.15       5.20        26
Mean Arnoant of Snow (Inches) ................................. 11.8   14.1 11.5 4.0    1.1 I
                                                                                          0.0    0.O t 0.8 8.4 12.4 64.1 26
Mean Number of Days with Precipital~on ..................... 29    26
                                                              28 25 26 25 26    26    23 29    26 29 318 22
Snow (Mean Number of Days) .................................. 25 25 25 20
                                                                             9 1 0                 O 1 8    21 24 159                            22
                    WIND
Procent of OI3serva~ons with Gales ........................... 5.9 5.9 5.3 2.5 1.1
                                                                                  0.3     0.1 0.5 1.1 4.5 6.5    5.5 3.3 24
Mean Wind Speed {Knots) ....................................... 18.0 18.2 18.0 16.3
                                                                           14.9 12.2 11.6 12.1   14.0 17.5   16.9 18.0 15.8 23
Direction (Percentage of Obs.)
  North ................................................................ 4.7 7.3 6.0 4.8
                                                                            6.9 6.4        3.0- 4.2 6.3 4.9 5.6 5.3 5.4 23
  North Northeast .................................................. 6.6 9.4 7.2 5.2 6.2
                                                                                  5.3     3.0    3.2 4.7 3.0    4.4 5.9 5.3 23
  Northeast ............................................................ 6.7 7.5 4.8 4.0
                                                                            3.8 4.3 2.6 2.8 3.6 2.2 3.1 4.7 4.1 23
  East Northeast .................................................... 8.4 9.9 6.9 5.0 4.1
                                                                                  4.9 3.4 2.4 3.8 3.2 4.5 7.6 5.3 23
  East ................................................................. 6.1 7.5 6.2 4.2 3.0 4.3
                                                                                          4.0    2.6 4.0        2.3 3.0 7.0           4.5 23
  East Southeast ................................................... 7.5 7.8 7.1  5.2 5.3 4.7 4.7
                                                                                                 3.2 4.8 2.7 4.4    7.8 5.4 23
  Southeast .......................................................... 7.7 4.6    6.1  5.2
                                                                            5.8 6.4        6.4 4.4 6.5           3.6 4.4 5.5 5.5 23
  South Southeast .................................................. 6.5 4.1    5.2 5.6 4.7
                                                                                  5.5 8.7    5.0    3.9 3.8    5.2 4.9 5.1 . 23
  South ................................................................ 4.7 4.3 5.0 6.8'
                                                                            8.4 6.2 9.4    8.3    6.7 5.3 5.3 4.8 6.1                             23
  South Southwest .................................................. 4.6 4.4 6.6
                                                                      7.1 6.4 5.7           8.2 8.7 5.5 6.7 5.g 4.5                     6.2 23
  Southwas1 .......................................................... 4.6 3.6 5.1
                                                                      6.3 5.0 5.2 9.6 9.6    6.2 6.2 6.0 4.2 6.0 23
  West Souh'wvesl .................................................. 7.3 5.4 7.4 9.5    9.8 8.7
                                                                                         12.4 12.3 9.4 13.4 10.2 9.1 9.6 23
  Wast ................................................................. 5.7 4.3    5.5 6.8 5.8
                                                                                  6.8 10.1 10.0 7.5 11.3 8.9 7.6 7.6                             23
  West Northwest .................................................. 7.1 5.7 6.7 7.0    6.9    5.2
                                                                                          5.3 7.5 7.6 10.9 11.9 8.0 7.6                          23
  ;~41hwast .......................................................... 4.5 5.6 5.7
                                                                     6.8 9.4 9.4           5.4 8.2    9.5 10.2 8.6 5.3                 7.6 23
  N(xth Northwest .................................................. 5.3 6.4 6.6 6.9    8.7
                                                                                  8.4 3.8 5.7   8.5 9.1 7.6 4.7 6.8 23
  Cairn ................................................................ 2.1 2.3 2.1 1.6
                                                                            1.7 2.7 2.1 1.8 2.3 1.2    1.2 3.1 2.0                                23
Directi(~ (Mean Speed, keats)
  North ................................................................ 15.8   17.7 17.8 13.6
                                                                           13.4 12.2 10.6 11.8 13.4 15.3 16.7 16.7 14.8                           23
  North Northeast .................................................. 18.4 19.1 19.6  15.8- 14.3
                                                                                 11.8    11.2 11.6   14.1 13.9 17.9   16.9 16.0 23
  |'4oftheeat ........................................................... 16.7 16.2 16.7  16.0   13.8 11.8 12.4
                                                                                                10.8 14.3      14.0   16.5 18.0 15.6 23
  East Northeast ................................................... 18.4 20.0   10.1 17.2
                                                                           t3.3 12.6 12.8 11.9   14.7 15.9 17.6 17.7                  16.8 23
  East ................................................................. 17.0 19.9   19.1 18.3 12.5 12.4 11.9
                                                                                                11.9 13.3 16.8 16.1 18.3             16.1 23
  East Southeast ................................................... 18.5 20.8 20.7 17.5   15.0
                                                                                 12.2 .12.9 11.7 14.7 16.7 20.3 18.7 .17.2                       23
  -~utheast ..........................' ................................ 21.7 18.6 20.6 17.3 15.5   13.0 12.0
                                                                                                11.0 14.2 19.9 21.4 20.1 17.1 23
  ï¿½ '~outh Southeast ................................................. 22.2 18.8 21.4 19.7   17.0 14.2 12.2.
                                                                                                12.6 14.9 20.7 23.0 21.8             18.1 23
  SOUth ................................................................. 20.4 18.5 18.2 18.4   16.5 12.2 12.1 13.2 15.2
                                                                                                              21.2 22.2 21.0        16.8        23
  South Southwast ................................................. 19.6 20.(I 18.4 18.4 16.5
                                                                                 !1.8 11.9 12.9 14.1 18.7 21.0 21.7 16.7 23
  Southwest .......................................................... 17.9 17.5 17.4  17.8   16.0 11.5
                                                                                         11.4   12.9 15.1 18.2   21.0 20.0 15.9 23
 West Southwest .................................................. 20.8 19.0 18.5 18.0   16.9 14.1
                                                                                         12.6 12.5 15.8 19.3 21.4 21.8 17.3 23
 West ................................................................. 17.7 16.8 16.6 16.2 15.1 11.9
                                                                                         10.9 11.1 13.4 17.2 18.2 18.4 15.1 23
 Wast No~st .................................................. 15.1 15.5 15.3  14.5 14.9   12.2 11.8
                                                                                               12.7 13.2      17.2 17.5 16.1 15.0               23
 Northwest .......................................................... 16.6 17.0 15.0 14.4 14.7
                                                                                 12.8 11.9 12.7 13.7           17.0 17.5 15.7 14.9 23
 North Northweal .................................................. 16.5 17.8 16.9 14.7
                                                                           14.3 12.7 11.5 12.5 14.4 17.3 17.7 15.1 15.3 23
                 VISIBILITY
Meatt Number of Days with Fog ............................... 12
                                                        9 13 16 19 23 30 27    17 14 12 10                                             203 22






                                                                                                                                   T-9


                                        ST PAUL ISLAND, ALASKA (57'09'N.; 170'13'W.) Elevatiofl 22 ft. (6.7m)


 .           WEA'Iï¿½1ER ELEMENTS JAN. FEB. MAR. APR. MAY J~IJNE    JULY AUG. SEPT.   OCT. NOV. DEC, YEAR
                                                                                                                               YEARS OF
- RECORD

           SEA LEVEL PRESSURE
Mean (1~) .......:.: ........................................... 1004.6 1001.4 11~]8.9 1008.9 1010.6 1012.2 1013.4 1009.8 1006.4 1003.7 11~2.7 1003.6 1007.2 19
        TEMPERATURE (DIEGREES F}
Mean .......... .................: ....................................... 26.1 23.0  23.8 26.5 34.9 40.9 45.7 47.5  44.4 37.8 33.2 27.6 34.5         29
Mean Daily Maximum ............................................... 30.1 27.4 28.6 32,5 38.8 45.0 49.4   50.8  48.2 41.7 36.9 31.7 38.4 29
Mean Daily Minimum .................' ............................... 22.0' 18.6 19.0  24.4 31.0 36.7 42.0 44.1 40.6 33.0 29.5 23.8        30.5 29
Extreme Highest .................................................... 48 44 44 44 56    62       63 64 59 54 50 52 64 56
Extreme Lowest .......................................... ............ -26 -15   -19 -2 8 24 28 30 25 t3 9 -5 -26                                     56
            RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Average Percentage .......: ......................: .................. 85.6 86.3 85.1  88.1 90,2 91.7 94.8   93.6 89.0  82.8   84.4 82.7  87.9 25
              CLOUO COVER
Average Amount ['Tenths)., ........................................ 8:0    8.0 8.0  5.6 9,0 9.1 9.5 9.5 8.6          8.3 5.2   6.1 8.6 23
              PREClPIrrATIOR
Mean Armxmt (inches) ............................................. 1.84 1.37 1.26 1.09 1.28 1.25  2.23 3.44 3.02 3.15 2.58   2.03 24.54 29
Greatest Amount (Inches) ......................................... 4.99 5.69   3.28  3.10 3.11 3.59 5.85   9.32   6.02 5.18 5.31 4.18 0 51
Least Amount (Inches] ............................................ 0.25 0.33 0.08 0.16   0.21 0.16 0.32 1.32 1.05 1.03 0.67 0.00             0 51
Maximum in 24 hrs. (inches) ..................................... 1.38 1.51 1.26 1.00 1.27 - 1.48 1.92 1.91 1.58 1,93 1.76 1.15 1.93 51
Mean Amount of Snow (Inches) ................................. 12.8 10.3 9.4 5.8 2.3 0:1 0.0 0.0    0.1 2.7 5,9 9.7 59.1 50
Mean Number 01 Days with Precipitation ........: ............ 25 24 26 24    26 23 27 27 26 29 28 27 310 21
Snow (IvleanNumber of Days) .................................. 21 22 24 21 13 2 0 0 I 14 20 23 267 21
                  WIRD
Percent of O~servafions v~th Gales ..................' .......... 3.9    4.7 3.2 1.5    6.3 0 0.2' 0.9 3.1 2.8    3.5 2.1 24
Mean Wind Speed (Knots) ........................................ 17.0  - 17.5 16.3 15.1 13.4   11,4 10.7 t2.4 13.5 16,5 16.6 17,4 14.9 25
Oirec~on (Percerdage.of CYos.)
  North ................................................................ 9,9 12.2 9.4 8.6    8.5 7.1 5.1 4.4 7.7 9,5    9.4 10,4 8.6 25
  Norlh Northeast .................................................. 10.1 14.8 9.5 7.5 7.5 6.5  3.6 3.1   5.6 8.0 10.2 12,6 8.2 25
  Norlheast ........................................................... 7.1 8,6 7.4 8.1 5.8    7.4 3.4 2.6 4.8 3.5 5.7 8.3 6.1 25
  East Northeast ................................................... 9.0 8.2 9.7 6.3    8.2 7.7 4.2 2.7 3.0 3.3 6.6 7.7 6.3 25
  East ................................................................. 10.5    7.0    6.1 5.1    6.1 5.9 6.2 3.5   4.1 3.9    6.3 6.8     8.1 25
  East Southeast ..............................: .................... 7.5 6.5 6.3 6.6 6.0 7.5 5.4 3.4 3.7 3.5 5.3 6.2 5.7 25
  Southeast ................. ........................................... 6.5 5.6 4.5 4.3 5.2 6.1 6,2    4.9 4.2 3.1 3.7 5.0 4.9 25
  ,%outh Southeesl ............................: .............: ...... 5.0 4.6 4.5 4.6 5.2 4.5 5.4    5.5   5.2 3.4 4.5   4.5 4.7 25
  ï¿½ ~<3uth ................................................................ 6.1 5.3 5.4 6.7 7.4 9.t 9.4 10.1 7.2 5.8    5.5 5.1 6.8 25
  '.~outh Southwest .........................................: ....... 4.1 4.5 4,7 4.5    6.5 4.3  8.9  10.5    6.5 4.7 4.5   4.0 5.6 25
  Southwest ...................................... .................... 3.2    3.5 3.3 4.5   4.4 3.8  6.8   10.5    5.2 5.3    5.3 3.6      4.9 25
  West SouO~west ...........................: ...................... 2.7 3.6   3.3 5.0    5.1 5.6 8.1 9.4 5,1 5.6    5.2 2.5                5.0 25
  West ................................................................. 3.1    3.4 3.7 4.0 4.3    5.7 8.8 9.1 7,5 9.2 6.3 3.5 5.7                    25
  uL/
  ..est Northwest ................................................... 3.0 2.6 3.7 5.3 4.0 4.5 4.7 5.5 6.9 8.4 5.1 3.7 4.8 25
  Northwest .......................................................... 4.1 2.7 6.5 8.8   6.8 7.1 6.8    8.0 12.1 13.7 8.6 7.2 7.7 25
  Norlh Northwest ........' ...................................' ....... 5.5 5.1 8.1 8.7 8.6 7.5 5.2 5.2 9.4 9.4 6.3 6.8 7.2 25
  Calm ................................................................ 2.5    1.6 1.B 1.4    1.4 1.0 1.7 1.6 1.8 1.5    1.4 1.7            1.6 25
Direction (Mean Speed, knots)
  North ................................................................ 18.5 19.2 16.9 16.6 14.4 12.1 10.7 12.0 13.5 15.9   16.8 17.0 16.0 21
  Norlh Northeast .................................................. 17.4 18.3 14.5 14.0 15.5 13.1 11.7 11.9 13.4 16.6 15.6   17.5         15.8       25
  Norlheast ............................................................ 19.1'.  19.8 ' 18.2 14.4 15.4 12.6 11.8 14.0 14.4  16.5 16.6 20,2 16.7 25
  :~est Norlheast ................................................... 18.9 19.9 19.5 15.4 14.6 11.3 10.8 13.4 13.7 18.7 17.g 19.5 16.9 25
  C-ast ................................................................. 16.3 19.4 18.8  16.9 12.7 11.5 10.1 12.5 13.9 19.6   18.4 19.9 16,4          25
  ~ast Southeast .................................................... 17.1 17.7. 16.4 15.0 12.6   10.3 9.7 11.9 13.6 18.1 19.4 19.1 15.3 25
  :~outhesst .......................................................... 16.8   16.0 14.6 14.4 12.7 11.5 10.4 12.0 13.1 18.g 17.9 19.2 14.6            25
  South Southeast .......................................: .......... 16.0: 16.9 14.5 14.7   12.7 10.1 10.4 11.6 15,6  17.7 17.7 17.8 14.6 25
  .'_~3ulfi ....................: ........................................... 16.5   18.3   15.5 16.1 12.4 10.3 10.4 12.5 14.5 18.1 18.3 16.9 14.5 25
  South Southwes1 .................................................. 17.2 18.8 15.7 15.4 13.1 11.3 10.9 13.5 15.0 15,7 17.7 17.9 14.8 25
  Southwest .......................................................... 16.3 16.9 16.1 15.1 13.9 11.5 10.9 13.9 14.6  15.0 16.5 16.4 14.6              25
  West Southwest .................................................. 15.8 16.5 18.6 14.0 11.8 10.5 11.4 12.4 13.0 16.7 16.7 15.9 13.9 25
  West ...........................................................: ..... ' 14.7 15.6   14.5 14,0 11.2 11.2 11.5 11.2 11.5 15.0 14.2 15.5 13.0 25
  West Noflhwest ................................................... 14.7, 16.1 14.8 13.9 13.1 10.7 11.3 11.9 11.5 14.7 15.1 13.9 13.4 25
  Northwest ........................................................... 16.4 14.8   16.2 16.1 13.9 12.8 12.2 12.9 13.7 16.7 16,3 15.3 14.9 25
  Noah Northwest ............................................: ..... 17.7 17.4   16,7 17.1 14.5  12.7 11.2 13.0 14,4 17.5 t7.0 16.9 15.7 25
                 VISIBILITY
Mean Number: of Days with Fog ..............................:. 12 10' 12 15 20 24 28    26 15 9 10 9 190







T-10


                                             8ETHEL ALASKA (60'47'N., 161'48'W.) Elevation 125 ;1. (38.1m)


             WEATHER ELEMENTS JAN. FEB. MAR. APR. MAY ,RI#E JULY AUG. SEPT. OCT. NOV. DEC. YEAR YEARS OF
                                                                                                                                      RECORD

           SEA LEVEL PRESSURE
Mean (Millibars) ..................................................... 1010,1 1009.0 1010.2 1010.6 1009,,6 101'2.0 1013,1 1010.4 1007.0 1002.0 1003,5 100(}.0 1008.6  20
         TEMPERATURE (DEGREES F)
Mean ............................................................. 5.1 6,2   11,4 24.5 40.1 51.6    54.7  52.3 45,0 30,2   17.2 4.4 28.7 29
Mean Daily Maximum ............................................... 12.3 15.8 20.3 32.7 48.5 60.2  61.9 58.5 51.8 36.1 23.6 11.3 36.1 29
Mean Daily Minimum ............................................... -2.2 0.5 2.5  16.3   31.7 43.0 47.4 46.0 38.2 24.3 10.8  -2.5 21.3 ' 29
Extreme Highest ..................................................... 48 47 48 58 76 86 86 81 70 57 48 42                                   86         20
Exb'eme Lowest .................................................... ~52 -45 -42 -31    -5 28 31 33 16 -5 -27 -44 -52 20
            RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Average Percentage ................................................ 77.6 76.6 78.3 81.8 78.6 76.7 81.7   87.2 86.2 86.3   &.3.1 76.7 80.9 20
               CLOUD COVER
Average Amount (Tenlbs) ........................................ 6.0    5.9 6.0 6.6 7.8 8.0     8.4 6.9 7.9 7.2 6.8 6.2 7.1 20
               PRECIPITATION
Mean Amount (rnches) ............................................ 0.54 0.74   0.79  0.43 0.83 !.24 1.98   3.97  2.42 1.32 0.96 0.62 15.84              29
Gfeatesl Amount (Inches) ........................................ 6.48 3.6t 3.09 1.30 2.25   3.32 5.69 12.37 5.21 3.24 1.88   6.17 0 20
Least Amount (inches} ............................................ 0~08   0.09   0.02  0.13   0.02   0.30 0.49 1.71 1.23 0.29   0.10 0.05 0 20
Maximum in 24 hrs. (Inches) ..................................... 1.76 0.95   1.21 0.37 0.73 0.95  3.10 2.30   1.50  1.88   0.88 0.81 3.10 20
Mean Amount of Snow (Inches) ................................. 9.5 6.6 10.9 5.3 1.5 0.1 0.0    0.0 0.4 4.6 7.2 9.6 58.6 20
Mean Number ol Days with Precipitafioa ..................... 20    16    20 19 20    20         22 26 23 21 21 22 251 20
Snow {Mean Number o1 Days) .................................. 19 17 19 17 7 1 0 0                              2 15    19 21 137 20
                   WIND
Percenl of Observations with Gales ............................ 0.4 0.4   0.3 * 0                            0,1 0,2 0,1' 0,1 20
Mean Wind Speed (Knots) ........................................ 10.6 11.4 10.7 10.0    9.1   8.9  ~ 8.7 0.1 9.2      9.6 9.0 10.3 9.8                 20
Direclio41 (Percentage of Ohs.)
  Norlh ................................................................ 12.4 14.7 12.3 10.4 9.4 5.0  4.7 3.9 7.6 9.4 10.4   11.g 9.3                  20
  N(~th Northeast ................................................... lg.1 19.0 12.3  8.2 5.2 2.6 3.1 3.3 7.7 11.9 17.8 19.9               10.8        20
  Northeast ........................................................... 17.2 17.0    9.8 5.6 5.0    3.3 2.6 4.3 7.8 11.4 12.6 14.3          9.2 20
  Easl Northeast .................................................... 6.9 4.4 4.2 3.3 4.8 2.5 2.3 3.9 4.9 6.1 7.0 4.6 4.6                           ' 20
  East ................................................................. 4.3 3.6    4.2 4.4 6.3    4.6 3.1 4.4 5.3 4.0 5.4 3.2              4.4 20
  East Southeast .................................................... 3.8 3.4 3.4 4.8    7.1 4.1 2.7 3.7 4.6          4.1    4.1 2.3 4.0 20
  So~tbeast .......................................................... 4.2 3.0    3.8 3.5 5.7 4.7 3.8 4.4 4.9 4.1 4.7 2.7                  .4.!        20
  South Sourheas1 ................................................. 4.2 4.1 4.4 4.0 5.3 ' 5.0 5.0    6.6    6.5 5.2 4.8 4.0                 4.9        20
  .~x.,t h ................................................................ 4.6 5.6 7.2  8.4 9.4 9.0 11.9 11.3    8.5 7.0 7.7 6.4           6.2 20
 South Soufi';west .................................................. 2.4 3.6 4.2 4.3 6.7    8.5  ' 14.6   14.4 6.7 3.5 2.8 3.2 6.3 20
  ..qouthwast .......................................................... 1.8 2.5 3.7 4.7 4.0    8.4 t0.8 10.0    4.8 2.8    2.5 2.4 5.0 20
 West Southwast .................................................. 1.1 1.2    2.7 3.2    2.9 5.6  5.5 5.5 3.6 2.8    1.6 1.4 3.1                      20
  West ................................................................. 1.1 1.4 3.2 3.7 3.6    5.5 5.0    5.2    3.2 3.0 2.0 1.5 3.2                  20
  West Nor6twest .................................................. 1.8 2.7 4.0  5.1 4.6 7.3 6.5.  5.1 4.5            4.8 2.2 2.7 4.3                  20
  Norlhwesl .............................................~ ............ 4.3 5.7 10.1 12.1 9.7 12.8  9.0 5.9 8.3 8.0 5.1 6.1 8.1                        20
  North Northwast .................................................. 5.5 5.9 7.6 11.2 7.4    8.0 6.9 4.7    6.1 8.6 5.3 8.6 7.3                        20
  Calm ................................................................ 5.4    2.1 3.0 3.1    2.2    2.2  2.5 3.2 3.1 3.4    4.1 4.7        3.3 20
Direction (Mean Speed, knots)
  North ................................................................ 9.7 10.6    9.8 9.3 8.4 7.9 7.4 7.5 8.6 8.9    9.0 9.3 9.2 20
  North Norlbeast .................................................. 13.3 13.6 13.5 11.7    9.0    8.0  6.0 8.4 9.6 11.9 12.7 13.8 12.4 20
  Northeast .........................~ ................................. 12.0 11.9 10.8  10.4    7.4 7.1  5.8 7.4 8.9  10.7 11.5 11.4      10.6 20
  East Norlheast ................................................... 6.5    9.6 0.7  9.4    8.9 7.1 6.8 7.8 8.7 9.1 10.2 8.6 9.0 20
  East ................................................................. 8.6 8.7 6.9 6.2 8.6 7.5  6.4 6.7 7.0         7.1 8.3 8.7 7.9                  20
  East Southeast ................................................... 10.0 10.8    9.6 9.0 8.8 8.0 6.7 7.2 7.7         8.3    9.1 9.3        8.7        20
  Sourheas1 .......................................................... 10.4 10.4 10.9 8,7 8,5 7,5 7.1 7.5 8.0 7.8 8,7 9.5 8.7 20
  South Southeasl ................................................. 14.0 14.9 14.6 12.2 11.0 10.5 10.0   11.7 10,9 11.5   11.4 11.6 11.9 20
  South ................................................................ 12.6 13.7 12.9 12.3 11.3 10.3 10.8 12.0 11.9 10.9 10.4 10.9 11.6 20
  South Southwest ................................................. 12.1 13.6 12.2 11.3 11.1 10.4 11.1 12.1 11.7 11.0. 10.5 10.7 11.4 20
  Southwest .......................................................... 8.9 12.1 9.1  10.3 9.2 9.1 9.0 9.4 9.5 10.9 8.2    6.8 9.4 20
  West SouUw~est .................................................. 11.4 9.6 g.2 10.0 8.4 8.9   8.5    9.1 9.2 9.6    8.4 10.0              9.1 20
  Wast ................................................................. 8.3 9.3 9.6 9.1    8.3 8.5  7.7 8.3 8.3      8~6    6.4    8.7 8.5 20
  West Northwest .................................................. 10.3 10.5 11.0 10.6 9.6 9.3 8.5 8.6 9.8           g.8 9.2 9.6 9.6 20
  Northwest .......................................................... 10.3 9.2 10.5 10.5 9.1 10.1 8.8    8.1   9.6 9.4 9.1 8.8             0.6 20
  North Northwas1 .................................................. 9.6 10.1 9.5 10.1 8.9 9.4 8.6 8.2 g.4 9.5 9.4 10.5                     9.5 20
                 VISIBILITY
Mean Number of Days with Fog ................................ 11 6    10 10       9      9 14 . 19 13 10 10 10 135                                     20
Days wfilt Visibility less than 1/2 mile ......................... 4~7 3.0 3.0  2.2 ?..2 1.8    2.7 3.5   ' 2.6 3.1    3.8 4.7             37.3 12






                                                                                                                                         T-11


                                               NOME, ALASKA (64'30'N., 162ï¿½2E.'W.} Elevation 13 fl. (4.0m)


             WEATHER EII=III=MTS                   JAN. FEB. MAR,    APR.  MAY JUME    JULY AUG. SEPT,    OCT. NOV. 0EC. YEAR
                                                                                                                                      ~F. ARS OF
                                                                                                                                      RECORO

           SEA LEVEL PRESSURE
Mean (MilM)ms) ...............= ..................................... 1012.5 1011.1 1012.4 1012.2 1012.2 1012.1   1911.8 1006.9 1007.5   1003.5 1006.5 10(}9.3 1010.0 25
        TEMPERATURE (DEGREES F)
Mean ................................................................... 6.0 5.2 7.4 18.9 34.8 45.5 50.1 49.2 42.1 ~:~.5 15.6 4.4 25.6 29
Mean Daily Maximum ............................................... 13.5 13.7 16.6 27.0 41.4 52.2 55.8   54.6 48.2    34.4 22.1 11.7 32.6 29
Mean Daily Minimum ............................................... - 1.6 - 3.3 - !.9 10.8   28.1 38.8 44.4 43:7 35.9     22.6 9,1 - 3.0 18,6 29
Extreme Highes1 .................................................... 43 47 42 51 75    81 86               83    65        59 44    43 86 25
Exlreme Loweal ..................................................... -39 -42 -42 -30   -11 25 32 27 15 -10 -39 -41 -42 25
            RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Average Percentage ................................................. 75.3 73.6 74.4 78.8,  78.8   60.2 84.5   84.8 80.7 76.3 77.6 73.9 78.4 25
               CLOUD COVER
Average Amount (Tenths]. ........................................ 5.8 5.2 5.6 6.2 6.9 7.1 7.9 6.3 7.4 6.7 6.5 5.5                                6.6 25
               PRECIPITATION
Mean Amount {Inches} ............................................ 0.90 0.84 0.79 0.73   0.70 0.95  2.42 3.57 2.40 1.42 0.98 0.74 16.44 29
Greatesl Amount (Inches) ........................................ 2.10   1.46 t.95 2,15 1.28 3.04 4.23 7.82 5.72 3.84   2.53 2.16                  0 27
Least Amount (Inches} ............................................ t t t    0.02 0.12 0.04 0.25 0.40   0.39 0.02 0.03 0.03 0                                 27
Maximum in 24 hm. (Inches) .................................... 1.23 0.52 0.65 0,56   D.7O 2.03 1.77 2.38   1,28 2.28   0.79 1.09 2.38 27
Mean Amount of Snow [inches) ................................ 9.6    5.7 7.4 6.5    i.9    0.1 0.0 t 0.4 5.1 10.1 7.7 54.5 27
Mean Number of Days with Precipitalion ..................... 19 15 19 18 17    17 20 23 19 18 20 18                                              2.23 25
Snow {Mean Number of Days) .................................. 18  15    19 17       10 1 0 3 14 20    18 134 25
                   WIHD
Percent of ObsewalJons with Gales ........................... 0.9 0.9 0.4    0.1 0.1 0                     0.1 0.1        0.4 0.4 0.5            0.4         24
Mean Wind Speed (Knots} ....................................... 10.6 9.9    9.{)  9.7 9.1 9.8      8.7 9,7 10.2 10.3 10.5 9.1 9.6 25
DirantJon (Pe~ceatage of Ohs.)
  North ................................................................ '10.0 9.7 10.4 9.9 9.5 5.0  4.4 7.5 13.9 16.6 14.0 13.6 10.3 25
  North Nodbeast .................................................. 7.7 7.9 7.3 6.2 7.4 2.8 1.7 3,4 7.3 8.9 5.6 8.2 5.4 25
  Northeast ........................................................... 12.0 13.2 11.6 9.1 7.9 3.3 2.5    4.4 9.5 12.3 12.5 10.5                 9.0 25
  East Northeast ................................................ 12.4 11.1 10.5  9.7 6.7 3.0      2.7 4.6    5.7 9.4   13.9 11.2 8.5 25
  East ................................................................. 20.6   13.7 13.7 12.7 9.5   4.6 4.6 5.4 7.0 7.3 13.3 14.6 10.6 25
  East Southeast ............................................. 5.0 5.1 4.6 5.3 7.2 5.3 4.9 4.0    4.7 3.6 4.6 4.2 5.0 25
  Southeast .......................................................... 2.7 3.1 3.,I 3.6 6.6 6.7    6.9 6.4 4.9 3.8 3.2 2.3 4.5 25
  South Southeast ................................................. t.5 1.7 1.5 3.2    4.1 4.7 6.7 5.5 4.9 3.3 1.6 1.4                           3.4 25
  South ................................................................ 1.5    2.3 1.6 4.1 4.4 6.0 9.4 8.6 4.8 3.5 1.7 1.5 4.1 25
  South Southwest ............~ .................................... 0.7 1.2    0.9 2.2 2.7 4.4 7.9 7.5 3.7 1.7 0.8    0.8                       2.9 25
  Southwest .......................................................... 1.6    1.3 1.9 4.9 6.4   9,6    10.7 10.4 5.3 2,4 1.6    0.9 4.8 25
  West Southwest .................................................. !.2    1.1 1.7 2.8    6.1 15.0 12.1    6.9 3.7 1.4 1.0    0.9                4,5 25
  West ................................................................. 1.9 3.0 3.4 4.0 5.5 12.8 9,5 5.7 2.9 t.7 1.1 1.9                        4.5 25
  West Northwes1 .................................................. 2.2    2,8   3.3 3.9    3.3    5.1 4.7 5.1 4.3 3.4 2.6    3.(] 3.6 25
  No~Jlwest .......................................................... 3.8 4.5   5,2  5.6 3.7 4.4 4,9 5.8   6.2           5.2    6.3    6.1      5.4 25
  North Northwest .............................. 3.8    5.0 4.8 4.8 4.1    3.5 2.9 4,6   6.1                              8.9 6.3 6.5 5.1 25
  Calm ................................................................ 11.4 13.6 14,3 8.1 5.0 3.6  3,4 3.1 4.1 4.4 6.9 12.3 7.5 25
Dkantiun (Mean Speed, knots)
  North ................................................................ 8.0 7.9 7,9 8.7 9.3    8*2 7.0 7.8 9.1 8.2 7.7    8.0                   82- 25
  ;,.'owth Northeast .................................................. 11.5 12.4 12.6 11,6 12.4 9.5 6.8 8.7 10.7    10.6    9.6 9.3 10.9 25
  ;4mtheest ....................................: ...................... 13.3 13.1 11.9 12.5 12.0    9.4 ?.1 0.0 10.6 10.1 11.6 10.7 11.5 25
  -_cast Northeast ................................................... 14.6 14.8 1,~.0 13.5   11.9 10.0 8.5 9.9 11.0 11.8 13.6 13.7 13.0 25
  ~sst ................................................................. 14.7 14~7 12,2 12.7 I1.1 10.0 9.0 10.1 11.2 11.8 14.7 14.2 13.0 25
  East Southeest ................: .................................. 12.6 11.4 11.6 10.6 11.0 10.3 10.2 11,9   12.8 15.3 14.1 11.6 11.8 25
  Southeast; ......................................................... 9.0 9.1 8.4 9.7 9.3 8.9 9.5 11.2 11.9 15.1 13.2 8.9 10,3                              25
  .South Southeast ................................................. 12.1 102    9.0 10.9    8.3 7.8  9.7 10.8 13.4 16.8   14.4 11.2 t1.0 25
  ,South ................................................................ 11.0 10.1 8.3 10.3 7.2 6.8  5.8   10.0 11.2 15.3   14.3   10.1 9.8 25
  Soc. th Southwant ................................................. 12.1 12.5   11.6 10.1 7.5 7.2 9.9 11.9 11.8 14.3 14.5 10.3                10.5 25
  Southwest .......................................................... 10.0    9.0 9.3 11.4 5.1    7.9  5.3 11.C   11.3 14.4 15.1    8.0 9.8                 25
  west Southwest ............................................... 10.4 9.0    8.3  6.2 8.4   10.7   10.3 ' 10.2 11.6 12.2 13.0 8.5 10.2 25
  West ................................................................. 9.9 8.8    8.2 7.7 8.1 10.6 10.2 10.1 10.1 9.4 9.6    8.2 9.5                       25
  West Northwest .................................................. 8.7 9*2 8.3 8.2 7.6    9.1      8.6    92- 9.7 8.9 9.2   8.0                 6.7 25
  Northwest ......................................................... 6.7 6.3    6.8 7.3    6.8 7.2 7.5    8.6 8.6        8.7 7.8 6.7 7.6 25
  Notlh Northwest .................................................. 7.0    6.6 7.0  6.4 7.3 7.9   6.4 8.0    8.5 7.9 6.7    6.8 7.3 25
                  VISIBILITY
Mean Numbeï¿½ of Days wilh Fog .............................. 9  6 9 9 10 12 17 15                                   9 5 7                  8      116         25
 Days with Visibility less thsn 1/2 mile ........................ 5.4 4.1 3.4 2.2 2.6 4.6 3.0    2.1 0.5                   1.1 3.1    3.2 35.3                12





T-12


                                             KOTZEBUE, ALASKA (66'52'N., 162'38'W.) Efevafio~ 10 fiL (3.0m)


             WEATHER ELEMEN~                     JAN. FEB. MAR. APR. MAY JUNE    JULY AUG. SEPT.   OCT. NOV, DEC.  YEAR
                                                                                                                                      YEAIF~ OF
                                                                                                                                       RECORD

           ~.A LEVEL PRESSURE
Mean (Millbars) ..................................................... 1016.4 1014.7 1015.2 1014.1 1013.8 1012.1  1011,5 1009.2 1009.2 1006.5 1009.5 1012.2 1012.0  25
        TEMPERATURE (DEGREES IF)
Mean .................................................................... - 3.7 - 4.3 - 0.5 13.9 30.8  43.5    52.9 50.7 41.1 23.6 7.7 - 3.9 20.9 29
Mean DMy Maximum......, ......................................... 3.2 3.3 8.1 22.3 37.8 49.6   58.7   55.9 46.5      28,7 13.4    2.6      27.5        29
Mean Daily Mi~mum ................................................ -10.6 -11.8  -9.1 3.7 23.7 37.3 47.1 45.4 35.7 18.5 2.0 -10.3           14.3 29
Exb'eme Highest .................................................... 39    35 . 39  46 74 83 85    50    68           51 38    36 65                  .31
Extreme Lowest ...................................................... -47 -52 -48 -44 ~-18    20  .34    31 15       -13 -36 -47 -52 31
            RELATfVE HUMIDITY
Average Percentage ................................................. 72.4 72.0  72.7 78.4 82.6 84.3 83.1 84.7 82.9 81.5 77.2  73.6 78.8 25
               CLOUD COVER
Average Amount (Tentha) ......................................... 5.3 5.0    5.4 5.9 6.5 8.8    7.7 8.3 7.2 6.6 6.4 5.4 6,4 25
               PRECIPITATION
Mean Amounl (Inches) ............................................. 0.29 0.30   0.33  0.33 0.40 0.52 1.55   2.26 1.43 0.61 0.41 0.33 8.76 29
Greatest Amount (Inches) ........................................ 1.77 1.13 1.23 1.34 0.94 1.32 2.98 5.18   2.85 1.53 1.31  0.79 0 31
Lessl Anx~nt (l~=has) ............................................. t 0.01 t t  0.03   0.01 0.45   0.38 0.03         0.04   0.09   0.02       0        31
Maximum in 24 hrs. (inches) ..................................... 0.81 0.68   0.47 0.36 0.56 0.80 1.78   1.48   0.94 0.54   0.36   0.40 1.78 31
Mean Amount of Snow [inches} ................................. 6.2 5.2 5.9 5.2 1.8 0.2 t                 I 1.1 7.0 8.3 .7.0 47.9 30
Mean Number of Days with Precipitation ..................... 17 14 17 16    15 14 17    22 18 18                             19 17 203 25
Snow (Mean Number of Days) .................................. 16 14 17 15 9 I                    "     *' 4 16 19 17 129 25
                   WIND
Perce, t of ObservalJons with Gales ............................ 2.1 2.3 1.1 0.5  '      *            0.1   0.1 0.3 1.3 1.8 0.8 25
Mean Wind Speed (Knots) ........................................ 12.5   11.5 10.7 10.9 9.3 10.~. 11.1 11,5 11.3 11.4 12.1 10.9 11.1 25
[~rection (Percenlage of Ohs.)
  Norlfi ................................................................ 4.1    5.3 ' 4.5 4.6 4.9 3.0 2.7 4.3 8.4 10.7 6.3 5.9 5.4                    25
 North Northeast .................................................. 5.2    5.3 5.2 5.1 4.8 1.7 1.6 2.8 5.6 9.1 7.4 6.8 5,0 25
  Nofit~east ............................................................ 9.6 10.3    8.8  6.8 6.3  . 2.2 1.6    3.2    5.7 10.4 10.5 12,5 7.3 25
 East Northeast ................................................... 5.6 10.5 8.7 6.2 6.3 2.3 2.1 3.7 7.4            12.5   14.4 12,9 9.0              25
 ~as! ................................................................. 18.9 15.8   15.8 9.5 8.3 3.0 3.2 7.0 13.0   14.4  19.5 18,1 12.2              25
 East Soutfieast .................................................... 22.0 14.1 14,3 12.9    8.9 3.4 5.2 9.4   15.8 17.0 19.2 14,4 13.0               25
  .~outheast .......................................................... 4.3    3.3    3,9 5.2    5.3 4.1 7.5    9.0 6.3  4.6 3.6 3,7 5.1               25
 ?~x~h S~Jtheast .................................................. 1.7    2.1 2,0 4.0    3.9 3.5  5.4 6.3 3.1 1.6 1.3 1.2 3,0                        25
  :'~wth ................................................................ 1.5 2.0 2,2 3.1 3.4    3.8  6.1 5.6 2.4 1.2 1.2 1,1               2.8        25
 ~}out h Southwest ................................................. 1.1 1.6    2.0  3.0 2.8 3.9 4.7 3.5 1.6 0.7 9.7 0.9 2.2                          25
 ~Jthwest .......................................................... 2.4 2.8 3.3 4.4 5.5 7.2  ,7.1 4.8 2.9 1.5 1.2 1.4 3.7 25
 L~
  .Vast SOUthWast .................................................. 2.3 3.7 5.1  6.1 7.7 10.3 8.5    6.8 2,8 1.8    0.9 1.6 4.7 25
 West ................................................................. 3.9 6.2   7.8 10.3 12.1 24.6 16.8 11.6 4.8 1.9 1.9 3.8 8.8 25
 West Noahwest .................................................. 4.7 6.1 7.0  9.4 10.5' 18.9 18.8   13.7 7.1 2.1 2.1 3.7 8.7 25
 Northwest ..............................~ ........................... 3.1 2.6 2.4 2.5    3.2. 4.1 4.7   .4.7 6.1 3.6 3.2 3.4 3.7 25
 North Northw~t .................................................. 3.0 3.0 2.4 2.8 2,6    2.5 2.5 3.0    5.5 5.6    4.0 3.7 3.4                       25
 Calm ................................................................ 3.6 .5.3 4.7 4.2    3.5 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.4 2.5 5.0 3.0                        25
Direction (Mean Speed, knols)
 North ................................................................ * 8.3 9.0    8.7 8.2 7.7 8,9 8.6 9.8 11.0 11.1 8.3 9.1 9.4                    25
 North Northeast .................................................. 8.4 7.2 7.0  7.0    6.5 6.2 6.9 7.3 7.7 7.8 7.3 6.3 7.1 25
 Northeast ..........................~ ................................ 6.5    7.6 7.3  7.6 6.7 6.6 6.6 6.g 7.8 7.2 7.0 6.1 7.0                       25
 East Northeast ............................... ..................... 8.7 8.9 9.1 9.7    9.6    8.2  7.5    8.5 9.5 8.9 9.3 7.9            5.9 25
 East ........~ ......................................................... - 15.3 18.5   14.0 14.4 12.3 11.4 9.4 11.0 12.3 13.4 14.9 14.6    14.0      25
 East Southeast .................................................... 18.4 18.0 16.1 16.0 12.2 10.5 10.5 12.3 13.0   15.4 17.6   17.2 15.7 25
 Southeast .......................................................... 13.5 12.7 12.0  13.2 11.4   10.9 12.3 12.9 12.4 13.8   14.2 13.3 12.7           25
 ~outh Southeast ................................................. 12.7 12.1 10.2 14.4 11.3 11.0 12.0 13.2 12.1 15,0   14.6 12.7 12.5 25
 South ................................................................ 10.2   8.8 7.2 10.2 9.6 9.6 10.5   11.5 12.1 11,6   13.2 11.0 10.4            25
 South Soulhwesl .................................................. 9.9 7.8 6.7 7.7    7.1 7.8 10.1 11.7 10.8 12.6  11.8 8.0 9.1 25
 Southwast ........................................................... 11.0 9.2 6.3 7.7 7.0 7.7 9.6 11.3 12.O 12,2 13.8 9.8 9.1 25
 Wes! Southwest ................................................... 11,4 9.9 9.0  10.1    8.3    9.3 10.7 11.6 11.7 13.3 13.3   10.0 10.1 25
 West ................................................................. 12.4 13.1 11.8 11.3 10.1 12.4 12.8 12.7 11.1 12.7 15.7  12,6    12.1          25
 West Noflhwesl ................................................... 15,4 13.9 14.0 12.4 11.6 12,6 13.4  13.3 12.9 12.4   14.0 13.5 13,1 25
  Northwast .......................................................... 11.3 9.1 9.8  9.8 7.7 9.2 10.4 11.5 12.3 12.3   13.8 14,2 11.1 25
 North Northwasl .................................................. 11.1 9.4 9.3  8.6 8.6 8.5 9.0 10.7 12.4 12.4 11.2 11.8 10.7 25
                 VISIBIUTY
Meae Numbe~ of Days with Fog ................................ 7 7 8 9 10 11 9 9 6 6                                           6      5 93 25





                                                                                                                                       1'-13


                                             9ARROW, ALASKA (71ï¿½16'N., 166ï¿½47'W.) Elevat]~ 31 ft. (0.5m)
            WEATHER ElEMENT6                   JAN. FEEL ILAR. AJAR. MAY JULIE JULY AUO, &F~T. OCT. NOV. tZC. YEARS OF
                                                                                                                             ï¿½EAN
                                                                                                                                     RECORO

           8EA IJ;VEL PRF..m~URE
Mean (MUba~) ....................................................~ 1020.5 1021.6 1020,9   1018,9 1018.6 1015,0 1012.8 1011.6 1012.8   1010.1 1014.5 1017.6 1016,2 22
        TEMPERATURE (DEGREES F)
Mean ................................................................... - 14.? - 16.6 - 15.2 - 6.9   19.1  33.O  38.7   37.6  30.3 15.3 - 0.6 - 12.3  9.3  29
Meen Daily Maximurn ........; .................................~... -8.0 -12,6 -6.6 6.5  24.2 37.1 44,3 42.0  33.4 20.2    5.4 -6.4 14.8
                                                                                                                                          29
Meant Daily Minimum ......................................., ......... -21.3 -24.6 -21,6 -8.2   14.0   26.9    33.0   33.1  27.2 10.4 -6.4 -16.1  3,6 29
ExlTeme Hi~best '. ..........: ...........' ............................. 35    32    33  42 45    70    , 76 76    62 43 39 34 78                  53
Extreme Lowest ............: ............ ............................ -53 -56 -52 -42 -18  4  22    20 1 -32   -40 -55 -56                         63
            RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Average Percentage ................................................ 65.0 63,?  63.5    71.2. 85.8  91.8 91.2   92.6  90.4 84.2 74.9  55.6 79.0 23
               CLOUD COVER
Average Am~Jrd {Tenths) ........................................ 4.6 4.7 4.6  5.6    8.3   8.3  8.2 9.1 9.2 6.6 6.9 5.2 7.0                         23
              I~ECIPITATION
Mean Amount (inches) ...........: ................................. 0.23 0.20 0.19 0.21 0.17 0.35    0.88   ;I.04 0.58 0.55   0.30 0.19 4.69 29
C~restest Amount (inches) ........................................ 1.04 0.81 1.49 1.36 0.81 !.15    2.44 2.81 1.56 1.65 1.15 0.76 0                53
Least Amount (Inches) ............................................. 0.00 0.00 0.(X) 0.00 t  t t t  6.01    0.12 I 0.00 0 53
Mau~TtUm kn 24 hra. (1~ ) ..................................... 0.70   0.36 0.71 0.42   0.30 0.82    0.86   0.83 0.56  1.00 0.41 0.26 1.00          52
Mean Amount of Snow (trmhes) ................................. 2.3 2.2 1.9 2.3    2.0 0.5    0.7 0.7 3.1 7.1 3.8 2.7 29.3                           53
Mean Number of Days with Precipitalion ..................... 21 19 21    19 26 22             21 25 26             27    23    22 270 23
Snow (Mean Number ot Days) .................................. 18    16 19  16    21 11 5 7 16                       24 20 19 * 193 23
                   WIND
Percefil of Obsen~alions with Gales ........................... 0.3    0.3 0.3 0 '                                 0.2 0.4   0.2 0.1              ' 23
Mean Wind Speed (Knots) ....................................... 10.3 9.9 9.9 10.0   10.5 10.1 10.2 11.0 11.2 11.8 11.6   9.3 10.6 23
Dkect~n (Pmcentage of Ohs.)
  Norlh ................................................................ 3.9 4.6 5.0 4.6 3.5   4.5  5.0 5.4 4.3    2.4 2.4 3.0 4.0 23
  North Northeast .................................................. 4.0    3.1 4.3 5.2 4.0   4.3 5.0 5.3 4.2 4.0 2.6 4.2 4.2 23
  Northeast ........................................................... 8.7 10.2 14.4 12.2 11.6 7.4 5.4 7.3 8.5   11.5   12.2 12.0 10.2 23
  Easl Northess1 ....................................... ............ 13.9 14.4 15.7 13.3  19.4 14.0  12.9 10.9 14.3 15.9 19.1 18.2 15.2 23
  EELSt ..........................~ ....................................... 11.9 15.4  13.0 12.3 18.0   19.4    '15.1 15.5 15.6 15.3 14.6 12.9  14.9 23
  ~est Southeast ......................... .......................... 9.9    6.9 6.6  5.7 10.9 12.0 7.0    3.9 11.8 9.4    8.2 6.0 8.9 23
 ~-~outhesst ........................................................... 5.1    3.8   4.5 5.5 5.6 4.6 4.0    5.2 6.2 7.2 6.3   4.7 5.2 23
  -'~outh Soutrteast .................................................. ' 2.6  ï¿½ 2.0 1.8  3.2 2.2 2.0 2.8 3.4 4.4 5.4 4.1 2.4 3.0 23
 :~uth ................................................................. 5.3 3.9 4.0  5.6 3.5   2.2    2.8 3.7   5.1 7.7 6.7 4.4        4.6 23
  -q. outh Southwest ................................................. 4.7 3.4 4.5 4.5 2.8    2.0 2.6 3.2 2.7 4.1 4.0 3.6 3.5                      23
  southwest .......................................................... 5.1    4.4 4.6 4.2 3.2 3.9 6.6 4.6 2.9 2.9 2.7 4.3 4.1                      23
  West Southwest .................................................. 5.2 4.1 4.0 3.7 2.8   6.5  9.1    6.5   2.9 2.0 3.2 4.4 4.5                     23
  West ................................................................. 6.2 7.6 6.2 4.7 3.2 6.6  8.6  ' 6.5   4.1 3.1 4.3   6.8         5.6 23
 West Norlhwesl .................................................. 4.7    6.8 4.3  4.3    2.3   3.9 4.6    5.1 4.3  3.3 4.0 4.7 4.4 23
  Nol'thwest ...................................................... .... 3.8 4.5   3.3 3.9 3.2 3.2 3.9 3.6    3.9 2.5 2.9 3.6 3~5                  23
  Nocth Northwest .................................................. 3.2    3.2 2.2 2.5 2.6 2.7  2.6 3.1   2.9 2.1 1.9 2.1 2.6 23
 Calm ................................................................ 1.8 1.7    1.5 1.4 1.1 0.8 0.9 0.7    1.2 1.1 0.9 2.7 1.3 23
Dkec~on (Mean Speed, knots)
  North ................................................................ 8.2    6.6    7.7 7.6    7.7   6.7 6.2 6.9 8.6 9.9 8.9 7.8 7.6             23
  North No~least ...........' ....................................... 9.4 7.4 9.5  8.7 9.0 7.9 7.6    3.1 9.8 11.5    9.4 8.1 9.0                  23
  Northeast ........................................................... 9.6    8.9 10.2 10.1 10.2 8.8 9.9 10.8 10.9 12.6   12.0 10.4 10.4 23
  ;.:ast Northeast .......................~ .......: .................... 11.2 11.8 12.0 11.5   12.2   11.3 12.2 13.1 13.4 13.7 13.8 12.0 12.4 23
  ~-~t .....................:....~ ....................................... 11.9 11.8 11.1 11.2 12.1 12.5 11.8 13.3 ' 12.7 12.9 12.8 10.5 12.1 23
  ~ast Southeast ................................................... 13.4 11.6 11.2 12.0 11.6   11.9 11.3   12.3 12.0  11.1 11.0 10.4 11.7 23
  Southeast ....: ....................................- ................. 10.0    8.2 9.1 9.5 9.8    9.4 10.3    9.6 9.3  9.6 9.3 9.6 9.5 23
 :~outh Southeast ................................................. 9.4 7.1 7.8 9.0    7.9 8.7 10.0 9.1   9.4 9.2 9.2 8.1 8.8 23
  :~outh .............................................................. 9.1 8.3 7.9 8.B    8.4 8.2 9.8 9.8    9.3 10.0 9.7 7.1 9.0 23
  -~outh Southwest ................................................. 9.7 9.2   9.0 10.2 9.1 9.3 10.3 11.6 11.2 11.2 12.3 8.5 10.2 23
  Southwest .......................................................... 9.8 9.7   8.6 9.3 9.8   9.7 10.8   11.3 11.2 12.3 13.3   8.9 10.2 23
  Wes1 Southwest ...........: ....................................... ' 12.0 11.0 11.2 10.5 10.4 10.5 11.4   12.1 12.3 13.9 13.6 10.4 11.5 23
 Wes1 ................................................................. 11.2   10.9 10.1 10.9    9.5 9.0  9.7 10.4   11.8  14.0 13.4   11.4 10.8 23
  West Northwest .................................................. 9.4 10.3 9.9 10.4 8.9 8.3 6.4 10.6 12.4 12.8 12.9 12.0              10.5 23
  Ncatlswest .......................................................... 8.1 8.1 7.4 8.3    7.0   7.2 7.2    8.5 10.2 11.6   10.5   9.1 8.5 23
  NoEth Northwest ...................: .............................. 8.1 7.2 6.8    ' 7.4 8.0    7.2 6.7 8.5 9.9 11.1 9.7 8.2 8.2 23
                 VISIBILITY
Mean Number of Days with Fog ............................... 12 11 10 10 17 21 23 22 17 16 13 12 185 23






T-14


                                         BARTER ISLAND, ALASKA (70"08'N., 143'38'W.) ElesstJon 11.9m)


            lrr. AIFHER ELEiI~                  JAN. FEB. MAR.   APR.  MAY JUNE JUIG. SEPT.   OCT. NOV. DEC.  YEAR
                                                                                                                            YEARS OF
                                                                                                                             RECORD

           SEA LEVEL PRESSURE
Mean (Millibars): .................................................... 1021,3 1020,3 1020.8  1018.4 1018.1 1014.4 101~.7 1012.3   1009,9 1013.7 1016.1
                                                                                                                      1015.9 23
        TEMPERATURE (DEGREES F)
Mean .............................................................: .......15.2 - 19.5 - 14.7 0.1 21.1 34.1 4~.9 31.6  16.4    0.2 - 12.4 10.1  29
Mean Daily Maximum ............................................... -8.5 -13.1 -7,5  8.2   26,5 38.2 4~.5 35.0 21,5    6,3  -6,4 15.8 29
Mean Daily Minimum ............................................... -21.9 -25.8 -21.9 -8.1 15.7 29.9 34.3 28.1 11.2   -5,9 -16.3 4,3 29
Ex~'eme I-lighesl ..................................................... 39    34 36 43 52 67 '72 64             45 37 37 75 24
Extreme J. ov~st ..................................................... -51 -59 -51 -38 -16 15 ;24 4  - -23 -51 -51 -59 26
            RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Average Percentage ................................................. 68.6   68.1 68.8 74.6 85.5 90.0 89.5 90.2 84.6 74.9 69.3 79.7 23
              CLOUD COVER
Average Amount (Tenths) ........................................ 5.4    5.2 5.2  6.0    8.2 7,9  ~J.6 8.4 8.2    6.9 5,8              7.0 23
              PRECIPITATION
Mean Amount (Inches) ............................................. 0.55   0.33 0.26  0.23 0.31 0.53  1.28 0.89 0.81
                                                                                                         0.45 0.29 7.05             29
Grealest AmOunl (Inches) ......................................... 4.08 2.63 1.44 1,22 1.51 2.09  3,140 4.91 3.62   1.50 1.17 0 25
Leest Anx3~nt (inches) ............................................. 0.01 I I I I 0.06         0.16
                                                                                           O.07 0.12 0.04 t 0 25
Ma~mum in 24 h~s. (Inches) ..................................... 2.25 1.22   0.55  0.44   0.76   1.15 1J11 2.23 1.98   0.43
                                                                                                               0.55 2.25 25
Mean Amount of Snow (Inches) ................................. 5.8 3.0 2.8 ' 2.6 3.2 1.5 0.5 6.2 9.4
                                                                                                          5.4 3.5 45.3 25
Mean N~Jmber of Days with Prec'~;~tation .................... 17 14 17 17 23 19 ;21    23 24 20 19 233 23
Snow (Mean Number of Days) .................................. 17 14 17 17 21 10 5 14 22 20 19 180 23
                   WIND
Percent of OI3serva0ons with Gales ............................ 3.9 3.7 2.1 1.0 .4 .4 1.0 2.5 2.9 2.6 1.8 22
Mean Wind Speed {Knots) ........................................ 12.3 12.4 11.6 10.5 10.5    9.5 ~).0  10.9   12.9 12.7 12.0 11.2 23
DireclJon (Percentage of Ohs.)
  Norffi ................................................................ 0.4 0.4 0.6 6.5    1.9 2.5 ~.7 1.9 1.0 -  0.6 0.9 1.4 23
  North Norlheest .................................................. 0.4    0.4 0,7  0.8 1.5    2.3  2.8 2.1 1.2 1.0   0.5 1.4 23
  Nodheasl ........................................................... 2.3 2.2 3.8 2.7    6.4 5.1  5'.7 6.0 6.1 4.1 3.5 5.2 23
  East Northeast ................................................... 10.3 10.3 14.0 13.7 18.2 22.2    2(7.7 13.9 12,2 15.3 12.8 15.2
                                                                                                                                  23
  East .................................................................. 20.6 19.2 18.3 20.3 28.5 26.7 1-o.8 23.0 19.6 20.3 15.4 21.2 23
  East. Southeast .................................................... 5.9 5.2 5.1 5.4 5.5 3.0 ~5.9 7.0 7.5 6.8 4.6 5,5 23
  Southeesl .......................................................... 3.5 1.0 1.6 1.9 1.2 0.6  11,8 2.8 3.9 3.3 1.5 2.0 23
  Sou~ Snutheast .................................................. 0.9 0,6 0.5  0.8 0.9    0.4  0,9 1.0 1.4 1.0 0.7 0,8 23
  SOu~ ................................................................ 2.1 1,7 1.7  2.1 1.3 0.6 11.4 1.9 4.4 3.2 1.9                2,0 23
  South Soulhwesl ................................................. '  2.1 2.3 2.1 2.1 1.3 0.6  0,2 1.7 5.7 4.1 3.8 2,3 23
  Southwest ........................................................... 9.3 8,5 7.8 6.6 4.3 1.2 /I,7 3.0 7.0 7.5 11.2                 5.8 23
  West Southwest .................................................. 11.3 13.5 12.5  11.0    4.1 3.4 ~.4    6.1 7.9    9.2 11.3 8.1 23
  West .................................................................. 20.1 25.3 22.8 20.1 12.5 10.2 111.5 13.9 12.1  14.5 23.0
                                                                                                                        16.4 23
  West No~lhwest .................................................. 3.8 4.5 3.6 4.2 5.4 7.9     8.8 6.4 3.9 3.3 3.0 5.2 23
  Nerthwesl ........................................................... 1.1 0.8    0.9 1.5 2.7 4.1  ~t.5 3.7 1.9 1 .I 1.5             2.4 23
  N~th Norlhwesl .................................................. 0.2 0.2 0.4  0.5 1.3 1.9 3.1 1.6 0.8 0.4   0.3 1.0
                                                                                                                                  23
  Calm ................................................................ 4.5 3.9 3.7 5.6 3.1 4.1 ~B.3 4.1 3.4 4.3
                                                                                                                 4.1     4.1        23
Direct]on (Mean Speed, knots)
  Norlh ................................................................. 5.0 5.1 4.4 4.7 4.9   4.5  z5.1 6,0 7.2    5,1 5.0
                                                                                                                         5.1 23
  North Nodheesl .................................................. 5.6 4.6 5.4 5.5 5.0 5.2     5.6 6.1 8.0 6.2 5,5'
                                                                                                                         5.7. 23
  Northeast ........................................................... 7.2 7.4 7.5 7.9 7.8 6.6  ~.9 9.4 14.0 10.9 7.9 8.6 23
  East Northeest ..................................................: 12.1 11.4 13.4 11.7 11.1 10.8 1(2.1 12.6 16.7 14.6
                                                                                                                12.5 12.3 23
  East .................................................................. 13.8 12.9 13.2 12.3 13.4 12.2 18.4   13.8 16.3 16.8 14.4
                                                                                                                        13.7 23
  East Scetheest ................................................... 8.9 10.1 9.5  9.3 9.8 10.1 9.2 10.9 11.2   13.6    9.6 10.3 23
  Southeast ........................................................... 8.1 5.9   6.4 7.0    6.1 7.2 8.7 8.2 8.0 7.0 6.4
                                                                                                                         7.2       23
  South Southeast ...............................................~. 9.0 5.8 5.6  6.7 5.5 5.6 6,9 6.0           5.9 5.4 6.0 6.2
                                                                                                                                  23
  South ................................................................ 6.9 6.2 5.8 6.5 6.3 5,2  8.1 6.3 6.8 6.3 6.6 6.4 23
  South So~Jthwest ................................................. 6.3 6.3 5.6 5.9 5.7 5.3 8.3 6.5           7.1 7,0 6.7
                                                                                                                         6.5 23
  Southwest .......................................................... 7.4 7.6 7.3 7.2 7.4 6.4 7~.1 7.8 8.1 7.8 8.6 7.7                         23
  West Snutl~west .................................................. 14.7 11.4   10.1 9.3
                                                                         8.g 9.g 10.3 12.0 12.8 13.1 11.9 11.6                          23
  West ................................................................. 18.3 18.2 16.4 15.0 13.0 10.9 10.4 13.7 16.2   16.5 17.4
                                                                                                                        15.5 23
  We~l Northwest .................................................. 14.7 17.4 13.6 12.9 11.0 9.0 !~.7 10.5 13.8 13.5 14.2
                                                                                                                        11.7 23
  Northwest .......................................................... 7.5 8.2 5.9 7.0 6.4 5.1 6.5    7.6 10.0 9.2 9.4 7.1                      23
  North Northwest .................................................. 6.6 4.5    5.3 4.7 5.6 5.1  S.5 6.2       7.7 5.6    5.9 5.6 23
                 VISIBILITY
Mean N~mber of Days with Fog ............................... 9 8 10 12 21 20                    :24 19 14 11 8                       175
                                                                                                                                  23
Days with Visibility less than 1/2 mile ......................... 7.8 7.8    5.7 5.4    8.5 10.5 1:~.5 11.7    5.2 7.3 5.0    105.1
                                                                                                                                  12





                                                                                        T-15


                       METEOROLOGICAL TABLE FOR COASTAL AREA OFF CORDOVA
                       Boundaries: Between 57ï¿½N. and the coast, from 140ï¿½W. to 146ï¿½W.


      Weltll~' elemeW~ Jun, Feb. Mar. Apr.  May June July Aug. Sept.  Oct. Nov. Dec. Annum

Wind ~ 34 knots (1) 9.5 10.2 5.3 3.9 2.0 1.1 0.4 0.8 4.9 12.4 11.6 10.5 5.9
Wave height ~ 10 feet (1) 23.2 28.0 19.7 14.5 9.4 8.1 7.7 4.5 11.7 21.9 14.8 29.8 15.7
Visibility < 2 neut. mi. (1) 6.4 8.2 5.3   4.7 4.8 3,4 5.7 3.1 4.2 6.2 4.9 5.5 5.1
Precipitation (1) 17.9 16.6 16.5 13,6 15.3 10.8 13.5 ~ll.6 15.4 18.4 24.4 21.8 16.2
Temperature ~- 85ï¿½F (1) 0                   0     0 0 0 0 0                       0 0 0 0                  0        0
Mean Temperature (ï¿½F) 36,6 38.2 37.7 40.6 45.2 50.4 54.4 56.8  53.8 47.0 41.6 38.2 45.5
Temperature ~ 32ï¿½F (1) 23.1 8.4 8.1 0.2                        0     0 0 0              0      0 4.0 15.6 4.5
Mean relative humidity (%)           85 86 85 83 86    86    88 85 87 83 54 86 85
Sky overcast or obscured (1) 40.5 48.8 37.4 36.6 49.0 53.6 62.3 46.9 43,9 37.6 47.0 42.9 45.9
Mean cloud cover (eighths)          5.8   ;6.1 5.7 5.2   6.1 6.6   6.8 6.1 6.1 5.9 6.2 5,9 6.1
Mean sea-level pressure (2) 1,007 1,006 1,008 1,011 1,014 1,014 1,016 1,014 1,009 999 1,004 1,002 1,009
Extreme max. seu4evei pressure (2) 1,045 1,038 1,039 '1,034 1,032 1,033 1,031 1,028 1,032 1,033 1,034 1,034 1,045
Extreme min. see-lovei pressure (2) 976 974 975 982 986 994 997 990 979 963 963 968 963
Prevailing wind direction E E E W E W W W E E E E E
Thunder end lightning (1) 0 0                      0     ' 0 0 0                  0      ' * 0 0 *


                        METEOROLOGICALTABLEFORCOASTAL AREA OFFSEWARD
                       Boundaries: Between 57ï¿½N. and the coast, from 146ï¿½W. to 151'W.


       W~dher elements Jan,  Feb. Mar. Apr. May June July Aug, Sept. Oct. Nov, Dec. Annual

Wind. ~ 34 knots (1) 11.7 12.0 9.7 5.4   3.0 1.1 0.5 1.6 5.8 8.8 14.6 16.7 6.8
Wave height ~ 10 feet (1) 27.5 28.9 26.3 18.9 7.8 6.2 7.2 8.9 20.8 29,9 32.5 29.7 18.7
Visibility <: 2 trout. mi. (1) 8.1 5.3 4.5 4.3 4.1 8.0 9.4 11.8 5.4 1.6 1.3 7.9 6.2
Precipitation (1) 19.4 21.9 14.3 16.1 13.4 12.7 14.2 11.4 18.0 14.9 17.0 16.1 15.4
~emperature ~. 85ï¿½F (1) 0                   0 0 0 0 0 0 0                               0 0 0              0 0
Mean Temperature (ï¿½F) 37.4 36.8 37.2 39.6 44.2 49.0 53.7 55.7  52.5 45.5 41.0 37.2 45.0
Temperature ~ 32ï¿½F (1) 11.1 13.3 11.1 3.5 0.3 0 0 0 0 0.6   3.7 19.5 4.4
Mean relative humidity (%) 83    83 82 83 85 87    88 67 86 81 82 84 94
Sky overcast or obscured (1) 42.9 50.5 37.8 35.2 41.9  56.7 55.0 47.0 44.5 35.7 39.6 41.0    44.6
Mean cloud cover (eighths) 5,6 6.1 5.6 5.1 5.6 6.4 6.3   5.9 5.9 5.6 5.6 5.5 5.8
Meensea-lovei pressure (2)        i,007 1,005 1,007 1,010 1,013 1,013 1,015 1,013 1,006 999 1,000 1,001 1,008
Extreme max. sea-level .pressure (2) 1,044 1,038 1,037 1,038 1,033 1,031 1,030 1,030 1,031 1,029 1,026 1,033 1,044
Extreme min. sea-level pressure (2) 972 968 969 979 983 993 991 991 976 966 965 966                               965
Prevailing wind direction W E NW W W E SW SW E W E E W
Thunder and lightning (1) 0                 0 0 0 0 0 0 0                               0      O 0 0 0


                        METEOROLOGICAL TABLE FORCOASTAL AREA OFFKODIAK
                       Boundaries: Between 56ï¿½N. and the coast, Irom 151ï¿½W. to 157"W.


       Weether elements Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May June July Aug. Sept. Oct.  Nov. Dec. Annum

Wind ~* 34 knots (1) 4.4 9.8 9.0 6.2 1.8 1.4 ' 2.7 2.9 4.9 i2.1 12.2 4.6
Wave height ~ 10 feet (1) 13.6 17.1 22.6 11.0 9.6 1.5 3.3 5.4 5.4 10.3 23.3 18.4 9.0
Visibility < 2 neut. mi. (1) 4.3 5.6   5.5 7.9 4.9 8.0 9.2 12.5 5.3 4.4 2.8 6.9 6.6
Precipitation (1) 34.4 35.2 22.9 16.8 20.4 20.1 24.7 19.1 20.2 30.6 29.3 20.3 23.6
Temperature ~- 85ï¿½F (1) 0 0                        0     0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0                                          0
Mean Temperature (ï¿½F) 35.5 33.5 36.2 39.1 44.7 48.8  53.9  55.0   52.6 45.1 36.5 32.4 44.6
Temperature ~; 32"F (1) 20.5 25.8 14.1 6.6 0.6 0                            0     0 0 *   7.3 28.0 4.9
Mean relative humiclity (%) 83 80 85 84 75 84 87 88 87 84 84    87 83
Sky overcast or obscured (1)       36,9 35.7 40.4 43.9 37.3  56.6 49.7 50.7 46.1 32.1 43.4 46.3 43.8
Mean cloud cover (eighths) 5.4 5.0   5.3   5.7 5.1 6.6 6.1 5.9   6.0   5.1 5.5 5.9 5.7
Mean sea-level pressure (2) 1,004 1,008 1,004 1,010 1,014 1,012 1,015 1,011 1,007 999 1,000 1,003 1,008
Extreme max. sea-level pressure (2) 1,039 1,041 1,036 1,033 1,033 1,031 1,031 1,029 1,029 1,025 1,032 1,032 1,041
Extreme min. see-level pressure (2)  966   969 969 980 987 989 993 988 977 968 957 969 966
Prevailing wind direction E NW NW NW SW NE SW SW W W NW W BW
Thunder end lightning (1) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

  ï¿½
   0,0.0.5%
Thrum din, m bemd upQn ol~m~mKons mmJe by ~ips in prorag* Such 8hip~ tend tO m~Id bed weather wh~t po~ibk. b'~u8 biumg ~ data towl~ good wea,~er mm~okm.





T-16


                         METEOROLOGICAL TABLE FOR COASTAL AREA OFF UNIMAK
                        Bounderlee: Between 53'N. and the coast, from 157*W. to 165ï¿½W.


       Weather elamanti           Jan. Feb. Mar, Apr, May June  ~July Aug. 8apt.  Oat. Nov. Dee. Annual


Wind ~ 34 knots (1) 11.2 10,9 7.5 5.6 3.3 2.4 0.8    2.1   3.2    8.1 14.4 13.3                                       5.8
Wave height ~. 10 feet (li 18.8   32.8   14.3 16.0 14.2 6.5 7.7 12.8 13.4 18.9   26.2  27.1 16,1
Visibility < 2 neut. mi. (1) 8.3    8.7 10.2 7.6 7.1 10.7 13.2 13.1 8.1 2.4 3.3 7.6                                   8.9
Precipitation (1) 18.2 21.5   17.5 14.9 14.6 13.4 13,8 15.6 17.2 17.2 20.5 21,3 16.5
Temperature ~- 85ï¿½F (1) 0 0                         0      0     0 0 0 0                   0      0 0 0 0
Mean Temperature (ï¿½F) 35.6 36.1  35.9 37.9 42.0 46.5   51.3   52.9   50.7 45.3 40.4 36.1 44.1
Temperature 4; 32OF (t) 19.1 17.1  20.5 8.1 1.8 0 0 0                                      0      * 5.3 22.7 6.5
Mean relative humidity (%) 85 87 86 88    85 88 88    89 87 83 83 86 86
Sky overcast or obscured (1) 42.0 42.1 41.3 47.4 51.3 62.2 61~3 57.2 45.3 37.0 34.3 42.3 48.8
Mean cloud cover [eighths)            5.8 6.0 5.6 6.1   6.3 6.7 6.6 6.6    6.2 6.0 5.8    6.0 6.2
Mean sea.level pressure (2) 1,004  1,503 1,010  1,011  1,012 1,011 1,017 1,013 1,007 1,004 1,004 1,000 1,009
Extreme max. sea-level pressure (2) 1,047 1,038 1,044 1,040 1,039 1,034 1,036 1,037 1,036 1,038 1,051 1,043 1,051
Extreme min. sea-level pressure (2) 958 950 974 966 975 982 992 981 973 969 986 960 958
Prevailing wind direction W W W W W W W W W W W NW W
Thunder and lightning (1) 0                   0 0 0 0 0 0 0                                 '     0     0 0 *


                      METEOROLOGICAL TABLE FOR COASTAL AREA OFF DUTCH HARBOR
                          Boundaries: Between 51ï¿½N. and 55ï¿½N. from 165ï¿½W. to 172ï¿½W.


       Weather elements Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May June July Aug. Sept Oct. Nov.  Dec. Annual

Wind ;~ 34 knots (1) 9.1 9.9 7.4 5.5 3.3 0.8 0.9 1.5 4.3 9.4 12.6 8.5 5.4
Wave height ~- 10 feet (1)           35.3 33.0 19.8 21.9 13.9 4.6 5.8 13.0 15.3 27.3 31.0 27.5 20.3
Visibility < 2 neut. mi. (1) 9.4 9.8 8.8 9.5 9.8 18.3 25.6   25.3 11.2 5.3 6.2 8.9 13.4
Precipitation (1) 25.3 24.9 18.4 21.9 19.5 16.9 16.1 14.4 16.5 21.0 21.7 24.1 19.5
Temperature ~- 85ï¿½F (1) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Mean Temperature (ï¿½F) 35.5 35.9 36.1 37.8 41.5 45.2 46.9 51.3 49.6 44.9 40.6 37.3 42.7
Temperature ~; 32ï¿½F (1) 33.2 20.4 17.6    8.5 *                         0 0 0 0 * 1.5 10.4 6.1
Mean relative humidity_ (%) 84 85 85 85  . 85 88 90 90 66 83 83 84 86
Sky overcast or obscured (1) 42.3 45.2 53.1 52.4 60.3 74.2 83.9 74.1 58.3 42.4 41.4 44.6 58.5
Mean cloud cover (eighths) 6.1 6.2 6.5 6.6 6.8 7.4 7.6    7.3    6.8 6.2 6.1 6.1 6.7
Mean sea-level pressure (2) 1,001 1,001 1,011 1,012 1,011 1,012 1,016 1,013 1,009 1,006 1,003 i,002 1,009
Extreme max. sea-loyal pressure (2)    1,040 1,044  1,039 1,044 1,044 1,039 1,038 1,038 1,036 1,038 1,045 t,048 1,048
Extreme min. sea-level pressure (2) 958 959 980 969 971 972 986 960 966 965 959 956 956
Prevailing wind direction W S W W W W SW W W W W W W
Thunder and lightning (1) 0 * * 0 0 0 * 0 0                                                       0      *     0        '


                          METEOROLOGICAL TABLE FORCOASTAL AREA OFF ADAK
                          Boundaries: Between 51*N. and 55ï¿½N., from 172ï¿½W. to 180ï¿½.


       Weather alernenhl          Jan. Feb. Mar.. Apr. May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Annual

Wind ~ 34 knots (1)                   8.5 13.0 9.9 7.4 4.3 0.6 0.7 0.8 3.9 8.4 11.6 10.6 5.0
Wave height ~- 10 feet (1)           31.7 31.0 24.6 21.6 10.2 6.0 4.0 9.3 21.5 24.7 40.8 27.2 17.t
Visibility < 2 neut. mi. (1)          5.0 8.5 6.9 8.6 11.0 18.6 28.8 26.9 10.4 4.5    6.5 7.2                        15.3
Precipitation (1} 30.4 29.6 31.6 28.4 22.0 16.4 18.5 18.8 22.0 23.6 30.6 34.3 23.0
Temperature ~- 85ï¿½F (1)                0      0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Mean Temperature (ï¿½F) 35.9 35.2 36.1 37.7 41.0 44.0 48.2 50.1 49.1 45.0 40.1 37.7 43.2
Temperature -~ 32ï¿½F (1) 18.0 23.1 16.9 5.9 0 0 0 0                                          0     0 2.4 7.2 4.0
Mean relative humidity (%) 86 87 87 86    87 88 91 92 88 84 85 85 88
Sky overcast or obscured (1) 45.9 46.9 53. t  49.7 64.9 75.0 62.8 76.3 63.2 41.6 41.0 42.9    63.9
Mean cloud cover (eighths) 6.2 6.3 6.6 6.5 7.1 7.4 7.6 7.4 6.9 6.1 6.0 5.9 7.0
Mean sea-level pressure (2) 997 998 1,007 1,008 1,011 1,013 1,016 1,013 1,010 1,008 1,002 1,002 1,009
Extreme max. sea-level pressure (2)    1,039  1,040 1,041 1,038 1,040 1,037 1,036 1,038 1,042 1,042 1,043 1,047 1,047
Exlreme rain. sea-level pressure (2) 953 958 955 968 972 976 964 982 975 965 959 957 953
Prevailing wind direction SE SW SW W SW SW SW SW W W W W SW
Thunder and lightning (1) 0                   *      '     0      ' 0 .......

 n) ~tae~ ~uencv.
 (2'J ~.
  ï¿½ 0.0.0.5%
l'hme dma am bull ul~e oe~'val~ ma~ by ~ in paN~e. Such tt~im te~l to avo~l bad weather ~ ~, ~S ~ ~ ~ ~&m ~ ~ ~.






                                                                                                                                     T-17



                                      METEOROLOGICAL TABLE FOR COASTAL AREA OFF ATTU
                                      Boundaries: Between 51'N. and 55'N., from 172ï¿½E. to 180i.


          Weather etement                 Jan.   Feb.   Mar.   Apr.   May  June   July   Aug.  Sept    Oct   Nov.   Dec.  Annual


Wind > 34 knots (1)                         10.9    9.3   ï¿½7.9    5.1    3.1    1.2    0.9    0.9    2.8    6.8   13.4    6.0               3.8
Wave height ;  10 feet (1)                  27;4   48.4   22.6   27.4    8.0    7.5    8.6    3.7    8.5   14.1   23.5   22.4              14.2
Visibility < 2 naut. mi. (1)                11.0   12.4   15.2    9.4   12.4   21.5   40.2   33.5   14.0    5.8    6.3    7.1              19.9
Precipitation (1)                          29.6   36.5   32.8   21.7   17.9   19.2   18.3   18.0   17.3   21.4   28.9   34.5               21.4
Temperature  > 85ï¿½F (1)                        0      0       0       0       0      0       0       0      0       0       0       0         0
Mean Temperature (ï¿½F)                       34.1   34.1   34.4   36.7   40.1   42.9   47.4   50.1   48.5   44.5   38.3   35.2              42.5
Temperature C 32ï¿½F (1)                      36.1   37.7   30.5   16.7    1.0         0       0       0      0       0    8.9   25.2         6.3
Mean relative humidity (%)                   86      87      88     -85     87      90      92     92      87      84      87     85         89
Sky overcast or obscured (1)                49.5   52.1   48.1   57.3   65.6   79.3   85.2   78.4   58.6   50.4   51.6   60.9              68.8
Mean cloud cover (eighths)                   6.3    6.6    8.5    6.7    7.0    7.5    7.6    7.3    6.6    6.3    6.4    6.8               7.1
Mean sea4-level pressure (2)                996    997  1.006  1,010  1,013  1,011  1,013  1,012  1,010  1,010  1,004  1,003   -1010
Extreme max. sealevel pressure (2)        1,034  1,032  1,036  1,042  1,052  1,055  1,052  1,046  1,036  1,044  1,044  1,047              1,055
Extreme min. sea-level pressure (2)         958    960    981    966    971    972    983    978    974    967    964    962                968
Prevailing wind direction                     E       N       N      W      W       W      SW     SW        W      W       W       W         W
Thunder and lightning (1)                      0       *      0       *       0      0       0       0       0      0       0       0


                                     METEOROLOGICAL TABLE FOR COASTAL AREA BRISTOL BAY
                                      Boundaries: Between 55ï¿½N. and 59ï¿½N., from coast to 165ï¿½W.


          Weather elements                Jan.   Feb.   Mar.   Apr.   May   June   July   Aug.  Sept    Oct.  Nov.   Dec.   Annual


Wind > 34 knots (1)                                                 3.1    1.9               *    1.8    3.7
Wave height >  10 feet (1)                                          4.9    6.8    1.8    5.6    4.9   10.0
Visibility < 2 naut. mi. (1)                                       14.6   18.8   24.9   25.2   26.0   17.1
Precipitation (1)                                                  18.2   16.3   10.0   15.6   18.3   16.8
Temperature > 85ï¿½F (1)                                                0       0      0       0       0       0
Mean Temperature (ï¿½F)                                              34.2   38.7   44.3   49.4   50.8   48.2
Temperature < 32ï¿½F (1)                                             31.7    7.4        *      0       0       0
Mean relative humidity (%)                                          90      87      90      92     91      88
Sky overcast or obscured (1)                                       55.0   57.6   60.3   70.6   77.9   49.8
Mean cloud cover (eighths)                                          6.5    6.6    6.7    6.9    7.4    6.4
Mean sea-level pressure (2)                                       1,013  1,011  1,012  1,015  1,011  1,007
Extreme max. sea-level pressure (2)                               1,040  1,039  1,037  1,034  1,035  1,033
Extreme min. sea-level pressure (2)                                969    979    978    988    983    968
Prevailing wind direction                                          NW      NW       W       W      SW    NW
Thunder and lightning (1)                                             0       0      0       0       0      0


                                  METEOROLOGICAL TABLE FOR COASTAL AREA AROUND ST. PAUL
                                      Boundaries:  Between 550N. and 59ï¿½N., from 165ï¿½W. to 172ï¿½W.


           Weather elements                 Jan.   Feb.   Mar.   Apr.   May   June   July   Aug.  Sept   Oct.   Nov.   Dec.   Annual


Wind > 34 knots (1)                                                 5.9    2.0    0.7    0.5    1.7    4.4    7.1
Wave height >  10 feet (1)                                         23.3    7.7    3.7    3.5    8.1   16.3   38.9
Visibility < 2 naut. mi. (1)                                       15.5   26.9   30.0   35.4   26.9   18.8    9.2
Precipitation (1)                                                  25.7   13.7   11.9   19.6   18.3   18.8   17.1
Temperature > 85ï¿½F (1)                                                0       0      0       0       0       0      0
Mean Temperature (ï¿½F)                                              32.0   36.5   42.1   47.2   48.7   46.5   41.1
Temperature C 320F (1)                                             50.3   15.0    1.3        0       0       0     1.4
Mean relative humidity (%)                                           88     90      91      92      91     88      83
Sky overcast or obscured (1)                                       56.1   704   77.0   77.9   76.1   58.5   46.8
Mean cloud cover (eighths)                                          6.7    7.0    7.3    7.3    7.4    6.8    6.6
Mean sea-level pressure (2)
Extreme max. sea-level pressure (2)
Extreme min. sea4evel pressure (2)
 Prevailing wind direction                                          NW        N    NW       SW       W     NW      NW
Thunder and lightning (1)                                             0       0      0       0       0       0      0

  1) Pon-tep feqncv.
    0.00.5%
 The data am buad won olevtina nmd-      l by  s ipu . t cp h ip S  b t o tend o  Nd bd w hn plosb, tus bhin V hl data towrd good weahr  nple.






T-18



                                     METEOROLOGICAL TABLE FOR COASTAL AREA OFF NUNIVAK
                                       Boundaries: Between 59ï¿½N. and 62ï¿½N., from coast to 171ï¿½W.


           Weather elements                 Jan.   Feb.   Mar.   Apr.   May   June   July   Aug.  Sept.   Oct   Nov.   Dec.   Annual


Wind > 34 knots (1)                                                                           *    1.1    3.6
Wave height ;  10 feet (1)                                                                  1.6    2.3    3.0
Visibility < 2 naut mi. (1)                                                               25.0   24.3    9.6
 Precipitation (1)                                                                         21.9   17.8   34.2
Temperature > 85ï¿½F (1)                                                                       0       0       0
Mean Temperature (ï¿½F)                                                                     46.9   47.6   46.6
Temperature < 32ï¿½F (1)                                                                       0       0       0
 Mean relative humidity (%)                                                                  90      92      89
Sky overcast or obscured (1)                                                              67.8   77.2   64.1
Mean cloud cover (eighths)                                                                 6.9    7.3    7.2
Mean sea-level pressure (2)                                                              1,014  1,011  1,007
Extreme max. sea-level pressure (2)                                                      1,031  1,029  1,028
Extreme min. sea-level pressure (2)                                                        990    985    984
Prevailing wind direction                                                                    S    SW         N
Thunder and lightning (1)                                                                    0       0       0


                                METEOROLOGICAL TABLE FOR COASTAL AREA AROUND ST. MATTHEW
                                      Boundaries: Between 59ï¿½N. and 62ï¿½N. from 171ï¿½W. to 178ï¿½W.


           Weather elements                 Jan.   Feb.   Mar.   Apr.   May  June   July   Aug.  Sept.   Oct   Nov.   Dec.   Annual


Wind > 34 knots (1)                                                                         1.3    2.6
Wave height > 10 feet (1)                                                                    0    5.3
Visibility < 2 naut mi. (1)                                                               32.7   28.1
 Precipitation (1)                                                                         11.0   22.3
Temperature > 85'F (1)                                                                       0       0
 Mean Temperature (ï¿½F)                                                                     46.9   47.5
Temperature 6 32'F (1)                                                                       0       0
Mean relative humidity (%)                                                                  90      92
Sky overcast or obscured (1)                                                              83.8   83.2
Mean cloud cover (eighths)                                                                  7.5    7.5
Mean sea-level pressure (2)                                                              1,013  1,007
Extreme max. sea-level pressure (2)                                                      1,028  1,027
Extreme min. sea-level pressure (2)                                                        990    981
Prevailing wind direction                                                                  SW        S
Thunder and lightning (1)                                                                    0       0


                                  METEOROLOGICAL TABLE FOR COASTAL AREA OFF ST. LAWRENCE
                                     Boundaries:  Between 62ï¿½N. and 86ï¿½N,, from 172ï¿½W. to the coast.


           Weather elements                 Jan.   Feb.   Mar.   Apr.   May  June   July   Aug.  Sept    Oct   Nov,   Dec.   Annual


Wind > 34 knots (1)                                                                         0.6       *    1.5
Wave height -  10 feet (1)                                                                  1.7    7.5    8.6
Visibility < 2 naut. mi. (1)                                                              20.3   13.0    7.8
Precipitation (1)                                                                          14.5   18.6   30.5
Temperature ) 85ï¿½F (1)                                                                       0       0       0
Mean Temperature (ï¿½F)                                                                     47.7   48.3   44.7
Temperature C 32"F (1)                                                                       0       0       *
Mean relative humidity (%)                                                                  89      88      86
Sky overcast or obscured (1)                                                              60.0   56.6   49.0
Mean cloud cover (eighths)                                                                  6.6    6.7    6.4
Mean sea-level pressure (2)                                                              1,013  1,009  1,009
Extreme max. sea-level pressure (2)                                                      1,029  1,026  1,035
Extreme min. sea-level pressure (2)                                                        981    985    987
Prevailing wind direction                                                                    S       N       N
Thunder and lightning (1)                                                                    0        *      0

  (1) Pr         qncy.
    In p0.0-05
Thaa daa  Ead war obaosn  roew mad by alveS In paa. Suand ae-, ltar to avolid bad  en po     n W     a         r good waor samle.







                                                                                                                                       T-19



                                 METEOROLOGICAL TABLE FOR COASTAL AREA OFF CAPE LISBURNE
                                    Boundaries:  Between 66ï¿½N. and 70ï¿½N., from 1700W. to the coast


          Weather ekements                 Jan.   Feb.   Mar.   Apr.   May  June   July   Aug.  Sept    Oct   Nov.   Dec.   Annual


Wind > 34 knots (1)                                                                        2.4    2.0    1.1
Wave height ;  10 feet (1)                                                                 1.2    2.6    0.9
Visibility < 2 naut. mi. (1)                                                              13.1   11.6    5.3
Precipitation (1)                                                                         17.0   24.3   30.2
Temperature > 85ï¿½F (1)                                                                       0       0      0
Mean Temperature (ï¿½F)                                                                     44.1   44.7   40.4
Temperature C 32ï¿½F (1)                                                                             1.0    5.0
Mean relative humidity (%)                                                                  89     89      88
Sky overcast or obscured (1)                                                              48.6   53.3   47.1
Mean cloud cover (eighths)                                                                 6.2    6.5    6.3
Mean sea-level pressure (2)                                                              1,011  1,008  1,009
Extreme max. sea-level pressure (2)                                                      1,027  1,026  1,033
Extreme min. sea-level pressure (2)                                                       994    982    988
Prevailing wind direction                                                                    S      S      NE
Thunder and lightning (1)                                                                    0       0      0


                                    METEOROLOGICAL TABLE FOR COASTAL AREA OFF BARROWY
                                      Boundaries: Between 70ï¿½N, and 74ï¿½N., from 5450W. to 170ï¿½W.


          Weather elements                 Jan.   Feb.   Mar.   Apr.   May   June   July   Aug.  Sept.   Oct.   Nov.   Dec.   Annual


Wind ; 34 knots (1)                                                                        0.9    0.7    1.0
Wave height ; 10 feet (1)                                                                  2.8    1.3       0
Visibility < 2 naut, mi. (1)                                                              19.0   11.1   11.9
Precipitation (1)                                                                         17.8   30.8   36.2
Temperature ; 850F (1)                                                                       0       0      0
Mean Temperature ('F)                                                                     38.9   38.0   30.6
Temperature < 32ï¿½F (1)                                                                    12.0   24.5   66.8
Mean relative humidity (%)                                                                 ï¿½89      89     93
Sky overcast or obscured (1)                                                              36.7   46.3   52.1
Mean cloud cover (eighths)                                                                 5.4    6.2    6.6
Mean sea-level pressure (2)                                                              1,015  1,012  1,013
Extreme max. sea-level pressure (2)                                                      1,030  1,033  1,028
Extreme min. sea-level pressure (2)                                                       988    983    985
Prevailing wind direction                                                                  NE        E      E
Thunder and lightning (1)                                                                            0       0

  (o)  eron terwuatcy .
  (2} tl#~el.
Ttea. dat u baed uon oateneato made by ahips in passage. Such ships lend to avdd had weather when posible. ths biasng the data toward good wealter sameros.


























                                                        MEAN SURFACE WATER TEMPERATURES (1) AND DENSITIES (D)

                               Jan Feb Mar                         Apr         May June                 July Aug                Bapt Ogt Nov Dec
         81~tlmm
                         J
                                  (D) Or) (D)   (lr) (D)   (T) (D)   (T) (D)   (1')   (D)
                             '~)C
                                                                                           (~TC)C
                                                                                                     (1')  (O)   (T)   (O)   (I)   (O)   (T)   (D)   (i') (ID) (1')   (D)
                                  ell                                                                      (D)
                                       ï¿½C   '~1   ~C    ï¿½1s   ï¿½C    ï¿½~t   ï¿½C 0tS   ï¿½C    ï¿½11               li  ï¿½C   ï¿½1s   ï¿½C ï¿½1s   ï¿½C    all   ï¿½C    ï¿½1s   ï¿½C ~11   eC    e111

Ketcl~J<sn                     44 5.2 21.0 5.1 21.6 5.4 21.8 6.4 21.7 8.9 20.6 12.2 19.1 13.8 18.5 14.0 18.3 12.0 18.7 9.5 18.5 7.2 18.5   5.8 19.g   8.8 19.8
 55'20'N., 131ï¿½38'W.
                         24 4.5  22.1 4.2 22.4 4.4 22.2 5.9 21.8 8.8 20.0 11.3 18.8 13.4 16.5 13.9 19.0 12.1 19.1 9.3 19.9 7.1 21.0   5.6  21.8 6.4  20.5
 $7ï¿½03'N., 135ï¿½20'W.
Juneau 29 2.2  21.2 2.1 21.8   2.8  21.9 4.5  20.9 7.6 15.2 10.3  10.7 11.0 9.3 10.6 10.0   9.1 11.7 6.6  14.4 4.6 18.0 3.2  20.4   6.2 16.3
 58'18'N., 134ï¿½25'W.
Skagway 22   2.5  23.2   2.2  23.3 2.3 23.2 3.4 23.0 6.7 17.9 9.9 8.0  10.6 3.5 10.2 3.4 8.8 9.1 6.5  16.2 4.4 20.3 3.3  22.4   5.8 16.1
 89'27'N., 135ï¿½19~V.
Yakutat 26   3.8  22.3 3.5  22.4 3.8  22.4 5.3 22.0   7.7 21.2 10.8 19.7 12.8 17.6 12.9 17.7 11.4 19.1 9.0 20.6   6.7 21.5 4.9  22.1 7.7  20.7
 59'33'N., 139'44~V.
Ccrdova 14 2.9  23.3 2.7 23.3   2.6 23.4 4.0 23.3   6.0 22.6   6.3 21.7 10.2 20.5 11.2 19.4 10.0 19.8 7.8  21.0 6.2  22.5 4.7 22.5   6.4 22.0
 60'33'N., 145ï¿½465N.
Seward 35   3.4 222    3.1 22.1 3.2 22.1 4.5 21.3   7.3 16.5 10.5   9.8 12.2 6.5  12.2 9.2 10.7 13.3 8.1 17.5   5.9 19.9 4.5  21.5 7.1
                                                                                                                                                              16.8
 60'06'N., 149'27'W.
Wcrirmns Bay 17 0.7  21.1 0.9 2t.6 1.5  22.5   3.6  22.4 6.4 19.0 0.7  16.1 11.3 17.0  11.7 20.2 10.0  19.8   6.9  20.9 4.0 20.7 1.8  21.8
                                                                                                                                                          5.6  20.2
 57'43ï¿½N., 152ï¿½31'W.
Anchorage 9 -0.9  14.3 -0.9 16.2   0.4 16.6 0.3 16.3 6.1 15.4 11.4 11.4 14.2 6.2 13.8 4.9  11.2 5.9   5.9   7.8   0.8    9.9 -6.6 12.3   5.1 11.4
 61ï¿½15ï¿½N., 149'53'W.
Massacre Bay 15   2.3  24.3   2.1  24.4 2.2 24.6 3.2  24.3 4.6  23.5 6.5 23.0 8.3 22.8 9.5  23.2   8.8  23.8   6.8  23.9 4.4 23.8   2.7  24.3 5.1  23.8
 52'48'N., 173'10'W.
Unalaska 12   2.5  21.5   2.0 21.7 2.4 22.2 3.6  21.5 5.2  20.0 7.3 19.9 8.9 21.1 9.5 22.0 8.3 21.1   6.1 20.3 4.5  21.5   3.1  21.6   5.3
                                                                                                                                                              21.2
 53'53'N., 166'325N.
Sweeper Cove 23 2.8  23.2   2.6 22.9 3.1 22.5   3.5  22.1 4.6 22.4 6.2  23.2 7.2  23.5 7.6 23.7 7.4 23.4 5.9 23.4 4.8  23.4 3.4 23.4 4.9
                                                                                                                                                              23.1
 51'51'N., 176'395N.

                                                                                 F (Fahrenheit) - 1.8C (Celsius) + 32
                           Perudry te ueed In this table b the ~ gravity Of the tea water or the milo hetwten the weloht of ï¿½ tea-water lainpie and the wetoht of tat equal vohatle of ~ wlt~
                         at 16ï¿½ï¿½ (SO*F). ~ flour. rd)remmtino demiit,/et 16'0 ( p,, ) ,we expnmmHi In thrnm of .lgauPt ( ï¿½t ) where t = lSï¿½C and ï¿½~ = ( p,, - 1) 1000. Thus, for p. - 1.02U,
                         "is ;B 2.3.8.






                                                                                                                                             T-21

                                                       DA'11[S OF ~E BREAKUP AND F1R~




                                                                    ,~iJH 01 Ablak!

Tetkeatna ............................... clo....,: ..............JMay  4/12/41  5/25/52    t~ac. 2 11/12/39                 12123/47       12 1619 - 1652
Kaldlo! ................................ YJ~k~l River ............. ~-, 3/27/41  4129/46    OEC. 3 11/13/45 12/24/48                       1        1637 - 1947
                                                   I~
K(mEd ..................................IK~i Riv~' .............. ,~o(r, 3/16/62  ', 4/14161    Dec. 10       11/23/51      12/26/37 1637 - 1662
Anchorage ........................... ~htr. 29
                         IShtp Creek ...............
                                                            2/16/44 4/'17/42    Nov. 24                11/10/35 12/10/36 21                  1615 - 1653

                                                                     ae~g Sea
Egegik ................................ Egegik River ............. Apr, 14  6/16141  51 'i/38    Dec, ï¿½ 12    11/12142 1/11/39 10                    1937 - 1952
N&knek ............................... NelmekRiver ............ Apr. 6  3/19t41 4125/49 Nov. 17 10/17139                    12/15/17 7 1616 - 1951
Koggiung ............................. Kvichak River ............ May 4 4/26138 5/13/40    Dec. 22 11/23/39                  1130/41 3 1937 - 1940
Dillingham ............................ Nustiagak Bay ........... May    6 4/25/26  5/27/52 Nov.  r 7 10/16/32 12/22/40 19 1919 ' 1962
Ka~k .............................. do .................... I~lGy 2 4/17/40      6/22/39     Nov. 20 10/14142 12/21/38 4 1937 - 1943
Ptel~um .............................. Goodnews Bay .......... May 1 4/ 6/42 5/26/52. Nov. 19 10/23130 12/12/47 12 1926 - 1952
Kwinhagak ........................... Kuskokwim Bay ......... May 1  4/10/45 5/17/46 Nov, 15 10/20/29 12/2C,/38 10                                   1929 - 1952
Bethel ................................. Kuskokwim River May 15    4/24/40       5/28/52    Oct.  29 10/ 8/28 11/24/51 27 1923 - 1952
Cfooknd ~eek ........................ do .................... May' 7 4/22/40     6/23/52 Nov. 18 11/ 3/39                    12/ 2/52 12 1937 - 1952
McGrath ................................. do .................... May   10  4/24/40  5/24/52 Nov. 5 10/23/41 11/15t52 12 1939 - 1952
Meko~uk Nunivak Island ........ Mekoo/uk River ......... May 12 4/18/50 5130146 Nov. 27 11/20/52 12/13/47 5 1943 - 1951
~11, SL Lawrence Island.. '                       May 26           5/ 1/43 71 1t50    Nov. 21 10/15/49 12/14/40 10 1940 - 1952
Savoonga, St. Lawerence
  Island ............................................................ May 26  4/25148  6/17145 Nov. 10 9/30/30 12/13/40                    10 1929 - 1949
Hooper Bay ......................... Hooper Bay .............. May 26  5/15/42 6/ 4/45 Nov. 12 10/19/26 11/20/41 4 1926 - 1945
St. Michael .......................... Norton Sound ........... June 9 5t19/12 7/ 3t01 Nov.  10 10/10/64 12/ 7/61                           53 1874 - 1952
Unelakloot ........................... UnaTakleet River ........ May 17 4t28/40  5/30/52 Oct. 25 10/8/39 ' 11/19/37                         14 1937 - 1952
Moses Point ......................... Kwiniuk River ............ May 24 5/ 2/51 6/11149    Oct. 20 10/ 1/51 11/ 2/52 6                               1943 - 1952
Goiovin ............................... Golovnin Bay ............ May 23 5/13140  6114/39    Nov. 2 10/ 8/42 11/19/37 6 1937. 1943
White Moonbain .................... Fish River ................ May 21  6/5/40 6/2/37 Oct. 14                  9/27/31       II/ 9/25 24 1923 - 1951
Solomon .............................. Solomon River .. ........ May 20  5/ 1/42 5/30/45    Oct. 29 10110/40 11/29/48                       10 1940. 1982
Council Niukluk River ............ May 17                          4/27/40       5/31/52 Oct. 30              10113/20       11/ 9140 12 1920. 1952
Nome ................................. Norton Sound May 29         4128142       6128/48    Nov.  12 10/13/16 12113/47 50 1900. 1952
Teller .................................. Grant!ey Harbor ......... June 7 5/12/36  8/18/39 Nov. 10 10/13/42 12/26/50                       16 1936 - 1952

                                                                     Yukon River
Akulumk .............................. Kwikluak Pass ........... May 27 5/20/42 6/ 4120    Oct.  24 10/11/39 11/ 7/23 14 1917 - 1948
Hamilton .............................. 22 May 22 5I 6/40 61 5/52    OCt. 25 10/15/39 11/ 2/38 14 1938. 1952
Azacharak ............................ 85 - May 20                 5/ 3/38 61 6/52 Nov.  13 11/ 1/39                         12/22/49 12             1937 - 1952
Pilot $talion ......................... 115       May 17           5/ 1/26       5/24/24 Nov,   8             10/27/24 11/13125 5 1924. 1643
Russlsn Mission .................... 195 May 12 4125/40 5/25/39 Nov. 4                                        10121/28 11/15/37 8 1926 - t944
Holy Cross .......................... 257 Nau0cal May 17          .4/25/40       5/28/52    Oct.   31 10/12/31 11130t34 32 1917. 1952
G_~~na ................................ 481 miles May   17 5/ 6/51 5/26/52 Nov.   6 10/11147 12/.8/50 10                                             1943 - 1952
Ruby .................................. 526 - above May 15         4/30/40 5/PP/20 NOV. 7 10/28/17 11/18/37                                 11 1917. 1646
Tanene ............................... 628 Apoon May 14 4/29/40 5/25t35 Nov. 4 10/13/30 11122/37 33 1917 - 1952
                                      Pass
Rampart .............................. 688        May 16 5/ 1/30                 5/25/52 Nov. 6 10/13/30                     11/23/45 21 1917. 1952
Fort Yukon .......................... 896         May 14           5/ 7/40       5/22/27 Oct. 28 10/14141 11115/52 30 1918. 1952
(~oal Creek .......................... 1,002      May   12 .51 7/43 5/15145 Nov. 9 11/ 1/38 11/20/40                                         8       1938 . 1950
Ea~le .................................. 1,089 May 9 4/25/40                     5/18/52 Nov. 19.             10/18/30 12/11t49 29                   1917 - 1952
Dawson, Cm~da ................... 1,197           May 8 4128/40                  5/16/45    Nov.  17 11/ 3/41 12/18/42 12 1917. 1947

                                                                     Arctic Ocean
'.'Jales ................................. Berincl Strait ............. June 8 5/15/47 . 6/30/49    Dec. 3 10/ 8/48          1/ 8/61 16              1927 - 1952
ï¿½ ~hishmeref ........................... Arctic Ocean ............ June 22 5130136 7/ 8/33 Nov. 10            101 6/39 12/18/34 15 1921 - 1952
Candle ................................ Kiwalik River ............. Msy 18 5/ 5/43  5/27/27    Oct. 17 10/10/42 10123/43 8 1922 - 1650
L1eering ............................... Inmachuk River. ........ June 4 5/11/43 6/30/41 Oct. 23 10/ 3/46 11/ 4/41 4 1937. 1948
KolzelXle ............................. Kot2ebue Sound ........ May 31 5/17140   6/8~45    Oct.  23 10/ 2/39                 11/ 5/36 14 1929. 1952
selewik ............................... selewik River ............ May 25 5/13/40  5/ 7/45 OCt. 17 101 3/46 10130t38 12                              1927 - 1952
Noorvik ............................... Kobuk River ............. May 29 5/18/25,  6II1/22    Oct. 11 9126148    ' 10/25t22                 17 1918 ï¿½ 1952
Kiana ..................................... do ...........~ ........ May 18 5t 7/40 5/29139    OCL 18 10/10/39 11/ 4t38                      6       1936 - 1944
Kobuk .................................... do .................... May 19 5111/43  5/29/45 OCt.  21           10/ 9/39       111 2/38 12 1937 - 1952
Shungnak ............................... do ..............' ...... May 21  5112141 5/29/45 OCt. 16            10/ 7/19 10/25140 6 1919 - 1950
Kivalina ............................... Kivalina Riveï¿½ ............ May 22 5/15/43 5/27/49    Oct. 25 10115/48 11/ 1/46 6 1943 - 1952
Point Hope .......................... Arctic Oceen ............ June 20  5130/27 7/ 8/46 Nov. 11 10/ 6/42 12/19/47 8                                 1927 . 1951
Point Lay ................................ do .................... June 24 6/ 1/43 7t10/53 Nov. 4             10/12/43 11/27/48 4 1943 - 1953
Wainwright .............................. do .................... June 29 6/ 7144 7/26/45 Oct. 2               9/26/46       10/ 9/45 7              1939 - 1953
Point Barrow ........................... do .................... July 22  6/15/44  8/22131    OCt. 3 8/31127                 12119147 31             1920. 1953





  T-22


                             COASTAL WARNING DISPLAYS

                                                DAYTIME SIGNALS

      SMALL CRAFT                         GALE                           STORM                         HURRICANE
        ADVISORY                       WARNING                          WARNING                         WARNING











                                             NIGHT (LIGHT) SIGNALS

       SMALL CRAFT                         GALE                           STORM                         HURRICANE
         ADVISORY                       WARNING                         WARNING                         WARNING











                                              EXPLANATION OF DISPLAYS


  So8"_ Craft Advehm. One RED pennant displayed by day and a RED light ABOVE a WHITE light at night, to alert mruiners to
sustained (more than two hours) weather or sea- conditions, either present or forecast, that might be hazardous to small boats.
Mariner leoming of a Small Craft Advisory are urged to determine imredatey the reason by tuning their radios to the latest marine
broarcasls. Decision as to the degree of hazard will be left up to the boatman, based on his experience and size and type of boat.
The threshold conditons for the Smal Craft Advisory are usually 18 knots of wind (less than 18 knots in some dangerous waters) or
hazardous wave conditions.

  Gale WanMng: Two RED pennas displayed by day and a WHITE light ABOVE a RED light at might tO indicate that winds within
the range 34 to 47 knots are forecast for f  area.

  Storm Warnng: A single square RED flag with a BLACK center displayed during daytime and two RED lights at night to indicate
tut winds 48 knots and above, no manelr how high the speed are forecast for the area. However, if the winds are associated with a
tropical cyclone (hurricane) the STORM WARNING display indicates that winds within the range 48 to 63 knots are forecast.

  H.Nferdc     Wnlg: Displayed only in connection with a tropical cyclone (hunricar). Two square RED flags with BLACK centers
dplayed by day and a WHITE light between two RED lights at night to indicate that winds 64 knots and above are forecast for the
aee.

  Hots: A "HURRICANE WATCH" is a  announcement issued by the National Weather Service via prss and radio and telewviion
broadcasts whenva     a t.ropicl ton  or huricae becomes a tireat to a coatal area. The "Huricane Watch" announcement is not
a warning, rather it intdicate that the hurricane is nearw enough that everyone in the area covered by the "Watch" should listen to their
ralao fcr Suehqunt advisories and be ready to take precautionary action in case hurricane wamrnings re issued.

 Note: As of 1 February 1989 the Nalional Weather Service discontinued its operation of the above visual system. Some local
organizations, however, continued this program using information from a NOAA Weather Radio or some similar source for activating
or ending their display. A SPECIAL MARINE WARNING BULLETIN is issued whenever a severe local storm or strong wind of brief
duration is imminent and is not covered by existing warnings or advisories. Boaters will be able to receive these special warnings by
keeping tuned to a NOAA VHF.FM radio station or to Coast Guard and commercial radio stations that transmit marine weather
information,

















                                                                                                                PACIFIC OCEAN DISTANCES
                                                                                                                           (Nautical Miles)

                                                                                                          Figure at intersection of columns opposite ports In
                                                                                                          question Is the nautical mileage between the two.
                                                                                                          Example: San Francisco, Calif., Is 2,091 nautIcal
                                                                                                          miles from Honolulu, Hawaii.


                       4b





2667                                             &
2939    94         ~        ~       ,'. &- 0
2939    95                                                           . 
2=70  '75-5         31             
3003   969   90a   904   507            Q)   4 s                  ' $: "
3606  1074   992   9019  652    85               r'                                   P
3920 I104  1024_  020   603   153   238 -
            -    ---to                                                             
4044  1228  114$  1144  007   278   36?   124   134
4307  1575  1497  1493  1156   660   74        5-    I   89' SiO                   p      .
4538  1723  1643  1639  1302   815   900   -        601 815   224                     ,d         6       . 
4603  1787  1707  1703  1366  883   96    -         739  916'   307    65                    a       s
4994 2174  20922069174561239 1324-    11001234   713479   400                                 '                                      . t
4940  2124  2043  2040  1702  1242  1327 -1100 .W123    682   494   422   144                 ~       O 
6117  2303  2223  2220  AM02  1435  1520   -    1294  1428 092   700   641   385   274                            44
4924  2115  2034  2031  1693  1261  1346   -    1124   25    742   564   505   260   175   242                    'i  f       . -
5226  2412 2331  2328  1990  1626  111   -    1510  1644  1193  1027  967   761   652   668   505                                 6' 'b              t       P *4     n
S004  2606  2725  2722  2403  2071  2156   -    1973  2107  1656  1490  1450  1224  1115  1151   966   463                     -                    .
4527  2175  2143  2140  2019  2214  2299  2260            2364  2396  2410  2447  2524  2439  2542  2296  2126  2196
4594  2219  2163  2160  2061  2235  2320  2276            2400  2405  2412  2445  2513  2432  2535  2289  2116  2164    63
4609  2212  2173  2170  2036  2207  2292  2245            2369  2361  2365  2398  2463  2377  2479  2233  2044  2099   121    85 
4605  2218  2236  2233  209M  2246  2331  2285   -    2409  2383  2365 '2411  246   2373 2477  2230  2020  2061 MI61 140    89                        'c'.   I
4690  2263  2241  2230  2096  2251  2336  2290   -    2414  2368  2390  2416  2473  2378  2462  2235  2024  2057   2011  I451  94               91       9 1
4767  2330  2264  2281  2126  2262  2347  2269            2413  2360  2361  23Me  2429  2332  2440  2M14  1963  1909   267   2301  161    661   921
4777  2347  2302  2299  2146  2261  23662306              2432  2367  2360  2407  2445  2351  2459  2203  1972  1990   297  240I 1931  106   1021   211
5707  3097  3034  3031  2792  2724  2809  2694   -    2810  2570  2481  2472  2386  2250  2305  2066  1680  1460  1336 112761 1232 1 1150 1146611069 11042

                            Via Inside passage






















                                                                                                                          GULF OF ALASKA DISTANCES
                                                                                                                                              (atclMiles)


                                                                                                       Figure at intersection of columns opposte Porns in question Is-the nautica
                                                                                                       mileage between the two. Exampl.- Anchorage is 88 nautical miles froth Port
                                                                                                       Valdez.






           19f      9


       739  25     162       6



                                                                      4-~-
1100   204         562      478        0       25         7


1113      647      542       492      41         9         6       96
1076      617      $27       467      395      288    e s          63        64-*
1100      842      553       494      422       312      146       14       125       61                                            1                                     P
1167      710      636   Sao          514    -411        260      257       239      172      14
117       729      647       59t      526      422       270      287       249      103      ISO        16

1124  UT7          613       684      $05      414       262      260'    261        201      175       ItS      1261   242j
1200      762      6N9       626      571      480       339      337       3l7      254      226       138      1491   26-M0
1301      674                                                                                                                       a l   IS 71  3I0  0   0   l   9   0   1  2   4   0
1394      953      692       865   Oil          730      597      595       574   sit         465       395    40         521  J338          273J 12 
1473     1064     1016  No0           926   844          711      709       669      626      60       510       521I   6381    4531  NO6             2381    1361
1510     1120     1064      1027   gal         897       763      761       742      678      662       562      5731    sea    WSo          4401    26911871             06





















                     ï¿½
                                                                                           BERING SEA AND ARCTIC OCEAN DISTANCES
                         ï¿½          -                                                                                   (Nautical Miles)

                                                                                ,..u,.
                                                                                      at intersection of column, opposite ports in question is the nautical
/'~-/.~  '/. ~, .~~/..~-. '~/-/ .~t / / / /'.>.. mileage between the two. Example: Port Moller is 618 nautical miles from Nome.
                                                  I /

4. 4,7
                 'I/'I " - .   .
                                                        ...I /
014  556 175 / e~
672  618 235   79        /
605 746  368  222 167         t
633  777  396  249 165   33 /
254  23,  387  501 526  604 632 /
208  256 627  769  809  920 934 335
277 325 694 ,32  871 976  991 381 8, /
377 425 779  912  945 1029 1056 437 198  11, /
384 432 785 919  951 1036 1062 444  207 130 72
                                                     .I
307 343 662  7,, 617  993  921  302 196 179  202  208 /
421 464 776 903  631 1007 1034 415  310 293 315  322
                                                       120 /
472 4,5  676 775  763 ,30  ,54  304 452  4,59 486  493 340
                                                           454
 706 721 607  982  981 1015 1037  528  676  684  711
                                                  71,  565 679  259 /
 711  124  900  985  984 101, 1040 52, 676 685 712 719  566 660  260   53 /
 737 750  026 1011 1009 1044 1066  6,55 703 712 738  744 592
                                                           706 286   86 35          .I
 666 699  675  960  966  990 1015  504 652 660 667  693  541 65,5  235 65
                                                                          5, 66 /
 646 669  835  920  619  950  975  470 616  625 653 659  507 620  200 116 110 126 62 /
 642  654  630  915  914  945  ,70 '468  621 626 666 662. 510 624 209  229
                                                                         230 254  1,7 139         i
 706  720  896  961  980 1013 1036  ,35  667  695  722  728 576 690
                                                                276 226  225 244 179 119 151             /
 702 7t5  691- 976  975 1006 1031 629 682 669 717  723  571 685  270  222
                                                                         219  238  174 114 125 57 /
 900  94, 1069 1174 1173 1206 1229  727  880  687 915
                                                  921 76'  883 468 420 417 436  372  312  323 255  198 /
 666  681 1057 1142 1141 1174 1197 6,5  646  655  683  689 737 650 436
                                                                     366  385  404  340 279  291 223 166I 1721    /
    1011 1167 1272 1271 1304 1327  925  678  985 1012 1016  866 960  566
                                                                     518  615  534 470 409 420 354 296I 3021 130)    /
1076 1092 1268 1353 1352 138,5 1408  906 1059 1066 1094 1100  94, 1061
                                                                647  599  596  615  551 490  502 436  3771 3,31 2111 661 /
1155 t167 1343 1428 1427 1460 1483  962 1134 1141 1169 1175 1023 1137 722 674 672 690 626
                                                                                       566  577 510 4521 4681 2861 1611
                                                                                                                       771    / "'1
                                                                                                                                                             I
1428 1440 t616 1701 1700 1733 1756 1255 1407 1414 1442 1448 1296 1410 995
                                                                     947 945  963 ,99  ,3, 550  763
                                                                                                    7251 7321 5601 4341 3501 2741    /
1490 1503 t676 1763 1762. 1795 1819 1317 1469 1477 1507 1,13 1358 1472
                                                                1056 1010 1007 1026  961 901 ,12 846 7871 7941 6211 496[ 4121 3'71 621    /





T-26

                                     Radio Bearing Conversion Table
                                             Table of correctiona in minutes
                                  [DIFFERENCE OF LONGITUDE IN DEGREES]



      Mid. L         Y,' 1' 1~4'  2'   2~'   3'   S)~' 4'   4)~'   5' 5h'   6' 6)~' 7' ?~'  11~   8~;   9'  ' 9~'  10'

15'. .............................. 4    8    12 16 19   23    27   $1 35 40    43   47 . 50   54    58   62 S6    70   74 78
16'. .............................. 4 8 12    17 21 25   29   33   37 41 45    S0    S4   58    82   86    70 74    79   83
17.. .............................. 4 9 13 18   22   26    31 35   39   44    4    53    57   61 66  70    75   79   83   88
18'. .............................. 5 9 13    19   23   28   32. 37   42 48    S1   56   80    as 70    74   79   83   8~    93
  8'. ......................... ..... S 10 15   20 24    28   34   3e   44 49    54    5S 63 56 78
                                                                                                   ~
                                                                                                              &3 U 93 98
20'. .............................. 5 10 15   21 26   31 36   41 416    SI 61)    62   d7    72 77   82    87   82   96 103
21'. .............................. 5 11 16 21 27 32   38   43   48 54    59   64   70 75    81 86    91 97   I~   108
22'. .............................. 6    11 17 22 28    34   39 45   51   56   62    67   73    78   84   90   il6 101 107 112
23'. .............................. 6 12 18    23   29    3S   41   47   53    S8 64   70 76 &?. 61)8   94 100 1~ 111 117
24'. .............................. 6 12 18 24   31   37   43   49   55    61 ~/   73   78   85   ' 92   98 104 110 116 122
25'. .............................. 6    13 19 25   32   38   44    51 57   93   70   78   82 88   9S 101 1M 114 120   127
26ï¿½. .............................. 7 13 20    26   33   39   46   53   59   86   72   79   86   92   88   105 112   118 125 131
27' ............................... 7 14   20   27   34 41 48    54   61 61)  76   82 ~ 89   95 102   109 110   123 129 161)
26'. .............................. 7 14 21   26   35 42 48    61)   eG   70   77    84 92    08 1M,  113 120 127 134 141
211". .............................. 7 15    21 29   36 44    $1 61)   85 73    M)   67 08  102 108 116 124 131 161)  145
30'. .............................. 7 15    22   30   38 45   53   ~)   61)    75   83   90 ~ 08  108 113 120 127 135 143   150
31ï¿½. .............................. 8    15   23    31 39   46    54 63    70 77 as   93 . 100   161) 116 124 131 138 146   155
32* ............................... 8 16    24 32 40 48    56    64 72    ?GI 87   95  103   111 111) 127 135 143   151 161)
33'. .............................. 8    16   25   33 41 49    57 65 74 62   90   08  106' 114   123   .131 139 147 155 163
34', .............................. 8 17   25    34 42 50   58   67 75   94   92   101 log 117 121 134   143 151 15~   1as
35'. .............................. II   17 26    34 43    52 60   69 77   88   as    105 112   120 1211 138 146   1~ 163 172
36'. .............................. 8 18    26   35 44 53   63    71  73   88    97 106 115' 123 132 141 150  159 108    176
37.. .............................. 9 18 27   26    45   54 63   72 el   90    99  108 117 126 135 144   153 1113 172 181
38'. .............................. 9    16   28    37 46    55   65    74 83    92 102 111, 120 129 138 148 157  I~   175 1~
38' ...........................- .... 9 19   28   38 47   57   66 75 85 94 104 113   123 132   142 151 163    170 179 189
40'. .............................. 10 19 29    39 48    58  63   77 87  08   106 118' i25 135 145 154 164   174 183 18~
41'. .............................. 10   20   30   39 48   58   (~t   791 el)  as   106 118 128 138 148 157 167   177 1117 197
.~2_'. .............................. 10    2O   3O   40   SO   eO    7O as 90  100   110 120' 130 140   161 161   171 181 181  201
43'. .............................. 10    20    31 41   51   61 72   63 92 102 113  123  133   143 153 164 174 164 194  2Mi
~4'. .............................. 10    21   31   42    52 63   73   B3 94   104 115 126 135   146   161) 167 177 161)   126  20e
45'. .............................. 11 21 32   42    S.tl  64    ?4 85   115 106 117 12"/ 138 148 15ï¿½t  170   180 191' 201 212
48'. .............................. 11 22   32 43    54    65 78   86    97   108 118 129  140 151 163  173 183   194 205   216
t7' ............................... 11   22 33 44 61)   68    17 08    eg   110 121 132 143   154  165   178 1as 197 208   219
4-8ï¿½. .............................. 11   22    33 45 56    67 78    88   100 111 123 134 145 156 187 178  lgG  201  212  223
18'. .............................. 11 23    34 45   57   68 79 111 102 113   125   136 147 156  ' 170 161 192 ~1  215  226
~ï¿½. .............................. 11 23    34   46   57    69   80   92  103   115  126   136 148  ISl 172   184  1as    L:N)7  218  230
51'. .............................. 12   23   35 47' 61)    70   82  23   105 117   122 140   lS2  183   175 1as   108    210   221 233
52'. .............................. 12    24 35 47 5~ 71   83   85   106   118   130 142   154 1eS 177 189  201  213  225   23~
:~'. .............................. 12    24 36    48   60   ?2   B4  08 108   1['0 132 144 156  156 180  163  204 216 238   240
-~'. .............................. 12    24 38 49   61 73    6S   97 100   121  133 148  161)    170 162   i94  288   2111  231  243
~-ï¿½'. .............................. 12   25   37 49   81 74 56   98 111 123 135 147 160   172  184 197 ~ 221  233   248
~,~'. .............................. 12   25 37 50   62    ;'5    87 100 112 124   137 146 162 174 187 108   211 224 ~56  248
:)7'. .............................. 13    26   3s    so 63 7,;   61)  101 113 126   13s 151   ?~ le 1as 201 214   :,ae  239   26::,
-~'. ........................: ..... 13   25  61)  51 64 711 e~   i02 115  ~27 140 153   le~ 173 lel  204  21e  223  242  254
:~'. .............................. 13   26   39    $1 64 77 O0  103 11(I  129   141 154  167   120 103  206   219  231  244   257
~'. .............................. 13    26   3e ,':2   ss    7e ;)1 104   117  130 143 156  160 !e2   tas   ~oe aal  ~4   247  2eo


     ~.xample. A ship in latitude 39ï¿½51 'N., longitude 67"35' W., by dead reckoning, obtains a radio bearing of 299' true on the
radiobeacon located in latitude 40"37'N., longitude 69'37' W.
     Radiobeacon station .................................................................................................................................... Latitude 40'37' N.
     Dead-reckoning position of ship .............................................................................................................. Latitude 39'51'

                Middle lalitucle ........................................................................................................................... 40'14'
     Radiobeacon station .................................................................................................................................... Longitude 69'37' W.
     Dead.reckoning position of ship: ............................................................................................................. Longitude 67'35'

                Longitude difference ................................................................................................................ 2'02'

     Entering the table with diffMence of longitude equal 2', which i11 the nearest tabulated value and opposite 40' middle latitude,
the correction of 39' is read,
     As the ship is east of the radiobeacon, a minus correction is applied. The Mercator bearing then will be 299' - 000'39' =
298'21'. To facilitate ~otling, subtract 180' and plot from the position of the radiobeacon lhe bearing 298'21' - 180', or 118'21'
(Mercator bearing reckoned clockwise from true n~rth).





                                                                                                                   T-27


                                    Dilatnce of Visibility of Objects at Sea

 This table gives the qaproximate geoaphic range of visibility lor an object which may be seen by an observer at sea level. It is
necessary to add to the distance for the height ol any object the distance corresponding to the height of the observer's eye above
sea level.
  Distances of visibility for objects of varius elevations above sea level.

             Height      Naical       Slute        Height       Height      Nautical     Statute       Height
             Feet        mile         mis         metes         Foot         miles       miles        meMrs
                1          1;2          1.3         0.30         120         12.8         14.7         36.58
                2          1.7          1.9         0.61         125          13.1        15.1         38.10
                3          2.0          2.3         0.91         130         13.3         15.4         39.62
                4          2.3          2.7         1.22         135         13.6         15.6         41.15
                5          2.6          3.0         1.52         140          13.8        15.9         42.67
                6          2.9          3.3         1.83         145          14.1        16.2         44.20
                7          3.1          3.6         2.13         150         14.3         16.5         45.72
                8          3.3          3.8         2.44         160         14.8         17.0         48.77
                9          3.5          4.0         2.74         170         15.3         17.6         51.82
               10          3.7          4.3         3.05         180         15.7         18.1         54.86
               11          3.9          4.5         3.35         190         16.1         18.6         57.91
               12          4.1          4.7         3.68         200         16.5         19.0         60.96
                13          4.2          4.9         3.968        210         17.0         19.5         64.01
                14          4.4          5.0         427          220         17.4         20.0         67.06
                15          4.5          5.2         4.57         230         17.7         20.4         70.10
                16          4.7          5.4         4.88         240         18.1         20.9         73.15
                17          4.8          5.6         5.18         250         18.5         21.3         76.20
                18          5.0          5.7         5.49         260         18.9         21.7         79.25
                19          5.1          5.9         5.79         270         19.2         22.1         82.30
               20          5.2          6.0         6.10         280          19.6        22.5         85.34
                21          5.4          6.2         6.40         290          19.9        22.9         88.39
                22          5.5          6.3         6.71         300          20.3        23.3         91.44
                23          5.6          6.5         7.01         310         20.6         23.7         94.49
                24          5.7          6.6         7.32         320         20.9         24.1         97.54
                25          5.9          6.7         7.62         330         21.3         24.5        100.58
                26          6.0          6.9         7.92         340         21.6         24.8        103.63
                27          6.1          7.0         8.23         350         21.9         25.2        105.68
                28          6.2          7.1         8.53         360         22.2         25.5        109.73
                29          6.3          7.3         8.84         370         22.5         26.9        112.78
                30.         6.4          7.4         9.14         380         22.6         26.2        115.82
                31          6.5          7.5         9.45         390          23.1        26.6        118.87
                32          6.6          7.6         9.75         400          23.4        26.9        121.92
                33          6.7          7.7        10.06         410         23.7         27.3        124.97
                34          6.8          7.9        10.36         420         24.0         27.6        128.02
                35          6.9          8.0        10.67         430         24.3         27.9        131.06
                36          7.0          8.1        10.97         440         24.5         28.2        134.11
                37          7.1          8.2        11.28         450         24.8         28.6        137.16
                38          7.2          8.3        11.58         460         25.1         28.9        140.21
                39          7.3          8.4        11.89         470         25.4         29.2        143.26
                40          7.4          8.5        12.19         480          25.6        29.5        148.30
                41          7.5          8.6        12.50         490         25.9         29.8        149.35
                42          7.6          8.7        12.80         500          26.2        30.1        152.40
                43          7.7          8.8        13.11         510         26.4         30.4        155.45
                44          7.8          8.9        13.41         520          26.7        30.7        158.50
                45          7.8          9.0        13.72         530         26.9         31.0        161.54
                46          7.9          9.1        14.02         540          27.2        31.3        164.59
                47          8.0          9.2        14.33         550          27.4        31.6        167.64
                48          8.1          9.3        14.63         560         27.7         31.9        170.69
                49          8.2          9.4        14.94         570          27.9        32.1        173.74
                50          8.3          9.5        15.24         580          28.2        32.4        176.78
                 55          8.7         10.0        16.76         590         28.4         32.7        179.83
                60          9.1         10.4        18.29         600          28.7        33.0        182.88
                 65          9.4         10.9        19.81         620         29.1         33.5        188.98
                 70          9.8         11.3        21.34         640         29.5         34.1        195.07
                 75         10.1         11.7        22.86         660         30.1         34.6        201.17
                 80         10.5         12.0        24.38         680         30.5         35.1        207.26
                 85         10.8         12.4        25.91         700         31.0         35.6        213.36
                 90         11.1         12.8        27.43         720         31.4         36.1        219.48
                 95         11.4         13.1        28.96         740         31.8         36.6        225.55
                100         11.7         13.5        30.48         760         32.3         37.1        231.65
                105         12.0         13.9        32.00         780         32.7         37.6        237.74
                110         12.3         14.1        33.53         800         33.1         36.1        243.84
                115         12.5         14.4        35.05         820         33.5         38.6        249.94

 Ezanpt Determine the geographic visibility of an object. with a height above water of 65 fet for an observer with a height of eye
 of 35 teet. Enter above table;
  Height of object                                                   65 1eet                       9.4 autical miles
  Height of observer                                                 35 feet                       6.9 rnAcl miles
  Computed geographic visibility                                                                  16.3 nautical miles





T-28

               Conversion of Degrees to Points and Vice Versa


                       Points                    '                 Points
 000    00      N                           180      00      S
 002    49                                  182      49
 005    38      N M2 E                      185      38      S h/ W
 008    26                                  188      26
 011    15      NxE                         191      15      SxW
 014    04                                  194      04
 016    53      NxE/2E                      196      53      SxW1/2 W
 019    41                                  199      41
 022    30      NNE                         202      30      SSW
 025    19                                  205      19
 028    08      NNE 1/2 E                   208      08      SSW t/2 W
 030    56                                  210      56
 033    45      NE x N                      213      45      SW x S
 036    34                                  216      34
 039    23      NE  2 N                     219      23      SW 1/2 S
 042    11                                  222      11
 045    00      NE                          225      00      SW
 047    49                                  227      49
 050    38      NE 1/2 E                    230      38      SW 1/2 W
 053    26                                  233      26
 056    15      NE x E                      236      15      SW x W
 059    04                                 - 239     04
 061    53      NE x E ï¿½/2 E                241      53      SW xW Y2 W
 064    41                                  244      41
 067    30      ENE                         247      30      WSW
 070    19                                  250      19
 073    08      ENE I  E                    253     '08      WSW Y W
 075    56                                  255      56
 078    45      E x N                       258      45      WxS
 081    34                                  261      34.
  084    23      E ï¿½ N                       264      23.    W  
  087    11                                  267      11
  090    00      E                           270      00      W
  092    49                                  272      49
  095    38      E 1/2S                      275      38      W /2 N
  098    26                                  278      26
  101    15      ExS                         281      15     WxN
  104    04                                  284      04
  106    53      ESE h2 E                    286      53      WNW M2 W
  109    41                                  289      41
  112    30      ESE                         292      30      WNW
  115    19                                 -295      19'
  118    08      SE x E /2 E                 298      08      NW x W 1/2 W
  120    56                                  300      56
  123    45      SE x E                      303      45      NW x W
  126    34                                  306      34
  129    23      SE Y2 E                     309      23      NW Y2 W
  132    11                                  312      11
  135    00      SE                          315      00      NW
  137    49                                  317      49
  140    38      SE M S                      320      38      NW Y2 N
  143    26                                  323      26
  146    15      SEx S                       326      15      NW x N
  149    04                                  329      04
  151    53      SSE 2 E                     331      53      NNW /2 W
  154    41                                  334      41
  157    30      SSE                         337      30      NNW
  160    19                                  340      19
  163    08      SxE  E                      343      08      NxW  W
  165    56                                  345      56
  168    45      S x E                       348      45      NxW
  171    34                                  351      34
  174    23      S 1 E                       354      23      N 1  W
  177    11                                  357      11





                                                                                                                             Tf29

                                DETERMINATION OF WIND SPEED BY SEA CONDITION


                           Milan!   force    mom~~~~~~~~~~~~ni
par  Knlol               0eea"-                                         Sea Cio~ndl                      (-ho



Owl.        0-1      ckk                Seta unse  uw  nwror,-Uca                                                             0 

1-3,        1-3      ugm S       W     S=*4eC.G aWls.          16010, bean                                                                  114


4-7,        4                           SmS   halla     nyeN e   hiem a 9162"wpsewmmi  ed do nol break                       2             1/2


8.12        7-10       "Al              Laie weoss   omcatbwt  rat   o  fatwAerne                                              3             2



IS-iS    II-is                           SaW" waves. becom  btu   Sl        ruoit Widles buon awls.              A                            4
                    browns

     19-24   17-21Fresh                 Modes. wavern. Ulfg a mars, promawuiced lbtg foti. itu*Ay siteln crme6 a              
         19-24~ ~~tw 17-2  besm        flie        b W M


26-31       22-27            S           ONLug. waves be011 So arrm while tamt aegs am nttre ederwie o velrwhmtw               6 ~ 60
                    breeze            ma" be some Mma


32          28433    NM                  Sam Amteepe  .upd sr e butt  Wmfrem breaufli waves be"i  to be blnt it Woof           7              14
                                    abae toe Seraco  of Oto uWI  spirdift teens

         3"   3440    G ale  ~~~Moderstely ftq  -ae  of Wealste IWil  edge-a ofeI Wreak ft   ka  qifli a is
                                      isaw kin well-naiued sheake slangthe diheeSat of "t wild.


47-64       41-47     S O O N 180 w                  waves; " Maea  of foam WlorOng Ut   eA'of  diwt wik4d CF   of waese       62
                    gaos              be~n to topple t~irf, end rail owu  sra  amy redcs vlbbillty. 

                                     Vary NVl  wae  wilt WMn ovutwnfl meet The resfn  loam in Word psiche
           4&5       w1 s                bown kV ',ie wise sledsis eOMi SteI drad   of ts wind Oni On wole  Gte              a0 2
                                     suract of Ito -  is s htIn appearance. The   if of ~goa fits -   a,     heaVy
                                       ad Sloale. V~bty is reSted.

                                     troepelonauly Nhl waves fit nory obcm sml uanSd toedphambod fl. ma sam
     64-72  SON       bloiu             is coutwolsthr covered wiot big sha petete  of Wmr  Iyt alon Ome Sreota  Of.           1
                         alarm       lbs etla Evurysher. Its edgs at dte wave cam  are blow nito frost. VIbfy a


73 or       64 at        T       h       m    ka lfr id  wM foe an01 d MMre. Sea cowelstsly wt~e swlt drl"  sprwr.             12            46
                Itaou             m     I~ywy nash reckned.







                                      ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE CONVERSION TABLE


                       tnt.           S~~Mi liba rs M                              ob Sme

                       2IL"  ~        ur                  an                                      30.21      1 i o n
                   am5          g        o                 29.41                36                 30.3                13Q
                   2A2                  M         2        a-                     ona 3Io
                   39.70               972                 3131002                                 3046     l o w
                   2a.7                976                 ams       I     N     oS                sos 
                   ANsg                  2076              an0 m I              aon                 es
                   am9                 98                  20.8         f a ll                     30.74               1041
                   2108                 64      m      m     .9                ï¿½014                3013                110441
                   30.16               3                   30.3                1017                30192               1047
                   3.24        I SO                        30.12        t        a        m        31.01               lowO






T-30








                            La 0 CN N                                     -010   0)
                                      N  :.--NN            10-.-NN  (        ~9~ C? I    - PM.-

                                     S ~       ~~~         CM00W   C?~       .~S   IANCDi

                                       v-v-C'    0O~     10 C0   Q-0(,7- 





                                                               0100~   LE v-(O    C M 0

                                                                o" cp0~~~~

                             10                            .-10                  6  th0 A.1N

                               w~ ~~ oo   66- - -.-~ej 9                                LO 


                   ~~~~~N    ?CLo                      tn                                   9

             z                                CM     '   9--NN4                       00-



                                                        0  C0                    4 10  C


                                 sk    S                9               - I     S.

                                                    a Lo   r- C%-      INN10Nr   


                           W~~~~~~~~~~~~~C    -0 CM 0   4.19    ~co('    IV 7           -Cy
                   o~~~~~~            C    ?W   I1 Pr ~CMen0-CM               t o - -c


             uj                        o"        'CT c,9   -6 0CIJNNNU)                     1

                              *  0                         100   4.N    4.~~~~  0  u)~ 'n.-10

                                 -:           9L T .                                 0-.&f 06
                           ' :3                           N-   to       a10   CO-0         a N10
                              -     c ~CO ?   M 19c r'..101  v-1.CV  C?-O            Cs *
                               0  00 0 000  6 0~                CMN  NcNo     lb 

                                                                       CM~~~~~ N
                                  -                       ~~~~~~17   N-  -0   I14   A04.
                               6 66 6iid  o6 C                       ~ c 0~ 0- --N(J0  -


                              0                         0  0         CM   N~ N   10)  C


                                 10~~~~ ~0                          C     M          N  l L ~
                                                  N1010M  CD   C?   190 T en      
                                    0000a               M           A     cv -   - CMN9v    9

                                10~~~~~ 00                   le  CM   L0   N   0~    2
                                               M                   1  *-      7k
                                    I~~~a            066         M              h0

                               co o o
                                   ~~~~~~~~~~~~~c le
                                                                                 cu en w Ln





                                                                                                             T-31

                 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS for BROADCASTS
       Characteritaic        ~~Abbrev                         Lighted Horn Buoy                         LHB
Fixed                          F                               Lighted Whistle Buoy                      LWB
Occulting                      OC                              Ocean Data
Grow-occulting                 OC(2)                             Acquisition System                      ODAS
Composite                                                      Privately
  Group-Occulting              OC(2+1)                           Maintained                              PRIV MAINTD
Isophase                       ISO               Rladar responder
Single-Flashing                FL                                beacon                                  RACON
Group-Flashing                 FL(3)                           Rader Reflector                           RA REF
Composite                                                      Radiobeacon                               RBN
  Group-Flashing               FL(2 +1)                        Temporarily Replaced
Continuous                                                       by Unlighted Buoy                       TRUB
  Quick-Flashing               QTemporarily Replaced
lntemjuptsd                                                      by Lighted Buoy                         TRLB
  Quick-Flashing               10                              Whistle                                   WHIS
Morse Code                     MO(A)
Fixed and Flashing             FFL                             Organizations
Alternating                    AL                              Coast Guard                               OG
Characteristic                 CHAR                            Commander, Coast
                                                               Guard District ()CCCD(#)
color,                                                         Corps; of Engineers                       COE
Black                          B                               Defense Mapping Agency
Blue                           BU                                Hydrographic/
Green                          G                                 Topographic Center                      DMAHTC
Orange                         OR                              National Ocean Service                    NOS
Red                            R                               National Weather
White                          W                                 Service                                 NWS
Yellow                         Y
                                                             vessels
Aids to Navigation                                             Aircraft                                  A/C
Aeronautical                                                   Fishing Vessel                            F/V
  radiobeacon                  AERO RBN                        Liquified Natural
Articulated Daybeacon          ARTIDBN                           Gas Carrier                             LNG
Articulated Light              ART LT                          Motor Vessel                              MI'.2
Destroyed                      DESTR                           Pleasure Craft                            P/C
Discontinued                   DISCONTD                        Research Vessel                            l/1V
Established                    ESTAB                           Sailing Vessel                            S/V
Exposed Location Buoy          ELB
Fog signal station             FOG SIG                         Compass Directions
Large Navigation                                               East                                      E
  ~buoy                         LNB                            North                                     N
Light                          LT                              Northeast                                 NE
Light List Number              LLNR                            Northwest                                 NW
Lighted Bell Buoy              LBB                             South                                     S
Lighted Buoy                   LB                              Southeast                                 SE
Lighted Gong Buoy              LGB3                            Southwest                                 SW
                                                             West                                      W

  Color refers to light characteristIcs of aids to navigation onlly.
2 M/V includes: Steam Ship, Container Vessel, Cargo Vessel, etc.




 T-32

                 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS for BROADCASTS
months                                                      Hour                                    HR
January                       JAN                           International
February                      FEB                             Regulations for
March,                        MAR                             Preventing Collisions
April                         APR                             at Sea  1972                          COIREGS
May                           MAY                           Kilohertz                               KHZ
June                          JUN                           Kilometer                               KM
July                          JUL                           Knot(s)                                 KT(S)
August                        AUG                           Latitude                                LAT
September                     SEP                           Local Notice to
October                       OCT                             Mariners                              LNM
November                      NOY                           Longitude                               LONG
December                      DEC                           Maintained                              MAINTD
                                                           Maximum                                 MAX
DOas of the Week                                            Megahertz                               MHz.
Monday                        MON                           Millibar                                MB
Tuesday                       TUE                           Millimeter                              mm
Wednesday                     WED                           Minute (time-, goo poe)                 MIN
Thursday                      THU                           Moderate                                MOD
Friday                        FRI                           Mountain, Mount                         MT
Saturday           $AT                                      Nautical'Mile(s)                        NM
Sunday                        SUN                           Notice to Mariners                      NTM
                                                           Obstruction                             OBSTR
various                                                     Occasiori/0ccasionally                  OCCASION
Anchorage                     ANCH                          Operating Area                          OPAREA
Anch~orage                                                  Pacific                                 PAC
  prohibited                  ANCH PROHIB                   Points(s)                               PT(S)
Approximate                   APPROX                        Position                                PSN
Atlantic                      ATLC                          Position Approximate                    PA
Authorized                    AUTH                          Pressure                                PRES
Average                       AVG                           Private, Privately                      PRIV
Gearing                       BRG                           Prohibited                              PROHIB
Breakwater                    BKW                           Publication                             PUS
Broadcast Notice              BNM                           Range                                   RGE
  to Mariners                                               Reported                                REP
Channel                       CHAN                          Restricted                              RESTR
Code of Federal                       Flock                                                         RK
  Regulations                 CFR                           Saint                                   ST
Continue                      CONT                          Second (time; goo pas)                  SEC
Degrees (temp; geo poe)       DEG                           Signal station                          SIG STA
Diameter                      DIA                           Station                                 STA
Edition                       ED                            Statute Mile(s)                         SM
Effect/Effective              EFF                           Storm signal
Entrance                      ENTR                            station                               S SIG STA
Explosive                                                   Temporary                               TEMP
  Anchorage                   EXPLOS ANCH                   Through                                 THRU
Fathom(s)                     FM(S)                         Thunderstorm                            TSTMI
Foot/Feet                     FT                            True                                    T
Harbor                        HBR                           Uncovers; Dries                         UNCOV
Height                        HT                            Universal Coordinate
Hertz                         HZ                            Time                                    UTC
Horizontal clearance     N     OR CL                        Urgent Marine
                                                             Information
                                                             Broadcast                             UMIB






                 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS for BROADCASTS
  Varioun (coal.)                                          Northen Marianas                        cm
Velocity                      VEL                           Ohio                                    OH
Vertical cleerance,           VERT CL                       Oklahoma                                OK
Visibility                    VSBY                          Oregon                                  OR
Warning                       WARN                          Peninsytvarda.                          PA
Weather                       WX                            Puerto Rico                             PR
Wreck                         WK                            Rhode Island                            RI
Yard(s)                       YD                            South Carolina                          SC
                                                          South Dakota                           SD
Coupilnes and States                                       Tennessee                                TN
Alabam~a                      AL                            Texas                                   TX
Alaska                        AK                            United States                           us
American Samoa                AS                            Utah                                    UT
Arizona                       AZ                            Vermont                                 VT
Arkansas                      AD                            VW∈  slands                           VI
Califoria                     CA                            Virgmia                                 VA
Canada                        CN                            Washington                              WA
Colorado                      co                            West Virginia                           WV
Connecticut                   CT                            Wisconsin                               WI
Delaware                      DE                            Wyoming                                 WY
District of Columbia          DC
Federated States of
  Micronesia                 FSM
Florida                       FL
Georgia                       GA
Guam                          GU
Hawaii                        Hi
Idaho                        ID
Illinois                     IL
Indiana                       IN
Iowa.                         IA
Kansas                        KS
Kentucky                      KY
Louisiana                     LA
Maine                         ME
Maryland                      MD
Massachusetts                 MA
Mexico                        MX
Michigan                      ml
Minnesota                     MN
Mississippi                   Ms
MISsouH                       MO
Montana                       MT
Nebraska                      NE
Now Hampshire                 NH
Nevada                        NV
Now Jersey                    NJ
Now Mexico                    NM
Now York                      NY
North Carolina                NC
North Dakota                  ND




T-34




            CONVERSION TABLE FOR NAUTICAL AND STATUTE MILES

            1 nautical mile = 6076.11549  . . feet                         1 statute mile = 5,280 feet

                 Nautical miles to statute miles                           Statute miles to nautical miles

    Nautical                     Nautical                    Statute                       Statute
     miles     Statute miles      miles     Statute miles     miles      Nautical miles    miles      Nautical miles

       1           1.151           51          58.690           1           0. 869           51         44.318
       2           2.302           52          59.840           2            1. 738          52         45.187
       3           3.452           53          60.991           3           2.607            53         46. 056
       4           4. 603          54          62.142           4           3.476            54         46. 925
       5           5. 754          55          63. 293          5           4. 345           55         47. 794

       6           6.905           56          64.444           6           5.214            56          48.663
       7           8.055           57          65.594           7           6.083            57          49.532
       8           9. 206          58          66. 745          8           6. 952           58          50.401
       9          10.357           59          67.896           9           7.821            59          51.270
      10          11.508           60          69.047          10           8.690            60          52.139

      11          12.659           61          70.197          11           9.559            61          53.008
      12          13.809           62          71.348          12          10.428            62         53.877
      13          14.960           63          72.469          13          11.297            63         54.746
      14          16.111           64          73.659          14          12.166            64         55.615
      15          17.262           65          74.801          i5          13.035            65         56.484

      16          18.412           66          75.951          16          13.904            66         57.353
      17          19.563           67          77.102          17          14.773            67         58.222
      18          20.714           68          78.253          18          15. 642           68         59.091
      19          21.865           69          79.404          19          16. 511           69         59.959
      20          23.016           70          80.554          20           17.380           70          60.828

      21          24.166           71          81. 705         21           18.249           71         61.697
      22          25.317           72          82.856          22           19.118           72         62.566
      23          26. 468          73           84. 007        23           19. 986          73          63. 435
      24          27.619           74          85. 158         24          20.855            74         64.304
      25          28.769           75          86. 308         25          21.724            75         65.173

      26          29.920           76          87. 459         26          22.593            76         66. 042
      27          31.071           77          88. 610         27          23.462            77         66.911
      28          32.222           78          89. 761         28          24.331            78         67.780
      29          33.373           79           90.911         29           25.200           79         68.649
      30          34. 523          80           92.062         30           26. 069          80         69. 518

      31          35. 674          81          93.213          31          26. 938           81         70.387
      32          36. 825          82           94.364         32          27.807            82         71.256
       33          37.976           83          95.515          33          28.676            83         72.125
       34          39.126           84          96.665          34          29.545            84         72. 994
      35          40.277           85           97.816         35          30.414            85          73.863

      36          41.428           86           98.967         36          31.283            86         74. 732
       37          42.579           87          100.118         37          32.152            87         75.601
      38          43. 730          88          101.268         38           33.021           88          76.470
      39          44.880           89          102.419         39           33.890           89          77.339
       40          46.031           90          103.570         40          34.759            90         78.208

       41          47.182           91         104. 721         41          35.628            91         79.077
       42          48.333           92         105.871          42          36.497            92         79.946
      43          49.483           93          107. 022        43           37.366           93          80.815
       44          50.634           94          108.173         44          38. 235           94          81.684
       45          51.785           95         109.324          45          39.104            95         82.553

       46          52.936           96         110.475          46          39.973            96         83.422
       47          54. 087          97          111.625         47           40. 842          97         84.291
       48          55.237           98          112.776         48          41.711            98         85.160
       49          56.388           99          113.927         49          42.580            99         86.029
       50          57. 539         100          115.078         50          43.449           100         86.898
        To convert Nautical miles to Statute miles, multiply Nautical miles by 1.15.
        To convert Statute miles to Nautical miles, multiply Statute miles by 0.87.





                                                                                                                            I-I


                                                           Index







The numbers of the largest scale charts on which the names appear follow the                                                          Page
indexed items. Some geographic names are indexed more than once when
                                                                  Akutan Peak 1653l ................... ................28
more than one place has the same geographic name. Charts published by the    Akutan Peak 16531228
Defense Mapping Agency Hydrographic/Topographic Service are indicated by    Akutan Point 16532 ..................................227
an asterisk.                                                           Alaganik 16013 ......................................            81
                                                                  Alaganik Slough 16013 ................................          81
                                                          Page  Alagnak River 16323 ................................              292
                                                                  Alaid Island 16435 ...................................         278
A.C. Point 16648 .....................................          137  Alakanuk 16240 ...........................309
Aberdeen Rock 16592 ...................           .            ..........        166 Alaska Highway ..................................... 95
Abraham Bay 16430 .................................281  Alaska Island 16045 ............................327
Acceptable Vessel Watering Points .......................        7    Alaska Peninsula 16011, 16013 .........................185
Acheredin Bay 16553 ................................             209    Alaska-Canada Boundary Monument No. 1 16041 ..........         329
Acheredin Point 16553, 16551 ..........................        209    Albatross Anchorage 16553 ............................           203
Acorn Rock 16471 .................................. .. 267  Albatross Bank 16580 ............................ 70
Adak Bight 16475 .............................                 265  Alcan Harbor 16423, 16436 ............................             278
Adak Island 16471 .........................                    265  Alder Rock 17301 ..........................4
Adak Strait 16471, 16467 ...................        ..........     267  Aleks Rock 16520 ................................. 218
Admiralty Bay 16004 ..................................         325  Aleut Point 16440 ............................273
Adugak Island 16511 ..................................         248  Aleut Village 16594 ............................151
Afognak 16594 ...................................       ..... 152  Aleutian Islands 16011, 16012 .......................... 21
Afognak Bay 16594 ...................................          151  AleutianRock 16597 ..........................182
Afognak Island 16604 .................................          149    Aleutian Trench 16011, 16012 ..........................         222
Afognak Point 16594 .................................. 152  Alexat Point 16432 ...................................278
Afognak River 16594 .................................           151  Alexander 16660.................................. 140
Afognak Strait 16594..................................            152  Alexander Island 16594 ............................... 151
Agamgik Bay 16522 ...................................           240  Alexander Point 16556, 16540 ..........................199
Agattu Island 16434, 16423 .......................... ... 282  Alf Island 16597..........................2 .....
Agattu Roadstead 16434, 16423 .........................        282    Aligo Point 16682 ...................................18
Aghik Island 16013 ...................................          193  Aliksemit Island 16013 ...........................93
Aghiyuk Island 16013 .................................          192  Alimuda Bay 16515 .................................238
Agligadak Island 16480 ................................        258  Alinchak Bay 16580 ...............................188
Agligadak Reefs 16480 ................................         258  Alitak Bay 16590 ..............................1
AgnesCove 16682 ...................................             114  AlitakLagoon 16591 ................................. 172
Agriculture, Department of ............................   ..334    Aliulik Peninsula 16590 ...............................             168
Agripina Bay 16568 ..................................           190  Alligator Island 1660ï¿½ ................................ . 175
Aguchik Island 16603, 16576 ...........................         187    Alligator Island Light 16605 ...........................        175
Aguliak Island 16704 ..................................         112  Alpine Cove 16590 ............................... 173
Aguligik Island 16603, 16576 ..........................         187    Alsek Glacier 16760.................................. 75
Aguliuk Point 16500 .................... . ...........            245  Alsek River 16760 ............................                    5
Aiaktalik Cove 16590 .........................                  169  Amagat Island 16535 .............................15
Aiaktalik Island 16590 ................................         169  Amak Island 16520 .............................287
Aiaktalik Island Light 5 16590 ..........................       169    Amakdedori 16648 .................................               136
AialikBay 16682 .....................................           118  Amakdedori Creek 16648 .........................136
Ailik Cape 16682 ....................................           118  Amakdedulia Cove 16648 .............................. 136
Aichilik River 16042 .................................. 329  Amaknak Island 16529 ................................232
Aids to navigation ....................................      19, 64    Amalik Bay 16576, 16580 ........................87
Aiktak Island 16531 ...............................224  Amatignak Island 16460............................... 272
Air Almanac ........................................             331  Amatuli Cove 16606 .................................. 126
Aircraft procedures for directingsurfacecrafttosceneofdistressincident  10    Amber Bay 16568 ....................................     192
Aiugnak Columns 16568 ...............................           190    Amchitka Island 16440 ...............................273
Akhiok 16591 .......................................            172  Amchitka Pass 16460 ................................ 272
AkliokBay 16591 ....................................            172  AmeeBay 16592...................................                  166
Akhiok Island 16591 ...........................                 172  American Bay 16553................................. 02
Akhiok Reef 16591 ...................................           172    American Practical Navigator ...........................        331
Akjemguiga Cove 16648 .................... ..........           136  Amerk Point 16702 ...................................             110
Akoliakatat Pass 16087 ...............................          323  Amik Island 16591 ..............................172
Akulurak 16240 .................................       ..... 309  Amlia Island 16480 ................................ 257
Akumwarvik Bay 16648 ..............................             136  Amlia Pass 16490 ...............................258
 Akun Bay 16531 .....................................           227  Amook Island 16597 ............................ 182
 Akun Head 16531 ...................................             227  Amos Bay 16500 ..........................49
Akun Island 16531 ................... ................          226  Amtagi Island 16480 ...................2........58
 Akun Strait 16532 ................... .................        227  Amugul Bay 16522 ...................3.......
Akun Strait Light 16532 ...............................         227  Amukta Island 16500 .................................254
Akutan 16532 ......................................             227  Amukta Pass 16480 ...................................255
 Akutan Bay 16532 ............................                  227    A ER Reporting ...........................                          5
 Akutan Harbor 16532 ................................              227  Anagaksik Island 16477 ............................... 264
 Akutan Island 16531 ...............................             228  Anaktuvuk River 16004 ...............................326
 Akutan Pass 16528 ..................................229    Anangula (Ananiuliak) Island 16511 .....................               .    247




1-2


                                                          Page                                                                   Page
Anchor Cove 16683 ...................................           114  Avatanak Strait 16531 ................................ 226
Anchor Point 16315 ...................................         296  Axel Lind Island 16705 ............................... 99
Anchor Point 16645 ...................................          135  Ayakulik Island 16601 ................................ 184
Anchor Point Light 16645 ......................... ....         135    Ayakulik River 16601.. ~ ..............................          184
Anchorage 16665, 16663 ............................... 143  Ayugadak Point 16441 ................................ 274
Anchorage Bay 16566 .................................           194  Azamis Cove 16477 .................................. 264
Anchorage Cove 16762 ................................            75  Aziak 16200 ........................................ 315
Anchorage Regulations ................................           39  Aziak Island 16478 ................................... 264
Anchorages .........................................             65  Azimuth Point 16594 ................................. 157
Anderson Bay 16517 ..................................           236
Anderson Point 16044 ................................. 328  Babcock Creek 16681 ................................ 121
Anderson Point 16517 .................................         236  Baby Islands 16528 .................................. 229
Andreanof Islands 16012 ...............................        255  Baby Pass 16528 .................................... 229
Andreon Bay 16604 ...................................           149  Bailey Ledge 16529 .................................. 234
Andronica Island 16553 ...............................         207     Bainbridge Glacier 16683 .............................           113
Andronica Island Light 16553 ...........................       207      Bainbridge Island 16702 .............................. 110
Angun Lagoon 16042 .................................           329  Bainbridge Passage 16702 .............................110
Angun Point 16042 ...................................          329  Balboa Bay 16553 ................................... 203
Anguvik Island 16566 .................................          194  Bald Head 16200 .................................... 312
Aniak 16006 ........................................           299  Bald Head Chris Island 16705 .......................... 100
Aniakchak Bay 16568 .................................           192  Baldwin Peninsula 16005 .............................. 320
Aniakchak Crater 16343 ...............................         289    Bales Landing 16556, 16540 ...........................           201
Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service ................      2    Balika Cove 16594 ...................................             156
Animal Import Centers ................................         334    Ballast Island 16553 .................................. 203
Ankau, The 16761 ....................................            76  Ban Island 16604 .................................... 176
Annoy Rock 16463 ...................................           269  Banner Bay 16487 ................................... 260
Anowik Island 16013 .................................           193  Banner Point 16487 .................................. 260
Anton Larsen Bay 16594 ...............................          155  Baralof Bay 16553 ................................... 209
Apavawook Cape 16006 ...............................           305  Baralof Bay Light 16553 .............................. 209
Aphrewn River 16006 .................................           307  Bare Island 16594 .................................... 153
Apoon Pass 16240 ....................................           309  Barling Bay 16592 ................................... 168
Applegate Cove 16501 ................................          251  Barnabas Rock 16592 ................................. 166
Applegate Island 16705 ................................         102  Barnes Cove 16704 .................................. I
Applegate Rock 16701 ................................           108  Barometer Mountain 16594 ............................              159
Arch Point 16520 .....................................         223  Barren Islands 16606 ................................. 125
Arch Point 16549 .....................................         211  Barrow 16082 ....................................... 324
Arch Point Light 2 16549 ..............................        211     Barry Arm 16700 .... ............................... 101
Arch Rock 16645 .....................................           123  BarterIsland 16043 .................................. 328
Archimandritof Shoals 16645, 16646 .....................        134    Barwell Island 16682 .................................           114
Arctic Ocean 16003 ...................................         317  Basalt Rock 16531 ................................... 226
Arey Island 16043 ....................................         328  Bass Harbor 16705 ................................... 98
Argonne Channel 16474 ...............................          267  Battery Point 16531 .................................. 229
Argonne Point 16471 ..................................         267  Bay of Islands 16474 ................................. 267
Ariadne Cove 16681 ..................................          121  Bay of Isles 16701 ................................... 108
Ariadne Island 16681 .................................         121  Bay of Waterfalls 16471 ............................... 268
Armeria Bay 16434,16423 .............................           282  Bay Point 16551 ..................................... 209
Armeria Point 16434, 16423 ............................        282  Beacon Point 16300 .................................. 299
Arre Rocks 16006 ...................................           305  Bear Bay 16549 ..................................... 211
Articulated daybeacons ................................          20  Bear Cape 16709 .................................... 85
Articulated lights .....................................         20  Bear Cove 16645 .................................... 135
Ashiiak Island 16568 ..................................         190  Bear Cove 16682 .................................... 118
Ashishik Point 16500 .................................         245  Bear Glacier 16682 ................................... 114
Askinuk Mountains 16240, 16006 .......................         308    Bear Island 16599 ....................................            181
Aspid Bay 16515 .....................................          238  BearIsland 16605 .................................... 175
Astrolabe Bay 17301 ..................................           74  Bear Point 16682 .................................... 119
Astrolabe Point 17301 .................................          74  Bear Rock 16549 .................................... 214
Astrolabe Rocks 17301 ................................           74  Bearings ........................................... 
Astronomical Almanac ................................ 331  Beartrack Creek 16520 ................................ 286
Asuksak Island 16478 .................................         264  Beartrap Bay 16708 .................................. 88
Asuksak Pass 16477 ..................................          264  Beaufort Lagoon 16042 ............................... 329
Atigaru Point 16064 ..................................         325  Beaufort Sea 16003 .................................. 324
Atka 16490 .........................................           259  Beautiful Isle 16681 .................................. 121
Atka Island 16480 ....................................         258  Beauty Bay 16681 ................................... 121
Atka Pass 16484 ......................................         263  Beaver Bay 16480 ................................... 259
Atkins Island 16540 ...................................         204  Beaver Bay 16551 ................................... 210
Atkulik Island 16566 ..................................         194  Beaver Inlet 16522 ................................... 239
Attu 16433 ..........................................           280  Becharof Lake 16323 ................................. 290
Attu Island 16421 .....................................        278  Bechevin Bay 16486 ................................. 262
Augustine Island 16648 ................................         136  Bechevin Bay 16535 ................................. 217
Augustine Rocks 16648 ................................          136  Bechevin Point 16486 ................................ 261
Auk Bay 16683 ......................................            113  Beechey Point 16062 ................................. 326
Austin Cove 16421 ................................... 280  Beehive Island 16682 ................................. 118
Automated Mutual-assistance Vessel Rescue System (AMVER)          5    Belkofski 16549 .....................................           212
Avatanak Island 16531 ................................         225  Belkofski Bay 16549 ................................. 212
Avatanak Point 16531 .................................         226  Belkofski Point 16549 ................................ 212





                                                                                  I- 3

                                      Page                                                                           Page
Belleview Beach 16471 .................269 Blodgett Island 16596..................163
Beluga Hill 16300 ...................298 Blossom Shoals 16087 .................323
Beluga River 16663, 16660................140 Blue Fiord 16705 ...................105
Beluga Shoat 16665, 16663................142  Blueberry Bay 16521..................241
Belvedere Island 16046 .................327 Bluefox Bay 16487...................261
Bendel Island 16540 ..................205 Bluefox Bay 16605...................175
BergerlIslandl16681...................122 Bluffl16200......................313
Bering Glacier 16016 ..................78 Bluff Point 16363 ...................288
Bering River 16723...................80 Bluff Point 16549 ...................212
Bering Sea 16006....................284 Bluff Point 16556, 16540 ................I201
Bering Strait 16003 ...................317 Bluff Point 16592 ...................165
Bernard Harbor 16043..................328 Bluff Point 16645 ...................135
Bernard Spit 16043...................328 Blunt Point 16553 ...................202
Bert Point 16590....................173 Blying Sound 16683 ..................113
Bertoncini Island 16062 .................326 Bobrof Island 16463 ..................270
Besboro Island 16200..................312 Bobrof Volcano 16463 .................270
Beshta Bay 16663, 16662 ................139  Bodfish Island 16062..................326
Bethel 16006 .....................299 Bogoslof Hill 16382 ..................302
Bettles Bay 16700 ..1.................1o Bogoslof Island 16500 .................245
Bettles Island 16702...................109 Boiler Point 16535...................216
Beulah Island 16240 ..................311 Boiling Pinnacles 16500.................245
Beverly Cove 16474 ..................267 Bold Cape 16549....................213
Bidarka Point 16708 ..................89 Bolshoi Islands 16490..................259
Big Alinchak Bay 16580.................188 Bomb Point 16709...................86
Big Bay 16604 ....................174 Boot Bay 16475....................266
Big Diomede Island 16200................319 Boot Point 16590 ...................169
Big Flat 16323.....................290 Boswell Bay 16709....................S
Big Fort Channel 16604 .................149 Boswell Rock 16709 ..................81
Big Fort Island 16604..................149 Boulder Bay 16513...................243
Big Koniuji Island 16540.................204  Boulder Bay 16556, 16540................201
Big Lagoon 16535 ...................216 Boulder Bay 16592...................165
Big Rock 16594 ....................151 Boulder Bay 16708...................89
Big Rock 16648 ....................137 Boulder Point 16663, 16662 ...............142
Billings Head 16531 ..................227 Boussole Bay 17301 ..................74
Billings Head Bight 16520................227 Boussole Head 17301..................74
Billings Head Light 16531 ................227 Bowditch.......................331
Binnacle Bay 16434, 16423................282  Bowen Anchorage 16683 ...............-                                                                   114
Biorka 16522 .....................239 Bowers Bank 16012 ..................273
Bird Cape 16440....................273 Bowers Ridge 16012 ..................273
Bird Island 16535....................218 Bowser Creek 16648 ..................137
Bird Island 16540....................204 Box Island 16478 ...................264
Bird Islet 16595 ....................158 Box Point 16701 ................... 84
Bird Reef 16646 ....................128 Bradford Point 16322..................294
Bishop Point 16518...................235 Bridge and cable clearances ...............18
Bishop Rock 16702...................109  Bridge lights and clearance gages .............20
Black Bay 16681....................119 Bridges .......................
Black Bluffs 16382...................302  Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Communication                                                     ......31
Black Cape 16500 ...................249 Bristol Bay 16011 ...................285
Black Cape 16604 ...................176 Broad Bay 16528 ...................234
Black Hill 16520....................286, 287 Broad Bight 16531...................229
Black Island 16474...................267 Broad Point 16593...................163
Black Mountain 16681..................119 Broadcast Abbreviations.................13
Black Peak 16343 ...................289 Broken Oar Cove 16761.................77
Black Peak 16501 ...................251 Broken Point 16511 ..................246
-Black Point 16200 ..                                                   .................311  Broken Point 16576, 16597................179
Black Point 16551 ...................210 Brooks Range 16003 ..................317
Black Point 16592 ...................167 Brother Islands 16013..................198
Black Point 16594 ...................156 Brown Mountain 16681.................123
Black Reef 16648....................137 Brownlow Point 16045 .................327
Black River 16240 ...................308 Bruin Bay 16648....................136
Black River Entrance Light 16240.............308  Brundage Head 16528..................230
Black Rock 16315 ...................296 Buchanan Point 16432 .................278
Black Rock 16513 ...................244 Buck Bight 16515 ...................237
Black Rock 16551 ...................210 BucklIsland 1 6515...................237
Blackface Point 16462 ..................270 Buckland 16005....................320
Blackstone Bay 16705..................101 Buckland. River 16005 .................320
Blackstone Glacier 16705 ..1...............1 Bukhti Point 16441...................275
Blackstone Point 16705 ...........  ......l0 Buldir Island 16440...................272,277
Bligh Island 16708 ...................89 Buldir Reef 16440 ...................277
Bligh Reef 16708 ....................89 Bulldog Cove 16682 ..................114
Bligh Reef Light 16708 .................89  Bullen (Savakvik) Point 16046 ..............327
Blind Breaker 16553 ..................209 Bumble Bay 16601...................184
Blind Cove 16475 ...................266 Bumpy Point 16462 ..................270
*Blizhni Point 16761...................76 Bun Point 16591....................172
Block Island 16705...................105 Buoys........................20




 I-4


                                                          Page                                                                  Page
 Burr Point 16648 .....................................         136  Cape Grant 16598 ....................................183
 Busby Island 16707 ................................... 89  Cape Greig 16011 ....................................289
 Busby Island Light 16707 ..............................        89    Cape Greville 16593 ..................................
 Bush Banks 16706 ....................................          102  Cape Gull 16576, 16580 ...............................187
 Bush Point 16592 .................................... 166  Cape Halkeit 16065 .................................325
 Bush Point Light 2 16592 .............................. 166  Cape Hall 16006 .....................................305
 Buyers Cove 16708 ...................................          98  Cape Hepburn 16590 .................................173
                                                                  Cape Hinchinbrook 16709 .............................84
 Cabin Bay 16705 .................................. 98  Cape Hinchinbrook Light 16709 ........................84
 Cabin Cove 16475 .................................... 265  Cape Horn 16553 ....................................206
 Cabin Point 16463 ....................................        269  Cape Idak 16513 .....................................245
 Cable Bay 16462 ..................................... 270  Cape Idalug 16480 ...................................258
 Cable clearances .....................................          18  Cape Igvak 16570 ....................................189
Cable ferries ........................................           I  Cape Ikolik 16601 ...................................
Cables .............................................             I  Cape Ikti 16013 .....................................196
Caines Head 16682 ...................................          114    Cape Ilktugitak 16576, 16580 ..........................188
Camden Bay 16044 ...................................          328  Cape Ilmalianuk 16511 ................................246
Camel Islet 16480 .................................... 257  Cape Izhut 16594 ....................................151
Campbell Bay 16708 ..................................           96  Cape Izigan 16513 ...................................243
Campers Cove 16475 .................................          265  Cape Junken 16683 ..................................113
Campers Point 16475 .................................         265  Cape Kagalus 16478 ..................................263
Canal Point 16240 ................................... 310  Cape Kaguyak 16590 .................................168
Candle 16005 ........................................         320  Cape Kalekta 16528 ..................................231
Candlestick Point 16501 ...............................       250  Cape Kanatak 16570 .................................189
Cannery Bay 16517 ...................................         236  Cape Karluk 16598 ...................................183
Cannery Point 16517 ..................................        236  Cape Kasiak 16592 ...................................168
Canning River 16045 ................................ 327  Cape Kasilof 16662, 16660 ............................140
Cannon 16660 .......................................           143  Cape Kayakliut 16568 ................................190
Canoe Bay 16551 .................................... 211  Cape Kekurnoi 16580 .................................188
Canoe Passage 16709 .................................           86  Cape Kiavak 16592 ..................................168
Cape Adagdak 16471 ................................. 267 Cape Kiguga 16471 ..................................267
Cape Agamrnsik 16462 .................................        270  Cape Kigun 16486 ...................................262
Cape Aiak 16514 .....................................         243  Cape Kigunak 16511 .................................246
Cape Aklek 16580 ....................................          189  Cape Kigushimkada 16500 ............................247
Cape Aksit 16535 ....................................   218, 223  Cape Korovin 16487 .................................259
Cape Aliaksin 16553 ..................................        203    Cape Kostromitinof 16594 .............................151
Cape Alitak 16591 ....................................         171  Cape Kovrizhka 16518 ................................236
Cape Alitak Light 16591 ............................... 171  Cape Krenitzin 16535 .................................217
Cape Amagalik 16462 ................................. 270  Cape Krusenstem 16005 ..............................321
Cape Aslik 16511 ....................................         245  Cape Kubugakli 16580 ................................188
Cape Aspid 16515 ....................................         238  Cape Kudugnak 16490 ................................259
Cape Atushagvik 16576, 16580 .........................        187    Cape Kuliak 16576, 16580 ............................187
Cape Avinof 16006 ...................................  297, 299  Cape Kuliuk 16597 ...................................180
Cape Ayutka 16568 ...................................         192  Cape Kumlik 16566 ..................................193
Cape Barnabas 16592 ................................. 166  Cape Kumliun 16566 .................................193
Cape Beaufort 16103 ..................................        322  Cape Kunmik 16568 ..................................191
Cape Blossom 16005 .................................. 320  Cape Kutuzof 16011 ..................................289
Cape Chagak 16500 ...................................         245  Cape Kuyuyukak 16568 ...............................191
Cape Chakik 16477 ...................................         264  Cape Lazaref 16535 ..................................223
Cape Cheerful 16518 ..................................        235  Cape Liakik 16592 ...................................168
Cape Chichagof 16323 ...............................          290  Cape Lisburne 16122 .................................322
Cape Chiniak 16580 ..................................          186  Cape Lutke 16520 ...................................223
Cape Chiniak 16593 ..................................         164  Cape Manning 16006 .................................304
Cape Chiniak Light 16593 .............................         164  Cape Mansfield 16683 ................................113
Cape Chlanak 16471 ..................................         267  Cape Mendenhall 16006 ...............................304
Cape Chunu 16463 ...................................          268  Cape Menshikof 16011 ................................289
Cape Cleare 16701 ...................................          83  Cape Miga 16471 ....................................268
Cape Constantine 16322 ............................... 293  Cape Moffett 16471 ..................................267
Cape Corwin 16006 ...................................         304  Cape Mohican 16006 .................................303
Cape Current 16605 ...................................         175  Cape Mordvinof 16520 ...............................287
Cape Current Narrows 16605 ...........................         175  Cape Morgan 16531 ..................................229
Cape Darby 16200 ....................................         313  Cape Mountain 16200 .............................318
Cape Deceit 16005 ...................................         320  Cape Newenham 16305 ...............................297
Cape Denbigh 16200 ..................................312  Cape Newland 16605 .................................175
Cape Devine 16553 ................................... 207  Cape Ninilchik 16640 .................................135
Cape Dezhneva 16005 ................................. 319  Cape Nome 16200 ...................................314
Cape Douglas 16200 ..................................         315    Cape Nukshak 16603, 16576 ...........................186
Cape Douglas 16580 ..................................         186    Cape Nuniliak 16576, 16594 ...........................178
Cape Elizabeth Light 16645 ............... ............ 127  Cape Pankof 16535 ..................................217
Cape Espenberg 16005 ................................ 319  Cape Pankof Light 16535 .............................217
Cape Etolin 16006 ....................................         304  Cape Paramanof 16604 ...............................176
Cape Etolin Anchorage 16006 ..........................         304    Cape Peirce 16305 ...................................297
Cape Fairfield 16683 .................... ..............      113  Cape Prince of Wales 16200 ...........................318
Cape Fairweather 16760 ............................... 75  Cape Prominence 16521 ...............................241
Cape Glazenap 16520 .................................         287  Cape Providence 16568 ...............................190









                                                     Page                                                                      Page
Cape Puget 16683 .................................... 113 Castle Rock 16305 ................................... 297
Cape Resurrection 16682 ............................... 114 Castle Rock 16500 ................................... 245
'Cape Riley 16204 ..................................... 316 Castle Rock 16540 ................................... 205
Cape Rodney 16200 ................................... 315 Cat Head 16704 ...................................... III
Cape Romanzof 16006, 16240 ........................... 308 Cataract Bight 16471 ................................. 268
Cape Rozhnof 16363 .................................. 288 Cataract Cove 16682 .................................. 119
Cape Rukavitsie 16520 ................................ 223 Cathead Bay 16704 ................................... IIl
Cape Sabak 16434, 16423 .............................. 282 Cathead Shoal 16704 ................................. 11I
Cape Sabine 16121 ................................... 322 Cathedral Island 16592 ................................ 166
Cape Sagak 16500 .................................... 248 Caton Cove 16553 .................................... 206
Cape Sajaka 16462 .................................... 270 Caton Harbor 16547 .................................. 219
Cape Sarichef 16520 .................................. 224, 286 Caton Island 16547 ................................... 219
Cape Sarichef Light 16520 ............................ 224 Caton Shoal 16553 ................................... 208
Cape Sasmik 16463 ................................... 269 Cave Point 16520 .................................... 286
Cape Sedanka 16522 .................................. 238 Cedar Bay 16700 ..................................... 98
Cape Seniavin 16011 .................................. 289 Cemetery Cove 16511 ................................. 246
Cape Shaw 16480 .................................... 259 Cenotaph Island 16762 ................................ 75
Cape Simpson 16067 .................................. 325 Center Point 16433 ................................... 280
Cape Sitkinak 16590 .................................. 169 Central Island 16568 .................................. 191
Cape Spencer 17301 ...........................: ...... 73 Chagulak Island 16500 ................................ 253
Cape Spencer Light 17301 ........................... 74 Chagulak Pass 16500 ................................. 254
Cape St. Elias 16723 .................................. 79 Chagvan Bay 16305 ................................... 297
Cape St. Elias Light 16723 ............................. 79 Chagvan Mountain 16300 .............................. 297
Cape St. Hermogenes 16604 ............................ 150 Challenge Entrance 16045 ............................. 327
Cape St. Stephen 16441 ................................ 276 Challenge Island 16045 ................................ 327
Cape Starichkof 16517 ................................. 236 Chalugas Bay 16480 .................................. 258
Cape Starichkof 16640 ................................. 135 Chamberlain Bay 16708 ............................... 96
Cape Starr 16511 ..................................... 248 Chamisso Island 16005 ................................ 320
Cape Stephens Light 16240 ............................. 310 Chance Cove 16681 .................................. 120
,Cape Suckling 16723 .................................. 79 Chance Lagoon 16681 ................................ 120
Cape Sudak 16463 .................................... 269 Chandalar River ..................................... 310
Cape Suworof 16323 .................................. 291 Chaniliut 16240 ...................................... 310
Cape Tachilni 16535 ........................... : .....  216 Chankliut Island 16566 ............................... 195
Cape Tanak 16500 .................................... 245 Channel Island 16701 ................................. 107
Cape Thompson 16005 ................................ 321 Channel Islands 16710 ............................... 86
Cape Thompson 16540 ................................ 204 Channel markers, caution .............................. 21
Cape Tolstoi 16551 ................................... 210 Channel Rock 16570 .................................. 189
Cape Trinity 16590 ................................... 171 Channel Rock 16595 .................................. 157
Cape Tusik 16460, 16467 .............................. 268 Channel Rock 16705 .................................. 112
Cape Udak 16500 ................................... 249 Chapel Cove 16471 ................................... 268
.Cape Uganik 16576, 16597 ............................. 179 Chapel Roads 16471 .................................. 268
Cape Ugat 16597 ..................................... 180 Chart Datum ........................................ 15
Cape Ugyak 16603, 16576 .............................. 187 Chart Numbering System .............................. 17
Cape Unalishagvak 16570 .............................. 189 Chart symbols and abbreviations ........................ 15
Cape Upright 16006 ................................... 305  Charts and Publications-National Ocean Service ............ 330
Cape Uyak 16598 ..................................... 183  Charts and Publications-Other U.S. Government Agencies .... 330
Cape Vancouver 16006 ................................ 307 Chase Island 16704 ................................... IlI
Cape Wedge 16553 ................................... 205 Chat Island 16682 .................................... 118
Cape Wislow 16518 ................................... 235 Chatham Island 16645 ................................ 127
Cape Wrangell 16430 .................................. 280 Chelan Bank 16528 ................................... 231
Cape Yakak 16471 .................................... 268 Chena River ........................................ 310
Cape Yakataga 16016 .................................. 79 Chenega 16701 ...................................... 112
Cape Yanaliuk 16521 .................................. 240 Chenega Island 16701 ................................. 112
Cape York 16200 ..................................... 315 Chenik 16648 ....................................... 136
Captain Harbor 16549 ................................. 212 Chenik Head 16648 ................................... 136
Captains Bay 16530 ................................... 234 Chenik Mountain 16648 ............................... 136
Careful Point 16474 ............................. 267 Chernabura Island 16540 .............................. 204
Carlisle Island 16501 .................................. 252 Cherni Island 16547 .................................. 220
Carlisle Pass 16501 ................................... 250 Chemof Point 16594 ............................ 153
Carlsen Point 16597 ................................... 182 Chemofski Harbor 16516 .............................. 238
Carlsen Reef 16597 ................................... 182 Chemofski Point 16516 ............................... 238
Carolyn Island 16200 .................................. 313 Chevak 16006 ....................................... 307
Carry Inlet 16604 ............................... 148 ChiachiBay 16556,16540 ............................. 199
Carson Creek 16741 ................................... 78 Chiachi Island 16556, 16540 ........................... 198
Carter 16300 ......................................... 298 Chiachi Islands 16556, 16540 ........................... 198
Carter Bay 16300 ..................................... 298 Chiachi Point 16594 .................................. 152
Carter Spit 16300 .................................... 298 Chicago Harbor 16761 ................................ 77
Cascade Bight 16531 .................................. 229 Chichagof Bay 16553 ................................. 202
Cascade Glacier 16762 ................................ 75 Chichagof Harbor 16433 ............................... 279
Cascade Rock 16474 ................................... 267 Chichagof Point 16433 ................................ 279
Casco Cove 16432 .................................... 279 Chicken Island 16702 ................................. 109
Castle Bay 16566 ..................................... 194 Chief Cove 16597 .................................... 181
Castle Cape 16566 .................................... 194 Chief Point 16597 .................................... 181
Castle Island 16463 ................................... 269 Chiginagak Bay 16568 ................................ 190
Castle Island 16500 .................................. 245 Chignik 16566 ...................................... 194





1- 6


                                       Page                                                                            Page
Chignik Bay 16566...................193 Coffee Point 16322...................294
Chignik Lagoon 16566 .................194 Coffee Point 16323...................291
Chignik Spit Light 16566 ................194 Cohen Island 16645 ..................131
Childs Glacier 16013 ..................80  Cohen Island Rock Light 16645..............131
Chilkat 16723.....................80 Cohoe 16662, 16660 ..................140
Chimney Cove 16531..................226 Cold Bay 16549....................214
China Poot Bay 16645..................131 Coleman Bay 16682 ..................118
Chiniak Bay 16594, 16593................157  College Fiord 16700 ...................1o
Chiniak Island 16593 ..................164 Collinson Point 16044..................328
Chinitna Bay 16640...................138 COLREGS Demarcation Lines..............38, 65
Chip Cove 16590....................172 Columbia Bay 16708 .................96
Chirikof Island 16580, 16013...............170  Columbia Glacier 16708 ................96
Chirikof Point 16432 ..................278 Column Rocks 16440..................273
Chisak Bay 16477 ...................264 Colville River 16063, 16004...............326
Chisik Island 16640...................138 Combine Flats 16322..................294
Chistiakof Island 16343 .................289 Comfort Cove 16708..................88
Chiswell Islands 16682 ................. 114 Communications....................72
Chitka Cove 16440...................273 Compass roses on charts.................18
Chitka Point 16440...................273  Computer Bulletin Board (BBS) .............26
Choris Peninsula 16005 .................320 Concord Point 16501..................251
Chowiet Island 16013..................193 Cone Island 16490...................259
Christie Point 16081 ..................324 Cone Mountain 16300 .................298
Christmas Tree Point 16463 ...............269 Cone Peak 16551 ...................211
Chrome Bay 16645...................127 Conquer Point 16441..................276
Chugach Bay 16645 ..................124 Constantine Bay 16528.................232
Chugach Islands 16645 .................126  Constantine Harbor 16446................273
Chugach Mountains 16700................82 Constantine Harbor 16709................85
Chugach Passage 16645.................127 Contact Point 16648 ..................136
Chuginadak Island 16501 ................251  Control of shipping in time of emergency or war                                               ......30
Chuginadak Pass 16501 .................250 Controller Bay 16723..................80
Chugul Island 16478 ..................263 Cook Inlet 16660, 16640 ................124
Chugul Pass 16478...................263 Coolie Hat 16463 ...................270
Chugul Point 16441...................274 Cooper Island 16081..................325
Chuitna River 16663, 16660 ...............139  Cooper Islands 16433..................279
Chukchi Sea 16003...................317 Copper Bayl16704                                                                                              .................. II
Chunak Point 16520 ..................287 Copper River 16013 ..................80
Chunak Point 16535 ..................217 Cordova 16710 ....................87
Chuniksak Point 16430 .................281 Cormorant Rock 16599.................181
Cinder Point 16511...................246 Cormorant Rock 16762.................75
Cinder River 1601 1...................289 Corps of Engineers...................6
Claim Point 16645 ...................127 Corps of Engineers Offices................331
Clam Gulch 16640 ...................135 Corwin Rock 16501 ..................251
Clam Islands 16704 ..1.................I COSPAS-SARSAT system................23
Clam Lagoon 16475 ..................266 Cottle Island 16062 ..................326
Clarence Lagoon 16041 .................329 Cottonwood Bay 16594.................178
Clark Bay 16553....................202 Cottonwood Bay 16648.................137
Clark Slough 16322...................294 Course Point 16594 ..................157
Clarks Point 16322...................294 Courses .......................
Claybluff Point 16741 ..                                               ...............78,79  Cow Pens, The 16705..................99
Cliff Island 16596 ...................163 Cowanesque Rock 16606 ................125
Cliff Point 16596....................163 Coxcomb Point 16592 .................165
Clifford Island 16547..................219 Crab Bay 16702 .........7..........109
Cloudy Cape 16682...................119 Crafton Island 16705..................105
Clover Rock 16597...................181 Crafton Island Light 16705 ...............105
Clubbing Rocks 16540 .................220 Crag Point 16594 ...................155
Coal Bay 16551 ....................210 Crater Anchorage 16500 ................253
Coal Bay 16645, 16646 .................131 Crater Bay 16441 ...................274
Coal Cape 16556, 16540.................198 Crater Bay 16682 ...................118
Coal Cape Mountain Range 16556, 16540..........198  Crater Cove 16475...................265
Coal Cove 16646....................128 Crater Mountain 16240.................310
Coal Harbor 16553...................210 Crater Point 16382...................302
Coal Point 16556....................199 Crescent Bay 16486 ..................262
Coal Point 16645, 16646.................131 Crillon Inlet 16762...................75
Coast Guard......................4 Crooked Island 163 1 5.................296
Coast Guard District Offices ...............331  Crooked Island 16595 .................158
Coast Guard droppable, floatable pumps .......... 12 Cross Bay 16531 ...................226
Coast Guard Marine Safety Offices.............331  Cross Island 16061...................326
Coast Guard Radio Broadcasts ..............332  Cross Island 16553...................209
Coast Guard radio stations................12 Cross Point 16531...................227
Coast Guard Stations ..................331 Cross Sound 17301...................74
Coast Guard vessels , warning signals ...........28  Crow Ann 16521 ...................241
Coast Pilot .....................1, 330 Crow Point 16363 ...................288
Cochrane Bay 16705 ..................101 Crow Reef 16363 ...................288
CCoco........................26 Crowley Rock 16547..................218
Code of Signals, Intemnational...............331  Cruising schedules...................12






                                                                                     1- 7

                                       Page                                                                            Page
Cub Island 16592 ....................166 Devil Inlet 16604 ...................175
Cub Point 16556, 16540.................201 Devils Bay 16013 ...................195
Culross Bay 16705 ...................100 Devils Cove 16603, 16576................187
Cuiross Island 16705 ..................100 Devils Finger 16568 ..................191
Cuiross Island Light 16705 ..1..............0 Devils Pass 16547 ..................                                                                    219
Culross Passage 16705 ..1................0 Devils Prongs 16594 ..................159
Cup Cove 16682....................119 DGPS........................25
Currents ......................1, 66 Diablo Peak 16681...................121
Customs Ports of Entry and Stations ............333  Dicks Arm 17301 ...................74
Customs Service ....................2 Differential GPS (DGPS) ................25
Cyane Rock 16595 ...................158 Dillingham 16322 ...................294
                                             Dinkum Rocks 16460..................271
Dakavak Bay 16576. 16580................181 Dinkum Sands 16061..................326
Dali Point 16006 ...................308 Diomede 16200 ....................319
Dalnol Point 16381...................301 Diomede Islands 16200 .................319
Danger Bay 16594....................151 Discoverer Bay 16604..................149
Danger Island 16701 ..................108 Discoverer Island 16604.................149
Danger Reef 16594...................151 Discovery Point 16701 .................108
Danger signal .....................30 Disenchantment Bay 16761 ...............77
Danger zones .....................66 Disk Island 16705 ...................106
Dangerous Cape 16592 .................165 Disposal areas                                                                                                .................... 18
Dangerous Cape 16646 .................128 Disposal Sites.....................64
Dangerous Cape Reef 16646................128 Distance Tables ....................330
Dangerous Passage 16701 ................112 Distances.......................2
Dark Cove 16441....................275  Distress Assistance and Coordination Procedures ......9
Dark Island 16604 ...................148  Distress Signals and Communication Procedures .......                                                          8
Dark Passage 16604...................148 Ditch, The 16463 ...................269
Dates of Latest Editions ..................1 Ditto Islets 16597 ....................l8
David Island 16568...................190 Division Island 16681..................122
Davidof Island 16441 ..................274 Division Point 16705..................105
Davidson Bank 16520..................224 Dixon Harbor 17301 ..................74
Dawson .......................310 Doctor Island 16082 ..................325
Day Harbor 16683....................113 Documentation....................                                                                                5
Daylight Harbor 16605 .................175 Doe Point 16363....................288
Daylight saving time ..................72 Dolgoi Cape 16549...................211
Dead Man Sands 16323 .................290 Dolgoi Harbor 16549..................211
Deadman Bay 16590 ..................172 Dolgoi Island 16549 ..................211
Deadmans Island 16082 .................325 Dolina Point 16580...................170
Dease Inlet 16081 ...................325 Dolphin Point 16594 ..................152, 178
Decision Point 16706 ..................101  Dolphin Point Light 3 16594...............178
Decision Point Light 16706 ..............I..101  Dome Point 16556, 16540................201
Deck officers .....................30 Dome Rock 16514...................242
Deep Bay 16487 ....................261 Dora Harbor 16535...................218
Deep Bay 16528 ....................230 Dora Reef 16645....................126
Deep Bay 167 1 0....................87 Dorenoi Bay 16553...................202
Deep Creek 16640 ...................135 Dot Island 16594....................151
Deep Water Bay 16705 .................105 Double Peak 16013...................138
Deer Cove 16709....................85 Douglas Reef 16580 ..................186
Deer Island 16363 ...................288 Dragon Point 16501 ..................252
Deer Island 16549 ...................213 Drake Head 16591...................172
Deer Passage 16549 ...................214 Drew Point 16067 ...................325
Deering 16005.....................320 Drier Bay 16704....................III
Defense Mapping Agency HydrographicfTopographic Center (DMAHTC) 6   Drift River 16662, 16660 ................139
Defense Mapping Agency Procurement Information              .          ....330  Driftwood Bay 16500..................248
Delarof Harbor 16553..................209 Driftwood Bay 16518..................235
Delarof Islands 16460 ..................271 Driftwood Bay 16683..................114
Delenia Island 16701 ..................112 Driftwood Slough 16006.................307
Delphin Bay 16604...................149 Dry Bay 16580 ....................189
Delphin Island 16604 ..................149 Dry Bay 16648.....................138
Delta Point Light 16549 .................214 Dry Bay 16760 ....................75
Demarcation Bay 16041.................329 Dry Spruce Bay 16594 .......... .......154
Demarcation Point 16041 ................329  Dry Spruce Bay Entrance Light 16594 ...........153
Dent Point 16556, 16540.................202  Dry Spruce Island 16594 ................153
Department of Agriculture, Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service          Dry Spruce Island Rock Light 7 16594...........153
  (APHIS) Offices...................334 Drying Point 16594...................153
Depths........................I Dublin Bay 16520 ...................286
Deranof Island 16594 ..................152 Duchess Island 16045..................327
Deranof Rock 16594...................152 Duck Bay 16594....................151
Derbin Bay 16531....................225 Duck Creek Light 16323.................292
Derbin Island 16531...................225 Duck Island 16061...................327
Derbin Strait 16531 .................225 Duck Mountain 16594 .................151
Derby Point 16500....................247 Dumping Grounds ...................18, 64
Derickson Bay 16705 ..................105 Dumping of dredged material...............6
Derickson Island 16568 .................191  Dushkot Island 16522..................240
Destructive waves ...................27 Dutch Group 16705...................99








                                      page                                                                            Page
Dutch Harbor 16529 ..................232 Elbow Hill 165112...................248
                                           Eldred Passage 16645..................131
Eagle Bay 16521 ....................241 Eleanor Cove 16761..................77
Eagle Bay 16708 ....................96 Eleanor Island 16705..................105
Eagle Harbor 16553 ...................206 Electronic navigation..................64
Eagle Harbor 16593 ...................164 Elephant Head Point 16568 ...............192
Eagle Island 16568 ....................192 Elephant Point 16553..................202
Eagle Lagoon 16708 ...................96 Elephant Rock 16006..................305
Eagle Point 16521 ....................242 Elephant Rock 16553..................209
Eagle Rock 16363 ....................288 Elf Point 16708 ....................96
Eagle Rock 16522....................240 Buim 16200......................3122
Eagle Rock 16547 ....................219 Elizabeth Island 16645 .................127
Eagle Rock 16566 ....................194 Ellamar 16707, 16708 .................89
Eaglek Bay 16705 ....................99 Ellsworth Glacier 16683.................113
Eaglet Rocks 16474 ...................267 Elms Island 16547...................219
Ear Mountain 16005 ...................319 Elrington Island 16702 .................109
Earle Cove 16421 ....................280 Elrington Passage 16702 ................109
Earthquakes ......................66 Elrington Passage Light 16702 ..............109
East Amnatuli Island 16606................126 Blson Lagoon 16082 ..................324
East Amnatuli Island Light 16606..............126  Bluitkak Pass 16082 ..................325
East Anchor Cove 16535.................217 Emerald Bay 16706 ..................102
East Arm 16433 .....................280 Emerald Cove 16708..................96
East Arm 16597 .....................180 Emerald Island 16513..................243
East Bight 16540 ....................206 Emerald Island 16706..................102
East Cape 16440 ....................273 English Bay 16528...................230
East Cape 16594 ....................156 English Bay 16646...................128
East Channel 16529 ...................233 English Bay 16709...................85
East Channel Island 16570................189  English Bay Reef 16646.................128
East Chugach Island 16645................126  Entrance Island 16549 .................212
East Chugach Light 16645................126 Entrance Island 16705 .................106
East Cove 16500 ....................253 Entrance Island 16707 .................92
East Foreland 16663, 16662 ...............141  Entrance Point 16363..................288
East Head 16553 ....................206, 208 Entrance Point 16540..................204
East Landing 16381 ...................302 Entrance Point 16594..................157
East Nagai Strait 16540 .................205 Entrance Point 16707..................92
East Nunatak Glacier 16761 ...............78 Entry Cove 16705 ...................101
East Point 16597 ....................180  Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)..........6
East Twin Bay 16705 ..................99  Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Offices                                                   ...I...331
Eastern Passage 16594 .................151 EPIRBs .......................23
Easy Cove 16531 ....................226 Erskine Bay 16522...................240
Echo soundings              .             ....................1 9 Erskine Point 16528 ..................230
Eddy Island 16471 ....................267 Eschscholtz Bay 16005.................320
Eddy Point 16490 ....................258  ESCORT REQUIREMENTS FOR CERTAIN TANKERS   ...58
Eddy Rock 16463 ....................269 Eshamy Bay 16705...................105
Edmonds Cove 16240..................308 Eshamy Lagoon 16705 .................105
Eek 16006 .......................299 Eskimo Islands 16064 .................325
Eek Channel 16300 ...................297 Esther Bay 16705 ...................100
Eck Island 16300 ....................299 Esther Island 16705.................. 100
Eck River 16006 ....................299 Esther Lake 16705.................. 100
Egaksrak Lagoon 16042.................329  Esther Passage 16705, 16700...............100
Egegik 16323 ......................291 Esther Rock 16705...................100
Egegik Bay 16323 ....................290 Etienne Bay 16430...................281
Egegik River 16323 ...................290 Etienne Head 16430 ..................281
Egg Bay 16487 .....................260 Etolin Point 16322...................293
Egg Island 16061 ....................326 Etolin Strait 16006...................304
Egg Island 16240 ....................310 Evans Island 16702 ..................109
Egg Island 16487 ....................260 Ewan Bay 16701 ...................112
Egg Island 16522 ....................238 Excelsior Glacier 16683.................113
Egg Island 16535 ....................216  Exclusive Economic Zone of the United States........30
Egg Island 16553 ....................208 Expedition Harbor 16474 ................267
Egg Island 16556, 16540.................199  Expedition Island 16529.................234
Egg Island 16591 ....................172 Explorer Bay 16480 ..................259
Egg Island Channel 16709................81 Explorer Mountain 16300................298
Egg Islands 16709 ....................81 Explorer Passage 16463.................269
Egg Point 16487 ....................259 Eyak River 16709 ...................81
Egg Rocks 16705 ....................99
Eickelberg Bay 16708..................98 Fairmount Island 16700.................98
Eider Island 16594 ....................156 Fairway Rock 16200..................319
Eider Point 16528 ....................234 Fairweather Range 16760.................75
Eider Reef 16463 ....................269 Falls Bay 16705....................105
Eider Rock 16511 ....................247  Falmouth Harbor 16553, 16540..............206
Ekilukrualc Entrance 16081................325 False Bay 16471....................268
Eklutna 16660 .....................147 False Pass 16535 ...................216
Ekuk 16322 ......................294, 295 Fassett Point 16591 ..................172
Ekuk Bluff 16322 ....................294 Fathometer Reef 16531.................227







                                        Page                                                                            Page
Fatigue Bay (McKay Inlet) 16081, 16067 ..........325  Gambell 16006 ....................306
Fault Point 16683....................113  Game Sanctuary, Walrus Islands State 16011, 16315. 16305   ..296
Fawn Point 16549 ...................214 Gann~et Cove 16474...................267
Federal Communications Commission ...........6 Gannet Rocks 16476~..................266
Federal Communications Commission Offices ........334  Gannet Rocks Light 4 16476...............266
Fenimore Pass 16484 ..................263 Garden Cove 16381 ..................301
Fenimore Rock 16484..................263 Garden Cove 16709 ..................85
Ferrsm Creek 16681 ..................121 Garden Island 16568 ..................192
Figure IV Mountain 16300................298 Garden Island 16709 ..................85
Final Bay 16522 ....................240 Gareloi Island 16460 ..................271
Finch Cove 16480 ...................256 Gargoyle Islands 16514.................243
Finch Point 16480 ...................256 Gatherer Rock 16709..................86
Finger Bay 16476....................266 Geese Channel 16590..................169
Finger Shoal 16476 ...................266 Geese Islands 16590 ..................169
Finneys Day 16547...................219  Geographic Harbor 16576, 16580 .............188
Finski Bay 16708....................96 Geographic range ...................19
Fire Cove 16682 .................118 Gertrude Cove 16441 ..                                                                                              ...............275
Fire Island 16500....................245 Geyser Bight 16511 ..................246
Fire Island 16665, 16663.................143  Gibbon Anchorage 1670 1. . :1.............107
Fire Island Shoal 16665, 16663 ..............143  Gibson Islands 16433..................279
Fish Bay 16708 ....................89 Gilbert Inlet 16762...................75
Fish havens .....................6, 18 Gillon Point 16434, 16423................282
Fish Island 16701....................84 Gilmour Point 16701, 16709...............107
Fish River 16200....................313 Girdwood 16660....................143
Fisherman Cove 16474 .................267 Glacier Ice ......................96
Fisherman Point 16528 ................!  230 Glacier Island 16708 ..................96
Fishery Conservation Zone................3 1  Glacier Island Light 16708................96
Fishtrap areas..................... 18 Glen Island 16520 ...................287
Fishtraps .......................6 Glory of Russia Cape 16006 ...............305
Flagstaff Hill 16553...................209 Goat Harbor 16683 ...................113
Flat Bight 16531....................229 Golden 16700.....................101
Flat Island 16551....................210 Golci Island 16549 ..................212
Flat Island 16590....................169 Goloi Sandspit Light 16549...............212
Flat Island 16646, 16645.................127 Golovin 16200 ....................313
Flat Island Light 16646, 16645 ..............127  Golovnin Bay 16200 ..................313
Flaxmnan Island 16045..................327  Golovnin Bay Light 4 16200 ...............313
Flemming Island 16702 ..1...............0t Golovnin Lagoon 16200.................313
Flent Point 16708 ....................98  Goodnews Bay (Goodnews) 16300 ............298
Flying Eagle Harbor 16540................264 Goodnews Bay 16300..................297
Foam Cove 16521 ...................241 Goose Bay 16705 ...................100
Fog signal characteristics.................2 Goose Island 16708...................88
Fog signals ......................20 Goose Island Light 16708 ................88
Foggy Cape 16568 ...................192 Goose Rocks 16463 ..................269
Foggy Island 16061...................327 Gore Peak 16645 ...123...............
Foggy Island Bay. 16046 ................327 Gore Point 16645 ...................123
Food and Drug Administration (FDA) ...........7 Gore Rock 16645 ...................123
Food and Drug Administration (FDA) Regional Offices           .        ...334  Gori Point 16594....................153
Fool Island 16705 ..................                                   99 Gorman Strait 16553 ..................207
Foot Bay 1601i3 ....................196 Government Agencies..................2
Fortification Bluff 16648.................136  Govemnment Printing Office ...............330
Foul Bay 16604 ....................176 Government Rock 16709 .............81
Foul Pass 16705 ....................106 GPS.........................24
Fountain Rock 16709...................83 GPS Navigation System.................24
Fourpeaked Mountain 16580 ...............186 GPS System .....................26
Fourth of July Creek 16682................118 Gramp Rock 16460...................271
Fox Bay 16556, 16540..................201 Granite Bay 16700...................98
Fox Bay 16594.....................152 Granite Bay 16705                                                                                           ..................100o,112
Fox Cape 16556, 16540 .................200 Granite Cape 16682 ..................118
Fox Creek 16204 ...................316 Granite Cove 16708 ..................98
Fox Farm Bay 16702 ..1................09 Granite Island 16682 ..................118
Fox Hole 16553.....................207 Granite Passage 16682 ..................8t
Fox Island 16549....................214 Granite Point 16553 ..................206
Fox Island 16590....................173 Granite Point 16663, 16662 ...............139
Fox Island 16682....................114 Grant Point 16520 ...................287
Fox Island Light 16549 .................214  Grantley Harbor 16204 .................316
Fox Islands 16520 ...................222  Granville Portage 16556, 16540..............200
Frequency units ....................12 Grassy Island 16322 ..................294
Front Point 16681 ...................123 Gravel Point 16709                                                                                             ..................8 1
Frosty Peak 16535. 16011 ................185,215  Graves Harbor 17301 .                                                                                .................74
Frye Point 16596....................163 Graves Rocks 17301 ..................74
                                              Graveyard Point 16323 .................292
Gaamaak Cove 16701..................112 Graveyard Point 16594 .................151
Gage Island 16702 ..1.................0t Graveyard Point 16701, 16709 ..............108
Gage Point 16463....................270 Graveyard IPoint 16708 .................89
Galena Bay 16707 ...................92 Graveyard Point Light 16323...............292





I-10


                                                         Page                                                                  Page
Gravina Island 16709 .................................          86    Harrison Bay 16064 .................................. 325
Gravina Point 16709 ..................................          86  Hartman Island 16570 ................................ 189
Gravina Point Light 3 16709 ............................        86    Harvester Island 16599 ................................        181
Gravina Rocks 16708 .................................           88    Harvester Island Spit Light 2 16599 ......................     181
Gray Cliff 16646 .....................................         128  Hasgox Point 16460 .................................. 272
Gray Cliff 16663, 16662 ...............................        142    Hawkins Island 16709 ................................ 86
Great Sitkin Island 16471 ..............................      263    Hawkins Island Cutoff 16709 ...........................          86
Great Sitkin Pass 16478 ............................... 263  Haycock Rock 16441 ................................. 275
Green Bight 16532 ...................................         227  Haystacks, The 16553 ................................ 207
Green Island 16474 ...................................        267  Hazard Point 16463 .................................. 269
Green Island 16605 ..................................          174  Hazen Bay 16006 .................................... 307
Green Island 16701 ...................................         107  Head of Passes 16240 ................................. 309
Greystone Bay 16705 .................................         105  Head Point 16594 .................................... 152
Griffin Point 16042 ...................................       329  Head Rock 16475 .................................... 266
Grosvold Bay 16553 ..................................         207  Heald Point 16061 ................................... 326
Growler Bay 16708 ...................................          96  Heather Bay 16708 ................................... 96
Grub Gulch 16553 ....................................         202  Heather Island 16708 ................................. 96
Guguak Bay 16702 ...................................           110  Heights ............................................ 2
Guillemot Island 16553 ................................ 203    Helianthus Cove 16531 ............................... 227
Gula Point 16441 .....................................        274  Helicopter evacuation ................................. 11
Gull Island 16061 ....................................        326  Hell Gate 16474 ..................................... 267
Gull Island 16551 ....................................        211  Hells Hole 16708 .................................... 88
Gull Island 16553 ....................................        210    Henderson Island 16553 ............................... 207
Gull Island 16595 ....................................        158  Heney Range 16709 .................................. 81
Gull Island 16604 ....................................         174  Herbert Island 16501 ................................. 252
Gull Island 16640 ....................................         138  Herd Rock 16462 .................................... 269
Gull Island 16645 ....................................        131  Herendeen Bay 16363 ................................ 288
Gull Island 16708 ....................................          88  Herendeen Island 16540 ............................... 204
Gull Island 16741 ....................................         78  Herring Bay 16705 ................................... 106
Gull Point 16593 .....................................         165  Herring Islands 16645 ............................... 129
Gull Rock 16006 .....................................         305  Herring Point 16705 .................................. 106
Gull Rock 16556, 16540 ...............................        201    Herschel Island 16003 ................................ 329
Gull Rock 16660 .....................................          143  Hesketh Island 16645 ............................... 131
Gunners Cove 16441 ..................................         274  Hidden Basin 16593 .................................. 165
Gurney Bay 16598 ...................................           184  Hidden Bay 16471 ................................... 268
Gusty Bay 16463 .....................................         270  Hidden Harbor 16576 ................................. 187
Guyot Glacier 16741 ..................................         79  High Bluffs 16381 ................................... 301
Gwydyr Bay 16061 ...................................          326  High Hill 16500 ....................... ............. 244
                                                                High Hill 16511 .....................................         247
Haenke Island 16761 ..................................         77  High Island 16315 ................................... 296
Hag Peak 16556, 16540 ................................        200  High Island 16553 ................................... 207
Hagemeister Island 16315, 16305 ........................      296    High Rock 16500 .................................... 254
Hagemeister Strait 16315, 16305 ........................      296    Hinchinbrook Entrance 16709 ..........................           84
Hague Channel 16363 .................................         288    Hinchinbrook Island 16709 ............................82
Hague Rock 16547 ...................................          220  Hive Bay 16522 ..................................... 240
Hague Rock Light 16547 ..............................         220  Hive Rock 16463 ................................... 269
Halferty Bay 16580 ...................................         187  Hobo Bay 16700 ..................................... 101
Halftide Rock 16363 ..................................        288  HodikofBay 16433 .................................. 279
Halfway Rock 16553 ..................................         209    HodikofIsland 16433 ................................. 279
Halibut Bay 16598 ...................................          183  Hodikof Point 16433 ................................. 279
Halibut Cove 16645 ...................................         134  Hog Island 16530 .................................... 234
Halibut Cove Lagoon 16645 ............................         134    Hog Island 16594 .................................... 151
Hall Island 16006 ....................................        305  Hogan Bay 16701 ..................: ................. 108
Hall !sland 16540 ....................................        204  Hogback Hill 16240 .................................. 309
Hallo Bay 16580 .....................................          186  Hogg Bay 16702 ..................................... 113
Hamilton 16240 ......................................         310  Hogg Island 16605 ................................... 175
Hammerhead Cove 16476 ..............................          266  Holgate Arm 16682 .................................. 118
Hammerhead Island 16436, 16423 .......................        278    Holgate Glacier 16682 ................................ 118
Hanin Rock Light 16595 ...............................         157    Holiday Island 16595 ................................. 158
Hanin Rocks 16595 ...................................          157  Holidays, public .................................... 72
Hanks Island 16709 ...................................         86  Holtz Bay 16433 ..................................... 280
Harmnning Bay 16701 ...................................       107  Home Cove 16681 ................................... 122
Harbor Island 16682 .................................          118    Homer 16645, 16646 ................................ 131
Harbor Point 16363 ...................................        288    Homer Spit 16645, 16646 ............................. 131
Harbor Point 16762 ...................................         75    Homer Spit Light 16645, 16646 ........................131
Harbormasters ......................................           72  Hoof Point 16681 .................................... 120
Harding Gateway 16682 ...............................          114  Hook Bay '16566 ..................................... 194
Hardover Point 16681 ...  .............................        122  Hook Point 16709 .................................... 82
Hardscratch Point 16553 ...............................        209    Hooper Bay 16006 ................................... 307
Harem Rock 16462 ..................................           270  Hope 16660 ........................................ 143
Harriet Point 16662. 16660 .............................       138    Horseshoe Bay 16702 ................................. 109
Harriman Fiord 16700 ................................          101    Horseshoe Cove 16648 ................................ 136
Harrington Point 16681 ................................        121    Hot Springs Bay 16463 ............................... 269
Harris Bay 16682 .....................................         118  Hot Springs Bay 16532 ............................... 228
Harris Point 16682 ....................................        119    Hot Springs Cove 16511 .............................. 246







                                                     Page                                                                       Page
Hotham Inlet 16005 ................................... 320 Inner Anchorage 16595 ................................ 159
Hotsprings Bay 16535 ................................. 217 Inner Humpback Rock 16595 ........................... 158
Howe Island 16061 ................................... 327 Inner Iliasik Island 16549 .............................. 212
Hub Rock 16682 ..................................... 118 Inner Point 16594 .................................... 153
Hubbard Glacier 16761 ................................ 77 Inner Right Cape 16592 ............................... 165
Huddle Rocks 16514 .................................. 242 Inner Rocks 16433 ................................... 279
Humboldt Harbor 16553 ............................. 208 Inner Seal Rock 16601 ................................ 184
Humpback Bay 16517 ................................. 236 Inner Signal 16522 ................................... 238
Humpback Bay 16556, 16540 ........................... 199 Innoko River ........................................ 310
Humpback Rock 16594 ................................ 158 International Code of Signals ........................... 331
Humphrey Point 16042 ................................ 329 international distress signals ............................ 8
Humpy Cove 16682 ................................... 114 Irish Cove 16708 ..................................... 89,96
Hutchinson Hill 16382 ................................. 302 Irishmans Hat 16518 .................................. 235
Hutchinson Reef 16595 ................................ 157 Iron Point 16441 ...................................... 274
Hydra Island 16568 ................................... 191 Isanotski Peaks 16520 ................................. 223
Hydrographic survey source diagrams ..................... 15  Isanotski Strait (False Pass) 16535 ....................... 216
                                                            Isanotski Strait Light 4 16535 ........................... 216
Ice ................................................. '68 Isanotski Strait Light 8 16535 ........................... 216
Iceberg Point 16708 ................................... 96 Island Bay 16556, 16540 .............................. 201
Icehouse Point 16595 .................................. 157 Island Bay 16570 .................................... 189
Icon Bay 16594 ...................................... 156 Island Bay 16594 .................................... 156
Icy Bay 16700, 16701 ................................. 112 Island Point 16487 ................................... 261
Icy Bay 16741 ....................................... 78 Island Rock 16535 ................................... 217
Icy Bay 17301 ....................................... 74 Islands of Four Mountains 16501 ........................ 249
Icy Cape 16087 ...................................... 322 Ismailof Island 11645 ................................. 134
Icy Cape Pass 16088 .................................. 322 Isthmus Bay 16593 ................................... 164
Icy Point 17301 ...................................... 74 Italian Bay 16702 .................................... III
Icy Reef 16041 ....................................... 329 Ivan Bay 16013 ...................................... 197
IdaliukPoint 16511 ................................... 248 Ivan Island 16551 .................................... 211
lgalik Island 16081 .............................. .... 325 Ivanof Bay 16556, 16540 .............................. 199
Igitkin Bank 16478 ................................... 263 Izembek Lagoon 16520 ................................ 287
Igitkin Bight 16478 ................................... 263 Izhiga Cove 16511 ................................... 246
Igitkin Island 16478 ................................... 263 Izhut Bay 16594 ..................................... 150
Igitkin Pass 16478 .................................... 263
Igitkin Point 16478 ..: ................................ 263 Jack Bay 16707 ...................................... 92
Igushik Ridge 16322 .................................. 293 Jackass Point 16531 .................................. 226
Igushik River 16322 ................................... 293 Jackpot Bay 16701 ................................... 112
Ikatan Bay 16535 ..................................... 216 Jackpot Island 16701 .................................. 112
Ikatan Bay Light 1 16535 .............................. 216 Jacksmith Bay 16300 ................................. 298
Ikatan Peninsula 16535 ................................ 217 Jackson Cove 16708 .................................. 96
lkatan Point 16535 .................................... 216 Jackson Hole 16708 .................................. 96
lkiginak Island 16484 ................................. 263 Jackson Point 16707 .................................. 92
Ikpik Hill 16601: ..................................... 184 Jacob Island 16556, 16540 ............................. 199
Ikpikpuk River 16004 ................................. 325 Jade Harbor 16708 ................................... 98
Iksiak Point 16517 ................................... 236 Jagged Mountain 16300 ............................... 297
lktua Bay 16702 ...................................... 110 Jago Lagoon 16043 ................................... 329
Iktua Rocks 16702 .................................... 110 Jago River 16043 .................................... 329
Ilak Island 16460 ..................................... 271 Jakolof Bay 16645 ................................... 129
Iliamna 16013 ....................................... 293 James Lagoon 16681 .................................. 121
Iliamna Bay 16648 .................................... 137 Japanese Bay 16590 .................................. 168
Iliamna Lake 16013 ................................... 293 Jeanette Island 16046 ......................... ....... 327
Iliamna River 16013 .................................. 293 Jeanie Cove 16701 ................................... 84
Iliamna Volcano 16640 ................................ 138 Jeanie Point 16701 ................................... 84
Iliasik Islands 16549 .................................. 212 John Island 16540 .................................... 206
Iliasik Islands Light 16549 .............................. 212 John Island 16592 .................................... 168
Iliuliuk Bay 16529 .................................... 232 Johnson Bay 16547 ................................... 219
l1iuliuk Harbor 16529 ................................. 234 Johnson Bay 16704 ................................... 112
Iliuliuk Reef 16529 ................................... 233 Johnson Cove 16521 .................................. 241
Ilkognak Rock Light 1 16594 ........................... 153 Johnson Cove 16702 .................................. 109
Immigration and Naturalization Service ............. 6 Johnston Channel 16363 ............................... 288
Immigration and Naturalization Service Offices ............. 334  Johnston Hill 16011 ...................., ............. 290
Imuruk Basin 16200 ................................... 316 Johnstone Bay 16683 ................................. 113
lmuya Bay 16568 ..................................... 190 Johnstone Passage 16761 .............................. 77
Inanudak Bay 16511 .................................. 246 Johnstone Point 16709 ................................ 86
Indian Creek 16663, 16660 ............................. 139 Johnstone Point Light 16709 ........................... 86
Indian Head 16549 .................................... 213 Jonah Bay 16705 ..................................... 99
Indian River 16300 ................................... 298 Jonah Point 16705 .................................... 99
Ingenstrem Rocks 16421, 16423 ......................... 277 Jones Islands 16062 .................................. 326
Ingot Island 16705 .................................... 106 Joshua Green River 16520 ............................. 287
Iniskin Bay 16648 .................................... 137 Jude Island 16551 .................................... 209
Iniskin Island 16648 .................................. 137 Juma Reef 16648 ..................................... 136
Iniskin River 16648 .................................... 137 Junction Island 16705 ................................. 112
Iniskin Rock 16648 ................................... 137 Jute Bay 16570 ...................................... 189
Iniskin Shoal 16648 ................................... 137 Jute Island 16570 .................................... 189
Inland Waterways Navigation Regulations................. 50







                                                    Page                                                                   Page
Kabuch Point 16535 .................................. 216 Kelp Point 16549 .................................... 214
Kachemak Bay 16645 ................................. 129 Kelp Point 16570 .................................... 189
Kaflia Bay 16603, 16576 ............................... 187 Kelp Point 16645 .................................... 127
Kagalaska Island 16475 ................................ 265 Kempff Bay 16591 ................................... 172
Kagalaska Strait 16475 ................................ 265 Kenai 16662, 16660 .................................. 140
Kagamil Island 16501 ................................. 250 Kenai River 16662, 16660 ............................. 140
Kagamil Pass 16501 .................................. 250 Kenmore Head 16535 ................................. 215
Kagayan Flats 16553 .................................. 203 Kennedy Entrance 16604 .............................. 148
Kageet Point 16741 ................................... 79 Kennedy Entrance 16606.... .......................... 125
Kaguyak 16580 ...................................... 186 Kennon Island 16433.................................. 279
Kaguyak Bay 16590 .................................. 168 Kennoys Island 16551 ................................ 209
Kaiugnak Bay 16592 .................................. 168 Keoklivik River 16006 ................................ 307
Kak Island 16566 ..................................... 193 Kettle Cape 16513 ................................... 244
Kaknau Creek 17301 .................................. 74 Khantaak Island Light 16761 ........................... 76
Kaktovik (Kaktoavik) Lagoon 16043 ..................... 329 Khlebnikof Point 16433 ............................... 279
Kaktovik 16043 ...................................... 328 Khvostof Island 16441 ................................ 274
Kalekta Bay 16528 ................................... 231 Kbvostof Pass 16441 ................................. 274'
Kalgin Island 16662, 16660 ............................ 139 Kialegak Point 16006 ................................. 306
Kaligagan Island 16531 ................................ 225 Kiana 16005 ........................................ 321
Kalsin Bay 16593 .................................... 163 Kiavak Bay 16592 ................................... 168
Kalsin Island 16593 ................................... 163 Kichyatt Point 16741 ................................. 78,79
Kalsin Reef 16593 .................................... 158 Kigul Island 16500 ................................... 249
Kamishak 16648 ..................................... 136 Kigun Bay 16486 .................................... 262
Kamishak Bay 16648 ................................. 135 Kikiktak Islands 16004 ................................ 325
Kanaga Bay 16471 ................................... 268 Kiliktagit Island 16013 ................................ 193
Kanaga Island 16460 .................................. 268 Kiliuda Bay 16592 ................................... 165
Kanaga Pass 16463, 16467 ............................. 269 Kiliuda Rock 16592 .................................. 165
Kanaga Volcano 16460 ................................ 268 Killer Bay 16683 .................................... 114
Kanak Island 16723 ................................... 80 Kilokak Rocks 16568 ................................                         190
Kanakanak 16322 .................................... 294 Kinak Bay 16576, 16580 .............................. 187
Kanatak Lagoon 16570 ................................ 189 King Cove 16549 .................................... 213
Kanektok River 16300 ................................. 298 King Cove 16604 .................................... 150
Kanu Island 16478 .................................... 264 King Cove Harbor 16549 .............................. 213
Karab Cove 16434, 16423 .............................. 282 King Cove Lagoon 16549 ............................. 213
Karluk 16599 ........................................ 183 King Island 16200 ................................... 315
Karluk Anchorage 16599 .............................. 183 King Salmon Airport 16323 ............................ 291
Karluk Island 16046 .................................. 327 Kingfisher Point 16478 ................................ 263
Karluk Reef 16662, 16660 ............................. 140 Kings Bay 16705 .................................... 102
Karluk River 16599 ................................... 183 Kinzarof Lagoon 16549 ............................... 214
Karpa Island 16553 ................................... 207 Kirilof Bay 16440 .................................... 273
Kasatochi Island 16486 ................................ 262 Kirilof Point 16446 ................................... 273
Kasegaluk Lagoon 16087 .............................. 323 Kiska Harbor 16442 .................................. 276
Kasegaluk Lagoon 16102 .............................. 322 Kiska Island 16441 ................................... 275
Kashega 16515 ...................................... 237 Kiska Volcano 16441 ................................. 275
Kashega Bay 16515 ................................... ï¿½237 Kismaliuk Bay 16515 ................................. 237
Kashega Pinnacles 16515 .............................. 237 Kisselen Bay 16522 .................................. 240
Kashega Point 16515 ...................................237 Kitchen Anchorage 16549 ............................. 212
Kashunuk River 16006 ................................ 307 Kitoi Bay 16594 ..................................... 150
Kashvik Bay 16580 ................................... 188 Kitten Pass 16681 .................................... 119, 120
Kasilof 16661, 16662 ................................. 140 Kiukpalik Island 16580 ............................... 186
Kasilof River 16662, 16660 ............................ 140 Kivalina 16005 ...................................... 321
Kasitsna Bay 16645 .................................. 129 Kiwalik 16005 ...................................... 320
Kaslokan Point Light 2 16549 ........................... 214 Kiwalik Lagoon 16005 ................................ 320
Katakuruk (Katakturak) River 16044 ..................... 328 Kiwalik River 16005 .................................. 320
Katalla 16723 ....................................... 80 Kizhuyak Bay 16594 ................................. 154
Katalla Bay 16723 .................................... 80 Kizhuyak Point 16594 ................................ 155
Katalla River 16723 ................................... 80 Klikitarik Bay 16200 ................................. 312
Kateekuk Island 16013 ................................ 193 Knee Bay 16594 ..................................... 156
Katmai Bay 16580 .................................... 188 Knight Island 16705 .................................. 105
Katmai National Monument 16580 ....................... 188 Knight Island 16761 .................................. 76, 77
Katmai Reef 16566 ................................... 194 Knight Island Passage 16700 ........................... 110
Katmai River 16580 .................................. 188 Knik 16660 ......................................... 147
Kavalga Island 16460 ................................. 271 Knik Arm 16665, 16663 ............................... 143
Kawanak Pass 16240 .................................. 309 Knik Arm Shoal 16663, 16665 ......................... 143
Kayak Cape 16522 ................................... 240 Knob Point 16460 .................................... 272
Kayak Entrance 16723 ................................ 80 Knoll Bay 16592 .................................... 168
Kayak Island 16723 ................................... 79 Knoll Head 16648 ................................... 137
Kazakof Bay 16594 ................................... 151 Knoll Point 16592 ................................... 168
Kekur Island 16593 .................................. 163 Knot Point 16710 .................................... 87
Kekur Point 16594 ................................... 155 Knowles Head 16709 ................................. 86
Kelliher Cove 16433 .................................. 279 Kobakof Bay 16480 .................................. 258
Kelly Rock 16553 .................................... 209 Kobuk 16005 ....................................... 321
Kelp ............................................... 65 Kobuk Lake 16005 ................................... 320
Kelp Bay 16531 ...................................... 225 Kobuk River 16005 .................................. 321
Kelp Point 16511 ..................................... 247 Kodiak 16595 ....................................... 158





                                                                                                              1-13

                                                   Page                                                                      Page
Kodiak Harbor 16595 .............................. 159 Kvichak 16323 ...................................... 292
Kodiak Island 16580 .................................. 148,164 Kvichak Bay 16323 ................................... 290
Kodiak Rock 16594 ................................... 158 Kvichak River 16323 ................................. 292
Kodiak Small-Boat Harbor 16595 ........................ 162 Kwemeluk Pass 16240 ................................ 309
Koggiung 16323 ...................................... 292 Kwigillingok 16006 .................................. 299
Kogr3u River 16064 ........................ .......... 325 Kwiguk 16240 ....................................... 309
Kohl Island 16434, 16423 .............................. 282 Kwiguk Pass 16240 ................................... 309
Kokechik Bay 16240, 16006 ............................ 308 Kwikluak Pass 16240 ................................. 309
KokechikRiver 16006 ................................. 308 Kwikpak Pass 16240 .................................. 309
Kokolik River 16101 .................................. 322  Kwiktalik Mountain 16200 ............................. 313
Konets Head 16513 ................................... 243
Konganevik (Kangigivik) Point 16044 .................... 328 La Chaussee Spit 16762 ...............................75
Kongishluk Bay 16240 ................................ 308 La Perouse Glacier 16760 ..............................74
Koniuji Island 16486 .................................. 262 Label Reef 16521 ....................................241
Koniuji Island 16594 .................................. 153 Lagoon Point 16363 .................................. 288
Koniuji Strait 16540 ................................... 204 Laida Rocks 16594 ................................... 154
Kookoolik Point 16006 ................................ 306 Lake Aleknagik 16322 ................................ 294
Koriga Point 16518 ................................... 236 Lake Bay 16705 .....................................10
Korovin Bay 16487 ................................... 259 Lake Bennett ........................................ 310
Korovin Bay 16553 ................................... 207 Lake Clark 16013 ....................................293
Korovin Island 16553 ................................. 207 Lake Naknek 16323 ..................................291
Korovin Strait 16553 .................................. 207 Lake Point 16471 ....................................268
Korovin Volcano 16480 ................................ 258 Lamb Island 16594 ...................................151
Kotlik 16240 ........................................ 310 Lancashire Rocks 16645 ...............................131
Kotlik River 16240 ................................... 310 Lance Point 16514 ...................................242
Kotzebue 16005 ...................................... 320 Landlocked Bay 16708 ................................ 89
Kotzebue Sound 16005 ................................ 319 Larsen Bay 16540 ....................................206
Kovurof Bay 16486 .................................... 261 Larsen Bay 16599 .................................... 182
Kovurof Point 16486 .................................. 261 Lash Bay 16462.270
Koyuk River 16200 ................................... 312 Laska Cove 16475 .................................... 265
Koyuktolik Bay 16645 ................................. 127 Last Knoll 16011 ..................................... 288
Kaoyukuk River ....................................... 310 Last Point 16594 ..................................... 152
Krasni Point 16431, 16423 ................. ........... 281 Last Timber Point Light 6 16594 ........................ 153
Krekatok Island 16240.; ............................... 308 Latax Rocks 16604 ...................................148
Krenitzin Islands 16531 ................................ 224 Latax Rocks Light 16604 ..............................148
Kresta Point 16421 .................................... 280 Latouche 16702 ......................................109
Krugloi Point 16434, 16423 ............................. 282 Latouche Island 16701 ................................108
Krutoi Island 16761 ................................... 77 Latouche Passage 16702 ...............................108
Krysi Pass 16441 ..................................... 275 Lava Bight 16531 ....................................228
Krysi Point 16441 .................................... 274 Lava Cove 16480 .................................... 257
Kshaliuk Point 16500 .................................. 246 Lava Point 16480 ....................................257
Kudiakof Islands 16520 ................................ 287 Lava Point 16531 ....................................228
Kudobin Islands 16363 ................................ 288 Lazaref Reef 16535 ...................................223
Kugrua Bay 16084 .................................... 323 Lazy Bay 16591 .....................................171
Kugrua River 16005 ................................... 323 Lazy Bay Light 2 16591 ............................... 172
Kuiukta Bay 16013 ................................... 196 Leader Island 16556, 16540 ............................200
Kujulik Bay 16566 .................................... 193 Left Arm 16553 ...................................... 203
Kuk River 16085 ..... ............................... 323 Left Cape 16592 ..................................... 166
Kukak Bay 16603, 16576 .............................. 187 LefthandBay 16553 .................................. 203
Kukak Point 16603, 16576 ............................. 187 Legal public holidays .................................72
Kukpowruk Pass 16102 ................................ 322 Lemesurier Point 16723 ............................... 79
Kukpowruk River 16102 ............................... 322 Lenard Harbor 16549 ................................. 214
Kuliak Bay 16576,16580 .............................. 187 Levelock 16011 ...................................... 292
Kulichkof Island 16603, 16576 .......................... 187 Libby Island 17301 ...................................4
Kuliliak Bay 16514 ................................... 242 Libby Island Light 17301 ..............................74
Kuluk Bay 16475 ..................................... 266 Libbyville 16323 ..................................... 292
Kuluk Shoal 16475 ................................... 266 Lida Island 16547 ....................................219
Kulukak Bay 16315 ................................... 296 Lief Cove 16441 .....................................276
Kulukak Point 16315 .................................. 296 Light and fog signal characteristics ......................2
Kumlik Island 16566 .................................. 193 Light Lists .......................................... 5,331
Kun River 16240 ..................................... 308 Lighthouse Point 16605 ...............................175
Kuparuk River 16004 .................................. 326  Lighthouse Point Light 16605 .......................... 175
Kupreanof Harbor 16556, 16540 ......................... 199 Lighthouse Rocks 16013 ............................... 193
Kupreanof Mountain 16594 ............................. 153 Lights .............................................19
Kupreanof Peninsula 16556, 16540 ....................... 200 Likes Creek 16682 ................................... 114
Kupreanof Peninsula 16576, 16594 ....................... 154 Lion Point 16046 .................................... 327
Kupreanof Point 16556, 16540 .......................... 200 Lipsett Point 16594 ................................... 151
Kupreanof Strait 16594 ................................ 153 List of Lights ........................................ 331
Kupreanof Strait 16594, 16576 .......................... 153 Litnik 16594 ....................................... 151
Kusilvak Mountains 16240 ............................. 309 Little Afagnak 16594.151
Kuskokwak Creek 16300 ............................... 298 Little Alinchak Bay 16580 ............................. 188
Kuskokwim Bay 16300, 16006 .......................... 297 Little Apoon Pass 16240 ............................... 310
Kuskokwim River 16300, 16006. . . . . . . . . . . . . ............229
               Kuskowim iver163001600   .................... 297Little Bay 16531 ...... ............................... 227
Kustatan River 16662, 16660 ..............139 Little Bay 16702.I
Kuzitrin River 16204 ................................. 316 Little Diomede Island 16200 ........................... 319





1- 14

                                      Page                                                                            Page
Little Egg Island 16553 .................208 Mallard Bay 16704....................1I
Little Fort Island 26604 .................149 Manning Point 16043..................329
Little Green Island 16701 ................107  Manning Point 16515..................238
Little Kiska Island 16442 ................276 Manning Rocks 16701 .................108
Little Kaniuji Island 16540................204  Marble Point 16363 ..................288
Little Mummy Island 16709...............81I Marine Broadcast Notices to Mariners ...........2
Little Norway 16553 ..................202  Marine Emergencies and Oil Spills ............72
Little Raspberry Island 16594...............178  Marine Weather Services Charts .............331
Little River 16597 ..1.................0S Maritime Radio Users Handbook .............331
Little Sitkin Island 16440 ................273 Marmot Bay 16594...................150
Little Sitkin Pass 16440 .................274 Marmot Cape 16604 ..................150
Little Smith Island 16705 ................106 Marmot Island 16604..................150
Little Susitna River 16665, 16663 .............140  Marmot Strait 16604..................150
Little Tanaga Island 16477................264  Marryat Inlet 16123 ..................322
Little Tanaga Strait 16475 ................265  Marsha Bay 16701...................108
Littlejohn Lagoon 16535.................216 Marshall 16006 ....................310
Lituya.Bay 16762 ...................75 Martin Harbor 16487..................260
Lituya Glacier 16762 ..................75  Martin Islands 16723.80
Local magnetic disturbances ...............18  Martin Islands Light 16723.                                                                              80
Local Notice to Mariners.................2 Martin Point 16043...................329
Lofty Mountain 16528..................230 Mary Anderson Cove 16594...............151
Logging Camp Bay 16705................101 Mary Sachs Entrance 16045 ...............327
Logs and deadheads...................66 Marys Bay 16682 ...................114
Lone Island 16705 ...................99 Masked Bay 16701...................112
Lone Peak 16513....................243 Massacre Bay 16432..................279
Lone Rock 16500 ...................249 McArthur Cove 16681 ..2.............. 20
Lone Rock 16568 ...................190 McArthur Pass 16441..................275
Lone Rock 16682 ...................114 McArthur Pass 16681..................120
Lonetree Point 16702..................109 McArthur Pass Light 16681 ...............120
Long Bay 16705....................100 McArthur Reef 16441 .................275
Long Bay 16708....................98 McCarty Fiord (East Arm) 16681.............120
Long Beach 16013 ...................197 McCarty Glacier 16681.................120
Long Channel 16704 ..................Ill McCarty Lagoon 16681 .................121
Long Island 16062 ...................326 McCloud Head 16432 .................278
Long Island 16593 ...................164 McClure Bay 16705 ..................105
Long Island 16594 ...................158 McClure Islands 16046.................327
Long Island 16681 ...................123 McCord 16592 ....................166
Long Sands 16322 ...................295 McCulloch Rock 16471.................268
Lookout Point 16500 ..................249 McDonald Cove 16434, 16423..............282
LORAN-C ......................23 McDonald Lagoon 16592 ................166
Loran-C information ..................26 McGrath 16006 ....................299
Lost Harbor 16532 ...................228 Mclver Bight 16515 ..................237
Louies Corner 16556, 16540 ...............201  McLees Lake 16518 ..................235
Louis Bay 16705....................106 McNeil Cove 16648 ..................136
Low Cape 16601....................184 McNeil Head 16648 ..................136
Low Island 16594 ...................155, McNeil Islet 16648...................136
Low Island Anchorage 16594...............155 Mean Low Water ..I.................S
Low Point 16471....................268 Mean Lower Low Water ..I..............S 
Lower Arm 16475 ...................265 Meares Glacier 16705 .................98
Lower Herring Day 16705 ................112 Medical advice ....................12
Lower Passage 16705..................106  Medical advice and/or evacuation                                                                              ............ 12
Lucky Bay 16702 ...................III Mekoryuk 16006 ...................304
Lukanin Bay 16382...................302 Mercator projection.................. 19
Lumber Bay 16553...................203 Meshik 16343.....................289
Luminous range.................... 19 Mid Reef 16490....................258
Lump Island 16551...................210 Midarm Island 16594..................150
Lutris Pass 16708 ...................96 Middle Arm 16471...................268
                                            Middle Bay 16593...................163
Macks Head 16553...................206 Middle Bay 16598...................184
Macleod Harbor 16701 .................106 Middle Cape 16598 ..................184
Magnet Rock 16645 ..................127  Middle Ground Shoal 16663, 16662............142
Magnetic disturbances                                                  ................. 18 Middle Ground Shoal 16709...............86
Maguire Islands 16045 .................327 Middle Island 16593 ..................163
Main Bay 16705....................105 Middle Lagoon 16535 .................216
Maknik Lagoon 16006 .................306 Middle Ledge 16462..................270
Makushin 16517....................236 Middle Peak 16433...................279
Makushin Bay 16517 ..................236 Middle Point 16709 ..................85
Makushin Point 16517..................236 Middle Reef 16440...................277
Makushin Valley 16528 .................234 Middle Reef 16591...................172
Makushin Volcano 16518 ................236 Middle Rock 16707 ..................92
MAlaspina Glacier 16016.................78 Middle Rocks 16433..................279
Malga Bay 16528 ...................230 Middleton Island 16700.................82
Malina Bay 16594 ...................176 Midnight Cove 16681..................120
Malina Point Light 16576, 16594 .............154  Midway Bay 16592 ..................166
Malka Bay 16594 ...................177 Midway Islands 16061 .................326








                                          Page                                                                               Page
Midway Reef 16363 ...................288 Murre Rocks 16540...................204
Mikhail Point 16430 ...................281 Mushroom Reef 16598 .................184
Mikkelsen Bay 16046 ..................327 Muskomee Bay 16594 .................178
Miles Glacier 16013 ...................80 Mutton Cove 16516 ..................238
Miller Point 16594.................... 157
Milne Point 16062 ................. ..326 Naga Point 16471 ...................267
Mine Harbor 16363 ...................288 Nagahut Rocks 16645..................126
Miners Point 16576, 16597 ...........  .....179 Nagai Island 16540...................205
Minesweeper signals ...................28 Nagai Rocks 16580...................171
Mink Island 16705 ....................105 Naginak Cove 16517 ..................236
Mink Point 16597 .....................0S Nakalilok Bay 16568..................191
Missak Bay 16576, 16580 .................187  Nakehamik Island 16566 ................193
Mist Harbor 16540 ....................206 Naked Island 16705, 16709 ...............98
Mitrofania 16013 ....................196 Nakeen 16323.....................292
Mitrofania Bay 16013 ..................197 Naknek 16323.....................291
Mitrofania Island 16013 ........... ......197 Naknek Light 16323 ..................291
Moffet Lagoon 16520 ..................287 Naknek River 16323 ..................291
Moffet Point 16520 ...................287 Narrow Cape 16593...................164
Monashka Bay 16594 ..................157 Narrow channels....................30
Monolith Point 16434, 16423 ...............282  Narrow Strait 16594 ..................156
Montague Island 16700 ..................83 Narrows, The 16594..................178
Montague Point 16701, 16709 ...............108 Narrows, The 16707 ..................92
Montague Strait 16701 ..................106 Narrows, The 167 1 0..................86
Monti Bay 16761 ....................76 Narwhal Island 16046..................327
Moonlight Bay 16681 ..................120 Nash Harbor 16006...................303
Moose Point 16663, 16660 ................142 Nassau Fiord 16700 ..................112
Moose Point Shoal 16663, 16660 ..............142  Natalia Peninsula 16592.................167
Moraine Island 16741 ..................78 Natalia Point 16592...................167
Moraine Reef 16741 ...................78 Nateekin Bay 16530 .. . ...............234
Morakas Point 16323 ...................291  National Environmental Satellite, Data, and Information Service                                                    8
Morgan Point Light 16549 .................213  National Institute of Standards and Technology........15
Momning Cove 16681 ...................120 National Ocean Service .................3
Morris Cove 16528 ...................232  National Ocean Service Offices..............330
Morzhovoi Bay 16535 ..................216  National Standard Abbreviations for Broadcasts                                                       .......13
Moser Bay 16591 ....................172 National Weather Service ................7
Moses Point 16200 ...................312  National Weather Service Forecast Offices (WSFOs)  ...                                                               7
Moses Rock 16551 ....................210  National Weather Service Forecasts Offices (WSFOs)                                                      .          ....334
Moss Cape 16549 ....................212  National Weather Service Offices ............7, 333
Moss Point 16681 ....................121  National Weather Service Port Meteorological Officers (PMOs)    8,334
Moundhill Point 16480 ..................256 Natoa Island 16682...................118
Mount Ballyhoo 16529 ..................232 Naugolka Point 16594..................179
Mount Chiginagak 16568 .................191 Nautical Almanac ...................331
Mount Cleveland 16501 .. ..i.............251 Nautical Charts ....................330
Mount Douglas 16580 ..................186 Nautical charts ...................3, 15
Mount Fairweather 16760 .................75 Naval Observatory...................27
Mount Gareloi 16460 ...................271 Navigation Rules....................331
Mount Gilbert 16531 ...................226  Navigation Safety Regulations ..SQ...........5
Mount Herman 16594 ..................155 Navigation, Satellite ..................24
Mount Katmai 16580               .            .................. 188 NAVSAT ......................24
Mount Kubugakli 16580 .................188 NAVSAT information ..................27
Mount Logan 16016 ...................78 NAVSAT Navigation System...............24
Mount Mageik 16580 ...................188  NAVTEX Transmitting Stations                                                                                     ..............332
Mount Marshall Reese 165 18...............235 Navy Cove 16432 ...................279
Mount Moffett 16471 ..................265 Navy Island 16568...................190
Mount Pomneroy 16648               ~.................138 Nazan Bay 16490 ...................259
Mount St. Elias 16016 ..................78 Near Island 16540 ...................205
Mount Susisna 16660 ...................140 Near Island 16595...................1t58
Mount Tulik 16513 ...................244  Near Islands 16421, 16423................277
Mount Vsevidof 16500 ...................247  Necessity Cove 16566..................195
Mountain Point 16540 ..................205 Neck Point 16701 ...................83
Mountain Slough 16709 ..................81  Needle Rock 16529.                                                                                               ..................232
Mountain Village 16006 .................307 Needle, The 16701...................107
Mt. Eccles 167 1 0....................87 Negro Head 16566 . ................-                                                                               194
Mt. Eyakl167lO0                                                          ..... ................87  Neketa Bayl16605S...................174
Mud Bay 16566.....................194 Nellie Juan Glacier 16705 ................105
Mueller Cove 16511 ...................247 Nellie Martin River 16701................84
Mulgrave Hills 16005 ..................321 Nelson Bay 16709 ...................87
Mummy Bay 16702 .....................l Nelson Island 16594 ..................156
Mummy Island 16704               .            .......... .......IIl  Nelson Lagoon 16363..................288
Mummy Island 16709 ............;......81 Nelson Reef 16591...................172
Mummy Island LightS5 16709 ...............81 Nenana .......................310
Murder Point 16432 ...................279 Neragon Island 16240..................308
Murk Bay 17301 ....................74 Nest Rock 16514....................242
Murphy Cove 17301 ..................-                                     74 Neva Cove 16594................... 157
Murphys Cove 16547 ...................219 Nevidiskov Bay 16430 .................281




1- 16


                                      Page                                                                               Page
New Fort Hamilton 16240 ................310 Northeast Rocks 16441 ................275
New Year Islands 16704..................1I Northwest Bay 16705..................105
Newbalen River 16013 .................293 Northwest Cape 16006 .................306
Newman Bay 16592 ..................167 Northwest Coiner Light 16005 ..............319
Newport Entrance 16046.................327  Northwest Harbor 16540 ................204
Nichols Hills 16322...................293 Northwest Point 16463 .................269
Nichols Point 16535 ..................217 Northwest Reef 16382 .................302
Nichols Spit 16322...................293  Northwestern Glacier 16682...............119
Nikiski 16662, 16663..................141  Northwestern Lagoon 16682...............119
Nikiski Bay 16663, 16662 ................141 Norton Bay 16200...................312
Nikiski No. 2 16663, 16662 ...............141 Norton Sound 16006..................308
Nikolai Cove 16566...................195 Notices to Mariners ..................2,331
Nikolai Creek 16663, 16662 ...............139 Nubble Point 16645 ..................129
Nikolski 16511 ....................248 Nuchek 16709.....................85
Nikolski Bay 1651 1.                                                         .................247 Nsuka Bay 16681....................119
Nile Point 16434, 16423 .................282 Nuka Island 16681...................122
Ninagiak Island 16580..................186 Nuka Passage 16681 ..................122
Ninilchik 16640, 16661 .................135 Nuka Point 16681 ...................122
NIST Times and Frequency Dissemination Services, Special Publication 432    Nuka River 16681...................121
  15                                                                             Nuka Rock 16681 ...................122
Nitrof'Point 16460 ...................272 Nukshak Island 16603 .................186
Niyrakpak Lagoon 16006 ................306 Nunachik Pass 16240..................310
Nizki Island 16435...................278 Nunachuak 16322 ...................294
No Name Cove 16513..................243 Nunatak Fiord 16761..................78
NOAA Weather Radio.................7, 13, 333  Nunivak Island 16006 .................303
Noatak 16005.....................321 Nushagak 16322....................294
Noatak River 16005...................321 Nushagak Bay 16322..................293
Noisy Islands 16576, 16597 ...............179  Nushagak Point 16322 .................294
Noisy Islands Light 16576, 16597.............179  Nushagak River 16322 .................293
Noisy Passage 16576, 16597 ...............179  Nut Island Light N 16592.................166
Nokotlek Point 16087..................323 Nuvagapak Lagoon 16042................329
Nome 16206 .....................314 Nuvagapak Point 16042.................329
Nome River 16200...................314 Nyman Peninsula 16596.................163
Nominal range.....................19 Nyman Spit 16596...................163
Noon Point 16556, 16540 ................199
Noorvik 16005.....................321 Oarlock Island 16004..................325
Nord Island 16606 ...................126 Observation Island 167 1 0................87
Nordyke Island 16648..................136 Observation Point 16240 ................310
North Anchorage 16381.................301  Observation Point 16592 ................165
North Arm 16471 ...................267 Obstructions .....................2
North Arm 16478 ...................263 Ocean Bay 16592 ...................167
North Arm 16681 ...................121 Ocean Cape 16761...................76
North Cape 16480 ...................259 Ocean Cape Light 16761 ................76
North Cape 16594 ...................156 Odiak Channel 1671 0..................87
North Cove 16501 ...................250 Ogangen Island 16521 .................241
North Crillon Glacier 16762 ...............75  Ogchul Island 16500..................249
North Foreland 16663, 16662...............139 Oglala Pass 16440...................273
North Head 16442 ...................276 Ogliuga Island 16460..................271
North Head 16531 ...................228 Ogliuga Pass 16460 ..................271
North Head 16553 ...................210 Oglodak Island 16484 .................262
North Head 16648 ...................137 Oil Bay 16648 ....................137
North Island 16474...................267 Oil Pollution .....................30
North Island 167 10...................87 Oil Spills.......................72
North Island Rock 167 10 ................87 Okalee Channel 16723 .................80
North Pinnacle Rock 16535 ...............223 Okalee Spit 16723...................79
North Point 16240 ...................310 Okee Bay 16511....................247
North Point 16665, 16663 ................143 Okee Point 16511 ...................247
North Point Shoal 16663, 16665..............143  Oksenof Point 16520..................287
North Point Shoal 16665, 16663..............145  Old Fort Hamilton 16240 ................310
North Rocks 16474...................267 Old Harbor 16592 ...................167
North Star Island 16045.................327 Old Iliamna 16013...................293
North Twin Bay 16702 .................109 Old Iliamna 16640...................137
North Twin Peak 16591 .................172 Old Kaguyak Bay 16590 ................169
Northeast Arm 16597..................180 Old Man Rocks 16522 .................238
Northeast Arm 16702                                                       .................Ill Olga Bay 16590....................172
Northeast Arm Light 1 16597................0s Olga Narrows 16590..................172
Northeast Bight 16553. 16556 ..............205  Oliktok Point 16062 ..................326
Northeast Cape 16006..................305 Olsen Bay 16708 ...................88
Northeast Cove 16478..................264 Olsen Cove 16705...................99
Northeast Cove 16704................. Ill Olsen Island .....................99
Northeast Harbor 16540.................204 Omega .......................25, 26
Northeast Harbor 16547.................219 Omega Island 16551 ..................209
Northeast Harbor 16598 .................183 Onion Bay 16576, 16594 ................154
Northeast Point 16382..................302 Open Bay 16521....................241
Northeast Point 16547..................219 Open Bight 16531...................228





                                                                                  1- 17


                                      Page                                                                             Page
Orca Bay 16709 ....................86 Perevalnie Islands 16604 ................149
Orca Inlet 1671 0....................87 Perevalnie Passage 16604 ................149
Orizaba Reef 16240...................311 Peril Cape 16594....................150
Oruktalik Entrance 16042 ................329 Pern Island 16645 ...................126
Orusktalik Lagoon 16042.................329 Pert Rock 16645....................126
Orzinski Bay 16553...................202 Perry Island 16705...................99
Osier Island 16761 ...................77 Perry Island Light 16705 ................99
Ostrof Point 16594...................156 Perry Passage 16705 ..100.............. o
Ostrovka Point 16594..................153 Perryville 16556, 16540.................198
Qaviak 16305 .....................297 Peter Island 16517 ...................236
Osviak River 16305...................297 Peterson Bay 16547 ..................219
Otkit Bay 16434, 16423 ................282 Peterson Bay 16645 ..................131
Otmelni Point 16594 ..................157 Petes Pass 16682....................118
Otter Right 16513 ...................244 Petrel Bank 16460 ...................273
Otter Cove 16535....................218 Petrel Island 16556...................199
Otter Island 16382 ...................302 Petrel Point 16460 ...................272
Otter Point 16513....................244 Petrof Glacier 10681 ..................123
Otter Strait 16540....................204 Petrof Point 16681...................123
Outer Iliasik Island 16549 ................212  Phipps Point 16709...................85
Outer Island 16681 ...................119 Phoenix Bay 16604...................149
Outer Right Cape 16592 ................165 Picnic Harbor 16645...................123
Outer Seal Rock 16601 .................184 Pigot Bay 16705....................101
Outer Signal 16522 ..................238 Pikmiktalik River 16240.................310
Outlet Cape 16576, 16594 ................154 Pillar Cape 16594 ...................150
Ouzinkie 16594 ....................156 Pillar Mountain 16594 ................                                                                            159
Ouzinkie Narrows 16594.................157 Pillar Point 16592....................165
Ouzinkie Point 16594 ................157 Pillar Rock 16441 ...................275
                                            Pillars, The 16500 ...................249
Pacific Shoal 16064...................325 Pillbox Rock 16463 ..................270
Pad Island 16556, 16540.................201 Pilot Harbor 16681...................121
Paddy Bay 16701....................112 Pilot Point 16011....................289
Paguna Arm 16682...................119 Pilot Rock 16682 ...................114
Palisades Lagoon 16681.................121 Niot Rock Light 16682 .................114
Palisades Point 16490..................259 Pilot Station 16006...................307
Palm Point 16723....................80 Pilotage .......................70
Palma Bay 17301....................74 Pincer Point 16463...................269
Pancake Rock 16511 ..................248 Pingok Island 16062 ..................326
Panhat Point 16702..1.................0t Pingokraluk Point 16041 ................329
Pankof Breaker 16535..................217 Pingorarok Pass 16086 .................323
Paps, The 16762 ....................75 Pinkidulia Cove 16648 .................136
Paradise Cove 16682 ..................118 Pinnacle Island 16006..................305
Paramanof Bay 16604..................176 Pinnacle Point 16490..................258
Parrot Island 16594...................151 Pinnacle Rock 16531..................226
Parshas Bay 16708 ...................88 Pinnacle Rock 16540..................220
Partition Cove 16592 ..................167 Pinnacle Rock 16681..................122
Party Cape 16604....................148 Pinnacle Rock 16709..................81
Pasagshak Bay 16593..................164 Pinnacle Rock 16723..................79
Pasagshak Point 16593 .................164 Pinusuk Island 16556................199
Passage Canal 16705 ..                                                   ................101  Pipelaying barges ...................65
Passage Island 16646..                                                   ................128  Piper Cove 16475 ...................265
Passage Point 16478 ..................264 Pirate Cove 16553 ...................207
Passage Point 16705 ..................106 Pirate Cove Light 16553.................207
Pastol Bay 16240....................309 Pirate Shake 16553, 16556................205
Pastolik River 16240 ..................310 Pisa Point 16433....................279
Patricia Bight 16434, 16423 ...............282  Pisa Tower 16433 ...................279
Patricia Point 16434, 16423................282 Pit Rock 16476 ....................266
Patterson Point 16440 .................274 Pitt Point 16066....................325
Patton Bay 16701 ....................84 Pivot Point 16592 ...................165
Patton Cove 16460 ...................272 Platinum 16300 ....................297
Paul Island 16556, 16540.................199  Pleiades Islands 16700 .................110
Pavlof Bay 16551....................210 Pleiades Light 16700..110...............I
Pavlof Harbor 16547 ..................219 Plover Islands 16081 ..................324
Pavlof Islands 16549 ..................211 Plum Island Rocks 16474 ................267
Pavlof Volcano 16011..................185 Poa Island 16531....................226
Peacock Point 16513 ..................243 Pochnoi Point 16460 ..................272
Peak Island 16705 ...................98 Podsopochni Bay 16486.................261
Peaked Island 16430 ..................280 Podsopochni Point 16486................261
Peard Bay 16084 ...................323 Pogromnni Volcano 16520 ................223, 287
Pedersen Glacier 16682 .................118 Point Adam 16645...................127
Peninsula Island 16556, 16540 ..............205  Point Banks 16604 ..................149
Pennsylvania Rock 16705 ................106 Point Barrow 16082 ..................324
Penny River 16200 ...................314 Point Bazil 16701 ...................107
Perch Rock 16514 ...................242 Point Bede 16645 ...................127,
Peregrebni Point 16594 .................154 Point Bentinck 16709 ..................81
Perenosa Bay 16604...................149 Point Brower 16061 ..................327





I-18


                                                                  Page                                                                                    Page
Point Bryant 16701 ....................        ...............                 106  Porpoise Rocks 16553 ................................ 206
Point Campbell 16665, 16663 ...........................                        143  Porpoise Rocks 16709 ................................                               85
Point Carrew 16761...................................                           76  Port Ashton 16702 ................................... 09
Point Collie 16085 ................................. 323  Port Audrey 16704 ................................... 111
Point Countess 16702 .................................                        110  Port Bailey 16594 .................................... 154
Point Dexter 16200 ...................................                        312  Port Bainbridge 16683 ................................ 113
Point Divide 16363 ...................................                        288  Port Benney 16702 ................................... 109
Point Doran 16700 ....................................                        101  Port Chalmers 16701, 16709 ........................... 107
Point Eleanor 16705 ..................................                        105  Port Chatham 16645 .................................. 127
Point Eleanor Light 16705 .............................                        105   Port Chatham Entrance Light 16645 .                 ....................          127
Point Elrington 16702 .................................                       109  Port Clarence 16204 .................................. 315
Point Elrington Light 16702 ............................                      109  Port Dick 16645 ..................................... 123
Point Esther 16705 ...................................                        100  Port Etches 16709 .................................... 85
Point Esther Light 16705 ...............................                      100  Port Fidalgo 16708 ................................... 88
Point Franklin 16084 ..................................                       323  Port Graham 16646 .................................. 128
Point Freemantle 16707 ................................                        89  Port Graham Entrance Light 16646 .                   .....................          128
Point Freemantle 16708 ................................                         96  Port Gravina 16708 .................................. 88
Point Grace 16702 ....................................                        108  Port Heiden 16343 ................................... 289
Point Helen 16701 ....................................                        108  Port Hobron 16592 ................................... 166
Point Helen Light 16701 ...............................                       108  Port Lawrence 16605 ................................. 175
Point Hey 16723 .....................................                           80  Port Levashef 16530 .................................. 234
Point Hope 16124 ....................................                         322  Port Lions 16594 ............ ....................... 154
Point Horn 16709 ....................................                           85  Port Moller 16363 ................................... 288
Point Jackson 16204 ..................................                        315  Port Mulgrave 16761 ................................. 77
Point Kadin 16518 ....................................                        236  Port Nellie Juan 16705 ................................ 102
Point Latouche 16761 .................................                         76  Port Nellie Juan Light 16705 .                  ..........................102
Point Lay 16101 .....................................                         322  Port O'Brien 16597 .................................. 180
Point MacKenzie 16665, 16663 .........................                        143  Port Safety 16200 .................................... 314
Point Manby 16761 ...................................                           76  Port San Juan 16702 .................................. 109
Point Marsh 16085 ...................................                         323  Port Series of the United States .                ........................ 331
Point Martin 16013 ...................................                          81  Port Valdez 16707 ................................... 92
Point McIntyre 16061 .................................                        326  Port Wakefield 16594 ................................. 154
Point Munoz 16761 ...................................                           76  PortWells 16700 .................................... 101
Point Naskowhak 16646 ...............................                         128  Port William 16605 .................................. 175
Point Nowell 16705 ...................................                        105  Port Wrangell 16568 .................................. 190
Point of Rocks 16704 .................................                         111  Portage 16660 ....................................... 143
Point Pakenham 16700 ................................ 101  Portage Bay 16517 ................................... 236
Point Pellew 16705 ...................................                          99  Portage Bay 16553 ................................... 203
Point Petrof 16548 ....................................                       219  Portage Bay 16570 ................................... 189
Point Pigot 16705 ....................................                        101  Portage Bay 16590 .................................. 173
Point Pigot Light 16705 ...............................                       101  Portage Bay 16593 ................................... 164
Point Pogibshi 16645, 16646 ............................                       128  Portage Bight 16463 ..................................                             270
Point Pogibshi Light 16645, 16646 .......................                      128  Portage Lagoon 16486 ................................                             262
Point Possession 16665, 16663 ...... ..................                        142  Ports and Waterways Safety ............................                             65
Point Pyke 16683 .....................................                        113  Ports and Waterways Safety-General .....................                             39
Point Riou Spit 16741 .................................                        78  Posliedni Point 16594 ................................. 151
Point Romanof 16240 .................................                         310  Posliedni Point 16604 ................................. 149
Point Romanof Light 16240 ............................                        310  Possession 16660 .................................... 142
Point Spencer 16204 ..................................                        315  Potato Mountain 16005 ............................... 319
Point Spencer Light 16204 .............................                       315  Potato Point 16707 ................................... 92
Point Steele 16709 ....................................                         82  Potato Point 16708 ................................... 82
Point Tebenkof 16518 ................................                         235  Powder Point 16702 .................................. 109
Point Turner 16761 ...................................                         76  Powooiliak Point 16006 ............................... 306
Point Waters 16702 ...................................                        110  Pratt Cove 16460 .................................... 272
Point Welcome 16540 .................................                         204  Pratt Point 16440 .................................... 274
Point Whitshed 16709 .................................                          81  Preparations for being towed by Coast Guard .               .............           12
Point Woodcock 16701 ................................                         106  Pribilof Islands 16380 ................................ 300
Point Woronzof 16665, 16663 ...........................                        143  Priest Rock 16517 ...................................236
Pokok Bay 16042 ....................................                          329  Priest Rock 16528 ................................... 232
Pole Island 16046 ....................................                        327  Prince of Wales Passage 16702 .                   ........................ 110
Polivnoi Rock 16513 ..................................                        243  Prince of Wales Shoal 16200 ........................... 319
Polka Rock 17301 ....................................                           74  Prince Shoal 16761 ................................... 77
Polovina Hill 16382 ...................................                       302  Prince William Sound 16700 ...........................82
Poltava Island 16568 ..................................                       190   Prince William Sound Shipping Safety Fairway ............                           82
Pomeroy Island 16648 .................................                         137   Prince William Sound Traffic Separation Scheme...........                          92
Poperechnoi Island 16551 ..............................                       211   Prince William Sound Vessel Traffic Service ..............                          92
Popof Head 16553 ....................................                         208  Princess Head 16528 ................................. 232
Popof Island 16553 ...................................                        207  Princess Rock 16547 ................................. 219
Popof Strait 16553 ....................................                       208  Principal ports ....................................... 70
Popof Strait Entrance Light 1 16553 ......................                    208   Procession Rocks 16683 ...............................                             113
Popokamiut 16300 ....................................                         299  Prokhoda Point 16440 ................................ 274
Porcupine Cove 16682 ................................                          114  Prokoda Island 16594 ................................. 156
Porcupine Point 16708 ...............................                          88  Prokoda Island Light 2 16594 .                   .........................          156
Porcupine River ......................................                        310  Promontory Cove 16520 .............................. 223
Porpoise Harbor 16553 ................................                        206  Promontory Hill 16520 ................................ 223






                                                                               1- 19

                                     Page                                                                            Page
Protection Bay 16521 ..................240 Red Cinder Dome 16518 ................235
Protection Point 16322..................293 Red Cove 16553....................208
Prudhoe Bay 16061...................326 Red Glacier 16640 ...................138
Puale Bay 16580....................188 Red Head 16421....................280
Public Health Service ..................7 Red Head 16709....................86
Public Health Service Quarantine Stations ..........334  Red Hill 16520 ....................223, 286
Puffin Island 16005 ........I..........320 Red Hill 16553 ....................202
Puffin Island 16592 ...............I...167 Red Mountain 16300 ..................297
Puffin Island 16595...................158 Red River 16601....................184
Puffin Peak 16606 ...................126 Redfield Cove 16761 ..................77
Puget Bay 16683....................113 Redfox Bay 16605...................175
Pulpit Rocks 16471...................268 Redoubt Bay 16662, 16660................139
Pumicestone Bay 16515 .................237 Redoubt Point 16661..................138
Punuk Islands 16006 ..................305 Redoubt Volcano 16660.................138
Purple Bluff 16701 ...................84 Reef Bight 16531 ...................228
Pustoi Island 16513...................244 Reef Island 16708 ...................89
Putnam Point 16701...................107 Reef Point 16382....................302, 303
Pye Islands 16681 ...................119 Reef Point 16521 ..................241
Pye Reef 16681 ....................119 Reef Point 16531....................228
Pyramid Cove 16432 ..................279 Reef Point 16553....................203
Pyramid Island 16441..................274 Reese Bay 16518....................235
Pyre Peak 16480....................255 Refuge Island 16594 ..................158
                                          Regulated Navigation Areas and Limited Access Areas           .         ...55
Quail Bay 16475....................265 Reindeer Hills 16200..................312
Quarantine stations, human................334  Reindeer Island 16061 .................326
Quarantine, Animal...................334 Reindeer Point 16500..................245
Quarantine, animal ...................2 Reliance Point 16046..................327
Quarantine, human ...................7 Renshaw Point 16553..................203
Quarantine, Plant....................334 Repairs .......................72
Quarantine, plant....................2 Repetition Point 16514 .................242
Quartz Bay 16681 ...................121 Reported information..................2
Queer Island 16593.163  Reports from ships ..................13
Quillian Bay 16705 ...100 Rescue Coordination Centers...............9, 333
Quinhagak 16300....................298 Restricted areas ..................6, 66
                                           Resurrection Bay 16682.................114
Rabbit Island 16681...................119 Return Islands 16061..................326
Race, The 16474....................267 Reynard Cove 16441 ..................275
Racons........................23,65 Reynolds Head 16535 ..................216
Radar ........................30 Richardson Highway ..................92
Radar beacons (Racons) .................23, 65 Ridge Point 16532...................228
Radar reflectors on small craft ...............12 Right Arm 16648 ...................137
Radial Island 16568 ...................191 Right Hand Point 16315 .................296
Radio aids to navigation .................2 Ringgold Island 16474 .................267
Radio bearings ....................21 Ringgold Sound 16474 ................ 267
Radio distress procedures.................8 Riou Bay 16741....................78
Radio navigation warnings and weather...........12  Rip Rock 16475....................265
Radio Navigational Aids.................331 Ripple Cove 16682...................118
Radio shore stations providing medical advice ........334  River Cove 16511 ...................247
Radio Weather Broadcasts ................333  Rivermouth Point 16594.................151
Radiobeacons .....................21 Road Island 16556, 16540................199
Radiofaicsimile Weather Information ............333  Roaring Cove 16681...................120
RADIOMEDICAL ...................12, 334 Roberts Mountain 16006.................303
RADIONAVIGATION USER INFORMATION........26  Rock Island 16535...................223
Radiotelephone channels.................31 Rock Islet 16517....................236
Ragged Island 16681 ..................120 Rock Point 16240 ...................311
Ragged Jack 16520...................223 Rock Point 16597 ...................180
Ragged Point 16475...................265 Rocky Bay 16645 ...................123
Ram Point 16516....................238 Rocky Bay 16709 ...................85
Ramsey Bay 16556. 16540................201 Rocky Cove 16648...................136
Ranchers Point 16513..................243 Rocky Island 16605 ..................174
Range Island 16553 ...................208 Rocky Point......................217
Range Isle 16704....................III Rocky Point 16200...................313
Range Peak 16648 ...................137 Rocky Point 16315...................296
Range Point 16433 ...................280 Rocky Point 16529 ..................232
Ranges ...............I.........2 Rocky Point 16535 ...................217
Raspberry Cape 16576, 16594...............154  Rocky Point 16598...................183
Raspberry Island 16594 .................153 Rocky Point 16704 ..Ill...............H
Raspberry Strait 16594 .................177 Rocky Point 16707...................92
Raspberry Strait Light 16576. 16594 ............178  Rocky Point Light 10 16707 ...............92
Rat Island 16441....................274 Rodman Reach 16591..................172
Rat Island Pass 16440..................274 Rolling Bay 16592...................167
Rat Islands 16.440....................272 Rootok Island 16531 ..................226
Raven Bay 16521....................241 Rootok Strait 16531 ..................226
Red Bluff 16646 ....................128 Ross Cove 16566 ...................195
Red Bluff Mountain 16540 ...............198 Rough Bay 16463 ...................270






1-20


                                                         Page                                                                   Page
Rough Beach 16553 ..................................           203  Savoonga 16006 ..................................... 306
Round Cove 16477 ...................................           264  Savoonga Point 16006 ................................ 306
Round Head 16471 ....................................          267  Saw Island 16707 .................................... 92
Round Head 16531 ...................................           227  Sawmill Bay 16702 .................................. 109
Round Hill 16591 ....................................           172  Sawmill Bay 16707 ................................. 92
Round Island 16315 ...................................         296  Sawmill Cove 16761 ................................. 77
Round Island 16522 ...................................         239  Scabbard Bay 16476 .................................. 267
Round Island 16531 ...................................         224  Scammon Bay 16240 ................................. 308
Round Island 16551 ...................................         211  Scarab Rock 16462 ................................... 270
Round Island 16553 ..................................          210  Schooner Rock 16709 ................................ 85
Round Rock 16580 ...................................            171  Schrader Island 16708 ................................ 98
Round Top 16518 ....................................           236  Scotch Cap 16520 .................................... 223
Roundtop Mountain 16520 .............................          223  Scotch Cap Light 16520 ...............................             223
Routes .............................................            68  Scotch Cap Pinnacle 16520 ............................ 223
Ruby ..............................................            310  Scotland Point 16553 ................................. 207
Rudisell Reef 16511 ..................................         248  Scott Island 16648 ................................... 137
Rue Ledge 16480 .....................................          257  Scripps Bay 16477 ................................... 264
Rugged Island 16682 ..................................          114  Sea Lion Pass 16441 .................................. 275
Rugged Island Light 16682 .............................         114  Sea Lion Rock 16382 ................................. 302
Rurik Harbor 16761 ...................................          77  Sea Lion Rock 16441 ................................. 275
Rush Rock 16535 .............................., .....           215  Sea Otter Bay 16761 .................................. 77
Russell Fiord 16760 ...................................          78  Sea Otter Island 16604 ................................ 149
Russian Anchorage 16576, 16580 ........................         187    Sea Otter Pass 16460 .................................          271
Russian Bay 16500 ...................................          249  Sea Ranger Reef 16723 .............................. 79
Russian Harbor 16590 .................................          169  Seahorse Islands 16084 ............................... 323
Russian Point 16646 ..................................          128  Seal Bay 16604 ...................................... 149
                                                                 Seal Cape 16013 .....................................           195
Saddleridge Point 16480 ............................... 256  Seal Cape 16520 ..................................... 223
Saddlers Mistake 16540 ............................... 206  Seal Cape 16551 ..................................... 210
Sadie Cove 16645 ....................................           131  Seal Cape Light 16551 ................................ 210
Safety Cove 16683 ...................................           114  Seal Island 16705 .................................... 106
Sagavanirktok River 16061 .............................        327    Seal Island Light 16705 ...............................           106
Sagchudak Island 16480 ............................... 258  Seal Islands 16011 ................................... 289
Sagigik Island 16480 ..................................        258  Seal Rocks 16682 .................................... 114
Sailing Directions ....................................        331  Seal Rocks 16700 .................................... 83
Saktuina Point 16064 ..................................        325  Seal Rocks 16709 .................................... 84
Sales agents .........................................            3  Seal Rocks Light 16682 ............................... 114
Sales Information ....................................         330  Seal Rocks Light 16709 ............................... 84
Sally Island 16597 ....................................         180  Sealion Point 16520 .................................. 224
Salmo Point 16710 ...................................           87  Sealion Rocks 16520 ................................. 287
Salmo Rock 16662, 16660 .............................           140  Sealion Rocks 16553 ................................. 209
Salmon Lagoon 16441 ................................. 275  Sealion Rocks 16604 ................................. 150
Salt Island 16487 .....................................        260    Sealion Rocks Lightt 16520 ............................ 287
Saltery Cove 16593 ...................................          165  Search and Rescue ................................... 8
Samalga Island 16500 .................................         248  Searchlights ........................................ 30
Samalga Pass 16501 ..................................          249  Second Priest Rock 16529 ............................. 232
San Diego Bay 16553 .................................          203  Security Cove 16305 ................................. 297
San Juan Bay 16701 ..................................           106  Sedanka Island 16522 ................................. 238
Sanak Harbor 16547 ..................................          219  Sedanka Pass 16522 .................................. 238
Sanak Island 16547 ...................................         219  Sedanka Point 16515 ................................. 237
Sanak Islands 16547 ..................................         218  Seguam Island 16480 ................................. 255
Sanak Peak 16547 ....................................          218  Seguam Pass 16480 .................................. 257
Sanborn Harbor 16553 ................................ 206  Segula Island 16441 .................................. 274
Sand Bay 16478 ......................................          264  Segula Pass 16441 ................................... 274
Sand Islands 16240...................................          308  Seiche.............................................                 28
Sand Point 16553 .....................................         208  Selawik 16005 ...................................... 321
Sandman Reefs 16547, 16540 ...........................         220  Selawik Lake 16005 .................................. 321
Sandy Bay 16682 .....................................           119  Selawik River 16005 ................................. 321
Sandy Cove 16532 ....................................          228  Seldovia 16646 ...................................... 129
Sandy Cove 16535 ....................................          215  Seldovia Bay 16646 .................................. 128
Sandy Cove 16540 ....................................          204    Seldovia Bay Entrance Light 16646 ......................         128
Sanigaruak Island 16081 ...............................        325    Seldovia Bay Light 3 16646............. ..............            128
Sanigaruak Pass 16081 ................................ 325  Seldovia Lagoon 16646 ............................... 129
Sankin Island 16535 ..................................         216  Seldovia Point 16646 ................................. 128
Santa Flavia Bay 16592 ................................         165    Seldovia Slough 16646 ................................ 129
Saposa Bay 16594 ....................................           150    Selected Worldwide Marine Weather Broadcasts ...........        331
Sarana Bay 16433 ....................................          279  Selezen Bay 16594 ................................... 151
Sarana Bay 16531 ....................................          229  Selezen Point 16594 .................................. 151
Sarana Cove 16487 ...................................          260  Selief Bay 16594 .................................... 178
Sarana Island 16549 ..................................         212    Semichi Islands 16421, 16423 ..........................          277
Sarichefl Island 16005 ................................. 319  Semidi Islands 16013 ................................. 192
Sarichef Strait 16006 ..................................       305    Semisopochnoi Island 16460 ...........................           272
SARSAT ...........................................              23  Sennett Point 16520 .................................. 223
Satellite Navigation ...................................        24  Sentinel Island 16604 ................................. 149
SATELLITE POSITION INDICATING RADIO BEACON (EPIRB)               21    Sentry Rock 16463 ...................................           268




                                                                                                                         1-21


                                                         Page                                                                   Page
SeredkaBay 16531 ...................................           227  Simeonof Island 16540 ................................ 204
Sergief Bay 16480 .................................... 259  Simpson Bay 16709 .................................. 86
Serpent Point 16514 ...................................        243  Simpson Cove 16044 ................................. 328
Settlement Point 16551 ................................        210  Simpson Lagoon 16062 ............................... 326
Settler Cove 16594 ....................................        154  Sinuk River 16200 ................................... 314
Seven Sisters, Th6 16709 ............................. 85  Sirius Point 16441 .................................... 275
Sevenmile Beach 16598 ................................         183  Sisek Cove 16522 .................................... 239
Seventy-second Pass 16480 .............................        255    Sisters, The 16661, 16660 ..............................        .140
Seward 16682 ........................................          116  Sitkagi Bluffs 16016 .................................. 78
Seward Peninsula 16200 ...............................         318    Sitkalidak Island 16592 ................................ 166
Shag Bluff 16590 .....................................         173  Sitkalidak Lagoon 16592 .............................. 167
Shag Island 16604 ....................................         174  Sitkalidak Passage 16592 .............................. 166
Shag Rock 16592 .....................................          166    Sitkalidak Passage Light 4 16592 ........................ 167
Shag Rocks 16594 .................................... 153  Sitkalidak Strait 16592 ................................ 166
Shagak Bay 16471 ....................................          267  Sitkin Point 16440 ................................... 274
Shahafka Cove 16595 .................................          157  Sitkinak Dome 16580 ................................. 170
Shaiak Island 16305 ...................................        297    Sitkinak Island 16590, 16580 ........................... 170
Shakmanof Cove 16594 ...............................            155    Sitkinak Lagoon 16590, 16580 ..........................         170
Shakmanof Point 16594 ...............................           155  Sitkinak Strait 16590 ................................. 169
Shakmanof Point Light 16594 ...........................         155  Siwash Bay 16705 .................................... 99
Shaktoolik 16200 .....................................         312  Sixty-foot Rock 16645 ................................ 131
Shaktoolik River 16200 ................................ 312  Skagul Island 16460 .................................. 271
Shakun Islets 16580 ..................................         186  Skagul Pass 16460 ................................... 271
Shakun Rock 16580 ...................................          186  Skan Bay 16517 ..................................... 237
Shangin Bay 16604 ...................................          148  Skan Point 16517 .................................... 237
Shapka Island 16556 ..................................         199  Skipwith Reefs 16594 ................................. 151
Sharatin Bay 16594 ..................................          155  Skoot Cove 16436,16423 .............................. 278
Shaw Island 16648 ...................................          135  Skull Cliff 16083 ..................................... 323
Shearwater Bay 16592 .................................         165  Slate Island 16682 .................................... 118
Shearwater Point 16592 ...............................         165  Slavna Point 16549 ................................... 213
Sheep Bay 16592 .....................................          166  Sledge Island 16200 .................................. 315
Sheep Bay 16709 .....................................           86  Slipper Point 16708 .................................. 98
Sheep Creek 16511 ...................................          247  Slope Point 16486 .................................... 262
Sheep Island 16592 ..................................          166  Slough, The 16594 ................................... 178
Sheep Island 16597 ...................................         180  Small Bay 16522 ..................................... 240
Sheep Point 16709 ....................................          86  Small-craft facilities .................................. 72
Sheldon Point 16240 .................................          309  Smith Bay 16067 .................................... 325
Shelikof Strait 16580 ..................................       173  Smith Island 16705, 16709 ......................... 106
Shelter Bay 16665, 16663 .............................         143  Smoky Point 16011 ................................... 289
Shelter Bay 16709 ....................................          85  Snag Point 16322 .................................... 294
Shelter Cove 16478 ...................................         263  Snake River 16206 ................................... 314
Shelter Cove 16681 ...................................         121  Snake River 16322 ................................... 293
Shelton 16204 ......................................           316  Snipe Point 16521 .................................... 241
Shemnya Island 16436, 16423 ............................       277     Snug Comer Cove 16708 ..............................             88
Shemya Pass 16436 ..................................           278  Snug Cove 16591 .................................... 172
Shepard Point 16710 ..................................          87  Snug Harbor 16640 ................................... 138
Shields Point 16604 ..................................         149  Snug Harbor 16701 ................................... 108
Shingle Point 16363 ...................................        288  Sobaka Rock 16441 .................................. 275
Ship Channel 16322 ...................................         295  Soldotna 16662, 16660 ................................ 140
Ship Creek 16665 .....................................          147  Solomon 16200 ...................................... 313
Ship Island 16702 ....................................          110  Solomon River 16200 ................................ 313
Ship Rock 16463 .....................................          269  Sombrero Point 16551 ................................ 209
Ship Rock 16513 ....................................           244  Source diagrams ..................................... 15
Ship Rock 16592 .....................................          167  South Amaknak Rocks 16529 ........................... 234
Shipping Safety Fairway, Prince William Sound.............      82    South Anchorage 16500 ..............................             253
Shipping Safety Fairway, Unimak Pass ....................      224    South Arm 16471 ....................................             268
Shipping Safety Fairways ..............................         65  South Arm 16478 .................................... 263
Shipyard Cove 16761 .................................           77  South Arm 16597 ................................... 180
Shishaldin Volcano 16520 ..............................        223  South Arm 16701 .................................... 108
Shishmaref 16005 ....................................          319  South Bay 16462 ..................................... 270
Shishmaref Inlet 16005 .......... . ...................        319  South Bay 16705 ..................................... 99
Shishmaref Light 16005 .......................... .....        319  South Bight 16440 ................................... 273
Shoal Point 16471 ....................................         267  South Channel 16529 ................................. 233
Shotgun Cove 16706 ..................................          101  South Cove 16501 ............................251
Shoup Bay 16707 .....................................           92  South Head 16442 .................................... 276
Shoup Glacier 16708 ..................................          92  South Island 16013 ................................... 193
Shumagin Islands 16540 ...............................         203  South Naknek 16323 .................................. 292
Shungnak 16005 ......................................          321  South Pass 16442 .................................... 276
Shuyak Harbor 16605 .................................          175    South Pinnacle Rock 16535 ............................223
Shuyak Island 16604 ..................................   148, 174  South Point 16594 .................................... 156
Shuyak Strait 16605 ...................................         174  South Rock 16513 .................................... 243
Siknik Cape 16006 ....................................         306  South Twin Bay 16702 ................................ 109
Siku Point 16041 .....................................         329  South Twin Peak 16591 ............................... 172
Simeon Bight 16553 ..................................          208  Southeast Cape 16006 ................................. 306
Simeonof Harbor 16540 ................................         204  Southeast Pass 16547 ................................. 219



1- 22

                                      Page                                                                             Page
Southeast Rock 16723..................79 Stevenson Entrance 16604................148
Southwest Anchorage 16580 ...............171  Stevenson Entrance 16606................125
Southwest Breaker 16723 ................79  Stockdale Harbor 16701, 16709..............108
Southwest Cape 16006 .................306 Stockton Islands 16046.................327
Southwest Point 16382 .................302 Stonehouse Cove 16540.................201
Sozavarika Island 16535.................215 Stony Point 16382...................302
Spafarief Bay 16005 ..................320 Storey Island 16705 ..................98
Special Notice to Mariners................331  Storkersen Point 16061.................326
Special signals.....................28 Storm surge......................27
Spectacle Island 16540 .................205 Strait Bay 16522....................239
Sphinx Island 16705 ..................106 Strawberry Hill 16709 .................81
Spike Island 167 1 0...................87 Strawberry Point 16723.................80
Spire Rock 16521!...................241 Stripe Point 16486...................262
Spiridon Bayl16597...................181 Stripe Rockl16594...................151
Spithead 16529 ....................232 Strogonof Point 16343 .................289
SpitzlIsland 16013 ...................198 Stuart Island 16240...................310
Split Point 16471....................268 Stuart Mountain 16240 .................310
Split Top Mountain 16528 ................232 Stump Island 16061 ..................326
Spoil areas ......................is Sturdevant Rock 16441.................275
Spray Cape 16515 ...................237 Sturgeon Head 16598..................183
Spruce Cape 16595...................157 Sturgeon River 16598..................183
Spruce Island 16594 ..................155  Submarine cables and submerged pipelines .........18
Spy Island 16062 ...................326  Submarine emergency identification signals.........28
Square Point 16433...................279 Submerged pipelines..................18
Squaw Bay 16705....................99 Sud Island 16606 ...................126
Squaw Creek 16323...................292 Sugarloaf Head 16460 .................272
Squaw Harbor 16553 ..................209 Sugarloaf Island 16606 .................126
Squire Island 16704.................. III Sugarloaf Island 17301 .................74
Squire Point 16704.................. III  Sugarloaf Island Shoal 17301...............74
Squirrel Bay 16702...................110 Sugarloaf Mountain 16006................305
Squirrel Island 16704 ......1............I Sukhoi Bay 16601...................184
Squirrel River 16005 ..................321 Suklik Island 16013 ..................193
Sredni Bight 16441...................275 Sukoi Bay 16648 ...................135
Sredni Point 16441...................275 Sulua Bay 16590 ...................173
St. Catherine Cove 16535 ................217 Summer Bay 16528 ..................232
St. George 16381....................301 Summit Island 16315..................296
St. George Harbor 16381.................301  Sunday Harbor 16645..................123
St. George Island 16381.................301  Sundstrom Island 16590.................169
St. Herman Bay 16595 .................162 Sunny Cove 16594...................156
St. Lawrence Island 16006................305 Sunny Cove 16682...................114
St. Matthew Island 16006 ................305  Superstructure icing ..................67
St. Matthews Bay 16708.................88 Supplies.......................72
St. Mkchael 16240 ...............I....311 Surf Bay 16532 ....................228
St. Michael Bay 16240 .................311  Surface ship procedures for assisting aircraft in distress  ....0t
St. Michael Canal 16240.................310   Surface ship procedures for assisting distressed surface vessels                                              9
St. Michael Island 16240.................310 Surok Point 16682...................119
St. Michael Mountain 16240 ...............310 Surprise Bay 16681 ..................121
St. Paul 16382.....................303 Surprise Cove 16705..................101
St. Paul Harbor 16595..................158 Surveyor Bay 16514 ..................243
St. Paul Harbor Entrance Light 16595 ...........158  Susitna River 16663, 16660 ...............140
St. Paul Island 16382 ..................302 Sutwik Island 16568 ..................192
Stag Point 16549....................214 Sviechnikof Harbor 16480................258
Stag Point Light 16549 .................214 Svitlak Island 16593 ..................163
Stair Mountain 16701..................106 Swallow Reef 16530..................234
Stalemate Bank 16012..................283 Swanson Bay 16702 ..................113
Standard Abbreviations for Broadcast ...........13  Swanson Lagoon 16520.................287
Standard time .....................72 Swanson Point 16702..................113
Staraya Bay 16522 ...................240 Swedania Point 16553 .................203
Starichkof Reef 16487..................260  Sweeper Cove 16476..................265, 266
Starr Point 16597 ....................180  Sweeper Cove Entrance LightS5 16476 ...........266
Starr Point Light 3 16597 ................180 Swift Point 16490....................258
Starr Rocks 16604 ...................148 Swikshak Lagoon 16580 ................186
Station Bay 16513 ...................243 Swirl Rock 16532 ...................227
Stebbins 16240 ....................310 Swirls........................66
Steep Cape 16594 ...................177
Steeple Point 16511...................246 Taan Fiord 16741 ...................79
Stefansson Sound 16046, 16061..............326  Table Island 16592...................166
Steller Cove 16421...................280 Table Island Light 16592 ................166
Step Mountain 16648..................136 Table Mountain 16606 .................126
Stepanof Cove 16511..................246 Table Top Mountain 16518 ...............235
Stepanrof Flats 16556, 16540 ...............201  Tachikuga 16006 ...................304
Stephens Hill 16240 ..................310 Tag Islands 16460 ...................271
Stephens Pass 16240 ..................310 Tagadak Island 16478..................264
Stepovak Bay 16556, 16540 ...............200 Tagalak Island 16484..................263
Sterling Shoal 16322 ..................293 Tagalak Pass 16484 ..................263





                                                                                      1- 23

                                        Page                                                                           Page
Tahoma Reef 16440 ...................277 Thistle Rock 16597...................181
Takli Island 16576, 16580 .................188 Thomas Rock 16594 ..................153
Takoma Cove 16645 ...................123 Three Arm Bay 16471 .................267
Taliudek Island 16594 ..................156 Three Brothers 16594..................155
Talkeetna.......................140 Three Hole Bay 16682 .................118
Tallapoosa Shoal 16592 ..................167  Three Island Bay 16521.................241
Talus Bay 16683 ....................114 Three Pillar Point 16594.................155
Talus Point 16531 ....................229 Three Saints Bay 16592.................168
Tana Bight 16475 ....................265  Three Sisters Island 16471................267
Tanaak Cape 16604 ...................176 Three Sisters Rocks 16592................166
Tanadak Island 16442 ..................276  Three Star Point 16556, 16540 ..............198
Tanadak Island 16460 ..................272  Threemile Creek 16663, 16660 ..............140
TanadaklIsland 16480 ..................258 Thumb Bay 16702 ....................1I
Tanadak Pass 16442 ...................276 Thumb Cove 16682...................114
Tanaga Bay 16462 ....................270 Thumb Mountain 16300.................298
Tansaga. Island 16460 ...................270 Thumb Point 16500 ..................249
Tanaga Pass 16460 ....;...............270 Thunder Bay 16682...................119
Tanaga Volcano 16462 ..................270 Thunder Point 16475 ..................266
Tanaklak Island 16478 ..................264  Tidal Current Charts                                                                                    ..................3, 330
Tanana ........................310 Tidal Current Tables ..................3, 330
Tanana River..                                                        ................... 310  TIDAL PREDICTIONS AND DATA FROM THE NATIONAL OCEAN
Tanaskan Bay 16522 ...................240  SERVICE.....................3
Tangent Point 16081 ...................325 Tide rips.......................66
Tangik Island 16531 ....................226 Tide Tables......................3,330
Tanginak Anchorage 16592 ................166 Tiderip Point 16513 ..................243
Tanginak Island 16531 ..................227 Tides ........................66
Tanglefoot Bay 16599 ..................183 Tidgituk Island 16462..................270
Tanglefoot Beach 16599 .................183 Tigalda Bay 16531...................225
Tanker Island 16701 ...................84 Tigalda Island 16531 ..................225
Tanner Head 16591 ...................172 Tiger Cape 16594 ...................178
Tapkaluk Islands 16082, 16081 ...............325  Tigvariak Island 16046 .................327
Tarasof Point 16517 ...................236 Tillamook Cove 16480 .................259
Taroka Arml16682....................119 Time.                                                                                                        .......................2,72
Tatik Point 16006 ....................306 Time Signals .....................15
Tatitlek 16708 .....................89 Tin City 16200 ....................318
Tatitlek Narrows 16707, 16708 ...............89  Tiny Island 16004 ...................325
Taylor Bay 16645 ....................123 Tiny Island 16603, 16576 ................187
TazrBasin 16682 .....................118 Togiak 16315.....................296
Teapot Rock 16471 ...................263 Togiak Bay 16315 ...................296
Teck Island 16605 ....................175 Tolstoi Point 16200...................312
Telegraph Hill 16535 ...................215 Tolstol Point 16381...................301
Telemnitz Island 16547 ..................219 Tolstoi Point 16382...................303
Teller 16204 ......................316 Tolstoi Point 16604...................149
Teller Mission 16204                        .... ...............3I6  Tombstone Rocks 16598 ..1..............84
Telrod Cove 16597 ..............;......181  Tongue.Point 16315, 16305 ...............296
Temnac Bay 164341, 16423 ................281 Tongue Point 16707 ..................92
Termination Point 16594 .................157 Tonki Bay 16604....................149
Terrace Island 16570 ...................189 Tonki Cape 16604 ...................150
Terror Bay 16594 ....................179 Tonki Cape Light 16604 ..................O
The Ankau 16761 ....................76 Tonsina Bay 16681 ...........;.......123
The Cow Pens 16105...................99 Tooth Cove 16682 ...................118
The Ditch 16463 ....................269 Tooth Mountain 16300 .................298
The Haystacks 16553 ...................207 Topkok Head 16200 ..................313
The Kitchen 16553 ....................206 Torch Bay 17301....................74
The Narrows 16594 ...................178 Towage .......................71
The Narrows 16707 ...................92 Traders Cove 16500 ..................249, 255
The Narrows 167 1 0...................86 Traders Cove 16535 ..................217
The Needle 16701 ....................107 Trading Bay 16663, 16662................139
The Paps 16762 .....................75  Traffic Separation Scheme (Prince William Sound)                                                    ......82
The Pillars 16500 ....................249  Traffic Separation Scheme (Traffic Lanes)..........65
The Race 16474..                                                         ..................267  Traffic Separation Scheme, Prince William Sound...... 92
The Seven Sisters 16709 .................85  Traffic Separation Schemes (Traffic Lanes) .........29
The Signals 16463 ....................269 Trap Point 16591....................172
The Signals 16522 ....................238 Trays Point 16514 ...................242
The Sisters 16661, 16660 .................140 Treeless Islet 16594 ..................152
The Slough 16594 ....................178 Triangle Island 16006..................304
The Triplets 16594 ....................156 Trident Bay 16531...................226
The Twins 16315 ....................296 Trinity Islands 16580..................170
The Whaleback 16553 ..................207 Trinity Point 16706...................102
Theodore Point 16430 ..................281 Triplet Rocks 16531 ..................229
Theodore River 16663. 16660 ...............140 Triplets, The 16594.................. 156
Thetis Island 16062 ...................326 Trunk Point 16463...................269
Thin Point 16535 ..                                                    215 Tsaa Fiord 16741....................79
Thinpoint Cove 16535S..................215  Tsunamis (seismic sea waves) ..............27,66
Thistle Cove 17301 ...................74 Tugidak Island 16580 .................170



I- 24


                                                          Page                                                                    Page
Tugidak Passage 16580 ................................          170  Unalaska Island 16011 ................................ 230
Tuksuk Channel 16204 ................................           316  Unalga Bight 16474 .................................. 267
Tulik Volcano 16513 ...................................         244  Unalga Island 16460 .................................. 271
Tuman Point 16460 ...................................           272  Unalga Island 16528 .................................. 230
Tununak (Tanunak) 16006 ..............................          307  Unalga Pass 16528 ................................... 230
Turf Point 16480 .....................................          257  Unavikshak Island 16566 .............................. 193
Turnagain Arm 16665, 16663 ...........................          143  Under-keel clearances ................................ 1
Turner Glacier 16761 .................................           77  Unga 16553 ........................................ 209
Turner Island 16540 ..................................          205  Unga Cape 16553 .................................... 209
Turtle Reef 16648 ....................................          137    Unga Island 16540, 16553, 16551 .......................          208
Tutka Bay 16645 .....................................           131  Unga Reef 16553 .................................... 208
Tutka Bay Lagoon 16645 ..............................           131  Unga Spit Light 16553 ................................ 203
Tuxedni Bay 16640............. . ....................           138    Unga Spit Light 16553, 16557 .......................... 210
Tuxedni Channel 16640 ...............................           138  Unga Strait 16553 .................................... 203
Twelve Fathom Strait 16540 ............................         204    Uniform State Waterway Marking System ................           27
Twin Bays 16463 .....................................           269  Uniktali Bay 16522 .................................. 240
Twin Heads 16594 ....................................           177  Unimak Bight 16520 ................................. 223
Twin Islands 16682 ...................................          118  Unimak Cove 16547 .................................. 219
Twin Mountain 16006 .................................           303  Unimak Island 16520 ................................. 222
Twin Peaks 16591 ....................................           172  Unimak Pass 16520 .................................. 224
Twin Rocks 16442 ....................................           276    Unimak Pass Shipping Safety Fairway ...................         224
Twin Rocks 16709 ....................................            81  Upper Arm 16475 .................................... 265
Twins 16540 ........................................            205  Upper Passage 16705 ................................. 105
Twins, The 16315 ....................................           296  Urilia Bay 16520 .................................... 287
Two Arm Bay 16682 ..................................            119  Ursus Cove 16648 .................................. 136
Two Moon Bay 16708 .................................             88'  Useless Cove 16708 .................................. 98
Twoheaded Island 16590 ...............................          168    Ushagat Island 16606 ................................. 126
Tyndall Glacier 16741 .................................          79  Uski Island 16595 .................................... 162
Tyonek 16663, 16660 .................................           139  UsofBay 16521 ..................................... 241
Tzuse Shoal 16761 ...................................            76  Ustiugof Shoal 16322 ................................ 293
                                                                  Utukok River 16088 ..................................          322
U.S. Fishery Conservation Zone .........................        31  Uyak 16599 ........................................ 181
U.S. Nautical Chart Numbering System ...................         17    Uyak Anchorage 16599 ...............................             181
Udagak Bay 16522 ................................... 239  Uyak Bay 16597 ..................................... 181
Udagak Strait 16522 ..................................         239  Uyak Island 16490 ................................... 259
Udamak Cove 16517 ..................................           236  Uzkosti Point 16594 .................................. 154
Udamat Bay 16522 ......... . .........................          239
Ugadaga Bay 16522 ..................................            240  Valdez 16707 ....................................... 92
Ugaiushak Island 16568 ...............................          191    Valdez Arm 16707, 16708 .............................            89
Ugak Bay 16593 .....................................            164  Valdez Narrows 16707................................ 92
Ugak Island 16593 ....................................          164    Valley of Ten Thousand Smokes 16580 ...................          188
Ugamak Bay 16531 ...................................           224  VasiliefBay 16480 ................................... 258
Ugamak Island 16531 .................................          224  Vasilief Rock 16595 .................................. 158
Ugamak Strait 16531 ..................................         225  Vega Bay 16441 ..................................... 275
Uganik Bay 16576, 16597 ..............................          179  Vega Point 16441 .................................... 275
Uganik East Passage 16576, 16597 .......................        179    Veniaminof Crater 16013 .............................. 197
Uganik Island 16576, 16597 ............................         179    Venisa Point 17301 ................................... 74
Uganik Passage 16576, 16597 ...........................         179    Verdant Island 16701 .................................           112
Ugashik 16011 .......................................           289  Vessel Arrival Inspections ............................. 72
Ugashik Bay 16011 ...................................          289    Vessel Bridge-to-Bridge Radiotelephone Regulations.......         33
Ugashik River 16011 ..................................         289    Vessel Traffic Management ............................ 43
Ugidak Island 16460 ..................................         271     Vessel Traffic Service (Prince William Sound Vessel Traffic Service)  82
Ukivok 16200 .......................................           315  Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) ........................... 65
Ukolnoi Island 16551 .................................         211    Vessel Traffic Service, Prince William Sound ..............       92
Ukolnoi Island Light 16551 ............................        211    Vessel Watering Points ................................ 7
Ulak Island 16460 ....................................          272  VHF-FM Radiotelephone.- ............................ 31
Ulak Island 16478 ....................................          263  Viekoda Bay 16576, 16597 ............................ 178
Ulak Pass 16460 .....................................           272  Viesoki Island 16593 ................................. 163
Ulakta Head 16529 ...................................          232  Village Cove 16382 .................................. 302
Uliaga Island 16501 ...................................         250  Village Islands 16597 ................................. 180
Uliaga Pass 16501 ....................................          250  Village Reef 16463 ................................... 269
Ultramarine Glacier 16705 .............................         105  Village Reefs 16594 .................................. 151
Ulva Cove 16460 .....................................          272  Village Shoal 16761 .................................. 77
Umak Bight 16477 ...................................'           264  Vincennes Point 16474 ................................ 267
Umak Island 16477 ...................................           264  Virgin Bay 16707, 16708 .............................. 89
Umak Pass 16477 ....................................            264  Virgin Peak 16566 ................................... 195
Umga Island 16535 ...................................           215  Vodapoini Point 16549 ................................ 214
Umia Island 16547 ...................................          219  Volcano Bay 16517 ................................... 236
Umnak Island 16500 ..................................           244  Volcano Bay 16549 ................................... 211
Umnak Pass 16513 ...................................            243  Vsevidof Island 16500 ................................ 249
Unakwik Inlet 16700 ..................................           98  Vulcan Point 16441 .................................. 276
Unalakleet 16200 .....................................          312  Vulcan Point 16531 .................................. 229
Unalakleet River 16200 ................................         312
Unalaska 16529 ......................................           233  Wainwright 16085 ................................... 323
Unalaska Bay 16528 ..................................          231      Wainwright Inlet 16085 ............................... 323








                                     Page                                                                               Page
Wainwright Lagoon 16085................323  Wilby Island 16701. 16709................107
Wales 16200......................318 Wildcat Cove 16681 ..................120
Wa~llBay 16487 ....................261 Wildcat Passl16681...................120
Walrus Island 16363 ..................288  Will Rogers Memorial 16082...............324
Walrus Island 16382 ..................302 Willard Island 16705 ..................101
Walrus Islands 16315 ..................296 William Cove 16440 ..................274
Walrus Islands State Game Sanctuary 16011, 16315, 16305   ...296  Williams Reef 16594..................157
Walrus Peaks 16535...................215 Williamsport 16648...................137
Wanda Island 16547...................219 Williwaw Cove 16440 .................274
Warehouse Bluff 16300 .................298 Williwaw Point 16514 .................242
Warehouse Creek 16300.................298 Williwaws ......................68
Wamner Bay 16566 ...................195 Wind Bound Bay 16553.................202
Waskanareska. Bay 16594 ................178 Winds........................2
Watch Point 16646 ...................128 Windy Bay 16013 ...................196
Waterfall Point 16553..................202 Windy Bay 16645 ...................123
Weasel Cove 16597...................181 Windy Bay 16709 ...................86
Weasel Mountain 16566.................194 Windy Cove 16240 ..................308
Weather .......................66 Wingham Island 16723 .................80
Wedge Point 16471 ..................267 Winter Island 16594 ..................152
Wedge Point 16515...................238 Wislow Island 16518..................235
Weedy Shoals 16553 ..................210 Witchcraft Point 16441 .................276
Welcome Bay 16531 ..................225 Wolcott Reef 16598 ..................183
Wells Bay 16700 ....................98 Womens Bay 16596 ..................163
Wells Passage 16705 ..................100 Wonder Bay 16604...................174
Wessels Reef 16700...................83 -Wood River 16322...................294
West Amatuli Island 16606 ...............126 Wooded Island 16594..................156
West Anchor Cove 16535 ................218 WoodedlIslands 16701 .................84
West Arm 16433....................280 Woody Island 16594 ..................157
West Arm 16478....................263 Woody Island Light 16594................157
West Arm 16645....................123 Wooly Read 16553...................206
West Arm 16681....................121 World Geodetic System (1984) ..............25
West Arm 16701....................108 Woronzof Shoal 16663, 16665 ..............145
West Cape 16549 ....................214 Woronzof Shoal 16665, 16663 ..............145
West Channel Island 16570................189  Wosnesenaki Island 16551................211
West Chunu Point 16463.................269 Wrangell Cove 16430..................281
West Cove 16434, 16423.................282 WWV and WWVH broadcasts ..............27
West Cove 16553....................202
West Foreland 16663, 16662 ...............139 Yahtse Glacier 16741..................79
West Head 16553....................208 Yakataga Reef 16016..................79
West Nagai Strait 16553.................206 Yakutat 16761.....................76
West Point 16006....................299 Yakutat Bay 16761...................75
West Point 16516....................238 Yakutat Glacier 16760 .................75
West Point 16597....................180 Yakutat Roads 16761..................77
West Point 16665, 16663.................143 Yalik Bay 16681....................121
West Twin Bay 16705..................100 Yalik Glacier 16681 ..................122
Westdahl Cove 16681..................122 Yantarni Bay 16568 ..................191
Westdahl Rock 16535..................218 Yentna River 16660 ..................140
Westemn Channel 167 1 0.................87 Yoke Pass 16478....................264
Westemn Inlet 16604...................174 York 16200......................315
Western Point 16463 ..................269 Yugnat Rocks 16603, 16576 ...............186
Whale Bay 16547....................219 Yukon Delta 16006, 16240................309
Whale Bay 16701 .............I......112 Yukon Harbor 16540 ..................204
Whale sland 16240...................311 Yukon Hill 16300 ...................298
Whale Island 16594...................152 Yukon Island 16645 ..................131
Whale Passage 16594..................153  Yukon River 16006, 16240 ............I... 284, 310
Whaleback, The 16553 .................207 Yukuk Bay 16594 ...................178
Whalebone Cape 16521 .................241 Yunaska Island 16500..................252
Whalen Bay 16708 ...................89 Yuzhni Point 16594...................153
Wharf Point 16480 ...................256
Whidbey Bay 16683 ..................113 Zachar Bay 16597 ...................182
Whirl Point 16535 ...................216 Zachary Bay 16553...................210
Whirlpool Point 16590..................169 Zaikof Bay 16709 ...................85
Whirlpool Point Light 16590 ...............169 Zaikof Point 16709...................84
Whirlpool Rock 16471..................267 Zaimka Island 16596 ..................163
White Gull Island 16648.................137 Zaliva Point 16478...................263
White Mountain 16200 .................313 Zapad Head 16441...................274
White. Point 16486 ...................262 Zapadni Bay 16381...................301
White Rock 16591 ...................172 Zapadni Point 16382 ..................303
Whittier 16706.....................102 Zapadni Point 16594 ..................156
Wide Bay 16528 ....................234 Zeto Point 16475....................266
Wide Bay 16570 ....................189 Ziegler Cove 16705...................101
Wide Bay 16592 ....................168 Zip Rock 17301 ....................74







                                                                                            OMF Appmval No. 0648-0007 Expires 6/3098
NOAA Form 77-4                                                                         U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE
(Rev. 8s5)                                                    NATIONAL OCEANIC AND ATMOSPHERIC ADMINISTRATION

                                         COAST PILOT REPORT

SUBMIT TO:                                                      This record of your experience and observations when
NATIONAL OCEAN SERVICE, NOAA (N/CS26 1)                         traversing the coast, entering port, and/or navigating inside
1315 EAST-WEST HIGHWAY, STATION 7317                            waters will be used to update the Coast Pilot.
SILVER SPRING, MD 20910-3282
FAX:           301-713-4516
INTERNET:    [email protected]

OBSERVER: NAME AND ADDRESS                                    DATE OF OBSERVATION

                                                          DATE OF SUBMISSION

                                                          VESSEL NAME AND ADDRESS




TEL. (daytime)

FAX

                                           GEOGRAPHIC LOCATION
             (Refer to charted objects by distance and bearing and/or include latitude/longitude, as applicable)











CHART NUMBER                                                  COAST PILOT NUMBER and EDITION NUMBER


CHANGES TO EXISTING COAST PILOT TEXT
Give recommended revised language for the book. Identify affected text by page, paragraph(s), and line number(s). State the
source of the information if other than personal observation.













                                              (Continue on plain paper)









REQUEST FOR SURVEYS OR CHART CHANGE

List area for which surveys and/or changes in chart format, scale, or layout are needed. Include the name and geographic
position of the area, the chart number of the largest scale chart that covers the area, and the reason for the request.























                                                        (Continue on plain paper)

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FOR THE COAST PILOT

We are particularly interested in information about unusually strong currents; prominent landmarks; objects which provide
particularly good radar return; sheltered anchorages (be explicit on direction of weather and type of bottom observed);
drawbridge operation changes (e.g., drawbridge remains permanently in open position); changes in pilot pick-up points;
changes in radio frequencies monitored by pilots, marine exchanges, harbor masters, or drawbridges.

























                                                       (Continue on plain paper)

Public reporting burden for this collection is estimated to average thirty minutes per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering
and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. Send comments regarding this burden estimate or any other aspect of this collection of
information, including suggestions for reducing this burden, to the National Ocean Service (N/CS261), 1315 East-West Highway, Silver Spring, MD 20910-3282; and to the Office of
Management and Budget, Paperwork Reduction Project (0648-0007). Washington, DC 20503






                                                                                         OMF Approval No. 0648-0007 Expires 6/3/8
NOAA Form 77-6                                                                         U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE
(Rev. W95)                                                    NATIONAL OCEANIC AND ATMOSPHERIC ADMINISTRATION

                                       COAST PILOT REPORT

SUBMIT TO:                                                      This record of your experience and observations when
NATIONAL OCEAN SERVICE, NOAA (N/CS261)                          traversing the coast, entering port, and/or navigating inside
1315 EAST-WEST HIGHWAY, STATION 7317                            waters will be used to update the Coast Pilot.
SILVER SPRING, MD 20910-3282
FAX:            301-713-4516
INTERNET:    [email protected]

OBSERVER: NAME AND ADDRESS                                     DATE OF OBSERVATION
                                                        DATE OF SUBMISSION
                                                        VESSEL NAME AND ADDRESS




TEL. (daytime)

FAX

                                          GEOGRAPHIC LOCATION
             (Refer to charted objects by distance and bearing and/or include latitude/longitude, as applicable)











CHART NUMBER| COAST PILOT NUMBER and EDITION NUMBER


CHANGES TO EXISTING COAST PILOT TEXT
Give recommended revised language for the book. Identify affected text by page, paragraph(s), and line number(s). State the
source of the information if other than personal observation.













                                             (Continue on plain paper)








 REQUEST FOR SURVEYS OR CHART CHANGE

 List area for which surveys and/or changes in chart format, scale, or layout are needed. Include the name and geographic
 position of the area, the chart number of the largest scale chart that covers the area, and the reason for the request.























                                                        (Continue on plain paper)

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FOR THE COAST PILOT

We are particularly interested in information about unusually strong'currents;- prominent landmarks; objects which provide
particularly good radar return; sheltered anchorages (be explicit on direction of weather and type of bottom observed);
drawbridge operation changes (e.g., drawbridge remains permanently in open position); changes in pilot pick-up points;
changes in radio frequencies monitored by pilots, marine exchanges, harbor masters, or drawbridges.

























                                                       (Continue on plain paper)

Public reporting burden for this collection is estimated to average thirty minutes per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering
and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of infortmation. Send comments regarding this burden estimate or any other aspect of this collection of
information, including suggestions for reducing this burden, to the National Ocean Service (NIf2S261), 1315 East-West Highway, Silver Spring, MD 20910-3282; and to the Office of
Management and Budget, Paperwork Reduction Project (0648-0007), Washington, DC 20503






                                                                                         OMF Approval No. 0648-000M7 Expires 63089
NOAA Form 77-6                                                                         U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE
(Rev. Bl5s)                                                   NATIONAL OCEANIC AND ATMOSPHERIC ADMINISTRATION

                                       COAST PILOT REPORT

SUBMIT TO:                                                      This record of your experience and observations when
NATIONAL OCEAN SERVICE, NOAA (N/CS261)                          traversing the coast, entering port, and/or navigating inside
1315 EAST-WEST HIGHWAY, STATION 7317                            waters will be used to update the Coast Pilot.
SILVER SPRING, MD 20910-3282
FAX:           301-713-4516
INTERNET:    [email protected]

OBSERVER: NAME AND ADDRESS                                     DATE OF OBSERVATION

                                                        DATE OF SUBMISSION

                                                        VESSEL NAME AND ADDRESS




TEL. (daytime)

FAX

                                          GEOGRAPHIC LOCATION
             (Refer to charted objects by distance and bearing and/or include latitude/longitude, as applicable)











CHART NUMBER| COAST PILOT NUMBER and EDITION NUMBER


CHANGES TO EXISTING COAST PILOT TEXT
Give recommended revised language for the book. Identify affected text by page, paragraph(s), and line number(s). State the
source of the information if other than personal observation.













                                            (Continue on plain paper)









 REQUEST FOR SURVEYS OR CHART CHANGE

 List area for which surveys and/or changes in chart format, scale, or layout are needed. Include the name and geographic
 position of the area, the chart number ofthe largest scale chart that covers the area, and the reason for the request.























                                                        (Continue on plain paper)

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FOR THE COAST PILOT

We are particularly interested in information about unusually strong currents; prominent landmarks; objects which provide
particularly good radar return; sheltered anchorages (be explicit on direction of weather and type of bottom observed);
drawbridge operation changes (e.g., drawbridge remains permanently in open position); changes in pilot pick-up points;
changes in radio frequencies monitored by pilots, marine exchanges, harbor masters, or drawbridges.
























                                                       (Continue on plain paper)

Public reporting burden for this collection is estimated to average thirty minutes per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering
and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. Send comments regarding this burden estimate or any other aspect of this collection of
information, including suggestions for reducing this burden, to the National Ocean Service (N/CS261), 1315 East-West Highway, Silver Spring, MD 20910-3282; and to the Office of
Management and Budget, Paperwork ReductionProject (0648-0007), Washington, DC 20503


                                         *U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE:1995-404-445/256L)8